JP2023101566A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: Based on the fact that a determination result by determination means is a specific determination result, a privilege game is executed. One determination state is set out of a plurality of determination states including at least a first determination state in which the specific determination result is obtained when determination using specific determination information is executed and a second determination state in which a failure determination result is obtained when determination using the specific determination information is executed. As a dynamic display type for indicating the failure determination result, one dynamic display type is determined out of a plurality of types including at least a first dynamic display type that is easily executed when the specific determination information is used for determination and the result is the failure determination result and a second dynamic display type that is easily executed when determination information different from the specific determination information is used for determination and the result is the failure determination result. Thereby, interest of the player in the game can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, notify the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole by variably displaying symbols on a display means. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine shifts to a so-called winning state that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of patterns with different variation times are provided for the symbol variation, and the interest of the player in the game is improved.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and the specified discrimination result when discrimination using predetermined specific discrimination information as the discrimination information is executed. discrimination state setting means for setting one discrimination state out of a plurality of discrimination states including at least a first discrimination state and a second discrimination state in which a discrimination result different from the specified discrimination result is obtained when discrimination is performed using the specific discrimination information; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; a dynamic display type determining means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a display type and a second dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when discrimination information different from the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and the result of the discrepancy is obtained.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a performance mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a mode.

According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the first presentation mode is a presentation mode that suggests the first discrimination state.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a second probability lower than the first probability.

The game machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first determination state being configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability, and the second determination. The state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; a discrimination state setting means for setting one discrimination state from among a plurality of discrimination states including at least a second discrimination state that results in a discriminated result different from the specified discrimination result when discrimination using the specific discrimination information is performed; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; a dynamic display type determining means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a second dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when determination information different from specific determination information is used for determination and the result of the determination is out of line.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a first effect mode that is more likely to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type as the effect mode of the specific effect, and in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type rather than the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. and an effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a second effect mode that is likely to be executed.

As a result, it becomes easier to understand whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is executed depending on the performance mode, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine of claim 2, since the first performance mode is configured in a performance mode that suggests the first determination state, there is an effect that when the specific performance of the first performance mode is executed, the player can be convinced that it is the first determination state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the first determination state is configured to give the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is configured to give the specific determination result with a second probability lower than the first probability.

Thus, when the first dynamic display type that is easily executed in the first discrimination state is determined, the possibility of being in the discrimination state with a high probability of a specific discrimination result increases, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type will be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the game state setting means is provided for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the first determination state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability. The second determination state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.

Thus, when the first discrimination state is set, the specific discrimination result is more likely to be obtained in the first game state with a lower degree of advantage than when the second discrimination state is set, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first discrimination state is set.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general electric winning device flowing into the out port. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the winning balls in the general electric prize winning device flowing into the special electric operation opening. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the V winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device when the reservoir valve is in the reservoir state in the role winning game. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve shifts from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is positioned at the guidance position in the role winning game. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve shifts from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is positioned at the passing position in the role winning game. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the start of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when a display screen is displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol win during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a role winning during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (a) is displayed, (d) ) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of winning a V prize during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of winning a prize during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14 (a) is displayed. , (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of timer addition during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15 (a) is displayed, and (d) is FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the V rush is extended and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed, and (d) is a display shown in FIG. 16(b). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when a screen is displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special screen at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the pending state of each symbol when the display screen shown in b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the middle chance production for winning a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of normal pattern stop during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed, and (d) is a diagram. 18(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a special symbol stop during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the lucky time effect during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19 (a) is displayed, and (d) is FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second winning random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time saving table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various action scenario tables in the first embodiment, and FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of a first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the configuration of an operation scenario table for a normal pattern in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of a scenario for a normal normal pattern in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure per scenario for time saving in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game in the normal state in the first embodiment when the game per normal pattern is executed. (a) ~ (i) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the normal figure per game is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a special electric starting gate winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a winning control process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing stop-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a character winning related process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation update process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4(a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4A is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won the general electric prize winning device can flow down to the second special electric operation opening. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a state in which a normal figure long winning game and a role winning game are performed in duplicate during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. FIG. 90(c) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than the predetermined period, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is longer than the predetermined period, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed. FIG. 91(d) is a schematic diagram showing a status of holding a symbol, and FIG. 91(d) is a schematic diagram showing a status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(b) is displayed. (a), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the termination conditions of the accessory winning game executed during the normal figure long winning in the second embodiment are changed. (a), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the ending conditions of the game per accessory executed during the normal pattern long variation in the second embodiment are different. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the general figure per type selection table in the second embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general figure fluctuation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various action scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second role-per-accessory action scenario table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an operation scenario table per normal diagram in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per normal diagram for time reduction in the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 3 scenarios per normal figure for time saving in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting entrance prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure related processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a character winning related process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the character hitting start processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure residual variation suggestion process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure related time update processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. (a) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when entering the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment, and (b) and (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the jackpot is discarded at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the jackpot is interrupted at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting entrance prize-winning process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically about the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of the main-control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 deviating stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passage processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the modification, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop-related processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the end condition selection screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after selection of the end condition displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 6 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a special electric starting gate winning process 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing switching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing end condition setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 6 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing termination condition related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is a front view showing typically game board 13 of pachinko machine 10 in a 7th embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial perspective views schematically showing the structure of the right electric accessory according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing lid of the right electric accessory in the seventh embodiment; (a), (b) is the elements on larger scale which showed typically a part of right side area|region in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the variable probability state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of shifting from the variable probability state to the latent probability state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the second special symbol variation is not started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the second special symbol variation is started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the RUSH game performed during the latency state displayed on the 3rd design display device 81 in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the special figure reserved ball is changed during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the special figure reserved ball becomes a specific number during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode suggesting the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which suggests the completion|finish of the super RUSH game displayed on the 3rd design display device 81 in 7th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the small winning random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of a jackpot type selection table that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 7 normal tables of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 7 tables for probability variation that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the 7 tables for probability that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the seventh embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop-related processing 7 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing preparation state setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure discarding setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ceiling effect setting processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting processing during probability variation performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a setting process during RUSH 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment; (a) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning device in the modification of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the modification of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the transition diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table 202ga performed by the main controller 110 in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection 8 table that the ROM of the main controller in the eighth embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 8 table of the ROM of the main controller in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an occupancy 8 table possessed by a ROM of a main controller in an eighth embodiment; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 8 table which ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation stop processing 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent certainty state displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 9 table which ROM of the main-control apparatus in 9th Embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 9 table that the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment has, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table that the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an icon display number selection table possessed by the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the continuous effect selection table possessed by the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a ready state setting process 9 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting processing 9 in RUSH performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when reach is established in the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during normal per-normal fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the normal pattern winning in the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed at the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment is set. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation performance executed in the state where the special figure 2 suspension displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not acquired in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol variation is performed in a state where the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol variation is performed in a state where the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the variable jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. There is, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the game flow in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the game flow in the case of the reach fluctuation pattern in the tenth embodiment. (a) to (c) are timing charts showing the flow of effects executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table possessed by the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal winning random number 10 table possessed by the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 10 table in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table in the tenth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 10 table in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal 10 table in the tenth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable / time saving 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table that the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the effect selection table during probability variation that the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the tenth embodiment has. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 10 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 10 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a winning process 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure related process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for changing settings in the eleventh embodiment, and (e) to (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for setting confirmation in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the transition of an effect mode when the setting change state is ended and the normal game is possible in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 11 table in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an 11 table for confirmation in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for RAM clearing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a setting suggestion effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing game state update processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation|variation process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 11 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the continuous loss effect displayed on the third symbol display device when the first special symbol lottery is lost in the latent state in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the continuous loss effect is executed and the loss cannot be continued until the chance zone is set in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost three times in a row during the latent certainty state. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 12 table in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a 12-table for confirmation in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation stop processing 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 12 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an effect setting process when out, which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the thirteenth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the lottery device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device with both the ball discharge door and the ball stopper closed in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the distribution rotary body in 13th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the time-dependent change of the state of each part at the time of small hit election in 13th Embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the temporal change in the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotator immediately after the chance zone ends in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the transition of the game after the chance zone ends in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the charge time effect displayed on the third symbol display device when the second special symbol lottery is lost in the time saving state in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the number of reserved balls increases due to game balls entering the second ball entrance during execution of the charge time effect in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V winning table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 13 table for time saving in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation unit according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the operation unit in a state where the standing accessory operates to the overhanging position in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the operation unit in a state in which the tilting accessory operates to the overhanging position in the fourteenth embodiment; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the winning rate suggesting effect in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a winning rate in which setting 6 is determined is notified in the winning rate suggesting effect in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode when a setting suggesting effect corresponding to the variation type of the high set fixed super reach is executed in the 14th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special 1 winning table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special 2 winning table in the 14th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the left-handed state table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of distribution of the hit random number in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for right-handed hitting states in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table in 14th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the fourteenth embodiment. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the winning rate suggesting effect lottery table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the corresponding relationship between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the variable probability state of the special symbol in the fourteenth embodiment and the winning rate within 100 games for each set value. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a presentation type selection table in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a power return operation table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a role product operation setting table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing origin return processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 14 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing character product control processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 14 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal state setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 14 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number 15 table in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a random number range setting table in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 15 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing 15 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the ready-to-win symbol selection effect is executed in the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the ready-to-win pattern prefetch effect is executed in the modification of the fourteenth embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIGS. 3 to 5 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a general electrical winning device 640 provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and FIGS. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 is provided with a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, a shooting rail (not shown) that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening and closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or a ready-to-win performance is performed, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit or blinked by the lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs to notify that the big win is in progress or the reach just before the big win is in progress. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a certificate stamp or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) in front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation part 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. A ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball rental operation section 40, but in this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball rental operation section 40 so that the parts configuration may be shared. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 for storing balls not fully stored in the upper tray 17 formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation, the ball is shot with the strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit in front of the game board 13 with the distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extraction lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened, and the ball is naturally dropped and discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, special figure entrances 64 and 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. A general ball entrance 63, a special figure ball entrance 64, a general electrical winning device 640, a V winning device 65, a variable winning device 650, and a variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that a game area is formed in front of the game board 13 where the game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (an area in which winning holes are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the ball, and the ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the central part side while the momentum is attenuated.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of transparent resin (for example, ABS) so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.例文帳に追加

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the special symbol entrance 64 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure lottery) executed when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol is used, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to each special symbol type.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., normal state, time-saving state, etc.) by the lighting state, indicates by the lighting state whether or not the special symbols (first symbols) are changing (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a big win that is advantageous to the player or a symbol that corresponds to a big win that is disadvantageous to the player. The number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and a combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various game states are notified by combinations of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify various game states.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is performed when a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which a privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, an open state in which balls can be easily won in a specific prize winning port 650a of a variable prize winning device 650 is made, and a game capable of acquiring many prize balls in a short period of time is executed by allowing balls to enter the specific prize winning port 650a. This jackpot game is executed (in some cases) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display), and has an opening period (for example, 1 second) for a predetermined time (a period during which a closed state is set to make it difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning port 650a of the variable prize winning device 650), a round game period for which the open state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A jackpot game period consisting of an interval period in which a state is set and an ending period in which a closed state for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is set after the end of the last round game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern showing the winning of the big win is stopped and displayed (fixed display), it is possible to prepare for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction in accordance with the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened during the big win game, so that the big win game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

By setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game, so that preparations can be made for shooting balls in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed after the jackpot game is finished, so that the game can be switched smoothly.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery may be set to a different length depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win or the type of the jackpot won. ) is set to be longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of another big win game, and during the ending period, a performance for preliminarily guiding the game contents to be executed after the big win game is finished to the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a big win is won in which the game contents at the time of winning the big win and the game contents to be executed after the end of the big win game are the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the big win may be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of the other big win games. This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without actually discriminating between the game contents at the time of winning the big win and the game contents to be executed after the completion of the big win game, for example, the game state to be set after the end of the big win game may be defined in advance based on the type of the winning big win and the game state at the time of winning the big win, and the ending period of each big win game may be set in advance according to the defined contents.

Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game to be executed by the player when the game state is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is configured to be different from the game to be executed by the player when the game state is the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). It is constructed so as to be advantageous to the player (make it easier to execute a jackpot game).

That is, the content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game may be defined so that the ending period of the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won in the normal state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win is longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state is already set and the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win is finished. As a result, the ending period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game according to the contents defined in advance.

It should be noted that the period other than the ending period may be defined in advance according to the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the opening period and the interval period may be changed. Further, even if the type of the jackpot won is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be varied according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Thus, the player can be interested not only in which jackpot type the jackpot has been won (lottery result of special symbols), but also about the game state when the jackpot is won, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, the kind of the big win is determined. A detailed description will be given later, but as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is given. 4R time saving jackpot is given. Then, there is prepared a time-saving jackpot (time-saving number of times: 15 times) in which the time-saving state continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed 15 times without winning the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, if a special symbol lottery does not win a big win, it is determined as a loss, and the player is not provided with a privilege. However, the configuration is not limited to this. A first pattern display device 37 not only shows whether or not the result of lottery is a big win (whether it is a small win) as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also shows a pattern corresponding to the type of the big win when it is a big win.

In this embodiment, the game state is configured to be set to either the "normal state" or the "time saving state". The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state), and the time saving state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a high probability (300/1000). (Hereinafter, it is referred to as a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state).

Here, the ``4R jackpot (four time reductions)'' is a jackpot that can shift to a time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state) after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 650 is opened for four rounds), and the time saving state with four times of time saving is set after the jackpot game ends.

The ``4R jackpot (time saving 15 times)'' is a jackpot capable of shifting to a time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state) after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), and the time saving state of 15 times of time saving is set after the jackpot game is finished.

In this embodiment, after the time-saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving mentioned above indicates the time-saving end condition. That is, the number of times of time reduction of 4 times means that the lottery of special symbols is executed 4 times without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set (4th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), and the time reduction end condition is established. are

That is, the ``4R jackpot (four times of time reduction)'' is a jackpot type in which time-saving termination conditions that are more likely to be established than the ``4R jackpot (four times of time reduction)'' are defined.

In this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a condition (time saving number of times) regarding the number of special symbol lotteries during the time saving state is defined, but other configurations may be used as the time saving end condition. , 100 seconds), or the number of balls entering a specific entrance (for example, the general entrance 63a) during the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5).

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. In the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there are arranged a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning), and a second symbol display device composed of an LED that variably displays the normal symbol (second symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. (not shown) are provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21) to display, for example, three pattern rows of left, middle and right. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display (dynamically display) the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21) by the first symbol display device 37, while the first symbol display device 37 performs decorative display according to the display. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second pattern display device performs variable display by alternately lighting up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display patterns (second pattern (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a winning game (general symbol winning game) in which an electric accessory 640a attached to a general electric prize winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment).

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern is always constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the normal pattern lottery and the probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state). In a pachinko machine 10 constructed in such a manner that the time required for variable display of normal patterns (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer in the normal state than in the time reduction state in order to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern winning game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) is difficult to be executed, and the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern low probability state) is easily executed. When the game state shifts to (normal pattern high probability state), it is possible to suppress the setting of a long period in which the normal pattern lottery is not executed in the time reduction state, even though the time reduction state is set, by shifting to the time reduction state during the execution of the normal pattern variation (ordinary pattern winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time reduction state) executed in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the game contents (open pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the normal pattern winning game to be executed are different between the normal state and the time saving state without changing the fluctuation time of the normal pattern. Specifically, the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643. Specifically, if the normal state is set, if the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the electricity actor 640A is closed period), the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set (gaming per normal map), and if the time saving is set, the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set (electric role. After 640A closing period), a gaming for a 3 -second opening period (gaming per time saved) will be executed.

In this way, by executing the normal pattern winning game in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is changed according to the probability state of the normal pattern, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to win in the normal electric prize winning device 640 during the normal pattern winning game in the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) than in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state).

Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 during the general figure per game enters the special electric operation port 643 in the normal state and the time saving state. Concretely, it is configured such that the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving normal prize game enters the special electric operation port 643 more easily than the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal general prize winning game executed in the normal state. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ordinary electric prize winning device 640, and even when the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 is won, the ball is difficult to enter the special electric prize winning device 643. I can.

That is, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the shot ball enters the special electric activation opening 643, the state of allowing the ball to enter the special electric activation opening 643 and the state of restricting it are varied according to the set game state. Therefore, the ease with which the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 can be reliably varied according to the set game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the game method advantageous to the player is the same (left-handed game) during the game state in which the normal state is set and in the game state in which the time-saving state is set. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, a normal pattern lottery opportunity is established (a ball passes through the through gate 67) even in the normal state, and a normal pattern lottery is executed. As a result of the normal pattern lottery, when the winning is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball fired by the left-handed hitting game can reach is controlled to be opened, so there is a possibility that the ball will win the normal electric winning device 640 during the execution of the normal normal winning device 640, which is more difficult than the time-saving normal winning game.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that even if a ball wins a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 during a general pattern winning game executed in a normal state, the prize winning ball hardly enters the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加By constructing in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 having a structure for executing a game in the same game method in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) and the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), even if the ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal state, the ball can be prevented from entering the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the same variation time (3 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of normal symbols in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). It may be configured to shorten the fluctuation time. In addition, in the normal symbol high probability state (normal symbol high probability), other methods such as increasing the normal symbol winning probability, increasing the opening time and opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. If the normal symbol high probability state is made to be a state where the ball is more likely to enter the general electrical winning device 640 than the normal symbol low probability state, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter than the normal state during normal pattern high probability, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one winning may be made constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is constructed so that most (approximately 100%) of the balls that flow down the left area of the game board 13 out of the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, a variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of ``O'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of ``X'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment, or may be performed using part of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of normal symbol start openings (through gates) 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 in the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.例文帳に追加

Next, the configuration of the general electrical winning device 640, which is in the open state when winning the normal symbol lottery, will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the electric prize winning device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and an electric accessory 640a that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize than the open state. . In this embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the general electric prize winning device 640 at a rate of about 3 balls (if the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the general electric prize device 640 reaches a winning position).

The electric accessory 640a is normally maintained in a closed state, and when winning in a normal pattern lottery, a normal pattern winning game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to an open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. In other words, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern lottery wins and the general pattern winning game is executed, so that the general electrical winning device 640 is configured to be able to provide the player with a state in which the ball is likely to win.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, it is possible to establish a normal pattern lottery opportunity (to enable the ball to pass through the through gate 67), and to make it possible to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 that is open when the ball is won in the normal pattern lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that a special pattern lottery opportunity can also be established by a left-handed game. In addition, a variable prize winning device 650 which is variably operated by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols is also arranged at a position where a ball shot by a left-handed game can win a prize.

With this configuration, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game) regardless of the game state, so that the player can smoothly play the game without having to change the game method.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 and the flow of winning balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 into the out port 644, and FIG.

In this embodiment, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal pattern lottery is executed, and when winning is won in the normal pattern lottery, a normal pattern winning game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. Then, when the electric accessary 640a is changed to the open state in this normal game, the ball enters the normal electric prize winning device 640 in a state where it can win.

As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the electric prize winning device 640 . This second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state that can guide the ball that has flowed into the general electric winning prize device 640 and flowed down the first flow path 641 a into the second flow path 641 b that communicates with the special electric operation port 643, and a second state that can guide it to the third flow path 641 c that communicates with the out port 644. In addition, the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of winning balls to the general electric prize winning device 640 in one general game is configured to be measurable. Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in one general pattern per game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the general pattern per game is configured to end at that point. In this embodiment, prize balls (four pieces) are paid out when the balls enter the special electric activation port 643, and prize balls are not paid out when the balls enter the out port 644.

The general electric prize winning device 640 has a cover body formed of transparent acrylic resin so that the player can visually recognize the flow of balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 , and the cover body is attached to the game board 13 . Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball inside the electric prize winning device 640, the player can enjoy the behavior of the winning ball in the electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

The electric accessory 640a provided in the general electric prize winning device 640 is provided with the upper end portion side of the second partition 640k2 as a base for rotation, and is configured to be variable between a closed state (see FIG. 3) in which the ball is difficult to enter the general electric prize device 640 and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball is more likely to enter the general electric prize device 640 than in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is configured to be housed in the general electric prize winning device 640. Specifically, the tip of the first partition 640k1 is configured to protrude to the left of the vertical line of the second partition 640k2 (to the left in FIG. 3), and the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is accommodated below the tip of the first partition 640k1. are doing. By configuring in this way, the electric accessory 640a in the closed state can be made difficult to come into contact with the ball fired in the left-handed game, so that the electric accessory 640a can be prevented from being damaged.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the ball winning in the general electric winning device 640 wins the special electric operation opening 643 according to the game state set at the time when the game per normal is executed. Specifically, by varying the period (opening period per normal pattern) from the execution of the normal pattern winning game to the opening control of the electric accessory 640a in a predetermined opening pattern, the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general prize winning game executed during the normal state is configured to be less likely to enter the special electric operation port 643 than the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general prize winning game executed during the time reduction state.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the game is played in the same game method (left-handed game) in the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the balls from winning the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state is configured to execute the normal pattern winning game in which the ball is less likely to enter the general electric prize winning device 640 than the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state. Also with this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state. In other words, in the present embodiment, in addition to measures to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when a ball wins the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state, there is a measure for making it more difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operation opening 643 than when the ball wins the general electric prize device 640 during the time saving state. In this way, by providing a configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, it is possible to suppress it more reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the ball flow when the ball wins in the general electrical winning device 640 in the general pattern winning game executed when the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state winning game. In this embodiment, in order not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method, it is configured so that the game can always be executed in the left-handed game. Therefore, even in the normal state of the low probability state of the normal pattern, there is a possibility that the normal pattern lottery opportunity is established (the ball passes to the through gate 67) and the ball wins in the normal electric prize winning device 640 when the normal pattern winning game is executed.

That is, the normal state (low-probability state of normal symbols) is a game state in which it is difficult for balls to enter the general electric winning device 640 compared to the short-time state (high-probability state of normal symbols) in which the balls are likely to enter the general electric winning device 640. However, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time-saving state, the ball enters the electric winning device 640 in the normal state, albeit at a low probability. I could have won a prize.

As described above, the general electric winning device 640 is provided with the special electric activation opening 643 that triggers the execution of the winning game (accessory winning game) that causes the V winning device 65 to open.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ratio of balls winning the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state to the special electric operation opening 643 and the ratio of the balls winning the general electric prize device 640 during the time saving state to the special electric operation opening 643 are configured to be different. Specifically, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state, the period from when the normal pattern per game is started to when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (first opened state) is set longer than when the normal pattern per game is executed in the time saving state. It is configured so that a chisel ball can win a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 4, when a ball enters the normal electric prize winning device 640 during a normal game that is executed in the normal state, the ball flows down the first flow path 641a designed to have a flow period of about 0.5 seconds, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 positioned in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (After reaching the second movable valve 642, the ball enters the out port 644. (Designed to have a period of about 0.3 seconds). By constructing in this way, even if a ball wins in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643, so that it is possible to prevent the excessively advantageous game from being provided to the player who is playing the game in the normal state.

Also, in order to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state, there is no need to use a special configuration for preventing the ball from winning the general electric prize winning device 640 by the general pattern winning game executed during the normal state, so the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, in the normal game that is executed in the normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the normal game) is earlier than the timing of opening the electric accessory 640a (4.1 seconds after the start of the normal game). It is configured so that the ball does not reach the second movable valve 642 while it is moving. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the second movable valve 642 in variable operation from coming into contact with the winning ball of the ordinary electric prize winning device 640, resulting in clogging of balls in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 and failure of the second movable valve 642.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the out opening 644, no prize balls are paid out. 0) may be paid out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of normal symbols according to the game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, more prize balls than in the time-saving state are given to the player as a privilege, and when the time-saving state is set, in addition to the fewer prize balls than in the normal state, the player can be given a role-winning game which is not (hardly) given in the normal state as a privilege. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the normal symbols.

Also, the same number of prize balls (four pieces) may be paid out when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 and when the ball enters the out opening 644. In this case, it is preferable to make it difficult to understand whether the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 has entered the special electric operation opening 643 or the out opening 644. As a result, since the player cannot grasp which ball entrance (the special electric operation opening 643 and the out opening 644) the balls enter according to the number of the paid-out prize balls, it is possible to perform a performance that makes the player think that whether or not a winning game (role winning game) for opening the V winning device 65 is executed after winning the ball in the general electric winning device 640 is decided by lottery, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, in this case, when the ball detection sensor 640s detects the ball, it is preferable to put out the prize balls (four pieces), so that the prize balls given to the player based on the winning of the ball to the electric prize winning device 640 can be quickly paid out to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the tip side of the first partition 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel to form a spherical flow path therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state receives the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from rebounding outside the electric prize winning device 640 due to the impact.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the ball flow when the ball wins in the general electrical winning device 640 in the general figure per game executed when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general figure per game during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the normal pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, the period from the start of the normal pattern per game to the opening state (first open state) of the electric role product 640a is set shorter than the normal pattern per game performed during the normal state. a becomes open.

Therefore, when the winning ball of the ordinary electric prize device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball enters the ordinary electric prize winning device 640), the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state, so it flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flow period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds), and the special electric operation port 643 enter the ball. Then, when the entry of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 is detected by a detecting means (proximity sensor) (not shown), the V prize winning device 65 is opened, and a prize winning game is started.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state, the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable to a position where the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is less likely to come into contact with the second movable valve 642. As a result, frequent contact between the ball and the second movable valve 642 and failure of the second movable valve 642 can be suppressed. Although the detailed description will be described later, when the normal pattern winning game is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state 0.1 seconds after the normal pattern winning game is started, and the normal electric winning device 640 is in a state where the ball can win. Therefore, the shortest period from the execution of the normal per game to the arrival of the ball at the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (0.1 seconds from the start of the normal per game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a, and 0.5 seconds until the ball that has won the general electric prize device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642).

The second movable 642 is variably operated at the same time as the normal per game is started, and the variable operation period (period required to vary from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state)) is configured to be 0.1 second. In addition, since the second movable valve 642 is variably operated one second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the normal game, the second movable valve 642 is variably operated when a period (1 second) twice the period (0.5 seconds) until the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642 immediately before the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to contact the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation even in the normal game per game executed during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. A V winning device 65 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (on the left side in the view of FIG. 2) so that the ball that is shot in the left-handed game and flows down the left side area can win. Here, the specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. In this embodiment, when a ball enters a special electric operation opening 643 provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, the V prize winning device 65 is opened and a prize winning game is executed. And it is configured so that a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed by winning a ball in a V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65 .

In other words, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution opportunity of the big win game (special big win game) established when the big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, there is the execution opportunity of the big win game (V big win game) established when the ball wins in a specific winning opening (V winning opening 165). In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening/closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can easily win in the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which the ball cannot win more than the open state. The opening/closing door 65a is provided at a position (see FIG. 2) where balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a role winning game is executed.

In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which the balls that have passed through the opening/closing door 65a in the open state flow down is formed in the space between the first partition wall 65k1 and the second partition wall 65k2. A storage part capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a, and the ball that first wins the prize in the V winning device 65 during the role-winning game is temporarily stored in the storage part. Further, a storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a so as to be able to detect that the balls are stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b, and based on the detection of the ball by the ball detection sensor 65s2, the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 is measured during the accessory winning game, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. Thus, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at the position where the winning ball of the V winning device 65 flows down immediately afterward, it is possible to suppress the situation in which more than a prescribed number of balls win the V winning device 65, and to immediately give the player the prize balls during the game per the role.

A second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65c is configured so that the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 65b do not directly flow into the second flow path 65c, but that the subsequent balls flowing down the first flow path 65b contact the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a and are guided to the second flow path 65c while the balls are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entrance for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball flows down the second flow path 65c (flowing period of 0.1 second), and the ball entering the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a released state in which balls are less likely to be stored than in the storage state, according to the progress of the role winning game (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the role winning game is executed). When the reservoir valve 66a is in the released state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65b or the ball that has been stored in the reservoir of the reservoir valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm, which is formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3.

A first movable valve 66b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b is configured to move in a predetermined movable pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, between a guiding position (protruding position) capable of receiving the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d and a passing position (recessed position) unable to receive the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d. Specifically, it is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d driven and controlled by the main controller 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b moves to the passage position (the position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 66b retreats from the V winning device 65, and the first movable valve solenoid 209 moves. When d is set to OFF (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b is configured to move to a guiding position protruding into the V winning device 65 (a position protruding from the game board 13).

The first movable valve 66b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d with the first movable valve 66b at the guiding position (protruding position) (falling period of 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b toward the fourth flow path 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and a ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 65e (falling period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. The second out port 163b is, like the first out port 163a described above, a ball entry port for discharging a ball that has entered the pachinko machine 10 to the outside.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passage position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the ball (flowing period of 0.2 seconds) flowing down the third flow path 65d flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flowing period of 0.1 second). A V winning port 165 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning hole 165 is a winning hole that can be a trigger for executing a big winning game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 while the big winning game is not being executed, the big winning game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first outlet 163a and a second outlet 163b. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball that has won the V winning device 65 when the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state from flowing into the flow path (the third flow path 65d, the fourth flow path 65e, and the fifth flow path 65f) through which the ball can pass when the reservoir valve 66a is in the released state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the first out port 163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e may be communicated, the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, and the ball flowing down the second flow path 65c may enter the second out port 163b. In this case, the third partition wall 65k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. 6, should be inclined from the upper end side to the lower end side in the lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball flowing down the second flow path 65c flows into the fifth flow path 65f.

Thus, in this embodiment, there are two opportunities for executing the big winning game, that is, the big winning game is executed when the big winning is won by lottery of the special symbols, and the big winning game is executed when the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game. Hereinafter, when the jackpot games are described by classifying execution opportunities, the jackpot game executed when the player enters the V winning port 165 is also referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 65 of the present embodiment is configured such that when the winning game is executed, the ball enters an open state in which the ball can win a prize, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. configured to decide.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the first movable valve 66b is constantly moved in a movable pattern in which the time at the guidance position (the time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 165) is 5 seconds, and the time at the passing position (the time during which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165) is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, even if a plurality of balls are awarded to the V winning device 65 in one role winning game, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one, so that when the role winning game is executed 11 times, one big winning game is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the contents of the winning ball flow in the V winning device 65 during execution of the prize winning game will be described. First, referring to FIG. 7, the ball flow in the first half period of the game per role (the period in which the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state) will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the V winning device 65 when the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state in the role winning game. Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operationally controlled so as to be in a storage state from when the accessory winning game is executed until the V winning device 65 is closed. When a plurality of balls enter the V winning device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and the second winning ball P2 contacts the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, all the winning balls (for example, the balls P2) other than the balls P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a enter the out port 163a. In addition, since the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d can be reliably reduced to one in one accessory game.

By constructing in this way, since the easiness of winning the ball to the V winning opening 165 is not changed according to the timing of winning the ball to the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game and the number of winning prizes, all the players can be provided with a fair game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the content of the ball flow (second half period of the game per role) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening/closing door 65a is closed and new balls cannot enter the V winning device 65, when the storage valve 66a shifts to the released state (indicated by the dotted line in the figure), the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the guiding position, so the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, flows down the fourth flow path 65e, and enters the second out port 163b.

On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the ball flow when the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passage position will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 9, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b and the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passing position, the ball flows down the fifth flow path 66f and enters the V prize opening 165.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a special figure ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the special figure entrance 64, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the special figure entrance switch, a big win lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when a ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the ball can enter the special figure entrance 64 at a rate of 1 ball in about 15 balls out of the balls fired by the left-handed game.

As shown in FIG. 10, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port for communication with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover that are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is cut into the box base side and the box cover side when the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102 or when the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 positioned at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). are The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 21) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device.

Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The RAM 203 has a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and the like, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected with the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol reservation lamp. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed, a specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening and closing door for changing the opening state and the closing state of the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650, a V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening and closing door of the V winning device 65, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65. A first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the first movable valve 66b provided, a second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the electric prize winning device 640, and other solenoids 209z for driving other various devices are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205.

Also, to the input/output port 205, various switches 208 comprising a group of switches (not shown) (switches for detecting that a ball has entered each ball entrance, a switch for detecting that a ball is positioned at a specific position, etc.) and a later-described RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotating position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 by the command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the performance role product (not shown), a voice output command is set for causing the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22, or a lamp output command is set for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226. Also, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in correspondence with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display such as the variation effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 10). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19. FIG. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three upper, middle, and lower pattern rows (L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). The decorative patterns which fluctuate corresponding to the variable display of the third patterns (special patterns) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are composed of 10 types of main patterns to which identification information imitating the numbers '0' to '9' is attached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to identification information imitating numerals. Thus, by using a display mode corresponding to each piece of identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled vertically for variable display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and in a state where each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third symbols are stopped on the effective line L1 in a combination of big winning symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

Incidentally, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variability display area of the third symbol may be made smaller, or the variability display area may be moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the third symbol is varying. Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern is variably displayed (dynamically displayed), but without being limited to this, the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the normal pattern may be variably displayed (dynamically displayed). In this case, whether the variable display of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special pattern or the variation of the normal pattern may be notified in an incomprehensible manner to the player. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to perform both the variable display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbols and the variation display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols, the target of the third symbol may be switched according to the game content (game state) to be executed, for example, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbols is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols is executed during the time saving state. It may be configured to execute a variable display of patterns. In this case, it is preferable to variably display the third symbol corresponding to the symbol type in which a lottery advantageous to the player (a lottery on the side where the player pays more attention to the lottery result) is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying symbol. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the lower two-thirds being a main display area Dm for variably displaying the third pattern, and the other upper one-third being a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and a third pattern is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left pattern row Z1→right pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2 in each game. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. Thus, by displaying the stopped third pattern for a certain period (1 second or more), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether the combination of the third patterns corresponds to the big win (whether the lottery result of the special symbols is the big win or not). Further, when the combination of the big win patterns (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main patterns) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third pattern is stopped, the big win is decided, the big win game is started, and the big win animation (opening presentation) is displayed.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the loss and there is a reserved ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after one-second stop display (determined display). In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 even though the player shoots the game ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and most of the cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) are caused by the fact that the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player quits the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) for which variation has not been executed among the game balls that have entered the special figure entrance 64 and the through gate 67, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears to perform an announcement effect.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to four, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Also, when the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to one time, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the reserved ball number is four balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays the reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the special ball entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 displays the reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the through gate 67. In the example of FIG. 11(b), four reserved ball number patterns are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, while no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the right half, so there are four reserved balls with special patterns, but there are no reserved balls with normal patterns.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is configured to be suspended up to 1 time. However, the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors or lighting patterns) corresponding to the reserved ball number. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Also, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm, but the display area may be formed in a manner other than this. For example, the sub-display area Ds may be formed below the main display area Dm. Also, in this case, it is preferable to variably form the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the set game state. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game has changed to a different game state just by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, in a state in which the player is forced to pay attention to the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which the variable display of the third pattern indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big win is highly expected, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be reduced or the sub-display area Ds may be hidden.

<Regarding the production content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery (special pattern lottery), a time saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends. This time saving state is continued until the drawing of special patterns reaches a specified number of times (until a predetermined end condition of the time saving state is established), and when the drawing of special patterns is executed for a specified number of times, the end condition of the time saving state is established and a normal state is set.

The time-saving state is a state in which a normal pattern high probability state is set, and compared with the case where the game state is the normal state, it is constituted so as to easily set an open state in which a ball can enter a normal electric prize winning device 640 by a normal pattern winning game.

When the winning of the normal pattern is won and the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 in the electric winning device 640, the prize winning game is executed, and the game for winning the ball in the V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65 is executed.

Here, in this embodiment, a game ball shot aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. In the normal pattern lottery executed by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67, when the time-saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10, and when the normal pattern lottery wins, the normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened is executed.

The normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a period (3 seconds) during which most (approximately 100%) balls can be awarded to the general electric prize winning device 640 by continuously executing the left-handed hitting game.

Further, in the general figure winning game executed during the time saving state, most of the balls winning the general electric prize winning device 640 are configured to enter the special electric operation opening 643, and when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the accessory winning game is executed. Then, the V winning device 65 is opened by executing the accessory winning game, the ball winning the V winning device 65 enters the V winning port 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed with the winning of the ball to the V winning port 165 as a trigger.

That is, during the time-saving state, it is easier to execute a game (special electric game) aiming for a big win by entering a game ball into a V winning opening 165 (V prize) rather than executing a game (special game) aiming for a big win in a lottery of special symbols, so that the player executes the game while desiring V winning (V big win game) by the role winning game in the special electric game.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 as a special electric game (to pass the ball through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery), it is necessary to aim at the left area of the game board 13 and shoot the ball. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the ball enters the special figure entrance 64, so that during the time saving state, both a special figure game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn) and a special electric game (a game in which a normal symbol is drawn) are executed.

The time saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special electric game is configured to continue until the time until the special symbol lottery executed by the special electric game reaches the specified number of times (that is, the special symbol fluctuation time for the specified number of times) has passed. Execution of the technique is a basic game method during the time saving state in this embodiment.

In order to convey the state of the time-saving game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the third symbol display device 81 executes various effects. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, but when the jackpot game is executed and the jackpot ends, the game state is shifted to a V rush mode for indicating that the game state is a time saving state which is advantageous for the player, and the setting of the time saving state is notified. Then, various effects during the V rush will be explained. Hereinafter, the time saving state is referred to as "V rush" for simplification of explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 12(a), the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (game). When the final round of the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the characters ``V rush will start after the jackpot ends!!'' are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can easily understand that the transition to the V rush mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment ``Get 40 seconds of V rush period'' with a short remaining time mode 801 of ``40 seconds'' for indicating the duration of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed.

Here, the display contents of the remaining short time mode 801 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, as the end condition of the time saving state, the end condition that is established when the number of special symbol lottery times reaches the specified number of times (for example, 4 times) is set. Therefore, the time-saving state is continued until the time until the special symbol lottery reaches the prescribed number of times (that is, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbols for the prescribed number of times) elapses. In the remaining short time mode 801, a display mode showing the total time obtained by totaling the fluctuation time of the special symbols until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is displayed.

Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). FIG. 12(c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories of special symbols and a maximum of one reserved memory of normal symbols are configured to be memorizable. In FIG. 12(c), the status of each symbol is explained using a running special figure th0 for explaining the situation of the special symbol variation being executed, a special figure first reservation th1 to special figure fourth reservation th4 for explaining the winning information of the special symbols held and stored, a running normal figure fh0 for explaining the situation of the normal symbol variation being executed, and a general figure first holding fh1 for explaining the winning information of the held and stored normal symbols. are doing.

FIG. 12(c) is a state in which four reserves of a special symbol in which a variation pattern of 10 seconds is set are accumulated in the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure fourth reservation th4. That is, 40 seconds, which is a value obtained by adding up the fluctuation time for four times of the special symbol lottery, is set for the period of the time-saving state this time. Therefore, characters of ``40 seconds'' are displayed in the short remaining time display mode 801 for indicating the continuation period of the game state which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to easily inform how long the V rush period continues.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed in a specific number of seconds, as shown in the short remaining time display mode 801. However, the remaining period of the duration may be notified to the player using an indicator or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the short remaining time mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of "40 seconds" calculated as the V rush duration. ) may be additionally notified.

In this case, for example, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the value obtained by summing the fluctuation time of the special symbols corresponding to 3 special symbol reservations (special symbol reservations) among the 4 special symbol reservations that have already been acquired (special figure reservations), that is, in the case of FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in this embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by summing up the fluctuation times of the special symbol lottery executed a plurality of times until the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current special figure pending number, the display mode for showing the special figure pending number is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the value of the remaining short time mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush is the total value of the variable times corresponding to how many special figure reservations. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of each special symbol lottery.

Therefore, for example, even in a pachinko machine 10 in which different variation patterns of variation time are set depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or a loss, the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 prevents the player from grasping the lottery result of the special symbol reservation (whether or not the winning information corresponding to the big win is included in the special symbol reservation) in advance.

Further, for example, a pachinko machine 10 configured to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and configured to select any variation pattern of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 30 seconds when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, wherein the special figure first reservation th1 is "10 seconds", the special figure second reservation th2 is "30 seconds", the special figure third reservation th3 is "20 seconds", When the special figure 4th hold th4 is "10 seconds", it is preferable to display "50 seconds" as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. By constructing in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the fact that the period is shorter than '90 seconds' (total value of the variation time for four special symbol reservations) which is the duration of the V rush, and that the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state wins a big win (the first special symbol lottery wins a big win and the variation time is set to 50 seconds).

In other words, when displaying only a part of the period instead of the entire period in which the V rush continues, in addition to the configuration of displaying the value corresponding to the variable time (50 seconds) set when the jackpot is won as described above, for example, the remaining short time mode 801 may be displayed in a display mode of "60 seconds" that makes the player think that the first time reduction is a loss variation (variation time of 10 seconds) and the second time reduction is a big win variation (variation time of 50 seconds). In other words, a value which is smaller than the value indicating the actual duration of the V rush and which is calculated when combining at least the variation time that can be selected for the jackpot variation and the variation time that can be selected for the loss variation can be displayed.

In this embodiment, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to display the acquired special figure pending number, but without being limited to this, a display mode for indicating the special figure pending number may be displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently obtained special figure reservation number by displaying the display form for showing the special figure reservation number in a display form in which the contents are difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in which the ending period of the jackpot ends and the V-rush starts, and FIG. 12(d) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) is displayed. That is, FIG. 12(b) shows the display screen at the time when the special figure hold indicated by the special figure first hold th1 at the end of the jackpot starts to change, and the special figure hold that was the special figure first hold th1 at the time of the jackpot ending is shifted to the special figure th0 during execution, and the special figure second hold th2 is the special figure first hold th1, the special figure third hold th2 is the special figure second hold th2, and the special figure fourth hold th4 is the special figure. It is a display screen in a state shifted to the third hold th3. In addition, since the V rush is started, there is no new entry into the special figure entrance 64, and the special figure 4th reservation th4 is empty. And, as shown in the normal drawing fh0 during execution, the lottery of the normal symbols also starts to fluctuate, and the reservation is accumulated in the normal drawing first reservation fh1 (see FIG. 12(d)).

When the V-rush is started, the main display area Dm displays characters "under V-rush" as a game status notification mode indicating that the V-rush period is now in effect. Next to the main display area Dm, a character 810 resembling a rabbit is dynamically displayed as if trying to take something out of the bag 810a. This indicates that the normal symbol is in the process of being changed.

A timer 812 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to indicate the remaining period of the V rush period that is advantageous to the player. This timer 812 displays a value obtained by summing up the fluctuation time for the specified number of times of the special symbol until the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12 (b), the number of lotteries of special symbols in the time saving state is stipulated to be 4 times, and 10 seconds, which is the variation time of the special symbol th0 during execution, and "40.0 seconds", which is the sum of the variation time from the special symbol first reservation th1 to the special symbol third reservation th3, is shown in the timer 812. This timer 812 is displayed so that its value is decremented each time the variable time of the running special figure th0 is decremented, and the player can easily understand that the V rush period is progressing.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters ``When the timer reaches 0, the V rush ends!!'' are displayed to inform the player that the V rush will end when the value of the timer 812 being subtracted reaches 0. As described above, during the V rush period, the game is executed with the aim of allowing the player to enter the ball into the V winning opening 165 . Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the change state of the value displayed on the timer 812 .

Characters of ``first run'' are displayed in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, indicating how many times the V rush period is after winning a jackpot (so-called first win) from the normal state and starting the V rush without shifting the game state to the normal state. Further, "0pt" is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls won in the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of winning balls acquired by the big win during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can confirm the game history at his/her own timing and the convenience of the game can be improved.

In addition, a V rush variation area 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a left area 811a, a middle area 811b, and a right area 811c of the V rush variation area 811 are displayed in such a manner that the patterns are varied (dynamic display). In this V rush variation area 811, information is displayed for suggesting the game situation during the V rush to the player. In FIG. 12(b), the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has passed, and that the special and normal patterns are currently changing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(a), a description will be given of a display screen in the case where a general pattern is won during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when winning a normal figure during the V rush, and FIG. 13(c) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when the lottery for the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electrical winning device 640 is opened so that the game ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), the running normal pattern suspension fh0 is indicated by "◯" indicating that the normal symbol lottery was won. Then, at the upper right of the main display area Dm, an animation is displayed in which the character 810 who was looking for something from the bag 810a at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12(b)) takes out the ticket 810b with the character "lucky" written thereon, which is a notification mode for indicating that the character 810 has won the lottery of the normal pattern and obtained the privilege. Then, in a display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general electric prize winning device 640 is displayed in a state in which the lottery of the normal pattern is won and the electric accessory 640a is opened. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "If you enter the electric chew, you have a chance to win V!!" are displayed. By these display contents, the player can understand that the game is to be executed aiming at the electric chew, so that the player can be guided to the correct game method. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds described above are guide/notification modes for guiding the game content to be executed to the player.

A timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the game situation of FIG. 13 (a), the remaining variation time of the special figure fluctuation being executed shown in the special figure th0 being executed is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure lottery from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3 is a period of V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812 . In FIG. 13 (a), the special figure 4th reservation th4 that was not reserved at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12 (b)) is reserved, but this is the specified number of V rushes. Since it is a special drawing lottery that is executed after the period has elapsed, the fluctuation time of this special figure 4th reservation th4 is not added up. Therefore, "-" is shown in the special figure 4th reservation th4 (see FIG. 13(c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), the display screen when the character hits during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the accessory winning game is executed during the V rush, and FIG. 13(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640, the V opening/closing door 65a associated with the V prize winning device 65 is opened.

FIG. 13(b) is a display screen when a game ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640 due to the general figure hit shown in FIG. 13(a). In FIG. 13(a), the reserved ball that was reserved in the special figure first reservation th1 is shifted to the special figure th0 during execution in FIG. 13(b). A "?" indicating that the remaining variation time is 9.9 seconds and the variation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13(d)). In this embodiment, when an accessory winning game or a jackpot game is executed, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each winning game is completed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which had decreased along with the fluctuation time of the special symbol up to FIG. In addition, the characters "STOP!!" are displayed to indicate that the timer 812 is interrupting the subtraction display. From these display contents, the player can understand that the V rush period has been interrupted. In the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 with the V open/close door 65a opened is schematically displayed together with the words "Aim!!".

Thus, the player can understand that the V opening/closing door 65a of the V prize winning device 65 is open (that the role winning game is being executed) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. 13(b) have a function of a game status notification mode for informing the player of the game status during the V rush and a function of a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game to be executed during the accessory winning game.

In addition, the V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed in a so-called ready-to-win display mode, in which the letter "V" is displayed still in the left area 811a and the right area 811c. Further, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters ``If you enter the V, you will get a big win!!'', and by these display contents, the player can play the game with expectation that the game ball will be won in the V prize-winning opening 165 in a little while.

That is, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, in a game (special symbol game) in which a special symbol lottery is executed and the lottery result is expected to be a big hit, a plurality of identification information (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81) for indicating the lottery result is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in a plurality of rows (for example, 3 rows), and one figure among the plurality of symbol rows is displayed. When the pattern rows other than the pattern row are stop-displayed in a ready-to-win display mode (for example, a combination of the same identification information) that is a combination of identification information for indicating the winning of the big win, the ready-to-win performance for increasing the expectation of winning the big win is executed.

The game (special electric game) executed during the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is not a lottery of special symbols but a game of executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by making the ball win a prize in a V prize opening 165 through various processes based on the lottery of normal symbols instead of the lottery of special symbols. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, according to the progress of the special electric game (various processes until the jackpot game is executed) having the above-described complicated game characteristics, the variable display mode of the symbols (characters) variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in each of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush variation area 811 is configured to perform a performance mode as if the special game were being executed. With such a configuration, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 without grasping the specific game contents in the special electric game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the V winning screen during the winning role game during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball enters the V winning opening 165 during a V-rush and a jackpot is awarded, and FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the role winning game is executed during the V rush, and when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game (when V wins), the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded.

FIG. 14(a) is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning hole 165 during the winning game shown in FIG. 13(b). As described above, since the variation of the special symbol is interrupted during the per-accessory game, the running special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped while leaving the variation time of 9.9 seconds. And special figure 1st suspension th1 and special figure 2nd suspension th2 are suspensions within the specified number of times of this V rush, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds each. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period remains "29.9 seconds" from the time shown in FIG. 13(b) (see FIG. 14(c)).

When it is determined that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the subtraction of the V rush period is not subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period). "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

In this embodiment, when a V winning (V jackpot game) occurs during the temporary stop of the special pattern, the time saving state is continued until the special pattern lottery executed after the temporarily stopped special pattern variation is completed is executed for the number of time saving times set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed this time. That is, it is configured so that the information (the number of times of time saving) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special pattern variation (restart special pattern variation) executed after the end of the jackpot game.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 14(c), when the number of times of time reduction is set to 4 times after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining period (9.9 seconds) of the special symbol variation during interruption and the special symbol variation time for 4 special symbol reservations is added to the duration of the next V rush. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state (at the time of the first V rush) set by performing a special game in the normal state and winning the jackpot is set by executing the jackpot game (V jackpot game) during the V rush, and the time-saving state (when the V rush continues) is set again after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to easily provide a V rush that is advantageous to a person. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the V rush to continue.

In addition, other methods may be used to set a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the V rush continues than when the V rush enters for the first time. A different variation pattern may be selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and more specifically, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the condition for executing the big win game is established in the time saving state (V prize in the special electric game) and the time saving state is set after the big win game is completed than when the condition for executing the big win game is established in the normal state (win the jackpot in the special lottery) and the time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. Good. By constructing in this way, it is easier to lengthen the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state when the V rush continues than when the V rush first enters, and as a result, the duration of the V rush can be lengthened. Therefore, since added value can be given to the player who has continued the V rush, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, as a technical concept opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information (the number of times of time saving) for establishing the time saving end condition may be updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special symbol variation, or the special symbol variation with a longer variation time may be more easily executed when the V rush first enters than when the V rush continues. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the V rush from being excessively continued, and to prevent the V rush from ending without executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) even once in the special electric game executed during the V rush, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when using a configuration in which the timing of interrupting the special figure fluctuation during execution greatly affects the length of the duration of the V rush after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), in a state where the special figure fluctuation can be interrupted (for example, in a state where the normal winning game is won), information for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation under execution is notified to the player, and the player can select whether or not to interrupt the special figure fluctuation. You can In other words, if the remaining variation time of the special figure variation being executed is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special figure variation (a game that causes the ball to enter the special electric activation port 643 during the normal figure per game to execute the accessory per game) is executed. It may be configured to allow selection.

In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is provided by V winning, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special pattern and the fluctuation time of the special pattern within the prescribed number of times of the V rush reserved at that time are displayed as the preset period of the next V rush. The time is displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period stocked for the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

Then, in the V rush variation area 811 for indicating the game state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, "V" is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b that fluctuates in FIG. 13(b). Then, since the character 'V' is stopped and displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the prize is executed, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b and the right area 811c are combined to display 'VVV' indicating that the player has won the jackpot. In addition, the characters "Congratulations on the big win!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is clearly shown to the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the role and the jackpot has been granted.

In the present embodiment, the V rush fluctuation area 811 is configured such that the left area 811a and the right area 811c are stopped when the prize is won, and the middle area 811b is stopped when the V is won during the prize. It may be configured so as to stop display. In this way, by constructing the game so as to execute step-by-step performance with the establishment of the game condition as a trigger, the player can instantly judge which stage the game stage is when he/she visually recognizes the V fluctuation area 811.例文帳に追加Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Also, the characters to be stopped may indicate that a big win is given and the player can obtain a privilege, and may be displayed as "win" or "V win". By displaying a plurality of characters indicating a big win in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a more varied presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(b), the loss screen during winning of the character during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 during the prize winning during the V rush. In the present embodiment, the variation of the executed special pattern is temporarily stopped when the winning of the role is executed, but when the V prize cannot be won during the winning of the role, the temporarily stopped variation of the special pattern is restarted.

FIG. 14(b) is a display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 after the winning of the prize is executed in FIG. 13(b). In the V fluctuation area 811 indicating the game situation during the V rush in the main display area Dm, the character "x" indicating that the V prize is not won is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, in the V rush fluctuation area 811, the deviation display form of "VxV" is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the game ball could not enter the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the prize this time.

Then, in the main display area Dm, characters "Restart!!" are displayed to indicate that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special figure is restarted. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 begins to decrease again with the resumption of fluctuation of the special figure shown in the running special figure th0 (see FIG. 14(d)). As a result, the player can easily understand that the game must be executed with the aim of winning V within the time indicated by the timer 812 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(a), the jackpot ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a jackpot ending during a V-rush, and FIG. 15(c) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won or a V prize is won during the V rush period, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

FIG. 15(a) is a view showing the ending screen of the big win awarded from the V prize shown in FIG. 14(a). As described above, when the jackpot is given during the V rush, the value obtained by adding the fluctuation time to the special figure second hold th2 which was the specified number of times in the previous V rush period and the temporarily stopped running special figure th0 is displayed in the display area HR4 as the time stock. Then, during the special figure suspension corresponding to the special figure third suspension th3 in FIG. 15(c), that is, during the V rush before the big win game is executed, the variation time of the special figure suspension that has not been added as the V rush period (time period) is calculated.

As described above, when a big win is awarded during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the big win game. The period of the V rush is set to a value obtained by summing the remaining time of the variation of the special figure temporarily stopped during the big win and the variation time for the number of lotteries of the special figure given according to the kind of the big win. In FIG. 15 (a), 29.9 seconds as time stock as displayed in the display area HR4, that is, the remaining period of the interrupted special figure fluctuation (9.9 seconds), and the number of seconds obtained by adding the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 that had already been added and displayed on the timer 812 during the previous V rush (20 seconds in total) are already displayed as time stock. At the end of the technique, the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure third hold th3 is added as a new value that can be added to the V rush period.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 15(a) shows the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the time reduction is given four times after the end of the jackpot game, and the special figure hold held as the time stock is up to the special figure second hold th2 (for two special figure holds). Since there is no (because the special figure reservation is not stored in the special figure fourth reservation th4), only the fluctuation time of the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 is added and displayed.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is granted during a V rush, and the number of special figure reservations that are time-stocked at that point is short of the specified number of times (number of time reductions) of time saving (V rush) to be granted this time, the variable time corresponding to the special figure reservations that are held and stored by the end of the jackpot game is configured to be added to the value of the time stock, and in FIG. Characters of “+15 seconds GET” are displayed in the additional period display mode 802 . As a result, the player can enjoy the fact that the period in which the player is advantageous has been further extended. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the performance of adding the V rush period is executed during the ending period of the big win game, the game can be executed with expectation that the advantageous period will be extended at the time of the ending of the big win game, so that the performance during the big win can attract more attention.

In the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, characters of ``second row'' indicating that the V rush is continued twice are displayed, and ``670P'', which is the number of prize balls obtained in the big win during the V rush, is displayed in the display area HR2. In this way, the game result is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it, and the value increases each time a big win is executed and a privilege is obtained, thereby making the player feel more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Continue V rush" are displayed to indicate that the V rush has been set again. As a result, the player can easily understand that the V rush that is advantageous to the player will be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the timer addition screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during the V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol holding newly won at the time of the jackpot ending executed during the V rush, and the addition performance of the variable time of the special symbol outside the period of the prescribed number of times of the V rush are executed. When the number of reserved balls for the specified number of times of V rush is not reserved at the end of the big win, the addition performance for the newly increased number of reserved balls is executed even during the V rush period until the special figure reservation for the specified number of times of V rush is accumulated.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the game progresses from the ending of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15(a) and a game ball newly enters the special figure entrance 64, and FIG. 15(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. In the main display area Dm, the V rush fluctuation area displays a variable display mode indicating that the V rush period has passed. In FIG. 15 (b), as shown in FIG. 15 (d), the running special figure th0 resumes the fluctuation, the remaining variation time is 3.2 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 are each stored with a hold that is set to 10 seconds as the fluctuation time. And special figure 3rd reservation th3 is a state in which the retention ball of the fluctuation time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds, which is the sum of these values.

The state of FIG. 15 (a), as described above, is a state in which it is possible to add the variable time for two new special figure reservations as the V rush period, but only one new special figure reservation is acquired (Special figure third reservation th3 only). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when a new special figure reservation is acquired next time, the change time of the acquired special figure reservation is additionally displayed.

Specifically, it is shown that there was an additional winning in the special figure 4th reservation th4, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set for this new special figure reservation. Therefore, an effect of adding 20 seconds to the current V rush period is executed. Then, a character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm adds a period of V rush and throws a ticket 810b for showing extension of the advantageous period to the player to a timer 812 for showing the remaining period of V rush. After this performance is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure additionally won this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the value ``58.2 seconds'' is displayed on the timer 812.例文帳に追加Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Timer addition!!" are displayed to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has been extended (added).

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), the V rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16(c) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, when a game ball is not entered into the V prize winning opening 165 during the V rush period, or when a special pattern lottery is not won, the V rush period ends and the game state shifts to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the display of "x" is shown to indicate that the running special figure th0f, which is the final variation of the current V rush, has come off and stopped. The reserved balls are accumulated from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3, but these reserved balls are reserved balls outside the prescribed number of times of V rush. In addition, during execution, the normal map fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the normal map first reserved fh1 normal map reserved ball is accumulated.

In the main display area Dm, characters ``VGET×2'' indicating how many times the V rush has been continued this time are displayed, and further characters ``PGET×1500'' indicating how many prize balls (privileges) have been acquired in the big hit during the V rush this time are displayed. As a result, the game result of the current V rush is reported in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "V Rush End" are displayed to notify that the advantageous period has ended. With these display modes, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has ended.

Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the period of the V rush has been extended, and FIG. 16(d) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is configured to execute the V rush effect. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol variation of the predetermined specified number of times ends. Specifically, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the time saving state is terminated and shifted to the normal state when the fourth special pattern variation is stopped (fixed display) after the time saving state is set. Here, since the lottery (variation) of the special symbols and the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols are executed independently, when the general symbol winning game is executed just before the end of the V rush period (immediately before the final variation of the special symbols in the time saving state is stopped and displayed), the role winning game may be executed after the time saving state is ended (after shifting to the normal state).

In this case, if the V rush performance is ended at the timing when the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, there is a possibility that the game with the accessory is started in spite of the end of the V rush performance, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern winning game is executed at the end timing of the V rush period (the final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time saving state), the V rush performance is extended until the normal pattern winning game is completed or until the accessory winning game executed triggered by the normal pattern winning game is completed. As a result, the V rush effect can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period in which the V jackpot game is aimed, and the effect can be easily understood by the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the state in which the character "○" indicating that the winning is performed in the normal figure tf0 during execution is shown, that is, during the normal figure per game, the special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving state, is stopped and displayed ("X" indicating that the special figure th0 is out and stopped during execution) When the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. A left region 811a, a middle region 811b, and a right region 811c of a V rush fluctuation region 811 for indicating the situation are displayed in a state of being changed. That is, it suggests to the player that the V rush is continuing.

Then, the timer 812 displays "00.0 seconds" indicating that all the fluctuations of the special figure for the prescribed number of times in the time saving state have ended. However, above the main display area, the characters "V rush extended" are displayed. With such a display, the player learns that the V rush, which he thought has ended, has been extended, and can obtain unexpected joy. Characters of 'Last Chance!!' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player can easily understand that the V rush will end unless the game ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and the V winning port 165 in this normal game win.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), that is, when the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the accessory winning game is executed in the same manner as during the normal V rush period. In this case, the display screen during the winning-access-game shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the characters "Last Chance!!" are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period will end if the ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 in the current accessory winning game. Then, when the ball enters the V prize winning opening 165 in the role winning game displayed as "Last Chance!!", the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed after the accessory winning game ends.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), in the present embodiment, a series of V rush effects are executed with the period in which the special electric game can be executed as the V rush period, not the transition state of the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16(a) is not limited to after the final variation of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, for example, the display may be started when the remaining period of the final variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is ended at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as the period until the V rush end screen is displayed.

By configuring in this way, the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, so that the player can be notified of the game result during the V rush period in an easy-to-understand manner. In the case of using such a configuration, for example, when the normal symbol lottery situation is determined in advance at the time when the V rush end screen is displayed, and when it is determined in advance that the normal symbol winning game will be executed within the period in which the V rush end screen can be displayed, the extended screen shown in FIG. It may be configured as follows. In this way, by using the configuration to switch the end screen to the extension screen, the possibility of aiming at the V jackpot game can be left even after the end screen is displayed, so that the player can play the game with expectation until the end. In addition, in this embodiment, when the extended screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed, the normal state is set as the game state. When such a constitution is used, for example, it is preferable to execute a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state. As a result, the period during which the extended screen is displayed indicates that the V rush period will end soon and that the advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, the player who is playing the game during the V rush period can play the game with expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and the normal normal state so as to be manageable, and only when the special normal state is set, an advantageous jackpot game is given to the player, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal normal state, almost no prize balls can be obtained as a penalty, and a disadvantageous jackpot game in which the normal state is set is executed after the jackpot game ends. It is better to configure it so that In addition, without being limited to this, for example, when the display condition of the extended screen is satisfied at the time when the final variation of the special pattern in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is not terminated, and when the termination condition of the extended screen display is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends is variable, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(a), the special screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a special screen at the end of a jackpot game, and FIG. 17(c) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot game is executed during a V rush, the period of the V rush is set again after the jackpot game is finished based on the number of reserved balls of special symbols and the variation time. However, if there is a reserved ball for which a winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds is performed among the reserved balls at the ending of the jackpot game, a heaven mode performance indicating that the jackpot is surely won after the lapse of a predetermined period is executed.

FIG. 17(a) is a display screen when the winning variation with the variation time of 200 seconds is suspended at the ending of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the holding status of each symbol at the ending of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 17(a) is that the running special symbol th0 is during the jackpot game, so the special symbols are not changed. In addition, "↓" indicating that the running normal map fh0 is fluctuating is shown, and it is shown that the normal map first reserved fh1 is stored. And, in the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2, it is shown that the reservation ball in which the deviation variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed is stored.

And, in the special figure third reservation th3, the reservation ball in which the variation pattern is executed for 200 seconds is shown. In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as a variation pattern of special symbols during a time-saving game (during V rush), when the result of winning or not determination is winning, long winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds (hereinafter referred to as special winning) may be executed. Furthermore, in the big wins (big wins A, big wins B) that are won in the lottery of special symbols, a time-saving state is set after the big win game ends. Therefore, even if the player cannot enter the V winning port 165 in the special electric game until the fluctuation of the special winning is stopped (during the heaven mode), the special electric winning can always be won by the big winning game, and the period of the V rush is set again after the big winning game is finished, so the special electric game can be executed without anxiety. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the special figure 4th reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since the big hit game is executed in the special figure 3rd reservation th3, the variation time is indicated as "-" because it is set as the V rush period set after the jackpot game executed by the special figure 3rd reservation th3.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when there is a special win in the pending game at the end of the jackpot game, the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays characters of ``enter heaven mode'' indicating that the special win is in the pending game. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, or during the V Rush in which there is no special win in the reserve, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b which are not displayed are displayed. Also, the characters "Super Lucky!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed in the normal state or during the V rush in which there is no special win in the hold, are displayed, so that the player can have an expectation that the game situation is a special situation, and can continue the game with excitement. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b form a special game situation suggesting mode for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

Also, in the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as "220 seconds" is displayed. The value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation of winning the special prize in the special symbol lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode. That is, it becomes a special game period notification mode for indicating the special game period to be executed from now on. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is a sum of 200 seconds, which is the variation time for the special win, and the variation time for the number of pending balls until the special win is won. In FIG. 17(c), the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set for each of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time per special shown in the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is 200 seconds, the value of the fluctuation time from the special figure 1st reservation th1 to the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is added up "220 seconds" is the period in which the heaven mode is set.

The time-saving state (V rush) period in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to notify the player in the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game, but the variation time of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state is configured to execute a variation pattern in which the longest variation time is set to 50 seconds at maximum except for the special winning variation of 200 seconds (see FIG. 25(c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player can understand that the time saving state is always set again, and the special electric game can be executed with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning variation in the reserved balls at the ending of the big winning game, and if there is a special winning, the player is notified at the ending of the big winning game, but the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, when there is a special win in the hold, at the ending of the big win, the time until the special win variation is executed may be notified, and when the special win variation is started, the player may be notified that the period has been extended by ``200 seconds''. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an unexpected pleasure that the period of the V-rush, which was thought to have ended, was suddenly extended for a long period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(b), the screen during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during heaven mode, and FIG. 17(d) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, when there is a special win in the reserved ball at the ending of the big win, the time until the fluctuation of the special win stops is called a heaven mode, and it is configured to be a period in which the player can play the special electric game with peace of mind. FIG. 17(b) is an example of the display screen when the game progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters "10th run" are displayed to indicate that it is the 10th V rush period after the game state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state (V rush). In the display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters "6000pt" indicating the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game executed after the shift to the V rush are displayed. Above the main display area Dm, the characters "in paradise mode" are displayed so that the player can instantly determine the current game state. In addition, similarly to during the V rush, a V rush variation area 811 is displayed, and in each area of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, a lottery of normal symbols is executed, and a variation display mode indicating that the special electric game is in progress is shown. Also, like during the V rush, an animation of the character 810 looking for something in the bag 810a is displayed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that the lottery for normal symbols is being executed.

And, as shown in FIG. 17(d), in the running special symbol th0, the variation of the special symbol with the remaining variation time of 30 seconds is being performed. This running special figure th0, in the gaming situation shown in FIG. 17(c), is that the reserved ball that executes the special hit shown in the special figure third reserved th3 has started to fluctuate. Therefore, the remaining period of heaven mode being executed in FIG. 17(b) is 30 seconds which is the remaining variation time of this executing special figure th0. In addition, the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3 show that there is a reserved ball, but since it is a special figure lottery executed outside the period of the heaven mode being executed, "-" is shown for the fluctuation time. In addition, in the running general map fh0, "↓" indicating that the general map lottery is being executed is shown, and the general map first reservation fh1 is also in a situation where the reserved ball is stored.

The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented according to the remaining period of the variation of the running special figure th0. As shown in FIG. 17(d), since the remaining variation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the characters "30.0 seconds" are displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17(b)). In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters ``There is something good with the timer 0'', suggesting to the player that when the value of the remaining period displayed on the timer 812 becomes 0, the player wins a jackpot. That is, in the secondary display area Ds, a suggestive effect notification mode for suggesting the game situation from now on to the player is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is the period until the winning symbols stop after winning the special prize, is configured to be the same as in the V rush mode. By constructing in this way, the player can be informed that executing the special electric game and winning the game ball in the V winning port 165 during the heaven mode as well as during the V rush is a basic game method advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

It should be noted that the display mode is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute an effect dedicated to the heaven mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to further enhance the presentation effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(a), the chance effect screen during winning of the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the chance effect during winning the role, and FIG. 18(c) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the winning of the normal pattern is won and the game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the winning of the accessory is executed, and when the winning of the game ball enters the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 during the execution of the winning of the accessory, the jackpot is awarded. In FIG. 18(a), the timing at which the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the accessory from the game situation shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), the holding status of each symbol in FIG. 18(a) is indicated by "?" indicating that the variation is temporarily stopped because the running special figure th0 is in the middle of winning the character. Then, each holding ball from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure second reservation th2 shows a deviation variation of 10 seconds respectively. In addition, since the special figure third reservation th3 is a special figure variation that is performed outside the period of the V rush that is currently being performed, the variation time indicates "-". Furthermore, it has shown that special figure 4th reservation th4 is not reserved. And, in the normal figure fh0 being executed, "○" is shown to indicate that the normal figure lottery was won.

FIG. 18(a) is a notification screen for notifying the player that the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 165 during the prize winning shown in FIG. 13(b). In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball that has won the V winning device 65 during the winning of the accessory is stored in the storage valve 66a. The reservoir valve 66a is configured to be in an open state for 1.5 seconds out of the 3-second period so that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7). The first movable valve 66b disposed above the V winning opening 165 is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can flow down the fifth flow path to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 seconds out of 5.5 seconds regardless of the game state (see FIG. 27(a)).

In other words, in order to enter the game ball into the V winning port 165, it is necessary to enter the game ball flowing down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is opened within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and if it is determined that the first movable valve 66b is opened within 2 seconds, as shown in FIG. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters such as "Big Chance for V Winning!!" are displayed. That is, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of the timing at which the game state is likely to shift to an advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, the player can understand the timing at which the V prize is likely to be won, and it becomes easier to execute the game.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which it is easy to win a V prize is notified by the highlighted display mode 811z or the comment in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more friendly game to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(b), the general pattern stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the normal symbol lottery is stopped during the period of the V rush, and FIG. 18(d) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), winning the lottery of normal symbols, entering the game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, and executing the special electric game aiming at the V prize is the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is not executed during this V rush, the special electric game cannot be executed, so the third pattern display device 81 executes the performance for prompting the shooting of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. 18(a) shows that the running special figure th0 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds. In addition, the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2 are each stored with a reservation ball in which deviation variation for 10 seconds is executed. And special figure 3rd reservation th3 and special figure 4th reservation th4 are the states where the reservation sphere is not remembered. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18(b) is 22.2 seconds which is the sum of the remaining variation time of the running special figure th0 and the variation time of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. And, during execution general figure fh0, "-" which shows that general figure lottery is not executed is shown. Furthermore, the held ball is not stored in the normal first hold fh1.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), when the lottery for normal symbols is not executed and stopped during the V rush, the electric accessory 640a associated with the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state, and it is impossible to let the game ball enter the special electric operation opening 643. That is, the special electric game, which is a basic game method during the V rush, cannot be executed, and since the special figure lottery is being executed, the V rush ends as it is when the special figure lottery for the prescribed number of times is hunted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball into the special figure ball entrance 64 or the normal winning device 640, it is necessary to execute a left-handed game in which the game ball is shot aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, and when the left-handed game is executed, the game ball is 100% passed through the through gate 67 that triggers the lottery of the normal symbol. In other words, the game situation in which the normal figure lottery is not executed while the special figure lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect for prompting the player to shoot the game ball.

In the main display area Dm, the characters "During V rush" are displayed, and furthermore, the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the V rush as being subtracted as time elapses. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V Rush game is being executed and the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V fluctuation area 811 where the fluctuation display is executed when the lottery of the normal pattern is executed, the character ``hit'' is shown to the player by the animation guided by the character 810 together with ``hit'' in the left area 811a, ``tsu'' in the middle area 811b, and ``te'' in the right area. In other words, the V fluctuation area 811 indicates that the normal symbol lottery is not executed, and is in a warning display mode for indicating to the player that the V rush will end.

In addition, the characters "Please start the game" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to notify the player that the special electric game cannot be executed because the normal symbol lottery is not executed, and also warn that the V rush period, which is advantageous to the player, will end as the special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending unexpectedly by the player.

It should be noted that the effect of prompting the shooting of the game ball described above is not limited to this display mode. In other words, it suffices to convey to the player that the lottery for the normal symbols is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further warn the player that there is a risk of loss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the special figure stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V Rush, and FIG. 19(c) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the time-saving state (V rush) is continued until the special pattern lottery is executed for the prescribed number of times, and the value obtained by adding up the fluctuation time for the prescribed number of times is notified to the player as the prescribed period of the V rush. Therefore, when the lottery for the special pattern is not executed, the prescribed period is not discriminated, so the performance is executed to make the player expect how long the V rush will continue.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), the holding status of each holding symbol in the gaming situation shown in FIG. 19(a) is indicated by "-" indicating that the special symbol lottery is not being executed for the running special symbol th0. In addition, special figure 1st reservation th1 - special figure 4th reservation th4 indicate that the reservation sphere is not remembered. On the other hand, the running normal map fh0 is shown with "↓" indicating that the normal map lottery is being executed, and the normal map first reservation fh1 is also stored.

In this way, when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for the prescribed number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the timer 812 displays characters "??? seconds" indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been executed and the prescribed period has not yet been reached. In addition, in the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of "↓↓↓" indicating that the lottery for normal symbols is being executed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode indicating that the prescribed period of the V-rush has not been reached is displayed as "How long will it last?" From these display contents, the player can understand that the remaining period of the V rush is not reduced because the lottery for the special pattern is not executed, but the special electric game can be executed because the lottery for the normal pattern is executed. With this configuration, the player can play the game while being excited about how long the game situation advantageous to the player that the special electric game can be executed before the V rush period elapses continues. In other words, the display contents shown in FIG. 19(a) are suggestive notification contents for showing that the player is in an advantageous state.

As described above, when there are no reserved balls with special patterns during the V rush period, it is possible to notify once that the V rush period has ended, and next, when a game ball enters the special symbol entrance 64, a resurrection performance such that the V rush period is revived may be executed. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the V rush period, which was thought to have ended, has been revived, and can obtain unexpected pleasure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(b), the lucky time screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing an example of a lucky time screen during a V rush, and FIG. 19(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the interrupted special pattern fluctuation and the special pattern fluctuation time for the number of times of time saving (4 times) set after the V jackpot game is finished are set as a short time period (V rush period) after the V jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the V rush period is displayed (reduced display) using the display mode of the timer 812, but the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is not displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for informing the player of that effect is executed. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next, the lucky time performance is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, when a V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters “Enter lucky time” are displayed in the main display area Dm, and “10 seconds” is displayed as the period display mode 851 . On the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b), a lucky time effect is executed indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. As shown in FIG. The number of seconds displayed in the period display mode 851 is displayed by subtraction corresponding to the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, and when 0 seconds is displayed, the lucky time presentation ends.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Having a chance to hit a character during the lucky time" is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the player to the privilege during the lucky time. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), an unlucky performance can be executed as a performance capable of informing the player of that effect. In other words, it is constructed so that the player can grasp that the V rush period to be set next tends to be shortened when the V jackpot game is executed when the unlucky performance is executed.

By executing the unlucky performance in this way, it is possible for the player to select whether to actively execute the special electric game even during the unlucky performance in order to execute the V jackpot game for the time being during the V rush period, or to aim to set a longer V rush period after the end of the V big prize game by not performing the special electric game until the unlucky performance is completed although the V rush period is subtracted, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, the above-described lucky time effect or unlucky effect is executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbols satisfies a predetermined condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, whether or not to execute the effect may be determined by lottery, or whether or not to execute the effect may be determined based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. Further, the performance execution frequency may be varied according to the length of the period that can be displayed as the lucky time performance or the unlucky performance, and when the remaining period of the special pattern variation during execution exceeds 50 seconds, the lucky time performance may be executed with a high probability.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19(b), during the period during which the lucky time effect is being executed, the player is notified of the period in which the player will benefit from using the period display mode 851. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display only the display mode indicating that it is lucky time without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the length of the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game.

Furthermore, as an execution condition of the lucky time performance or the unlucky performance, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time saving state may be provided as an execution condition that is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the lucky time performance or the unlucky performance may not be executed during the final fluctuation of the special symbols in the V rush period.

<Regarding Transition of Game State of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the content of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing the flow of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, two game states can be set as the game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). It is configured so that the normal state is set when the condition that is satisfied when the

First, the case where the normal state is set as the game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal state is set as the game state in the initial state (the state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated in the start-up processing (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 is executed). Since this normal state is a low-probability state of normal patterns, it is a game state in which it is difficult to win a ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 (more difficult to win than in a high-probability state of normal patterns), so a left-handed game for entering a ball into a special-figure ball entrance 64 is executed.

In this normal state, when a big win is won in a special pattern (special pattern) lottery (special lottery), either a big win A or a big win B is set as a big win type, and a big win game is executed. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, but in this embodiment, 99% of the time when a special lottery wins a jackpot, "jackpot A (4R (round), time reduction 4 times)" is set as the jackpot type, and "jackpot B (4R (round), time reduction 15 times)" is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 1%.

In other words, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the end condition of the time saving state is different according to the set jackpot type. Specifically, the easy-to-set jackpot type (jackpot A) is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is easier to establish than the hard-to-set jackpot type (jackpot B). By constructing in this way, a player who is playing a game in a normal state can play a game while expecting that the set jackpot type (jackpot B) will be advantageous to the player in addition to the game aiming at winning the jackpot in the special lottery.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, while the normal state is set, a dynamic display (performance display) for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and by grasping the dynamic display mode (performance mode) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. In addition, as described above, since the low probability state of the normal pattern is set during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric winning device 640 by the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery).

By constructing in this way, the player can pay more attention to the performance executed based on the result of the special drawing lottery than to the performance executed based on the result of the normal drawing drawing during the period when the normal state is set, so that it is possible to visually grasp that the game (special drawing game) mainly consisting of the special drawing drawing is executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Then, when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the general electric winning device 640 becomes easier to open based on the general drawing lottery, and the game (special electric game) aiming for the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the role game executed by entering the ball into the special electric operation port 643 based on the general drawing lottery is the jackpot game (special electric game) based on the special drawing lottery. It is configured to be a game more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aiming for a big hit game).

In this way, the player can be made to execute different games according to the set game state by making the execution timing of the big win to be aimed at by the player different according to the set game state, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. In addition, in the present embodiment, during the normal state, the special electric game aiming at the special drawing lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special electric game aiming at the normal drawing drawing, and during the time saving state, the special electric game aiming at the normal drawing drawing is more advantageous to the player than the special drawing game aiming at the special drawing drawing. Provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), the type of special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player may be configured to be different according to the set game state. state) is set, the second special symbol game aiming at the special symbol lottery with the second special symbol may be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol game aiming at the special symbol lottery with the first special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured so that the same game method (left-handed game) is executed when executing the special game and when executing the special electric game, so as not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method every time the game state changes. For example, a left-handed game (a game aimed at the game area (left area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is executed during the normal state, and a right-handed game (a game aimed at the game area (right side area) formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) is executed during the time saving state. In this case, a special figure ball entrance 64 is provided as a configuration for executing a special figure game in the left area, a through gate 67, a general electric winning device 640, and a V winning device 65 are provided as a configuration for performing a special electric game in the right side area, and a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game is provided in the left side area or the game area (lower area) where the ball flowing down the right side area can reach.

By configuring in this way, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) can be changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, so that the player can be provided with the pleasure of changing the game method.

In addition, in this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly performed by the player, it is preferable to perform a guidance notification (for example, the display mode of "right-handed" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) to be performed by the player.

Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, by providing a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game in the game area (lower area) where the ball flowing down the left side area or the right side area can reach, even when the jackpot game is executed based on the special game, When the jackpot game is executed based on the special electric game. Also, there is no need to change the game method with the execution of the jackpot game as a trigger, and the game can be played smoothly.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description continues. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of the special symbol lottery). In addition, the lottery of normal symbols (general figure lottery) is configured to be executable independently without being involved in the lottery of special symbols (special figure lottery). In other words, the execution opportunity of the normal figure lottery is configured to be established regardless of the situation of the special figure lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters a special electric operation opening 643 provided in a special pattern variation (special pattern variation) general electric prize winning device 640 and a role winning game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, and when the role winning game ends, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed. In addition, when a ball enters a V winning port 165 during a role winning game and a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed, the interrupted special pattern variation is restarted when the big winning game ends.

In this embodiment configured in this manner, when a time saving state is set, a special electric game aiming at a large number of V jackpot games is executed until a condition for ending the time saving state (time saving end condition) that can be established based on a special figure lottery is established, that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) before a special figure lottery is executed. To give a specific example, when the special figure fluctuation 4 times is set as the time saving end condition, the period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, 10 seconds for each of the four special figure lotteries If the fluctuation time is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special figure lottery ends).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), when there are four reserved special figures at the end of the jackpot game, "40 seconds" is displayed as the period until the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, while the accessory per game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the time saving state are being executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation being executed is not subtracted. Therefore, the period in which the time saving state is actually set is the period obtained by adding the special figure fluctuation time until the time saving end condition is satisfied and the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted corresponds to the period during which the winning game (the winning game, the jackpot game) is executed, and the execution period of the winning game varies depending on the contents of the game played by the player, so the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is displayed (see FIG. 13 (a)), and when the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted, the subtraction is restarted.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player without any difference between the display content of the display mode (remaining short time display mode 801 in FIG. 12A) indicating the period until the time saving state ends displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the period until the time saving state actually ends.

A normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed during a time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is constituted so that the winning probability is about 33%, and is constructed so as to make it easier to win a normal pattern lottery than the winning probability (1%) of the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed during a normal state (normal pattern low probability state). Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, the variation time of 3 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the normal symbols. Therefore, by executing the left-handed game continuously during the time saving state, the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be in the open state by executing the general pattern per game once in about 10 seconds.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, when the normal pattern winning game is executed during the time saving state, the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 is easily entered into the special electric operation opening 643 (It is configured to be easier to enter than the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state), and it is configured to be able to execute the accessory winning game approximately the same number of times as the normal pattern winning game execution frequency. Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball enters the V winning port 165 in one accessory game and the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed is about 1/11.

In other words, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, at a rate of about once every 10 seconds, it is configured to execute the accessory winning game as a chance for the ball to win the V winning opening 165 . When the game result of the role winning game is that the ball can enter the V winning port 165 (in the case of V winning), after the role winning game, the jackpot game (jackpot game whose jackpot type is jackpot C (10R (round), time reduction 4 times)) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is set again. In other words, when a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by causing a ball to enter a V winning port 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will not end as long as the special electric game continues to run the jackpot game, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation to execute the special electric game.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, when a jackpot game is executed by a special electric game, the interrupted special figure fluctuation is restarted after the jackpot game is finished, but the restarted special figure fluctuation is configured not to update the special figure lottery (special figure fluctuation) number for establishing the time saving end condition. That is, after the special figure fluctuation after the restart is completed, it is configured so that the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation is executed four times.

That is, when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long (for example, 30 seconds), the role per game is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the role per game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is "30 seconds + 4 special figure fluctuations". When it is executed, the period of time saving state set after the jackpot game becomes "0.5 second + 4 special figure fluctuations".

By constructing in this way, in the case of executing the special electric game aiming at the V big winning game during the time saving state in which the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is not advantageous for the player to execute the V big winning game early, but it is possible to make it advantageous to the player to execute the V big winning game in a state where the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation during execution is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has passed since the time saving state was set, the player can continue to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving number (the special figure fluctuation number updated to establish the time saving end condition) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the jackpot. Even in the case of such a constitution, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart, the more advantageous it is for the player, so that even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has passed since the time reduction state is set, the player can continue to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. When the game result of the accessory winning game executed during the time saving state does not allow the ball to enter the V prize winning port 165 (in the case of non-V winning), the special electric game is repeatedly executed until the time saving state ends.

When the special pattern variation (special figure variation) ends in the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is established, that is, whether the special figure variation for the number of times set as the time saving end condition is completed, and when the time saving end condition is established, the game state shifts to the normal state and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, if the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure variation is executed. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25(c), but in this embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special figure lottery executed during the time saving state, if the result of the special figure lottery is winning (1/100), 50 seconds or 200 seconds is selected. That is, it is configured to make it easier to continue the time saving state for a longer period when a big win is won in a special lottery executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the time saving end condition is set four times as the time saving end condition, the special lottery is four times executed after the big win game ends). Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in a special lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when a jackpot is won by a special lottery within a limited period in which the time saving state is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is big win information in which a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set in the holding memory of the special symbols acquired at the end of the big win game, a special performance for notifying that effect is executed (see FIG. 17(a)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the end conditions of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, a time saving end condition that is easy to be met (time saving 4 times) and a time saving end condition that is difficult to be met (time saving 15 times) can be set. Here, when the time saving 15 times is set, the time saving state is continued until the 15th special drawing lottery executed in the time saving state is completed, so that the time saving state can be lengthened according to the increment of the special drawing fluctuation frequency, the probability of winning a big prize during the time saving state can be increased, and the time saving time can be lengthened by the long-time fluctuation pattern set at the time of the big prize winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to play the same game method (left-handed game) during the normal state, during the time saving state, and during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special figure lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special figure variation is configured to be selected regardless of the number of special symbols reserved (the number of special figures reserved), but without being limited to this, for example, if the time saving state is set, it is better to configure the variation pattern in which the longer the number of special figures reserved, the longer the variation time is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to reach the upper limit (4 pieces) of the number of reserved special figures in the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during the jackpot game). In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state (a state in which the time saving end condition is not established) in which the special figure variation is not executed during the time saving state.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, during the period when the time saving state is set, that is, during the period until the predetermined number of special symbol variations (special symbol variations) are completed, the normal symbol lottery is executed, and finally the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 is configured to execute the special electric game to win the ball. The V winning device 65 is configured so that the ball can easily win during the role winning game, and is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is not subtracted (suspended) during the role winning game. Furthermore, the role-winning game has a plurality of end conditions. Specifically, it has a first end condition (ball winning end condition) that is satisfied when the number of balls that win the V-winning device 65 during the role-winning game reaches a predetermined number (three), and a second end condition (time-elapsed end condition) that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the execution of the role-winning game reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds), and either the first end condition or the second end condition. When the end condition of is established, the accessory winning game is ended. In addition, a new normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is not executed during the normal pattern variation period and the execution period of the normal pattern winning game, but a new normal pattern lottery can be executed during the period when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during the normal pattern winning game and the accessory winning game is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, a special electric game is performed with the aim of executing more role winning games while interrupting the special figure variation by executing the role winning games during the time saving state. However, the period during which the normal pattern variation period until the lottery result of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, and the period during which the ball cannot be won in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the execution period of the normal pattern winning game (the period when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state) are the periods in which the special symbol variation time during the time reduction state is wastefully subtracted, so it becomes a short period of disadvantageous time for the player during the time reduction state.

Therefore, for example, as the variation pattern of the normal pattern set during the time saving state, the normal pattern short variation pattern (variation time 3 seconds) with a short variation time and the normal pattern length variation pattern (variation time 15 seconds) with a long variation time are selectable. When configured, the game is performed while expecting that the normal pattern short variation pattern will be selected so that the short period of disadvantage described above is shortened. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the execution period of the game per role (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted), it is possible to suppress the subtraction of the special symbol variation time during the short period of disadvantage by extending the period in which the short period of unfavorable time and the suspension period of special symbol variation are overlapped.

Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous short period during the time saving state, when the role winning game is executed in the time saving state, the remaining time of the normal figure fluctuation during execution is discriminated, and when the remaining time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is preferable to execute the performance to encourage the end of the role winning game according to the passage of time instead of ending with the winning of a ball. By configuring in this way, the short period of disadvantageous time can be shortened by lengthening the execution period of the game per accessory.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, a first winning type counter C2 used to select the special symbol jackpot type, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. , and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of normal symbols are used for initial value setting of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 55), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 consisting of four reservation areas (reserved first to fourth areas).In the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the special pattern is established, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern fluctuation is started based on the stored various values.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of special symbol type is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more special symbol types may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish the lottery conditions for one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the entrance of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance), each value described above is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area, and another special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) is entered based on the entrance of the ball into an entrance (for example, the second entrance) different from the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance). In order to establish the lottery condition, the above values may be stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (in parallel). Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery results of the special symbols are configured to be only big wins and loses, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the lottery results of the special symbols are loses, it may be possible to win a small win that can give the player less benefits than when winning the big win (privileges different from those when winning the big win). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small winning type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the value of the acquired small winning type counter is configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, when a special symbol lottery is configured to enable a small win, for example, the transition contents of the game state based on the jackpot winning and the game state transition contents based on the small win may be configured to be different. A small winning game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small winning game is finished.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that the game rich in variations can be provided.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of one reservation area (reserved first area). In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal pattern is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal pattern execution area, and the normal pattern fluctuation is started based on the stored various values.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64. The value of the random number that becomes the big win for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big winning set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b). FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table that defines random numbers (determined values) for determining a big hit in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first winning random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a big win is defined within a predetermined range, and the judgment value within the predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23(b), among the values of the first winning random number counter C1, "0 to 3" are defined as big hit determination values, and other values ("4 to 399") are defined as out determination values.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the big win is the same regardless of the game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big win probability may be different depending on the game state. Also, in that case, the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to two types, a high-probability state and a low-probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be different for each of at most four types of game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in the case of constructing so as to be able to win a ``small win'' as a lottery result of special symbols, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the ``small winning'' may be defined in the first winning random number table 202a. By constructing in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed by the same processing, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case of executing the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery by different processing. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is configured to be incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 24(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first win type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24(a), the first win type selection table 202c has a special symbol jackpot type selection table 202c1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 that is referred to when a ball enters the V winning opening 165 (V win).

First, with reference to FIG. 24(b), the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described. FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the obtained first win type counter C2.

Specifically, "jackpot A" is defined in the range of "0 to 98" of the value of the first win type counter C2, and "jackpot B" is defined in the value of "99".

Here, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game is finished will be described. In the present embodiment, opening action scenarios (opening timing, number of times of opening) for the movable member (variable winning device 650) executed during the jackpot game are pre-stored in various action scenario tables 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Then, when a jackpot is won, an opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read from the various operation scenario table 202e and stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加When the opening operation scenario is stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds), and in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario contents are determined and the process based on the determination result is executed.

With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one opening operation control, the operation control for the plurality of movable members can be centrally managed by using an opening operation scenario that defines the operation contents of each movable member in chronological order. Therefore, compared to the case where the motion control is performed separately for each movable member, the motion timing of each movable member can be appropriately set, and the motion processing for the other movable members can be smoothly performed when a problem occurs in one movable member.

“Jackpot A” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as a jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 650 is opened during the four rounds is executed. This round game is a game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until 10 balls enter the variable winning device 650 or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds. That is, in the "jackpot A" in which 4 rounds of round games are executed, it becomes a jackpot game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be awarded to the variable prize winning device 650 .

Furthermore, the ``jackpot A'' is defined so that a time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and ``4 times of time-saving'' is defined as a period during which the time-saving state continues, that is, a short period of time is defined until the lottery of the special symbols is executed four times during the time-shortening state (until the result of the fourth special symbol lottery is stopped (fixed) is displayed).

The "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the four rounds is executed. A time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the period during which the time saving state continues is ``15 times of time saving'', that is, a short period of time is defined until the special pattern lottery is executed 15 times (until the lottery result of the 15th special pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)) without winning a jackpot during the time saving state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery, four rounds of the big win game are executed without fail, and a time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. When the set jackpot type is ``jackpot A'' (99% when the jackpot is won), the number of times of time reduction is set to ``4 times'', and when the set jackpot type is ``jackpot B'' (1% when the jackpot is won), the number of times of time reduction is set to ``15 times''.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special electric game (a game aiming for a big hit by entering a ball (V prize) into the V winning opening 165 based on the normal symbol lottery) is executed more easily than a special game (a game in which a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 and aims to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery) in a normal state during the time saving state, and a time saving state is performed than in the normal state. is configured to provide a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the ``jackpot B'' in which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is difficult to end (the condition for terminating the time-shortening state is difficult to be satisfied) is a jackpot type more advantageous to the player than the ``jackpot A''.

In the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a lottery of special symbols, the jackpot games of the same number of rounds are executed for all the jackpots, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a different number of round games may be executed according to the selected jackpot type. In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends for all the jackpots, and the number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is changed according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 24(c). FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. This V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table that defines game contents of a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed when a ball wins a prize (V win) in the V prize opening 165. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 defines the "jackpot C" in the entire range of "0 to 99".

This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the 10 rounds. Then, it is stipulated that a time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and ``4 times of time saving'' is defined as a period during which the time saving state continues, that is, a short period of time is defined until the lottery of special patterns is executed four times without winning a jackpot during the time saving state (until the lottery result of the fourth special pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)).

That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game (jackpot game executed in the special electric game) executed based on the V winning is configured to execute a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds than the jackpot game (jackpot game executed in the special pattern game) executed based on the special lottery. In other words, in terms of the amount of benefits (the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the game state is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving state than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the ball winning the special electric activation opening 643, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed based on the V winning during the role winning game is the V jacking type selection table 202c2 based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the ball entered the special electric activation opening 643, which triggered the execution of the V winning role winning game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference.

In the present embodiment, since only one jackpot type (jackpot C) is defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same jackpot game is executed even if the V prize is won by any of the role winning games. Also, a plurality of special electric operation openings may be provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set corresponding to the special electric operation opening in which the ball has won among the plurality of special electric operation openings. Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball wins in the V winning hole 165 while the role winning game is being executed, and the jackpot type may be selected based on the acquired value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is selected regardless of the game state set at the time when the big win is won or when the ball enters the V winning port 165. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be varied according to the game state set when the big win is won or when the ball enters the V winning port 165. In this case, , For example, just before the end of the time saving state (immediately before the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state stops), the normal figure winning game is executed, and when the V prize is won during the role per game executed in the state where the normal state after the time saving state is finished, that is, only when the V prize is won in the special electric game during the normal state, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the jackpot game (for example, the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 20 times) is set. You can

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot types is three, but the number of types is not limited to three, and may be two or less, or may be four or more. Also, the same jackpot type may be set in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols and in the case of winning the V prize in the special electric game. Further, the selection rate and type of the jackpot type to be selected this time may be varied based on the information on the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the content of the jackpot game and the content of transition of the game state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the past game history (jackpot history) as well. Also, in this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestive performance capable of suggesting to the player the kind of big win that is likely to be set at the time of the next big win based on the past history of big wins. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a normal table 202d1 that is used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time saving table 202d2 that is used when the time saving state is set. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is changed according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be varied.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c). FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 is a data table referred to when a normal state is set as a game state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of special symbols is a big win than when it is a loss.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the lottery result of the special symbol (special design) is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" with a variation time of 20 seconds. In FIG. 25 (b), in order to simplify the explanation of the variation pattern of the winning super reach, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198". However, in practice, a predetermined variation time (for example, a variation time of 60 seconds, a variation time of 100 seconds, and a variation time of 120 seconds) is defined in the corresponding value range of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit'' and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of ``51 to 198'', a variation pattern is set in which any variation time of ``60 seconds to 120 seconds'' corresponding to the acquired value is set.

In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in correspondence with the short loss with a variation time of 8 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", in the range of "180 to 194" in correspondence with normal reach with a variation time of 20 seconds, and in the range of "195 to 198" in correspondence with super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds. In addition, the lottery result is "loss" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown in the range of "195 to 198" for the same purpose as the case where the lottery result is "jackpot (hit)", and the explanation is simplified.

In other words, in the present embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the types of variable times that can be selected are made the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is made different. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (hit), the ratio of selecting a longer variation time is set higher than when it is a loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol variation under execution is, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot is, so that when the special symbol variation for a long variation time is executed, the player is prevented from getting tired of the game before the variation time elapses.

In this embodiment, that is, in this embodiment, as the variable time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the longer the variable time is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball can be prevented from entering the special symbol entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is configured to be the same, so that by grasping the length of the variable time to be set, it is possible to suppress the fact that the special symbol lottery result is revealed to the player in advance.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol lottery result (win/fail determination result) and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained.

Next, the contents of the time reduction table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 25(c). FIG.25(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the table 202d2 for time reduction. As shown in FIG. 25(c), the time saving table 202d2 defines the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the change type counter CS1, and the change pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(c), when the result of the success/failure determination (lottery result) is “win (big win)”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the variation time is 50 seconds. In the case of "out", "short out A" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in the range of "0 to 149", "short out B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 169", "short out C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "170 to 189", and "long out of range" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 196". A” is defined, and the values of “197, 198” are defined with “long deviation B” with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds.

As described above, during the time saving state, unlike during the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a loss, and the variable time that can be selected when winning a big win is configured to be longer than the variable time that can be selected when it is a loss.

In this embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes a game state advantageous to the player, and during that short period of time, special electric games are executed based on the normal symbol lottery. In addition, the termination condition (the number of times of time saving) based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of lottery) is set as the condition of ending the time saving state (the number of times of time saving).

Therefore, when a longer variation time is selected as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the period during which the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set can be lengthened. A special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, for example, when four times of the time saving state is set, when a big win (1/100) is won in the special pattern lottery for four times executed after the time saving state is set, a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as an added value. By constructing in this way, when a special pattern jackpot is won within a limited period of time saving, a more advantageous game can be offered to the player, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, even when the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the variation time to be selected as ``10 seconds to 50 seconds'' has a difference of 5 times at maximum, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the longer variation time will be selected.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), on the end screen of the jackpot game, a short remaining time mode 801 for indicating the length of the period of the time saving state (V rush period) is displayed. This short time remaining mode 801 is within the range until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is configured to display a value obtained by adding up the variable time determined in advance based on the winning information included in the already acquired special symbol reservation.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining short-time mode 801 is a display mode in which the fluctuation times of a plurality of outlier fluctuations are added together or a display mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of one big win fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 22, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) in this embodiment, acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number to be the winning of the normal pattern is set by a second winning random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202b, the winning of the normal pattern (second pattern) is determined. The second winning random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for normal pattern low probability and one for high probability when normal pattern winning is higher than the low probability, and the numbers of random numbers to be big wins included in each are set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 23(c). FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the case of the low probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit is defined as the value of "0" for the second random number counter C4 obtained, and in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit is defined in the range of "0 to 299" of the second random number counter C4 obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. Thus, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state of the low probability state of normal patterns and the time-saving state of the high probability state of normal patterns, it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal pattern winning game during the normal state, so that the normal pattern winning game is executed during the normal state and the ball wins in the normal electric prize winning device 640 can be made difficult to occur. On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (300/1000) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the general pattern winning game executed during the normal state, it is configured so that the ball is less likely to win the general electric prize winning device 640 than in the normal prize winning game executed during the time saving state. That is, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win the normal game in the normal state, and even if the game is won in the normal game, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal game.

In this way, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the winning of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643, the game is made more difficult to progress during the normal state than during the time saving state, thereby reliably preventing the ball from winning the special electric operation opening 643 triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the normal state and the execution of the prize winning game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described three processes, instead of regulating the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 based on the execution of the normal symbol lottery during the normal state, a short variation time (3 seconds, which is the same as during the time saving state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol even during the normal state. In other words, even if the lottery for normal symbols is easily executed in a short period of time, since the balls are restricted from winning the special electric operation opening 643 by the regulation in the above-mentioned three processes, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the special electric operation opening 643 and the execution of the role winning game with the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

Thus, by setting the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal state to be short, at the timing when the game state is switched, for example, at the timing when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal symbol variation with a long variation time executed during the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) is executed across the transition timing of the game state, and although the special symbol variation in the time saving state is started, the situation where the normal symbol drawing in the time saving state cannot be executed occurs. can be suppressed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time-saving state is managed for a period, it is possible to provide the player with a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited short-time period.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to regulate the winning of balls into the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state in the above-described three processes (the winning probability of the normal symbol, the winning rate of the ball to the general electric winning device 640 in the general symbol winning game, and the winning rate of the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 winning the special electric operation opening 643), but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be regulated in two or less processes. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 does not win the special electric activation opening 643, it enters the out opening 644 and the player is not given a privilege (for example, a prize ball).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a player with a different privilege (a privilege different from the privilege of executing a game per accessory) when winning a prize in the general electric prize device 640 while suppressing the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 in the normal state, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game. In addition, in the state in which the low-probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to provide the player with the added value when winning the normal pattern.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the big win lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results on the second symbol display device 83, according to the values of the counters and the like.

Ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Concretely, using the value of the acquired general pattern variation type counter CS2, it is configured so that the normal pattern variation time is determined.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, and the like. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first winning random number table 202a, a second winning random number table 202b, a jackpot type selection table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and various operation scenario tables 202e. Since the first winning random number table 202a, the second winning random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the description thereof will be omitted.

The various motion scenario table 202e is a data table having motion scenarios in which the details of the motions of the various movable members whose motion control is managed by main controller 110 are defined in advance in chronological order. In this embodiment, when controlling the motion of the movable member, the motion scenario that matches the current motion control condition is read from the various motion scenario tables 202e, and the read motion scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the content of the motion scenario stored in the storage area is periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds), and if there is a motion scenario in which the movable member is variably operated in the area corresponding to the updated value, motion control is executed based on that motion scenario. Further, each action scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set for each event (jackpot game, normal figure winning game, accessory winning game) for controlling the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in the action scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a normal game) in which it is necessary to control the actions of a plurality of movable members within one event, the content of action control to be executed for the plurality of movable members is defined.

Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the various action scenario table 202e includes a jackpot action scenario table 202e1, a prize action scenario table 202e2, a normal figure action scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4.

First, referring to FIG. 26(b), the contents of the action scenario table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 26(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the action scenario table 202e2 for each role. The role-winning operation scenario table 202e2 is a data table that defines a role-winning scenario in which action contents during the role-winning game are set. A grace period after the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF) is stipulated, and operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) which is set when a winning-accessory game is started and whose value is incremented by 1 periodically (every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed) is executed.

Specifically, when the accessory winning game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to "1". Since an operation scenario in which the storage solenoid 209c is turned on is defined as a corresponding operation scenario in the scenario counter "1", the storage solenoid 209c is set to on at the same time as the start of the role-winning game, and the storage valve 66a is moved to a state where balls can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is incremented every 4 milliseconds, and the opening period is terminated when the scenario counter is "25", that is, 0.1 seconds after the start of the winning game. That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is changed to the storage state using the period from when the accessory winning game is started until the V winning device 65 is opened. With this configuration, even if the ball enters the V winning device 65 vigorously immediately after the V winning device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already changed to the storage state at the timing when the V winning device 65 is opened, so that the ball can be surely prevented from passing through the storage valve 66a and entering the V winning port 165.例文帳に追加

Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "375", that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have passed since the start of the winning-accessory game, a scenario is defined in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off and the V open/close door 65a (V attacker) is closed. After executing the closing control of the V open/close door 65a (V Attacker), that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "376", the ending period of the accessory winning game is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF. Then, until the value of the scenario counter reaches "750", the closing state (ending period) of the accessory winning game is set.

That is, in the role winning game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is opened after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter "375"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the role winning game at an unintended timing due to the occurrence of an unforeseen situation at the start or end of the role winning game.

Next, the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The operation of the first movable valve 66b of this embodiment is controlled so as to move according to a predetermined operation pattern while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The value of the scenario counter is updated (added by 1) by the process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 .

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the first movable valve 66b in this embodiment is configured to be positioned in either a V winning possible state in which a ball can enter the V winning port 165 or a V winning difficult state in which it is difficult to cause a ball to enter the V winning port 165. The first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 defines an operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on (a state in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165) and an operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning opening 165) for the range of the value of the scenario counter from "1" to "1500".

Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, until 5 seconds have passed since the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 was set, and is set to be turned on when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1251" to "1500", that is, between 5 seconds and 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. operating scenarios are specified. When the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value "1500", when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed, the value of the scenario counter is switched from "1500" to "1", and thereafter the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for permitting or prohibiting the entry of balls into the V winning opening 165, is configured to variably operate so as to switch to a state in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 for only 0.5 seconds during 5.5 seconds. Thus, when the ball reaches the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and enters the V winning port 165 is 1/11. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand in which role winning game the ball will enter the V winning opening 165, and the player can be motivated to play all the role winning games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls win the V winning device 65 during one accessory winning game, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability of the ball entering the V prize opening 165) in the role-winning game becomes about 1/11, so that the player can be prevented from being provided with the jackpot game excessively.

In the present embodiment, the operation contents of the first movable valve 66b are configured so that the same operation contents are always set while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. seconds), and a second operation pattern defined as an ON period (0.3 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, but without being limited to this, for example, a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 may be provided, and based on the measurement result of the measuring means, it may be configured to switch to a different operation scenario. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within 1 hour after the power is turned on, or 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after the power is turned on), it is preferable to set the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON to the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be OFF. By constructing in this way, the big win game (V big win game) can be easily executed during the time-saving game only for a specific period, and the player can be made to play the game aiming at the period, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, the control contents of the operation scenario may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 may be started from the initial state (scenario counter value "1") at the timing when a specific jackpot game is executed or finished. A special operation scenario may be set in which the proportion of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON is higher than the proportion of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be OFF. Then, once this special operation scenario is set, the time saving state is set after that, and it is preferable that the setting is continued until the time saving state ends. As a result, the player can continue playing the game by setting the special action scenario. In this case, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player that the special action scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special action scenario is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(b), the contents of the action scenario table 202e3 per normal pattern will be described. FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the action scenario table 202e3 per normal figure. This normal pattern winning operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table storing the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery, and the operation scenario corresponding to the game state set at the time of starting the normal pattern winning game is set.

Specifically, in the normal pattern winning operation scenario table 202e3, a normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 defining an operation scenario of a normal pattern winning game executed in a normal state and a normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 for reducing working hours defining an operation scenario of a normal pattern winning game executed in a reduced working time state are defined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27(c), the contents of the normal normal map winning scenario 202e31 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e31 for normal normal map. This normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 is an operation scenario that is set when it is determined that the game state is the normal state (S1118 in FIG. 48: No) at the time when the winning normal pattern variation is stopped (settled) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48).

The scenario 202e31 for the normal scenario defines an operation scenario for setting on and off the general electric solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general electric prize device 640 and the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the winning ball to the general electric prize device 640, respectively, when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1050".

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1025", that is, until 4.1 seconds have passed since the normal normal game scenario 202e31 was set (after the normal game is executed in the normal state), the general electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off (the ball flows down to the out port 644). 026" to "1050", that is, for 0.1 seconds between 4.1 seconds and 4.2 seconds after the normal normal map per scenario 202e31 is executed, the normal electric solenoid is turned on (electric accessory 640a is open), The operation scenario is defined so that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643).

That is, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state, the normal pattern per game of the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 second) is executed. Furthermore, even if the ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 during the open state for 0.1 second, the second movable valve 643 is changed to the position (see FIG. 4) where the prize winning ball flows down to the out port 644 at that time, so that the ball can be reliably prevented from entering the special electric operation port 643.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the scenario 202e32 for normal drawing for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e32 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 is an operation scenario that is set when it is determined that the game state is the normal state (S1118: Yes in FIG. 48) at the time when the winning normal pattern variation is stopped (determined) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48).

A normal electric solenoid for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the normal electric prize winning device 640 and a second movable valve solenoid 209e for controlling the operation of the second movable valve 642 for distributing the flow destination of the winning ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 for the scenario counter value range of "1" to "1025" for the scenario 202e32 for reducing working hours.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "25", that is, until 0.1 seconds have passed since the normal normal game winning scenario 202e31 was set (after the normal game winning game was executed in the normal state), the general electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the ball flows down to the special electric activation port 643). The value is in the range of "26" to "775", that is, for three seconds between 0.1 and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 for the normal working hours is set, the normal solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously set to ON, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range "776" to "1024", that is, the scenario 202e32 for the normal working hours is set. Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds have passed since then, the normal electric solenoid 209e is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation opening 643), and when the value of the scenario counter reaches "1025", that is, the upper limit value stipulated in the scenario 202e32 for the time-saving general drawing, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off (the ball is out of the opening 644 The operation scenario is defined so that the state of flowing down to the

In other words, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the time saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the normal pattern per game is immediately executed for 3 seconds after a short closed state (0.1 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to win the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 than the general pattern per game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving normal game scenario 202e32, the second movable valve 643 can be set to a position (see FIG. 5) that allows the ball to enter the special electric operation opening 643 during the period in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal game.

In addition, in the above-described normal normal figure winning scenario 202e31 and time saving normal figure winning scenario 202e32, since the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is defined to be the same, the operation control contents based on the operation scenario can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable member can be simplified.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this general pattern winning game, a time end condition established based on the passage of time (a condition established in which the normal pattern per scenario is updated to the upper limit value) and a winning end condition established when the number of winning balls to the general electric winning device 640 reaches the upper limit value (for example, 5) are set. When a normal game is played, the prize-winning end condition is set so that the time end condition is satisfied first. As a result, for example, in a general-purpose game, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally winning a large amount of balls into the general-purpose electrical winning device 640 .

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 has a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 55) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 54) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

29, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a prize number counter 203e, an operation counter group 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a time reduction end flag 203j, and a prize winning flag 20. 3k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment).

A special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting variable display of special symbols, and is a storage area for storing various counter values after being shifted when various counter values are stored in a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a when the special symbols stop varying.

In the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the start winning are stored respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing a special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-described special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a (the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) to the special symbol retaining ball execution area in order to execute processing such as setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. . It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area in which the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) accompanying the detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), it acquires the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer, and stores them in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one reserved area so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to one time. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant.

In addition, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) stores each counter value when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, and is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display effects of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 stores the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-described normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b (the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2) in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83. ). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

A first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, based on the winning to the special symbol entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (standby number) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to a maximum of 4 times. The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the special symbol ball entrance 64 (start winning). The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the start winning is detected and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), performs a big win lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern and the stop classification which are decided here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop classification command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of variable display reserved balls (waiting times) performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to a maximum of 1 time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls that is stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the V winning device 65 and the number of balls winning the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the accessory winning game. Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a detection opening (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, the value is updated by adding one. On the other hand, when one round ends, after it is determined whether or not the winning number of the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) matches the discharged number (the cumulative number of detection results of the detection means capable of detecting the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening), the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various set operation scenarios, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. When any operation scenario in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, update processing of the counter values is executed as processing executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

In this embodiment, scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed redundantly. For example, a scenario related to the normal figure per game and a scenario related to the accessory per game are configured to be executable at the same time. Accordingly, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e, but the scenario counters are not limited to this, and may be provided as many scenario counters as the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously. In this case, when a scenario counter is provided with a type and a new operation scenario is set, a scenario counter type that is not used is determined, a scenario counter is set based on the result of the determination, use information is set for indicating in which operation scenario the set scenario counter is to be used, and use information set in the storage means of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is set. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the storage means in which the usage information is set with a backup function capable of retaining the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as with the other various configurations of the RAM 203 . By configuring in this way, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like during the operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after power restoration can be continued from the state before the power failure.

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and stores the game state corresponding to the game state (setting state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, the time saving state is stored.

Further, in a state in which a jackpot game or a prize winning game is executed, a winning game state (jackpot state, prize winning game state) indicating that each winning game is being executed, and type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed are also stored. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is configured to set a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203j after the jackpot game ends (S1914, 1915 in FIG. 56). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, based on the special design lottery (variation), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203j becomes 0, the time reduction state is completed and it is configured to shift to the normal state. can be configured to In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203j.

Also, in the present embodiment, as the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j, only the condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (variation) is set. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special normal winning), the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be subtracted, or when the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643. It may be configured to subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203j. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is configured to be decremented by 1, but depending on the type of end condition that has been met, a plurality of values of the time-saving counter 203j may be collectively (for example, 2) subtracted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The big hit flag 203i is set to ON when the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the special figure entrance 64. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The time saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time saving end condition is satisfied. This time saving end flag 203h is set to ON when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation in the time saving state (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined to be ON, the value of the time saving counter 203j is reset to "0", the process for terminating the time saving state is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45), and set to OFF (see S804 in FIG. 45).

In addition, during the special symbol variation (during the final variation of the time saving state) executed in the state that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, it is also set to OFF when the ball wins the V prize opening 165 and the V jackpot game is executed (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, and the ending process for determining the end of the time saving is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols. Then, when the special symbol variation is interrupted by the role winning game during the variation of the special symbols and the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed with the opportunity of the role winning game, the time saving end flag 203h is set to OFF.

Therefore, for example, even if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the time saving end flag 203h is set to ON, and the interrupted special pattern fluctuation is restarted after the jackpot game is finished, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the fluctuation stop timing of the restarted special pattern fluctuation. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the subtraction processing of the time saving counter 203h is executed when the special symbol variation is started, the subtraction processing of the time saving end flag 203h is not performed when the special symbol variation is restarted. Therefore, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j is executed from the time when the next special symbol variation after the special symbol variation after the restart is started.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to play the game for a longer time in the set time-saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, only the final fluctuation of the time saving state is updated when the special symbol is stopped from changing, but the process is not limited to this. For example, even when the value of the time saving counter 203j is a predetermined value (for example, 2), the process of updating the time saving state may be performed when the special symbol is stopped from changing.

The role winning flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the role winning game is to be executed, and is set to ON when the role winning game is to be executed. This accessory winning flag 203k is set to ON when a ball that has won a prize in the general electric winning device 640 during a normal drawing winning game wins a special electric activation opening 643, and at that time, the accessory winning game is not being executed (see S1307 in FIG. 50). In various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when determining whether or not the role winning game is in progress, and is set to OFF when the role winning game ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the award winning flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol variation is interrupted.

The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, and when it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variation time is restarted.

This special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted). In the present embodiment, when a ball is won in the special electric operation port 643, the role winning game is configured to be executable, and when the role winning game is performed, the variation of the special symbol being executed is stopped.

The special symbol variation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol, and a value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43) is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the special symbol variation in-execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. It is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 40) (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 203a is 0 (S204 of FIG. 40: No), a special symbol variation stop process (see S287 of FIG. 45) for stopping the special symbol during variation is executed.

Furthermore, this special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured so that the processing for subtracting the value is interrupted when the accessory per game or the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the per-accessory game or during the jackpot game.

The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the V winning hole during the role winning game, and is set to ON when the ball enters the V winning hole during the role winning game. The setting state of this V flag 203p is referred to in the control process for the role (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the start of the big win game (V big win game) is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). After that, it is set to OFF (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol reserve lamp, a specific winning aperture solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 650b of the specific winning aperture 650a forward about the lower side of the opening and closing plate 650b, a V winning aperture solenoid 209b for driving the opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and the V winning device 6. 5, a first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, a second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the electric winning device 640, and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory 640a. 205 to transmit various commands and control signals to them.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 comprising a group of switches and a group of sensors not shown (for example, a storage sensor 65s for detecting a ball stored in a storage portion formed in a storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Various processing is executed based on the

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated), the shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of performance at the time of super ready-to-win. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the error type to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 30A, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the executed special symbol variation. In this variation performance, a detailed variation pattern is determined on the basis of the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the winning/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play the game (special figure game) while predicting whether or not the current special symbol variation wins a jackpot by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, the third pattern display device 81 does not execute the variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, and the performance (V rush performance) for guiding the game contents of the special electric game aiming at the V win game is executed with the normal symbol lottery as a trigger. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, various variation patterns are defined as variation patterns to be referred to when the game state is the normal state, and variation patterns to be referred to when the game state is the time saving state are not defined. In addition, when the third pattern is displayed in a small size on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the time saving state in correspondence with the special pattern variation, only the variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 may be defined.

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the sound lamp controller 113 to grasp the status of operation control for various devices executed by the main controller 110, and is formed from the same data table as the various operation scenario tables 202e that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has. This action scenario table 222b is referred to when setting an action scenario corresponding to the command received from the main controller 110 side, when a command indicating the start of action control (for example, a command indicating the start of a winning game) is received. The operation scenario set here is updated and controlled so as to synchronize with the update operation on the main controller 110 side.

With this configuration, only by outputting only a command indicating the start of operation control from the main controller 110 side, the sound lamp control device 113 side can easily grasp the operation status of various devices and future operation development. In the present embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the audio lamp control device 113 side for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main controller 110 side.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(b). As shown in FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol pending ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a production counter 223f, a sub-state setting area 223g, a look-ahead counter 223h, a short time counter 223i, an uninformed period storage area 223j, and an uninformed pending number. At least a storage area 223k, an interruption flag 223m, a special hit flag 223n, an extension flag 223p, a V rush flag 223q, a variable time counter 223r, a notified pending number storage area 223s, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of variable effect pending balls (waiting times) suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the reserved ball number is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of variable display is added by the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of pending balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is updated according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, it controls image drawing so that the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure stop classification selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop classification command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation stop classification output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 98. It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.

Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figure reservations for which the variable time is foreseen among the number of times of saving time set as the time saving state, and the value corresponding to the number of times of saving time set when the time saving state is set is set, and subtracted according to the number of special figure reservations that have performed the look-ahead of the variable time. Then, it is referred to when the value of the time short period counter 223i, which will be described later, becomes 0, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, the special symbol variation is executed in spite of the time saving state, and processing for displaying a dedicated effect (see FIG. 19 (a)) is executed.

The short-time counter 223i is a counter indicating the time of special symbol variation (special symbol variation time) until the time-saving state ends, and is set with a value obtained by accumulating a plurality of special symbol variation times until the end of the special symbol variation satisfying the termination condition of the time-saving state. At this time, the value of the short time counter 223i is referred to and decremented (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72) in the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control process 113.

The value indicated by the short time counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining period of the V rush in the V rush effect executed during the short time state (see FIG. 12(c)). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the same game method (left-handed game) is used during the normal state, during the jackpot game, and during the time saving state, and at the timing when the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c easily reaches the upper limit (4).

Therefore, on the ending screen (see FIG. 12(a)) of the jackpot game in which the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the fluctuation time until the time saving state ends (cumulative value of the fluctuation time for 4 times of special figure fluctuation) is displayed based on the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time (special symbol winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b).

In addition, even if the number of time saving times is greater than the upper limit value (4) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, or even if the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, if the special symbol reserved number (special figure reserved number) at the end of the jackpot game does not reach 4, the value of the short time counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reserved information acquired at that time, and the special figure added to the short time counter 223i from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of handle reservations is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol reservation information is acquired, the special symbol variation time is added to the short time counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol reservation information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

The uninformed period storage area 223j is in a state where the variable time can be added to the short time counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, despite receiving the winning command, When the special symbol variable time value corresponding to the special symbol reservation information included in the winning command cannot be added to the short time counter 223i (for example, during the jackpot game, during the role game), according to the special symbol reservation information included in the received winning command. It is an area that temporarily stores the special figure fluctuation time.

The value (special figure fluctuation time) stored in this unnotified period storage area 223j is read when the time period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time period counter 223i. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not the time period can be added, when the winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the processing of reading the special figure fluctuation time included in the winning command, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unreported pending number storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands whose special symbol variation time is stored in the above-described unreported period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol pending balls.

The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the short time counter 223h is not decremented, and is set to ON when the value of the short time counter 223h is not decremented, that is, when the accessory winning game or the jackpot game is executed.

The special winning flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special winning ("jackpot B") is included in the reserved special symbols. This special winning flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot ending process (see S4914 of FIG. 69) that the prize information indicating the special winning is included in the reserved storage (see S5013 of FIG. 69).

In the present embodiment, when there is a special win in the reserved special prize obtained at the end of the jackpot game, only the period until the end of the special pattern variation corresponding to the special prize is displayed as a short period of time during the V rush, and furthermore, an effect (heaven mode) for informing the player that the special prize exists in the reserved special prize is executed (see FIG. 17(a)).

With this configuration, the player can be notified in advance that a big win game (a big win game won in a special figure lottery) will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after a short period of time when the display is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 has passed), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, in this embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the special win is terminated is notified as a short period of time, so that the remaining period of the short period of time at the time of the big win game (special win) can be set to 0 second. Therefore, since it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many seconds later the jackpot game will be executed, the player can play the game while enjoying how many times the V jackpot game can be executed in a short period of the heaven mode (during the period until the special prize jackpot game is executed).

Furthermore, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the special win is terminated is notified as a short period of time, so that the player cannot determine in advance the special pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the special pattern reserve acquired after the special prize reserve corresponding to the special win. As a result, for example, when a big win game corresponding to a special win is executed at the stage of remaining 10 seconds of the time period, the player grasps in advance that the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be executed next is 10 seconds, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the normal pattern winning game is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and is set to ON when the normal pattern winning game is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. In this embodiment, as the operation scenario of the normal pattern winning game, there are a normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 corresponding to the normal pattern winning game in the normal state and a time reduction normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 corresponding to the normal pattern winning game in the time reduction state.

Therefore, for example, when the normal pattern per game is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the normal pattern per game during the time saving state may be executed even after the game state shifts to the normal state. When such a state occurs, the end timing of the V rush performance indicating the game mode in the time saving state is extended to the end timing of the normal per game game (see FIG. 16(c)). As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the period (V rush period) during which the player should aim for the V prize.

The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating the V rush period, is set to ON when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery) in a normal state, and is set to OFF when a termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied. This V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously set to ON even when a jackpot game is executed during a short period of time (during V rush). As a result, it is possible to easily set a period during which various types of cumulative information (the number of winning V jackpot games and information indicating the number of winning balls during the V rush period) are calculated during the V rush period.

The fluctuation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of a special symbol, and when a fluctuation pattern command of a special symbol is received, a fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set, and referred to and subtracted in the effect update process (S4111 of FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice ramp control process 113 (see S5303 and S5304 of FIG. 72). The value of the variation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol variation during execution at the timing at which the special symbol variation can be interrupted, and is used to set different presentation modes according to the remaining period.

The reported pending number storage area 223s is an area for storing the special figure pending number corresponding to the variable time already added to the value of the time short period counter 223i, and when the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is updated, the updated value is stored and the value is subtracted when the special symbol variation is completed. Then, when a new time saving state is set by subtracting the value stored in the notified reserved number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h at the end of the jackpot game in which the new number of times of time saving is set, the number of special pattern reserved balls already reported as the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted, and the number of special pattern reserved balls capable of newly adding and displaying the time period is used to correspond to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In this embodiment, it is configured so as not to execute the performance suggesting the variable time corresponding to the special figure suspension obtained in the normal state to the player, but it is not limited to this, and the performance mode may be varied according to the contents of the special figure suspension in the normal state.

For example, the stop type of the special symbols (combination of the third symbols indicating the big win) may be variably set based on the variation time corresponding to the acquired special symbol suspension, and when the big win is won in a state where the total variation time of the special symbol suspension exceeds 100 seconds, the combination of the third symbols in which the odd numbers are stop-displayed in a square pattern may be displayed.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the normal state may be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of the big win by the special drawing lottery.

In the present embodiment, when entering the V rush, it is configured to notify all the variable time based on the acquired special figure suspension, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to notify the player only a part of the variable time based on the acquired special figure suspension, or by the player operating the operation means, The variable time of the special symbol for indicating the duration of the V rush (period until the time saving state ends) can be selected. You can

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to sum up and notify the variation times corresponding to multiple special figure variations that are executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied, but it is not limited to this. In this case, for example, the display mode of the special figure suspension corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating the character, and according to the type of the displayed character, the player may roughly grasp the length of the variation time of the special figure variation corresponding to the special figure suspension.

In the present embodiment, since the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is always set after the jackpot game is executed, the processing for setting the V rush flag is executed when the jackpot game is executed. It may not be set. In this case, after the jackpot game is over (during the ending period of the jackpot game), whether or not the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over is discriminated based on the set jackpot type, and when it is decided that the time saving state is set, it can be changed after holding the special figure acquired at that point.

Next, game contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the normal symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 is a timing chart showing the game flow when the normal pattern winning game is executed in the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, in the normal state, the flow of the game when the normal figure per game is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, a game (special electric game) that can progress in the order of a normal pattern winning game, a role winning game, and a big winning game (V big winning game) is configured to be executed when winning a winning lottery of normal symbols. In other words, it is configured so that a big winning game can be executed without performing a lottery for special symbols.

First, in the normal state, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the normal pattern winning game based on the normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27(c)) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. As shown in FIG. 27(c), in the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state, it takes 4 seconds (t1) for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the normal pattern winning game is started. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the normal per game game, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation opening 643, and then the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

Therefore, in the general-purpose winning game executed in the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general electrical prize winning device 640, and even if the prize is won, the prize-winning ball is guided to the out port 644.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state and the performance of the accessory winning game. By configuring in this way, even if the same game method is executed in the normal state in which the special game aiming at execution of the big winning game is executed by lottery of special symbols and the time reduction state in which the special electric game aiming at execution of the big winning game by lottery of normal symbols is executed, the execution of the big winning game by the special electric game in the normal state can be suppressed, and the excessive provision of the big winning game to the player can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) during the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated, so it is necessary to prevent a situation where the special symbol lottery is not executed during the time saving state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the same game method is executed in the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game in which only the lottery of normal symbols is executed during the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the operation contents of the general pattern per game are set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state, but without being limited to this, for example, in a part of the general pattern per game executed during the normal state, the same operation scenario as the general pattern per game executed during the time reduction state may be selected. This allows the player to play a game with unexpectedness.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. As described above, when the normal game is executed in the normal state, the ball that has won the normal electric prize device 640 does not enter the special electric operation opening 643, so the special electric prize winning game that is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 is not executed. A new normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) is executed based on what has been done. Note that the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31(h)) is set to a motion scenario in which it is always driven while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, so regardless of whether or not a winning role game is executed, the first movable valve 66b (see FIG. 27(a)) is driven according to the motion pattern based on the first movable valve motion scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow of the game when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed among the game flows when the normal figure winning game is executed in the time saving state will be described.

First, in the time saving state, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. 28, it takes 0.1 seconds (t1) for the electric accessary 640a to be in the open state after the start of the normal pattern winning game, and then 3 seconds (t2) for the open state, 1 second (t3) for the closed state, and the normal pattern per game ends. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the normal per game game, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation opening 643, and then the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

Therefore, in the general pattern winning game executed during the time saving state, the ball is easily won into the general electric prize winning device 640 (easier to win than the general prize winning game in the normal state), and the winning ball is more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643 (easier to win than the general prize winning game in the normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to win the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state, and to facilitate the execution of the accessory winning game.

The ball that has entered the special electric operation opening 643 and the passing of the ball (winning) are detected by the special electric operation opening winning switch (FIG. 32(e)) not shown, and the detection result triggers the opening operation of the V winning device 65 to execute the prize winning game. When the role winning game is started, after a waiting period of 0.1 seconds (t5) has passed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) in order to open the V opening/closing door 65a, and then the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF for 1.4 seconds (t7). Also, with the start of the role-winning game, the retention solenoid 209c is turned on for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the retention valve 66a in the retention state. In other words, during a period in which the ball can enter the V winning device 65 by the role winning game, the storage valve 66a is maintained in the storage state (see FIG. 7), so that it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165 during one role winning game.

When the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the period t8 has elapsed, one ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down toward the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operating scenario 202e4 so as to alternately switch between a closed state for 5 seconds (t10) and an open state for 0.5 seconds (t9). is in an open state, the ball flows down toward the V winning opening 165. - 特許庁When the ball enters the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by the V winning switch (FIG. 32(i)) not shown, and the big winning game (V big winning game) is started based on the detection result.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the general pattern winning game is executed during the time saving state, it is easy to cause the general electric winning device 640 to win the ball (easier to win than the general electric winning game in the normal state), and the winning ball is easy to enter the special electric activation opening 643. (difficult to win a prize than the normal game in the state) and, even when the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640, the winning ball hardly enters the special electric operating port 643 so as to execute the normal prize winning game.

By constructing in this way, even if the game method aiming at the special ball entrance 64 which triggers the lottery of the special symbols and the game method aiming at the through gate 67 which triggers the lottery of the normal symbols are made to be the same in order to continuously execute the special symbol variation during the time saving state, the probability of executing the winning game can be greatly changed according to the game state. In addition, even if an act of illegally winning the ball into the general electric prize winning device 640 (for example, holding the ball in the vicinity of the electric role object 640a with a magnet and making the ball win a prize in accordance with the opening timing) is executed in the normal state winning game, it is possible to prevent the winning ball from winning the special electric operation opening 643, so that the player can be provided with a fair game.

In addition, in this embodiment, not only the game for establishing the lottery opportunity of the special pattern or the lottery opportunity of the normal pattern, but also the normal pattern winning game, the role winning game, and the big winning game can be executed in the left-handed game, so that the game can be played smoothly without making the player feel the trouble of changing the game method.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variation effect) and notice effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 10). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a character ROM 234 , a resident video RAM 235 , a normal video RAM 236 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 , and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113 , and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 via a bus line 240 . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different lottery probability of special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls put out for one special symbol jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including recovery from a power failure; hereinafter the same). Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but reading of the data of the first page requires a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take time to read the instructions constituting the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237.

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (such as characters) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the relevant data is read from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks in which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks.

Since the ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without considering the address position of the defective data block which is different in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether or not one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the designated address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while data is set in one bank, transfers one page of data including data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and sets the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading out from and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND-type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND-type flash memory 234a. This NOR-type ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

The MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and designate the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240 when the system reset is released. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and designates the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. While the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem unique to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order for the MPU 231 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. i. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, by storing in the NOR type ROM 234d a predetermined number of instructions from among the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is cleared, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is cleared, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data (eg, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program. It is programmed to transfer to area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is canceled while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the designation of the address of the internal bus as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed to set the command pointer 231a to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then executes the rest of the boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program is set as the second predetermined address.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after releasing the system reset, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM composed of the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) transmitted from the MPU 231, develops the image drawn in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the third pattern display device 81.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231 at intervals (20 milliseconds) between image drawing processing and display processing. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, the display control device 114 is configured such that the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image drawing processing can be performed by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. - 特許庁Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

The display control device 114 is configured such that, when drawing an image using image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and the time required for reading the data can be saved.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

For the transfer instructions of the image data that MPU231 and the transfer data of the drawing list are transferred to the image controller 237, the first address (the top address of storage), the final address (the final address of the storage), and the transfer destination (normal storage) Includes the first address of the local video RAM235 and the normal video RAM236) and the first address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM235 or regular video RAM236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time can be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a and then transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of the image data so that the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the display on the third pattern display device 81 are not in time for the required time.

Further, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character pattern area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image for displaying the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 by a variable performance when the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the special figure entrance 64 is detected.

When the power supply unit 251 starts supplying power, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 34 . FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG.

At this time, upon receiving a variation pattern command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. and are alternately displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variable pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stopped type command, the display variable patterns sent from the audio lamp control device 113 and the display stopped type command separate commands to determine the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110, and is in FIG. 34 (B. ) The image shown in) is displayed, and the image shown in FIG.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at power-on. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped while the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the special symbol entrance 64 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the image controller 2 is controlled by the MPU 231 so that the images shown in FIGS. 37. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation performance image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so that when the ball entry is detected in the special symbol entrance 64 while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 35A and 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 35(a) shows the rear A corresponding to the "town stage", and FIG. Also, FIG. 28 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 35, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 so as to be longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. After the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the image between the position a and the position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the rear image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81.

When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding rear image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the display area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Specifically, on the rear surface E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their display positions fixed. On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the third pattern display device 81 displays a repeated back image that returns to the back image showing the morning glow.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 with all image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the ``town stage'', which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced by keeping all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the frequently displayed ``town stage'' permanently in the back face image area 235c. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage", as shown in FIG. Also, image data corresponding to the back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the power is turned on.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if this is done, a RAM with a very large capacity must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when the stage change is determined by lottery at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and can be scrolled or displayed while changing the color tone with the lapse of time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. Therefore, after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by scrolling the range from position b' to position d using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. I can.

Similarly, for the back face E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range of the image data is set so that the transfer of the remaining image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the back face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Thus, the image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap the image data corresponding to the image between position b′ and position b. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from the position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 smoothly.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. . As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. Thus, when the third pattern display device 81 performs the variable performance, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND type flash memory 234a, the third pattern display device 81 can quickly start the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though the variable performance is started in the first pattern display device 37 after the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the rear pattern such as a wooden box and the main pattern consisting of the rear pattern and the accessory patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. are also resident as main patterns to which the numbers '0' to '9' are not attached. These image data are used for the demonstration performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variation performance associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation performance was stopped. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e. By reading the image data pre-resident in 5e, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 reads the image data preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command, so that the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the corresponding error message can be immediately displayed after receiving the error command.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the type of the image data. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes a one-frame image drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby developing the one-frame image in that frame buffer. A process for displaying the one-frame image on the pattern display device 81 is executed.

Thus, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and at the same time, read out the one-frame image previously drawn from the other frame buffer, and display the read-out one-frame image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 to be either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the one frame of image rendering processing is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately designated every 20 milliseconds by alternately switching either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, so that the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data determination flag 233i, a drawing object buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag. 233z at least.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is an area for storing a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a transfer data table defining transfer data information and transfer timing of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, and stored in this data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each performance mode of each performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command from the main controller 110. For example, the display data tables corresponding to the variable performance, the opening performance, the round performance, the ending performance and the demonstration performance are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop pattern indicating the failure is finally stop-displayed, and if the stop type of the variable performance is either the big win A or the big win B, the stop patterns showing the big win are finally stop-displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now shifted to a special game state and the large opening normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round performance is a performance for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

As described above, the demonstration performance is a performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting prize is not started even after the lapse of a predetermined time after one variable performance is stopped. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time, in correspondence with the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and also defines drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of sprite.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. When the enlargement rate is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and when the enlargement rate is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a smaller size than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, drawing information for each sprite such as one back image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. This back face type describes information specifying whether to display one of the back faces A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of ``town stage'', ``forest stage'', ``river stage'', ``sky stage'', and ``island stage'') or to display a back image different from the back faces AE. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the rear faces A to E as a drawing object when the display of any one of the rear faces A to E is specified by the rear face type, and also specifies the range of the rear face image to be displayed for the frame according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, the display data table defines only the back surface type as the drawing content of the back surface image, but instead of this, the back surface type and the position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image displayed when the image drawing (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the start of drawing of the image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on the display data table, depending on the back face type. (Information indicating whether the display of the pattern display device 81 is information indicating the elapsed time since the start) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. The reason why the offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third pattern is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before and the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time, and the offset information from the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before is described in the pattern offset information until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is described. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Since each third pattern is attached with a specific number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number attached to the third pattern, and the offset information is represented by the difference in the number attached to each third pattern, so that the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

Further, in the pattern offset information, a predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time is set so as to be the time during which the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed. While the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time during that time, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not allowed to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the end address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the image content to be drawn next is identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) to be described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110.

Here, when a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, a large load is imposed on the activation and execution of the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous with the diversification of the effect images. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, so that various performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

The reason why the display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table is that the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, since the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, the display contents cannot be predicted, and therefore the display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above cannot be provided. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table describes transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer object image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the prescribed sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the prescribed sprite is started according to the display data table, and the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the transfer object image data corresponding to the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, null data is defined corresponding to that address, which means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 37).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the transfer data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the end address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a variation pattern command for display) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, and if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring, and the generated drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred to the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is necessary for light drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 in the display control device 114. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It can be transferred from ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 .

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data whose transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address is defined in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Therefore, the transfer start timing can be instructed so that the image data of a predetermined sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the D-type flash memory 234a, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, the third pattern display device 81 is set to OFF in order to display an image other than the power-on image (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 and the like.

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, selects the display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, describing the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, describing the content of image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared.

Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and if the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f (that is, if Null data is not described), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) containing the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address for obtaining transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in display setting processing for V interrupt processing (see S6303 in FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later. Add.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can be surely stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 38, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the back image used in the image of one frame, the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), and the character (character 1, character 2, . It is. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the address thereof, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The image controller 237 performs scaling processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, translucency processing according to the translucency value, and synthesis with other sprites according to the α blending information on a standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from various video RAMs. After applying processing, color tone correction processing according to color information, filtering processing according to filter designation information by a method designated by the information, and performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, an image obtained by drawing is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU231 shows the drawing data tables stored in the displayed data table buffer 233D, and the contents of the drawing specified by the pointer 233F, the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold image that displays the holding ball number, and a warning image that notify the occurrence of an error). Based on, a detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame is generated, and a drawing list is created by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), character (character 1, character 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e contains transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the storage source start address and storage source end address in the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads the image data from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the performance displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is completed, and executes various processes to be performed in accordance with the completion of the performance.

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are inevitably unstored by storing the image data of one sprite, so the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

When transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86), and the image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying, from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c), a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. The information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the driving signal, thereby executing the display processing for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted every time drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the one frame of image rendering processing is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are specified by alternately replacing either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (see S7002 in FIG. 81(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and is set to OFF when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S in FIG. 78B). 6805, see S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is set to OFF when a display data table other than the fixed display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S68 in FIG. 78B). 05, see S6905 in FIG. 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 39 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the start-up processing, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, and 999, respectively, in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process accompanying the ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 (start winning) and the ball entering the general electric winning device 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the special electric starting gate winning processing is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passage processing (S109) and the V passage processing (S110) are executed. Details of the special electric starting gate winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the V-passing process, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. The shooting control process is a process of determining whether to shoot the ball on or off on condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, special symbol variation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104) performs various determinations (validity determination) and determination of the special symbols based on the acquired counter values, and controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variation display in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control, or sets various commands for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation display effects of the third and fourth symbols, and displays the determination result (validity determination result). Control for stopping display is executed. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is in the middle of a jackpot game (during a jackpot) or in a role game (during a role) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current state is during the jackpot game (during jackpot) or during the role winning game (during winning the role).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot or the accessory is in progress (S201: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202), If it is determined that it is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the accessory per game is executed. In this embodiment, while the role winning game is being executed, the variable time set in the variable display (special symbol variable display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted), and during that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the variation display of the special symbols being executed is temporarily stopped with the start of the winning-accessory game, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the disappearance of the special symbol variation being executed. The display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped may be, for example, the same display mode as the display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.2 seconds), or a display mode having a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is being performed (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.5 seconds). Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during a temporary stop may be used.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not in the middle of a big hit or in the middle of a prize (S201: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S204). When it is determined that the special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is greater than 0) (S204: Yes), a special symbol variation process is executed (S206).

In this special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for varying (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the special symbol is varying is executed. This special symbol variation in-execution process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Then, when the processing of S206 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol variation executing processing (S206) is 0 (S207), and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time counter 203n is 0 in the processing of S207 (S207: Yes), the special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is terminated.

In the special symbol variation stop process (S208), when the variation time defined for the special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. The details of this special symbol variation stop process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 in the process of S207 (S207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure variation time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S204 (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation is not currently in progress, next special symbol variation start processing is executed (S205). In this special pattern variation start processing (S205), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of special symbols is performed, and determination of whether the new lottery (variation) is executable or not, and when the new lottery (variation) is executable, processing for performing the new lottery (variation) are executed. This special symbol variation start process (S205) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. After executing the special symbol variation start process (S205), this process is terminated.

As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in the configuration capable of executing the lottery (variation) of the special symbols, the variation processing (S204 to S208) regarding the special symbols is performed within one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for the special symbol, the change processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special symbol variation start process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation start process (S205).

In the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S303).

Then, a reservation ball number command indicating the number of reservation balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reservation area 1 to reservation area 4 of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The details of the special symbol big hit determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. Using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the big win determination as to whether or not the game is a big win is executed based on the set game state.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described later in detail, is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value, based on the result of the determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

After executing the processing of S307, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S310), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and then this process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, the processing for updating the number of times of time saving is executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, and when the special pattern change of this time is the final change in the time saving state, the processing of setting the time saving end flag 203j to ON is executed without updating the number of times. Although the details will be described later, the setting state of the time saving end flag 203j is referred to when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, and when the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 to end the time saving state. And, when the role winning game is executed by the special electric game during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the V jackpot game is started, the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j to off is executed.

With this configuration, for example, when the special symbol variation is interrupted based on the execution of the V jackpot game during the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted after the jackpot game is finished, but when the special symbol variation after the restart is stopped and displayed, the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF, so the time saving state is not terminated. Further, when the special symbol variation is restarted, the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented.

Thus, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, a period obtained by adding the number of times of time saving (four times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game to the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption is set as a short time period for setting the time saving state. Therefore, when the special electric game is executed during the time saving state and the big win game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning the ball into the V winning port 165, the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation is added, and the duration of the time saving state advantageous to the player can be made longer than the duration of the time saving state set when the special pattern game is executed during the normal state and the big win is won in the special pattern lottery.

That is, when the time saving state is set again based on the game in the time saving state, it is easier to lengthen the duration of the time saving state to be set than when the time saving state is set based on the game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the case of using the configuration for executing the processing for updating the number of times of working hours and the processing for terminating the working hours state at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the working hours, the special design fluctuation starting processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed when the special design fluctuations are restarted. There is a problem that the maximum amount cannot be provided to the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the processing for updating the number of times of time saving and the processing for ending the time saving state are configured to be executable at different timings. Specifically, processing for updating the number of times of working hours is executed at the timing of starting fluctuation of the special symbols, and processing for ending the state of working hours is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols. By constructing in this way, the number of times of shortening working hours is not updated when the special symbol variation is resumed, and the shortening of working hours state can be set as the game status during the last variation period of the special symbol variation in the shortening of working hours state, so that the game in the shortened working hours state can be provided to the player as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, the processing for terminating the working hours state is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in a state where the condition for starting the next special symbols fluctuation is established, the time saving state is ended at the timing before the processing of S306 is executed, for example, the processing of S305 is executed in the special symbols fluctuation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) and the period until the next special symbol fluctuation lottery is executed. It may be configured to execute processing for.

Further, although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions during the time reduction state is managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, based on the reception of the information indicating the game state included in the state command set at the end of the jackpot game (the information indicating that the time saving state is set, the information indicating the number of times of time saving) set this time, the information of the time saving state set this time is stored, and based on the reception of the special pattern variation pattern command indicating the start of the special symbol variation, the number of times of remaining time saving is updated, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side manages the game state of the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation of the time saving state and set the performance mode corresponding to the current game situation without setting a command for indicating the number of times of remaining time saving and a command for indicating the final change of the time saving state (that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON) in the control processing of the main control device 110.例文帳に追加Therefore, control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S402).

After the processing of S402 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a big win (S403), and if it is determined to be a big win (S403: Yes), a big win flag 203i is set to ON so as to indicate a special symbol big win (S404). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Then, the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a big win (S405), the big win pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired win type counter C2 (S406), and the processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S403 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S403: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 of FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big win, that is, whether or not the special symbol big win is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203i is turned on for the special symbols. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S404 in the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 42).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and the special figure variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505 (S506). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S508), a value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n (S509), and the process is terminated. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S507 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as the reach out or the outage that does not become the reach, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 55).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is lost (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S503.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation executing process (S206). In this special symbol variation in-execution process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being performed is executed.

In the special symbol variation executing process (S206), first, it is determined whether the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

In the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure fluctuation restart command is set (S702), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to OFF (S703), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the special figure of the first design display device 37 is updated (S705), and this End the process.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, special symbol variation in-execution processing (see S206 in FIG. 44) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) in the special symbol variation in-execution processing (see S205 in FIG. 44). Therefore, for example, when a variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n, and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON in the process of S701 (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and the process proceeds to S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation stop processing (S208). This special symbol variation stop processing (S208) is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is "0", that is, when the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol) has passed.

When the special symbol variation stop process (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), next, a jackpot scenario that is won in this special symbol variation is set (S806), the values of the jackpot flag 202i and the time reduction counter 203h are reset (S807), and information indicating that the current game state is a jackpot (during jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S808) and S8. 09 is processed. The game state storage area 203g is configured to store the game state (normal state, time saving state) regarding the lottery game and the game state regarding the winning game, and by executing the processing of S808, the game state (normal state, time saving state) regarding the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to OFF, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery of this time is lost (S801: No), it is then determined whether or not the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802). When it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the special pattern variation whose variation is stopped this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S804), and information indicating that the current game state is the normal state is stored in the game state storage area 203g. (S805), and the process proceeds to S809. In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processing of S803 to S805 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, a special figure confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the special figure is set (S809), the process of stopping the variable display of the special figure being variably displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S810), and this process is finished.

Thus, in the special symbol variation stop process (S208), the process (S809, S810) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery (lottery game) result is executed.

In the present embodiment, when a ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 and a role winning game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. By constructing in this way, it is possible to show the case where the special symbol variation indicating the duration of the time saving state is interrupted and the case where it is discarded, so that the duration of the time saving state can be abruptly subtracted (finished), and the performance with a sense of tension can be executed for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) determines whether or not the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and when the start winning is made, up to the reserved upper limit number (up to 4 in the special figure entrance 64), each obtained counter value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

In addition, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting the result of determination of suitability and the variation pattern to be selected in advance is executed based on each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball enters (starting winning) into the special figure entrance 64 which is the starting opening (S901). Here, the entry of the ball to the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball entered the special symbol entrance 64 (there was a start prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (904), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of starting openings (special symbol lottery right reserved number) is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S905).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and reserved (stored) in the storage area of the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 (S906).

Next, prefetch processing is executed (S907), and then this processing ends. This look-ahead processing (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but from each counter value newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. are determined. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining the result of winning or not determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc., based on each newly stored counter value.

In this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the special symbol lottery right is newly obtained, the contents of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) are determined in advance. You can

Also, when it is determined in the process of S901 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S901: No), or in the process of S903, when it is determined that the number of pending balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the pre-reading process (S907) is executed based on the information (winning information) on the added prize. It may be configured so that the look-ahead process (S907) can be executed when the ball is entered into the special figure entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the symbol has reached the upper limit. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the look-ahead process (S907), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S907).

In the look-ahead process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 203a (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when new reserved storage occurs (timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a) and the timing when the big win determination is executed based on the newly reserved winning information, so it is difficult to predict the game state (special pattern probability state) set at the timing when the big winning determination is executed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S1003). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a prize winning command indicating the conditions for winning the jackpot (game state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot when winning is set (S1004), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a prize winning command indicating failure is set (S1005), and then this process ends.

Here, the prize winning command set in the process of S1004 or S1005 is set to include information indicating the above-described win/fail determination result (information that gives different meanings based on the win/fail determination result), as well as information indicating the various counter values read out by the process of S1001 as common information. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, based on various information included in the winning command, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the usual color), and an effect (pre-reading effect) can be executed such as displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of winning or failing determination to the player.

In the present embodiment, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to set the information set in the winning command (response judgment result) regardless of the game state. A winning command may be set based on the result of each determination, or a determination value (value of a first winning random number counter C1) for determining a big win regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the determination value is read.

By constructing in this manner, a prize winning command indicating a big win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when a specific big win is determined in advance, so that a feeling of expectation of winning the big win can be given to the special pattern variation in which the look-ahead performance is not executed.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a may be accurately discriminated, and the win/loss determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Also, in the present embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is performed, and the winning judgment is predicted in advance in the prereading process. The information shown may be set as a prize winning command, and the result of winning/failure determination may be predicted based on the information included in the prize winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is preferably configured to be analyzed (prediction of the result of winning/failure determination). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1101). The normal pattern (second pattern) win includes the period from when the win is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 (after the win pattern is stopped and displayed) until the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed (until the win game is finished). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed at present (S1102: No), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

When it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S1105). That is, when it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning prize information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is established, the value of the normal symbol retained ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 in order to execute the normal symbol variation using the retained and stored winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the normal pattern (S1108), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1108: Yes), the winning judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hitting judgment value of the second winning random number table 202b for high probability (see FIG. 23(c)), and the process proceeds to S1111. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S1108: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202b for low probability (see FIG. 23 (c)), the result of the hit/fail determination is acquired (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S1111), and when it is determined to be a win (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode at the time of winning is set (S1112), and the normal symbol variation time is determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern using the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (no) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode when losing is set (S1113), and the process shifts to the above-described S1114 process.

As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, the variable time is always set to 3 seconds. By configuring in this way, at the timing of switching the game state, specifically, at the timing of the end of the jackpot game where the game state is switched from the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set to the short time state (normal symbol high probability state) in which the short variation time is likely to be set, a normal symbol variation with a long variation time is executed, and the normal symbol lottery in the time reduction state is not executed even though the time reduction state is set. can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a special electric game (V rush) aiming at a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed with the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state, and during the time saving state (V rush), the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to display the performance based on the normal symbol lottery. In this way, when performing the production based on the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation), the amount of production data can be reduced by unifying the fluctuation time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when the normal figure winning game is executed in the normal state and the ball wins to the general electric prize winning device 640, it is configured so as to make it difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operating port 643 which triggers the execution of the accessory winning game. Therefore, even if it is configured so that only the same variation time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the merit of performing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per normal pattern.

The method of setting the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but may vary the variation time according to the game state, vary the variation time according to the number of normal symbol pending balls, or vary the variation time according to the acquired predetermined value. , and may be configured to be variably set based on. Further, it may be configured such that the easiness of the ball entering the general electric prize winning device 640 is different depending on the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring so as to vary the entry state of the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 according to the length of the set normal pattern variation time, the easiness of the ball entering the general electric prize device 640 can be easily changed according to the game state, so that various game properties can be created.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1102: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed (S1115), and when it is determined that the variation time has not passed (S1115: No), this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the normal symbol lottery of this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1117). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1117: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the crying normal symbol is not a hit (no) (S1117: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol (timing of performing the processing of S1108 to S1111). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and furthermore, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of normal symbols is configured to be variable based on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols which is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, a high probability state of the normal symbols is set at the timing of judging whether or not the normal symbols are appropriate, and a low probability state of the normal symbols is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role product 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of judging the suitability of the normal pattern, there is a problem that the electric role product 640a is long opened (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is winning (S1117: Yes), next, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current normal symbol, it is determined whether the time saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, the current is the low probability state of the normal symbol (S1 118: No), set the scenario action per normal normal map (S1119).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), scenario operation per normal figure for time reduction is set (S1120).

Next, based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set (S1121), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the normal design is determined based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, and the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role product 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Only when the state is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (open pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set based on the game state set at the timing of judging whether the normal symbol is right or wrong.

Also, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal symbol lottery results, normal symbol variation fluctuation time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are set with commands indicating the contents of each type of information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

Next, referring to FIG. 49, through gate passing processing (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1202), and then it is determined whether the acquired value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 1 (whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls has reached the upper limit) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (it is the upper limit of 1) (S1203: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 1 (is 0) (S1203: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1204), the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), and the second random number counter C4. is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special electric starting prize winning process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the special electric starter winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640, and by winning a ball in the special electric operation opening 643, the V winning device 65 is configured to execute a role winning game in which a predetermined variable pattern opens. In this special electric start opening winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball wins the special electric starting opening 643. FIG.

When the special electric starting opening winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric starting winning, that is, the game ball has won the special electric operating opening 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected is output from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has won the special electric activation port 643. In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the special electric activation opening 643 (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the special electric operation port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol winning game is in progress (S1302). When it is determined that the normal symbol winning game is not currently in progress (S1302: No), since the ball cannot enter the special electric operation opening 643, an error command is set (S1309), and then this processing is terminated. By performing the processing of S1309, the state in which the game ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 outside the game period per normal figure, that is, when a game is illegally made to win the game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, or when the member attached to the special electric operation opening 643 (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642) has a malfunction It can be quickly notified to the outside.

In the processing of S1302, when it is determined that the normal symbol winning game is currently in progress (S1302: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special electric current is in operation (accessory winning game is in progress) (S1303), and when it is determined that the special electric current is in operation (accessory winning game is in progress) (S1303: Yes), a new role winning game cannot be executed, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special electric current is not in operation (playing per character) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbols are currently changing (S1304). When it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S1304: Yes), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), the special figure temporary stop command is set (S1306), the role per flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

That is, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed. As a result, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted when the accessory winning game is executed. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and then this process ends.

As described above, the special electric starting gate winning process (S108) includes, when a ball is won in the special electric activation opening 643, determining processing means for determining whether or not the winning has been normally won, processing means for determining whether or not a new role winning game can be executed based on the winning, and means for executing processing for special symbol variation (processing to interrupt the special symbol variation being executed, processing to prevent new special symbol variation from being executed during the winning role game). and means for executing a winning game.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V entrance passage process (S109), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401). On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is ON (S1401: Yes), next, it is determined whether the V winning opening is open, that is, whether the winning game is in progress (S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (during the game per accessory) (S1402: Yes), the V entrance pass command is set (S1403), and the process ends. If it is not during the V winning opening opening period (S1402: No), it is the case that the game ball enters the V winning device 65 even though the game is not in the role winning game, so an error command is set (S1404) and this processing is finished.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1403 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the winning game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 65 .

Next, the V passing process (S110) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the V passing process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When the V passage processing (S110) is executed, it is first determined whether there is V passage, that is, whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the current V valid period is in effect (S1502). In the processing of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the action scenario related to the accessory winning game is set is within the V valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that it is not during the V valid period.

In the processing of S1502, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether the current role per game is in progress (S1503). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0 (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

That is, in the processing of S1504 to S1506, the processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game. On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the winning game is not in progress (S1503: No), there is no need to perform processing for newly executing the jackpot game.

In the process of S1507, a V pass command is set (S1507), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V pass command, for example, when the V pass command is received during the role winning game, the performance during the V rush executed during the role winning game is successful, and the performance for showing that the jackpot game is executed following the role winning game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the jackpot game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the role winning game is executed.

On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a prescribed timing during the game of the role, a disappointing performance for indicating failure of the V challenge is executed, and when the V passing command is not received at a prescribed timing during the big winning game, the resurrection performance from the disappointing performance is executed to inform the player that the big winning game will be continuously executed.

In this embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 is set, but a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that a game ball has not entered the V winning opening 165 may be set. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game ball that can be entered into the V winning hole 165 is only the game ball (for example, one) retained by the retention valve 66a. , the above-described V non-passing command may be set. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 65 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this process ends. By performing the processing of S1508, it is possible to quickly inform the outside of the state in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 165 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally performed in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 165, or when the member attached to the V winning hole 165 (for example, the V open/close door 65a, the storage valve 66a, and the first movable valve 66b) malfunctions.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the operation scenario is defined so that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 in the role winning game is the ending period of the winning role game. For example, if the action scenario of the role winning game is defined so that the ball can always enter the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game, then in the V passing process (S110), only the process of S1505 is executed, and the processes of S1506 to S1508 may be configured to be executed when the V flag is set to ON in the role winning control process (see S1805 of FIG. 58). As a result, even if the ball enters the V winning port 165 immediately after the performance of the prize winning game, the time saving state can be continued until the big winning game is started, so that the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, referring to FIG. 53, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1713, S1714).

Similarly, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in switch reading processing in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of won balls is sent to payout control device 111. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (variation effect, decoration effect, etc.) are set. Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a command setting for executing a jackpot performance by the sound lamp control device 113 and a jackpot control process for opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 650a of the variable winning device 650 are executed (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. In this jackpot control processing (S1804), a specific winning port 650a (hereinafter referred to as a winning port, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and whether the maximum opening time of the winning port, etc. (specific winning port 650a) has elapsed, or whether a specified number of balls have won in the winning port, etc. (specific winning port 650a). judge. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 650a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 650a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the control processing for the accessory per game related to the accessory per game that is executed when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 is executed (S1805). In this prize winning control process (S1805), processing for setting a period for opening and a period for closing the V opening/closing door 65a for the V winning device 65 which is operated to be opened during the winning prize game based on a predetermined scenario (performance scenario for winning a prize) is executed. note that. Details of the winning control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the general electric prize winning device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S1121 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished and the green LED is lit, if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished and the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting color of the LED is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and by the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45), the stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device in the display mode set in S507 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of FIG. 43). 37A and 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode (loss pattern) indicating a loss, and a stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or S1113 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). stop display (lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809), and if power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the main process this time (S1810).

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 can be updated at random. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value relating to the lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent games aimed at the timing of acquiring the judgment value corresponding to winning.

In the process of S1809, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and as a result of the power failure signal SG1 being output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1809 is executed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from the power failure state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the process of S1801 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initialization process (S1701). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state with special symbols, it is a process for setting information (commands) for executing various effects according to the jackpot, and for opening or closing a prize winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1901). Specifically, when the process of S806 of the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, or when the process of S2010 of the role control process (see S1805 of FIG. 58) is executed and the start of the big win is set, the action counter is set corresponding to the big win action scenario table 202e1 included in the various action scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the action counter coincides with the jackpot start timing defined in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that it is time to start a special symbol jackpot (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special pattern jackpot or accessory prize is started, an opening counter is initialized to 0, and then an opening command is transmitted when the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 5000 for jackpot C). By doing so, for example, when the special lottery results in a big win in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be shortened, and when the special electric game results in the left-handed game and the big win is achieved in the accessory winning game, the time until the start of the big win (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be lengthened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure a period for making preparations for the jackpot game for the player who has been watching the ball flow situation during the role-winning game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1901: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S1903). In the processing of this S1903, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203g.

During the big winning includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the big winning with the special symbols (including during the big winning game with the special symbols), and the time during the predetermined time after the end of the big winning game. It also includes the time when a display indicating that the ball has won a prize is being displayed in the V prize opening 165 . If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the jackpot is not in progress (S1903: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1903: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1904).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1904, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired action counter is the time to start a round game defined in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1 (S1904: Yes), the specific prize winning opening solenoid 209a is turned on (S1905), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1906), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired operation counter is the end timing of the round game defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is turned off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the round is not finished (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1910). The start timing of the ending performance is determined to be the start timing of the ending performance when the final round of the jackpot game (fourth round in the case of the jackpot A) is completed, the specific prize winning port 650a is closed, and the waiting time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, elapses. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1912). The end timing of the big win is specifically the end timing of the big win game in which the value of the acquired operation counter is defined in the big win operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (end timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the type of the big win is the big win B (S1913). When it is determined that it is a jackpot B (S1913: Yes), 15 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1914), and the process proceeds to S1916. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (the jackpot A or the jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process proceeds to S1915.

In the process of S1915, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), then the state command corresponding to the game state after the big win is set (S1916), the end of the big win for setting the end of the big win is set (S1917), and the process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and then this process ends. Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1918).

In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S2001). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period during which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S2001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S2004). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002: No), this process is terminated.

After executing the process of S2004, it is then determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and then this processing is terminated. In the process of S2005, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and the process ends.

By constructing in this way, when a termination condition established with the passage of time (elapsed of 30 seconds) and a termination condition established with the winning of a ball (winning 10 balls) are provided as termination conditions of the round game, the operation control of the big win game can be executed based on the same operation scenario even if either of the termination conditions is established. Therefore, the control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the winning control process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this winning control process (S1805). This prize winning control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired value of the action counter) of the action scenario (action scenario defined in the prize winning action scenario table 202e2) set when the prize winning flag 203k is set to ON in the special train start-up winning process (see S108 of FIG. 50).

In the role winning control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start winning a role (S2101). Here, it is determined whether the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26(b)) is 1 or not. When it is determined that it is time to start winning a role (S2101: Yes), an opening command for winning a role is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the time to start winning the role (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the current time is during the winning of the role (S2103). If it is determined that the player is not in the middle of winning the role (S2103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize is in progress (S2103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e for the role item is 26 or not. When it is determined that it is time for the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and then this process is terminated. Although not shown, a process of closing (turning off) the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) and a process of turning on the storage solenoid 209c are executed according to the value of the action counter corresponding to the action scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), next, it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the prize winning (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e for the role item is 750 or not. When it is determined that it is time to end the award winning (S2106: Yes), the award winning flag 203k is set to OFF (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is ON (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the time to end winning the role (S2106: No), the V passage detection process is executed (S2112), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 59, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the current start-up processing was started during execution of the power-off processing (see FIG. 60) in S4117 due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or was started when only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (because the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut off), so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if this launch process was started after the power outage was completed after the power outage was instantaneous power outage, or if the reset was started only on the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 by noise, etc. Since the keyword 55AAh is remembered, the data of RAM223 is determined to be normal (S4003: NO) and shifts to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset during execution of the power-off processing in S4117. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on when the current start-up processing is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off, for example, because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely cut off, the process of S4004 to S4006 was passed through to the process of S4008, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clear processing of S4009 is skipped is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 through the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. This is because the control of the lamp control device 113 can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). The reason why it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S4101 is that S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), but it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are executed to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the setting for switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the performance effect, and the corresponding performance is set to be performed when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of this rendering update process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4111, command determination processing (S4112) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and a variable display setting process is executed for setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed to determine whether or not the first movable valve operation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202), and then this processing ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to operation control of the first movable valve 66b that is executed when power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, the operation scenario is updated without delay. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control contents on the main controller 110 side and the status grasp contents on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, an operation scenario (an operation scenario for grasping the operation status of the first movable valve 66b on the voice lamp control device 113 side) is set only when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to operation control of the first movable valve 66b that is executed when power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is set. or a command indicating the operation control contents of the first movable valve 66b each time a jackpot game is executed. Then, the contents of the received command and the contents of the updated operation scenario may be compared, and a process of correcting the updated contents of the operation scenario may be executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the accuracy with which the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the details of the operation control on the main control device 110 side. Further, the operation scenario update process of the sound lamp control device 113 may be executed in consideration of the time lag required until the command output from the main control device 110 is received.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4203). Here, the special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), the special figure variation start processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command is received (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4205, if it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). Here, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) of the received pending ball number command is analyzed, and the value of the corresponding counter provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated (S4209). Specifically, when a special symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number of variable display of the special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

In addition, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the number of reserved balls of variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (special figure entrance 64, through gate 67) and the value of the various reserved ball number counters is added, or when the value of the various reserved ball number counters is subtracted when various fluctuation start processing is executed. The values of the number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter can be matched with the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110.

Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., when the start winning prize, the variable display setting, that is, when the reserved ball number command is notified based on the change of the various reserved ball numbers, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, Various reserved ball number counters of the control device 110 can be matched with the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d.

Also, in the process of S4208, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4211), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (storing) in the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of voice lamp control device 113), and executes processing (prefetching effect) based on the received winning information. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4212: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4213), and this processing ends. The details of this state command reception processing (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the game state (normal state, time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 and the winning game state (during the jackpot, during winning the role) are set in the sub-state setting area 223g.

Next, in the process of S4212, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the process of S4214 that the stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), the stop-related process is executed (S4215), and this process ends. A detailed description of this stop-related process (S4215) will be given later with reference to FIG. 65, but based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110, a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the third and fourth symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when special symbol variation is performed as a period during which special symbol variation display is performed, but even during execution of special symbol variation based on the preset variation pattern, there is a case where processing for forcibly stopping special symbol variation is performed according to the result of another special symbol variation. Therefore, the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation display (variation performance) of the third and fourth symbols can be stopped in correspondence with the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbols and the situation of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether the general map related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216). The details of the normal map related process (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4216, if it is determined that the normal figure related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the winning related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4218). The details of the win-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but as a result of the lottery of special symbols, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big win game or the small win game executed when the big win or the small win is won.

In the processing of S4218, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the command is set so that processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described, but in the command determination process (S4112), the order of determining whether or not the reception of various commands is performed may be performed using an order other than the order shown in this embodiment, for example, the process of determining whether a state command has been received may be defined to be performed before the process of determining whether a special figure variation pattern command is received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the main controller 110, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, the special figure variation pattern command is set, and the state command indicating that the game state has changed after that is set. Technique state can be determined earlier than the special figure variation pattern command.

Next, with reference to Drawing 62, special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 62 is the flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and the process of setting the display mode (main fluctuation fluctuation pattern, dependent fluctuation fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the set game state is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 sets the display mode to be displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When special figure fluctuation start processing is set, first. Set the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d to ON (S4301), extract the fluctuation pattern from the received special figure fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and select the detailed display mode using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S4303).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223g is read to determine whether the current game state is the time saving state (S4304). In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), the command for display in the normal state is set (S4305), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the processing of S4305, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 11 (b) is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), the command for display during the time saving state is set (S4306), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted by 1 (S4307), the value (variation time) corresponding to the variation pattern received this time is set in the variation time counter 223r (S4308), and this processing ends.

Next, the winning command process (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the winning command process (S4211). This winning command process (S4211) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the type of the received winning command (special design, normal design) and the current game state.

When the winning command process (S4211) is executed, first, based on the information included in the received winning command, it analyzes which symbol type it corresponds to, and sets (stores) it in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4401). Then, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the variation time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (0) (S4404: No), the variable time (variable time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time cannot be reported as the remaining period of the V rush, so the extracted variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), The process proceeds to S4412.

On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), it is possible to add the variable time (variable time of the special symbol) included in the winning command received this time as the remaining period of the V rush, and then it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405). In the processing of S44405, it is determined whether or not the current time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In this embodiment, during the V rush, during the accessory winning game period and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V rush is not additionally notified. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to concentrate on various winning games and play the game.

In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), the current is in a state where the additional notification can be executed, so the value corresponding to the variable time extracted in the process of S4403 is added to the value of the short time counter 223i (S4407), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is added by 1, and the process proceeds to S4409.

Although illustration is omitted, when the variable time is added in the processing of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set and an additional notification effect (see FIG. 15(a)) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, all the values added in the processing of S4407 are configured to be notified as the additional notification effect, but without being limited to this, the added value may be divided into multiple times with the added value being the upper limit, and the additional notification effect may be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the addition of the remaining period (short remaining time) of the V rush, so that the performance can be executed so that the player does not get tired of it early.

In addition, until the value added in the processing of S4407 reaches a predetermined value, or until the value of the time short period counter 223i is subtracted to a predetermined value, the value added in the processing of S4407 may be configured not to be notified, and the variable time included in a plurality of winning commands (variation time of special symbols) may be added and notified. As a result, the length of the remaining short time added in one additional notification effect can be made unexpected. Also, in this case, for example, when the variable time (for example, 50 seconds) of the same length as the variable time (for example, 50 seconds) set at the time of winning the special pattern is added to the short time counter 223i, the additional notification performance of 50 seconds may be executed in the additional notification performance. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is ON in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), and when it is determined that the special winning flag 223n is ON in the processing of S4406 (S4406: Yes), the extracted variation time is stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4410), and the process proceeds to the above-described S4411 processing.

After completing the processing of S4411, the value of the prefetch counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), then other processing is executed (S4412), and then this processing ends.

Next, the state command reception processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4212). This state command reception processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes the processing for setting the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 differently according to the set game state. Details of the state command reception processing (S4213) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game status is to be changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4501: No), the processes of S4502 to S4508 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4509. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4502).

In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently winning (S4503). When it is determined that the normal pattern is not hit (S4503: No), the display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), the information indicated by the state command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4509), and the processing is terminated.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the command set in the process of S4504, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in this embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, only by outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern can be set based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, information (confirmation information) indicating the content of the display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the sound lamp control device 113 side. is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the already set display data is rewritten to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, simple display data showing proper information can be set, and a variable effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). As the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, or display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol, may be used display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable effect display.

In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern may be set on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. In the processing of S4502, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time saving state (S4507), and if it is determined that the game state is the time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the time saving state) (S4507: Yes), display indicating the V rush mode. command is set (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4509 described above. If it is determined that the game state does not have a time saving state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the current pattern is winning (S4503: Yes), the command for display indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4506), and the processing of S4509 described above is performed. When the display command is set in the processing of S4505, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display mode showing the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the stop-related process (S4215), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop related process (S4215). In this stop-related processing (S4215), processing for setting a display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when stopping and displaying based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main controller 110 is executed.

When the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure determination command (S4601). When it is determined that it is a special figure confirmation command (S4601: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation is set (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4603.

In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether the stop related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). When it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command is received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), the display command indicating the special symbol temporary stop mode is set (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processing of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4606.

When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbols is set in the process of S4605, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display mode (characters of "STOP") indicating the temporary stop is displayed, and the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted.

In the processing of S4606, it is determined whether the stop related command received this time is a special figure fluctuation restart command (S4606). This special symbol variation resume command is a command set when the special symbol variation resumes in the special symbol variation executing process (see S206 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 44). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation resume command is received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to OFF (S4607), and the display command indicating the special figure fluctuation restart is set (S4608).

Then, it is determined whether or not the unreported information was updated during the period when the interruption flag 223m was set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not information indicating a new fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported pending number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the short time counter 223i is added in correspondence with the update content (S4610), the information in the uninformed period storage area 223j, the uninformed pending number storage area 223k, and the reported pending number storage area 223s are updated, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation restart command is not received (S4606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In addition, the value added by the processing of S4610 is the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, the special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the numerical value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is collectively added at the timing when the subtraction starts. By constructing in this way, in a state where the subtraction of the variable time of the special symbols is stopped, the players are made to pay attention to various winning games, and the addition notification performance is collectively executed after the completion of the various winning games, so that the players can expect that the remaining period of the V rush will be added in large quantities even after the completion of the various winning games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the general map related process (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose map-related processing (S4217). This normal figure related process (S4217) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Hereinafter, the details of the normal map related processing (S4217) will be described.

When the general pattern related processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the general pattern related command received this time is the general pattern variation pattern command (S4701). When it is determined that the received command is the general pattern variation pattern command (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a general pattern variation pattern command (S4701: No), then the general pattern related command received this time is a normal pattern per start command (S4703). When it is determined that the received command is a general pattern per start command (S4703: Yes), a small per winning command for display is set (S4704), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not a normal map per start command (S4703: No), then it is determined whether the general map related command received this time is a special electric operation command (S4705). If it is determined that the received command is a special electric operation command (S4705: Yes), the display V winning command is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined to be a trick (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to OFF (S4708), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4707 that the extension flag 223p is not ON (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and this process ends.

In the processing of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special electric operation command (S4705: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal map related command received this time is a normal map per end command (S4709). If it is determined that the received command is not the end command per normal pattern (S4709: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the received command is a general pattern per end command (S4709: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is ON (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), the V rush flag 223q is set off (S4713), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S4710, if the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the normal pattern is set (S4714), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal figure winning game is executed in a state where the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set to ON in order to extend the V rush effect. Then, the end timing of the V rush performance is varied according to the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal game. Specifically, when the ball does not enter the special electric operation port 643 in the normal game, the V rush performance is terminated at the end timing of the normal game, and when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and the role winning game is executed, the V rush performance is ended at the end timing of the role winning game. Incidentally, when the ball enters the V winning opening 165 in the role winning game, the effect based on the big winning game (V big winning game) is preferentially executed.

With this configuration, the player can be notified of the period during which the player can aim for the V jackpot game regardless of the game state, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4219). In this win-related processing (S4219), processing is performed for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game or the role-winning game to be executed when the jackpot or the role-winning game is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls obtained during a winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and processing for setting a prize ball number command for display based on the accumulation result is executed.

In the hit related process (S4219), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is a jackpot related command (S4801). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the jackpot related processing (S4802), which is one of the winning related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is ON (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current big win is a special win (jackpot B) (S4911), and if it is determined to be a special win (jackpot B) (S4911: Yes), the special win flag 223n is set to OFF (S4912), and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current big win is not a special win (big win B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped and the process ends as it is.

In the processing of S4903, if it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), extract the number of times of reduced working hours given in the jackpot to be executed this time (S4904), read the special figure winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S4905), select the target with the upper limit of the number of times of shortened working hours extracted from the read special figure winning information (S4906), and select the number of special figure winning information is stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k (S4907), the variable time included in the selected special figure winning information is calculated (S4908), the calculated variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4909), the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4910), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4913). If the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4914), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command, so the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. A round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of update commands may be provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the current round number may be calculated on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the round number command for display may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S4915). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end processing is executed (S4916), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot ending process (S4919), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S4919).

In the jackpot end processing (S4919), the number of times of saving time given in the jackpot to be executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the read-ahead counter 223h (S5002), and then the value stored in the unnotified pending number storage area 223k is read (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). When it is determined that the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (0) (S5004: No), the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15(a)) is in a state where it is not possible to execute the additional notification effect (because there is no fluctuation time information to be added).

On the other hand, in the process of S5004, if it is determined that the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, if there is information indicating the variable time that can be added and notified (variable time information of special symbols not used for the added report), the value of the prefetch counter 223h is subtracted in correspondence with the read value (S5005), and out of the values stored in the uninformed pending number storage area 223k , the value corresponding to the value subtracted in the process of S5005 is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning information (special figure reservation information) contained in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) (S5008), and if it is determined that it is not included (S5008: No), a display addition command corresponding to the read variable time stamp is set (S5009), and the variable time stored in the unnotified period storage area 223j is used for this current addition effect. The period corresponding to the obtained fluctuation time is cleared (S5010), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5008, when it is determined that the winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) is included in the winning information storage area 223b (S5008: Yes), a display command corresponding to the variation time until the special winning variation is completed is set (S5011). In other words, when the special symbol variation executed one after another is the special symbol variation corresponding to the special winning, even if the variation time for four reserved special symbols can be summed up and reported as the addition notification performance, only the variation time obtained by adding the variation time of the next special symbol variation, the variation time of the next special symbol variation and the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the special winning (special winning variation) is used in the addition notification performance.

Furthermore, a display command indicating a special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special win flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process proceeds to S5010 described above.

As a result, when there is winning information indicating winning of a special win (jackpot B) in the reserve of special symbols at the end of the big win game, an effect for informing the transition to the special mode (heaven mode) and a variation time "220 seconds" until the special win variation ends are displayed as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the special winning game (the big winning game in which the big winning B is set) is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, after the end of the special winning game, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the player is not notified of the time of variation of the reserved and stored special symbols after the special winning variation, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the end of the big winning game can be made difficult for the player to understand until the big winning game is completed.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a role related command (S4803). When it is determined that the received command is a role-hitting related command (S4803: Yes), the role-hitting related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the winning-related process (S4804), which is one of the winning-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role-related process (S4804). In the role-winning related processing, a process for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to the role-winning game executed when the role-winning is executed, and when the role-winning is executed, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the award-related processing (S4804), first, it is determined whether the winning-related command received by the winning-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) is the award-winning start command (S5101).

In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the accessory winning start command is received (S5101: Yes), the display accessory winning start command is set (S5102), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the received command is not the winning start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V entrance passing command (S5103).

In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S5103: Yes), the prize winning command for display accessories is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the received command is not the V entrance pass command (S5103: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V pass command (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the V passing command is received (S5105: Yes), the display V hit command is set (S5106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the received command is not the V passing command (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5107: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the processing of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not the command related to the winning of the role (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806), the prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after addition is set (S4807), and this processing is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON is accumulated in the number of prize balls counter. Information indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the accumulated value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game) or during the V rush production (see display area HR2 in FIG. 12(c)).

By constructing in this way, the cumulative number of balls acquired during a period (advantageous continuation period) from the setting of the time-saving state (V rush) to the end of the V rush can be reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but any configuration may be used as long as the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. In this case, it is preferable to provide a means for discriminating the winning game state (during jackpot, during winning the accessory) based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g at the time of receiving the prize ball command and accumulating the number of prize balls for each discrimination result. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily sorted.

Further, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period may be accumulated and displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of V jackpot games executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is cumulatively displayed (see display area HR1 in FIG. 12(c)). The lottery probability of the lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, the player can analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and can be motivated to play the game.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) executes the process of setting the variable pattern command for displaying the special symbol based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). And, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), since the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S5205. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5201: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5202).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), based on the variation pattern related to the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set (S5203), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and S5205. Go to processing.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the special figure stop type command for display is set (S5208), and this processing ends.

Next, the rendering update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period, and executes the process for setting the effect mode based on the updated counter values.

In the effect update process (S4111), first, it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300), and if the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, if the special symbol fluctuation is not interrupted (S5300: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the short time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time short period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the value of the short period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the short period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then it is determined whether the value of the short period counter 223i after updating is 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the updated value of the short period counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the short period counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining variable time is short is set (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. When the display command is set in the processing of S5308, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, and an effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) is set to indicate to the player that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is short. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed reaches 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining variation time is short is set, but this is not the only option. A display command may be set to indicate that the time is short. By constructing in this way, when the performance mode (for example, unlucky performance) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol variation under execution is short is not set (unlucky performance is not executed in the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation under execution is long or short.

Also, in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates the remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the variable time of the next variation (the variable time of the special symbol variation to be executed next) is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variable time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is S5. It is determined whether it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the process of 313 (S5314).

In the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation read out in the process of S5313 (S5314: Yes) When it is determined that the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, when the V jackpot game is executed, it is set after the V jackpot game ends. A display command indicating a lucky time is set for informing the player that the V rush period is likely to become longer (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309. On the other hand, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is not larger (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation read in the processing of S5313 (S5314: No), skips the processing of S5315 and proceeds to the processing of S5309.

When the display command is set in the processing of S5315, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display mode of the lucky time effect shown in FIG. 19B is set. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the period during which the player is more advantageous during the V rush period, so that the game during the V rush period can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. In the present embodiment, the execution trigger of the lucky time effect is set to the case where the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation by 10 seconds or more. However, it is not limited to this, and the period in which the remaining variation time becomes longer when the special symbol variation is interrupted may be notified to the player by the lucky time effect. ) It is also possible to use the determination of the above as a trigger for executing the lucky time effect.

Also, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation read in the processing of S5313, the processing of S5315 is always performed. A lottery process for determining whether or not to set a display command indicating that the time is long may be executed, and only when the result of the lottery process determines that the display command should be set, the display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long may be set. By constructing in this way, in a state where a performance mode (for example, lucky time performance) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol variation under execution is long is not set (the lucky time performance is not executed in the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation under execution is long or short.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the short time counter 223i after updating is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol variation is not executed even though the end condition of the time saving state is not established, so a display command indicating "??" The display command set in the processing of S5311 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that it is a period during which the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), the V rush flag 223q is set off, and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, another effect update process is executed (S5309), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 to complete drawing processing for one frame of an image. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", the data for one page including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the NOR-type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. The boot program stored in d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 74, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like, while eliminating the need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and executes various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, subsequently, according to the rest of the boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S610). 3). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and ending the boot process.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all made up of DRAM. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated productions using the auxiliary production unit.

On the other hand, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. good too. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may be such that a part of the remaining boot program is further transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may be further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a may be set in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is repeated a plurality of times including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

In the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is canceled, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw and display an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can start normally by inspecting whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the leading address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. be done.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 may write transfer end information indicating transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. The MPU 231 may read information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detect the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the head address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the power-on varying image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. transferred to The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later, instructs the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is kept ON until transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during this period, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, a player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64 (start winning). , that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since a simple variation performance can be performed by using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play the game at ease even while the power-on main image is displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the power is restored.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after identifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a drawing list of the image is created and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). Command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. At the same time, if the display demonstration command or the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. do.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the drawing of the image can be controlled so as to display the performance image corresponding to the mode on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically specified. In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is instructed to use the continuous notice effect. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the image and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated from the types of sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which are determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected in the command determination processing, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. migrate.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then all the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always makes a judgment of the start of variation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, when a variation performance having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is instructed by the main controller 110, the next variation pattern command for display is received from the main controller 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and another variation display is suddenly started. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variable display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, display settings are made so that even when the main controller 110 actually instructs a variation effect having a longer variation time than the set display data table, the demonstration effect is displayed after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed and until the next display pattern command is received from the main controller 110, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the processing, the player can continue to see the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is finished, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406).

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of the big hits A to G, the small hits A to C, the reach out, and the complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Finally set (S6602).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set to on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is described as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. In the task processing (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since main controller 110 always determines the start of a change several seconds or more apart, two or more stop-type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, it is impossible for two or more stop-type commands for display to be stored in the command buffer area. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type table is determined on the assumption that the stop type is completely out of line. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is set, the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 even when the ``big win of the special pattern'' is actually set, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has hit the ``big hit of the special pattern'', and there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, by setting the stop pattern corresponding to the complete loss as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special pattern jackpot" even if the third symbol display device 81 displays the stop pattern of the complete loss in the case of a ``special symbol jackpot'' in fact, so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408).

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410).

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412).

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414).

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol in the main control device 110 (timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command). 13 shows various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel), and furthermore, when one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped with a symbol indicating failure regardless of whether or not the predetermined variation pattern (variation time) has ended. configured to display.

Then, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the command set when the special pattern fluctuates from the main control device 110, the fluctuation stop processing (see the S4217 in FIG. (Variable display command (forced stop command) to be displayed to support the display form of a special design that is forcibly displayed is configured.

In this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third pattern or the fourth pattern is not stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the stop display based on the forced stop command received later is executed. That is, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third pattern and the fourth pattern can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main controller 110 .

In addition, the fluctuation stop command for display also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display command indicating this temporary stop (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table in which display data in which the symbol to be displayed in a stopped state slightly fluctuates is set as the fluctuation stop display data is determined.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command in the unprocessed commands (S6416).

Details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the audio lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the target of notification is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). is added, the related command may be output to the corresponding control device.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418).

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the bit corresponding to the other back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, the range of the back face image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the back face image range is stored, Identify the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, it does not receive two or more background image change commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on, or the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420).

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the warning image corresponding to the error type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on varying image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, so S6502. In the process 2, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 and S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for causing the third pattern display device 81 to display an error warning image corresponding to all the error discrimination flags set to ON is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the developed warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, each data table has start information written at address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after address "0001H". When the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. data can be read.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timer counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 to initialize (S7405), and this process is executed. End and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is described are always developed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), based on the rendering content developed in S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are identified, and various parameters required for rendering, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether or not the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the fixed display flag is off (S7209: No), the fixed display effect has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the fixed display effect, so first the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop pattern discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop pattern discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stop pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. As compared with the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 does not have a heavy load, so that a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and the variable display data table describes the pattern offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation, the stop pattern of the previously performed variable performance is specified from the last stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display performance, so after a lapse of a fixed time from the end of the fixed display performance, processing for displaying the demonstration performance on the third pattern display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation performance is not received after the fixed display performance is finished.

In the processing of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration performance is performed after the completion of the fixed display performance, which means that the demonstration performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated as it is, and the V interrupt processing is returned to. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration performance is started again by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, as described above, so that the demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, a process of setting a display data table for stopping display of one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends, is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is completed, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is OFF (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the resident image transfer setting process ends because the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). If there is resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data that has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data to be transferred here). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)), the command determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident object image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as back images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, etc. are resident. Responsiveness can be kept high until 81 displays some image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703). A transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705).

In the process of S7706, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (S7707). If the transfer start flag is ON (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and after setting the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 as the image data to be transferred, the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x that is in the ON state is specified among the back image discrimination flags 233x provided for each back image type, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the processing in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the transfer target image data to be transferred here is to be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off".

Thus, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the back image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in task processing (S6304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by transfer setting processing (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified, and the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and a drawing list is generated by describing, as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite, in the sprite order after the rearrangement. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. Therefore, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the top address of the transfer destination in anticipation of the time when it is in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing can be simultaneously processed in parallel.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time drawing processing of V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image for one frame is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read, and the drawing processing and display processing of the image are executed. After 20 milliseconds from the completion of the drawing processing for the image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. 6b is specified. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately designating one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c for each 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame, the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being rendered.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 107. FIG. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the game board 13, part of the configuration of the main controller 110, and part of the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special electric operation opening 643 and an out opening 644 are provided as ball entrances into which winning balls of the general electric winning device 640 can enter. Then, when the ball wins the special electric activation port 643, the accessory winning game is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one actuation opening for executing the role winning game, and variations cannot be given to the role winning game, so the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored of the game early. In addition, since the role winning game is executed in the same operation pattern each time, the role game is executed at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 (the ball is made to enter the special electric activation opening 643). There was a problem of becoming

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a second special electric operation port 1643 is newly provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the ball that wins the general electric prize device 640 is configured to win any one of the special electric operation port 643, the second special electric operation port 1643, or the out port 644.

Furthermore, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 and when the ball wins the second special electric activation opening 1643, it is configured so that a role winning game with a different opening pattern is executed. 6) is configured to make it easier to win a prize.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the flow situation of the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general figure per game. In addition, when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 and when the ball wins the second special electric operation opening 1643, different action patterns of the role winning game are executed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to execute the role game (make the ball win the special electric operation opening 643) at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to win the V winning opening 165.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the second embodiment differs from the various effects executed in the above-described first embodiment in that the first game method suggesting effect executed based on the remaining variation time of the normal symbol being executed when the role winning game is executed during the time saving state, and the second game method suggesting effect executed based on the remaining variation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) interrupted when the role winning game is executed during the time saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for indicating the game content of the game (special electric game) during the time saving state, the remaining duration of the time saving state, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the execution status of the general figure winning game, and the performance status of the role winning game are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the game in the time saving state is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It was something to do.

However, with the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time saving state (during the V rush) in an easy-to-understand manner, but during the V rush, the player cannot select a game method in order to make the player perform a better game. That is, when a role winning game that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation (the period until the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is completed) is executed, the current situation is that it is better to finish the role winning game as soon as possible while aiming to win the ball to the V winning opening 165 by causing the V winning device 65 to win a plurality of balls, or the winning of the ball to the V winning opening 165 is given up. It was not possible to suggest (report) to the player whether it is better to continue the accessory winning game for as long as possible.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the above-described first game method suggestive effect and second game method suggestive effect are executable, it is possible for the player to select the game method of the role-winning game based on the effect contents of the various suggestive effects to be executed. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method, so that the player can be interested in various suggested performances to be executed. Also, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment can flow down to the second special electric operation opening 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above except that the configuration inside the electric winning device 640 is different. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 3) in that a notch is provided at the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (below the position separated by the second movable valve 642), and the lower end of the second partition 640k2 is formed in order to form a fourth flow path 641d through an opening formed by the notch into which the balls can flow. The difference is that a fourth partition wall 640k4 connected to the side is provided.

In order to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down toward the special electric activation port 643 without the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a flowing into the fourth flow path 641d, the normal position (see FIG. 88) shielding the second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641d and the flow path for the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a to flow down the second flow path 641b and enter the special electric activation opening 643 are blocked. The difference is that a variable third movable valve 1643 is provided to the operating position (see FIG. 89) leading to the 4th flow path 641d.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving the third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and is variably operated between the above-described normal position and the operating position in a predetermined variable pattern when the operation control of the normal game by the main controller 110 is started. The third movable valve 1643 is configured to be at the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is turned on (when energized), and at the normal position when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (when not energized). Therefore, in the state in which the normal figure per game is not executed, it is located at the normal position. In addition, in the second embodiment, the game content (operation pattern) of the role winning game executed in the case of winning the ball in the special electric activation opening 643 and the case of winning the ball in the second special electric activation opening 1643 are different, and the ball winning in the second special electric activation opening 1643 is configured to make it easier to win the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the winning game. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF, by positioning the third movable valve 1642 in the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special electric operation opening 1643, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally allowing the ball to enter the second special electric operation opening 1643.

Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is designed so as not to come into contact with the second movable valve 642 positioned in the second state (the state in which the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). By configuring in this way, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642 .

Then, when the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is positioned in the operating position, as shown in FIG. Although the detailed description will be given later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern triggered by the start of the normal game, and is configured to repeatedly perform the variable operation of maintaining the operating position (see FIG. 89) for 0.2 seconds and the normal position (see FIG. 88) for 1.5 seconds. That is, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 positioned in the first state enter the special electric operation opening 643, and about 15% enter the second special electric operation opening 1643. Therefore, during a game per normal figure, the special electric operation opening 643 becomes an operation opening in which the ball is more likely to win than the second special electric operation opening 1643.

Further, the ball is more likely to enter the V winning port 165 in the executed accessory winning game when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643 than when the ball enters the special electric operating port 643.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game triggered by the normal symbol lottery, the ease of winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game differs depending on the game result during the normal figure winning game (in which operation opening the ball wins). can improve the interest of

In this embodiment, it is determined by the variable operation of the third movable valve 1642 whether the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643 in the normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state. Although it is possible to execute a winning game, it is not limited to this, for example, as a normal pattern winning type set when winning in a normal pattern lottery, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state wins to the special electric operation opening 643, and about 15% wins to the second special electric operation opening 1643. It may be configured to be able to set an advantageous general pattern per type in which an advantageous general pattern per game is executed with a high percentage of winning balls to the special electric operation port 1643.

By constructing in this way, the player aiming at the V jackpot game by the special electric game can be made to pay attention to all of the lottery result of the normal pattern (the type of the winning of the ordinary pattern to be set), the winning game of the normal drawing and the winning game of the accessory, and the special electric game can be played more enthusiastically.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the remaining period of the normal figure long per game is less than a predetermined period (less than 15 seconds) in the state in which the normal figure long per game and the role per game are performed in the time saving state (V rush) in duplicate, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the remaining time of the winning game is a predetermined period or more (15 seconds or more). The same reference numerals are given to the same display modes as those displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is completed, and during the time saving state (special symbol variation) When the role game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted). That is, while the accessory-per-game is being executed, it becomes a period during which the remaining period of the time saving state is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be played without worrying about the remaining period of the time-saving state until the ball enters the V winning port 165 (V winning) after the role winning game is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time saving state (V rush), there are a method of lengthening the period of the time saving state (the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied) by setting a long variation time as a special symbol change executed during the time saving state, and a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the role winning game is executed. The former method is based on the result of a special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the player's skill, so there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may decrease when a short variation time is set as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the length of the period from which the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted can be varied according to the skill of the player, the player can be motivated to play the game as opposed to the latter method described above.

Here, a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the accessory winning game is executed will be described. The game during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. Then, during the normal figure winning game, the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 and the second special electric operation opening 1643 in the general electric winning device 640 to execute the role winning game, the ball is made to enter the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 during the role winning game (V winning), and the game (special electric game) aiming at the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed.

And, the normal symbol lottery which is the trigger for the start of the special electric game is configured not to be newly executed in the state where the normal symbol lottery is already executed or during the normal pattern winning game. In other words, the accessory winning game and the lottery of normal symbols are configured to be executable in duplicate. Further, a plurality of end conditions are set for the role winning game, and the role winning game is completed when a predetermined number (three) of balls wins in the V winning device 65 during the role winning game, or when a predetermined period of time (a period in which the action scenario of the role winning game is updated until the end timing of the role winning game) elapses.

Therefore, by lengthening the period during which the normal pattern winning game is executed overlapping with the period during which the normal pattern winning game is not executed, that is, the execution period of the special symbol variation in the period during which the normal pattern winning game is not executed can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the execution interval of the winning game due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the normal symbol lottery period (during the variation period).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening operation patterns can be executed as a normal pattern winning game, and an advantageous normal pattern winning game in which an open state (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is opened) in which the ball can be won into the general electric winning device 640 during the normal pattern winning game is set relatively long, and a disadvantageous normal pattern winning game in which the open state is set shorter than the advantageous normal pattern winning game are configured to be executable. Further, in the unfavorable general pattern winning game, after the open state in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640 is set, the closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the general electric prize device 640 is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

Even in the long-term closed state of this disadvantageous normal pattern winning game, it is substantially impossible to execute a new role winning game as in the above-described normal symbol fluctuation period. Therefore, when the role winning game and the disadvantageous normal symbol winning game are executed in duplicate, by lengthening the execution period of the role winning game, the execution period of the special symbol variation in the period in which the new role winning game is not executed can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution interval of the accessory per game from becoming longer due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the closing period during the normal per per game.

As described above, it is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol variation during the unfavorable period by determining the unfavorable period (ordinary figure fluctuation period, closing period of the general figure per game) during which the new role winning game is not executed (hardly) during the V rush, and the unfavorable period and the role per game period in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted. In the case of duplication, it is configured to be able to notify the player to that effect.

In other words, the game situation of the normal figure winning game during the role winning game is configured so that the player can visually recognize the performance contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . And, according to the game situation of the normal figure per game during the accessory per game, it is configured to vary the production mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(a), when the accessory per game is being executed (the special figure variation is interrupted) and the closed period of the unfavorable normal per game is for a long time (15 seconds), the display area HR10 displays the comment "10 seconds until the end of the normal per" as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the unfavorable normal per game (remaining period until the end of the closed period). In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP without winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the winning role game. Since other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the game aiming at V winning by causing the ball to enter the V winning device 65 for the role winning game being executed by the player, that is, the end condition of the role winning game based on the winning ball is likely to be satisfied, and the period of the role winning game is likely to be shortened, but the V winning can aim at the big winning game (V jackpot game). It is possible to select whether to execute one game or to give up execution of a big winning game (V big winning game) by winning a V prize and to execute a second game (a game in which a ball is not shot) for lengthening the playing period for winning a role by establishing a termination condition for the winning game for a role based on the passage of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the role winning game and the long-time variation of the normal symbols overlap, information for allowing the player to select the game method (first game, second game) is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 90(a). Specifically, when the role winning game is being executed (the special figure variation is interrupted) and the remaining period of the normal symbol variation during execution is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds), a comment "15 seconds until the end of the normal figure variation" is displayed in the display area HR11 as information indicating the remaining period of the normal symbol variation. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP without winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the winning role game. Since other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By constructing in this manner, the length of the period during which the special symbol variation is interrupted can be changed according to the player's skill (game contents to be executed), so that the player can actively execute the game during the V rush (during the time reduction state). In addition, since it is constructed so that a game result that can be advantageous to the player in different respects can be generated regardless of which game the player selects, the subsequent game result can be greatly changed depending on the game selected by the player, and the game method can be selected more positively.

Further, in this embodiment, at least the advantageous normal pattern winning game and the unfavorable normal pattern winning game are configured to be executable as the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern executed during the time saving state is also configured to be able to set the long time fluctuation and the short time fluctuation. When the accessory winning game is executed during the advantageous normal pattern winning game and when the accessory winning game is executed during the short-time fluctuation of the normal symbols, the game (first game) for winning the ball to the V winning device 65 during the accessory winning game is more advantageous to the player.

In this way, by varying the timing (presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) of a disadvantageous period (a period in which a new role-winning game cannot be executed) during the time-saving state (during the V rush) according to the lottery result of normal symbols, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game during the time-saving game (during the V rush).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the role winning game, it is possible to perform an advantageous role winning game in which the ball that has won the V winning device 65 easily enters the V winning opening 165 (V winning), and a disadvantageous role winning game that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous role winning game. When the technique is executed, the probability of winning the V prize is about 1/11.

Therefore, when the role winning game executed overlapping with the disadvantage period described above is the advantageous role winning game, the effects shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) are not executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game (second game) that does not aim at execution of the V jackpot game even though a situation occurs in which the player can easily win the V jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the effect executed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the winning game will be described. FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and FIG.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state (during V rush), the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends is set so that the period obtained by adding the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation to the number of times of time saving (for example, four times of time saving) set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed is set. That is, after the end of the special symbol variation restarted after the end of the big win game (the special symbol variation interrupted when the big win game is executed), the subtraction of the number of times of time saving is started.

Therefore, even when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, a new time-saving state period set after the jackpot game ends is different according to the remaining period of the special pattern variation in the jackpot game (V jackpot game). Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is desirable to execute a big winning game (V big winning game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol variation is long, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property aiming at a big win by a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time saving state and using the special symbol lottery during the time saving state as an element for ending the time saving state (an element for setting the duration of the time saving state). However, as in the first embodiment described above, the short remaining time mode 801 (see FIG. 12(a)) indicating the duration of the time saving state does not indicate the remaining period of each special symbol variation, and information corresponding to the total time until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is completed is displayed. are

In other words, in the effect mode described in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is interrupted by the execution of the role winning game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), when the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption during the winning role game is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(c)), the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "It is better to get VGET with the next winning role", and as shown in FIG. 91(b), the remaining period of the special symbol variation during suspension during the winning role game is 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(d)). , the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment "If you get a VGET with this prize, you have a great chance".

That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is discriminated, and if the result of the discrimination is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), when the V jackpot game is executed by causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 in the current role winning game, an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened is executed, and the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is shortened. If it is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), a ball is made to enter a V winning port 165 in the current accessory winning game, and when the V big winning game is executed, a presentation is executed to indicate that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V big winning game is likely to become longer. Therefore, the player can select the game method during the V jackpot game based on the contents of the performance executed (whether or not the ball enters the V winning port 165), and the game result during the V rush period can be greatly changed based on the game method arbitrarily selected by the player.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in order to execute the production shown in FIG. 91 (a), other production execution conditions are provided, specifically, the first condition that is established when the winning information that is hit and won is included in the acquired general pattern reservation memory (the winning information of the acquired normal pattern), and the second condition that is established when the special symbol variation during the interruption is not the special symbol variation (shorter final variation) that will establish the time saving end condition. By setting the performance execution condition in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is terminated immediately after selecting a game in which the ball is not awarded a V prize during the role winning game being executed according to the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

91(a) and (b) described above may use the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. For example, a comparison means is provided for comparing the remaining period of the special symbol variation during suspension and the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. When the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the special symbol variation during suspension is longer, the performance (see FIG. 91(b)) to encourage V winning during the current role winning game is executed, and the special during suspension is performed. If it is determined that the remaining period of the symbol variation is shorter, it may be configured to execute the effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) that suppresses the V winning during the current role winning game.This makes it possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is being interrupted with respect to the period of the special symbol variation that is actually performed (the period of the special symbol variation that will be executed next), so that the player can perform (set) a highly accurate effect for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute an effect suggesting a game method that can be advantageous to the player based on the normal symbol variation situation during the role winning game (interruption of the special symbol variation) during the V rush, the game status of the normal symbol winning game, and the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation. However, for example, it may be configured to execute a performance suggesting each of the normal symbol variation situation during the accessory winning game, the game situation of the normal symbol winning game, and the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation, that is, only the situation suggesting performance suggesting various situations during the V rush period. By constructing in this manner, the player who has grasped the situation suggesting performance can analyze the game situation during the V rush period, predict the most advantageous game method by himself and provide the enjoyment of selecting the game method.

<Regarding the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG.92 and FIG.93, the flow of the game in a time saving state in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the second embodiment, a normal pattern winning game with a short normal pattern winning game period and a normal pattern winning game with a long normal pattern winning game period are configured to be executable as the normal pattern winning game executed when winning is won in the normal pattern lottery in the time saving state. Then, the ratio of the length of the period in which the general electric prize winning device 640 is in the open state to the length of the entire period of the general pattern winning game is lower in the general pattern winning game in which the period of the general pattern winning game is longer than in the general pattern winning game in which the period of the normal pattern winning game is short. In other words, a normal per game with a short normal per game period can win a ball to the general electric winning device 640 during the normal per game, and it becomes an advantageous normal per game in which the general per pattern game ends in a short period (about 3.5 seconds), and a general per pattern per game with a long period of a general per pattern game can win a ball to the general electric winning device 640 during the general per pattern game, but the period until the end of the general per pattern game. is a long (about 17.5 seconds) disadvantageous normal game.

Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, the above-mentioned disadvantageous normal pattern winning game is a general pattern winning game in which a period in which the general electric winning device 640 is in a closed state after opening the normal electric winning device 640 in the same variable operation as the advantageous normal winning game is set for 15 seconds, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is wastefully subtracted.

Therefore, the timing at which the above-described disadvantageous period is set and the game contents of the winning-accessory game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the game per unfavorable normal pattern (per normal pattern B) is executed. When a normal pattern lottery wins and a disadvantageous normal pattern winning game is executed, a normal pattern winning game is executed in which the general electric prize winning device 640 opens for 1 second, closes for 0.5 seconds, opens for 1 second, closes for 15 seconds, and opens for 0.1 seconds. Then, when the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the first 1-second opening period wins the special electric operation opening 643, the prize winning game is executed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 92(a), if the ball is not allowed to enter the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (personal object winning game) and the game ends after the passage of time, since the personable object winning game ends 8.1 seconds after the personable object winning game is started, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, a part of the unfavorable period set when the game with the unfavorable normal pattern (B) is executed can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation is not subtracted, so that the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be subtracted during the unfavorable period can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(b), when the specified number (three) of balls is won into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game for a role) and the game for a role is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the game for the role (the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted) is shorter than when the game for the role is finished with the passage of time shown in FIG. 92(a). Variation time of pattern variation becomes longer.

In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the period until the end of the normal symbol winning game is displayed in the display area HR10, and furthermore, the sub display area Ds guides and displays the game method in which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is continued and interrupted. When the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period overlaps with the disadvantageous period set when the unfavorable normal game (normal game B) is executed, so that the setting of the unfavorable period does not put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method for ending the accessory winning game being executed with the lapse of time and preventing the useless subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, or selecting a game method for aiming at the V big winning game by winning the ball into the V winning port 165 in the accessory winning game being performed (the probability of winning is about 1/11).

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the flow of the game when the long time variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the game when a long time variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, a short variation of 1 second and a long variation of 15 seconds are selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Here, during the normal symbol variation period in the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted and the normal symbol winning game is not performed, so it becomes a disadvantageous period for the player. Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the normal symbol per game described above with reference to FIG. 92, the game period of the role per game, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted, and the variation period of the normal symbol variation are overlapped so that the variation time of the special symbol variation is not wasted during the unfavorable period.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 93(a), when the specified number (three) of balls is won into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (character per game) and the character per game is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the character per game (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted compared to the case where the character per game is ended with the time lapse shown in FIG. 92(a). period) is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be subtracted during the unfavorable period is lengthened.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(b), when the ball is not allowed to enter the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (accessory winning game) and is terminated after the elapse of time, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds because the accessory winning game ends 8.1 seconds after the accession winning game is started. Therefore, since the fluctuation period of the long normal pattern fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation is not subtracted, the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be subtracted during the disadvantage period can be reduced.

In such a situation, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the period until the variation per normal symbol ends is displayed in the display region HR11, and furthermore, the sub-display region Ds guides and displays the game method in which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is continued and interrupted. When a ball enters the V winning port 165 during the role winning game and the V big winning game is executed, the period of the big winning game overlaps with the variation period of the long-time normal pattern variation (15 seconds), so that the setting of the disadvantageous period does not put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method for ending the accessory winning game being executed with the lapse of time and preventing the useless subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, or selecting a game method for aiming at the V big winning game by winning the ball into the V winning port 165 in the accessory winning game being performed (the probability of winning is about 1/11).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99. FIG. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and part of the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113, and a new solenoid are added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110. Others are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the electric power winning device 640, and the third movable valve solenoid 209f for driving the third movable valve 1642 is added. Although detailed description will be given later, this third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to switch between an ON state and an OFF state at predetermined intervals upon execution of a game per normal pattern. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is varied between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 is operated during the normal game, and the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 flows down toward the special electric operation opening 643, it is switched whether the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643 according to the state of the third movable valve 1642.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the winning ball flowing down in the electric prize winning device 640 .

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the above-described first embodiment is provided with various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa instead of the various operation scenario tables 202e, and is different in that a normal pattern per type selection table 202ab and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac are provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, per general pattern type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b). FIG.95(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to per normal figure classification selection table 202ab. Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the second embodiment provides a plurality of types in the normal game per game executed during the time saving state, and is configured to be able to execute the normal per game with different operation patterns. Although a specific description is omitted, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the normal symbol variation that is won per normal pattern stops (S1117: Yes), the type per normal pattern is selected by referring to the normal pattern per type selection table 202ab based on the value of the second per type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the set game state.

Specifically, the contents defined in the normal pattern per type selection table 202ab will be described. The set game state is a time saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), and when the value of the acquired second per type counter C9 is in the range of "0 to 89", "per normal pattern A" is defined as the normal per pattern type, and in the range of "90 to 99", "per normal per pattern B" is defined as the per normal pattern type. Although the specific operation contents of the normal pattern per game will be described later, when "normal per pattern A" is selected (selection rate 90%), the electric role product 640a will be in an open state a plurality of times (twice) over the entire normal per pattern game period, and a normal per pattern game that is relatively easy to win the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 will be executed. On the other hand, when ``normal pattern winning B'' is selected (selection rate 10%), after the normal pattern winning game similar to ``normal pattern winning A'' is executed (in the latter half of the normal pattern winning game period), the normal pattern winning game is executed in which the period in which the electric accessary 640a is in the closed state is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

As described above, since the normal pattern per game is executed without interruption of the special symbol fluctuation, the "normal per pattern A" allows the ball to win the special electric activation opening 643 or the second special electric activation opening 1643 throughout the per normal per game, and can execute the game aiming at the role per game. Therefore, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is wastefully subtracted, resulting in a disadvantageous normal symbol per game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, in the case where such a normal pattern winning game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the role winning game, by continuing the role winning game for a long time, it is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 90 (a)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol to be subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable normal pattern winning game. As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG.95(c), the content of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is demonstrated. FIG.95(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern executed when a ball passes through a through gate 67, and is referred to when selecting a normal symbol variation time in normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48).

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the variation time of the normal symbol is unified to 3 seconds, so in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol (see S1114 in FIG. 48), only the variation time (variation pattern) of 3 seconds was set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, different variation patterns can be selected based on the set game state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of normal symbols.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired variation type counter CS2. In other words, in the normal state, the same three-second normal symbol variation as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is the time saving state, the value of the variation type counter CS2 is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second in the range of "0 to 179", and a short variation is defined. A long variation is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds in the range of "180 to 197".

Thus, in this embodiment, the length of the period during which the normal pattern is fluctuating largely differs depending on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the variation period of the normal patterns in the time saving state, the normal pattern winning game is not executed, and further, the remaining period of the special pattern variation is subjected to subtraction processing, so that the normal pattern variation pattern is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol variation is executed in the disadvantageous normal pattern variation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the role winning game, the player continues the role winning game for a long time, thereby executing an effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol to be subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable normal pattern variation. As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(a), contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from those of the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the motion scenario tables 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the normal-symbol motion scenario table 202e3 is changed, and that a second role-symbol motion scenario table 202e5 is added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the action scenario table 202e5 for the second role will be described with reference to FIG. 96(b). FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the action scenario table 202e5 for the second prize. This second prize winning action scenario table 202e5 is a data table that defines the action scenario of the prize winning game to be executed when the ball wins in the second special electric activation opening 1643 in the normal game.

Specifically, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "1", that is, immediately after the performance of the role winning game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF, and the OFF state of the storage solenoid 209c continues until the role winning game ends. Then, an operation scenario is defined in which the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the V open/close door 65a is closed) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the game with the accessory, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "26" to "400", that is, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON (the round period is set) for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V open/close door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. A ball that enters the V winning device 65 during this round period passes through the storage valve 66a that is moving to the ball non-storage state (retracted state) and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, since a plurality of balls can be made to flow into the first movable valve 66b during one role-winning game, it is possible to increase the V winning probability during the role-winning game.

Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "400", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the state in which the V open/close door 65a is closed continues until the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650", that is, the operation scenario is defined to continue for 5 seconds. After that, when the value of the scenario counter reaches ``1650'', the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON until the value of the scenario counter reaches ``1675'', that is, for 0.1 second, and then the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF until the value of the scenario counter reaches ``2025''.

In the present embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the above-described operation scenario table 202e2 for the role item and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the second operation scenario table 202e5 for the role item are different in the operation contents of the storage valve 66a. It may be configured to vary the winning ratio of balls to 5.

Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is set to turn off the storage solenoid 209c for 3 seconds after the start of the per-accessory game, set the storage solenoid 209c to on for 2 seconds, and then set the storage solenoid 209c to off again. The operation scenario is defined so that the role-winning game is executed with a period of 1.5 seconds during which the door 65a is open and an ending period of 1.5 seconds (a period during which the V open/close door 65a is closed).

On the other hand, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the operation scenario may be defined so that a role-per-game with an opening period (a period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed) of 3.1 seconds, a round period (a period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in an open state) of 1.5 seconds, and an ending period (a period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in a closed state) of 1.5 seconds is executed. With this configuration, in the role winning game executed based on the winning of the ball in the second special electric operation opening 1643, the storage valve 66a is in a retracted state (ball non-reserving state) in which the ball cannot be stored during the period in which the ball can be made to enter the V winning device 65. Therefore, a plurality of balls that have won the V winning device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, thereby increasing the probability of winning the V winning opening 165. I can.

In addition, in the role winning game that is executed based on the winning of the ball in the special electric operation opening 643, the storage valve 66a is in a protruding state (ball storage state) in which the ball can be stored in the V winning device 65 during the period in which the ball can be won. You can lower your chances of winning.

With this configuration, in the case of varying the ease of winning a ball into the V winning port 165 during the role winning game (V winning rate) according to the type of the role winning game to be executed, the V winning rate can be varied only by changing only the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening and closing door 65a is first opened among the opening pattern of the V opening/closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a. It is possible to simplify the operation control in That is, only during the period from the start of the role winning game to the end of the opening period, an operation scenario is set for each type of the role winning game, and after that, the operation control of various devices can be executed based on the common operation scenario, so that the operation control can be simplified.

In addition, according to the above-described example, it is configured such that the role winning game that is advantageous to the player (the role winning game that is executed when the ball wins in the second special electric activation opening 1643) can win the ball to the V winning device 65 at an earlier stage after the role winning game is started than the role winning game that is disadvantageous to the player (the role winning game that is performed when the ball has won in the special electric activation opening 643). As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute a game that is advantageous to the player. In addition, as the contents of operation of the storage valve 66a, an operation advantageous to the player (an operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is set before the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning device 65 in the role winning game that is disadvantageous to the player. Since an action advantageous to the player (the action to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the V winning hole 165 illegally.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the action scenario defined in the role winning action scenario table 202e2 is different from that in the first embodiment described above. More specifically, the second embodiment differs in that a closed period of 15 seconds and an open period of 0.1 second are defined in the second half of the role winning game, similar to the second role winning action scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96(b).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the role winning game is executed, the playing period of the role winning game can be made largely different between the case of ending the role winning game based on winning a ball and the case of ending the role winning game based on the passage of time. As a result, the game result during the time saving state can be greatly changed according to the selection result of the game method during the accessory winning game, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97(a), the difference from the above-described first embodiment will be described in the action scenario table 202e3 for the normal figure of the second embodiment. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-universal figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation contents of the game per normal pattern executed during the time saving state are different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the second embodiment, the action scenario of the game per normal pattern executed during the time saving state is different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and there are 2 scenarios 202e33 per normal pattern for reducing working hours and 3 scenarios per normal pattern 202e33 for reducing working hours.

First, with reference to FIG. 97(b), the contents of the 2 scenarios 202e33 per standard diagram for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 97(b) is a model that schematically shows the contents stipulated in the two scenarios 202e33 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving 2-per-normal-map scenario 202e33 defines an action scenario of a normal-per-per-map game to be executed when "normal-per-per-per-map A" is selected as the normal-per-per-map type. be done.

Specifically, when the value of the scenario counter is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON, and an operation scenario is defined in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON. It should be noted that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state until the normal game per game ends (the value of the scenario counter becomes "900"). In other words, in the normal game to be executed corresponding to the "normal game A", the winning ball of the electric accessory 640a is configured to always win the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643.

In addition, the third movable valve solenoid 209f is configured such that an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at an operating position where the ball can win a prize in the second special electric operation opening 1643) and an OFF period of 1.5 seconds (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at a normal position in which the ball can win a prize in the special electric operation opening 643) are repeatedly set. That is, the ratio of balls passing through the second movable valve 642 to the second special electric operation opening 1643 is about 11%, and the ratio of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 to the special electric operation opening 643 is about 89%.

Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the normal game is started, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range from "26" to "274", that is, for 1 second, the general electric solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the range from "275" to "400", that is, for 0.5 seconds. The electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, an operation scenario is defined in which the normal solenoid is set to ON again for a range from "401" to "649", that is, for one second, and then the normal solenoid is set to OFF for a range from "650" to "900", that is, for one second. That is, when the normal pattern per game based on the operation scenario stipulated in the 2 per normal pattern scenario 202e33 for reducing working hours is executed, the normal per pattern game is executed in which the opening operation of opening the electric role object 640a for 1 second is executed twice, and the total period of the open state of the electric role object 640a during which the ball can enter the normal electric prize winning device 640 is 2 seconds with respect to the entire period (3.6 seconds) of the normal per pattern game. 0% is a period advantageous to the player (a period during which the special electric game can be progressed (a ball can be entered into the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the 3 scenarios 202e34 per standard diagram for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern per 3 scenario 202e34 defines the operation scenario of the normal pattern per game executed when "normal pattern per B" is selected. Since the contents defined in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per time-saving normal map are the same as the 2 scenarios per time-saving normal map 202e33 described above until the value of the scenario counter reaches "650", a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "650" to "3500", i.e., the general electric solenoid is set to OFF for 15 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "3501" to "3524", i.e., the general electric solenoid is set to ON for 0.1 second.

In other words, the normal pattern winning game defined in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per normal pattern for reducing working hours has a total length of 17.7 seconds for the entire game period per normal pattern, and the total period during which the ball can be won in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the game per normal pattern is configured to be 2.1 seconds. Therefore, with respect to the entire period of the game per normal pattern (17.7 seconds), the total open state period of the electric role object 640a during which the ball can enter the normal power prize device 640 is 2.1 seconds. Furthermore, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state for fifteen seconds.

Therefore, when the 3 normal pattern winning scenario 202e34 for the time saving is set during the time saving state, the period in which the ball cannot win the general electric prize winning device 640 is set long, so that the game becomes a normal drawing winning game disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (when the fourth special symbol variation ends), the time saving state is terminated, and during the normal figure winning game, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted. That is, even during the closed state of 15 seconds, since the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted, it becomes a game per normal pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, with respect to the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa, the normal pattern per time counter 223ab, the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac, and the production set flag 223ad are added. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the normal pattern fluctuation time, and when a general pattern fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process periodically (every 1 millisecond) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is subtracted. It is configured to be referred to when the role-winning game is executed, and to execute various effects based on the counter value.

The normal pattern per time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the game period in which the normal pattern per game is executed, and when the general pattern per start command is received, the normal pattern per game period corresponding to the received command is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process periodically (every 1 millisecond) executed in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) is subtracted.

The shooting prohibition suggesting flag 223ac is set to ON when performing puncture suggesting performance for puncturing the role winning game (ending the role winning game with the lapse of time), and is set to OFF when the role winning game is finished in the state of being set to ON. When the role winning game ends, it is referred to when changing the display mode of the ending screen of the role winning game based on the setting status of the flag and the end condition of the established role winning game (end of prize winning, end of elapse of time).

The performance setting completion flag 223ad is for indicating that a puncture suggesting performance suggesting that the role winning game is terminated based on the lapse of time or performance suggesting winning of the ball to the V winning device 65 during the role winning game is set, and is set to ON when a dedicated performance is set during the role winning game.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a different accessory per game can be executed according to the operation opening (special electric operation opening 643, second special electric operation opening 1643) in which the ball wins during the normal figure per game. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the normal symbol lottery, based on the game state and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (see FIG. 95 (c)) is configured to be selectable. The control processing executed by the main controller 110 is the same except for the contents described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108). This special electric starting opening winning process 2 (S108) is different from the special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above in that the winning type corresponding to the operation opening (special electric opening 643, second special electric opening 1643) in which the ball has won is settable, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. 70 in S4804), and the performance update processing 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) instead of the performance update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72). Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the general-purpose map related process 2 (S4217) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal map related process 2 (S4217). This general figure related process 2 (S4217) is different from the general figure related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above in that the process performed when the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received and the process performed when the general figure per start command is received are changed.

When the general pattern related processing 2 (S4217) is executed, it is first determined whether the general pattern variation pattern command is received (S4701), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4701: Yes), the general pattern variation start processing is executed (S4751), and then this processing ends. In addition, the regular pattern fluctuation start processing (S4751) executed in the processing of S4751 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102, but the processing for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation times are selectable as variation patterns of normal symbols (see FIG. 95(c)), and the degree of advantage of the game executed during the time-saving state is configured to vary according to the selected variation pattern.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received (S4701: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703), and if it is determined that it is received (S4703: Yes), the time per normal pattern based on the received command (END time of the game operation scenario per normal pattern) is set to the time counter per normal pattern (S4752), and the start command per normal pattern for display. is set (S4704), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure per start command is not received in the process of S4703 (S4703: No), the same S4705 to S4714 processing as the general figure related process (see FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S4751) will be described. Figure 102 is the flowchart which shows the contents of normal figure fluctuation start processing (S4751). When the normal pattern fluctuation start processing (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is in the time saving mode (in the time saving state) (S4771), and if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (S4771: No), the normal pattern variation command for display is set (S4771), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving in the process of S4771 (S4771: Yes), extract the normal pattern fluctuation time from the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4772), set the extracted value to the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa (S4773), execute the above-described S4774 process, and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the role-related process 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role-related process 2 (S4851). This award-winning related process 2 (S4851) differs from the above-described award-winning related process (S4804) in that the details of the process executed when receiving a winning-for-a-personal start command or when an ending command is received are changed.

When the role winning related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a role winning start command has been received (S5101), and if it is determined to have been received (S5101: Yes), the role winning start process is executed (S5151), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not been received in the processing of S5101 (S5101: No), the processing of S5103 to S5107, which is the same as the above-described processing related to the character item (S4804), is executed.

In other words, in the processing of S5152, it is determined whether or not an effect is being executed to suggest that it is more advantageous to prohibit the player from shooting the ball. If it is determined in the processing of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not ON (S5152: No), the processing of S5108 to S5109, which is the same as the above-described prize winning related processing (S4804), is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the processing of S5152 (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to OFF (S5153), and it is determined whether the end condition of the current regular game per game is the passage of time (S5154).

When it is determined that the normal per game is over based on the passage of time (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating "success" is set (S5155), and the per game is not over based on the passage of time, that is, when it is determined that the per game is over based on the winning ball (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). In this way, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or unfavorable for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the normal per game during the time saving state, and when the performance of suggesting the game method to the player is executed based on the prediction result, it is determined whether the normal per game is over based on the suggested content, and the display mode of the end screen of the normal per game is changed based on the determination result. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the technique method was the correct selection.

It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, for example, when it is predicted whether it is advantageous or unfavorable for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the normal game in the time saving state, and based on the prediction result, an effect that suggests a game method to the player is executed. , In the processing of S5154, it is determined whether the game corresponding to the actual prediction result (elapsed time, ball winning) ends the game with a normal pattern, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the end screen may be changed. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected production for the player.

Also, in this case, in addition to the above-described effect of suggesting the game method to the player, it is preferable to execute a situation notification effect (for example, effect of suggesting the type of game per normal pattern) for making the player predict the actual game situation. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the effect suggesting the game method to the player is a false effect. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the normal figure winning game and the accessory winning game are executed in duplicate, an effect suggesting the game method to the player is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the role winning start process (S5151) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prize winning start process (S5151). In the role winning start process (S5151), various processes for varying the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the role winning game.

When the accessory winning start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the winning special electric opening is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the current role winning game is a role winning game to be executed when a ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643 (special electric operation opening 1) (S5302), and if it is determined that it is not based on the winning in the special electric operation opening 1 (S5302: No), a display command for indicating advantageous role winning is set (S5303), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301, if it is determined that it is based on the winning of the special electric activation opening 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time counter is read (S5304), and it is determined whether the read value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command for suggesting the end of the time elapsed for each character is set (S5306), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON (S5307), and the process proceeds to S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the sub-display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the ball from being shot is displayed, like the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a).

Also, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the process of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less (S5308), and if it is determined that it is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), by quickly ending the role game, the next general figure per game can be executed again. Since it is in this state, a display command is set to indicate the end of winning a prize (S5309), and the process proceeds to S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the processing of S5309, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 displays a display mode prompting the ball to be shot (for example, ``If you shoot the ball quickly and end the accessory winning game, you have a chance'').

If it is determined in the processing of S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, a display command for indicating the prize winning is set without setting a dedicated display command (S5310), the effect set flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first game method suggestive effect and the second game method suggestive effect are configured to be executable, so that the player can be made to select the game method of the role winning game based on the effect contents of the various suggestive effects to be executed. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method, so that the player can be interested in various suggested performances to be executed. Also, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second embodiment, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect so that the player can select the game method of the role-performing game according to the normal symbol variation and the situation of the normal-performing game that are executed during the role-performing game. Based on the length of the remaining period of the normal symbol fluctuation, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect that can be selected by the player. By constructing in this way, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal pattern variation executed in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is executed for a long time, the period in which the normal pattern variation is not executed in the time saving state becomes longer, and the player's willingness to play is reduced.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. FIG. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, based on the fact that the ball has won the special electric operation opening (the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643), it is configured to execute the role winning game and interrupt the subtraction of the special symbol variation being executed. In other words, it is configured such that the more the role-winning game is executed, the more advantageous the player is. Therefore, the game method during the time-saving state (during the V rush) becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player may become bored with the game.

On the other hand, the third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment in that the processing contents for the special symbol variation being executed when the role winning game is executed are different. Specifically, according to the role winning game type to be executed (set), the processing of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed, the processing of discarding (discarding the remaining variation time, forced stop regardless of the lottery result), and the processing of ending the time saving state in addition to discarding. , is configured to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the role-winning game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

Furthermore, based on the performance executed during the time-saving state (V rush), it is configured to execute the performance that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the role winning game. As a result, for example, when a role-winning game in which the time-saving state ends is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust caused by the sudden end of the time-saving state. In addition, since the player himself/herself can select whether or not to execute the role winning game based on the contents of the performance to be executed, the player can be motivated to participate in the game and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the contents of characteristic effects among the effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. The effect executed in the present embodiment differs greatly from each of the above-described embodiments in that the duration of the time saving state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed in addition to the time-measured subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812, the decrease display in which the value displayed in the timer 812 is greatly reduced when the special symbol variation being executed is discarded by executing the role winning game, and the extinction display in which the time saving state ends due to the execution of the role winning game.

Further, when the special pattern variation being executed is winning a big win (during the big winning variation), the execution of the role winning game is greatly different in that a suggestive performance suggesting that the big winning variation being executed is discarded is executed. Other display contents are the same except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the differences described above. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents executed when the remaining period of the special symbol jackpot variation reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), and FIG. 108(c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108(a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, the display mode of "entering danger time" is displayed, and "10 seconds" is displayed as a period display mode 851 indicating the period until the danger time ends (until the jackpot fluctuation is stopped). Similar to the value displayed on the timer 812 , the period display mode 851 is periodically subtracted (counted down) by the effect update processing of the sound lamp control device 113 .

Further, in the V rush variation area 811, in addition to the pattern imitating "V" corresponding to the success of the game (execution of the V jackpot game) during the V rush, the pattern imitating "skull" showing the game result disadvantageous to the player is variably displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "During Danger Time, it's a big pinch" are displayed.

In other words, when entering the danger time, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility that the big winning variation will stop (execution of the big winning game based on the special drawing) after a predetermined time (10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, this danger time is configured to be executed even in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.

Therefore, when entering the danger time, the player selects whether to execute the special electric game aiming at the role winning game (not shoot the ball) until the end of the danger time, or to execute the special electric game even during the danger time and go for the V winning game enthusiastically.

In this embodiment, the condition for entering the danger time is when the remaining period of the special variation during execution reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), but without being limited to this, for example, the condition for entering the danger time may be different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation during execution is a jackpot or when it is not. It may be constructed so as to be able to enter the danger time only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation fluctuation. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed based on the display of the remaining period of the danger time displayed when the danger time is entered.

In addition, in the above-described example, an example in which a condition for entering the danger time exclusively for the fluctuation of the jackpot is provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player who understands that the ball is fluctuating to play the game without shooting the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the display contents when the role winning game is executed during the danger time and the big winning variation is discarded will be described. FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when the accessory winning game is executed during the danger time and the big winning variation is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when the prize winning is executed during the danger time, the characters "end" are displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, in the V rush variation area 811, a pattern resembling a "skull" is stopped and displayed in a grid pattern to indicate that the jackpot variation that was being executed has been discarded. Furthermore, a comment "Unfortunately... pull back" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, since the accessory winning game is being executed, a display mode for aiming for a V prize in the accessory game is displayed.

Also, since the special symbol variation being executed has been discarded, only "10 seconds", which is the variation time of the next variation, is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to notify the player that the big winning variation has been discarded in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, when the accessory winning game interrupting the big winning variation is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, after continuing the danger time, the performance of notifying that the V big winning game is executed is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 110, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, the value of the first win type counter C2 is acquired when the ball wins the special electric activation port 643, and the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the V winning port 165 is won can be selected based on the acquired value of the first win type counter C2, and the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Differences in point and in. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110(a), three types of jackpot types are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3, and depending on the selected jackpot type, the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, the game state (time reduction number) set after the end of the V jackpot game, and the effect on the special symbols being executed when the role winning game is executed are configured to be different.

Specifically, a jackpot C is defined when the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is in the range of ``0 to 79'', a jackpot D is defined in the range of ``80 to 94'', and a jackpot E is defined in the range of ``95 to 99''.

The "jackpot C" (80% selection rate) has the same content as the V jackpot game executed in each of the above-described embodiments, and is set with 10 rounds (R) of the jackpot game, 4 times of time reduction, and interruption of the special symbol being executed. "Jack D" (selection rate 15%) is set with 10 rounds (R) of jackpot games, 4 times of time saving, and contents of discarding the special symbol variation being executed. "Jack E" (selection rate 5%) is set to 15 rounds (R) of jackpot games, 15 times of time saving, discarding the special pattern variation being executed, and ending the time saving state.

As described above, when the ``jackpot E'' in which the influence of the special symbol variation during execution is most disadvantageous to the player is set, when the V prize is won during the role-winning game, the jackpot game most advantageous to the player and the game state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot game is finished are set, so that the last chance can be given to the player. Further, for example, if the final fluctuation of the time saving state is off and the ending fluctuation is about to end, that is, if the time saving state ends in a few seconds without doing anything, this ``jackpot E'' can be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 110(b), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(b), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. Other than that, they are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when deciding whether to actually execute the danger time performance when a danger time entering condition is satisfied, and is constructed so as to vary the execution probability based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed.

Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 110(c). FIG. 110(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110(c), when the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation, the danger time effect is more likely to be executed than when it is a losing variation. Thus, when the danger time presentation is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the big win is fluctuating.

Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is a jackpot, execution of danger time is selected regardless of the value of the obtained performance counter 223f, and when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is out, no danger time performance is selected within the range of the value of the performance counter 223f from "0 to 89", and execution of the danger time performance is selected within the range of "90 to 99".

By constructing in this way, the danger time performance can be executed even when the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is not successful, so that the game of the player during the danger time can have a game property related to prediction and selection, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Contents of control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing contents in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the control processing executed by the main controller 110 and the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, but the rest are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the details of the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158). This special electric start winning process 3 (S158) is different from the special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above in that when a ball wins the special electric operation opening 643, a different jackpot type can be selected and a process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special electric starting prize winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes of S1301 to S1303 and S1305 to S1309 as the special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed. Then, in the process of S1303, it is determined that the special electric is in operation (during the game per character), and if it is determined that the special electric is in operation, then it is determined whether the jackpot type selected this time is "jackpot E" (S1371), and if it is determined to be "jackpot E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and the special symbol variation stop process is executed. (S1374), the process proceeds to S1375. In addition, since the content of the special symbol variation stop processing (S1374) is the same as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1371, if it is determined that it is not a "jackpot E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is a "jackpot D" (S1372), and if it is determined that it is a "jackpot D" (S1372: Yes), the process of S1374 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not the "jackpot D", that is, that it is the "jackpot C" (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375.

In the processing of S1375, the role winning flag is set to ON (S1375), the command corresponding to the current winning type (“jackpot C” to “jackpot E”) is set (S1376), the special electric operation command is set (S1308), and the process ends.

Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the content of effect update process 3 (S4171). This effect update process 3 (S4171) is different from the effect update process 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) of the above-described second embodiment in that the danger time setting process (S5371) regarding the setting of the danger time effect is configured to be executed after the process of S5306, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the danger time setting process (S5371). In this danger time setting process (S5371), when the condition for executing the danger time presentation is satisfied, it is determined whether the danger time is actually performed, and the process for setting the danger time presentation is executed based on the determination result.

When the danger time setting process (S5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates 10 seconds remaining period (S5601). If it is determined that the value does not indicate 10 seconds remaining period (S5601: No), it means that the conditions for executing the danger time are not satisfied, so this process ends.

In the processing of S5601, when it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the danger time selection table 222ca is referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (special figure lottery result) and the value of the acquired production counter 223f to select whether or not to execute the danger time production (S5602).

In the processing of S5603, based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602, it is determined whether or not to execute the danger time effect (S5603), and if it is determined to be executed (S5603: Yes), a display command indicating the danger time effect is set (S5604), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5603, if it is determined not to execute the danger time effect (S5603: No), this processing ends.

The display command set in the process of S5604 executes the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90(a).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 137. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main controller 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, a special game in which a ball is entered into the special ball entrance 64 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened. It is configured to be a game method that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special electric operation opening 643, a ball opening (second ball opening 1645) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). The V open/close door 65a is configured to be opened when a specific lottery result (small win) is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the opening timing of the V open/close door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is not the winning of the accessory due to the ball entering the special electric operation opening 643, but the second special symbol lottery executed with the ball entering the second ball opening 1645 as a trigger. This small win is a kind of loss, and is a lottery result that enables a predetermined winning device (V winning device 65) to be activated without changing the game state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation). Then, during the time saving state, the lottery of the second special pattern is set so that the variation time is shorter than that of the first special pattern, so that the lottery of the second special pattern is easily executed.

In addition, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the cumulative time-saving end condition established when the sum of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol (number of fluctuations) reaches 100 times, and the special figure 1 time-saving end condition established when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) reaches 4 times are set, and when the cumulative time-saving end condition or the special figure 1 time-saving end condition is established, the time-saving state is established. is configured to terminate.

In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbols set during the time saving state is the same as the variation pattern of the special symbols set during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a small winning game (a game for opening a V winning device 65) is executed by entering a ball into a second ball entrance 1645 in place of a game to enter a ball and winning a small winning in a lottery of a second special pattern, and a game is used in which the time saving state is terminated even when the accumulated time saving end condition is established before the number of fluctuations of the first special pattern (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., four times).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (fluctuation period of the second special symbol) can be variably set in contrast to the above-described first embodiment. Therefore, for example, as the variation period of the second special symbol, a short variation period (e.g., 0.1 second variation time) and a long variation period (e.g., 10 second variation time) can be set. can vary greatly depending on the fluctuation period of Therefore, since it is possible to enrich the variation of the game during the time saving state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the accumulation time saving end condition can be established based on the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit to the number of small winning games to be executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a privilege (V jackpot game) excessively during the time-saving state. Furthermore, by making it difficult to set a short variation period (for example, 0.1 second) as the variation period of the second special symbol set during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of small winning games during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessive amount of benefits (prize balls) in a short period of time.

The characteristic configuration and gameplay of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described below. First, the timing of updating the number of times of time saving and the determination processing timing for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described. As in the fourth embodiment, a simultaneous variation type game machine capable of simultaneously executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to execute update processing of the number of times of shortening of working hours and determination processing for ending the shortening of working hours at the timing of starting variation of each special symbol so that the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the shortening of working hours does not exceed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times). As a result, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special pattern variation of the specified number of times is executed, so that the 101st special pattern variation exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) can be surely performed in the normal state, and the excessive granting of benefits (special pattern variation in the time saving state) to the player is suppressed. However, before the final variation of the time saving state (the 100th special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol variation is started, the time saving state ends, so there is a problem that the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened depending on the timing of discrimination (variation) of each special symbol, giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

Specifically, for example, as the discrimination (variation) of the first special symbol, immediately after the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (the final number of times of time saving) is performed, the discrimination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, when the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing of the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (immediately before the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed). When the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is not executed in a state where the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (final time of the number of times of time saving) is performed, for example, when the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is started after the special figure variation of the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure variation of the 100th rotation is performed.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the 100th special figure fluctuation) that satisfies the time saving end condition and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the 101st special figure fluctuation) that is first executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the timing that is executed first among the timings. It is configured to end the time saving state based on.

By constructing in this way, a high probability state (working time reduction state) of normal patterns can be set until the timing when the specified number of special pattern variations are stopped and displayed or the timing when the special pattern variations of the number exceeding the specified number of times are executed, the player can be provided with the time saving state for the maximum period, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as the timing for executing the 101st special symbol variation, the timing at which the condition for executing the 101st special symbol variation is established can be determined, and the time saving state is completed before the 101st special symbol is determined. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which a time saving state is set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of times of time saving, and a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation when the time saving end condition is established, and the timing when the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation where the time saving end condition is established.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the variation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Then, when a V winning (ball entering a V winning port 165) occurs during a small winning game and a big winning is given, the temporarily stopped special pattern variation is restarted after the big winning game is finished. In the fourth embodiment, the timing for subtracting the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted when the variation of the special symbol that has started to change during the time saving game is stopped.

Since the variation of the temporarily stopped special pattern is the variation started before the big win game, the number of times of shortening of time is not subtracted when the variation of the temporarily stopped special pattern is restarted and stopped. That is, in this embodiment, when a big win is awarded by winning a V prize, in addition to the number of times of reduced working hours granted by the big win, the period until the temporarily stopped variation of the special pattern is stopped is also set as a reduced working time game state.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the most advantageous time-saving state for the player as long as possible.

Here, the fourth embodiment is shown as an example for realizing the game properties of the pachinko machine 10 described in the above-described first to third embodiments (special symbol lottery, special electric operation opening 643, and game properties aiming for a jackpot game) by a different method. Detailed descriptions of the technical ideas and effects that are used in the same manner as in the above-described first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<Regarding the Game Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine in the Fourth Embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 114, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a second ball entrance unit 1640 is provided instead of the general electric prize winning device 640 and a second ball entrance 1645 is provided instead of the special electric operation opening 643.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the special ball entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and by passing through the through gate 67, when the normal symbol lottery is executed and won, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the general electric winning device 640. Then, when the game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the winning of the accessory is executed, and the V open/close door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened.

On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is greatly different in that a second ball entrance 1645 serving as a second special symbol lottery opportunity is provided in place of the special electric operation opening 643 described above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opening timing of the V opening/closing door 65a is not the prize winning to the special electric operation opening 643, but based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1645.

When the game state is the normal state, the player shoots the game ball toward the left side area of the game board 13 in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, makes the ball enter the special symbol ball entrance 64, and executes the game while desiring to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time-saving game state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state) at a rate of 100%.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if the game is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. 0) is set.

A second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the second ball entry unit 1640, and when a game ball enters, a lottery for a second special symbol is executed. And, in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery for the second special symbol. When a small win is won, the V opening/closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to an open state, and when the game ball wins the V winning opening 165, a big win is awarded.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is defined to be 396/400 (approximately 9/10), although the details will be described later. The time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 is the state in which the V prize is likely to occur, which is the most advantageous state for the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery method is different from that of the above-described first embodiment, and the partial configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are changed corresponding to the above-described differences.

First, with reference to FIG. 115, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, a first winning type counter C2 used to select the special symbol jackpot type, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, a small winning type counter C5 used to select the special symbol small winning type, and a first winning random number counter. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of C1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of normal symbols are used for initial value setting of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 55), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da corresponding to a ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 consisting of four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) and a second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203db corresponding to a ball entering a second ball entrance 1645 consisting of four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas). , According to the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area, and the special symbol fluctuation based on the stored various values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area, and the special symbol fluctuation based on the stored various values is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, so the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da.

Further, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small prize as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 may be stored. In this way, regardless of the specification of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small win), all of the counter values acquired by entering the ball into the starting port (the special symbol entrance 64, the second entrance 1645) that triggers the special symbol lottery are stored, and when the special symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the special symbol lottery is executed using only the necessary values among the acquired counter values. Since the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines with different (presence or absence of small wins), parts and technology can be shared, and costs can be reduced.

Further, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reservation areas (reserved first to fourth areas) similar to the special symbols described above.

Then, when starting conditions (fluctuation conditions) of the normal symbols are established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and normal pattern fluctuations are started based on the stored various values.

In this embodiment, each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 is reserved and stored, and each counter value obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored. However, without being limited to this, the function (reservation storage function) for storing each counter value obtained for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) may be omitted.

By constructing in this way, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player as a lottery of one special symbol type are switched according to a set game state, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired in order to execute the advantageous lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that a big hit type selection 4 table 202db is provided instead of the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24 (a)), and a variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202e. They are different in one respect. In addition, since the rest is the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 117 (a), small hit random number table 202da provided in ROM202 of main control unit 110 in a 4th embodiment is explained. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number table 202da. This small hit random number table 202da is a table in which a random number (determination value) determined as a small hit is defined in the second special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the small winning random number table 202da, the determination value determined as a small winning is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the determination value within a predetermined range is defined regardless of the state of the special symbol (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is not defined, and it is defined so as not to win the small winning in the first special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is defined within the range of "4 to 399". That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (approximately 9/10).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that wins the big win and the value of the first random winning counter C1 that wins the small win are configured to be different, and in one process of executing the special symbol lottery (the process of judging whether or not there is a win), it is configured to continuously (simultaneously) execute the determination of whether the big win is successful and the determination of whether the small win is successful.

By configuring in this manner, a big win or a small win lottery can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, when a small prize is won, the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened for a certain period of time (a state in which a game ball can enter the V winning device 65). A big win is awarded by causing a game ball to enter a V winning port 165 in a V winning device 65 within a period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is open. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to win many small prizes.

In the present embodiment, the V opening/closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period when a small win is won, but without being limited to this, a type may be provided for the winning small win, and the period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened may be varied based on the type of the won small win. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a small hit type table, refer to the table, and determine the small hit type. With such a configuration, the player can be interested not only in winning the small prize but also in the type of the small prize to be won, and can execute the game while desiring to win the small prize in which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened for a longer period of time. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are defined with different probabilities of winning a small hit. By configuring in this way, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (time-saving state) is set, the lottery for the second special symbol advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so as to set the specific game state.

In this embodiment, a table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referred to when executing a big winning lottery and a table (small winning random number table 202da) that is referenced when executing a small winning lottery are configured separately. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of counter values for small winnings for each type of special symbol. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a determination of a big win or a small win according to a predetermined determination value according to the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. The C1 value may be varied, and a data table in which a judgment value corresponding to a big win or a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not defined may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in a big winning lottery or a small winning lottery executed in a state where a prescribed abnormal condition is established.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (parallel), and a restriction is set so that both special symbols are not simultaneously (parallelly) won a big win (so that the big win game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during a period until a big win is won in the lottery of one special pattern and a big win game corresponding to the big win is executed, the lottery of the special pattern may be executed by referring to a dedicated data table defining only the judgment value corresponding to the small win without defining the determination value corresponding to the big win so as not to win the big win in the lottery of the other special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, and a small hit flag. 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 variation time counter 203di, special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj, special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, time saving end waiting flag 203dm is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the game balls entering the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment).

A first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol, and is a storage area in which, when various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of the start winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), each counter C1 to C2, C5, CS1 value is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the corresponding areas (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing a special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 selects one of the data (the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db in order to execute processing such as setting the display of the big winning lottery and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. The data corresponding to the start winning prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc is a storage area in which the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning) are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), it acquires the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer, and stores them in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas where the data is vacant.

In addition, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) stores each counter value when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, and is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83, among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc (the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting winning is transferred to this normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are based on the winning to the special symbol entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1645 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. A counter that counts up to The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning). The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is incremented by one.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning). The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is incremented by one.

When the respective values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 transfers the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) to the first special symbol variation start process (S255 in FIG. 123). Reference) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the first special symbol big win is executed while the second special symbol is being variably displayed, and is set to ON when the first special symbol big winning is executed while the second special symbol is being variably displayed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the 1st special design fluctuation stop processing (refer to S257 of Drawing 124) which MPU201 of main control unit 110 performs. Also, in the process of S952 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

Thus, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it is possible to prevent the second special pattern forcibly stop-displayed as a losing pattern from executing the lottery again.

In addition, the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the process related to the second special symbol after executing the process related to the first special symbol in one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), thereby executing the variation process for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 is configured to execute the big win control process (S1804 in FIG. 56). In addition, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is configured to skip the variation processing for each special symbol (S254 to S263 in FIG. 119) when the current state is the big win state or the small win state (S251 in FIG. 151: Yes).

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured so that no new special symbol variation (lottery) is executed. 119 (see S151), a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed.

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when a small hit is won. This small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the winning result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and is set to OFF when the special symbol variation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag that indicates the period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the suspended update (subtraction) of the variation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) where the lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), and is referred to in special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). When it is set to ON in the process of S252, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed (S253 in FIG. 119). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 123) (S751 in FIG. 123: Yes), it is set to OFF (S753 in FIG. 123).

In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won as a small win, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small win is only the first special symbol. However, when the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that a small win can be won, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol based on the stoppage of the special symbol in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the jackpot game), and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, based on the stop of the special symbol in the combination of the small hit, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (small winning game). It is configured to stop until the technique is completed).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of one special pattern becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is executed, the other special pattern (the lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed, and the big win can be suppressed from being erased by the small win.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and the value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and it is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 of FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 119) for stopping the first special symbol during variation is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1555 in FIG. 132). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed for a jackpot, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di remains and after the forced stop display, the variation of the first special symbol can be suppressed again based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and the value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and it is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262 of FIG. 119: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 of FIG. 119) for stopping the second special symbol during variation is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj remains and after forced stop display, the variation of the second special symbol can be suppressed again based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the variation should subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h when the variation is stopped in the variation of the first special symbol. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120) when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (S358 in FIG. 120), and the time saving update process (see S863 in FIG. 125) in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124). ), when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S2101 in FIG. 125: Yes), after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2102), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

It should be noted that, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to OFF. Similarly, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the jackpot is won, the second special symbol variation stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132) is set to OFF. In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S in FIG. 125). 2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (see S2102 in FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the fluctuation is executed.

By constructing in this way, the jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is resumed, and the remaining time reduction frequency is not updated (subtracted) when the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game after the end of the big winning game awarded by the V winning, in addition to the number of lotteries of the special symbols specified by the big winning, the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol also becomes the time-saving game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous period for the player.

Special Figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the variation is stopped in the variation of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the value of 3h is greater than 0 (that is, the time is being shortened) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update process (S1661) of the special figure 2 out stop process (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to OFF. Also, when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to OFF (see FIG. 124 S860), and the second special symbol lottery is set to OFF in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the big hit is won, if the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is out and forced to stop. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to OFF, so that when the fluctuation forcedly stopped due to the deviation is stopped, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The time saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that the special figure variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is established has started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, four or 15 variations of the special symbols are executed as the specified period of the time saving state, and the time saving state is ended.

This time saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (that is, the final fluctuation of the prescribed number of times in the time saving state) (S360), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125) is executed, which is the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, or when performing the determination of the new special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121)), second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 3dm is set to off.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time saving end timing arrives, the time saving end processing can be reliably executed according to each timing.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. FIG. The fourth embodiment is different from the control processing of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable (in parallel), and the content of the control processing corresponding to the above-described difference is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 119, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S151). Special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination based on the obtained counter values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variation display in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control, or sets various commands for executing the variation display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and determines the result. Control is executed to stop and display in a display mode showing (result of judgment). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether it is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning).

In the process of S251, if it is determined that it is during the big hit or the small hit (S251: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S252). 253), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating small hit winning. In this embodiment, while the small winning game is being executed, the variation time set in the variation display (special symbol variation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted), and during that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, the player can be notified that the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is temporarily stopped with the start of the small win game, so that the player can be prevented from feeling distrustful of the disappearance of the first special symbol variation being executed. The display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped may be, for example, the same display mode as the display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.2 seconds), or a display mode having a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is being performed (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.5 seconds). Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during a temporary stop may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the present is not during the big hit or the small hit (S251: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0, that is, whether the first special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (S254). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S255).

In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), a process for varying (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 while the first special symbol is varying is executed. Then, when the processing of S255 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S255) is 0 (S256), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 in the processing of S256 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S257), and the processing of S259 described later. to

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), when the variation time specified for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the processing of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stopping process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 in the process of S256 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S254 (S254: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently varying, then the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S258). In the first special symbol variation start processing (S258), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and determination of whether the new lottery (variation) is executable or not, and when the new lottery (variation) is executable, processing for performing the new lottery (variation) are executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S258) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG.

After executing the first special symbol variation start processing (S258), after determining that the special symbol 1 is being varied in the processing of S256 (S256: No), or after executing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), next, variation processing (S259 to S263) regarding the second special symbol is performed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S259 (S259: No), it is not currently in the special figure 2 variation. Next, the second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if the reserved data (various counter values) are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, the big hit determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data are executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S260), when the lottery result is a big win (or a small win), the big win flag 203i (or the small win flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S259, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is currently being varied (S259: Yes), then the second special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S261). The contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, but the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255) is executed by changing the processing target from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) is finished, it is determined whether the current value of the special symbol variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined to be 0 (S262: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S263), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 in the process of S262 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), when the variation time specified for the second special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the processing for stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the processing of stopping and displaying the first special symbol variation under execution in a display mode indicating a compulsory loss is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. In addition, since this embodiment is configured so that a small win can be won in the lottery of the second special pattern, when the result of the lottery of the second special pattern is not a big win, processing corresponding to the small win or loss is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (parallel). Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, the variation stop processing of the first special symbol is preferentially executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but without being limited to this, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol may be configured to be performed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute variation processing for special symbol types in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and if the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed according to the set game state, means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variable processing may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the first special symbol variation start process (S258), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S258).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S353).

Then, a reservation ball number command indicating the number of reservation balls after subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in the reservation area 1 to reservation area 4 of the first special symbol reservation ball number storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is used to execute the big win determination as to whether or not the game is a big hit based on the set game state.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described later in detail, is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value, based on the result of the determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

A first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is in time saving (S358). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S358 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S358: No), the game state is the normal state, so this process ends. In this way, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, when the time saving is in progress, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to ON, it is possible to determine whether the fluctuation is started during the time saving at the time of stopping the fluctuation, and update the time saving end condition (subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h) at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

After executing the process of S359 mentioned above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether it is the final variation which is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S360, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1, this process is terminated as it is because it is not the final variation of the time saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S451). Then, in order to discriminate whether or not the conditions for ending the time saving are satisfied and waiting state, that is, whether or not the final variation of the time saving is executed by lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is in the final fluctuation of the time saving) (S452: Yes), the period of the time saving state set this time is over. Therefore, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set off (S454). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the game state has switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, in the process of S452, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the final variation of the time saving state is not being executed, so the processes of S453 to S456 are skipped and the process of S457 is performed.

In this way, if the state of waiting for the end of the time -saving state (a state where the final fluctuation of the time -saving state has begun due to the other special pattern), setting the gaming state to the normal state before acquiring the lottery result of the special pattern will be terminated, but the special pattern fluctuations in which the final fluctuation of the time -saving state has been executed will be executed. Up to which, the other special pattern can eliminate the bug of executing a gaming based on a time -short gaming status. Therefore, a proper game can be provided to the player.

When the process of S452 or S453 is completed, next, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S457). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big win (S458), and when it is determined to be a big win (S458: Yes), a big win flag 203i is turned on so as to indicate a big win of the first special symbol (S459). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special pattern that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Therefore, in the process of S459, information indicating a big win is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol among the big win flags 203i.

Then, the lottery result of the first special pattern is set to a big win (S460), the big win pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired win type counter C2 (S461), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S458 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S458: No), the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big win determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not the first special symbol big win is set (S551). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S459 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 121).

In the processing of S551, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S551: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S553), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out (S554).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 (S556).

Next, set a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol (S557), set the start of variation of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 (S558), set the value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern to the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di (S559), and finish this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the big hit flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S553.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S255). In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a process for resuming the special symbol variation interrupted by winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol are performed.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when one special symbol wins a small prize and the other special symbol is displayed in a variable display, the other special symbol variation is interrupted for a predetermined period (period from the small winning to the end of the small winning game), and the other special symbol variation is resumed after the lapse of the predetermined period (after the small winning game is finished).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small winning game of one. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded based on the winning of the small winning game in one special symbol lottery, for example, it is possible to prohibit (suppress) the situation that the lottery result of winning the big winning (the lottery result more advantageous to the player than the winning of the small winning) is discarded due to the winning of the small winning.

In the process of S751, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S751: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S752), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S753), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is subtracted by 1 (S754), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S75 5), the process ends.

In this embodiment, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds is configured to execute the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 119), and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Configure. Therefore, for example, when the variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di, and the value is configured to be subtracted by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON in the processing of S751 (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small winning is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processing of S752 and S753 is skipped and the processing of S754 is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257). This first special symbol variation stop process (S257) is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is "0", that is, when the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) has passed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S851). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S852), and a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on is set (S853).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S854), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). Thus, when the first special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode showing a big win, the variable display of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) being executed can be stopped-displayed (determined display) in a display mode (loss pattern) showing loss.

When the process of S855 is finished, next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i for the second special design is set to ON (S856), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S856: Yes), the big hit flag 203i for the second special design is set to OFF (S857) in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special design to the second special design that is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed in the process of S854 described above. ), deletes the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S858), and proceeds to the processing of S859. On the other hand, in the process of S856, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery, the processes of S857 and 808 are skipped and the process proceeds to S859.

In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won in this special symbol variation is set (see 809), then the jackpot flag 203i corresponding to the first special symbol, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The game state storage area 203g is configured to separately store the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state (during the big win, during the small win) related to the winning game, and by executing the processing of S861, the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the big win and the game state indicating that the big win is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S861 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), the first special symbol display device 37 executes a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner (S864), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update process (S862) is executed, and the process of S863 described above is performed. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S851: Yes), the second special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S854). In this manner, in the process of stopping and displaying (determining) one special symbol with a symbol indicating a big hit, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, it is possible to perform a proper process for a plurality of special symbol variations which are executed at the same time.

In other words, in the configuration in which the variation processing for the first special symbol and the variation processing for the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation processing for the second special symbol (forced stop processing) executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed within the variation processing for the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing for the second special symbol is not being executed, so the processing for the second special symbol is duplicated. It is possible to prevent it from being done, and it is possible to execute the process smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the other special symbol is configured to forcibly stop at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big win, but it is not limited to this. : Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the lottery result for the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the game result of the lottery game executed by the player being discarded.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol being executed based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the content of variation control may be changed according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol, when the second special symbol is being varied (loss fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the result of the lottery is discarded, and forced stop processing is performed to forcibly stop the variation. When the lottery result of the second special pattern is in the process of changing (winning fluctuation) for indicating that the lottery result of the second special pattern is winning (big win, small win), after the big winning game of the first special pattern is finished, the interruption processing may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special pattern can be resumed.

In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the game can be played while making the player interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is restarted. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to execute a suggestion performance for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not).

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the time saving update process (S862 (S1661)) which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation stop process (first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S151 in FIG. 119), second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132)) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the game state is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the termination condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted to the normal state. In addition, in the explanation to be given later, the processing when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped will be explained, but the same processing is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, whether or not the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed this time starts the fluctuation during the time saving game (S2101). The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, when it is determined that fluctuation is started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2104. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), since it is not a change stop that triggers the update of the time saving state, the processing of S2102 to S2106 is skipped and the process of S2107 is performed.

As described above, when the game state is the time-saving state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the value of the time-saving counter 203h can be subtracted at the time of stopping the fluctuation by setting the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type to ON. Therefore, the time saving game state can be set until the final variation of the time saving game state stops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player for the longest possible period.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the variation of the first special pattern is temporarily stopped, and the variation is not restarted until the small prize game is finished. Then, a V prize is generated during the small win game, a big win is awarded, and after the big win game ends, the temporarily stopped variation of the first special symbol is resumed. Furthermore, although it will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 137, since the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game is started, when the temporarily stopped fluctuation restarts and stops, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off, so the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, it is configured so that the number of remaining time reductions is not subtracted when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol after the end of the big winning game by the V winning is stopped. By constructing in this way, in addition to the time-saving specified period set according to the jackpot type, the time-saving game is set for the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped special figure, so that the time-saving state, which is an advantageous period for the player, can be set to be the longest possible period. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

In the process of S2104, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S2104). If it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104: Yes), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is the final fluctuation of the time saving, and in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), when the next fluctuation is not started from the final fluctuation of the time saving, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to off (S2105), since it is the timing of shifting the game state to the normal state. The normal state is set in the skill state storage area 203g (S2106). Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the state where the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the time saving state is continuing. Thus, in the simultaneous variation type game machine, when the variation which is the final variation of the time saving game is stopped, it is determined whether or not the other special pattern is subjected to a variation exceeding the prescribed number of times of the time saving game state (from the final variation to the next variation), and if it is not performed, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause discomfort.

When one of the processes of S2101, S2104, and S2106 is completed, the process proceeds to S2107. In the process of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the second special symbol variation start process (S260), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S260).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121)) executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)) immediately before this process is performed.

In the process of S951, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), skip various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol, set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df to OFF (S952), and finish this process. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big winning symbol, and after the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol, it is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the process of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

This is performed immediately before the second special symbol variation start processing (S260) is executed (within the same special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)) (within the same special symbol variation processing 4). The big win game is started based on the big win information (big win scenario) set in the big win determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the big win game ends by the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the processing load of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (big hit), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with the lost symbol), and until the big hit game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is executed, a special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to prevent the execution of a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol, and the variation processing of the other special symbol is skipped once. may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol lottery (variation) may be configured so as not to win a big hit until the big win game based on the big win win is completed. may be configured to be set to off.

By constructing in this way, even if the timing of turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing of stopping and displaying the first special pattern in the big win pattern, the execution of the new second special pattern fluctuation (lottery) can be prohibited until the big win game is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON, the variation processing of the second special symbol is skipped, that is, a new variation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but without being limited to this, the second special exclusive for when the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON. It may be configured to execute a variable display of patterns.

In this case, the lottery for the second special symbol is performed using a special lottery that does not win the big win, and the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the period until the big win game based on the big win winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the period until a specific timing during the big win game, or the period until the big win game ends, the second special symbol. It may be configured to display the special symbols in a variable manner. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

In addition, the content of the variation processing related to each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content thereof, and the variation display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. However, the second symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 When the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed while the special pattern is forcibly stopped, the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be used to execute the variable performance during the forced stop.

In this way, by using each pattern (third pattern, fourth pattern) variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special pattern variation has been forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the actual second special pattern is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S951, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S951 in FIG. 126: No), the processes of S953 to S959 are executed, and the process of S960 described later is performed. The processes of S953 to S959 are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, in contrast to the processes of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120). Since (S356) is the same except that it is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. The processing of S960 to S963 is the same as the processing of S358 to S361 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S258 in FIG. 120) except that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, so the explanation thereof is omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game machine executes the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol at the same time, by executing the same processing at the start of variation of both special symbols, it is possible to prevent problems such as the number of remaining time reductions not being subtracted in the other special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) by changing the type of target special symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and adding some other processes.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1051 corresponding to the processing of S451, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), in the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of S452 to S461, the target is changed from the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) to the special symbol 2 (second special symbol), and the lottery result of the special symbol. The difference is that the processing that is executed when it is out is changed. Since other points are the same, description thereof is omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), when it is determined that this lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special figure 2 loss variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends.

This special figure 2 loss fluctuation processing (S1062) is the processing which is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big win, that is, the small win or the loss. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, but when the lottery result is a loss, the same processing as the processing of S462 of the above-described first special symbol big winning determination processing (S356 in FIG. 121) is executed, and when the lottery result is a small winning, processing corresponding to winning a small winning is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation process (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation process (S1062).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1062), first, this lottery result (lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small hit or not (S1151).

When it is determined that a small win is won in the process of S1151 (S1151: Yes), the small win flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), the lottery result of the second special pattern is set to a small win (S1153), then the small win pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S1154), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1151, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win, that is, it is a loss (S1151: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1155), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) Special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1062 in FIG. 128) executed as one process (S1062 in FIG. 128), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is won in the process executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol By setting the small hit flag 203dg to ON, the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute processing corresponding to winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the processing of S1251 corresponding to the processing of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and in each process of S1252 to S1256, S1258 to S1260 corresponding to each process of S552 to S559, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is the special figure 2 variation. The difference is that it is changed to a pattern command and that the process of special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1257) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) will be described.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, determination is performed based on the lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 in FIG. 127).

In the processing of S1351, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained (S1352), and the small hit type is selected based on the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 (S1353). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small winning type, different small winning types are not set based on the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5, but for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a plurality of small winning types, a small winning type selection table is provided in which different small winning types are defined for the range of values of the acquired small winning type counter C5, and different small winning types are selected by the processing of S1352 and S1353. do it.

As in the present embodiment, even if the specifications of the game are changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, the change can be easily dealt with by using the processing of S1352 and S1353 even though there is only one kind of small winning type.

When the processing of S1353 is finished, then, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1354), and the variation pattern for the small hit is selected based on the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 (S1355). Then, the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (S1351: No), the process (S1357 to S1359) for the case where the lottery result is a loss is executed. In the process of S1357, first, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming state is read (S1357), the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2 (S1358), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S1359), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261). In this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) in that the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when the other special symbol wins a small hit (executes a small winning game) is set to ON. However, other than that, since it is the same except that the object of processing is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to win a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol, a flag (for example, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag) for indicating that a small win has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (that the small winning game is executed) is provided, and the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) may be performed in this second special symbol variation in-execution process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process (S263) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) in that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, the contents of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big win, and the process of setting a flag for stopping the variation of the other special symbol are omitted.

That is, when it is determined that the processing of S852 in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is deleted, and the processing target of S851 and S853 to S864 is changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513) and the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1551: No), the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1558) is performed. They differ from each other in terms of execution. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the contents of the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be described. Figure 133 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 omission stop processing (S1564). This special figure 2 loss stop process (S1564) executes the special symbol variation stop process corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than the big win (small hit or out).

When the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1564) is executed, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1652), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. A temporary stop command in FIG. 1 is set (S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the audio lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is temporarily stopped (is being done) A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description continues. When the processing of S1653 is completed, next, a small winning scenario (opening operation scenario for small winning) corresponding to the small winning game is set (S1654), the small winning flag 203dg is set to OFF (S1655), the winning information indicating that the small winning game is being played (during small winning) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol stops at the pattern indicating the small winning (small winning pattern). A special figure 2 confirmation command for indicating that it is displayed (confirmed display) is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (confirmed display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) for performing a process such as subtraction of the number of remaining time saving times is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 203dg is set to OFF in the processing of S1651 (S1651: No), a special figure 2 confirmation command is set (S1659) to indicate that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the removal (defective symbol) (S1659), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped (determined display) with the symbol (S1660). And a time saving update process is performed (S1661 (S863)), and this process is complete|finished.

Incidentally, for the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update process (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, even if the lottery game is executed by variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern at the same time, when the big winning game occurs in one of the first and second special patterns, the variable display of the other special pattern is stopped, so that the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that indicates a big win (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed. However, the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can grasp that the lottery game which was in the middle of the variable display is not extinguished, and can play the jackpot game without anxiety.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, start winning process 4 (S152), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 4 (S152). The start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) determines whether the ball has entered (start winning) either the special symbol entrance 64 or the second entrance 1645, and if the start winning is performed, each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 20 up to the maximum number of reservations (maximum of 4 in each of the special symbol entrance 64 and the second entrance 1645). This is the process of storing each in 3db.

In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) of predicting the result of winning or not, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. in advance is executed based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db. The starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described below.

In the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entered (starting winning) into the special figure entrance 64 which is the first starting opening (S1751). Here, the entry of the ball to the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the special figure entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S1751: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S1752), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (S1754), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the special figure entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights of the first special symbol) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1755).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1756).

Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1757). This first look-ahead processing (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135, but from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the result of winning or not determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. are determined. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining the result of win/fail judgment, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc., based on each newly stored counter value.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, that is, when the first special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the contents of the first special symbol lottery right (winning information) are determined in advance. may be configured.

After the processing of S1757 is executed, the processing of S1758 is executed next. Also, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 in the processing of S1751 (S1751: No), or in the processing of S1753, when it is determined that the number of reservations for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1758.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first look-ahead process (S1757) is executed based on the information (winning information) on the added winning. 1753: No), that is, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit and the ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64, the first look-ahead process (S1757) may be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Further, since an added value can be given when a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit.

Next, for each process from S1758 to S1764, the same process as the process performed for the winning of the ball to the first start port (special figure entrance 64) executed in each process from S1751 to S1757 is different only in that it is a process executed for the second ball entrance 1645, so detailed description will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, the first look-ahead process (S1757), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S1757).

In the first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 135), first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S1822).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reservation (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a) and the timing when the big winning determination is executed based on the winning information newly reserved this time.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is composed so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special pattern and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern are executed (in parallel), and the fluctuation time set in corresponding to the lottery results of each special pattern is compatible with the reservoir of the special pattern (holding) at the time of holding the special pattern (at the time of the special design). This is because it is difficult to determine the timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of each special pattern (lottery) because it is set to be varied by the number of pending patterns).

Then, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in the low-probability state, jackpot only in the high-probability state, jackpot in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state) (S1823: Yes), the first winning command indicating the conditions for winning the jackpot (game state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot when winning is set (S1824), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is lost even in a high-probability state or a low-probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the loss is set (S1825), and this processing ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is set to include information for indicating the above-described win/fail judgment result (information that has a different meaning based on the win/fail judgment result), as well as information for showing the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 as common information. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, based on various information included in the winning command, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the usual color), and an effect (pre-reading effect) can be executed such as displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of winning or failing determination to the player.

In the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the success/failure determination result in the case of a high probability state of the special symbol and the success/failure determination result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are distinguished, and a winning command is set based on each determination result. It may be configured such that a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot is set only when the player wins.

By constructing in this manner, a prize winning command indicating a big win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when a specific big win is determined in advance, so that a feeling of expectation of winning the big win can be given to the special pattern variation in which the look-ahead performance is not executed.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a may be accurately determined, and the win/loss determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, prefetching processing based on the winning information is performed, and the winning judgment is predicted in advance in the prereading processing. Counter value) may be set as a prize winning command, and the result of win/fail determination may be predicted based on the information included in the prize winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is preferably configured to be analyzed (prediction of the result of winning/failure determination). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the second look-ahead process (S1764), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this second look-ahead processing (S1764). In the second look-ahead process (S1764 in FIG. 134), the above-described first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 133) discriminates (pre-reads) the pending data (winning information) based on the fact that the ball entered (start winning) in the first start opening (special figure entrance 64) in advance, and makes various judgments. 1645), the only point is that the winning information is changed to that based on the start winning, and since the other processes are the same, the detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the details of the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the contents of this V passing process 4 (S153). The V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment is different from the V passing process (see S153 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. When a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a V prize occurs during the small winning game, a process of setting the time saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether it is during a small hit (S1571). When it is determined that it is in the middle of a small hit (S1571: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 described above are executed, and the process proceeds to S1572. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the small hit (S1571: No), the processing of S1504-S1506 and S1572-S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1572, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S1572). When it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S1572: Yes), after the jackpot game awarded from this V winning, a new time saving state period is set, so the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set off (S1573). In this way, when a small win is won in the final variation of the time saving game, a V prize is generated, and a big win is given, a new time short time is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, by setting the short time end standby flag 203dm to off, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of shifting to a normal game state immediately after a new short time period is set.

After executing the process of S1572 or S1573, the process proceeds to S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON (S1574). That is, it is determined whether or not the variation of the first special pattern is executed in parallel with the variation of the second special pattern this time, and the variation of the first special pattern is not yet stopped and is temporarily stopped. When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509.

In this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is being executed at the time of winning the small hit, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, after the end of the small winning game, the temporarily stopped variation of the special symbols is restarted, but in this embodiment, there is a case where V wins are made during the small winning game and a big winning is awarded. The lottery for the first special symbol is temporarily stopped even during the jackpot game. After the end of the jackpot game, the temporarily stopped variation of the special pattern is resumed, but in this embodiment, the number of remaining short time periods is subtracted when the variation is stopped, so there is a problem that the remaining short time period is reduced even with this temporarily stopped variation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a V winning occurs during a small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time period is not subtracted when the temporarily stopped variation is stopped. Therefore, the player can set the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped symbols as a time saving period in addition to the time saving period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer period of time that is advantageous to the player, and to provide pleasure for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, it is configured to forcibly stop (discard) the fluctuation of the other special symbol. Further, when a small win is won, the variation of the other special pattern is temporarily stopped, but the configuration is not limited to this, and when a small win is won, the variation of the other special pattern may be discarded. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from winning a big win by temporarily stopped fluctuation and giving an excessive privilege to a player after a big win game is awarded by winning a V prize.

Also, when winning a big win that is disadvantageous to the player with one special symbol, the disadvantageous big win variation can be discarded by winning a small win with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of playability.

As described above, the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine in which the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed in parallel, and is configured to temporarily stop the other symbol when a small hit is won. Then, when a V prize is generated during the small winning game and a big winning is given, the temporarily stopped symbols resume fluctuation after the big winning game is finished. Further, in this embodiment, when the game state is the time saving state at the start of the fluctuation, by setting on a flag indicating that the value of the time saving counter is scheduled to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

Therefore, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is resumed by setting the subtraction flag to OFF when the V winning occurs, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the time saving counter is not decremented. That is, when the temporarily stopped pattern restarts the fluctuation and stops, the short period of time is not updated, so the player can set the remaining fluctuation period of the temporarily stopped special pattern in addition to the preset short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to set the short period of time advantageous to the player to the maximum length.

In the present embodiment, one type of jackpot is provided by winning a V prize. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, the player can play the game while having an interest not only in whether or not the V prize is generated, but also in the type of jackpot to be awarded.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to have one small hit type to be elected, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Furthermore, it may be configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol. In this way, by providing a plurality of types of small wins, the player can play the game while expecting small wins that are more likely to generate a V prize.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel, but without being limited to this, the special symbol corresponding to the order in which the ball is entered may be changed (so-called winning order change). In addition, when configured in this way, it is preferable to configure the advantage degree of the winning jackpot type to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the player can execute the game while desiring to win a big win when the lottery for the special figure that is more advantageous is executed, so that the game with a sense of tension can be provided.

In the present embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, but by providing a plurality of small winning types, the small winning that discards the variation of the first special symbol (forcibly stops due to loss) and the small winning that temporarily stops may be set separately. In the case of such a constitution, when the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player due to the variation of the other special pattern, it is preferable to execute the performance to urge the player to discard it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

In the present embodiment, the game state to be set is two types (normal state, time saving state), but it may be three types (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state), or four types (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, latent probability state). Moreover, it is good also as two types or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game is executed by aiming at the left area of the game board 13 so that the game balls flow down regardless of the game state, but the game method is not limited to this, and a game method aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed. Then, the switching of the game method may be configured to be set based on the game state. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute a guide display mode for showing the current game method to the player. The player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state by this guidance display mode.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of updating the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of times of time saving, and the timing of determining whether the termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied are different. You may comprise so that a process may be performed. Moreover, although the process of subtracting the time saving frequency is performed after performing the special figure lottery, the special figure lottery may be performed after subtracting the time saving frequency.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol final variation in the time saving state (special symbol variation executed in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied), the time saving state is terminated at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. That is, when the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win) is satisfied at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition in a state where the time saving end condition is established, the timing for determining the establishment of the time saving end condition is switched (delayed at the end of the small winning game). As a result, the period during which the time saving state continues can be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end.

In addition, it may be possible to use other than the above-mentioned contents (small winning) as the above-mentioned switching condition, for example, in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, it may be set as a switching condition that the normal symbol fluctuation is running and that the game per normal pattern is being executed. can be set as By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Combination Modification of General Electric Prize-winning Device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, and when the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 during the general electric winning game wins the special electric operating opening 643, the accessory winning game is executed. In addition, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to solve the problem that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the game becomes monotonous during the time saving state and the game motivation is reduced, a plurality of special electric operation openings (special electric operation opening 643, second special electric operation opening 1643) are provided in the electric prize winning device 640, and V jackpot games are easily executed according to the special electric operation opening in which the ball has won. And, it is configured to be able to execute the accessory winning game in which the V jackpot game is difficult to execute.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, the period of the time saving state is lengthened by suspending the special symbol variation being executed (interrupting the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation) with the execution of the role winning game as a trigger. On the other hand, in the above-described third embodiment, the V jackpot type is selected based on the fact that the ball has entered the special electric activation port 643, and according to the selected V jackpot type, any one of a pattern of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed when executing the role winning game, a pattern of discarding, and a pattern of discarding and ending the time saving state is executed, and the player is made to select whether or not to execute the role winning game during the time saving state. By providing a new playability, it is intended to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time saving state.

In addition, in the above-described first to third embodiments, the special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643, the role game is executed. In the fourth embodiment, the second ball entrance 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the same game as in the first to third embodiments described above. A lottery for the first special symbol and a lottery for the second special symbol are executed in parallel, which is a so-called simultaneous variation type specification.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 138, based on the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 88), a second ball entrance 1645 is provided in place of the second special electric operation opening 1643, and the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 is configured to enter the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. It differs from other embodiments.

Then, the V winning device 65 is configured to open with the same contents in the small winning game executed when winning the small winning in the second special pattern lottery executed based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1645 and the accessory winning game executed based on the winning of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small winning game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the fulfillment element of the accumulated time saving end condition, which is the condition for ending the time saving state, is updated as in the above-described fourth embodiment. As a result, the number of times the V winning device 65 is opened does not match the number of times the element satisfying the time saving end condition is updated, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the period until the time saving state ends.

In this modification, an example is shown in which the same end condition as in the fourth embodiment is set as the end condition of the time saving state, but without being limited to this, for example, the time saving end condition may be established even when the number of times the game per role reaches a specific number (for example, 50 times). By constructing in this way, the game can be played while making the player predict whether the time saving end condition will be established first based on the lottery of the second special symbols or whether the time saving end condition will be established first based on the performance of the role winning game.

In this case, as an effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is preferable to execute a suggestive effect (for example, an effect suggesting the number of times until each time-shortening end condition is satisfied) for suggesting to the player which time-shortening end condition is likely to be satisfied, out of the time-saving end condition established based on the lottery of the second special pattern and the time-saving end condition established based on the performance of the winning game. By constructing in this way, the player can grasp the period until one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, so that the player can be happy and sad about the destination of the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 138, in this modification, a special electric operation opening 643 and a second ball entrance 1645 are provided in the general electric prize winning device 640. However, the second special electric operation opening 1643 may also be provided, and a ball winning a prize in the general electric prize device 640 may be configured to win any one of the above three.

Furthermore, in the case of using the configuration of this modification, the processing contents for the special symbol variation being executed may be different between the case where the small winning game is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 and the case where the accessory winning game is executed based on the ball winning the special electric activation opening 643. For example, when the small winning game is performed, the special symbol variation being performed is discarded rather than when the accessory winning game is performed When the accessory winning game is executed, it is preferable to make it easier to interrupt the special symbol variation being executed than when the small winning game is executed.

It should be noted that, in this modified example, the ball may enter the special electric operation opening 643 while the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are being executed. In this case, both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are interrupted. After the accessory winning game ends, the interrupted first special symbol variation and second special symbol variation are restarted. Then, when the second special symbol variation after the restart is winning a small winning, when a small winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning, the first special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded.

In this way, in this modification configured to be able to simultaneously execute three kinds of games, ie, the first special symbol variation (lottery), the second special symbol variation (lottery), and the ball winning to the special electric activation port 643, it is possible to interrupt the first special symbol variation, in which a longer variation time than the second special symbol variation is likely to be selected, at a plurality of opportunities during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player regarding the timing when the first special symbol variation is interrupted and the period during which the first special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, it is configured so that the winning ball in the general electric prize device 640 can win the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645, but without being limited to this, for example, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 1645 or the special electric operation opening 643. Specifically, the special electric operation opening 64 in the general electric prize winning device 640 3, and a second ball entrance 1645 may be provided in the right area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. FIG. The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the setting method of various commands for outputting the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 side is different, and in that the control processing that is executed when the various commands output from the main control device 110 are received on the sound lamp control device 113 side is partially changed. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the production mode (V rush) corresponding to the special symbol variation in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is variably set according to the remaining period of the time saving state (the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state). , The number of times of time saving (variation times of special patterns) set as a termination condition of the time saving state is stored, and when information (variation pattern command) indicating the start of variation of special patterns is received, processing for updating the number of times of time saving is executed, whereby the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

By configuring in this way, in the first embodiment in which the timing of updating the number of times of time saving (at the start of special symbol variation) and the timing of determining whether the time saving condition is satisfied (at the time of stopping special symbol variation) are different, only the command indicating the content of the game using the special symbol lottery, such as the state command set when the game state is changed and the variation pattern command set when the variation of the special symbol is started, is performed without setting a dedicated command on the main controller 110 side. By using this, it is possible to grasp the remaining period of the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and it is possible to set an effect according to the lapse of the period during the time saving state.

However, in the control content used in the above-described first embodiment, the update status of the game state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 that does not have a backup function. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted (power failure occurs) during the period when the time saving state is set, and then the power supply is restarted, various information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the audio lamp control device 113 side is cleared. (initialization), and there was a problem that the update state of the game state in the time saving state could not be determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main control unit 110 executes the process of starting the special symbol variation (the process of setting the variation pattern command), the command indicating the update result of the number of times of time saving (number of times command) can be set.

Then, the fluctuation pattern command and the time saving command can be output at the same timing, and the determination command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Further, when receiving the variation pattern command on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not the command for the number of times of shortening of working hours is received, and based on the determination result, it is possible to determine the current status of shortening of working hours.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp controller 113 side to determine the status of the time saving state based on the combination of each command set by the main controller 110 and received by the voice lamp controller 113, and even if a power failure occurs during the variable display of the special symbol, the voice lamp controller 113 side can determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main controller 110.

In addition, since the combination of commands received at the same timing determines the status of the time saving state, compared to setting individual commands to indicate the status of the time saving state on the main controller 110 side, the types of commands set by the main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of the control processing in the main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing contents of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, among the control processing contents of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, points different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see S235 of FIG. 41) is replaced with the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 of FIG. 41), the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 of FIG. 45) is replaced with the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45), and the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 48) is replaced with the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see S238 of FIG. 45). S136 in FIG. 141) is provided, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the processing for updating (subtracting) the number of times of working hours (value of the time saving counter 203h) when starting the variation of the special symbols (see S205 of FIG. 139), and the processing for determining whether the conditions for ending the time saving state when stopping the variation of the special symbols are satisfied (see S208 of FIG. 45) was configured to run

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to manage the situation of the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the state command output from the main control device 110 (the state command set in the processing of S1916 in FIG. 56) and the variation pattern command (Special figure variation pattern command set in S506 in FIG. 43), the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol variation starts or the special symbol variation stops, in addition to the command indicating the start and stop of the special symbol variation, various commands for indicating the status of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times, etc.) are set. case), it is configured so that it is possible to grasp the situation of the time saving state (number of remaining time saving times) on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235). This special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) differs from the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the above-described first embodiment in the processing for updating the time saving state at the start of the special symbol variation, but the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the above-described first embodiment, there is no need to output information for indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the special symbol variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state. 3j setting process).

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of times of time saving (remaining time saving times) of special symbols is set, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 .

The processing contents of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Then, in the process of S308, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, the current time is in the time saving state (S308: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S372).

If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction, that is, the time saving number command indicating the number of remaining time saving times is set (S373), and this process ends. Time saving frequency command set in the process of S373 is the same timing as the special figure variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43), and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving number command is also received.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, only when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating (after subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No), the time saving number command is configured to be set. Therefore, in the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113, if the fluctuation pattern command (special figure fluctuation pattern command) is received during the time saving state and the time saving number command is not received, the special symbol in the time saving state can be determined to be the final variation of

Returning to FIG. 139, the description is continued. In the processing of S372, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, if the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311) as in the first embodiment described above, and this processing ends.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more), even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, while the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, the normal pattern high probability state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol (S308: Yes), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is always executed, so that the control process can be shared.

Also, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction (after updating) is greater than 0 (1 or more), the time saving number command is set, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction (after updating) is 0, the time saving number command is not set. In addition, the processing for setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43) and the same processing (special symbol variation start processing) are configured to set the time saving number command, and in the external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), it is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing.

By constructing in this way, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command is received in the state where the time saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving frequency command is received at the same time. In addition, when a time saving number command is received at the same time, it is possible to determine the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving number) to be updated by executing the special symbol variation this time.

In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating becomes 0, i.e., when the special pattern variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving number command is not set. . In this way, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state (time saving final variation) is executed, instead of setting the time saving number command indicating the remaining time saving number 0 as the time saving number command, the time saving number command is not set, so that when the time saving number command set by the main controller 110 cannot be received, for example, when the command cannot be normally received due to noise or the like, the performance at the time of the time saving final variation is executed.

Therefore, since it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of short remaining time of 0 times which is less than the number of times of short remaining time which is actually set without using special performance data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be normally received, the performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) is provided. It is also possible to provide an end condition that is established when the player wins (time).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state, which of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied varies according to the game content of the player, so that it is necessary to determine the update status until the termination condition is satisfied for each termination condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are established among a plurality of possible time-saving end conditions, the voice lamp control device 113 side can easily discriminate that the current special symbol variation is the final change of the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) is different from the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment in that the update contents of the time saving state at the time of stopping the special symbol variation are different, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same S801 and S802 processing as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not turned on in the processing of S802 (S802: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( S871), greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed this time is not the final variation of time saving (S871: Yes), a time saving continuation command indicating that the time saving state continues is set (S872), the same S809 and S810 processing as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current game state is the normal state, the process of S872 is skipped and the process proceeds to S809. Also, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed this time is the final time saving variation (S802: Yes), the same S804 and S805 processes as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment are executed, and then the processes of S809 and S810 are executed to execute this process. end.

In addition, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processes of S806 to S810 are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping display (determined display) of the special symbol variation, the special symbol confirmation command is set, and the time saving continuation command is set. Then, the special figure determination command set in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) and the time saving continuation command are executed in the main processing (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 External output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) Output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing. A voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not a time saving continuation command is received at the same time when a special figure determination command is received in a state in which a time saving state is set, and based on the determination result, grasps whether the special pattern variation to be stopped and displayed this time is the final variation (time saving final variation) of the time saving state, and sets a presentation mode.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing in the state where the time saving state is set, the performance mode for indicating that the time saving state continues is set, and when only the special figure determination command is received, the performance mode for indicating that the time saving state ends is set. In this way, by combining a plurality of commands output from the main controller 110 at the same timing, the state of the current time saving state can be grasped on the side of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the types of commands set by the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case where each command is set to indicate the situation of the time saving state in the main controller 110.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol determination command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be set within the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140), but each command may be output at the same timing in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55), and the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55) External output processing (S1801) is executed within an interval of 4 milliseconds, the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command may be configured to be settable, respectively.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when executing the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, various commands set in the interval (4 milliseconds) after the previous external output process is executed are configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at once (output as serial data). 801 reference) may be configured to wait the output of the special figure determination command until the predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing even if the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command are not set in the same process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) differs from the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above in that the process for determining whether the current game state is a normal symbol high probability state is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state in which the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON are configured to be managed as information indicating the high probability state of the normal design, and only the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) is managed as the information indicating the high probability state of the normal design. is different from the first embodiment.

That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235 in FIG. 139), the value of the time saving counter 203h is configured to be subtracted until it becomes 0, thereby simplifying the updating process of the time saving counter 203h, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted to 0. Even in this case, the difference is that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON in order to continue the high probability state of normal symbols until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the same processing of S1101 to S1108 as the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above is performed, and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S1108 (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is turned on. If it is set, that is, it is determined whether the special symbol is in the time saving final variation (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1171: Yes), it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, in the process of S1171, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), the present is the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, so the processes of S1110 to S1114, which are the same as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above, are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol is fluctuating (S1102: Yes), the same S1115 to S1118 processing as the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and in the processing of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), Set the scenario operation per normal figure for time saving (S1120), set the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory (S1121), and end this process.

In the process of S1118, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1118: No), then it is determined whether the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S1172). S1120 and S1121, which are the same as those in S106 of No. 8), are executed, and this process ends. Also, in the processing of S1172, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), the present is a low probability state of normal symbols, so the processing of S1119 and S1121, which is the same as the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol (the length of the dynamic display period), or the content of the normal symbol winning game (opening pattern of the electric role object 640a) executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is configured to be set differently according to the probability state of the normal symbol. In addition to the value of the counter 203h, it is configured to refer to the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the probability state of normal symbols.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 142 and 143, control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. ) is replaced with the stop-related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, types of commands output from the main control device 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the situation during the time saving state (number of remaining time saving times) can be determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side. By configuring in this way, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the time saving state and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, after the power supply is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate presentation mode according to the actual situation of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times).

First, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254) will be described. Figure 142 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254). This special figure variation start process 5 (S4254) is a process executed when a special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is different from the special figure variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above in that the processing content during the time saving state is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure fluctuation start process 5 (S4254) is executed, the same S4301 to S4305 processes as the special figure fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, that is, when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the state where the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the time saving number command is included in the command received this time (S4351).

In this embodiment, in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the main controller 110, serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands is used to output a command to the sound lamp controller 113. Therefore, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main controller 110, the special figure variation pattern command and the time saving number command are set in the same process, At least the special figure variation pattern command and the time saving number command are stored in the same serial data and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

In the process of S4351, whether the command received this time has a time saving number command, that is, in the serial data in which the special figure variation pattern command is stored, it is determined whether the time saving number command is also included (S4351), If it is determined that the time saving number command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command received this time is the final variation of the time saving state (shortening final variation) Since it is not the case, set a display command for indicating that it is in the time saving state (S4306), the same S4306 to S4308 processing as the special figure fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4351, if it is determined that there is no time saving number command in the received command (S4351: No), the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command this time is the final time saving variation.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the time saving state, by discriminating the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure variation pattern command, the status of the time saving state (remaining time shortening number) can be easily determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265). This stop related process 5 (S4265) is different from the stop related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the process executed when receiving the special figure determination command are changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601), and if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command is not received (S4601: No), the same S4602 to S4611 processing as the stop related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above is executed and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving continuation command is received (S4631), and if it is determined that the time saving continuation command is received (S4631: Yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation indicating the time saving continuation is set (S4632), and the process proceeds to S4602.

In the processing of S4631, if it is determined that the time saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether the time saving end command has been received (S4633), and if it is determined that the time saving end command has been received (S4633: yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation indicating the end of the time saving state is set.

In this way, when the special figure determination command is received, the time saving continuation command or the time saving end command can be received at the same time. By executing the stop related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), the display mode (production mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed and set when the time saving continuation command is received, when the time saving end command is received, and when no command is received. Therefore, the processing for setting the display mode for stopping the fluctuation to be executed when the special figure confirmation command is received and the processing for setting the display mode for showing the status of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times) can be performed in the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the normal pattern winning game that is executed when the lottery of the normal pattern is won is aimed at the role winning game (the aim is to win the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 provided in the general electric winning device 640 that is opened in the normal drawing winning game). It is configured to cause the player to execute a game (special electric game) aiming to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game).

Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) (until the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed), or until the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot before reaching the predetermined number (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed to indicate that the lottery result is a big hit). short period) can be lengthened, and the number of normal symbol lotteries to be executed during the short period of time can be increased.

Furthermore, when the role winning game is executed with the fact that the ball has entered the special electric activation port 643 during the normal per game, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the processing for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted). It is constructed so as to restart when the conditions for executing the special symbol variation are satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the execution period (short time period) of the special electric game is changed by the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period of the role winning game, so that the player during the special electric game can be motivated to play the game while wishing to select as long a variation time as possible as the special symbol variation and to execute many role winning games.

However, during the special electric game, for example, during the fluctuation period of the normal pattern or during the normal pattern per game, the ball cannot be won in the general electric prize device 640 (difficult to win) (closed period of the electric role product 640a). The open period of a, that is, the period in which the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which the winning-accessory game can be executed.

In addition, the accessory winning game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted is configured to end when either of the termination condition (winning termination condition) that is satisfied when the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three) or the termination condition (time termination condition) that is satisfied when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the accessory winning game is satisfied. If any end condition is met, the accessory winning game ends.

That is, in the first embodiment described above, in view of the normal pattern fluctuation situation and the game situation of the general pattern per game during the special electric game, it has a game property that allows you to select which end condition to establish for the accessory per game being executed. By configuring in this way, the length of the period in which the above-described disadvantageous period (normal symbol fluctuation period, normal symbol per game electric accessory 640a closed period) and the per-accessory game execution period overlap can be varied depending on the skill of the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, since a plurality of end conditions are set, for example, a ball does not enter the V winning device 65 as expected and the time end condition is satisfied despite the game being played in an attempt to satisfy the winning end condition, or a ball that has been shot in advance enters the V winning device 65 and the winning end condition is satisfied despite the game being played to satisfy the time end condition. However, there is a problem that the end condition desired by the player cannot be satisfied.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the prize-winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the winning-accessory game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if the period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied passes, and when the time ending condition is selected, the winning ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of winning prizes to the V prize winning device 65 reaches the number for which the winning end condition can be satisfied. By configuring in this way, the role winning game can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is established, so that the player can be made to actively play the game during the special electric game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the elapsed time during the prize winning game, and when the time ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game. 1.6 seconds) or longer (e.g., 10 seconds), or if a time end condition is selected, a forced winning end condition may be set that is met when the number of winnings (e.g., 10) is greater than the number of winnings (e.g., 3) set as a normal winning end condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of the accessory winning game for a long period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in that an operation means (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) that can be operated by the player is newly provided, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side of the return button 43 provided in the ball rental operation unit 40 (right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144), and a first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). The switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter also referred to as the end condition switching button group 22z) are configured such that when the player presses them, a detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing and outputs the detection result to the input/output port 205 (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

Specifically, when the switching button 22za is pressed, the switching button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the switching button 22za, when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the first selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the first selection button 22zb, and when the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the second selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the second selection button 22zc. Each detection switch is configured to output the detection result to main controller 110 .

That is, the switching button detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the end condition switching button group 22z described above is spaced apart from the frame button 22 by about 10 centimeters. By constructing in this way, the operation performance using the frame button 22 is executed in order to make the player interested in various performances executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the player's erroneous operation of the end condition switching button group 22z can be suppressed when the player is made to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with operating means (frame buttons 22) for effects and operating means (group of end condition switching buttons 22z) that affect the game performance, so that the player can arbitrarily select contents in terms of both effects and game performance. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<Regarding production content in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, the characteristic effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In contrast to the above-described first embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, a selection effect for allowing the player to operate the end condition switching button group and a switching effect for indicating the player's operation result of the end condition switching button group are configured to be executable.

First, with reference to FIG. 145(a), the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 145(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the jackpot ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is different from the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12(a)) in the above-described first embodiment in that a display mode for prompting the player to operate the switch button 22za is added, and the rest is the same. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "V rush will start after the jackpot ends!" Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment ``Get 40 seconds of V rush period'' with a short remaining time mode 801 of ``40 seconds'' for indicating the duration of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Incidentally, when the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the special symbol pending storage status (see FIG. 145 (c)) is the same as the special symbol pending storage status (see FIG. 12 (c)) when the display screen of FIG. 12 (a) of the first embodiment described above is displayed.

In addition, a display area HR20 is formed in the lower left side of the main display area Dm (lower left side in the front view of FIG. 145), and a comment of "Select end condition with button PUSH" and an icon imitating the switching button 22za are displayed as a display mode for prompting the operation of the switching button 22za.

In the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is being displayed, so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the completion condition of the role winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game is finished, the termination condition of the role winning game cannot be switched.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the frequent switching of end conditions of the accessory winning game according to the game situation during the V rush, that is, the variation situation of the special pattern and the variation situation of the normal pattern, and to provide the player with an excessively advantageous game situation. In addition, since the end condition of the role winning game can be selected at the timing when the game for winning the ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is completed and before the execution of the special electric game, the game for shooting the ball and the act of selecting the end condition do not overlap, and the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the end condition of the role winning game can be selected in a state in which the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is notified, so that the player can select the end condition of the role winning game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big win ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801, the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the game for the role, and the game period of the game for the role is arbitrarily adjusted, Aiming for a special electric game that efficiently sets the period for interrupting the special symbol variation, the period of the time saving state is long (for example, 200 seconds) as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801. is displayed, the time end condition is selected, and by increasing the number of balls to be awarded to the V winning device 65 in one accessory winning game, a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per unit time is increased can be aimed at.

In the sixth embodiment, the player can select the ending condition of the role winning game during the period when the ending screen of the big winning game is displayed.

In addition, even when a waiting screen (demonstration screen) displayed when the special symbol variation is not executed in the time saving state, the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable, or the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable during the period when the role winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, the conditions for ending the game with the role can be selected at the timing when the remaining time (short period of time) of the time saving state is not subtracted, so that the player can select the condition for finishing the game with the role while giving him time to spare.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game per role may be selectable only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted. By configuring in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted, it is possible for the player to select whether to concentrate only on the special electric game or to execute the operation of selecting the end condition of the game with the role, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game contents, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the player presses the switching button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the termination condition of the accessory winning game will be described. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as the end condition selection screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za is pressed, the detection result is output to the main controller 110 . In the main controller 110, a command (during switching command) indicating that the switching button 22za is pressed is set, and the set command (during switching command) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55). Then, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) based on the reception of the switching command.

Referring to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the winning role game will be explained in detail. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, a comment "Please select the end condition of winning the role" is displayed. By visually recognizing this comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the end condition of the winning-accessory game.

In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions selectable by the player are partitioned, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end condition, time end condition) (contents for establishing the end condition) are displayed. More specifically, the display area HR21 displays the prize winning end condition as the condition for ending the accessory winning game, and the display area HR22 displays the time end condition as the condition for ending the accessory winning game.

In the display area HR21, a comment ``It will end when three balls enter the V attacker'' is displayed as a requirement for establishing the winning end condition, and ``winning end'' for indicating the target ending condition is displayed in the display region HR21a. Also, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the winning end condition, an icon imitating the first selection button 22zb (a circle with the number 1 attached) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area HR22, a comment "It will end in 1.6 seconds from the start of winning the character" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the time end condition, and "time end" for indicating the target end condition is displayed in the display area HR22a. Also, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon imitating the second selection button 22zc (a circle with the number 2 attached) is displayed.

Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Time" are displayed to indicate the type of end condition currently set as the end condition of the winning-accessory game. That is, FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game. In addition, when a prize-winning end condition is set as the condition for ending the role-winning game, the characters "winning" are set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the operation to be executed by the player to select the end condition of the winning game, a comment of ``Please select with the button'' and an icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (depressed) are displayed.

By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily make a selection while grasping the content of the conditions for ending the accessory winning game. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b), when the selection screen that allows selection of the end condition of the accessory winning game is displayed, the information (for example, the short time remaining state 801 shown in FIG. 145(a)) indicating the length of the time saving state (short time) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured not to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily select the end condition of the accessory winning game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed, the first selection button detection switch detects that the first selection button 22zb has been operated (pressed), and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, processing based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb (processing for storing the selected termination condition) is executed, and a command (operation command) is set to indicate that the first selection button 22zb has been effectively operated.

When an operation command is set in the control processing of main controller 110, the operation command is output to sound lamp controller 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), and sound lamp controller 113 sets the display mode after selection of the end condition based on the information included in the received operation command (information indicating the type of the selected button that was operated). Here, an example of the display screen displayed after selection of the termination condition will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed after selecting the prize ending condition as the condition for ending the winning-accessory game.

When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning ending condition is operated (depressed) while the ending condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed, a display area corresponding to the selected ending condition (winning ending condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the character "OK" indicating that the selection of the ending condition is completed is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 146(a). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for informing the player of the timing at which the result of this selection is reflected, a comment ``The prize winning will end after winning the next role'' is displayed, and in the display area HR23, characters of ``Winning'' indicating that the currently set end condition is the winning end condition are displayed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the role winning game can be selected a plurality of times within a period in which the end condition of the role winning game can be selected, and the end condition selected at the time when the period in which the end condition of the role winning game can be selected has passed is set as the end condition of the role winning game. Therefore, even if the player selects the ending condition by mistake, he/she can select the ending condition again until the period during which the player can select the ending condition for the accessory winning game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state in which the condition for ending the role winning game is selectable, an operation command indicating that the selection button has been operated and the type of the selected button that has been operated is set, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, when the period in which the condition for ending the role winning game can be selected ends, the ending condition for the finally selected role winning game is determined. It is configured to set the command to indicate (end condition command).

That is, since the player may select the termination condition a plurality of times during the period when the termination condition of the accessory winning game is selectable, only the operation of each selection button is output to the voice lamp control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and only the finally selected termination condition is output to the voice ramp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary commands from being output from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 .

Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is displayed in the same situation (see FIG. 12(c)) as the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 146(c)). The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), on the display screen during the V-rush, the characters "WIN" are displayed, indicating that the prize-winning end condition is set as the condition for ending the role-winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the accessory winning game executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period, and for example, the player can easily grasp the end condition of the role winning game even during the role winning game. When the end condition is displayed during the role winning game in this way, it is preferable to display the update status of the element for establishing the end condition (the number of winning balls to the V attacker (V winning device 65) when the winning end condition is set, and the elapsed time after the start of the role winning game when the time end condition is set) and the value satisfying the end condition on the display surface. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused due to the abrupt end of the accessory winning game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 147, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29) in that an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec are added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The termination condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the termination condition of the role winning game selected by the player, and when it is determined that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the termination condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the stored end condition is read, and is referred to when setting the end condition command corresponding to the read end condition. Further, when executing the accessory winning game, the accessory winning game is executed based on the read end condition.

In the sixth embodiment, the end condition storage area 203ea is configured to store information indicating the winning end conditions as initial data. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated (S1704: Yes in FIG. 54) in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54), information for indicating the winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea as part of the process of S1714.

In this way, at least one end condition is stored as the initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea as the end condition of the role winning game, so that in the pachinko machine 10 having the function of selecting the end condition of the role winning game, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which none of the end conditions of the role winning game is set. In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the winning end condition is stored (stored) in the ending condition storage area 203ea as the initial data for the end condition for ending the role winning game.

The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected, and is set to ON when the ending period of the big winning game is started, and is set to OFF when the ending period of the big winning game ends.

In the sixth embodiment, when the switch button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation of the switch button 22za is disabled. With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, execution of processing based on the operation can be suppressed.

The switching flag 203ec is a flag for indicating that the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during a period in which the end condition of the role-winning game can be selected (the period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), and the end condition can be selected by operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc. The end condition is selected by operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc. It is set to on when a period is set that can be set.

This switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes) when the switching button 22za is operated in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) (S2201 in FIG. 151: Yes), that is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes) (S22 in FIG. 151). 04).

Then, the setting state of the switching flag 203ec is referred to in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) when determining whether or not the operation of the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined (S2202 in FIG. 151). It is set to off (see S2209 in FIG. 151). Further, when the selection operation is not performed by the player while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, it is set to OFF at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Ramp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, the sixth embodiment differs from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment in the above-described first embodiment in that an end storage area 223ea is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected accessory winning game. When an operation command is received in the end condition related process (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the corresponding end condition is stored based on the operation information (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated) included in the operation command (S5706, S5 in FIG. 155). 707). Then, when an end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the content of the received end condition command (type of end condition set) is compared with the information stored in the end storage area 223ea (type of end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) (S5710 in FIG. 155), and when the comparison result is different, the end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored. There is.

In other words, the end storage area 223ea stores an end condition based on the received operation command when an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated by the player is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. Then, when an end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set by the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command is compared with the actually set end condition, and when the comparison result is not the same, the end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

By constructing in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) for indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of the jackpot game, the end condition selected by the player can be predicted based on the operation command at a stage prior to receiving the end condition command, and the performance mode based on the prediction result can be set, so that the player can execute the performance without discomfort. In the present embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is the end timing of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the player operates the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), the end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. When configured in this manner, a display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be selected based on the received termination condition command, that is, based on the actually set termination condition.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Control processing of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 153. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, timer interrupt processing 6 (see FIG. 149) instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is replaced with the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), special electric starting door winning processing 6 (see S178 of FIG. 150) is replaced with the special electric starter winning prize processing (see S108 of FIG. 50), and jackpot control processing (see S1804 of FIG. 56) is replaced with the jackpot control processing 6 (see S1854 of FIG. 152). are the same except that they execute The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt processing 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 6. As shown in FIG. This timer interrupt process 6 differs from the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) in that the special electric starting point winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is executed instead of the special electric starting point winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50), and a switching process (see S171) is added. ), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178). This special electric starter winning process 6 (S178) differs from the above-described special electric starter winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that the contents of the process to be executed when the conditions for executing the game with the accessory are satisfied are changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric starting entrance winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the same S1301 to S1307 processes as the special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and then the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined that it is not in the process of S1302 (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this process ends.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the condition for executing the role winning game is established, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set, thereby varying the end condition of the role winning game. As a result, when the termination condition selected by the player is established, the role winning game can be terminated, so that the player can select the size of the privilege to be given during the special electric game, and the willingness to play can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the condition for ending the role winning game to be executed is set each time the condition for executing the role winning game is established. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the condition for ending the role winning game can be selected only during the jackpot game as in the present embodiment, it is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea when the jackpot game ends or when the condition for executing the role winning game is satisfied for the first time after the jackpot game ends. It is also possible to read out the set end condition, set the role winning operation scenario corresponding to the end condition, and execute the role winning game based on the set role winning operation scenario until the next big winning game is executed.

By constructing in this way, the role winning game corresponding to the end condition selected by the player can be executed without executing the processing of reading information from the end condition storage area 203ea each time the execution condition of the role winning game is satisfied.

Further, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select the end condition of the role winning game during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, a flag (end condition switching flag) indicating that the end condition of the role winning game has been switched is provided, and only when the end condition switching flag is set to ON, The information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read to switch the end condition of the role winning game. good to do Thus, when a new role winning game is executed under the same end condition as the previous role winning game, it is possible to skip processing for reading out information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea, thereby simplifying control processing when executing the role winning game.

Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and is executed based on the player's operation of the end condition switching button group 22z.

When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the current time is not during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: No), the operation of the end condition switching button group 22z is in an invalid period, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON in the process of S2201, that is, when it is determined that the current time is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), it is next determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

In the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, if the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed) (S2202: No), it is determined whether the switching button 22za is operated (S2203), and if it is determined that the switching button 22za is not operated (S2203: No ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), then the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), the switching command is set (S2205), and this processing ends.

Here, the determination processing of S2203 will be described. In this embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za, the switching button detection switch detects the pressed switching button 22za, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the determination processing of S2203, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the switch button detection switch described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, when the switching button 22za is already being operated (the display screen of FIG. 145(b) is being displayed) (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is being operated (S220). 6). In the determination process of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the first selection button detection switch detects the pressed first selection button 22zb, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first selection button detection switch. Further, when the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the second selection button detection switch detects the pressed second selection button 22zc, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the second selection button detection switch.

If it is determined in the process of S2206 that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (S2206: Yes), an operation command including information indicating that the selection button has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button is set (S2207), and the end condition selected by the process of S2206 is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (S2208). , the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF (S2209), and the process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S2206 that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc has been operated, that is, if it is determined that neither the first selection button detection switch nor the second selection button detection switch outputs a detection signal (S2206: Yes), this processing ends.

As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), when any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated at the timing at which the operation of the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, information indicating the selected termination condition is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea, but the command indicating the selected termination condition is not set. , information indicating that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button are set. Further, since the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF in the process of S2209, it is possible to select the ending condition again by operating the ending condition switching button group 22z during the ending period of the jackpot game.

That is, since the end condition is not determined until the ending period of the jackpot game is over, the command (end condition command) for indicating the selected end condition is not output to the sound lamp control device 113. - 特許庁With this configuration, when the end condition command is received on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, performance can be set according to the information (end condition type) included in the received end condition command until the next jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the control processing on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified compared to the case where the end condition command is set each time the player operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc).

Further, since an operation command indicating that the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) are operated in the state that the switching flag 203ec is set to ON can be set, performance based on the received operation command can be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player who operates the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) feel uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot control processing 6 (S1854). This jackpot control process 6 (S1854) differs from the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed at the start timing of the ending period and the process executed at the end timing of the jackpot game are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and after finishing the process of S1911, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and this process ends. That is, in this embodiment, when an ending period set after the end of the last round game is set in the jackpot game, by setting the switchable flag 203eb to ON, the operation of the player on the switch button 22za is effectively discriminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), next, it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, that is, the timing of the end of the ending period (S1912), and when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), S1913 to S1917 which are the same as the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. After that, the end condition setting process is executed (S1952), and this process ends. Also, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot in the processing of S1912 (S1912: No), the same processing of S1918 as the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 153, the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and is executed based on the selection result of the end condition selection of the accessory winning game executed during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to OFF (S2301), and then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2302). The switching flag 203ec is set to off (S2303), the information (finally selected termination condition type) stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S2304), the termination condition command is set based on the information read from the termination condition storage area 203ea (S2305), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, if the switch button 22za is not operated on the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)), or if the desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) (S2302: No), S23 03 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, the end condition command is set only for the finally selected end condition. Furthermore, it is configured so that the period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected is only during the big winning game. By constructing in this way, the number of end condition commands output to the sound lamp control device 113 side at the time of one big win game can be reduced to one, and the end conditions corresponding to the end conditions included in the end condition commands are applied at least until the next big win game is executed.

Therefore, since the performance based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next big win game is executed on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing for changing the performance mode when changing the performance mode according to the end condition of the role winning game.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The sixth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 154, the contents of command determination processing 6 (S4172) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 6 (S4172). This command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61) in the above-described first embodiment in that a determination process for determining whether a command related to the end condition of the role-winning game has been received and a process executed based on the result of the determination process are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 6 (S4172 of FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process of the first embodiment (see S4102 of FIG. 61) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4218 that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, the termination condition-related command corresponds to the switching command and operation command set in the switching process of the main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151), and the termination condition command set in the termination condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153).

In the process of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the end condition related process is executed (S4272), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272). In this end condition related process (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation to select the end condition of the accessory winning game, various processes are executed for setting the effect mode corresponding to the selection operation.

When the end condition-related processing (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is currently in progress (S5701), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S5701: No), this processing is terminated as it is. That is, in this embodiment, since the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected only during the big win game, when the end condition related command is received other than during the big win game, the performance corresponding to the received command is not set. Therefore, when an erroneous command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect not intended by the player.

In the processing of S5701, when it is determined that the game is currently in the jackpot game (S5701: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the switching command is received, that is, whether the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za during the ending period of the jackpot (S5702). If it is determined in the processing of S5702 that the switching command has been received (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating the selection screen is set (S5703), and this processing ends.

When the processing of S5703 is executed, a display command for switching the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)) to a selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) for selecting the termination condition of the accessory winning game is set. The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)), and the selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is set when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) effectively, that is, when the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated during the ending period of the big win, and the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated in a state in which the selection screen of the ending condition is displayed, and indicates the type of the selection button operated by the player. is a command that contains information about

In the processing of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the operation command received this time is an operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, whether information included in the operation command includes information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated (S5705). A display command indicating the end of winning (condition), which is the end condition corresponding to the selection button 22zb, is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the processing of S5706, an end condition determination screen (see FIG. 146(a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). After that, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc. When the display command is set in the processing of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). Specifically, in the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146(a), the display area HR22 (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed in an enlarged manner instead of the display area HR21, "Time End" is displayed in the display area HR22a, and the characters "Time" are displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

In the processing of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has not been received (S5704: No), then it is determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and if it is determined that an end condition command has not been received (S5709: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the termination condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the termination condition stored in the termination storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the termination condition command received this time to determine whether the same termination condition is indicated (S5710).

In the process of S5710, if it is determined that the end condition is the same, that is, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition (S5710: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. Further, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), the actually set end condition and the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are different. 11), the process ends.

When the display command is set in the process of S5711, a display mode corresponding to the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command is displayed in the display area HR23 while displaying the comment "Ending condition is being switched" in the center of the main display area Dm.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the prize-winning end condition or the time end condition as the condition for ending the winning-accessory game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if the period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied passes, and when the time ending condition is selected, the winning ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of winning prizes to the V prize winning device 65 reaches the number for which the winning end condition can be satisfied. By configuring in this way, the role winning game can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is established, so that the player can be made to actively play the game during the special electric game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the elapsed time during the prize winning game, and when the time ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game. 1.6 seconds) or longer (e.g., 10 seconds), or if the time end condition is selected, a forced winning end condition may be set that is met when the number of winnings (e.g., 10) is greater than the number of winnings (e.g., 3) set as a normal winning end condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of the accessory winning game for a long time.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the completion condition of the role winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game is finished, the termination condition of the role winning game cannot be switched.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress frequent switching of the termination condition of the accessory winning game according to the game situation during the V rush, that is, the variation situation of the special pattern and the variation situation of the normal pattern, and to provide the player with an excessively advantageous game situation. Also, since the end condition of the role winning game can be selected at the timing when the game for winning the ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is completed and before the special electric game is executed, the game for shooting the ball and the act of selecting the end condition do not overlap, and the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, since the end condition of the role winning game is selectable in the state that the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is notified, the player can select the end condition of the role winning game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big win ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801, the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the game for the role, and the game period of the game for the role is arbitrarily adjusted, aiming at a special electric game that efficiently sets the period for interrupting the special symbol variation, and the period of the time saving state is long (for example, 200 seconds) as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801. is displayed, the time end condition is selected and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize winning device 65 in one accessory winning game is increased, thereby aiming at a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per unit time is increased.

In the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the ending condition of the role winning game during the period when the ending screen of the big winning game is displayed.

In addition, even when a standby screen (demonstration screen) is displayed when the special symbol variation is not executed in the time saving state, the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable, or the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable during the period when the role winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, the conditions for ending the game with the role can be selected at the timing when the remaining time (short time period) of the time saving state is not subtracted, so that the player can select the condition for finishing the game with the role while giving him time to spare.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game per role may be selectable only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted. By configuring in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted, it is possible for the player to select whether to concentrate only on the special electric game or to execute the operation of selecting the end condition of the game with the role, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game contents, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a second modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time-saving state is set, in all games such as winning games (character winning game, small winning game, big winning game), the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) out of the game areas formed on the game board 13. It was configured to execute a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is shot so that the ball flows down.

As a result, since the game area in which the player shoots the ball is not changed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, in each embodiment, as described above, in the middle of the game (for example, when a winning game is executed), there is no need to change the game method. Therefore, even if a normal figure winning game is executed (see FIG. 13 (a)) or a role winning game is executed (see FIG. 18 (a)), guidance information for changing the game method (for example, comment display of "right hit") is not executed, and the display area HR3 is opened during the winning game. It was configured to notify the player of the device (for example, the general electric winning device 640, the V winning device 65, etc.) to be in the state.

However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)) in each of the above-described embodiments, there is simply an image display schematically showing the winning device (general/electrical winning device 640) corresponding to the winning game to be executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, when unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)), the area for executing other performance displays is narrowed, and the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, if each display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set for the purpose of widening the area for executing other performance display and enhancing the performance effect, the display area of the display area HR3 becomes narrow, and there is a problem that a game difficult for the player to understand is provided.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, the guide display mode (the display mode of the display image displayed in the display area HR3) indicating the winning device (general electric winning device 640, V winning device 65, variable winning device 650) that the player should aim for during the winning game is configured to be variably settable based on various conditions, which is different from the above-described embodiments. The contents other than that are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, an example of the display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when a game per normal figure is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed.

In the second modified example, similarly to each of the first embodiments described above, when a game per normal pattern is executed, the ball enters a state in which the normal electric winning device 640 can win. A special electric operation port 643 is provided inside the general electric prize winning device 640, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 643, a prize winning game is executed in which the ball can win a prize to the V prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加Further, a V prize winning port 165 is provided in the V prize winning device 65, and when a ball enters the V prize winning port 165, a big winning game (V big winning game) in which the ball can win a prize to the variable winning device 650 is executed. In other words, it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of possible winning games based on one winning game (normal figure winning game).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, for example, the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 during the normal pattern winning game, so that the accessory winning game is executed continuously from the normal pattern winning game. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed corresponding to the type of the winning game being executed, the guidance display mode displayed in the display area HR3 is switched in accordance with the timing of switching from the regular winning game to the role winning game, so there is a problem that the timing of displaying the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the prize winning device (V winning device 65) corresponding to the role winning game is delayed. In addition, considering that the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed is delayed, for example, when the hitting game switches from the normal game to the role game, specifically, after the normal game is finished (after the ball enters the special electric activation port 643), it is also possible to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) until the role game is executed. ), the sense of speed of the special electric game is lowered, and the amusement of the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 156(a), in the state where the image display imitating the general electric winning device 640 is executed as the guide display mode in the display area HR3, the winning device (V winning device) that the player should aim for in the winning game (accessory winning game) that is executed when the ball is entered into the special electric activation opening 643 in the normal drawing winning game being executed. The prize device 65) is configured such that a second guidance display mode for guiding the player in advance is displayed in the display area HR30.

By configuring in this way, when the game result of the current normal figure winning game is a specific game result (the game result of winning the ball into the special electric activation port 643), the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the winning device to be targeted in the next winning game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, by notifying in advance the game contents of the accessory winning game that can be executed next during the normal figure winning game, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a waiting period for allowing the player to grasp the game contents of the role winning game (a winning device to be aimed at) during the period from the end of the normal figure winning game to the execution of the role winning game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows.

In addition, as described above, since it is configured so that the role winning game is executed when the game result of the normal figure winning game being executed becomes a specific game result, the comment "Aim" is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed in the display area HR30 during the normal figure winning game. In addition, in a state in which the performance of the accessory winning game is not confirmed, that is, in a state in which the normal game is in progress and the ball has not entered the special electric operation opening 643, only a part of the display image imitating the V winning device 65 (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 in FIG. 18(a)) is configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily distinguish between the first guidance display mode showing the game contents of the winning game being executed and the second guidance display mode showing the game contents of the winning game to be executed next, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game aiming at the V winning device 65 during the normal winning game.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a), as the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, the image display imitating the prize-winning device that is in the open state in the corresponding winning game is used.

Further, photographed data obtained by photographing each prize-winning device actually provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used as the image display imitating the prize-winning device displayed in the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode. As a result, the image of the winning device can be used as the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can achieve an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

On the contrary, it is possible to use a simple display that displays only the minimum required display information among the winning devices corresponding to the winning game. In this case, since the simple display can be used in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the cost of developing the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in the second modification, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the past history information mode is also displayed for enabling notification of the type of winning game that triggered the execution of the winning game (for example, jackpot game) currently being executed.

By constructing in this way, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to look back on the past game contents, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the jackpot game executed this time is a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in a lottery of special symbols or a jackpot game executed based on a ball entering a V winning port 165 during a role winning game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the second guidance display mode displayed during the normal pattern per game is configured to be variably set according to the progress of the normal per pattern game, that is, according to the change in the degree of expectation that the ball will win in the special electric operation port 643 in the normal per pattern game being executed. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of the general game per game from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (universal electric winning device 640) and the second image data to be displayed as the second guidance display mode (image data schematically showing the V winning device 65) are set and transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, based on the reception of the display command described above, the image display data of the first guidance display mode and the image display data of the second guidance display mode shown in FIG. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed immediately after the game per normal pattern is started. Then, when a prize winning command indicating that a winning sensor 640s has detected that a ball has won a prize in a general electric prize winning device 640 during a normal pattern winning game is output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command indicating the progress of the normal pattern winning game to the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

As a result, image display data (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed) in which the image simulating the V winning device 65 is exposed more than the display mode shown in FIG. Then, similarly, when a command is output from the main controller 110 indicating that it is determined that the ball will enter the special electric operation opening 643, for example, the state in which the ball passes through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special electric operation opening 643, an entire image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as the second guidance display mode.

With this configuration, the display mode (second guidance display mode) of the guidance display for the winning game that can be executed next can be changed according to the progress of the winning game that is being executed, that is, the higher the expectation that the ball will win in the special electric activation opening 643 in the normal figure winning game that is being executed, the more clearly the guidance display for guiding the winning game that can be executed next can be displayed.

The example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a) is merely an example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games in a series of flows, during the period in which one winning game is being executed, it is sufficient if it is possible to guide the game method of the winning game that can be executed next. According to the type of the game per normal figure to be executed, the first guide display mode displayed during the game per normal figure, or the second guide display mode may be varied. Specifically, the display color and size of the first guide display mode may be changed to a mode that stands out to the player as the probability of the next winning game (for example, the winning game for the role) increases. In addition, the display mode of the second guide display mode displayed at the start of the normal game may be varied. For example, when a disadvantageous normal game with a low probability of execution of the next winning game (for example, a role winning game) is executed, a display mode in which about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode, and a horse match in which an advantageous normal game winning game is more likely to be executed than a disadvantage normal game is entered as the second guidance display mode. It is preferable to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the prize device 65 is displayed.

By recognizing the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, not only can the game method of the winning game to be executed be easily comprehended, but also the player can predict whether the winning game under execution is a winning game advantageous to the player or not, so that the presentation effect of the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, by configuring the display mode to vary step by step according to the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player, and by configuring the stage of the initially set display mode to be different according to the degree of advantage of the winning game (normal game) to be executed, i.e., by varying the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of advantage of the winning game to be executed while using common image data. Data capacity can be reduced.

In the above-described contents, an example in which the normal figure winning game and the accessory winning game are executed as an example winning game is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it may be used in all cases where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of winning games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156(b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the normal game winning game will be described. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed, the display area HR3 for guiding the game method of the normal figure winning game being executed is enlarged and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player who wants to know the game method of the winning game being executed. When the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is reduced from the size shown in FIG. 156(a). When the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen. When the frame button 22 is operated four times, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed.

Thus, by varying the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the playing method of the winning game being executed based on the player's operation, the guide display mode can be displayed in the size desired by the player. Further, when the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other performance displays (the performance displays such as reference numerals 811 and 812) displayed on the display screen overlapping the display timing of the guidance display mode is enlarged. Furthermore, it has an effect display that is executed only when the display area of other effect displays becomes large. This allows the player to positively operate the frame button 22 .

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, the detailed display part of the first guidance display mode, for example, the display mode imitating the second movable valve 642 in the electric power winning device 640 is configured so that the player can visually recognize that it is a specific display mode different from the usual, and this specific display mode may be configured to be easily displayed when a winning game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. As a result, even a player who already understands the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

In the example described above, the guidance display mode can be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22). However, the guidance display mode may be changed based on the operation of the operation means. The guidance display mode may be varied so that the area where the target winning device is arranged on the game board 13 of No. 0 is displayed, or the guidance display mode may be varied so that the target winning device of the guidance display mode is rotated (horizontally rotated, vertically rotated). In this case, image data showing the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device are stored in advance in the display control device 114, and when a command corresponding to the operation signal indicating the operation content for the direction operation means is received, the image data corresponding to the command is created and displayed. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that information advantageous to the player is displayed in the displayable area only when the direction operation means is operated. As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment described above, all games are configured to be executable as left-handed games. However, for example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games as a series of games, and when one winning game is executed as a left-handed game and the next winning game is executed as a right-handed game, a display region HR3 in which the first guidance display mode is displayed is formed on the left side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the second It is preferable that the display area HR30 in which the guide display mode is displayed is formed on the right side of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . Further, in this case, the player may be configured to be able to operate the position where the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed by operating the above-described direction operation means.

In the second modified example explained above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games was explained, but even when a specific winning game is executed alone, the above-described effect can be applied. For example, a special symbol variation period and a jackpot game may be set as a series of games, and during the special symbol variation period, an image aiming at the special symbol entrance 64 may be displayed as the first guidance display mode, and an image showing the variable winning device 650 may be displayed as the second guidance display mode. In this case, the first guidance display mode, which is less necessary to guide the player on the game method, may be deleted, and only the second guidance display mode may be displayed. In addition, if the game machine is provided with a plurality of variable prize winning devices 650 which are opened when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the second guidance display mode may be constructed so as to be able to perform a presentation to prompt the player as to which variable prize winning device 650 will be finally displayed.

In addition, in the second modified example described above, the guide display mode when the normal pattern winning game is executed was explained, but for example, during the period until the normal symbol winning game is won and the normal pattern winning game is executed, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. Also, at that timing, the guidance display mode may be switched in order to display the flow of the game when all the examples of games are successful, that is, the flow of the normal game, the role game, and the big win game.

Furthermore, the variable contents of the guide display mode displayed during the winning game may be appropriately set, for example, besides enlarging, reducing, and rotating, the guide display mode may be changed using flashing or color change, or the guide display mode may be varied by causing a character to appear in the vicinity of the guide display mode. Also, the game method may be guided by combining a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 .

Furthermore, in each of the above-described second modified examples, an image display using an image simulating the real thing is executed in order to guide the game method during the winning game in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. It is also possible to use a display image simplified to the extent that it is possible for the player to grasp at least one of the location of the advantageous area. By constructing in this way, the minimum required information can be provided to the player, and common image data can be used for different pachinko machines 10, so that the development cost and manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, or when the ball enters (wins) the specific area (V winning opening 165) during the role winning game, the big winning game is configured to be executable, and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the big winning game. In addition, as a termination condition of the time-saving state, a time-saving termination condition (number of times of time-saving) established based on execution of a predetermined number of special pattern lotteries (for example, four times) without winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery is set. Further, when the role winning game is executed during the dynamic display period (variation period of the special pattern) from the execution of the special symbol lottery until the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted, and the interrupted processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted based on the end of the role winning game or the end of the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the ball passed (entered) the specific area during the role winning game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, processing for updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state (processing for subtracting the number of remaining time reduction) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, specifically, it is executed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the special symbol variation, and after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is established.

By constructing in this way, when the processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted on the basis of the performance of the winning-accessory game during the execution of the special symbol variation, and then the interrupted processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted, when the dynamic display period after the resumption elapses and the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the number of times of shortening of working hours can be prevented from being updated. Therefore, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the residual dynamic display period of the interrupted dynamic display is extremely short, and it is possible to suppress the immediate subtraction of the number of times of time saving set after the end of the jackpot game by the stop display of the special symbol variation after restart.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing when the dynamic display period of the special symbol has passed. Therefore, the time saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, which satisfies the conditions for terminating the time saving state, is stopped and displayed, so that the game state advantageous to the player can be continued as long as possible. Furthermore, since it is not determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is established during the dynamic display period of the special pattern, the game state does not shift from the time saving state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special pattern. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, you may apply the content mentioned above to the pachinko machine 10 of 4th Embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in duplicate. When the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small win, big win), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation (processing for subtracting the dynamic display period of the special symbol) being executed is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, when one special symbol lottery wins a big win, the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and when a small win wins, the other special symbol variation being executed is interrupted.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, when the cumulative number of lotteries obtained by summing the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or when the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol reaches a specific number of times (for example, 4 times), the time saving end condition is established.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above executes the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state (the process of subtracting the number of remaining time reductions) based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, and determines whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied. As a processing result of (1), the execution condition of the other special symbol lottery is established during the execution of the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation in which the number of times of time reduction after subtraction is 0) in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, and the timing is set before the execution of the special symbol lottery.

With such a configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed more than a specified number of times during the time saving state, and the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player can be continued as long as possible.

In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the process of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied and the process of ending the time saving state (shifting to the normal state) based on the processing result are the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed). When the special pattern variation (final variation of the time saving state) wins (small win or big win), the timing at which the winning game is executed, the predetermined timing during the winning game (for example, 1 second after the winning game is started), and the timing at which the winning game ends may be set. In other words, the processing for updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (processing for subtracting the number of times of remaining time reduction) is executed, and the period from when the special symbol variation targeted for the execution is stopped and displayed until the next special symbol lottery is executed is sufficient.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, 4 times) is provided. However, without being limited to this, the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (e.g., a lottery result other than a jackpot winning, and a part of the lottery results in the case of losing and winning). A time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls passing through a specific end region in the middle reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or a time-saving end condition that is established when the elapsed time after the time-saving state is set exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be set. In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, if the game machine is configured to be able to execute a winning game (small winning game) different from the big winning game, the time reduction end condition that is established when the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches a specific number of times may be set.

In addition, when configuring to be able to set the end condition of the time saving state that is established under various conditions, it is preferable to configure so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the trigger for setting the time saving state. Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game, the time-saving end condition may be set based on the game state when the big win is won or the big win type set when the big win is won, or the time-saving end condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the big win is won. Further, the time saving end condition may be set based on the number of times the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set across the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the time-saving end condition to be set.

In addition, it may be configured so that the player can select the time saving end condition set for the current time saving state from among a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be set as the time saving end condition. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while the player predicts which time saving end condition is selected to execute the most advantageous game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state, the number of times of saving time is not subtracted when the restarted special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Even when such a constitution is used, since the length of the short period of time after resuming differs depending on the length of the remaining variation period of the special symbol variation at the time of interruption, it is possible to make the player interested in at what timing the special symbol variation is interrupted (whether the jackpot game is executed).

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the process of updating (subtracting) the number of times of saving time is configured to be executed in the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the start of the special symbol variation. By constructing in this way, depending on the timing when the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to provide a case where the number of times of shortening of working hours is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol variation after resuming, and a case where it is not. Specifically, when the special symbol variation is interrupted 2 seconds after the special symbol variation is started, the update processing of the number of time reduction is executed 3 seconds after the special symbol variation is restarted. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation is interrupted after 10 seconds from the start of the special symbol variation, the number of time-saving update processing is not executed after the special symbol variation is restarted. Therefore, even when the special symbol variation is interrupted immediately after the special symbol variation is started, that is, when the remaining variation time is long, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state, so that the player can be interested in the game after the restart (the game during the time saving state). In addition, when configured so as to execute the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times of saving time during the period when the special pattern is fluctuating, it is preferable to configure the timing of executing the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times of saving time to be different according to the variation pattern (variation time, jackpot lottery result, stop type) of the selected special pattern. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing of interrupting the special symbol variation, which is advantageous to the player (the number of times of time saving is not updated by the special symbol variation after restarting, or the time saving state set at the time of restarting can be continued for a long time), so that the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for informing the player of that fact is executed. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next, the lucky time performance is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, when a V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed, a method (absolute determination) of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) and a method of determining whether the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next is longer (relative determination) are configured to be executable. As a result, the player can grasp the timing of advantageously interrupting the special symbol variation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player can be notified of the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is being executed. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration for executing update processing of the number of times of shortening of working hours of special symbol variations during special symbol variations, it may be configured to execute an effect indicating that the number of times of shortening of working hours is updated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when a specific winning game (accessory winning game, small winning game, big winning game) is executed during the execution of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a general electric prize winning device 640 is provided that makes it easier for a ball to win when a normal pattern winning game is executed, and a winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 passes (enters) a specific area (special electric operation opening 643, special electric operation opening 1643, second ball entrance 1645). That is, depending on the game result, it is possible to execute a game in which a jackpot game can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to set a game state (time-saving state) in which the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 easily passes through the above-mentioned specific area (time saving state) and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass.

By constructing in this way, even if a ball wins a prize in a general electric prize winning device 640 during a normal state winning game, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering a specific area, so that it is possible to prevent the excessively advantageous game from being provided to the player who is playing the game in the normal state.

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide the game board 13 with a special configuration for preventing the ball from winning a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general pattern winning game executed in the normal state in order to suppress the balls from entering the specific area during the normal state, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be enhanced. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the winning balls of the general electrical winning device 640, the balls that do not pass (enter) the specific area are configured to enter the out hole, and are configured so that the player is not awarded a privilege (a prize ball). .

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the type of privilege given to the player by the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 according to the set game state, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, a game state (time-saving state) in which the ball that has won the general electric prize device 640 can easily pass through the above-described specific region and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the above-described specific region can be set. 3), and a second specific area (special electric operation port 643) for executing the role winning game in which the execution opportunity of the jackpot game is less likely to be established than in the first specific area.

By configuring in this way, the ratio (easiness of passage) of the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 to pass through the specific region is changed according to the set game state, and the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 can be made to pass through either the first specific region advantageous to the player or the second specific region disadvantageous to the first specific region in a state where the game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to pass the specific region is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which specific area the ball enters (passes through) even in a state (a state in which the ball is likely to be given) that the first privilege is decided to be given by the winning ball of the electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the general pattern winning game executed during the time saving state until the end.

In the above-described second embodiment, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning hole 165 in the executed accessory winning game varies depending on the type of the specific area (special electric operation opening) into which the ball enters. That is, although the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the role winning game is made different, for example, the contents of the V jackpot game executed when the ball enters the V prize winning opening 165 (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game is finished (the number of time reductions)) may be configured to differ according to the type of the specific area (special electric activation opening) into which the ball enters.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments described above, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time is interrupted), but as in the third embodiment described above, according to the conditions established when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the special symbol variation being performed is discarded (the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and stopped) or discarded. You may comprise so that a time saving state may be ended on.

Furthermore, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the technical idea of the above-described second embodiment may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 which is configured so as to execute multiple types of special symbol lotteries (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) in duplicate. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the second ball entrance 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640, and the winning ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 when the ball wins in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving state than when the ball wins in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state. The winning device 640 may be provided with a right first ball entrance which triggers the lottery of the first special pattern, and a switching means may be provided so that the ball winning in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the time saving state enters either the second ball entrance 1645 or the right first ball entrance. In this case, it is preferable that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1645 rather than the right first ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol that can be executed even in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to entertain the player until the end of the result of the normal figure per game executed during the time saving state. In addition, in the case of using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in which the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol is defined as the termination condition of the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is not executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the general electric prize winning device 640 may be configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to configure so as to control the operation of the switching means so as to make it easier to enter the ball. By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery can be executed more reliably during the time saving state.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be executed at the start of the game per general pattern, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be executed based on the timing at which the normal symbol indicating winning per general pattern is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the stop display period has elapsed. It may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time saving state is set, until the time saving state ends (until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state ends), the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of aiming for a big win game (V big win game) via a specific game (accessory game or small win game) has been explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 having such game characteristics, the longer the variable time of the special symbols during the time saving state, the longer the time period (short time period) in which the time saving state is set, and the more times the specific game is executed during the time saving state.

Further, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol variation (the process for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation) is restarted after the specific game or the big win game (V big win game) ends, that is, when the conditions for executing the new special symbol change are established.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, the length of the short period of time is varied by the variation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period of the specific game, so that the player can be made to play the game enthusiastically so as to perform many specific games while wishing to select a longer variation time as the special symbol variation.

However, for example, the game period for executing the specific game (period during which the ball cannot be won in the general electrical winning device 640 during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol or during the game per normal symbol (difficult to win)) is a period in which the specific game cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted. This is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the opening period of the electric role product 640a during the normal pattern winning game, that is, the period in which the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, but the period in which the role winning game can be executed).

Further, the specific game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted is configured to end when either of the end condition (winning end condition) established when the number of winning balls into the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) that is opened during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, three) or the end condition (time end condition) established when a prescribed period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) elapses after the start of the accessory winning game (time end condition) is met. According to the contents of the game played by the player during the winning game (whether or not the ball is shot), the accessory winning game ends when any of the end conditions is met.

On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-described unfavorable period overlap, the effect mode of the specific game is configured to be variable based on the length of the unfavorable period. As a result, it is possible for the player to select the content of the game (end condition to be established) during the specific game, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, a special electric activation port 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, which serves as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed. Also in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the electric winning device 640 as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed. In a game machine having such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a delay means that randomizes (delays) the period (ball flowing period) until the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the period until the end of a plurality of special symbol variations is configured to be a short period of time, and when a new time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is set by executing a jackpot game, the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is added without subtracting the time-saving number of times. Therefore, it is constructed so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the jackpot game after the remaining number of times of the remaining time reduction and when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation under execution is long (the jackpot game is executed after the short period of time is shortened), rather than when the number of times of remaining time reduction remains and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation under execution is short.

Thus, by providing a delay means in the general electric prize winning device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance, it may be advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player as to at what timing the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance. In addition, it is possible to suppress the intentional execution of a game in which the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance while the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long.

In this case, as the delay means, a cloon member in which the ball can roll is provided, and when a plurality of balls flow into the cloon member, the balls may easily flow into a passage opening provided in the center of the cloon member, and the ball passing through the passage opening may be configured to flow into the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to operate the timing at which the ball enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entry opening according to the game content (the winning degree of the ball to the general electric winning device 640) during the game per normal game even though the delay means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the game so that the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entry opening at an arbitrary timing.

In addition, when the ball has flowed into the delay means (clone member), a suggestive effect is executed to suggest to the player a period advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long), or a result notification means for informing whether the timing at which the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance is a timing advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long) may be provided. Furthermore, in the above-described example, an example using a cloon member as a delay means has been described, but it is sufficient to be able to change the flow period of a ball that enters the ordinary electric winning device 640. For example, a plurality of flow paths having different periods (flowing periods) from entering the ordinary electric winning device 640 to entering the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance may be provided, and a distribution means for distributing the ball to any of the plurality of flow paths.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. FIG. Like the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are configured to be executable (so-called simultaneous variation specification), and by varying the length of the variation time of the first special symbol and the length of the variation time of the second special symbol selected according to the set game state, the lottery is easy to be executed. There are some that change the symbol type according to the game state. Specifically, when one game state (eg, normal state) is set, a short variation time (eg, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, and a long variation time (eg, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. When a specific game state different from the normal state (eg, latent state) is set, a long variation time (eg, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. A short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol lottery is easily executed during the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state.

Furthermore, in the game machine having the above-described structure, there is a game machine which is configured to win a small prize with a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and makes a latent state in which a small prize game executed based on the small prize winning is frequently executed a game state advantageous to the player.

In the above-described gaming machine, since a game (advantageous game) that frequently generates a small winning game can be executed only in a specific game state (latency state), the player can play the game while expecting the game state to shift. However, since a fixed variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state, it is not possible to make a large difference in the small winning game execution frequency during the latent definite state. there was

On the other hand, in the present seventh embodiment, it is configured to vary the range that can be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol in accordance with the number of held balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a short variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, by executing a game (right-handed game) in the latent definite state, it is possible to obtain both the start winning of the first special symbol (holding memory) and the starting winning of the second special symbol, and according to the small winning type set when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted or the lottery result indicating the failure can be forcibly stopped (discarded). By forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to positively reduce the number of reserved first special symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of pending memories of the first special symbol based on the lottery result of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the latent certainty state.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game state in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, as the game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and although detailed description will be given later, the latent state is configured as the most advantageous game state for the player, and the normal state is the most disadvantageous game for the player. It is configured as a skill state. Also, the variable probability state is configured as a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the name of the production mode executed during each game state may be used to indicate the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the board configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in that the V winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640 are deleted, and instead, a right variable winning device 1650, a right electric accessory 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided. Also, the difference is that the positions of the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are different. Other configurations are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, the left area (left area) and the right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80 among the game areas formed on the game board 13 are respectively provided with winning openings (ball receiving openings) through which a ball can be won. Therefore, unlike the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, it is configured so that the player can execute a game in which the ball flows down to the left side area (left-handed game) and a game in which the ball flows down to the right side area (right-handed game).

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the seventh embodiment, the player is made to execute different games according to the set game state. When the normal state is set, the left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64. When the variable probability state is set, the right-handed game is executed to make the right electric accessory 164 win the ball. It is configured to execute a right-handed game in order to enter the ball into the ball. In addition, even when a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, it is configured to execute a right-handed game.

In other words, when a game that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is configured to play the right-handed game. Therefore, since the game method allows the player to grasp whether the current situation is advantageous or not, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Although the details will be described later, during the game state (variable probability state, latent probability state, and various winning states) in which the right-handed game is executed, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a guidance display mode for causing the player to execute the right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), the rate at which a ball flowing down the left side area due to a left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), and the rate at which a ball flowing down the right side area due to a right-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 are configured to vary depending on the nail planted on the board surface of the game board 13 and various structures. Specifically, one out of about 15 balls that flow down the left side area in a left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), and one out of about 250 balls that flow down in the right side area in a right-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c). Therefore, in a normal state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), the left-handed game is the most advantageous game method for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80), there are a right variable winning device 1650, a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650, a right first ball entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67, and a right electric accessory 16 having an opening/closing door 164r1 capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first ball entrance 164r. 4, a right second ball entrance 645 into which a ball that has flowed down (passed) the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 can enter, and a variable winning device 650 is provided in a downstream area where a ball that has flowed down the right area without entering any of the above-described ball entrances reaches.

As shown in FIG. 157, the flow-down path of the game ball is set so that only the game ball passing through the through gate 67 can reach the right second ball entrance 645 while the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed). In other words, even if a right-handed game is played in a high-probability state (probability variable state) of normal patterns where the right electric accessory 164 is likely to be opened, almost all game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first ball entrance 164r, so that the game balls cannot be entered into the right second ball entrance 645.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, even in the variable probability state (variable probability mode), it can be configured so that the game can be progressed by the right-handed game.

In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening/closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all the balls flowing down the right side area in the right-handed game can win the right variable winning device 1650 in the open state. This right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball entry means) that is opened in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery.

When the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (a small winning game is not executed), about 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right region flow down the region where the through gate 67 is arranged (the right region (first route) of the left and right regions defined by the nails planted on the left side of the right variable winning device 1650), and the remaining about 1/2 flow down the left region (second route). The ball flowing down this left area (second path) flows down toward the variable winning device 650 without entering the right electric accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 1645 .

On the other hand, all the balls flowing down the right area (first path) where the through gate 67 is arranged flow down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (the upstream end side of the opening/closing door 164r1), and flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 from the upstream side to the downstream side. Approximately 2/3 of the ball discharged from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enters the right second ball entrance 645, and the remaining approximately 1/3 passes through the gap formed between the right electric accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 645 and flows down toward the variable winning device 650.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of paths are provided for the ball shot to the right side area by the right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650, and each path is formed so that the period required for the ball to flow down is different. Specifically, it is configured so that the ball flows down in the right area (first path) for about 2 seconds, and the ball in the left area (second path) flows about 1 second. By configuring in this way, balls fired at different timings (balls fired in a right-handed game), specifically, a plurality of balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds can reach the variable winning device 650 at the same timing. Therefore, during the period when the variable prize winning device 650 is in the open state (during the jackpot game), a plurality of balls can be easily entered into the variable prize winning device 650 at the same time, so that the player can be interested in the behavior of the falling balls during the jackpot game.

The right electric accessary 164 is a variable ball entry means which is opened when winning in a normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) in which a lottery condition can be established when a ball passes through a through gate 67 (when a normal pattern winning game is executed). Here, the normal design lottery (normal pattern lottery) in the present seventh embodiment, and the contents of the normal pattern per game will be briefly described.

In the seventh embodiment, even in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the ball can enter the right electric accessory 164 by the right-handed game, albeit with a low probability. This ball entry rate is set lower than the rate of balls that enter the first ball entry port 64 when a left-handed game is played in the normal state (ratio of about 1 ball out of 20 balls). A ball entering the right electric accessory 164 is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 164r without fail. Then, when the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164, the lottery right of the first special pattern is acquired (the lottery condition is established) as in the case of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, prize balls (four pieces) are provided in addition to the first special pattern lottery right as a benefit of the ball entering. On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164, a prize ball (1 piece) is granted in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege for entering the ball. That is, when the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is set as the game state, it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the first special symbol when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed, and the number of prize balls given when the ball is entered into the ball entrance for acquiring the lottery right of the first special symbol is increased. Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

Also, when a right-handed game is played in the normal state, about 1/3 of the balls flowing down the right side area enter the right second ball entrance 645 . When the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645, the lottery right for executing the lottery for the second special symbol is given, and one prize ball is given. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a long time (10 minutes) is set as the variation time. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured not to be stored (retained storage). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not smoothly performed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, when a jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed and a game of winning the ball to the variable winning device 650 is executed. Since the normal state of the normal pattern is set during the execution of the jackpot game, balls enter the right first ball entrance 164r in the right electric accessory 164 during the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the reserved memory number (the number of reserved balls) of the first special pattern becomes the upper limit.

Thus, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being the upper limit. In this embodiment, when the latent definite state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and a long variation (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. Then, a game (small winning RUSH) is executed in which a large number of prize balls are obtained while frequently winning a small winning in the second special symbol lottery.

Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent definite state reaches a predetermined number (1 or 2), a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation than when the number is other than the predetermined number (0, 3, 4). That is, the period in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is the predetermined number during the latent definite state is the period in which the number of times of the small winning game executed per unit time is likely to increase, and the game period is advantageous to the player.

As described above, since this embodiment does not have a reservation storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the latent state. And it is configured so that the variation time of the first special symbol in the latent definite state is a long time (10 minutes). Therefore, it is difficult to reach a predetermined number (1 or 2) of the number of held balls of the first special symbol in the lapse of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the latent certainty state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is configured to forcibly stop (discard) the first special symbol variation being executed in part when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the player can play the game of reducing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while playing the game aiming at winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent certainty state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the advantage period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in the latent state is set based on the number of balls held in the first special symbol, and furthermore, the number of balls held in the first special symbol can be increased when a game (right-handed game) for executing the second special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the advantageous period lasts.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a reserved memory function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is configured to select the variation time of the second special symbol based on the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol to be selected during the latent state is always configured to be a long variation time, but without being limited to this, for example, a short variation (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected with a probability of about 1/10 as the variation time of the first special symbol variation during the latent definite state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to include the fluctuation time lapse of the first special symbol in the practical method of causing the reserved memory of the first special symbol to be reduced during the latent definite state. Therefore, it is possible to substantially have a plurality of opportunities to reduce the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol in the latent certainty state.

In addition, although detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the discarding condition is satisfied in part when the small winning in the second special symbol lottery is won, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, but the discarding condition that can be satisfied regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol may be used. Alternatively, a discard condition that can be established when a ball enters a ball entrance provided in any of the game areas (right area) of the game board 13 may be set. In this way, the state of discarding the first special symbol is established due to various factors, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period is set.

Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. FIG. 158(a) is a front perspective view schematically showing a closed state of the right electric accessory 164 (a state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed), and FIG. 158(b) is a front perspective view schematically showing an open state (a state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is open).

As shown in FIG. 158(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is provided with projections 164r1a to 164r1c provided to prevent game balls from flowing down. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by the projections 164r1a to 164r1c, it flows down from the left side to the right side of the opening/closing door 164r1 along the outer periphery of each projection 164r1a to 164r1c. In other words, on the opening/closing door 164r1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the projections 164r1a to 164r1c. Therefore, compared to the case where the projections 164r1a to 164r1c are not provided (that is, the case where the game ball flows straight down the opening/closing door 164r1 from the left direction to the right direction in front view), it is possible to lengthen the period required until it completely flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. This makes it easier for a plurality of balls (subsequent balls) to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 while one ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and the ball can be easily won to the right electric accessory 164 when the normal game is executed.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but in this embodiment, when a high probability state (probability variable state) of normal symbols is set as the game state, most of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right electric accessory 164. The variation time of the normal symbols, the operation content of the normal per game, and the path of the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are designed. By constructing in this way, in the variable probability state, the probability of winning a big win in the special pattern lottery can be increased more than in the normal state, and by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the first special pattern can be made easier than in the normal state. In addition, since the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the variable probability state, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player who is playing the game during the variable probability state. In this embodiment, if a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the variable probability state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a variable time (60 seconds) shorter than the normal state is selected.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable probability state shifts to the latent probability state while the second special symbol variation is being executed for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time despite the shift to the latent probability state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as transition conditions for shifting the gaming state from the variable probability state to the latent probability state, a first transition condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the variable probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) and a second transition condition that is established when a specific small winning (small winning C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbols executed during the variable probability state are set. That is, in the probability variable state in which the lottery of the second special pattern is difficult to execute, when a specific small win (small win C) is won in the lottery of the second special pattern (when the second shift condition is satisfied), the state can be shifted to the latent probability state even if the number of executions of the special pattern lottery (fluctuation) executed during the variable probability state does not reach the predetermined number of times (50 times).

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158(b), the opening/closing door 164r1 slides from the front side in front view toward the back side in front view and is housed inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. As shown in FIG. As a result, the right first ball entrance 164r is opened. Although detailed description is omitted, the opening/closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state based on an instruction from the main controller 110. When an electric current is supplied to this solenoid, the solenoid is turned ON and the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened. In other words, it is configured so that the current flows to the solenoid only when the normal pattern lottery wins and the normal pattern winning game is executed. As a result, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed because the power is not required during the period in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed, which occupies a large proportion of the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

When the first ball entrance 164r is opened (when the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened), the ball passing through the through gate 67 can win the right electric accessory 164. In addition, since the interval in the height direction of the opening for housing the opening/closing door 164r1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the game ball which was flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 at the time when the opening/closing door 164r1 starts to slide is not housed inside the game board 13 together with the opening/closing door 164r1. A positioned ball can be dropped from above the opening/closing door 164r1 toward the first ball entrance 164r.

In the seventh embodiment, three protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 so that the game ball circumvents the protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the passage period during which the game ball passes through the opening/closing door 164r1 is lengthened. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c, or in addition, the upper surface of the open/close door 164r1 may be made of a material (for example, an elastic body) having a larger coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable prize winning device 65, etc.), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, the surface may be provided with unevenness, etc.).

FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening/closing door 164r1 viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 159, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of a ball are embedded in the zigzag path on which the ball can (easily) roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other at a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are known optical sensors whose output is H (high) when a game ball is placed above them and whose output is L (low) when there is nothing to obstruct the above. In the seventh embodiment, the combination of the outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored by the audio lamp control device 113 side. By combining the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, it is possible to calculate the passage state of the ball on the opening/closing door 164r1, and execute notification of the ball passage state based on the calculation result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp how close the ball shot by the right-handed game during the variable probability state is to the right second ball entrance 645 . Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game during the variable probability state based on the content of the ball passing state notification to be executed, the interest of the game during the variable probability state can be improved. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged only on the opening/closing door 164r1. However, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are provided only on the opening/closing door 164r1. It may be configured so that the number of balls that have passed through the upper surface of 1 can be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, description will be given of the flow-down situation when a ball shot in a right-handed game flows down the right-hand region. FIG. 160(a) is a latent state (high-probability state for special symbols, low-probability state for normal symbols), and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flowing down state when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645. FIG.

The seventh embodiment is configured so that the game of entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 by the right-handed game is the most advantageous game for the player when the latent definite state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is set. 160(a), the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state, and enters the right second ball entrance 645.

Although the detailed explanation will be given later, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is set to 1/2, and 30 seconds is set as a period (fluctuation time) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display (confirmation) of the lottery result. That is, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state (normal state, latent probability state, jackpot game state) in which a low probability state of normal patterns is set, one ball passes through the through gate 67 at a rate of one ball out of two balls, so that one ball out of four is won per normal pattern, and the game per normal pattern is executed at a rate of once every 60 seconds.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering ball flow path (passing period 1.3 seconds) is formed on the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 that is opened as a normal game. Therefore, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to make a plurality of balls stay on the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state with a high probability.

Therefore, even when the low-probability state of normal symbols is set, it is possible to win one or two balls to the right electric accessory 164 per minute. In addition, since the ball is easily made to stay on the opening/closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, even if the game period of the normal figure winning game is set to a short period (for example, open for 0.2 seconds), the ball can be easily won to the right electric accessory 164 during the normal figure winning game.

By setting the game period of the normal pattern winning game short in this way, when the right hitting game is executed after determining that the normal pattern winning game is executed based on the stop display mode of the normal pattern, the normal pattern winning game can be finished before the ball reaches the right electric accessory 164.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game of efficiently winning the ball to the right electric accessory 164 by executing the right hitting game after determining that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that is opened during a small winning game is provided above (upstream) the through gate 67. Therefore, even in a state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set, if the game state (latent probability state) in which the second special pattern lottery can be smoothly executed, the ball can be suppressed from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164 by executing the small winning game.

By constructing in this way, even when the low-probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to make it more difficult for the right electric accessory 164 to win the ball in the latent-probability state than in the normal state or during the jackpot game. Therefore, in the right hitting game executed during the jackpot game, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) can be obtained up to the upper limit by winning the balls in the right electric accessory 164, while the excessive increase of the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 due to the right hitting game executed during the latent state can be suppressed.

<Regarding production content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161 to FIG. 165, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the flow of effects from when the variable probability state is set as the game state until the latent probability state is set, and the flow of the effects executed during the latent probability state will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the flow of effects from when the variable probability state is set as the game state to when the latent probability state is set will be described. In this embodiment, in a part of the case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, a variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, in a state in which the variable probability state is set, when a predetermined transition condition is established, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state. Specifically, as the variable probability state, the high probability state of the special pattern is continued until the next big win, and the high probability state of the normal pattern is continued until the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times. In other words, the game state is changed from the variable probability state to the latent probability state when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot after the variable probability state is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, an effect is executed to suggest a period until the probability state that is most advantageous to the player is set. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the conditions until the latent certainty state is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the variable probability state (variable probability mode) is set. FIG.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, by passing (adding) the number of time reductions in the variable probability state, it is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous latent certainty mode (latent certainty state). Therefore, in the variable probability state (variable probability mode), an effect aiming at the latent probability state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), an effect is executed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In addition, a display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain displays the characters "Aim for the top!", and a display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811 displays the display content suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of lotteries) until the variable probability mode ends (the number of times of shortening time passes a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times)). The example of FIG. 161(a) illustrates a case where characters "50 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. Since the remaining meter display up to the top is displayed by subtracting 1 m each time the variable display (variation display of the third pattern) is executed once, the player can easily understand that the remaining meter (distance) up to the top is the remaining number of times of variation until shifting to the stealth mode.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the above-described display area HR2 is varied (subtracted) each time the variation display of the third symbol is executed, and when the display mode of the meter display after the variation (subtraction) becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m"), the game state is configured to shift from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. The display mode (numerical value) of the meter display may be configured so that the latent accuracy mode is set when it is added up to a specific numerical value. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the meter display every time the variable display of the third pattern is executed, and for example, when the variable display of the third pattern is executed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter display may be changed. By constructing in this way, the timing of changing the display mode of the meter display can be made different from the variable display timing of the third pattern, so that an unexpected performance can be provided by executing the performance of greatly decreasing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display at once while making the player recognize the approximate period until the latent probability mode (latent probability state) is set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2, in order to notify the player that the period until the latent probability mode is set is getting shorter (that the timing of establishment of the transition condition is approaching), only the effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is executed. You may perform the production|presentation which temporarily increases the display mode (numerical value) of. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the probability state will be set, so that the player can play the game while always anticipating that the probability state will be set.

In this case, as a transition condition for transitioning from the probability variable state to the latent probability state, at least a plurality of transition conditions, specifically, according to the jackpot type that triggered the probability variable state to be set and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, As a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first transition condition (for example, the number of times of time saving 20 times) and the second transition condition (for example, the number of times of time saving 50 times) that is less likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition. A display mode (e.g., ``remaining 20m'') indicating a period until a first transition condition that is likely to be met when a probability variable state is set is displayed in a display area HR2, and when the actually set time-saving termination condition is the first transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is executed as it is, and when the actually set time-saving termination condition is the second transition condition, the meter is displayed based on the number of times of remaining time reduction. While increasing the number of display modes, a specific transition display mode may be displayed at the timing when the second transition condition is satisfied. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time saving end condition set for the current variable probability state is when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to set a plurality of time-saving end conditions in the variable probability state that is set after execution of a specific jackpot game. More specifically, a first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the variable probability state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the result of the special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the variable probability state is a specific result (for example, a small winning C win) are set. And it comprises so that the meter display based on the 1st time saving end conditions which can calculate the timing when time saving end conditions are satisfied beforehand may be displayed on display area HR2. That is, during the definite variable state, the meter display is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, ``remaining 0 m''), an effect is executed to notify that the definite state is set. On the other hand, when the second time-saving end condition is satisfied before the above-described first time-saving end condition is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display changes to a specific transitional display mode), an effect is executed in which the meter display changes to a specific transitional display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m") after the character 811 vigorously climbs a mountain as a shortened effect in which the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is rapidly reduced.

Thus, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the state is shifted to the probability state, so that the player who is playing the variable probability state can be made to play the game while always expecting the shift to the probability state. In addition, even when any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the player can be notified of the transition to the latent state by displaying the specific transition display mode as the display mode of the meter display, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand presentation.

Next, with reference to Drawing 161 (b), the contents of the production performed when time saving end conditions are satisfied during probability change state are explained. Figure 162 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the number of times of time saving has elapsed in the variable probability mode (variable probability state) (the time saving end condition is established). As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the time-saving end condition (for example, a special pattern variation of a predetermined number of times) is established, an effect is executed in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain, and the characters "Reach the top!" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to the latent state (latent certainty mode).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent definite state is set, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special pattern is made easier than when the game state other than the latent definite state is set, and the lottery of the second special pattern is constructed so as to win a small prize with a high probability (higher probability than the lottery of the first special pattern). By frequently executing the second special symbol lottery, the small winning game is frequently executed, and the player is made to execute the game in which many benefits (prize balls) can be obtained. Hereinafter, the game in which the small winning game is frequently executed by the second special symbol lottery in the latent state will be referred to as "RUSH", and the effect executed during the RUSH game will be referred to as "RUSH effect".

FIG. 162(a) shows a state (preparation state) from the transition to the latent state (latent certainty mode) to the state in which a prize ball can actually be obtained (until a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery). As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the preparatory state, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the characters "Right-handed to start RUSH!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the characters "RUSH preparation" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the right-handed game will enter the RUSH state in which prize balls can be obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set when the time saving end condition is established in the probability variable state, but the second special symbol lottery may not be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set. Specifically, the second special symbol variation is executed during the probability variation state, and when the time saving end condition is established based on the execution of the first special symbol variation while the second special symbol variation is being performed, the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state while the second special symbol variation is being performed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol variation in the latent probability state is not executed until the second special symbol variation being executed (the second special symbol variation started during the probability variation state) is stopped and displayed.

In this way, after the latent certainty state is set, if a period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly executed occurs for a predetermined period, by displaying the display screen (RUSH preparation screen) shown in FIG. I can.

In this embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the game state shifts from the probability variable state to the latent probability state, when the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed is a predetermined period or more (for example, 10 seconds or more), the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. In a certain case, it may be configured to notify that an advantageous game is executed later, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which a game method (e.g., left-handed game) executed by a player during a disadvantageous game (variable probability state) is different from a game method (e.g., right-handed game) executed by a player during an advantageous game (variable probability state), the period from when the latent probability state is set to when the second special symbol variation is actually executed by the right-handed game is used. 162(a).

Further, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured such that, in a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is easier for the player to be won in a normal symbol lottery than in an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and that the length of the variation time to be selected is likely to be longer, and the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed during the normal symbol winning game that is executed when the player wins in the normal symbol lottery, the disadvantageous game state occurs when the advantageous game state is set. The RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162(a) may be executed during the period until the normal symbol variation executed during is stopped and displayed. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 162(a), it is preferable to hide (difficult to see) the display mode of "Right shot" displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, or to display the characters "Preparing, please wait for a while" in the display area HR1. That is, it is preferable to display the RUSH preparation period display so as to notify the player that the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (difficult to execute) even if the right-handed game is executed, although the latent definite state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the RUSH game from being executed in spite of the execution of the right-handed game, thereby giving the player a sense of distrust.

Then, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) is executed during the latent certainty state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162(b) is displayed, and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162(b), when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the latent state and the second special symbol variation in which the small hit is won is executed, the characters "RUSH start" are displayed in the display area HR1, and the characters "RUSH rush!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, an icon resembling a treasure box (treasure box 812) is displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, during the RUSH game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect (RUSH effect) using an icon imitating a treasure box (treasure box 812) will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, the effect of the character 811 opening the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery of this time is displayed from the opened treasure box 812 . As the lottery result display mode, for example, when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is a small win, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, when the result is a big win, a display mode imitating the characters "hit" is displayed, and when it is a loss, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed. In this way, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed only by executing the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 for the treasure box 812 that is always displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, the effect executed during the super RUSH game that is more advantageous to the player than during other RUSH games during the RUSH game will be described. In this embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the latent definite state is configured to be variable based on the number of special symbols reserved (the number of retained memories of the first special symbol) that is reserved and stored. Specifically, the second special symbol variation executed when the number of special symbols reserved is a specific number (for example, 1) is configured so that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the second special symbol variation executed when the number of special symbols reserved is other than the specific number. As described above, while the latent definite state is set, the effect of awarding a privilege (a prize ball) to the player is executed by frequently generating the small winning game based on the winning of the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the shorter the variation time of the second special symbol variation in the latent definite state, the greater the proportion of the small winning game period in the unit period, so that the player can make the game state more playable. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the number of reserved special symbols becomes a specific number, and the RUSH game during the period in which the variation time of the second special symbol variation is shortened is referred to as a super RUSH game.

First, the effect contents executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents executed in a state where the special figure pending number is likely to be subtracted during the RUSH game. In this embodiment, when a specific small win (for example, a small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent definite state, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly missed and stopped and displayed. In addition, it is configured such that a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is likely to be selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to acquire the first special symbol reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball) by the right-handed game executed during the latent certainty state. That is, while executing the RUSH game during the latent certainty state, it is configured to make it difficult to reduce the special figure 1 reserved balls based on the passage of the fluctuation time.

Therefore, in order to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls until the conditions for executing the super RUSH game are established, it is necessary to win a specific small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol variation in which a specific small win is won is executed, the characters "Aim for further top" are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and an effect for the character 811 to aim for a higher position is executed in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 164(a).

Specifically, a display mode showing a stage corresponding to the difference between the number of currently acquired special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls that is the condition for executing the super RUSH game is displayed, and a guidance suggestion display that suggests the situation until the super RUSH game is executed to the player is displayed in the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm.

Then, when a specific small hit is won multiple times during the RUSH game, and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes a specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164(b) is displayed. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed when the conditions for executing the super RUSH game are satisfied. When the execution condition of the super RUSH game (for example, the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 becomes 2) is satisfied, the character 811 reaches the top and the performance is executed with the display mode informing that the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied. And, in the display area HR71, the display mode "2" indicating that the current special figure 1 reserved ball number has the execution condition of the super RUSH game is displayed.

164 (a) and (b) are displayed, i.e., after setting an effect mode suggesting super RUSH rush in the special figure discard setting process (see S4643 in FIG. 186) to be described later. Therefore, in the state where FIGS. 164(a) and (b) are displayed, a process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired is executed, and when the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, a process for switching the performance mode is executed. For example, when a special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, an effect is executed in which the peak shown in FIG. As a result, even if the super RUSH entry opportunity disappears during the execution of the production suggesting the super RUSH entry, the effect can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Also, in FIGS. 164 (a) and (b), the effect contents when the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special 1 reserved balls are explained, but in addition to this, the effect suggesting the super RUSH rush is executed even when the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of special 1 reserved balls. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the current state (increased advantageous state) sets an advantageous period (a period in which a super RUSH game is executed) by increasing the special figure 1 reserved number by one is executed, and when it is determined that the increased advantageous state is established, it is determined whether or not a normal figure winning game is executed. In this determination, it is determined whether or not a normal pattern winning game is executed based on the preliminary determination result (prefetch result) of whether or not information for winning a normal pattern is included in the prefetching process (corresponding to the process of executing the same process as the prefetching process for the special symbol executed in each embodiment described above for the normal symbol) based on the lottery result of the normal symbol fluctuation being executed and the information reserved for the normal symbol. Then, when it is determined that a game per normal pattern is executed, a super RUSH rush performance is executed for suggesting that an opportunity to increase the special figure 1 reserve will soon come.

As a performance mode of this super RUSH rush performance, a notification mode for notifying a player that a super RUSH game is to be executed is set by increasing the special figure 1 reserved number (by winning a ball in the right electric accessory 164). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to establish the conditions for executing the super RUSH game. In addition, in this embodiment, the player can grasp the conditions for executing the super RUSH game, that is, the case where the super RUSH game is executed by decreasing the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls and the case where the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls. It may be configured to inform the player and make the player select whether to execute a game to increase the special figure 1 reserved number or to execute a game to decrease it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effects executed during the super RUSH will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during Super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol variation with a shorter variation time than the normal RUSH game is easily executed, so that the execution interval of the small winning game is shortened and the number of times the small winning game is executed in a unit time can be increased more than the normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the super RUSH game, it becomes a game period more advantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH game. During the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the characters "SUPER RUSH" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the characters "speed up" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

That is, during the super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and it is difficult to execute the effect of suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery using one fluctuation period of the second special symbol lottery (the effect of displaying a treasure box) and the effect of informing the lottery result (the effect of opening the treasure box and displaying the contents) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. In addition, it is constructed so that an effect for opening the treasure box is appropriately executed based on the result of the lottery.

Specifically, a plurality of treasure chests with different display modes (for example, colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and a performance for opening the treasure chests according to the lottery result of the second special pattern to be executed is executed. In this case, as a result of the lottery of the second special pattern that is advantageous to the player, for example, if the player wins the big win in which the latent state is set again after the end of the big win game, a gorgeous rainbow-colored or golden treasure box is opened, and as a result of the lottery that is unfavorable to the player, for example, if the player wins a big win in which the normal state is set after the end of the big win game, that is, when the RUSH game ends, an effect of opening a tattered treasure box is executed.

Thus, by displaying a plurality of treasure boxes with different display modes in advance, it is possible to easily execute the performance suggesting the lottery result (the performance of varying the display mode of the treasure box to be opened) without executing the performance of varying the display mode of the displayed treasure box according to the result of the second special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have a holding memory function, for example, the winning information of the second special symbol that is held and stored is determined in advance. Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for executing the performance suggesting the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, the performance effect of previously displaying a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes can be further enhanced.

When using a configuration in which a plurality of treasure chests with different display modes are displayed in advance as in this embodiment, the number of displayed treasure boxes displayed at the same time and the display mode may be set randomly, or the display mode may be varied according to the number of games played (the number of executions of the special symbol lottery) during the latent state. In addition, the current number of special figure reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) is read out, whether or not the super RUSH game is likely to end based on the result of reading out, and the display mode and the number of displayed treasure boxes may be varied based on the result of the determination. By constructing in this way, not only the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery but also the game status of the super RUSH game can be grasped by the player by using the display mode and the number of displayed treasure boxes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165(b), during the super RUSH game, the effect content of the effect suggesting the end of the super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect for suggesting the end of the super RUSH game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (one or two), the super RUSH game is configured to be executed, and the right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) can be increased by the game (right-handed game) executed during the super RUSH game (see FIG. 157).

Therefore, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases during the super RUSH game, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases from 2 to 3, and the super RUSH game may end. In such a case, an ending suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165(b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165(b), the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is 2, and during the super RUSH game, the normal symbol is won (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 is opened. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "end pinch" are displayed.

By executing the end suggesting performance in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game due to the increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 by causing the ball to win in the right electric accessory 164 during the super RUSH game. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (b), in the state in which the super RUSH game ends due to the factor of the super RUSH game ending, that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 increases, the player is not notified that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is likely to increase (the state in which the game per normal figure is executed). Guidance notification may be performed to make it difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the end of the super RUSH game based on the increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1, and to make the player pay attention to the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the super RUSH game, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the execution timing of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be the start timing of the game per normal pattern, the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation (fluctuation time 10 seconds to 30 seconds) that is won per normal pattern, the timing when the remaining fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation becomes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the information contained in the normal pattern holding ball is discriminated in advance, and the predetermined timing (for example, 30 seconds before the game per normal pattern is executed). But it's okay.

Furthermore, in the case of executing the above-mentioned guidance notification (guidance notification that makes it difficult for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the normal game by interrupting the right-handed game), when the right-handed game is interrupted after grasping the notification content of the guidance notification, it is preferable to secure a period of time during which the ball fired by the right-handed game that was being executed before the interruption cannot win the right electric accessory 164. It is preferable to configure so that the guidance notification is executed 10 seconds before the game is executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute a game that does not increase the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls for the player who grasps the guidance information. In addition, when the normal pattern per game is not actually executed, for example, when the information contained in the normal pattern reserved ball is determined in advance and it is determined in advance that the normal pattern per pattern game is executed after 60 seconds, that is, the above-mentioned end suggesting performance (so-called fake performance) may be executed at the timing when the number of special 1 reserved balls cannot increase even if the right-handed game is not interrupted.

In the above-described FIG. 165 (b), the number of special 1 reserved balls is no longer a specific number (1 or 2) due to the increase in the number of special 1 reserved balls, and the super RUSH game can be terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the end suggesting effect executed when the super RUSH game ends due to the decrease in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the end suggesting effect executed when the super RUSH game ends due to the decrease in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the end suggesting effect is executed in the same display mode as the display mode shown in FIG. 165(b) described above.

In this case, after 1.5 seconds, the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the next first special symbol variation is started, so that the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls becomes 0 and the super RUSH game ends. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "finishing pinch! Accumulate pending" are displayed. By executing the end suggesting effect in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the super RUSH game will end unless the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased.

In this embodiment, a plurality of opportunities to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls are provided, and as shown in FIG. 166, in addition to the case where the first special symbol variation in progress is stopped and displayed after the variation time has elapsed, there is a case where a specific small win (small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol variation in progress is forcibly stopped (discarded). By executing the end suggesting performance shown in FIG. 166 in a state where any opportunity is established (or can be established), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game.

166, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation that is winning the small hit B are determined, and based on the determination result, the remaining period until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes 0 is calculated, and the calculation result may be configured to be executed at the timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). , 30-second intervals). That is, the state in which the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is 1 is a state in which the super RUSH game continues even if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls increases by one, so the end suggesting performance may be executed to reduce the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls to 2 without determining the timing when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls may become zero.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game can be completed regardless of whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 increases or decreases. I can.

It should be noted that, unlike the effect content of the present embodiment, for example, the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 165 (b)) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is likely to be satisfied by increasing the number of special 1 reserved balls, and the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 166) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game by decreasing the number of special 1 reserved balls is likely to be satisfied. It may be constructed so as to execute an effect that allows the player to select whether or not. Thereby, the continuation period of the super RUSH game can be made different depending on the game method selected by the player, that is, the game method of continuing the super RUSH game by executing the right-handed game in order to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the game method of continuing the super RUSH game by interrupting the right-handed game in order not to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. In addition, when the player selects an erroneous game method, the game method becomes a game method that facilitates establishment of conditions for ending the super RUSH game, so that the effect of the game method selected by the player on subsequent game results can be increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the period in which the super RUSH game is executed is configured to be a specific range (1, 2) in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is continuous. In this case, as the end suggestion effect, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls can be 1 to 0 and when it can be 3 to 4, the same end suggestion effect as in FIG. 165 (b) and FIG. should be configured to That is, according to the above-described example, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2, the super RUSH game will be executed even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases or increases. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0 or 4, the super RUSH game will be in a state (standby state) that is easier to execute. Also, in this case, the variation time selected in the first special symbol variation executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2 (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2 after subtracting the number of special figure 1 reserved balls used in the first special symbol lottery of this time) may be configured to be shorter than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0 or 4. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the transition from the standby state to the super RUSH game, and to motivate the player who has transitioned to the standby state to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of game states in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in this embodiment, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set. And, according to the set game state, the amount of privilege given to the player who plays the game is configured to differ. Specifically, it is constructed so that the player is given the most benefits when the latent probability state is set, and the amount of benefits given to the player decreases in the order of the variable probability state and the normal state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). During the normal state, a left-handed game aiming at the entrance of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed because it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a normal state, a first special symbol lottery is executed to win a big win with a probability of 1/200. When a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, a big win type (big win A7) in which a normal state is set again after the big win game is over is set at a rate of 35%, a big win type (big win B7) in which a probability variable state is set after the big win game is over is set at a rate of 45%, and a big win type (big win C7) in which a potential state is set after the big win game is over is set at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, it is most easily shifted to the variable probability state, then easily shifted to the normal state, and most difficult to shift to the latent state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game property in which a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set by going through a plurality of game states.

Next, when the variable probability state is set, the normal symbol high probability state is set, so that the right electric accessory 164 is more easily opened than the normal symbol low probability state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 164r by the right-handed game than to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, so that the right-handed game executes the first special symbol lottery. Furthermore, during the variable probability state, the state becomes a state with a high probability of special symbols, and the first special symbol lottery for winning a big hit with a probability of 1/60 is executed. When a big win is won in a first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, a big win type (big win A7) in which a normal state is set after the end of the big win game is set at a rate of 35%, a big win type (big win B7) in which a latent state is set after the big win game is over at a rate of 45%, and a big win type (big win C7) in which the variable probability state is set again after the big win game is over at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the variable probability state is more likely to shift to the latent probability state than the normal state, which is the initial state. Thus, when a jackpot is won in the normal state and the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the variable probability state can be changed to the latent probability state more easily than the normal state, so that the player can easily continue playing the game.

In addition, when the special pattern variation is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot in the state where the variable probability state is set, a condition for ending the high-probability state of the normal pattern (time-saving termination condition) is established, and the state is shifted to the latent probability state. That is, when the definite variable state is set, the latent definite state is set when any one of the first transition condition (establishment probability is about 35%) established when the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot (winning probability 1/60) and the second transition condition (establishment probability is about 30%) established when the jackpot is won in the probability variable state and the jackpot B7 is set is established. In addition, the above-described first transition condition has a probability of establishment varying according to the remaining period of the variable probability state. For example, in a state where the special symbol variation is executed 49 times during the variable probability state, the first transition condition is established (probability of establishment is about 90%) when the 50th special symbol variation to be executed next is lost (winning probability 59/60).

In this way, when there are multiple migration conditions for shifting the gaming status from the probable change state to the accuracy state, the transfer conditions in which the probability of establishment is variable according to the number of executions of the special pattern fluctuation (the first migration condition), and the transition condition that does not change the probability of establishment according to the number of executions of the special pattern fluctuation (second transfer conditions). It is possible to variable the desired gaming results as the gaming of the gaming in accordance with the gaming in the probable change. Therefore, immediately after the variable probability state is set, that is, in a period in which the probability that the probability state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition is higher than the probability that the probability state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition, an effect is executed to prompt the player whether the second transition condition is satisfied or not, and if a predetermined period has passed since the variable probability state was set, that is, the probability that the probability information is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition is higher than the probability that the probability information is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition. In a period in which the probability of setting the latent certainty state is higher than the probability of setting, it is possible to execute an effect to prompt the player whether or not the first transition condition is satisfied.

Next, the flow of the game during the latent certainty state will be explained. When the latent certainty state is set, as described above, the RUSH game corresponding to the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number of balls) is executed. Specifically, when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number of balls) is 0, 3, 4, a RUSH game is executed in which a normal length is likely to be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the latent state, and when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number of balls) is 1 or 2, a super RUSH game is executed in which a shorter length than usual is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation in the latent state. In this way, by varying the variation time of the second special symbol variation according to the game situation (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and thus the number of executions of the small winning game, can be varied, so that the player can be made to play the game in the latent state while expecting the execution of the more advantageous RUSH game.

Both the RUSH game and the super RUSH game described above are games executed during the latent state, and the winning probability of the special symbols (hitting winning in the second special symbols) is set to be common (1/60). Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is set to be high (59/60). When a jackpot is won in the latent definite state, a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished is set at a rate of 35%, and the latent state is set again after the jackpot game is finished at a rate of 65%. On the other hand, when a small hit is won during the latent probability state, the game state is not changed. That is, once the probability state is set, the RUSH game (game during the probability state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of the jackpot winning) is set.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 174. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110, and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 168 to 172, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided within the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168(a). FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, the small winning random number table 202de with the small winning random number 7 table, the second winning random number table 202b with the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, and the jackpot type selection 4 table 20 with respect to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 116) in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is provided instead of 2db, a variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe is provided instead of a variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and a small hit type selection 7 table 202ff and a normal figure variation pattern selection 7 table 202fg are newly provided. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, in the seventh embodiment, the range in which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can be updated is changed from "0 to 399" to "0 to 599", and the range in which the value of the second winning random number counter C2 can be updated is changed from "0 to 999" to "0 to 299". Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are attached and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 168(b), the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described. FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 7 table 202fa. This first winning random number 7 table 202fa is different from the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) in that it defines the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined as winning according to the special symbol type and the probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery is executed, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 "0 to 2" is defined as the jackpot determination value (the value determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery). A range is specified. That is, in the seventh embodiment, even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special symbol low probability state is set, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/200, and even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state where the special symbol high probability state is set, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/60. In the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for each special symbol type. However, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is different for each special symbol type may be defined as the big hit determination value, or the number of the first winning random number counter C1 that is the big hit determination value may be different for each special symbol type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value ("0 to 2") of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win when the special symbol low probability state is set is configured to be the value of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win even when the special symbol high probability state is set. By configuring in this way, in the first look-ahead process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process (see S1764 in FIG. 136) executed in the start-up winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit in a low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special corresponding to the winning information It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information for winning a jackpot without executing a process of discriminating (predicting) the game state at the time when the symbol lottery is executed. The contents of the first winning random number table 202fa may be defined so that at least a part or all of the values of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win in the low probability state of the special symbols are not determined as a big win in the high probability state of the special symbols. With this configuration, when the same value of the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired, the judgment result can be varied according to the game state set when the big winning judgment using the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act to acquire the value of the specific first winning random number counter C1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168(c), the contents of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb will be described. Figure 168 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number 7 table 202fb. This small winning random number 7 table 202fb is different from the small winning random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the above-described fourth embodiment only in that the range of the small winning judgment value in the second special symbol is changed to "10 to 599" in accordance with the change in the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take. In other words, the seventh embodiment is configured so as to win a small hit with a high probability (590/600) in the lottery of the second special symbol without winning a small prize in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 168(d), the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be described. FIG. 168(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. This second winning random number 7 table 202fc, as shown in FIG. 168(d), in the case of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined to be "0" value, and in the case of the high probability state of the normal symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined to be in the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/299) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, the execution probability of the game per normal pattern can be made different between the normal state, the latent probability state, which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the variable probability state, which is the high probability state of the normal pattern.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the same game method (right-handed game) is executed in the variable probability state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set and the latent probability state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set. In the right hitting game executed during the latent probability state, the second special symbol lottery is executed by entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 (see FIG. 157), and in the right hitting game executed during the probability variable state, the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164 to execute the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, details of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd. This jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which a determination value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "jackpot A7" to "jackpot C7" Three jackpot types are defined. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbols, two jackpot types, "jackpot D7" to "jackpot E7", are defined.

As shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot A7" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This "jackpot A7" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the normal state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends. It should be noted that depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, it is variable whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set. More specifically, when "jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the time saving state of normal symbols is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "big win A7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot A7'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A7'' is 35% (35/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "jackpot B7" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". This "jackpot B7" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the completion of the jackpot. When the ``jackpot B7'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 50, while when the ``jackpot B7'' is won in the variable probability state and the probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, if the "jackpot B7" is won in the normal state, it shifts to a comparatively advantageous variable probability state (50 times). On the other hand, when "jackpot B7" is won in the variable probability state or the latent certainty state, the number of time saving times is set to 0, so the game state after the end of the big win becomes the most advantageous latent certainty state. Therefore, "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 45 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot B7'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B7'' is 45% (45/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "jackpot C7" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot C7" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is finished, the variable probability state of the special symbol is set. When the ``jackpot C7'' is won in the probability variation, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 50, while when the ``jackpot C7'' is won in the normal state and the probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, it is more advantageous for the player to win the ``big win C7'' than to win the ``big win B7'' in the normal state, and it is more advantageous to the player to win the ``jackpot B7'' than to win the ``jackpot C7'' in the probability variable state. Further, during the latent certainty state, the degree of advantage does not change between the case of winning the "jackpot B7" and the case of winning the "jackpot C7".

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot C7'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C11'' is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rate of shifting to the most advantageous game state (potential state) is different depending on the game state when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and the potential state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 20% during the normal state, 45% during the variable probability state, and 65% during the potential state. By constructing in this way, when the game state shifts, for example, when a jackpot is won in a normal state and a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, an advantageous state in which the state is more likely to shift to the latent state than in the normal state can be provided, so that the player who has not been set in the latent state can be motivated to continue the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot D7" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This ``jackpot D7'' is a jackpot type in which the same content as the above-mentioned ``jackpot A7'' is specified, the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is finished, it is a type of jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot) set to a normal state with special symbols. It should be noted that depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, it is variable whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set. More specifically, when "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the time saving state of normal symbols is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "jackpot D7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot D7'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot D7'' is 35% (35/100). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery is easily executed when the game state (potential state) most advantageous to the player is set, this "jackpot D7" serves as an end trigger for ending the game state (potential state) most advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "jackpot E7" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". This "jackpot E7" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the completion of the jackpot, the variable probability state of the special symbol is set. When the ``jackpot E7'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 when the ``jackpot E7'' is won in the variable probability state and the latent probability state.

That is, if the "jackpot E7" is won in the normal state, it shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (100 times). On the other hand, when "jackpot E7" is won in the variable probability state or the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the end of the big win becomes the most advantageous latent certainty state. Therefore, "jackpot E7" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 65 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E7'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E7'' is 65% (65/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is mainly executed in the most advantageous game state (latency state) for the player, the probability state is looped at a rate of 65%, and the probability state is ended (normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, the player will execute the game hoping not to win the 'big win E7' while winning prize balls by the small win game executed with a high probability (59/60) in the state that the latent certainty state is set.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. This fluctuation pattern selection table 202fe, like the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, is a data table for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the seventh embodiment, as the variation pattern selection table 202fe, the content of the data table referred to when the game state is the normal state is partially changed from the first embodiment described above.

First, the contents of the normal 7-table 202fe1, which is referred to when the game state is the normal state, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal 7-table 202fe1. This normal 7 table 202fe1 is greatly different from the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above in that a variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) are defined as symbol types.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery wins, normal variation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds)) is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99”, super variation (15000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) is associated with the range of “100 to 179”, and special variation (20000 milliseconds (20000 milliseconds) is associated with the range of “100 to 179”. 20 seconds)) are associated.

In FIG. 170, the length of the variation time defined for each variation pattern is shown in units of milliseconds (units of 1/1000 second), but for convenience of explanation, the length of the variation time will be explained using seconds in the following description.

As the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern of short variation (1 second) out of the range of "0 to 180", out of the range of "181 to 197" is associated with middle variation (10 seconds), and out of the range of "197, 198" is associated with super variation (15 seconds).

On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, regardless of the lottery result, the long variation (hitting long variation, losing long variation) (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1.

In the present embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the total value of the reserved storage numbers of all the special symbols. In this embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have the reserved memory function, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol are substantially selected based on the number of reserved memories (the number of retained balls) of the first special symbol. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 of FIG. 139) is executed after the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation pattern is not selected in a state where the number of special figure reserved balls is four. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(a), the contents of the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probability variation state will be described. FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the right electric accessory 164 wins the ball by the right-handed game, and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. And, for the first special symbol variation in the probability variation state, the variation pattern of the same content as the above-described normal 7 table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern is defined in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1 is set. Other elements are the same as those of the normal 7-table 202fe1 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is opened with a high probability in the variable probability state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the ball hardly enters the right second ball entrance 645. - 特許庁That is, it is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the second right ball entrance 645 when executing a right-handed game in the variable probability state than when executing a right-handed game in the normal state. Further, when the normal state is set, the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game is the appropriate game method, and when the variable probability state is set, the game of the right-handed game where the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164 is configured to be the proper game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when a right-handed game is executed in a normal state, a ball can be easily entered into the right second ball entrance 645. Therefore, by setting a variation pattern in which a long-time variation time (10 minutes) is defined as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed in the normal state, the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, and the act of executing the second special symbol lottery is suppressed.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game, which is the appropriate game method, is executed in the variable probability state, most of the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the right electric accessory 164 as described above with reference to FIGS. There is a case to ball.

In the present embodiment, when a proper game method is executed in this way, when the ball flows down with unpredictable behavior and enters the right second ball entrance 645, i.e., when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the variable probability state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, a shorter variation time (60 seconds) is set than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, when a specific small win (small win C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed during the probability variable state, the variable probability state can be shifted to the latent probability state.

As a result, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be made to pay attention to the behavior of the ball flowing down the right side area and eagerly play the game while expecting the execution of the second special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(b), the contents of the 7 table 202fe3 for latent probability referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the 7-table for confirmation 202fe3. In this embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the latent state is set, a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 645 by a right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. By executing a long variation (10 minutes) for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state, the reserved memory number (special figure 1 reserved ball number) of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the latent definite state is configured to be the upper limit number. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the latent definite state is made different according to the reserved memory number (special figure 1 reserved ball number) of the special symbol (first special symbol).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), as the variation pattern determined corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (hit ultra-long variation, lose ultra-long variation) is associated. That is, the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state is always configured to have a variation time of 600 seconds.

On the other hand, as a variation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery wins (big hit), when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "0 to 3", the long fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" When the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "4", the fluctuation type counter CS1 The whole range "0 to 198" short fluctuation (1 second). are associated.

In addition, as the variation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery is lost (including small hits A and C), when the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved) is "1, 2", the fluctuation type counter CS1 goes out to the entire range "0 to 198" Short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated, and when the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved) is "0, 3, 4", the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls out of the entire range "0 to 198". Variation (10 seconds) is associated.

Furthermore, as a variation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit B, when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "0, 1, 2", a small hit middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "3, 4", a small hit short fluctuation (0.5) to the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. seconds) are associated.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol variation executed during the latent certainty state, as the variation pattern set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a short variation of 0.5 seconds and a long variation of 10 seconds are set. When winning the small hits A and B set at about 95% of the time when the small hit is won, if the special figure holding number is a specific number (1, 2), the game in which the short variation (0.5 seconds) is set. (Super RUSH game) is executed, and if it is other than the specific number (0, 3, 4), a game (RUSH game) in which long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

By configuring in this way, the number of small winning games per unit time can be changed according to the number of reserved special figures (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) in the latent sure state, and as a result, the amount of privilege (the number of prize balls) that the player can acquire in the unit time can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who is executing the RUSH game during the latent certainty state to aim at the super RUSH game which is more advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if you win a small hit B, that is, if you win a small hit type in which the process of discarding (forcibly stopping) the first special symbol variation in progress is executed, a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set when the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is greater than a specific number (1, 2) (3, 4), and a long variation (10 seconds) when the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is less than or equal to a specific number (1, 2) (0, 1, 2). is configured to be set. That is, when winning a small prize capable of reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) is larger than a specific number, a shorter variation time is determined than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) is smaller than the specific number.

By constructing in this way, the first special pattern variation being executed can be quickly discarded when the small win B is won in a state where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) is larger than the specific number, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) can be easily set to the specific number. On the other hand, when the small win B is won with the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) less than the specific number, a long period of fluctuation is set as the small prize variation, so that the period required to discard the first special pattern variation being executed can be lengthened, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) can be suppressed from decreasing below the specific number.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of special figure reserved balls is the lower limit value of "0", it is easier to set a long-time variation (variation of 10 seconds) as the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation than when the number of special figure retained balls is other than the lower limit value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the number of special figure reserved balls is the lower limit value "0", long time fluctuation (10 second fluctuation) is set even if any small hit is won.

In this way, by imposing a penalty that a long-time variation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls is ``0'' which is the lower limit value, it is possible to suppress the action of interrupting the game until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of special figure reservations) becomes ``0'' after the latent definite state is set, specifically, interrupting the game until the first special symbol variation in the latent definite state in which the variation time of 10 minutes is set is executed four times, and then executing the game in the latent definite state.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the degree of advantage in the latent definite state is divided into two stages according to the number of special figures reserved, but without being limited to this, the degree of advantage in the latent definite state may be divided into three or more stages according to the number of special figures reserved. In this case, for example, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of special figure pending balls is "0" which is the lower limit value, it is possible to set a longer variation time (for example, 30 seconds) than the above-mentioned long time variation (variation of 10 seconds). A variable time (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the other (for example, 2) special figure reservation number can be set, and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player may be executed.

In addition, different variation pattern tables are referred to when the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the probability state is set via the variable probability state. An advantageous game (a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) that is advantageous to the player during the latent definite state may be easily executed rather than the latent definite state is set by the establishment of the establishment of the latent definite state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state, the special symbol variation pattern is selected (determined) with the same stipulated content, but is not limited to this. Different variation patterns are defined for the 7 table 202fe3 according to the number of special symbol variations (number of times obtained by summing the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation) after the latent definite state is set, and it is preferable to make it easier to execute an advantageous game (a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player in the second period than in the first period. By constructing in this manner, novel game characteristics can be provided in which the longer the latent definite state continues for a long time, that is, the longer the period during which the big win is not won during the latent definite state (so-called addictive period), the more advantageous the player can be.

Further, when the definite variable state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and based on the fact that the small win C is won, the advantageous game most advantageous to the player (the game in which the short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) may be executed when the state shifts to the latent state without executing the special symbol variation of the specified number of times (50 times). In this case, for example, the variation pattern data to be referred to during the probability variation state should be defined so as to correspond to the period until the special symbol variation is executed a specified number of times (50 times), and the special variation pattern data to be referred to when shifting to the latent probability state within the specified number of times may be defined corresponding to the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 to be referred to when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 in which the variation pattern data is defined for the range of the specified number of times (50 times) of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation to be executed during the probability variation state within the specified number of times and the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation to be executed during the latent probability state may be defined in advance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the execution of the second special symbol variation (lottery) during the variable probability state. In this case, after the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number of times (50 times), the variation pattern may be set by referring to the 7 table 202fe3 for latent probability shown in FIG. 171(b). The data may be continuously settable.

170 and 171, the variation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to each game state has been described, but it is not limited to the example described in this embodiment, and the variation time of each variation pattern set based on the set game state, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the success/failure determination result may be defined so as not to deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment (a range that does not deviate from the technical idea relative to other variation patterns). In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, an example in which a specific variation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions is shown, but under each specific condition, a different variation pattern (variation time) may be selected according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In this case, the average value calculated based on the variation time of each variation pattern that can be latent may be specified so as not to deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment. It may be configured to set a time (for example, 1 second).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to rarely provide a game with unexpectedness to the player without changing the flow of the main game executed during the latent certainty state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In the above example, the variation pattern selected in the latent state is taken as an example, but based on the same technical idea, the same technical idea may be applied to the variation pattern selected when another game state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172(a), the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described. This small winning type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table referred to when selecting a small winning type after winning a small winning in a special symbol lottery, and is defined so that three types of small winning types of 'small winning A7', 'small winning B7' and 'small winning C7' are selected corresponding to the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5.

When a small prize is won in a special pattern lottery, the content of small prize operation, pattern fixing time (a period required for fixing the stop display of the special pattern), and processing contents for the special pattern variation during execution can be changed according to the selected small prize type. In this embodiment, as described using the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 168 (c)), it is configured so that the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the main controller 110, when it is determined that the small hit is won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

When the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff are specifically described, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with the “small hit A” in the range of “0 to 74”, the “small hit B7” is associated with the range of “75 to 79”, and the “small hit C” is associated with the range of “80 to 99”. Since the range of possible values of the small win type counter C5 is 100 of ``0 to 99'', the ratio of selecting the ``small prize A'' when winning the small prize is 75% (75/100), the ratio of selecting the ``small prize B'' is 5% (5/100), and the ratio of selecting the ``small prize C'' is 20% (20/100).

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.2 seconds" is selected as the special symbol determination time, and the process of interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the processing for interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed, the processing for interrupting the processing for measuring the fluctuation time lapse of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. Specifically, when the small winning game is executed, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, and while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to ON, the process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed. Then, with the end of the small winning game, the restart condition is established (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is restarted. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed from being reduced while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is established), so that, for example, the first special symbol variation that has been won is stopped and displayed and the overlapping winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is prohibited to be executed while the small winning game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the variation time lapse of the special symbol variation being executed is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol variation performed before the small win game can be resumed after the restart condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied with the fact that the small winning is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed is executed. That is, even when the interruption condition is met, the updating process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the updating process is executed until the preset fluctuation time elapses, it is determined whether or not the interruption condition is established, and when it is judged that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special symbol fluctuation is not executed until the restart condition is established. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in a state in which the interruption condition is established and the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, that is, in a state in which the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is skipped, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the interruption effect in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol fluctuation (first special symbol fluctuation) is interrupted, the notification display for informing the player that the first special symbol fluctuation is being interrupted as the current gaming situation, and the elapse of a predetermined period of time. A guide display for showing that the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted later (after the end of the small winning game) can be displayed. Thereby, when the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to inform the player of the fact in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as the above-mentioned interrupting effect, for example, it is preferable to configure so that different interrupting effects can be executed according to the effect mode of the variable display effect (variable display effect using the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When the third pattern fluctuates at a high speed, it is configured to execute, as an interruption performance, a performance of continuing the high-speed fluctuation of the third pattern until the restart condition is satisfied, and when the third pattern fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, i.e., when the third pattern fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the varying third pattern, it is preferable to execute a performance of continuing the low-speed fluctuation of the third pattern until the restart condition is satisfied as the interruption performance. In this way, by varying the variable performance mode (interruption performance mode) during the period when the suspension condition is established according to the variation performance mode of the third pattern at the time when the suspension condition is established, the interruption performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, when the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, for example, the symbols other than one of the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the winning of the jackpot (combination of symbols indicating the same number), and the remaining one symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the winning of the big win (whether all the symbols stop with the same number). An interrupting performance for continuing the variable display may be executed, or one pattern during the variable display may be stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, ``temporary rest!!'') indicating that the interrupting condition is established, and the ready-to-win performance may be terminated. After the resuming condition is established, the characters ``Break is over!!'' may be displayed, and the result of the ready-to-win performance executed before the interruption may be stopped and displayed without executing the ready-to-win performance. As a result, various performances can be executed according to the timing when the interruption condition is established, so that the performance executed based on the establishment of the interruption condition can be diversified, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 172(a), the description is continued. When "small win B" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 second" is selected as the special symbol determination time, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the processing for discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed and the remaining variation time, the processing for stopping and displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the result is out is executed. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the value of a special figure 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is cleared to 0, and a forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is set. Further, when the first special pattern variation targeted for forced stop has won the jackpot, the information indicating the jackpot winning set at the start timing of the first special pattern variation is cleared (the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is turned off).

When the forced stop command is set and the forced stop command is received on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 (when the forced stop display condition is established), the forced stop performance for switching the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed (the third symbol variation displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol variation) is executed.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, the forced stop condition is established based on the fact that the ``small win B'' is won, and the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped, and the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost and the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. In addition, according to the timing when the forced stop condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the forced stop effect for forcibly stopping and displaying the third symbol variation being executed is changed.

Specifically, when the forced stop display condition is established in a state where the third pattern is fluctuating at a high speed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, that is, the third pattern is fluctuating at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuating third pattern. When the third pattern is fluctuating at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the third pattern, the forced stop display is performed using a second period longer than the first period for the third pattern fluctuation display during low speed fluctuation as a forced stop presentation.

In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third pattern, it is difficult for the player to identify the third pattern that is being variably displayed. Therefore, even if the third pattern is suddenly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a detachment, the player will not feel uncomfortable. If the forced stop performance is suddenly executed in this state, the player feels a sense of incongruity that the performance mode of the third pattern variation being executed is suddenly switched. In addition, since the forced stop performance is to stop and display the third pattern in a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is finally lost, the third pattern is displayed off after the performance mode of the third pattern variation being executed is suddenly switched, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, when the third pattern on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 fluctuates at a low speed, i.e., when the third pattern fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the third pattern during the fluctuation, as a forced stop effect, a forced stop display is executed using a second period longer than the above-described first period for the third pattern fluctuating display during the low speed fluctuation, and the forced stop display is executed during the second period according to the contents of the third pattern fluctuating display being executed. It is configured so as to set the mode and finally perform the out-of-order display. Therefore, the forced stop performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable by varying the performance mode and the performance period from when the forced stop condition is satisfied until the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the variable performance mode of the third pattern at the time when the forced stop condition is established.

When "small win C" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the above-described "small win A". Furthermore, when the "small hit C" is selected in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the normal design, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state is executed. That is, the "small win C" is set as a time-saving end condition for shifting the high-probability state of normal symbols to the low-probability state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed is varied according to the small winning type selected when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which small win type is selected when the small win is won. Furthermore, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be varied according to the content of the processing (interruption, abandonment) executed for the first special symbol variation.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery wins the small prize, it is configured to vary the special symbol fixation time according to the selected small prize type. As a result, the period from when the special symbol for indicating the winning of the small prize is stop-displayed to when the small prize game is executed can be varied according to the selected small prize type. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which the timing at which a small winning game is executed is predicted and a ball is shot.

In the present embodiment, the small winning game is configured to be executed with the same opening contents regardless of which small winning type is selected, but without being limited to this, for example, depending on the selected small winning type, the type of attacker to be opened in the small winning game may be changed, or the opening operation content (opening time, opening number of times) may be changed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 172 (b), the contents of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg are explained. FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery, and each data is defined so that different variation patterns (variation time) are selected according to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 and the set game state.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, each variation pattern (long variation) in which the variation time is set in the range of 10 seconds to 30 seconds with respect to the range of "0 to 198" for the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is defined. More specifically, the range of "0 to 99" is associated with a variation pattern of "10 seconds", the range of "100 to 149" is associated with a variation pattern of "20 seconds", and the range of "150 to 198" is associated with a variation pattern of "30 seconds". In this way, when the same game state is set, the variation patterns of different variation times can be selected according to the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS3, thereby making it difficult for the player to predict the stop display timing of the normal symbol variation, and furthermore, the timing at which the normal symbol variation is stop-displayed in the display mode indicating the normal symbol winning and the normal symbol winning game is executed.

Further, during the probability variation state, the value of the obtained second variation type counter CS3 is associated with the variation pattern (short variation) of "0.8 seconds" for the entire range of "0 to 198". By constructing in this way, the ball passing through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal pattern lottery, can be entered into the right electric accessory 164 with high probability in the right hitting game executed during the variable probability state.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set, the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is associated with the variation pattern of “0.1 seconds” in the range of “0 to 169”, and the variation pattern of “10 seconds” in the range of “170 to 198”. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 in the latent probability state than in the probability variable state, and to allow the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 moderately in the latent probability state.

Next, contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a variable probability flag 203fa for storing the high probability state of the special symbol is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those in the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, for example, the types and numbers of information that can be stored in the game state storage area 203g are different, but the role of the game state storage area 203g and the processing contents for updating the stored information are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variable probability flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to a variable probability state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the variable probability state is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the fluctuation number counter 223fc, the preparation state flag 223fd, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, the super RUSH flag 223fi are added. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb differ from the above-described special figure fluctuation start flag 223d and stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. Therefore, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether the flag is set to ON and the process of determining the setting status of the flag are executed based on the first special symbol variation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb determine whether to set the flag on in the process executed based on the second special symbol variation. and a process of determining the setting status of the flag is executed. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation number counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbol variation, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The in-ready state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in a ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in a ready state (see FIG. 162(a)), and if it is off, it means that it is not in a ready state. In the latent state, the ready state in-progress flag 223fd is referred to determine whether or not the ready state has already ended (the display is switched to RUSH), and it is determined whether to execute the preparation state performance or the RUSH state performance.

The RUSH in-progress flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not the RUSH game is in progress (renso mode). If it is on, it means that the RUSH game is in progress (renso mode), and if it is off, it means that the RUSH game is not in progress (renso mode). During the latent state, the ready state flag 223fd and the RUSH state flag 223fg are referred to, and it is determined for which state the effect mode is to be set.

The ceiling performance execution flag 223fh is a flag indicating whether or not the performance of the performance mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (top reaching performance), which is executed when the number of times of probability variation or the number of times of time reduction remains 1, is being executed. If the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 161(b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the peak reaching effect is not being executed. When the pattern stop timing is reached while the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON, the mode is shifted to the continuous villa mode and a preparation state is established. In the present embodiment, even if the number of times of probability variation (number of time reductions) remaining in the probability variation state is not 1, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C), the time reduction end condition is established, and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON. In this case, the performance mode is gradually changed according to the subtraction state of the number of probability variations, and the top-reaching performance is executed abruptly compared to the case where the top-reaching performance is executed. As a result, the performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 can be executed without a sense of incongruity, and the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the top has been reached (the latent certainty state is set) earlier than planned.

The flag 223fi during the super RUSH is a flag for indicating that the number of special figure reserved balls becomes a specific number while the RUSH game is being executed and that the RUSH game advantageous to the player is being executed. A super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed by setting this super RUSH in-progress flag 223fi to ON.

<Regarding main control processing in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182, the contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (special figure 2 lottery) are redundantly configured to be executable, and compared to the above-described fourth embodiment, the function of temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol (holding storage function) is deleted, and the high probability state of the special symbol can be set. This machine is different in that, when a small hit is won in a special figure 2 lottery, the types of set small hit types are increased and the processing executed for the first special pattern variation (special figure 1 variation) being executed is varied according to the set small hit type, and the game state is shifted when the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (the high probability state of the normal pattern is shifted to the low probability state). Also, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the difference is that the contents defined in various data tables referred to in the control process executed by main controller 110 are different. Other than that, it is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described. This first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (see S258 in FIG. 124) in the above-described fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a deviation variation, time saving update processing (see S862 in FIG. 124) is performed. When it is determined that the short update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), that is, among the processes executed when the first special symbol fluctuation to be stopped this time is a jackpot fluctuation, various flags and various counters are cleared based on the stop of the jackpot fluctuation (start of the jackpot game) (S860 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the process (S870 in FIG. 175) with a added is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). This time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) differs from the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that the game state set in the case where it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (S2104 in FIG. 125: Yes) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), three types of game states can be set. Then, when the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. From the state in which the variable probability mode is set to the state in which the probability mode (RUSH game) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). In the seventh embodiment, since it is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that it does not have a function of holding and storing the second special symbol, the content of the information to be referred to when starting the variation of the second special symbol (determining whether the start condition for starting the second special symbol variation is satisfied) is changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol variation start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to OFF (S952), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the processing of S951 (S951: Yes), then the ball is the second ball entrance (right second ball entrance 645) It is determined whether it entered (S974). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have a reservation storage function (because it does not have a second special symbol reserved ball number counter and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area), it is determined whether the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 and has acquired the execution right of the second special symbol lottery in the state where the second special symbol variation start process 7 (S280) is executed.

Although detailed description is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the right second ball entrance 645, the length of the period during which the second special symbol variation start process 7 (S280) is executed multiple times in the control processing of the main controller 110, and the detection signal is output for a period shorter than the shortest variation time set for the second special symbol variation. It is configured so as not to miss the detection signal indicating that the ball has hit the ball opening 645 . Here, in the process of S974, when the winning of the ball is detected once, the process for starting the second special symbol variation is executed, and the second special symbol variation is performed in a predetermined variation time. Therefore, even if the detection signal is output for the length of the period during which the second special symbol variation start processing 7 (S280) is executed multiple times in the control processing of the main controller 110, it is possible to suppress the second special symbol variation from being performed multiple times based on the output of the detection signal once. In addition, not limited to this, when the processing for starting the second special symbol variation is executed based on the reception of the detection signal, the processing of setting a flag so that the currently output detection signal becomes invalid may be added. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably suppress the execution of the second special symbol variation multiple times based on the output of one detection signal.

In the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance (the right second ball entrance 645) (S974: Yes), then the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed (S978), and then the processes of S959 to S963, which are the same as the above-described second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), are executed, and this process ends. Also, in the processing of S974, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (second right ball entrance 645) (S974: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). This second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) differs from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the jackpot determination corresponding to the set probability state of the special symbol is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, the same S1051 and S1052 processes as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) are performed, and when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON in the process of S1052 (S1052: Yes), S10 53 to S1056 are executed, and the process proceeds to S1071. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is not set to ON in the process of S1052 (S1052: No), the process proceeds to S1071 as it is.

In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S1071), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S1071: Yes), the first per random number table (first per random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)) Refer to the data defined in the high probability state. Acquire the lottery result (win/fail determination result). On the other hand, in the process of S1071, the probability variation flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1071: No), the first winning random number table (1st random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)) data defined in the low probability state is obtained.

Then, after obtaining the lottery result in the process of S1073 or the process of S1072, the process of S1058 to S1062, which is the same as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127), is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) will be described. This special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277), as shown in Figure 179, with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in Figure 130), when selecting the variation pattern, it is different in that the processing content for selecting (determining) the small winning type for the small winning winning this time is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same S1371 process as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the same S1 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130). The processing of 377 to S1379 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small hit in the process of S1371 (S1371: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, the small hit type is selected by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same S1374 to S1376 processing as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, the process of selecting the small hit type is executed in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, but without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit in the process of determining the lottery result of the second special symbol (second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178))), the process of selecting the small hit type may be performed together, and a different small hit determination value is defined for each small hit type. , It may be configured so that the small hit type is determined in correspondence with the small hit determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1) used when it is determined that the small hit is won. As a result, the number of types of counters can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283) will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (S283). This second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283) is a processing executed when the variation time of the second special symbol variation has passed and the second special symbol variation during variation is stopped, and is different from the above-described second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) in that a part of the processing performed when the second special symbol variation to be processed is a jackpot variation is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283) is performed, first, the same S1551 to S1559 processing as the above-described second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is performed, then the special figure 2 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the big hit flags 203i), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end standby flag 20 3dm, the variable probability flag 203fa is set to OFF, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

In other words, when one special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning of a jackpot, the lottery result and remaining variation time for the other special symbol variation being executed are completely discarded, and then stopped and displayed, and the set information on the game state (probability variation flag 203fa, time reduction counter 203h, time reduction end standby flag 203dm) are all reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire a privilege (prize ball) other than the privilege (prize ball) obtained by winning the ball in the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game, and to suppress the situation in which the player is given the privilege excessively.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous variation specification, the special pattern variation executed before the big win game is not restarted after the end of the big win game, and the number of times of time reduction is not subtracted by the information based on the special pattern variation executed before the big win game, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. When the processing of S1580 is finished, then the same processing of S1561 to S1563 as the above-described second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is executed, and this processing is finished.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of special figure 2 deviating stop processing 7 (S1584). This special figure 2 out stop processing 7 (S1584) is different from the above-described special figure 2 out stop processing (see S1564 in FIG. 133) in that when it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651: Yes), the small win process (S1671) is executed. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted. Here, the contents of the small hit process (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 out stop process 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process (S1671). This small winning process (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol winning the small winning is stopped and displayed, and the process (interrupting process, forced stop (discard) process) corresponding to the selected small winning type is executed for the first special symbol variation being executed.

When the small hit process (S1671) is executed, first, the small hit type (small hit type selected in the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)) set for the second special symbol variation of this time is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit A" (S1683). If it is determined that it is a "small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 1 is changing (during the first special symbol variation) (S1684), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating the ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set. (S1686), this processing ends. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that it is not during special figure 1 fluctuation (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1683, if it is determined that it is not "small hit A" (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit C" (S1687), and if it is determined to be "small hit C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current is in a probability variable state (normal pattern high probability state) ( S1688). If it is determined that the current is in the variable probability state (S1688: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol variation that won the "small hit B" in the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state is the processing target of this time, Next, it is determined whether the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not ON (S1689: No), When it is determined that it is not the final variation of the probability variation state, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690), and the process proceeds to S1684 described above. In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 in the processing of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the present is not in the probability changing state (S1688: No), or if the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON in the processing of S1689, that is, if it is determined that it is the final change in the probability changing state (S1689: Yes), the processing of S1690 is skipped, and the above S1684 Go to processing.

In other words, when a ``small hit C'' is won in the variable probability state, the time reduction end waiting flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not reduced to 0, so that the game state can be shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state before the special pattern variation (lottery) in the variable probability state is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the "small hit C" election is set as an end condition for ending the variable probability state (high probability state of normal symbols). In this embodiment, since the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player than the probability variable state, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state is small, that is, the state where the probability of transitioning to the normal state without shifting to the latent probability state is low. The end condition is the end condition that is more advantageous to the player. When the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (in the case of a low-probability state of a normal pattern), that is, in the case of a normal state or a latent probability state, processing for ending the time-saving state is not executed, so the same processing is executed in the case of winning the "small winning C" and winning the "small winning A".

In the process of S1687, if it is determined that it is not "small hit C", that is, if it is determined that the read small hit type is "small hit B" (S1687: No), it is determined whether the current special figure 1 is fluctuating (S1691), and if it is determined that special figure 1 is fluctuating (S1691: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S 1692), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S1693), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag (flag corresponding to the first special symbol out of the big hit flag 203i) is set to ON, that is, whether the first special symbol variation being executed is the big hit variation (S1695), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol out of the big hit flag 203i) is set to on (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag (jackpot flag 20) The flag corresponding to the first special symbol among 3i) is set to OFF (S1696), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1697), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that there is no special figure 1 fluctuation (S1691: No), this process is terminated as it is. In addition, in the processing of S1695, the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the big hit flags 203i) is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation being executed is a deviation variation (S1695: No), the processing of S1696 and S1697 is skipped and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 192, control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of command determination processing 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and performs processes corresponding to various commands received from the main controller 110, similar to the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above.

When command determination processing 7 (S4192) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a status command has been received (S4231). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), status command reception processing is performed (S4232), and this processing ends. This received command process (S4232) executes the same process as the received command process (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the above-described command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Although detailed explanation is omitted, a state command indicating the current game state is received, a mode performance mode corresponding to the game state is set, and a display command for displaying the corresponding performance mode (for example, back image) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set. For example, when a state command indicating a variable probability state is received, a display command corresponding to the production mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. The details of the switching control of the effect mode during the latent certainty state will be described later.

In command determination processing 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not a status command has been received is different from that in the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether the state command has been received prior to determining whether the special figure variation pattern command has been received. By configuring in this way, after determining the current gaming state, it is possible to reliably execute the processing based on the special figure variation pattern command. Various command determinations may be executed in the same order as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) without being limited to this.

If it is determined that the state command has not been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: No), then it is determined whether the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203), and if it is determined that it is received (S4203: Yes), the variation start flag (special figure variation start flag 223d, special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command is set to ON (S4233), from the received command A variation pattern command is extracted (S4234). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special figure stop type command is received (S4205), and if it is determined that it is received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command is set to ON (S4235), The stop type is extracted from the received command (S4236). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), the same S4208 to S4214 processing as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) is performed, and in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop related command has been received, the stop related processing 7 is performed (S4236), and this processing ends. The detailed content of this stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the same processing of S4216 to S4218 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) is executed, and in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop-related command has been received, the winning-related processing 7 is executed (S4237), and this processing ends. Although the detailed description of this winning related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, the above-mentioned winning related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67) is executed based on the reception of the small winning related command instead of the winning related command. The small prize related commands include at least a small prize start command indicating the start of the small prize game, a round command indicating the start of the round game opened by the winning device to be operated during the small prize game, and an ending command indicating the end of the small prize game, similarly to the above-described accessory prize related command, and a process of setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. As a result, the effect mode corresponding to the small winning game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

Then, in the process of S4218, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4220: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of stop-related processing 7 (S4236) executed in command determination processing 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop-related processing 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) is the above-described stop-related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65), when the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes), the preparation state setting process (See S4641 in FIG. 184) is added and the process for determining whether the special figure discard command is received (S4642), and when it is determined that the special figure discard command is received in the process of S4642. To (S4642: Yes), it is different in that the process (S4643) to execute the special figure discard setting process is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Here, the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). This preparation state setting process (S4641) is, as described above, a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162(a)). In this preparation state setting processing (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON (S8001), and if it is determined that it is OFF (S8001: No), there is no possibility of shifting to the preparation state, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S8001, if it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to OFF (S8002), and the display mode during RUSH preparation (see FIG. 162(a)) is set (S8003). Next, the in-RUSH flag 223fg and the in-preparation flag 223fd are both set to ON (S8004), and the process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), it is possible to set the display mode of the preparation state from the time of shifting to the consecutive villa mode (RUSH game).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the latent state is configured as an advantageous game state (continuous game mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbols is easily executed and small winning games are frequently performed, and the normal state is configured as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the number of times of probability variation (50 times) in the probability variation state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to shift directly from the probability variable state to the most advantageous game state without going through the jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the probability variation state, it is possible to play a game with the elapse of the probability variation number of times as one goal.

Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which the probability state is set to the most advantageous game state, and the probability state can be set after winning a jackpot. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the latent state is not set unless a big win is won, a disadvantageous state is formed in which the number of balls in possession is likely to decrease while staying in the normal state (that is, until the big win is won).

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the probability variable number of times in the probability variable state that is more disadvantageous than the latent probability state, the game is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous continuous mode (latent probability state) without going through the jackpot winning. In other words, even if the player does not win the jackpot, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently by simply continuing the right-handed game. By constructing in this way, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment when the probability variable number of times can be ended, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C) in a state where the variable probability state is set, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous continuous mode (latent probability state) without allowing the variable probability number to pass. As a result, the player can have expectations for the lottery results other than the winning of the jackpot during the variable probability state.

In addition, the lottery result (small win C) described above is configured so that it can be won only in the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) that is difficult to be executed during the variable probability state. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the right-handed game in the variable probability state enters the right second ball entrance 645 with irregular behavior and the second special pattern lottery is executed, the player can have expectations.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol is not stored in the reserved memory, the small win C cannot be won unless the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 645 during the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the behavior of the ball in the variable probability state. In addition, only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be adopted, for example, a second special symbol holding storage function may be provided, for example, the second special symbol lottery based on the holding storage of the second special symbol acquired during the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set may be executed during the probability change state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation a plurality of times immediately after the probability variation state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period in which the second special symbol variation is executed, for example, as a preliminary stage of the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG.

As a result, immediately after the variable probability state is set, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the period during which the state is likely to shift to the latent probability state is set. Furthermore, in this case, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the variable probability state, when the number of times of special symbol variation executed after the variable probability state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), the short variation (variation time is 5 seconds) should be easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is frequently opened during the variable probability state, so that the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to enter the right second ball entrance 645. For example, it is configured to select a variation pattern with a long period of time (for example, 10 seconds) with a small probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, so that the ball can temporarily enter the right second ball entrance 645 easily. It may be configured so as to form a state. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery during the variable probability state. Therefore, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes the specific lottery result (small hit C), the chance of shifting to the latent probability state can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ``small hit C'' that triggers the transition from the variable probability state to the latent probability state can be won only in the second special symbol lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to report a preparation state from the transition to the continuous game mode (secret state) until the first small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and to notify that it has become an advantageous state (RUSH state) when it becomes a situation in which a prize ball can actually be obtained (that is, when the small win variation is started). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained even though the RUSH state has been notified for a long time.

In the seventh embodiment, the probability of a small win in the second special symbol lottery is set to about 1/1 (59/60), but the probability is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. For example, the small hit probability may be lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643). This special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed when a special figure discard command is received in the stop related process 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In this embodiment, by executing the right-handed game in the latent sure state, while securing the reserved ball of the first special pattern (special figure 1 reserved ball), the lottery of the second special pattern is mainly executed, and the RUSH game for frequently executing the small winning game is executed.

And, during the latent definite state, the variation time set as the first special symbol variation is likely to be long (600 seconds). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state is configured to vary according to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, specifically, the smaller the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 or 2), the shorter the variation time is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In addition, when a specific lottery result ("small win B") is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded (forcibly stopped).

In other words, in the present embodiment, a game aiming at a more efficient game (a game for increasing the number of small winning games executed within a unit time) is executed by reducing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by winning a specific small winning while frequently executing the small winning game in the second special symbol lottery during the latent certainty state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH game executed during the latent state is a normal RUSH game, and a super RUSH game in which the number of small winning games executed within a unit time is increased than the normal RUSH game. It consists of Thus, the presence of a more advantageous state (super RUSH game) and the situation until the execution of the super RUSH game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who is executing the game in the latent certainty state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

When the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No), the present is not in the latent state (RUSH game), so the processes of S8102 to S8107 described later are skipped, and the process of S8108 is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read, and it is determined whether the current number of special figure reserved balls is 3. That is, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 and the game is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of special figure pending balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), the production mode (see FIG. 164 (b)) indicating the super RUSH rush is determined, the flag during super RUSH is set to ON (S8105), the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), the display command for showing the determined various modes is set (S8109), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the processing of S8108 will be described. In this embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel (overlapping), the timing of stopping and displaying the second special symbol variation that wins a specific small win (small win B7) in the second special symbol lottery is determined independently of the variation timing of the first special symbol variation. Therefore, it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the first special symbol variation is started, or may be forcibly stopped (discarded) at the timing immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol variation. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation mode of the third symbols (decorative symbols variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that is variably displayed corresponding to the variation of the first special symbols (decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is variable based on the lapse of the variation time, for example, immediately after the variation starts, the high-speed variation display that makes it difficult for the player to identify the third symbols is executed, and just before the end of the variation time (immediately before the variation stops), the variation speed is slowed down to the extent that the player can identify the third symbols. is common.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, if the third symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of receiving the command indicating the forced stop based on the forced stop of the first special symbol variation, for example, when the third pattern is displayed in low-speed variation display, there is a possibility that the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the process of S8108, based on the remaining period of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed as the forced stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol), either the stop mode at high speed fluctuation or the stop mode at low speed fluctuation is determined. Then, it outputs to the display control device 114 by the display command set in the process of S8109. On the side of the display control device 114, the forced stop display mode of the third pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received command for display, and display control is executed based on the determined forced stop display mode.

Specifically, when a display command indicating a stop mode during high-speed fluctuation is received, image data of a display mode indicating forced stop is interrupted into image data prepared for executing high-speed fluctuation display, and display control is performed so that high-speed fluctuation display is suddenly switched to a display mode indicating forced stop. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player without delay that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped. Also, since it is difficult for the player to identify the varying third pattern during the high-speed fluctuation, even if the display mode indicating the forced stop is suddenly stopped and displayed, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the replacement of the image.

On the other hand, when a display command indicating a stop mode at low speed fluctuation is received, an image displayed (or to be) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is read, and it is determined whether or not it is in a ready-to-win state (a state in which the third pattern can be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win). When it is determined that the present state is not in the ready-to-reach state, an image corresponding to display data in which each third pattern is displayed at a predetermined position (formation line) among display data used for low-speed fluctuation display is determined as a forced stop image, and after the low-speed fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed, the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. In addition, in the case of the ready-to-win state, image data in which one pattern included in the remaining third pattern row during fluctuation is replaced with a forced stop pattern indicating forced stop is created, variable display data for forced stop is generated so that the forced stop pattern is stop-displayed, and display control is executed based on the variable display data for forced stop.

In this way, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the process for forcibly stopping the third symbol is changed according to the variation display mode of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable even if the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped at any timing.

Also, when the above-described display control is executed, the period from when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped until the third symbol variation display is stopped and displayed differs depending on the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being performed. A pattern fixing period from the stop display of the special pattern showing the small win B winning to the fixing is specified as a prescribed period (for example, 1 second), and various kinds of forced stop display control for stop-displaying the third pattern variation can be executed within the prescribed period. Then, based on the output of a command (confirmation command) indicating that the confirmation period has passed from the main controller 110, the third symbol display mode (for example, "123") for confirming the forced stop may be displayed. By constructing in this way, when the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped, even if the period until the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped is varied according to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed, the third symbol variation display can be forcibly stopped within the determination period, and furthermore, the third symbol can be displayed in the same display mode in the display mode for forced stop determination when the determination period elapses.

Returning to FIG. 186, the description continues. In the processing of S8103, if it is determined that the number of special pending balls is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of special pending balls is 4 (S8106), and if it is determined to be 4 (S8106: Yes), a production mode aiming for the top (for example, a production mode in which the character 811 rises one step above the production screen shown in FIG. 164 (a)) is determined (S8107), The process proceeds to S8108. If it is determined in the process of S8106 that the number is not 4, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8108.

Next, referring to FIG. 187, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variation display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and generates and sets a variation pattern command for display based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). And, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5234 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5231), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5202), and then the display control device 114 is notified to the variation pattern command for the display. The data in the award information storage area 223b is shifted (S5233), and the process proceeds to S5234.

In the processing of S5234, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5234). And, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5234: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5238 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is on (S5234: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5235), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is set to off (S5236), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 is executed (S5237). The details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing the processing of S5237, the process proceeds to S5238.

In the processing of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5238). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is not on (that is, it is off) (S5238: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is ON (S5238: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is set to OFF (S5239), and then the special figure 1 for display or the special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and then this process ends.

Next, details of the effect mode setting process (S5232) described above will be described. This production mode setting process (S5232) is, as described above, a process for setting the production mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this production mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S8201), and if it is determined that the state is not the normal state (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the variable probability state (S8202). In the processing of S8202, if it is determined that the state is not the variable probability state (S8202: No), it means that the state is the latent probability state (Rental house mode), the ceiling effect setting process is executed (S8203), the variable pattern command for display indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8202, when it is determined that it is in the variable probability state (S8202: Yes), in order to determine whether the first special symbol of this time is the final variation of the variable probability state, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223fc is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), the ceiling effect setting process for selecting the effect mode of the last variable display effect before shifting to the RUSH game is executed (S8206), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the processing of S8204, if it is determined that the number of times of remaining time reduction is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (continuous mode), so the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the processing of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the normal mode effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8207), and the process proceeds to S8208.

Next, details of the above-described ceiling effect setting process (S8202, S8206) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, among the winning information storage area 223b, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special design is read (S8301), and it is determined whether or not the data of the read execution area is data corresponding to the jackpot (S8302). When it is determined that it is a hit variation, the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (the production mode for notifying the jackpot is determined (S8303), and this process ends. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the latent state. A performance mode of displaying a display mode indicating the winning of a jackpot while climbing is determined.By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the jackpot game despite the performance of reaching the top, and then the setting of a game state other than the latent state.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is a jackpot winning in the process of S8302, regardless of the selected jackpot type, the top reaching effect is not executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not to execute the peak reaching performance in the final variation of the variable probability state, but without being limited to this, after the jackpot game ends in the variable probability state, when a jackpot for which the latent probability state is set is won (during the jackpot variation), the top reaching performance is executed, and further, the performance of displaying the display mode indicating the jackpot winning at the top may be executed. As a result, the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable probability state (the performance in which the character 811 aims for the top) can be varied based on the remaining period of the variable probability state and the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery, and when the performance for reaching the top is executed, the latent probability state can be surely set, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating the big win (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 169(b)) is determined (S8304), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON (S8305), and this process ends.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), it is possible to appropriately set whether or not to execute the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 169(b)) according to the result of the foreseeing of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the latent state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 190, details of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. When this special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223fg is ON (S8401), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is OFF (S8401: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the potential state, then it is determined whether the probability variable state is set (S8402) .

In the processing of S8402, if it is determined that the variable probability state is not set, that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8402: No), the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8403), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the variable probability state (S8402: Yes), during the variable probability setting processing (S8404) for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol variation during the variable probability state, the processing ends. The detailed content of this variable probability setting process (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S8401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), then it is determined whether the preparation state flag 223fd is on (S8405). RUSH game) during RUSH setting processing (S8410) for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol variation in the middle, and ends this processing. The detailed content of this setting processing during RUSH (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S8405, when it is determined that the flag 223fd in the preparation state is on (that is, in the preparation state) (S8405: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the variation type of the small hit is notified by the variation pattern command (S8406), and when it is determined that the variation type of the small hit is notified (S8406: Yes), the flag 223fd in the preparation state is set to OFF (S8407), As the effect mode of the current variable display effect, the effect mode of the RUSH rush effect (see FIG. 162(b)) for informing the RUSH rush is determined (S8408), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the processing contents of the during probability variation setting processing (S8404) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable probability setting process (S8404). This variable probability setting processing (S8404) is for setting the performance mode when the second special symbol variation is executed during the variable probability state, and the processing for setting the performance mode (shortcut performance mode) when the latent probability state is set without winning the small win C during the variable probability state and the number of times of variable probability (50 times) does not elapse is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed in the variable probability state, most of the balls flowing down the right-side region win the right electric accessory 164, and the first special symbol variation is executed. However, when the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other and behave irregularly, the ball may rarely enter the right second ball entrance 645 and the second special symbol lottery may be executed. When a small win C is won by a second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the variable probability state can be shifted to the latent probability state without executing the special symbol variation for the number of times of probability variation (50 times), which is the termination condition of the variable probability state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the variable probability state, a special performance is executed to indicate to the player that a chance to shift to the probability state has arrived.

When the probability variation setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol variation of this time is a variation that is winning the small hit C (S8501). If it is determined to be a small hit C (S8501: Yes), then read the value of the variation number counter 223fc (S8502), and based on the value of the variation number counter 223fc read in the process of S8502. A presentation mode is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8503, if it is determined that the probability variation calculation number is not 5 times or less (6 times or more) (S8503: No), the effect mode (for example, warp effect) indicating that the shortcut rushes into the small hit RUSH (RUSH game) is determined (S8504), and the process proceeds to S8506. In addition, in the processing of S8501, when it is determined that the small winning C is not won in this variation (S8501: No), the processing proceeds to S8506 as it is.

In the process of S8506, the effect mode (for example, the character 811 is dressed in flames from the display mode shown in FIG. 161(a) from the display mode shown in FIG. 161(a) (the display mode of the character 811 is changed) and the character 811 climbs up the mountain vigorously) is determined (S8506), the display pattern commands indicating the determined various effect modes are set (S8507), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the contents of the setting process during RUSH (S8410) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the contents of the setting processing during RUSH (S8410). In this RUSH setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol variation executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S8601: Yes), then it is determined whether the current variation is a small hit B winning (S8602). When it is determined that the small hit B is won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped when the variation is stopped, so the performance mode of the end suggestive performance showing the pinch of the end of the super RUSH is set (S8603), In addition, the performance mode for RUSH corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8604), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8602, if the small hit B is not won (S8602: No), or if it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is not set to ON in the process of S8601 (S8601: No), the process proceeds to S8604 as it is, and then the process ends.

<Regarding another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path is formed in the right area of the game board 13 so that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and the right electric accessory 164 is arranged in the flow path. 158), and the right second ball inlet 645 is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 can enter. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric role object 164 (the opening operation pattern of the normal game), the ball flowing down the right side area, and the ball flowing down the flow path (hereinafter referred to as the specific flow path) where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down. and the rate of entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 (the rate of entering the ball into the starting opening which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol lottery).

Specifically, when the probability variable state is set as the game state, the variation time of the normal symbol variation and the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 are defined so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path win the right electric accessory 164, and when the latent probability state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set so that the rate of the balls flowing down the specific flow path winning the right electric accessory 164 is lower than when the probability variable state is set. , and right electric-access pattern 164 are defined. In addition, when the normal state is set, the variation time of the normal pattern variation is stipulated so as to lower the rate of winning the right electric accessory 164 than when the latent state is set. In addition, in both the potential probability state and the normal state, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the opening operation pattern (opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed in the game per normal pattern is the same, but by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the interval at which the game per normal pattern is executed is different, and as a result, the ratio of the ball flowing down the specific flow path to the right electric accessory 164 is different.

According to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, by making the starting opening (right first ball entrance 164r, right second ball entrance 645) into which balls are likely to enter different according to the set game state, it is possible to easily change the types of special symbols for which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed by executing a right-handed game. could be improved.

However, in the seventh embodiment described above, a special symbol type in which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed is defined for a set game state (for example, a variable probability state). Specifically, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state and the second special symbol lottery during the latent state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, the special symbol types corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed cannot be differentiated, and the player who has been playing the game for a long time in the same game state gets tired of the game early.

In order to solve the above-described problem, it is preferable to use each of the following configurations or a combination of each of the configurations in place of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Configuration example 1: Configuration of normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the set gaming state and the value of the second variation type counter CS3, and when the process of selecting the variation pattern is executed, the variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is selected. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the same game state is set, regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed during the game state, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 obtained from the data table defining the variation pattern of the same content. On the other hand, in this configuration example 1, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected variation time and the length of the selected variation time can be varied according to the number of special symbol variations executed in a state where a specific game state (probability variation state) is set (the number of special symbol lotteries performed after the completion of the probability variation jackpot game).

That is, with respect to the configuration of the general pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172 (b)) of the seventh embodiment described above, different variation patterns are defined corresponding to the number of special symbol variations after the game state is set. Specifically, in the range of 1 to 2 times the number of times of special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is defined, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.8 seconds is defined in the same manner as the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above.

By configuring in this way, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as the normal symbol variation from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is executed twice. Therefore, during a predetermined period after the variable probability state is set (a period until the special symbol variation is executed twice), it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 than outside the predetermined period (a period after the special symbol variation is executed twice). As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery only for a partial period during the variable probability state. Therefore, a specific small win (small win C) is won in the second special symbol lottery only in a partial period during the variable probability state, and the variable probability state can be easily shifted to a latent probability state which is more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period (50 times of probability variable frequency).

In the above-described configuration example 1, the normal symbol variation pattern that can be selected so that the predetermined period after the variable probability state is set is more advantageous to the player than the period other than the predetermined period is defined. By configuring in this way, when the specific period elapses without terminating the variable probability state, it is possible to execute a game more advantageous to the player than during the specific period. Therefore, the player who has been playing for a long time can be motivated to play the game without changing the game state.

In addition, in the configuration example 1 described above, it is configured to select a different variation time (variation pattern) according to the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set, but without being limited to this, for example, regardless of the number of special symbol variations, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.8 seconds are configured to be selectable, and the probability that each variation pattern is selected is configured to be different according to the number of special symbol variations. Specifically, special after the probability variation state is set. When the number of symbol variations satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the number of special symbol variations executed after the probability variation state is set is within two times, or when the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set is an even number), a variation pattern (2-second variation pattern) advantageous to the player may be more likely to be selected than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set a period in which a game advantageous to a player is executed only by variably setting the selection ratio of each variation pattern according to the number of variations of special symbols.

In the above-described configuration example 1, there is one type of normal pattern variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the probability variable state is set, but without being limited to this, according to the jackpot type that triggers the probability variable state to be set, it may be configured to select a normal symbol variation pattern with reference to a different data table. A variation pattern (variation time) of symbol variation can be selected. In this case, the length of the advantageous period (the period in which a game more advantageous to the player than other periods (for example, the second special symbol lottery) is more likely to be executed) and the timing at which the advantageous period is set may be changed according to the type of big win. Further, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the variable probability state is set as an advantageous period, and when a specific disadvantageous jackpot type is set, the advantageous period may not be set for the entire period of the variable probability state.

As described above, when a game that is more advantageous to the player than other periods can be executed during a part of the period in which a specific game state (probability variable state) is set, in addition to the current game state, it is preferable to execute a period suggestion effect for suggesting (informing) the player whether the present is an advantageous period (a period in which a game (for example, a second special symbol lottery) that is more advantageous to the player than other periods). For example, during the hill-climbing effect (see FIG. 161(a)) executed during the variable probability state in the above-described seventh embodiment, the character 811 resembling a rabbit is changed to a power-up display mode, and the main display area Dm displays the characters "entering the powerful zone", and the effect is executed so that the period until reaching the top can be shortened.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period. Therefore, for example, a plurality of normal pattern fluctuation pattern tables with different advantageous periods are prepared as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern tables to be referred to during the probability variable state, and even if one normal pattern fluctuation pattern table is selectable based on the jackpot type set when the probability variable jackpot is won, the player can be notified of the advantageous period in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that the above-mentioned period-indicating performance is intended for all performances configured to be more likely to be executed during the advantageous period than outside the advantageous period, and even if the performance is other than the performance that directly explains to the player that the current period is in the advantageous period, the possibility that the current period is in the advantageous period is higher than the possibility that it is outside the advantageous period at the time the performance is executed, so that the period-indicating performance is included in the period-indicating performance. Therefore, the execution frequency of the period-indicating effect may be lower than during the advantageous period, and may be executed during a period (unfavorable period) outside the advantageous period.

In addition to the above-described period suggesting performance, that is, the performance for suggesting to the player that the current probability is likely to be in the advantageous period, the state suggesting performance suggesting that the normal pattern variation pattern table referred to in the probability variation state this time is the normal pattern variation pattern table in which the advantageous period is easily set among the plurality of normal pattern variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the probability variation state may be executed.

Further, when the probability variable state is set, when the ball enters the second right ball entrance 645, the effect mode of the notification effect for notifying that the ball has entered the second right ball entrance 645 may be configured to vary based on the determination result of whether or not the current time is the advantageous period. Since it is a ball entry, the notification performance is executed without setting the performance mode of excessively congratulating the player, and when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 in a state where the ball entrance frequency is low (during the unfavorable period), the performance mode of congratulating the player is preferably set rather than the performance mode of the notification performance that can be set when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the advantageous period. In this way, when a plurality of periods in which the easiness of entering a ball into a specific ball entrance is made different can be set, by varying the performance mode of the notification performance according to the set period, when the ball can enter the specific ball entrance during the period when it is difficult to enter the ball, the notification performance of the special performance mode can be executed.

In the configuration example 1 described above, by varying the variation time of the normal symbols according to the predetermined conditions (jackpot type, game state, number of special symbol variations, value of variation type counter CS3), it is configured to vary the rate at which the ball flowing down the specific flow path (the flow path in which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) reaches the right second ball entrance 645. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the winning normal symbol variation is stopped. The length of the period (normal pattern determination period) from the display to the execution of the normal pattern per game may be varied according to the winning normal pattern per type or the selected normal pattern variation pattern type. That is, the period from the start of the normal pattern variation to the execution of the normal pattern per game may be configured to be variable according to predetermined conditions (jackpot type, game state, number of special symbol fluctuations, value of variation type counter CS3, normal pattern lottery result, etc.).

<Configuration example 2: Configuration of opening operation of right electric accessory>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in the normal figure winning game executed during the variable probability state is shown as an example of one type. It may be configured such that the length of the period during which the second right ball entrance 645 is turned on is different. By configuring in this way, the rate at which the ball flowing down the specific flow path (the flow path in which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) reaches the right second ball entrance 645 can be varied according to the winning type of the normal game winning game executed during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, for example, as the opening operation pattern of the normal figure per game, the first open state (the state in which the ball is easy to enter the right electric accessory 164) is set for 2 seconds, the first closed state (the state in which the ball is difficult to enter the right electric accessory 164) is set for 5 seconds, and the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds. .

By configuring in this way, for example, if the ball wins the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the normal game is terminated at that point, but by executing the game so as not to allow the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the ball can be easily reached to the right second ball entrance 645 during the normal game. Also, in this case, it is preferable to be able to set an opening operation pattern in which the normal figure per game ends when the period of the first open state has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to shoot the ball during the normal game per game (perform the right-handed game).

In the above-described seventh embodiment and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path is formed in the right area of the game board 13 through which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and the right electric role object 164 is arranged in the flow path. A flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that a ball flows down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 of 64, and a right second ball entrance 645 is disposed at a position where the ball that has flowed down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 can enter. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric role object 164 (the opening operation pattern of the normal game), the ball flowing down the right side area, and the ball flowing down the flow path (hereinafter referred to as the specific flow path) where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down. and the ratio of entering a ball into a right second ball entrance 645 (the ratio of entering a ball into a start opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol lottery) to be variable, and during the variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In other words, a lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player is executed at the start opening provided upstream of the specific flow path than at the start opening provided downstream, and by varying the winning ratio of the balls to the start opening provided on the upstream side, the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. It may be configured such that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed rather than the ball entering the starting port provided on the side.

Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, no matter what occasion the latent certainty state that is most advantageous to the player is set, specifically, when a jackpot is won in which the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or even when the latent certainty state is set after the predetermined transition condition (for example, the number of times of probability variation is 50 times) is established during the certainty variable state, the first special symbol is reserved and stored at the time when the latent certainty state is set. In order to facilitate a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of (special figure 1 reserve) is secured, the special figure 1 reserve can be obtained in a right-handed game executed during a jackpot game or a variable probability state.例文帳に追加Specifically, the first special symbol variation is executed during the probability variable state, and the first special symbol variation is not executed during the jackpot game, so that when the latent probability state is set with the chance of winning the probability jackpot, the probability state is more likely to be executed with the number of special symbols 1 reserved at the upper limit value (4) than when the probability state is set via the probability variable state.

In addition, when the latent definite state is set, a game (second special symbol lottery) with a different degree of advantage (different fluctuation time) is executed according to the number of reserved special figures 1, and a game more advantageous to the player is executed when the number of reserved special figures 1 is smaller than when the number of reserved special figures 1 is large.

In other words, when the number of times of probability variation (the number of times of special pattern variation executed during the probability variation state) reaches 50 times during the probability variation state, the number of reserved special figures 1 becomes the upper limit (4) with a high probability by the right-handed game executed until the number of times of probability variation reaches 50 times. Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the small winning C is won in the second special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, the variable probability state can be shifted to the latent probability state before the number of times of the probability variable reaches 50 times. Therefore, for example, when a small win C is won immediately after the variable probability state is set and the state is shifted to the latent probability state, the execution period of the right-handed game before the probability state is set is shortened compared to the case where the probability state is set based on the establishment of other transition conditions, so that the number of reserved special figures 1 at the time when the probability state is set can be easily reduced. Therefore, it is possible to set a transition condition that is more advantageous to the player than the other transition condition (the transition condition that is established when the probability variable number of times reaches 50).

In this way, a plurality of transition conditions (big win, probability variable number of times 50 times, small win C win) are set in advance in order to set a specific game state (for example, probability state), and the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set can be varied according to the type of the established transition condition, so that the player can be interested not only in the game state set to the player but also in the established transition condition. Furthermore, in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent probability state) in a state where the same game state (for example, a variable probability state) is set, a plurality of transition conditions (50 times of variable probability, winning a small win C) are set in advance as transition conditions that can be established without a big win, and the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set according to the type of the established transition condition is variable. A game aiming to make the player play and the game can be played in parallel. Furthermore, the preset specific transition condition (small hit C win) is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the latent state is easily changed according to the timing when it is established. Specifically, when the transition condition is established in a state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is small, it is configured so that an advantageous game (super RUSH) is easily executed after setting the latent state. In addition, since the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) can be established regardless of the special figure 1 reserved number, the player can always expect the specific transition condition to be established.

In the seventh embodiment described above, among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning to the latent definite state, the transition condition established by winning a small win C is configured so as to be most advantageous to the player. In this case, for example, the variable probability state is more advantageous to the player than the latent certainty state, or setting the latent certainty state with a large number of special figure 1 reserved balls is more advantageous to the player than setting the latent certainty state with a small number.

161 (a) and (b), as the effect (mountain climbing effect) executed during the variable probability state shown with reference to FIG. (For example, an effect mode in which the top is a flower garden) may be executed to inform the player that the transition condition has been established in an advantageous state. At the time when the small winning C is won (when the second special symbol variation for winning the small winning C is started) or when it is determined that the probability variation number of times reaches 50 times (the special figure 1 reservation is read ahead and it is determined that the big winning will not be won before the probability variation number of times of 50 is reached), the right-hand hitting game may be urged to be interrupted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the useless increase of the special figure 1 reservation.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, by interrupting the game until the first special symbol variation (10-minute variation) of the long-time variation is executed a plurality of times while the latent state is set, it was possible to forcibly play the game in an advantageous game state. Specifically, the normal pattern variation pattern to be selected is configured to be different according to the number of reserved memories of normal symbols (the number of reserved memory of normal symbols), and the normal pattern variation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of normal symbols is 0 is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal pattern variation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of normal symbols is greater than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, it may be configured so that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is likely to be selected.

By constructing in this way, when the number of normal pattern reservations is set to 0 by suspending the game for a long time in the latent sure state, the player can play the game in a disadvantageous situation in which the special figure 1 reservation is difficult to increase from 0.例文帳に追加In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be able to select a normal pattern variation pattern based on the number of reserved normal patterns and the number of reserved special patterns 1, for example, when the number of reserved patterns for normal patterns is 0 and the number of reserved patterns for special patterns is 1 or 2, it is easy to set a short variation time as the fluctuation time of normal patterns so that the number of reserved balls for special patterns 1 is 3 or more, and when the number of reserved patterns for normal patterns is 0 and the number of reserved patterns for special patterns is 0, it is difficult to newly acquire the reserved patterns for special patterns. For this reason, it is preferable to configure so that a long fluctuation time is set.

Furthermore, according to the number of reserved and stored normal symbols, the configuration in which the normal pattern variation pattern is varied may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is also provided in the left side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. ) is provided with a variable prize winning device 650 opened during the big win game, and the game board 13 is configured so that the player can select the left-handed game or the right-handed game during the big win game. Then, the rate at which the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 is made different between when the right-handed game is played and when the left-handed game is played. As a result, depending on which game is played during the jackpot game, the number of reserved memory of normal symbols acquired at the end of the jackpot game (normal pattern reserved number) can be varied. As game states to be set after the end of the jackpot game, a first game state in which a larger number of reserved normal patterns is more advantageous than a smaller number and a second game state in which a larger reserved number of normal patterns is more disadvantageous than a smaller number can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method during the big win game while predicting the game state to be set after the big win game is over.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 200, a modified example of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) that can perform the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) is set, a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation, and a short-time (for example, 1 second) variation pattern is set as the variation time for the second special symbol variation. , and furthermore, it is configured so that a small prize can be won in the special figure 2 lottery.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the special figure 2 lottery than the execution frequency of the special figure 1 lottery during the latent definite state, and to provide a game advantageous to the player by frequently generating a small winning game executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

On the other hand, in a modification of the seventh embodiment, similar to the above-described seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) that can perform the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol in duplicate, when a specific game state (eg, variable probability state) is set, one special symbol (eg, the first special symbol) is configured to have a longer variation time (eg, 10 minutes), and the other special symbol (eg, the second special symbol) is configured. By configuring the fluctuation time to be short (for example, 1 second), the other special symbol lottery may be preferentially executed.

Then, the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, the second special symbol lottery makes it easier to win a small win than the first special symbol lottery, or the contents of the big win game executed when a big win is won), and the game that is advantageous to the player is facilitated during a specific game state (for example, a variable state).

In the above-described game machine, the first special symbol lottery becomes a disadvantageous lottery disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery advantageous to the player, at least during the period when the variable probability state is set. Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machine, at least one of the end conditions for ending a specific game state (for example, the variable probability state) is set to an end condition that is satisfied when the lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery) becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a winning lottery or a big win), and by providing a game property in which many advantageous special symbol lotteries are executed until the end condition is satisfied by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery. .

However, in the above-described gaming machine, when a specific game state (for example, a probability variable state) that is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous game state continues is set only by the result of the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result that terminates an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot winning in which a normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game), the period until the special symbol for indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result is started) becomes the period in which the advantageous game state continues, and once the period in which the advantageous game state continues is set, the period cannot be changed (discarded). There was

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) mainly executed during an advantageous game state, the disadvantageous special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed can be discarded. That is, when the result of the disadvantageous special symbol variation during execution is the result of ending the advantageous game state (for example, the result indicating the winning of a big win in which the normal state is set after the end of the big win game), the advantageous game state can be extended (continued) by discarding the lottery result. In addition, when the unfavorable special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is discarded, the number of disadvantageous special symbol variations is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special symbol variation. Therefore, even if the termination condition for terminating the advantageous game state is set when the number of unfavorable special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice) during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued). are

By constructing in this way, the period during which the advantageous game state continues can be varied based on the lottery result of the advantageous special pattern (second special pattern), so that the player who plays the game in the advantageous game state can be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, in this modification, when a small win is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery in an advantageous game state (probability variable state), at least a small win type (small win B) that discards the disadvantageous special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed and a small win type (small win C) that terminates the advantageous game state after discarding the disadvantageous special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed can be set.

That is, in the present modified example, as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state, the termination condition established based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second winning symbol) is set. By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the advantageous game state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues.

In addition, since the termination condition that can be satisfied is set based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbols (second special symbols) during the advantageous game state, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected games. In addition, as described above, when a small win is won in the advantageous special pattern lottery, the period during which the advantageous game state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the set small win type, so that when the small win is won in the lottery of the advantageous special pattern (second special pattern), the player can be made to pay attention to the subsequent game contents.

Furthermore, in this modification, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, it is possible to variably set the fluctuation time of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) variation according to the number of retained balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (first special symbol) (the number of retained balls of the special symbol and the number of retained balls of the advantageous special symbol). Arithmetic) is configured so that a short variation time can be easily set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the advantageous game state (during the probability variation state).

As a result, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols in the advantageous game state can be increased by winning a small prize in the lottery of the advantageous special symbols (second special symbols) and canceling the unfavorable special symbol variations being executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbols is set after the end of the big win game, the high probability state of the special symbols is continued until the next big win is won by the special symbol lottery, and the probability state of the normal symbols is configured to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (specific small winning or execution of the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times) is established. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, once the high probability state of the special symbols is set, the probability of winning the big win in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next big win is won, so that the player can play the game without anxiety. .

On the other hand, in this modified example, a condition is added that the high-probability state of the special pattern shifts to the low-probability state, and the high-probability state of the special pattern can be shifted to the low-probability state even if the special pattern lottery does not win a big hit. As a result, even when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the high probability state of the special pattern may end without winning the jackpot, so that the player who is playing in the high probability state of the special pattern can play the game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this modification, when the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of special symbols is set, and when the second transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of normal symbols is set. , When the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, the variable probability state is shifted to the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). Then, when both of the transition conditions are met, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set.

That is, it is configured such that the state is finally shifted to the normal state through different processes depending on the order of establishment of the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be satisfied during the variable probability state. By constructing in this way, a player who is playing in the variable probability state can be interested in not only when the variable probability state ends, but also to which game state the variable probability state shifts to.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above is configured such that a long-time (e.g., 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation while the latent state is set, and a long-time (e.g., 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation while the normal state is set. 50 times) is set, there is a possibility that both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation may fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) during the normal state set based on the establishment of the first transition condition, and the player cannot smoothly play the game.

On the other hand, in this modification, from a game state (for example, a probability variation state) in which a long-time variation is set as a variation pattern of one special symbol variation (for example, a first special symbol variation) to a game state (for example, a normal state) in which a long-time variation is set as a variation pattern for the other special symbol variation (for example, a second special symbol variation). 10 minutes) It is configured to make it difficult for the situation to fluctuate. This allows the player to play the game smoothly.

First, based on FIG. 193, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of this modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 157) in a part of the configuration of the right side area (area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) among the game areas formed on the game board 13, and the rest of the configuration is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 193, in this modification, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and the balls fired by the right-handed game are configured to be alternately distributed to the left flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member 700 and the right flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 forming a flow-down surface of the left flow path 701 is provided on the upstream side of the left flow path 701. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a fixed opening/closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown). It consists of

Specifically, a movable lid opening/closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110, and the movable lid opening/closing process repeats an opening period of 0.1 seconds and an average closing period of 0.8 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b that is controlled to open and close in this way is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG.

Then, the ball that flows down the left channel 701 and flows down on the movable lid 1500 (the ball that flows down the channel formed on the movable lid 1500 in the closed state) flows down the bent portion of the left channel 701 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a by the nail planted at the position where the downstream end of the left channel 701 faces.

On the other hand, a bent portion is formed in the right channel 702 by the sorting device 700, and a small hit attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is arranged so as to form a part of the flowing surface of the bent portion. This small winning attacker 3650 is composed of an opening/closing lid 3650a whose opening/closing is controlled during a small winning game executed on the basis of winning of a small winning in a second special pattern lottery, a flow path through which the balls flowed down when the opening/closing lid 3650a is in an open state, and a small winning prize opening 3653 into which the balls flowing down the flow path enter. The contents of the opening/closing control of the opening/closing lid 3650a during the small winning game are the same as the contents of the accessory winning control process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will now be described in detail. This normally movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 0.8 seconds, which is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of this modified example, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the rolling surface on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in the open state, the ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entrance 64b.

The timing for rolling on (or falling on) the constantly movable member 1500 is every 1.2 seconds, and the timing for the constantly movable valve 1500 to be open is 0.1 second out of 0.9 seconds, so the timing at which the two coincide is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b periodically, so that when the jackpot game is finished and a variable probability state is set, a state in which the first special symbol is not reserved (special figure 1 reservation) can be prevented from occurring. In addition, since a period (0.1 second) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit is set as a period in which the movable valve 1500 is opened once, the right-handed game can be disadvantageous to the player rather than the left-handed game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in the normal game state.

Specifically, it is designed so that about 15 balls out of 250 shot balls enter the first ball entrance 64 when a left-handed game is played when the game state is the normal state, and when the balls enter, 5 prize balls are paid out. Also, it is designed so that about five balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the balls enter. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, taking into consideration the fact that the paid-out prize balls are shot again, it is possible to let about 20 balls enter the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, it is designed so that about 9 out of 250 shot balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b when the right-handed game is played, and when the balls enter, 2 prize balls are paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, only about 10 balls can be entered into the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the paid-out prize balls are shot again. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired in the right-handed game passes is not provided with the general prize-winning opening 63, but the general prize-winning opening 63 may be provided based on the design concept that the right-handed game is not more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game when the game state is normal. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time saving state or during the jackpot state.

Furthermore, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball on the path until the ball shot in the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the ball shot in the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500.例文帳に追加In this modification, the distribution member 700 is provided for both the purpose of delaying the flow of the ball (differentiating the flow behavior of the ball) and the purpose of distributing the ball fired in the right-handed game to a plurality of flow paths. A delay means (e.g., a flow path in which the friction coefficient of the flow-down surface is different from that of other flow-down surfaces, or a flow path in which the flow-down direction of the sphere branches in the middle and eventually reaches the movable lid 1500 regardless of which branch) may be provided.

Next, the electric accessory 640a to which the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 reaches will be described. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric role object 640a is provided in an area where both the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 701 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 702 can reach, and the ball that has reached the electric role object 640a can flow down toward the second ball entrance 640 by the normal figure winning game that is executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery. It can be changed to a released state (embedded state) in which it is not possible to do so.

Furthermore, the variable mode (opening/closing control content) of the electric role product 640a executed as the above-described normal pattern winning game is varied according to the probability state of the set normal symbol, and in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the electric role product 640a is opened and closed for a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball reaching the second ball entrance 640 to enter the induction state. In the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the opening and closing of the electric role object 640a is controlled so that the ball reaching the electric role object 640a cannot reach the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.1 second).

By configuring in this way, during a game state (for example, normal state, latent probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a left-handed game is an advantageous game that is more advantageous to an advantageous person than a right-handed game, and during a game state (for example, a variable probability state, a time-saving state) in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set, a right-handed game can be made an advantageous game that is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game.

Finally, the ball that has passed through the electric accessory 640 a (the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 701 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 702 ) reaches the V winning device 2650 . The V winning device 2650 is controlled to be opened/closed by a big win game executed when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery, and is constructed so as to set a high-probability state of the special pattern after the big win game is finished by the ball winning to the V winning device 2650 passing through a specific gate during the big win game.

Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 2650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the V winning device 2650 includes an opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 2650c combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b for screwing the V winning device 2650 to the game board 13, and a base member 2650c arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c and mounted on the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. LED substrate 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs for lighting the LEDs are arranged on the front side of the back cover 2650d; a channel cover body 2650g that is combined to form a channel; a switching member 2650h that protrudes into the channel formed by the back cover body 2650e and the channel cover body 2650g and switches the channel of the game ball; 650i, and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover 2650j with screws.

FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. FIG. 195(c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 195(b), the V winning device 2650 is formed with a jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning hole (jackpot winning hole) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the bottom surface is inclined to the lower left so that the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 195(b). A detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the rear side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195(b).

As shown in FIG. 195(b), the opening of the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a is changed between an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 2650f1 constructed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is retracted inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a.

In addition, in the open state, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the ball wins the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 195(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 195(b). As shown in FIG. 195(a), a magnetic sensor 2650c1 having a detection port 2650a1 is fixed to a base member 2650c such that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration for distributing the balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 2650e to a normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and a special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 196(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is actuated so that the balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 that guides the ball, and is rotatably supported from the rear side of the flow channel cover 2650g. Here, the channel cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, so that the guide piece 2650h can be rotatably arranged in the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 2650g.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), the sphere guided into the sorting channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2. The special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route through which the ball that has flowed in passes through a specific area (detection switch) 2650e3.

Here, the details will be described later, but the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to set a high probability state of special symbols when the detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 2650h is for setting either a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) that can pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 (ordinary discharge flow path 2650e1) as the flow path for the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game, and sets the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the game state transition contents in this modified example will be described. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of the game state in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. In this modified example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery), the jackpot A is set at a rate of 40% and the jackpot B is set at a rate of 60% as the jackpot types. Then, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), the big win C is set at a rate of 100% as the big win type.

When the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot B is set, the same jackpot game as the jackpot B7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this modification, when the probability variable state is set, as the end condition (first transition condition) of the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability of special symbol), the number of special symbol lotteries (ST number) 50 times executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and as the end condition (second transition condition) of the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of normal symbol), the number of times of special symbol lottery (time reduction number) 70 times (second transition condition A) executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, or , Special figure 1 lottery number of times 2 times (second transition condition B) is configured to be set.

When a jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) can easily reach the upper limit (4). During the variable probability state, a game for executing a special figure 2 lottery is performed by a right hitting game. This modification differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the special figure 2 lottery is configured to execute a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery so that the game state most advantageous to the player becomes a variable probability state, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easily executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to make it easier to win the small prize than the special figure 1 lottery, and the probability of winning the small prize in the special figure 2 lottery is set to 1/20. Furthermore, it is constructed so that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game is more easily set in the case of winning the big win in the special figure 2 lottery than in the case of winning the big win in the special figure 1 lottery. In addition, the 7 table 203fe3 for probability variation referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the latent probability state in the seventh embodiment described above is referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the 7 table 202fe2 for probability variation referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol in the seventh embodiment is configured to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the latent probability state.

In this embodiment configured in this manner, a right-handed game in which a special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed is performed in a variable probability state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set and a time saving state, and a left-handed game in which a special figure 1 lottery is mainly performed in a normal state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set and a latent probability state is performed.

Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the game result during the variable probability state and the contents of the transition of the game state. As described above, in this modification, the first transition condition for shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state when satisfied, and the second transition condition for transitioning from the variable probability state to the latent probability state when satisfied are set. Specifically, as the first transition condition, the special symbol lottery frequency (ST frequency) executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set 50 times, and as the second transition condition, the special symbol lottery frequency (number of time reduction) 70 times (second transition condition A) executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, or the special symbol 1 lottery frequency 2 times (second transition condition B) is set.

In other words, after the variable probability state is set, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, the state is shifted to the time saving state, and after that, when the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times in the time saving state, the state is shifted to the normal state. Here, in this modification, in the variable probability state, according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1), a different variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. Specifically, similar to the 7 table 203fe3 for concealment in the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is a predetermined number or less (for example, 1, 2), when it is a predetermined number or more (for example, 4) It is configured to make it easier to select a shorter fluctuation time.

By constructing in this way, in order to increase the execution frequency of the special figure 2 lottery in which the set period (the number of times of ST is 50 times) is stipulated, the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery that facilitates the execution of the lottery advantageous to the player can be made to play a novel game of winning the small win B in the special figure 2 lottery and reducing the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls by discarding the special figure 1 variation.

Furthermore, in this modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big hit game, the game is interrupted and the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed multiple times. When the act of reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is executed, the second transition condition B is established and the probability variable state is shifted to the latent probability state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game is lowered due to the interruption of the game during the period when the special figure 1 variation is executed in the variable probability state in which a long variation time is likely to be selected.

Next, a description will be given of how each special symbol changes when the game state changes. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied in a state where the variable probability state is set and the latent probability state is set will be described. As described above, the second transition condition B can be established when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed, so a new special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the latent certainty state is set. For this newly executed special figure 1 variation, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the variation pattern table referred to during the latent state, so the variation pattern that can be selected during the normal state as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special figure 2 variation for a long time during the execution of the special figure 1 variation for a long time.

On the other hand, the case where the 1st transition condition is satisfied during the probability variable state and the time saving state is set will be described. As described above, the first transition condition, when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed, or because it can be established in any case when the special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is set At the timing, there is a case where the special figure 1 variation is performed for a long time. However, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special figure lottery is performed 20 times or until a big hit is won in the special figure lottery, and the total value of the variation time for 20 special figure 2 variations executed during the time saving state is configured to be at least longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation set during the latent state. The contents of the variation pattern table are defined so that the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state is likely to be selected for a shorter variation time than the special figure 1 variation executed during the latent state.

By constructing in this way, when shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state and then shifting to the normal state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which both the first special pattern fluctuation and the second special pattern fluctuation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). When a special figure lottery is won in a time saving state or a latent state, the special figure variation being executed is discarded, so that a new special figure lottery corresponding to the game state set after the big winning game is finished is executed after the big winning game is finished. Therefore, when a new game state is set with the winning of a big win as a trigger, the long-time special symbol variation executed before winning the big win is continuously executed even after the end of the big winning game, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are varied for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

As described above, in this modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in duplicate, and the variable probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game is finished if the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery than in the case that the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery becomes a lottery (game) more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

The same technical idea as this modification may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having different game characteristics from that of this modification. For example, like the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, even if a special symbol lottery does not win a big win, a predetermined game (accessory winning game, small winning game) can be executed when a predetermined execution condition (e.g., a ball entering a special electric start gate or winning a small win in a special symbol lottery) is established. It may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot game is executed when a ball entering a variable ball entering means opened during a predetermined game enters a specific area (for example, a V winning hole) as a trigger.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), the internal structure of the small-hit attacker 3650 is changed, and the movable valve 3651 is configured to move so that the ball winning the small-hit attacker 3650 wins either the normal winning opening 3652 or the V winning opening 3653, and when the ball enters the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197(b)), the big winning game is started. It should be configured to run. Also, even if the ball winning the small winning attacker 3650 wins the normal winning hole 3652 (see FIG. 197(a)), it is preferable to give the same winning ball as the V winning hole 3653.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the contents of the effect performed in this modified example will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, various transition conditions for ending the variable probability state are set, and the variable probability state is configured to shift to a different game state according to the established transition condition. Among them, the effect contents regarding the second transition condition B established when the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probability variation state will be described.

In this modification, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, a small hit type (small hit A, small hit C) that interrupts the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution and a small hit type (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution can be set. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the number of special figure 1 fluctuations is configured to be updated.

In other words, when a small prize B is set when a small prize is won in a special prize 2 lottery, the special prize 1 fluctuation under execution is discarded and a new special prize 1 fluctuation is executed without updating the number of special prize 1 fluctuations. Therefore, in the probability variation state, if you continue to discard the special figure 1 variation in progress, it is configured so that the second transition condition B described above is unlikely to be established. On the other hand, as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation in the probability variable state, long special figure 1 variation in which a long time (for example, 10 minutes) variation time is set and short special figure 1 variation in which a short time (for example, 1 minute) variation time is set are configured to be selectable. It is advantageous for the player. That is, in some cases, the second transition condition B can be made difficult to be established.

Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation to be newly executed after discarding the long special figure 1 variation under execution is the short special figure 1 variation, there is a possibility that the number of special figure 1 variations will be updated as the variation time of the short special figure 1 variation passes than when the long special figure 1 variation is not discarded.

Therefore, in this modification, in the state where the probability change state is set, the situation of the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution (length of the remaining fluctuation time), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery to be mainly executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game content during the variable probability state in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the RUSH period variable effect executed when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the variable probability state (RUSH), and FIG. Also, FIG. 200(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as the effect result of the RUSH period variable effect, and FIG. Among the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in this modified example, the same elements as in the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), during the RUSH period, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined lottery result (big win, small win, partial loss), a character 811 imitating a rabbit in the main display area Dm finds a treasure box 812 with a bonus bag 812h (variable period effect). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "What is the content of the bonus?" is displayed. The treasure box 812 is a display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is mainly executed, and the bag 812h is a display mode for informing the player how the RUSH period (variable probability state period) varies based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

After the period variable production shown in FIG. 199(a) is started, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), as the result display mode 812a, a display mode of "V" indicating that a small hit has been won in the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. As the result display mode 812a, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, when the result is a big win, a display mode imitating the characters "hit" is displayed, and when it is a loss, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed.

Then, from the opened bag 812h, an effect is executed to display a situation display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probability variable state period) is variable (whether it shifts to a variable state) based on the lottery result of this special figure 2 lottery. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), as the status display mode 812j, the display mode of "extended" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed. In addition to the display mode of "extended" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, the status display mode 812j includes "disappointing" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, "end" indicating that the small hit C is set and the RUSH period ends, "?" Aspects are displayed.

Here, the method of setting various display modes displayed when the period variable effect is executed will be described using the control processing (see FIGS. 183 to 192) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above. First, in the state command receiving process (see S4232 in FIG. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the variable probability state, and when it is determined that the state is in the variable probability state, a process of setting a display command for displaying "RUSH in progress" shown in FIG.

Next, instead of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), the special figure 2 variation of this time is a big hit variation, a small hit variation, or an outlier variation. In this selection process, it is selected whether or not to execute the variable period effect based on the contents defined in a dedicated data table (variable period effect selection table). Concretely, the contents of the variable period performance selection table are defined so that execution of the variable period performance is selected at a rate of about 20% when the current special figure 2 variation is a big winning variation, at a rate of 100% when it is a small winning variation, and at a rate of 10% when it is a loss variation.

Here, when it is selected to execute the period variable performance in the big win variation, a display command for displaying the display mode of ``hit'' as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of ``celebration'' as the situation display mode 812j on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 variation. In addition, when it is selected to execute the period variable performance in the deviation fluctuation, a display command for displaying the display mode of "cross mark" as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of "?"

On the other hand, when it is selected to execute the period variable performance in the small winning variation, next, the small winning type set in the current small winning variation is read, and at the timing of stopping the special figure 2 variation, the small winning classification is to interrupt the special figure 1 variation being executed or the small winning classification is to be discarded. Next, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (variation pattern command included in the prize information stored in the first reserved area) to be executed next is predicted from the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b.

Then, as a result of the type determination process, when it is determined that it is a small hit type that interrupts the special figure 1 variation, if the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of interruption is longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation that will be executed next, the display mode of "extended" is set as the situation display mode 812j. be done. Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation is discarded as a result of the type determination process, the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of discarding is longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be executed next. be done. Further, when the small win type set this time is the small win C, a display command for displaying the display mode of ``end'' on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as the situation display mode 812j is set because the high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state at the timing of stopping the special figure 2 variation.

As described above, in this modified example, even if the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit variation is stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern set for the special figure 1 variation to be executed next time. In other words, as a performance result of the variable period performance, it is configured to relatively discriminate which is more advantageous to the player between the small winning type that interrupts the special figure 1 variation being executed at the timing of stopping the special figure 2 variation and the small winning type that is discarded at the timing when the current small winning variation is stopped and displayed, and sets the performance mode (display mode) of the period variable performance based on the determination result. Therefore, even when the small hit fluctuates at any timing, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not a small win type advantageous to the player is set at that time.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, the production mode of the variable period production is configured to be relatively set, but without being limited to this, for example, the remaining variation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted may be determined by whether it is longer than a specific time (for example, 1 minute).

Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modified example of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the latent state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than winning a jackpot may be provided, and the latent state may be ended when the end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, a first termination condition that can be established when the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches 100 times, a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches five times, and a third termination condition that can be satisfied when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small win (small win C) can be set.

By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the latent sure state will continue when the latent sure state advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, once the cm accurate state is set, at least until the next jackpot is executed (until the jackpot is won), the diving state of the diving will continue, so the gaming in the dive state will be monotonous, but in this case, the creamy state will continue for a long time or a large hit. The players can do gaming while expecting to continue, so it can suppress the fact that the players get tired of the game as soon as possible.

Further, a plurality of small winning types including at least a small winning type (small winning A) for interrupting the first special symbol variation under execution and a small winning type (small winning B) for canceling the second special symbol variation under execution (forced stop due to failure) when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery can be set. Then, when a small win B is set as a small win type and the first special pattern variation is discarded, the discarded first special pattern variation does not update the number of lotteries of the first special pattern in the latent definite state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which the above-described second end condition is established during the latent certainty state based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. Moreover, the advantage degree of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be varied according to the execution status of the first special symbol.

For example, in a gaming machine configured so that at least a variation time A (2 minutes) and a variation time B (10 minutes) can be set as the variation time of the first special symbol in the latent definite state, when the first special symbol variation set with the variation time B (10 minutes) is executed, if the remaining time of the first special symbol variation being executed is longer than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to interrupt the first special symbol being executed than to discard the first special symbol being executed. When the remaining time of one special symbol variation is shorter than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol being executed than to interrupt it.

Therefore, the player can be interested in both the special symbol lottery result and the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by combining a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, variation of the first special symbol), it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict.

Furthermore, the technical concept described above may be applied to a game machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, according to the hit type obtained when winning the special electric operation opening, it is sufficient to vary the processing for the special figure fluctuation under execution.

In the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of overlapping execution of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (so-called simultaneous variation specification), the first special symbol variation being executed is canceled or interrupted according to the result of the second special symbol lottery, thereby varying the length of the period in which the advantageous game state is set. In other words, by canceling the first special symbol variation, the end condition that can be established based on the number of execution times of the first special symbol lottery is made difficult to be established, thereby aiming at a long-term advantageous game state, but instead of this, a specific area may be provided in the small winning attacker opened in the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, and the big winning game may be executed even when the ball passes through the specific area.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, only the first special symbol has the reserved memory function, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be provided with the reserved memory function. In this case, in a game state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player, as the number of reserved balls referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol to be executed, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol may be referred to, or the cumulative number of reserved balls obtained by summing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be referred to. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol.

With this configuration, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern while acquiring the reserved balls of the second special pattern, so that the action of interrupting the game to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern can be suppressed. In addition to this, the variation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the total number of reserved balls obtained by summing the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and when the total number of reserved balls is a specific number (for example, 5) or more and the difference is 3 or more, the variation pattern of the second special pattern is advantageous to the player. It is preferable to configure so that a pattern (variation pattern with a short variation time) is easily selected. As a result, since the player can actively play the game, the operation of the game can be improved.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (1 or 2), a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than in the case other than the specific number. It may be a plurality of values (eg, 3 or 4) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of retained balls of 1 special symbol, or may be a separate value (eg, 1 or 3). In this case, when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small winning classification for discarding the first special symbol variation being executed is set, whether the winning of the small winning is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player can be varied according to the number of retained balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, there are cases where it is advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation and cases where it is advantageous for the player not to discard (suspend) the variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, only one type of variation pattern table is provided when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when a game state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player is set. A plurality of pattern tables may be provided, and in this case, the number of retained balls of the first special symbol, which facilitates the selection of a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation, should be varied according to the variation pattern table to be referred to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of reserved balls of the first special symbols that the player aims for during the latent state, so that the player can be provided with a game that is difficult to predict. Furthermore, when a plurality of variation pattern tables to be referred to during the latent definite state are provided, an advantageous variation pattern table in which a variation pattern (short-term variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation is easily selected (always selected) regardless of the number of retained balls of the first special symbol, and a variation disadvantageous pattern table in which a variation pattern (short-term variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation is difficult to be selected (not selected) regardless of the number of retained balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide both or one of

Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above, when the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, the number of times of time saving is not subtracted. In such a configuration, when a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to a player is set, a variation pattern in which a short-time (for example, 5 seconds) variation time is set is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, and a variation pattern in which a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation time is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is easily selected. Then, with the second special symbol variation that is efficiently executed for the first special symbol variation, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property that the game can be executed in the variable probability state until the player wins a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) for a small win that discards the first special symbol variation that is being executed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of pending memories of the first special symbol becomes one or two during the latent certainty state, the variation time of the second special symbol variation is shortened. Furthermore, it is configured to reduce the reserved memory number of the first special pattern by winning a specific small prize (small prize B) in the second special pattern lottery and canceling (forcibly stopping) the first special pattern variation being executed. Further, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the reserved memory of the first special symbol can be acquired in the game (right-handed game) executed during the latent state. In addition, it is configured such that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state is long (for example, 10 minutes). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented game in which the second special symbol lottery, in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed as a game during the latent definite state, simultaneously executes a game of winning a large win or a small win advantageous to the player to win a large number of prize balls and a game of reducing the reserved memory of the first special symbol to increase the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is four (upper limit), the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, with respect to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, it may be configured to make it difficult to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol during the game (right-handed game) in the latent state. In this case, unlike each embodiment described above, winning a specific small win (small win B) in the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player.

Even in the case of such a constitution, the easiness of lottery of special patterns (second special patterns) advantageous to the player can be varied according to the reserved memory number of the special patterns (first special pattern) disadvantageous to the player. Also, in this case, for example, by acquiring the reserved memory number of the first special symbols up to the upper limit value during the big win game in which the latent definite state is set after the end of the big win game, it is possible to easily set the state in which the second special symbol lottery is advantageously executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to acquire the reserved memory number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game.

Further, even if the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is obtained up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game, the processing for starting the first special symbol variation is executed before the processing for starting the second special symbol variation after setting the latent state, so that the execution of the second special symbol variation in an advantageous state after setting the latent state can be suppressed. In addition, as the control processing of the main controller 110, the processing for starting the second special symbol variation may be configured to be executed prior to the processing for starting the first special symbol variation. By constructing in this way, for example, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special pattern variation can be executed without changing (decreasing) the reserved memory number of the first special pattern from the reserved memory number obtained during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the reserved memory number of special symbols (the number of special symbol reserved balls) is a specific number (for example, 1), it is configured so that a game that is advantageous to the player (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) is easily executed. For example, a game that stops the special symbol variation after the variation time has elapsed) is executable. In addition, the specific number (for example, 1) of the special figure reserved balls which facilitates the execution of a game advantageous to the player is designed to be less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the special figure reserved balls, and when the current number of special figure reserved balls is larger than the specific number, the first game is more likely to be executed than when the number is smaller than the specific number. In addition, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is a specific number, or when it is less than the specific number, it is configured so that the first game is more difficult to execute than when it is greater than the specific number.

By constructing in this way, the number of special figure reserved balls can be brought close to a specific number only by making the player play the game with the aim of executing the first game, and the player can play an easy-to-understand game.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls that makes it easier for the player to play an advantageous game is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls. In this case, when a game for forcibly stopping the special symbol variation is executed, the number of special symbol reserved balls tends to decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of performing the game aiming at not executing the game in which the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 215. FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the contents of processing for the first special symbol variation being executed are made different according to the small winning type set when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbols. Specifically, when the small winning A or the small winning C is set as the small winning type, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, and when the small winning B is set, the special symbol variation being executed is discarded.

In the pachinko machine 10 using such a constitution, the process corresponding to the set small winning type is executed regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol variation during execution, so that even during the big winning variation which is the lottery result more advantageous to the player than the small winning winning, the big winning variation is discarded based on the small winning winning. In addition, when such a constitution is used, if the high expectation level performance in which the first special symbol variation being executed is a big win is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the player notices that the big winning variation has been discarded (the jackpot winning is invalidated), so there is a problem that it is difficult to execute the high expectation level performance.

In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the game state (latency state) advantageous to the player is set, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is not stored with hold. There is a problem that it is difficult to execute the high-expectation performance for a long time (time corresponding to the fluctuation time of the big win fluctuation) because the timing when it is determined that there is no big win fluctuation is immediately before the stop display of the big win fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed (when special processing is executed for the special symbol variation being executed), the content of processing is determined according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed. More specifically, when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when a special symbol indicating a small winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed is discriminated, and if the determination result is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol variation being performed is discarded, and if it is other than the specific variation pattern, the other special symbol variation being performed can be interrupted. It is configured as follows.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) for winning the jackpot, different variation patterns are selected for an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, a variable jackpot) is executed and a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) is performed.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, a variation pattern in which a variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type is more likely to be selected than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is smaller, and a variation pattern in which the variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be more easily selected.

By constructing in this way, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, a big win game (for example, variable probability big win) advantageous to the player can be easily executed (difficult to be discarded by winning a small prize), and a big win game (for example, normal jackpot) disadvantageous to the player is difficult to be executed (easily discarded by winning a small prize), compared to when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is small. That is, it is possible to vary the proportion of the probability variable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to ambitiously accumulate the number of reserved balls of special symbols while expecting that an advantageous jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is won in either the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the big win can be canceled by the other small win, so that the percentage of the probability variable big win at the time of winning the big win can be surely changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbols.

First, referring to FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in this embodiment differs from the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193) in that part of the configuration of the right side area and part of the configuration of the lower side area (the area below the variable display unit 80) are different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193) in that a first flow path 701 and a second flow path 702 through which the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 can flow down are provided extending to the lower side of the right side area, a through gate 67, and an electric accessory 640a. and a small winning attacker (second attacker) 5650 which is opened in a part of the small winning game to be opened in the small winning game instead of the small winning attacker 3650 is arranged at the center lower position of the game board 13. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described, focusing on differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 pass through the curved path 701a, pass through the through gate 67, and flow out downward to the right region. In addition, the ball distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flows into the inflow port 704a, flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 201), passes through the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and flows out from the outflow downward to the right area on the game board 13. The balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge in the lower right area, flow down on the variable winning device (first attacker) 2650, and flow into the out port 66.

Next, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 among the structures arranged in the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In this embodiment, a through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and a second ball entrance 640 is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without lowering the flow velocity. Therefore, it is possible to keep the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 constant, thereby preventing the balls from lining up in the second flow path 702 and causing a plurality of balls to enter the second ball inlet 640 at the same time. In addition, when the third pattern display device 81 reports that the electric accessory 640a is opened without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball can be quickly entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by the winning of the normal symbol are arranged in different flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) distributed by the distribution member 700, it is difficult to let the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 when the distribution member 700 is broken so as to cause the ball to flow down only to one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled). can be reduced. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed to create a state in which the ball flows down only to one flow path, thereby making it possible to create a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to suppress the creation of a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 illegally.

Next, the case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the ball flows down in a shorter period than the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured such that it takes about 1.5 seconds for the ball that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the flow outlet. With this configuration, when 100 balls are shot toward the right side area in one minute, the ball that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the ball that has flowed into the second flow path 702 following the first flow path flow down the lower right area (the area where the first variable winning device 2650 is arranged) of the game board 13 almost at the same time (about 0.1 second difference). Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a plurality of balls at once.

A part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701, so that a plurality of flow paths overlap when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball passages (the area of the game board 13 occupied by the ball passages) can be reduced.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second ball inlet 640), and the balls flow out from the first flow path 701 in the lower right region of the game board 13 so that the balls flow out to the downstream side. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball flowing out from the outflow port 704c with force (the ball flowing out at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the ball flowing out from the first flow path 701 to cause an irregular flow of balls.

In this embodiment, the distribution member 700 uses a configuration in which the balls fired in the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the two flow paths, but other configurations may be used. For example, instead of alternately (1:1) in the two flow paths, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the balls are randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths according to the weight of the balls or the flow timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passed ball. However, for example, a distribution member that is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule may be used.

Next, the lower area of the game board 13 where the small winning attacker 5650 is arranged will be described. This small winning attacker 5650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a small winning game executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small winning attacker 5650 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, and is constructed such that the nail planted in the game board 13 makes it difficult for the balls flowing down on the game board 13 to reach there. Therefore, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which it is difficult for the player to acquire prize balls.

In this embodiment, when a small prize is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the control for interrupting or forcibly stopping the other special symbol variation being executed is configured to be executable, and furthermore, the control content to be executed is switched based on the variation content of the other special symbol variation being performed. In other words, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to acquire the prize ball, but this is an execution opportunity for executing a predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) for the second special symbol variation being executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 208. FIG. The eighth embodiment differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and a partial configuration of the RAM 203 are different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 202, the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has a small hit random number 8 table 202gb instead of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb, a big hit type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202ge instead of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe. , The difference is that a small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is provided instead of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, and the rest is the same.

Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of the small winning random number 8 table 202gb will be described. Figure 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit determination value is defined also for the first special symbol in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to be in the range of ``300 to 599'' regardless of the probability state of the special symbol for the first special symbol type, and the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 to the second special symbol is defined to be within the range of ``550 to 599'' regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is constructed so that a small prize is won with a probability of about 1/2 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a small prize is won with a probability of about 1/12 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. In the present embodiment, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the attacker 5650 for a small win in which the ball cannot (is difficult to win) wins during the small win game is opened, and when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened during the big win game. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to win a small prize with a high probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being given excessive specific (prize balls). The second special symbol lottery is set so that the small winning probability is lower than the probability of the small winning of the first special symbol lottery, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls possessed by the player in a probability variable state or a latent state in which the game is executed by the right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, this jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is different from the above-described jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in that the winning device for executing the jackpot operation (winning device to be released) is different and the value of the time saving counter 203h that is set after the jackpot is different. For convenience of explanation, some of the names of the jackpot types used in the seventh embodiment described above and the jackpot types used in the eighth embodiment are different (for example, jackpot A7 and jackpot A8), but the elements without explanation about the differences are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, regardless of the game state set when the jackpot is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0, that is, the high-probability state of the normal pattern is not set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when a jackpot C8 set at a rate of 20% is won in the first special pattern lottery, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 10000 regardless of the game state set when the jackpot is won. That is, substantially, it is configured such that the variable probability state is set until the next big hit is won.

As described above, the jackpot types set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are stipulated with different degrees of advantage for the player, and ``jackpot A8'', ``jackpot B8'' and ``jackpot C8'' are defined in order of the most disadvantageous to the player. In other words, the "jackpot C8" is defined to be the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when winning the variable probability big win in the second special pattern lottery (when winning the "big win E8"), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the big win. That is, when "jackpot E8" is won, the 100 times (special symbol variation is 100 times) probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a right-handed game is executed during the variable probability state, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlapping), a game aiming at winning the "jackpot C8" which is the most advantageous jackpot type, but not winning the jackpot types "jackpot A8" and "jackpot D8" where the probability variable state ends is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, among the variation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation 8 table 202ge and the probability variation 8 table 202ge to be referred to during the probability variation state will be described. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation 8 table 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the potential probability 8 table 202ge.

In this embodiment, a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the variable probability state and the latent probability state are set, and a game is executed in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are overlapped. The variation pattern set when a big win is won is made different according to the selected big win type. Further, based on the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2), different variation patterns can be selected.

Specifically, the larger the combined special figure reservation number, the shorter the variation time selected when winning the jackpot advantageous to the player than when the total number of combined special figure reservations is short, and the larger the total special figure reservation number, the longer the variation time selected when the player wins the jackpot disadvantageous to the player than the smaller the total number of special figure reservations.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the control contents to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed are varied according to the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed. Specifically, when the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, a process for discarding the special symbol variation is executed, and if the variation pattern is less than 30 seconds, the special symbol variation is interrupted. It is configured to execute the process to make it possible.

By constructing in this way, when the combined special symbol reserved number is large, the special symbol variation can be easily discarded when the big winning type disadvantageous to the player is set compared to when the combined special symbol reserved number is small, and when the big winning type advantageous to the player is set, the special symbol variation can be made difficult to discard (easily interrupted). Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to continue the state in which the total number of reserved special symbols is large.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the probability variation 8 table 202g2, different variation patterns are defined based on the special symbol type, the success/failure determination result (the result of the selected type), and the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number).

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and among the big hits, the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is "0 to 3". In the range of , the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot B", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and the number of reserved special figures (total special figure reserved number) is in the range of "0 to 3", the full range of the variation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") is associated with a super long variation with a variation time of 60 seconds as a variation pattern, and the special figure reserved number (total special figure reserved number) is in the range of "4 to 7", The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a super-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the result of the judgment is off (including a small hit), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The range ("0 to 198") is associated with a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the range of the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number) is "7".

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the hit/fail determination result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot D", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". A long variation with a variation time of 35 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the hit/fail determination result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot E", and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the success/failure determination result is off (including a small hit), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 7", that is, in the entire range, the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a short variation with a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the hidden 8 table 202g2, different variation patterns are defined based on the special symbol type, the success/failure determination result (selected type result), and the special figure pending number (total special figure pending number).

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and among the big hits, the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is "0 to 4". In the range of , the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot B", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". A long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the hit/fail determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the winning judgment result is out (including a small hit), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 6". "0 to 198") is defined in association with a middle variation with a variation time of 25 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and among the jackpots, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". A long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the big hit type is "jackpot E", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the result of the judgment is off (including a small hit), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The range ("0 to 198") is associated with a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 325 as a fluctuation pattern, the range of the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number) is "7", and the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") is defined by being associated with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution condition for executing specific control (for example, interruption or abandonment) for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied (for example, when executing a small winning game), the content of the specific control to be executed is configured to be switched according to the content of the special symbol variation being performed. Then, the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variation display mode set when executing the special symbol variation) is configured to be switched to the variation display mode according to the specific control content. As a result, it is possible to change the switching contents of the variation display mode according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Also, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the easiness of establishment of the switching condition for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to the specific variation display mode (variation display mode for forced stop) is varied according to the set game state. Furthermore, the easiness of establishment of the switching condition is varied according to the type of the special symbol being executed and the set jackpot type (the length of the variation time to be selected is varied). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how the variable display mode will switch when the execution condition is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, the easiness of establishment of the execution condition differs according to the special symbol type. Specifically, the probability of obtaining a lottery result (small winning) in which the execution condition can be established in the special symbol lottery is made different according to the special symbol type, and furthermore, the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation set when the small winning is won is made different. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the game result depending on which special symbol type executes variation indicating which lottery result at what timing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, a specific variable time is selected in correspondence with each condition. However, without being limited to this, a plurality of variable times that can be selected in correspondence with each condition may be defined, and a variation pattern of different variation times may be selected according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time of 30 seconds is set as the threshold as a condition for switching the specific control to be executed, but a plurality of thresholds may be set without being limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time (for example, 28 seconds, 30 seconds) close to a threshold set as a condition for switching the specific control to be executed is selected. Thereby, when the variable effect corresponding to the selected variable pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect of the same effect mode can be executed. The difference of the variable time (for 2 seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the variable performance from the start timing of the special symbol variation or by making the end timing of the variable performance earlier than the end timing of the special symbol variation, and for the difference period, a still image (for example, an image displayed at the start of the variable performance or an image displayed at the end of the variable performance) can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf. This small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is different from the above-described small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172 (a)) in that the small hit type is defined also for the first special symbol, the opening target to be opened in the small winning game is changed, the symbol determination time is changed, and the control content performed for the special symbol fluctuation during execution is changed. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

To specifically explain the contents defined in the small winning type selection 8 table 202gf, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is associated with the ``small winning A8'' in the range of ``0 to 89'', and the ``small winning B8'' in the range of ``90 to 99''. Since the range of possible values of the small winning type counter C5 is 100 of '0 to 99', the rate of selecting 'small winning A8' is 90% (90/100) and the rate of selecting 'small winning B8' is 10% (10/100) when the small winning is won.

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed to open the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 for 0.1 second. In addition, "0.1 second" is selected as the special design determination time, and the process of interrupting the second special design (special design 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the processing for interrupting the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed is executed, the processing for interrupting the processing for measuring the fluctuation time lapse of the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. Specifically, when the small winning game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, and while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, the process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Then, with the end of the small winning game, the restart condition is established (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is resumed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed from being reduced while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is established), so that, for example, the winning second special symbol variation being stopped and displayed and the overlapping winning game (big winning game, small winning game) being executed while the small winning game is being executed can be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the variation time lapse of the special symbol variation being executed is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol variation performed before the small win game can be resumed after the restart condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied with the fact that the small winning is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed is executed. That is, even when the interruption condition is met, the updating process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the updating process is executed until the preset fluctuation time elapses, it is determined whether or not the interruption condition is established, and when it is judged that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special symbol fluctuation is not executed until the restart condition is established. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, when "small win A" is selected, the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 is the object to be released for the small win game, and the small win game in which it is difficult to win prize balls during the small win game is executed.

When the "small win B" is selected, the small win game is executed with the same operation contents as the "small win A" described above. Furthermore, according to the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol being executed, either the process of interrupting the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed or the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, in a part of the case where one special symbol lottery wins a small prize, the contents of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed are configured to be switchable based on the situation (variation situation, setting situation) of the other special symbol variation. Specifically, when the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded), and when the variation pattern has a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control contents can be switched so as to interrupt the special symbol variation. By constructing in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed is discarded according to the fluctuation situation of the special symbol lottery being executed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the timing of winning the small win B8.

Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time, is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation in execution. Therefore, for example, only by prescribing the variation pattern table so that the variation pattern length of the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player is lengthened, the special symbol variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player can be easily stopped (discarded). In addition, the condition used when determining the control content is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to determine whether the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation during execution or whether the lottery result satisfies the specific condition, and determine the result of the control content based on the determination result. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the control contents to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed based on the combination of the first special symbol variation being executed and the lottery result of the second special symbol that is won with a small hit.

Next, the contents of the small hit type corresponding to the second special design (special figure 2) as the design type of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be described. The value of the small winning type counter C5 is associated with the ``small winning C8'' in the range of ``0 to 79'', the ``small winning D8'' in the range of ``80 to 89'', and the ``small winning E8'' in the range of ``90 to 99''. Since the range of possible values of the small winning type counter C5 is 100 of ``0 to 99'', the ratio of selecting ``small winning C8'' at the time of winning a small winning is 80% (80/100), the ratio of selecting ``small winning D8'' is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of selecting ``small winning E8'' is 10% (10/100).

When "small win C8" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the big win attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Also, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol. Further, when 'small winning D8' is selected, the same small winning game as 'small winning C8' is executed, and furthermore, according to the fluctuation state of the first special symbol being executed, either the processing of interrupting the special figure 1 variation being executed or the processing of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. In addition, the contents of the control processing when interrupting or forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation based on the "small hit D8" are only switching the target of the control processing executed based on the "small hit B8" from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 208, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, this embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the above-described seventh embodiment in that a special variation flag 203ga is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special variation flag 203ga indicates whether the special symbol variation to be executed is a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and is set to ON when the variation time of 30 seconds or more is set. In this embodiment, when a small winning variation that wins a specific small winning type is stopped and displayed, it is possible to switch between executing processing for interrupting the other special symbol variation or executing processing for discarding (forced stop) according to the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed. In other words, in one special symbol lottery, when a processing condition for switching a variation mode during execution to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation is satisfied in one special symbol lottery, the variation mode after switching is made different according to the variation mode during execution.

By constructing in this way, when the above-described processing conditions are established, the variation mode to be switched to is determined based on the other special symbol variation, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 215, the contents of control processing of main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This eighth embodiment differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small win can be won in the first special symbol lottery, when a variation pattern is selected, a process for determining whether or not a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected is added, and when the special symbol variation that has won a small win is stopped and displayed, a process for determining the processing content to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed is added, but the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, various control processes executed for the first special symbol will be used to describe the characteristic processing contents of the eighth embodiment, but the same processing contents are also executed in the corresponding second special symbol control process, but detailed description using the illustration will be omitted because the description will be duplicated.

First, referring to FIG. 209, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be described. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (see S457 in FIG. 121), the special figure 1 loss variation process 8 (S481) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 loss variation process 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481). In this special figure 1 loss variation process 8, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery (when the win is lost), the process for determining the presence or absence of the small hit is executed. In addition, the detailed contents are different in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol with respect to the above-described special figure 2 deviation variation process (see S1059 in FIG. 128), and the rest is the same.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation process 8 (S481), first, this lottery result (lottery result obtained in the process of S457 of the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit or not (S485).

When it is determined that the small winning is won in the processing of S485 (S485: Yes), the small winning flag 203i is set to ON (S486), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small winning (S487), the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S485, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win, that is, it is a loss (S485: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S485), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S481 in FIG. 210) executed as one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, when it is determined that the small winning is won in the process executed at the timing of starting the variation (lottery) of the special symbol, the small winning flag 203i is set to ON, and the small winning flag 203i is set at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. Corresponding processing can be easily carried out.

In addition, the small hit flag 203i used in the present embodiment has a special figure 1 area indicating that it was elected by the first special design lottery, and a special figure 2 area indicating that it was elected to the small hit by the second special pattern lottery. The flag is set to on, and if the small hit is won by the second special design lottery, the flags in the special map 2 area are configured to turn on. As a result, even when a small hit is won in duplicate in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily stored.

Next, referring to FIG. 211, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that a determination process for setting the special variation flag to ON after selecting a variation pattern is added, and a process for selecting a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning is added. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes of S551 to S555 as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are performed, and then it is determined whether the variation pattern selected this time is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). Then, when it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or more (S582: Yes), the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122) is executed, and the processing of S556 to S559, which is the same as the processing, is completed. Also, when it is determined that the variation time is not 30 seconds or more (S582: No), the processing of S583 is skipped, and the processing of S556 to S559, which is the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122), is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the processing of S551 (S551: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing is executed (S581), and then the processing of S553 is performed. The contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above is performed, the target being the second special symbol to the first special symbol.

When the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S591: No), the processing of the same content as S1377 to S1379 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599). , and then terminate this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small hit in the process of S591 (S591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, the small hit type is selected by referring to the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf (S593). Next, the processing of S1374 to S1376 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1277 in FIG. 179) and the processing of the same content are executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S594 to S596), and the processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288) will be described. FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288). This first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S851; No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a deviation variation, the time saving update processing 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) executed when the special figure 1 deviation stop processing 8 (S 892), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), a process for determining whether the second special symbol variation is executed (S891), and when the second special symbol variation is not performed, the processing of S853 to S855 is configured to be skipped, and various flags and various counters are set based on the stop of the big hit variation (start of the jackpot game). The difference is that the processing (S893 in FIG. 213) is executed to add the special fluctuation flag 203ga to the clearing processing (S870 in FIG. 175), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the contents of the special figure 1 deviating stop process 8 (S892) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviating stop process 8 (S892). In this special figure 1 out stop processing 8 (S892), the same processing as the special figure 2 out stop processing 7 (see S1584 in FIG. 181) of the seventh embodiment described above is performed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. omitted.

Here, the small winning process 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 out stop process 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process 8 (S1972). This small winning process 8 (S1972) is different from the small winning process (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the control process executed according to the winning small winning type is different. Specifically, when a specific small win type (small wins B, D, E) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation being executed is different in that it is configured to execute.

When the small winning process 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small winning type set for the current first special symbol variation is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small winning type is "small winning A or small winning C" (S1981). If it is determined that it is "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 2 is fluctuating (during the second special symbol fluctuation) (S1684), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 is fluctuating (S1684: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol fluctuation is interrupted (temporary stop) is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set. Set the special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating ON (S1686) and terminate this process. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 fluctuation (S1684: No), skip the processes of S1685 and S1686 and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1981, if it is determined that it is not "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit E8" (S1982). medium) is determined (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the variable probability state (S1688: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689).

Next, it is determined whether the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if the variation pattern set for the second special symbol variation being executed is not a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more, or if the second special symbol variation is not executed (S1983: No), the process proceeds to S1684 described above. In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 in the processing of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the present is not in the probability changing state (S1688: No), or if the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON in the processing of S1689, that is, if it is determined that it is the final change in the probability changing state (S1689: Yes), the processing of S1690 is skipped, and the above S1684 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON in the process of S1983 (S1983: Yes), the process proceeds to S1692. Also, in the processing of S1982, if it is determined that it is not "small hit E8", that is, if it is determined that it is "small hit B8" or "small hit D8" (S1982: No), skip the processing of S1688 to S1690 and move to the processing of S1983.

In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small winning processing (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and then the special variation flag 203ga is set to OFF (S1184), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed (when special processing is executed for the special symbol variation being executed), the processing content is determined according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed. More specifically, when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when a special symbol indicating a small winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed is discriminated, and if the determination result is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol variation being performed is discarded, and if it is other than the specific variation pattern, the other special symbol variation being performed can be interrupted. It is configured as follows. In other words, when a specific condition for executing a special process is established for the special symbol variation being executed, the processing contents of the special process are determined by referring to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if the specific condition is satisfied, only "interruption" is determined as the special processing, and when the variable probability state is set, "interruption" or "discard" may be set as in the eighth embodiment described above. By varying the determined contents of the special processing according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to provide diversity in the game characteristics in each game state.

Further, the content of the special processing to be determined may be changed according to the type of the special pattern that satisfies the specific condition. For example, it may be configured such that "discard" is more likely to be decided when the specific condition is satisfied with the second special pattern than when the specific condition is satisfied with the first special pattern. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is less likely to be established than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), and when the specific condition is established, the condition for determining "discard" (in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern during execution is 30 seconds or more). 32 seconds or longer). As a result, the content of the special processing can be changed depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when a specific condition for executing a special process for the special symbol variation being executed is established, the processing content of the special process is determined by referring to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. In the case of , the condition for determining "abandon" (in the eighth embodiment, the variation pattern during execution is 30 seconds or more) may be changed depending on the case of disengagement. By configuring in this way, the easiness of "discarding" can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, so that the game suitable for the design idea can be easily executed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) for winning the jackpot, different variation patterns are selected for an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, a variable jackpot) is executed and a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) is performed.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, a variation pattern in which a variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type is more likely to be selected than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is smaller, and a variation pattern in which the variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be more easily selected.

By constructing in this way, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, it is possible to make it easier to execute a big win game (for example, variable probability big win) advantageous to the player (difficult to discard by winning a small win) and to make it difficult to execute a big win game (for example, normal big win) to the player (easier to cancel by winning a small win) than when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is small. That is, it is possible to vary the proportion of the probability variable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to ambitiously accumulate the number of reserved balls of special symbols while expecting that an advantageous jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is won in one of the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, the big win can be canceled by the other small win, so that the ratio of the definite variable big win at the time of winning the big win can be surely changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbols.

In the eighth embodiment described above, as a condition (specific condition) that triggers execution of special processing (interruption or cancellation) for one special symbol variation (for example, first special symbol variation), the other special symbol variation (for example, second special symbol variation) shows a condition that is established when a specific small hit is won. A specific condition may be established when it is determined that the power supplied to the dick machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power is temporarily turned off). Further, the game method executed by the player may be configured to satisfy a specific condition when detecting an illegal game method (for example, a game method in which a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetic force is provided and the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force, or a game method in which an impact detection sensor is provided for detecting an impact on the pachinko machine 10 and the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (when the variable probability state and the time saving state are set), the special symbol variation executed is discarded (forced stop). Specifically, in a game machine configured to set a latent probability state when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) while the probability variable state is set, when the special symbol fluctuation executed during the probability variable state is discarded (forcibly stopped), the number of time saving times (variable probability frequency) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode (for example, the value displayed in the display area HR2 in FIG. 161 (a)) for indicating the number of times of time reduction (variable number of times) until the probability variation state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of times of time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has been canceled without updating the number of times of time saving. In this case, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of times of reduced time (probability variable number of times) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the display mode may be restored based on the discarding of the special symbol variation (for example, if the number of reduced time remaining is displayed, the number of times of reduced time remaining is added, and if the number of times of shortened time that has elapsed is displayed, subtraction is performed).

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation reaches 100 times, and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the second special symbol variation is executed five times) are set as transition conditions (end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for terminating the high-probability state of normal symbols) for shifting from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. Therefore, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, by displaying only the end condition (for example, "5" corresponding to five times of the second special symbol variation) that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the pachinko machine 10 configured to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner, even if the first special symbol variation is executed immediately after the probability variation state is set, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed. It is configured not to update. When the first special symbol variation is executed 95 times after the probability variation state is set and the first special symbol variation is further performed (when the 96th first special symbol variation is performed), display control is performed to update the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4". In this way, by determining whether or not to update the display of the number of reduced working hours displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol variation is executed during the variable probability (time reduction) state, the period until the variable probability state ends can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 223. FIG. The ninth embodiment is greatly different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a holding memory function is provided also for the second special symbol, the performance mode of the performance executed during the latent state (during the RUSH game) (the performance during the RUSH) is changed, and the variation pattern of the big win type, the small win type, and the normal symbol is different.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of special symbols reserved for indicating the number of reserved memories of special symbols (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are those that display a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special figure reserved number on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the number of reserved special figures to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, a prefetching process (preliminary discrimination process) is executed for the winning information of the reserved and stored special patterns, and the prefetching result (preliminary discrimination result) is changed in the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern (for example, the color or effect of the reserved pattern is changed, or the design of the reserved pattern is changed) to execute a pending change performance to notify the player.

However, in the above-described pending change performance, the number of pending patterns to be subjected to the pending change performance is determined according to the number of acquired special-figure pending balls, so when the number of special-figure pending balls is small, the pending change performance is more difficult to execute than when the number of special-figure pending balls is large. In other words, as long as the performance using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed according to the number of the acquired special figure reserved balls, the effect of the look-ahead performance (reserved change performance) for informing the player of the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) is variable according to the number of the acquired special figure reserved balls. There is a problem in that the player feels dissatisfied with the decrease in the performance effect of the game, and the desire to play the game decreases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, according to the result of the pre-reading process (preliminary discrimination process) executed for the winning information of the reserved and stored special symbols, regardless of the number of the acquired special symbol reserved balls, the pre-reading effect (icon effect) for varying the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. As a result, even when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same look-ahead performance as when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is the upper limit according to the result of look-ahead. Therefore, even a player who cannot obtain a lot of special reserved balls can be provided with a look-ahead performance with a high performance effect, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is configured to be the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be retained and stored (the number of retained and stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that the specific pattern displayed by the icon performance is a reserved pattern for indicating the special figure reserved ball number (the reserved memory number of the second special pattern mainly executed during the latent definite state). It is possible to suppress the decrease in the game motivation of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead result is a specific result (for example, a big win in which the latent state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol pending balls that can be stored and stored (the number of pending memories of the second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to a player who has been under the illusion that the specific symbols displayed in the icon performance are reserved symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) executed for the reserved and stored special symbol winning information, the number of opening times of the attacker to be released in the small winning game is determined, and the display number of the specific symbol is determined based on the determination result. And it is configured to vary the number of times the attacker is released in one small win game according to the type of the won small win. Furthermore, as a part of the big winning game executed when the big winning is won, the same attacker release operation as in the small winning game is executed.

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to predict the number of small winning games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as icon effects. Further, in this embodiment, the player is notified that the period during which the specific symbol is displayed is the period during which the latent state (RUSH game) is not terminated. That is, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that the latent definite state will be set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, every time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding production content in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 216 to FIG. 219, the characteristic presentation contents among the presentation contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Concretely, the contents of the icon effect for variably displaying the specific symbols executed during the latent certainty state (during the RUSH game) will be explained. This icon effect is a effect of variably displaying the number of specific symbols (icons) based on the result of prefetching of the acquired second special symbol pending storage (special symbol 2 pending).

First, with reference to FIG. 216(a), the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the latent state (RUSH game) is set immediately after will be described. FIG. 216(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during the ending period in the jackpot game before rushing into the RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the latent probability jackpot (jackpot in which the latent probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game) is won in a state where the probability state is not set, i.e., when the RUSH game is entered for the first time and when the probability jackpot is won in the state where the probability state is set, the performance mode displayed during the ending period is made different.

During the ending period when the RUSH game is entered for the first time, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and a display area HR70 is formed in the center. An icon 871 representing a carrot and acquisition number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216(a)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH will continue as long as there are icons" are displayed.

In this embodiment, when the RUSH game is executed, the icon 871 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the content of the game to be executed during the RUSH game is suggested to the player based on the number of displayed icons 871 and the display mode. This icon 871 is configured such that the display number and display mode are variably set based on the information (lottery information, prefetch information) related to the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the RUSH game.

As described above, in the present embodiment configured so that the icon effect is executed during the RUSH game, the icon effect initial display screen shown in FIG. 216 (a) is displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game that triggers the entry into the RUSH game, and four icons 871 are displayed regardless of the number of balls held in the second special symbol at that time and the look-ahead result. Thus, even if the RUSH game is executed in any state, the performance mode of the icon performance at the time of entering the RUSH game can be made the same, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed from being lowered by the performance mode of the icon performance at the time of starting the RUSH game.

In the present embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon presentation. However, the number of icons 871 to be displayed at the start of the icon presentation is not limited to four. In this case, the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon presentation may be other than four when a specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon presentation, for example, when there is a big win advantageous to the player in the look-ahead result for the reserved ball of the second special symbol (potential jackpot in which the probability state is set again). It is preferable to configure so that a smaller number of icons 871 are displayed.

When the RUSH game is started, the icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a pending icon 873 in the display area HR71, and an effect using the pending icon 873 and a rabbit-like character 811 is executed in the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216(b), in this embodiment, the upper limit display number of the pending icon 873 is configured to be the same as the upper limit pending number of the second special symbols in which the lottery is mainly executed during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four pending icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

As for the suspended icons 873a to 873d, a first suspended icon 873a, a second suspended icon 873b, a third suspended icon 873c, and a fourth suspended icon 873d are displayed in order from the top of the display area HR, and are used for presentation in order from the first suspended icon 873a. Then, when the first pending icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in rendering, the remaining second pending icon 873b to fourth pending icon 873d are shifted and displayed to the pending icon in the previous order. Also, when a new pending icon is acquired, it is additionally displayed in order after the already displayed pending icon.

In this embodiment, the small winning game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is read in advance, and the number of pending icons is determined based on the result of the reading in advance. The number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is changed in the small winning game according to the winning small winning type, and further, even when the big winning winning is won, the big winning game is executed in which the second attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times in part of the big winning winning winning type.

That is, for example, even when the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is 2, if the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is 4 times as a result of pre-reading (preliminary determination) for the 2 special figure 2 reserved balls, it is configured so that 4 can be set as the number of display of the reserved icon. By constructing in this way, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be determined regardless of the number of actually obtained special 2 reserved balls, so that even in a state where many special 2 reserved balls are not obtained, an interesting icon performance can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217(a), the contents of the effect of consuming the pending icon in the icon effect during the RUSH game will be described. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the small winning game is executed, the character 811 eats the reserved icon 873a, and a prize ball display mode 874 showing the prize balls won in the small winning game is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217(a), the prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in the display mode of "+15" indicating that the second attacker 1650 won one ball and there were 15 prize balls. In addition, the characters "itadakimasu" are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect of the character 811 eating the pending icon 873a will be executed.

In FIG. 217(a), the display screen displayed during the execution of the small winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened once is described as an example. Therefore, the character 811 picks up only one reserved icon 873a. However, for example, when the small winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is executed, the character 811 eats two reserved icons. Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in some small winning games or some big winning games, winning games in which the second attacker 1650 is opened multiple times are executed, and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is larger in the big winning games than in the small winning games.

In other words, as the effect shown in FIG. 217(a), if the effect in which the character 811 eats a plurality of reserved icons is executed, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the effect of consuming the pending icons (reducing the number of pending icons) among the icon effects executed during the RUSH game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the small winning game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the big winning game are configured to be the same. Therefore, by grasping the contents of the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the winning game, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the type of the current winning game (small winning game, big winning game).

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved icons 873 corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one digest effect, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small winning game being executed is displayed. By configuring in this way, the number of pending icons displayed at the start of the digestion effect can be increased, so that the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot.

Further, the number of pending icons used in the digestion effect may be varied during the execution period of the digestion effect. As a result, the number of reserved icons can be increased at any timing, so that even when an icon performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed, a game can be played while expecting that the number of reserved icons used for performance during the digest performance period will increase during the digest performance period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217(b), as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game, the effect contents of the acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of reserved icons have been acquired will be described. FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of reserved icons have been acquired as an icon effect executed during a RUSH game. In this embodiment, an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed, similar to the effect executed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 162(b)). Then, it is configured to execute an acquisition effect in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of reserved icons are displayed from the treasure box.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), the treasure box 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and the display area HR70 displays a carrot-like icon 871 and acquisition number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217(b)). Then, the characters "get carrots" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect is executed to inform the player that the number of displayed pending icons has increased.

As described above, in the icon effect of the present embodiment, the number of displayed reserved icons is controlled so that the number of reserved icons does not become 0 while the RUSH game continues, and acquisition effects for increasing the number of reserved icons can be executed at various timings. Then, it is configured to suggest that the more the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition effect, the more advantageous the game will be executed for the player. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the number of display of the pending icon can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increasing the number of special figure 2 pending balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218(a), the contents of the continuous effect executed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the continuous effect executed during the icon effect. In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of variation of the second special symbol, continuous production is configured to be executable. This continuous performance has a pattern executed for a variation period of one second special symbol variation and a pattern executed over a plurality of second special symbol variations, and the performance using all the displayed reserved icons is executed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed when four (upper limit number) of reserved icons are displayed. When the continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. Then, behind the last reserved icon 873d, a V-icon 873y indicating winning of a big win (winning of a big win type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "I've eaten up all the carrots! You might find a treasure inside" are displayed to show the contents of the continuous effects to the player.

In other words, when the continuous effect is executed, it is suggested whether all the reserved icons are consumed and the jackpot is won or the reserved icons are not completely consumed and the RUSH game is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 218(b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from among the pending icons being executed before the last pending icon is executed while the continuous effect is being executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 218(b), description will be given of the effect contents when the V-icon 873z is displayed during the continuous effect. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the V-icon 873z is acquired without consuming all the pending icons during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 218(b), an effect of discovering the V-icon 873z from the third reserved icon 873c is executed while the third reserved icon 873c is being consumed (during eating). In this case, the fourth pending icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71 because the fourth pending icon 873d has not been completed. When the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game is executed while the reserved icon is displayed, so that the player is informed that the latent definite state (RUSH game) will be executed again after the jackpot game is finished at this point.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the effect in which a special icon different from the normal reserved icon is displayed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during icon rendering. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of pending icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of special figure 2 pending balls and the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated by prefetching.

When the number of pending icons that can be displayed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four or more), that is, when the display upper limit number is exceeded, a special icon is displayed. When the second special symbol variation being executed or the result of prefetching of the second special symbol includes a big win advantageous to the player, the number of displayable reserved icons is configured to easily exceed a predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 219, when the number of displayable reserved icons is calculated to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a special icon 873x resembling a gorgeous carrot appears in the treasure box 812 in the acquisition presentation, and the characters "Lucky, SP carrot get" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In the present embodiment, the number of icons that can be simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71 is stipulated to be 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the number of displayable reserved icons exceeds 4, special icons are displayed to execute an effect that raises the player's expectations for a big win while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71. In this case (when a special condition is established), the upper limit number of pending icons that can be simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71 may be set to be greater than the upper limit number of the pending balls of the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the player who has recognized that the reserved icon indicates the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is displayed with a number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, so that an unexpected performance can be executed. Furthermore, when the number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning the big win can be increased, so that the performance with the high degree of expectation for the big win can be executed for the player by using the performance with unexpectedness.

Above, with reference to Figures 216 to 219, the various effect screens executed during the characteristic effect (icon effect) performed in the ninth embodiment have been described, but without being limited to this, for example, in a state in which the RUSH game is being executed, when the number of special figures 2 pending becomes 0, one or more pending icons may be displayed, and a pseudo-fluctuation effect using the pending icon may be executed without being involved in the result of the special symbol lottery, or the pending icon may be hidden. can be configured to

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pending icon, a display mode imitating a normal carrot (see the pending icon 873a in FIG. 217(a)) and a display mode imitating a luxurious carrot (see the special icon 873x in FIG. 219) are configured to be settable, but other display modes may be settable. and a third display mode to be set. In addition, in order to additionally display a large number of pending icons at once, it may be configured to execute a reduction effect in which a large number of pending icons are consumed at once.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 223. FIG. In the ninth embodiment, a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 are different from the above-described seventh embodiment. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment has will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd. This jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd differs from the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the above-described seventh embodiment in terms of the jackpot operation release target defined for the jackpot types (jackpots A to C) associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the time reduction counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends, and the type of jackpot type associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). is increased, and otherwise the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34". Since this "jackpot A9" is the same jackpot type as the "jackpot A7" of the above-described seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, "jackpot B9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". This "jackpot B9" is different from the above-described "jackpot B7" of the seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends is changed, and otherwise the same.

Specifically, when a ``jackpot B9'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100, and when the ``jackpot B9'' is won in the variable probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 50.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when "big win 9" is won in the probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, the game shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state. On the other hand, when "jackpot B9" is won in the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the end of the big win becomes the most advantageous latent certainty state. Also, even when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game, the variable probability state is set to be more advantageous to the player when winning the ``big winning B9'' in the variable probability state than when winning the ``big winning B9'' in the normal state, so that the variable probability state is set to be smaller in the case of winning in the variable probability state than in the case of winning in the normal state.

With this configuration, the player can easily shift to the most advantageous game state by shifting from the normal state, which is the initial game state, to a different game state, so that the player can be motivated to play the game aiming at the most advantageous game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, "jackpot C9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot C9" is different from the above-described "jackpot C7" of the seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends is changed, and the rest is the same.

Specifically, when a ``jackpot C9'' is won in a normal state, a variable probability state and a potential probability state, that is, when the ``jackpot C9'' is won, the value of a time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set game state. That is, when "jackpot C9" is won, the game state (probability state) most advantageous to the player is always set after the jackpot game ends, which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player. In addition, in the state in which the probability state is set, the value of "jackpot B9" and "jackpot C9" is the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio of shifting to the most advantageous game state (latency state) for the player is different between the case where the normal state and the variable probability state are set and the case where the probability state is set. It is configured as follows.

Further, as described above, the normal state and the variable probability state in which the transition rate to the latent certainty state is set to 20% are both configured to shift to the variable probability state at a rate of 45%. By constructing in this way, even if a plurality of game states set at the time of winning the big win are set to have the same transition rate to the game state (probability state) most advantageous to the player after the end of the big win game, the degree of expectation of transition to the probability state can be made different for each game state set at the time of winning the big win.

Next, the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be explained. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four types of jackpot types (jackets D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special drawing 2) are defined, and the contents of the opening operation of the jackpot game are varied according to the selected jackpot type.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot D9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with each other. This "jackpot D9" is a jackpot type in which the same content as the "jackpot D7" of the above-described seventh embodiment is defined. "Jack E9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 69". This "jackpot E9" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the completion of the jackpot, the probability variable state of the special symbol is set. It should be noted that, when the "jackpot E9" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when the "jackpot C9" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when "jackpot C9" is won, the game state (probability state) most advantageous to the player is always set after the jackpot game ends, and it becomes the jackpot type most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E9'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E9'' is 35% (35/100).

"Jack F9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89". This "jackpot F9" is a jackpot (9 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 9 rounds, and in the 1st round (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds and the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds from the 2nd round (R) to the 9th round (R). It should be noted that, when the "jackpot F9" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, when "jackpot F9" is won, the same release operation as the small win game is executed as the first round. That is, in the prefetching of the second special symbol, in addition to winning the jackpot, the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is calculated once. Thus, in the icon performance for determining the number of display of reserved icons based on the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 (the number of times of opening the small winning game), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the pattern suggesting the winning of the small winning and the pattern suggesting the winning of the big winning, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, in the "jackpot F9", nine rounds of jackpot games are defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened is the same as in the above-described "jackpot E9". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650 .

In this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small winning game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big winning game is executed after the second round (R). and an opening operation for opening for 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified. Therefore, for example, when the first symbol display device 37 is provided with a notification means for notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed (e.g., a means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting an LED lamp), the number of rounds to be notified by the notification means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type based on the notification contents of the notification means.

"Jackpot G9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". This "jackpot G9" has 11 rounds of the jackpot, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and from the 4th round (R) to the 11th round (R), the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds. In the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, when the "jackpot G9" is won, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, when "jackpot G9" is won, the same release operation as the small win game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the prefetching of the second special symbol, in addition to winning the jackpot, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated three times. Thus, in the icon performance for determining the number of display of reserved icons based on the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 (the number of times of opening the small winning game), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the pattern suggesting the winning of the small winning and the pattern suggesting the winning of the big winning, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is calculated three times as a lottery result of one time of the second special pattern lottery, even when the number of balls reserved for the special figure 2 is small, the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 can be calculated to be large, and the performance mode of the icon performance can be diversified. Also, in the "jackpot G9", 11 rounds of jackpot games are defined such that the number of openings of the first attacker 650 is the same as in the above-described "jackpot E9". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650 .

In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as the small winning game is executed in the 1st round (R) to the 3rd round (R), and the actual big winning game is executed after the 4th round (R). , the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds may be executed. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified. Therefore, for example, when the first symbol display device 37 is provided with a notification means for notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed (e.g., a means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting an LED lamp), the number of rounds to be notified by the notification means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type based on the notification contents of the notification means.

Next, with reference to Fig.221 (a), the content of small hit classification selection 9 table 202hf is demonstrated. FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the types of small hit types are increased, and the small hit operation content (open operation content of the small hit game) defined for each small hit type, and the processing content of the first special symbol variation that is executed when the small hit game is executed. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

This small winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table referred to when selecting a small winning type after winning a small winning in a special symbol lottery like the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff described above, and is defined to select four types of small winning types, "small winning A9" to "small winning D9", corresponding to the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5.

When a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, the content of the small win operation and the processing content for the special symbol variation during execution can be changed according to the selected small win type. In addition, in this embodiment, even when any small hit type is selected, it is configured to execute the interruption process for the special symbol variation being executed. This suspension process is a process of temporarily suspending the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed (for example, until the small winning game ends). Since this interruption process is the same as that of the above-described seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff are specifically described, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with the "small hit A9" in the range of "0 to 59", the "small hit B9" in the range of "60 to 79", the "small hit C9" in the range of "80 to 89", and the "small hit D9" in the range of "90 to 99". . Since the range of values that the small winning type counter C5 can take is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small winning A9" at the time of winning the small winning is 60% (60/100), the rate of selecting "small winning B9" is 20% (20/100), the rate of selecting "small winning C9" is 10% (10/100), and the rate of selecting "small winning D9" is 10% (10/10). 0).

When "small win A9" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the variable prize winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds, when "small win B9" is selected, a small prize game is executed in which the right variable prize winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and when "small win C9" is selected, the right variable prize winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. A small winning game to be executed twice is executed, and when "small winning C9" is selected, a small winning game to open the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 for 0.5 seconds three times is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, according to the small winning type selected when winning the small winning, the small winning game to open the first attacker 650 mainly opened during the big winning game and the small winning game to open the second attacker 2650 mainly opened during the small winning game are configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the big winning game may have been executed immediately after the small winning game was executed. The player can be made to think that. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed with the pending icon displayed in the potential state, the icon performance is executed so that the potential state is set again after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, if the player wins the 'small win A' while the reserved icon is displayed, the player can be made happy and sad that an advantageous big win game will be executed when the first attacker 650 is released.

Further, when ``small winning B9'' to ``small winning D9'' are selected, a small winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed, but the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is varied for each selected small winning type. That is, it is configured so that the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 calculated for one special symbol lottery can be varied. As a result, when calculating the number of displayed pending icons in the icon effect, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be greatly deviated from the number of special-figure 2 pending balls and, by extension, the number of winning small hits. Therefore, the display number of the pending icon determined based on the number of times of opening of the second attacker 1650 can be easily displayed without synchronizing with the special figure 2 pending ball number.

In this embodiment, according to the selected small winning type, either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is configured to execute a small winning game that opens. However, without being limited to this, for example, in one small winning game, an opening operation that sequentially opens the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the opening action executed as one small winning game is continuously executed a plurality of times of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221(b), the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be described. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg differs from the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above in that the variation pattern of the normal symbol selected during the latent probability state is the same as during the normal state, and the rest is the same. Detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

As shown in the normal figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in this embodiment, during the probability variation state, the ball fired by the right hitting game is configured to enter the right electric accessory 164 as in the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, a ball fired in a right-handed game during the latent probability state is configured to be less likely to enter the right electric accessory 164 as compared with the above-described seventh embodiment. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, the game property is such that the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164 even in the latent state and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is easily increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 222(a), the contents of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the ninth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment in that an icon display number selection table 222ha and a continuous effect selection table 222hb are provided. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referred to when selecting the number of displayed pending icons displayed in the icon effect described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. 223(a). FIG. 223(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the number of displayed icons that can be selected (the number of reserved icons displayed) is defined based on the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the count value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved balls counter 223c) and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Specifically, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and when the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "5 (special)" is defined as the number of displayed icons. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 pending number is "1", the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb does not become "6" or more, so the corresponding value is not defined.

In addition, when the number of special figures 2 pending is "2" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 2" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "1 to 4" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 ~", as the number of displayed icons. "5 (Special)" is defined.

When the special figure 2 pending number is "3" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 3" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5". 4” is stipulated.

Then, when the special figure 2 pending number is "4" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 4" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "3 to 4" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 ~", as the number of displayed icons. "4" is specified.

Here, when the icon display number "5 (special)" is selected, an icon display number larger than the upper limit number of special-figure 2 reserved balls "4" is selected, and in this embodiment, the upper limit display number of the reserved icon is "4".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference between the number of special-figure 2 pending balls and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb, that is, as the look-ahead result of one special-figure 2 pending, the more the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is calculated, the more easily the special icon is displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, when the number of special 2 pending balls is large (for example, 3, 4), the number of special 2 pending balls to be prefetched increases, so the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is more likely to be calculated multiple times as a result of the prefetching of one special 2 pending than the result of prefetching executed when the number of special 2 pending balls is small. is not set, and "4" is easily set. Then, when the icon display number is "4", it is configured to facilitate the execution of a continuous effect, which will be described later. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large.

Also, even if the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is small (for example, 2), if the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is large as a result of the look-ahead, that is, if the small hit C9 or the small hit D9 (see FIG. 221 (a)) is won, or if the big hit G9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the icon display number larger than the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is selected.

On the other hand, even if the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is large, if the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is small as a look-ahead result, that is, if the lottery result of the second special pattern is lost, or if a small hit A9 (see FIG. 221 (a)) is won, or if a big hit D9 or big hit E9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the icon display number less than the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is selected.

With such a configuration, the display number of reserved icons used for icon performance can be determined regardless of the actual number of special-figure 2 reserved balls, so that an interesting look-ahead performance can be executed regardless of the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is made to think that the reserved icon is a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2, and an interesting look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of the actual number of reserved balls of the special figure 2. It may be configured to display the reserved symbols shown on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . In this case, the player can grasp the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the number of display of reserved icons, so that, for example, when many reserved icons are displayed in a state where the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is small, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, when winning a jackpot type (jackpot F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is calculated, the probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, so that all the big wins that can be predicted based on the number of display of the pending icons are jackpots in which the probability state is set. Therefore, since the prediction based on the performance mode of the icon performance (reserved icon display) is the prediction of winning a big win advantageous to the player, the player can be more interested than the prediction including the winning of a big win disadvantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot winning in which the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is not calculated, that is, when a jackpot (jackpot D9, jackpot E9) in which the second attacker 1650 is not opened during the jackpot game is executed, the percentage of setting the latent state after the jackpot game is 50%. Therefore, even if the big win is won in the case that the performance mode of the icon performance is a performance mode in which the big win cannot be predicted (for example, a state in which the number of display of reserved icons is small), the possibility of setting the latent state after the end of the big win game can be left. In this case, a performance is executed to agitate whether or not the reserved icon is completely consumed before the execution of the big win game, and if even one reserved icon is displayed at the age when the big win game is executed, it is configured to inform that a latent state is set (the RUSH game is continued) after the end of the big win game.

In this way, by using the reserved icon displayed in the icon effect for various purposes, it is possible to execute more various effects and enhance the effect of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 222, the description continues. The continuous performance selection table 222hb is a data table referred to when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous performance described above with reference to FIG. This continuous production selection table 222hb defines whether or not continuous production is executed based on the winning information (special figure 2 winning information) related to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

Here, the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223(b), in the continuous effect selection table 222hb, out of the special figure 2 prize information, execution area winning information (winning prize information used in the second special symbol lottery of this time), pending (holding area) winning prize information, the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are used to define whether or not execution is to be performed. Only in a state where four pending icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the continuous effect can be selected.

Specifically, when the winning information included in the execution area is a jackpot, that is, when the second special symbol variation to be executed this time is a jackpot variation, if the jackpot type is "jackpot F9, jackpot G9", execution (execution A) of continuous production A is defined, and if the jackpot type is other than that, "jackpot D9, jackpot E9", non-execution of continuous production is associated with the range of the acquired production counter 223f being "0 to 89". , "90 to 99" are defined in association with the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B). When the execution area contains prize winning information related to the winning of the jackpot, since the jackpot game is executed after the second special pattern variation of this time, the presence or absence of execution of the continuous performance is defined without considering the prize winning information stored in the reservation area.

Here, in the continuous performance of the pattern of finally winning the jackpot, it is determined which of the first result of getting the V-icon 873y by consuming all the reserved icons and the second result of getting the V-icon 873z without consuming all the reserved icons is determined as the performance result of the continuous performance. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot to be executed in this continuous effect is a variable probability jackpot (jackpots E9 to G9), and if it is determined that it is not a variable probability jackpot (jackpot D9) (in the case of execution B), the first result of extinguishing all the pending icons is set, and if it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, a lottery (result selection lottery) is executed to determine whether to set the first result or the second result, and the result selection lottery is performed. It is configured to set the type of effect result based on the result. By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the latent definite state is not set after the big winning game is finished despite the fact that the big winning game is executed with the reserved icon remaining.

In addition, even when a variable probability jackpot is won (execution A), the first result can be set as the performance result of the continuous performance, so even if the continuous performance of getting the V icon 873y is executed, the player can play the game with expectations until the end. When a big win game corresponding to the variable probability big win is executed in a state where all the reserved icons are consumed, it is preferable to execute the performance of displaying the reserved icon by the end of the big win game triggered by the establishment of a predetermined occurrence condition during the big win game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player who is playing the jackpot game to quickly grasp the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the method of establishing the generation condition is not limited to this, and for example, a generation condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls enter the variable ball entry means (the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650) that is opened during the big win game, or a condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable ball entry means different from the variable ball entry means that is opened during the big win game.

Returning to FIG. 223(b), the description is continued. If the execution area of the special figure 2 winning information contains winning information indicating small winning, and the winning information is ``small winning B9'' to ``small winning D9'', if there is winning information indicating the kind of big winning of ``big winning E'', ``big winning F'', and ``big winning G'' in the reservation, the execution (execution B) of the continuous production B is associated with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of ``0 to 69'', and the range of ``70 to 99''. is defined in association with non-execution of the continuous effect. In addition, when there is no prize winning information indicating any one of the ``jackpot E'', ``jackpot F'', and ``jackpot G'' in the reserve, non-execution of the continuous performance is associated with the range of the value of the performance counter 223f from ``0 to 69'', and the execution of the continuous performance C (execution C) is associated with the range of ``70 to 99''. The execution area of the special figure 2 winning information includes winning information indicating winning of a small winning, and when the winning information is 'small winning A9', non-execution of continuous presentation is stipulated regardless of the winning information stored in the reserved area.

When the execution area of the special figure 2 winning information includes the winning information indicating the winning outside, the execution of the continuous performance is defined in correspondence with the winning information indicating the jackpot type of any of ``jackpot E'', ``jackpot F'' and ``jackpot G'' in the reservation, and the non-execution of the continuous performance is defined in correspondence with the case of no prize information indicating the jackpot type of ``jackpot E'', ``jackpot F'' and ``jackpot G'' in the reservation.

As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous performance, the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed this time and the prefetch result of the second special symbol reserved and stored (winning information stored in the reservation area) are referred to, so that the continuous performance with high expectation for big win can be executed. Therefore, after grasping that a jackpot is won at the time when the continuous performance is executed, the continuous performance can be watched while paying attention to whether the performance result of the continuous performance becomes the first result or the second result, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous effect is executed only when four pending icons are displayed. And, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the larger the number of actual special figure 2 reserved balls, the easier it is for the four reserved icons to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the four pending icons are displayed, and to enhance the operation of the game. In addition, the upper limit number (4) of the reserved icons may not be displayed even when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, so that even when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the 4 reserved icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be further enhanced.

In this embodiment, the continuous performance can be executed only when four reserved icons are displayed, but without being limited to this, the continuous performance may be executed when two or more reserved icons are displayed. In this case, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous performance is determined based on the actual number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 and the result of the look-ahead. For example, only when there is winning information indicating that the player wins a big win (jackpot E9), the continuous performance may be executed in a state where there are few reserved icons. As a result, the degree of expectation for the continuous performance, that is, the degree of expectation for winning a big win advantageous to the player can be varied according to the number of display of the reserved icons at the time when the continuous performance is executed, so that the player can be interested in the timing at which the continuous performance is executed.

Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous performance based on the actual number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead result, and for example, when there is prize winning information indicating that the player wins a big win (jackpot E9), the continuous performance may be executed after the forced increase display is executed so that the number of display of the reserved icons reaches the upper limit as a preparatory performance for executing the continuous performance.

223(b), the continuous effect A (execution A), the continuous effect B (execution B), and the continuous effect C (execution C) are provided as types of the continuous effect. In the execution C, an effect in which the reserved icons 873a to 873d imitating carrots cannot be digested (cannot be eaten) and the V icon cannot be acquired is executed in the continuous effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 174) in that an undisplayed information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a continuous rendering flag 223hd are added. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main controller 110, and stores the opening number of the second attacker 1650 extracted in the winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) (S4486 in FIG. 224). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of displayed icons based on the stored information, and then the referred information is discarded. As for the prize winning information already acquired before the latent probability state is set, the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is extracted for all the winning prize information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game, and the result is stored.

By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this way, it is possible to easily differentiate the timing of receiving the special symbol winning information and the timing of determining the effect mode.

The undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of pending icons that have not yet been displayed among the number of currently displayable pending icons, and the value of the counter is decremented when a new pending icon is displayed. In this embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons, a true icon effect in which the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the displayed icon number counter 223hc are increased or decreased, and a pseudo effect in which only the apparent number of pending icons is increased or decreased without increasing or decreasing the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb or the displayed icon number counter 223hc (effect that ultimately becomes the same value) are configured to be executable.

The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for counting the number of currently displayed pending icons, and is a counter that is incremented when a new pending icon is displayed and decremented when the number of pending icons decreases. When displaying a new pending icon, the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are referred to determine the total number of pending icons to be displayed, and the display number is determined based on the difference between the determined total number and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc.

The continuous effect flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the continuous effect is being executed. While the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON, the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons is not executed in the icon effect.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, among the control contents of the ninth embodiment, control processing executed by the sound lamp control device will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 227. FIG. The contents of control of the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment are as follows. 691) is replaced with the setting process during RUSH (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and the setting process during RUSH 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is executed. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 224, the content of winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning command process 9 (S4281). In this prize winning command process 9 (S4281), a process of updating information related to icon effects executed during the RUSH game and determining the number of display of pending icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effects is executed.

When the winning command process 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4482). 84). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a winning winning command.

When it is determined that there is winning information in the process of S4484 (S4484: Yes), the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is extracted based on the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) indicated by the winning information (S4485), and the value corresponding to the extracted number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, based on the information stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number and the undisplayed information storage area 223hb, the icon display number selection table 222ha is referred to and the icon display number is selected (S4487). After that, the difference between the selected displayed icon number and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), other processes are executed (S4412), and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a winning prize command is received as a prize winning command, only updating of information used for icon presentation is executed, and control for varying the number of displayed pending icons is not executed. As a result, the timing at which the number of displayed pending icons is changed can be made different from the timing at which the winning prize command is received, so that it is difficult for a player to understand when and how the number of displayed pending icons is changed. In this embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for the icon effect is only updated, and the control for changing the number of displayed pending icons is not executed. However, without being limited to this, the control for varying the number of displayed pending icons may be executed, or the control may be executed for varying the number of displayed pending icons when a predetermined lottery is executed and a prize is won.

Also, in the process of S4484, if it is determined that there is no win information (S4484: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S4490). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (S4490: Yes), the effect mode of a pseudo effect that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S4492), the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated according to the mode of the pseudo effect (S4493), and a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S4493). 4494), and the process proceeds to S4412.

If it is determined in the process of S4489 that the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489: Yes), that is, if the continuous effect is currently being performed, or if the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0 (S4404: No), that is, if the number of displayed pending icons cannot be increased, the process proceeds to S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the contents of the jackpot ending process 9 (S4954) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot end processing 9 (S4954). This jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is greatly different from the jackpot end processing described above in that processing for setting information on icon performance is executed based on the winning information already obtained when a RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot ends, that is, when a latent probability state is set or when a probability variable state is set.

When the jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5051: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S5052). When it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is determined (S5052: Yes), that is, when the probability variable state is set in the jackpot executed at a timing other than during the RUSH game, all the winning prize information stored in the winning prize information storage area 223b is read (S5053), the winning information (big winning information, small winning information) included in the winning prize information is extracted (S5054), and the second attacker 165 based on the extracted winning information. The number of opening times of 0 is calculated (S5055). Then, the calculated total number of second attackers (total release number) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a potential jackpot (S5057), and if it is a potential jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding potential probability mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode) is set (S5058), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon number counter is set to 4 (S5060), and stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the big win is set (S5062), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that it is not a latent probability jackpot (it is a probability variable jackpot) (S5057: No), a display command for indicating the probability variable mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062.

If it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON in the process of S5051, that is, if it is a jackpot won during the RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot (S5064). set) (S5065), set the display command for RUSH corresponding to this big hit (S5066), and proceed to the process of S5062. In this case, in the processing of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. Also, when it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game continues is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, the content of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be described. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). This preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) is different from the preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 226) of the seventh embodiment described above in that a process for displaying a pending icon at the timing of transition from the variable probability state to the latent probability state is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the ready state setting process 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processes of S8001 to S8004 as the ready state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 226) are executed, then a display command for indicating the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) is set (S8051), the icon display number is set to 4 (S8052), and the displayed icon number counter is set to 4 (S8053). ), the information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S8054), and this processing ends.

That is, the same processing as the processing executed at the end of the big win in the case where the latent state is set after the end of the big win game is executed. As a result, the initial display of the icon production (the state in which four reserved icons are displayed regardless of the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls) can be unified regardless of the occasion when the latent certainty state is set. Therefore, it is possible to unify the control processing for changing the effect mode of the icon effect according to the timing of transition to the latent definite state, so that the load of the control processing can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 227, the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In this RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting the effect mode of the icon effect to be executed according to the second special symbol variation executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH middle setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651), and if it is 4 (S8651: Yes), the continuous effect selection table 222hb is referred to select the continuous effect (S8652), and it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (S4453). If it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the selected continuous effect is set (S4454), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated in correspondence with the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous effect. If it is determined in the process of S4453 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (S8653: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8651 that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (S8656: Yes), the effect mode of a pseudo effect that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S8658), the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated according to the mode of the pseudo effect (S8659), and a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S8659). 8660), the process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S8655 that the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655: Yes), that is, if the continuous effect is currently being performed, or if the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0, that is, if the number of displayed pending icons cannot be increased, this process is terminated without setting the pseudo effect.

<Regarding the modification of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment described above will be described. In the icon effect executed in the ninth embodiment described above, continuous effect can be executed based on the look-ahead result. Then, the performance mode of the continuous performance is determined when the continuous performance is set. Concretely, as the performance result of the continuous performance, the type of the performance mode such as the performance mode executed so as to leave the reserved icons or the performance mode executed so as to consume all the reserved icons is determined in advance, and the performance corresponding to the type is configured to be executed. By constructing in this manner, there is no difference between the performance result of the continuous performance and the actual game result, and the processing load during the continuous performance can be reduced, but there is a problem that the performance pattern of the continuous performance cannot be diversified.

On the other hand, in this modified example, at the start of the jackpot game targeted for the continuous performance, the performance mode of the continuous performance is varied based on the type of the winning big win and the number of remaining reserved icons. By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the continuous performance can be set by dividing the performance mode into, for example, the first half period until the start of the big win game and the second half period after the start of the big win game, so that the performance pattern of the continuous performance can be easily diversified.

Further, in this modified example, since the processing for increasing the number of displayed reserved icons can be executed after the start of the jackpot game, even if the performance mode in which all the reserved icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous performance is set, the number of displayed reserved icons can be increased during the jackpot game when the winning jackpot type is the potential jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the performance mode of the first half period of the performance pattern of the continuous performance, and to facilitate the diversification of the performance pattern.

Furthermore, in this modified example, it is configured so that the continuous effect progresses in accordance with the release action of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, although the second attacker 1650 is released in the big winning game, the player can be made to think that the small winning game is being executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the ninth embodiment>
Here, referring to FIG. 228, the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. This modification differs from the above-described ninth embodiment in that a jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) executed at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, and the rest is the same. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the contents of jackpot-related processing 9 (S4802).

When the jackpot related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether the jackpot start command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is received (S4901: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4902), then it is determined whether the flag 223fg during RUSH is set to ON (S4951), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4951: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952). That is, it is determined whether or not the current big win is a big win targeted for continuous production.

In the process of S4952, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), it is determined whether the current big win is a latent big win (a big win in which the latent certainty state is set after the big win game ends) (S4954), and if it is determined to be a latent big win (S4954: Yes) , the information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated in correspondence with the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 during the big win, that is, each value is updated in order to consume the number of displayed pending icons in correspondence with the opening of the second attacker 1650 executed in the jackpot game to be executed this time (S4955).

After that, a display command corresponding to the updated contents is set (S4956), and it is determined whether or not the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 after the update (S4957), and if it is determined to be 0, that is, if the number of displayed pending icons becomes 0 when the number of displayed pending icons becomes 0 (S4957) in spite of the fact that RUSH continues with the potential jackpot and the continuous performance is progressed in accordance with the release of the second attacker 1650 (S4957). An additional effect (mode) for displaying one pending icon later is set (S4958), and this process is terminated. As an additional effect mode set here, there is an effect such as carrots falling from the sky during the jackpot game. Further, although the detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot game executed during the RUSH is in progress and the reservation icon is not displayed, that is, when there is a possibility that the RUSH game will end due to the jackpot game this time, a pseudo additional performance is executed to determine whether or not the above-mentioned additional performance is executed. This pseudo-additional effect is composed of a first effect that encourages something to fall from the sky and a second effect that something other than carrots falls from the sky, like the additional effect. As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations until the end.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4954 that the current big win is not a potential big win (S4954: No), that is, when the RUSH game ends with the current big win, the production mode of consuming all the displayed pending icons is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same S4913 to S4916 processes as the jackpot related process (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed, and this process ends.

The technical idea used in this modified example, that is, the technical idea of executing the effect of changing the number of displayed reserved icons at the timing when the jackpot game is started may be used for purposes other than execution in the continuous effect.

In this modified example, since processing for increasing the number of displayed reserved icons can be executed after the start of the jackpot game, even if a performance mode in which all reserved icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous performance is set, the number of displayed reserved icons can be increased during the jackpot game when the winning jackpot type is the potential jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the performance mode of the first half period of the performance pattern of the continuous performance, and to facilitate the diversification of the performance pattern.

Furthermore, in this modified example, it is configured so that the continuous effect progresses in accordance with the release action of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, although the second attacker 1650 is released in the big winning game, the player can be made to think that the small winning game is being executed.

As described above, in the above-described ninth embodiment, according to the result of the look-ahead processing (preliminary determination processing) executed for the reserved and stored special symbol winning information, regardless of the number of acquired special symbol reserved balls, the look-ahead effect (icon effect) for varying the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. As a result, even when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same look-ahead performance as when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is the upper limit according to the result of look-ahead. Therefore, even a player who cannot obtain a lot of special reserved balls can be provided with a look-ahead performance with a high performance effect, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is configured to be the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be retained and stored (the number of retained and stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that the specific pattern displayed by the icon performance is a reserved pattern for indicating the special figure reserved ball number (the reserved memory number of the second special pattern mainly executed during the latent definite state). It is possible to suppress the decrease in the game motivation of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead result is a specific result (for example, a big win in which the latent state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol pending balls that can be stored and stored (the number of pending memories of the second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to a player who has been under the illusion that the specific symbols displayed in the icon performance are reserved symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) executed for the winning information of the reserved and stored special symbols, the number of opening times of the attacker to be opened in the small winning game is determined, and the number of display of the specific symbols is determined based on the determination result. And it is configured to vary the number of times the attacker is released in one small win game according to the type of the won small win. Furthermore, as a part of the big winning game executed when the big winning is won, the same attacker release operation as in the small winning game is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small winning games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in this embodiment, the player is notified that the period during which the specific symbols are displayed is the period during which the latent state (RUSH game) is not terminated. That is, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that the latent definite state will be set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, every time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, the number of displayable icons (the number of pending icons) is determined in the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when the winning information command indicating the special symbol winning information is received. Instead of being executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed when an information command is received, the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the displayable icon number determination process may be executed when a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds, or a period until the number of additional winning information commands (winning commands) received reaches three) has elapsed since the last displayable icon number determination process was executed. As a result, the timing of actually receiving the winning information command (winning command) can be made different from the timing of determining the number of displayable icons based on the information included in the command, so that it is difficult to understand for which winning information (special figure reserved storage) the number of reserved icons is determined. In this way, by making the timing of determining the number of displayable icons different, it is possible to easily deviate the performance mode of the performance for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons displayed within the range of the number of displayable icons from the winning information contained in the received winning information command, so that it is possible to easily provide the player with an unexpected performance.

Furthermore, in addition to winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operable operation means (frame button 22), the number of displayable icons determination process may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an operation effect on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to cause the player to operate the operation means according to predetermined contents. As a result, the player who has correctly operated the operating means for the operation performance to be executed can be made to easily execute the icon performance based on the prize winning information included in the received prize winning information command, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition to this, it is also possible to detect that a ball has entered a general winning hole 63 or a through gate 67 provided on the game board 13, and to execute the number of displayable icons determination processing based on the detection result (at a predetermined probability when the ball has entered). Since the number of displayable reserved icons is determined by a game irrelevant to the special symbol lottery, the timing of actually receiving a winning information command (winning command) can be made different from the timing of determining the number of displayable icons based on the information included in the command, so that it is difficult to understand for which winning information (special figure reserved storage) the number of reserved icons is determined.

In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the pending icons, a true icon effect in which the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the displayed icon number counter 223hc are increased or decreased, and a pseudo effect in which only the number of pending icons in appearance is increased or decreased without increasing or decreasing the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb or the displayed icon number counter 223hc (resulting in the same value in the end). 13, but is not limited to this, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a pseudo effect, and when it is determined that the pseudo effect is to be executed, a display command indicating the range of the number of pending icons to be increased or decreased in the pseudo effect and the execution of the pseudo effect is set and output to the display control device 114. When the display command indicating that the pseudo effect is to be executed is received by the display control device 114, it is included in the received display command. It may also be configured to determine the mode of presentation based on the information received.

By constructing in this way, only the icon performance (true icon performance) set based on the winning information of the special symbol can be controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the processing load of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, by executing a pseudo performance of increasing/decreasing (variable) only the number of pending icons in appearance without increasing/decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the variable pattern of the number of pending icons can be diversified in the icon performance. In addition, since the pseudo performance is executed so that the final increment and decrement of the pending icon match, when setting the performance mode of the true icon performance, there is no need to care about the performance situation of the pseudo performance, and the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 263. FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing performed by the main control device 110 and the control processing performed by the voice ramp control device 113 are partially changed. It is different in that it has been changed. In addition, due to the difference described above, part of the content of the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also different. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure same as 7th Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, a brief description will be given of major differences between the tenth embodiment and the above-described seventh embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are constructed so as not to be executed in duplicate (in parallel), and the lottery for the second special pattern is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special pattern. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time saving state, variable probability state) is set rather than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state), it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In addition, it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. That is, when the game is played in the normal state which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. By constructing in this manner, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the game state to be set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting the game state with a high degree of advantage to be set.

Here, for example, when the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player among a plurality of game states, is set, if the lottery for the second special symbol, which is the lottery advantageous to the player, is not executed at all, the player's desire to play the game in the normal state, that is, the desire to play for the purpose of setting a more advantageous game state (reduction of working hours state, variable probability state) is lowered, and there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early. On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when a specific condition is established in a period in which a normal state is set, a predetermined number (up to five) of lottery rights for the second special symbol can be acquired. Concretely, when a win is won in a normal pattern lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal pattern is set, a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessary 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which the second special symbol lottery can easily be executed even in a normal state that is a game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player playing in the normal state can be made to execute a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot winning and a game aiming for a winning lottery in the normal symbol lottery, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be varied based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol stored, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as a performance mode of the special figure 2 variation performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-loss variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a win is performed in the first half period of the variation performance, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to perform a pseudo-hit variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, and the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation performance. The number of times is configured to be variable corresponding to the number of special figures 2 pending. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the variable performance of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big win. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery is conducted a plurality of times.

As a result, even when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special pattern lottery to be executed first among a plurality of special figure 2 reservations obtained during the normal pattern per game, the player can be made to think that he or she has won the big prize because the plurality of special figure 2 reservations are obtained during the normal pattern per game, so that the player can play the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation more enthusiastically during the normal pattern per game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved number in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 0, as the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance, the variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the pseudo repetition of the special figure 2 variation performance in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variable performance imitating the special figure 1 variable performance is executed, the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, so that the unexpected variable performance can be executed for the player.

<Regarding the Game Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine in the Tenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 229 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 157) of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and the configuration of the lower area formed on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 are different. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that the game value obtained by the player does not differ (is unlikely to occur) even if a game (left-handed game) in which balls flow down to the left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 is executed or a game (right-handed game) in which balls flow down to the right side area is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 is formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line of the central part of the game board 13. In the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there is a first ball entrance 64 that can trigger a first special symbol lottery by entering a ball, a second ball entrance 640 that is provided below the first ball entrance 64 and can trigger a second special symbol lottery by entering a ball, and a second ball entrance 640. An electric accessory 640a attached to the ball entrance 640 and opened in the normal figure winning game executed when winning the normal symbol lottery, and a V winning device 2650 provided at the lower position of the second ball entrance 640 and opened in the big winning game executed when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot are arranged.

Balls shot in a left-handed game flow down the left side area and pass through a through gate 67 provided in the left side area at a ratio of 1/2, and both the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and the balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward a first ball inlet 64 provided in the lower side area by nails planted in the game board 13.例文帳に追加Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters two general ball entrances 63 . In this embodiment, about 1/50 of the balls flowing down the left side region are configured to enter either of the two general ball entrances 63, and when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (privileges) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a rate of 1 ball per 15 balls in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and when a ball enters, four balls are paid out as prize balls. When the electric accessory 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 229), few balls enter the second ball inlet 640. When the electric accessory 640 is opened (shown in black in FIG. 229), the second ball inlet 640 is configured so that one ball enters at a rate of about two out of the balls launched in the left-handed game and flowing down the left area. configured to be released. In addition, the V winning device 2650 is constructed so that almost no balls enter when the big win game is not executed, and during the big win game the balls enter at a rate of 2 out of 3 balls, and when the balls enter, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the V winning device 2650 will be described. This V winning device 2650 is a variable ball entry means which is opened in a big winning game executed when a special pattern lottery is won, and is constructed so that a ball winning to the V winning device 2650 during the big winning game passes through a specific gate so that a high probability state of the special pattern can be set after the big winning game is finished. In addition, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 is likely to flow down a specific gate and a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 is difficult to flow down can be executed. ) is referred to as a variable jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which it is difficult for a ball that has entered a V winning device 2650 to flow down a specific gate, that is, a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to make the ball flow down to a specific gate even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game will be referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if the variable probability big winning game is executed, if the balls cannot flow down to the specific gate during the big winning game, the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the big winning game is finished. That is, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is not determined. Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the round game executed in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the round game (V round game) in which the balls are most likely to flow down to the specific gate is executed. Therefore, the game state set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until the V-round game ends. In this way, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the game result during the jackpot game, so that the player can play a game for acquiring various benefits (prize ball, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when using the above -mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set the news of the news (for example, at the start of the jackpot gaming), and the control processing of the ball cannot be set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot gaming), and control processing related to the outing is performed. There was a problem that the control process of pachinko machine 10 had to be complicated during the densely executed jackpot, and the control process of pachinko machine 10 was complicated.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when a variable probability jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as a performance mode of the notification performance (at the start of the jackpot game), and immediately before the notification performance is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the performance mode of the notification performance based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate. The notification effect of the effect mode set in advance is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball does not flow down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and the variable probability jackpot advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, there is a problem that if the performance mode of the jackpot ending period is simply changed to the performance mode executed in the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification performance is executed during the ending period. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode which is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game is made in advance, it is necessary to store image data (performance data) for the performance mode in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the normal win game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification performance that does not give a sense of incompatibility to a player without providing a special performance mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the variable probability big winning game.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, thereby switching and setting the effect mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game. The notification performance executed for a period may be executed, or the round performance executed during the final round period of the big win game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the big win ending period is set, and then the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual big win ending period by executing the notification performance.

Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which a ball flowing down the right area enters the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the above-described left area, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state and whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the same privilege is provided whether the player executes the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that the bonus amount that the player can obtain does not differ greatly between when playing a left-handed game and when playing a right-handed game. The ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game, so that the left-handed game is more difficult to acquire prize balls than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is more likely to acquire prize balls than the left-handed game, but it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, i.e., during the execution of the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method, and in the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (the game during the time-saving state or the probability variable state), the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

<Regarding display content in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 230(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth control example are different from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described first control example, in that the scroll direction of the third symbol (decorative symbol that is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol) is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is changed from one (see FIG. 11(a)) to five (see FIG. 230(a)). It is different in that the mode of notification of the information related to the game is different. Also, there are some elements that are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three upper, middle, and lower pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230(a)). The third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (decorative pattern that fluctuates corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) is composed of 10 types of main patterns to which identification information imitating numbers '1' to '9' is attached. In this embodiment, the number of pieces of identification information imitating a specific number (for example, identification information imitating the number “4”) is configured to be greater than the number of pieces of identification information imitating other numbers. As a result, when the identification information simulating the specific number is in the ready state, the number of big winning patterns (identification information simulating the specific number) passing on the effective line can be increased more than when the other identification information is in the ready state, so that the player can visually predict that the degree of expectation of winning the big prize is high.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each identification information modeled on numbers. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on the top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is cyclically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to be variably displayed by scrolling from right to left, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are variably displayed by scrolling from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, a sub-symbol (blank symbol) which does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is also formed between the main symbols. In FIG. 230(b), a blank pattern (secondary pattern) is displayed using a pattern imitating a triangle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in an oblique direction. When the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stop-displayed and the third symbols are stopped on the effective line in a combination of big-win patterns (in this control example, the same main-symbol combination), a big-win animation is displayed as a big win.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variability display area of the third symbol may be made smaller, or the variability display area may be moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying special symbol.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 230(b). As shown in FIG. 230(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result) is displayed. configured to be displayed.

In addition, the small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuation) and the lottery result) is displayed. It consists of

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of special symbols and the lottery status of normal symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross. ), the lottery result of the special symbol is shown. However, the lottery result of the special symbol may be shown by, for example, using a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors to indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating according to the display mode of changing the number or color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbol or color.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is underway (fluctuating) and the result of the lottery). Further, as shown in FIG. 230(b), in this embodiment, the fourth symbol display areas (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed are shown as an example in which they are formed on the upper left side and the upper right side of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, it is preferable to delete the fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 and execute the variable display of the fourth pattern using light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display unit 80.

The display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, so a detailed description is omitted. Although the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is only the small area Ds1, and in the small area Ds1, the active area Ds1a and the waiting area Ds1b are formed. The display contents of the in-execution area Ds1a are the same as those of the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In this embodiment, eight pedestals are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols are normally displayed.

In addition, when the total value of the first special symbol reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball) and the second special symbol reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) becomes 8, that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed on the rightmost pedestal, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), a dedicated effect (period effect) using the 8 reserved patterns stored in the reservation may be executed. In the area Ds1b, not reserved patterns for indicating the number of reserved balls of special patterns, but reserved patterns for performance indicating only the period during which the period performance is executed (reserved patterns to be subjected to the period performance) may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period performance, a new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner how long the period performance continues.

In the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, and the same game result is given when a right-handed game is performed and when a left-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is not displayed. If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting the case of the technique method, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction). By constructing in this manner, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot toward, only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area, so that the game machine can be provided that is easy for the player to understand.

To explain in more detail, it is preferable that the guidance display area displays a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to play a right-handed game and a "left-handed" display mode for guiding the player to play a left-handed game. is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed in a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, the display mode of 'left-handed' is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Also, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each of the above-described embodiments may be configured so as to be appropriately displayable.

<Regarding production content of the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 231 to FIG. 236, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 231(a), the display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed in the reach state in the normal state (normal state). In this embodiment, the third symbols to be variably displayed are stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as part of the third symbol combination indicating the winning of the jackpot on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 230(a)), the ready-to-win state is entered, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the winning of the big win. The middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed with the effective line on which is displayed as a ready-to-win effective line. After reaching the ready-to-win state, the middle pattern row Z2 is configured to variably display each piece of identification information (third pattern) at a low speed (a speed of about 0.5 seconds required for one main pattern (third pattern imitating a number) to shift by one) at which the player can visually recognize.

As described above, in this embodiment, one symbol row has 10 types of main symbols, so when the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed at a low speed, the time required for one round is set to 5 seconds (0.5×10). Then, the medium symbol row Z2, which is variably displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231(a), even when the ready-to-win state occurs with any third symbol (in FIG. 231(a), the identification information imitating "9" (the third symbol imitating a crab)), the medium symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 230) variably displayed during the ready-to-win is configured so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third symbol resembling an octopus) can be visually recognized first. are

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance mode of the variable performance is configured to be variable according to the variation mode of the medium symbol row Z2 after entering the ready-to-win state, for example, it is configured to be variable to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode) at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round or two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by unifying the identification information of the medium pattern row Z2 which becomes visible first after entering the ready-to-win state, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand at what timing to change to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode).

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the medium pattern row Z2 makes one round or two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state is used as the timing for changing to a different production mode (ready-to-win mode), but the present invention is not limited to this. aspect). In this way, by structuring such that specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information for which the ready-to-win state is stopped is changed to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode) on the basis of passing through the ready-to-win effective line, it is possible to provide the player with a relationship between the timing at which the middle pattern row Z2 is stop-displayed in combination for a big hit and the timing for changing to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode). Specifically, when the identification information (the same identification information as the reach-stopped identification information) that becomes the combination indicating the big win after entering the ready-to-win state is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-reach mode) at the timing of passing through the ready-reach effective line, it is possible for the player to overlap the timing at which the medium symbol row Z2 is stop-displayed in the combination that becomes the big win and the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (the ready-to-win mode). (identification information) approaches the reach effective line, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable presentation while having a great sense of anticipation.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the medium symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed with low-speed fluctuation so that the specific identification state (the third symbol imitating the number 1) becomes visible first, regardless of which third symbol is in the ready-to-win state. A new problem arises that the period until all the third patterns are stop-displayed (until the final stop display mode is stop-displayed) differs depending on the type of the third pattern in the ready-to-win state.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the "third symbol imitating the number 1", the middle symbol row Z2 displays the "third symbol imitating the number 1" as a specific symbol in low-speed fluctuation. In the hit state, the medium pattern row Z2 displays ``the third pattern imitating the number 1'' as a specific pattern at a low speed, so that it takes 8 seconds (first round) and 13 seconds (second round) after entering the ready-to-win state in order to stop and display the medium pattern row Z2 in the final stop display mode with one frame off the ready-to-win state.

Therefore, in order to establish a ready-to-win state with third patterns of different types in a variation pattern in which the same variable time is set, it is necessary to execute a process of setting the timing of reaching the ready-to-win state by calculating back from the stop display timing of the third pattern. In other words, there is a problem that a non-uniform ready-to-win performance that varies according to the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is executed during the period from the timing of starting the fluctuation until reaching the ready-to-win state, thereby degrading the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, along with the execution of the lottery for the special symbol, the variation time of the first symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by lottery in the main control device 110, and the determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display performance of the performance period suitable for the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and executes the variable display performance of the third pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic variation time and an addition time command indicating an added variation time, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern to be in the ready-to-win state based on the length of the variation time included in the addition time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional time. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional time. In other words, the notification content of the addition time command allows the audio lamp control device 113 side to identify the variation type that is seven seconds longer than the basic time. As a result, it is possible to set the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state simply by confirming the contents of the addition time command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 231(b) to 234, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 231(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the normal symbol variation that is winning in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during execution of normal symbol variation in which winning is achieved in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 231(b), when the normal symbol variation is performed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being performed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an icon simulating an electric accessory 640 to be opened in a normal game is displayed therein, and an emphatic display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to inform the player that the small display area Dm3 is formed. In the situation shown in FIG. 231(b), since the winning normal symbol variation is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 has a display mode that imitates the electric accessory 640 in the closed state. By configuring in this way, the game may soon be executed for the player. can be predicted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 231(b), the execution of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery is won is explained as an example, but the small display area Dm3 is formed in part of the execution of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery result is lost (for example, the probability of 1/100 of the loss variation), and the effect (fake effect) of displaying the icon imitating the electric accessory 640 is performed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player expects that the game per normal pattern will be executed.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, up to four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal pattern reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the preliminary determination result can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 . Therefore, the suggesting performance suggesting that the normal pattern winning game will soon be executed can be executed from the stage before the execution of the normal pattern variation in which the winning of the suggesting performance suggesting the execution of the normal pattern winning game is executed, that is, the stage of acquiring the normal pattern holding that the preliminary determination result is winning. In this case, the suggestive effect may be executed in an effect mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 231(b). For example, the suggestive effect may be configured to be executed in the same effect mode as the effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, or the pre-discrimination result for the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive effect may be configured to notify the player only that a situation advantageous to the player will soon come. .

In this way, it is difficult for a player to understand the performance mode of the suggestive performance for indicating that the normal game will be executed to the extent that the timing of actually executing the normal pattern winning game and the execution timing of the suggestive performance diverge, and by making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestive performance is the normal pattern winning game, the amusement of the game when the suggestive performance is executed can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when the normal pattern winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when a general pattern per game (long open per game) is executed at normal time (during normal state). In this embodiment, in the normal state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the variation time of the normal pattern variation executed in the normal pattern low probability state is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, it is configured so that about 1/2 of the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 in either case of executing a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, it is configured to be able to store up to four lottery rights (normal pattern reservation) for normal patterns.

In other words, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the normal symbol lottery is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when winning a general pattern in the normal state, the electric accessory 640 is configured to be executed for a general pattern per game (long open per) in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 229, the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, so that the shot ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second ball inlet 640 in the normal pattern winning game in the low probability state of the normal pattern that occurs at a low probability is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), when a normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state, identification information (symbols) is stopped and displayed in a combination (two circles in the figure) indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win in the small display area Dm2, a comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, and an icon simulating an open electric chew (electric accessory 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery can be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variable display of the third symbol executed corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol executed in the small display area Dm1 are continuously executed even during the regular per-symbol game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds, the special figure 2 reserved pattern (indicated by a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 2 reserved) of the second special pattern acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is given priority over the special figure 1 reserved pattern (indicated by a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special pattern acquired (on the left side of the waiting area Ds1b ) is displayed. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 232 (a), it is a state after four or more balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and four or more are acquired as the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the second special pattern is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special pattern, so that the special pattern lottery is executed with the later acquired special pattern 2 reservation given priority over the earlier acquired special pattern 1 reservation. By constructing in this way, when a normal pattern winning game is executed in a normal state and a plurality of special pattern 2 reserves are acquired, the second special pattern lottery can be preferentially and continuously executed, so that one period during which the lottery of the second special pattern is executed can be used as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player to perform a dedicated performance, and an easy-to-understand performance can be provided to the player.

Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 232(b) to 234. FIG. FIG. 232(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 232(b), when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state, the comment "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set to a period until all the reserved special symbols 2 obtained in the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, characters of ``variable probability GET high probability'' are displayed as a guide display mode for showing that the variable probability state can be obtained with a high probability. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this chance zone, during one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation), a pseudo variation effect is executed to make it appear that a plurality of special symbol variations are performed. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 232 (a)) indicating the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds is hidden, and the special figure 1 reserved number (in the figure, "2" indicating that the special figure 1 reserved number is 2) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm.

As shown in FIG. 232(b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 232(a)) of the sub-display area Ds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the chance zone, it can be made to think that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm is used to display the number of special figures reserved, but without being limited to this, the number of special figures reserved may be configured not to notify the player during the chance zone, or may be configured to notify the number of special figures reserved in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is only necessary to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of reserved special figures, for example, a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily identify the number of reserved special figures may be switched to a display mode in which colors are changed in correspondence with each number of reserved special figures. In the case of such a configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 232(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate that the second special symbol is currently changing. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), so the period during which the normal pattern winning game is executed may overlap with the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (see FIG. 232 (a)) or may not overlap. When the normal pattern winning game is executed while overlapping with the fluctuation period of the first special pattern, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the first special pattern fluctuation being executed is finished, and when it is not overlapped with the fluctuation period of the first special pattern, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game (during the normal pattern winning game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special pattern lottery is different according to the fluctuation state of the first special pattern when the normal pattern winning game is executed, and there arises a problem that it is difficult for the player to accurately discriminate whether the currently executed special pattern fluctuation is the first special pattern fluctuation or the second special pattern fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233(a) to FIG. 234, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) among the variable effects executed during the chance zone will be described. Figure 233 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation production, and Figure 233 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in the special variation production executed in the state where the special figure 2 suspension is obtained. It is a schematic diagram which showed the example typically.

Here, the contents of the special fluctuation production (pseudo-variation production) will be explained. This special variation performance is a variation performance in which the third pattern is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) during one variation period of the second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation performance that makes the player think that the special symbol variation has been executed a plurality of times. First, the ready-to-win effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variable effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special variation presentation, characters of ``sorry'' suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the player is made to think that the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone was lost. In other words, in the first half period of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the ready-to-win performance with the expectation of winning the jackpot is stopped (temporarily stopped) with the performance result indicating the failure.

After that, in the second half period of the special variable performance, a variable performance (special second half performance) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured to vary its effect mode according to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, for example, in a state where special figure 2 reservations are secured, as shown in FIG. The second half production is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the special variation performance, the type of the special symbol variation to be executed after the second special symbol variation in execution is finished is discriminated based on the number of special symbol reservations, and the performance mode of the special second half performance is set in the performance mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more strongly that the special symbol variations are executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone (see FIG. 233(b)), it is configured to vary the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the second half period in correspondence with the acquired special symbol 2 pending number. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 reservation nor the special figure 1 reservation is secured when the special variation production is executed, the temporary stop display of the 3rd symbol shown in FIG. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only in a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is secured, so that it is possible to make the player think more strongly that the special symbol variations are executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a presentation mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol to be executed during the second half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped, so it is difficult to accurately determine the number of temporary stops. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed to make the player think that the temporary stop display has been performed five times or more, or to make the player think that a part of the temporary stop display is the stop display and make him think that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached 5 times or more even though the temporary stop display is actually made five times or more, and the enjoyment of predicting the performance result can be provided to the player.

In addition, other configurations may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect, for example, a display mode indicating the number of times of temporary stop display for allowing the player to easily grasp the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol change. , effect of the third pattern, etc.) may be configured to vary in stages. Further, it is also possible to display a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again (for example, the first time, the second time) at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the special variation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserve is not secured, the characters "Chance zone end" are displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm is the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol fluctuates in the horizontal direction). After that, the effect result of the special variation effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stop-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the contents of the effect in the state in which the variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the production contents when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the variable probability state is set, and FIG.

In this embodiment, when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed. Then, when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, a variable probability state is set with a high probability (a variable probability big win game in which a ball can easily flow down to a specific gate is always executed during the big win game). Then, the variable probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state can be looped at a high probability as long as the second special symbol lottery wins the big win (the probability of the big win in the high probability state of the special symbols is 1/50) before the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly win the big win in the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, even in the state where the probability variable state is set, for example, the probability variable jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and immediately after the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, in the state where the probability variable state is set, the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained and the special figure 1 reservation is obtained, the first special symbol lottery may be executed. In this embodiment, as described above, when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability variable big winning game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability variable big winning game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. In other words, even if the variable probability state is set, there is a case where the variable probability state cannot be looped when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, if the player early determines that the winning jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed, the player's willingness to play will decrease. A double ready-to-win performance, which is a variable performance to bring the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the big win and the ready-to-win state at the same time, is easily executed. More specifically, when winning the normal jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the double reach performance described above is always executed (see FIG. 235(a)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent execution of the ready-to-win performance in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal big win is in the ready-to-win state when winning the normal big win in the first special pattern lottery executed during the variable probability state, and to prevent the player from predicting in advance that the normal big win will be won during the variable period of the special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), in this embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same manner as in the chance zone described above, and the player is configured to make it difficult to grasp the number of reserved special figures. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters of "under super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the current state is in the variable probability state.

Here, in the super chance mode, when the double reach shown in FIG. 235 (a) (the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to the normal jackpot are in the ready state at the same time) is executed. In the embodiment, even in the variation performance executed in correspondence with the second special symbol variation, the double reach performance shown in FIG. 235(a) is configured to be executable. In other words, the variable performance corresponding to the second special pattern lottery in which the variable probability big win game is always executed when the big win is won, is constituted so as to be able to execute the double reach performance using the third pattern corresponding to the normal win.

With this configuration, even if the double reach performance shown in FIG. 235(a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily discriminate whether the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the double ready-to-win effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is shown in FIG.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the probability variable big winning game will always be executed when the special symbol lottery being executed has won the big winning. In addition, even when the double reach performance is executed as the variable performance corresponding to the first special pattern lottery, the game can be played while expecting the player to be promoted to the variable probability double reach on the way.

In the present embodiment, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach production being executed to the probability variable double reach production, a variable condition is set that is established when the variation mode of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one lap has passed). However, without being limited to this, for example, the variable condition that is established when the third symbol corresponding to the ready state as the third symbol variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 (the third symbol that becomes a big hit combination) passes through the ready reach effective line. may be set, or a variable condition may be set that is satisfied when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that the player can operate is a specific operation result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable when the variable condition is satisfied. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 235(a), blank patterns (represented by triangle marks in the drawing) are erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed in order from the left as the upper pattern row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed in order from the left as the lower pattern row Z3. Even in the case of such a constitution, the number of reach of the third pattern corresponding to the variable probability big win can be increased in the triple reach performance rather than the double reach performance, so that the player can be visually informed of the high possibility of winning the variable probability big win in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical idea may be applied to the variable performance executed in the normal state, for example, when the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach performance in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the ready-to-win state, the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state may be switched to the type of the third symbol to correspond to the probability variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the ready-to-win state may be increased. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting a more advantageous performance result to be provided until the variable performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, FIG. 236(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period out of the ending period of the variable jackpot game, and FIG. (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the variable probability jackpot game.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game (variable probability game) in which a variable probability state, which is a game state advantageous to a player, is likely to be set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to set a variable probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. Specifically, 17 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period for the probability variable jackpot, and 15 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period for the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when the variable probability jackpot game is executed, the variable probability state is not set unless the winning ball of the V winning device 2650 is allowed to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable big winning game, the probability variable state is not set after the probability variable big winning game is finished, but a time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set like the normal big winning game.

In this case, there is a problem that if the notification performance indicating the setting of the variable probability state is executed in the ending period of the variable probability jackpot game, the performance contents of the notification performance and the actually set game state are different, which makes the player feel dissatisfied. Furthermore, when the performance mode of the notification performance executed in the ending period (17 seconds) of the probability variable jackpot game is switched to the performance mode of the notification performance executed in the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, the length of the actual ending period and the performance period of the notification performance are different, and there is a problem that the notification performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the latter half period is set to be a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. Then, the effect mode of the notification effect to be executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236, when the normal jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, the character "chance mode 100 times" is displayed for the first half period (8 seconds), which suggests that the time saving state is set. As a game guidance mode for indicating that it is easy to win, a production mode (see FIG. 236(c)) in which characters of "win and super chance GET in chance mode" is displayed is executed.

On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, a production mode (see FIG. 236 (b)) is executed in which the characters "super chance mode 100 times" suggesting that the probability variable state is set are displayed in the first half period (10 seconds). d) is configured to execute cf.

In this embodiment, the effect mode during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be set in advance at the timing at which the jackpot game is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing executed during the jackpot game because it is not necessary to execute the processing for determining the performance mode of the notification performance each time during the jackpot game in which various control processing is executed.

Here, a case will be described in which the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the big winning game even though the variable probability big winning game is executed. In this case, out of the display modes shown in FIG. 236(b), a process of hiding the characters "super" and a process of switching the notification effect executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the normal winning game ending period (see FIG. 236(c)) are executed.

More specifically, as the display mode shown in FIG. 236(a), the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "SUPER" are displayed and the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "CHANCE MODE 100 times" are displayed are different, and it is possible to switch between the presence or absence of the display instruction for the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "SUPER" are displayed based on the determination result as to whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the ball can be made to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the period set with the same length as the second half period of the jackpot ending period, the presentation mode of the notification presentation can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is varied depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all the jackpot types without being limited to this. In addition, in this embodiment, the second half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all the jackpot types. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the first half period of the jackpot is the same length for the jackpot types A and B, and the second half period of the jackpots for the jackpot types B and C may be configured to have the same length.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ending period of different length is set according to the winning jackpot type, but without being limited to this, the length of the ending period may be changed according to the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this embodiment and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of production when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation production is executed is set as the variation production of the third symbol, and FIG.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 242, but in this embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern obtained by summing the basic time and the addition time is defined. A period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common variation pattern, and a period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific variation pattern.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, the period from when the ready-to-win state is displayed to when the third symbol is stop-displayed is configured to vary according to the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state. Then, the third pattern corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. By constructing in this way, the third pattern variation performance (the third pattern variation performance executed corresponding to the basic time) executed during a predetermined period after the third pattern starts to fluctuate can be shared.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237(a), in the case of the non-ready-to-win variation production, since the addition time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper symbol row Z1 is stop-displayed at the timing (for example, 5-second elapsed timing) when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third symbol variation production, and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stop-displayed in a stop display mode in which the reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later, the lottery result. The middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a stopped display mode indicating that the is out. After that, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is finally displayed after a stop display period (determined time) of 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 237(b), when the ready-to-win variation effect is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common variation pattern for 30 seconds, the effect mode is set until 5 seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state is reached. In other words, the effect mode from when the ready-to-win state is reached to when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one turn is set as the common variation pattern. After that, an effect mode (ready-to-win pattern, stop pattern) is set according to the added time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 238(a) shows the flow of the ending period targeting the normal jackpot, FIG. 238(b) shows the flow of the effect for the variable probability big win, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 238, in this embodiment, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot, and the ED period is set to 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the variable probability jackpot. The ending display mode is divided into the first half period and the second half period to be displayed (see FIG. 236).

In this embodiment, the performance mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, whether or not the V prize is won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start timing of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 245. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202 and a part of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 and a part of the ROM 222 and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242. FIG. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239(a). FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 239(a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja in place of the first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in place of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and a normal winning random number 10 table 202j in place of the second winning random number table 202b, in place of the first winning random number table 202a. c is different in that a jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db, and that the small hit random number table 202de is deleted. Furthermore, the illustration is omitted, but in the 10th embodiment of the book, in response to the fourth embodiment described above, the special random number counter C1 (update range "0-999") has the same function (update range "0-999") with the same functions instead of the first random number counter C1 per random number counter C1. Instead, only the update range is different, and the other is different in that it has an ordinary random number counter C5 (update range "0-299") with the same function. Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are attached and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, as described above, the names of the various counters are partially changed, but the basic functions are the same, so a detailed description thereof and the description of the various counters referred to in the various data tables defined in the ROM 202 will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 240(a), the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja will be described. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja. This special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja differs from the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) in that it defines the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined as winning according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, irrespective of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery is executed, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is defined as a value of "0 to 4" as a jackpot determination value (value determined as a big win in the special symbol lottery), and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is defined as a jackpot determination value of "0 to 19". is stipulated. That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special symbol low probability state is set, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/200, and even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state where the special symbol high probability state is set, the player wins the big win with a probability of about 1/50. In the present embodiment, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big hit is commonly defined for each special symbol type, but without being limited to this, a different value of the special winning random number counter C1 for each special symbol type may be defined as the big winning determination value, or the number of values of the special winning random number counter C1 serving as the big winning determination value may be varied for each special symbol type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value ("0 to 4") of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win when the special symbol low probability state is set is configured to be the value of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win even when the special symbol high probability state is set. By configuring in this way, in the first look-ahead process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process (see S1764 in FIG. 136) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special corresponding to the winning information It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information for winning a jackpot without executing a process of discriminating (predicting) the game state at the time when the symbol lottery is executed. In addition, without being limited to this, the contents of the special symbol big winning random number table 202ja may be defined so that at least part or all of the value of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big winning in the special symbol low probability state is not determined as a big winning in the special symbol high probability state. By configuring in this way, when the same value of the special winning random number counter C1 is obtained, the determination result can be varied according to the game state set when the big winning determination using the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act to acquire the value of the specific special winning random number counter C1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240(b), the contents defined in the normal winning random number 10 table 202jc will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal random number 10 table 202jc. As shown in FIG. 240(b), this normal winning random number 10 table 202jc defines normal winning random number counter C5 in the range of "0 to 2" in the case of normal symbol low probability state, and normal winning random number counter C5 in the range of "0 to 149" in the case of normal symbol high probability state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. Thereby, the execution probability of the game per normal pattern can be varied between the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, the probability variable state which is the high probability state of the normal pattern, and the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd will be described. FIG. 241(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd. This jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is a data table in which a determination value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 241 (a), in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd in the tenth embodiment, a special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 will be described. FIG. 241(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1. This special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 is a data table referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241 (b), in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 in the tenth embodiment, as the first special symbol (special figure 1) jackpot type, "jackpot A" ~ "jackpot B" two jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the special hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type. The ``jackpot A'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win A'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win A'' is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 7 rounds and a normal jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game is finished. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win B'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win B'' is 50% (50/100).

That is, the two types of jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but differ in the ease with which the ball passes through a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed in which the balls are likely to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, the "jackpot A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 will be described. FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2. This special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 is a data table referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 in the tenth embodiment, as the second special symbol (special figure 2) jackpot type, "jackpot C" ~ "jackpot E" three jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type. The ``jackpot C'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win C'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win C'' is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to "50" after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Out of 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win D'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win C'' is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". The ``jackpot E'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``big win E'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win E'' is 30% (30/100).

That is, three types of jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are all executed as variable jackpot games, but the numbers of rounds of the jackpot games are made different, and "jackpot E" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and "jackpot A" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As explained above, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variable probability big winning game is always executed, so that the game state set after the end of the big winning game is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery in which the variable probability big winning game is executed at a rate of 50%. In terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls obtainable during the jackpot game, the maximum obtainable number is larger in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum obtainable number is also smaller in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, the average number of prize balls that can be acquired is defined so that the number of the second special symbol lottery is larger.

Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls obtainable under the minimum conditions, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other respects. In this embodiment, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are defined, but without being limited to this, various jackpot types can be set based on the same technical concept as each jackpot type that can be set in each embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 242(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb. As shown in FIG. 242 (a), in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb, the normal 10 table 202jb1 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the state where the normal state is set, and the probability variation / time reduction 10 table 202jb2 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the state where the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set are defined.

First, the normal 10 table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 242(b). FIG. 242(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal ten table 202jb1. In this normal 10 table 202jb1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the win/loss determination result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating either a basic time of 30 seconds or an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in increments of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. For example, if the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", if it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", if it is "2", the addition time is "4 seconds", if "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds", and if it is "3". If the additional time is "5 seconds" or "4", the additional time is "5.5 seconds"; if the additional time is "5", the additional time is "6 seconds"; if the additional time is "6", the additional time is "6.5 seconds"; if "7" is "7 seconds"; If the additional time is "9 seconds" and "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds"; if "15", the additional time is "10 seconds"; if "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds";

Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice ramp control device 113, the variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the ready-to-win pattern (type of the third symbol) is set based on the information included in the addition command. Thus, even if the type of the third pattern of the middle pattern row Z2, which is first visible to the player in the ready-to-win state, is configured to always be the specific third pattern (in this embodiment, the third pattern to which the number 1 is added), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the additional time of 13 to 22 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the above-described normal pattern, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, when the number of seconds included in the addition command is "3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal ready-to-win effect (effect to stop display after the middle pattern row Z2 fluctuates about one turn) is "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super ready-to-win effect (effect to stop display after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about two times). ) is configured to run.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during the first predetermined period, and then the variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, the period in which the same performance mode is executed can be set based on the basic command (command including information indicating the basic time), and the variable performance after branching can be set based on the addition command (command including information indicating the addition time). Therefore, for example, even when the entire fluctuation time is the same, the voice lamp control device 113 side can easily set different fluctuation performances only by changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time in the fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the basic time (30 seconds) for executing normal reach and the basic time (30 seconds) for executing super reach are set to be the same, and the effect mode of ready reach effect is varied according to the length of the variable time set as the additional time. 12 seconds” may be selected.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an additional time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, an effect is executed in which the variable effect of the third symbol once in the ready-to-win state is switched to another variable effect. Therefore, even if the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, which is first visible to the player in the ready-to-reach condition, is always set to a specific third symbol (in this embodiment, the third symbol to which the number 1 is attached), the medium symbol row Z does not give the player a sense of incongruity during the variation. Since the display order of the third pattern of 2 can be changed corresponding to the third pattern to be finally stopped, there is no need to set the type of the third pattern to be in a ready-to-win state by varying the addition time like the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the loss is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the loss without entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, there is no need to set the addition time.

Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the variation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When this out of reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of 30 seconds of basic time and 3 to 22 seconds of additional time is output as a variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the above-described normal pattern, so detailed description will be omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is a loss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. When the result of the lottery is a loss, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed so that the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that makes a big win. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 side performs a correction process so that the third symbol shifted by one from the set content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is set. Thus, when the out-of-reach performance is executed, it is possible to easily set a performance mode in which the third pattern is stop-displayed (disappearance-stop display) in the vicinity of the third pattern that is the combination of the big win.

On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit/fail determination is a big win, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a variation time of 40 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command showing a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command of a combination of a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when the basic command indicating the basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, as shown in FIG. 233(a), an effect mode is set to stop display (temporary stop display) of the third symbol. Then, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is out of special), the third pattern is fixed and displayed as it is, and the variation performance is terminated.

On the other hand, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is special ready-to-win), as shown in FIG. 233(b) and FIG. A detailed effect mode of the variable effect in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239(b). FIG. 239(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 239(b), the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a game state storage area. 203g, time-saving counter 203h, variable probability counter 203ja, jackpot start flag 203jb, mid-jackpot flag 203jcc, variable probability setting flag 203jd, variable probability passage counter 203je, winning number counter 203jf, remaining ball timer flag 203jg, remaining ball timer 203jh, variable probability effective flag 203ji, variable probability effective timer 203jj, discharge number counter 203jk, other memory It has at least an area 203z.

Among the various configurations of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment, some configurations having the same names as those of the above-described embodiments are given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each value of a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the empty areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination of the special symbol lottery or the like is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, shift processing is performed to shift the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) having an area number smaller by 1.例文帳に追加In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db has four reserved areas like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. In this second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value and the like is the same as that of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C5. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area). That is, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main controller 110, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203dc is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the lottery for the winning of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, similarly to the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area with the area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203dd is incremented by one up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203dd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is changed, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the variable display reserved by the main controller 110. As a result, even if the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c1 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of holding balls of variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 receives the pending number of balls command for display for notifying the number of pending balls. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203de is incremented by one up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. Since this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has the same content as the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d used in the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variable probability counter 203ja is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case in which a high probability state of special symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the probability variable counter 203ja after the jackpot game ends (see S2602 in FIG. 253). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. Also, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a state where the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is set (see S622 in FIG. 248).

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set, based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is subtracted, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203ja becomes 0, the variable probability state ends and shifts to the time saving state. It may be configured to continue. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203ja.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203ja, only the condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203ja based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (variation) is set. . Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., special winning win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., special normal win winning), the value of the probability variable counter 203ja may be reduced, or the ball enters a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.). may be configured to subtract the value of the probability variable counter 203ja.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is configured to be decremented by one, but depending on the type of the satisfied end condition, a plurality of values of the variable probability counter 203ja may be collectively subtracted (for example, 2), or the value of the variable probability counter 203ja may be subtracted so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the variable probability counter 203ja. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the variable probability state may be varied according to the content of establishment of the conditions for which the variable probability state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The jackpot start flag 203jb is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203jb is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. The big win start flag 203jb is set to ON when the end timing of the fluctuation display indicating the big win comes. Also, the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S2403 in FIG. 251).

The jackpot flag 203jc is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. When this jackpot in progress flag 203jc is ON, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and when it is OFF, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203jc is set to ON at the same time as a jackpot (special game state) is started (see S2403 in FIG. 251) when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Then, in the special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 247), this jackpot in progress flag 203jc is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S601 in FIG. 247).

The variable probability setting flag 203jd is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not a ball enters (flows down) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific gate (passage of the variable probability switch provided in the specific gate), the variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715 in FIG. 254). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2605 in FIG. 253). The variable probability setting flag 203jd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

When the variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is turned off. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203m, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce damage on the side of the game parlor by discriminating fraud such as turning on only the variable probability setting flag 203jd while the power is turned off and turning on the power again.

The variable probability passage counter 203je is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (flowed down a specific gate) in one round (in this embodiment, 5 rounds of jackpot) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 2650a of the V winning device 2650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203je and the ejection number counter 203jk, which will be described later. This probability variable passing counter 203je is updated by adding one by one when the ball passes through the probability variable switch (falls down a specific gate). In addition, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the V winning device 2650 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that this probability variable passage counter 203je is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203jf is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 in one round in the jackpot game, and is updated by incrementing one by one based on detection of winning in the specific winning opening 2650a. On the other hand, when one round is finished, it is reset to "0" which is the initial value after it is determined whether or not the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) of the V winning device 2650 and the discharged number (the total value of the discharge number counter 203jk and the probability variable passage counter 203je) match. The value of the winning number counter 203jf is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203jg is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 2650a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 2650a is closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged has passed.

The remaining ball timer 203jh is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the winning balls to the V winning device 2650 has elapsed when one preset round is completed and the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be discharged from the V winning device 2650 is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh. When the remaining ball timer 203jh reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning balls to the V winning device 2650 and the number of discharged balls match. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to inform early that game balls are jammed in the V winning device 2650 .

When the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a special flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the variable probability setting flag 203jd may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The variable probability effective flag 203ji is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage (entrance) when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch (enters the V area) after the distribution member is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to a specific gate. When this variable probability effective flag 203ji is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch.

The variable probability valid timer 203jj is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203ji described above is set to ON. After the V role is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this probability variation valid timer 203jj, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the variable probability switch. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203jj is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the damage caused by illegally entering the V area to pass the variable probability switch, pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passing it through, or erroneously detecting that the game ball has passed through the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The discharged number counter 203jk is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This ejected number counter 203jk is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the ejected number.

Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245. FIG. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 243(a). FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, a normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja and a probability variable medium effect selection table 222jb are added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. Regarding the changes in the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b, the detailed description is omitted, but various values are changed in accordance with the changes in the main controller 110.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 244 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja. This normal special figure 2 performance selection table 222ja is a data table referred to when selecting the performance mode of the 3rd pattern when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the 2nd special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are defined corresponding to the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol lottery (result of determination of success or failure), the number of special figures 2 reserved, the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, the common out reach production is executed in correspondence with the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 233 (a)), and then the pseudo-variation production (see FIGS. 233 (b) to 234) is executed during the addition time (30 seconds) as the production content (production mode) selected by referring to the normal medium special 2 production selection table 222ja.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is in the range of "0 to 79", "pseudo 3 production" is defined as the variation pattern, and "special pseudo 2 production" is defined as the variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99", and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 2, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is "0 to 9 In the range of 9", ``pseudo 2 performance'' is defined as a variation pattern, and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 1, the value of the performance counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is defined in the range of ``0 to 89'', ``pseudo 1 performance'' as the variation pattern, and ``special pseudo 4 performance'' as the variation pattern in the range of ``90 to 99''.

In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0, ``special ending performance'' is set when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 1 to 4, and ``non-pseudo presentation'' is set when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0.例文帳に追加

If the lottery result is out, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of "0 to 99", and "pseudo 3 production" is defined as the variation pattern. In the case, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of ``0 to 99'', and the variation pattern is ``pseudo 1 production'', and when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, ``pseudo no production'' is defined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when setting the performance mode of the pseudo-variation performance of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the special figure 2 reserved number and the special figure 1 reserved number is determined, and the pseudo-variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily make the pseudo-variation performance executed during one special symbol variation period look like a variation performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Further, since the number of times of pseudo fluctuation executed in the pseudo fluctuation performance (the number of times of temporary stop of the third pattern) is set to correspond to the number of reserved special figures 2 already acquired, it can be made to think that all the reserved special figures 2 acquired during the normal figure per game executed in the normal state are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance of winning the jackpot is executed, the player can be made to think that he or she has won the jackpot as a result of acquiring many special 2 reserves during the normal game winning game executed in the normal state. In addition, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance of losing winning is executed, the fluctuation performance using the special figure 2 reservation is executed next (because the chance zone continues) after making the player think that the special figure 2 reservation has been completely consumed, so that the player can be provided with the performance with extraneousness.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the pseudo-variation performance (special pseudo-2 performance, pseudo-4 performance) set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the player can be interested in the number of times of pseudo-variation executed in the pseudo-variation performance and the number of special figures 2 reserved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the variable probability effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability effect selection table 222jb. The performance selection table 222jb during the probability variation is a data table referred to when setting the variation performance when the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state.

As shown in FIG. 245, different effects modes are defined according to the type of special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is defined as "variable single reach" in the range of "0 to 49", "double reach" in the range of "50 to 99", "double reach" in the case of a normal jackpot, and "non-reach" in the case of a deviation.

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is defined as "special double reach" in the range of "0 to 49", and "variable double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99". ' is defined as 'non-reach' in the range of '11-99'.

By configuring in this way, both when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the "double reach" (shown in FIG. 235 (a), the reach effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the normal hit are in the ready state) is executed. Therefore, when the "double reach" is executed for the player, the third symbol variation effect corresponding to any special symbol lottery is executed. can make it difficult to understand

Further, when ``special double reach'' is set, the performance mode of ``double reach'' is set first, and then the ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance mode is changed to ``variable double reach'' shown in FIG. 235(b). Therefore, even when "double reach" is executed corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be played while expecting to be promoted to "probability variable double reach" on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing of changing the performance mode of the ready-to-win performance is the timing when the middle pattern row Z2 makes one or two rounds, but the performance mode may be varied based on the timing when the player operates the operation button 22 without being limited to this.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the game flow in the tenth embodiment will be briefly described. FIG. 246 is a transition diagram showing the game flow in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 246, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to set three game states, namely, a normal state, a variable probability state, and a time saving state, as the game state. In the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery.

When a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/200) in a first special pattern lottery executed in a normal state, a normal jackpot game and a probability variable jackpot game are executed with a probability of 1/2, and when a ball flows down to a specific gate during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a probability variable state, and when a ball does not flow down to the specific gate, it shifts to a time-saving state.

The probability variable state is constituted so as to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times or a big win is won, and when the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times without winning the big prize during the probability variable state, the state shifts to the time saving state. This time saving state is configured to continue until 100 special pattern lotteries are executed after the end of the big win game, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big win game, the number of times of time saving is 100 times, and when the variable probability state is shifted to the time saving state, the number of times of time saving is 50 times.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255, the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, as described above, the lottery right for the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved) are both stored. In this point, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. A high-probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the big winning game by causing the ball to flow down to a specific gate arranged in the V winning device 2650 while the big winning game is being executed. As an end condition for ending the variable probability state which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition established when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the end condition established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is provided, which is different from the above-described embodiments.

Then, in order to configure the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described differences, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes a special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247), a normal symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249), a through-gate passage process (see S157 in FIG. 250), and a jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251). are doing. Other control contents are the same as any of the control processing contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 247, special symbol variation processing 10 (S154) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 10 (S154). This special symbol variation process 10 (S154) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

In the special symbol variation process 10 (S154), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S601). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203jc is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbols are in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

In the process of S601, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (during the jackpot game) is not being performed (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S602). The holding number N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (S605), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de changed by calculation is set (S606). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 corresponding to the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved ball number counters 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S606, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (S607). In the process of S607, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203db are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and the process proceeds to S608.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the number of times N1 of holding the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S204: No). 609).

In the processing of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S609: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S609: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 603dd is subtracted by 1 (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by calculation is set (S611). ). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 corresponding to the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved ball number counters 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S611, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted by the same method as the processing of S607 (S612), and the processing is shifted to the processing of S608. In the process of S608 executed after the process of S607 or S612, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S608), and this process ends. In this special symbol variation start process, similar to the special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 41) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above, a process for determining the lottery result of the special symbol and a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the same manner as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 41) are performed.

In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S614). In the processing of S614, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation start process (S608) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and thereafter updated (decremented) each time the process of S614 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S613 (S613: Yes), that is, when the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S614 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S615). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S608). When this special symbol variation start process (S608) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol big win according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol big winning, one of the big wins A to E is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 lights up a blue LED in the case of a big win A, a red LED in the case of a big win B, a green LED in the case of a big win C, and a blue LED and a green LED in the case of a big win D. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the processing of S615 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is started, it is determined whether the special pattern lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special pattern variation start processing is a special pattern jackpot (S616). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S616: Yes), a jackpot start flag 203jb is set to ON (S617), the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variable counter 203ja are cleared (set to 0) (S618), and the process proceeds to S619. When the jackpot start flag is set to ON by the processing of S617, when the jackpot control processing 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, S2401: Yes branch to set the opening command (S2402). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S616, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S616: No), the processes of S617 and S618 are skipped, the update process is executed (S620), and then the process proceeds to S619.

The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the contents of the update process (S620 in FIG. 247) executed in the special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S620). This update process (S620) is a process executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (when the fluctuation is stopped), and the remaining period of the period in which the variable probability state is continuously set or the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is updated.

When the update process (S620) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the present is a high probability state of the special symbol (S621), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (updated) (S622), and then the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update. is 0 (S623), and if it is determined to be 0 (S623: Yes), the time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. Also, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S621 (S621; No), the current is not in the high probability state of the special symbol, so the above-described S622 to S624 processing for updating the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is skipped and the process of S625 is performed.

Also, in the processing of S623, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is not 0, that is, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is greater than 0, and even if the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) continues, the processing of S624 is skipped and the processing of S625 is performed.

In the process of S625, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined to be greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S625: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S626), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S627). Umaai, who determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S627, sets the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S628), sets the value of the probability variation counter 203ja, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the current game state (S629), and ends this process. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S625 (S625: No), or when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 in the process of S627 (S627: No), the process proceeds to S629 as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) will be described. In this normal symbol variation processing 10 (S166), various processes related to normal symbol variation (lottery) (processing for executing normal symbol variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal symbol variation to be performed, processing for updating normal symbol variation during execution, processing for stopping normal symbol variation, processing for determining game content of normal symbol per game performed when the result of normal symbol lottery is winning) are executed, and the normal symbol of the first embodiment described above. The pattern variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is different in that the contents of the process of selecting the variation time of the normal symbol and the process of determining the game content of the normal per pattern game are partially changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) is executed, first, the same processes of S1101 to S1113 as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed. After that, it is determined by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h whether the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state) (S1161), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state) (S1161: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set to 3 seconds (S1162), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1161 that it is not in the time saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S1161: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S1163), and this process ends.

In addition, the processing of S1115 to S1118, which is the same as the above-described normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48), is performed, and the current game state is determined by referring to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S1118), and when it is determined that it is during time reduction (high probability state of normal symbols) (S1118: Yes), the game content of the game per normal symbol. , the game content (opening action) is set such that the opening time of the electric accessary 640 is 1 second×2 times (S1165), the process of S1121 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) in the processing of S1118 (S1118: No), as the game content of the game per normal pattern, the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is set to 5 seconds x 1 game content (opening operation) (S1164), the processing of S1121 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the low probability state of normal symbols has a lower probability of winning of normal symbols than the high probability state of normal symbols (see FIG. 240(b)), and although the variation time of normal symbols is set to be long, the period in which the electric accessory 640 is opened in the normal symbol winning game executed when winning is configured to be longer. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) when winning the normal pattern with a low probability. In addition, since it is possible to easily acquire the upper limit number (four) of the special figure 2 reserve during one normal figure per game, the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed a plurality of times in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)), and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 250, the contents of the through gate passage processing (see S157) will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S157). This through-gate passing process (see S157) is different from the through-gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the above-described first embodiment, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual success/failure determination is executed (before the success/failure determination (see S1111) is performed in the normal symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249)), a process for obtaining the lottery result (result of success/failure determination) in advance. are the same except for the addition of The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the through gate passage processing (see S157) is executed, first, the same processing of S1201 to S1205 as the through gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and then the lottery result is acquired in advance based on the normal winning random number 10 table 202jc (S1211), and the normal drawing winning information command including the normal winning determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the processing of S1211) is issued. It sets (S1212) and terminates this processing.

The normal figure winning information command set in the process of S1212 is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each embodiment described above. By constructing in this way, it is possible to discriminate in advance the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal symbol lottery right, and to execute the performance based on the preliminary determination result.

Specifically, in a state in which a chance zone is set, i.e., in a state in which a second special symbol lottery is executed based on execution of a normal pattern winning game in a normal state, when information indicating winning of a normal pattern is included in a normal pattern prize winning information command received, performance to continue the chance zone until the next normal pattern winning game is executed can be executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is all finished and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal pattern lottery game is executed, the production mode of the variable production executed in response to the first special symbol lottery is not the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the production mode of horizontally varying the third symbol shown in FIG. 231 (b)), but the production mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, shown in FIG. 232 (b). It is preferable to configure so that a production mode in which the third pattern is changed in the vertical direction) is set. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal pattern is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the chance zone is not finished even though the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can grasp that the next general pattern winning game will be executed soon, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo-variable performance of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is executed. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone will be extended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074) will be described. FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074). This jackpot control process 10 (S1074) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 2650a.

In the jackpot control process 10 (S1074), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203jb is ON (S2401). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2402), the jackpot start flag 203jb is turned off, the jackpot medium flag 203jc is turned on (S2403), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is off (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (that is, whether the jackpot flag 203jc is on) (S2404). In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203jc is off) (S2404: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2404, if it is determined that the jackpot is currently in progress (the jackpot flag 203jc is ON) (S2404: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S2405).

In the process of S2405, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2405: Yes), a big win operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds is executed (S2406), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2405: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S2407). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S2407: Yes), an ending command is set (S2408), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect (see FIG. 236) indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2407, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S2407: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2409, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (S2409: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S2410), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2409, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S2409: No), winning processing for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 2650a is executed (S2411), abnormal processing is performed for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning opening 2650a was discharged normally (S2412), and then this processing ends. The details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2406) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S2406). This jackpot action setting process (S2406) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning port 2650a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 252) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start the fifth round (S2501). In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the 5th round (S2501: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V role (flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid)) 65k is set (S2502), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 2650a corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S2503).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (fifth round) is changed according to the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), as the fifth round round game, the round game that operates the V accessories so that the ball can easily flow down to a specific gate is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the balls flowing down to a specific gate only for a specific period of the long-running big winning game, so that the player can execute the game during the big winning game without losing concentration.

In this embodiment, when the fifth round of the variable probability jackpot game is executed, the characters "Aim for V" are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance notification mode for indicating to the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate in the long-running jackpot game. Further, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific gate, the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a guide notification mode for guiding that the ball has flowed down the specific gate. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.

Note that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of conditions. For example, based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate, it is preferable to change the character color of "Aim for the V", change the size of the display area, or change the characters to emphasize the content (for example, "Aim for the V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific gate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by varying the operation pattern of the V role object for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the V winning device 2650, it is possible to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to do so. It may be configured such that a period in which it is easy and a period in which it is difficult to set can be set. As a result, it is possible to standardize the operation pattern of the V role product, thereby making it difficult for the V role product to break down.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the current round is not the fifth round (S2501: No), the processing of S2502 and S2503 is skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2504), and the processing proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2505), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252), it is possible to open the specific prize winning opening 2650a in each round of the jackpot, and to set the passage through the special discharge channel 2665e2 in the fifth round. As a result, in the big hits A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific gate (variable probability switch 2665e3) only by the player shooting the ball in the fifth round, so that the variable probability state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) can be set after the end of the big win.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S2410) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S2410). This jackpot end process (S2410) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S2410), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203jd is ON (S2601). In the processing of S2601, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203jd is on (S2601: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through a specific heto (variable probability switch 2650e3) during the big hit. On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if the variable probability setting flag 203jd is off (S2601: No), the process of S2602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2603.

In the process of S2603, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2603), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203ja (S2604). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203jc and the variable probability setting flag 203jd are set to OFF (S2605), and the process ends.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 253), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball passes through the specific gate (probability variable switch 2665e3) during the jackpot game.

Next, details of the winning process (S2411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S2411). This winning process (S2411) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 2650a.

In the winning process (S2411), first, it is determined whether or not the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 2650a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S2701, if it is not the round effective period (S2701: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2701, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 2650a is detected (S2702). A winning command indicating that a winning to 650a has been detected is set (S2704), and the process proceeds to S2705. On the other hand, in the process of S2702, if winning to the specific winning hole 2650a is not detected (S2702: No), the processes of S2703 and S2704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2705.

In the processing of S2705, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705). On the other hand, in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 9 or less (S2705: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2706), and if the round time has elapsed (S2706: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. In addition, in the process of S2706, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round game of this big win. In this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot and the number of rounds, the end condition of the round game is established by the same elapsed round time and the number of prizes won.

In the process of S2707, closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2707), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set is set (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 2650a this time is based on the end of 5 rounds (S2709), and if it is determined that it is the closure based on the end of 5 rounds (S2709: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is set to off (S2710), and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning hole 2650a this time is due to the completion of rounds other than 5 rounds (S2709: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, so the process of S2710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2711, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg, the variable probability effective flag 203ji, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the process of S2705 (S2705: No), and when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S2706 (S2706: No), the processes of S2707 to S2711 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2712, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is ON (S2712), and if the round end flag 203 is OFF (S2712: No), the process proceeds to S2713. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203 is ON in the process of S2712 (S2712: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203ji is ON (S2716). In the processing of S2716, if the variable probability effective flag 203ji is off (S2716: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203ji is ON (S2716: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj (S2717), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2718). Then, if the value of the variable probability valid timer 203jj is not the upper limit value (S2718: No), the process proceeds to S2713, and the variable probability switch 2665e3 is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203jd. As a result, if the variable probability valid timer 203jj is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being imparted by illegally passing the ball through the variable probability switch 2665e3.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2718: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203ji and the round end flag 203 are set to OFF (S2719), the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj is reset (S2720), and this processing ends.

Also, in the processing of S2713, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3 (S2713), and if the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3 (S2713: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3 (S2713: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203je (S2714), the variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715), and the process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S2412) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S2412). This abnormality process (S2412) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, it is a process for determining whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 2650a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality process (S2412), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2801). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (see FIG. 196) (S2802).

In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 2650e4 (S2802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203jk (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: No), the process of S2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2804.

In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is ON (S2804). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is off (S2804: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is updated by adding 1 (S2805). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passing counter 203je and the value of the discharge number counter 203jk) matches the number of prizes won (the value of the prize number counter 203jf) (S2807).

In the processing of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S2807: No), an error command is set (S2808), and the process proceeds to S2809. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge channel 2650e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge channel 2650e2 and passing through the variable probability switch 2650e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S2807: Yes), the process of S2808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2809. In the process of S2809, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to OFF (S2809), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is reset (S2810). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203jf, the discharge number counter 203jk, and the variable probability passing counter 203je are reset (S2811), and the process is terminated.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 255), it is possible to quickly detect and notify the occurrence of a problem such as ball clogging occurring inside the V winning device 2650 and the ball entering the specific winning hole 2650a not being discharged normally.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 263, the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. The tenth embodiment differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that command determination processing 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) is performed in place of command determination processing 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183), and variable display setting processing 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) is performed in place of variable display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187). The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 256, the contents of the command determination process 10 (see S4193) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 10 (see S4193). When the command determination process 10 (see S4193) is executed, the same processes of S4231 to S4208 as the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) of the seventh embodiment are executed.

Then, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S4208: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2) and normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223ja (S4291), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4208: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command (winning information command) has been received (S4210). Details of the winning command process 10 (S4292) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command (winning information command) has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S4293). If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4293: No), then it is determined whether or not the general map related command has been received (S4216). In addition, the detailed description of the normal figure related process 10 (S4295) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4216, if it is determined that the command related to the general pattern is not received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot is received (S4296), and if it is determined that the command is received (S4296: Yes), the processing 10 related to the jackpot is executed (S4297), and then this processing is terminated. A detailed description of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4296: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4220), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the contents of the winning command process 10 (see S4292) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning command process 10 (S4292). This winning command process 10 (S4292) is executed when a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, a normal symbol lottery winning information command set when the lottery right for the normal symbol lottery is acquired, or a V winning command set when the ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during the jackpot game is received.

When the winning command process 10 (S4292) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). (S4442) If it is determined that there is winning information (S4442: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal patterns (S4443).

Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high probability state of the normal pattern, that is, it is the normal state (S4443: No), it is a state in which the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins the normal pattern is obtained in the normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set. When the display command is set in the process of S4444, the display control device 114 is notified with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control processing in other audio lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect (for example, an effect to encourage whether or not the small display region Dm3 is formed in the main display region Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. be done.

In the present embodiment, the above-described suggestive effect is executed only when the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired in the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and the above-described suggestive effect may be executed even when it is determined that the prize information indicating the specific lost winning is included in the normal pattern winning information command. As a result, it is possible to set the case where the normal pattern winning game is executed and the case where it is not executed when the suggestion performance is executed, so that the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery right for the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, the suggestive effect is configured to be executed. In addition to this configuration, the timing at which the normal pattern lottery is actually executed based on the special symbol lottery being executed or the preliminary determination result of the special pattern lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, that is, the timing at which the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information command for normal pattern indicating winning per normal pattern is executed (per normal pattern). A pre-game state process for determining whether or not the game state at the timing at which the game is executed is the normal state may be executed, and when it is determined that the game state is the normal state, the above-described suggestive performance may be executed. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description continues. In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the winning information command for the normal figure is not received (S4441: No), if it is determined that there is no hit information in the process of S4442 (S4442: No), If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in the process of S4443 (S4443: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4445.

In the processing of S4445, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2791) set when the ball flows down to the variable probability switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S2411 in FIG. 254)) (S4445), and if it is a V winning command (S4445: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4446), and other processing is performed. is executed (S4412), and the process ends. Also, in the process of S4445, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4445: No), the process of S4446 is skipped, the process of S4412 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the general pattern related process 10 (S4295) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general-purpose map related process 10 (S4295). This general pattern related process 10 (S4295) is a process executed when a general pattern variation pattern command indicating that a normal pattern lottery is executed, a general pattern per start command indicating that a general pattern per game is started, and a general pattern per end command indicating the end of a general pattern per game are received from the main control device 110.

When the general pattern related process 10 (S4295) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general pattern variation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4701: Yes), the normal pattern variation start command for display is set (S4702), and then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether it is a high probability state of the normal pattern (S4781). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4781: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4781: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command received this time is a normal pattern lottery corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has been won per normal pattern (S4782). End the process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal pattern win is won (S4782: Yes), the long open pattern is executed for the normal pattern per variation, so a display command indicating waiting for the long open is set (S4783), and this processing is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4783, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will soon be set.

In the present embodiment, a processing form that displays the display form (display form that forms a small display area DM3) shown in FIG. 231 (B) based on whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation fluctuates, but is not limited to this, and a specific outbreak fluctuation (for example, the same fluctuation time is the same fluctuation time. The display form (display form that forms a small display area DM3) may be displayed in FIG.

Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied according to the content of the variation performance (third symbol variation performance) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. For example, when the variation performance with high expectation for big win (for example, ready-to-win performance) is executed in the third symbol variation performance, the display content of the small display region Dm3 may be made smaller than when the variation performance with high expectation for big win (for example, ready-to-win performance) is not executed. Good. In this way, by variably controlling the display contents by giving a relationship between the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the useless supply of a lot of game information and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. If it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703), and if it is determined that the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4784), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4784: No) ), set a display command indicating that the long opening is in progress (S4785), and terminate this process. By setting the display command in the process of S4785, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the long open win is being executed. Moreover, in the process of S4784, when it discriminate|determines that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4784: Yes), the process of S4785 is skipped and this process is complete|finished.

In the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the normal pattern per start command is not received (S4703: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per end command is received (S4709), if it is determined that it is received (S4709: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4786), and if it is not greater (S4786: No), then the normal symbol retention ball counter It is determined whether the value of 223ja is 1 or more (S4787), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S4787: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S4788). (S4790), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4786 to S4788, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297). In the jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297), the third symbol display device 81 executes the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4981), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4981: Yes), an ending display mode indicating entry into the chance mode (a time-saving state is set) is set (S4982), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4981: No), that is, when it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, an ending display mode indicating entry into a super chance mode (variable probability state is set) is set (S4983), and this processing is terminated.

That is, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 241, the ending period of different length is set according to the set jackpot type (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is started. By configuring in this way, various types of control (variable display control of the jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control to display information for indicating the number of round games being played), prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the V prize winning device 2650 during the jackpot game) are frequently performed Set the ending display mode during the jackpot game period. Since there is no need to execute display control for the display control, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the processing for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, the ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation of the special symbols in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, or may be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 which is executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period.

In the processing of S4901, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4913). When it is determined that there are five rounds (V round) (S4984: Yes), a display command for guiding V winning is set (S4985), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4984 that the current round number is not 5 rounds (V round), that is, if it is determined that a round game other than the 5th round will be started (S4984: No), this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4986). Also, when it is determined that the ending command is not received in the processing of S4986 (S4986: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command is received (S4915), and when it is determined that it is received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end processing is executed (S4916), and then this processing is finished. Also, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is not received in the process of S4915 (S4915: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, the processing of ending processing 10 (S4987) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending process 10 (S4987). This ending process 10 (S4987) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the above-described jackpot related process 10 (see S4297 in FIG. 259), and is a process for finally determining the ending display mode executed during the ending period.

When the ending process 10 (S4987) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4991: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to OFF (S4992), execution of the ending display corresponding to the already set ending display mode is set (S4995), and this process is terminated. . Also, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223jc is not set to ON in the processing of S4991 (S4991: No), it is determined whether the current big win is a variable probability big win (S4993), and when it is determined that it is not a variable probability big win (it is a normal big win) (S4993: No), the process proceeds to S4995 as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4993, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot (S4993: Yes), out of the ending period, set a display switching command for switching the display mode of the second half period (7 seconds) (S4994), and shift to the processing of S4995.

When the display switching command is set in the process of S4994, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set corresponding to the setting of the variable probability state in advance (see FIG. 236(d)) is executed to the display mode corresponding to the time saving state being set (see FIG. 236(c)). In this embodiment, the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183). This variable display setting process 10 (S4183) differs from the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5251) is executed instead of the effect mode setting process (S5232), and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237). Another difference is that the process of subtracting the value of the fluctuation number counter (S5231 and S5235 in FIG. 187) is eliminated. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) will be described. Figure 262 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing 10S (S5251). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) is executed when setting the variable effect of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261), and the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the set game state is executed.

When the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variable state based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S8251). If it is determined that it is not a probability variable state (normal state, time saving state) (S8251: No), the production mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, the production mode that stops without reaching the reach after the 3rd design variation is started, or the production mode from the start of the 3rd design variation to the reach state and 5 seconds), that is, the period in which a common production mode can be executed regardless of the stop design of the 3rd design. The corresponding effect mode is determined (S8252), and then the effect mode corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, the effect mode corresponding to the period until the third symbol is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds have elapsed since the ready-to-win state) is determined (S8253), and the process proceeds to the process of S8257 described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S8251, if it is determined that the variable probability state (S8251: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S8254), and the basic variation time (basic time) is determined to be 30 seconds (S8255). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242(c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is always selected when the jackpot is won, and the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is selected in about 90% of the cases when the winning is lost.

In the processing of S8255, when it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S8255: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the probability variable performance selection table 222jb (S8256), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8257), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8255: No), the above-described S8252 and S8253 processes are executed, then S8257 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) will be described. Figure 263 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing 10 (S5252). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed when setting the variable effect of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261), and the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the set game state is executed.

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S8261), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S8261: Yes), the command for display indicating entering the chance zone is set (S8262), then the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S8263), and the normal special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja is set. Based on this, an effect mode is determined (S8264), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8261, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S8261: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probability variable state (S8266), and if it is determined that it is not in the probability variable state (S8266: No), the production mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, the production mode to stop without reaching the reach after the third symbol variation is started, or the third A production mode corresponding to a period during which a common production mode can be executed regardless of the stop pattern of the third symbol (S8267), and then a production mode corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, a production mode corresponding to the period until the third symbol is stopped and displayed after five seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state), that is, the stop symbol of the third symbol. The effect mode of the period to be varied is determined (S8268), the process proceeds to the above-described S8265 process, and then the process ends.

Also, in the process of S8266, if it is determined that the variable probability state (S8266: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S8269), and the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds or not is determined (S8270). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242(c), when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is selected with a probability of about 25% when the jackpot is won and about 4% when the miss is won.

In the processing of S8270, when it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S8270: Yes), the performance mode (details of performance) is determined based on the probability variable performance selection table 222jb (S8271), the variation pattern command for display indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8265), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8270: No), the above-described S8267 and S8268 processes are executed, then S8265 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed in duplicate (in parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time saving state, variable probability state) is set rather than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state), it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In addition, it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. That is, when the game is played in the normal state which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. By constructing in this manner, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the game state to be set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting the game state with a high degree of advantage to be set.

In addition, when winning is won in a normal pattern lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of normal patterns is set, a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery even in a normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player who is playing in the normal state can be made to execute a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot winning and a game aiming for a winning lottery in the normal symbol lottery, and early boredom of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be varied based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol stored, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as a performance mode of the special figure 2 variation performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-loss variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a win is performed in the first half period of the variation performance, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to perform a pseudo-hit variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, and the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation performance. The number of times is configured to be variable corresponding to the number of special figures 2 pending. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big win. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery is conducted a plurality of times.

As a result, even when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special pattern lottery to be executed first among a plurality of special figure 2 reservations obtained during the normal pattern per game, the player can be made to think that he or she has won the big prize because the plurality of special figure 2 reservations are obtained during the normal pattern per game, so that the player can play the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation more enthusiastically during the normal pattern per game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved number in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 0, as the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance, the variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the pseudo repetition of the special figure 2 variation performance in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variable performance imitating the special figure 1 variable performance is executed, the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, so that the unexpected variable performance can be executed for the player.

In the present embodiment, when a variable probability jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as a performance mode of the notification performance (at the start of the jackpot game), and immediately before the notification performance is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the performance mode of the notification performance based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, and when the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the preset performance is performed. The notification effect of the mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball does not flow down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and the variable probability jackpot advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, there is a problem that if the performance mode of the jackpot ending period is simply changed to the performance mode executed in the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification performance is executed during the ending period. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode which is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game is made in advance, it is necessary to store image data (performance data) for the performance mode in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the normal win game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification performance that does not give a sense of incompatibility to a player without providing a special performance mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the variable probability big winning game.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, so that the effect mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game is switched and set. The notification performance executed for a period may be executed, or the round performance executed during the final round period of the big winning game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the big win ending period is set, and then the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual big winning ending period by executing the notification performance.

Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which a ball flowing down the right area enters the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the above-described left area, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state and whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the same privilege is provided whether the player executes the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be bilaterally symmetrical. However, the configuration is not limited to this. The ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game, so that the left-handed game is more difficult to acquire prize balls than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is more likely to acquire prize balls than the left-handed game, but it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, i.e., during the execution of the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method, and in the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (the game during the time-saving state or the probability variable state), the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the case where the command for the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning to the special figure entrance 64 is suspended up to 4 times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to 1 time, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to this. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the special figure entrance 64 may be indicated by numbers in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the area divided into four.

Further, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling patterns as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying patterns in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but includes, for example, a performance display in which one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern, by variously displaying actions or changing displays. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, each display mode may be set by using common image data of the display control device 114, for example, so that the player can hardly distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. Moreover, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state. is executed, and in the case of the time-saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed, or a left-handed game may be executed during the time-saving state and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed when any game state is set or when the jackpot game is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means is determined to have been operated by the player by pressing the button. or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as an effect operation means for changing the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal capable of inputting an output signal from the frame button 22) and outputting to the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of operation means for performance are provided, output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of operation means for performance can be centrally managed, so that the mode of performance for the player's operation of the operation means for performance can be set smoothly.

In addition, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the switching button group 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game per character is provided, and the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) are provided. 22c may be configured to be executed not by the main controller 110 but by the audio lamp controller 113 side.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 296. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above facilitates the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol with a high probability of small winning by shifting to the latent state, and forms a state in which a game ball enters the right variable winning device 1650 to frequently obtain a chance to win a prize ball. In other words, it is constructed so as to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without winning the jackpot.

In addition to this, in the eleventh embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the combination (setting) of the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (variable probability state) is configured to be variable. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, six types of combinations (settings) are defined as combinations (settings) of the jackpot probability (see FIG. 269(a)). The higher the jackpot probability is set (higher setting), the easier it is to win the jackpot in both the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) and the latent state (high probability state of special symbols). On the other hand, the lower the probability of big win (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period (easier to generate addiction). That is, the game properties (the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period, and the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to be continued for a relatively long period) can be differentiated according to the big win probability (probability), so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, that the main controller 110 is provided with various operation means (setting keys 110b and setting change switches 110c) for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 (combination of jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state and the low-probability state). The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the seventh embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 264, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 264, the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) only in that a special figure 1 winning device 1640 is provided below the central first ball entrance 64c to be opened when a small win is obtained in the first special symbol lottery. In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, a specification is adopted in which a small win can be won not only in the lottery of the second special symbol but also in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the type of the winning device that is opened (allows ball entry) when the small win is won is differentiated according to the type of the special symbol.

This special figure 1 winning device 1640 includes at least a special figure 1 winning opening 1640a into which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a, and a special figure 1 small winning solenoid (not shown) for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. This special figure 1 winning device 1640 is normally maintained in a closed state in which the opening/closing plate completely covers the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a, making it difficult for game balls to enter the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a (closing the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a). When the lottery of the first special pattern results in a small win, the solenoid for the special figure 1 small win is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front lower side to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball easily wins a prize for the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 264, the special figure 1 winning device 1640 has the central first ball entrance 64c arranged vertically above it, and the upper right direction and the upper left direction in the front view are blocked by the game nail. That is, the small hit of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment is not provided for the player to win the prize ball, but is provided to forcibly end (discard) the long variation of the second special symbol by the small hit of the first special symbol when the second special symbol lottery is executed due to intentional or mistaken hitting to the right in the normal state. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for one of the special symbols becomes a big win or a small win, if the variation display of the other special symbol is being executed when the variation display of the big win or the small win is stopped, the variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In other words, even if the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 645 by hitting to the right and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in normal times, and the second special symbol is long-varied (variation display for 600 seconds) is executed, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by entering the game ball into the first center ball entrance 64c by hitting to the left after that. It is possible to forcibly end (discard) the long variation of the second special symbol by winning the election. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation of the special symbol on the side that is likely to be executed for each game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various operation means for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 265 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the setting value display device 110a capable of displaying the setting value to the main control device 110, the setting key 110b capable of switching between a state of accepting the setting change operation (and the setting confirmation operation) and a state of not accepting it (normal game state), and in the state of accepting the setting change operation (setting change state), the operator (for example, the staff of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed) operates in response to the operation. A setting change mechanism is provided which comprises at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing setting values of the cock machine 10. FIG. A setting change method and a setting confirmation method using this setting change mechanism will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

First, with reference to FIGS. 266(a) to (d), the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIGS. 266(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, with the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 turned off, rotate the setting key 110b clockwise to turn it to the ON position (see FIG. 266(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 first. Next, while turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 266(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state. In the setting change state, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display content makes it possible for the operator (for example, a hall clerk) to easily understand that the setting change state has been normally entered.

When the setting change state is entered, the set value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 266(c)). In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, six types of setting values, ie, setting values 1 to 6, are provided. That is, setting 1 has the lowest jackpot probability (for example, 1/320 in a low probability state, and 1/102 in a high probability (variable probability) state), and setting 6 has the highest jackpot probability (for example, 1/220 in a low probability state and 1/70 in a high probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed in the order of 1→2→ . . . →6 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed. Further, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the setting value is 6, the setting value is returned to 1. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. Note that FIG. 226(c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the set value is set to "5". As shown in FIG. 226(c), when the set value is switched to 5 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "5" indicating the setting 5 is displayed for the last digit on the set value display device 110a.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting key 110b is turned counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position, thereby terminating the setting change state and shifting to a normal game state (see FIG. 266(d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key part can be inserted into the keyhole only when an operator (for example, a hall clerk) performs a setting change operation, and the key part can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized players from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, so that it is possible to prevent the hall from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

Next, referring to FIGS. 266(e) to 266(g), a procedure for setting confirmation (setting confirmation operation) will be described. In order to confirm the setting, first, the setting key 110b is turned to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as in the setting change operation (see FIG. 266(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while it is in the off state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 266(f)). When the setting confirmation state is entered, the currently set values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in FIG. 266(f) shows a state in which "5" is set as the set value. When the confirmation of the settings by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to a state in which the normal game can be played (see FIG. 266(g)).

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting may be switched in the order of 1→2→ . Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out from the keyhole portion to restore the normal game state. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the transition of the effect mode when the setting change operation is terminated and the normal game is enabled in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, an effect that can suggest to the player the set value set by the setting change operation can be executed. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, only during the period from the setting change until the jackpot is won for the first time, every time a specific variation pattern is selected, the setting suggesting performance suggesting the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

In this setting suggestion performance, the left pattern row and the right pattern row are stop-displayed with the third symbols attached with the same numbers, and the performance of finally losing (so-called reach-off performance) is executed, and the set value is suggested to the player by the numbers of the left and right third patterns stopped when the ready-to-win occurs. More specifically, the 1-symbol ready-to-win (ready-to-win effect in which the third pattern with the numbers "1" attached to the left and right is stopped and displayed) is highly likely to be selected when "1" is set as the setting value, the 2-symbol ready-to-win is highly likely to be selected when the setting value is "2", the 3-symbol ready-to-win is highly likely to be selected when the setting value is "3", and the 4-symbol ready to be selected is "3" as the setting value. The possibility of selection is high when 4" to "6" are set, the possibility of selection of the 5-pattern reach is high when ``5'' or ``6'' is set as the set value, and the possibility of selection of the 6-pattern reach is increased when ``6'' is set as the set value. In addition, the ready-to-win with "9" symbols is configured to be selected only when "6" is set as the set value. On the other hand, the reach of 8 symbols is configured such that the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of being selected.

FIG. 267 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode after the setting change operation in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 267, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting change operation is completed, the normal performance mode is executed over the variable display based on the lottery of special symbols for 49 times, and the setting suggestion performance is executed in the 50th variable display. Then, in the 51st to 99th variable display, the normal effect mode is executed, and in the 100th variable display, the setting suggesting effect is executed. After that, the setting suggesting effect is executed every time the number of times of variable display becomes a multiple of 50 until the jackpot is won for the first time. In the eleventh embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether or not it is a variation pattern for which the setting suggestion effect should be set, depending on the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272(b), but in the eleventh embodiment, when power is turned on with RAM clear 122, the variation pattern scenario is set such that a special variation type (outlier special reach variation) that is not normally selected is selected each time the number of variations after power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50. On the side of the voice lamp control device 113, only when a deviation special reach variation is notified as a variation pattern command, the performance mode of setting suggestion performance is determined and the variation pattern performance of the determined performance mode is executed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to keep track of whether or not a setting change (power-on accompanied by operation of the RAM clear switch 122) has been executed in the audio lamp control device 113, the number of fluctuations after power-on, and the like, so the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

After the setting is changed, until the jackpot is won for the first time, the player is made to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 that has not won the big win even once by executing the setting suggesting performance every time the lottery of the special pattern is executed, and the player can be motivated to continue the game depending on the presence or absence of the setting suggesting performance and its contents. More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 where the result of the previous day is bad (the result is a low jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of big wins), when the setting suggestion performance can be confirmed, the player can be expected to expect that the setting value has been changed to an advantageous set value, so that the player can be made to want to continue the game at the pachinko machine 10 where the setting suggestion performance has been confirmed. In addition, for example, when the setting suggestive effect cannot be confirmed in the pachinko machine 10 where the previous day's result is good (the result is a high jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games played and the number of big wins), the player can be convinced that the settings of the previous day have not been changed, so that the player can continue the game in anticipation of a good result similar to that of the previous day. Furthermore, in the setting suggesting effect, when the effect in which the high setting can be expected is executed, the game can be continued with a stronger expectation of the high setting. In addition, even when a big win is achieved before the execution of the setting suggesting performance (before the lottery of special symbols is executed 50 times), the player can be made to think that winning within 50 times is more likely to occur as the setting is higher, so that the player can be made to continue the game.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, until the first big win is won, the player's motivation for playing the game can be enhanced by executing an effect capable of suggesting a specific element (set value) relating to the advantage of the pachinko machine 10 each time a special pattern lottery is executed for a specific number of times (50 times). As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10, especially in a state in which the jackpot has not been won.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 268(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 268(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with the first per random number 11 table 202ma instead of the first per random number 7 table 202fa in place of the first per random number 7 table 202fa with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)). The difference is that a jackpot type selection 11 table 202md is provided instead of 02fd, a variation pattern selection 11 table 202me is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and a variation pattern scenario table 202mf is added. The variation pattern scenario table 202mf is a data table that is referenced to determine which variation pattern table to refer to and select a variation pattern (variation time) from among the four variation pattern tables (normal 11 table 202me1, time saving/probability variation 11 table 202me2, latency 11 table 202me3, RAM clear time table 202me4) defined in the variation pattern 11 table 202me.

First, with reference to FIG. 269(a), details of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 269(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 269(a), in the first winning random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment, the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as big hits is defined in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the set value "1" (setting 1) is defined in association with "0 to 204" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1, and the setting value "2" (setting 2) is defined in association with "0 to 217" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1, and the set value "3" (setting For 3), the counter value (random value) range of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to be "0 to 233", the setting value "4" (setting 4) is defined to be the counter value (random value) range of the first winning random number counter C1 "0 to 251", and the setting value "5" (setting 5) is defined to be the counter value (random value) range of the first winning random number counter C1 "0 to 272". The set value "6" (setting 6) is defined in association with "0 to 297" as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first hit random number counter C1. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the possible range of the first winning random number counter C1 is expanded to "0 to 65535". Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state is 1/320 (205/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/301 (218/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/280 (234/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/260 (252/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/240. (273/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/220 (298/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(a), in the high-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 643" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 1, "0 to 686" is defined in correspondence with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 to setting 2, and "0" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 3. "0 to 735" is defined in association with setting 4, "0 to 791" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 4, "0 to 857" is defined in association with setting 5 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 935" is defined in association with setting value 6 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. are For this reason, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is 1/102 (644/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/95 (686/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/89 (736/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/82 (792/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/76 (858 /65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/70 (936/65536). The ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, as a whole, the higher the setting, the higher the degree of advantage for the player. That is, setting 6 is most advantageous for the player, and setting 1 is most disadvantageous. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of a big win, so the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the big win itself increases, and even if the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small win during the latent state is reduced, the higher the setting, the higher the total advantage. That is, a low setting (for example, setting 1) tends to be disadvantageous to the player as the game is continued, so that it becomes a game property of a short-time game depending on how many prize balls can be obtained in the latent state of 1 (how many times a lottery of special symbols can be executed without winning a big win).

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to set the setting value to 1 out of 6 stages of setting values from 1 to 6, and the higher the setting, the higher the probability of the jackpot in the low-probability state and high-probability (variable probability) state. Therefore, the higher setting makes it difficult to continue the disadvantageous normal state for a long period of time (hardly addiction occurs), while the most advantageous latent state tends to end in a relatively short period of time (other game state is easily set by winning a jackpot in the latent state). Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbols is executed in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state, a small win is won with a high probability and the right variable winning device 1650 is opened, so that even if the player does not win the big win, the opportunity to win prize balls is frequently given. Furthermore, once the game shifts to an advantageous latent state, it is constructed so as not to shift to another game state unless a big win is won. Therefore, in the latent probability state, the longer the period during which the big win is not won (that is, the more addictive the game is), the more prize balls can be obtained by the small win, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in an advantageous probability state, a low setting with a low probability of big win and relatively easy occurrence of addiction tends to increase the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by a small winning game in a probability state of 1, rather than a high setting with high probability of big win and relatively difficult occurrence of addiction. That is, the game properties (the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period, and the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to be continued for a relatively long period) can be differentiated according to the big win probability (probability), so that the player's interest can be further improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special pattern was configured to be common to all settings, but the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be changed for each setting. More specifically, for example, while the jackpot probability in the low-probability state varies according to the set value as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state may be constant regardless of the set value (for example, 1/90). With this configuration, the ease of addiction in the high-probability state can be made common regardless of the setting, so the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, since the advantage of the high setting can be further enhanced, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game property that the higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. Further, for example, the odd-numbered setting (settings 1, 3, 5) and the even-numbered setting (settings 2, 4, 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, odd number setting lowers the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/100), whereas even number setting increases the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/70). By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Further, in this case, the probability of big wins in the low-probability state of the special pattern may be configured so that the even-numbered setting has a higher jackpot probability than the odd-numbered setting, and the odd-numbered setting and the even-numbered setting may be configured so that the higher the odd-numbered setting, the higher the big-win probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state does not last long, but the latent state does not last long, so that a game property in which the ball-out transition tends to be relatively gentle can be realized. On the other hand, in the odd-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state tends to last for a long time, but the latent state tends to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, since appropriate settings can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269(b), the details of the small winning random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 269(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269(b), in the eleventh embodiment, as the random number value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit, a common value is defined regardless of the type of special symbol. More specifically, 936 to 58981 are associated and defined as the range of random numbers corresponding to the small hits (the counter value of the first hit random number counter C1). Among the 65535 random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 65535 that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the small winning is 58046, so the ratio of the lottery result to the small winning when the lottery of the special symbol is executed is about 88.6% (58046/65536).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for the special pattern is executed, a small win is won with a high probability (ratio of 88.6%), so the right variable prize winning device 1650 is frequently opened in an advantageous latent state, and the player can frequently win prize balls. Therefore, since the amusement of the game in the latent certainty state can be improved, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game will shift to the latent certainty state. In addition, by constructing the lottery not only for the second special pattern but also for the first special pattern to win a small prize with a high probability, when the second special pattern lottery is executed due to intentional or erroneous hitting to the right in a normal state, the long variation of the second special pattern can be forcibly terminated (discarded) by the small prize of the first special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, details of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. This jackpot type selection 11 table 202md is a data table in which a determination value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, similarly to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 270, in the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment, six jackpot types of “jackpot A11” to “jackpot F11” are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbols, five jackpot types of "jackpot G11" to "jackpot K11" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), "jackpot A11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. This "jackpot A11" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds (R) variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state regardless of the game state at the time of winning (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON regardless of the game state). This "jackpot A11" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because it has the largest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is also the most advantageous. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the ``jackpot A11'' is 1, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A11'' is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot B11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 49". This "jackpot B11" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the variable probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot (variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot B11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 in game states other than the normal state (time saving state, variable probability state, and potential probability state).

That is, if the "jackpot B11" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state. In this definite variable state, since the number of times of time saving is set to 65536, the definite variable state continues substantially until the next big hit. On the other hand, when "jackpot B11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, "jackpot B11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 49 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot B11'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B11'' is 49% (49/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot C11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 59". This "jackpot C11" is a jackpot (8-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

That is, when the "jackpot C11" is won, a variable probability state is set which is substantially continued until the next jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "jackpot C11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot C11'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C11'' is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot D11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64". This "jackpot D11" is a type of jackpot (8-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. In addition, unlike the "jackpot C11", in the "jackpot D11", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, so the variable probability state does not always continue until the next jackpot. That is, when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big win within 100 times after the end of the "big win D11", the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0 and shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "jackpot D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot C11" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the lottery of special symbols within 100 times results in a big hit, the operation is exactly the same as the "big win D11", so it can be rephrased as a big win type that tends to be more advantageous than the "big win C11" in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot D11'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot D11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot E11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 84". This "jackpot E11" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the "jackpot E11" is a jackpot type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E11'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E11'' is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot F11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 99". This "jackpot F11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern (the variable probability flag 203g is set off). When the ``jackpot F11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while when the ``jackpot F11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, if 'big win F11' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, so 'big win F11' is the most disadvantageous big win type in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 15 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot F11'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot F11'' is 15% (15/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". This "jackpot G11" is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the completion of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot G11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot G11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``jackpot G11'' is won in a normal state, a probability variable state substantially continuing until the next jackpot is set, while when a ``jackpot G11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the most advantageous latent probability state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot G11'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot G11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot H11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 9". This "jackpot H11" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the state of the special pattern after the completion of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot H11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot H11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``jackpot H11'' is won in a normal state, a probability variable state substantially continuing until the next jackpot is set, while when a ``jackpot H11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the most advantageous latent probability state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot H11'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot H11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot I11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 14". This "jackpot I11" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of 100 times of time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the "jackpot I11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot I11'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot I11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot J11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64". This "jackpot J11" is a jackpot (two-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state that is substantially continued until the next jackpot (65536 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the "jackpot J11" is a jackpot type having a lower degree of advantage than the "jackpot I11" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot J11'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot J11'' is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot K11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot K11" is a type of jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state with the number of times of time-saving 100 times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the "jackpot K11" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpot types of the second special symbols in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``big win K11'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win K11'' is 35% (35/100).

The reason why there is no jackpot type that directly shifts to the latent state when the lottery of the second special symbol is a jackpot in the normal state is to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right second ball entrance 645 by hitting to the right in the normal state. That is, if the player hits to the right in the normal state, the long variation of the second special symbol is executed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated, and the game state after the big win is more disadvantageous than the big win of the first special symbol, so that the player can feel that the irregular game is more disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the big hit. It is composed of four types of data tables, namely, an 11 table for confirmation 202me3 referred to determine the variation pattern when the pattern lottery is executed and a RAM clear time table 202me4 referred to determine the variation pattern when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state after RAM clearing.

Among these, since the defined contents of the 11 tables for time saving and probability variation 202me2 are the same as the 7 tables for probability variation 202fe2 in the seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted here. First, with reference to FIG. 271(a), the details of the 11-for confirmation 11-table 202me3 constituting the variation pattern selection 11-table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 271(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the 11 table for confirmation 202me3.

As shown in FIG. 271(a), the lottery for the first special symbol is defined in association with a super long variation of 60000 ms regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the latent definite state, the variable display for 600 seconds (10 minutes) is always executed. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, when the lottery result is winning, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of ``0 to 49'' in association with the winning short variation with the variation time of 2000 ms, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of ``50 to 198'' is associated with the winning long variation with the variation time of 5000 ms. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (or a small hit), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and the deviation time is 2000 ms. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent definite state, only the variation pattern with a short variation time (2 seconds or 5 seconds) is executed, so the small winning game of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively short period. Therefore, it is possible to win more prize balls in a short period of time in the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271(b), the details of the RAM clearing table 202me4 will be described. This RAM clear time table 202me4 is, as described above, a data table referred to for determining a variation pattern (variation time) based on a lottery of special symbols in the normal state (normal state after RAM clear operation) set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 122. Here, as described above, in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (setting of combinations of jackpot probabilities in the low-probability state and high-probability state), the RAM clear operation is essential. Therefore, after the setting is changed, the table for RAM clearing 202me4 is always referred to until the jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 271(b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined to correspond to the normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms for the range of "0 to 39", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined to correspond to the super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms to the range of "40 to 119", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined to be "120. ∼ 198", a special variation with a variation time of 40000 ms is defined in association with the range.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a loss and the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation is a multiple of 50, a loss special reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25000 seconds is associated and defined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This deviation special reach fluctuation is a fluctuation type that can be determined only in the normal state after the RAM clear operation. The voice ramp control device 113 is configured to, when receiving the variation pattern command indicating the deviation special reach variation, execute a setting suggesting performance as a performance mode (variation pattern performance) during execution of the deviation special reach variation. That is, on the condition that a jackpot is not won even once after the RAM clearing operation (after setting change), the setting suggesting performance can be executed every time the lottery of special symbols is executed 50 times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 currently playing the game by the contents of the setting suggesting performance to have novel game property that makes him/her wish to be out of the lottery of special symbols continuously at least 50 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is not generated even if the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times or more after the power is turned on, the player can be convinced that the RAM clearing operation is not performed (that is, the setting is not changed). Therefore, when the result of the pachinko machine 10 which is playing the game on the previous day is good (the result is a high jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of jackpots), the player can predict whether the jackpot probability was set to a good setting (high setting) before the day before and the good setting has not been changed until today. On the other hand, conversely, when the result of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 in which the game is played is bad (the probability of big win calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of big wins is low), it is possible to make the player predict that the bad win probability setting (low setting) was set before the previous day and the bad setting has not been changed until today. In this way, depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the presence or absence of a setting change and the set value can be guessed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271(b), when the lottery result is out and the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation is other than a multiple of 50, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 70" in association with the short deviation of the fluctuation time of 8000 ms, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "71 to 130" is defined in association with the long deviation of the fluctuation time of 12000 ms. is defined in association with the range of "131 to 170" with an off normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms, and with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "171 to 198" with an off super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. In other words, when the number of times of fluctuation is a number other than a multiple of 50 and the first special symbol is lost in the lottery, the special ready-to-win fluctuation is not selected. In this way, by limiting the timing of executing the deviation special reach variation (that is, the execution timing of the setting suggesting performance) to the number of times of variation that is a multiple of 50, the player can have a sense of purpose to continue the game until the number of times of variation reaches a multiple of 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 that has not won a big win even once on the day.

Also, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600000 ms is associated and defined. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600000 ms is associated and defined. That is, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the RAM clearing operation, an extremely long variation time of 600000 ms is set under any circumstances. Therefore, the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated when the game is played by hitting to the right in the normal state, and the loss special reach fluctuation is not selected (the setting suggestion performance is not executed) even if the game is lost, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.

The normal table 202me1 differs from the RAM clearing table 202me4 only in that when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery of the first special symbol, the loss special reach variation is not selected even if the number of variations is a multiple of 50 (a variation pattern in a variation number other than a multiple of 50 is selected), and other specified contents are the same as the RAM clearing table 202me4, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf, as described above, four fluctuation pattern tables (normal 11 table 202me1, time-saving/probability variable 11 table 202me2, probability 11 table 202me3, RAM clear time table 202me4) are referred to for determining which fluctuation pattern table to select a fluctuation pattern (variation time).

As shown in FIG. 272, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment defines a variation pattern table to be referred to for selecting a variation pattern in association with the game state after the last big win, the last big win type, and the number of special symbol lotteries (number of variations) after the last big win. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous big win is the latent definite state, and the last big win type is the big win A11, B11, G11, H11, a variation pattern scenario in which the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the probability 11 table 202me3 (see FIG. 271(a)) regardless of the number of times of lottery (variation number) of special symbols after the end of the big win is defined in correspondence. Therefore, when the big hits A11, B11, G11 and H11 are won, the lottery of the second special pattern is frequently executed by hitting to the right until the next big win, and an advantageous game state is formed in which the opportunity to win the small prize of the second special pattern and obtain a prize ball is frequently given.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, the game state after the end of the previous jackpot is the variable probability state, and the last jackpot type is the jackpot D11, I11, in the case of the number of times of lottery of special symbols within 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the 11 table 202me2 for time reduction and probability variation is referred, and in the case of the number of times of lottery of special symbols after 101 times, the variation pattern scenario in which the 11 table 202me3 for latent certainty is referred to is defined in correspondence. . Therefore, when the game state after the jackpot D11, I11 is won and the game state after the end of the big win is set to the variable probability state, the lottery of the first special pattern is frequently executed by hitting to the right until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 100 times after the end of the big win (when the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the long variation is always set). form an advantageous game state that is frequently given. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the lottery will be executed 101 times or more without winning the jackpot in the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the probability variable state and the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpots D11 and I11 (that is, any one of the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11), a variation pattern scenario in which the time-saving/probability variable 11 table 202me2 is referred to is associated and defined regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win. Therefore, when a variable probability state is set by winning big wins B11, C11, G11, H11, J11, a relatively advantageous game state is formed in which the player can play the game without reducing the number of held balls until the next big win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous big win is the normal state and the type of the previous big win is the big win F11, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to is associated and defined regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win. For this reason, a game state disadvantageous to the player is formed in which the game efficiency is remarkably deteriorated unless the game is played aiming at the central first ball entrance 64c by hitting to the left.

Also, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is a time saving state, and the previous jackpot type is one of the jackpot E11, F11, and K11, the time saving/probability 11 table 202me2 is referred to in the case of the number of special symbol lotteries within 100 times after the end of the jackpot, and the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to in the case of the lottery number of special symbols after 101 times. Scenarios are associated and defined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, for the normal state after clearing the RAM, regardless of the number of times of lottery of special symbols after clearing the RAM, a variation pattern scenario in which the table for RAM clearing 202me4 is referred to is defined in association. Therefore, in the normal state after clearing the RAM, every time the number of times of lottery for the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50, the special ready-to-win variation is selected and the setting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 currently playing the game by the content of the setting suggesting performance to have novel game property which makes him/her wish to be out of the lottery of the special symbols continuously at least 50 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 268(b). FIG. 268(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268(b), the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a set value storage area 203ma, a winning state storage area 203mb, a special figure 1 big win flag 203mc, and a special figure 2 big win flag 2, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 173). 03md, the special figure 1 small per flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small per flag 203mf are different in that they are added. In addition, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are also different in that they are deleted.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db differs from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 is acquired in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 645, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and determination of the special symbol lottery or the like is performed based on each counter value stored in the execution area. When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to shift the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (the second reservation area to the fourth reservation area) to the reservation areas (the first reservation area to the third reservation area) having an area number smaller by 1.例文帳に追加

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is a counter for counting the reserved balls based on winning the right second ball entrance 645, and has the same function as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203da for counting the reserved balls of the first special symbol. That is, it is a counter capable of counting the second special symbol reserved balls up to the upper limit value (4).

The set value storage area 203ma is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. More specifically, if "00H" is stored in the setting value storage area 203ma, it indicates that the setting value "1" is set; if "01H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value is "2"; if "02H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value is "3"; if "03H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value is "4"; If "04H" is stored, it indicates that the set value "5" is set, and if "05H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "6" is set. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is read out, and the special symbol lottery (big win lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, among the first winning random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269(a)), the random number range corresponding to the setting value indicated by the data in the setting value storage area 203ma and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area are compared to execute the lottery for the special symbol (see S492 and S493 in FIG. 278 and S1081 and S1082 in FIG. 285). The initial value of the setting value storage area 203ma is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the value is updated by "01H" → "02H" → ... → "05H" and "01H". When the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, all the data in the RAM 203 are reset (cleared). Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203ma is also reset to the initial value "01H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, all the data in the RAM 203 are cleared when the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122 (RAM clear operation), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured to be retained even when the RAM clear operation is performed. That is, the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may not be updated (changed) unless the setting switch 110c is operated (depressed) in the setting change state. With such a configuration, when the hall side wishes to reset the data in the RAM 203 without changing the set value (for example, when the opening hours of the hall end in the most advantageous latent state, and if the reset is not performed, the most advantageous state will remain even at the start of business on the next business day, etc.), the request can be easily fulfilled, so the convenience of the hall can be improved.

The winning state storage area 203mb is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 and the variable probability flag 203fa is off), '00H' is stored as information indicating the normal state in the winning state storage area 203mb. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203fa is off), '01H' is stored as information indicating the time saving state in the winning state storage area 203mb. In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the variable probability flag 203fa is on), ``02H'' is stored as information indicating the variable probability state in the winning state storage area 203mb. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent probability state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the variable probability flag 203fa is on), ``03H'' is stored as information indicating the probability state in this winning state storage area 203j. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the end of the big win (see S1991 in FIG. 292).

The special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball entering the central first ball entrance 64c or the right first ball entrance 164r matches the big hit determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S459 in FIG. 278). This special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the second special symbol small win (see S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S11608 in FIG. 289).

With the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with a deviated symbol is executed (see S854 in FIG. 282). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol result in a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the right second ball opening 645 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S1059 in FIG. 285). This special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol (see S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S11608 in FIG. 289).

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S1554 in FIG. 288). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol result in a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball entering the central first ball entrance 64c or the right first ball entrance 164r matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S10481 in FIG. 279). This special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the second special symbol big hit (see S3009 in FIG. 283, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S11608 in FIG. 289). With this special figure 1 small hit flag 203me turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S3006 in FIG. 283). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win or a small win is made in the lottery of the second special pattern while the small win of the first special pattern is being executed, and the big win or the small win is started redundantly during the small win.

The special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball entering the right second entrance 645 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S1332 in FIG. 286). This special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the first special symbol big hit (see S10855 in FIG. 282, S3009 in FIG. 283, and S11608 in FIG. 289). With the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S11605 in FIG. 289). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win or a small win is made in the lottery of the second special pattern while the small win of the second special pattern is being executed, and the big win or the small win is started redundantly during the small win.

Next, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, which is realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is provided with roughly four game states. That is, there are four game states: a normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), a short-time state (low-probability state of special symbols and short-time state of normal symbols), a variable probability state (variable probability state of special symbols and short-time state of normal symbols), and a latent state (variable probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the most unfavorable normal state is called normal mode, the time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is low next to the normal state (normal mode) but the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held is called pullback mode, and the probability variable state with a relatively high degree of advantage in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held until the next big win is called consecutive mode A. The advantageous latent state is referred to as Renso Mode B. In FIG. 273, the normal mode is shown on the upper left side, the pullback mode is shown on the upper right side, the continuous mode A is shown on the lower left side, and the continuous mode B is shown on the lower right side.

As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another state in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 273, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 1% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the continuous mode B. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 64% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a comparatively advantageous continuous mode A after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots E11 and F11 determined at a rate of 35% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to a pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a big win is won in the normal mode, the game can be played in anticipation of shifting to either the continuous mode A or B.例文帳に追加As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the probability of a big win varies depending on the setting, and the higher the setting (the higher the setting), the higher the probability of a big win. Therefore, the higher the setting, the more likely the jackpot will be won early in the disadvantageous normal mode. That is, the higher the setting, the less likely the period during which the jackpot is not won in the disadvantageous normal mode becomes longer (the more difficult it is to become addicted). As described above, when a jackpot is won in the normal mode, the mode is always shifted to another mode having a higher degree of advantage compared to the normal mode, so in the normal mode, the high setting with a high jackpot probability has a higher degree of advantage than the low setting.

In addition, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the pullback mode will shift to another state when a big win occurs and when a prescribed number of times of time saving has passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 273, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and one of the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to the most advantageous continuous mode B after the jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots C11 and D11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to a comparatively advantageous continuous mode A after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and the jackpot F11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, and when the predetermined number of times of shortening the time (100 times) has passed since the pullback mode was set, the game shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the first special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot E11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, a pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage is set again after the jackpot ends (the pullback mode is looped). Therefore, in the pullback mode, the ratio of setting the most advantageous multi-floor mode B in the case of winning the jackpot is greatly increased compared to the normal mode (1%→50%), so that the shift to the multi-floor mode B can be expected more strongly when the player wins the jackpot. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning a big win again within the number of times of shortening the time (pulling back the jackpot) and shifting to the most advantageous continuous mode B, while the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous normal mode without winning the big win within the number of times of shortening the time. Therefore, even in the pullback mode, the high setting with a high jackpot probability has a higher advantage than the low setting, as in the normal mode.

In addition, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode A to another state when a big win occurs or when a prescribed number of times of time saving has passed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 273, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% are selected (determined) as the jackpot types, and when the number of times of time saving set in the consecutive game mode A has passed, the game shifts to the game game mode B which is most advantageous to the player. In addition, when the first special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot E11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage. Furthermore, when the first special pattern is a big win and a big win F11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the big win type, the game state after the big win is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode for the player. On the other hand, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and jackpots C11 and D11 determined at a rate of 15% are determined as the jackpot types, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode A, the probability of a big win is high, and the ratio of shifting to the consecutive game mode B, which is advantageous when the big win is won, is also high (50%) as in the pullback mode, so that a game state advantageous to the player is formed. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, even in the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbols. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot at an early stage, so when 100 times is set as the number of times of shortening the working hours in the multi-station mode A, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of losing 100 consecutive times in the lottery of the special pattern, so that the shift to the more advantageous multi-station mode B is facilitated. That is, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lower the setting, the higher the advantage. In the continuous mode A, there is a higher possibility that the number of times of reduced working hours (65536 times) that will continue until the next big win is substantially set, but if it continues until the next big win, the influence of the big win probability on the degree of advantage is relatively small. This is because, while the variable probability state continues, the game ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 164r, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held.

In addition, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode B to another state only when a big win occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 273, when the second special pattern is a jackpot, and jackpots I11 and J11 determined at a rate of 55% are selected (determined) as the jackpot types, the mode shifts to consecutive mode A which is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot K11 determined at a rate of 35% is determined as the jackpot type, a pullback mode with a low degree of advantage is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the second special pattern is a big win and the big wins G11 and H11 determined at a rate of 10% are selected (determined) as the big win types, the game state after the big win is again set to the most advantageous consecutive game mode B (the consecutive game mode B is looped). In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the player can acquire prize balls by a small winning of the second special pattern while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and there is no possibility of shifting to the most disadvantageous normal mode in the case of a big winning, which is very advantageous for the player. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of a big win, so that the consecutive game mode B, which is advantageous to the player, is easily terminated early (the big win is easily won with a small number of lotteries). The continuous mode B is substantially continued until the next big win, and since it is possible to frequently acquire prize balls by small wins while the continuous mode B continues, more prize balls can be expected to be obtained by not winning the big win. Therefore, in the low setting where it is difficult to win the jackpot (the probability of the big win is low), the expected value of the number of winning balls to be obtained when shifting to the continuous mode B is higher than in the high setting, so that the novel game property can be realized in which the low setting is more advantageous in the most advantageous game state. In other words, in the consecutive game mode B, it is possible to realize a very special game property in which the degree of advantage decreases as the probability of winning increases, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 274, the ROM 222 of the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RM 222 of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 30(a)) only in that a setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma is added. The setting suggesting effect selection table 222ma is a data table referred to for selecting the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect to be executed during the execution period of the non-special ready-to-reach variation when the main control device 110 notifies the special reach variation as a variation type by a variation pattern command.

The details of this setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 275, in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma in the eleventh embodiment, the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect mode are defined in association with each set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1, 10 counter values of "0 to 9" are defined as the value range of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of one-symbol ready-to-win, and in the case of setting 2 to 6, three counter values of "0 to 2" are defined in correspondence as the value range of the effect counter 223f. Therefore, when the deviation special reach variation is notified in setting 1 (when the number of times of variation after setting change becomes a multiple of 50), the ratio of selecting the variation pattern performance of one symbol reach is 10% (10/100). Therefore, when one symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of 1, which is the lowest setting, is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1, three counter values of "10 to 12" are defined as values of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of two-symbol ready-to-win, in setting 2, ten counter values of "3 to 12" are defined in correspondence as values of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of settings 3 to 6, three counter values of "3 to 5" are defined in correspondence. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 2-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 is 1% (1/100), the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 2-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 2 is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 2-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 3 to 6 is 3% (3/100). Therefore, when the 2-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 2 is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1 and 2, three counter values of "13 to 15" are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of 3 symbol reach, in the case of setting 3, 15 counter values of "6 to 20" are defined in association as the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 4 to 6, three counter values of "6 to 8" are defined in association. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 3-symbol ready-to-win is 3% (3/100) when the missing special variation is notified in setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, while the ratio of selecting the variation pattern presentation of 3-symbol ready-to-win when the missing special variation is notified in setting 3 is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the 3-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 3 is relatively high.

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the 4-symbol ready-to-win production mode, in the case of settings 1 and 2, three counter values "16 to 18" are defined in association as the value of the production counter 223f in the case of setting 3, three counter values "21 to 23" are defined in association as the value of the production counter 223f in the case of setting 4, and 15 counter values "9 to 23" are defined in association with settings 5 and 6. In this case, seven counter values "9 to 15" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the percentage of 4 -pattern reach fluctuation pattern production of the 4 -design reach is selected when a special fluctuation is notified in settings 1 to 3, and when a special fluctuation is notified in setting 4, the rate in which the fluctuation pattern production of the reach is selected is 15 % (15/100), and the setting is 5, 5,. When a special fluctuation is notified in 6, the percentage of 4 -design reach fluctuation pattern production is selected is 7 % (7/100). Therefore, when the 4-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 4 is relatively high, and the player can also have expectations of setting 5 or 6.例文帳に追加

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of the 5-symbol ready-to-win, in the case of settings 1 and 2, 3 counter values "19 to 21" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in association, in the case of settings 3 and 4, 3 counter values of "23 to 26" are defined in association as the values of the effect counter 223f, in the case of setting 5, 15 counter values of "15 to 29" are defined in association, and 6. , seven counter values "16 to 22" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 5-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 to 4 is 3% (3/100). Therefore, when 5-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 5 is relatively high, and the player can also have expectations of setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of 6 symbol ready-to-win, in the case of settings 1 and 2, three counter values of "22 to 24" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in association with each other, in the case of settings 3 and 4, three counter values of "27 to 29" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in correspondence, and in the case of setting 5, three counter values of "30 to 32" are defined in association with each other. In this case, 15 counter values from "23 to 38" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern presentation of 6-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 to 5 is 3% (3/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern presentation of 6-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 6 is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the 6-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 6 is relatively high.

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of 8 symbol reach, in the case of setting 1, 2, 75 counter values of "25 to 99" are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f in association, in the case of setting 3, 4, 70 counter values of "30 to 99" are defined in association as the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 67 counter values of "33 to 99" are defined in association, In the case of setting 6, 57 counter values from "39 to 96" are associated and defined. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 and 2 is 75% (75/100), the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 3 and 4 is 70% (70/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 5 is 67% (67/100). ), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8 symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 6 is 57%. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern presentation of the 8-pattern ready-to-win, so when the 8-pattern ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of low setting is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 6, three counter values of "97 to 99" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of the 9-symbol ready-to-win, while in other settings, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated. Therefore, when the number of times of variation after setting change is a multiple of 50 and 9 symbol reach is executed, setting 6, which is the highest setting, is determined.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, every time the number of times of change after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50, the setting suggesting effect is executed so that the setting can be guessed from the contents (selection rate of each effect mode differs for each set value). As a result, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after turning on the power becomes a multiple of 50, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved after turning on the power until winning a jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 292. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 276, the details of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) will be described. This special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276, S121) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIGS. 119, S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above, and is a process for performing display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, like the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 119) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment).

Of the special symbol variation processing 11 (FIGS. 276, S121), S251, S254, S259 and S262 are the same as S251, S254, S259 and S262 of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIGS. 119, S151) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment).

Further, as shown in FIG. 276, in the special symbol variation processing 11 (S121) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S254, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is subtracted and updated (S291), and the first special figure of the first symbol display device The pattern display is updated (S292). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di updated in the processing of S291 is 0 (S256), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 for setting the stop display of the first special symbol is executed (S293), and the process moves to S259. Details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283. FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 in the process of S256 (S256: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S254 (S254: No), it means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. Next, the first special symbol variation start processing 11 for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (S294), and the process proceeds to S259. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 281, this first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) is executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 11 in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a value greater than 0 in the processing of S259 (S259: No), it means that the second special symbol is currently being varied and displayed. And (S296), next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update by the processing of S295 has become 0 (S262). In the processing of S262, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj has been updated to 0 (S262: Yes), it means that the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol has elapsed, so the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 for setting the stop display of the second special symbol is executed (S297), and this processing is terminated. Here, details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289, but this second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297) is executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see FIG. 180) in the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, in the process of S262, if it is determined that the value of the post-update special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj has not been updated to 0 (S262: No), the process of S297 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

Also, as shown in FIG. 276, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) in the process of S259 (S259: No), since it means that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed, next, the second special symbol variation start process 11 for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (S298), and this process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287, but this second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) is executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, details of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121), will be described. This first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment), and is a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), in each process of S351 to S355, the same processes as those of S351 to S355 of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) are executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S355, the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 for executing the first special symbol big hit lottery is executed (S391). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, but this first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 121) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment).

When the process of S391 is completed, then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the special symbol lottery result is executed (S392). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 280, but this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment). Further, when the process of S392 is finished, next, a game state update process for updating the game state is executed (S393), and this process is finished. Details of this game state update process (S393) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121, S356) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment), and as described above, it is a process for executing the first special symbol jackpot lottery.

In the processes of S451 and S458 to S461 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), the same processes as those of S451 and S458 to S461 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIGS. 121 and S356) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 278, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S451 is completed, then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S491), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is ON (S491: Yes), it means that the present is a high probability state (variability state) of the special symbol, Of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma for high probability (see FIG. 269(a)), the winning random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S492), and the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, in the process of S491, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S491: No), it means that the current is a low probability state of the special symbol, so the first per random number table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)) for the low probability. In the process of S494 executed after the process of S492 or S493, the lottery result (judgment result) of the big win lottery is obtained using the winning random number value read in the process of S492 or S493 and the data of the execution area (S494), and the process proceeds to S458.

In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 278) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S458, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot (S458: No), the special figure 1 loss variation process 11 for setting a stop symbol according to the type of loss is executed (S495), and this process ends. The details of this special figure 1 deviation variation process 11 (S495) will be described with reference to FIG.

The special figure 1 loss variation process 11 (S495) is a process for setting a stop symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost (including a small hit which is a kind of loss), and is the same process as the special figure 1 loss variation process 8 (see FIG. 210) in the eighth embodiment described above. Of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (see FIG. 279) in the eleventh embodiment, S485, and in each processing of S487 to S489, S485 of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (FIG. 210, S481) in the eighth embodiment, and the same processing as each processing of S487 to S489 are executed.

In addition, in the special figure 1 deviation variation process 11 (S495) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S485, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S485: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to ON (S10481), and the process proceeds to S487. By setting the special figure 1 small winning flag 203me, it is possible to easily determine that the small winning symbol should be stopped at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122, S357) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment).

Of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), in each process of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559, the same process as each process of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122, S357) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 280, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S553, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (see FIG. 272) is referred to, the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations is read (S560), and the process proceeds to S555. By reading the variation pattern table with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf, the variation pattern can be varied according to the number of variations after the big win, the game state, and the type of the previous big win, so that the variation pattern can be diversified. In the processing after S555, similarly to the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), the variation pattern is selected with reference to the read variation pattern table, and the processing of setting the start of the selected variation pattern is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, details of the game state update process (S393), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This game state update process (S393) is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the game state update process (S393), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving (S2901). In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S2901: No), since there is no need to update the game state (the number of time saving times), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2902), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter is set (S2903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction has become 0 (S2904), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h has become 0 (S2904: Yes), it means that the game state has been changed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is not 0 (S2904: No), since there is no change in the gaming state, this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203fa is on (S2905), and if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203fa is on (S2905: Yes), it means that the time saving number of times in the variable probability state has changed to 0 and the state has shifted to the probability state, so a state command indicating the probability state is set (S2906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203fa is off (S2905: No), it means that the number of times of time saving is 0 in the time saving state and the normal state has been entered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S293) will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

In the processes of S851 to S855, S863, and S864 of the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293), the same processes as the processes of S851 to S855, S863, and S864 of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 282, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S293) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S851, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203mc is set to OFF (S581: No), since it means that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit, the special symbol 1 loss stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol is performed (S10851). ), and the process proceeds to S863. The details of this special figure 1 out stop processing (S10851) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S581, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc is set to ON (S581: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S10852). In the process of S10852, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S10852: Yes), the process of S852 to S855 for forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and the process of S10853 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S10852: No), it means that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed, so the processing of S852 to S855 is skipped and the process of S10853 is performed.

In the process of S10853, the start of the jackpot is set (S10853), the data stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is updated to the data corresponding to the current game state (that is, the data indicating the game state when the jackpot is won) (S10854), next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf, the variable probability flag 203 All the values of fa and the time saving counter 203h are reset (S10855). Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S10856), and the process proceeds to S863.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the details of the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (S10851) executed in the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (see FIGS. 282 and S293) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviating stop process (S10851).

In the special figure 1 off stop processing (S10851), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on (S3001), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is off (S3001: No), it means that the lottery result of the special figure this time is a pure loss (not a small hit), so for the first special symbol being fluctuatingly displayed in the first symbol display device 37 A change stop is set in the outlier pattern (S3002), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203me is ON (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S3003). In the processing of S3003, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S3003: Yes), it means that the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, so the second special symbol during variation is out and forcibly stopped. More specifically, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S3004), the special figure 2 variation stop command indicating the variation stop of the second special symbol is set (S3005), and the variation stop in the off design is set for the second special symbol being displayed in the first symbol display device 37 (S3006). Then, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S3003: No), it means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner.

In the process of S3008, the start of the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S3008), and the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to OFF (3009). Next, data indicating that a small win is in progress is set in the game state storage area 203g (S3010), and the first special symbol being changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to stop changing with a small winning symbol (S3011), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this special figure 1 loss stop processing (see FIG. 283), when the first special symbol wins a small win, the second special symbol is forced to lose and the variation can be stopped at the time of stop display of the small win. Therefore, in particular, when the second special pattern performs a long variation in a normal state, the long variation can be easily ended only by winning a small win with a high probability in the lottery of the first special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the details of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) will be described. This second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (FIG. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In the processes of S951 and S952 of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298), the same processes as those of S951 and S952 of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (FIGS. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S951, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S951: No), the processes of S953 to S957, S981 and S982 are executed, and S described later. 983 (S393). The processes of S953-S957, S981 and S982 are different from the processes of S351-S355, S391 and S392 of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIGS. 277, S294). Symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) and first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) are the same except that they are changed to second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de, second special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), and second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 11 (S982). Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, in the second special symbol variation start processing 11 (see FIG. 284) in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 11 (S982) ends, the same processing as the above-described game state update processing (FIG. 281, S393) is executed (S983), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (FIGS. 284, S298), will be described. This second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (FIG. 178, S978) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process for executing the second special symbol jackpot lottery.

In the processes of S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), the same processes as the processes of S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (FIG. 178, S978) of the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1071, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S1071: Yes), the first per random number 11 table 202ma for high probability (see FIG. 269 (a)), read out the per random value corresponding to the current set value (S1 081), and the process proceeds to S1083. On the other hand, in the processing of S1071, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is not set to ON (S1071: No), the first per random number 11 table 202ma for low probability (see FIG. 269 (a)), the per random value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S1082), and the process proceeds to S1083. In the process of S1083, the lottery result (win/fail determination result) of the big win lottery is obtained based on the winning random number value read out in the processes of S1081 and S1082 and the data of the execution area (S1083).

In addition, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 285) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot in the process of S1058 (S1058: No), the special figure 2 loss variation process 11 for setting the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol loss is executed (S1084), and this process ends. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 286, in the special figure 2 deviation variation process 11 (S1084), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1331), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to ON (S1332). Next, the lottery result of the second special design is set to a small hit (S1333), the small hit design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S1334), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1331, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win (that is, it is a loss) (S1331: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1335), and the process is terminated. By executing this special figure 2 loss variation processing 11 (see FIG. 286), it is possible to set an appropriate stop pattern depending on whether the type of loss is a pure loss or a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), which is one process in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (FIGS. 284, S298), will be described. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 129, S956) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment) described above.

Of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), in each process of S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1258 to S1260, S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Fig. 129, S956) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment) respectively The same processing as each processing of 258 to S1260 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 287, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S1251 (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped and the process of S1253 is performed.

Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (see FIG. 287) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1253, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (FIG. 271) is referred to and the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations is read (S1281), and then the processes of S1255, S1256, S1258 to S1260 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297) will be described. This second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment described above.

Among the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297), S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563 are respectively S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S156 of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (FIGS. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment. 3 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 288, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S1551, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is off (S1551: No), the special figure 2 loss stop processing 11 for stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss is executed (S1596), and the process proceeds to S1562. do. The details of this special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1551, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is ON (S1551: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 (S1591). In the process of S1591, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 (S1591: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S1592), and the first special symbol during the fluctuation display is executed S1553, S1554 and S1505 for forcibly stopping the symbol, and the process proceeds to S1593.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1591, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S1591: No), it means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol does not need to be forcibly stopped.

In the process of S1593, the start of the jackpot is set (S1593), and the data in the win state storage area 203mb is updated to data corresponding to the current game state (data indicating the game state when the jackpot is won) (S1594). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md, the variable probability flag 203fa and the values of the time saving counter 203h are all reset (S1595), and the process proceeds to S1561.

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described. This special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (S1596) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 out stop processing 7 (FIGS. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment described above, and the second special symbol is out. It is a process for stopping with a stop symbol corresponding to.

Of this special figure 2 deviating stop processing 11 (S1596), the processing of S1660 is the same as the processing of S1660 of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 7 (FIG. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 289, in the special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (S1596) in the eleventh embodiment, it is first determined whether the special figure 2 small per flag 203mf is set to ON (S11601), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 small per flag 203m is set to on (S11601: Yes), then the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0, that is, , It is determined whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S11602). In the processing of S11602, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed while varying (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S11602: Yes), the first special symbol during variation is removed and forcibly stopped by the symbol is executed. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S11603), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON is set (S11604). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S11605), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is set to 0 (S11606), and the process proceeds to S11607.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter is 0 (S11602: No), since the first special symbol is not being varied, the processing of S11603 to S11606 for forcibly stopping the variation display of the first special symbol is skipped, and the process of S11607 is performed.

In the process of S11607, the start of the special figure 2 small hit is set (S11607), and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to OFF (S11608). Next, data indicating that a small win is in progress is set in the game state storage area 203g (S11609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a small win symbol (S11610), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 290, the contents of start-up processing 11 will be described. This start-up process 11 is a process that is executed instead of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a process that is executed to perform various initial settings based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on.

In the processes of S1701 to S1714 of the startup process 11, the same processes as the processes of S1701 to S1714 of the startup process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 290, in the start-up process 11 in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (S1721). In the process of S1721, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the ON position (S1721: Yes), this means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set, and therefore the set value control process for performing control corresponding to these states is executed (S1722), and the process proceeds to the process of S1710. Details of this set value control process (S1722) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the setting key is not in the ON position (S1721: No), the process proceeds to S1704.

Also, in the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 290) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1710, a state command indicating the current game state is set (S1723), and the process proceeds to S1711.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, the contents of the set value control process (S1722), which is one process in the start-up process 11 (FIG. 290), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 291, in the set value control process (S1722), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 265) is turned on (S3101). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S3103, S3104). In the RAM initialization process (S3103, S3104), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S3103), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S3104). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, a status command indicating the setting change status is set (S3105), and the process proceeds to S3106.

In the process of S3106, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S3106). In the process of S3106, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S3106: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3106 that the setting switch is off (S3106: No), the process of S3107 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3108.

In the processing of S3108, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (S3108). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the OFF position (S3108: Yes), this processing is terminated. That is, the setting change state is ended, and the process returns to start-up processing 11 (see FIG. 292). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be played.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (S3108: No), the process returns to S3106. In other words, the processes of S3106 to S3108 are repeated until it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Also, in the processing of S3101, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S3101: No), first, a payout return command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S3109), and then the data in the set value storage area 203ma is read out (S3110). After the processing of S3110 is completed, next, the setting value display device 110a is caused to display the setting value corresponding to the read data (S3111), the state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (S3112), and it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position (S3113). In the processing of S3113, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (S3113: Yes), this processing ends. That is, the game is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3113 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (S3113: No), the process of S3113 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

By executing this set value control process (see FIG. 291), it is possible to change the set value in accordance with the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, details of the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 11 (S1831) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and first embodiment), and is a process for performing various controls during the jackpot game.

Of this jackpot control process 11 (S1831), in each process of S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918, the same process as each process of S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918 of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 292, in the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that the current jackpot end timing (S1912: Yes), the data of the state storage area 203mb at the time of winning is read (S1991), and the game state corresponding to the read data (game state at the time of winning the jackpot) and the current jackpot type, according to the time-saving counter 203h, the probability variation flag 203fa is updated (S1992), and the process proceeds to S1916. By executing this jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 292), the game state after the jackpot is completed can be appropriately set according to the game state when the jackpot is won and the jackpot type.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 296. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This command determination process 11 (S4131) is a process executed instead of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process for performing control according to the type of command received from the main controller 110.

In this command determination process 11 (S4131), each process except for the process of S4241 is the same as each process of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) in the seventh embodiment except for the process of S4232.

Further, as shown in FIG. 293, in the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that a state command has been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: Yes), the state command reception process 11 for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command is executed (S4241), and this process ends. Details of this state command process 11 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. This status command reception process 11 (S4241) is a process executed instead of the status command reception process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment).

In the process of S4509 of the state command reception process 11 (S4141), the same process as the process of S4509 of the state command reception process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 294, in the state command reception processing 11 (S4241) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating a setting change state (S4511). If it is determined that the command is a command indicating a setting change state (S4511: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting change screen is set (S4512), and the process proceeds to S4509.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4511 that the received command does not indicate the setting change state (S4511: No), then it is determined whether or not the received command indicates the setting confirmation state (S4513). If it is determined that the received command indicates the setting confirmation state (S4513: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting confirmation screen is set (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4509.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently set game state is changed (S4515). If it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4515: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4515 that there is a change in the game state (S4515: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S4516), and the process proceeds to S4509.

Next, with reference to FIG. 295, details of the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 11 (S4132) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In the variable display setting process 11 (S4132), the processes other than S5261 are the same as the processes in the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) except S5232 in the seventh embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 295, in the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S5202, the effect mode setting process 11 for setting the variable display mode corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command received this time is executed (S5261), and the process proceeds to the process of S5233. Details of the rendering mode setting process 11 (S5261) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In the processing of S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the rendering mode setting processing 11 (S5261), the same processing as the processing of S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the rendering mode setting processing (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 296, in the production mode setting process 11 (S5261) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8281), and the process proceeds to S8208.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is normal (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a special reach variation (S8282). In the process of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a special reach variation (S8282: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, in the processing of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is different and the special reach variation is determined (S8282: Yes), it means that after changing the setting (after turning on the power with RAM clearing operation), the number of variations has become a multiple of 50 without becoming a big win. 75) determines the effect mode with the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter (S8284), and shifts to the process of S8208.

By executing this performance mode setting processing 11 (see FIG. 296), every time the number of times of variation after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50, a setting suggestion performance can be executed (the selection rate of each performance mode differs for each set value), which makes it possible to guess the setting from the content, so that the player can be made to continue the game until the number of times of variation after the power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved after the power is turned on until the jackpot is won. .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set (for example, any one of six types of jackpot probabilities) by performing a predetermined operation (setting change operation) by a hall clerk or the like outside business hours. The higher the jackpot probability is set (higher setting), the easier it is to win the jackpot in both the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) and the latent state (high probability state of special symbols). On the other hand, the lower the probability of big win (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period (easier to generate addiction). That is, the game properties (the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period, and the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to be continued for a relatively long period) can be differentiated according to the big win probability (probability), so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to always be set to the normal state (RAM 203 settings are initialized by the RAM clear operation) by performing the setting change operation, and only in the normal state that shifts after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), a specific type of variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the establishment of a specific condition. That is, whenever the number of lotteries of special symbols after changing the setting (after clearing the RAM) becomes a multiple of 50, the special ready-to-win fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm whether or not a setting change operation is executed by the variation type of the variation pattern executed when a specific condition is established (the number of lotteries of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50) after turning on the power, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved after the power is turned on until the specific condition is established. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as a production mode (variation pattern production) during execution of the special reach fluctuation, the setting value that is set can be suggested by the type of the third symbol (number attached to the third symbol) when the reach occurs. By configuring in this way, the player's motivation for the game can be improved when the ready-to-win effect of the effect mode that is easily executed with high setting is executed. In addition, when the effect mode of the content suggesting the high setting is not executed in the setting suggesting effect, it is possible to make the user want to confirm the setting suggesting effect again. That is, since it is possible to make the player think that the lottery for the special symbol will be executed 50 times, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting may be switched in the order of 1→2→ . Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out from the keyhole portion to restore the normal game state. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state of special symbols and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (probability variable state) of special symbols is common to all settings. More specifically, for example, while the jackpot probability in the low-probability state varies according to the set value as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state may be constant regardless of the set value (for example, 1/90). With this configuration, the ease of addiction in the high-probability state can be made common regardless of the setting, so the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, since the advantage of the high setting can be further enhanced, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game property that the higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. Further, for example, the odd-numbered setting (settings 1, 3, 5) and the even-numbered setting (settings 2, 4, 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, odd number setting lowers the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/100), whereas even number setting increases the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/70). By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Further, in this case, the probability of big wins in the low-probability state of the special pattern may be configured so that the even-numbered setting has a higher jackpot probability than the odd-numbered setting, and the odd-numbered setting and the even-numbered setting may be configured so that the higher the odd-numbered setting, the higher the big-winning probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state does not last long, but the latent state does not last long, so that a game property in which the ball-out transition tends to be relatively gentle can be realized. On the other hand, in the odd-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state tends to last for a long time, but the latent state tends to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, since appropriate settings can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved. Further, for example, only setting 6, which is the highest setting, may be configured such that the game characteristics are significantly different from those of the other settings. Specifically, for example, for settings 1 to 5, while adopting the jackpot probability in the eleventh embodiment described above, only setting 6 may be set to an extremely high jackpot probability (for example, a probability of twice or more than setting 5). Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state may be set to 1/100, and the jackpot probability in the special symbol high probability state may be set to 1/30. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the setting is 6 in a relatively short period of time based on the odds of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the player who is convinced that the setting is 6 can play the game for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. By making it easy to determine whether the setting is 6 or not, the player can be made to recognize that the hole uses the setting 6 which is the highest setting (that is, the most advantageous for the player) when the setting 6 is set. Therefore, the reputation of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, in a part of the variable probability big wins (in the case of the big wins D11, E11, and I11), a variable probability state with 100 times of time saving is set after the end of the big win, and when 100 times of times of time saving have passed in the probability variable state (when 100 times of lotteries for special symbols are continuously lost), the state is shifted to the most advantageous latent probability state. In other words, in a specific game state (probability variable state), it is configured to shift to an advantageous state by continuously failing (lottery result different from a big win) over a specific number of special symbol lotteries (100 times), thereby realizing a game property that becomes more advantageous as the big win probability is lower (that is, as the setting is lower) in the high probability state of special symbols. For example, the variable probability state of the special symbols may be terminated when the lottery for the special symbols is executed a specific number of times (for example, 100 times), and the latent probability state may be the most unfavorable state (a state in which neither the first special symbol lottery nor the second special symbol lottery is executed even if the player hits to the right), and in the latent state, when the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times is continuously lost, the state may be shifted to a relatively advantageous normal state. That is, in the latent definite state, the number of rounds is small even if the big win is won, and most of the jackpot types are set to the latent definite state after the end of the big win, while most of the jackpot types are set to an advantageous variable probability state after the end of the big win if the big win is won in the normal state. Then, in the variable probability state, it is possible to make it easy to win a big win without almost reducing the number of balls held, and to make it easy to set the variable probability state again after the end of the big win, so that a game may be played with the goal of shifting to an advantageous variable probability state. Also in this specification, the lower the jackpot probability in the latent probability state, the easier it is to shift to a relatively advantageous normal state, and as a result, the easier it is to shift to the most advantageous probability variable state, so that the lower the jackpot probability (that is, the lower the setting), the more advantageous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, if the jackpot probability is low, it is difficult to win a jackpot in a normal state with a high degree of advantage, and the possibility that the variable probability count (specific number) ends without a jackpot in an advantageous variable probability state increases. Therefore, in the high setting with a high jackpot probability, the latent state and the disadvantageous jackpot are likely to be repeated. It is possible to realize a playability that is easy to play. In this way, since the game characteristics can be differentiated between the low setting and the high setting, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the deviation special reach fluctuation can be executed only in the normal state set after the setting change (after the RAM clearing operation), but it is not limited to this. For example, even in a normal state set under conditions other than after setting change (after RAM clearing operation), every time the number of special pattern lotteries becomes a multiple of a specific number of times (50 times), a deviation special ready-to-win variation is executed with a relatively low probability (for example, a probability of 1/10). By constructing in this way, even in a normal state set under conditions other than after the setting change, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of the specific number of times (50 times), so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, instead of changing the selection probability of the loss special reach fluctuation, for example, the cycle of selecting the loss special reach fluctuation may be set longer than the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clearing operation) (for example, every time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of 100). Also, in the normal state, regardless of whether or not the settings have been changed, a common variation pattern scenario may be referenced to determine the variation pattern. In other words, even in a normal state other than after setting change, it may be constituted so that the deviation special ready-to-win variation is executed every time the number of times of lottery becomes a multiple of 50, and the setting suggestion performance can be executed every time the number of times of lottery becomes a multiple of 50.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the operating rate in a disadvantageous normal state.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the RAM clearing operation is performed at the time of power-on, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the RAM clearing table 202me4 while the normal state continues, regardless of whether the setting change state is entered or not. In other words, even if the setting change state is not entered, if the RAM clearing operation is performed, every time the number of times of lottery for the special pattern becomes a multiple of 50, the special ready-to-win fluctuation is executed and the setting suggesting performance is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, only when shifting to a setting change state when the power is turned on, setting suggestion performance may be executed every time the number of lotteries of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50 in the subsequent normal state. By constructing in this manner, only when the store clerk or the like of the hall actually performs the setting change operation, the loss special reach fluctuation is executed and the setting suggestion performance is executed, so that the player can more easily distinguish whether or not the setting is changed.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the loss special reach fluctuation is executed, the set value is suggested by the number attached to the third pattern when the reach is generated as the fluctuation pattern performance, but the set value does not necessarily have to be suggested by the performance. For example, it may be configured to execute a variation pattern effect of an effect mode that can suggest only whether or not it is an outlier special reach variation. That is, even if the deviation special reach fluctuation is determined, the set value may not be suggested from the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, there is no need to grasp the set value on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and only when the variation type of the loss special reach variation is notified, a special effect (or a mode that tends to appear only in the case of the loss special reach variation) can be executed, so the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game player from thinking that the setting is low due to the suggestion of the setting, and to reduce the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the eleventh embodiment, when the variation pattern of the loss special reach variation is notified, the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Simply, when determining the effect mode of the variation pattern effect on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 1%). By configuring in this way, there is no need to provide a deviation special reach fluctuation, and a common fluctuation pattern table can be used in the normal state, so the number of fluctuation pattern tables can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the setting change state, in the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), the setting suggestion performance is executed (the special reach variation is selected) every time the lottery for the special symbol is performed 50 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outlier special reach variation is selected may be varied. That is, the rate at which the sound lamp control device 113 side executes the setting suggestion effect when the deviation special reach fluctuation is notified may be varied according to the set value. Alternatively, by making the variation pattern selection table referred to in the normal state after the RAM clearing operation differ for each set value, when the number of variations becomes a multiple of 50 according to the set value, the ratio of selecting the off special reach variation itself may be varied. More specifically, for example, in multiples of 50, the higher the setting, the more easily a variation pattern other than the off-special reach variation is selected (the more difficult it is to execute the setting-suggestion effect). By constructing in this way, even though the number of lotteries of special patterns has become a multiple of 50, when the deviation special ready-to-win fluctuation is not executed (setting suggesting performance is not executed), the expectation for high setting can be improved. Further, for example, by changing the variation pattern selection table referred to in the normal state after the RAM clearing operation for each set value, the cycle of executing the deviation special reach variation (executing the setting suggestion effect) may be changed according to the set value. By constructing in this way, a game can be played while paying attention to how many variations the special reach variation is executed, so that the game can be positively started from the state of zero big hits. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is also cleared to the initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured not to be cleared even if the RAM clear operation is performed. In other words, the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may be configured to be updated only while the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position. With such a configuration, when the hall side desires to perform the RAM clearing operation without wanting to change the setting, the request can be fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, a right variable prize winning device 1650 that enables a prize to be won during a small winning game when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special pattern and a variable prize winning device 650 that enables a prize to be won in each round of the big prize when the lottery of the special pattern results in a big win are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable prize winning device 650 may be configured to be able to enter the ball when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit or a big hit. By configuring in this way, the right variable winning device 1650 can be deleted, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the flexibility of the game area can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value is suggested only by the setting suggestion effect. That is, when the number of lotteries of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50 in a normal state after setting change and the variation pattern of the deviation special ready-to-win fluctuation is set, the setting suggesting performance is executed as the variation pattern performance for the deviation special ready-to-win variation, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to suggest a setting in the opening effect or ending effect of a big win. In this case, the type (selection ratio) of characters appearing on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect and ending effect may be changed for each set value. Further, for example, after shifting to an advantageous game state (continuous game mode A or continuous game mode B), when the advantageous game state is terminated and the game is shifted to the disadvantageous normal mode, the type of display mode (so-called result display) showing the game result in the advantageous game state may be changed. Specifically, for example, as the titles displayed according to the game results, a title of a type determined only according to the game result and a title of a type determined in consideration of the set value may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result display at the end of an advantageous game state.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may also be configured to display a numerical value indicating the set value.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the player to become more advantageous (that is, the higher chance chance), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a part of the settings and a part of the other settings have the same total advantage. More specifically, for example, by adjusting the jackpot probability, the advantages of setting 1 and setting 6 may be made equal. That is, in the setting 1, when the state is once shifted to the latent certainty state, the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the latent certainty state is greatly increased compared to the other settings (for example, the probability of the big win in the high probability state of the special symbols is set to 1/200), so that the setting values other than the setting 6 (settings 2 to 5) may be more advantageous than the setting values (settings 2 to 5) other than the setting 6 even if the probability of the big win is low in the low probability state of the special symbols. In addition to this, it may be configured such that settings 2 and 5 have the same degree of advantage, and settings 3 and 4 have the same degree of advantage. In other words, setting 1 and setting 6 may be configured to have the highest degree of advantage, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be configured to have the lowest degree of advantage. In other words, setting 1 to setting 3 may be configured to have a game property in which a low probability of a big hit is advantageous (a game property mainly to increase the number of balls held with a small prize ball in a latent probability state), and a game property to be advantageous to a high probability of a big win (a game property mainly to increase the number of balls with a big prize ball) in the setting 4 to setting 6. By configuring in this way, the difference in game characteristics for each setting can be made more noticeable, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in this case, it may be possible to inform the player whether the game property setting (settings 1 to 3) is set mainly to increase the number of balls held with small prize balls in the latent probability state, or whether the game property setting (settings 4 to 6) is set mainly to increase the number of balls held with big prize balls. More specifically, for example, in the demo display displayed when the pachinko machine 10 has not played a game for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), which game type is displayed (for example, if the setting is 1 to 3, the character "single blow type" is displayed, and if the setting is 4 to 6, the character "knock-knock type" is displayed). As a result, the game can be started with the game properties set to the player's preference, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, instead of or in addition to the demonstration display screen, a display mode such as a volume display displayed when a volume change operation is performed to change the volume of the pachinko machine 10, or a light amount display displayed when a light amount change operation is performed to change the light amount of various light emitting members such as LEDs may be configured to be capable of informing the playability (whether it is a one-hit type or a tapping type). By configuring in this way, the player can check the playability at an arbitrary timing by performing the volume change operation or the light amount change operation, so that the player's convenience can be further improved. Furthermore, the display mode of the ending screen of the big win and the result screen after the end of the latent certainty state may be changed according to the game characteristics. Specifically, for example, when the one-hit type game property (settings 1 to 3) is set, the total number of winning balls won in an advantageous state is displayed in a conspicuous manner, while when the tapping type game property (settings 4 to 6) is set, the total number of jackpots won in the advantageous state may be displayed in a conspicuous manner. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the item that the player tends to pay more attention to for each game feature, so that the player's convenience can be improved. In this case, the setting value display device 110a may be configured to display settings A, B, and C instead of settings 1, 2, and 3. FIG. In other words, the notation of the set values may be changed according to the game characteristics. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress confusion due to the fact that the advantage degrees are not in numerical order (the advantage degrees increase in the order of setting 3, 4 → 2, 5 → 1, 6) when the hall clerk or the like changes or confirms the set values.

In the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the RAM clearing table 202me4 (see FIG. 271 (b)) is referred to until the first big win is won, and the variation pattern table is determined (every time the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times). For example, the variation pattern scenario may be set so that the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to by winning a small prize. In this case, the table for RAM clearing 202me4 may be configured so that the loss special reach variation is always executed when the lottery results other than the big win are obtained. In other words, in the specification of winning a small prize with a high probability, it may be constructed so that the special ready-to-win game is lost every time a lottery of special symbols is executed until the first small prize game (or big prize game) is executed after the setting is changed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that the setting change has been performed only by executing the special pattern lottery once in the Pachinko machine 10 in which the special pattern lottery has not been executed even once after the opening of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall.

In the eleventh embodiment, only after the setting is changed, the special symbol lottery variation is executed every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed 50 times. By structuring in this way, it is possible to predict the number of fluctuations in which the loss special reach is set when the setting is not changed from the number of fluctuations at the end of the game on the previous day, and realize the novel game property that the player can be convinced that the possibility of the setting change is high when the loss special reach is not executed in the predicted number of times.

In the eleventh embodiment, every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed 50 times, the special reach variation is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the off special reach variation can be performed only once. In other words, when the normal state is set, the number of times of lottery of special patterns until the loss special reach fluctuation is set is set, and while 50 times is set when the setting is changed, when the normal state is set under other conditions, the number of times such as 65536 times which cannot be practically consumed may be set. After the deviation special reach fluctuation is set, it may be configured to set the number of times such as 65536 times that is practically impossible to digest. By constructing in this way, when the lottery of the special pattern is executed 50 times in the state that no big win is won, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the loss special reach occurs.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 306. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above is configured such that the jackpot probability can be set to any one of a plurality of stages (six stages) of settings, and the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability.

In addition to this, in the twelfth embodiment, when a specific lottery result different from a big win is obtained in a predetermined game state, a period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player is formed. More specifically, it is configured such that it is easier for the player to win a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern than in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a long fluctuation time can be set when the player loses in the lottery of the first special pattern in the continuous mode B (secret state). That is, by intensively executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the long variation of the first special symbol is executed, an advantageous period (chance zone) can be formed in which the player can aim for the big win of the second special symbol with a relatively low degree of advantage without winning the big win of the first special symbol with a relatively low degree of advantage.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small win during the variation of the first special symbol and the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is not discarded (not stop-displayed with the missing symbol). By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the long variation from being discarded (forcibly ending the chance zone) when the second special symbol wins a small prize during the long variation of the first special symbol (in the chance zone). Therefore, the player can be sufficiently entertained in the chance zone once entered.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed. This is the point that has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the continuous villa mode B (hidden state) of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display mode of a continuous losing effect that is executed when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost in the continuous villa mode B of the twelfth embodiment. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a high probability (approximately 90%) of a small win or a big win is achieved. In other words, it is configured so that the lottery for the special symbols has a relatively low probability of being lost. In the twelfth embodiment, when this relatively low-probability loss continues over a predetermined first number of times (for example, three consecutive losses in the first special symbol lottery), a long variation is set as the first loss variation (a chance zone is formed in which the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed intensively). In addition, even if the deviation continues for a second number of times less than the first number (for example, two consecutive deviations), a long fluctuation is set (a chance zone is formed) as the deviation fluctuation for the second number of times at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). In other words, the chance zone is formed more easily as the first special symbol continues to come off, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the first special symbol coming off. The continuous omission effect described below is an effect mode that is executed to suggest (notify) the player the number of consecutive omissions and whether or not entry into the chance zone is possible.

First, with reference to FIG. 297, the display mode at the start of the above-described continuous loss effect will be described. This continuous loss effect is started when the first special symbol lottery results in a loss after the end of the big win or after the end of the small win of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 297, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, when the lost symbol for the first special symbol is stopped, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 imitating a rabbit finds a hill with a flag FG with the letters SP on the top. In addition, along with the effect of discovering this hill, the characters "Aim for further peaks" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display is displayed that suggests to the player the situation until the chance zone (super RUSH game) is executed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the chance zone will start if the rabbit-like character 811 can climb the hill and reach the flag FG. As shown in FIG. 297(a), the hill discovered by the character 811 has two ladders, a ladder HG1 extending from the foot to the middle and a ladder HG2 extending from the middle to the top. In addition, a jump platform JD is also installed at the foot of the hill. In the twelfth embodiment, when the chance zone is started, one of two patterns of performance is executed: one is the performance that the character 811 reaches the top (flag FG) by climbing the ladder one by one requiring two movements, and the other is the case that the character 811 jumps to the top at once with one movement using the jumping platform JD. More specifically, when the lottery for the first special pattern is lost two times in a row and the variation pattern in the second continuation is set to the long variation, the performance of jumping to the top at once using the jumping table JD is executed, and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified. On the other hand, when there are 3 consecutive losses in the lottery of the first special pattern and the 2nd consecutive loss is not a long variation, the performance of climbing the ladder HG1 continuing from the foot to the middle is executed during the second consecutive loss variation, and the performance of climbing the ladder HG2 continuing from the middle to the top is executed during the 3rd continuous loss variation, and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified.

On the other hand, if the lottery for the first special symbol following the first loss was not a loss (a small win), as shown in FIG. 297(b), in the main display area Dm, the character 811 jumps to the top using the jumping board JD, but fails to reach the top and falls down. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Failed..." are displayed. With these presentation modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the game did not enter the chance zone without consecutive misses.

FIG. 298 is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where three consecutive losses in the lottery of the first special symbol in the continuous mode B (RUSH) and the long variation of the first special symbol are set. As shown in FIG. 298, when the long variation of the first special symbol is started, the character 811 reaches the flag SP in the main display area Dm, and an effect of raising the flag SP and being happy is executed. In addition to this, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters ``Super RUSH rush!!'' are displayed, and a countdown display of the remaining variation time until the end of the long variation (that is, the remaining time until the chance zone ends) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily confirm the end of the chance zone (super RUSH) in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbols can be executed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, the small winning probability is made common to all settings while the big winning probability is varied according to the setting. As the special symbol lottery results, only three kinds of lottery results of big win, small win and loss are provided. For this reason, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of being out, so the possibility of entering the chance zone (continuously being out) is reduced. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to a chance zone that is more advantageous to the player, so when shifting to the consecutive game mode B, the low setting makes it possible to realize a very special and novel game property that the degree of advantage is higher. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical Configuration in the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 to 301. FIG. Here, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment has the first per random number 12 table 202na instead of the first per random number 11 table 202ma, the small per random number 12 table 202nb instead of the small per random number 11 table 202mb, and the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. The difference is that a jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd is provided in place of , and a variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me.

First, with reference to FIG. 299(a), details of the first winning random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299(a), the first winning random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment, like the first winning random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment, defines the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as a big hit in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299(a), in the low-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 204" is defined in association with the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1. As the range, "0 to 233" is associated and defined, with setting 4, "0 to 251" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1, with setting 5, "0 to 311" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1, and with setting 6, "0 to 409" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. are stipulated. Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state is 1/320 (205/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/301 (218/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/280 (234/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/260 (252/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/210. (312/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/160 (410/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 299(a), in the high-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 467" is defined in correspondence with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 1, "0 to 498" is defined in correspondence with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 to setting 2, and "0" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 to setting 3. "0 to 534" is defined in association with setting 4, "0 to 575" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 4, "0 to 712" is defined in association with setting 5 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 935" is defined in association with setting value 6 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. are Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is 1/140 (468/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/131 (499/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/123 (535/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/114 (576/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/92 ( 713/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/70 (936/65536). Incidentally, as in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, mainly, the jackpot probabilities of setting 5 and setting 6 in the low probability state of special symbols are increased, and the jackpot probability in the high probability (variable probability) state of special symbols is lowered as a whole. As a result, the probability of losing the first special pattern in the lottery is relatively increased, and the execution frequency of the continuous losing performance can be increased, so that the player who confirms the start of the continuous losing performance can be made to have expectations for shifting to the chance zone more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 299(b), the details of the small winning random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 299(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299(b), in the small winning random number 12 table 202nb, 58982 random numbers (counter values) of 936 to 59917 are defined as random numbers (the value of the first random number counter C1) determined as the small winning of the first special symbol. Among 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small winnings is 58982, so the probability of winning a small winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/1.11 (58982/65536). In addition, as described above, in the variable probability state of the special symbols, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 1/140 (setting 1) to 1/70 (setting 6). Therefore, the probability of losing the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state of the special symbol is 1/10.8 (setting 1) to 1/11.7 (setting 6). As described above, in the latent state, the chance zone that is more advantageous is likely to be set as the loss continues in the lottery of the first special symbol. And, the lower setting has a lower probability of big hits, and a higher probability of losing. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such that it is easier to enter the chance zone where the low setting is more advantageous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 299(b), the small hit random number 12 table 202nb is defined as a random number (value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. Among 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small winnings is 64599, so the probability of winning a small winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/1.01 (64599/65536). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small win is won. However, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the continuous mode B (secret state), the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in the same distribution as the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, if the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first while the small hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol will come off and be forcibly stopped. In other words, even if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, about half of them are changed to lose due to the stop display of the small win pattern of the first special pattern first, and the chance of getting a prize ball by the small prize game of the second special pattern is lost. In other words, in the consecutive game mode B in the twelfth embodiment, compared to the consecutive game mode B (invisible state) in the eleventh embodiment described above, the frequency of small hits of the second special symbol is about half (the frequency of winning prize balls is about half). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the big win probability in the high probability state of the special symbols is generally lowered, and the small win probability of the second special symbol is increased, so that it is adjusted so as not to be too disadvantageous as compared with the continuous mode B (latent state) in the eleventh embodiment.

In addition, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol continues to come off, the long variation of the first special symbol can be set. During this long variation, there is no possibility that the small winning pattern (and the big winning pattern) of the first special pattern is stopped, so that when the small winning pattern of the second special pattern is won, the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning can be surely executed. That is, during the long variation (chance zone) of the first special symbol, the execution frequency of the small winning game of the second special symbol becomes high, forming an extremely advantageous state in which the winning frequency of prize balls also becomes high. Also, even if the lottery of the second special pattern results in a small win, the long variation of the first special pattern is controlled so as not to be discarded (not to be forcibly stopped by the missing pattern), so that the advantageous state (chance zone) can be continued for a longer time. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, it is easier for the player to win a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols than in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbols. That is, the ratio of setting the most advantageous continuous mode B (probability state) after the end of the big win (looping the continuous mode B) is higher for the big win of the second special pattern than for the big win of the first special pattern. Therefore, in a chance zone in which the lottery of the first special pattern is difficult to execute (the lottery of the second special pattern is intensively executed), the loop rate of the continuous mode B is substantially improved in the event of a big win, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the continuous villa mode B, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property in which a succession of misses is expected in order to shift to the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300, details of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types of "jackpot A12" to "jackpot F12" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, while three jackpot types of "jackpot G12" to "jackpot K12" are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), "jackpot A12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. This "jackpot A12" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds (R) variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state regardless of the game state at the time of winning (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON regardless of the game state). This "jackpot A12" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because it has the largest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is also the most advantageous. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the ``jackpot A12'' is 1, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A12'' is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot B12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 49". This "jackpot B12" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the variable probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot (variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). In the normal state and the probability state, when the "jackpot B12" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, when winning the "jackpot B12" in the normal state and the latent probability state, the state shifts to a comparatively advantageous probability variable state. In this definite variable state, since the number of times of time saving is set to 65536, the definite variable state continues substantially until the next big hit. On the other hand, when "jackpot B12" is won in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the most advantageous probability state. Therefore, "jackpot B12" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when winning in the normal state and the latent state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 49 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``big win B12'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B12'' is 49% (49/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot C12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 59". This "jackpot C12" is a jackpot (8 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In other words, when the "big win C12" is won, a variable probability state is set which is substantially continued until the next big win regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, "jackpot C12" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot C12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C12'' is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot D12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64". This "jackpot D12" is a jackpot (8-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, since 100 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h in the "jackpot D12" unlike the "jackpot C12", the variable probability state does not always continue until the next jackpot. That is, when the special symbol lottery within 100 times after the end of the "jackpot D12" does not result in a jackpot, the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0 and shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "jackpot D12" is a jackpot type that tends to be more advantageous than the "jackpot C12" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot D12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot D12'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot E12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 84". This "jackpot E12" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the "jackpot E12" is a jackpot type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E12'' is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot F12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 99". This "jackpot F12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern (the variable probability flag 203g is set off). When the ``jackpot F12'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while when the ``jackpot F12'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, if ``jackpot F12'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, so ``jackpot F12'' is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 15 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot F12'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot F12'' is 15% (15/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9". This "jackpot G12" is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the completion of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot G12'' is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot G12'' is won in the latent probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``big win G12'' is won in a game state other than the latent definite state, a variable definite state substantially continuing until the next big win is set, while when a ``big win G12'' is won in the latent definite state, the most advantageous latent definite state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot G12'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot G12'' is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot H12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 64". This "jackpot H12" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot H12'' is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot H12'' is won in the probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``big win H12'' is won in a game state other than the latent definite state, a variable definite state substantially continuing until the next big win is set, while when a ``big win H12'' is won in the latent definite state, the most advantageous latent definite state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 55 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot H12'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot H12'' is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot K12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot K12" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state with the number of times of time-saving 100 times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, "jackpot K12" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpot types of the second special symbols in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``big win K12'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win K12'' is 35% (35/100).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot is won in the consecutive game mode B (latent state), the game state after the jackpot is more disadvantageous than in the eleventh embodiment described above. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the latent state, at a rate of 50% (that is, when either of the jackpots A11 or B11 is won), the game state after the big win is set to the most advantageous consecutive game mode B (latent state). It is configured so that only advantageous consecutive villa mode B is set. On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win in the advantageous consecutive villa mode B (probable state), the advantageous consecutive villa mode B is set with a high probability (65% ratio). Therefore, in the latent definite state, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a big win rather than a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, the game can be played with a strong expectation that a chance zone (long variation period of the first special pattern) in which the lottery of the special pattern can be executed biased toward the lottery of the second special pattern is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the chance zone is formed as an advantageous state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed with a bias toward the second special symbol lottery by configuring the ratio of setting the second special symbol to the advantageous latent state after the end of the big win to be higher than the first special symbol jackpot in the advantageous latent state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the ratio of the probability variable big win (jackpot that shifts to the probability variable state or the latent probability state after the end of the big win) is higher in the second special symbol jackpot than in the first special symbol jackpot, so that the advantage of the second special symbol may be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, details of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment is a normal 12 table 202ne1 that is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the jackpot, and a time saving / probability variation 12 table 202ne2 that is referred to for determining the variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is performed in the probability variation state and the time reduction state. It is composed of four types of data tables, namely, a 12-table for confirmation 202ne3 referred to determine the variation pattern when the pattern lottery is executed and a RAM-clearing table 202ne4 referred to determine the variation pattern when the special pattern lottery is performed in the normal state after the RAM is cleared. Among these four types of data tables, the normal 12 tables 202ne1, the time saving/probability 12 tables 202ne2, and the RAM clearing table 202ne4 are the same data as the normal 11 tables 202me1, the time saving/probability 11 tables 202me2, and the RAM clearing table 202me4, respectively, in the eleventh embodiment described above, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

With reference to FIG. 301, the details of the 12-for-occurrence table 202ne3 constituting the 12-variation pattern selection table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the 12-table for confirmation 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 301, in the 12 table for latent certainty 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the win and the small win, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149". A long variation per 5000 ms is associated and defined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, the variation time is varied according to the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big win and the small win. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big win and the small win (the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol) is 1, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (that is, with respect to the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take), the deviation short fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 1000 ms is defined as the fluctuation type in association. For this reason, the chance zone (long variation) is not set for the first (non-continuous) deviation in the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after winning (big win or small win) is 2 times, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of ``0 to 158''. Therefore, if two misses occur consecutively in the latent certainty state, the miss super long fluctuation is set at a rate of about 20% (40/199). That is, it is possible to form an advantageous state (chance zone) in which only an advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after winning (big win or small win) is 3 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 600000 ms as the fluctuation type. Therefore, if there are three or more consecutive misses in the latent probability state, a miss long variation (chance zone) is always set. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property that strongly desires continuous failures, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of the first special pattern being lost, so that in the latent probability state, the lower the setting, the more advantageous (because the chance zone is easily set, and as a result, it is easy to win the advantageous second special pattern jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after winning (both big and small), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2000 ms as a fluctuation type (variation pattern) for the range of "0 to 49". are

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after winning (big win and small win), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" as the fluctuation type (variation pattern). are stipulated. In other words, the distribution is the same as when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, a loss short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined as a variation type regardless of the number of variations after winning (big win and small win) and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, regardless of the number of fluctuations after winning (big win and small win), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2000 ms as a fluctuation type (variation pattern) for the range of ``0 to 49'', and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms as a fluctuation type with a value in the range of ``50 to 198''. In other words, the distribution is the same as when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when a lottery result other than a loss is obtained in the hidden state (that is, the state in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to the hidden 12 table 202ne3), the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to prevent only the disadvantageous first special fluctuation from continuing to stop first. In addition, as the loss in the lottery of the first special pattern continues, the ratio of setting the loss super-long variation (chance zone capable of intensively executing the lottery of the second special pattern with advantage) is set higher, so that the novel game property that strongly expects the continuous loss can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 174) in the eleventh embodiment (and seventh embodiment) described above only in that a continuous loss effect counter 223na is added.

The continuous loss effect counter 223na is a counter indicating the progress of the effect in the continuous loss effect (see FIGS. 297(a), (b), and FIG. 298). The initial value of this continuous loss effect counter 223na is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 every time the loss continues in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state (see S8735 and S8741 in FIG. 306). When setting the effect mode of the continuous loss effect, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na and the variation type is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 12 (S11595) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 12 (S11595) in the twelfth embodiment. This special figure 2 out stop processing 12 (S11595) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the eleventh embodiment described above.

This special figure 2 out stop processing 12 (S11595) is different from the special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the above-described eleventh embodiment in that the processing of S11602 to S11606 is deleted, and the processing of S11611 is executed instead of the processing of S11608. In other words, the only difference is that when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped by a small hit, even if the first special symbol is in the process of being varied, the first special symbol being varied is not forcibly stopped by the missing symbol (variation display is continued as it is). By configuring so as not to discard (forcibly stop) the fluctuation display of the first special pattern when the second special pattern becomes a small prize, it is possible to suppress the chance zone (loss fluctuation of the first special pattern) from being forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining time of the chance zone just by winning the small prize once in the lottery of the second special pattern.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306. FIG.

First, with reference to FIG. 304, details of the rendering mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIG. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment described above.

In the processing of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 to S8284 of the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271), the same processes as the processes of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 to S8284 of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIG. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment are executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 304, in the presentation mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the current state is the potential state (S8291). When it is determined that the present state is not the latent definite state (S8291: No), the processing proceeds to S8281, while when it is determined that the present state is the latent definite state (S8291: Yes), special figure 1 performance setting processing for setting the performance mode when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent definite state is executed (S8292), and the processing proceeds to S8208. The details of this special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 305, in the special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701). In the processing of S8701, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the loss (S8701: Yes), the performance setting processing at the time of failure for setting the performance mode of continuous failure performance (see FIG. 297) is executed (S8702), and this processing is terminated. The details of the effect setting process when out (S8702) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8701, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern corresponding to the loss (S8701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is greater than 0 (S8703). In the process of S8783, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive omission effect counter 223na is larger than 0 (S8703: Yes), the effect mode of failing to reach the top of the hill is determined (S8704), the value of the consecutive omission effect counter 223na is reset to 0 (S8705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8703, when it is determined that the value of the continuous out of production counter 223na is 0 (S8703: No), the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8706), and then it is determined whether the super RUSH flag 223fi is on (that is, whether it is in the chance zone) (S8707). When it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is ON (S8707: Yes), the flag 223fi during super RUSH is set to OFF (S8708), and then this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is off (S8707: No), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the details of the effect setting process at the time of failure (S8702) will be described. FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process (S8702) at the time of failure in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 306, in the out-time effect setting process (S8702), first, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is ON (S8731). In the processing of S8731, when it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is on (S8731: Yes), at least the previous fluctuation display is set to super long fluctuation, and furthermore, this time is also set to super long fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8731, if it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is off (S8731: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733). In the processing of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 297 (a)) corresponding to the first variation of the continuous loss effect is determined (S8734), 1 is added to the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na (S8735), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is not 0 (S8733: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736). When it is determined that the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is not 1 (2 or more) (S8736: No), the effect mode of climbing the second stage ladder and entering the super RUSH (chance zone) is set (S8737), and the process proceeds to S8742.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a super long variation (S8738). If it is determined that the current variation is off and the variation pattern corresponds to the super long variation (S8738: Yes), the performance mode of entering the super RUSH (chance zone) by reaching the top of the hill at once on the jumping platform is determined (S8739), and the process proceeds to S8742. On the other hand, in the processing of S8738, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern corresponding to the extra-long variation (S8738: No), the effect mode of climbing the first ladder is determined (S8740), 1 is added to the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na (S8741), and then this processing is terminated.

In the process of S8742, the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is reset, the flag 223fi during super RUSH is set to ON (S8742), and the process is terminated. By executing this performance setting processing at the time of failure (see FIG. 306), when the first special symbols are continuously missed, the performance mode of continuous failure performance can be preferably set according to the number of times of succession and the selected variation pattern.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the higher the setting, the lower the probability that the special symbols will be lost, and the chance zone that is advantageous to the player is set when the first special symbol lottery is continuously lost for the first number of times in an advantageous latent state. More specifically, as the first deviation fluctuation, a deviation super-long fluctuation with an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to bias the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, during the execution of the extra-long fluctuation. That is, in the lottery of the second special pattern, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to obtain a prize ball by winning a small win with a high probability, and in the case of winning a big win, the game state after the end of the big win is likely to be set again to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the lower the setting in the latent probability state, the easier it is to set the chance zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the chance zone is set at a rate of 20% when there are two consecutive losses in the lottery for the first special symbol in the latent state, and the chance zone is set at a rate of 100% when the failure occurs three times or more in succession. In addition, the chance zone may be set even if the loss is not continuous, or the chance zone may be set at a certain rate (for example, a rate of 50% or 100%) when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery regardless of the number of consecutive times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of appearance of the chance zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special pattern that is easily executed in the chance zone is executed, the big win type that is advantageous when winning the big win is easily selected, and if the small win with high probability is won, prize balls can be easily obtained during the small win game. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the probability variable big win in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol are made different at the time of winning the jackpot, and the ratio of the probability variable big win in the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 50%) may be set higher in the lottery of the second special symbol (e.g., 80% or 100%). By constructing in this way, the game can be played with a strong expectation of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols in the chance zone. Further, for example, regarding the type of big win, the lottery of the second special symbol may be more disadvantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, the ratio of setting the advantageous continuous mode B (potential state) may be reduced, or the ratio of the probability variable jackpot may be reduced). In the case of this constitution, there is a high possibility that winning a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern during the chance zone will be disadvantageous, but continuing to win a small win will be advantageous to the player, so that a novel game property can be realized in which the player can play the game with a strong hope that he will not get a big win in the chance zone.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when one of the special symbols becomes a big win or a small win in the lottery, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped with the missing symbol, and only when the second special symbol becomes a small win, the variable display is continued even while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed when the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped, the variable display being executed may be continued without being forcibly stopped (between the big winning game and the small winning game, the subtraction of the variation time of the first special symbol is interrupted, and after the big winning game and the small winning game, the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed). By constructing in this way, when a big win is won during the chance zone, the chance zone continues even after the end of the big win, so that the benefit of the chance zone can be continuously received even after the end of the big win, especially when the latent state (continuous mode B), which is advantageous again after the end of the big win, is set. Therefore, the superiority of the chance zone can be further enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced when the chance zone is set.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol, which is relatively disadvantageous, is lost in the advantageous continuous mode B (secret state), only the lottery for the second special symbol, which is relatively advantageous, is frequently executed. For example, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the big win fluctuation (for example, to 10 minutes), the period during the execution of the big win fluctuation may be formed as a chance zone in which only the advantageous second special pattern lottery can be frequently executed. In this case, if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the chance zone and the big winning symbol of the second special symbol is not stopped and displayed before the chance zone ends (that is, if the big winning variation of the first special symbol is not forcibly changed to a failure by stopping the big winning symbol of the second special symbol), the big winning of the relatively disadvantageous first special symbol is started at the end of the chance zone, so that the game property that strongly expects the big winning of the advantageous second special symbol during the chance zone is realized. I can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player between the chance zones. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which forms a chance zone when it becomes a small hit by lottery of the 1st special design.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the drawing of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous is lost, only the drawing of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, is performed intensively, and an advantageous chance zone is formed. Alternatively, or in addition, a period (pinch zone) is formed in which only the drawing of the first special symbol, which is relatively disadvantageous, is performed by setting a long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) even when the drawing of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, is lost. It may be configured as With this configuration, the lower the setting, the more likely the chance zone and the pinch zone will appear. Therefore, it is possible to add contrast to the game in the consecutive villa mode B, which is more advantageous at the lower setting. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 327. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above, the specification is such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (overlapping), and a chance zone can be set in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous when the first special symbol lottery is lost in the latent state, can be executed biasedly.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the specification that only one type of variable display can be performed, a period (chance zone) advantageous to the player is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. More specifically, in the thirteenth embodiment, there are a jackpot (direct hit) that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a jackpot (V win) that is executed based on the fact that a game ball enters (V wins) a specific area (V area) provided at a predetermined position on the game board 13, and when the special symbol lottery is lost in a specific game state (time saving state), a specific game method is performed during the loss fluctuation. Thus, the ball-entering rate (V winning rate) to the specific area (V area) is increased. By configuring in this way, as in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lower the setting is, the higher the degree of advantage in a specific game state (time saving state) can be.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 307, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 is a front view of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment is provided with a lottery device 6750 for executing a jackpot lottery (character lottery) by allocating the inflowing game balls to either a specific area (V area) or an out port below the third symbol display device 81 on the game board 13, in contrast to the board configuration (see FIG. 264) of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). The difference is that the variable winning device 1650 and the right electric accessory 164 are omitted, and the second right ball inlet 6400 is provided with an electric accessory 6400a instead of the right second ball inlet 645.

The lottery device 6750 is in a state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period when a small win is obtained in a lottery with a special pattern (that is, an attacker 6750a for a small win provided at the entrance of the lottery device 6750 is opened), and the game ball entered during the enterable state enters a V winning port 6750f1 provided inside the lottery device 6750, thereby winning a big win (V win). . In addition, inside the lottery device 6750, one V winning opening and five out-openings (out-openings 6750f2 to 6750f6) are provided. Since the game ball entering the lottery device 6750 always enters the V winning port 6750f1 or one of the out ports, the rate (probability) that the game ball entering the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning port (V winning occurs) is 1/6.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of winning the small prize is zero, but when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the probability of winning the small prize is high (for example, 98%). Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry hole 6400, by continuing to hit to the right, a small win is obtained with a high probability and the attacker 6750a for the small win is released, so that the ball is easily entered into the V winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 even if the game ball is hit to the right, so it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left. A left-handed game ball can enter the first ball entry hole 64, but cannot enter the second ball entry hole 6400, so that a small win is not won in the normal state of the normal pattern. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, only two types of game states, a normal state and a time-saving state, are provided. That is, the high probability state and low probability state of the special symbols are not provided, and the lottery probability of the special symbols (lottery probability of direct hit) is always constant.

Next, details of the lottery device 6750 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 308, the lottery device 6750 is provided with one V winning opening 6750f1, five normal V winning openings 6750f2 to 6750f6, and a distribution rotating body 6750f that always rotates at a constant speed. A game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6750f enters one of one V winning hole and five out holes. Since the distribution rotor 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is cut off, the timing of winning a small win, the rolling speed of the game ball in the lottery device 6750, etc. Depending on the ball entrance (one V winning hole and five out ports) provided in the distribution rotor 6750f, it is variable. That is, each time a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the ball entrances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308, a small winning attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the lottery device 6750 when viewed from the front. This small winning attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) when winning a small winning. The game balls that reach the small winning attacker 6750 a from above during this open period flow into the lottery device 6750 . Inside the lottery device 6750, as shown in FIG. 308, a guide channel 6750b for causing game balls to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f is provided, and a part of the floor surface of the guide channel 6750b is provided with a ball discharge door 6750c for opening and closing the floor surface. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c form one flow path, so that the game ball can flow downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls to the discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the sorting rotor 6750f. Further, as shown in FIG. 308, a ball stopping portion 6750e capable of temporarily stopping a game ball that has flowed down in the guide channel 6750b (closing a specific position of the guide channel 6750b) is provided downstream of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c by about one game ball.

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309(a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device 6750 while both the ball ejection door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 309(a), when the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stop portion 6750e are closed, the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6750 passes through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c, is prevented from flowing down by the ball stop portion 6750e, and is stopped to the right of the ball stop portion 6750e. When a game ball further flows down the guide channel 6750b while one game ball is parked, the already parked game ball prevents the flow down and stops to the right of the parked game ball. As described above, the ball stop portion 6750e is disposed with a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the second and subsequent game balls entering the lottery device 6750 are stopped on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

FIG. 309(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while game balls are stationary. As shown in FIG. 309(b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls stopped on the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e drop to the discharge area 6750d and fall outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, a state in which only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 can be formed. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the ball ejection door 6750c was opened, the ball stopper 6750e is tilted leftward in a front view, thereby allowing passage through the guide channel 6750b. As a result, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be caused to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f. The game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 6750b is dropped toward the distribution rotor 6750f from the upper right direction in the front view toward the distribution rotor 6750f. By controlling in this way, the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotator 6750f in one small win can be limited to one at most, so that the probability of the big win lottery using the lottery device 6750 (the ratio of being distributed to the V prize opening by the distribution rotator 6750f) can be made constant.

Next, with reference to FIG. 310, details of the distribution rotor 6750f will be described. FIG. 310 is a top view of the distribution rotor 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189, the distribution rotator 6750f is configured in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and has six ball entrances arranged on its outer edge portion. Since the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with an inclination downward from its center toward the outer edge direction, a game ball that reaches the vicinity of the center of the distribution rotator 6750f from above is distributed to any of the ball entrances provided at the outer edge portion along the inclination toward the outer edge direction.

As shown in FIG. 310, the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with one V-winning opening having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the top and five out openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the top. That is, the V winning opening 6750f1 and the out openings 6750f2 to 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 310, the distribution rotator 6750f is configured to continuously rotate around the axis 6750fz as a rotation axis in a clockwise direction in a top view at a constant speed (for example, a rotation speed of one rotation in 6 seconds) while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 311, the operating pattern (opening pattern) of each part of the lottery device 6750 (the small winning attacker 6750a, the ball stopper 6750e, and the ball ejection door 6750c) when the second special symbol lottery in the thirteenth embodiment results in a small winning will be described. FIG. 311 is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of each part when a small hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 311, when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small winning attacker 6750a is opened along with the start of the small winning (the start of the small winning effective period). As shown in FIG. 311, the open state of this small hit attacker 6750a continues for 2 seconds and is closed after 2 seconds. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6750a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. If the game ball can enter the small hit attacker 6750a during the open period of 2 seconds, the game ball can be made to reach the distribution rotor 6750f during the small win effective period and enter any ball entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 311, the ball stop portion 6750e is maintained in a closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) until 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and is switched to an open state (a state in which the guide channel 6750b can flow down) from the time when 3.5 seconds have passed (1.5 seconds after closing the small hit attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small win. On the other hand, the sphere discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309(a)) until 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small winning, and is switched to the open state (see FIG. 309(b)) from the time when 3 seconds have passed (1 second after closing the small winning attacker 6750a) to the end of the small winning, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small winning. That is, for 3 seconds after the start of the small win, the ball stop part 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are closed, so that all the game balls entered into the lottery device 6750 are stopped in the guide channel 6750b by the ball stop part 6750e.

In addition, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stop part 6750e closed, so that all the game balls other than the one game ball stopped by direct contact with the right side of the ball stop part 6750e fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 . Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball ejection door 6750c is opened, the ball stop portion 6750e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 flows down toward the distribution rotor 6750f. In this way, by first opening the ball discharge door 6750c and then opening the ball stop part 6750e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small winning attacker 6750a, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6750d until the ball stop part 6750e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f in one small win can be limited to one each time, the winning probability of the big win in the small win (probability of the game ball entering the V winning hole) can be always constant (1/6).

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, when the second special symbol lottery performed with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols being 0 results in a small hit, the fluctuation time is randomly set to 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds. Therefore, even if it is possible to adjust the variation start timing (the timing at which the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400) by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is impossible to adjust the start timing of the small winning game (starting at any timing after 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds after the start of the variation). can be configured to prevent In other words, the jackpot (per V) winning rate in the case of a small win in the time saving state can be made constant (1/6). Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the variation time of the normal symbols is fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the game state, the electric accessory 6400a is opened only at intervals of 30 seconds at the shortest (the opportunity to enter the second ball entrance 6400 is given only every 30 seconds). On the other hand, when it becomes a small hit that is won at a rate of 98% in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds or less (1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds). In other words, even if the effective period (6 seconds) of the small winning game is taken into account, the period required from the start of the lottery of one special symbol to the end of the small winning game is 9 seconds or less (the period is less than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), so that it is difficult to accumulate the reserved balls even if the right-handed hitting is basically continued continuously in the time-saving state. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the opening time of the electric accessary 6400a when the normal symbol wins in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds x 1 time", so that it is configured so that one game ball can barely enter during the opening period based on the win of one normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the presence of the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the variation time is fixed to 1 second. That is, while the reserved ball exists, a new special symbol lottery is executed every 7 seconds (fluctuation time of 1 second + small winning game period of 6 seconds). In this case, the ball stopping portion 6750e is opened, and the game balls stopped inside the guide flow path 6750b are moved to the distribution rotor 6750f at intervals of 7 seconds. Here, as described above, the distribution rotor 6750f is configured to always rotate at a rotational speed of one revolution in 6 seconds while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, if the game ball goes to the distribution rotor 6750f every 7 seconds, the game ball will reach the distribution rotor 6750f about every 7/6 laps. Here, as described above, the distribution rotator 6750f has six ball entrances (V winning opening 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6) arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, when a game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f every 7/6 rounds, it enters the ball entrance that is adjacent in the rotational direction to the previously distributed (about 7 seconds ago) ball entrance. . Therefore, as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the game ball can be entered into the adjacent ball entrance for each small hit variation, so it can be said that the game ball can easily enter the V winning opening 6750f1. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the long variation of the second special symbol is set so that the maximum (four) reserved balls of the second special symbol can be accumulated during the long variation. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a loss that is originally not very pleasing can be turned into a great chance of winning a V.

Next, with reference to FIG. 312, an overview of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) (long variation) is set, and during this period, the second special symbol reserved balls can be stored up to the maximum (four). In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol lottery can be executed at least four times or more. As described above, the variation time of the normal symbols is 30 seconds, and the open period at the winning of the normal symbols is 0.5 seconds, so that the lottery of the normal symbols can be executed about 5 times during the long variation. Therefore, it is possible to easily store up to four holding balls of the second special symbol, which is the maximum value, simply by continuously hitting to the right during the long variation. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing the change over time of the progress of the game after accumulating the reserved balls to the upper limit in the chance zone (lost long variation).

FIG. 312(a) shows an example of temporal change in the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotor 6750f immediately after the chance zone ends. Each number attached to FIG. 312(a) corresponds to one of the six entrances (V winning entrance 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6). That is, the number "1" designates the first entrance (one of six entrances), the number "2" designates the second entrance rotationally adjacent to the first entrance, the number "3" designates the third entrance rotationally adjacent to the second entrance, the number "4" designates the fourth entrance rotationally adjacent to the third entrance, and the number "5" designates the fifth entrance rotationally adjacent to the fourth entrance. The number "6" designates the sixth entrance, which is rotationally adjacent to the fifth entrance, respectively. In addition, in FIG. 312(a), as the position (rotational position) of the distribution rotor 6750f, the change over time of the ball entrance into which the game ball dropped from the guide channel 6750b can be entered is shown. Here, in FIG. 312(a), in order to make the explanation easier to understand, a situation is exemplified in which the first ball entrance becomes a ball-enterable arrangement at the end timing of the chance zone. However, since the rotation of the sorting rotor 6750f is executed regardless of the end timing of the chance zone (the state of the variable display of the second special symbol), the end timing of the chance zone does not always coincide with the timing when the first ball entrance is moved to an arrangement in which a ball can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), the type of the ball entrance arranged at the position where the game ball can enter in the distribution rotator 6750f is switched every second. That is, as shown in FIG. 312(a), until 1 second has elapsed from the end of the chance zone, the game ball is arranged to enter the first ball entrance, from 1 second until 2 seconds have elapsed, the game ball is arranged to enter the second ball entrance, from 2 seconds to 3 seconds, the arrangement is such that the game ball can enter the third ball entrance, and from 3 seconds to 4 seconds, the arrangement is such that the game ball can enter the fourth ball entrance. A game ball can be entered into a fifth ball entrance from 4 seconds to 5 seconds, and a game ball can be entered into a 6th ball entrance from 5 seconds to 6 seconds. After that, the ball entrance that allows the ball to enter is switched one by one every second.

On the other hand, FIG. 312(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the game after the loss long variation (chance zone) ends. If the held ball is stored until the end of the long fluctuation (during the chance zone), the small hit fluctuation will start with the end of the chance zone. As described above, the small winning variation of the second special pattern is always set to 1 second under the condition that the ball is held, so when 1 second elapses, the small winning pattern is stop-displayed and the small winning game is started. As described above in FIG. 311, in the small winning game of the thirteenth embodiment, the small winning attacker 6750a is opened for 2 seconds immediately after the start, and the game ball that first entered the lottery device 6750 during the opening period (the game ball stopped by the ball stopper 6750e) flows down toward the distribution rotating body 6750f 3.5 seconds after the start of the small winning. That is, the small hit attacker 6750a is released from 1 second after the end of the chance zone to 3 seconds after the end of the chance zone, and the game ball flows down toward the distribution rotor 6750f at 4.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. Here, since it takes 0.5 seconds to 1 second to flow down from the ball stop portion 6750e to the distribution rotor 6750f, it actually reaches the distribution rotor 6750f after 5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the chance zone. That is, as shown in FIG. 312(a), the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f in the arrangement in which the sixth ball entrance can be entered. Therefore, if the sixth ball entrance is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, the V winning occurs) and wins the V win (the V winning starts when the small win ends). Note that FIG. 312(b) illustrates a case where the sixth entrance is the out entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 312(b), after the chance zone ends, when the first small win does not result in a V prize, after the small win valid period elapses (after 6 seconds from the start of the small win), the variation display based on the second held ball held in the chance zone is started. That is, after the end of the chance zone, the variable display based on the second held ball is started when 7 seconds have passed. In addition, when the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit (four) in the chance zone, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the second reserved ball (the variable display executed under the condition that two reserved balls exist) is always set to 1 second. Therefore, when 1 second elapses after the start of variation (8 seconds after the end of the chance zone), the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed to start the small winning game, and the small winning attacker 6750a is released for 2 seconds (from 8 seconds after the end of the chance zone to 10 seconds after the end of the chance zone). Then, when 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win (11.5 seconds have passed after the chance zone has ended), the ball stopping part 6750e is opened. That is, as shown in FIG. 312(a), the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f in the arrangement in which the first ball entrance can be entered. Therefore, if the first ball entrance is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, the V winning occurs) and wins the V winning (the V winning starts when the small winning ends), while if the first ball opening is one of the out openings, the V winning does not occur and the V winning does not occur. Note that FIG. 312(b) illustrates a case where the first entrance is the out entrance. Thus, in the second small winning game after the chance zone ends, the ball enters the ball entering (the first ball entering) adjacent to the ball entering (the sixth ball entering) in the first small winning game in the rotating direction.

Then, in the small hit based on the third reserved ball held in the chance zone (the third small hit after the chance zone ends), similarly, as shown in FIGS. 312 (a) and (b), the game ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance) adjacent in the rotation direction to the ball entrance (first ball entrance) in the second small winning game. Regarding the fourth held ball, since the number of held balls is 0 at the time of digestion of the hold, any one of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds is randomly set as the fluctuation time, but when the fluctuation time of 1 second is set, the ball enters the entrance (third ball entrance) adjacent in the rotation direction to the entrance (second ball entrance) in the third small winning game, and when the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the ball enters in the third small winning game. A ball is entered into a ball entrance (fourth ball entrance) at a position advanced by two positions in the rotational direction with respect to the entrance (second ball entrance), and when a variation time of 3 seconds is set, the ball is entered into a ball entrance (fifth ball entrance) at a position advanced by three positions in the rotational direction with respect to the ball entrance (second ball entrance) in the third small winning game.

In summary, by continuously executing right-handed hitting in the chance zone, the reserved balls are accumulated to the maximum, and the game ball is entered into the small winning attacker 6750a during the opening period of the small winning game after the chance zone ends. In other words, it is possible to enter a game ball into four different ball entrances among the six ball entrances provided in the distribution rotator 6750f during the pending digestion after the end of the chance zone. Therefore, the probability that a V prize will occur during the period from the end of the chance zone until the upper limit number (four) of the reserved balls accumulated during the chance zone is consumed is 4/6. Since the V winning rate is about 52% (1-5/6×5/6×5/6×5/6) when the small winning game is executed four times in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0, an advantageous situation can be formed in which the V winning rate is increased by 10% or more by setting the chance zone. In addition, when winning of normal symbols is started during the holding digestion and the number of held balls of the second special symbols increases, the number of small winning games increases, so that the V winning rate further increases. In this way, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to form an advantageous situation in which V prizes are more likely to occur than usual when the game is lost in the time-saving state, so it is possible to realize a novel game property of wishing to be lost in the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, a characteristic effect in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, control is performed so that the lost long variation with a variation time of 5 minutes (300 seconds) is set, and it is possible to accumulate the number of reserved balls up to the upper limit during the execution of this lost long variation. By accumulating the reserved balls up to the upper limit number, the possibility of generating a V winning prize in a small win game executed from the end of the lost long variation to the consumption of all the reserved balls is increased (4/6 or more). In FIG. 313, the effect mode (charge time effect) executed in the third symbol display device 81 during execution of this off-long variation (during the chance zone) will be described.

FIG. 313(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the charge time effect which is executed when the drawing for the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 313(a), when the off-long variation is executed (entering the chance zone) and the charge time effect is executed, a character 811 resembling a rabbit with a stern expression and a display mode in which the character 811 begins to apply force to the whole body is displayed in the approximate center of the main display area Dm, and a display area is formed above the character 811 in which the characters "Charge time rush!" This display area also displays a countdown display of the remaining period until the charge time (chance zone) ends. In the example of FIG. 313(a), the state of 4 minutes and 56 seconds remaining is illustrated, and characters "4:56 remaining" are displayed in the display area. Furthermore, an expectation level display image KH having a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed on the right side of the character 811 when viewed from the front. This expectation degree display image KH is a display area for displaying characters indicating the degree of expectation that a V prize will be generated in a small win game for the number of reserved balls executed after the chance zone ends, and is constructed so that the displayed degree of expectation increases each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases. FIG. 313(a) illustrates a state in which the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0, and "Expectation 0/6" is displayed in the expectation level display image KH. Furthermore, a character saying ``Raise your expectations by hitting right-handed!!'' is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous manner by numbers in the small display area Ds1 formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that hitting to the right increases the expectation of a big win.

FIG. 313(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when game balls enter the second ball entrance 6400a and the number of held balls increases during execution of the charge time effect. When the ball entering the second ball entrance 6400a is detected during execution of the charge time performance, the character 811 is switched to a display mode in which the character 811 is wrapped in an aura OG (the surroundings emit light), and an expectation-increasing image UG is formed on the upper left side of the character 811, in which the characters "UP!!" Furthermore, the degree of expectation displayed in the degree-of-expectation display image KH increases by 1 to become "1/6". In addition, the number indicating the number of held balls of the second special symbol in the small display area Ds1 is also updated. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the degree of expectation increases as the number of held balls of the second special symbol increases. As the number of held balls increases, the range of the aura OG expands, and the degree of expectation displayed in the degree of expectation display image KH increases up to 4/6. These changes in the display content can further heighten expectations for the small winning game to be executed after the chance zone (charge time) ends, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the display mode of the aura image OG and the degree-of-expectation display image KH is simply varied according to the number of held balls of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time the number of held balls increases, the result of prefetching may be determined, and the display mode may be determined in consideration of the determination result. More specifically, for example, when the look-ahead result is a small win, the display mode of the aura image OG and the degree-of-expectation display image KH is raised by one step, while when the look-ahead result is a big win, the display mode may be set to correspond to the maximum degree of expectation (for example, 6/6). With this configuration, the player can play the game while paying attention to the change in the display mode (implied degree of expectation) during execution of the charge time performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314(a). FIG. 314(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment has the first per random number table 202pa instead of the first per random number 12 table 202na, the small per random number 13 table 202pb instead of the small per random number 12 table 202nb, and the second per random number 7 table 202fc instead of the first per random number table 202pa. The difference is that a second winning random number 13 table 202pc is provided, a jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd, and a variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne.

First, with reference to FIG. 315(a), details of the first winning random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 13 table 202pa. As shown in FIG. 315(a), in the first winning random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment, one type of value range of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in association with each set value. In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is no special symbol low probability state or probability variable state, and the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is always executed with a constant jackpot probability.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 315(a), the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponds to setting 1, which corresponds to "0 to 204", the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponds to setting 2, which corresponds to "0 to 217", and the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1 corresponds to setting 3, which corresponds to "0 to 233". Setting 4 is defined in association with "0 to 251" as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1, setting 5 is defined in association with "0 to 311" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1, and setting 6 is defined in association with "0 to 409" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state is 1/320 (205/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/301 (218/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/280 (234/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/260 (252/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/210. (312/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/160 (410/65536).

Next, with reference to FIG. 315(b), details of the small winning random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is not associated with the first special symbol. Therefore, the probability of becoming a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is zero. On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, "410 to 64634" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1. Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/1.02 (64225/65536). Therefore. Considering the probability of a big hit, the probability of losing the second special symbol lottery is 1/59 (setting 1) to 1/73 (setting 6). In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of entering the chance zone in the time-saving state (the ball is lost in the lottery of the special symbols and the long variation is set), so the low setting also increases the probability of winning the V during the period from the setting of the advantageous time-saving state to the end of the lottery based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols reserved in the time-saving state. Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, when winning a V hit, the game state after the end of the V hit is always set to an advantageous time-saving state. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the lower the setting, the longer the repetition of the time-saving state and the jackpot tends to continue (more times). Therefore, in an advantageous time-saving state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played with the expectation that the setting is low, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315(c), details of the second winning random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315(c), in the second winning random number 13 table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment, only "0" is defined as a random value (the counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) determined to be a winning of a normal symbol in a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is 1/300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 315(c), in the second winning random number 13 table 202pc, "0 to 299" is defined as a random value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a winning of normal symbols in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. Therefore, the probability of winning the lottery of the normal symbols in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols is 1/1 (300/300). As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbols in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols is configured to be extremely low. As a result, even if the lottery for the second special pattern with a high small winning probability is to be executed in the normal state by hitting to the right, it is difficult to win the normal pattern and it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, so that the game ball can be more likely to lose than hitting to the left. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, details of the first win type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. This first winning type selection 13 table 202pd is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when winning a jackpot, like the first winning type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 316(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning type selection 13 table 202pd.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment includes a direct hit table 202pd1 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (so-called "direct hit" occurs), and a direct hit table 202pd1 for determining (determining) the jackpot type when a special symbol lottery occurs. A V-per table 202pd2 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type is defined. First, the details of the direct hit table 202pd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 316(b).

FIG. 316(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the direct hit table 202pd1. As shown in FIG. 316(b), in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A13" and "jackpot B13", are provided as jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot (a direct hit occurs) occurs in the first special symbol lottery. "Jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (4 rounds, short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state of 5 times of time-saving times regardless of the game state. On the other hand, "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (four rounds, normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the end of the jackpot, while when winning during the time saving state, the time saving state of 5 times is given. Therefore, in the normal state, the "jackpot A13" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B13" because the game state after the completion of the jackpot is more advantageous. In addition, in the time-saving state, even if any jackpot is won, an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, so the degree of advantage is the same.

As shown in FIG. 316(b), "jackpot A13" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 64", and "jackpot B13" is defined in correspondence with the range of "65 to 99". That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win, the "jackpot A13" is determined at a rate of 65% (65/100), and the "jackpot B13" is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 316(b), the direct hit table 202pd1 is provided with "big hit C13" as a big hit type that can be determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit. This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (4 rounds, normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 12 rounds, and the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends when winning in the normal state, while the time saving state of 5 times is given when winning during the time saving state. If you win a jackpot in the second special design lottery. 100% (100/100) "jackpot C13" is determined.

Next, details of the V winning table 202pd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 316(c). As described above, this V winning table 202pd2 is a data table that defines data for specifying (selecting) the type of big winning to be executed based on the occurrence of a V winning in a small winning game (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 6500e3). FIG. 316(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this V winning table 202pd2. As shown in FIG. 316(c), the V-winning table 202pd2 defines three types of jackpots: "jackpot D13", "jackpot E13", and "jackpot F13".

As shown in FIG. 316(c), "jackpot D13" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 12 rounds and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot D13" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and the game state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot C7' is 50, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot D13' as the jackpot type to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 50/100 (50%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 316(c), "big win E13" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" for the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot E13" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This 'jackpot E13' has the largest number of rounds next to the 'jackpot C13' and 'jackpot D13', and since the game state after the completion of the jackpot is in an advantageous time-saving state, it is the next advantageous jackpot type after the 'jackpot C13' and 'jackpot D13' in terms of the number of rounds. In addition, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot E13' is 20, so the probability (percentage) that the 'jackpot E13' is determined (selected) as the jackpot type to be started when the V winning occurs during execution of the small win game is 20/100 (20%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 316(c), "big win F13" is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" for the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot F13" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot F13" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in terms of the number of rounds, but the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot F13' is 30, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot F13' as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 30/100 (30%).

Incidentally, as described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the probability of winning a small prize at a rate of about 98% and the occurrence of a V prize in one small prize game is 1/6. In addition, unless the lottery for the second special symbol results in a relatively low probability of being out, it is almost impossible to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls. Therefore, when the time-saving state of 5 times of time-saving is set, 5 times of the small win game is executed and the reserved ball of the 2nd special pattern shifts to the normal state with 0, or V winning occurs within 5 times and becomes a V win in most cases. Since the probability of V winning occurring within 5 small wins executed in the time saving state is about 59.8% (1-5/6×5/6×5/6×5/6×5/6), basically, once the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 59.8% (a rate of more than 60% when direct hits are taken into consideration). When winning the second special pattern directly or winning the V win, an advantageous time saving state is set again after the end of the big win without fail, so that when shifting to the time saving state, an advantageous state is formed in which the big win and the time saving state are repeated at a rate of more than 60%. Therefore, since the game can be played with one goal of shifting to the time-saving state, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, details of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment includes a normal 13 table 202pe1 that is referred to to determine the variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is performed in the normal state, a time saving 13 table 202pe2 that is referred to to determine the variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, and a special symbol lottery in the normal state after clearing the RAM (after setting change). and a RAM clear time table 202pe3 that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern in each case. For convenience of explanation, first, the details of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 will be explained.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 317, in the time saving 13 table 202pe, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of held balls, the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation type (variation pattern). On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, regardless of the number of held balls, a short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined as a variation type in association with the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, the variation time is set to 1000 ms regardless of the lottery result.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the middle variation with the variation time of 5000 ms, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198" is defined in association with the long variation with the variation time of 10000 ms. In addition, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 300000 ms is defined in association with the entire range that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special pattern is lost in the time-saving state, the second special pattern continues to fluctuate for five minutes, so that a chance zone can be formed in which the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be accumulated during that time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time is configured to be variable according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 65" in association with the small winning variation A with the variation time of 1000 ms as the variation type, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the small winning variation B with the variation time of 2000 ms as the variation type in the range of "66 to 132". 33 ~ 198”, as a variation type, a small hit variation C with a variation time of 3000 ms is associated and defined. That is, the variable time of 1 second, the variable time of 2 seconds, and the variable time of 3 seconds are selected at a ratio of approximately 1:1:1. Therefore, in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0, a game method aiming at a small winning start timing which facilitates a V winning from the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6750f can be configured so as not to be established, so that the V winning rate in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0 can be uniformly reduced to 1/6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, a small hit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association with the entire range that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit number in the chance zone, the fluctuation time is fixed to 1 second until the reserved balls become 0 (until the reserved balls are consumed by 3), so that the intervals at which the game balls reach the distribution rotator 6750f in the small winning game can be set at regular intervals (7-second intervals). As a result, the game ball can be entered into the ball entrance adjacent in the rotation direction to the ball entrance into which the ball was entered in the previous small win for each small win until the number of reserved balls becomes 0 with respect to the distribution rotator 6750f that makes one round in 6 seconds. That is, in the small winning game for the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to enter the same ball entrance with each other, so that the possibility of winning a V prize can be improved. Therefore, when the player is given an opportunity to move to the chance zone and save the reserved balls, the expectation for the V prize can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although not shown, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the normal state, the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be the same except for the deviation. Therefore, for example, even when the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the state of one remaining number of times of time saving is lost and the long variation is set, by accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol during the long variation, a small winning game with a high V winning rate can be executed after the end of the long variation (that is, after the end of the time saving state). That is, regardless of the timing of the loss in the lottery of the second special pattern, a small win game with a high V prize winning rate can be executed after the chance zone ends, so the loss can always be expected until the time-saving state ends. It should be noted that, in the normal state, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, it is configured to set a loss short variation with a variation time of 1 second. This is intended to suppress a long useless period in which the lottery of the special symbols is not executed and the reserved balls cannot be stored because the winning probability of the normal symbols is low and the reserved balls of the second special symbol cannot be accumulated even if the losing long variation is executed when the ball is lost in the normal state.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314(b). FIG. 314(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 268 (b)) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) in that a jackpot type storage area 203pa and a V passage flag 203pb are added. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, the probability variation flag 203fa, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are different in that they are deleted. The deletion of these flags and counters is due to the deletion of the simultaneous variation function and probability variation function.

The jackpot type storage area 203pa is a storage area for storing data for discriminating the jackpot type (V win type) set when a game ball winning a prize in a lottery device 6750 enters a V prize opening 6750f1 during execution of a small prize game. This big win type storage area 203pa stores a data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the determined small win type when the variation of the special symbol that the determination result is a small win stops (S36022 in FIG. 320). When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 in the lottery device 6750, at the end of the small win, the start of the big win of the type corresponding to the data value stored in the big win type storage area 203pa is set (see S3311 in FIG. 324).

The V passing flag 203pb is a flag indicating whether or not V winning has been detected during the small winning game. If this V passing flag 203pb is ON, it indicates that V winning has already been detected during the small winning game, and if it is OFF, it means that V winning has not been detected. The initial value of the V passing flag 203pb is set to OFF, and is set to ON when a V winning is detected (see S3406 in FIG. 325). In addition, at the end of the small hit that detects the V winning, it is set to off after setting the start of the big hit according to the small win type (see S3312 in FIG. 324). With this V passing flag 203pb, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the big win should be started at the end of the small winning game (that is, whether or not the V winning occurred during the small winning game).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 318 to 325. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) will be described. This special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above, and is a process for setting the variation display of the special symbol in the first symbol display device 37.

In the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 13 (S141), the same process as the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) is executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (S141) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the present is not during the big hit or the small hit in the processing of S251 (S251: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is being varied (S10201), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not being varied (S10201: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter The value of 203dd (number of holdings of variable display based on lottery of the first special symbol N1) is acquired (S10202), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S10203).

In the processing of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S10203: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by calculation is set (S10205). The special figure 1 pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10205, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S10206). In the process of S10206, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203dd are processed to sequentially shift to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and the process proceeds to S10212.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S10203: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (the number of holding times of variation display based on the second special symbol lottery N2) is acquired (S10207). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is greater than 0 (S10208). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S10208: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (S10209), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de changed by calculation is set (S10210). The special figure 2 pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 322) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S10210, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted by the same technique as the process of S10206 (S10211).

In the processing of S10212 executed after the processing of S10206 or S10211, the special symbol variation start processing 13 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S10212), and this processing ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S10201, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10201: Yes), the variation time counter for measuring the variation time is updated (S10213), and based on the value of the variation time counter after updating, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this variation time has not passed (S10214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10215), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 13 (S10212), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of a special pattern is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and when the jackpot of the special pattern is determined, the type of jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

After the processing of S10216 is finished, when the variation display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is started, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is a special symbol jackpot (S10217). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10217: Yes), data corresponding to the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 203mb (S10218), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S10219). Next, the start of the jackpot is set, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10225.

On the other hand, in the process of S10217, if the result of the lottery this time is the deviation of the special pattern (including the small hit) (S10217: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether the time saving state of the normal pattern) is determined (S10221), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10221: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated by subtracting 1. (S10222), and the process proceeds to S10223. On the other hand, in the processing of S10221, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10221: No), the processing of S10222 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S10223.

In the process of S10223, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small win (S10223), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S10223: Yes), a small win start process for setting the start of the small win is executed (S10224), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S10223, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (that is, it is a loss) (S10223: No), the process of S10224 is skipped and the process of S10225 is performed.

In the process of S10225, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends (S10225). The stop command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the state command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

By executing this special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 318), it is possible to perform only one of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display. Also, the lottery for the first special symbol can be preferentially executed over the lottery for the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141), will be described. In this special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212), first, the data stored in the execution area is acquired (S321), and among the acquired execution area data, the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning random number table 202pa (see FIG. 315, (a)), and the small winning random number table 202pb (see FIG. 315, (b)) are referred to to acquire the lottery result of the big winning lottery (S 322). Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S322 is a special symbol jackpot (S323), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S323: Yes), data indicating the current jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203pa (S324). Then, the display mode at the time of the big win is set according to the type of the big win this time (S325). In the process of S325, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the jackpot type. Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S326). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S326, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state among the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S326 is completed, the process proceeds to S332.

On the other hand, in the processing of S323, when it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (S323: No), it is then determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is a small win (S327), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S327: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small win is set (S328). When the process of S328 is completed, the variation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S329). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S329, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops with a combination of symbols indicating a small win is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state among the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S329 is completed, the process proceeds to S332.

On the other hand, in the processing of S327, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery of this time is not a small win (S327: No), the display mode (loss symbol) at the time of loss is set (S330), and then the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S331). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S329, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state among the variation pattern selection 13 tables 202pe, and the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S331 is completed, the process proceeds to S332.

After any one of S326, S329 and S331 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S326, S329 and S331 is set (S332). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S333). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in any one of S325, S328, and S330 is set (S334). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) described later. When the processing of S334 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 318).

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, details of the above-described small winning start process (S10225) will be described. This small winning start process (S10225) is, as described above, a process for starting a small winning when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning. In this small winning start process (S10225), first, the operation scenario (see FIG. 311) of the lottery device 3750 in the small winning game is read out (S3601), and then the big winning type storage area 203pa stores the data indicating the big winning type to be started when V winning occurs in this small winning (S3602). More specifically, in the process of S3602, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot D13 (12 round short time jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type; , Jackpot F13 (4 round short time jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type. When the processing of S3603 ends, the start of the small hit is set, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 13 (S142) will be described. This normal design variation process 13 (S142) is a process executed instead of the normal design variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

In the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 of the normal symbol variation process 13 (S142), the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 321, in the normal symbol variation process 13 (S142) in the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1112 or S1113, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be 30 seconds (S1131). This fluctuation time of 30 seconds is a period of length in which it is difficult to increase the number of held balls of the second special symbol even if the player continues to hit to the right in an advantageous time-saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, the variation time of normal symbols is fixed to 30 seconds irrespective of the game state so that the number of held balls of the second special symbols cannot be increased unless the special symbol lottery is lost and long variation is set. As a result, it is possible to give great joy to the player when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery during the time saving state.

Also, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol (S1118: No), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S1133). On the other hand, in the process of S1118, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory are set to "0.5 seconds x 1 time" (S1132). This open time of 0.5 seconds x 1 time is composed of a length that makes it difficult to enter two or more game balls into the second ball entry port 6400 (it becomes difficult to acquire the second special pattern reserved ball by winning one normal pattern). After executing the process of S1132 or S1133, the process proceeds to S1121.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the details of the main process 13 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. This main process 13 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and first embodiment) described above.

Among the main processing 13, S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 are the same as S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main processing (FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Further, as shown in FIG. 322, in the main process 13 in the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1803, instead of the big win control process (see FIG. 56) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the big win control process 13 is executed (S1841). The details of this jackpot control process 13 (S1841) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S1841 is completed, small winning control processing for executing various controls during execution of the small winning game is executed (S1842), and the processing proceeds to S1806. The details of this small winning control process (S1842) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841), which is one process in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described. This jackpot control process 13 (S1841) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a process for executing various controls during execution of the jackpot game.

Of this jackpot control process 13 (S1841), in each process of S1901-S1912 and S1916-1918, the same process as each process of S1901-S1912 and S1916-1918 of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 323, in the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that the current jackpot end timing is determined (S1912: Yes), the data in the winning state storage area 203mb is read out (S1991), and the game state corresponding to the data in the read winning state storage area 203mb and the time according to the jackpot type this time. The value of the short counter 203h is updated (S1992), and the process proceeds to S1916.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the contents of the small hit control process (S1842), which is one process in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described. In this small hit control process (S1842), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the small hit start timing (S3301). In addition, in the processing of S3301, in the small winning start processing (see FIG. 320), when the start of the small winning is set, it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning.

In the processing of S3301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning (S3301: Yes), the opening command for the small winning showing the start of the opening period of the small winning is set (S3302), the small winning flag 203dg is set to ON (S3303), the start of the operation scenario for the small winning is set (S3304), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is on (that is, whether it is during the small hit) (S3305), and when it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is off (S3305: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is on (S3305: Yes), it means that the small hit game is being executed, so next it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ending period) (S3306). 3308). Next, it is determined whether the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309), and if it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309: Yes), it means that the V winning has already been detected in the small hit this time. S3311), the V passage flag 203pb is set to OFF (S3312), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3309: No), it means that the V winning is not detected, so each processing of S3310 to S3312 for setting a jackpot game based on the V winning is skipped, and the present processing is finished as it is.

Also, in the processing of S3306, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small win (S3306: No), the entry of the ball into the V prize opening 3750f1 is monitored, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the V passage detection processing for storing the occurrence of the V prize is executed (S3307), and this processing is finished. By executing this small winning control process (see FIG. 324), the big winning game can be started only when the V winning is detected during execution of the small winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the contents of the V passage detection process (S3307), which is one process in the small hit control process (FIG. 324, S1842), will be described. This V passing detection process (S3307) is, as described above, a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the V winning opening 3750f1 and storing the occurrence of a V winning when detecting the entry of a ball.

As shown in FIG. 325, in the V passing detection process (S3307), first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203pb is ON (S3401). If it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is ON (S3401: Yes), it means that the ball entering (passing through) the V winning hole 3750f1 has already been detected and there is no need to monitor the ball entering the V winning hole 3750f1. exit.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203pb is off (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not a ball entering (passing through) the V winning opening 3750f1 has been detected (S3402), and if it is determined that a ball entering (passing through) the V winning opening 3750f1 has not been detected (S3402: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3402 that a ball has been entered into the V winning opening 3750f1 (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is valid (S3403). 3404), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3403 that it is within the V effective period (S3403: Yes), the V passage command is set (S3405), then the V passage flag 203pb is set to ON (S3406), and this processing ends.

By this V passage detection processing, when the V prize is generated, the V passage flag 203pb is set to ON to memorize the occurrence of the V prize, so whether or not the big win game can be executed can be accurately determined according to the presence or absence of the V prize.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 and 327. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 326, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (S4161) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 11 (FIG. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

In the variable display setting process 13 (S4161), the process of S5231 is the same as the process of S5231 of the variable display setting process 11 (FIG. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

Also, as shown in FIG. 326, in the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5281). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5281: No), since the special figure fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S5285. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5281: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5231), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5282), then the production mode setting process 13 for setting the production mode according to the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is executed (S5283), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b. is shifted (S5284), and the process proceeds to S5285. Details of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S5285, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5285), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5285: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5285: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5286), a stop type command for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5287), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the contents of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described. This effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment described above.

In the processes of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 of the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283), the same processes as the processes of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327, in the production mode setting process 13 (S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is an off-long variation (S18201). In the processing of S18201, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not long variation (S18201: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, in the processing of S18201, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a long variation (S18201: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the charge effect (see FIG. 313) is determined (S18202), and the process proceeds to S8208. By executing the charge performance, the player can easily understand that the game should be played with the aim of increasing the number of held balls of the second special symbol by striking to the right during a chance zone (charge time).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the normal state (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), the V prize is generated at a rate of 1/6. When the V prize is generated, the big win is started after the small win is finished, and the game state after the big win is again in an advantageous time-saving state, so that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the V prize is generated in the small win game. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is configured to form a chance zone capable of accumulating up to the upper limit number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when winning in the time saving state. A small winning game with a higher V winning rate than usual is executed by continuously executing right-handed hitting in the chance zone and accumulating the reserved balls to the maximum, so that a special game property that strongly desires to be lost in a time-saving state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting (the higher the probability of a big hit), the lower the probability of being out, so when shifting to the time saving state, the lower setting is more likely to shift to the chance zone. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage in the time saving state, so that when shifting to the time saving state, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property that makes the player wish for a lower setting. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery during the time saving state, a long variation with a long variation time (5 minutes) is set, and the reserved ball with the second special symbol can be stored only during the long variation. is not limited to For example, even during execution of the jackpot game, it may be configured such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easily accumulated. By configuring in this manner, a situation in which the winnings are likely to be distributed to the V winning opening 6750f1 immediately after the end of the big win is likely to occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, for example, when a direct hit is won in a time-saving state, the change time of the direct hit may be lengthened (for example, to 5 minutes) to form a state in which a V prize is likely to occur after the direct hit ends. In this case, the high setting, which is easier to win directly, has a higher degree of advantage, so that the player can be made to want to play with the pachinko machine 10 with a higher setting.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in a situation where there are one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, each time a small winning game is executed, the variation time of the second special symbol is set (set to 1 second) so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entrance adjacent in the rotation direction to the entrance (distributed by the distribution rotator 6750f) in the previous small winning game. There is no need to set a variable time that makes it easier to The behavior when the small winning game is executed continuously in the state where the reserved balls are accumulated can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the case where the small winning game is executed the same number of times in the state where the reserved balls are not held.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in the lottery device 3750 for performing lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit by the entered game ball, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of V winning, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having specifications provided with a variable probability lottery device for drawing a game state (low probability state of special symbols or variable probability state) after the end of the big win during the big win game. Specifically, when at least one game ball entering a variable probability lottery device in which game balls can be entered during execution of a big winning game enters a V winning opening, the state of the special symbols after the end of the big winning is set to the variable probability state of the special symbols, and when the V winning does not occur during the big winning game, the special symbols may be set to the low probability state of the special symbols. The lower the setting, the lower the jackpot probability, but it may be configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type in which the variable probability lottery device is operated in an operation pattern in which V prizes are likely to occur increases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 14th embodiment, a chance zone (long fluctuation) is set to easily form a situation (a state in which reserved balls are accumulated up to an upper limit value) in which a V winning prize is likely to occur in a small winning game when the ball is lost in the time-saving state, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, in a normal state, a chance zone may be formed on the basis of establishment of a predetermined condition after being configured so that the lottery for the first special symbol can win a small prize at a lower probability (for example, probability of 1/100) than the lottery for the second special symbol. Concretely, for example, when two consecutive small wins are won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the fluctuation time is set to be extremely long, and by hitting to the right during that time, it may be configured to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special pattern like a chance zone set during the time-saving state. By constructing in this way, even if the V prize is not generated in the small prize game of the first special pattern, if the first special pattern lottery results in a small prize after the end of the small prize game, it is possible to obtain a chance that the V prize is likely to occur, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the first special pattern lottery result after the completion of the small prize. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 328 to 363. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment described above is configured to execute a special symbol jackpot lottery and a lottery for determining a variation pattern indicating the result of the jackpot lottery by referring to separate random numbers. That is, the jackpot lottery is executed by comparing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type selection 13 table 202pa, and the lottery for determining the variation pattern is executed by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured so that the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern are executed based on the same random number value. Then, a special failure variation pattern is selected as a failure variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that is a win for some set values and a failure for some set values. In other words, it is possible to guess (narrow down) the set value when an outlier variation pattern that is selected only for some set values is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of variation pattern that is executed at the time of loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the more unfavorable the situation is for the player, the higher the execution rate of the specific effect (win rate suggesting effect) that can suggest the setting. That is, the execution ratio of winning rate suggesting performance is set to be higher as the number of times of failing to shift to an advantageous game state (probability variable state continuing until the next big win or time saving state of 100 times of time saving) after the end of big win continues. As a result, the player can be made to start a game in the pachinko machine 10 where the disadvantageous situation has continued for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Although the details will be described later, in the 14th embodiment, four types of game states are provided: normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, and latent probability state. The normal state and latent probability state are disadvantageous game states. That is, the normal state and the hidden state are configured as a disadvantageous game state in which the electric accessary 6400a is difficult to open and the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed even if the player hits to the right (it is necessary to advance the game by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left). In addition, in a disadvantageous game state, even if a variable probability jackpot is won, the ratio of setting a small number of times of shortening time (e.g., 8 times) is high, and if the jackpot is not won again during the small number of times of shortening time, it is difficult to shift to an advantageous variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played with a strong desire to win a jackpot during a small number of times of time saving (8 times). Further, in the 14th embodiment, when a big win is won, a high probability state (latent probability state or probability variable state) of special symbols is set at a high rate (percentage of 90%) after the end of the jackpot. In other words, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, even if the probability variable big win is won, the state of the special pattern after the end of the big win is forcibly set to the low probability state of the special pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the big win, so that a deep game can be realized.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 328, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the game board 13 of the fourteenth embodiment differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 307) in that the lottery device 6750 is eliminated and that various movable members (accessories) capable of performing predetermined performance operations are provided for each part of the game board 13.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 329 and 330, the operation unit 300 provided with various movable members will be described. 329 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 330 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300 in which the operation unit 300 is disassembled and viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, operation unit 300 includes rear case 310 formed in a box-like shape with one side (front side of FIG. 330) opened from bottom wall portion 311 and outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of bottom wall portion 311. A rectangular opening 311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, so that the rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 328) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The motion unit 300 includes a swing motion unit 400, a first slide motion unit 500, a box-shaped unit 600, a decorative accessory unit 700, and a second slide motion unit 800, which are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 310, and are configured as one unit. Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an external shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the back case 310, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 311 in a manner surrounded by the outer wall portion 312 while contacting the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312. In the assembled state (see FIG. 329), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in front view.

The swing motion unit 400, the first slide motion unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decoration accessory unit 700 are arranged in a stacked state in front of the second slide motion unit 800, and housed in the rear case 310 (see FIG. 329). As described above, in the present embodiment, another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) is superimposed on the front side of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800). In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 328) is made of a light-transmissive material and the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are visible to the player, only the necessary parts of the predetermined action units can be seen by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by the other action units. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332, an overview of the operation modes of the standing object 400 and the first slide operation unit 500 will be described. 329 and 330 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 331 and 332 as appropriate.

331 and 332 are front views of operation unit 300. FIG. 331 shows a state in which the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged in the extended position, and FIG. 332 shows a state in which the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position. As shown in FIG. 331, the swinging motion unit 400 includes an arm member 420 whose base end is swingably pivoted, and an upright material 410 swingably supported at the swinging end side opposite to the base end side of the arm member 420, and these arm member 420 and upright helper 410 are operated between a retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and an extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (original position) shown in FIG. 329, the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 are retracted below the opening 311a of the rear case 310 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 331, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the standing member 410 is arranged in the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third pattern display device 81).

As shown in FIG. 332, the first slide operation unit 500 includes a tilting accessory 510 that slides obliquely downward, and a rotating accessory 520 that can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise around a rotating shaft 520a. The tilting accessory 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (original position) shown in FIG. 329, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 332, the tilting accessory 510 is placed in the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, in front of the third pattern display device 81).

As described above, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment is provided with a plurality of movable members (various accessories such as the standing accessory 410 and the tilting accessory 510), and is configured to be capable of executing various performance operations. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333, a characteristic presentation mode in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the 14th embodiment, in the normal state and latent probability state, which are relatively disadvantageous to the player, as a kind of variable display performance, a winning rate suggesting performance is configured to notify (suggest) the player of the expectation (winning rate) of winning a big win in the lottery of special symbols within 100 times. Here, in the 14th embodiment, as described above, both the normal state and the latent state are configured as disadvantageous game states in which it is extremely difficult to execute the special symbol lottery even if the player hits to the right (it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left). That is, since the behavior of the pachinko machine 10 (operation of the pachinko machine 10) other than the jackpot probability is common between the normal state and the latent probability state, it is basically difficult to distinguish between the normal state and the latent probability state. However, in the case that it is completely unknown whether it is a normal state or a latent state, the player has a feeling of uneasiness that a normal state with a low jackpot probability is set when the special pattern lottery is continuously lost, and the player loses motivation for the game and quits the game even though the latent state with a slightly higher advantage is set because the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state. That is, there is a possibility that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be lowered. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, by executing the winning probability suggesting effect, it is possible to distinguish between the normal state and the latent probability state depending on the content of the effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the winning rate suggesting performance is executed, and to improve the motivation for the game when the content of the performance has a high possibility of a latent probability state. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the 14th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the ratio of setting the number of time reduction times to 0 is lower than when the jackpot is won in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal state from becoming excessively disadvantageous compared to the latent probability state, so it is possible to prevent the operating rate from decreasing in the normal state.

FIG. 333(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode at the start of the winning probability suggesting effect. When execution of winning rate suggesting performance is set in a normal state or a latent probability state, a performance is executed in which a character 710 imitating a boy wearing a headband displayed in a small area Ds2 utters the words ``What is the winning rate within 100 games...'' while all the third patterns are being variably displayed at high speed. The line uttered by the character 710 after this line suggests the probability of winning the jackpot (winning rate) during 100 games (that is, until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times). In addition, since the probability of winning a big win is higher in the latent probability state than in the normal state, a higher winning rate is likely to be suggested in the latent probability state.

FIG. 333(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the winning rate is suggested by the character 710 in the winning rate suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 333(b), in the win rate suggesting effect, an effect is executed in which the character 710 suggests the win rate numerically to the player through dialogue. FIG. 333(b) exemplifies a situation in which the line "30% over" is uttered, suggesting that the winning rate is at least 30% or higher. Although the details will be described later, this production mode in which the line "30% over" is pronounced is configured to be more likely to be selected in the latent state than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the degree of expectation of the latent state is high, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved. In addition, in the 14th embodiment, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 1/200 and 1/55.6. In the low probability state of the special pattern, the ratio of winning the 1/200 jackpot (winning rate) until the lottery of the special pattern is executed 100 times is about 39.4%, so the winning rate of ``30% over'' is a numerical value that applies even in the normal state of setting 1.例文帳に追加As a result, even if a winning rate of ``30% over'' is suggested in a normal state with a low probability of big win, the behavior of winning a big win at a ratio exceeding 30% can actually be realized, so that the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(a), another aspect of the winning probability suggesting effect in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the winning rate suggesting performance in the 14th embodiment, the winning rate is suggested so as not to exceed the theoretical value of the rate of winning the jackpot (winning rate within 100 games) until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times. The winning rate within 100 games changes depending on the setting. More specifically, in the 14th embodiment, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is set to 1/200, while the jackpot probability of setting 6 is set to 1/90. Therefore, the winning rate within 100 games of setting 1 is approximately 39.4%, while the winning rate within 100 games of setting 6 is approximately 67.3%. For this reason, for example, when a winning rate of "40% over" is reported in the normal state, setting 1 is denied. Conversely, when a winning rate of "40% over" is notified in setting 1, the normal state is denied (the latent probability state is established). In this way, in the fourteenth embodiment, taking into account the difference in the jackpot winning rate for each setting and the game state word, when a specific performance mode (a mode in which a winning rate exceeding the winning rate within 100 games in a specific setting or a normal state) is executed in the winning rate suggesting performance, a part of the situation (a part of the setting or the normal state) is denied. As a result, it is possible to suggest a set value to the player in addition to suggesting the normal state or the latent state in the win rate suggesting presentation, so that a more amusing presentation mode can be realized.

FIG. 334(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the win rate suggestion effect for which setting 6 is fixed. As shown in FIG. 334(a), in setting 6, it is configured such that a winning rate of "66.6% over" can be announced as a winning rate suggesting effect. By setting all the digits (the tens digit, the ones digit, and the first decimal place) of the value indicating the winning rate to "6", it is possible to suggest that the setting is 6 to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation. It should be noted that this effect mode of "66.6% over" is configured to be executed only in the normal state in setting 6. In the normal state, the 100-game winning rate of setting 5 (jackpot probability 1/120) is about 56.7%, and the 100-game winning rate of setting 6 (jackpot probability 1/90) is about 67.3%. Therefore, when "66.6% over" is reported in the normal state of setting 6, the behavior of actually winning the big win at a rate exceeding 66.6% can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust.

In the 14th embodiment, the more the situation becomes disadvantageous for the player (the more the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) in which it has not been possible to shift to an advantageous game state (either the variable probability state that continues until the next big win, or the time-reduction state with the number of times of time-saving being 100 times), the higher the probability of execution of the winning rate suggesting effect. That is, it is configured such that the setting is suggested at a higher rate. As a result, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game in a disadvantageous situation, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the setting suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, on the main controller 110 side, an outlier variation pattern (variation type) that can be selected (or is likely to be selected) only with some set values is provided. More specifically, outlier fluctuations that are selected only at setting 2 or higher (setting 1 negative super reach), outlier fluctuations that are only selected at setting 4 or higher (high setting fixed super reach), and outlier fluctuations that are selected only at setting 6 (setting 6 fixed super reach) are provided. In addition, there are provided an outlier variation (even-number suggesting super reach) in which an even-number setting is more likely to be selected than an odd-number setting and an out-of-range variation (radix index super reach) in which an odd number setting is more likely to be selected than an even number setting. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, when these variation types are notified, similar to the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern type (that is, the setting value) is suggested (executed setting suggestion presentation) by the numbers attached to the left and right third symbols when the reach occurs.

FIG. 334(b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern presentation (drawing mode) when the variation type (variation pattern) of the high setting fixed super reach is notified from the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 334(b), when the high setting fixed super reach is executed, the third symbol with the number "4", the third symbol with the number "5", and the third symbol with the number "6" are stopped in a vertical line with respect to the right symbol row, while the third symbol with the number "6", the third symbol with the number "5", and the number "4" are attached with respect to the left symbol row. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the third symbols are stopped in a vertical line. In other words, a ready-to-win performance (a so-called triple ready-to-win performance) is executed in which the third pattern ready-to-win with the number ``4'' added in the downward right direction, the ready-to-win in the third pattern with the number ``5'' attached in the horizontal direction to the horizontal direction, and the ready-to-win in the third pattern with the number ``6'' attached to the rising right-hand side are performed, and finally the lost pattern is stop-displayed. In the setting suggesting performance, setting is suggested by a number attached to a pattern on which reach is applied, so that only by confirming the third pattern during execution of high setting fixed super reach, it is possible to easily understand that any one of setting 4, 5 and 6 is suggested.

In addition, in order to execute the production that the ready-to-win occurs in the third pattern to which any of the numbers ``1'' to ``6'' is attached in the setting suggestive presentation, when the normal super-ready-to-win (that is, super ready-to-win which can be selected regardless of the setting) is notified as the variation type, the presentation to generate the ready-to-win in the third pattern to which the third symbols other than ``1'' to ``6'' (that is, any of the numbers ``7'' to ``9'') is executed. As a result, when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player can easily understand whether it is the setting suggestion performance or the normal super ready-to-win performance only by confirming the number attached to the third pattern. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation.

<Electrical configuration in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 335(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment described above (see FIG. 314 (a)), in that the 1st per random number 14 table 202qa is provided instead of the 1st per random number 13 table 202pa, and the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd. The difference is that a variable pattern selection 14 table 202qe is provided instead of the pattern selection 13 table pe, a time reduction granting table 202qf is added, and a small winning random number 13 table 202pb is deleted along with the elimination of the small winning lottery result. Since other configurations are the same as those of the thirteenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 336(a), details of the first winning random number 14 table 202qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 14 table 202qa. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the first winning random number 14 table 202qa in the fourteenth embodiment defines the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as big hits in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 336(a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, 328 counter values (random values) of "0 to 89, 200 to 437" are defined in association with setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first per random number counter C1, and for setting 2, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as "100 to 189, 230 to 503." 364 counter values (random values) are defined in association with setting 3, and 410 counter values (random values) of “0 to 89, 230 to 549” are defined in association with setting 3 as the range of counter values (random values) of the first random number counter C1. With setting 5, 546 counter values (random numbers) of "0 to 89, 280 to 735" are associated and defined as the range of the counter values (random numbers) of the first random number counter C1, and with setting 6, 728 counter values (random numbers) of "100 to 189, 300 to 937" are associated with the ranges of the counter values (random numbers) of the first random number counter C1. are stipulated. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (328/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/180 (364/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 3 is 1/160 (410/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/140 (468/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120. (546/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/90 (728/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 336(a), in the high-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1179" is defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 1, "0 to 1310" is defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 2, and "0 to 1310" is defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 3. "0 to 1474" is defined in association with setting 4, "0 to 1684" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 4, "0 to 1965" is defined in association with setting 5 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 2620" is defined in association with setting value 6 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is 1/55.6 (1180/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/50 (1311/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/44.4 (1475/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/38.9 (1685/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability. is 1/33.3 (1966/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/25 (2621/65536). In addition, the ratio of the jackpot probability of a low probability state and the jackpot probability of a high probability state is common similarly to 11th Embodiment and 12th Embodiment.

Here, unlike other embodiments, the value of the random number (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big win in the low probability state of the special symbol is not continuous (the value is partly skipped). This is to provide a range that cannot be selected, a range that can be selected only at high settings (settings 4 to 6), a range that can be selected only at setting 6, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 339 and the like, but in the variation pattern selection 14 table in the 14th embodiment, the variation pattern at the time of loss and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 are defined in association with each other. That is, the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery are determined by referring to a common counter (first winning random number counter C1). In some set values, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit is defined in association with the type of a special outlier variation pattern. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to estimate (narrow down) the set value when the special deviation fluctuation pattern is executed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of variation pattern that is executed at the time of loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336(b), details of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 336(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 336(b), in the first win type selection 14 table 202qb in the tenth embodiment, at least a special 1 win table 202qd1 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and a special 2 winning table 202qd2 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 337(a), the details of the special 1 win table 202qd1 will be described.

FIG. 337(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special 1 win table 202qd1 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 337(a), in the special 1 winning table 202qd1 in the 14th embodiment, 8 types of "jackpot A14" to "jackpot H14" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. "Jack A14" to "Jack C14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot is set to a high probability state of special symbols. Also, "jackpot D14" to "jackpot F14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the special symbol state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. In addition, "jackpot G14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol low probability state. Furthermore, "jackpot H14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state. In addition, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given is configured to differ according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 5" in association with "jackpot A14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot A14' is 6 of '0 to 5', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot A14' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "6 to 46" as the jackpot type "jackpot B14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) in association with each other. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B14" is 41, ie, ``6 to 46'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot B14'' when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery is 41% (41/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "47 to 66" in association with "jackpot C14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``big win C14'' is 20, ie, ``47 to 66'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot C14'' is 20% (20/100) when the big winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value "67" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "jackpot D14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot D14'' is 1, so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot D14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "68, 69" in association with "jackpot E14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot E14'' is two, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot E14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 89" as the jackpot type "jackpot F14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) in association with each other. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot F14'' is 20, ie, ``70 to 89'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot F14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 92" in association with "jackpot G14" (9-round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``big win G14'' is 3, so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot G14'' when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "93 to 99" in association with "jackpot H14" (3-round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot H14'' is 7, so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot H14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 7% (7/100).

Thus, in the 14th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the percentage of probability variable jackpot is 90% (when any of ``jackpot A14'' to ``jackpot F14'' is obtained), and the normal jackpot is won at a percentage of 10% (when either ``jackpot G14'' or ``jackpot H14'' is obtained). In addition, it is configured such that a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337(b), the details of the special 2 win table 202qd2 will be described. This special 2 winning table 202qd2 is, as described above, a data table for determining the winning type when a big winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 337(b), in the 14th embodiment, as the winning types of the second special symbol, four big winning types of "big winning I14" to "big winning L14" are provided. "Jack A14" to "Jack C14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot is set to a high probability state of special symbols. In addition, "jackpot D14" to "jackpot F14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special pattern. "Jack I14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of special symbols. Also, "jackpot J14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special pattern. In addition, "jackpot K14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern. Furthermore, "jackpot L14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 66" in association with "jackpot I14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot I14' is 67 of '0 to 66'.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "67 to 89" in association with "jackpot J14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with ``jackpot J14'' is 23, ``67 to 89''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 92" in association with "jackpot K14" (9 round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot K14' is 3 of '90 to 92', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot K14' when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 3% (3/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type "jackpot L14" (3-round normal jackpot) in association with it. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot L14'' is 7, ``93 to 99''.

Thus, in the 14th embodiment, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, similarly to the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of 90% (when either ``jackpot I14'' or ``jackpot J14'' is obtained) is a probability variable jackpot, and the ratio of 10% (when either ``jackpot K14'' or ``jackpot L14'' is obtained) is configured to win a normal jackpot. In addition, it is configured such that a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%. In other words, it is configured so that the distribution of the number of rounds is the same as when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338(a), details of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment is different from other embodiments, and data for determining the variation pattern (variation time) is defined according to the value (random number) of the first per random number counter C1. FIG. 338(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 338 (a), the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the 14th embodiment is a left-handed state table 202qe1 for determining (selecting) the variation pattern (variation time) in the gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set (that is, the normal state in which the game should proceed by hitting to the left, the latent state), and the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (that is, the time-saving state in which the game should proceed by hitting to the right, variable state). and a right-handed state table 202qe2 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in . First, with reference to FIG. 338(b), the details of the left-handed state table 202qe1 will be described.

FIG. 338(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the left-handed state table 202qe1. As shown in FIG. 338(b), in the left-handed state table 202qe1 in the fourteenth embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the first winning random number counter C1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 338(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a multiple of 4, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in correspondence with the "winning normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to be a value other than a multiple of 4, and the "winning super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when a big win is obtained in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state and the latent state, the variation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the variation time is set to 30 seconds at a rate of about 3/4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 99". Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in the odd setting, the range of "0 to 89" in the range of the random numbers corresponding to the even suggesting super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to the range of "0 to 89". Therefore, in the odd number setting, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the even number suggesting super reach, 90% will be a big hit (loss variation is not executed), so the ratio of even number suggesting super reach is substantially 1/10. That is, the even-number suggesting super reach is ten times more likely to be executed in the even-number setting, so that the player can be made to think that the possibility of the even-number setting is high when the even-number suggesting super reach is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "100 to 199" in association with the "odd-suggestion super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in the even setting, the range of "100 to 189" in the range of the random numbers corresponding to the odd-number suggesting super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to the range of "100 to 189". Therefore, in the even number setting, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the odd number suggesting super reach, the ratio of executing the odd number suggesting super reach is substantially 1/10 because 90% of the winning is a big hit (loss variation is not executed). That is, the odd number suggesting super reach is ten times more likely to be executed in the odd number setting, so that the player can be made to think that the odd number setting is highly likely when the odd number suggesting super reach is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "200 to 229" in association with "setting 1 negative super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in setting 1, the entire range of the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to a random value determined as a big hit, while in the other settings, the random number value is set so that the range of the random numbers corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach and the range of the random number determined as a big win do not overlap. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach, the possibility of executing the setting 1 negative super reach becomes 0 because a big win is achieved (loss variation is not executed). That is, setting 1 negation super reach is performed only at setting 2 or higher, so that the player can have a sense of security that at least the setting is not the lowest setting when it is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "200 to 229" in association with "setting 1 negative super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in setting 1, the entire range of the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to a random number value determined as a big hit, while in the other settings, the random value range corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach and the range of random numbers determined as a big win are set so as not to overlap each other. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery for the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach, the possibility of executing the setting 1 negative super reach is 0 because a big win is achieved (loss variation is not executed). That is, setting 1 negation super reach is executed only at setting 2 or higher, so that when executed, the player can at least have a sense of security that the setting is not the lowest setting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "230 to 279" in association with the "high setting finalized super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in settings 1 to 3 (low setting), the entire range of the range of random numbers (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to the high setting fixed super reach is set to the random number value determined as a big hit, while in settings 4 to 6 (high setting), the random number value corresponding to the high setting fixed super reach and the range of the random number determined to be a big hit are set so as not to overlap. Therefore, in the settings 1 to 3, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the high setting fixed super reach, the possibility of executing the high setting fixed super reach becomes 0 because a big win is obtained (loss variation is not executed). That is, since the high setting fixed super reach is executed only at the setting of 4 or more (high setting), the player can have a great sense of security that the setting is high (the big win probability is set relatively high) when executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "280 to 299" in association with "setting 6 fixed super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in settings 1 to 5 (settings other than setting 6), the entire range of the range of random numbers (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to setting 6 confirmed super reach is set to the random number value determined as a big hit, while in setting 6, the random number value is set so that the range of random numbers corresponding to setting 6 confirmed super reach and the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit do not overlap. Therefore, in settings 1 to 5, even if a special symbol lottery is executed with a random number value corresponding to setting 6 fixed super reach, the possibility of executing setting 6 fixed super reach is 0 because a big win is achieved (loss variation is not executed). That is, since the setting 6 fixed super reach can be executed only at the setting 6 (high setting), the player can have a very great sense of security and satisfaction that the setting is the highest setting (the jackpot probability is set to the highest) when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's motivation for the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the normal (that is, selected regardless of the setting) deviation fluctuation pattern is associated with the range where the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "300" or more. More specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "300 to 10084", and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "300 to 10084", the fluctuation time of 30000 ms is defined in correspondence with the "short out" of the fluctuation time of 8000 ms in the range of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 of "1085 to 33465". 224” is defined in association with a “long outlier” with a fluctuation time of 12000 ms, and a “outlier normal reach” with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 of “53225 to 65535”.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is ``big win'', ``long winning variation'' with a variation time of 120000 ms is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "loss", "loss long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 120000 ms is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1. Therefore, when an irregular game method of right-handed hitting is practiced in a state where the game should be advanced by left-handed hitting (normal state, latent state), the electric accessary 6400a is hardly opened, making it difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the variation time is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, so that the game efficiency can be greatly deteriorated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-hand shot is performed in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which the game should be progressed by a left-hand shot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, in the 14th embodiment, an overview of the correspondence between the random number value (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) associated with various variation patterns corresponding to the failure and the random number value determined to be winning (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) will be described in detail using setting 1 and setting 4 as examples.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 339, the random numbers determined to be winning in setting 1 are the range of "0 to 89", which occupies 90% of the range of random numbers corresponding to even suggested super reach (the range of "0 to 99" for the first random number counter C1), the entire range of random numbers corresponding to setting 1 negative super reach (the range of "200 to 229" for the first random number counter C1), and the entire range of random values corresponding to high setting confirmed super reach. The full range of the range (the range of the first per random number counter C1 is "230 to 279"), the entire range of the random value range corresponding to the setting 6 fixed super reach (the range of the first per random number counter C1 is "280 to 299"), and the range of "300 to 437", which is part of the range of the random value corresponding to the outlier super reach (the range of the first per random number counter C1 is "300 to 10084"). are Therefore, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of starting winning in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number corresponding to the even-number suggesting super reach (within the range of "0 to 99"), 90% (within the range of "0 to 89") is determined as a big winning, and the normal winning variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, which is an odd number setting, even if a random number value corresponding to even number suggesting super reach is obtained, the ratio of actually executing even number suggesting super reach is only 10%, so even number suggesting super reach becomes difficult to execute.

In addition, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of start winning in setting 1 is within the range of random number values (within the range of ``200 to 299'') corresponding to any one of setting 1 negative super reach, high setting fixed super reach, and setting 6 fixed super reach, it is always determined as a big win and normal winning variation or winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, the possibility of execution of setting 1 negative super reach, high setting fixed super reach, and setting 6 fixed super reach is zero.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 339, the random value determined to be a hit in setting 4 is the range of “100 to 189”, which occupies 90% of the range of random values corresponding to the odd number suggestive super reach (the range of “100 to 199” for the first hit random number counter C1), the entire range of the random value range corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (the range of “280 to 299” for the first random number counter C1), and the outlier super reach. and a range of "300 to 657" which is a part of the range of random numbers corresponding to (the range of "300 to 10084" of the first hit random number counter C1). Therefore, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of starting winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number corresponding to the odd number suggesting super reach (within the range of ``100 to 199''), 90% (within the range of ``100 to 189'') is determined as a big winning, and the normal winning variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 4, which is an even number setting, even if a random value corresponding to odd number suggesting super reach is obtained, the ratio of actually executing odd number suggesting super reach is only 10%, so odd number suggesting super reach becomes difficult to execute.

In addition, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number corresponding to the setting 6 finalized super reach (within the range of ``280 to 299''), it is always determined as a big win, and the winning normal variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 4, the possibility of execution of setting 6 finalized super reach is 0.

Although illustration is omitted, the same is true for other settings. In setting 2, odd number suggestive super reach (random value range of “100 to 199”) is difficult to execute, and random values (counter value of first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit are set (distributed) so that the possibility of executing high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 confirmed super reach (random value range of “230 to 299”) is 0. Further, in setting 3, the random numbers (counter values of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as big wins are set (distributed) so that even-suggestion super reach (random value range of "0 to 99") is difficult to be executed, and the possibility of executing high setting fixed super reach and setting 6 fixed super reach (random number range of "230 to 299") is 0. Also, in setting 5, the random number (the counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big win is set (distributed) so that the possibility of even-suggestion super reach (random value range “0 to 99”) is difficult to be executed, and the possibility of executing setting 6 definite super reach (random value range “280 to 299”) is 0. Then, in setting 6, the random number (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit is set (distributed) so that the odd number suggesting super reach (random number "100 to 199" range) is difficult to execute, and other fluctuation types are executed without limitation.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a failure variation type that is difficult to be executed and a failure variation type that is unlikely to be performed for each setting, so that the game property of estimating the set value of the pachinko machine 10 from the execution state of the failure variation can be realized. For example, when setting 1 negative super reach and odd suggesting super reach are confirmed, the player can guess that setting 3 or setting 5 is highly likely. In addition, when high setting fixed super reach and even number suggested super reach are confirmed, the player can guess that setting 4 or setting 6 is highly likely. Further, if setting 6 confirmed super reach is executed, the player can be convinced that it is setting 6. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property of guessing (narrowing down) the setting from the execution status of the deviation fluctuation pattern of the specific type, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type drawn by the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to analyze the variation pattern command output each time the special symbol lottery is executed and execute the variation pattern performance according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, on the audio ramp control device 113 side, it is only necessary to define the correspondence relationship between the variation type and the performance mode of the variation pattern performance, and it is not necessary to grasp the setting values themselves (that is, the main control device 110 does not need to notify the audio ramp control device 113 of the setting values).

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, the details of the right-handed state table 202qe2 constituting the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe described above will be described. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the right-handed state table 202qe2. As shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is a "big win", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is a multiple of 4 is defined in association with the "normal winning reach" with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is not a multiple of 4 is defined in association with the "winning super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15000 ms. Therefore, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the variation time is set to 10 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the variation time is set to 15 seconds at a rate of about 3/4. That is, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be set compared to the state in which the game needs to be played left handed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is "loss", regardless of the type of special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "0 to 4999", and the fluctuation time is 15000ms. , the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to correspond to the range of "45000 to 54999" with "long out" with a fluctuation time of 7000 ms, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to correspond to the range of "55000 to 65535" with the "outside normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms. That is, in the time saving state and the probability variable state, even when it is out, it is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected than in the normal state and the latent probability state. As a result, since the game efficiency can be enhanced in an advantageous state, the player's interest in the advantageous state can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the time reduction provision table 202qf in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This time reduction provision table 202qf is a data table referred to for setting the number of times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Drawing 341 is a figure showing the contents of regulation of time reduction grant table 202qf.

As shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot A14 (9 round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set. The number of times of working hours is set. Therefore, if a jackpot A14 or a jackpot D14 is won before the probability variable limit number of times is reached, a variable probability state (most advantageous game state) continuing until the next big win is set, while when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, only a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of eight times are set, so that the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the probability variable limit number of times is reached.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot A14 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. If the probability variable jackpot hits before the probability variable limit is reached, the number of time reductions (65536 times) that substantially continues until the next jackpot is granted. Time saving number of times is set. Therefore, even when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the lottery of the special pattern can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls in hand, so that the player can have a feeling of anticipation for pulling back the big win. In addition, in the 14th embodiment, it is configured so as not to clearly inform the player whether or not the limit number of times has been reached (whether the variable probability state or the time saving state). Therefore, even if the variable probability limit number of times is actually reached and the time saving state is set, the player can expect the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot I14 (9 round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, 8 times of time saving times are given even if the hit is before reaching the probability limit limit or the probability limit number of times is reached. In other words, before the limit is reached, the probability variable state is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed eight times after the end of the jackpot, and the probability state is maintained after the ninth time. On the other hand, if the limit number of times has been reached, the time-saving state is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed eight times after the end of the jackpot, and the normal state is established after the ninth time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9-round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3-round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot I14 (9-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time-saving state, probability-variable state) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set are associated with the same time-saving grant times as the jackpot A14 and the jackpot D14. In other words, the number of times of time reduction (65536 times) substantially continuing until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time reduction of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times. Therefore, the big wins B14, E14, I14 are more disadvantageous than the big wins A14, D14 in terms of the game state after the end of the big win when they are won in the normal state or the latent probability state before reaching the probability variable limit number of times, and when they are won in other situations (when they are won in the probability variable state, the time-saving state, or when the probability variable limit number of times is reached), the same game state as the big wins A14, D14 is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state are defined in association with 8 times as the number of times of time reduction. In addition, if you win the probability variable jackpot in the normal state, the probability variable limit number of times will not be reached, so the number of time reduction grants when the probability variable limit number is reached is not specified (because the probability variable limit number cannot be reached, there is no need to specify). In addition, 0 times is defined as the number of times of shortening time even if the hit is before reaching the variable probability limit or the number of times of probability variable limit is reached for the jackpots C14 and F14 won in the latent probability state. In other words, when the jackpots C14 and F14 are won in the latent probability state, the time-saving state of normal symbols is not provided even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, are associated with the same time saving times as the jackpots A14, B14, D14, E14, I14. In other words, the number of times of time saving that continues until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time saving of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot G14 (9 rounds normal jackpot), jackpot H14 (3 rounds normal jackpot), jackpot K14 (9 rounds normal jackpot), and jackpot L14 (3 rounds normal jackpot) won in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set are defined in association with 8 times as the number of times of time reduction. In addition, since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached when winning a normal jackpot, the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not defined (no need to be defined). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, 100 times are associated with the jackpots G14, H14, K14, L14 won in the gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, as the number of time saving giving times. In other words, when the jackpots G14, H14, K14, L14 are won, it is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 to F14, H14 to J14 because the number of time-saving grants that continues until the next jackpot cannot be set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot J14 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is defined as 0 times as the number of times of time reduction regardless of whether or not the probability variable limit number of times is reached. Therefore, the jackpot J14 is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player when winning in the normal state or the latent probability state because the number of rounds is small and the time saving state is not given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot J14 won in the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, if the probability variable jackpot hits before reaching the probability limit limit, a time saving state (65536 times) that continues until the next big hit is given, and when the probability limit number is reached due to the big hit, the time saving number of times is set to 100 times.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the number of times of shortening time given after the end of the big win is differentiated according to the kind of the big win, the game state at the time of winning the big win, and whether or not the variable probability limit number of times has been reached. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state after the end of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 335(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 314(b)) in that a variable probability flag 203fa, a limit counter 203qa, and a limit reaching flag 203qb are added. Moreover, it is different in that the small hit flag 203dg, the big hit type storage area 203pa, and the V passage flag 203pb are deleted. Deletion of these configurations is intended to eliminate the configuration for realizing V wins because the 14th embodiment is not provided with a big win (V win) based on V winnings.

The variable probability flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to a variable probability state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the variable probability state is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied.

The limit counter 203qa is a counter for counting the probability variation limit number of times. If the value of the limit counter 203qa is less than 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached, so the state after the jackpot end is set to the special symbol high probability state. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203qa is 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached, so the state after the jackpot end is set to the special symbol low probability state. The limit counter 203qa has an initial value set to 0, and each time the probability variable jackpot is won, the value is updated by adding 1 at the end of the probability variable jackpot (see S3504 in FIG. 352). In addition, this limit counter 203qa is reset to 0 when it is determined that the variable probability limit has been reached (the counter value is updated to 11) at the end of the variable probability jackpot, and at the end of the normal jackpot (see S3502 in FIG. 352).

The limit reaching flag 203qb is a flag indicating whether or not the variable probability limit number of times has been reached. If this limit reaching flag 203qb is ON, it means that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached (the probability variable jackpot has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is OFF, it means that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached. The limit reaching flag 203qb is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203qa is updated to 11, which is the probability variable limit number, at the end of the jackpot (see S3507 in FIG. 352). Also, this limit reaching flag 203qb is set to OFF at the start of the big win (see S10233 in FIG. 347).

Next, referring to FIG. 342, a state transition method in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the 14th embodiment, as described above, there are provided four game states, namely, the normal state and latent probability state that are disadvantageous to the advantageous player, and the time-saving state and variable probability state that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment, two types of probability variable states are provided, namely, the probability variable state in which the number of times of time saving is 8 times and the probability variable state which continues until the next jackpot election. In addition, as the time saving state, two types of time saving state, ie, a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 8 times and a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 100 times are provided. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the normal state and latent probability state that are disadvantageous to the player are called normal mode A and normal mode B, respectively, the time saving state with a small number of times of time saving (8 times) and the probability variable state are respectively called chance mode A and chance mode B, the time saving state with a large number of times of time saving (100 times) is called a return mode, and the probability variable state that continues until the next big win (substantially confirmed state) is called continuous mode. First, with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in normal mode A will be described.

As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 342, in normal mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big win is won. That is, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and either the jackpot A14 or D14 determined at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the continuous mode advantageous to the player. In addition, when one of the big wins B14, C14, E14 and F14 determined at a rate of 83% is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加Further, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either the jackpot G14 or H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A.例文帳に追加In this way, when a big win is won in the normal mode A, the time saving state of the normal pattern is given at least eight times without fail, so that the shift to the continuous mode can be expected by winning the big win again within the number of times of the time saving. Also, when a big win is achieved in the normal mode A, one of the big wins B14, C14, E14, F14 is won mainly (at a high rate of 83%), and the game shifts to the chance mode B. In other words, in most cases, it is possible to receive the lottery eight times in the high probability state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to strongly expect the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

Next, a mode transition method in normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. 342 . As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 342, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big win is won. Specifically, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either of the big wins A14 or D14 decided at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the continuous mode advantageous to the player. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached by the big win, the mode after the big win is set to the chance mode A. - 特許庁In addition, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, either of the big wins B14 or E14 determined at a rate of 43% is won, the mode after the big win is finished is set to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached by the big win, the mode after the big win is set to the chance mode A. - 特許庁Further, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either jackpot G14 or H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win and either of the big wins C14 and F14 determined at a rate of 40% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the normal mode B again. That is, a disadvantageous state is set in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not provided. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached due to the big win, the normal mode A is set as the mode after the big win. In other words, even if the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the time saving state is not given. In this way, when a big win is won in the normal mode B, the time-saving state of normal patterns is given only at a rate of 60%, so the normal mode B is more disadvantageous than the normal mode A in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. However, in the normal mode B, since the probability of a big win is tripled or more, the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the probability of a big win.

Next, with reference to the central left side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described. As shown on the center left side of FIG. 342, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state not only when a jackpot is won, but also when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the center left of FIG. 342, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackets A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when the number of time saving passes in the chance mode A (eight consecutive draws of special symbols are lost), the game shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a jackpot during the eight time-saving times.

Next, with reference to the center right side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in chance mode B will be described. As shown on the center left side of FIG. 342, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the central right part of FIG. 342, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackpots A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. It should be noted that when the probability variation limit number of times is reached in the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when the number of time saving passes in chance mode B (lottery for special symbols is lost eight times in a row), the game shifts to normal mode B, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode B as well as in the chance mode A, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a jackpot during the eight time reduction times.

Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in the pullback mode will be described. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, in the pullback mode, like the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when a big win is won or when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackets A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the time saving number of times has passed in the pullback mode (the lottery of special symbols is lost 100 times in a row), the game shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the pullback mode again (the pullback mode is looped).

Next, with reference to the lower right part of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in the consecutive villa mode will be described. As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 342, in the continuous mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big win is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 342, when a normal jackpot (jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win, when winning a probability variable big win (big wins A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90%, the mode after the big win is again set to the consecutive game mode most advantageous to the player (the consecutive game mode is looped). In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won and the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

Thus, in the 14th embodiment, in order to shift to the continuous mode which is advantageous for the player, basically, it is necessary to shift to the chance modes A and B in which the number of times of time saving is set to 8 times, and then win a jackpot within the range of the number of times of time saving of 8 times, which is relatively small. However, once the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, a very advantageous state is formed in which the continuous mode and the big win are repeated at a high rate of 90%, so that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when shifting to the continuous mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343(a), details of the RAM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 343(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 222 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343(a), the configuration of the RAM 222 in the fourteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 222 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and eleventh embodiment) (see FIG. 274) in that a winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa, a performance type selection table 222qb, a power return operation table 222qc, and a role item operation setting table 222qd are added.

First, with reference to FIG. 344(a), the details of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The winning rate suggesting effect lottery table 222qa is a data table that defines the rate at which the winning rate suggesting effect (see FIG. 333) is determined as the variable pattern effect for each game situation. Here, as described above, the fourteenth embodiment is configured so that the execution probability of the winning rate suggesting effect increases as the situation disadvantageous to the player continues (as the number of times the player cannot shift to the consecutive game mode or the pullback mode increases).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 344(a), a probability of 1/100 is defined as the lottery probability of the winning rate suggesting effect in association with the situation where the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times in which it was not possible to shift to an advantageous state after the big win (through) is 3 times or less. In addition, when the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the continuous number of times that the game could not be shifted to an advantageous state after the big win (passed through) is 4 times or more and 6 times or less, the probability of 1/90 is defined as the lottery probability of the win rate suggesting performance in association with it. In addition, a probability of 1/80 is defined as a lottery probability of winning rate suggesting performance in association with a situation where the current game state is a normal state (normal mode A) and the consecutive number of times that the game could not be shifted to an advantageous state after a big win (passed through) is 7 times or more and 9 times or less. Furthermore, a probability of 1/50 is defined as a lottery probability of a win rate suggesting performance in association with a situation where the current game state is a normal state (normal mode A) and the continuous number of times that the game could not be shifted to an advantageous state after a big win (passed through) is 10 times or more.

On the other hand, when the current game state is the latent probability state (normal mode B), a probability of 1/50 is defined as the lottery probability of the win rate suggesting effect regardless of the number of through times. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the more disadvantageous the player is (the more unpleasing the situation continues), the higher the probability of execution of the win rate suggesting effect. By constructing in this way, the more the unfavorable situation continues, the higher the possibility that the setting is suggested in the win rate suggesting performance, so that even if the unfavorable situation continues, the motivation for the game can be maintained. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability of execution of the winning probability suggesting effect in the relatively advantageous probability state (normal mode B) is constant regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the latent probability state, the probability of execution of the win rate suggesting effect may be increased as the situation disadvantageous to the player continues. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player's motivation to play when the disadvantageous situation continues.

Next, details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described. This effect type selection table 222qb is a data table that is referred to for determining the mode of effect when execution of the win rate suggesting effect (see FIG. 333) is determined. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, first, referring to FIG. 344(b), the relationship between the jackpot probability and the winning rate within 100 games in the fourteenth embodiment will be explained, and then the details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 344(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state and probability variable state and the winning rate within 100 games for each set value. As shown in FIG. 344(b), in the low-probability state of the special symbols, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is 1/200, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 39.4% (probability of continuously losing 199/200 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 60.6%). Also, setting 2 has a jackpot probability of 1/180, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 42.7% (probability of losing 179/180 continuously in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 57.3%). Also, setting 3 has a jackpot probability of 1/160, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 46.6% (probability of losing 159/160 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 53.4%). In addition, setting 4 has a jackpot probability of 1/140, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 51.2% (probability of losing 139/140 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 48.8%). In addition, setting 5 has a jackpot probability of 1/120, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 56.7% (probability of losing 119/120 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 43.3%). Furthermore, setting 6 has a jackpot probability of 1/90, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 67.3% (probability of losing 89/90 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 32.7%).

On the other hand, in the variable probability state of the special symbols, the big win probability of setting 1 is 1/55.6, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 83.7% (probability of losing 54.6/55.6 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 16.3%). Also, setting 2 has a jackpot probability of 1/50, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 86.7% (probability of losing 49/50 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 13.3%). Also, setting 3 has a jackpot probability of 1/44.4, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 89.7% (probability of losing 43.4/44.4 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 10.3%). In addition, setting 4 has a jackpot probability of 1/38.9, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 92.6% (probability of losing 37.9/38.9 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 7.4%). In addition, setting 5 has a jackpot probability of 1/33.3, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 95.2% (probability of losing 32.3/33.3 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 4.8%). Furthermore, setting 6 has a jackpot probability of 1/25, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 98.3% (probability of losing 24/25 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 1.7%).

The winning rate suggestion performance in the 14th embodiment is configured to select a performance mode that does not conflict with the actual winning rate within 100 games calculated from the jackpot probability (the data of the performance type selection table 222qb is defined). As a result, the performance content of the winning rate suggesting performance can be matched with the actual behavior (big hit winning rate), so that the player can be prevented from feeling distrustful of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, details of the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect type selection table 222qb. As shown in FIG. 345, in the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment, the value range of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with the effect mode, game state, and set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 1, an odd-number setting suggestion effect (a performance mode that suggests a win rate of 13.5% within 100 games) is associated with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "0 to 84", and an even-number setting suggestion effect (a performance mode that suggests a win rate of 24.6% within 100 games) is defined for the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "85 to 94". is defined in association with the value of the production counter 203f, and the value of the production counter 203f is defined in association with a latent probability suggesting production (a production mode that suggests a winning rate of 30% within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 1, when it is decided to execute the winning rate suggesting effect in the normal state, the odd setting suggesting effect (13.5% over which implies setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 85%, the even setting suggesting effect (24.6% over which implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and the latent probability suggesting effect (indicating that the possibility of latent certainty is high) is executed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is notified) is executed. In other words, most of them are odd setting suggestions. As described above, the winning rate within 100 games in the normal state of setting 1 is about 39.4%, which is higher than the winning rate notified by the above three effects and does not contradict the actual behavior.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 2, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 9", the odd number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "10 to 91", the even number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "92 to 96", the latent definite suggestive effect is defined in relation to the effect counter 203f. The value of '97 to 99' is defined in association with a latent probability or 2 or higher fixed effect (a effect mode suggesting a winning rate of 40% within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 2, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over which suggests setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is performed at a rate of 10%, the even setting suggestion effect (24.6% over which implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is performed at a rate of 82%, and the latent probability suggestion effect (indicating that the possibility of the latent probability state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is reported) is executed, and a mode in which 40% over, which is higher than 39.4%, which is the jackpot winning rate in the normal state of setting 1, is reported) is executed at a rate of 3%. In other words, most of them are the even number setting suggesting effects, but the latent probability or 2 or more definite effects are also executed with a low probability. Therefore, when the latent probability or 2 or more definite performance appears under the situation where the player is convinced of the normal state (for example, under the situation where a big addiction occurs between big wins), it is possible to make the player guess that the setting is 2 or more, so that the player can have the pleasure of guessing the setting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 3, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 80", the odd number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "81 to 90", the even number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "91 to 95", the potential suggestive effect is defined in relation to the effect counter 203. A value of f in the range of ``96 to 98'' is defined in association with a fixed performance of latent probability or 2 or more, and a value of ``99'' of a performance counter 203f is defined in association with a fixed performance of setting 3 or more (performance mode suggesting 45.6% over as winning rate within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 3, when it is decided to execute the winning rate suggesting effect in the normal state, the odd setting suggesting effect (13.5% over which suggests setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 81%, the even setting suggesting effect (24.6% over which implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and the latent probability suggesting effect (indicating that the possibility of latent certainty is high) is executed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is reported) is executed, a latent probability or 2 or more fixed performance is performed at a rate of 3% (a mode in which 40% over, which is higher than 39.4%, which is a jackpot winning rate in a normal state of setting 1, is reported), and a set 3 or higher fixed performance (a mode in which 45.6% over implying high setting) is performed at a rate of 1%. In other words, almost all of them are odd number setting suggesting effects, but with a low probability, latent probability or 2 or more finalizing effects and setting 3 or more finalizing effects are also executed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player guess the settings when these presentation modes are executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 4, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 9", the odd number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "10 to 89", the even number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "90 to 94", the potential suggestive effect is defined in relation to the effect counter 203f. A value of ``95 to 97'' is defined in association with a latent probability or 2 or more fixed performance, a value ``98'' of a performance counter 203f is defined in correspondence with a set 3 or more fixed performance, and a value ``99'' of the performance counter 203f is defined in correspondence with a latent probability or 4 or more fixed performance (performance mode suggesting 50% over as winning rate within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 4, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd setting suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 10%, the even setting suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 80%, the latent probability suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 5%, the latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect is performed at 3%, the set 3 or more fixed effect is performed at 1%, the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is performed at 1%. A mode in which 50% over, which is higher than .6%, is notified) is executed.In other words, most of the even setting suggestion effects are performed, but with a low probability, a latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect, a setting 3 or more fixed effect, and a latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect are also executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 5, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 77", the odd number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "78 to 87", the even number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "88 to 92", the potential suggestive effect is defined in relation to the effect counter 203. For the value of f in the range of ``93 to 95'', a fixed effect of latent probability or 2 or more is defined in correspondence, with the value of the production counter 203f ``96, 97'', a fixed effect of 3 or more is defined in correspondence, with the value of the effect counter 203f ``98'', a fixed effect of 4 or more is defined in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 203f. ver) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of setting 5, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 78%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the latent probability suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 5%, the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is executed at a 3% ratio, the set 3 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio, the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is executed at a rate of 1%, the setting 5 or more fixed effect (set) A mode in which 56% over, which implies 5 or 6, is notified) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 6, odd number setting suggestive effects are defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f from "0 to 9", even number setting suggestive effects are defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f from "10 to 84", and potential suggestive effects are defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f from "85 to 89". value is in the range of ``90 to 92'', the value ``93, 94'' of the production counter 203f is associated with a fixed effect of 3 or more, and the value ``95'' of the production counter 203f is associated with a fixed effect of 4 or more. A value of f "98" is defined in association with a latent probability or 6 fixed performance (a performance mode suggesting 60% over as a winning rate within 100 games), and a setting 6 fixed performance (a performance mode suggesting a winning rate of 66.6% over within 100 games) is defined in correspondence with the value "99" of the performance counter 203f. Therefore, in the case of setting 6, when execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 75%, the latent probability suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 5%, the latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect is executed at a 3% ratio, the set 3 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio, the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio, and the set 5 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio. Then, at a rate of 1%, a latent probability or 6 fixed performance (a mode in which 60% over, which is higher than 56.7%, which is a jackpot winning rate in a normal state of setting 5, is reported) is executed, and at a rate of 1%, a setting 6 fixed performance (a mode in which 66.6% over implying setting 6 is reported) is executed. Therefore, when the setting 6 confirmation performance is executed, or when the latent probability or 6 confirmation performance is executed in a situation where the normal state is assured, the player can be given a great sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 345, in the latent certainty state, the selection ratio of each effect mode is common regardless of the setting. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 59", the latent probability suggesting effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "60 to 83", the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "84 to 88", the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is "89". , and the value of the performance counter 203f is ``90 to 99'', the latent probability fixed performance (a mode in which 80% over, which is higher than 67.3%, which is the winning rate of setting 6 in a low probability state, is notified as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined correspondingly. Therefore, in the case of the latent certainty state, the latent certainty suggesting performance is executed at a rate of 60%, the latent certainty or 2 or more fixed performance is executed at a rate of 24%, the latent certainty or 4 or more fixed performance is executed at a 5% rate, the latent certainty or 6 fixed performance is executed at a rate of 1%, and the latent certainty fixed performance is executed at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the distribution of the performance mode of the winning rate suggesting performance is made different according to the game state and the set value, so that the game property of inferring the set value and the game state from the content of the performance can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 346, the details of the power recovery operation table 222qc will be described. This power restoration operation table 222qc is a data table that is referred to when executing the power restoration operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be changed normally when the power is turned on. The power restoration operation is executed each time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed or not). In this power return operation table 222qc, a return operation for each type of role is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223qe. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the action of one of the role items due to the return action, an error command is set (see S9003 in FIG. 357). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location of the occurrence of the abnormality. The display control device 114 that has received this error command displays the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality on the third pattern display device 81 . In this manner, by performing the recovery operation based on power-on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not an abnormality has occurred in each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the clerk of the hall from starting the game without noticing that the accessory of the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (return to origin) before executing the power restoration operation based on the power restoration operation table 222qc. In other words, when the power is interrupted while the character is being changed, the system is configured to execute the power return operation after returning to the origin upon power-on. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare only one type of power return operation starting from the origin position (there is no need to define different patterns of power return operation according to the arrangement of the accessories when the power is turned on), so the amount of data in the power return operation table 222qc can be reduced.

If the power is cut off while the character is being changed and then the power is turned on again, the reason why the operation of the character is not continued is that the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. That is, once the power supply is shut off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the presentation that has been performed up to that point. Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed or not, when the power is turned on, the origin return operation is executed and then the power return operation is performed.

In this embodiment, the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, but backup power may be supplied so that the information stored in the RAM 223 can be held even after the power is turned off. As a result, when the power is cut off during the performance, the progress of the performance at the time of the power shutdown can be discriminated after the power is turned on, and the performance can be executed from the continuation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 346(a) is a diagram showing an example of the power recovery operation table 222qc. As shown in FIG. 346(a), in the power return operation table 222qc, the operation contents of the role are defined for each value of the return pointer 223qe. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223qe is updated by 1 in the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) each time the main process 14 (see FIG. 355) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation is completed.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured such that the return operation is executed in the order of the leaning accessory 510→the standing accessory 410 according to the update of the return pointer 223qe. In addition, in the return operation, each accessory is configured to be varied from the origin position to the extended position and then returned to the origin position. In other words, the return operation exhaustively operates the entire operation range in which the accessory may change during the normal game. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

Further, the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured such that the operation is stopped for a predetermined period of time (2000 ms) after each accessory is changed to the projecting position. Thereby, it is possible to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs during the operation up to the projecting position and in the operation from the projecting position to the origin position, and also detect whether an abnormality occurs during the stop of the operation. An abnormality during operation stop means, for example, the case where the operation does not stop even though the operation stop is set, the case where the return to the origin position occurs before the predetermined period (2000 ms) specified as the operation stop period elapses, or the case where the operation to return to the origin position does not start even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

Further, in the power restoration operation table 222qc of the present embodiment, an operation stop period of a predetermined period (2000 ms) is set after the restoration operation of all the characters is completed. This stop period is provided as a timing for ending confirmation and shutting off the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 normally starts up in a shipping inspection or the like. That is, if the role object immediately moves after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the Pachinko machine 10 must wait until the operated role object returns to the origin and then cut off the power supply, or cut off the power supply while the role object is operating and then manually return the role object to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by providing an operation suspension period after the return operation is completed, if the power supply is cut off during the operation suspension period, the power supply can be turned off while all the accessories are at the origin position. Therefore, it is not necessary to wait until returning to the origin position, or to manually return the accessories to the origin position after the power is turned off, so that inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection can be improved.

In the fourteenth embodiment, if the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change operation from being hindered by the action of each role object, which makes it possible to improve the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In addition, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening and closing shafts. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, so that the opening/closing shaft or the like can be prevented from being damaged. Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment, when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation state is established, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is avoided. This is because the possibility that the status of the pachinko machine 10 will change is low if it is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, after the end of the setting confirmation state, it is possible to quickly return the accessory to a state in which it is normally movable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346(b), details of the role product action setting table 222qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This role product operation setting table 222qd is a data table that defines the type (group) of the role product to be operated in various effects of the pachinko machine 10 and the operation timing. In this embodiment, the actions of the role product are set based on this role product action setting table 222qd. FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the role product action setting table 222qd. As shown in FIG. 346, the role product action setting table 222qd defines, for each corresponding effect, the timing at which the role product is to be operated and the group of role products to be operated at the operation timing.

Specifically, in the off super reach performance with the performance time of 30 seconds, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the performance, the tilting accessory 510 moves to the overhanging position and then moves to the origin position, to execute a series of operations. In addition, in the hit normal reach performance with a performance time of 20 seconds, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 19 seconds have elapsed from the start of the performance, a series of operations of moving the standing accessory 410 to the projecting position and then to the origin position are executed. Further, in the hit super reach performance with the performance time of 30 seconds, it is specified that a series of operations of moving the tilting accessory 510 to the projecting position and then to the origin position are executed at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the performance. In addition, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 29 seconds have elapsed from the start of the presentation, the standing accessory 410 moves to the projecting position and then moves to the origin position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the action timing of the role and the group of the role to be operated are specified in the role product action setting table 222qd, various actions of the role can be realized simply by executing the action predetermined for each group based on the role product action setting table 222qd.

Further, in the present embodiment, the action of the character is not performed in all the variable effects, but the action of the character is set only in some of the variable effects having a relatively long change time. A variation performance with a relatively long variation time has a low probability of being selected as a performance for notifying a loss and is likely to be selected as a performance for notifying a big win, so that a player can have a high expectation for a big win at the stage when the accessory moves in the variation performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the accessory moves, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the character is operated only in some variation pattern effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the character is moved in other effects such as the opening effect of the big win, the ending effect, and the round effect. Further, the types of variable effects for moving the character may be increased, and for example, the character may be configured to operate even in the case of a lost normal reach or the like. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effects, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343(b), details of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 343(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 302) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the twelfth embodiment) described above. The difference is that a flag 223qg and a return standby flag 223qh are added. In addition, the suspension flag 223m, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the preparation state flag 223fd, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, the super RUSH flag 223fi, and the continuous off effect counter 223na, The difference is that the is deleted. These deletions are mainly intended to eliminate flags and counters for managing various effects that are not executed in the fourteenth embodiment.

The secondary set value storage area 223qa is a storage area for storing data indicating the set values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the secondary set value storage area 223qa, when data indicating a set value set in the setting change state is notified as a set value command from main controller 110, data corresponding to the set value notified by the command is stored (see S14204 in FIG. 358).

The through number counter 223qb is a counter for counting the number of consecutive times (through number) that the transition to an advantageous game state has not been possible. When setting the effect mode of the variable pattern effect, the number of slew times indicated by the value of the slew time counter 223qb and the stipulated contents of the winning rate suggesting effect lottery table 222qa are referred to determine the lottery probability of execution of the winning probability suggesting effect (see S18215 in FIG. 363).

The initialization flag 223qc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the return operation of the role object is executed based on power-on. While the initialization flag 223qc is on, an initial action process (see FIG. 357) for setting the return action of the character is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223qc is off, it indicates that the return action of the character has already ended, so the initial action process (see FIG. 357) is skipped (see S8901: No in FIG. 356). This initialization flag 223qc is set to ON in the origin return processing (see S4021) of the start-up processing 14 (see FIG. 353) (see S8807 in FIG. 354). On the other hand, when it is determined in the initial operation process that the return operation of the character has ended (that is, when the END information is read from the power return operation table 222qc), it is set to OFF (see S9104 in FIG. 357).

The on-time operation flag 223qd is a flag indicating whether or not the return to origin of the role object executed before the power return operation has been completed. If this input operation flag 223qd is ON, it indicates that the return to origin of the role object has been completed, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. This closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON when it is determined that the return-to-origin operation has ended (see S9008 in FIG. 357). In addition, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the on-time operation flag 223qd is also cleared (that is, turned off).

The return pointer 223qe is used to select the operation data of the character from the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346(a)) that defines the operation contents of the return operation of the character executed based on power-on. More specifically, each time the initial action process (see FIG. 357) executed at intervals of 1 ms is executed, the return pointer 223qe is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223qe), and the action of the character indicated by the updated value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223qe is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is turned off. Therefore, every time the power is turned on, it is possible to execute the return action of the role object from the beginning of the power return action table 222qc.

The role product operation flag 223qf is a flag indicating whether or not each role product is being changed. The role product operation flag 223qf is composed of 2 bytes, and each bit is associated with each role product. If each bit of the role product operation flag 223qf is 1, it indicates that the corresponding role product is variable, and if it is 0, it indicates that the corresponding role product is stopped. Also, the value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. Based on the state of each bit of the role product action flag 223qf, the type of role product being operated can be identified.

The return delay flag 223qg is a flag for indicating that the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the role object is delayed until the setting confirmation state is completed due to the setting confirmation state being set at the time of power return.

The return standby flag 223qh is a flag for indicating that the setting confirmation state set at the time of power return is ended and the return operation of the role object (origin return operation, power return operation) can be started.

<Regarding main control processing in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 352. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 347, the details of the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 14 (S181) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Of the special symbol variation processing 14 (S181), S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222 and S10225 are the same as S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222 and S10225 of the special symbol variation processing 13 (Fig. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment. is executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the 14th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S10231). When it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S10231: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10231, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S10231: No), the process proceeds to S10201.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, the processing order of each processing of S10202 to S10206 regarding the lottery of the first special symbol and each processing of S10208 to S10211 regarding the lottery of the second special symbol is switched. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the processing of S10206 or S10211, instead of the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 319), the special symbol variation start process 14 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10232), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the process of S10219 is completed, the limit reach flag 203gb is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S10220. Further, in the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S10222, the process proceeds to the process of S10225 as it is. This is because, in the fourteenth embodiment, there is no loss as a special symbol lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the above-described special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) will be described. This special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Of this special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232), in each process of S321, S323 to S326 and S330 to S334, the same process as each process of S321, S323 to S326 and S330 to S334 of the special symbol variation start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, in the special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, after executing the process of S321, whether or not the probability variation flag 203fa is on, that is, whether or not the current probability variation state is determined (S341), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to on (S341: Yes), the first hit random for high probability time From the formula 14 table 202pa (see FIG. 335(a)), the winning random value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S342), and the process proceeds to S344. On the other hand, in the process of S341, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S341: No), the first per random number 14 table 202pa for low probability (see FIG. 335 (a)), the per random value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S343), and the process proceeds to S344.

In the process of S344, a lottery result is acquired based on the winning random number value read in the process of S342 or S343 and the data of the execution area (S344), and the process proceeds to the process of S323.

The processing of these S3341 to S344 is a change due to having a probability changing function in the 14th embodiment, whereas the above-described 13th embodiment did not have a probability changing function.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, details of the set value control process 14 (S1731) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This set value control process 14 (S1731) is a process executed in place of the set value control process (FIG. 291, S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and is a process for executing control in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

In this set value control process 14 (S1731), the processes of S3101 to S3113 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control process (FIG. 291, S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment.

In the set value control process 14 (S1731) of the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key is in the off position (S3108: Yes), a set value command indicating the data in the set value storage area 203ma is set (S3121), and this process ends. By executing the process of S3121, it is possible to immediately notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the setting value when the setting change state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, details of main processing 14 of main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This main process 14 (see FIG. 350) is a process executed in place of the main process 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Among the main processing 14, S1801-S1803 and S1806-1816 are the same as S1801-S1803 and S1806-1816 of the main processing 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment.

In addition, in the main processing 14 (see FIG. 350) in the 14th embodiment, after executing the processing of S1803, instead of the jackpot control processing 13 (see FIG. 323) in the 13th embodiment, the jackpot control processing 14 is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1806. Details of this jackpot control process 14 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG.

Of this jackpot control process 14 (S1851), S1901-S1912 and 1918 processes are the same as S1901-S1912 and 1918 of the jackpot control process 13 (FIG. 322, S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351, in the jackpot control processing 14 (S1851) in the 14th embodiment, in the processing of S1912, when it is determined that the current time is the timing of the jackpot end (S1912: Yes), the jackpot end processing 14 for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S11911), and this processing ends. Details of this jackpot ending process 14 (S11911) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 352, in the jackpot ending process 14 (S11911), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is a variable probability jackpot (S3501). In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the variable probability jackpot (that is, the normal jackpot) (S3501: No), the value of the limit counter 203ga is set to 0 (S3502), the variable probability flag 203fa is set off (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3508.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S3501: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203ga (S3504), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition has reached 11 (S3505). In the process of S3505, if it is determined that the value of the limit counter after addition has reached 11 (S3505: Yes), the limit reach flag 203gb is set to ON (S3507), and after executing the processes of S3502 and S3503, the process proceeds to S3508. On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203ga after addition is not 11 (S3505: No), the variable probability flag 203fa is set to ON (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

In the process of S3508, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203mb, and the state of the limit reaching flag is read from the time reduction grant table 202qf (see FIG. 341) (S3508), and the read number of time reductions is set to the counter value of the time reduction counter 203h (S3509). Next, a time saving setting state command for notifying the set number of times of time saving is set (S3510), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S3511), and a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203mb, and the state of the limit reaching flag is specified (S3512). Then, the data indicating the scenario identified in the process of S3512 is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area (S3513), the end of the jackpot is set (S3514), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end processing 14 (see FIG. 352), the game state after the jackpot ends can be accurately set in consideration of the probability variable limit number of times.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 to 363. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 353, the details of start-up processing 14 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This start-up process 14 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

In the processes of S4001 to S4011 of the start-up process 14, the same processes as the processes of S4001 to S4011 of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

Further, in the startup process 14 in the 14th embodiment, when the process of S4001 is finished, next, the placement of each character when the power is turned on is determined, and if there is a character that is displaced from the origin, origin return processing is executed to return it to the origin position (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4002. Details of this origin return processing (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 354, in the return-to-origin process (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not a state command indicating a setting change state has been received (S8801). In the processing of S8801, if it is determined that the state command indicating the setting change state has been received (S8801: Yes), the return delay flag 223qg is set to ON in order to delay the start of the origin return operation of the character and the power return operation (S8802), and this processing ends. As a result, the return operation of the role can be delayed until the setting change state is terminated, so that the role can be prevented from operating in the setting change state, making it difficult to perform the setting change operation. In addition, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening and closing shafts. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, so that the opening/closing shaft or the like can be prevented from being damaged.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8801 that the status command indicating the setting change status has not been received (S8801: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803). If it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803: Yes), the initialization flag 223qc and the ON operation flag 223qd are set to OFF (S8804), and this process ends. That is, it is set so as not to perform (avoid) the return operation of the role object (origin return operation, power supply return operation). This is because, in many cases, the setting confirmation state is a state shifted by the operation of an operator (for example, a store clerk in a hall, etc.) while the pachinko machine 10 is operating without any problem in the playable state, so the possibility of occurrence of an abnormality in the accessory is extremely low. By avoiding the return operation of the accessory in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to shorten the time from the end of the setting confirmation state to the state in which the game including the operation of the accessory can be played as usual.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8803 that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has not been received (S8803: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory shifted from the origin (S8805). In the process of S8805, if it is determined that there is a role product that is displaced from the origin (S8805: Yes), the action in the direction of the origin position is set for the role product that is displaced from the origin (S8806), and the process proceeds to S8807. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory that deviates from the origin (S8805: No), the process of S8806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8807. In the process of S8807, the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8807), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the details of the main processing 14 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the main processing 14, S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are the same as S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 of the main processing (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively.

In addition, in the main processing 14 in the fourteenth embodiment, after the processing of S4111 is completed, next, role product control processing for controlling actions of various role products is executed (S4141). Details of this role product control process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357. FIG. After the processing of S4141 is completed, command determination processing 14 is then executed (S4142). The details of this command determination process 14 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the process of S4142, the variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4143), and the process proceeds to the process of S4114. The details of this variable display setting process 14 (S4143) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, the contents of the accessory control process (S4141), which is one process in the main process 14 (FIG. 355), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 356, in the role product control process (S4141) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223qc is ON (S8901). In the process of S8901, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223qc is ON (S8901: Yes), the initial action process for setting the return action (initial action) of the role object is executed (S8902), and this process ends. The details of this initial operation process (S8902) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8901 that the initialization flag 223qc is off (S8901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory whose operation is to be stopped (S8903). If it is determined that there is a role product whose action is to be stopped (S8903: Yes), the action stop of the relevant role product is set, the corresponding bit of the role product action flag 223qf is set to 0 (S8904), and the process proceeds to S8905. On the other hand, in the process of S8903, when it is determined that there is no accessory to be stopped (S8903: No), the process of S8904 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8905.

In the process of S8905, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory to start moving (S8905). In the processing of S8905, when it is determined that there is a role product to start the action (S8905: Yes), the operation start is set, the corresponding bit of the role product action flag 223qf is set to 1 (S8906), and the process proceeds to S8907. On the other hand, in the process of S8905, if it is determined that there is no accessory to start the action (S8905: No), the process of S8906 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8907.

In the process of S8907, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag 223qh is ON (S8907). If it is determined that the return standby flag 223qh is ON (S8907: Yes), it means that the return operation of the role object is delayed and the delay has been canceled (the return operation is executable), so the return standby flag 223qh is set to OFF (8908), and the process proceeds to S8909. If it is determined that the return standby flag is off (S8907: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S8909, it is determined whether or not there is any accessory that is shifted from the origin (S8909). If it is determined that there is a role object that is deviated from the origin (S8909: Yes), the action in the direction of the origin position is set for the role object that is deviated from the origin (S8910), the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8911), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory that deviates from the origin (S8909: No), the process of S8910 is skipped, the process of S8911 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the details of the initial operation process (S8902), which is one process in the role product control process (FIG. 356, S4141), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 357, in the initial action process (S8902) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal action of the role object is detected (S9001). In the processing of S9001, if it is determined that an abnormal operation has been detected (S9001: Yes), a notification operation corresponding to the accessory that has detected an abnormality is set (S9002), an error command is set (S9003), and the process proceeds to S9004. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9001 that no abnormal operation has been detected (S9001: No), the processes of S9002 and S9003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9004.

In the process of S9004, it is determined whether or not the operation flag 223qd at input is ON (S9004). When it is determined that the operation flag 223qd at the time of entry is off (S9004: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005). In the process of S9005, if it is determined that there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9005 that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: No), the number of drive steps for all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S9006), the operation stop period of 1 second is set (S9007), the input operation flag 223qd is set to ON (S9008), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9004 that the ON operation flag 223qd is ON (S9004: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the operation stop period (one second) has elapsed (S9009). If it is determined that the operation suspension period has not elapsed (S9009: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that the operation suspension period has elapsed (S9009: Yes), the return pointer 223qe is updated (S9010), the data specified by the return pointer 223qe is read from the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346, (a)) (S9011), and then it is determined whether or not the END information has been read (S9012). In the processing of S9012, if it is determined that the END information has been read (S9012: Yes), this means that the power recovery operation has ended, so the initialization flag 223qc and the operation flag 223qd at power-on are set to OFF (S9014), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9012, if it is determined that the data read from the power return operation table 222qc is not the END information (S9012: No), the operation of the character corresponding to the read data is set (S9013), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358, the details of the command determination process 14 (S4142) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 14 (S4142) is a process executed instead of the command determination process 11 (FIG. 293, S4131) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

In the command determination process 14 (S4142), each of the processes of S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235 and S4242 is performed in the command determination process 11 (FIGS. 293 and S4131) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). ) are executed in steps S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235 and S4242.

Further, as shown in FIG. 358, in the command determination processing 14 (S4142) in the 14th embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4231 that a state command has been received (S4231: Yes), instead of the state command reception processing 11 (see FIG. 294) in the 13th embodiment (and the 11th embodiment), the state command reception processing 14 is executed (S14201), and this processing ends. The details of this state command reception process 14 (S14201) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360. FIG.

In addition, in the processing of S4218, when it is determined that a winning-related command has been received (S4218: Yes), a jackpot-related processing 14 for executing control according to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S14202), and this processing ends. The details of this jackpot related process 14 (S14202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4218 that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting value command has been received (S14203). If it is determined that a setting value command has been received (S14203: Yes), the secondary setting value storage area 223qa is updated according to the setting value indicated by the command (S14204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14203 that the setting value command has not been received (S14203: No), the process proceeds to S4220.

Next, referring to FIG. 359, the contents of the status command reception process 14 (S14201), which is one process in the command determination process 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described. This status command reception process 14 (S14201) is a process executed in place of the status command reception process 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

In the state command reception processing 14 (S14201), the processing of S4509 and S4511 to S4514 are the same as the processing of S4509 and S4511 to S4514 of the state command reception processing 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) of the thirteenth embodiment.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 359, in the state command reception processing 14 (S14201) in the 14th embodiment, if the received command is not a command that indicates the setting confirmation status (S4513: NO), it will respond according to the type of command received in the state where normal play is possible. Execute the normal state setting processing (S4521) to execute the control (S4521) and migrate to the S4509 process. Details of this normal state setting process (S4521) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the normal state setting process (S4521), first, it is determined whether or not the return delay flag 203qg is ON (S9101). If it is determined that the return delay flag 203g is ON (S9102: Yes), it means that a state command indicating a normal gaming state has been notified in the setting confirmation state, meaning that the setting confirmation state has ended and the return operation is possible. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9101 that the return delay flag 203qg is off (S9101: No), then it is determined whether the received command indicates either the normal state or the latent state (S9103). In the process of S9103, if it is determined that the received command indicates either the normal state or the latent state (S9103: Yes), the value of the through number counter 223qb is updated by adding 1 (S9104), and the process proceeds to S9105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9103 that the received command is not a command indicating the normal state or the latent state (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9105.

In the processing of S9105, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (S9105). In the processing of S9105, if it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S9105: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S9106), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9105, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S9105: No), the process of S9106 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the contents of the jackpot-related process 14 (S14202), which is one process in the command determination process 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described. This jackpot related process 14 (S14202) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process (FIG. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and first embodiment) described above.

Of this jackpot related processing 14 (S14202), in each of S4901, S4902, and S4913 to S4916, the same processing as each of S4901, S4902, and S4913 to S4916 of jackpot related processing (FIG. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and first embodiment) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot related processing 14 (S14202) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start command is not received in the processing of S4901 (S4901: No), the processing of S4913 is performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot related process 14 (see FIG. 361) in the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the hit is during the time saving state of normal symbols (S4921). When it is determined that it is not hit during the time saving state of normal symbols (S4921: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, when it is determined that the winning is during the time saving state of the normal symbol (S4921: Yes), the value of the through number counter 223qb is reset to 0 (S4922), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot-related process 14 (see FIG. 361), the number of slews can be reset when shifting to the continuous mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp how long the disadvantageous situation continues for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 362, details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 14 (S4143) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

In the variable display setting process 14 (S4143), the processes of S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287 are the same as the processes of S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287 of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 362, in the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) in the 14th embodiment, after executing the process of S5282, instead of the effect mode setting process 13 (see FIG. 327) in the thirteenth embodiment, the effect mode setting process 14 is executed (S5291), and the process proceeds to the process of S5284. Details of the rendering mode setting process 14 (S5291) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the processes of S8207 and S8208 of the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291), the same processes as the processes of S8207 and S8208 of the effect mode setting process 13 (FIG. 326, S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 363, in the presentation mode setting process 14 (S5291) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern for suggesting setting has been notified (S18211). When it is determined that the setting suggestion variation pattern has been notified (S18211: Yes), the setting suggestion effect mode corresponding to the type of variation pattern is determined (S18212), and the process proceeds to S8208. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the even-number suggestive super reach is notified, setting of the manner in which reach occurs (triple reach occurs) in the third symbols with three numbers ``2'', ``4'', and ``6'' respectively. When the suggested effect is set and the setting 1 negative super ready-to-win variation pattern is notified, the setting suggested effect is set to generate reach (double reach) in the third symbols with two numbers "2" and "6", respectively. When it is set and the variation pattern of the setting 6 fixed super reach is notified, the setting suggesting effect is set in which the reach is generated in the third symbol to which the number "6" is attached. Thus, when ready-to-win occurs, the set value suggested by the setting suggesting performance can be easily grasped only by confirming the number attached to the ready-to-win pattern, so that a performance mode easy for the player to understand can be realized.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the reach is generated by a variation pattern other than the setting suggestion, the third pattern other than the third pattern with the numbers "1" to "6" used for setting suggestion (the third pattern with the numbers "7" to "9") is configured to generate the reach. As a result, it is possible to easily understand whether or not it is a variation pattern for suggesting setting, simply by confirming the number attached to the pattern in which the reach has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S18211 that the variation pattern for suggesting setting has not been notified (S18211: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a failure (S18213). If it is determined that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: Yes), then it is determined whether the current state is the normal state or the latent certainty state (S18214). In the process of S18214, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214: Yes), whether or not execution of the state suggesting effect is executed is determined by lottery probability corresponding to the value of the through number counter 223qb (S18215), and it is determined whether or not the lottery for whether or not execution is won (S18216). In the process of S18216, when it is determined that the lottery for execution possibility is won (S18216: Yes), the effect type selection table 222qb (see FIG. 345) is referred to determine the effect mode corresponding to the set value and the value of the effect counter 223f (S18217), and the process proceeds to S8208.

On the other hand, in the processing of S18213, if it is determined that the current variation is not a variation pattern corresponding to a failure (S18213: No), in the processing of S18214, if it is determined that the current state is neither the normal state nor the latent state (S18214: No), and in the processing of S18216, if it is determined that the lottery for whether or not to execute the state suggesting effect is not won (S18216: No), the processing of S8207 to

By executing this performance mode setting process 14 (see FIG. 363), when a variation pattern for setting suggestion is notified from the main controller 110, it is possible to execute a performance suggesting a set value corresponding to the variation type, and even when the variation pattern for setting suggestion is not notified, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance can be increased as the situation disadvantageous to the player continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable display effect that can suggest the setting to the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured so that the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern are executed based on the same random number value. Then, a special failure variation pattern is selected as a failure variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that is a win for some set values and a failure for some set values. In other words, it is possible to guess (narrow down) the set value when an outlier variation pattern that is selected only for some set values is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of variation pattern that is executed at the time of loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type drawn by the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to analyze the variation pattern command output each time the special symbol lottery is executed and execute the variation pattern performance according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, on the audio ramp control device 113 side, it is only necessary to define the correspondence relationship between the variation type and the performance mode of the variation pattern performance, and it is not necessary to grasp the setting values themselves (that is, the main control device 110 does not need to notify the audio ramp control device 113 of the setting values).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the more unfavorable the situation is for the player, the higher the execution rate of the specific effect (win rate suggesting effect) that can suggest the setting. That is, the execution ratio of winning rate suggesting performance is set to increase as the number of times (as the number of through times increases) that the transition to an advantageous game state (probability variable state continuing until the next big win or time saving state with 100 times of time saving) continues after the end of the big win. As a result, the player can be made to start a game in the pachinko machine 10 where the disadvantageous situation has continued for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change operation from being hindered by the action of each role object, which makes it possible to improve the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In addition, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening and closing shafts. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, so that the opening/closing shaft or the like can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation state is established, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is avoided. This is because the possibility that the status of the pachinko machine 10 will change is low if it is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, after the end of the setting confirmation state, it is possible to quickly return the accessory to a state in which it is normally movable.

In the 14th embodiment, the higher the number of continuous times (the number of slew times) of failing to shift to either the advantageous consecutive mode or the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot, the higher the probability that the winning rate suggesting performance is executed in the normal state, and as a result, the higher the possibility of suggesting the set value, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the more consecutive normal jackpots are won, the higher the execution probability of the winning rate suggesting performance when the state shifts to the normal state after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining even when winning a disadvantageous normal jackpot.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability of execution of winning rate suggesting performance in the normal state increases as the number of continuous times (the number of slew times) of failing to shift to either the advantageous consecutive mode or the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the above-described twelfth embodiment, it may be configured such that the winning rate suggesting performance is more likely to be executed as the first special pattern lottery continues to be lost in the advantageous continuous mode B (latent probability state). In addition, for example, it may be so arranged that winning rate suggesting performance is likely to occur to the extent that a disadvantageous situation occurs such that a small winning variation of an advantageous second special symbol is lost due to a small winning of a first special symbol in which almost no prize balls can be obtained in the continuous mode B and the symbol is forcibly stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the stress of the player when a disadvantageous situation occurs. Further, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 of a type that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to shift (fall) to a low probability state of special symbols each time a lottery of special symbols is executed in the variable probability state, the smaller the number of times of lottery of special symbols from setting the variable probability state to winning the falling lottery, the easier it is to suggest the set value by winning rate suggesting performance. By constructing in this way, even if the number of lotteries is small and the player falls into a low-probability state of disadvantageous special symbols, the player's disappointment can be reduced.

In the 14th embodiment, the distribution of the big hit judgment value (random number) is changed according to the setting, and when some of the set values are lost and some of the set values become big hits, a special variation pattern is determined, so that the set value can be suggested by the special variation pattern. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern selection table in which different data are simply defined according to settings is referred to, and a variation pattern that is easily selected with some set values or a variation pattern that is only selected with some set values may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set the big win determination value as a discrete value, so it is possible to reduce the effort of the developer when setting the big win determination value.

In the 14th embodiment, when the setting key 110b is on and the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the return operation of the character is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, it may be constructed such that the return operation of the role object is unconditionally executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period of time from the end of the setting change state to the transition to the state in which normal games including accessories can be played.

In the 14th embodiment, only the big win probability in the special pattern high probability state and the special pattern low probability state is configured to be different according to the setting, but the object that can be changed according to the setting is not limited to this. It is only necessary that the player's degree of advantage differs according to the set value, and for example, the higher the set value, the greater the variable probability limit number of times. By constructing in this way, when shifting to the consecutive game mode, the higher the setting, the more times the consecutive game mode is easily looped, so that the player can be strongly desired to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 with a higher set value. Therefore, the game can be played while paying more attention to the contents of the setting suggesting effect and the win rate suggesting effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, when the setting change state is established when the power is turned on (that is, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10), the start of the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the role is delayed until the setting change state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the setting change state ends, while at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open, the start of the returning action of the character may be delayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the accessories from operating in a state where the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, and the loading of the opening/closing shaft of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 different from that during a normal game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hinges 18, 19, etc. from being damaged as a result of a larger load than usual.

In the 14th embodiment, when the power is turned on in the setting change state, the start of the return operation of the role object is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Some or all of the accessories may be executed upon power-on without delaying the return operation. In this case, the accessory to start the return operation immediately after power-on regardless of whether it is in the setting change state may be set to one that does not hinder the setting change operation and that the amount of movement of the center of gravity position based on the accessory operation is within a predetermined amount (for example, 5 cm) when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, they are supported only by the opening and closing shafts, so if the accessories whose center of gravity position can be greatly shifted (heavy weight accessories, fast moving accessories, long moving distance accessories, etc.), an excessive load may be applied to the opening and closing shafts. Therefore, only the return operation of the character having almost no effect on the center of gravity of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 due to movement is started immediately after the power is turned on, so that the opening and closing shafts of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be prevented from being damaged.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the third symbol for notifying the big win is selected without any restrictions. In other words, even if the ready-to-win occurs in the third pattern to which ``6'' is added, if three identical third patterns are arranged and a big win is reported, it is also determined that the set 6 fixed super ready-to-win which is a kind of loss variation is determined, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a reach occurs in a third pattern with numbers "1" to "6" attached (that is, when a reach occurs in a third pattern that can be selected in a setting suggestion variation pattern), the setting may be suggested by the number attached to the third pattern in which the reach has occurred regardless of whether it is a hit or not (a setting is suggested regardless of whether or not the same third patterns are complete). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling overjoyed when a big win is notified despite the thought that a good setting has been suggested.

<Modification of 14th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 368, a modification of the fourteenth embodiment described above will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment described above, when reach occurs in the third pattern display device 81, the type of the variation pattern is suggested to the player by the number attached to the pattern in which the reach occurs. More specifically, reach occurs at the same time in the third pattern with three numbers "2", "4", and "6", suggesting that there is a high possibility of setting an even number. , suggesting that there is no possibility of setting 1, suggesting that the reach is high at the same time with the third symbol with three numbers "4", "5", and "6", suggesting that it is a high setting (any of settings 4 to 6), and suggesting that the reach is at the third symbol with the number "6", suggesting that it is setting 6.

In addition to this, in this modified example, various examples of effects suggesting that there is a possibility that the setting suggesting effect may occur depending on the effect mode before the ready-to-win occurs will be described.

First, FIG. 368(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the ready-to-win symbol selection effect is executed to allow the player to select the type of the to-win symbol. This ready-to-win pattern selection performance is a performance that may be executed in a predetermined period (for example, 5 to 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) before the timing at which ready-to-win occurs (for example, 11 seconds after the start of fluctuation). As shown in FIG. 368(a), when the ready-to-win pattern suggesting effect is executed, a display area simulating a balloon is formed in the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and the characters "Push to select the ready-to-win symbol!!" are displayed inside the display area. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, there is formed in the center a display area in which the characters "Choose!" are displayed in a substantially oblong rectangular shape, three third patterns with numbers "4", "5" and "6" are displayed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, a third pattern with the number "6" is displayed on the lower right side, and a display area with the number "7" is formed on the upper left side. A display area in which patterns are displayed is formed, and three third patterns with numbers "2", "4", and "6" are displayed on the lower left side. During the execution of this ready-to-win pattern selection performance, one of four display regions displaying different combinations of third patterns is set to have a lighted (emission) appearance, and the remaining display regions are set to have an extinguished appearance. The third symbol shown in the display area set to look lit when the player presses the frame button (PUSH button) 22 is set as the ready-to-win symbol in the variable display effect. As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of selecting ready-to-win symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, when the ready-to-win in the third pattern to which the number '6' is attached is selected and the ready-to-win is lost, setting 6 fixed super ready-to-win is decided, so that the player can be pleased even if he wins or loses. In other words, when options in the ready-to-win pattern selection performance include a combination of symbols such as high setting suggesting super reach, setting 6 fixed super reach, etc., in which a setting comparatively advantageous to the player is fixed in case of deviation, the player desiring high setting can be made to expect that the variable display will be lost after selecting the pattern combination for setting suggesting. Conversely, a player who expects a big win can play a game in anticipation of being notified of a big win. In this way, by executing the ready-to-win pattern selection performance, the ready-to-win patterns to be selected and the results of the expected variable display can be changed according to whether the player desires high setting or the player desires a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the case of a player who desires a high setting, especially when the degree of expectation of a notice (for example, a so-called pending notice performance, a comment notice performance, etc.) for the change is low (in the case of content corresponding to a low possibility of a big win), the expectation that the high setting is suggested can be enhanced at the time when the option (display area) of the combination corresponding to the suggestion of the high setting is displayed in the ready-to-win pattern selection performance. In other words, when the ready-to-win pattern selection performance is executed in consideration of other performances, it is possible to realize a game property that makes it more likely that the setting is suggested (missed) or that a big win is reported, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 368(b), the ready-to-win symbol prefetch effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 368(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the ready-to-win symbol look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 368(b), when the ready-to-win symbol look-ahead effect is executed, the characters "there are six ready-to-win games in the hold" are displayed in the small area Ds3. In other words, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the ready-to-win effect of the effect mode in which the ready-to-win is generated with the "6" symbol is executed in the variable display based on any of the held balls. So also in this case. A player who desires a high setting can be expected to come off if a reach occurs with the symbol "6". In addition, when a notice effect of changing the display mode of a part of reserved symbols (so-called reserve notice effect) is generated, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is possible to strongly expect that the "6" symbol will not reach the ready-to-win with the reserved balls that cause the reserved predictive effect (that is, the reserved balls that are highly expected to hit the jackpot compared to the reserved balls whose display mode is not changed). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the ready-to-win pattern look-ahead performance, a pattern for notifying other third patterns for suggesting setting is provided, and a mode for notifying other patterns (for example, a "7" pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) is also provided. As a result, when the ready-to-win pattern pre-reading performance is executed, it is possible to realize the game property of estimating the degree of expectation for a big win, the degree of expectation for setting suggestion, etc. from the type of the notified pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the setting values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In this case, by delaying or avoiding the return operation of the character in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting value displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from being hidden behind the character by the movement of the character, so that the operation of the character in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state can be controlled more preferably.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the start of the return operation of the character is suppressed (delayed) during the setting change state, but the return operation may be started even in the setting change state. In this case, in most cases, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened in the setting change state, and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated by the pachinko machine 10 by the staff in the hall, so that it is difficult to confirm the return operation of the character. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the action of the role during the setting change state, the abnormality may be notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the abnormality occurs in the action of the role in a state other than the setting change state (a mode in which the user can easily notice even if the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is focused). By configuring in this way, when a part or all of the character is abnormal, the hall clerk can be easily made aware of the abnormality.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 to 367. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments described above, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is constantly updated in the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of starting winning is determined to match the winning random number. In addition, the jackpot lottery is executed using a first winning random number table in which a different winning random number value is associated with each set value.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, a random number generation IC 900 capable of generating a winning random number (first winning random number counter R1) is provided separately from the main controller 110, and the random number generated by this random number generating IC 900 (count value of the first winning random number counter R1) is acquired at the time of starting winning and used for the big winning lottery. The random number generating IC 900 is configured to be capable of designating a random number update range, and by setting a different random number update range according to a set value, it is configured to be able to vary the jackpot lottery probability using a common hit determination value. For example, if the random number update range of the second setting is halved with respect to the random number update range of the first setting, the probability denominator of the big win probability in the second setting becomes half of that in the first setting, so that the big win probability in the second setting can be made half of the big win probability in the first setting. With this configuration, on the side of the main controller 110, a random number update range corresponding to the set value is simply set for the random number generation IC when setting is changed, and when executing the lottery for the special symbol, it is only necessary to compare the common winning random value with the counter value of the first winning random number counter R1 acquired from the random number generation IC. That is, in the main controller 110, there is no need to store different hit determination values for each set value, and only one common hit determination value that does not depend on the setting can be stored, so that the processing load at the time of lottery for the special pattern can be reduced by the amount that can eliminate the process of selecting the hit determination value according to the set value. Also, the capacity of the first hit random number table can be reduced.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 364, the electrical configuration of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 364 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 364, in the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above, a random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. The random number generation IC 900 is used to generate a winning random number (first winning random number counter R1) obtained based on the start winning. That is, instead of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, the counter value (random number) used for the big winning lottery (judgment) executed by the main control device 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. The random number generation IC 900 can randomly generate a maximum 16-bit (0 to 65535) value as the value of the first hit random number counter R1. This random number generation IC 900 is configured, for example, internally with a clock generation circuit capable of generating a clock frequency of 250 kHz, and every time a clock signal is generated by this clock generation circuit, it can randomly generate a random number value (the value of the first random number counter R1) within a random number update range set in synchronization with this clock signal. That is, since random values can be randomly generated every 0.004 milliseconds, random values can be generated at intervals shorter than the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the random number value is not updated over a plurality of times of timer interrupt processing, so that randomness in the jackpot lottery can be ensured.

In the fifteenth embodiment, only the first winning random number counter R1 is generated by the random number generating IC 900, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the second hit random number counter C4, and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2, etc., for some or all of the various counter values, generated by the random number generation IC900 It may be replaced with a random value. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268(a)) only in that a first winning random number 15 table 202ra is provided instead of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma, and a random number range setting table 202rb that defines the random number update range of the random number generation IC 900 for each set value is added.

First, with reference to FIG. 365(a), details of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 365(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 365(a), the first winning random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment defines "0 to 204" as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and "0 to 643" as the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol. That is, only the setting 1 jackpot determination value (see FIG. 269(a)) in the eleventh embodiment is defined. In the fifteenth embodiment, instead of sharing the random value (hit determination value) specified in the first random number 15 table 202ra, the range of the random number generated by the random number generation IC 900 is varied according to the setting, thereby making the jackpot probability for each setting the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365(b), details of the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The random number range setting table 202rb is a data table referred to when setting the random number generation range (random number update range) according to the set value for the random number generation IC 900 . At the end of the setting change state, the random number range setting table 220rb is referenced to identify the random number generation range corresponding to the set value, and the identified random number generation range is set to the random number generation IC 900. By making the random number generation range different, the probability denominator in the big win lottery can be made different for each setting, so that the big win probability can be made substantially different according to the setting.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), in the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment, "0 to 65535" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 1, "0 to 61499" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 2, "0 to 57399" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 3, and "0 to 57399" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 4. , “0 to 53299” are associated and defined, “0 to 49199” is associated and defined as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 5, and “0 to 45099” is associated and defined as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 6.

Therefore, in setting 1, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 65536 values of "0 to 65535", so the jackpot probability of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 1 is 1/320 (205/65536) and 1/101.8 (644/65536), respectively. Also, in setting 2, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 61500 values "0 to 61499", so the jackpot probability of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 2 is 1/300 (205/61500) and 1/95.5 (644/61500), respectively. Also, in setting 3, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 57400 values "0 to 57399", so the jackpot probabilities of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 3 are 1/280 (205/57400) and 1/89.1 (644/57400), respectively. Also, in setting 4, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 53300 values "0 to 53299", so the jackpot probabilities of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 4 are 1/260 (205/53300) and 1/82.8 (644/53300), respectively. Also, in setting 5, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 49200 values "0 to 49199", so the jackpot probabilities of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 5 are 1/240 (205/49200) and 1/76.4 (644/49200), respectively. Also, in setting 6, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 45100 values "0 to 45099", so the special symbol low probability state and high probability state jackpot probability in setting 6 are 1/220 (205/45100) and 1/70 (644/45100), respectively.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of common hit determination values that does not depend on the set values is defined for the first hit random number 15 table 202ra, and the random number generation IC 900 varies the range for generating random values according to the set values, thereby varying the jackpot probability for each setting. By configuring in this way, the data amount of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and when executing the big winning lottery, the process of reading out the big winning determination value corresponding to the set value is unnecessary, so that the processing load at the time of the big winning lottery can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 366, details of the starting winning process 15 (S1751) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This starting winning process 15 (S1751) is a process executed instead of the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and is a process for acquiring various random values (counter values) based on the starting winning.

Of the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, the processes of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 are the same as the processes of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 of the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). executed.

In addition, in the starting winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1755 is completed, next, the value of the first winning random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC900 (S1771), the values of the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are acquired, and these acquired counter values (random numbers) are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da (S17). 72), and the process proceeds to S1757.

In addition, in the starting winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1762 is finished, next, the value of the first winning random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generating IC900 (S1773), the values of the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are acquired, and these acquired counter values (random numbers) are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db (S17). 74), and the process proceeds to S1764.

By executing this starting winning process 15 (see FIG. 366), the value of the first winning random number counter R1 randomly generated by the random number generating IC 900 can be obtained each time a starting winning is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 367, details of the set value control process 15 (S1741) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This setting value control process 15 (S1741) is executed in place of the setting value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process for performing control in the setting change state and setting confirmation state.

In this set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), the processes of S3101 to S3113 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment.

Further, in the set value control processing 15 (see FIG. 367) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S3108 that the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position, the random number generation range corresponding to the set value is read from the random number range setting table 202rb (see FIG. 365(b)), the read random number generation range is set in the random number generation IC 900 (S3131), and this processing ends.

By executing this set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), the random number generation range can be set according to the set value, so the probability denominator can be changed according to the set value, and as a result, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is configured so that the counter value (random number) used for the big win lottery (judgment) executed by the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of common hit determination values that does not depend on the set value is defined for the first random number 15 table 202ra in which the determination value determined as the big win in the special symbol lottery is defined, and the random number generation IC 900 varies the range of generating the random number according to the set value, thereby varying the jackpot probability for each setting. By configuring in this way, the data amount of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and when executing the big winning lottery, the process of reading out the big winning determination value corresponding to the set value is unnecessary, so that the processing load at the time of the big winning lottery can be reduced.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a 2-time right product or a 3-time right product) in which the expected value of a big win is increased until a big win state occurs a plurality of times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the big win once. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a variable-probability state) can be set to any one of a plurality of steps (for example, 6 steps). Instead of or in addition to the combinations of the jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is achieved according to settings may be implemented. That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big win may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the big win is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) a disadvantageous game state (such as a normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In the setting 6, when a big win is achieved, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of setting 6, which is the most advantageous, is extremely high, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In place of or in addition to these, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot games during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot type can be easily determined (decided rate increases) with specific settings. In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probabilities of big wins in accordance with the setting, in the low-probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the variable probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is disadvantageous to the player. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of game machine in which the number of winning balls tends to increase as the number of times of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of awarded balls tends to increase more than the number of fired game balls) in the variable probability state. More specifically, for example, the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won, and by applying it to a game machine of a type where the variable probability state gives a small win with a high probability, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the slot machine is a well-known machine in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid pattern line, and the pattern is changed by operating an operation lever, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to provide a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitely displays the identification information, and the variability display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a starting operation means (e.g., an operation lever), and the variability display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, there is provided a display device for confirming and displaying a pattern after variably displaying a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns, and not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. In this case, after putting the specified ball based on the prescribed operation (button operation), the pattern fluctuates due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, the design is stopped due to a predetermined time. A special game is generated as a requirement of a hidden pattern, which gives a prescribed gaming value to the player, and a large amount of balls are paid to the lower plate for the players. If such a game machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game values in the game hall, so that problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game values seen in the current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist can be solved.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (The timing of updating the number of times of time saving and the timing of determining the end of time saving are different)
Any one of a plurality of game states including at least a determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting a game state, comprising update means capable of updating first information relating to the determination by the determination means, and end determination means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the update means satisfies an end condition, wherein the game state setting means sets the second game state when the end determination means determines that the end condition is satisfied while the first game state is set; The game machine A1 is characterized in that the timing of updating the first information by the updating means is different from the end determination timing of determining whether the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when a winning lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period has passed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine which is configured to be able to set a plurality of game states, and when a specific game state is set, sets an advantageous state in which a game ball is likely to enter a starting hole until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described game machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the end processing for the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of lotteries reaches a specific number, are configured to be executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in an advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, so there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (the stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a game for executing a privilege game can be duplicated (overlapped game is possible), and according to the game result of one game, the other game. There is a game machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the variable period for indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be performed in an overlapping manner, a game aimed at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted according to the game result of one of the games, it is possible to suppress the execution of privilege games that are difficult for the player to understand due to the overlapping execution of the privilege games due to the plurality of games that are executed in duplicate.

However, when the configuration capable of setting the above-described advantageous state is used in a gaming machine capable of executing duplicate games, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed at the timing when the lottery results are stopped and displayed. When the state is set, there is a problem that the counting (subtracting) process of the number of lotteries is executed when the interrupted subtraction of the variable time is resumed and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the number of times of lotteries is measured (subtracted) in the advantageous state based on the stationary display of the result of the lottery executed in the state other than the advantageous state, so there is a problem that the player cannot preferably execute the game in the advantageous state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by allowing a player to preferably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A1, updating of the first information by the updating means and determination of end by the end determining means can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the termination condition is satisfied by updating the first information, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing executed at the same timing, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the update timing is the timing at which the determination is executed by the determination means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, since the update timing of the first information related to the discrimination of the discriminating means is set to the timing of execution of discrimination by the discriminating means, there is an effect that the first information corresponding to the discrimination contents can be reliably updated. Further, since the first information can be updated by the update means by executing the determination by the determination means, the players can be interested in both the determination by the determination means and the game state to be set, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the first information is updated by the updating means, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary update processing and reduce the processing load.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, since the determination of the end condition is executed during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, it is possible to suppress the change of the game state while the player watches the dynamic display of the identification information in order to grasp the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine A3, the determination means executes determination corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means, and the end determination timing is a period from when the identification information is stop-displayed to when the determination is next performed by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to suppress execution of discrimination by the discriminating means before the second game state is set, even though the updating means updates the first information to the first information that can satisfy the end condition. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information and the end determination timing are made different, there is an effect that the determination performed by the determination means can be properly performed.

A gaming machine A5, wherein said first information is updated by said updating means based on the number of said determinations executed by said determining means in any of gaming machines A2 to A4.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated each time the discrimination means executes discrimination, so that the update status of the first information can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game state suddenly shifts to the second game state and the player is confused.

In the game machine A5, the updating means updates the first information during a period from execution of the determination by the determination means to execution of dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the determination.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the first information is not updated while the identification information is dynamically displayed, so there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine A7 is characterized in that, in the game machines A1 to A6, the game machine A7 comprises a suspending means for suspending the dynamic display when a suspension condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a restarting means for resuming the dynamic display suspended by the suspending means when a resume condition is met, and an information changing means capable of varying the first information updated by the updating means when the dynamic display is suspended by the suspending means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing means. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can be entertained not only by the discrimination result of the discriminating means but also by the presence or absence of an interruption, which has the effect of enhancing the amusement of the game.

In the game machine A7, the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can play the game while anticipating that the dynamic display will be interrupted by the interruption means.

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game even when a second condition different from the first condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means is satisfied, and the interruption condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7 or A8, when the second condition for executing the privilege game is established without using the discrimination by the discrimination means, the interruption condition can be established, so that the game different from the discrimination by the discrimination means can be provided to the player, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the gaming machine A9 has a ball-entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball-entering means.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, a game in which a game ball is entered into the ball-entering means can be performed as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A10 has a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a variable control means capable of executing a variable operation of changing the variable member to the first state for a predetermined period based on the establishment of an execution condition, wherein the variable control means performs the variable operation when the first game state is set rather than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is easy to execute

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the period during which the first game state, in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second game state, continues can be varied based on the establishment of the second condition, so that the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second condition.

<Characteristic group B> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which the prize is given to the winning ball is changed)
A gaming machine comprising: variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on establishment of an execution condition; a specific region through which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means can pass; a setting information determining means capable of determining setting information when the variable ball entering means is variably controlled by the variable controlling means; and a switching means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area and a second state in which the game ball enters the variable ball entering means more difficultly than the first state, according to the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when a winning lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period has passed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a game machine in which, as a starting port, a variable ball-entering means having a variable member attached to the starting port that is variable between a first state that permits the entry of a game ball and a second state that restricts the entry of a game ball is provided, and the variable ball-entering means is configured to be able to set an advantageous state in which it is easy to change to the first state and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to change to the first state from the first game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, by varying the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball-entering means, the player can be motivated to play while anticipating that an advantageous state will be set. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's willingness to play by making it difficult to execute a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a variable ball entry means in the above-described game machine in a state in which a disadvantageous state is set.

According to the game machine B1, since the first state and the second state can be switched according to the setting information, the player can be interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 includes operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, wherein the switching means is capable of switching between the plurality of flow paths so that a game ball entering the variable ball entering means flows down any one of a plurality of flow paths including a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, the operation control means starts operation control of the switching means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and the switching means causes the first flow path. A game machine B2 characterized in that a game ball flowing down the channel can pass through the specific area.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation control means controls the operation of the switching means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and when the game ball that enters the variable ball entering means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, it can pass through the specific area. As a result, the variable control for facilitating entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering means and the operation control of the switching means can be interlocked, so that it is possible to appropriately control whether or not the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the specific area.

In the game machine B2, the game ball flowing down to the second flow path by the switching means is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the game ball flowing down to the first flow path.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, since it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path, it is possible to set the passing ratio of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means to the specific area only by controlling the operation of the switching means by the operation control means.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the game machine B2 or B3 has a normal area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can pass, wherein the normal area is formed so as to pass game balls that have not passed through the specific area among the game balls entering the variable ball entering means, and the privilege imparting means does not impart the privilege when the game ball passes through the normal area.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, when the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the normal area, the privilege is not given. Therefore, even if game balls enter the variable ball entry means excessively, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an excessive privilege. Further, by providing the normal area in the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege even without providing a mechanism for suppressing the entry of the game ball into the variable ball-entering means outside the variable ball-entering means, so that the area outside the variable ball-entering means can be easily used for other purposes.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the gaming machine has a distribution means capable of distributing a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to a third flow path different from the second flow path and a fourth flow path different from the second flow path and the third flow path, and the game machine has, as the specific area, a first specific area into which the game ball distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter, and a game ball distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means. The game machine B5 has at least a second specified area different from the first specified area where a ball can be entered, and the privilege imparting means is characterized in that the awarding contents of the privilege differ between when the game ball enters the first specified area and when the game ball enters the second specified area.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means passes through the first specific area when distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, and passes through the second specific flow path when distributed to the fourth flow path. As a result, when a game ball enters the variable ball entering means, it is possible to vary the easiness of granting the privilege by the privilege imparting means and to vary the contents of the privilege imparted by the sorting means according to the establishment of the set condition. Therefore, since whether or not a privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined in stages, there is an effect that the period during which the player can enjoy the game can be lengthened compared to the case where the presence or absence of the privilege and the content of the privilege are determined at once. Also, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating the flow condition of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flow condition of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is preferable to use a function of reporting information indicating that the setting condition is established. As a result, the player can grasp that some kind of privilege is likely to be awarded by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means before entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means, so that the player can play the game with expectations.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines B1 to B5 has a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the switching means is easier to switch to the first state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means than when the second game state is set.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the easiness of switching to the first state can be changed according to the set game state, so that the player can be interested in the currently set game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means can variably control the variable ball-entering means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern, and the switching means can switch at least to the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball-entering means with the first variable pattern.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can be made more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means when the second variable pattern is set by the variable control means than when the variable control means is variably controlled with the first variable pattern. Then, the switching means can be switched to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege giving means executes a specific game based on the entry of a game ball into the specific area, and the gaming machine has a privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game when the result of the specific game executed by the privilege giving means is a predetermined result.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B7, when the result of the specific game executed when the game ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the privilege game is executed, so there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game for passing the game ball through the specific area.

<Characteristic group C> (In a gaming machine that can overlap and execute multiple games, setting the mode of production for the other game according to the fluctuation time of one game)
A gaming machine comprising: determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on selection information; The game machine C1 is characterized by having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game during a period when identification information is dynamically displayed, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance related to the specific game, and a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means based on at least information corresponding to the selection information.

In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be redundantly executable (overlapping game is possible), and a game result is shown for each of the games that are redundantly executed. In such a game, when a plurality of games are executed in duplicate, each game can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by seeing each performance display to be executed in duplicate, but since the performance mode of the performance display to be executed is determined only based on the contents of the corresponding game, and it is impossible to execute the performance associated with the plurality of games to be executed in duplicate, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the whole of the redundantly executed games from the performance display being executed, and the performance effect is lowered. To provide a game machine capable of increasing the performance effect and allowing a player to enthusiastically play a game by executing a performance that makes it easy to grasp the contents of a plurality of games to be executed in duplicate in the above game machine.

According to the game machine C1, since the performance mode of the specific performance can be determined based on the selection information, the dynamic display of the identification information executed redundantly and the performance associated with the specific game can be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the performance mode of the specific performance can be determined based on the selection information, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various performance modes.

The game machine C2 is characterized in that the game machine C1 has remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means.

According to the game machine C2, since the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the remaining period of the identification information in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the performance mode of the specific performance can be varied according to the determination timing of the determination means and the execution timing of the specific game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various presentation modes.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that the game machine C2 comprises: when an interruption condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display; and a restart means for restarting the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means based on the end of the privilege game, wherein the interruption condition is satisfied when the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means becomes a predetermined game result.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, not only the effect to be executed, but also in the actual game, the determination by the determination means and the specific game can be associated with each other, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C3 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed, the game state setting means sets the first game state when a specific period of time has passed since the second game state was set, and the restart means restarts the suspended dynamic display when the second game state is set after the privilege game is finished. The game machine C4 is characterized in that the dynamic display is resumed during the second game state, the specific period is variable according to the remaining period of the identification information resumed by the restarting means, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed is set varies according to the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. Then, it is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the effect mode of the specific effect is interrupted by the interrupting means. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be grasped by the effect mode of the specific effect, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the game machine C5 has a remaining period determining means capable of determining a remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and an advantageous condition determining means determining whether the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means satisfies an advantageous condition, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition by the advantageous condition determination means, and the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the determination result, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the specific performance to be executed is in an advantageous state for the player.

In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information during the dynamic display is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, so that the player can be motivated to play the specific game based on the specific performance to be executed.

The gaming machine C4 or C5 has a ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, an acquisition means that acquires acquired information when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and a storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of acquired information acquired by the acquiring means, and the determination means executes determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and stores the acquired information stored in the storage means as the acquired information. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it has a preliminary determination means capable of prior determination before the determination based on the information is executed by the determination means, the preliminary determination means determines in advance a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means based on at least the acquired information, and the advantageous condition determination means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period determined by the preliminary determination means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquired information determined by the determination means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage means is pre-determined. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the dynamic display being executed is longer than the pre-determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be played while predicting the interruption timing of the dynamic display that is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determining means determines whether or not the advantageous condition is satisfied with respect to the determination result of the preliminary determining means corresponding to the acquired information next determined by the determining means among the obtained information stored in the storing means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since an advantageous condition is established when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information whose determination is next performed by the determination means, the player can determine whether to interrupt the dynamic display being executed or to interrupt the dynamic display to be executed next based on the specific performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to select a game, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the game state setting means sets the first game state when a period until the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times at least two times in a state in which the first game state is set as the specific period, and has a period calculation means capable of calculating the specific period, wherein the period calculation means calculates the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The game machine C8 is characterized in that the specific period is calculated by adding up the specific number of times to the upper limit, and that the game machine C8 has a period mode display means capable of displaying the period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by the period calculation means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the game situation in the second game state can be grasped based on the effect mode of the specific effect while grasping the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to various effects that are executed, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group D> (Different conditions for ending the winning game according to the operation of the operating means)
In a gaming machine having a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when a first condition is satisfied, the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is performed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. and a second termination condition that is satisfied when the period during which the variable ball-entering means is changed to the first state elapses the predetermined period of time. End means for terminating the game when one of the termination conditions is satisfied, and an operation means capable of executing a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation, wherein the first operation is performed by the operation means more than the second operation. The game machine D1 is characterized in that it facilitates establishment of the termination condition.

In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a privilege game that allows the game ball to enter the attacker (specific prize winning slot) is executed, and multiple conditions are set for terminating the privilege game. 5518). In such a game machine, generally, a time end condition for ending the privilege game based on the elapsed time after the privilege game is executed and a winning end condition for ending the privilege game based on the number of game balls entered by an attacker during the privilege game are set, and control for terminating the privilege game is executed when either end condition is satisfied.

However, since the same game is played each time during the privilege game, even if a plurality of end conditions are set, basically only one of the end conditions is likely to be satisfied. In other words, in a game machine constructed so that a game ball can easily win a prize to an attacker during a privilege game, the winning end condition is likely to be established before the time ending condition is established, and in a game machine constituted so as to make it difficult for the attacker to win a game ball during the privilege game, the time ending condition is likely to be established before the winning end condition is established.

Thus, even if a plurality of termination conditions of the privilege game are set, if most of the termination conditions that can be met are specific termination conditions, the advantage of setting the plurality of termination conditions, that is, it is difficult to obtain the effect of making the player interested in the game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand which termination condition the privilege game ends based on which termination condition is met. To provide a game machine in which a player can enthusiastically play a game during a privilege game by suppressing bias toward a specific termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the privilege game.

According to the game machine D1, it is possible to change the end condition for ending the specific game being executed according to the operation contents executed by the operation means, so that there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The game machine D2 is characterized in that the game machine D1 has a selection effect execution means capable of executing a selection effect for allowing the player to select whether to execute the first operation or the second operation with respect to the operation means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selection performance executed by the selection performance execution means, so that there is an effect that a game easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that the game machine D2 has a performance mode setting means capable of setting a performance mode of the selected performance to be executed by the selected performance execution means, and the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode differently when a privilege to be given after the specific game is completed is different between when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the selection effect can be changed according to the privilege given after the specific game ends, the player will pay attention to the selection effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In a gaming machine D3, determining means for executing determination when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means for a predetermined period of time; privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stop-displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result; and a period discriminating means capable of discriminating the period of the game machine D4, wherein the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode of the selected performance based on the timing at which the specific game is executed and the discrimination result of the period discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the performance mode of the selection performance is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing of execution of the privilege game, the game can be played while predicting which end condition for the specified game being executed can shorten the period from the end of the specified game to the execution of the privilege game based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D4 has a second variable ball-entering means that can be changed between a third state in which a game ball can enter and a fourth state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the third state, wherein the privilege game executing means changes the second variable ball-entering means to the third state and the fourth state according to a predetermined variable pattern for a predetermined period of time as the privilege game, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege type and a second variable entering means. a second privilege type in which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state during the privilege game longer than the first privilege type; and a type setting means for setting one privilege type among a plurality of privilege types including at least a second privilege type, wherein the performance mode setting means makes the performance mode different between when the type of the privilege game that can be executed at the end timing of the specific game is the first privilege type and when it is the second privilege type based on the start timing of the specific game. A game machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game can be executed at the end timing of the specific game, the performance mode of the selection performance is set according to the type of the privilege game, so that the player can play the game while predicting which end condition is established for the specific game being executed to end the specific game in a situation advantageous to the player based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D5 is characterized by comprising situation determining means for determining whether the end timing of the specific game is a first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means or a second situation in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means, and the presentation mode setting means changes the presentation mode between the first situation and the second situation.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the performance mode of the selection performance can be changed depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of the identification information or during the execution of the privilege game, so that the game can be played while predicting which end condition to satisfy for the specific game being executed will allow the specific game to end in a situation advantageous to the player based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The game machine D7 is characterized in that the gaming machine D6 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period of the dynamic display at the end timing of the specific game when the situation determining means determines that the first situation exists, and the effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period determining means, and sets a different effect mode from when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, the performance mode of the selection performance is set differently according to the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing at which the specific game can be terminated, so that the game can be played while predicting which end condition to satisfy the specific game being executed will shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines D4 to D7, the game machine D8 is characterized by comprising a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is established, an interrupting means for interrupting the dynamic display when the specific game is started in a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a restarting means for restarting the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means when the specific game ends.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic display can be interrupted while the specific game is being executed, the length of the period during which the dynamic display is interrupted can be varied by changing the end conditions for ending the specific game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

The game machine D9 is characterized in that the game machine D8 has a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and the special game execution means can execute the special game even when the game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of the game machine D8, the privilege game can be executed even when the game ball entering the variable ball entry means passes through the specific area, so that the player can be provided with the pleasure of choosing whether to perform the game to satisfy the second end condition or the game to satisfy the first end condition for the specific game, and the effect of improving the interest of the game.

A game machine D8 or D9, wherein the game machine D8 or D9 has game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed as game states, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times in a state in which the second game state is set. 0.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, interrupting the dynamic display during the second game state is effective in lengthening the duration of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether to perform the game for establishing the second end condition or the game for establishing the first end condition with respect to the specific game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

<Feature group E> (Navigation display of the target location of the winning game)
variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; discrimination means for executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means; The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and further comprising a display control means for displaying a display image showing the variable ball entry means on the display means when the privilege game is executed.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the game is successful, and when the lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a game in which a ball-entering means into which a game ball is normally difficult to enter is released as a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting hole and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, the position of shooting the game ball to the player is varied depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting hole or the privilege game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

However, when the privilege game is executed, if the game aimed at the starting hole is continuously executed, the ball cannot be entered into the ball-entering means during the privilege game, and there is a possibility that the player loses.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, there are some devices that are densely arranged within a limited game area (devices that change from a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to a state in which it is easy to enter a ball according to the content of the game). Such a gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for a player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and the player may play an inappropriate game, resulting in a loss for the player. It is an object of the gaming machine described above to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine E1, since the display image showing the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner where the game ball should be shot when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine E1, the display control means displays the display image on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed until the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state, so that when the game ball is shot after seeing the display image, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E3 has privilege game type selection means capable of selecting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and display mode setting means capable of setting a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and the display mode setting means can set a different display mode according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection means. .

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be changed based on the type of big win, so that the privilege game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner and the game contents of the privilege game can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E4 in the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege games with different values according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selecting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, privilege games with different values are executed according to the privilege game type, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the display mode setting means variably sets the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means by the display control means based on the detection of the ball entry by the ball entry detection means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means by the ball entry detection means, the display mode of the display image can be changed, so that the progress of the privilege game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A game machine E6 characterized in that any one of the game machines E1 to E5 has operation means operable by a player and operation discrimination means capable of discriminating the contents of an operation executed with respect to the operation means, and the display mode setting means variably sets the display mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the player can change the display mode of the display image by operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the game machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the display image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation of the operating means. As a result, a player who does not need to display the display image when the privilege game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed in the display means can be used for another performance display. Therefore, there is an effect that a display suitable for the player can be executed.

A game machine E8 in the game machine E6 or E7, wherein the display mode setting means can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation of the operation means, so there is an effect that the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means can be visually recognized by the player.

<Feature F group> (Switching the time saving end timing according to conditions)
Any one of a plurality of game states including at least a determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting a game state, updating means capable of updating predetermined information, and end determining means capable of determining whether the predetermined information updated by the updating means satisfies an end condition, and capable of setting the second game state when the end determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, wherein the switching means has switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determining means based on the establishment of the switching condition. Gaming machine F1.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when a winning lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period has passed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine which is configured to be able to set a plurality of game states, and when a specific game state is set, sets an advantageous state in which a game ball is likely to enter a starting hole until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described game machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the end processing for the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of lotteries reaches a specific number, are configured to be executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in an advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, so there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (the stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a game for executing a privilege game can be duplicated (overlapped game is possible), and according to the game result of one game, the other game. There is a game machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the variable period for indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be performed in an overlapping manner, a game aimed at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted according to the game result of one of the games, it is possible to suppress the execution of privilege games that are difficult for the player to understand due to the overlapping execution of the privilege games due to the plurality of games that are executed in duplicate.

However, when the configuration capable of setting the above-described advantageous state is used in a gaming machine capable of executing duplicate games, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed at the timing when the lottery results are stopped and displayed. When the state is set, there is a problem that the counting (subtracting) process of the number of lotteries is executed when the interrupted subtraction of the variable time is resumed and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the number of times of lotteries is measured (subtracted) in the advantageous state based on the stationary display of the result of the lottery executed in the state other than the advantageous state, so there is a problem that the player cannot preferably execute the game in the advantageous state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by allowing a player to preferably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the game machine F1, since the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the first game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the updating means can update, as the predetermined information, first information based on at least the number of times the determination is executed by the determining means, and the switching condition can be satisfied when the first information updated by the updating means satisfies the termination condition.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means satisfies the termination condition, the switching condition can be established, so that the player who executed the discrimination by the discrimination means can play the game while being excited about whether or not the first game state will end as many times as the number of times the discrimination means satisfies the termination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, second determination means for executing a second determination when a second determination condition is satisfied; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the result of the second determination by the second determination means for a predetermined period; , wherein the switching condition can be satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination result.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the switching condition can be established based on the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means different from the discrimination means, so that it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the switching condition is established when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed until the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays the execution timing of the end condition determination means for a specific period, and the determination means executes the determination corresponding to the first game state as the determination performed during the specific period.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the determination of the determination means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determination means is delayed by the switching means can be executed as determination during the first game state, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has a game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, the game state display means being capable of displaying a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode as a display mode for indicating that the first game state is set, and the second display mode is the switching means switching the execution timing of the end condition determination means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being displayed when

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the second display mode displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means can be displayed as the display mode showing the state in which the first game state is set, so that the player can be notified of the current game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature G Group> (Variable navigation display of the target device of the winning game according to the progress of the game)
A gaming machine having a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a first privilege game execution means capable of executing a first privilege game in which the first variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when a first execution condition is satisfied, in a third state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball in a higher state than in the third state. a second variable ball-entering means capable of changing between a fourth state in which it is difficult to enter a ball, a second privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that changes the second variable ball-entering means from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period when the game result of the first privilege game executed by the first privilege game executing means is a predetermined game result, and displaying a first display image showing the first variable ball-entering means on a display means when the first privilege game is executed, The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising display control means for displaying a second display image showing the second variable ball entry means on the display means when the second privilege game is executed.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the game is successful, and when the lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a game in which a ball-entering means into which a game ball is normally difficult to enter is released as a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting hole and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, the position of shooting the game ball to the player is varied depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting hole or the privilege game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

However, when the privilege game is executed, if the game aimed at the starting hole is continuously executed, the ball cannot be entered into the ball-entering means during the privilege game, and there is a possibility that the player loses.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, there are some devices that are densely arranged within a limited game area (devices that change from a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to a state in which it is easy to enter a ball according to the content of the game). Such a gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for a player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and the player may play an inappropriate game, resulting in a loss for the player. It is an object of the gaming machine described above to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine G1, since the display image showing the variable ball entry means corresponding to the privilege game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner where the game ball should be shot when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine G1, the display control means causes the display means to display the first display image in a period from when the first execution condition is satisfied until the first variable ball entering means is changed to the first state.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entering means is changed to the first state, so that when the game ball is shot after seeing the display image, the game ball can be entered into the first variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the second display image when the first privilege game execution means is executing the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, at least a part of the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game to be executed next is displayed during the execution of the first privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game method after the end of the first privilege game can be grasped in advance, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the game machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2 or G3, at least a part of the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means corresponding to the already executed first privilege game is displayed during execution of the second privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the content of the privilege game executed in the past, and the game can be easily understood by the player.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the display control means sequentially displays the first display image and the second image before the first privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the first execution condition.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is established, the flow of a plurality of privilege games to be executed in the future can be notified to the player, so that the player can grasp the series of game methods in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic group H> (execution of games that are unlikely to become games that are likely to result in a number of holdings that can be executed with an advantageous game)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means until a determination condition for the information is satisfied; determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied; A game machine H1 characterized by having a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating , wherein the game machine is more likely to execute an advantageous game advantageous to a player when the number of information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a game machine that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole, there is a configuration that allows a predetermined upper limit to be reserved and stored for the lottery right for executing the lottery for winning or losing the game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since a game with the same degree of advantage is executed regardless of the number of reserved and stored lottery rights, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, the ease with which an advantageous game can be executed can be varied according to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of information stored in the storage means, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is capable of executing a first game in which the number of information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which the predetermined condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first game.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can more easily satisfy the predetermined condition in the first game than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game makes it easier to reduce the number of the information than the second game when the number of the information stored in the storage means is larger than the specific number.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, when the number of information is larger than the specific number, the number of information can be easily reduced when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed, so the number of information can be easily reduced to the specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who is playing the game with the number of pieces of information larger than the specific number can play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is smaller than the specific number, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of the information than the second game.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2 or H3, when the number of information is less than a specific number, the number of information can be increased more easily than when the second game is executed when the first game is executed, so the number of information can be easily increased to the specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who is playing the game with the number of pieces of information smaller than the specific number can play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H4, when a first condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped until a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information elapses, the first game can forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means, and the second game is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means than the first game. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is difficult to play.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H2 to H4, the forced stop means can forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Accordingly, the dynamic display of the identification information can be terminated without waiting for the dynamic display of the identification information being executed for a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the determination means to perform the next determination, so that the efficiency of the game can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine H6 is characterized in that the game machine H5 comprises a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the determination condition when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, and the first condition can be satisfied at least when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the first condition can be easily established when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved by providing a novel game property of executing the second discrimination by the second discriminating means in order to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

<Characteristic group I> (Provide a variable display in which the number of times of reduced working hours is updated during a short period of time and a variable display that is not updated)
One game state is set from among a plurality of game states including a determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. possible game state setting means, the game machine has update means capable of updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed in the state where the second game state is set, and restriction means for restricting the update of the first information by the update means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the time-saving game ends when the number of lotteries executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the player easily predicts the remaining period of the time-saving game, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the state where the second game state is set, the updating of the first information can be restricted by the restricting means when the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I1, the game state setting means sets the first game state when a termination condition based on the first information is satisfied while the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, by restricting the updating of the first information by the restriction means, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the end condition of the second game state is established, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the determining means executes determination that is more advantageous to the player when the determination is performed when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the second game state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the number of times of dynamic display executed during the period in which the second game state is set increases, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine I3, the updating means can update, as the first information, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information executed in the state where the second gaming state is set.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machine I3, the update means updates the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information as the first information, so that the second game state is terminated based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information executed in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated even though the identification information is dynamically displayed according to the established condition, so that there is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I4, the game machine I5 is characterized by comprising forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information elapses when a special condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and wherein the first condition can be satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means, the first condition is established, and the limit means limits the update of the first information by the update means. As a result, updating of the first information by the dynamic display of the identification information which could not be dynamically displayed normally can be suppressed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the second game state is terminated while the identification information cannot be dynamically displayed normally in the state where the second game state is set.

In the game machine I5, the forced stop means forcibly stops the game with identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result regardless of the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the identification information.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the specific game is not executed when the identification information is forcibly stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the second game state is terminated while the identification information cannot be normally dynamically displayed in the state where the second game state is set.

The game machine I6 has a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the determination when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is established, the specific game execution means executes the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result. A game machine I7 characterized in that it can be established in

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of the game machine I6, a special condition is established when the second determination result of the second determination means that the specific game can be executed is a predetermined second determination result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the forced stop means. Thus, when the second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means for executing the specified game, even if the result of the second discrimination comes before the result of the specified second discrimination, the dynamic display of the specific identification information is forcibly stopped and the updating of the first information can be suppressed.

The gaming machine I7 has game type determination means for determining one specific game type from among a plurality of specific game types including a first specific game type and a second specific game type capable of executing a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, and the game type determination means determines the specific second determination result by the second determination means, the specific determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine I8 characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type than in the case of .

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machine I7, the second discrimination means is more likely to produce a discrimination result more advantageous to the player than the discrimination means, so the player can be actively made to perform the second discrimination. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect of the limiting means can be further enhanced.

In the game machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I7 or I8, it is easier to execute the second judgment by the second judgment means when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set, so that the player can positively execute the second judgment in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect of the limiting means can be further enhanced.

<Feature J group> (When the condition for stopping the variable display being executed is satisfied, the content of the stop control is switched based on the content of the variable display being executed.)
A gaming machine comprising: determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means; and specific game execution means for executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a specific control means capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode according to a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means when a switching condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a game machine capable of simultaneously varying a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when one lottery wins, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded. In this case, the result of the other lottery is forcibly discarded regardless of the contents of the result of the other lottery. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game. The above-mentioned conventional problem describes a problem in a gaming machine (a so-called simultaneous variation machine) that executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (parallel). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that

According to the game machine J1, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode in accordance with the conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information being executed when the switching condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed. Thereby, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust when the dynamic display mode is switched, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the specific control means switches to one of the plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means when executing the specific control.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, when the specific control is executed, the specific dynamic display mode can be changed according to the conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to determine the specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult for the player to understand when the specific control is executed for the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the game machine J3 comprises a second determining means for executing a second determination different from the above determination when a second determination condition different from the above determining condition is established, and the switching condition can be established when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a predetermined second determination result.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a predetermined second determination result, the switching condition is satisfied and the specific control is executed. Therefore, the control contents of the specific control are associated with both the result of discrimination by the discrimination means and the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J3, the specific game execution means can execute the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result.

According to the game machine J4, since the specific game can be executed even based on the second discrimination by the second discrimination means, the player can be motivated to perform both the discrimination by the discrimination means and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency with which the specific control is executed can be increased.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines at least the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is more likely to be satisfied when the dynamic display period is longer than when the dynamic display period is short.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the longer the dynamic display period is, the more easily the switching condition is established, so that the player can be interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the effect of improving the amusement of the game is obtained.

A game J6 characterized in that any one of the game machines J1 to J5 has a residual period determining means capable of determining a residual dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the switching condition is different in easiness of establishment according to the length of the residual dynamic display period determined by the residual period determining means.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J5, since the easiness of establishment of the switching condition can be changed according to the length of the residual dynamic display period, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the residual dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Feature K group> (increase or decrease the number of specific symbols displayed based on the look-ahead result without synchronizing with the number of pending)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the information acquisition means until at least a determination condition for the information is satisfied; determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when the specific game is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a result, in which, before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is performed, the preliminary determination means for executing the preliminary determination based on the information; the specific pattern display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means; A gaming machine K1, characterized by comprising: symbol number variable display means capable of variable display regardless of the number of symbols.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, when a game ball enters a start hole, it is proposed that a predetermined number of lottery rights for executing a game success or failure lottery can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number, the number of the retained and stored lottery rights is displayed by a pattern, and the display mode of the symbol is changed based on the predetermination result of preliminarily discriminating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved and stored lottery right (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-223613). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the result of the preliminary determination can be suggested to the player by using the displayed symbols, but when the number of reserved and stored lottery rights is small, the number of displayed symbols is also reduced, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect, and there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

According to the game machine K1, the number of specific symbols displayed based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means can be varied regardless of the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the number of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be variably displayed, and there is an effect that the player can be interested in the performance suggesting the result of preliminary discrimination.

In the game machine K1, the specific pattern display means can display the specific patterns up to the number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the upper limit display number of specific patterns is set as the upper limit number of information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the player can be made to think that the specific patterns indicate the number of information stored in the storage means.

In either the game machine K1 or K2, the symbol number varying means varies the number of the specific symbols to be displayed within a range of 1 or more as the number of the specific symbols when the number of the information stored in the storage means is 1 or more.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the specific patterns can be continuously displayed while the information is stored in the storage means, so that the player can be made to think that the specific patterns indicate the number of information stored in the storage means.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the game machine has game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the game state setting means can set the first game state when a termination condition is satisfied in a state in which at least the second game state is set, and the specific symbol display means is the second game state. is set, the specific pattern can be displayed on the display means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines K1 to K3, while the specific symbols are displayed on the display means, the second game state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player can be notified of whether or not the second game state will be terminated each time the number of display of the specific symbols is changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine K4, the game machine K5 is characterized in that the number-of-symbols varying means can change the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by two or more.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be greatly changed at one time, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected performance and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K5, the number-of-symbols varying means can more easily change the display number of the specific symbols when the information stored in the storage means includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be easily increased by pre-determination that information corresponding to the specific determination result is included, so that there is an effect that the player can be interested in the variable state of the specific symbols and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K6, the number-of-symbols varying means is more likely to increase the display number of the specific symbols to be increased at once when the information stored in the storage means contains the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result as a result of the preliminary discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means than when the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is not included.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, the possibility that the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included increases as the number of display of the specific patterns increased at one time increases, so that the player can be interested in how the number of display of the specific patterns increases, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine K7, the symbol number varying means can execute a preparatory variable display for decreasing the display number of the specific symbols before increasing the display number of the specific symbols to the specific number.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, the display number of the specific symbols can be reduced by the preparation variable display, so the increase variable display of the specific number can be executed regardless of the current display number of the specific symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of performance for variably displaying the number of specific symbols to be displayed by the symbol number varying means can be increased.

<Characteristic group L> (By varying the winning rate of electric chews on the upstream side, the rate of ball entry into the starting port on the downstream side is varied)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, and a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result or when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down; a first ball entry means that can satisfy the first determination condition when the game ball enters the first flow path; a variable means that can be varied between a first state in which the game ball can enter the first ball entrance means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; The game machine L1 is characterized by having a variable control means and a second ball entry means which allows a game ball to enter and which can satisfy the second determination condition when the game ball enters the game ball, and wherein the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has failed to enter the first ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, there is a game machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and a variable member for facilitating entry of a game ball during a time-saving game is provided in one of them to facilitate execution of a lottery during a time-saving game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when a game ball is shot toward the starting hole provided with the variable member, the game ball that does not enter the starting hole is wasted, and there is a problem that the willingness to play is reduced. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

According to the game machine L1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is likely to be executed and a state in which the second determination is likely to be performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path, depending on the length of the period in which the variable means is changed to the first state by the variable control means. Thus, when the game ball flows down the first flow path, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which determination will be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L1, the game machine L2 has a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the variable means is in the second state longer than the first variable pattern as the variable patterns of the variable means variably controlled by the variable control means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means in accordance with the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means. Therefore, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is easily performed and a state in which the second determination is easily performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path according to the variable state of the variable means. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the variable state of the variable means, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game machine L3, characterized in that the game machine L2 has a determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is established, and the variable control means variably controls the variable means when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, since the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determination means, the player can be interested in the determination contents of the determination means, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L3 is characterized by comprising: dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means; and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining one dynamic display period from among a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths as a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determination means is stopped and displayed can be varied, so that the player can be given a period during which variable control is not executed by the variable control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine L5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second determining means executes determination more advantageous to the player than the first determining means.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L4, since the second discrimination means performs discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discrimination means, the player can expect that the game ball will reach the second ball entering means and can play the game while making the player interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first flow path.

The game machine L5 includes a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection result of the detection means, wherein the detection means comprises at least a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the first flow path, and a second detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has not entered the first ball entering means out of the game balls flowing down the first flow path. The game machine L6 is characterized in that the effect to be executed is for indicating to the player the degree of expectation that the ball flowing down the first flow path will reach the second ball entering means.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L5, the player can be easily informed of the flow condition of the game balls flowing down the first flow path, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AA group>
first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; second information acquisition means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; A gaming machine having a second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of second identification information, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, wherein the performance mode execution means capable of executing the performance mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means. and selectable presentation mode selection means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AA1, since the performance mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied depending on the number of the stored second information, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information that can be executed thereafter, and even when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, the player continues to be interested in the subsequent game, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the game machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the performance mode executing means executes the performance mode when the specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to store the second information, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In the game machine AA1 or AA2, the presentation mode is set in a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of the second information stored.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA1 or AA2, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable over the dynamic display period of the second identification information which is continuously performed a plurality of times, there is an effect that the second dynamic display mode a plurality of times can be shown as one dynamic display to improve interest.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established. and advance determination means capable of determining in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, wherein the performance mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific performance mode at least based on the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AA1 to AA3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily discriminating the establishment of a specific condition which is a trigger for facilitating the acquisition of the second information, so there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristics AB group> (Effect variable depending on the number of special figures 2 pending during the execution of the variation pattern)
first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; second information acquisition means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; In a gaming machine having second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of second identification information, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during a dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means. and selectable performance mode selection means, wherein the performance mode selection means selects the performance mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines aim to increase interest in games by determining an effect mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning hole, and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AB1, since the performance mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, not only the result of the first determination but also the information about the possibility of executing the second determination can be determined from the performance mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine AB1, the rendering mode selection means selects the rendering mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1, since the performance mode is selected according to the number of the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of second information stored during the execution, there is an effect that various performance modes can be executed.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the performance mode is a performance related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information to be executed after that.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, when the second information is stored, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the performance mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information is started.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established. and advance determination means capable of determining in advance whether the specific condition is established before the establishment of the specific condition, wherein the performance mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific performance mode at least based on the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AB1 to AB3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily discriminating establishment of a specific condition, which is a trigger for facilitating the acquisition of the second information, so there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristic AC group> (Use special figure 1 variation effect as a pseudo effect of special figure 2 variation)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, a first privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming the predetermined first determination result, and based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the predetermined second determination result. Second privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player, first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the execution of the first determination, and second effect executing means for performing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the execution of the second effect, wherein the second effect executing means has at least a predetermined specific condition. The game machine AC1 is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect when established.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the first effect can be executed as the effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect executing means is capable of executing the second effect of a effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC1, the second effect using the display mode showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination can be executed, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect executing means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group> (Double display including probability variation even for normal hits)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying a plurality of first identification patterns on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying the combination to indicate the first determination result by the first determination means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination; 2. A gaming machine comprising: dynamic display means; and privilege granting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when the first identification symbols are stop-displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific first determination result on the display means or when the second identification symbols are statically displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, wherein the privilege provision means is stop-displayed in the combination of the identification patterns corresponding to the first specific combination among the specific combinations. a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is displayed, the gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege to be given by the privilege giving means; The game machine AD1 is characterized in that the first identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination after displaying a plurality of ready-to-win display modes in which the patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either the first specific combination or the second specific combination.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the benefits to be given after that are different depending on the type of displayed symbols, thereby improving the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that some of the patterns constituting a combination that does not give a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player are stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game is reduced before the result is reported.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

According to the game machine AD1, when identification patterns are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through a plurality of ready-to-win display modes, so that there is an effect that the expectation that both the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the combination corresponding to the second privilege are displayed can be kept for a long time, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD1, even in the specific period when the first privilege is determined by the determining means, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display mode, so that even when the first determination is executed in the specific period, there is an effect that it is possible to easily have an expectation for the second privilege to be given.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when the specific period is set, dynamically displays one second identification pattern and after displaying the special multiple ready-to-win display mode in which the remaining identification patterns are statically displayed in a combination that can be any combination of two or more different second specific combinations, the second identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination. A game machine AD3 characterized in that it is displayed by.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD2, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given when the specific second determination result is obtained during the specific period.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control at probability variable hit)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and a game state set after the execution of the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area. In a gaming machine having a setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state until an end condition is satisfied, and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the game state set after execution of the privilege game when the privilege game ends, the suggestion mode comprises a combination of a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, wherein the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the advantageous game state are suggested. The gaming machine AE1 is characterized in that the second suggestive mode for playing is composed of a suggestive mode configured in the same period.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a win, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during the winning game of a specific type, the variable ball entry area is changed to the state where the game ball can be entered and the state where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball enters the winning game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of winning game is executed, the game ball may not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. There was a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load.

According to the game machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation of the period for displaying the suggestion mode and set the mode suggested by the state of the ball entering the specific area, thereby facilitating the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game and reducing the control load.

In the gaming machine AE1, the gaming machine AE2 comprises: suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means corresponding to the type of the privilege game to be executed when the privilege game is executed; and switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode among the suggestion modes set when a game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific privilege game to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific privilege game. .

According to the game machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE1, even if the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game, the suggestion mode can be switched to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode, so that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be performed.

<Feature AF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means from a plurality of types; and period setting means for setting a period.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set according to the type of privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AF2 is characterized in that the game machine AF1 is provided with specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1, the specific performance can be executed in different periods set according to the type of the privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AF3 is characterized by comprising a period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game in the game machine AF1 or AF2.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AG group> (The ED period is variable depending on whether or not there is a V prize)
determining means capable of executing determination; privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result; a specific region through which a game ball can pass during execution of the privilege game; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game, and the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set different lengths of the specific period depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AG1, different lengths of specific periods can be set depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AG2, gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing state of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.

According to the game machine AG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic BA group> (Different game characteristics according to settings)
Specific element setting means capable of setting the state of a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of a player to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage; , wherein the second game state is more advantageous to the player when the specific element is set to the first state than when the specific element is set to the second state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the degree of advantage of each game state is fixed, there is a problem that the game may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BA1, in the advantageous second game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is advantageous to set the specific element to the first state with a low degree of advantage, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BA1 is characterized in that the game machine BA1 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, and the first state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific determination result being obtained is lower than that in the second state.

According to the game machine BA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA1, in an advantageous second game state, a very novel game property can be realized in which a lower probability of a specific discrimination result is more advantageous, so that there is an effect that a player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BA2, variable means capable of changing between a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position into which a game ball can easily enter the ball entering means, and a second position into which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, wherein the second game state is configured such that the predetermined privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means than in the first game state.

According to the game machine BA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA2, a predetermined privilege is easily given in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved when the second game state is set.

A gaming machine BA4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the first gaming state based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA2 or BA3, if a specific discrimination result is obtained in the second game state, there is a possibility that the first game state having a lower advantage degree than the second game state is set, so in the second game state, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants the privilege to be continuously provided with the second discrimination result rather than with the specific discrimination result. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game feature that makes one expect that a specific determination result will not be obtained, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

A game machine BA5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines BA2 to BA4, the second game state can be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine BA5, since the second game state is maintained until the specific determination result is obtained in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BA2 to BA5, the second game state tends to be continued longer in the first state having a lower probability of obtaining the specific determination result. That is, since the second determination result is likely to be obtained more times, the number of times that the predetermined privilege is granted is likely to be increased as well. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the second state in the states other than the second game state, and to make the player expect the disadvantageous first state in the second game state.

In the gaming machine BA2, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set to one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state. A game machine BA6 characterized by being configured to be able to set a state.

According to the game machine BA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA1 or BA2, the first state having a low probability of obtaining a specific determination result is more likely to have a determination result other than the specific determination result in the second game state, so that an advantageous third game state is easily obtained. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is strongly expected to set the disadvantageous first state in the second game state, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6 is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the shooting means, and a payout means paying out at least a prize ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, wherein the first game state is the payout when the game balls continue to be shot in a shooting direction in which the game balls are likely to enter the first ball entering means. The game machine BA7 is characterized by being constructed so that the number of game balls to be shot out is likely to be larger than the number of prize balls to be put out by means.

According to the game machine BA7, in any one of the game machines BA2 to BA6, in the first game state, the more game balls are shot, the more likely the number of held balls is reduced, so that the setting of the second state in which a specific determination result is likely to occur at an early stage can be strongly expected. Therefore, it is possible to realize the novel game property that the second state is expected in the first game state and the first state is expected in the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BA7, the game machine BA8 is characterized in that, in the second game state, the number of prize balls put out by the payout means is more likely to be closer to the number of game balls to be shot than in the first game state.

According to the game machine BA8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA7, the degree of advantage in the second game state can be increased, so there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of the transition to the second game state.

<Characteristic BB group> (The easier it is to win, the lower the advantage)
A state for setting one state out of a plurality of states including at least a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, a first probability state in which the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result with a first probability, and a second probability state in which the determination result in the determination result is obtained with a second probability different from the first probability, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. A game machine BB1 comprising a setting means, wherein said first probability state is constructed so as to have a higher degree of advantage for the player than said second probability state, at least while a predetermined specific condition is established.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the winning lottery probability can be changed according to the type of winning after the winning state is over, and there are also those which are intended to improve the interest after the winning state is over.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that if the winning probability is low, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, since the first probability state can be expected at least while the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BB2, wherein the first probability is lower than the second probability in the gaming machine BB1.

According to the game machine BB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB1, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such that the lower the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result is more advantageous while the specific condition is established, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BB3 is characterized in that, in the game machine BB1 or BB2, the state in which the specific condition is established can be terminated at least based on the specific determination result.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB1 or BB2, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained while a specific condition is established, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a variable game in which a game ball can enter a ball entering means, a first position where a game ball can easily enter the ball entering means, and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means, wherein the predetermined privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means when the specific condition is established than when the specific condition is not established.

According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BB1 to BB3, a predetermined privilege is likely to be given while the specific condition is established, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the specific condition is established.

In the gaming machine BB4, the determining means comprises at least a first determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition, and a second determining means for performing determination based on the establishing of a second determining condition different from the first determining condition, and the second determining means is configured so that a ratio of the second determining result is higher than that of the first determining means. The game machine BB5 is characterized in that it is constructed such that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a state where there is no such condition.

According to the game machine BB5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB4, discrimination by the second discriminating means that tends to result in the second discrimination result is easily executed while the specific condition is established, so there is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation that the specific condition will be established.

The game machine BB5 is characterized in that the state in which the determination result of the first determination means becomes the specific determination result while the specific condition is established is more likely to result in the establishment of the specific condition after the end of the privilege game than in the case where the judgment result of the second judgment means becomes the specific judgment result while the specific condition is established.

According to the game machine BB6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB5, when the discrimination of the second discrimination means, which is easily executed in the state of establishment of the specific condition, results in a specific discrimination result, the state of the establishment of the specific condition is highly likely to be ended, so that the novel game property of expecting that the specific discrimination result will not be obtained while the specific condition is established can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In a gaming machine BB5 or BB6, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction by the shooting means can easily enter, a second ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, a third position where a game ball can easily enter the second ball-entering means, and a game is played to the second ball-entering means. a third position where it is difficult for a ball to enter; The game machine BB7 is characterized in that the variable means is configured to be easily changed to the third position.

According to the game machine BB7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB5 or BB6, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the pleasure of changing the shooting direction of the game ball depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic BC group> (Variable occurrence rate of specific suggestions between normal state after setting change and normal state after winning)
A gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect comprises first game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on establishment of a first setting condition, and second game state setting means for setting the specific game state based on establishment of a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, wherein the effect execution means is configured to perform the specific game state when the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means and the second game state. A gaming machine BC1 is characterized in that the easiness of execution of a predetermined specific effect is different between when the specific game state is set by the game state setting means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game becomes monotonous when the same game state continues for a long time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BC1, even in the same specific game state, the easiness of execution of the specific performance can be changed depending on whether it is set by the first game state setting means or the second game state setting means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC1 comprises a determining means for performing a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, wherein the first game state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the specific game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game, and the second game state setting means is the setting of the gaming machine. A game machine BC2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set the specific game state based on the initialization of the BC2.

According to the game machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC1, the easiness of execution of the specific performance can be changed in the game state set at the time of initialization, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine BC1 or BC2, the game machine BC3 is characterized in that the performance executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance on the basis of the determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations after the specific game state is set.

According to the game machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC1 or BC2, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of continuous failure determination results.

In the game machine BC3, the performance executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance based on the fact that the number of times of succession of the result of determination of failure after the specific game state is set becomes a multiple of the specific number of times.

According to the game machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC3, the specific performance is executed every time the consecutive number of times of the failure determination result becomes a multiple of the specific number of times, so that the player can be tempted to continue the game until the number of times becomes a multiple of the specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BC1 to BC3, the game machine BC4 is characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to more easily execute the specific performance when the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means than when the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means.

According to the game machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BC1 to BC3, there is an effect that the operating rate in the specific game state set by the second game state setting means can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, a specific element setting means capable of setting a specific element relating to the player's degree of advantage to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage; and a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least:

According to the game machine BC5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BC1 to BC4, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific performance, so that the player who wants to predict the state of the specific element can play the game expecting the execution of the specific performance in the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the game machines BC1 to BC5 includes main control means for performing main control related to the game, and the effect execution means, and includes sub-control means for performing control according to commands output from the main control means, and display means capable of displaying identification information. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; type determination means for determining a dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means; and command output means for outputting a type command for indicating the dynamic display type determined by the type determination means to the slave control means; The game machine BC6 is characterized in that an effect corresponding to the received type command can be executed based on the reception, and the specific effect is composed of an effect that can be executed by the effect executing means as an effect corresponding to a predetermined specific dynamic display type.

According to the game machine BC6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BC1 to BC5, the slave control means only needs to determine the type of the specific performance when receiving the type command corresponding to the specific dynamic display type, so there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine BC6, the main control means stores a plurality of regulation information including at least first regulation information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the specific game state set by the first game state setting means and second regulation information referred to when deciding the dynamic display type in the specific game state set by the second game state setting means, as regulation information in which information referred to when determining the dynamic display type is defined in advance. A gaming machine BC7 comprising storage means, and provision information specifying means for specifying, from the provision information storage means, one provision information to be referred to for determining the dynamic display type based on the establishment of the determination condition, wherein the second provision information defines information such that the specific dynamic display type is more easily determined than the second provision information.

According to the game machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC6, there is an effect that the easiness of determination of the specific dynamic display type can be changed only by changing the stipulated information to be referred to.

In the gaming machine BC7, the second regulating information defines information such that when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the determination condition is satisfied, the specific dynamic display type is more likely to be determined than the second regulating information, and when the specific condition is not satisfied, the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type is common to the second regulating information.

According to the game machine BC8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC7, the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type can be varied depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not, so that the execution ratio of the specific effect can be biased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BD group> (Specific suggestions are more likely to occur in situations that are disadvantageous to the player)
a specific effect execution means for executing a predetermined specific effect based on the establishment of a specific execution condition; a specific effect type determination means for determining one type out of a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect capable of suggesting to the player the state of a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player and a second specific effect in which the state of the specific element is difficult to suggest as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means; A game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least two game states, wherein the first game state is configured such that the first specific effect is more likely to be determined by the specific effect type determination means than the second game state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are capable of executing an effect mode suggesting a degree of advantage for the player in a predetermined gaming state.

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, a player who desires to know the state of the specific element can actively play the game in the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1, the gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is constructed in a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

According to the game machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD1, there is an effect that the operation rate in the disadvantageous first game state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state, and the specific effect type determination means continuously sets the game state after the privilege game to a game state other than the third game state. The game machine BD3 is characterized in that it is easier to determine the first specific performance in the first game state set when the number of times is equal to or greater than the specific number of times than when the first game state is set when the number of times is less than the predetermined specific number.

According to the game machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD1 or BD2, the specific performance is more likely to be executed as the disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous third game state is not set continues, so that even when the disadvantageous situation continues, the player's motivation for the game can be hardly lowered.

In any one of the game machines BD1 to BD3, determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, and as the specific element, the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state in the first game state is set to one of a plurality of probabilities including at least a predetermined first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability. and specific element setting means, wherein the second game state is constituted by a game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state.

According to the game machine BD4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BD1 to BD3, the game can be played with the expectation that the second probability is indicated in the specific performance, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD4, the second game state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a probability of a third probability higher than the second probability, and the first specific effect is one of a plurality of effects including at least a first effect mode that is more likely to be executed when the first probability is set higher than the second probability, and a second effect mode that is more likely to be executed when the second probability is set to be higher than the first probability. The gaming machine BD5 is characterized by being constructed in a presentation mode suggesting information according to the probability of obtaining a specific determination result.

According to the game machine BD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD4, the execution of the second performance mode can be expected when the specific performance is executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD5, the specific element setting means sets the probability of the specific determination result to the first probability by setting a predetermined first set value to a predetermined setting destination, and sets the probability of the specific determination result to the second probability by setting a second set value different from the first set value to the predetermined setting destination, and the first presentation mode is a numerical value indicating a probability equal to or lower than the first probability, and The game machine BD6 is characterized in that the game machine BD6 is composed of a performance mode in which a numerical value suggesting a set value of 1 is notified, the second performance mode is a numerical value that suggests a probability equal to or lower than the first probability, and a performance mode in which a numerical value that suggests the second set value is notified.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD5, the set value can be suggested numerically in the first specific presentation, so there is an effect that an presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be realized.

In the game machine BD5 or BD6, the second specific effect is configured in a performance mode of announcing a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is equal to or higher than the second probability and equal to or lower than the third probability.

According to the game machine BD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD5 or BD6, the probability suggested by the second specific performance can be made below the actual probability, so that the actual behavior of the game machine can be made above the probability suggested by the second specifying means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from contradicting the content of the specific effect, so there is an effect that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In any one of the game machines BD5 to BD7, the specific effect type determining means is configured to be able to determine one type out of a plurality of types including at least the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect suggesting either the first game state set to the second probability or the second game state.

According to the game machine BD8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BD5 to BD7, when the third specified performance is executed, the player can expect the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD8, the third specific effect is configured in a performance mode in which a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than the first probability and equal to or less than the second probability is notified.

According to the gaming machine BD9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD8, the numerical value reported by the specific effect can draw the player's attention, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BE group> (varies the chance zone appearance rate according to the setting)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means; special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player until a predetermined specified condition is established based on a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result at least in a specific game state; , a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage, and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage, wherein the first state is configured such that the second determination result is more likely to occur in the specific game state than in the second state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the degree of advantage of each game state is fixed, there is a problem that the game may become monotonous.

According to the game machine BE1, since the first state with a low degree of advantage is more likely to be set as a special state in a specific game state, it is possible to expect the first state with a low degree of advantage in the specific game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BE1, the state setting means sets, as the specific element, at least the probability of obtaining the first determination result in the specific game state, the first state is configured to obtain the first determination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second state is configured to obtain the first determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to the game machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE1, novel game characteristics can be realized in which a state in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result is low can be realized in a specific game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BE3 is characterized in that when the special state is set in the specific game state in the game machine BE1 or BE2, the specific game state is maintained at least until the special state ends.

According to the game machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE1 or BE2, the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the game state in a specific game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BE1 to BE3, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and at least in the specific game state, the determination by the second determination means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the determination by the first determination means, and the special state is set to the special state. A game machine BE4 characterized in that it is constructed in a state in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more likely to be executed than in a state in which it is not.

According to the game machine BE4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BE1 to BE3, when the special state occurs, the advantageous second discrimination means is likely to perform the discrimination, so that the game in the specific game parlor cheer can be played in anticipation of the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BE4 is characterized in that the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on the second determination result obtained in the determination by the first determination means.

According to the game machine BE5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE4, there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized such that an advantageous special state is set when a second judgment result is obtained in the judgment of the first judgment means having a low degree of advantage.

A game machine BE6, characterized in that, in a game machine BE4 or BE5, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are configured to be executed in overlap.

According to the game machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE4 or BE5, there is an effect that the discrimination by the discrimination means can be efficiently performed.

In the game machine BE6, the special state is configured at least in a state during which the first identification information for indicating the second determination result is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6, only the discrimination of the second discriminating means which is advantageous during the special state can be executed, so there is an effect that the special state can be strongly expected.

In a gaming machine BE6 or BE7, a variable means capable of changing between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position into which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means, and the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in the discrimination of the second discrimination means. A gaming machine BE8 comprising: variable game executing means for executing a variable game, and privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means.

According to the game machine BE8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6 or BE7, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation of execution of a variable game.

In any one of the game machines BE1 to BE8, the game machine BE9 is characterized in that the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state at a higher rate than when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is less than the specific number of times when the second determination result is obtained continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means in the specific game state.

According to the game machine BE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BE1 to BE8, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make the user expect that the second determination result continues for a specific number of times or more.

In the gaming machine BE9, the special state setting means is configured to set the special state at a predetermined first rate when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is equal to or greater than the specified number of times, and to set the special state at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is equal to or greater than the second number of times greater than the specified number of times.

According to the game machine BE10, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE9, the more the second determination result continues, the easier it is to set the special state.

<Characteristic BF Group> (Form a chance zone without changing the game state based on the fact that the lottery result is a pure loss)
determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result; game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage is a first advantage based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; The game machine BF1 is characterized by comprising an advantage degree setting means capable of setting an advantage degree to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree while maintaining the first game state until a predetermined specific condition is established based on the judgment result.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game state does not change unless the lottery result is a win, there is a problem that the player is disappointed every time the lottery result is a loss.

According to the game machine BF1, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the degree of advantage is increased when the result of determination is a failure, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BF2 is characterized in that the game machine BF1 is provided with dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the advantage level setting means sets the advantage level while the identification information for indicating the outlier determination result is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means to the second advantage level.

According to the game machine BF2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1, it is possible to realize a very novel game property that is advantageous while the identification information for indicating the result of the discrepancy is dynamically displayed, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In the game machine BF1 or BF2, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the determination by the second determination means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the determination by the first determination means.

According to the game machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1 or BF2, there is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.

In the gaming machine BF3, the advantage level setting means sets the second advantage level based on the result of the determination by the first determination means as being out.

According to the game machine BF4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF3, there is an effect that a very novel game property can be realized such that the advantage degree becomes high when the judgment result of the first judgment means having a low advantage degree becomes a disadvantageous judgment result.

In the game machine BF4, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means is provided, and the advantage level setting means is configured to be able to vary the length of a dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the advantage level setting means controls the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means until the determination result of the first determination means in the first game state becomes a non-determination result. A dynamic display period is set to a length equal to or less than a predetermined first period, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means can be set to a second period longer than the first period based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination means is a failure determination result. A game machine BF5 characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed during a display period.

According to the game machine BF5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BF3, the dynamic display period of the second period can be set when the determination result of the first determination means is a failure determination result, so that only the determination of the second determination means can be executed during the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, the advantage setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second advantage at a higher rate than when the number of consecutive times of the failure determination results is less than the first number, when the failure determination result is obtained continuously over a predetermined first number of determinations in the determination by the determination means in the first game state.

According to the game machine BF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BF1 to BF5, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which one expects the result of the determination to be a failure continuously over the determination of the first number of times.

In the gaming machine BF6, the advantage setting means is configured to set the second advantage at a first rate when the number of consecutive failure determination results is equal to or greater than the first number, and to set the second advantage at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number of consecutive failure determination results is a second number greater than the first number.

According to the game machine BF7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF6, there is an effect that the degree of expectation to be set to the second advantage level increases as the failure determination result continues.

<Characteristic BG group> (1 type 2 types, low setting makes it easier to hit with accessories)
A ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first area provided at a position where a game ball entering the entering means can flow in, a second area different from the first area, a distributing means for distributing the game ball entering the entering means to either the first area or the second area, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball entered the first area; state setting means for setting a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, wherein the first state is configured such that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means is more likely to be distributed to the first area than the second state. Technique BG1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a special game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is given to the player when a game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine that makes it possible has been proposed, and attempts have been made to improve the interest of players (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010741).

In addition, among such conventional type game machines, there is also one that is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not a privilege game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is of an advantageous type. In such a conventional type gaming machine, when it is suggested that the degree of expectation of a privilege game of an advantageous type is high, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of passing through the specific area.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the ratio of game balls passing through the specific area is common when a specific game is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player even if it is suggested that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous type.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BG1, since the easiness of sorting to the first area can be changed according to whether it is in the first state or the second state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG1, the gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the first advantageous degree is lower than the second advantageous degree.

According to the game machine BG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG1, there is an effect that a game with a lower degree of advantage can be more easily distributed to the first area by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, variable means that can change between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a period; and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state after the end of the privilege game; A gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that it is constructed such that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means is easily distributed to the first area until the end of the game.

According to the game machine BG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG1 or BG2, the setting of the first state facilitates the distribution of the game balls to the first area in the advantageous first game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG3, a second privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, wherein the first game state is configured so that a game ball entering the ball entry means is easily distributed to the first area based on the determination result of the determination means being a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result and the second determination result. Technique BG4.

According to the game machine BG4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG3, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property such that, when the result of the determination is a failure in the first game state, the game is easily sorted to the first area.

A game machine BG5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BG4, the first state has a lower probability of the second determination result and a higher probability of the third determination result than the second state.

According to the game machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG4, the setting of the first state with a low probability of obtaining the second determination result makes it possible to realize the novel game property that the advantageous first game state becomes more advantageous, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BG4 or BG5, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined number of specific information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; The dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set a dynamic display period during which the variable game is likely to be executed in the first period cycle when setting the dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in a state in which one or more of the discrimination information are stored in the storage means in the first game state. A game machine BG6 characterized in that, in a state, when setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the discrepancy determination, a dynamic display period of a length that enables acquisition of the discrimination information of the specific number of pieces of information can be set.

According to the game machine BG6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG4 or BG5, discrimination information of a specific number of pieces of information can be acquired during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination of failure, so that the player can play the game expecting the result of discrimination of failure.

In the gaming machine BG6, the dynamic display period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a dynamic display period of a length that makes it difficult to acquire the discrimination information from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the end of the variable game executed after the dynamic display of the identification information ends, when setting the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result in the first game state.

According to the game machine BG7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG6, it is difficult to acquire discrimination information unless it is during the dynamic display of the discrimination information for showing the discriminated result of failure, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation of the discriminated result of failure. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature BH group> (Avoid the initial action of the character when confirming the setting)
A gaming machine BH1 comprising: a variable member that can be varied; a variable means for varying the variable member; an on-time control means capable of controlling the variable means so that the variable member performs a predetermined operation, that is, an input operation, when power is turned on to the game machine;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable members (eg, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

Among such conventional game machines, there are some which are configured so that it is possible to determine whether or not the variable member is normally operable by making the variable member perform a predetermined input operation when the power of the game machine is turned on.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a possibility that the insertion operation is performed even in a situation in which the insertion operation should not be performed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BH1, there is an effect that the variable member can be preferably operated when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine BH1, the suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of the input operation at least until the specific condition is not satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the game machine is powered on.

According to the game machine BH2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH1, there is an effect that the start timing of the insertion operation can be set favorably.

A game machine BH3 is characterized by comprising a second control means for controlling said variable means to perform said input operation on the condition that said specific condition is not satisfied when said specific condition and a second specific condition different from said specific condition are met at the time when the game machine BH1 or BH2 is powered on.

According to the game machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH1 or BH2, the insertion operation can be performed in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, so that the insertion operation can be executed more preferably.

In the gaming machine BH3, the suppressing means suppresses execution of the input operation even after the specific condition is not satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the game machine is powered on and the second specific condition is not satisfied.

According to the game machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH4, the execution of the insertion operation can be suppressed when the second specific condition is satisfied, so there is an effect that the variable member can be favorably operated.

In any one of the game machines BH1 to BH4, the state of a specific element relating to the degree of advantage for the player can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage on the basis of power being turned on to the game machine in a state in which an operation means operable by an operator and a first operation content is performed on the operation means. means, wherein the suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of the inserting operation while the special state is set.

According to the game machine BH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BH1 to BH4, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difficulty of changing the state of the specific element due to the execution of the insertion operation while the special state is set.

The game machine BH5 comprises display means capable of displaying information indicating the state of the specific element, and second special state setting means for setting a second special state in which the state of the specific element is displayed on the display means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine in a state in which a second operation content different from the operation of the second operation content is performed on the operation means, and the suppression means, when the second special state has been set at the time the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the second special state setting means. The gaming machine BH6 is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of the insertion operation even after the second special state is terminated.

According to the game machine BH6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH5, it is possible to prevent the power of the game machine from being turned on again just to confirm the state of the specific element, and the turning-on operation being executed even though the turning-on operation is highly likely not necessary, so that the operation of the variable member at the time of turning on the power can be preferably set.

In the game machine BH6, the operation means is composed of at least a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means, the operation of the first operation content is composed of the operation content of operating both the first operation means and the second operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is composed of the operation content of operating only the first operation means.

According to the game machine BH7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH6, the operator can easily switch between the operation of the first operation content and the operation of the second operation content, so that the convenience of the operator can be improved.

The game machine BH7 is characterized by comprising a game enable state setting means for setting a game enable state in which a normal game is possible based on the fact that the first operating means is in a non-operating state in the special state and the second special state.

According to the game machine BH8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH7, the game ready state can be easily set, so there is an effect that the operator's convenience can be improved.

<Feature BI group> (Provide a variation pattern that makes it easier to determine when a lottery is executed based on a winning random number that is a win in some settings and a loss in other settings)
discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; a first dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and the non-compliance discrimination result is obtained as a dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result; and discrimination information different from the specific discrimination information. A dynamic display type determining means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a second dynamic display type that is used for determination and is likely to be executed when the determination result is out.

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, notify the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole by variably displaying symbols on a display means. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine shifts to a so-called winning state that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of patterns with different variation times are provided for the symbol variation, and the interest in the game of the player is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BI1, it is possible to predict whether the state is the first discrimination state or the second discrimination state according to the dynamic display type, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BI1, one of a plurality of effects including at least a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a first effect mode that is more likely to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type as the effect mode of the specific effect, and a second effect mode that is more likely to be performed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. A game machine BI2 characterized by comprising a performance mode determining means for determining a mode.

According to the game machine BI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BI1, it becomes easier to understand whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type is executed or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is executed depending on the performance mode, so there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the game machine BI2, the game machine BI3 is characterized in that the first specific effect is configured in an effect mode suggesting the first determination state.

According to the game machine BI3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI2, there is an effect that the player can be convinced that the first determination state is established when the first specific effect is executed.

In any one of the game machines BI1 to BI3, the first determination state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability.

According to the game machine BI4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BI1 to BI3, when the first dynamic display type that is likely to be executed in the first discrimination state is determined, the possibility of being in a discrimination state with a high probability of a specific discrimination result increases, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type will be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BI4 comprises game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, wherein the first determination state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability, and the second determination state is the above in the first game state. The game machine BI5 is characterized in that the game machine BI5 is configured such that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is set to the second probability.

According to the game machine BI5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI4, when the first discrimination state is set, the specific discrimination result is more likely to occur in the first game state with a lower degree of advantage than when the second discrimination state is set, so there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first discrimination state is set.

In the game machine BI5, the first determination state is configured in a state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a third probability higher than the first probability, and the second determination state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a fourth probability higher than the second probability and lower than the third probability.

According to the game machine BI6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BI5, in the first determination state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is high both in the first game state and in the second game state, so the superiority in the first determination state can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the first determination state is set.

In any one of game machines BI1 to BI6, game machine BI7 is characterized in that the discrimination state set by the discrimination state setting means can be maintained until power to the game machine is cut off.

According to the game machine BI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BI1 to BI6, since the discrimination state is not changed during the operation of the hall, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that an advantageous discrimination state is set.

In any one of the game machines BI1 to BI7, the game machine comprises operation means operable by an operator, and operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period for treating an operation to the operation means as valid, wherein the determination state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the first determination state based on the fact that an operation of a first operation content is performed on the operation means during the operation valid period, and setting the second determination state based on the fact that an operation of a second operation content is performed. BI8.

According to the game machine BI8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BI1 to BI7, the discrimination state can be set by operating the operation means, so the favorite discrimination state can be easily set. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Different appearance rate of chance zone according to conditions)
A special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and a state setting means capable of setting a specific element relating to the degree of advantage to the player to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage, and the first state is the state in which the specific condition is established rather than the second state. The gaming machine BJ1 is characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the game machine BJ1, since the ease with which the specific condition is established varies depending on the state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BJ2 in the game machine BJ1 is characterized in that the special state setting means sets the special state on the basis that the specific condition is established in a predetermined specific game state.

According to the game machine BJ2, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that a specific condition will be established in a specific game state.

A game machine BJ3 is characterized in that the game machine BJ1 or BJ2 is constructed so as to maintain the game state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied from when the special state is set until the special state is terminated.

According to the game machine BJ3, the degree of advantage can be varied without changing the game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine BJ4 characterized in that the gaming machine BJ3 is constructed so as to maintain the gaming state at the point in time when the specific condition is established even after the special state ends.

According to the game machine BJ4, it is possible to change the degree of advantage before and after the special state without changing the game state.

In any one of the game machines BJ1 to BJ4, it comprises a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result, and the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on the determination result of the determination means being different from the specific determination result as the specific condition. Giki BJ5.

According to the game machine BJ5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BJ1 to BJ4, there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized such that an advantageous special state is set based on the generally disadvantageous deviation determination result.

<Characteristic BK group> (Variable degree of advantage when out)
discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a first discrimination result; game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's degree of advantage is the first degree of advantage, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; a gaming machine BK1 comprising advantage level setting means capable of setting a second advantage level higher than the first advantage level based on a second determination result.

According to the game machine BK1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage is increased without executing the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BK1, the advantage level setting means is configured to be able to set the second advantage level while maintaining the game state in the first game state.

According to the game machine BK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1, a novel game property can be realized in which the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the game state, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In the game machine BK1 or BK2, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set one game state out of a plurality of at least the first game state and a second game state in which the player's degree of advantage is a third degree of advantage lower than the first degree of advantage.

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1 or BK2, the degree of advantage is further improved by obtaining the second determination result in the relatively advantageous first game state, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved when the second determination result is obtained in the first game state.

In any of the game machines BK1 to BK3, the game machine BK4 is characterized by comprising a specific game executing means for executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the privilege game based on the third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in the discrimination of the discrimination means.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BK1 to BK3, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the degree of advantage increases based on the second determination result with the lowest degree of advantage among the determination results, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK4, the determination means comprises a first determination means for executing determination based on the satisfaction of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the second determination means is configured to facilitate the execution of the privilege game of a type having a high degree of advantage for the player when the specific determination result is obtained than the first determination means. The gaming machine BK5 is characterized in that the advantage degree setting means is configured to be able to set the second advantage degree based on the fact that the second judgment result is obtained in the judgment by the first judgment means in the first game state.

According to the game machine BK5, in addition to the effects of the game machines BK1 to BK4, when the second discrimination result of the low advantage degree is obtained in the discrimination of the first discrimination means of the low advantage degree, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the advantage degree is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine includes an operation handle, and a ball is shot into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and on the condition that the ball wins (or passes through) an operation opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to win prizes, and a valuable value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) corresponding to the number of prizes awarded is given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then for confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated under the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information. A gaming machine equipped with a special game state generating means". In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the integrated game machine, a special game advantageous to the player is provided with a variable display means that confirms and displays the identification information after dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information, the identification information starts to change due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (e.g., stop button), or after a predetermined period of time has passed. The game machine is equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a state, uses balls as game media, requires a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display of the identification information, and is constructed so that a large number of balls are put out at the time of the generation of the special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S323 Determination means S326, S331 Dynamic display type determination means S332 Dynamic display means S1756, S1763 Determination information acquisition means S3107 Determination state setting means S10220 Bonus game execution means S5291 Specific effect execution means, effect mode determination means S10222 Game state setting means S11911 Game state setting means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to improve the interest of a player in a game by suggesting to the player that a lottery result is winning in accordance with the contents of the variation performance to be executed.

JP-A-2006-345901

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1,A launching means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the shooting means, an acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied, a storage means capable of storing the specified information acquired by the acquiring means, and a determination means capable of executing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied. means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result; second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can be entered; a first position capable of allowing the game ball to enter the second ball entering means; A displacement control means capable of executing at least a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position. The game machine is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball-entering means, and the game machine is configured to give a predetermined value to the player at least when the game ball enters the first ball-entering means, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determining means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball-entering means can occur..

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1,A launching means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the shooting means, an acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied, a storage means capable of storing the specified information acquired by the acquiring means, and a determination means capable of executing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied. means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result; second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, into which the game ball fired by the launching means can be entered; a first position where the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means; A displacement control means capable of executing at least a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position, wherein the displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and a second condition that can be established in a situation where the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control. The game machine is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball-entering means, and the game machine is configured to give a predetermined value to the player at least when the game ball enters the first ball-entering means..

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general electric winning device flowing into the out port. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the winning balls in the general electric prize winning device flowing into the special electric operation opening. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the V winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device when the reservoir valve is in the reservoir state in the role winning game. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve shifts from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is positioned at the guidance position in the role winning game. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve shifts from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is positioned at the passing position in the role winning game. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the start of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when a display screen is displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol win during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a role winning during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (a) is displayed, (d) ) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of winning a V prize during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of winning a prize during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14 (a) is displayed. , (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of timer addition during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15 (a) is displayed, and (d) is FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the V rush is extended and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed, and (d) is a display shown in FIG. 16(b). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when a screen is displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special screen at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the pending state of each symbol when the display screen shown in b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the middle chance production for winning a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of normal pattern stop during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed, and (d) is a diagram. 18(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a special symbol stop during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the lucky time effect during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19 (a) is displayed, and (d) is FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram showing a state of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first winning random number table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second winning random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time saving table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various action scenario tables in the first embodiment, and FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of a first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the configuration of an operation scenario table for a normal pattern in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of a scenario for a normal normal pattern in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure per scenario for time saving in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game in the normal state in the first embodiment when the game per normal pattern is executed. (a) ~ (i) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the normal figure per game is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a special electric starting gate winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a winning control process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing stop-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a character winning related process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation update process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4(a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4A is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won the general electric prize winning device can flow down to the second special electric operation opening. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a state in which a normal figure long winning game and a role winning game are performed in duplicate during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. FIG. 90(c) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than the predetermined period, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is longer than the predetermined period, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed. FIG. 91(d) is a schematic diagram showing a status of holding a symbol, and FIG. 91(d) is a schematic diagram showing a status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(b) is displayed. (a), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the termination conditions of the accessory winning game executed during the normal figure long winning in the second embodiment are changed. (a), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the ending conditions of the game per accessory executed during the normal pattern long variation in the second embodiment are different. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the general figure per type selection table in the second embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general figure fluctuation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various action scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second role-per-accessory action scenario table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an operation scenario table per normal diagram in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per normal diagram for time reduction in the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 3 scenarios per normal figure for time saving in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting entrance prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure related processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a character winning related process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the role winning start processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure residual variation suggestion process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure related time update processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. (a) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when entering the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment, and (b) and (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the jackpot is discarded at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the jackpot is interrupted at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting entrance prize-winning process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation update process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically about the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of the main-control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 deviating stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passage processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the modification, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general electric winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation stop processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop-related processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the end condition selection screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after selection of the end condition displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 6 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a special electric starting gate winning process 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing switching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing end condition setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 6 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing termination condition related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is a front view showing typically game board 13 of pachinko machine 10 in a 7th embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial perspective views schematically showing the structure of the right electric accessory according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing lid of the right electric accessory in the seventh embodiment; (a), (b) is the elements on larger scale which showed typically a part of right side area|region in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the variable probability state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of shifting from the variable probability state to the latent probability state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the second special symbol variation is not started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the second special symbol variation is started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the RUSH game performed during the latency state displayed on the 3rd design display device 81 in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the special figure reserved ball is changed during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the special figure reserved ball becomes a specific number during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode suggesting the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which suggests the completion|finish of the super RUSH game displayed on the 3rd design display device 81 in 7th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the small winning random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of a jackpot type selection table that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 7 normal tables of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 7 tables for probability variation that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the 7 tables for probability that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has, and (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table that the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the seventh embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop-related processing 7 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing preparation state setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure discarding setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ceiling effect setting processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting processing during probability variation performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a setting process during RUSH 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment; (a) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning device in the modification of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the modification of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the transition diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table 202ga performed by the main controller 110 in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection 8 table that the ROM of the main controller in the eighth embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 8 table of the ROM of the main controller in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 8-table for latent confirmation that the ROM of the main controller in the eighth embodiment has; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 8 table which ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation stop processing 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent certainty state displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 9 table which ROM of the main-control apparatus in 9th Embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 9 table that the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment has, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table that the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an icon display number selection table possessed by the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the continuous effect selection table possessed by the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a ready state setting process 9 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting processing 9 in RUSH performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when reach is established in the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during normal per-normal fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the normal pattern winning in the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed at the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment is set. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation performance executed in the state where the special figure 2 suspension displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not acquired in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol variation is performed in a state where the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol variation is performed in a state where the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the variable jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. There is, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the game flow in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the game flow in the case of the reach fluctuation pattern in the tenth embodiment. (a) to (c) are timing charts showing the flow of effects executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table possessed by the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal winning random number 10 table possessed by the ROM of the main controller in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 10 table in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table in the tenth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 10 table in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal 10 table in the tenth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable / time saving 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table that the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment has. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the effect selection table during probability variation that the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the tenth embodiment has. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 10 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 10 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a winning process 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the normal figure related process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 10 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for changing settings in the eleventh embodiment, and (e) to (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for setting confirmation in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the transition of an effect mode when the setting change state is ended and the normal game is possible in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 11 table in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an 11 table for confirmation in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for RAM clearing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a setting suggestion effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation|variation process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing game state update processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation|variation process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 11 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the continuous loss effect displayed on the third symbol display device when the first special symbol lottery is lost in the latent state in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the continuous loss effect is executed and the loss cannot be continued until the chance zone is set in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost three times in a row during the latent certainty state. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 12 table in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a 12-table for confirmation in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation stop processing 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 12 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an effect setting process when out, which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the thirteenth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the lottery device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device with both the ball discharge door and the ball stopper closed in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the distribution rotary body in 13th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the time-dependent change of the state of each part at the time of small hit election in 13th Embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the temporal change in the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotator immediately after the chance zone ends in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the transition of the game after the chance zone ends in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the charge time effect displayed on the third symbol display device when the second special symbol lottery is lost in the time saving state in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the number of reserved balls increases due to game balls entering the second ball entrance during execution of the charge time effect in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V winning table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 13 table for time saving in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 13 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 13th Embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation unit according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the operation unit in a state where the standing accessory operates to the overhanging position in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the operation unit in a state in which the tilting accessory operates to the overhanging position in the fourteenth embodiment; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the winning rate suggesting effect in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a winning rate in which setting 6 is determined is notified in the winning rate suggesting effect in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode when a setting suggesting effect corresponding to the variation type of the high set fixed super reach is executed in the 14th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special 1 winning table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special 2 winning table in the 14th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the left-handed state table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of distribution of the hit random number in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for right-handed hitting states in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table in 14th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of an audio ramp control device according to a fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the winning rate suggesting effect lottery table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the corresponding relationship between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the variable probability state of the special symbol in the fourteenth embodiment and the winning rate within 100 games for each set value. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a presentation type selection table in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a power return operation table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a role product operation setting table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start process 14 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 14 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing origin return processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 14 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing character product control processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 14 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal state setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 14 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first winning random number 15 table in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a random number range setting table in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 15 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing 15 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the ready-to-win symbol selection effect is executed in the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the ready-to-win pattern prefetch effect is executed in the modification of the fourteenth embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIGS. 3 to 5 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a general electrical winning device 640 provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and FIGS. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 is provided with a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, a shooting rail (not shown) that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening and closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or a ready-to-win performance is performed, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit or blinked by the lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs to notify that the big win is in progress or the reach just before the big win is in progress. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a certificate stamp or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) in front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation part 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. A ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball rental operation section 40, but in this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball rental operation section 40 so that the parts configuration may be shared. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 for storing balls that cannot be fully stored in the upper tray 17 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation, the ball is shot with the strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit in front of the game board 13 with the distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extraction lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened, and the ball is naturally dropped and discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, special figure entrances 64 and 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. A general ball entrance 63, a special figure ball entrance 64, a general electrical winning device 640, a V winning device 65, a variable winning device 650, and a variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that a game area is formed in front of the game board 13 where the game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (an area in which winning holes are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the ball, and the ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the central part side while the momentum is attenuated.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS) so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.例文帳に追加

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the special symbol entrance 64 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure lottery) executed when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol is used, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to each special symbol type.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the game states (for example, normal state, time-saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a lighting state, indicates whether or not special symbols (first symbols) are fluctuating (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result) by a lighting state, and whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a big win that is advantageous to the player or a symbol that corresponds to a big win that is disadvantageous to the player. The number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and a combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various game states are notified by combinations of the light emitting colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify various game states.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, an open state in which balls can be easily won in a specific prize winning port 650a of a variable prize winning device 650 is made, and a game capable of acquiring many prize balls in a short period of time is executed by allowing balls to enter the specific prize winning port 650a. This jackpot game is executed (in some cases) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display), and has an opening period (for example, 1 second) for a predetermined time (a period during which a closed state is set to make it difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning port 650a of the variable prize winning device 650), a round game period for which the open state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A jackpot game period consisting of an interval period in which a state is set and an ending period in which a closed state for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is set after the end of the last round game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern showing the winning of the big win is stopped and displayed (determined display), it is possible to prepare for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction in accordance with the timing when the specific winning port 650a is opened during the big win game, so that the big win game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

By setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game, so that preparations can be made for shooting balls in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed after the jackpot game is finished, so that the game can be switched smoothly.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery may be set to a different length depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win or the type of the jackpot won. ) is set to be longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of another jackpot game, and during the ending period, a performance for preliminarily guiding the game contents to be executed after the jackpot game is finished to the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a big win is won in which the game contents at the time of winning the big win and the game contents to be executed after the end of the big win game are the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the big win may be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of the other big win games. This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without actually discriminating between the game contents at the time of winning the big win and the game contents to be executed after the completion of the big win game, for example, the game state to be set after the end of the big win game may be defined in advance based on the type of the winning big win and the game state at the time of winning the big win, and the ending period of each big win game may be set in advance according to the defined contents.

Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game to be executed by the player when the game state is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is configured to be different from the game to be executed by the player when the game state is the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). It is constructed so as to be advantageous to the player (make it easier to execute a jackpot game).

That is, the content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game may be defined so that the ending period of the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won in a normal state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win is longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state is already set and the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game is finished. As a result, the ending period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game according to the contents defined in advance.

It should be noted that the period other than the ending period may be defined in advance according to the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the opening period and the interval period may be changed. Further, even if the type of the jackpot won is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be varied according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Thus, the player can be interested not only in which jackpot type the jackpot has been won (lottery result of special symbols), but also about the game state when the jackpot is won, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, the kind of the big win is determined. A detailed description will be given later, but as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is given. 4R time saving jackpot is given. Then, there is prepared a time-saving jackpot (time-saving number of times: 15 times) in which the time-saving state continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed 15 times without winning the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, if a special symbol lottery does not win a big win, it is determined as a loss, and the player is not given a privilege. A first pattern display device 37 not only shows whether or not the result of lottery is a big win (whether it is a small win) as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also shows a pattern corresponding to the type of the big win when it is a big win.

In this embodiment, the game state is configured to be set to either the "normal state" or the "time saving state". The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state), and the time saving state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a high probability (300/1000). (Hereinafter, it is called a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols).

Here, the ``4R jackpot (four time reductions)'' is a jackpot that can shift to a time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state) after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 650 is opened for four rounds), and the time saving state with four times of time saving is set after the jackpot game ends.

The ``4R jackpot (time saving 15 times)'' is a jackpot capable of shifting to a time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state) after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), and the time saving state with the number of times of time saving 15 times is set after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, after the time-saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving mentioned above indicates the time-saving end condition. In other words, the number of times of time reduction of 4 times means that the time reduction end condition is satisfied when the lottery of special symbols is executed 4 times (4th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set, and the number of times of time reduction of 15 times means that the lottery of special symbols is executed 15 times (the 15th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set. are

That is, the ``4R jackpot (four times of time reduction)'' is a jackpot type in which time-saving end conditions are defined more easily than the ``4R jackpot (five times of time reduction)''.

In the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition (time saving number of times) regarding the number of special symbol lotteries during the time saving state is defined, but other configurations may be used as the time saving end condition. , 100 seconds), or the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63a) during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5).

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. In the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a are provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with the entrance of the ball (start winning) to the special symbol entrance 64 as a trigger, and a second symbol display device composed of an LED that variably displays the normal symbol (second symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. (not shown) are provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21), so that, for example, three pattern rows of left, middle and right are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row so that the third pattern is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21) on the first symbol display device 37, while the first symbol display device 37 performs decorative display according to the display. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time every time the ball passes through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a winning game (general symbol winning game) in which an electric accessory 640a attached to the general electric prize winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment).

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern is always constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the normal pattern lottery and the probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state). In a pachinko machine 10 constructed in such a manner that the time required for variable display of normal patterns (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer in the normal state than in the time reduction state in order to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern winning game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) is difficult to be executed, and the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern low probability state) is easily executed. When the game state shifts to (normal pattern high probability state), it is possible to suppress the setting of a long period in which the normal pattern lottery is not executed in the time reduction state, even though the time reduction state is set, by shifting to the time reduction state during the execution of the normal pattern variation (ordinary pattern winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time reduction state) executed in the normal state.

In this embodiment, the game contents (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the normal pattern winning game to be executed are different between the normal state and the time saving state without changing the variation time of the normal pattern. Specifically, the regular pattern winning game executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the regular pattern winning game executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643. Specifically, if the normal state is set, if the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the electricity actor 640A is closed period), the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set (gaming per normal map), and if the time saving is set, the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set (electric role. After 640A closing period), a gaming for a 3 -second opening period (gaming per time saved) is performed.

In this way, by executing the normal pattern winning game in which the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is changed according to the probability state of the normal pattern, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to win in the normal electric prize winning device 640 during the normal pattern winning game in the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) than in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state).

Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general figure per game in the normal state and the time saving state is configured to enter the special electric operation port 643 at a different rate. Concretely, it is configured such that the ball won in the general electric winning device 640 during the normal electric winning game executed in the normal state is more likely to enter the special electric operation opening 643 than the ball winning in the ordinary electric winning device 640 during the normal electric winning winning game. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ordinary electric prize winning device 640, and even when the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 is won, the ball is difficult to enter the special electric prize winning device 643. I can.

That is, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the shot ball enters the special electric activation opening 643, the state of allowing the ball to enter the special electric activation opening 643 and the state of restricting it are varied according to the set game state. Therefore, the ease with which the ball can enter the special electric activation opening 643 can be reliably varied according to the set game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the game method advantageous to the player is the same (left-handed game) during the game state in which the normal state is set and in the game state in which the time-saving state is set. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, a normal symbol lottery opportunity is established even in the normal state (a ball passes through the through gate 67), and a normal symbol lottery is executed. As a result of the normal pattern lottery, when the winning is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball fired by the left-handed hitting game can reach is controlled to be opened, so there is a possibility that the ball will win the normal electric winning device 640 during the execution of the normal normal winning game which is more difficult than the time-saving normal winning game.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that even if a ball wins a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 during a general pattern winning game executed in a normal state, the prize ball hardly enters the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a structure for executing a game by the same game method in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) and the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), even if the ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal state, the ball can be prevented from entering the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the same variation time (3 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of normal symbols in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). It may be configured to shorten the fluctuation time. In addition, in the normal symbol high probability state (normal symbol high probability), if other methods such as increasing the normal symbol winning probability, increasing the opening time and opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit are used to make the normal symbol high probability state a state where the ball is more likely to enter the general electrical winning device 640 than the normal symbol low probability state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter than the normal state during normal pattern high probability, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one winning may be made constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is constructed so that most (approximately 100%) of the balls launched to the game board flowing down the left area of the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, a variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of ``O'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of ``x'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment, or may be performed using part of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 due to the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the balls may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.例文帳に追加

Next, the configuration of the general electrical winning device 640 that is in the open state when winning the normal symbol lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the electric prize winning device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and an electric accessory 640a that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is harder to win than the open state is attached to a position where a ball flowing down reaches the left side area (area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view) of the game area formed on the game board 13. . In this embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the general electric prize winning device 640 at a rate of about 3 balls (if the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the general electric prize device 640 reaches a winning position).

The electric accessory 640a is normally maintained in a closed state, and when winning in a normal pattern lottery, a normal figure winning game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to an open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern lottery wins and the normal pattern winning game is executed, so that the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be able to provide the player with a state in which the ball is likely to win.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, it is possible to establish a normal pattern lottery opportunity (to enable the ball to pass through the through gate 67), and to make it possible to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 that is open when the ball is won in the normal pattern lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that a special pattern lottery opportunity can also be established by a left-handed game. In addition, a variable prize winning device 650 which is variably operated by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols is also arranged at a position where a ball shot by a left-handed game can win a prize.

With this configuration, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game) regardless of the game state, so that the player can smoothly play the game without having to change the game method.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 and the flow of winning balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 into the out port 644, and FIG.

In this embodiment, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal pattern lottery is executed, and when winning is won in the normal pattern lottery, a normal pattern winning game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. Then, when the electric accessary 640a is changed to the open state in this normal game, the ball enters the normal electric prize winning device 640 in a state where it can win.

As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the electric prize winning device 640 . This second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state that can guide the ball that has flowed into the general electric winning prize device 640 and flowed down the first flow path 641 a into the second flow path 641 b that communicates with the special electric operation port 643, and a second state that can guide it to the third flow path 641 c that communicates with the out port 644. In addition, the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of winning balls to the general electric prize winning device 640 in one general game is configured to be measurable. Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in one general pattern per game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the general pattern per game is configured to end at that point. In this embodiment, prize balls (four pieces) are paid out when the balls enter the special electric activation port 643, and prize balls are not paid out when the balls enter the out port 644.

The general electric prize winning device 640 has a cover body formed of transparent acrylic resin so that the player can visually recognize the flow of balls in the general electric prize winning device 640 , and the cover body is attached to the game board 13 . Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball inside the electric prize winning device 640, the player can enjoy the behavior of the winning ball in the electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

The electric accessory 640a provided in the electric prize winning device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition 640k2 as a base for rotation, and is configured to be variable between a closed state (see FIG. 3) in which the ball is difficult to enter the ordinary electric prize device 640 and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball is more likely to enter the electric prize winning device 640 than in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is configured to be housed in the general electric prize winning device 640. Specifically, the tip of the first partition 640k1 is configured to protrude to the left (left in FIG. 3) of the vertical line of the second partition 640k2. are doing. By configuring in this way, the electric accessory 640a in the closed state can be made difficult to come into contact with the ball fired in the left-handed game, so that the electric accessory 640a can be prevented from being damaged.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the ball winning in the general electric winning device 640 wins the special electric operation opening 643 according to the game state set at the time when the game per normal is executed. Specifically, by varying the period (opening period per normal pattern) from when the normal pattern per game is executed until the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened in a predetermined opening pattern (normal per pattern opening period), the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal pattern per game executed during the normal state is configured to be less likely to enter the special electric operation port 643 than the ball won in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general pattern per game executed during the time reduction state.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the game is played in the same game method (left-handed game) in the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the balls from winning the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state is configured to execute the normal pattern winning game in which the ball is less likely to enter the general electric prize winning device 640 than the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state. Also with this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state. In other words, in the present embodiment, in addition to measures to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when a ball wins the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state, there is a measure for making it more difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operation opening 643 than when the ball wins the general electric prize device 640 during the time saving state. In this way, by providing a configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, it is possible to suppress it more reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the ball flow when the ball wins in the general electrical winning device 640 in the general pattern winning game executed when the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state winning game. In this embodiment, in order not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method, it is configured so that the game can always be executed in the left-handed game. Therefore, even in the normal state of the low probability state of the normal pattern, there is a possibility that the normal pattern lottery opportunity is established (the ball passes to the through gate 67) and the ball wins in the normal electric prize winning device 640 when the normal pattern winning game is executed.

That is, the normal state (low-probability state of normal symbols) is a game state in which it is difficult for balls to enter the general electric winning device 640 compared to the short-time state (high-probability state of normal symbols) in which it is easy for the ball to enter the electric winning device 640. However, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the short-time state. I could have won a prize.

As described above, the general electric winning device 640 is provided with the special electric activation opening 643 that triggers the execution of the winning game (accessory winning game) that causes the V winning device 65 to open.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ratio of balls winning the general electric prize device 640 during the normal state to the special electric operation opening 643 and the ratio of the balls winning the general electric prize device 640 during the time saving state to the special electric operation opening 643 are configured to be different. Specifically, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state, the period from when the normal pattern per game is started to when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (first opened state) is set longer than when the normal pattern per game is executed in the time saving state. It is configured so that a chisel ball can win a prize in a general electric prize winning device 640. - 特許庁

That is, as shown in FIG. 4, when a ball enters the normal electric prize winning device 640 during a normal game that is executed in the normal state, the ball flows down the first flow path 641a designed to have a flow period of about 0.5 seconds, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 positioned in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (After reaching the second movable valve 642, the ball enters the out port 644. (Designed to have a period of about 0.3 seconds). By constructing in this way, even if a ball wins in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643, so that it is possible to prevent the excessively advantageous game from being provided to the player who is playing the game in the normal state.

Also, in order to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state, there is no need to use a special configuration for preventing the ball from winning the general electric prize winning device 640 by the general pattern winning game executed during the normal state, so the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, in the normal game that is executed in the normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the normal game) is earlier than the timing of opening the electric accessory 640a (4.1 seconds after the start of the normal game). It is configured so that the ball does not reach the second movable valve 642 while it is moving. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the second movable valve 642 in variable operation from coming into contact with the winning ball of the ordinary electric prize winning device 640, resulting in clogging of balls in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 and failure of the second movable valve 642.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the out opening 644, no prize balls are paid out. 0) may be paid out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of normal symbols according to the game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, more prize balls than in the time-saving state are given to the player as a privilege, and when the time-saving state is set, in addition to the fewer prize balls than in the normal state, the player can be given a role-winning game which is not (hardly) given in the normal state as a privilege. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the normal symbols.

Also, the same number of prize balls (four pieces) may be paid out when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 and when the ball enters the out opening 644. In this case, it is preferable to make it difficult to understand whether the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 has entered the special electric operation opening 643 or the out opening 644. As a result, the player cannot grasp which ball entrance (the special electric operation opening 643 and the out opening 644) into which the ball is entered according to the number of paid-out prize balls, so that after the ball is entered into the general electric prize winning device 640, the performance can be executed to make the player think that whether or not the winning game (role winning game) for opening the V prize winning device 65 is executed is decided by lottery, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, in this case, when the ball detection sensor 640s detects the ball, it is preferable to put out the prize balls (four pieces), whereby the prize balls given to the player based on the winning of the ball to the electric prize winning device 640 can be quickly paid out to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the tip side of the first partition 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel to form a spherical flow path therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state receives the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from rebounding outside the electric prize winning device 640 due to the impact.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the ball flow when the ball wins in the general electrical winning device 640 in the general figure per game executed when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the balls that have won the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general figure per game during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the normal pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, the period from the start of the normal pattern per game to the opening state (first open state) of the electric role product 640a is set shorter than the normal pattern per game performed during the normal state. a becomes open.

Therefore, when the winning ball of the ordinary electric prize device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball enters the ordinary electric prize winning device 640), the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state, so it flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flowing period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds), and the special electric operation port 643. enter the ball. Then, when the entry of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 is detected by a detecting means (proximity sensor) (not shown), the V prize winning device 65 is opened, and a prize winning game is started.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state, the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable to a position where the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is less likely to come into contact with the second movable valve 642. As a result, frequent contact between the ball and the second movable valve 642 and failure of the second movable valve 642 can be suppressed. Although the detailed description will be described later, when the normal pattern winning game is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state 0.1 seconds after the normal pattern winning game is started, and the normal electric winning device 640 is in a state where the ball can win. Therefore, the shortest period from the execution of the normal per game to the arrival of the ball at the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (0.1 seconds from the start of the normal per game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a, and 0.5 seconds until the ball that has won the general electric prize device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642).

The second movable 642 is variably operated at the same time as the normal per game is started, and the variable operation period (period required to vary from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state)) is configured to be 0.1 second. In addition, since the second movable valve 642 is variably operated one second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the normal game, the second movable valve 642 is variably operated when a period (1 second) twice the period (0.5 seconds) until the winning ball of the electric prize device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642 immediately before the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to contact the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation even in the normal game per game executed during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. A V winning device 65 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (on the left side in the view of FIG. 2) so that the ball that is shot in the left-handed game and flows down the left side area can win. Here, the specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. In this embodiment, when a ball enters a special electric operation opening 643 provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, the V prize winning device 65 is opened and a prize winning game is executed. And it is configured so that a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed by winning a ball in a V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65 .

In other words, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution opportunity of the big win game (special big win game) established when the big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, there is the execution opportunity of the big win game (V big win game) established when the ball wins in a specific winning opening (V winning opening 165). In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening/closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can easily win in the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which the ball is less likely to win than in the open state. The opening/closing door 65a is provided at a position (see FIG. 2) where balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a role winning game is executed.

In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which the balls that have passed through the opening/closing door 65a in the open state flow down is formed in the space between the first partition wall 65k1 and the second partition wall 65k2. A storage part capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a, and the ball that first wins the prize in the V winning device 65 during the role-winning game is temporarily stored in the storage part. Further, a storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a so as to be able to detect that the balls are stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b, and based on the detection of the ball by the ball detection sensor 65s2, the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 is measured during the accessory winning game, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. Thus, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at the position where the winning ball of the V winning device 65 flows down immediately afterward, it is possible to suppress the situation in which more than a prescribed number of balls win the V winning device 65, and to immediately give the player the prize balls during the game per the role.

A second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65c is configured so that the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 65b do not directly flow into the second flow path 65c, but that the subsequent balls flowing down the first flow path 65b contact the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a and are guided to the second flow path 65c while the balls are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entrance for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball flows down the second flow path 65c (flowing period of 0.1 second), and the ball entering the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a released state in which balls are less likely to be stored than in the storage state, according to the progress of the role winning game (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the role winning game is executed). When the reservoir valve 66a is in the released state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65b or the ball that has been stored in the reservoir of the reservoir valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm, which is formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3.

A first movable valve 66b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b is configured to move in a predetermined movable pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, between a guiding position (protruding position) capable of receiving the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d and a passing position (recessed position) unable to receive the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d. Specifically, it is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d driven and controlled by the main controller 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b moves to the passage position (position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 66b retreats from the V winning device 65, and the first movable valve solenoid 209 moves. When d is set to OFF (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b is configured to move to a guiding position protruding into the V winning device 65 (a position protruding from the game board 13).

The first movable valve 66b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured such that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d with the first movable valve 66b at the guiding position (protruding position) (falling period of 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b toward the fourth flow path 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and a ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 65e (falling period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. The second out port 163b is, like the first out port 163a described above, a ball entry port for discharging the ball that has entered the pachinko machine 10 to the outside.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passage position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the ball (flowing period of 0.2 seconds) flowing down the third flow path 65d flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flowing period of 0.1 second). A V winning port 165 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning hole 165 is a winning hole which can be a trigger for executing a big winning game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 while the big winning game is not being executed, the big winning game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first outlet 163a and a second outlet 163b. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the balls that have won the V winning device 65 when the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state from flowing into the flow paths (the third flow path 65d, the fourth flow path 65e, and the fifth flow path 65f) through which the balls can pass when the reservoir valve 66a is in the released state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the first out port 163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e may be communicated, the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, and the ball flowing down the second flow path 65c may enter the second out port 163b. In this case, the third partition wall 65k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. 6, should be inclined from the upper end side to the lower end side in the lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65c from flowing into the fifth flow path 65f.

Thus, in the present embodiment, there are two opportunities for executing the big winning game, that is, the big winning game is executed when the big winning is won by lottery of the special symbols, and the big winning game is executed when the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game. Hereinafter, when the jackpot games are described by classifying execution opportunities, the jackpot game executed when the player enters the V winning port 165 will also be referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 65 of the present embodiment is configured such that when a winning game is executed, the ball enters an open state in which the ball can win a prize, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow passage 65d. configured to decide.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the first movable valve 66b is constantly moved in a movable pattern in which the time at the guidance position (the time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 165) is 5 seconds, and the time at the passing position (the time during which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165) is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, even if a plurality of balls are awarded to the V winning device 65 in one role winning game, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one, so that when the role winning game is executed 11 times, one big winning game is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the contents of the winning ball flow in the V winning device 65 during execution of the accessory winning game will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 7, the ball flow in the first half period (period in which the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state) of the winning game will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the V winning device 65 when the reservoir valve 66a is in the reservoir state in the role winning game. Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operationally controlled so as to be in a storage state from when the accessory winning game is executed until the V winning device 65 is closed. When a plurality of balls enter the V winning device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the ball P1 that wins first is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and the ball P2 that wins second comes in contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, all of the winning balls (for example, the balls P2) other than the balls P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a are configured to enter the out port 163a. In addition, since the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d can be reliably reduced to one in one accessory game.

By constructing in this way, since the easiness of winning the ball to the V winning opening 165 is not changed according to the timing of winning the ball to the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game and the number of winning prizes, all the players can be provided with a fair game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the content of the ball flow (second half period of the game per role) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening/closing door 65a is closed and new balls cannot enter the V winning device 65, when the storage valve 66a shifts to the released state (indicated by the dotted line in the figure), the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the guiding position, so the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, flows down the fourth flow path 65e, and enters the second out port 163b.

On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the ball flow when the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passage position will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 9, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b and the first movable valve 66b is positioned at the passing position, the ball flows down the fifth flow path 66f and enters the V prize opening 165.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a special figure ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the special figure entrance 64, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the special figure entrance switch, a big win lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the ball can enter the special figure entrance 64 at a rate of 1 ball in about 15 balls out of the balls fired by the left-handed game.

As shown in FIG. 10, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port for communication with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover that are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is cut into the box base side and the box cover side when the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102 or when the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 positioned at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). are The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device.

Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The RAM 203 has a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and the like, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected with the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol reservation lamp. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed, a specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening and closing door for changing the opening state and the closing state of the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650, a V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening and closing door of the V winning device 65, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65. A first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the first movable valve 66b provided, a second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the electric prize winning device 640, and other solenoids 209z for driving other various devices are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205.

Also, to the input/output port 205, various switches 208 comprising a group of switches (not shown) (switches for detecting that a ball has entered each ball entrance, a switch for detecting that a ball is positioned at a specific position, etc.) and a later-described RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotating position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 by the command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance role product (not shown), a voice output command is set for causing the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22, or a lamp output command is set for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226. Also, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in correspondence with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display such as the variation effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 10). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19. FIG. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three upper, middle, and lower pattern rows (L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). Decorative patterns that fluctuate corresponding to the variable display of the third pattern (special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are composed of 10 types of main patterns to which identification information imitating numerals '0' to '9' is attached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to identification information imitating numerals. In this way, by using a display mode corresponding to each piece of identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled vertically for variable display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and in a state where each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third symbols are stopped on the effective line L1 in a combination of big winning symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variability display area of the third symbol may be made smaller, or the variability display area may be moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern is variably displayed (dynamically displayed), but without being limited to this, the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the normal pattern may be variably displayed (dynamically displayed). In this case, whether the variable display of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special pattern or the variation of the normal pattern may be notified in an incomprehensible manner to the player. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to perform both the variable display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbols and the variation display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols, the object of the third symbol may be switched according to the game content (game state) to be executed, for example, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbols is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols is executed during the time saving state. It may be configured to execute a variable display of patterns. In this case, it is preferable to variably display the third symbol corresponding to the symbol type in which a lottery advantageous to the player (a lottery on the side where the player pays more attention to the lottery result) is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying symbol. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the lower two-thirds being a main display area Dm for variably displaying the third pattern, and the other upper one-third being a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and a third pattern is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left pattern row Z1→right pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2 in each game. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. Thus, by displaying the stopped third pattern for a certain period (1 second or more), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether the combination of the third patterns corresponds to the big win (whether the lottery result of the special symbols is the big win or not). Further, when the combination of the big win patterns (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main patterns) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third pattern is stopped, the big win is decided, the big win game is started, and the big win animation (opening presentation) is displayed.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the loss and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display (determined display) for 1 second. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 even though the player shoots the game ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and most of the cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) are caused by the fact that the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player quits the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) for which variation has not been executed among the game balls that have entered the special symbol entrance 64 and the through gate 67, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears to perform an announcement effect.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to four, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Also, when the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to one time, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the reserved ball number is four balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the special ball entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the through gate 67. In the example of FIG. 11(b), four reserved ball number patterns are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, while no reserved ball number patterns are displayed in the right half, so there are four reserved balls with special patterns, but there are no reserved balls with normal patterns.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is configured to be suspended up to 1 time. However, the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors or lighting patterns) corresponding to the reserved ball number. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Also, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm, but the display area may be formed in a manner other than this. For example, the sub-display area Ds may be formed below the main display area Dm. Also, in this case, it is preferable to variably form the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the set game state. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game has changed to a different game state just by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, in a state in which the player is forced to pay attention to the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which the variable display of the third pattern indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big win is highly expected, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be reduced or the sub-display area Ds may be hidden.

<Regarding the production content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery (special pattern lottery), a time saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends. This time saving state is continued until the drawing of special patterns reaches a prescribed number of times (until a predetermined end condition of the time saving state is satisfied), and when the drawing of special patterns is executed a prescribed number of times, the end condition of the time saving state is established and a normal state is set.

The time-saving state is a state in which a normal pattern high probability state is set, and compared with the case where the game state is the normal state, it is constituted so as to easily set an open state in which a ball can enter a normal electric prize winning device 640 by a normal pattern winning game.

Then, when the win of the normal pattern is won and the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 in the electric prize winning device 640, the prize winning game is executed, and the game for winning the ball in the V winning prize opening 165 provided in the V winning prize device 65 is executed.

Here, in this embodiment, a game ball shot aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. In the normal pattern lottery executed by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67, when the time-saving state is set, it is designed to be won with a probability of 3/10, and when the normal pattern lottery is won, the normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened is executed.

The normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a period (3 seconds) during which most of the balls (approximately 100%) can be awarded to the general electric prize winning device 640 by continuously executing the left-handed hitting game.

Further, in the general figure winning game executed during the time saving state, most of the balls winning the general electric prize winning device 640 are configured to enter the special electric operation opening 643, and when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the accessory winning game is executed. Then, the V winning device 65 is opened by executing the role winning game, the balls winning the V winning device 65 enter the V winning port 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed with the winning of the ball to the V winning port 165 as a trigger.

That is, during the time-saving state, it is easier to execute a game (special electric game) aiming for a big win by entering a game ball into a V winning opening 165 (V prize) rather than executing a game (special game) aiming for a big win in a lottery of special symbols, so that the player executes the game while desiring V winning (V big win game) by the role winning game in the special electric game.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to win the ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 as a special electric game (to pass the ball through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery), it is necessary to aim at the left area of the game board 13 and shoot the ball. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the ball also enters the special figure entrance 64, so both a special figure game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn) and a special electric game (a game in which a normal symbol is drawn) are executed during the time saving state.

The time saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special electric game is configured to continue until the time until the special symbol lottery executed by the special electric game reaches the specified number of times (that is, the special symbol fluctuation time for the specified number of times) has passed. Execution of the technique is a basic game method during the time saving state in this embodiment.

Various effects are executed in the third symbol display device 81 in order to convey the state of the time-saving game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, but when the jackpot game is executed and the jackpot ends, the game state is shifted to a V rush mode for indicating that the game state is a time saving state which is advantageous to the player, and the fact that the time saving state has been set is notified. Then, various effects during the V rush will be explained. Hereinafter, the time saving state is referred to as "V rush" for simplification of explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 12(a), the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (game). When the final round of the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the characters ``V rush will start after the jackpot ends!!'' are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can easily understand that the transition to the V rush mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment ``Get 40 seconds of V rush period'' with a short remaining time mode 801 of ``40 seconds'' for indicating the duration of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed.

Here, the display contents of the remaining short time mode 801 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, as the end condition of the time saving state, the end condition that is established when the number of special symbol lottery times reaches the specified number of times (for example, 4 times) is set. Therefore, the time-saving state is continued until the time until the special symbol lottery reaches the prescribed number of times (that is, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbols for the prescribed number of times) elapses. In the remaining short time mode 801, a display mode showing the total time obtained by totaling the fluctuation time of the special symbols until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is displayed.

Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). FIG. 12(c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories of special symbols and a maximum of one reserved memory of ordinary symbols are configured to be memorizable. In FIG. 12(c), the status of each symbol is explained using a running special figure th0 for explaining the situation of the special symbol variation being executed, a special figure first reservation th1 to special figure fourth reservation th4 for explaining the winning information of the special symbols being held and stored, a normal figure being executed fh0 for explaining the status of the normal symbol variation being carried out, and a general figure first holding fh1 for explaining the winning information of the normal symbols being held and stored. are doing.

FIG. 12(c) is a state in which four reserves of a special symbol in which a variation pattern of 10 seconds is set are accumulated in the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure fourth reservation th4. That is, 40 seconds, which is a value obtained by adding up the fluctuation time for four times of the special symbol lottery, is set for the period of the time-saving state this time. Therefore, characters of ``40 seconds'' are displayed in the short remaining time display mode 801 for indicating the continuation period of the game state which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to easily inform how long the V rush period continues.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed in a specific number of seconds, as shown in the short remaining time display mode 801. However, the remaining period of the duration may be notified to the player using an indicator or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the short remaining time mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of "40 seconds" calculated as the V rush duration. ) may be additionally notified.

In this case, for example, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the value obtained by summing the fluctuation time of the special symbols corresponding to 3 special symbol reservations (special symbol reservations) among the 4 special symbol reservations that have already been acquired (special figure reservations), that is, in the case of FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in this embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by summing up the fluctuation times of the special symbol lottery executed a plurality of times until the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current special figure pending number, the display mode for showing the special figure pending number is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the value of the remaining short time mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush is the total value of the variable times corresponding to how many special figure reservations. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of each special symbol lottery.

Therefore, for example, even in a pachinko machine 10 in which different variation patterns of variation time are set depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or a loss, the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 can prevent the player from grasping in advance the lottery result of the special symbol reservation (whether or not the winning information corresponding to the big win is included in the special symbol reservation).

Further, for example, a pachinko machine 10 configured to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and configured to select any variation pattern of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 30 seconds when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, wherein the special figure first reservation th1 is "10 seconds", the special figure second reservation th2 is "30 seconds", the special figure third reservation th3 is "20 seconds", When the special figure 4th hold th4 is "10 seconds", it is preferable to display "50 seconds" as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. By constructing in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the fact that the period is shorter than '90 seconds' (total value of the variation time for four special symbol reservations) which is the duration of the V rush, and that the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state wins a big win (the first special symbol lottery wins a big win and the variation time is set to 50 seconds).

That is, when displaying only a part of the period instead of the entire period in which the V rush continues, in addition to the configuration of displaying the value corresponding to the variable time (50 seconds) set when the jackpot is won as described above, for example, the remaining short time mode 801 may be displayed in a display mode of "60 seconds" that makes the player think that the first time reduction is a loss variation (variation time of 10 seconds) and the second time reduction is a big win variation (variation time of 50 seconds). In other words, a value which is smaller than the value indicating the actual duration of the V rush and which is calculated when combining at least the variation time that can be selected for the jackpot variation and the variation time that can be selected for the loss variation should be displayed.

In this embodiment, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to display the acquired special figure pending number, but without being limited to this, a display mode for indicating the special figure pending number may be displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently obtained special figure reservation number by displaying the display form for showing the special figure reservation number in a display form in which the contents are difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in which the ending period of the jackpot ends and the V-rush starts, and FIG. 12(d) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) is displayed. That is, FIG. 12(b) shows the display screen at the time when the special figure hold indicated by the special figure first hold th1 at the end of the jackpot starts to change, and the special figure hold that was the special figure first hold th1 at the time of the jackpot ending is shifted to the special figure th0 during execution, and the special figure second hold th2 is the special figure first hold th1, the special figure third hold th2 is the special figure second hold th2, and the special figure fourth hold th4 is the special figure. It is a display screen in a state shifted to the third hold th3. In addition, since the V rush is started, there is no new entry into the special figure entrance 64, and the special figure 4th reservation th4 is empty. And, as shown in the normal drawing fh0 during execution, the lottery of the normal symbols also starts to fluctuate, and the reservation is accumulated in the normal drawing first reservation fh1 (see FIG. 12(d)).

When the V-rush is started, the main display area Dm displays characters "under V-rush" as a game status notification mode indicating that the V-rush period is now in effect. Next to the main display area Dm, a character 810 resembling a rabbit is dynamically displayed as if trying to take something out of the bag 810a. This indicates that the normal symbol is in the process of being changed.

A timer 812 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to indicate the remaining period of the V rush period that is advantageous to the player. This timer 812 displays a value obtained by summing up the fluctuation time for the specified number of times of the special symbols until the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12 (b), the number of lotteries of special symbols in the time saving state is stipulated to be 4 times, and 10 seconds, which is the variation time of the special symbol th0 during execution, and "40.0 seconds", which is the sum of the variation time from the special symbol first reservation th1 to the special symbol third reservation th3, is shown in the timer 812. This timer 812 is displayed so that its value is decremented every time the variable time of the running special figure th0 is decremented, and the player can easily understand that the V rush period is progressing.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters ``When the timer reaches 0, the V rush ends!!'' are displayed to inform the player that the V rush will end when the value of the timer 812 being subtracted reaches 0. As described above, during the V rush period, the game is executed with the aim of allowing the player to enter the ball into the V winning opening 165 . Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the change state of the value displayed on the timer 812 .

Characters of ``first run'' are displayed in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, indicating how many times the V rush period is after winning a jackpot (so-called first win) from the normal state and starting the V rush without shifting the game state to the normal state. Further, "0pt" is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls won in the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of winning balls acquired by the big win during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can confirm the game history at his/her own timing and the convenience of the game can be improved.

In addition, a V rush variation area 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a left area 811a, a middle area 811b, and a right area 811c of the V rush variation area 811 are displayed in such a manner that the patterns are varied (dynamic display). In this V rush variation area 811, information is displayed for suggesting the game situation during the V rush to the player. In FIG. 12(b), the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has passed, and that the special and normal patterns are currently changing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(a), a description will be given of a display screen in the case where a general pattern is won during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when winning a normal figure during the V rush, and FIG. 13(c) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when the lottery for the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electrical winning device 640 is opened so that the game ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), the running normal pattern suspension fh0 is indicated by "◯" indicating that the normal symbol lottery was won. Then, at the upper right of the main display area Dm, an animation is displayed in which the character 810 who was looking for something from the bag 810a at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12(b)) takes out the ticket 810b with the character "lucky" written thereon, which is a notification mode for indicating that the character 810 has won the lottery of the normal pattern and obtained the privilege. Then, in a display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general electric prize winning device 640 is displayed in a state in which the lottery of the normal pattern is won and the electric accessory 640a is opened. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "If you enter the electric chew, you have a chance to win V!!" are displayed. By these display contents, the player can understand that the game is to be executed aiming at the electric chew, so that the player can be guided to the correct game method. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds described above are guide/notification modes for guiding the game content to be executed to the player.

A timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the game situation of FIG. 13 (a), the remaining variation time of the special figure fluctuation in execution shown in the special figure th0 in execution is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure lottery from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3 is a period of V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812 . In FIG. 13 (a), the special figure 4th reservation th4 that was not reserved at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12 (b)) is reserved, but this is a special figure lottery that is executed after the period of the specified number of times of the V rush has passed. Therefore, "-" is shown in the special figure 4th reservation th4 (see FIG. 13(c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), the display screen when the character hits during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the accessory winning game is executed during the V rush, and FIG. 13(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640, the V opening/closing door 65a associated with the V prize winning device 65 is opened.

FIG. 13(b) is a display screen when a game ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640 due to the general figure hit shown in FIG. 13(a). In FIG. 13(a), the reserved ball that was reserved in the special figure first reservation th1 is shifted to the special figure th0 during execution in FIG. 13(b). A "?" indicating that the remaining variation time is 9.9 seconds and the variation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13(d)). In this embodiment, when an accessory winning game or a jackpot game is executed, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each winning game is completed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which had decreased along with the variation time of the special symbol up to FIG. In addition, the characters "STOP!!" are displayed to indicate that the timer 812's decrement display is suspended. From these display contents, the player can understand that the V rush period has been interrupted. In the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 with the V open/close door 65a opened is schematically displayed together with the characters "Aim!!".

As a result, the player can understand that the V opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is open (that the prize winning game is being executed) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. 13(b) have a function of a game status notification mode for informing the player of the game status during the V rush and a function of a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game to be executed during the accessory winning game.

In addition, the V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed in a so-called ready-to-win display mode, in which the letter "V" is displayed still in the left area 811a and the right area 811c. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters ``If you enter the V, you will get a big win!!'', and by these display contents, the player can play the game with expectation that the game ball can be won in the V winning hole 165 in a little while.

That is, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, in a game (special symbol game) executed while expecting that the lottery result is a jackpot winning, a plurality of identification information (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81) for indicating the lottery result is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and one figure among the plurality of symbol rows is displayed. When the pattern rows other than the pattern row are stop-displayed in a ready-to-win display mode (for example, a combination of the same identification information) that is a combination of identification information for indicating the winning of the big win, the ready-to-win performance for increasing the expectation of winning the big win is executed.

The game (special electric game) executed during the time-saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is not a lottery of special symbols but a game of executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by finally winning a ball into a V winning opening 165 through various processes based on the lottery of normal symbols, so there is a problem that the player has difficulty understanding the specific game contents of the special electric game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, according to the progress of the special electric game having the above-described complicated game characteristics (various processes until the jackpot game is executed), the variation display mode of the symbols (characters) variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in each of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush variation area 811 is configured to perform a performance mode as if the special symbol game were being performed. With this configuration, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 without grasping the specific game contents in the special electric game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the V winning screen during the winning character game during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball enters the V winning opening 165 during a V-rush and a jackpot is awarded, and FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the role winning game is executed during the V rush, and when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game (when V wins), the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded.

FIG. 14(a) is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning hole 165 during the winning game shown in FIG. 13(b). As described above, since the variation of the special symbol is interrupted during the per-accessory game, the running special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped while leaving the variation time of 9.9 seconds. And special figure 1st suspension th1 and special figure 2nd suspension th2 are suspensions within the specified number of times of this V rush, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds each. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period remains "29.9 seconds" from the time shown in FIG. 13(b) (see FIG. 14(c)).

Then, when it is determined that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the subtraction of the V rush period is not subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period). "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

In this embodiment, when V winning (V jackpot game) occurs during the temporary stop of the special pattern, the time saving state is continued until the special pattern lottery executed after the temporarily stopped special pattern variation is completed is executed for the number of times of time saving set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed this time. In other words, the information (the number of times of time saving) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special pattern change (restart special pattern change) executed after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 14(c), when the number of times of time reduction is set to 4 times after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining period (9.9 seconds) of the special symbol variation during interruption and the special symbol variation time for 4 special symbol reservations is added to the duration of the next V rush. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state (at the time of the first V rush) that is set by performing a special game in the normal state and winning the jackpot, is set again after the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the V rush, and the time-saving state (when continuing the V rush) that is set again after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to easily provide a V rush that is advantageous to a person. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the V rush to continue.

In addition, other methods may be used to set a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the V rush continues than when the V rush enters for the first time. A different variation pattern may be selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and more specifically, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the condition for executing the big win game is established in the time saving state (V prize in the special electric game) and the time saving state is set after the big win game is completed than when the condition for executing the big win game is established in the normal state (win the jackpot in the special lottery) and the time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. Good. By constructing in this way, it is easier to lengthen the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state when the V rush continues than when the V rush first enters, and as a result, the duration of the V rush can be lengthened. Therefore, since added value can be given to the player who has continued the V rush, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, as a technical concept opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information (the number of times of time saving) for establishing the time saving end condition may be updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special symbol variation, or the special symbol variation with a longer variation time may be more easily executed when the V rush first enters than when the V rush continues. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the V rush from being excessively continued, and to prevent the V rush from ending without executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) even once in the special electric game executed during the V rush, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when using a configuration in which the timing of interrupting the special figure fluctuation during execution greatly affects the length of the duration of the V rush after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), in a state where the special figure fluctuation can be interrupted (for example, in a state where the normal winning game is won), information for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation under execution is notified to the player, and the player can select whether to interrupt the special figure fluctuation. You can In other words, if the remaining variation time of the special figure variation being executed is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special figure variation (a game that causes the ball to enter the special electric activation port 643 during the normal figure per game to execute the accessory per game) is executed. It may be configured to allow selection.

In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is provided by V winning, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special pattern and the fluctuation time of the special pattern within the prescribed number of times of the V rush reserved at that time are displayed as the preset period of the next V rush. The time is displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period stocked for the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

Then, in the V rush variation area 811 for indicating the game state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, "V" is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b that fluctuates in FIG. 13(b). Then, since the character 'V' is stopped and displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the prize is executed, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b and the right area 811c are combined to display 'VVV' indicating that the player has won the jackpot. In addition, the characters "Congratulations on the big win!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is clearly shown to the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the role and the jackpot has been granted.

In the present embodiment, the V rush variation area 811 is configured such that the left area 811a and the right area 811c are stopped when the prize is won, and the middle area 811b is stopped when the V is won during the prize. It may be configured so as to stop display. In this way, by constructing the game so as to execute step-by-step performance with the establishment of the game condition as a trigger, the player can instantly determine which stage the game stage is when he/she visually recognizes the V fluctuation area 811.例文帳に追加Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. In addition, the characters to be stopped may indicate that a jackpot is awarded and the player can obtain a privilege, and may be displayed as "win" or "V win". By displaying a plurality of characters indicating a big win in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a more varied presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(b), the loss screen during winning of the character during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 during the prize winning during the V rush. In the present embodiment, the variation of the executed special pattern is temporarily stopped when the winning of the role is executed, but when the V prize cannot be won during the winning of the role, the temporarily stopped variation of the special pattern is restarted.

FIG. 14(b) is a display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 after the winning of the prize is executed in FIG. 13(b). In the V fluctuation area 811 indicating the game situation during the V rush in the main display area Dm, the character "x" indicating that the V prize is not won is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, in the V rush fluctuation area 811, the deviation display form of "VxV" is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the game ball could not enter the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the prize this time.

Then, in the main display area Dm, characters "Restart!!" are displayed to indicate that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special figure is restarted. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 begins to decrease again with the resumption of fluctuation of the special figure shown in the running special figure th0 (see FIG. 14(d)). As a result, the player can easily understand that the game must be executed with the aim of winning V within the time indicated by the timer 812 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(a), the jackpot ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a jackpot ending during a V-rush, and FIG. 15(c) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won or a V prize is won during the V rush period, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

FIG. 15(a) is a view showing the ending screen of the big win awarded from the V prize shown in FIG. 14(a). As described above, when the jackpot is given during the V rush, the value obtained by adding the fluctuation time to the special figure second hold th2 which was the specified number of times in the previous V rush period and the running special figure th0 which was temporarily stopped is displayed as the time stock and the characters "time stock 29.9 seconds" are displayed in the display area HR4. Then, during the special figure suspension corresponding to the special figure third suspension th3 in FIG. 15(c), that is, during the V rush before the big win game is executed, the variation time of the special figure suspension that has not been added as the V rush period (time period) is calculated.

As described above, when a big win is awarded during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the big win game. The period of the V rush is set to a value obtained by summing the remaining time of the variation of the special figure temporarily stopped during the big win and the variation time for the number of lotteries of the special figure given according to the kind of the big win. In FIG. 15 (a), 29.9 seconds as time stock as displayed in the display area HR4, that is, the remaining period of the interrupted special figure fluctuation (9.9 seconds), and the number of seconds obtained by adding the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 that had already been added and displayed on the timer 812 during the previous V rush (20 seconds in total) are already displayed as time stock. At the end of the technique, the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure third hold th3 is added as a new value that can be added to the V rush period.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 15(a) shows the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the time reduction is given four times after the end of the jackpot game, and the special figure hold held as the time stock is up to the special figure second hold th2 (for two special figure holds). Since there is no (because the special figure reservation is not stored in the special figure fourth reservation th4), only the fluctuation time of the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 is added and displayed.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is granted during a V rush, and the number of special figure reservations that are time-stocked at that point is short of the specified number of times (number of time reductions) of time saving (V rush) to be granted this time, the variable time corresponding to the special figure reservations that are held and stored by the end of the jackpot game is configured to be added to the value of the time stock, and in FIG. Characters of “+15 seconds GET” are displayed in the additional period display mode 802 . As a result, the player can enjoy the fact that the period in which the player is advantageous has been further extended. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the performance of adding the V rush period is executed during the ending period of the big win game, the game can be executed with expectation that the advantageous period will be extended at the time of the ending of the big win game, so that the performance during the big win can attract more attention.

In the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, characters of ``second run'' indicating that the V rush is continued twice are displayed, and in the display area HR2, ``670P'', which is the number of prize balls obtained in the big win during the V rush, is displayed. In this way, the game result is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it, and the value increases each time a big win is executed and a privilege is obtained, thereby making the player feel more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Continue V rush" are displayed to indicate that the V rush has been set again. As a result, the player can easily understand that the V rush that is advantageous to the player will be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the timer addition screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during the V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol holding newly won at the time of the jackpot ending executed during the V rush, and the addition performance of the variable time of the special symbol outside the period of the prescribed number of times of the V rush are executed. When the number of reserved balls for the specified number of times of V rush is not reserved at the end of the big win, the addition performance for the newly increased number of reserved balls is executed even during the period of V rush until the special figure reservation for the specified number of times of V rush is accumulated.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the game progresses from the ending of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15(a) and a game ball newly enters the special figure entrance 64, and FIG. 15(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. In the main display area Dm, the V rush fluctuation area displays a variable display mode indicating that the V rush period has passed. In FIG. 15 (b), as shown in FIG. 15 (d), the running special figure th0 resumes the fluctuation, the remaining variation time is 3.2 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 are each stored with a hold that is set to 10 seconds as the fluctuation time. And special figure 3rd reservation th3 is a state in which the retention ball of the fluctuation time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds, which is the sum of these values.

The state of FIG. 15 (a), as described above, is a state in which it is possible to add the variable time for two new special figure reservations as the V rush period, but only one new special figure reservation is acquired (Special figure third reservation th3 only). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when a new special figure reservation is acquired next time, the change time of the acquired special figure reservation is additionally displayed.

Specifically, it is shown that there was an additional winning in the special figure 4th reservation th4, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set for this new special figure reservation. Therefore, an effect is executed in which 20 seconds are added to the current V rush period. Then, a character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm adds a period of V rush and throws a ticket 810b for showing extension of the advantageous period to the player to a timer 812 for showing the remaining period of V rush. After this performance is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure additionally won this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the value ``58.2 seconds'' is displayed on the timer 812.例文帳に追加Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Timer addition!!" are displayed to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has been extended (added).

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), the V rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16(c) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, when a game ball is not entered into the V prize winning opening 165 during the V rush period, or when a special pattern lottery is not won, the V rush period ends and the game state shifts to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), an "x" is displayed to indicate that the running special figure th0f, which is the final variation of the current V rush, has come off and stopped. The reserved balls are accumulated from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3, but these reserved balls are reserved balls outside the prescribed number of times of V rush. In addition, during execution, the normal map fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the normal map first reserved fh1 normal map reserved ball is accumulated.

In the main display area Dm, the characters 'VGET×2' indicating how many times the V rush is continued this time are displayed, and the characters 'PGET×1500' indicating how many prize balls (privileges) have been obtained in the big hit during the V rush this time are displayed. As a result, the game result of the current V rush is reported in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "V Rush End" are displayed to notify that the advantageous period has ended. With these display modes, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has ended.

Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen indicating that the period of the V rush has been extended, and FIG. 16(d) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is configured to execute the V rush effect. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol variation of the predetermined specified number of times ends. Specifically, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the time saving state is terminated and shifted to the normal state when the fourth special pattern variation is stopped (fixed display) after the time saving state is set. Here, since the lottery (variation) of the special symbols and the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols are executed independently, when the general symbol winning game is executed just before the end of the V rush period (immediately before the final variation of the special symbols in the time saving state is stopped and displayed), the role winning game may be executed after the time saving state is ended (after shifting to the normal state).

In this case, if the V rush performance is ended at the timing when the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, there is a possibility that the game with the accessory is started in spite of the end of the V rush performance, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern winning game is executed at the end timing of the V rush period (the final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time saving state), the V rush performance is extended until the normal pattern winning game is completed or until the accessory winning game executed triggered by the normal pattern winning game is completed. As a result, the V rush effect can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period in which the V jackpot game is aimed, and the effect can be easily understood by the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the state in which the character "○" indicating that the winning is performed in the normal figure tf0 during execution is shown, that is, during the normal figure per game, the special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving state, is stopped and displayed ("X" indicating that the special figure th0 is out and stopped during execution) When the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. A left region 811a, a middle region 811b, and a right region 811c of a V rush fluctuation region 811 for indicating the situation are displayed in a state of being changed. That is, it suggests to the player that the V rush is continuing.

Then, the timer 812 displays "00.0 seconds" indicating that all the fluctuations of the special figure for the prescribed number of times in the time saving state have ended. However, above the main display area, the characters "V rush extended" are displayed. With such a display, the player learns that the V rush, which he thought has ended, has been extended, and can obtain unexpected joy. Characters of 'Last Chance!!' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player can easily understand that the V rush will end unless the game ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and the V winning port 165 in this normal game win.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), that is, when the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the accessory winning game is executed in the same manner as during the normal V rush period. In this case, the display screen during the winning-access-game shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the characters "Last Chance!!" are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period will end if the ball does not enter the V winning opening 165 in the current accessory winning game. Then, when the ball enters the V prize winning opening 165 in the role winning game displayed as "Last Chance!!", the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed after the accessory winning game ends.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), in the present embodiment, a series of V rush effects are executed with the period in which the special electric game can be executed as the V rush period, not the transition state of the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16(a) is not limited to after the final variation of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed. For example, the display may be started when the remaining period of the final variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is ended at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as the period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

By configuring in this way, the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, so that the player can be notified of the game result during the V rush period in an easy-to-understand manner. In the case of using such a configuration, for example, when the normal symbol lottery situation is determined in advance at the time when the V rush end screen is displayed, and when it is determined in advance that the normal symbol winning game will be executed within the period in which the V rush end screen can be displayed, the extended screen shown in FIG. It can be configured as follows. In this way, by using the configuration to switch the end screen to the extension screen, the possibility of aiming at the V jackpot game can be left even after the end screen is displayed, so that the player can play the game with expectation until the end. In addition, in this embodiment, when the extended screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed, the normal state is set as the game state. When such a constitution is used, for example, it is preferable to execute a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state. As a result, the period during which the extended screen is displayed indicates that the V rush period will end soon and that the advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, the player who is playing the game during the V rush period can play the game with expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and the normal normal state so as to be manageable, and only when the special normal state is set, an advantageous jackpot game is given to the player, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal normal state, almost no prize balls can be obtained as a penalty, and a disadvantageous jackpot game in which the normal state is set is executed after the jackpot game ends. It is better to configure it so that In addition, without being limited to this, for example, when the display condition of the extended screen is satisfied at the time when the final variation of the special pattern in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is not terminated, and when the termination condition of the extended screen display is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends is variable, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(a), the special screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a special screen at the end of a jackpot game, and FIG. 17(c) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot game is executed during a V rush, the period of the V rush is set again after the jackpot game is finished based on the number of reserved balls of special symbols and the variation time. However, if there is a reserved ball for which a winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds is performed among the reserved balls at the ending of the jackpot game, a heaven mode performance indicating that the jackpot is surely won after the lapse of a predetermined period is executed.

FIG. 17(a) is a display screen when the winning variation with the variation time of 200 seconds is suspended at the ending of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the holding status of each symbol at the ending of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 17(a) is that the special symbol being executed th0 is during the jackpot game, so the special symbol variation is not executed. In addition, a "↓" is shown to indicate that the running normal map fh0 is fluctuating, and it is shown that the normal map first reserved fh1 is stored. And, in the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2, it is shown that the reservation ball in which the deviation variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed is stored.

And, in the special figure third reservation th3, the reservation ball in which the variation pattern is executed for 200 seconds is shown. In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as a variation pattern of special symbols during a time-saving game (during V rush), when the result of winning or not determination is winning, long winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds (hereinafter referred to as special winning) may be executed. Furthermore, in the big wins (big wins A, big wins B) that are won in the lottery of special symbols, a time-saving state is set after the big win game ends. Therefore, even if the player cannot enter the V winning port 165 in the special electric game until the fluctuation of the special winning is stopped (during the heaven mode), the special electric winning can always be won by the big winning game, and the period of the V rush is set again after the big winning game is finished, so the special electric game can be executed without anxiety. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the special figure 4th reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since the big hit game is executed in the special figure 3rd reservation th3, the variation time is indicated as "-" because it is set as the V rush period set after the jackpot game executed by the special figure 3rd reservation th3.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when there is a special win in the pending game at the end of the jackpot game, the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays characters of ``enter heaven mode'' indicating that the special win is in the pending game. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, or during the V Rush when there is no special win in the hold, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b which are not displayed are displayed. Also, the characters "Super Lucky!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed in the normal state or during the V rush in which there is no special hit in the hold, are displayed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that the game situation is a special situation, and can continue the game with excitement. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b form a special game situation suggesting mode for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

Also, in the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as "220 seconds" is displayed. The value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation of winning the special prize in the special symbol lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode. That is, it becomes a special game period notification mode for indicating the special game period to be executed from now on. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is a sum of 200 seconds, which is the variation time for the special win, and the variation time for the number of reserved balls until the special win is won. In FIG. 17(c), the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set for each of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time per special shown in the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is 200 seconds, the value of the fluctuation time from the special figure 1st reservation th1 to the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is added up "220 seconds" is the period in which the heaven mode is set.

The time-saving state (V rush) period in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to notify the player in the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game, but the variation time of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state is configured to execute a variation pattern in which the maximum variation time is set to 50 seconds at the maximum except for the special winning variation of 200 seconds (see FIG. 25(c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player can understand that the time saving state is always set again, and the special electric game can be executed with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning variation in the reserved ball at the ending of the big winning game, and if there is a special winning, the player is notified at the ending of the big winning game, but the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, when there is a special win in the hold, at the ending of the big win, the time until the special win variation is executed may be notified, and when the special win variation is started, the player may be notified that the period has been extended by ``200 seconds''. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an unexpected pleasure that the period of the V-rush, which was thought to have ended, was suddenly extended for a long period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(b), the screen during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during heaven mode, and FIG. 17(d) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, when there is a special win in the reserved ball at the ending of the big win, the time until the fluctuation of the special win stops is called a heaven mode, and it is configured to be a period in which the player can play the special electric game with peace of mind. FIG. 17(b) is an example of the display screen when the game progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters "10th run" are displayed to indicate that it is the 10th V rush period after the game state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state (V rush). In the display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters "6000pt" indicating the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game executed after the shift to the V rush are displayed. Above the main display area Dm, the characters "in paradise mode" are displayed so that the player can instantly determine the current game state. In addition, similarly to during the V rush, a V rush variation area 811 is displayed, and in each area of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, a lottery of normal symbols is executed, and a variation display mode indicating that the special electric game is in progress is shown. Also, like during the V rush, an animation of the character 810 looking for something in the bag 810a is displayed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that the lottery for normal symbols is being executed.

And, as shown in FIG. 17(d), in the running special symbol th0, the variation of the special symbol with the remaining variation time of 30 seconds is being performed. This running special figure th0, in the gaming situation shown in FIG. 17(c), is that the reserved ball that executes the special hit shown in the special figure third reserved th3 has started to fluctuate. Therefore, the remaining period of heaven mode being executed in FIG. 17(b) is 30 seconds which is the remaining variation time of this executing special figure th0. In addition, the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure third reservation th3 show that there is a reserved ball, but since it is a special figure lottery executed outside the period of the heaven mode being executed, "-" is shown for the fluctuation time. In addition, in the running general map fh0, "↓" indicating that the general map lottery is being executed is shown, and the general map first reservation fh1 is also in a situation where the reserved ball is stored.

The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented according to the remaining period of the variation of the running special figure th0. As shown in FIG. 17(d), since the remaining variation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the characters "30.0 seconds" are displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17(b)). In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters ``There is something good with the timer 0'', suggesting to the player that when the value of the remaining period displayed on the timer 812 becomes 0, the player wins a jackpot. That is, in the secondary display area Ds, a suggestive effect notification mode for suggesting the game situation from now on to the player is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is the period until the winning symbols stop after winning the special prize, is configured to be the same as in the V rush mode. By constructing in this way, the player can be informed that executing the special electric game and winning the game ball in the V winning port 165 during the heaven mode as well as during the V rush is a basic game method advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

It should be noted that the display mode is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute an effect dedicated to the heaven mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to further enhance the presentation effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(a), a description will be given of the chance effect screen during winning of the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the chance effect during winning the role, and FIG. 18(c) is a diagram showing each pattern situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the winning of the normal pattern is won and the game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the winning of the accessory is executed, and when the winning of the game ball enters the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 during the execution of the winning of the accessory, the jackpot is awarded. In FIG. 18(a), the timing at which the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the role from the game situation shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), the holding status of each symbol in FIG. 18(a) is indicated by "?" indicating that the variation is temporarily stopped because the running special figure th0 is in the middle of winning the character. Each holding ball from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure second reservation th2 shows a deviation variation of 10 seconds respectively. In addition, the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is a special figure variation that is performed outside the period of the V rush that is currently being performed, so the variation time indicates "-". Furthermore, it has shown that special figure 4th reservation th4 is not reserved. And, in the normal figure fh0 being executed, "○" is shown to indicate that the normal figure lottery was won.

FIG. 18(a) is a notification screen for notifying the player that the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 165 during the prize winning shown in FIG. 13(b). In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball that has won the V winning device 65 during the winning of the accessory is stored in the storage valve 66a. The reservoir valve 66a is configured to be in an open state for 1.5 seconds out of the 3-second period so that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7). The first movable valve 66b disposed above the V winning opening 165 is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can flow down the fifth flow path to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 seconds out of 5.5 seconds regardless of the game state (see FIG. 27(a)).

In other words, in order to enter the game ball into the V winning port 165, it is necessary to enter the game ball flowing down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is opened within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and if it is determined that the first movable valve 66b is opened within 2 seconds, as shown in FIG. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters such as "Big Chance for V Winning!!" are displayed. In other words, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of the timing at which the game state is likely to shift to an advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, the player can understand the timing at which V winning is likely to occur, and the game can be easily executed.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which it is easy to win a V prize is notified by the highlighted display mode 811z or the comment in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more friendly game to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(b), the general pattern stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the normal symbol lottery is stopped during the period of the V rush, and FIG. 18(d) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), winning the lottery of normal symbols, entering the game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, and executing the special electric game aiming at the V prize is the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is not executed during this V rush, the special electric game cannot be executed, so the third pattern display device 81 executes the performance for prompting the shooting of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. 18(a) shows that the running special figure th0 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds. In addition, the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2 are each stored with a reservation ball in which deviation variation for 10 seconds is executed. And special figure 3rd reservation th3 and special figure 4th reservation th4 are the states where the reservation sphere is not remembered. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18(b) is 22.2 seconds which is the sum of the remaining variation time of the running special figure th0 and the variation time of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. And, during execution general figure fh0, "-" which shows that general figure lottery is not executed is shown. Furthermore, the held ball is not stored in the normal first hold fh1.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), when the lottery for normal symbols is not executed and stopped during the V rush, the electric accessory 640a associated with the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state, and it is impossible to let the game ball enter the special electric operation opening 643. That is, the special electric game, which is a basic game method during the V rush, cannot be executed, and since the special figure lottery is being executed, the V rush ends as it is when the special figure lottery for the prescribed number of times is hunted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball into the special figure ball entrance 64 or the normal winning device 640, it is necessary to execute a left-handed game in which the game ball is shot aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, and when the left-handed game is executed, the game ball is 100% passed through the through gate 67 that triggers the lottery of the normal symbol. In other words, the game situation in which the normal figure lottery is not executed while the special figure lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect for prompting the player to shoot the game ball.

In the main display area Dm, the characters "During V rush" are displayed, and furthermore, the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the V rush as being subtracted as time elapses. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V Rush game is being executed and the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V fluctuation area 811 where the fluctuation display is executed when the lottery of the normal pattern is executed, the character ``hit'' is shown to the player by the animation guided by the character 810 together with ``hit'' in the left area 811a, ``tsu'' in the middle area 811b, and ``te'' in the right area. In other words, the V fluctuation area 811 indicates that the normal symbol lottery is not executed, and is in a warning display mode for indicating to the player that the V rush will end.

In addition, the characters "Please start the game" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, the player can be notified that the special electric game cannot be executed because the normal pattern lottery is not executed, and the special symbol lottery is executed, so that the V rush period, which is advantageous to the player, will end as it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending unexpectedly by the player.

It should be noted that the effect of prompting the shooting of the game ball described above is not limited to this display mode. In other words, it suffices to convey to the player that the lottery for the normal symbols is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further warn the player that there is a risk of loss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the special figure stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V Rush, and FIG. 19(c) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the time-saving state (V rush) is continued until the special pattern lottery is executed for the prescribed number of times, and the value obtained by adding up the fluctuation time for the prescribed number of times is notified to the player as the prescribed period of the V rush. Therefore, when the lottery for special symbols is not executed, the specified period is not discriminated, so a performance is executed to make the player expect how long the V rush will continue.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), the holding status of each holding symbol in the gaming situation shown in FIG. 19(a) is indicated by "-" indicating that the special symbol lottery is not being executed for the running special symbol th0. In addition, special figure 1st reservation th1 - special figure 4th reservation th4 indicate that the reservation sphere is not remembered. On the other hand, the running normal map fh0 is shown with "↓" indicating that the normal map lottery is being executed, and the normal map first reservation fh1 is also stored.

In this way, when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for the prescribed number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the timer 812 displays characters "??? seconds" indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been executed and the prescribed period has not yet been reached. In addition, in the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of "↓↓↓" indicating that the lottery for normal symbols is being executed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode indicating that the prescribed period of the V-rush has not been reached is displayed as "How long will it last?" From these display contents, the player can understand that the remaining period of the V rush is not reduced because the lottery for the special pattern is not executed, but the special electric game can be executed because the lottery for the normal pattern is executed. With this configuration, the player can play the game while being excited about how long the game situation advantageous to the player that the special electric game can be executed before the V rush period elapses continues. In other words, the display contents shown in FIG. 19(a) are suggestive notification contents for showing that the player is in an advantageous state.

As described above, when there are no reserved balls with special patterns during the V rush period, it is possible to notify once that the V rush period has ended, and next, when a game ball enters the special symbol entrance 64, a resurrection performance such that the V rush period is revived may be executed. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the V rush period, which was thought to have ended, has been revived, and can obtain unexpected pleasure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(b), the lucky time screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing an example of a lucky time screen during a V rush, and FIG. 19(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation during interruption and the special pattern fluctuation time for the number of times of time saving (4 times) set after the V jackpot game is finished are set as a short time period (V rush period) after the V jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the V rush period is displayed (reduced display) using the display mode of the timer 812, but the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is not displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for informing the player of that effect is executed. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next, the lucky time performance is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, when a V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters “Enter lucky time” are displayed in the main display area Dm, and “10 seconds” is displayed as the period display mode 851 . On the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b), a lucky time effect is executed indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. As shown in FIG. The number of seconds displayed in the period display mode 851 is displayed by subtraction corresponding to the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, and when 0 seconds is displayed, the lucky time presentation ends.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Having a chance to hit a character during the lucky time" is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the player to the privilege during the lucky time. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), an unlucky performance can be executed as a performance capable of informing the player of that effect. In other words, it is constructed so that the player can grasp that the V rush period to be set next tends to be shortened when the V jackpot game is executed when the unlucky performance is executed.

By executing the unlucky performance in this way, it is possible for the player to select whether to actively execute the special electric game even during the unlucky performance in order to execute the V jackpot game for the time being during the V rush period, or to aim to set a longer V rush period after the end of the V big prize game by not performing the special electric game until the unlucky performance is completed although the V rush period is subtracted, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, the above-described lucky time effect or unlucky effect is executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbols satisfies a predetermined condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the effect may be determined by lottery, or may be determined based on the operation result of the operation means (the frame button 22) that the player can operate. Furthermore, the performance execution frequency may be varied according to the length of the period that can be displayed as the lucky time performance or the unlucky performance, and when the remaining period of the special pattern variation during execution exceeds 50 seconds, the lucky time performance may be executed with a high probability.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19(b), during the period during which the lucky time effect is being executed, the player is notified of the period in which the player will benefit from using the period display mode 851. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display only the display mode indicating that it is lucky time without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the length of the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game.

Furthermore, as an execution condition for the lucky time performance or the unlucky performance, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time saving state may be provided as an execution condition that is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the lucky time performance or the unlucky performance may not be executed during the final fluctuation of the special symbols in the V rush period.

<Regarding Transition of Game State of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the content of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing the flow of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, two game states can be set as the game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). It is configured so that the normal state is set when the condition that is satisfied when the

First, the case where the normal state is set as the game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal state is set as the game state in the initial state (the state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated in the start-up processing (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 is executed). Since this normal state is a low-probability state of normal patterns, it is a game state in which it is difficult to win a ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 (more difficult to win than in a high-probability state of normal patterns), so a left-handed game for entering a ball into a special-figure ball entrance 64 is executed.

In this normal state, when a big win is won in a special pattern (special pattern) lottery (special lottery), either a big win A or a big win B is set as a big win type, and a big win game is executed. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, but in this embodiment, 99% of the time when a special lottery wins a jackpot, "jackpot A (4R (round), time reduction 4 times)" is set as the jackpot type, and "jackpot B (4R (round), time reduction 15 times)" is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 1%.

In other words, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the end conditions of the time saving state are different according to the set jackpot type. Specifically, the easy-to-set jackpot type (jackpot A) is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is easier to establish than the hard-to-set jackpot type (jackpot B). By constructing in this way, a player who is playing a game in a normal state can play a game while expecting that the set jackpot type (jackpot B) will be advantageous to the player, in addition to the game aiming at winning the jackpot in the special lottery.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, while the normal state is set, a dynamic display (effect display) for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and by grasping the dynamic display mode (performance mode) executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. In addition, as described above, since the low probability state of the normal pattern is set during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric winning device 640 by the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery).

By constructing in this way, the player can pay attention to the performance executed based on the result of the special drawing lottery rather than the performance executed based on the result of the normal drawing drawing during the period when the normal state is set, so that it is possible to visually grasp that the game (special drawing game) mainly consisting of the special drawing drawing is executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Then, when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the general electric winning device 640 becomes easier to open based on the general drawing lottery, and the game (special electric game) aiming for the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the role per game executed by entering the ball into the special electric operation port 643 based on the general drawing lottery is the jackpot game (special electric game) based on the special drawing lottery. It is configured to be a game more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aiming for a big hit game).

In this way, the player can be made to execute different games according to the set game state by making the execution timing of the big win to be aimed at by the player different according to the set game state, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. In addition, in the present embodiment, during the normal state, the special electric game aiming at the special drawing is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special electric game aiming at the normal drawing, and during the time saving state, the special electric game aiming at the ordinary drawing is more advantageous to the player than the special drawing game aiming at the special drawing. Provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), the type of special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player may be configured to be different according to the set game state. state) is set, the second special symbol game aiming at the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol may be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol game aiming at the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured so that the same game method (left-handed game) is performed both when the special game is executed and when the special electric game is executed. For example, a left-handed game (a game aimed at the game area (left side area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is executed during the normal state, and a right-handed game (a game aimed at the game area (right side area) formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) is executed during the time saving state. In this case, a special figure ball entrance 64 is provided as a configuration for executing a special figure game in the left side area, a through gate 67, a general electric winning device 640, and a V winning device 65 are provided as a configuration for performing a special electric game in the right side area, and a variable winning device 650 that opens as a jackpot game is provided in the left area or the game area (lower area) where the ball flowing down the right area can reach.

By configuring in this way, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) can be changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, so that the player can be provided with the pleasure of changing the game method.

In addition, in this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly performed by the player, it is preferable to execute a guidance notification (for example, the display mode of “right-handed” displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) to be performed by the player.

Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is changed according to the game content (special game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, by providing a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a big win game in the game area (lower area) where the ball flowing down the left side area or the right side area can reach, even when the big win game is executed based on the special game, When the big win game is executed based on the special electric game. Also, there is no need to change the game method with the execution of the jackpot game as a trigger, and the game can be played smoothly.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description continues. In this embodiment, it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of the special symbol lottery). In addition, the lottery of normal symbols (general figure lottery) is configured to be executable independently without being involved in the lottery of special symbols (special figure lottery). In other words, the execution opportunity of the normal figure lottery is configured to be established regardless of the situation of the special figure lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters a special electric operation opening 643 provided in a special pattern variation (special pattern variation) general electric prize winning device 640 and a role winning game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, and when the role winning game ends, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed. In addition, when a ball enters a V winning port 165 during a role winning game and a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed, the interrupted special pattern variation is restarted when the big winning game ends.

In this embodiment configured in this manner, when the time saving state is set, a special electric game aiming at many V jackpot games is executed until the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) that can be established based on the special figure lottery is established, that is, before the special figure lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). To give a specific example, when the special figure fluctuation 4 times is set as the time saving end condition, the period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, 10 seconds for each of the four special figure lotteries If the fluctuation time is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special figure lottery ends).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), when there are four reserved special figures at the end of the jackpot game, "40 seconds" is displayed as the period until the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, while the accessory per game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the time saving state are being executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation being executed is not subtracted. Therefore, the period in which the time saving state is actually set is the period obtained by adding the special figure fluctuation time until the time saving end condition is satisfied and the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted corresponds to the period during which the winning game (the winning game, the jackpot game) is executed, and the execution period of the winning game varies depending on the contents of the game played by the player, so the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is displayed (see FIG. 13 (a)), and when the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted, the subtraction is restarted.

By configuring in this way, the display content of the display mode (remaining short time display mode 801 in FIG. 12(a)) indicating the period until the time saving state ends displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 does not differ from the period until the time saving state actually ends, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed during the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is constituted so that the probability of winning is about 33%, and it is constructed so that the normal pattern lottery is easier to win compared to the winning probability (1%) of the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed during the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, the variation time of 3 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the normal symbols. Therefore, by executing the left-handed game continuously during the time saving state, the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be in the open state by executing the general pattern per game once in about 10 seconds.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, when the normal pattern winning game is executed during the time saving state, the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 is easily entered into the special electric operation opening 643 (It is configured to be easier to enter than the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state), and it is configured to be able to execute the accessory winning game approximately the same number of times as the normal pattern winning game execution frequency. Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball enters the V winning port 165 in one accessory game and the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed is about 1/11.

That is, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, at a rate of about once every 10 seconds, it is configured such that the accessory-winning game, which is a chance for the ball to win the V winning opening 165, is executed. When the game result of the role winning game is that the ball can enter the V winning port 165 (in the case of V winning), after the role winning game, the jackpot game (jackpot game whose jackpot type is jackpot C (10R (round), time reduction 4 times)) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is set again. That is, when a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by causing a ball to enter a V winning port 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will not end as long as the special electric game continues to be executed, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation and can be made to execute the special electric game.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, when a jackpot game is executed by a special electric game, the interrupted special figure fluctuation is restarted after the jackpot game is finished, but the restarted special figure fluctuation is configured not to update the special figure lottery (special figure fluctuation) number for establishing the time saving end condition. That is, after the special figure fluctuation after the restart is completed, it is configured so that the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation is executed four times.

That is, when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long (for example, 30 seconds), the role per game is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the role per game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is "30 seconds + 4 special figure fluctuations". When it is executed, the period of time saving state set after the jackpot game becomes "0.5 second + 4 special figure fluctuations".

By constructing in this way, in the case of executing the special electric game aiming at the V big winning game during the time saving state in which the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is not advantageous for the player to execute the V big winning game early, but it is possible to make it advantageous to the player to execute the V big winning game in a state where the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation during execution is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has passed since the time saving state was set, the player can continue to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving number (the special figure fluctuation number updated to establish the time saving end condition) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the jackpot. Even in the case of such a constitution, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart, the more advantageous it is for the player, so that even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has passed since the time reduction state is set, the player can continue to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. When the game result of the accessory winning game executed during the time saving state does not allow the ball to enter the V prize winning port 165 (in the case of non-V winning), the special electric game is repeatedly executed until the time saving state ends.

When the special pattern variation (special figure variation) ends in the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is established, that is, whether the special figure variation for the number of times set as the time saving end condition is completed, and when the time saving end condition is established, the game state shifts to the normal state and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, if the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure variation is executed. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25(c), but in this embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special figure lottery executed during the time saving state, if the result of the special figure lottery is winning (1/100), 50 seconds or 200 seconds is selected. That is, it is configured to make it easier to continue the time saving state for a longer period when a big win is won in a special lottery executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the time saving end condition is set four times as the time saving end condition, the special lottery is four times executed after the big win game ends). Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in a special lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when a jackpot is won by a special lottery within a limited period in which the time saving state is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is big win information in which a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set in the holding memory of the special symbols acquired at the end of the big win game, a special performance for notifying that effect is executed (see FIG. 17(a)).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as end conditions of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, a time saving end condition that is easily met (time saving 4 times) and a time saving end condition that is difficult to be met (time saving 15 times) can be set. Here, when the time saving 15 times is set, the time saving state is continued until the 15th special drawing lottery executed in the time saving state is completed, so that the time saving state can be lengthened according to the increment of the special drawing fluctuation frequency, the probability of winning a big win during the time saving state can be increased, and the long time change pattern set at the time of the jackpot winning can make the time saving time longer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to play the same game method (left-handed game) during the normal state, during the time saving state, and during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special figure lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special figure variation is configured to be selected regardless of the number of special symbols reserved (the number of special figures reserved), but without being limited to this, for example, if the time saving state is set, it is better to configure the variation pattern in which the longer the number of special figures reserved, the longer the variation time is set.

By configuring in this way, in the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during the jackpot game), it is possible to motivate the game to reach the upper limit (4 pieces) of the number of reserved special figures. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state (a state in which the time saving end condition is not established) in which the special figure variation is not executed during the time saving state.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, during the period when the time saving state is set, that is, during the period until the predetermined number of special symbol variations (special symbol variations) are completed, the normal symbol lottery is executed, and finally the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 is configured to execute the special electric game to win the ball. The V winning device 65 is configured so that the ball can easily win during the role winning game, and is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is not subtracted (suspended) during the role winning game. Furthermore, the role-winning game has a plurality of end conditions. Specifically, it has a first end condition (ball winning end condition) that is satisfied when the number of balls that win the V-winning device 65 during the role-winning game reaches a predetermined number (three), and a second end condition (time-elapsed end condition) that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the execution of the role-winning game reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds), and either the first end condition or the second end condition. When the end condition of is established, the accessory winning game is ended. In addition, a new normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is not executed during the normal pattern variation period and the execution period of the normal pattern winning game, but a new normal pattern lottery can be executed during the period when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during the normal pattern winning game and the accessory winning game is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, a special electric game is performed with the aim of executing more role winning games while interrupting the special figure variation by executing the role winning games during the time saving state. However, the period during which the normal pattern variation period until the lottery result of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, and the period during which the ball cannot be won in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the execution period of the normal pattern winning game (the period when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state) are the periods in which the special symbol variation time during the time reduction state is wastefully subtracted, so it becomes a short period of disadvantageous time for the player during the time reduction state.

Therefore, for example, as the variation pattern of the normal pattern set during the time saving state, the normal pattern short variation pattern (variation time 3 seconds) with a short variation time and the normal pattern length variation pattern (variation time 15 seconds) with a long variation time are selectable. When configured, the game is performed while expecting that the normal pattern short variation pattern will be selected so that the short period of disadvantage described above is shortened. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the execution period of the game per role (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted), it is possible to suppress the subtraction of the special symbol variation time during the short period of disadvantage by extending the period in which the short period of unfavorable time and the suspension period of special symbol variation are overlapped.

Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous short period during the time saving state, when the role winning game is executed in the time saving state, the remaining time of the normal figure fluctuation during execution is discriminated, and when the remaining time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is preferable to execute the performance to encourage the end of the role winning game according to the passage of time instead of ending with the winning of a ball. By configuring in this way, the short period of disadvantageous time can be shortened by lengthening the execution period of the game per accessory.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are used in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, a first winning type counter C2 used to select the special symbol jackpot type, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. , and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of normal symbols are used for initial value setting of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 55), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 consisting of four reservation areas (reserved first to fourth areas).In the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the special pattern is established, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern fluctuation is started based on the stored various values.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of special symbol type is used. However, two or more types of special symbol types may be provided without being limited to this. In this case, for example, in order to establish the lottery conditions for one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the entrance of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance), each value described above is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area, and another special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) is entered based on the entry of the ball into an entrance (for example, the second entrance) different from the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance). In order to establish the lottery condition, the above values may be stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (in parallel). Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is established, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery results of the special symbols are configured to be only big wins and loses, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the lottery results of the special symbols are loses, it may be possible to win a small win that can give the player less benefits than when winning the big win (privileges different from those when winning the big win). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small winning type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the value of the acquired small winning type counter is configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, when it is possible to win a small win in a special symbol lottery, for example, the transition contents of the game state based on the jackpot winning and the game state transition contents based on the small win may be configured to be different, for example, when the big win is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big win game, and further, based on the set big win type, a new game state can be set after the big win game ends, and when the small win is won, A small winning game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small winning game is completed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that the game rich in variations can be provided.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of one reservation area (retained first area). In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal pattern is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal pattern execution area, and the normal pattern fluctuation is started based on the stored various values.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64. The value of the random number that becomes the big win for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big winning set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b). FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determined values) for determining a big winning in a special symbol lottery are defined.

Specifically, in the first winning random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a big win is defined within a predetermined range, and the judgment value within the predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23(b), among the values of the first winning random number counter C1, "0 to 3" are defined as big hit determination values, and other values ("4 to 399") are defined as out determination values.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the big win is the same regardless of the game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big win probability may be different depending on the game state. Also, in that case, the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to two types, a high-probability state and a low-probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be different for each of at most four types of game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in the case of constructing so as to be able to win a ``small win'' as a lottery result of special symbols, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the ``small winning'' may be defined in the first winning random number table 202a. By constructing in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed by the same processing, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case of executing the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery by different processing. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is configured to be incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 24(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first win type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24(a), the first win type selection table 202c has a special symbol jackpot type selection table 202c1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 that is referred to when a ball enters the V winning opening 165 (V win).

First, with reference to FIG. 24(b), the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described. FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the obtained first win type counter C2.

Specifically, "jackpot A" is defined in the range of "0 to 98" of the value of the first win type counter C2, and "jackpot B" is defined in the value of "99".

Here, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game is finished will be described. In the present embodiment, opening action scenarios (opening timing, number of times of opening) for the movable member (variable winning device 650) executed during the jackpot game are pre-stored in various action scenario tables 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Then, when a jackpot is won, an opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read from the various operation scenario table 202e and stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加When the opening operation scenario is stored in an executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds), and in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario contents are determined and the process based on the determination result is executed.

With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one opening operation control, the operation control for the plurality of movable members can be centrally managed by using an opening operation scenario that defines the operation contents of each movable member in chronological order. Therefore, compared to the case where the motion control is performed separately for each movable member, the motion timing of each movable member can be appropriately set, and the motion processing for the other movable members can be smoothly performed when a problem occurs in one movable member.

“Jackpot A” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as a jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 650 is opened during the four rounds is executed. This round game is a game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until 10 balls enter the variable winning device 650 or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds. That is, in the "jackpot A" in which 4 rounds of round games are executed, it becomes a jackpot game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be awarded to the variable prize winning device 650 .

Furthermore, the ``jackpot A'' is defined so that a time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and ``4 times of time-saving'' is defined as a period during which the time-saving state continues, that is, a short period of time is defined until the lottery of the special symbols is executed four times during the time-shortening state (until the result of the fourth special symbol lottery is stopped (fixed) is displayed).

The "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the jackpot game, and the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the four rounds is executed. A time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the period during which the time saving state continues is ``15 times of time saving'', that is, a short period of time is defined until the special pattern lottery is executed 15 times (until the lottery result of the 15th special pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)) without winning a jackpot during the time saving state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery, four rounds of the big win game are executed without fail, and a time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. When the set jackpot type is ``jackpot A'' (99% when the jackpot is won), the number of times of time reduction is set to ``4 times'', and when the set jackpot type is ``jackpot B'' (1% when the jackpot is won), the number of times of time reduction is set to ``15 times''.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special electric game (a game aiming for a big hit by entering a ball (V prize) into the V winning opening 165 based on the normal symbol lottery) is executed more easily than a special game (a game in which a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 and aims to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery) in a normal state during the time saving state, and a time saving state is performed than in the normal state. is configured to provide a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the ``jackpot B'' in which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is difficult to end (the condition for terminating the time-shortening state is difficult to be satisfied) is a jackpot type more advantageous to the player than the ``jackpot A''.

In the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a lottery of special symbols, the jackpot games of the same number of rounds are executed for all the jackpots, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a different number of round games may be executed according to the selected jackpot type. In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends for all the jackpots, and the number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is changed according to the jackpot type.

Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 24(c). FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. This V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table that defines game contents of a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed when a ball wins a prize (V win) in the V prize opening 165. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 defines the "jackpot C" in the entire range of "0 to 99".

This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the 10 rounds. Then, it is stipulated that a time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and ``4 times of time saving'' is defined as a period during which the time saving state continues, that is, a short period of time is defined until the lottery of special patterns is executed four times without winning a jackpot during the time saving state (until the lottery result of the fourth special pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)).

That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game (jackpot game executed in the special electric game) executed based on the V winning is configured to execute a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds than the jackpot game (jackpot game executed in the special pattern game) executed based on the special lottery. In other words, in terms of the amount of benefits (the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the game state is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving state than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the ball winning the special electric activation opening 643, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed based on the V winning during the role winning game is the V jacking type selection table 202c2 based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the ball entered the special electric activation opening 643, which triggered the execution of the V winning role winning game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference.

In the present embodiment, since only one jackpot type (jackpot C) is defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same jackpot game is executed even if the V prize is won by any of the role winning games. Also, a plurality of special electric operation openings may be provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set corresponding to the special electric operation opening in which the ball has won among the plurality of special electric operation openings. Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball wins in the V winning hole 165 while the role winning game is being executed, and the jackpot type may be selected based on the acquired value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is selected regardless of the game state set at the time when the big win is won or when the ball enters the V winning port 165. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be varied according to the game state set when the big win is won or when the ball enters the V winning port 165. In this case, , For example, just before the end of the time saving state (immediately before the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state stops), the normal figure winning game is executed, and when the V prize is won during the role per game executed in the state where the normal state after the time saving state is finished, that is, only when the V prize is won in the special electric game during the normal state, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the jackpot game (for example, the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 20 times) is set. You can

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot types is three, but the number of types is not limited to three, and may be two or less, or may be four or more. Also, the same jackpot type may be set in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols and in the case of winning the V prize in the special electric game. Further, the selection rate and type of the jackpot type to be selected this time may be varied based on the information on the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the content of the jackpot game and the content of transition of the game state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the past game history (jackpot history) as well. Also, in this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestive performance capable of suggesting to the player the kind of big win that is likely to be set at the time of the next big win based on the past history of big wins. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a normal table 202d1 that is used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time saving table 202d2 that is used when the time saving state is set. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is changed according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be varied.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c). FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 is a data table referred to when a normal state is set as a game state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of special symbols is a big win than when it is a loss.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the lottery result of the special symbol (special design) is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" with a variation time of 20 seconds. In FIG. 25 (b), in order to simplify the explanation of the variation pattern of the winning super reach, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198". However, in practice, a predetermined variation time (for example, a variation time of 60 seconds, a variation time of 100 seconds, and a variation time of 120 seconds) is defined in the corresponding value range of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit'' and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of ``51 to 198'', a variation pattern is set in which any variation time of ``60 seconds to 120 seconds'' corresponding to the acquired value is set.

In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in correspondence with the short loss with a variation time of 8 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", in the range of "180 to 194" in correspondence with normal reach with a variation time of 20 seconds, and in the range of "195 to 198" in correspondence with super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds. In addition, the lottery result is "loss" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown in the range of "195 to 198" for the same purpose as the case where the lottery result is "jackpot (hit)", and the explanation is simplified.

In other words, in the present embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the types of variable times that can be selected are made the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is made different. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (hit), the ratio of selecting a longer variation time is set higher than when it is a loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol variation under execution is, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot is, so that when the special symbol variation for a long variation time is executed, the player is prevented from getting tired of the game before the variation time elapses.

In this embodiment, that is, in this embodiment, as the variable time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the longer the variable time is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball can be prevented from entering the special symbol entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is configured to be the same, so that by grasping the length of the variable time to be set, it is possible to suppress the fact that the special symbol lottery result is revealed to the player in advance.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol lottery result (win/fail determination result) and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained.

Next, the contents of the time reduction table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 25(c). FIG.25(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the table 202d2 for time reduction. As shown in FIG. 25(c), the time saving table 202d2 defines the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the change type counter CS1, and the change pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(c), when the result of the success/failure determination (lottery result) is “win (big win)”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the variation time is 50 seconds. In the case of "out", "short out A" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in the range of "0 to 149", "short out B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 169", "short out C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "170 to 189", and "long out of range" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 196". A” is defined, and the values of “197, 198” are defined with “long deviation B” with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds.

As described above, during the time saving state, unlike during the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a loss, and the variable time that can be selected when winning a big win is configured to be longer than the variable time that can be selected when it is a loss.

In this embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes a game state advantageous to the player, and during that short period of time, special electric games are executed based on the normal symbol lottery. In addition, the termination condition (the number of times of time saving) based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of lottery) is set as the condition of ending the time saving state (the number of times of time saving).

Therefore, when a longer variation time is selected as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the period during which the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set can be lengthened. A special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, for example, when four times of the time saving state is set, when a big win (1/100) is won in the special pattern lottery for four times executed after the time saving state is set, a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as an added value. By constructing in this way, when a special pattern jackpot is won within a limited period of time saving, a more advantageous game can be offered to the player, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, even when the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the variation time to be selected as ``10 seconds to 50 seconds'' has a difference of 5 times at maximum, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the longer variation time will be selected.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), on the end screen of the jackpot game, a short remaining time mode 801 for indicating the length of the period of the time saving state (V rush period) is displayed. This short time remaining mode 801 is within the range until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is configured to display a value obtained by adding up the variable time determined in advance based on the winning information included in the already acquired special symbol reservation.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining short-time mode 801 is a display mode in which the fluctuation times of a plurality of outlier fluctuations are added together or a display mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of one big win fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 22, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) in this embodiment, acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number to be the winning of the normal pattern is set by a second winning random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202b, the winning of the normal pattern (second pattern) is determined. The second winning random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for normal pattern low probability and one for high probability when normal pattern winning is higher than the low probability, and the numbers of random numbers to be big wins included in each are set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 23(c). FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the case of the low probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit is defined as the value of "0" for the second random number counter C4 obtained, and in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit is defined in the range of "0 to 299" of the second random number counter C4 obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. Thus, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state of the low probability state of normal patterns and the time-saving state of the high probability state of normal patterns, it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal pattern winning game during the normal state, so that the normal pattern winning game is executed during the normal state and the ball wins in the normal electric prize winning device 640 can be made difficult to occur. On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (300/1000) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the general pattern winning game executed during the normal state, it is configured so that the ball is less likely to win the general electric prize winning device 640 than in the normal prize winning game executed during the time saving state. That is, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win the normal game in the normal state, and even if the game is won in the normal game, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric prize winning device 640 during the normal game.

In this way, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the winning of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643, the game is made more difficult to progress during the normal state than during the time saving state, thereby reliably preventing the ball from winning the special electric operation opening 643 triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the normal state and the execution of the prize winning game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described three processes, instead of regulating the winning of the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 based on the execution of the normal symbol lottery during the normal state, a short variation time (3 seconds, which is the same as during the time saving state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol even during the normal state. In other words, even if the lottery for normal symbols is easily executed in a short period of time, since the balls are restricted from winning the special electric operation opening 643 by the regulation in the above-mentioned three processes, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the special electric operation opening 643 and the execution of the role winning game with the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

Thus, by setting the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal state to be short, at the timing when the game state is switched, for example, at the timing when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal symbol variation with a long variation time executed during the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) is executed across the transition timing of the game state, and although the special symbol variation in the time saving state is started, the situation where the normal symbol drawing in the time saving state cannot be executed occurs. can be suppressed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time-saving state is managed for a period, it is possible to provide the player with a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited short-time period.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to regulate the winning of balls into the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state in the above-described three processes (the winning probability of the normal symbol, the winning rate of the ball to the general electric winning device 640 in the general symbol winning game, and the winning rate of the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 winning the special electric operation opening 643), but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be regulated in two or less processes. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 does not win the special electric activation opening 643, it enters the out opening 644 and the player is not given a privilege (for example, a prize ball).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a player with a different privilege (a privilege different from the privilege of executing a game per accessory) when winning a prize in the general electric prize device 640 while suppressing the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 in the normal state, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game. In addition, in the state in which the low-probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to provide the player with the added value when winning the normal pattern.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the big win lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results on the second symbol display device 83, according to the values of the counters and the like.

Ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Concretely, using the value of the acquired general pattern variation type counter CS2, it is configured so that the normal pattern variation time is determined.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, and the like. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first winning random number table 202a, a second winning random number table 202b, a jackpot type selection table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and various operation scenario tables 202e. Since the first winning random number table 202a, the second winning random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the description thereof will be omitted.

The various motion scenario table 202e is a data table having motion scenarios in which the details of the motions of the various movable members whose motion control is managed by main controller 110 are defined in advance in chronological order. In this embodiment, when controlling the motion of the movable member, the motion scenario that matches the current motion control condition is read from the various motion scenario tables 202e, and the read motion scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the content of the motion scenario stored in the storage area is periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds), and if there is a motion scenario in which the movable member is variably operated in the area corresponding to the updated value, motion control is executed based on that motion scenario. Further, each action scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set for each event (jackpot game, normal figure winning game, accessory winning game) for controlling the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in the action scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a normal game) in which it is necessary to control the actions of a plurality of movable members within one event, the content of action control to be executed for the plurality of movable members is defined.

Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the various action scenario table 202e includes a jackpot action scenario table 202e1, a prize action scenario table 202e2, a normal figure action scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4.

First, referring to FIG. 26(b), the contents of the action scenario table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 26(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the action scenario table 202e2 for each role. The role-winning operation scenario table 202e2 is a data table that defines a role-winning scenario in which action contents during the role-winning game are set. A grace period after the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF) is stipulated, and operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) which is set when a winning-accessory game is started and whose value is incremented by 1 periodically (every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed) is executed.

Specifically, when the accessory winning game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to "1". Since an operation scenario in which the storage solenoid 209c is turned on is defined as a corresponding operation scenario in the scenario counter "1", the storage solenoid 209c is set to on at the same time as the start of the role-winning game, and the storage valve 66a is moved to a state where balls can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is incremented every 4 milliseconds, and the opening period is terminated when the scenario counter is "25", that is, 0.1 seconds after the start of the winning game. That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is changed to the storage state using the period from when the accessory winning game is started until the V winning device 65 is opened. With this configuration, even if the ball enters the V winning device 65 vigorously immediately after the V winning device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already changed to the storage state at the timing when the V winning device 65 is opened, so that the ball can be surely prevented from passing through the storage valve 66a and entering the V winning port 165.例文帳に追加

Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "375", that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have passed since the start of the winning-accessory game, a scenario is defined in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off and the V open/close door 65a (V attacker) is closed. After executing the closing control of the V open/close door 65a (V Attacker), that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "376", the ending period of the accessory winning game is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF. Then, until the value of the scenario counter reaches "750", the closing state (ending period) of the accessory winning game is set.

That is, in the role winning game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is opened after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter "375"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the role winning game at an unintended timing due to the occurrence of an unforeseen situation at the start or end of the role winning game.

Next, the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The operation of the first movable valve 66b of this embodiment is controlled so as to move according to a predetermined operation pattern while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The value of the scenario counter is updated (added by 1) by the process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 .

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the first movable valve 66b in this embodiment is configured to be positioned in either a V winning possible state in which a ball can enter the V winning port 165 or a V winning difficult state in which it is difficult to cause a ball to enter the V winning port 165. The first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 defines an operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on (a state in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165) and an operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning opening 165) for the range of the value of the scenario counter from "1" to "1500".

Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, until 5 seconds have passed since the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 was set, and is set to be turned on when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1251" to "1500", that is, between 5 seconds and 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. operating scenarios are specified. Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value "1500", when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed, the value of the scenario counter is switched from "1500" to "1", and thereafter, operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for permitting or prohibiting the entry of balls into the V winning opening 165, is configured to variably operate so as to switch to a state in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 for only 0.5 seconds during 5.5 seconds. Thus, when the ball reaches the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and enters the V winning port 165 is 1/11. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand in which role winning game the ball will enter the V winning opening 165, and the player can be motivated to play all the role winning games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls win the V winning device 65 during one accessory winning game, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability of the ball entering the V prize opening 165) in the role-winning game becomes about 1/11, so that the player can be prevented from being provided with the jackpot game excessively.

In the present embodiment, the operation contents of the first movable valve 66b are configured so that the same operation contents are always set while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. seconds), and a second operation pattern defined as an ON period (0.3 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, but without being limited to this, for example, a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 may be provided, and based on the measurement result of the measuring means, it may be configured to switch to a different operation scenario. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within 1 hour after the power is turned on, or 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after the power is turned on), it is preferable to set the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON to the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be OFF. By constructing in this way, the big win game (V big win game) can be easily executed during the time-saving game only for a specific period, and the player can be made to play the game aiming at the period, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, the control contents of the operation scenario may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 may be started from the initial state (scenario counter value "1") at the timing when a specific jackpot game is executed or finished. A special operation scenario may be set in which the proportion of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON is higher than the proportion of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be OFF. Then, once this special operation scenario is set, the time saving state is set after that, and it is preferable that the setting is continued until the time saving state ends. As a result, the player can continue playing the game by setting the special action scenario. In this case, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player that the special action scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special action scenario is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(b), the contents of the action scenario table 202e3 per normal pattern will be described. FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the action scenario table 202e3 per normal figure. This normal pattern winning operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table storing the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery, and the operation scenario corresponding to the game state set at the time of starting the normal pattern winning game is set.

Specifically, in the normal pattern winning operation scenario table 202e3, a normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 defining an operation scenario of a normal pattern winning game executed in a normal state and a normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 for reducing working hours defining an operation scenario of a normal pattern winning game executed in a reduced working time state are defined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27(c), the contents of the normal normal map winning scenario 202e31 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e31 for normal normal map. This normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 is an operation scenario that is set when it is determined that the game state is the normal state (S1118 in FIG. 48: No) at the time when the winning normal pattern variation is stopped (settled) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48).

The scenario 202e31 for the normal scenario defines an operation scenario for setting on and off the general electric solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general electric prize device 640 and the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the winning ball to the general electric prize device 640, respectively, when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1050".

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1025", that is, until 4.1 seconds have passed since the normal normal game scenario 202e31 was set (after the normal game is executed in the normal state), the general electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off (the ball flows down to the out port 644). 026" to "1050", that is, for 0.1 seconds between 4.1 seconds and 4.2 seconds after the normal normal map per scenario 202e31 is executed, the normal electric solenoid is turned on (electric accessory 640a is open), The operation scenario is defined so that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643).

That is, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal state, the normal pattern per game of the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 second) is executed. Furthermore, even if the ball enters the general electric prize winning device 640 during the open state for 0.1 second, the second movable valve 643 is changed to the position (see FIG. 4) where the prize winning ball flows down to the out port 644 at that time, so that the ball can be reliably prevented from entering the special electric operation port 643.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the scenario 202e32 for normal drawing for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e32 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 is an operation scenario that is set when it is determined that the game state is the normal state (S1118: Yes in FIG. 48) at the time when the winning normal pattern variation is stopped (determined) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48).

A normal electric solenoid for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the normal electric prize winning device 640 and a second movable valve solenoid 209e for controlling the operation of the second movable valve 642 for distributing the flow destination of the winning ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 for the scenario counter value range of "1" to "1025" for the scenario 202e32 for reducing working hours.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "25", that is, until 0.1 seconds have passed since the normal normal game winning scenario 202e31 was set (after the normal game winning game was executed in the normal state), the general electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the ball flows down to the special electric activation port 643). The value is in the range of "26" to "775", that is, for three seconds between 0.1 and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 for the normal working hours is set, the normal solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously set to ON, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range "776" to "1024", that is, the scenario 202e32 for the normal working hours is set. Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds have passed since then, the normal electric solenoid 209e is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation opening 643), and when the value of the scenario counter reaches "1025", that is, the upper limit value stipulated in the scenario 202e32 for the time-saving general drawing, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off (the ball is out of the opening 644 The operation scenario is defined so that the state of flowing down to the

In other words, when the normal pattern per game is executed in the time saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the normal pattern per game is immediately executed for 3 seconds after a short closed state (0.1 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to win the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 than the general pattern per game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving normal game scenario 202e32, the second movable valve 643 can be set to a position (see FIG. 5) that allows the ball to enter the special electric operation opening 643 during the period in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal game.

In addition, in the above-described normal normal figure winning scenario 202e31 and time saving normal figure winning scenario 202e32, since the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is defined to be the same, the operation control contents based on the operation scenario can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable member can be simplified.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this general pattern winning game, a time end condition established based on the passage of time (a condition established in which the normal pattern per scenario is updated to the upper limit value) and a winning end condition established when the number of winning balls to the general electric winning device 640 reaches the upper limit value (for example, 5) are set. When a normal game is played, the prize-winning end condition is set so that the time end condition is satisfied first. As a result, for example, in a general-purpose game, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally winning a large amount of balls into the general-purpose electrical winning device 640 .

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 has a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 55) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 54) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

29, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a prize number counter 203e, an operation counter group 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a time reduction end flag 203j, and a prize winning flag 20. 3k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment).

A special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting variable display of special symbols, and is a storage area for storing various counter values after being shifted when various counter values are stored in a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a when the special symbols stop varying.

In the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the start winning are stored respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing a special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-described special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a (the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) to the special symbol retaining ball execution area in order to execute processing such as setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. . It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area in which the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) accompanying the detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), it acquires the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer, and stores them in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one reserved area so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to one time. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant.

In addition, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) stores each counter value when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, and is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display effects of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 stores the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-described normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b (the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2) in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83. ). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

A first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, based on the winning to the special symbol entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (standby number) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to a maximum of 4 times. The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the special symbol ball entrance 64 (start winning). The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the start winning is detected and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), performs a big win lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern and the stop classification which are decided here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop classification command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of variable display reserved balls (waiting times) performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to a maximum of 1 time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls that is stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the V winning device 65 and the number of balls winning the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the accessory winning game. Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a detection opening (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, the value is updated by adding one. On the other hand, when one round ends, after it is determined whether or not the winning number of the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) matches the discharged number (the cumulative number of detection results of the detection means capable of detecting the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening), the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various set operation scenarios, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. When any operation scenario in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, update processing of the counter values is executed as processing executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

In this embodiment, scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed redundantly. For example, a scenario related to the normal figure per game and a scenario related to the accessory per game are configured to be executable at the same time. Accordingly, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e, but the scenario counters are not limited to this, and may be provided as many scenario counters as the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously. In this case, when a scenario counter is provided with a type and a new operation scenario is set, a scenario counter type that is not used is determined, a scenario counter is set based on the result of the determination, use information is set for indicating in which operation scenario the set scenario counter is to be used, and use information set in the storage means of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is set. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the storage means in which the usage information is set with a backup function capable of retaining the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as with the other various configurations of the RAM 203 . By configuring in this way, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like during the operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after power restoration can be continued from the state before the power failure.

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and stores the game state corresponding to the game state (setting state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, the time saving state is stored.

Further, in a state in which a jackpot game or a prize winning game is executed, a winning game state (jackpot state, prize winning game state) indicating that each winning game is being executed, and type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed are also stored. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is configured to set a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203j after the jackpot game ends (S1914, 1915 in FIG. 56). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, based on the special design lottery (variation), the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203j becomes 0, the time reduction state is completed and it is configured to shift to the normal state. can be configured to In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203j.

Also, in the present embodiment, as the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j, only the condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (variation) is set. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special normal winning), the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be subtracted, or when the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643. It may be configured to subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203j. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is configured to be decremented by 1, but depending on the type of end condition that has been met, a plurality of values of the time-saving counter 203j may be collectively (for example, 2) subtracted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The big hit flag 203i is set to ON when the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the special figure entrance 64. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The time saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time saving end condition is satisfied. This time saving end flag 203h is set to ON when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation in the time saving state (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined to be ON, the value of the time saving counter 203j is reset to "0", the process for terminating the time saving state is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45), and set to OFF (see S804 in FIG. 45).

In addition, during the special symbol variation (during the final variation of the time saving state) executed in the state that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, it is also set to OFF when the ball wins the V prize opening 165 and the V jackpot game is executed (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, and the ending process for determining the end of the time saving is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols. Then, when the special symbol variation is interrupted by the role winning game during the variation of the special symbols and the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed with the opportunity of the role winning game, the time saving end flag 203h is set to OFF.

Therefore, for example, even if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the time saving end flag 203h is set to ON, and the interrupted special pattern fluctuation is restarted after the jackpot game is finished, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the fluctuation stop timing of the restarted special pattern fluctuation. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the subtraction processing of the time saving counter 203h is executed when the special symbol variation is started, the subtraction processing of the time saving end flag 203h is not performed when the special symbol variation is restarted. Therefore, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j is executed from the time when the next special symbol variation after the special symbol variation after the restart is started.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to play the game for a longer time in the set time-saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, only the final fluctuation of the time saving state is updated when the special symbol is stopped from changing, but the process is not limited to this. For example, even when the value of the time saving counter 203j is a predetermined value (for example, 2), the process of updating the time saving state may be performed when the special symbol is stopped from changing.

The role winning flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the role winning game is to be executed, and is set to ON when the role winning game is to be executed. This accessory winning flag 203k is set to ON when a ball that has won a prize in the general electric winning device 640 during a normal drawing winning game wins a special electric activation opening 643, and at that time, the accessory winning game is not being executed (see S1307 in FIG. 50). Then, in various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is referred to when determining whether or not the role winning game is in progress, and is set to OFF when the role winning game ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the award winning flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol variation is interrupted.

The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, and when it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variation time is restarted.

This special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted). In the present embodiment, when a ball is won in the special electric operation port 643, the role winning game is configured to be executable, and when the role winning game is performed, the variation of the special symbol being executed is stopped.

The special symbol variation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol, and a value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43) is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the special symbol variation in-execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. It is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 40) (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 203a is 0 (S204 of FIG. 40: No), a special symbol variation stop process (see S287 of FIG. 45) for stopping the special symbol during variation is executed.

Furthermore, this special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured so that the processing for subtracting the value is interrupted when the accessory per game or the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the per-accessory game or during the jackpot game.

The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the V winning hole during the role winning game, and is set to ON when the ball enters the V winning hole during the role winning game. The setting state of this V flag 203p is referred to in the control process for the role (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the start of the big win game (V big win game) is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). After that, it is set to OFF (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol reserve lamp, a specific winning aperture solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 650b of the specific winning aperture 650a forward about the lower side of the opening and closing plate 650b, a V winning aperture solenoid 209b for driving the opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and the V winning device 6. 5, a first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, a second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the electric prize winning device 640, and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory 640a. 205 to transmit various commands and control signals to them.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 comprising a group of switches and a group of sensors not shown (for example, a storage sensor 65s for detecting a ball stored in a storage portion formed in a storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Various processing is executed based on the

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated), the shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of performance at the time of super ready-to-win. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the error type to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 30A, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the executed special symbol variation. In this variation performance, a detailed variation pattern is determined on the basis of the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the winning/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play the game (special figure game) while predicting whether or not the current special symbol variation wins a jackpot by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, the third pattern display device 81 does not execute the variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, and the performance (V rush performance) for guiding the game contents of the special electric game aiming at the V win game is executed with the normal symbol lottery as a trigger. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, various variation patterns are defined as variation patterns to be referred to when the game state is the normal state, and variation patterns to be referred to when the game state is the time saving state are not defined. In addition, when the third pattern is displayed in a small size on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the time saving state in correspondence with the special pattern variation, only the variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 may be defined.

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the sound lamp controller 113 to grasp the status of operation control for various devices executed by the main controller 110, and is formed from the same data table as the various operation scenario tables 202e that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has. This action scenario table 222b is referred to when setting an action scenario corresponding to the command received from the main controller 110 side, when a command indicating the start of action control (for example, a command indicating the start of a winning game) is received. The operation scenario set here is updated and controlled so as to synchronize with the update operation on the main controller 110 side.

With this configuration, only by outputting only a command indicating the start of operation control from the main controller 110 side, the sound lamp control device 113 side can easily grasp the operation status of various devices and future operation development. In the present embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the audio lamp control device 113 side for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main controller 110 side.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(b). As shown in FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol pending ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a production counter 223f, a sub-state setting area 223g, a look-ahead counter 223h, a short time counter 223i, an uninformed period storage area 223j, and an uninformed pending number. At least a storage area 223k, an interruption flag 223m, a special hit flag 223n, an extension flag 223p, a V rush flag 223q, a variable time counter 223r, a notified pending number storage area 223s, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of variable effect pending balls (waiting times) suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the reserved ball number is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of variable display is added by the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of pending balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is updated according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, it controls image drawing so that the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure stop classification selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop classification command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation stop classification output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 98. It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.

Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figure reservations for which the variable time is foreseen among the number of times of saving time set as the time saving state, and the value corresponding to the number of times of saving time set when the time saving state is set is set, and subtracted according to the number of special figure reservations that have performed the look-ahead of the variable time. Then, it is referred to when the value of the time short period counter 223i, which will be described later, becomes 0, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, the special symbol variation is executed in spite of the time saving state, and processing for displaying a dedicated effect (see FIG. 19 (a)) is executed.

The short-time counter 223i is a counter indicating the time of special symbol variation (special symbol variation time) until the time-saving state ends, and is set with a value obtained by accumulating a plurality of special symbol variation times until the end of the special symbol variation satisfying the termination condition of the time-saving state. At this time, the value of the short time counter 223i is referred to and decremented (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72) in the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control process 113.

The value indicated by the short time counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining period of the V rush in the V rush effect executed during the short time state (see FIG. 12(c)). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the same game method (left-handed game) is used during the normal state, during the jackpot game, and during the time saving state, and at the timing when the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c easily reaches the upper limit (4).

Therefore, on the ending screen (see FIG. 12(a)) of the jackpot game in which the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, the fluctuation time until the time saving state ends (cumulative value of the fluctuation time for 4 times of special figure fluctuation) is displayed based on the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time (special symbol winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b).

In addition, even if the number of time saving times is greater than the upper limit value (4) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, or even if the number of times of time saving is set to 4 times, if the special symbol reserved number (special figure reserved number) at the end of the jackpot game does not reach 4, the value of the short time counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reserved information acquired at that time, and the special figure added to the short time counter 223i from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of handle reservations is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol reservation information is acquired, the special symbol variation time is added to the short time counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol reservation information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

The uninformed period storage area 223j is in a state where the variable time can be added to the short time counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, despite receiving the winning command, When the special symbol variable time value corresponding to the special symbol reservation information included in the winning command cannot be added to the short time counter 223i (for example, during the jackpot game, during the role game), according to the special symbol reservation information included in the received winning command. It is an area that temporarily stores the special figure fluctuation time.

The value (special figure fluctuation time) stored in this unnotified period storage area 223j is read when the time period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time period counter 223i. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not the time period can be added, when the winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the processing of reading the special figure fluctuation time included in the winning command, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unreported pending number storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands whose special symbol variation time is stored in the above-described unreported period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol pending balls.

The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the short time counter 223h is not decremented, and is set to ON when the value of the short time counter 223h is not decremented, that is, when the accessory winning game or the jackpot game is executed.

The special winning flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special winning ("jackpot B") is included in the reserved special symbols. This special winning flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot ending process (see S4914 of FIG. 69) that the prize information indicating the special winning is included in the reserved storage (see S5013 of FIG. 69).

In the present embodiment, when there is a special win in the reserved special prize obtained at the end of the jackpot game, only the period until the end of the special pattern variation corresponding to the special prize is displayed as a short period of time during the V rush, and furthermore, an effect (heaven mode) for informing the player that the special prize exists in the reserved special prize is executed (see FIG. 17(a)).

With this configuration, the player can be notified in advance that a big win game (a big win game won in a special figure lottery) will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after a short period of time when the display is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 has passed), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, in this embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the special win is terminated is notified as a short period of time, so that the remaining period of the short period of time at the time of the big win game (special win) can be set to 0 second. Therefore, since it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many seconds later the jackpot game will be executed, the player can play the game while enjoying how many times the V jackpot game can be executed in a short period of the heaven mode (during the period until the special prize jackpot game is executed).

Furthermore, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the special win is terminated is notified as a short period of time, so that the player cannot determine in advance the special pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the special pattern reserve acquired after the special prize reserve corresponding to the special win. As a result, for example, when a big win game corresponding to a special win is executed at the stage of remaining 10 seconds of the time period, the player grasps in advance that the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be executed next is 10 seconds, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing his desire to play.

The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the normal pattern winning game is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and is set to ON when the normal pattern winning game is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. In this embodiment, as the operation scenario of the normal pattern winning game, there are a normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 corresponding to the normal pattern winning game in the normal state and a time reduction normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 corresponding to the normal pattern winning game in the time reduction state.

Therefore, for example, when the normal pattern per game is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the normal pattern per game during the time saving state may be executed even after the game state shifts to the normal state. When such a state occurs, the end timing of the V rush performance indicating the game mode in the time saving state is extended to the end timing of the normal per game game (see FIG. 16(c)). As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the period (V rush period) during which the player should aim for the V prize.

The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating the V rush period, is set to ON when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery) in a normal state, and is set to OFF when a termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied. This V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously set to ON even when a jackpot game is executed during a short period of time (during V rush). As a result, it is possible to easily set a period during which various types of cumulative information (the number of winning V jackpot games and information indicating the number of winning balls during the V rush period) are calculated during the V rush period.

The fluctuation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of a special symbol, and when a fluctuation pattern command of a special symbol is received, a fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set, and referred to and subtracted in the effect update process (S4111 of FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice ramp control process 113 (see S5303 and S5304 of FIG. 72). The value of the variation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol variation during execution at the timing at which the special symbol variation can be interrupted, and is used to set different presentation modes according to the remaining period.

The reported pending number storage area 223s is an area for storing the special figure pending number corresponding to the variable time already added to the value of the time short period counter 223i, and when the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is updated, the updated value is stored and the value is subtracted when the special symbol variation is completed. Then, when a new time saving state is set by subtracting the value stored in the notified reserved number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h at the end of the jackpot game in which the new number of times of time saving is set, the number of special pattern reserved balls already reported as the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted, and the number of special pattern reserved balls capable of newly adding and displaying the time period is used to correspond to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In this embodiment, it is configured so as not to execute the performance suggesting the variable time corresponding to the special figure suspension obtained in the normal state to the player, but it is not limited to this, and the performance mode may be varied according to the contents of the special figure suspension in the normal state.

For example, the stop type of the special symbols (combination of the third symbols indicating the big win) may be variably set based on the variation time corresponding to the acquired special symbol suspension, and when the big win is won in a state where the total variation time of the special symbol suspension exceeds 100 seconds, the combination of the third symbols in which the odd numbers are stop-displayed in a square pattern may be displayed.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the normal state may be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of the big win by the special drawing lottery.

In the present embodiment, when entering the V rush, it is configured to notify all the variable time based on the acquired special figure suspension, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to notify the player only a part of the variable time based on the acquired special figure suspension, or by the player operating the operation means, The variable time of the special symbol for indicating the duration of the V rush (period until the time saving state ends) can be selected. You can

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to sum up and notify the variation times corresponding to multiple special figure variations that are executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied, but it is not limited to this. In this case, for example, the display mode of the special figure suspension corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating the character, and according to the type of the displayed character, the player may roughly grasp the length of the variation time of the special figure variation corresponding to the special figure suspension.

In the present embodiment, since the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is always set after the jackpot game is executed, the processing for setting the V rush flag is executed when the jackpot game is executed. It may not be set. In this case, after the jackpot game is over (during the ending period of the jackpot game), whether or not the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over is discriminated based on the set jackpot type, and when it is decided that the time saving state is set, it can be changed after holding the special figure acquired at that point.

Next, game contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the normal symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 is a timing chart showing the game flow when the normal pattern winning game is executed in the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, in the normal state, the flow of the game when the normal figure per game is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, a game (special electric game) that can progress in the order of a normal pattern winning game, a role winning game, and a big winning game (V big winning game) is configured to be executed when winning a winning lottery of normal symbols. In other words, it is configured so that a big winning game can be executed without performing a lottery for special symbols.

First, in the normal state, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the normal pattern winning game based on the normal normal pattern winning scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27(c)) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. As shown in FIG. 27(c), in the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state, it takes 4 seconds (t1) for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the normal pattern winning game is started. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the normal per game game, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation opening 643, and then the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

Therefore, in the general-purpose winning game executed in the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general electrical prize winning device 640, and even if the prize is won, the prize-winning ball is guided to the out port 644.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 during the normal state and the performance of the accessory winning game. By configuring in this way, even if the same game method is executed in the normal state in which the special game aiming at execution of the big winning game is executed by lottery of special symbols and the time reduction state in which the special electric game aiming at execution of the big winning game by lottery of normal symbols is executed, the execution of the big winning game by the special electric game in the normal state can be suppressed, and the excessive provision of the big winning game to the player can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) during the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated, so it is necessary to prevent a situation where the special symbol lottery is not executed during the time saving state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the same game method is executed in the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game in which only the lottery of normal symbols is executed during the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the operation contents of the general pattern per game are set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state, but without being limited to this, for example, in a part of the general pattern per game executed during the normal state, the same operation scenario as the general pattern per game executed during the time reduction state may be selected. This allows the player to play a game with unexpectedness.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. As described above, when the normal game is executed in the normal state, the ball that has won the normal electric prize device 640 does not enter the special electric operation opening 643, so the special electric prize winning game that is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 is not executed. A new normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) is executed based on what has been done. Note that the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31(h)) is set to a motion scenario in which it is always driven while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, so regardless of whether or not a winning role game is executed, the first movable valve 66b (see FIG. 27(a)) is driven according to the motion pattern based on the first movable valve motion scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow of the game when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed among the game flows when the normal figure winning game is executed in the time saving state will be described.

First, in the time saving state, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. 28, it takes 0.1 seconds (t1) for the electric accessary 640a to be in the open state after the start of the normal pattern winning game, and then 3 seconds (t2) for the open state, 1 second (t3) for the closed state, and the normal pattern per game ends. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the normal per game game, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation opening 643, and then the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

Therefore, in the general pattern winning game executed during the time saving state, the ball is easily won into the general electric prize winning device 640 (easier to win than the general prize winning game in the normal state), and the winning ball is more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643 (easier to win than the general prize winning game in the normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to win the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 in the normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state, and to facilitate the execution of the accessory winning game.

The ball that has entered the special electric operation opening 643 and the passing of the ball (winning) are detected by the special electric operation opening winning switch (FIG. 32(e)) not shown, and the detection result triggers the opening operation of the V winning device 65 to execute the prize winning game. When the role winning game is started, after a waiting period of 0.1 seconds (t5) has passed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) in order to open the V opening/closing door 65a, and then the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF for 1.4 seconds (t7). Also, with the start of the role-winning game, the retention solenoid 209c is turned on for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the retention valve 66a in the retention state. In other words, during a period in which the ball can enter the V winning device 65 by the role winning game, the storage valve 66a is maintained in the storage state (see FIG. 7), so that it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165 during one role winning game.

When the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the period t8 has elapsed, one ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down toward the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operating scenario 202e4 so as to alternately switch between a closed state for 5 seconds (t10) and an open state for 0.5 seconds (t9). is in an open state, the ball flows down toward the V winning opening 165. - 特許庁When the ball enters the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by the V winning switch (FIG. 32(i)) not shown, and the big winning game (V big winning game) is started based on the detection result.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the general pattern winning game is executed during the time saving state, it is easy to cause the general electric winning device 640 to win the ball (easier to win than the general electric winning game in the normal state), and the winning ball is easy to enter the special electric activation opening 643. (difficult to win a prize than the normal game in the state) and, even when the ball wins the general electric prize winning device 640, the winning ball hardly enters the special electric operating port 643 so as to execute the normal prize winning game.

By constructing in this way, even if the game method aiming at the special ball entrance 64 which triggers the lottery of the special symbols and the game method aiming at the through gate 67 which triggers the lottery of the normal symbols are made to be the same in order to continuously execute the special symbol variation during the time saving state, the probability of executing the winning game can be greatly changed according to the game state. In addition, even if an act of illegally winning the ball into the general electric prize winning device 640 (for example, holding the ball in the vicinity of the electric role object 640a with a magnet and making the ball win a prize in accordance with the opening timing) is executed in the normal state winning game, it is possible to prevent the winning ball from winning the special electric operation opening 643, so that the player can be provided with a fair game.

In addition, in this embodiment, not only the game for establishing the lottery opportunity of the special pattern or the lottery opportunity of the normal pattern, but also the normal pattern winning game, the role winning game, and the big winning game can be executed in the left-handed game, so that the game can be played smoothly without making the player feel the trouble of changing the game method.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variation effect) and notice effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 10). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a character ROM 234 , a resident video RAM 235 , a normal video RAM 236 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 , and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113 , and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 via a bus line 240 . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different lottery probability of special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls put out for one special symbol jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including recovery from a power failure; hereinafter the same). Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but reading of the data of the first page requires a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take time to read the instructions constituting the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237.

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the relevant data is read from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks in which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks.

Since the ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without considering the address position of the defective data block which is different in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether or not one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the designated address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while data is set in one bank, transfers one page of data including data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to the one bank, and sets the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading out from and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND-type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND-type flash memory 234a. This NOR-type ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

The MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and designate the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240 when the system reset is released. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and designates the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. While the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem unique to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order for the MPU 231 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. i. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, by storing in the NOR type ROM 234d a predetermined number of instructions from those to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released. A program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data (eg, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program. It is programmed to transfer to area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is canceled while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the designation of the internal bus address as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed to set the command pointer 231a to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then executes the rest of the boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program is set as the second predetermined address.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after releasing the system reset, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM composed of the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) transmitted from the MPU 231, develops the image drawn in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the third pattern display device 81.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231 at intervals (20 milliseconds) between image drawing processing and display processing. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, the display control device 114 is configured such that the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image drawing processing can be performed by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. - 特許庁Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

The display control device 114 is configured such that, when drawing an image using image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and the time required for reading the data can be saved.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

For the transfer instructions of the image data that MPU231 and the transfer data of the drawing list are transferred to the image controller 237, the first address (the top address of storage), the final address (the final address of the storage), and the transfer destination (normal storage) Includes the first address of the local video RAM235 and the normal video RAM236) and the first address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM235 or regular video RAM236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time can be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a and then transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of the image data so that the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the display on the third pattern display device 81 are not in time for the required time.

Further, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character pattern area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image for displaying the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 by a variable performance when the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the special figure entrance 64 is detected.

When the power supply unit 251 starts supplying power, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 34 . FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG.

At this time, upon receiving a variation pattern command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. and are alternately displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variable pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stopped type command, the display variable patterns sent from the audio lamp control device 113 and the display stopped type command separate commands to determine the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110, and is in FIG. 34 (B. ) The image shown in) is displayed, and the image shown in FIG.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped while the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the special symbol entrance 64 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the image controller 2 is controlled by the MPU 231 so that the images shown in FIGS. 37. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation performance image when the power is turned on is already resident in the variation image area 235b when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the entry of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 is detected while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 35A and 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 35(a) shows the rear A corresponding to the "town stage", and FIG. Also, FIG. 28 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 35, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 so as to be longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. After the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the image between the position a and the position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the rear image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81.

When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding rear image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the display area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Specifically, on the rear surface E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their display positions fixed. On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the third pattern display device 81 displays a repeated back image that returns to the back image showing the morning glow.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 with all image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the ``town stage'', which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced by keeping all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the frequently displayed ``town stage'' permanently in the back face image area 235c. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage", as shown in FIG. Further, image data corresponding to the back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the power is turned on.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but if this is done, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when the stage change is determined by lottery at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and can be scrolled or displayed while changing the color tone with the lapse of time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. Therefore, after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by scrolling the range from position b' to position d using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. I can.

Similarly, for the rear face E, the range of image data is set so that the transfer of the image data of the remaining images from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back planes B to D, the image data stored in the back plane image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from the position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a smooth manner.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. . As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. Thus, when the third pattern display device 81 performs the variable performance, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND type flash memory 234a, the third pattern display device 81 can quickly start the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the third pattern display device 81 does not start the variable performance immediately after the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first pattern display device 37 starts the variable performance.

In the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the rear pattern such as a wooden box and the main pattern consisting of the rear pattern and the accessory patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. are also resident as main patterns to which the numbers '0' to '9' are not attached. These image data are used for the demonstration performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variation performance associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation performance is stopped. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e. By reading the image data pre-resident in 5e, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 reads the image data preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command, so that the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the corresponding error message can be immediately displayed after receiving the error command.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the type of the image data. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes a one-frame image drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby developing the one-frame image in that frame buffer. Then, the pattern display device 81 is caused to display the one-frame image.

Thus, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and at the same time, read out the one-frame image previously drawn from the other frame buffer, and display the read-out one-frame image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 to be either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the completion of the image drawing processing of one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are specified by alternately replacing either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data determination flag 233i, a drawing object buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag. 233z at least.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is an area for storing a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table defining transfer data information and transfer timing of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the one effect displayed by the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, and stored in this data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each performance mode of each performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command from the main controller 110. For example, the display data tables corresponding to the variable performance, the opening performance, the round performance, the ending performance and the demonstration performance are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop pattern indicating the failure is finally stop-displayed, and if the stop type of the variable performance is either the big win A or the big win B, the stop patterns showing the big win are finally stop-displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now shifted to a special game state and the large opening normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round performance is a performance for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

As described above, the demonstration performance is a performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting prize is not started even after the lapse of a predetermined time after one variable performance is stopped. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time, in correspondence with the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object constituting an image of one frame, and also defines drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of sprite.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. When the enlargement rate is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and when the enlargement rate is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a smaller size than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, drawing information for each sprite, such as one back image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . . . ), an effect expressing the insertion of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. This back face type describes information specifying whether to display one of the back faces A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of ``town stage'', ``forest stage'', ``river stage'', ``sky stage'', and ``island stage'') or to display a back image different from the back faces AE. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the rear faces A to E as a drawing object when the display of any one of the rear faces A to E is specified by the rear face type, and also specifies the range of the rear face image to be displayed for the frame according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, the display data table defines only the back surface type as the drawing content of the back surface image, but instead of this, the back surface type and the position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image displayed when the image drawing (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the start of drawing of the image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on the display data table, depending on the back face type. (Information indicating whether the display of the pattern display device 81 is information indicating the elapsed time since the start) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. The reason why the offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third pattern is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before and the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time, and the offset information from the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before is described in the pattern offset information until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is described. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Since each third pattern is attached with a specific number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number attached to the third pattern, and the offset information is represented by the difference in the number attached to each third pattern, so that the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

Further, in the pattern offset information, a predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time is set so as to be the time during which the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed. While the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time during that time, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the image content to be drawn next is identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) to be described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110.

Here, when a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, a large load is imposed on the activation and execution of the program, which is complicated and voluminous due to the diversification of the effect images. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, so that various performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

The reason why the display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table is that the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, since the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, the display contents cannot be predicted, and therefore the display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above cannot be provided. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table describes transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer object image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the prescribed sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the prescribed sprite is started according to the display data table, and the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the transfer object image data corresponding to the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, null data is defined corresponding to that address, which means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 37).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the transfer data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the end address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a variation pattern command for display) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, and if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring, and the generated drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred to the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is necessary for light drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a variation pattern command for display) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 in the display control device 114. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It can be transferred from ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 .

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data whose transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address is defined in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Therefore, the transfer start timing can be instructed so that the image data of a predetermined sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the D-type flash memory 234a, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, the third pattern display device 81 is set to OFF in order to display an image other than the power-on image (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 and the like.

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, selects the display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, describing the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, describing the content of image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, if the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f (that is, if Null data is not described), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) containing the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in display setting processing for V interrupt processing (see S6303 in FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed, pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later. Add.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can be surely stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 38, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the back image used in the image of one frame, the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), and the character (character 1, character 2, . It is a thing. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the address thereof, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The image controller 237 performs scaling processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, translucency processing according to the translucency value, and synthesis with other sprites according to the α blending information on a standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from various video RAMs. After applying processing, color tone correction processing according to color information, filtering processing according to filter designation information by a method designated by the information, and performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, an image obtained by drawing is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU231 shows the drawing data tables stored in the displayed data table buffer 233D, and the contents of the drawing specified by the pointer 233F, the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold image that displays the holding ball number, and a warning image that notify the occurrence of an error). Based on, a detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame is generated, and a drawing list is created by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table.

Also, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), character (character 1, character 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e contains transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the storage source start address and storage source end address in the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads the image data from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the performance displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is completed, and executes various processes to be performed in accordance with the completion of the performance.

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are inevitably unstored by storing the image data of one sprite, so the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

When transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86), and the image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying, from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c), a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. The information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the driving signal, thereby executing the display processing for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted every time drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the completion of the image drawing processing of one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are specified by alternately replacing either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (see S7002 in FIG. 81(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and is set to OFF when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S in FIG. 78B). 6805, see S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is set to OFF when a display data table other than the fixed display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S68 in FIG. 78B). 05, see S6905 in FIG. 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 39 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing that is started when power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the start-up processing, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, and 999, respectively, in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process accompanying the ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 (start winning) and the ball entering the general electric winning device 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the special electric starting gate winning processing is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passage processing (S109) and the V passage processing (S110) are executed. Details of the special electric starting gate winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the V-passing process, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. The shooting control process is a process of determining whether to shoot the ball on or off on condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, special symbol variation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104) performs various determinations (validity determination) and determination of the special symbols based on the acquired counter values, and controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variation display in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control, or sets various commands for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation display effects of the third and fourth symbols, and displays the determination result (validity determination result). Control for stopping display is executed. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is in the middle of a jackpot game (during a jackpot) or in a role game (during a role) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current state is during the jackpot game (during jackpot) or during the role winning game (during winning the role).

In the processing of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot or the accessory is in progress (S201: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202), If it is determined to be set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S202, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the accessory per game is executed. In this embodiment, while the role winning game is being executed, the variable time set in the variable display (special symbol variable display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted), and during that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variation display of the special symbols being executed is temporarily stopped with the start of the winning-accessory game, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the disappearance of the special symbol variation being executed. The display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped may be, for example, the same display mode as the display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.2 seconds), or a display mode having a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is being performed (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.5 seconds). Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during the temporary stop may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the present is not in the middle of a big hit or in the middle of a prize (S201: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, whether the special pattern is being displayed in fluctuation (S204). When it is determined that the special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is greater than 0) (S204: Yes), a special symbol variation process is executed (S206).

In this special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for varying (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the special symbol is varying is executed. This special symbol variation in-execution process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Then, when the processing of S206 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol variation executing processing (S206) is 0 (S207), and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time counter 203n is 0 in the processing of S207 (S207: Yes), the special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is terminated.

In the special symbol variation stop process (S208), when the variation time specified for the special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. The details of this special symbol variation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 in the process of S207 (S207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure variation time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S204 (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation is not currently in progress, next special symbol variation start processing is executed (S205). In this special pattern variation start processing (S205), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of special symbols is performed, and determination of whether the new lottery (variation) is executable or not, and when the new lottery (variation) is executable, processing for performing the new lottery (variation) are executed. This special symbol variation start process (S205) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. After executing the special symbol variation start process (S205), this process is terminated.

As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in the configuration capable of executing the special symbol lottery (variation), the variation processing (S204 to S208) regarding the special symbol is performed within one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for the special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special symbol variation start process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation start process (S205).

In the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S303).

Then, a reservation ball number command indicating the number of reservation balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reservation area 1 to reservation area 4 of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The details of the special symbol big hit determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. Using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the big win determination as to whether or not the game is a big win is executed based on the set game state.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value, based on the result of the determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

After executing the processing of S307, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S310), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and then this process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, the processing for updating the number of times of time saving is executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, and when the special pattern change of this time is the final change in the time saving state, the processing of setting the time saving end flag 203j to ON is executed without updating the number of times. Although the details will be described later, the setting state of the time saving end flag 203j is referred to when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, and when the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 to end the time saving state. And, when the role winning game is executed by the special electric game during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the V jackpot game is started, the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j to off is executed.

With this configuration, for example, when the special symbol variation is interrupted based on the execution of the V jackpot game during the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted after the jackpot game is finished, but when the special symbol variation after the restart is stopped and displayed, the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF, so the time saving state is not terminated. Further, when the special symbol variation is restarted, the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented.

Thus, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, a period obtained by adding the number of times of time saving (four times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game to the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption is set as a short time period for setting the time saving state. Therefore, when the special electric game is executed during the time saving state and the big win game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning the ball into the V winning port 165, the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation is added, and the duration of the time saving state advantageous to the player can be made longer than the duration of the time saving state set when the special pattern game is executed during the normal state and the big win is won in the special pattern lottery.

That is, when the time saving state is set again based on the game in the time saving state, it is easier to lengthen the duration of the time saving state to be set than when the time saving state is set based on the game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the case of using the configuration for executing the processing for updating the number of times of working hours and the processing for terminating the working hours state at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the working hours, the special design fluctuation starting processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed when the special design fluctuations are restarted. There is a problem that the maximum amount cannot be provided to the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the processing for updating the number of times of time saving and the processing for ending the time saving state are configured to be executable at different timings. Specifically, processing for updating the number of times of working hours is executed at the timing of starting fluctuation of the special symbols, and processing for ending the state of working hours is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols. By constructing in this way, the number of times of shortening working hours is not updated when the special symbol variation is resumed, and the shortening of working hours state can be set as the game status during the last variation period of the special symbol variation in the shortening of working hours state, so that the game in the shortened working hours state can be provided to the player as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, the processing for terminating the working hours state is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in a state where the condition for starting the next special symbols fluctuation is established, the time saving state is ended at the timing before the processing of S306 is executed, for example, the processing of S305 is executed in the special symbols fluctuation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) and the period until the next special symbol fluctuation lottery is executed. It may be configured to execute processing for.

Further, although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions during the time reduction state is managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, based on the reception of the information indicating the game state included in the state command set at the end of the jackpot game (the information indicating that the time saving state is set, the information indicating the number of times of time saving) set this time, the information of the time saving state set this time is stored, and based on the reception of the special pattern variation pattern command indicating the start of the special symbol variation, the number of times of remaining time saving is updated, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side manages the game state of the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation of the time saving state and set the performance mode corresponding to the current game situation without setting a command for indicating the number of times of remaining time saving and a command for indicating the final change of the time saving state (that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON) in the control processing of the main control device 110.例文帳に追加Therefore, control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S402).

After the processing of S402 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a big win (S403), and if it is determined to be a big win (S403: Yes), a big win flag 203i is set to ON so as to indicate a special symbol big win (S404). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Then, the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a big win (S405), the big win pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired win type counter C2 (S406), and the processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S403 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S403: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 of FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big win, that is, whether or not the special symbol big win is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203i is turned on for the special symbols. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S404 in the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 42).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and the special figure variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505 (S506). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S508), a value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n (S509), and the process is terminated. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S507 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as the reach out or the outage that does not become the reach, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 55).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is lost (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S503.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation executing process (S206). In this special symbol variation in-execution process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being performed is executed.

In the special symbol variation executing process (S206), first, it is determined whether the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

In the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure fluctuation restart command is set (S702), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to OFF (S703), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the special figure of the first design display device 37 is updated (S705), and this End the process.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, special symbol variation in-execution processing (see S206 in FIG. 44) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) in the special symbol variation in-execution processing (see S205 in FIG. 44). Therefore, for example, when a variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n, and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON in the process of S701 (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and the process proceeds to S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation stop processing (S208). This special symbol variation stop processing (S208) is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is "0", that is, when the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol) has passed.

When the special symbol variation stop process (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), next, a jackpot scenario that is won in this special symbol variation is set (S806), the values of the jackpot flag 202i and the time reduction counter 203h are reset (S807), and information indicating that the current game state is a jackpot (during jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S808) and S8. 09 is processed. The game state storage area 203g is configured to store the game state (normal state, time saving state) regarding the lottery game and the game state regarding the winning game, and by executing the processing of S808, the game state (normal state, time saving state) regarding the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to OFF, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery of this time is lost (S801: No), it is then determined whether or not the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802). When it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the special pattern variation whose variation is stopped this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S804), and information indicating that the current game state is the normal state is stored in the game state storage area 203g. (S805), and the process proceeds to S809. In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processing of S803 to S805 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, a special figure confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the special figure is set (S809), the process of stopping the variable display of the special figure being variably displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S810), and this process is finished.

Thus, in the special symbol variation stop process (S208), the process (S809, S810) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery (lottery game) result is executed.

In the present embodiment, when a ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 and a role winning game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. By constructing in this way, it is possible to show the case where the special symbol variation indicating the duration of the time saving state is interrupted and the case where it is discarded, so that the duration of the time saving state can be abruptly subtracted (finished), and the performance with a sense of tension can be executed for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) determines whether or not the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and when the start winning is made, up to the reserved upper limit number (up to 4 in the special figure entrance 64), each obtained counter value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

In addition, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting the result of determination of suitability and the variation pattern to be selected in advance is executed based on each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball enters (starting winning) into the special figure entrance 64 which is the starting opening (S901). Here, the entry of the ball to the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball entered the special symbol entrance 64 (there was a start prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (904), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of starting openings (special symbol lottery right reserved number) is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S905).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and reserved (stored) in the storage area of the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 (S906).

Next, prefetch processing is executed (S907), and then this processing ends. This look-ahead processing (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but from each counter value newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. are determined. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining the result of winning or not determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc., based on each newly stored counter value.

In this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the special symbol lottery right is newly obtained, the contents of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) are determined in advance. You can

Also, when it is determined in the process of S901 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S901: No), or in the process of S903, when it is determined that the number of pending balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the pre-reading process (S907) is executed based on the information (winning information) on the added prize. It may be configured so that the look-ahead process (S907) can be executed when the ball is entered into the special figure entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the symbol has reached the upper limit. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the look-ahead process (S907), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S907).

In the look-ahead process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 203a (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when new reserved storage occurs (timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a) and the timing when the big win determination is executed based on the newly reserved winning information, so it is difficult to predict the game state (special pattern probability state) set at the timing when the big winning determination is executed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S1003). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a prize winning command indicating the conditions for winning the jackpot (game state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot when winning is set (S1004), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a prize winning command indicating failure is set (S1005), and then this process ends.

Here, the prize winning command set in the process of S1004 or S1005 is set to include information indicating the above-described win/fail determination result (information that gives different meanings based on the win/fail determination result), as well as information indicating the various counter values read out by the process of S1001 as common information. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, based on various information included in the winning command, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the usual color), and an effect (pre-reading effect) can be executed such as displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of winning or failing determination to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to set the information (results of judgment) to be set in the winning command regardless of the game state. A winning command may be set based on the results of each determination, or a determination value (value of a first winning random number counter C1) for determining a big win regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state may be defined, and only when the determination value is read out, a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set.

By constructing in this manner, a prize winning command indicating a big win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when a specific big win is determined in advance, so that a feeling of expectation of winning the big win can be given to the special pattern variation in which the look-ahead performance is not executed.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a may be accurately discriminated, and the win/loss determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Also, in the present embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is performed, and the winning judgment is predicted in advance in the prereading process. The information shown may be set as a prize winning command, and the result of winning/failure determination may be predicted based on the information included in the prize winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is preferably configured to be analyzed (prediction of the result of winning/failure determination). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1101). The normal pattern (second pattern) win includes the period from when the win is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 (after the win pattern is stopped and displayed) until the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed (until the win game is finished). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed at present (S1102: No), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

When it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S1105). That is, when it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning prize information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is established, the value of the normal symbol retained ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 in order to execute the normal symbol variation using the retained and stored winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the normal pattern (S1108), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1108: Yes), the winning judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hitting judgment value of the second winning random number table 202b for high probability (see FIG. 23(c)), and the process proceeds to S1111. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S1108: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202b for low probability (see FIG. 23 (c)), the result of the hit/fail determination is acquired (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S1111), and when it is determined to be a win (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode at the time of winning is set (S1112), and the normal symbol variation time is determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern using the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (no) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode when losing is set (S1113), and the process shifts to the above-described S1114 process.

As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, the variable time is always set to 3 seconds. By configuring in this way, at the timing of switching the game state, specifically, at the timing of the end of the jackpot game where the game state is switched from the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set to the short time state (normal symbol high probability state) in which the short variation time is likely to be set, a normal symbol variation with a long variation time is executed, and the normal symbol lottery in the time reduction state is not executed even though the time reduction state is set. can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a special electric game (V rush) aiming at a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed with the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state, and during the time saving state (V rush), the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to display the performance based on the normal symbol lottery. In this way, when performing the production based on the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation), the amount of production data can be reduced by unifying the fluctuation time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when the normal figure winning game is executed in the normal state and the ball wins to the general electric prize winning device 640, it is configured so as to make it difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operating port 643 which triggers the execution of the accessory winning game. Therefore, even if it is configured so that only the same variation time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the merit of performing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per normal pattern.

The method of setting the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but may vary the variation time according to the game state, vary the variation time according to the number of normal symbol pending balls, or vary the variation time according to the acquired predetermined value. , and may be configured to be variably set based on. Further, it may be configured such that the easiness of the ball entering the general electric prize winning device 640 is different depending on the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring so as to vary the entry state of the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 according to the length of the set normal pattern variation time, the easiness of the ball entering the general electric prize device 640 can be easily changed according to the game state, so that various game properties can be created.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1102: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed (S1115), and when it is determined that the variation time has not passed (S1115: No), this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the normal symbol lottery of this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1117). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1117: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the crying normal symbol is not a win (no) (S1117: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol (timing of performing the processing of S1108 to S1111). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and furthermore, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of normal symbols is configured to be variable based on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols which is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, a high probability state of the normal symbols is set at the timing of judging whether or not the normal symbols are appropriate, and a low probability state of the normal symbols is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role product 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of judging the suitability of the normal pattern, there is a problem that the electric role product 640a is long opened (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is winning (S1117: Yes), next, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current normal symbol, it is determined whether the time saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, the current is the low probability state of the normal symbol (S1 118: No), set the scenario action per normal normal map (S1119).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), scenario operation per normal figure for time reduction is set (S1120).

Next, based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set (S1121), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the normal design is determined based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, and the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role product 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Only when the state is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (open pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set based on the game state set at the timing of judging whether the normal symbol is right or wrong.

Also, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal symbol lottery results, normal symbol variation fluctuation time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are set with commands indicating the contents of each type of information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

Next, referring to FIG. 49, through gate passing processing (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1202), and then it is determined whether the acquired value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 1 (whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls has reached the upper limit) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (it is the upper limit of 1) (S1203: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 1 (is 0) (S1203: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1204), the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), and the second random number counter C4. is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special electric starting prize winning process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the special electric starter winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric prize winning device 640, and by winning a ball in the special electric operation opening 643, the V winning device 65 is configured to execute a role winning game in which a predetermined variable pattern opens. In this special electric start opening winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball wins the special electric starting opening 643. FIG.

When the special electric starting opening winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric starting winning, that is, the game ball has won the special electric operating opening 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected is output from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has won the special electric activation port 643. In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the special electric activation opening 643 (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the special electric operation port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol winning game is in progress (S1302). When it is determined that the normal symbol winning game is not currently in progress (S1302: No), since the ball cannot enter the special electric operation opening 643, an error command is set (S1309), and then this processing is terminated. By performing the processing of S1309, the state in which the game ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 outside the game period per normal figure, that is, when a game is illegally made to win the game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, or when the member attached to the special electric operation opening 643 (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642) has a malfunction It can be quickly notified to the outside.

In the processing of S1302, when it is determined that the normal symbol winning game is currently in progress (S1302: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special electric current is in operation (accessory winning game is in progress) (S1303), and when it is determined that the special electric current is in operation (accessory winning game is in progress) (S1303: Yes), a new role winning game cannot be executed, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special electric current is not in operation (playing per character) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbols are currently changing (S1304). When it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S1304: Yes), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), the special figure temporary stop command is set (S1306), the role per flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

That is, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed. As a result, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted when the accessory winning game is executed. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and then this process ends.

As described above, the special electric starting gate winning process (S108) includes, when a ball is won in the special electric activation opening 643, determining processing means for determining whether or not the winning has been normally won, processing means for determining whether or not a new role winning game can be executed based on the winning, and means for executing processing for special symbol variation (processing to interrupt the special symbol variation being executed, processing to prevent new special symbol variation from being executed during the winning role game). and means for executing a winning game.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V entrance passage process (S109), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401). On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is ON (S1401: Yes), next, it is determined whether the V winning opening is open, that is, whether the winning game is in progress (S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (during the game per accessory) (S1402: Yes), the V entrance pass command is set (S1403), and the process ends. If it is not during the V winning opening opening period (S1402: No), it is the case that the game ball enters the V winning device 65 even though the game is not in the role winning game, so an error command is set (S1404) and this processing is finished.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1403 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the winning game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 65 .

Next, the V passing process (S110) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the V passing process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When the V passage processing (S110) is executed, it is first determined whether there is V passage, that is, whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the current V valid period is in effect (S1502). In the processing of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the action scenario related to the accessory winning game is set is within the V valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that it is not during the V valid period.

In the processing of S1502, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether the current role per game is in progress (S1503). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0 (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

That is, in the processing of S1504 to S1506, the processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game. On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the winning game is not in progress (S1503: No), there is no need to perform processing for newly executing the jackpot game.

In the process of S1507, a V pass command is set (S1507), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V pass command, for example, when the V pass command is received during the role winning game, the performance during the V rush executed during the role winning game is successful, and the performance for showing that the jackpot game is executed following the role winning game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the jackpot game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the role winning game is executed.

On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a prescribed timing during the game of the role, a disappointing performance for indicating failure of the V challenge is executed, and when the V passing command is not received at a prescribed timing during the big winning game, the resurrection performance from the disappointing performance is executed to inform the player that the big winning game will be continuously executed.

In this embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 165 is set, but a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that a game ball has not entered the V winning opening 165 may be set. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game ball that can be entered into the V winning hole 165 is only the game ball (for example, one) retained by the retention valve 66a. , the above-described V non-passing command may be set. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 65 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this process ends. By performing the processing of S1508, it is possible to quickly inform the outside of the state in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 165 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally performed in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 165, or when the member attached to the V winning hole 165 (for example, the V open/close door 65a, the storage valve 66a, and the first movable valve 66b) malfunctions.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the operation scenario is defined so that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 in the role winning game is the ending period of the winning role game. For example, if the action scenario of the role winning game is defined so that the ball can always enter the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game, then in the V passing process (S110), only the process of S1505 is executed, and the processes of S1506 to S1508 may be configured to be executed when the V flag is set to ON in the role winning control process (see S1805 of FIG. 58). As a result, even if the ball enters the V winning port 165 immediately after the performance of the prize winning game, the time saving state can be continued until the big winning game is started, so that the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, referring to FIG. 53, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1713, S1714).

Similarly, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 are transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in switch reading processing in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is sent to payout control device 111. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 46). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (Variation effect, decorative effect, etc.) are set as information for setting. Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a command setting for executing a jackpot performance by the sound lamp control device 113 and a jackpot control process for opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 650a of the variable winning device 650 are executed (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. In this jackpot control processing (S1804), a specific winning port 650a (hereinafter referred to as a winning port, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and whether the maximum opening time of the winning port, etc. (specific winning port 650a) has elapsed, or whether a specified number of balls have won in the winning port, etc. (specific winning port 650a). judge. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 650a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 650a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the control processing for the accessory per game related to the accessory per game that is executed when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 is executed (S1805). In this prize winning control process (S1805), processing for setting a period for opening and a period for closing the V opening/closing door 65a for the V winning device 65 which is operated to be opened during the winning prize game based on a predetermined scenario (performance scenario for winning a prize) is executed. note that. Details of the winning control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the general electric prize winning device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S1121 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished and the green LED is lit, if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished and the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting color of the LED is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and by the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45), the stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device in the display mode set in S507 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of FIG. 43). 37A and 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode (loss pattern) indicating a loss, and a stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or S1113 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). stop display (lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809), and if power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the main process this time (S1810).

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 can be updated at random. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value relating to the lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent games aimed at the timing of acquiring the judgment value corresponding to winning.

In the process of S1809, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and as a result of the power failure signal SG1 being output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1809 is executed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from the power failure state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the process of S1801 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initialization process (S1701). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state with special symbols, it is a process for setting information (commands) for executing various effects according to the jackpot, and for opening or closing a prize winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1901). Specifically, when the process of S806 of the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, or when the process of S2010 of the role control process (see S1805 of FIG. 58) is executed and the start of the big win is set, the action counter is set corresponding to the big win action scenario table 202e1 included in the various action scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the action counter coincides with the jackpot start timing defined in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that it is time to start a special symbol jackpot (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special pattern jackpot or accessory prize is started, an opening counter is initialized to 0, and then an opening command is transmitted when the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 5000 for jackpot C). By doing so, for example, when the special lottery results in a big win in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be shortened, and when the special electric game results in the left-handed game and the big win is achieved in the accessory winning game, the time until the start of the big win (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be lengthened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure a period for making preparations for the jackpot game for the player who has been watching the ball flow situation during the role-winning game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1901: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S1903). In the processing of this S1903, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203g.

During the big winning includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the big winning with the special symbols (including during the big winning game with the special symbols), and the time during the predetermined time after the end of the big winning game. It also includes the time when a display indicating that the ball has won a prize is being displayed in the V prize opening 165 . If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the jackpot is not in progress (S1903: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1903: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1904).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1904, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired action counter is the time to start a round game defined in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1 (S1904: Yes), the specific prize winning opening solenoid 209a is turned on (S1905), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1906), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired operation counter is the end timing of the round game defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is turned off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the round is not finished (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1910). The start timing of the ending performance is determined to be the start timing of the ending performance when the final round of the jackpot game (fourth round in the case of the jackpot A) is completed, the specific prize winning port 650a is closed, and the waiting time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, elapses. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1912). The end timing of the big win is specifically the end timing of the big win game in which the value of the acquired operation counter is defined in the big win operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (end timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the type of the big win is the big win B (S1913). When it is determined that it is a jackpot B (S1913: Yes), 15 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1914), and the process proceeds to S1916. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (the jackpot A or the jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process proceeds to S1915.

In the process of S1915, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), then the state command corresponding to the game state after the big win is set (S1916), the end of the big win for setting the end of the big win is set (S1917), and the process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and then this process ends. Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1918).

In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S2001). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period during which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S2001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S2004). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002: No), this process is terminated.

After executing the process of S2004, it is then determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and then this processing is terminated. In the process of S2005, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and the process ends.

By constructing in this way, when a termination condition established with the passage of time (elapsed of 30 seconds) and a termination condition established with the winning of a ball (winning 10 balls) are provided as termination conditions of the round game, the operation control of the big win game can be executed based on the same operation scenario even if either of the termination conditions is established. Therefore, the control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the winning control process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this winning control process (S1805). This prize winning control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired value of the action counter) of the action scenario (action scenario defined in the prize winning action scenario table 202e2) set when the prize winning flag 203k is set to ON in the special train start-up winning process (see S108 of FIG. 50).

In the role winning control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start winning a role (S2101). Here, it is determined whether the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26(b)) is 1 or not. When it is determined that it is time to start winning a role (S2101: Yes), an opening command for winning a role is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the time to start winning the role (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the current time is during the winning of the role (S2103). If it is determined that the player is not in the middle of winning the role (S2103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize is in progress (S2103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e for the role item is 26 or not. When it is determined that it is time for the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and then this process is terminated. Although not shown, a process of closing (turning off) the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) and a process of turning on the storage solenoid 209c are executed according to the value of the action counter corresponding to the action scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), next, it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the prize winning (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the action counter value corresponding to the action scenario table 202e for the role item is 750 or not. When it is determined that it is time to end the award winning (S2106: Yes), the award winning flag 203k is set to OFF (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is ON (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the time to end winning the role (S2106: No), the V passage detection process is executed (S2112), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 59, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the current start-up processing was started during execution of the power-off processing (see FIG. 60) in S4117 due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or was started when only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (because the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut off), so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if this launch process was started after the power outage was completed after the power outage was instantaneous power outage, or if the reset was started only on the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 by noise, etc. Since the keyword 55AAh is remembered, the data of RAM223 is determined to be normal (S4003: NO) and shifts to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset during execution of the power-off processing in S4117. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on when the current start-up processing is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off, for example, because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely cut off, the process of S4004 to S4006 was passed through to the process of S4008, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clear processing of S4009 is skipped is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 through the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. This is because the control of the lamp control device 113 can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). The reason why it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S4101 is that S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), but it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are executed to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the setting for switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the performance effect, and the corresponding performance is set to be performed when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of this rendering update process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4111, command determination processing (S4112) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and a variable display setting process is executed for setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed to determine whether or not the first movable valve operation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202), and then this processing ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to operation control of the first movable valve 66b that is executed when power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, the operation scenario is updated without delay. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control contents on the main controller 110 side and the status grasp contents on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, an operation scenario (an operation scenario for grasping the operation status of the first movable valve 66b on the voice lamp control device 113 side) is set only when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to operation control of the first movable valve 66b that is executed when power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is set. or a command indicating the operation control contents of the first movable valve 66b each time a jackpot game is executed. Then, the contents of the received command and the contents of the updated operation scenario may be compared, and a process of correcting the updated contents of the operation scenario may be executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the accuracy with which the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the details of the operation control on the main control device 110 side. Further, the operation scenario update process of the sound lamp control device 113 may be executed in consideration of the time lag required until the command output from the main control device 110 is received.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4203). Here, the special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), the special figure variation start processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command is received (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4205, if it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). Here, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) of the received pending ball number command is analyzed, and the value of the corresponding counter provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated (S4209). Specifically, when a special symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number of variable display of the special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

In addition, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the number of reserved balls of variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (special figure entrance 64, through gate 67) and the value of the various reserved ball number counters is added, or when the value of the various reserved ball number counters is subtracted when various fluctuation start processing is executed. The values of the number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter can be matched with the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110.

Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., when the start winning prize, the variable display setting, that is, when the reserved ball number command is notified based on the change of the various reserved ball numbers, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, Various reserved ball number counters of the control device 110 can be matched with the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d.

Also, in the process of S4208, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4211), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (storing) in the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of voice lamp control device 113), and executes processing (prefetching effect) based on the received winning information. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4212: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4213), and this processing ends. The details of this state command reception processing (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the game state (normal state, time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 and the winning game state (during the jackpot, during winning the role) are set in the sub-state setting area 223g.

Next, when it is determined in the process of S4212 that the status command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the process of S4214 that the stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), the stop-related process is executed (S4215), and this process ends. A detailed description of this stop-related process (S4215) will be given later with reference to FIG. 65, but based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110, a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the third and fourth symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when special symbol variation is performed as a period during which special symbol variation display is performed, but even during execution of special symbol variation based on the preset variation pattern, there is a case where processing for forcibly stopping special symbol variation is performed according to the result of another special symbol variation. Therefore, the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation display (variation performance) of the third and fourth symbols can be stopped in correspondence with the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbols and the situation of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether the general map related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216). The details of the normal map related process (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4216, if it is determined that the normal figure related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the winning related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4218). The details of the win-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but as a result of the lottery of special symbols, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big win game or the small win game executed when the big win or the small win is won.

In the processing of S4218, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the command is set so that processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described, but in the command determination process (S4112), the order of determining whether or not the reception of various commands is performed may be performed using an order other than the order shown in this embodiment, for example, the process of determining whether a state command has been received may be defined to be performed before the process of determining whether a special figure variation pattern command is received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the main controller 110, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, the special figure variation pattern command is set, and the state command indicating that the game state has changed after that is set. Technique state can be determined earlier than the special figure variation pattern command.

Next, with reference to Drawing 62, special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 62 is the flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and the process of setting the display mode (main fluctuation fluctuation pattern, dependent fluctuation fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the set game state is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 sets the display mode to be displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When special figure fluctuation start processing is set, first. Set the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d to ON (S4301), extract the fluctuation pattern from the received special figure fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and select the detailed display mode using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S4303).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223g is read to determine whether the current game state is the time saving state (S4304). In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), the command for display in the normal state is set (S4305), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the processing of S4305, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 11 (b) is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), the command for display during the time saving state is set (S4306), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted by 1 (S4307), the value (variation time) corresponding to the variation pattern received this time is set in the variation time counter 223r (S4308), and this processing ends.

Next, the winning command process (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the winning command process (S4211). This winning command process (S4211) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the type of the received winning command (special design, normal design) and the current game state.

When the winning command process (S4211) is executed, first, based on the information included in the received winning command, it analyzes which symbol type it corresponds to, and sets (stores) it in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4401). Then, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the variation time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (0) (S4404: No), the variable time (variable time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time cannot be reported as the remaining period of the V rush, so the extracted variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), The process proceeds to S4412.

On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), it is possible to add the variable time (variable time of the special symbol) included in the winning command received this time as the remaining period of the V rush, and then it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405). In the processing of S44405, it is determined whether or not the current time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In this embodiment, during the V rush, during the accessory winning game period and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V rush is not additionally notified. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to concentrate on various winning games and play the game.

In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), the current is in a state where the additional notification can be executed, so the value corresponding to the variable time extracted in the process of S4403 is added to the value of the short time counter 223i (S4407), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is added by 1, and the process proceeds to S4409.

Although illustration is omitted, when the variable time is added in the processing of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set and an additional notification effect (see FIG. 15(a)) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, all the values added in the processing of S4407 are configured to be notified as the additional notification effect, but without being limited to this, the added value may be divided into multiple times with the added value being the upper limit, and the additional notification effect may be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the addition of the remaining period (short remaining time) of the V rush, so that the performance can be executed so that the player does not get tired of it early.

In addition, until the value added in the processing of S4407 reaches a predetermined value, or until the value of the time short period counter 223i is subtracted to a predetermined value, the value added in the processing of S4407 may be configured not to be notified, and the variable time included in a plurality of winning commands (variation time of special symbols) may be added and notified. As a result, the length of the remaining short time added in one additional notification performance can be made unexpected. Also, in this case, for example, when the variable time (for example, 50 seconds) of the same length as the variable time (for example, 50 seconds) set at the time of winning the special pattern is added to the short time counter 223i, the additional notification performance of 50 seconds may be executed in the additional notification performance. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is ON in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), and when it is determined that the special winning flag 223n is ON in the processing of S4406 (S4406: Yes), the extracted variation time is stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4410), and the process proceeds to the above-described S4411 processing.

After completing the processing of S4411, the value of the prefetch counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), then other processing is executed (S4412), and then this processing ends.

Next, the state command reception processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4212). This state command reception processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes the processing for setting the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 differently according to the set game state. Details of the state command reception processing (S4213) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game status is to be changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4501: No), the processes of S4502 to S4508 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4509. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4502).

In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently winning (S4503). When it is determined that the normal pattern is not hit (S4503: No), the display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), the information indicated by the state command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4509), and the processing is terminated.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the command set in the process of S4504, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in this embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, only by outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern can be set based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, information (confirmation information) indicating the content of the display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the sound lamp control device 113 side. is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the already set display data is rewritten to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, simple display data showing proper information can be set, and a variable effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). As the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, or display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol, may be used display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable effect display.

In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern may be set on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. In the processing of S4502, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time saving state (S4507), and if it is determined that the game state is the time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the time saving state) (S4507: Yes), display indicating the V rush mode. command is set (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4509 described above. If it is determined that the game state does not have a time saving state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the current pattern is winning (S4503: Yes), the command for display indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4506), and the processing of S4509 described above is performed. When the display command is set in the processing of S4505, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display mode showing the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the stop-related process (S4215), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop related process (S4215). In this stop-related processing (S4215), processing for setting a display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when stopping and displaying based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main controller 110 is executed.

When the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure determination command (S4601). When it is determined that it is a special figure confirmation command (S4601: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation is set (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4603.

In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether the stop related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). When it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command is received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), the display command indicating the special symbol temporary stop mode is set (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processing of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4606.

When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbols is set in the process of S4605, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display mode (characters of "STOP") indicating the temporary stop is displayed, and the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted.

In the processing of S4606, it is determined whether the stop related command received this time is a special figure fluctuation restart command (S4606). This special symbol variation resume command is a command set when the special symbol variation resumes in the special symbol variation executing process (see S206 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 44). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation resume command is received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to OFF (S4607), and the display command indicating the special figure fluctuation restart is set (S4608).

Then, it is determined whether or not the unreported information was updated during the period when the interruption flag 223m was set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not information indicating a new fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported pending number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the short time counter 223i is added in correspondence with the update content (S4610), the information in the uninformed period storage area 223j, the uninformed pending number storage area 223k, and the reported pending number storage area 223s are updated, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation restart command is not received (S4606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In addition, the value added by the processing of S4610 is the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, the special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the numerical value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is collectively added at the timing when the subtraction starts. By constructing in this way, in a state where the subtraction of the variable time of the special symbols is stopped, the players are made to pay attention to various winning games, and the addition notification performance is collectively executed after the completion of the various winning games, so that the players can expect that the remaining period of the V rush will be added in large quantities even after the completion of the various winning games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the general map related process (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose map-related processing (S4217). This normal figure related process (S4217) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Hereinafter, the details of the normal map related processing (S4217) will be described.

When the general pattern related processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the general pattern related command received this time is the general pattern variation pattern command (S4701). When it is determined that the received command is the general pattern variation pattern command (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a general pattern variation pattern command (S4701: No), then the general pattern related command received this time is a normal pattern per start command (S4703). When it is determined that the received command is a general pattern per start command (S4703: Yes), a small per winning command for display is set (S4704), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not a normal map per start command (S4703: No), then it is determined whether the general map related command received this time is a special electric operation command (S4705). If it is determined that the received command is a special electric operation command (S4705: Yes), the display V winning command is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined to be a trick (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to OFF (S4708), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4707 that the extension flag 223p is not ON (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and this process ends.

In the processing of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special electric operation command (S4705: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal map related command received this time is a normal map per end command (S4709). If it is determined that the received command is not the end command per normal pattern (S4709: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the received command is a general pattern per end command (S4709: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is ON (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), the V rush flag 223q is set off (S4713), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S4710, if the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the normal pattern is set (S4714), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal figure winning game is executed in a state where the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set to ON in order to extend the V rush effect. Then, the end timing of the V rush performance is varied according to the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal game. Specifically, when the ball does not enter the special electric operation port 643 in the normal game, the V rush performance is terminated at the end timing of the normal game, and when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and the role winning game is executed, the V rush performance is ended at the end timing of the role winning game. Incidentally, when the ball enters the V winning opening 165 in the role winning game, the effect based on the big winning game (V big winning game) is preferentially executed.

With this configuration, the player can be notified of the period during which the player can aim for the V jackpot game regardless of the game state, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4219). In this win-related processing (S4219), processing is performed for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game or the role-winning game to be executed when the jackpot or the role-winning game is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls obtained during a winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and processing for setting a prize ball number command for display based on the accumulation result is executed.

In the hit related process (S4219), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is a jackpot related command (S4801). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the jackpot related processing (S4802), which is one of the winning related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot related process (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is ON (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current big win is a special win (jackpot B) (S4911), and if it is determined to be a special win (jackpot B) (S4911: Yes), the special win flag 223n is set to OFF (S4912), and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current big win is not a special win (big win B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped and the process ends as it is.

In the processing of S4903, if it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), extract the number of times of reduced working hours given in the jackpot to be executed this time (S4904), read the special figure winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S4905), select the target with the upper limit of the number of times of shortened working hours extracted from the read special figure winning information (S4906), and select the number of special figure winning information is stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k (S4907), the variable time included in the selected special figure winning information is calculated (S4908), the calculated variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4909), the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4910), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4913). If the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4914), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command, so the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. A round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of update commands may be provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the current round number may be calculated on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the round number command for display may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S4915). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end processing is executed (S4916), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot ending process (S4919), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S4919).

In the jackpot end processing (S4919), the number of times of saving time given in the jackpot to be executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the read-ahead counter 223h (S5002), and then the value stored in the unnotified pending number storage area 223k is read (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). When it is determined that the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (0) (S5004: No), the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15(a)) is in a state where it is not possible to execute the additional notification effect (because there is no fluctuation time information to be added).

On the other hand, in the process of S5004, if it is determined that the value of the uninformed pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, if there is information indicating the variable time that can be added and notified (variable time information of special symbols not used for the added report), the value of the prefetch counter 223h is subtracted in correspondence with the read value (S5005), and out of the values stored in the uninformed pending number storage area 223k , the value corresponding to the value subtracted in the process of S5005 is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning information (special figure reservation information) contained in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) (S5008), and if it is determined that it is not included (S5008: No), a display addition command corresponding to the read variable time stamp is set (S5009), and the variable time stored in the unnotified period storage area 223j is used for this current addition effect. The period corresponding to the obtained fluctuation time is cleared (S5010), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5008, when it is determined that the winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) is included in the winning information storage area 223b (S5008: Yes), a display command corresponding to the variation time until the special winning variation is completed is set (S5011). In other words, when the special symbol variation executed one after another is the special symbol variation corresponding to the special winning, even if the variation time for four reserved special symbols can be summed up and reported as the addition notification performance, only the variation time obtained by adding the variation time of the next special symbol variation, the variation time of the next special symbol variation and the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the special winning (special winning variation) is used in the addition notification performance.

Furthermore, a display command indicating a special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special win flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process proceeds to S5010 described above.

As a result, when there is winning information indicating winning of a special win (jackpot B) in the reserve of special symbols at the end of the big win game, an effect for informing the transition to the special mode (heaven mode) and a variation time "220 seconds" until the special win variation ends are displayed as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the special winning game (the big winning game in which the big winning B is set) is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, after the end of the special winning game, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the player is not notified of the time of variation of the reserved and stored special symbols after the special winning variation, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the end of the big winning game can be made difficult for the player to understand until the big winning game is completed.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a role related command (S4803). When it is determined that the received command is a role-hitting related command (S4803: Yes), the role-hitting related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the winning-related process (S4804), which is one of the winning-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role-related process (S4804). In the role-winning related processing, a process for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to the role-winning game executed when the role-winning is executed, and when the role-winning is executed, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the award-related processing (S4804), first, it is determined whether the winning-related command received by the winning-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) is the award-winning start command (S5101).

In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the accessory winning start command is received (S5101: Yes), the display accessory winning start command is set (S5102), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the received command is not the winning start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V entrance passing command (S5103).

In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S5103: Yes), the prize winning command for display accessories is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the received command is not the V entrance pass command (S5103: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V pass command (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the V passing command is received (S5105: Yes), the display V hit command is set (S5106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the received command is not the V passing command (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5107: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the processing of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not the command related to the winning of the role (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806), the prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after addition is set (S4807), and this processing is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON is accumulated in the number of prize balls counter. Information indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the accumulated value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game) or during the V rush production (see display area HR2 in FIG. 12(c)).

By constructing in this way, the cumulative number of balls acquired during a period (advantageous continuation period) from the setting of the time-saving state (V rush) to the end of the V rush can be reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but any configuration may be used as long as the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. In this case, it is preferable to provide a means for discriminating the winning game state (during jackpot, during winning the accessory) based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g at the time of receiving the prize ball command and accumulating the number of prize balls for each discrimination result. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily sorted.

Further, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period may be accumulated and displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of V jackpot games executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is cumulatively displayed (see display area HR1 in FIG. 12(c)). The lottery probability of the lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, the player can analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and can be motivated to play the game.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) executes the process of setting the variable pattern command for displaying the special symbol based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). And, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), since the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S5205. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5201: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5202).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), based on the variation pattern related to the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set (S5203), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and S5205. Go to processing.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the special figure stop type command for display is set (S5208), and this processing ends.

Next, the rendering update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period, and executes the process for setting the effect mode based on the updated counter values.

In the effect update process (S4111), first, it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300), and if the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, if the special symbol fluctuation is not interrupted (S5300: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the short time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time short period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the value of the short period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the short period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then it is determined whether the value of the short period counter 223i after updating is 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the updated value of the short period counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the short period counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining variable time is short is set (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. When the display command is set in the processing of S5308, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, and an effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) is set to indicate to the player that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is short. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed reaches 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining variation time is short is set, but this is not the only option. A display command may be set to indicate that the time is short. By constructing in this way, when the performance mode (for example, unlucky performance) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol variation under execution is short is not set (unlucky performance is not executed in the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation under execution is long or short.

Also, in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates the remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the variable time of the next variation (the variable time of the special symbol variation to be executed next) is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variable time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is S5. It is determined whether it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the process of 313 (S5314).

In the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation read out in the process of S5313 (S5314: Yes) When it is determined that the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, when the V jackpot game is executed, it is set after the V jackpot game ends. A display command indicating a lucky time is set for informing the player that the V rush period is likely to become longer (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309. On the other hand, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is not larger (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation read in the processing of S5313 (S5314: No), skips the processing of S5315 and proceeds to the processing of S5309.

When the display command is set in the processing of S5315, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display mode of the lucky time effect shown in FIG. 19B is set. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the period during which the player is more advantageous during the V rush period, so that the game during the V rush period can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. In the present embodiment, the execution trigger of the lucky time effect is set to the case where the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation by 10 seconds or more. However, it is not limited to this, and the period in which the remaining variation time becomes longer when the special symbol variation is interrupted may be notified to the player by the lucky time effect. ) It is also possible to use the determination of the above as a trigger for executing the lucky time effect.

Also, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation read in the processing of S5313, the processing of S5315 is always performed. A lottery process for determining whether or not to set a display command indicating that the time is long may be executed, and only when the result of the lottery process determines that the display command should be set, the display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long may be set. By constructing in this way, in a state where a performance mode (for example, lucky time performance) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol variation under execution is long is not set (the lucky time performance is not executed in the third symbol display device 81), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation under execution is long or short.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the short time counter 223i after updating is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol variation is not executed even though the end condition of the time saving state is not established, so a display command indicating "??" The display command set in the processing of S5311 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that it is a period during which the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), the V rush flag 223q is set off, and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, another effect update process is executed (S5309), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 to complete drawing processing for one frame of an image. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", the data for one page including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the NOR-type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. The boot program stored in d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 74, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like, while eliminating the need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and executes various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, subsequently, according to the rest of the boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S610). 3). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and ending the boot process.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all made up of DRAM. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated productions using the auxiliary production unit.

On the other hand, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. good too. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may be such that a part of the remaining boot program is further transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may be further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a may be set in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is repeated a plurality of times including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

In the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is canceled, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw and display an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can start normally by inspecting whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the leading address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. be done.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 may write transfer end information indicating transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. The MPU 231 may read information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detect the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the head address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the power-on varying image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. transferred to The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later, instructs the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is kept ON until transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during this period, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, a player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64 (start winning). , that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since a simple variation performance can be performed by using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play the game at ease even while the power-on main image is displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the power is restored.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after identifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a drawing list of the image is created and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). Command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. At the same time, if the display demonstration command or the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. do.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the drawing of the image can be controlled so as to display the performance image corresponding to the mode on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically specified. In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is instructed to use the continuous notice effect. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the image and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated from the types of sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which are determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected in the command determination processing, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. migrate.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then all the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always makes a judgment of the start of variation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, when a variation performance having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is instructed by the main controller 110, the next variation pattern command for display is received from the main controller 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and another variation display is suddenly started. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variable display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, display settings are made so that even when the main controller 110 actually instructs a variation effect having a longer variation time than the set display data table, the demonstration effect is displayed after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed and until the next display pattern command is received from the main controller 110, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the processing, the player can continue to see the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is finished, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406).

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of the big hits A to G, the small hits A to C, the reach out, and the complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Finally set (S6602).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set to on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is described as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. In the task processing (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since main controller 110 always determines the start of a change several seconds or more apart, two or more stop-type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, it is impossible for two or more stop-type commands for display to be stored in the command buffer area. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type table is determined on the assumption that the stop type is completely out of line. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is set, the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 even when the ``big win of the special pattern'' is actually set, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has hit the ``big hit of the special pattern'', and there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, by setting the stop pattern corresponding to the complete loss as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special pattern jackpot" even if the third symbol display device 81 displays the stop pattern of the complete loss in the case of a ``special symbol jackpot'' in fact, so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408).

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410).

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412).

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414).

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol in the main control device 110 (timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command). 13 shows various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel), and furthermore, when one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped with a symbol indicating failure regardless of whether or not the predetermined variation pattern (variation time) has ended. configured to display.

Then, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the command set when the special pattern fluctuates from the main control device 110, the fluctuation stop processing (see the S4217 in FIG. (Variable display command (forced stop command) to be displayed to support the display form of a special design that is forcibly displayed is configured.

In this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third pattern or the fourth pattern is not stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the stop display based on the forced stop command received later is executed. That is, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third pattern and the fourth pattern can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main controller 110 .

In addition, the fluctuation stop command for display also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display command indicating this temporary stop (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table in which display data in which the symbol to be displayed in a stopped state slightly fluctuates is set as the fluctuation stop display data is determined.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command in the unprocessed commands (S6416).

Details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the audio lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the target of notification is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). is added, the related command may be output to the corresponding control device.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418).

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the bit corresponding to the other back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, the range of the back face image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the back face image range is stored, Identify the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, it does not receive two or more background image change commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on, or the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420).

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the warning image corresponding to the error type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on varying image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, so S6502. In the process 2, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 and S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for causing the third pattern display device 81 to display an error warning image corresponding to all the error discrimination flags set to ON is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the developed warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, each data table has start information written at address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. data can be read.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timer counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 to initialize (S7405), and this process is executed. End and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is described are always developed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), based on the rendering content developed in S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are identified, and various parameters required for rendering, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether or not the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the fixed display flag is off (S7209: No), the fixed display effect has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the fixed display effect, so first the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop pattern discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop pattern discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stop pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. As compared with the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 does not have a heavy load, so that a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and the variable display data table describes the pattern offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation, the stop pattern of the previously performed variable performance is specified from the last stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display performance, so after a lapse of a certain time from the end of the fixed display performance, processing for displaying the demonstration performance on the third pattern display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation performance is not received after the fixed display performance is finished.

In the processing of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration performance is performed after the completion of the fixed display performance, which means that the demonstration performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated as it is, and the V interrupt processing is returned to. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration performance is started again by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, as described above, so that the demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

Note that the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, a process of setting a display data table for stopping display of one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends, is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is completed, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is OFF (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the resident image transfer setting process ends because the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). If there is resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data that has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in drawing processing includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data to be transferred here). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)), the command determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident object image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing, so that the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as back images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, etc. are resident. Responsiveness can be kept high until 81 displays some image.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703). A transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705).

In the process of S7706, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and after setting the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 as the image data to be transferred, the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x that is in the ON state is specified among the back image discrimination flags 233x provided for each back image type, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the processing in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the transfer target image data to be transferred here is to be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off".

Thus, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in task processing (S6304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by transfer setting processing (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified, and the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and a drawing list is generated by describing, as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite, in the sprite order after the rearrangement. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. Therefore, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the top address of the transfer destination in anticipation of the time when it is in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing can be simultaneously processed in parallel.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time drawing processing of V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image for one frame is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read, and the drawing processing and display processing of the image are executed. After 20 milliseconds from the completion of the drawing processing for the image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. 6b is specified. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately designating one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c for each 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame, the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being rendered.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 107. FIG. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the game board 13, part of the configuration of the main controller 110, and part of the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special electric operation opening 643 and an out opening 644 are provided as ball entrances into which winning balls of the general electric winning device 640 can enter. Then, when the ball wins the special electric activation port 643, the accessory winning game is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one actuation opening for executing the role winning game, and variations cannot be given to the role winning game, so the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored of the game early. In addition, since the role winning game is executed in the same operation pattern each time, the role game is executed at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 (the ball is made to enter the special electric activation opening 643). There was a problem of becoming

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a second special electric operation port 1643 is newly provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 is configured to win any one of the special electric operation port 643, the second special electric operation port 1643, or the out port 644.

Furthermore, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643 and when the ball wins the second special electric activation opening 1643, it is configured to execute a different opening pattern winning game. 6) is configured to make it easier to win a prize.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the flow situation of the ball that has won the general electric prize winning device 640 during the general figure per game. In addition, when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 and when the ball wins the second special electric operation opening 1643, different action patterns of the role winning game are executed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to execute the role game (make the ball win the special electric operation opening 643) at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to win the V winning opening 165.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the second embodiment differs from the various effects executed in the above-described first embodiment in that the first game method suggesting effect executed based on the remaining variation time of the normal symbol being executed when the role winning game is executed during the time saving state, and the second game method suggesting effect executed based on the remaining variation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) interrupted when the role winning game is executed during the time saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for indicating the game contents of the game (special electric game) during the time saving state, the remaining duration of the time saving state, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the execution status of the general pattern winning game, and the execution status of the role winning game are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the game in the time saving state is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It was something to do.

However, with the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time saving state (during the V rush) in an easy-to-understand manner, but during the V rush, it was not possible to allow the player to select a game method in order to make the player perform a better game. In other words, when a role winning game that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation (the period until the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is completed) that is the remaining period of the V rush is executed, the current situation is that it is better to finish the role winning game quickly while aiming to win the ball to the V winning opening 165 by causing the V winning device 65 to win a plurality of balls, or give up winning the ball to the V winning opening 165, It was not possible to suggest (report) to the player whether it is better to continue the accessory winning game for as long as possible.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the above-described first game method suggestive effect and second game method suggestive effect are executable, it is possible for the player to select the game method of the role-winning game based on the effect contents of the various suggestive effects to be executed. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method, so that the player can be interested in various suggested performances to be executed. Also, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment can flow down to the second special electric operation opening 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above except that the configuration inside the electric winning device 640 is different. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 3) in that a notch is provided at the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (below the position separated by the second movable valve 642), and the lower end of the second partition 640k2 is formed in order to form a fourth flow path 641d through an opening formed by the notch into which the balls can flow. The difference is that a fourth partition wall 640k4 connected to the side is provided.

In order to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down toward the special electric activation port 643 without the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a flowing into the fourth flow path 641d, the normal position (see FIG. 88) shielding the second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641d and the flow path for the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a to flow down the second flow path 641b and enter the special electric activation opening 643 are blocked. The difference is that a variable third movable valve 1643 is provided to the operating position (see FIG. 89) leading to the 4th flow path 641d.

Although detailed description will be given later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving the third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and is variably operated between the above-described normal position and the operating position in a predetermined variable pattern when the operation control of the normal game by the main controller 110 is started. The third movable valve 1643 is configured to be in the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is turned on (when energized), and to be in the normal position when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be off (not energized). Therefore, in the state in which the normal figure per game is not executed, it is positioned at the normal position. In addition, in the second embodiment, the game content (operation pattern) of the role winning game executed in the case of winning the ball in the special electric activation opening 643 and the case of winning the ball in the second special electric activation opening 1643 are different, and it is configured to make it easier to win the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the winning game in the case of winning the ball in the second special electric activation opening 1643. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF, by positioning the third movable valve 1642 in the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special electric operation opening 1643, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally allowing the ball to enter the second special electric operation opening 1643.

Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is designed so as not to come into contact with the second movable valve 642 positioned in the second state (the state in which the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). By configuring in this way, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642 .

Then, when the second movable valve 642 is positioned in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is positioned in the operating position, as shown in FIG. Although the detailed description will be given later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern triggered by the start of the normal per game, and is configured to repeatedly perform the variable operation of maintaining the operating position (see FIG. 89) for 0.2 seconds and the normal position (see FIG. 88) for 1.5 seconds. That is, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 positioned in the first state enter the special electric operation opening 643, and about 15% enter the second special electric operation opening 1643. Therefore, during the game per normal pattern, the special electric operation opening 643 becomes an operation opening in which the ball is more likely to win than the second special electric operation opening 1643.

Further, the ball is more likely to enter the V winning port 165 in the executed accessory winning game when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643 than when the ball enters the special electric operating port 643.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game triggered by the normal symbol lottery, the ease of winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the role winning game differs depending on the game result during the normal figure winning game (in which operation opening the ball wins). can improve the interest of

In this embodiment, it is determined by the variable operation of the third movable valve 1642 whether the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643 in the normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state. Although it is possible to execute a winning game, it is not limited to this, for example, as a normal pattern winning type set when winning in a normal pattern lottery, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state wins the special electric operation opening 643, about 15% wins the second special electric operation opening 1643. It may be configured to be able to set an advantageous general pattern per type in which an advantageous general pattern per game is executed with a high percentage of winning balls to the special electric operation port 1643.

By constructing in this way, the player aiming at the V jackpot game by the special electric game can be made to pay attention to all of the lottery result of the normal pattern (the type of winning of the ordinary pattern to be set), the game winning the ordinary figure and the game winning the accessory, and the special electric game can be played more enthusiastically.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the remaining period of the normal figure long per game is less than a predetermined period (less than 15 seconds) out of the state in which the normal figure long per game and the role per game are performed in the time saving state (V rush) in duplicate, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the remaining time of the winning game is a predetermined period or more (15 seconds or more). The same reference numerals are given to the same display modes as those displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is completed, and during the time saving state (special symbol variation) When the role game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted). That is, while the accessory per game is being executed, it is a period during which the remaining period of the time saving state is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be played without worrying about the remaining period of the time-saving state until the ball enters the V winning port 165 (V winning) after the role winning game is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time saving state (during the V rush), there are a method of lengthening the period of the time saving state (a period until a time saving end condition is satisfied) by setting a long variation time as a special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the role winning game is executed. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the player's skill, so there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play is lowered when a short variation time is set as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the length of the period from which the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted can be varied according to the skill of the player, the player can be motivated to play the game as opposed to the latter method described above.

Here, a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the accessory winning game is executed will be described. The game during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. Then, during the normal figure winning game, the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening 643 and the second special electric operation opening 1643 in the general electric winning device 640 to execute the role winning game, the ball is made to enter the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 during the role winning game (V winning), and the game (special electric game) aiming at the big winning game (V big winning game) is executed.

And, the normal symbol lottery which is the trigger for the start of the special electric game is configured not to be newly executed in the state where the normal symbol lottery is already executed or during the normal pattern winning game. In other words, the accessory winning game and the lottery of normal symbols are configured to be executable in duplicate. Further, a plurality of end conditions are set for the role winning game, and the role winning game is completed when a predetermined number (three) of balls wins in the V winning device 65 during the role winning game, or when a predetermined period of time (a period in which the action scenario of the role winning game is updated until the end timing of the role winning game) elapses.

Therefore, by lengthening the period during which the normal pattern winning game is executed overlapping with the period during which the normal pattern winning game is not executed, that is, the execution period of the special symbol variation in the period during which the normal pattern winning game is not executed can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the execution interval of the winning game due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the normal symbol lottery period (during the variation period).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening operation patterns can be executed as a normal pattern winning game, and an advantageous normal pattern winning game in which an open state (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is opened) in which the ball can be won into the general electric winning device 640 during the normal pattern winning game is set relatively long, and a disadvantageous normal pattern winning game in which the open state is set shorter than the advantageous normal pattern winning game are configured to be executable. Further, in the unfavorable general pattern winning game, after the open state in which the ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640 is set, the closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the general electric prize device 640 is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

Even in the long-term closed state of this disadvantageous normal pattern winning game, it is substantially impossible to execute a new role winning game similarly to the above-described normal symbol fluctuation period. Therefore, when the role winning game and the disadvantageous normal symbol winning game are executed in duplicate, the execution period of the special symbol winning game can be shortened in the period in which the new role winning game is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the execution interval of the accessory per game from becoming longer due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the closed period during the normal per per game.

As described above, it is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol variation during the unfavorable period by determining the unfavorable period (ordinary figure fluctuation period, closing period of the general figure per game) during which the new role winning game is not (hardly) executed during the V rush, and the unfavorable period and the role per game period in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted. In the case of duplication, it is configured to be able to notify the player to that effect.

In other words, the game situation of the normal figure winning game during the role winning game is configured so that the player can visually recognize the performance contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . And, according to the game situation of the normal figure per game during the accessory per game, it is configured to vary the production mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(a), when the accessory per game is being executed (the special figure variation is interrupted) and the closed period of the unfavorable normal per game is for a long time (15 seconds), the display area HR10 displays the comment "10 seconds until the end of the normal per" as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the unfavorable normal per game (remaining period until the end of the closed period). In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP without winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the winning role game. Since other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the player can aim for a V prize by causing the ball to enter the V winning device 65, that is, the termination condition of the role winning game based on the winning ball, and the period of the role winning game is likely to be shortened. It is possible to select whether to execute one game or to give up execution of a big winning game (V big winning game) by winning a V prize, and to execute a second game (a game in which balls are not shot) for lengthening a playing period for winning a role by establishing conditions for terminating the winning game for a role based on the lapse of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the role winning game and the long-time variation of the normal symbols overlap, information for allowing the player to select the game method (first game, second game) is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 90(a). Specifically, when the role winning game is being executed (the special figure variation is interrupted) and the remaining period of the normal symbol variation during execution is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds), a comment "15 seconds until the end of the normal figure variation" is displayed in the display area HR11 as information indicating the remaining period of the normal symbol variation. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP without winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the winning role game. Since other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By constructing in this manner, the length of the period during which the special symbol variation is interrupted can be changed according to the player's skill (game contents to be executed), so that the player can actively execute the game during the V rush (during the time reduction state). In addition, since it is constructed so that a game result that can be advantageous to the player in different respects can be generated regardless of which game the player selects, the subsequent game result can be greatly changed depending on the game selected by the player, and the game method can be selected more positively.

Further, in this embodiment, at least the advantageous normal pattern winning game and the unfavorable normal pattern winning game are configured to be executable at least as the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state, and the variation time of the normal pattern executed during the time saving state is also configured to be able to set a long time variation and a short time variation. When the accessory winning game is executed during the advantageous normal pattern winning game and when the accessory winning game is executed during the short-time variation of the normal symbols, the game (first game) for winning the ball to the V winning device 65 during the accessory winning game is more advantageous to the player.

In this way, by varying the timing (presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) of a disadvantageous period (a period during which a new role-winning game cannot be executed) during the time-saving state (during the V rush) according to the lottery result of normal symbols, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game during the time-saving game (during the V rush).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the role winning game, it is possible to perform an advantageous role winning game in which the ball that has won the V winning device 65 easily enters the V winning opening 165 (V winning), and a disadvantageous role winning game that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous role winning game. When the technique is executed, the probability of winning the V prize is about 1/11.

Therefore, when the role winning game executed overlapping with the disadvantage period described above is the advantageous role winning game, the effects shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) are not executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game (second game) that does not aim at the execution of the V jackpot game even though a situation in which the player can easily win the V jackpot game occurs, thereby preventing the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the effect executed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the winning game will be described. FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and FIG.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state (during V rush), the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends is set so that the period obtained by adding the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation to the number of times of time saving (for example, four times of time saving) set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed is set. That is, after the end of the special symbol variation restarted after the end of the big win game (the special symbol variation interrupted when the big win game is executed), the subtraction of the number of times of time saving is started.

Therefore, even when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, a new time-saving state period set after the jackpot game ends is different according to the remaining period of the special pattern variation in the jackpot game (V jackpot game). Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is desirable to execute a big winning game (V big winning game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol variation is long, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property aiming at a big win by a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time saving state and using the special symbol lottery during the time saving state as an element for ending the time saving state (an element for setting the duration of the time saving state). However, as in the first embodiment described above, the short remaining time mode 801 (see FIG. 12(a)) indicating the duration of the time saving state does not indicate the remaining period of each special symbol variation, and information corresponding to the total time until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is completed is displayed. are

In other words, in the effect mode described in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is interrupted by the execution of the role winning game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), when the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption during the winning role game is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(c)), the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "It is better to get VGET with the next winning role", and as shown in FIG. 91(b), the remaining period of the special symbol variation during suspension during the winning role game is 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(d)). , the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment "If you get a VGET with this prize, you have a great chance".

That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is determined, and if the result of the determination is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), when the V jackpot game is executed by causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 in the current role winning game, an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened is executed, and the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is reduced. If it is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the ball is entered into the V winning port 165 in the current accessory winning game, and when the V big winning game is executed, the performance is executed to indicate that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V big winning game is likely to become longer. Therefore, the player can select (select whether or not to allow the ball to enter the V winning port 165) based on the contents of the performance to be executed during the V jackpot game, and the game results during the V rush period can be greatly varied based on the game method arbitrarily selected by the player.

Although detailed description is omitted, in order to execute the production shown in FIG. 91 (a), other production execution conditions are provided, specifically, the first condition that is established when the winning information that is hit and won is included in the acquired general pattern reservation memory (the winning information of the acquired normal symbol), and the second condition that is established when the special symbol variation during the interruption is not the special symbol variation (shorter final variation) that will establish the time saving end condition. By setting the performance execution condition in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is terminated immediately after selecting the game in which the ball is not awarded V during the role winning game being executed according to the comment displayed in the sub display area Ds.

91(a) and (b) described above may use the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. For example, a comparison means is provided to compare the remaining period of the special symbol variation during suspension and the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. When the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the special symbol variation during suspension is longer, the performance (see FIG. 91(b)) to encourage V winning during the current role winning game is executed, and the special during suspension is performed. When it is determined that the remaining period of the symbol variation is shorter, it may be configured to execute the effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) to suppress the V winning during the current role winning game.This makes it possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol variation during interruption with respect to the period of the special symbol variation that is actually performed (the period of the special symbol variation that will be executed next), so that the player can perform (set) a highly accurate effect for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute an effect suggesting a game method that can be advantageous to the player based on the normal symbol variation situation during the role winning game (interruption of the special symbol variation) during the V rush, the game status of the normal symbol winning game, and the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation. However, for example, it is possible to execute a performance suggesting each of the normal symbol variation situation during the accessory winning game, the game situation of the normal symbol winning game, and the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation, that is, only the situation suggesting performance suggesting various situations during the V rush period. By constructing in this manner, the player who grasps the situation suggesting performance analyzes the game situation during the V rush period, predicts the most advantageous game method by himself, and can provide the enjoyment of selecting the game method.

<Regarding the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG.92 and FIG.93, the flow of the game in a time saving state in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the second embodiment, a normal pattern winning game with a short normal pattern winning game period and a normal pattern winning game with a long normal pattern winning game period are configured to be executable as the normal pattern winning game executed when winning is won in the normal pattern lottery in the time saving state. Then, the ratio of the length of the period in which the general electric prize winning device 640 is in the open state to the length of the entire period of the general pattern winning game is lower in the general pattern winning game in which the period of the general pattern winning game is longer than in the general pattern winning game in which the period of the normal pattern winning game is short. In other words, a normal per game with a short normal per game period can win a ball to the general electric winning device 640 during the normal per game, and it becomes an advantageous normal per game in which the general per pattern game ends in a short period (about 3.5 seconds), and a general per pattern per game with a long period of a general per pattern game can win a ball to the general electric winning device 640 during the general per pattern game, but the period until the end of the general per pattern game. is a long (about 17.5 seconds) disadvantageous normal game.

Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, the above-mentioned disadvantageous normal pattern winning game is a general pattern winning game in which a period in which the general electric winning device 640 is in a closed state after opening the normal electric winning device 640 in the same variable operation as the advantageous normal winning game is set for 15 seconds, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is wastefully subtracted.

Therefore, the timing at which the above-described disadvantageous period is set and the game contents of the winning-accessory game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the game per unfavorable normal pattern (per normal pattern B) is executed. When a normal pattern lottery wins and a disadvantageous normal pattern winning game is executed, a normal pattern winning game is executed in which the general electric prize winning device 640 opens for 1 second, closes for 0.5 seconds, opens for 1 second, closes for 15 seconds, and opens for 0.1 seconds. Then, when the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the first 1-second opening period wins the special electric operation opening 643, the prize winning game is executed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 92(a), if the ball is not allowed to enter the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (personal object winning game) and is terminated after the passage of time, since the personable object winning game ends 8.1 seconds after the personable object winning game is started, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, a part of the unfavorable period set when the game with the unfavorable normal pattern (B) is executed can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation is not subtracted, so that the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be subtracted during the unfavorable period can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(b), when the specified number (three) of balls is won into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game for a role) and the game for a role is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the game for the role (the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted) is shorter than when the game for the role is finished with the passage of time shown in FIG. 92(a). Variation time of pattern variation becomes longer.

In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the period until the end of the normal symbol winning game is displayed in the display area HR10, and furthermore, the sub display area Ds guides and displays the game method in which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is continued and interrupted. When the ball enters the V winning port 165 during the accessory winning game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period overlaps with the disadvantageous period set when the unfavorable normal game (normal game B) is executed, so that the setting of the unfavorable period does not put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method for ending the accessory winning game being executed with the lapse of time and preventing the useless subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, or selecting a game method aiming at the V big winning game by winning the ball into the V winning port 165 in the accessory winning game being executed (the winning probability is about 1/11).

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the flow of the game when the long time variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the game when a long time variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, a short variation of 1 second and a long variation of 15 seconds are selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Here, during the normal symbol variation period in the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted and the normal symbol winning game is not performed, so it becomes a disadvantageous period for the player. Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the normal symbol per game described above with reference to FIG. 92, the game period of the role per game, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted, and the variation period of the normal symbol variation are overlapped so that the variation time of the special symbol variation is not wasted during the unfavorable period.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 93(a), when the specified number (three) of balls is won into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (character per game), and the character per game is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the character per game (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted compared to the case where the character per game is terminated with the passage of time shown in FIG. 92(a). period) is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be subtracted during the unfavorable period is lengthened.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(b), if the ball is not allowed to enter the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (accessory per game) and is terminated after the passage of time, since the accession per game ends 8.1 seconds after the accession per game is started, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, since the fluctuation period of the long normal pattern fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation is not subtracted, the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be subtracted during the disadvantage period can be reduced.

In such a situation, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the period until the variation per normal symbol ends is displayed in the display region HR11, and furthermore, the sub-display region Ds guides and displays the game method in which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is continued and interrupted. When a ball enters the V winning port 165 during the role winning game and the V big winning game is executed, the period of the big winning game overlaps with the variation period of the long-time normal pattern variation (15 seconds), so that the setting of the disadvantageous period does not put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method for ending the accessory winning game being executed with the lapse of time and preventing the useless subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, or selecting a game method aiming at the V big winning game by winning the ball into the V winning port 165 in the accessory winning game being executed (the winning probability is about 1/11).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99. FIG. In the second embodiment, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and part of the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113, and a new solenoid 209 connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 are added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the electric power winning device 640, and the third movable valve solenoid 209f for driving the third movable valve 1642 is added. Although detailed description will be given later, this third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to switch between an ON state and an OFF state at predetermined intervals upon execution of a game per normal pattern. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is varied between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 is operated during the normal game, and the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 flows down toward the special electric operation opening 643, it is switched whether the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643 according to the state of the third movable valve 1642.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the winning ball flowing down in the electric prize winning device 640 .

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the above-described first embodiment is provided with various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa instead of the various operation scenario tables 202e, and is different in that a normal pattern per type selection table 202ab and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac are provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, per general pattern type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b). FIG.95(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to per normal figure classification selection table 202ab. Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the second embodiment provides a plurality of types in the normal game per game executed during the time saving state, and is configured to be able to execute the normal per game with different operation patterns. Although the specific description is omitted, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the normal symbol variation that is won per normal pattern stops (S1117: Yes), the type per normal pattern is selected by referring to the normal per pattern selection table 202ab based on the value of the second per type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the set game state.

Specifically, the contents defined in the normal pattern per type selection table 202ab will be described. The set game state is a time saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), and when the value of the acquired second per type counter C9 is in the range of "0 to 89", "per normal pattern A" is defined as the normal per pattern type, and in the range of "90 to 99", "per normal per pattern B" is defined as the per normal pattern type. The specific operation contents of the game per normal pattern will be described later, but when "per normal pattern A" is selected (selection rate 90%), the electric role product 640a will be in an open state a plurality of times (twice) over the entire game period per normal pattern, and a game per normal pattern that is relatively easy to win the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640 will be executed. On the other hand, when ``normal pattern winning B'' is selected (selection rate 10%), after the normal pattern winning game similar to ``normal pattern winning A'' is executed (in the second half of the normal pattern winning game period), the normal pattern winning game is executed in which the period in which the electric accessary 640a is in a closed state is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

As described above, since the normal pattern per game is executed without interrupting the special symbol fluctuation, the "normal per pattern A" allows the ball to win the special electric activation opening 643 or the second special electric activation opening 1643 throughout the normal per per game. Therefore, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is wastedly subtracted, resulting in a disadvantageous normal symbol per game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, in the case where such a normal pattern winning game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the role winning game, by continuing the role winning game for a long time, it is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 90 (a)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol to be subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable normal pattern winning game. As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG.95(c), the content of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is demonstrated. FIG.95(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern executed when a ball passes through a through gate 67, and is referred to when selecting a normal symbol variation time in normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48).

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the variation time of the normal symbol is unified to 3 seconds, so in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol (see S1114 in FIG. 48), only the variation time (variation pattern) of 3 seconds was set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, different variation patterns can be selected based on the set game state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of normal symbols.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired variation type counter CS2. In other words, in the normal state, the same three-second normal symbol variation as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is the time saving state, the value of the variation type counter CS2 is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second in the range of "0 to 179", and a short variation is defined. A long variation is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds in the range of "180 to 197".

Thus, in this embodiment, the length of the period during which the normal pattern is fluctuating largely differs depending on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the variation period of the normal patterns in the time saving state, the normal pattern winning game is not executed, and further, the remaining period of the special pattern variation is subjected to subtraction processing, so that the normal pattern variation pattern is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol variation is executed in the disadvantageous normal pattern variation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the role winning game, the player continues the role winning game for a long time, thereby executing an effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol to be subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable normal pattern variation. As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(a), contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from those of the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the motion scenario tables 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the normal-symbol motion scenario table 202e3 is changed, and that a second role-symbol motion scenario table 202e5 is added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the action scenario table 202e5 for the second role will be described with reference to FIG. 96(b). FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the action scenario table 202e5 for the second prize. This second prize winning action scenario table 202e5 is a data table that defines the action scenario of the prize winning game to be executed when the ball wins the second special electric activation opening 1643 in the normal game.

Specifically, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "1", that is, immediately after the performance of the role winning game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF, and the OFF state of the storage solenoid 209c continues until the role winning game ends. Then, an operation scenario is defined in which the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the V open/close door 65a is closed) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the game with the accessory, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "26" to "400", that is, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON (the round period is set) for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V open/close door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. A ball that enters the V winning device 65 during this round period passes through the storage valve 66a that is moving to the ball non-storage state (retracted state) and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, since a plurality of balls can be made to flow into the first movable valve 66b during one role-winning game, it is possible to increase the V winning probability during the role-winning game.

Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "400", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the state in which the V open/close door 65a is closed continues until the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650", that is, the operation scenario is defined to continue for 5 seconds. After that, when the value of the scenario counter reaches ``1650'', the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON until the value of the scenario counter reaches ``1675'', that is, for 0.1 second, and then the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF until the value of the scenario counter reaches ``2025''.

In the present embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the above-described operation scenario table 202e2 for the role item and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the second operation scenario table 202e5 for the role item are different in operation content of the storage valve 66a. It may be configured to vary the winning ratio of balls to 5.

Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is set to turn off the storage solenoid 209c for 3 seconds after the start of the per-accessory game, set the storage solenoid 209c to on for 2 seconds, and then set the storage solenoid 209c to off again. The action scenario is defined so that the role-winning game is executed with a period of 1.5 seconds during which the door 65a is open and an ending period of 1.5 seconds (a period during which the V open/close door 65a is closed).

On the other hand, when a ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643, the operation scenario may be defined so that the opening period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed) is 3.1 seconds, the round period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in the open state) is 1.5 seconds, and the ending period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, in the role winning game that is executed based on the winning of the ball in the second special electric operation opening 1643, the storage valve 66a is in a retracted state (ball non-reserving state) in which the balls cannot be stored during the period in which the ball can be made to enter the V winning device 65, so that the plurality of balls that have won the V winning device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, thereby increasing the probability of winning the V winning opening 165. I can.

In addition, in the role winning game that is executed based on the winning of the ball in the special electric operation opening 643, the storage valve 66a is in a protruding state (ball storage state) in which the ball can be stored in the V winning device 65 during the period in which the ball can be won. You can lower your chances of winning.

With this configuration, in the case of varying the ease of winning a ball into the V winning port 165 during the role winning game (V winning rate) according to the type of the role winning game to be executed, the V winning rate can be varied only by changing only the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening and closing door 65a is first opened among the opening pattern of the V opening/closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a. It is possible to simplify the operation control in That is, only during the period from the start of the role winning game to the end of the opening period, an operation scenario is set for each type of the role winning game, and after that, the operation control of various devices can be executed based on the common operation scenario, so that the operation control can be simplified.

Further, according to the above-described example, the ball winning device 65 can win the ball in the V winning device 65 at an earlier stage after the start of the role winning game than the role winning game that is disadvantageous to the player (the role winning game that is executed when the ball enters the second special electric activation port 1643) that is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute a game that is advantageous to the player. In addition, as the contents of operation of the storage valve 66a, an operation advantageous to the player (an operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is set before the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning device 65 in the role winning game that is disadvantageous to the player. Since an operation advantageous to the player (an operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed, it is possible to suppress the illegal entry of the ball into the V winning opening 165.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the action scenario defined in the role winning action scenario table 202e2 is different from that in the first embodiment described above. More specifically, the second embodiment differs in that a closed period of 15 seconds and an open period of 0.1 second are defined in the second half of the role winning game, similar to the second role winning action scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96(b).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the role winning game is executed, the playing period of the role winning game can be made largely different between the case of ending the role winning game based on winning a ball and the case of ending the role winning game based on the passage of time. As a result, the game result during the time saving state can be greatly changed according to the selection result of the game method during the accessory winning game, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97(a), the difference from the above-described first embodiment will be described in the action scenario table 202e3 for the normal figure of the second embodiment. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-universal figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation contents of the game per normal pattern executed during the time saving state are different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the second embodiment, the action scenario of the game per normal pattern executed during the time saving state is different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and there are 2 scenarios 202e33 per normal pattern for reducing working hours and 3 scenarios per normal pattern 202e33 for reducing working hours.

First, with reference to FIG. 97(b), the contents of the 2 scenarios 202e33 per standard diagram for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 97(b) is a model that schematically shows the contents stipulated in the two scenarios 202e33 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving 2-per-normal-map scenario 202e33 defines an action scenario of a normal-per-per-map game to be executed when "normal-per-per-per-map A" is selected as the normal-per-per-map type. be done.

Specifically, when the value of the scenario counter is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON, and an operation scenario is defined in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON. It should be noted that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state until the normal game per game ends (the value of the scenario counter becomes "900"). In other words, in the normal game to be executed corresponding to the "normal game A", the winning ball of the electric accessory 640a is configured to always win the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643.

In addition, the third movable valve solenoid 209f is configured such that an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at an operating position where the ball can win a prize in the second special electric operation opening 1643) and an OFF period of 1.5 seconds (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at a normal position in which the ball can win a prize in the special electric operation opening 643) are repeatedly set. That is, the ratio of balls passing through the second movable valve 642 to the second special electric operation opening 1643 is about 11%, and the ratio of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 to the special electric operation opening 643 is about 89%.

Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the normal game is started, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range from "26" to "274", that is, for 1 second, the general electric solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the range from "275" to "400", that is, for 0.5 seconds. The electric solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, an operation scenario is defined in which the normal solenoid is set to ON again for a range from "401" to "649", that is, for one second, and then the normal solenoid is set to OFF for a range from "650" to "900", that is, for one second. That is, when the normal pattern per game based on the operation scenario stipulated in the 2 per normal pattern scenario 202e33 for reducing working hours is executed, the normal per pattern game is executed in which the opening operation of opening the electric role object 640a for 1 second is executed twice, and the total period of the open state of the electric role object 640a during which the ball can enter the normal electric prize winning device 640 is 2 seconds with respect to the entire period (3.6 seconds) of the normal per pattern game. 0% is a period advantageous to the player (a period during which the special electric game can be progressed (a ball can be entered into the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the 3 scenarios 202e34 per standard diagram for reducing working hours will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per standard diagram for reducing working hours. This time-saving normal pattern per 3 scenario 202e34 defines the operation scenario of the normal pattern per game executed when "normal pattern per B" is selected. Since the contents defined in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per time-saving normal map are the same as the 2 scenarios per time-saving normal map 202e33 described above until the value of the scenario counter reaches "650", a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "650" to "3500", i.e., the general electric solenoid is set to OFF for 15 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "3501" to "3524", i.e., the general electric solenoid is set to ON for 0.1 second.

In other words, the normal pattern winning game defined in the 3 scenarios 202e34 per normal pattern for reducing working hours has a total length of 17.7 seconds for the entire game period per normal pattern, and the total period during which the ball can be won in the general electric prize winning device 640 during the game per normal pattern is configured to be 2.1 seconds. Therefore, with respect to the entire period of the game per normal pattern (17.7 seconds), the total open state period of the electric role object 640a during which the ball can enter the normal power prize device 640 is 2.1 seconds. Furthermore, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state for fifteen seconds.

Therefore, when the 3 normal pattern winning scenario 202e34 for the time saving is set during the time saving state, the period in which the ball cannot win the general electric prize winning device 640 is set long, so that the game becomes a normal drawing winning game disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (when the fourth special symbol variation ends), the time saving state is terminated, and during the normal figure winning game, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted. That is, even during the closed state of 15 seconds, since the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted, it becomes a game per normal pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, with respect to the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa, the normal pattern per time counter 223ab, the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac, and the production set flag 223ad are added. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the normal pattern fluctuation time, and when a general pattern fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process periodically (every 1 millisecond) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is subtracted. It is configured to be referred to when the role-winning game is executed, and to execute various effects based on the counter value.

The normal pattern per time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the game period in which the normal pattern per game is executed, and when the general pattern per start command is received, the normal pattern per game period corresponding to the received command is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process periodically (every 1 millisecond) executed in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) is subtracted.

The shooting prohibition suggesting flag 223ac is set to ON when performing puncture suggesting performance for puncturing the role winning game (ending the role winning game with the lapse of time), and is set to OFF when the role winning game is finished in the state of being set to ON. When the role winning game ends, it is referred to when changing the display mode of the ending screen of the role winning game based on the setting status of the flag and the end condition of the established role winning game (end of prize winning, end of elapse of time).

The performance setting completion flag 223ad is for indicating that a puncture suggesting performance suggesting that the role winning game is terminated based on the lapse of time or performance suggesting winning of the ball to the V winning device 65 during the role winning game is set, and is set to ON when a dedicated performance is set during the role winning game.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a different accessory per game can be executed according to the operation opening (special electric operation opening 643, second special electric operation opening 1643) in which the ball wins during the normal figure per game. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the normal symbol lottery, based on the game state and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (see FIG. 95 (c)) is configured to be selectable. The control processing executed by the main controller 110 is the same except for the contents described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108). This special electric starting opening winning process 2 (S108) is different from the special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above in that the winning type corresponding to the operation opening (special electric opening 643, second special electric opening 1643) in which the ball has won is settable, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. 70 in S4804), and the performance update process 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) instead of the performance update process (see S4111 in FIG. 72). Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the general-purpose map related process 2 (S4217) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal map related process 2 (S4217). This general figure related process 2 (S4217) is different from the general figure related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above in that the process performed when the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received and the process performed when the general figure per start command is received are changed.

When the general pattern related processing 2 (S4217) is executed, it is first determined whether the general pattern variation pattern command is received (S4701), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4701: Yes), the general pattern variation start processing is executed (S4751), and then this processing ends. In addition, the regular pattern fluctuation start processing (S4751) executed in the processing of S4751 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102, but the processing for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation times are selectable as variation patterns of normal symbols (see FIG. 95(c)), and the degree of advantage of the game executed during the time-saving state is configured to vary according to the selected variation pattern.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received (S4701: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703), and if it is determined that it is received (S4703: Yes), the time per normal pattern based on the received command (END time of the game operation scenario per normal pattern) is set to the time counter per normal pattern (S4752), and the start command per normal pattern for display. is set (S4704), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure per start command is not received in the process of S4703 (S4703: No), the same S4705 to S4714 processing as the general figure related process (see FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S4751) will be described. Figure 102 is the flowchart which shows the contents of normal figure fluctuation start processing (S4751). When the normal pattern fluctuation start processing (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is in the time saving mode (in the time saving state) (S4771), and if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (S4771: No), the normal pattern variation command for display is set (S4771), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving in the process of S4771 (S4771: Yes), extract the normal pattern fluctuation time from the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4772), set the extracted value to the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa (S4773), execute the above-described S4774 process, and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the role-related process 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role-related process 2 (S4851). This award-winning related process 2 (S4851) differs from the above-described award-winning related process (S4804) in that the details of the process executed when receiving a winning-for-a-personal start command or when an ending command is received are changed.

When the role winning related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a role winning start command has been received (S5101), and if it is determined to have been received (S5101: Yes), the role winning start process is executed (S5151), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not been received in the processing of S5101 (S5101: No), the processing of S5103 to S5107, which is the same as the above-described processing related to the character item (S4804), is executed.

In other words, in the processing of S5152, it is determined whether or not an effect is being executed to suggest that it is more advantageous to prohibit the player from shooting the ball. If it is determined in the processing of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not ON (S5152: No), the processing of S5108 to S5109, which is the same as the above-described prize winning related processing (S4804), is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the processing of S5152 (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to OFF (S5153), and it is determined whether the end condition of the current regular game per game is the passage of time (S5154).

When it is determined that the normal per game is over based on the passage of time (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating "success" is set (S5155), and the per game is not over based on the passage of time, that is, when it is determined that the per game is over based on the winning ball (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). In this way, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or unfavorable for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the normal per game during the time saving state, and when the performance of suggesting the game method to the player is executed based on the prediction result, it is determined whether the normal per game is over based on the suggested content, and the display mode of the end screen of the normal per game is changed based on the determination result. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the technique method was the correct selection.

It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, for example, when it is predicted whether it is advantageous or unfavorable for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the normal game in the time saving state, and based on the prediction result, an effect that suggests a game method to the player is executed. , In the processing of S5154, it is determined whether the game corresponding to the actual prediction result (elapsed time, ball winning) ends the game with a normal pattern, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the end screen may be changed. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected production for the player.

Also, in this case, in addition to the above-described effect of suggesting the game method to the player, it is preferable to execute a situation notification effect (for example, effect of suggesting the type of game per normal pattern) for making the player predict the actual game situation. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the effect suggesting the game method to the player is a false effect. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the normal figure winning game and the accessory winning game are executed in duplicate, an effect suggesting the game method to the player is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the role winning start process (S5151) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prize winning start process (S5151). In the role winning start process (S5151), various processes for varying the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the role winning game.

When the accessory winning start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the winning special electric opening is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the current role winning game is a role winning game to be executed when a ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643 (special electric operation opening 1) (S5302), and if it is determined that it is not based on the winning in the special electric operation opening 1 (S5302: No), a display command for indicating advantageous role winning is set (S5303), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301, if it is determined that it is based on the winning of the special electric activation opening 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time counter is read (S5304), and it is determined whether the read value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command for suggesting the end of the time elapsed for each character is set (S5306), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON (S5307), and the process proceeds to S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the sub-display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the ball from being shot is displayed, like the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a).

Also, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the process of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less (S5308), and if it is determined that it is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), by quickly ending the role game, the next general figure per game can be executed again. Since it is in this state, a display command is set to indicate the end of winning a prize (S5309), and the process proceeds to S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the processing of S5309, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 displays a display mode prompting the ball to be shot (for example, ``If you shoot the ball quickly and end the accessory winning game, you have a chance'').

If it is determined in the processing of S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, a display command for indicating the prize winning is set without setting a dedicated display command (S5310), the effect set flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first game method suggestive effect and the second game method suggestive effect are configured to be executable, so that the player can be made to select the game method of the role winning game based on the effect contents of the various suggestive effects to be executed. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method, so that the player can be interested in various suggested performances to be executed. Also, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second embodiment, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect so that the player can select the game method of the role-performing game according to the normal symbol variation and the situation of the normal-performing game that are executed during the role-performing game. Based on the length of the remaining period of the normal symbol fluctuation, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect that can be selected by the player. By constructing in this way, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal pattern variation executed in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is executed for a long time, the period in which the normal pattern variation is not executed in the time saving state becomes longer, and the player's willingness to play is reduced.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. FIG. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, based on the winning of the ball in the special electric operation opening (the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643), the game per role is executed, and the subtraction of the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. In other words, it is configured such that the more the role-winning game is executed, the more advantageous the player is. Therefore, the game method during the time-saving state (during the V rush) becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player may become bored with the game.

On the other hand, the third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment in that the processing contents for the special symbol variation being executed when the role winning game is executed are different. Specifically, according to the role winning game type to be executed (set), the processing of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed, the processing of discarding (discarding the remaining variation time, forced stop regardless of the lottery result), and the processing of ending the time saving state in addition to discarding. , is configured to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the role-winning game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

Furthermore, based on the performance executed during the time-saving state (V rush), it is configured to execute the performance that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the role winning game. As a result, for example, when a role-winning game in which the time-saving state ends is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust caused by the sudden end of the time-saving state. In addition, since the player himself/herself can select whether or not to execute the role winning game based on the contents of the performance to be executed, the player can be motivated to participate in the game and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the contents of characteristic effects among the effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. The effect executed in the present embodiment differs greatly from each of the above-described embodiments in that the duration of the time saving state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed in addition to the time-measured subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812, the reduction display in which the value displayed in the timer 812 is greatly reduced when the special symbol variation being executed is discarded by executing the role winning game, and the extinction display in which the time saving state ends due to the execution of the role winning game.

Further, when the special pattern variation being executed is winning a big win (during the big winning variation), the execution of the role winning game is greatly different in that a suggestive performance suggesting that the big winning variation being executed is discarded is executed. Other display contents are the same except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the differences described above. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents executed when the remaining period of the special symbol jackpot variation reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), and FIG. 108(c) is a schematic diagram showing the status of holding each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108(a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, the display mode of "entering danger time" is displayed, and "10 seconds" is displayed as a period display mode 851 indicating the period until the danger time ends (until the jackpot fluctuation is stopped). Similar to the value displayed on the timer 812 , the period display mode 851 is periodically subtracted (counted down) by the effect update processing of the sound lamp control device 113 .

Further, in the V rush variation area 811, in addition to the pattern imitating "V" corresponding to the success of the game (execution of the V jackpot game) during the V rush, the pattern imitating "skull" showing the game result disadvantageous to the player is variably displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "During Danger Time, it's a big pinch" are displayed.

In other words, when entering the danger time, it is suggested to the player that there is a possibility that the big winning variation will stop (execution of the big winning game based on the special drawing) after a predetermined time (10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, this danger time is configured to be executed even in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.

Therefore, when entering the danger time, the player selects whether to execute the special electric game aiming at the role winning game (not shoot the ball) until the end of the danger time, or to execute the special electric game even during the danger time and go for the V winning game enthusiastically.

In this embodiment, the condition for entering the danger time is when the remaining period of the special variation during execution reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), but without being limited to this, for example, the condition for entering the danger time may be different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation during execution is a jackpot or when it is not. It may be constructed so as to be able to enter the danger time only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation fluctuation. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed based on the display of the remaining period of the danger time displayed when the danger time is entered.

In addition, in the above-described example, an example in which a condition for entering the danger time exclusively for the fluctuation of the jackpot is provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player who understands that the ball is fluctuating to play the game without shooting the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the display contents when the role winning game is executed during the danger time and the big winning variation is discarded will be described. FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when the accessory winning game is executed during the danger time and the big winning variation is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when the prize winning is executed during the danger time, the characters "end" are displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, in the V rush variation area 811, a pattern resembling a "skull" is stopped and displayed in a grid pattern to indicate that the jackpot variation that was being executed has been discarded. Furthermore, a comment "Unfortunately... pull back" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, since the accessory winning game is being executed, a display mode for aiming for a V prize in the accessory game is displayed.

Also, since the special symbol variation being executed has been discarded, only "10 seconds", which is the variation time of the next variation, is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to notify the player that the big winning variation has been discarded in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, when the accessory winning game interrupting the big winning variation is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, after continuing the danger time, the performance of notifying that the V big winning game is executed is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 110, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, the value of the first win type counter C2 is acquired when the ball wins the special electric activation port 643, and the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the V winning port 165 is won can be selected based on the acquired value of the first win type counter C2, and the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Differences in point and in. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110(a), three types of jackpot types are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3, and depending on the selected jackpot type, the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, the game state (time reduction number) set after the end of the V jackpot game, and the effect on the special symbols being executed when the role winning game is executed are configured to be different.

Specifically, a jackpot C is defined when the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is in the range of ``0 to 79'', a jackpot D is defined in the range of ``80 to 94'', and a jackpot E is defined in the range of ``95 to 99''.

The "jackpot C" (80% selection rate) has the same content as the V jackpot game executed in each of the above-described embodiments, and is set with 10 rounds (R) of the jackpot game, 4 times of time reduction, and interruption of the special symbol being executed. "Jack D" (selection rate 15%) is set with 10 rounds (R) of jackpot games, 4 times of time saving, and contents of discarding the special symbol variation being executed. "Jack E" (selection rate 5%) is set to 15 rounds (R) of jackpot games, 15 times of time saving, discarding the special pattern variation being executed, and ending the time saving state.

As described above, when the ``jackpot E'' in which the influence of the special symbol variation during execution is most disadvantageous to the player is set, when the V prize is won during the role-winning game, the jackpot game most advantageous to the player and the game state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot game is finished are set, so that the last chance can be given to the player. Further, for example, if the final fluctuation of the time saving state is off and the ending fluctuation is about to end, that is, if the time saving state ends in a few seconds without doing anything, this ``jackpot E'' can be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 110(b), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(b), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. Other than that, they are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when deciding whether to actually execute the danger time performance when a danger time entering condition is satisfied, and is constructed so as to vary the execution probability based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed.

Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 110(c). FIG. 110(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110(c), when the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation, the danger time effect is more likely to be executed than when it is a losing variation. Thus, when the danger time presentation is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the big win is fluctuating.

Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is a jackpot, execution of danger time is selected regardless of the value of the obtained performance counter 223f, and when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is out, no danger time performance is selected within the range of the value of the performance counter 223f from "0 to 89", and execution of the danger time performance is selected within the range of "90 to 99".

By constructing in this way, the danger time performance can be executed even when the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is not successful, so that the game of the player during the danger time can have a game property related to prediction and selection, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Contents of control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing contents in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the control processing executed by the main controller 110 and the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, but the rest are the same. Identical elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the details of the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158). This special electric start winning process 3 (S158) is different from the special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above in that when a ball wins the special electric operation opening 643, a different jackpot type can be selected and a process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special electric starting prize winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes of S1301 to S1303 and S1305 to S1309 as the special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed. Then, in the process of S1303, it is determined that the special electric is in operation (during the game per character), and if it is determined that the special electric is in operation, then it is determined whether the jackpot type selected this time is "jackpot E" (S1371), and if it is determined to be "jackpot E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and the special symbol variation stop process is executed. (S1374), the process proceeds to S1375. In addition, since the content of the special symbol variation stop processing (S1374) is the same as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1371, if it is determined that it is not a "jackpot E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is a "jackpot D" (S1372), and if it is determined that it is a "jackpot D" (S1372: Yes), the process of S1374 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not the "jackpot D", that is, that it is the "jackpot C" (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375.

In the processing of S1375, the role winning flag is set to ON (S1375), the command corresponding to the current winning type (“jackpot C” to “jackpot E”) is set (S1376), the special electric operation command is set (S1308), and the process ends.

Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the content of effect update process 3 (S4171). This effect update process 3 (S4171) is different from the effect update process 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) of the above-described second embodiment in that the danger time setting process (S5371) regarding the setting of the danger time effect is configured to be executed after the process of S5306, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the danger time setting process (S5371). In this danger time setting process (S5371), when the condition for executing the danger time presentation is satisfied, it is determined whether the danger time is actually performed, and the process for setting the danger time presentation is executed based on the determination result.

When the danger time setting process (S5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates 10 seconds remaining period (S5601). If it is determined that the value does not indicate 10 seconds remaining period (S5601: No), it means that the conditions for executing the danger time are not satisfied, so this process ends.

In the processing of S5601, when it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the danger time selection table 222ca is referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (special figure lottery result) and the value of the acquired production counter 223f to select whether or not to execute the danger time production (S5602).

In the processing of S5603, based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602, it is determined whether or not to execute the danger time effect (S5603), and if it is determined to be executed (S5603: Yes), a display command indicating the danger time effect is set (S5604), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5603, if it is determined not to execute the danger time effect (S5603: No), this processing ends.

The display command set in the process of S5604 executes the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90(a).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 137. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main controller 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, a special game in which a ball is entered into the special ball entrance 64 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened. It is configured to be a game method that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special electric operation opening 643, a ball opening (second ball opening 1645) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). The V open/close door 65a is configured to be opened when a specific lottery result (small win) is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the opening timing of the V open/close door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is not the winning of the accessory due to the ball entering the special electric operation opening 643, but the second special symbol lottery executed with the ball entering the second ball opening 1645 as a trigger. This small win is a kind of loss, and is a lottery result that enables a predetermined winning device (V winning device 65) to be activated without changing the game state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation). Then, during the time saving state, the lottery of the second special pattern is set so that the variation time is shorter than that of the first special pattern, so that the lottery of the second special pattern is easily executed.

In addition, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the cumulative time-saving end condition established when the sum of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol (number of fluctuations) reaches 100 times, and the special figure 1 time-saving end condition established when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) reaches 4 times are set, and when the cumulative time-saving end condition or the special figure 1 time-saving end condition is established, the time-saving state is established. is configured to terminate.

In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbols set during the time saving state is the same as the variation pattern of the special symbols set during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a small winning game (a game for opening a V winning device 65) is executed by entering a ball into a second ball entrance 1645 in place of a game to enter a ball and winning a small winning in a lottery of a second special pattern, and a game is used in which the time saving state is terminated even when the accumulated time saving end condition is established before the number of fluctuations of the first special pattern (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., four times).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (fluctuation period of the second special symbol) can be variably set in contrast to the above-described first embodiment. Therefore, for example, as the variation period of the second special symbol, a short variation period (e.g., 0.1 second variation time) and a long variation period (e.g., 10 second variation time) can be set. can vary greatly depending on the fluctuation period of Therefore, since it is possible to enrich the variation of the game during the time saving state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the accumulation time saving end condition can be established based on the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit to the number of small winning games to be executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a privilege (V jackpot game) excessively during the time-saving state. Furthermore, by making it difficult to set a short variation period (for example, 0.1 second) as the variation period of the second special symbol set during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of small winning games during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving an excessive amount of benefits (prize balls) in a short period of time.

The characteristic configuration and gameplay of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described below. First, the timing of updating the number of times of time saving and the determination processing timing for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described. As in the fourth embodiment, a simultaneous variation type game machine capable of simultaneously executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to execute update processing of the number of times of shortening of working hours and determination processing for ending the shortening of working hours at the timing of starting variation of each special symbol so that the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the shortening of working hours does not exceed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times). As a result, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special pattern variation of the specified number of times is executed, so that the 101st special pattern variation exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) can be surely performed in the normal state, and the excessive granting of benefits (special pattern variation in the time saving state) to the player is suppressed. However, before the final variation of the time saving state (the 100th special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol variation is started, the time saving state ends, so there is a problem that the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened depending on the timing of discrimination (variation) of each special symbol, giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

Specifically, for example, as the discrimination (variation) of the first special symbol, immediately after the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (the final number of times of time saving) is performed, the discrimination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, when the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing of the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (immediately before the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is performed). When the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is not executed in a state where the special figure variation of the 100th rotation (final time of the number of times of time saving) is performed, for example, when the special figure variation of the 101st rotation is started after the special figure variation of the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure variation of the 100th rotation is performed.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the 100th special figure fluctuation) that satisfies the time saving end condition and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the 101st special figure fluctuation) that is first executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the timing that is executed first among the timings. It is configured to end the time saving state based on.

By constructing in this way, a high probability state (working time reduction state) of normal patterns can be set until the timing when the specified number of special pattern variations are stopped and displayed or the timing when the special pattern variations of the number exceeding the specified number of times are executed, the player can be provided with the time saving state for the maximum period, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as the timing for executing the 101st special symbol variation, the timing at which the condition for executing the 101st special symbol variation is established can be determined, and the time saving state is completed before the 101st special symbol is determined. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which a time saving state is set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of times of time saving, and a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the special figure fluctuation when the time saving end condition is established, and the timing when the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation where the time saving end condition is established.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the variation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Then, when a V winning (ball entering a V winning port 165) occurs during a small winning game and a big winning is given, the temporarily stopped special pattern variation is restarted after the big winning game is finished. In the fourth embodiment, the timing for subtracting the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted when the variation of the special symbol that has started to change during the time saving game is stopped.

Since the variation of the temporarily stopped special pattern is the variation started before the big win game, the number of times of shortening of time is not subtracted when the variation of the temporarily stopped special pattern is restarted and stopped. That is, in this embodiment, when a big win is awarded by winning a V prize, in addition to the number of times of reduced working hours granted by the big win, the period until the temporarily stopped variation of the special pattern is stopped is also set as a reduced working time game state.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the most advantageous time-saving state for the player as long as possible.

Here, the fourth embodiment is shown as an example for realizing the game properties of the pachinko machine 10 described in the above-described first to third embodiments (special symbol lottery, special electric operation opening 643, and game properties aiming for a jackpot game) by a different method. Detailed descriptions of the technical ideas and effects that are used in the same manner as in the above-described first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<Regarding the Game Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine in the Fourth Embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 114, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a second ball entrance unit 1640 is provided instead of the general electric prize winning device 640 and a second ball entrance 1645 is provided instead of the special electric operation opening 643.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the special ball entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and by passing through the through gate 67, when the normal symbol lottery is executed and won, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the general electric winning device 640. Then, when the game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the winning of the accessory is executed, and the V open/close door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened.

On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is greatly different in that a second ball entrance 1645 serving as a second special symbol lottery opportunity is provided in place of the special electric operation opening 643 described above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opening timing of the V opening/closing door 65a is not the prize winning to the special electric operation opening 643, but based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1645.

When the game state is the normal state, the player shoots the game ball toward the left side area of the game board 13 in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, makes the ball enter the special symbol ball entrance 64, and executes the game while desiring to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the game state shifts to a time-saving game state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state) at a rate of 100%.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if the game is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. 0) is set.

A second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the second ball entry unit 1640, and when a game ball enters, a lottery for a second special symbol is executed. And, in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery for the second special symbol. When a small win is won, the V opening/closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to an open state, and when the game ball wins the V winning opening 165, a big win is awarded.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is defined to be 396/400 (approximately 9/10), although the details will be described later. The time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 is the state in which the V prize is likely to occur, which is the most advantageous state for the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery method is different from that of the above-described first embodiment, and the partial configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are changed corresponding to the above-described differences.

First, with reference to FIG. 115, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, a first winning type counter C2 used to select the special symbol jackpot type, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the special symbol, a small winning type counter C5 used to select the special symbol small winning type, and a first winning random number counter. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of C1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of normal symbols are used for initial value setting of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 55), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da corresponding to a ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 consisting of four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) and a second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203db corresponding to a ball entering a second ball entrance 1645 consisting of four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas). , According to the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area, and the special symbol fluctuation based on the stored various values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area, and the special symbol fluctuation based on the stored various values is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, so the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da.

Further, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small prize as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 may be stored. In this way, regardless of the specification of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small win), all of the counter values acquired by entering the ball into the starting port (the special symbol entrance 64, the second entrance 1645) that triggers the special symbol lottery are stored, and when the special symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the special symbol lottery is executed using only the necessary values among the acquired counter values. Since the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines with different (presence or absence of small wins), parts and technology can be shared, and costs can be reduced.

Further, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reservation areas (reserved first to fourth areas) similar to the special symbols described above.

Then, when starting conditions (fluctuation conditions) of the normal symbols are established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and normal pattern fluctuations are started based on the stored various values.

In this embodiment, each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 is reserved and stored, and each counter value obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored. However, without being limited to this, the function (reservation storage function) for storing each counter value obtained for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) may be omitted.

By constructing in this way, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player as a lottery of one special symbol type are switched according to a set game state, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired in order to execute the advantageous lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that a big hit type selection 4 table 202db is provided instead of the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24 (a)), and a variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202e. They are different in one respect. In addition, since the rest is the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 117 (a), small hit random number table 202da provided in ROM202 of main control unit 110 in a 4th embodiment is explained. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number table 202da. This small hit random number table 202da is a table in which a random number (determination value) determined as a small hit is defined in the second special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the small winning random number table 202da, the determination value determined as a small winning is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the determination value within a predetermined range is defined regardless of the state of the special symbol (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is not defined, and it is defined so as not to win the small winning in the first special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning is defined within the range of "4 to 399". That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (approximately 9/10).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that wins the big win and the value of the first random winning counter C1 that wins the small win are configured to be different, and in one process of executing the special symbol lottery (the process of judging whether or not there is a win), it is configured to continuously (simultaneously) execute the determination of whether the big win is successful and the determination of whether the small win is successful.

By configuring in this manner, a big win or a small win lottery can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, when a small prize is won, the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened for a certain period of time (a state in which a game ball can enter the V winning device 65). A big win is awarded by causing a game ball to enter a V winning port 165 in a V winning device 65 within a period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is open. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to win many small prizes.

In the present embodiment, the V opening/closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period when a small win is won, but without being limited to this, a type may be provided for the winning small win, and the period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened may be varied based on the type of the won small win. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a small hit type table, refer to the table, and determine the small hit type. With such a configuration, the player can be interested not only in winning the small prize but also in the type of the small prize to be won, and can execute the game while desiring to win the small prize in which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened for a longer period of time. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are defined with different probabilities of winning a small hit. By configuring in this way, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (time-saving state) is set, the lottery for the second special symbol advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so as to set the specific game state.

In this embodiment, a table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referred to when executing a big winning lottery and a table (small winning random number table 202da) that is referenced when executing a small winning lottery are configured separately. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of counter values for small winnings for each type of special symbol. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a determination of a big win or a small win according to a predetermined determination value according to the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. The C1 value may be varied, and a data table in which a judgment value corresponding to a big win or a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not defined may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in a big winning lottery or a small winning lottery executed in a state where a prescribed abnormal condition is established.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (parallel), and a restriction is set so that both special symbols are not simultaneously (parallelly) won a big win (so that the big win game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during a period until a big win is won in the lottery of one special pattern and a big win game corresponding to the big win is executed, the lottery of the special pattern may be executed by referring to a dedicated data table defining only the judgment value corresponding to the small win without defining the determination value corresponding to the big win so as not to win the big win in the lottery of the other special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, and a small hit flag. 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 variation time counter 203di, special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj, special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, time saving end waiting flag 203dm is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the game balls entering the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment).

A first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol, and is a storage area in which, when various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of the start winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), each counter C1 to C2, C5, CS1 value is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the corresponding areas (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing a special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 selects one of the data (the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db in order to execute processing such as setting the display of the big winning lottery and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. The data corresponding to the start winning prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc is a storage area in which the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning) are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), it acquires the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer, and stores them in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas where the data is vacant.

In addition, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) stores each counter value when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, and is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83, among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc (the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting winning is transferred to this normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are based on the winning to the special symbol entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1645 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. A counter that counts up to The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64 (start winning). The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is incremented by one.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning). The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is incremented by one.

When the respective values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 transfers the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) to the first special symbol variation start process (S255 in FIG. 123). Reference) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the first special symbol big win is executed while the second special symbol is being variably displayed, and is set to ON when the first special symbol big winning is executed while the second special symbol is being variably displayed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the 1st special design fluctuation stop processing (refer to S257 of Drawing 124) which MPU201 of main control unit 110 performs. Also, in the process of S952 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

Thus, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it is possible to prevent the second special pattern forcibly stop-displayed as a losing pattern from executing the lottery again.

In addition, the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the process related to the second special symbol after executing the process related to the first special symbol in one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), thereby executing the variation process for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 is configured to execute the big win control process (S1804 in FIG. 56). In addition, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is configured to skip the variation processing for each special symbol (S254 to S263 in FIG. 119) when the current state is the big win state or the small win state (S251 in FIG. 151: Yes).

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured so that no new special symbol variation (lottery) is executed. 119 (see S151), a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed.

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when a small hit is won. This small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the winning result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and is set to OFF when the special symbol variation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag that indicates the period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the suspended update (subtraction) of the variation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) where the lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), and is referred to in special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). When it is set to ON in the process of S252, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed (S253 in FIG. 119). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 123) (S751 in FIG. 123: Yes), it is set to OFF (S753 in FIG. 123).

In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won as a small win, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small win is only the first special symbol. However, when the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that a small win can be won, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol based on the stoppage of the special symbol in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the jackpot game), and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, based on the stop of the special symbol in the combination of the small hit, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (small winning game). It is configured to stop until the technique is completed).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of one special pattern becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is executed, the other special pattern (the lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed, and the big win can be suppressed from being erased by the small win.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and the value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and it is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 of FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 119) for stopping the first special symbol during variation is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1555 in FIG. 132). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed for a jackpot, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di remains and after the forced stop display, the variation of the first special symbol can be suppressed again based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and the value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and it is determined whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262 of FIG. 119: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 of FIG. 119) for stopping the second special symbol during variation is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj remains and after forced stop display, the variation of the second special symbol can be suppressed again based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the variation should subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h when the variation is stopped in the variation of the first special symbol. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120) when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (S358 in FIG. 120), and the time saving update process (see S863 in FIG. 125) in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124). ), when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S2101 in FIG. 125: Yes), after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2102), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

It should be noted that, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to OFF. Similarly, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the jackpot is won, the second special symbol variation stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132) is set to OFF. In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S in FIG. 125). 2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (see S2102 in FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the fluctuation is executed.

By constructing in this way, the jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is resumed, and the remaining time reduction frequency is not updated (subtracted) when the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game after the end of the big winning game awarded by the V winning, in addition to the number of lotteries of the special symbols specified by the big winning, the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol also becomes the time-saving game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous period for the player.

Special Figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the variation is stopped in the variation of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the value of 3h is greater than 0 (that is, the time is being shortened) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update process (S1661) of the special figure 2 out stop process (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to OFF. Also, when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to OFF (see FIG. 124 S860), and the second special symbol lottery is set to OFF in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the big hit is won, if the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is out and forced to stop. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to OFF, so that when the fluctuation forcedly stopped due to the deviation is stopped, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The time saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that the special figure variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is established has started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, four or 15 variations of the special symbols are executed as the specified period of the time saving state, and the time saving state is ended.

This time saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (that is, the final fluctuation of the prescribed number of times in the time saving state) (S360), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125) is executed, which is the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, or when performing the determination of the new special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121)), second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 3dm is set to off.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time saving end timing arrives, the time saving end processing can be reliably executed according to each timing.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. FIG. The fourth embodiment is different from the control processing of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment in that the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable (in parallel), and the content of the control processing corresponding to the above-described difference is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 119, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S151). Special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination based on the obtained counter values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variation display in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control, or sets various commands for executing the variation display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and determines the result. Control is executed to stop and display in a display mode showing (result of judgment). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether it is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning).

In the process of S251, if it is determined that it is during the big hit or the small hit (S251: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S252). 253), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating small hit winning. In this embodiment, while the small winning game is being executed, the variation time set in the variation display (special symbol variation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted), and during that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, the player can be notified that the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is temporarily stopped with the start of the small win game, so that the player can be prevented from feeling distrustful of the disappearance of the first special symbol variation being executed. The display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped may be, for example, the same display mode as the display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.2 seconds), or a display mode having a slower blinking interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is being performed (for example, a blinking display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of 0.5 seconds). Furthermore, when the display mode of the first pattern display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during a temporary stop may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the present is not during the big hit or the small hit (S251: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0, that is, whether the first special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (S254). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S255).

In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), a process for varying (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 while the first special symbol is varying is executed. Then, when the processing of S255 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S255) is 0 (S256), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 in the processing of S256 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S257), and the processing of S259 described later. to

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), when the variation time specified for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the processing of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stopping process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 in the process of S256 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S254 (S254: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently varying, then the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S258). In the first special symbol variation start processing (S258), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and determination of whether the new lottery (variation) is executable or not, and when the new lottery (variation) is executable, processing for performing the new lottery (variation) are executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S258) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG.

After executing the first special symbol variation start processing (S258), after determining that the special symbol 1 is being varied in the processing of S256 (S256: No), or after executing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), next, variation processing (S259 to S263) regarding the second special symbol is performed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S259 (S259: No), it is not currently in the special figure 2 variation. Next, the second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if the reserved data (various counter values) are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, the big hit determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data are executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S260), when the lottery result is a big win (or a small win), the big win flag 203i (or the small win flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S259, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is currently being varied (S259: Yes), then the second special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S261). The contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, but the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255) is executed by changing the processing target from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) is finished, it is determined whether the current value of the special symbol variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined to be 0 (S262: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S263), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 in the process of S262 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257), when the variation time specified for the second special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the processing for stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the processing of stopping and displaying the first special symbol variation under execution in a display mode indicating a compulsory loss is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. In addition, since this embodiment is configured so that a small win can be won in the lottery of the second special pattern, when the result of the lottery of the second special pattern is not a big win, processing corresponding to the small win or loss is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (parallel). Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, the variation stop processing of the first special symbol is preferentially executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but without being limited to this, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol may be configured to be performed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute variation processing for special symbol types in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and if the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed according to the set game state, means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variable processing may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the first special symbol variation start process (S258), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S258).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S353).

Then, a reservation ball number command indicating the number of reservation balls after subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in the reservation area 1 to reservation area 4 of the first special symbol reservation ball number storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is used to execute the big win determination as to whether or not the game is a big hit based on the set game state.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described later in detail, is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value, based on the result of the determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

A first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is in time saving (S358). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S358 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S358: No), the game state is the normal state, so this process ends. In this way, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, when the time saving is in progress, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to ON, it is possible to determine whether the fluctuation is started during the time saving at the time of stopping the fluctuation, and update the time saving end condition (subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h) at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

After executing the process of S359 mentioned above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether it is the final variation which is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S360, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1, this process is terminated as it is because it is not the final variation of the time saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S451). Then, in order to discriminate whether or not the conditions for ending the time saving are satisfied and waiting state, that is, whether or not the final variation of the time saving is executed by lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is in the final fluctuation of the time saving) (S452: Yes), the period of the time saving state set this time is over. Therefore, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set off (S454). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the game state has switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, in the process of S452, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the final variation of the time saving state is not being executed, so the processes of S453 to S456 are skipped and the process of S457 is performed.

In this way, if the state of waiting for the end of the time -saving state (a state where the final fluctuation of the time -saving state has begun due to the other special pattern), setting the gaming state to the normal state before acquiring the lottery result of the special pattern will be terminated, but the special pattern fluctuations in which the final fluctuation of the time -saving state has been executed will be executed. Up to which, the other special pattern can eliminate the bug of executing a gaming based on a time -short gaming status. Therefore, a proper game can be provided to the player.

When the process of S452 or S453 is completed, next, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S457). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big win (S458), and when it is determined to be a big win (S458: Yes), a big win flag 203i is turned on so as to indicate a big win of the first special symbol (S459). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special pattern that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Therefore, in the process of S459, information indicating a big win is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol among the big win flags 203i.

Then, the lottery result of the first special pattern is set to a big win (S460), the big win pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired win type counter C2 (S461), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S458 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S458: No), the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big win determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not the first special symbol big win is set (S551). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S459 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 121).

In the processing of S551, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S551: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S553), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out (S554).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 (S556).

Next, set a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol (S557), set the start of variation of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 (S558), set the value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern to the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di (S559), and finish this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the big hit flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S553.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S255). In this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a process for resuming the special symbol variation interrupted by winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol are performed.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when one special symbol wins a small prize and the other special symbol is displayed in a variable display, the other special symbol variation is interrupted for a predetermined period (period from the small winning to the end of the small winning game), and the other special symbol variation is resumed after the lapse of the predetermined period (after the small winning game is finished).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small winning game of one. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded based on the winning of the small winning game in one special symbol lottery, for example, it is possible to prohibit (suppress) the situation that the lottery result of winning the big winning (the lottery result more advantageous to the player than the winning of the small winning) is discarded due to the winning of the small winning.

In the process of S751, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S751: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S752), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S753), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is subtracted by 1 (S754), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S75 5), the process ends.

In this embodiment, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds is configured to execute the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 119), and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Configure. Therefore, for example, when the variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di, and the value is configured to be subtracted by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON in the processing of S751 (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small winning is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processing of S752 and S753 is skipped and the processing of S754 is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S257). This first special symbol variation stop process (S257) is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is "0", that is, when the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) has passed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S851). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S852), and a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on is set (S853).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S854), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). Thus, when the first special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode showing a big win, the variable display of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) being executed can be stopped-displayed (determined display) in a display mode (loss pattern) showing loss.

When the process of S855 is finished, next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i for the second special design is set to ON (S856), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S856: Yes), the big hit flag 203i for the second special design is set to OFF (S857) in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special design to the second special design that is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed in the process of S854 described above. ), deletes the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S858), and proceeds to the processing of S859. On the other hand, in the process of S856, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery, the processes of S857 and 808 are skipped and the process proceeds to S859.

In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won in this special symbol variation is set (see 809), then the jackpot flag 203i corresponding to the first special symbol, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The game state storage area 203g is configured to separately store the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state (during the big win, during the small win) related to the winning game, and by executing the processing of S861, the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the big win and the game state indicating that the big win is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S861 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), the first special symbol display device 37 executes a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner (S864), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update process (S862) is executed, and the process of S863 described above is performed. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S851: Yes), the second special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S854). In this manner, in the process of stopping and displaying (determining) one special symbol with a symbol indicating a big hit, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, it is possible to perform a proper process for a plurality of special symbol variations which are executed at the same time.

In other words, in the configuration in which the variation processing for the first special symbol and the variation processing for the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation processing for the second special symbol (forced stop processing) executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed within the variation processing for the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing for the second special symbol is not being executed, so the processing for the second special symbol is duplicated. It is possible to prevent it from being done, and it is possible to execute the process smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the other special symbol is configured to forcibly stop at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big win, but it is not limited to this. : Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the lottery result for the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the game result of the lottery game executed by the player being discarded.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol being executed based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the content of variation control may be changed according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol, when the second special symbol is being varied (loss fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the result of the lottery is discarded, and forced stop processing is performed to forcibly stop the variation. When the lottery result of the second special pattern is in the process of changing (winning fluctuation) for indicating that the lottery result of the second special pattern is winning (big win, small win), after the big winning game of the first special pattern is finished, the interruption processing may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special pattern can be restarted.

In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the game can be played while making the player interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is restarted. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to execute a suggestion performance for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not).

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the time saving update process (S862 (S1661)) which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation stop process (first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S151 in FIG. 119), second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132)) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the game state is the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the termination condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted to the normal state. In addition, in the explanation to be given later, the processing when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped will be explained, but the same processing is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, whether or not the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed this time starts the fluctuation during the time saving game (S2101). The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, when it is determined that fluctuation is started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2104. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), since it is not a change stop that triggers the update of the time saving state, the processing of S2102 to S2106 is skipped and the process of S2107 is performed.

As described above, when the game state is the time-saving state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the value of the time-saving counter 203h can be subtracted at the time of stopping the fluctuation by setting the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type to ON. Therefore, the time saving game state can be set until the final variation of the time saving game state stops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player for the longest possible period.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the variation of the first special pattern is temporarily stopped, and the variation is not restarted until the small prize game is finished. Then, a V prize is generated during the small win game, a big win is awarded, and after the big win game ends, the temporarily stopped variation of the first special symbol is resumed. Furthermore, although it will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 137, since the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game is started, when the temporarily stopped fluctuation restarts and stops, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off, so the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, it is configured so that the number of remaining time reductions is not subtracted when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol after the end of the big winning game by the V winning is stopped. By constructing in this way, in addition to the time-saving specified period set according to the jackpot type, the time-saving game is set for the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped special figure, so that the time-saving state, which is an advantageous period for the player, can be set to be the longest possible period. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

In the process of S2104, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S2104). If it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104: Yes), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is the final fluctuation of the time saving, and in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), when the next fluctuation is not started from the final fluctuation of the time saving, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to off (S2105), since it is the timing of shifting the game state to the normal state. The normal state is set in the skill state storage area 203g (S2106). Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the state where the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the time saving state is continuing. Thus, in the simultaneous variation type game machine, when the variation which is the final variation of the time saving game is stopped, it is determined whether or not the other special pattern is subjected to a variation exceeding the prescribed number of times of the time saving game state (from the final variation to the next variation), and if it is not performed, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause discomfort.

When one of the processes of S2101, S2104, and S2106 is completed, the process proceeds to S2107. In the process of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the second special symbol variation start process (S260), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S260).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121)) executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)) immediately before this process is performed.

In the process of S951, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), skip various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol, set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df to OFF (S952), and finish this process. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big winning symbol, and after the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol, it is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the process of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

This is performed immediately before the second special symbol variation start processing (S260) is executed (within the same special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)) (within the same special symbol variation processing 4). The big win game is started based on the big win information (big win scenario) set in the big win determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the big win game ends by the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the processing load of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (big hit), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with the lost symbol), and until the big hit game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is executed, a special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to prevent the execution of a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol, and the variation processing of the other special symbol is skipped once. may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol lottery (variation) may be configured so as not to win a big hit until the big win game based on the big win win is completed. may be configured to be set to off.

By constructing in this way, even if the timing of turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing of stopping and displaying the first special pattern in the big win pattern, the execution of the new second special pattern fluctuation (lottery) can be prohibited until the big win game is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON, the variation processing of the second special symbol is skipped, that is, a new variation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but without being limited to this, the second special exclusive for when the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON. It may be configured to execute the variable display of the pattern.

In this case, the lottery for the second special symbol is performed using a special lottery that does not win the big win, and the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the period until the big win game based on the big win winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the period until a specific timing during the big win game, or the period until the big win game ends, the second special symbol. It may be configured to display the special symbols in a variable manner. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

In addition, the content of the variation processing related to each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content thereof, and the variation display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. However, the second symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 When the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed while the special pattern is forcibly stopped, the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be used to execute the variable performance during the forced stop.

In this way, by using each pattern (third pattern, fourth pattern) variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special pattern variation has been forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the actual second special pattern is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S951, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S951 in FIG. 126: No), the processes of S953 to S959 are executed, and the process of S960 described later is performed. The processes of S953 to S959 are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, in contrast to the processes of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120). Since (S356) is the same except that it is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. The processing of S960 to S963 is the same as the processing of S358 to S361 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S258 in FIG. 120) except that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, so the explanation thereof is omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game machine executes the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol at the same time, by executing the same processing at the start of variation of both special symbols, it is possible to prevent problems such as the number of remaining time reductions not being subtracted in the other special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) by changing the type of target special symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and adding some other processes.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1051 corresponding to the processing of S451, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), in the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of S452 to S461, the target is changed from the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) to the special symbol 2 (second special symbol), and the lottery result of the special symbol. The difference is that the processing that is executed when it is out is changed. Since other points are the same, description thereof is omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), when it is determined that this lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special figure 2 loss variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends.

This special figure 2 loss fluctuation processing (S1062) is the processing which is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big win, that is, the small win or the loss. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, but when the lottery result is a loss, the same processing as the processing of S462 of the above-described first special symbol big winning determination processing (S356 in FIG. 121) is executed, and when the lottery result is a small winning, processing corresponding to winning a small winning is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation process (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation process (S1062).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1062), first, this lottery result (lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small hit or not (S1151).

When it is determined that a small win is won in the process of S1151 (S1151: Yes), the small win flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), the lottery result of the second special pattern is set to a small win (S1153), then the small win pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S1154), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1151, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win, that is, it is a loss (S1151: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1155), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) Special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1062 in FIG. 128) executed as one process (S1062 in FIG. 128), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is won in the process executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol By setting the small hit flag 203dg to ON, the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute processing corresponding to winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the processing of S1251 corresponding to the processing of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and in each process of S1252 to S1256, S1258 to S1260 corresponding to each process of S552 to S559, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is the special figure 2 variation. The difference is that it is changed to a pattern command and that the process of special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1257) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) will be described.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, determination is performed based on the lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 in FIG. 127).

In the processing of S1351, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained (S1352), and the small hit type is selected based on the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 (S1353). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small winning type, different small winning types are not set based on the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5, but for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a plurality of small winning types, a small winning type selection table is provided in which different small winning types are defined for the range of values of the acquired small winning type counter C5, and different small winning types are selected by the processing of S1352 and S1353. do it.

As in the present embodiment, even if the specifications of the game are changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, the change can be easily dealt with by using the processing of S1352 and S1353 even though there is only one kind of small winning type.

When the processing of S1353 is finished, then, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1354), and the variation pattern for the small hit is selected based on the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 (S1355). Then, the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (S1351: No), the process (S1357 to S1359) for the case where the lottery result is a loss is executed. In the process of S1357, first, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming state is read (S1357), the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2 (S1358), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S1359), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261). In this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) in that the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when the other special symbol wins a small hit (executes a small winning game) is set to ON. However, other than that, since it is the same except that the object of processing is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to win a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol, a flag (for example, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag) for indicating that a small win has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (that the small winning game is executed) is provided, and the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) may be performed in this second special symbol variation in-execution process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 of FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process (S263) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) in that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, the contents of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big win, and the process of setting a flag for stopping the variation of the other special symbol are omitted.

That is, when it is determined that the processing of S852 in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is deleted, and the processing target of S851 and S853 to S864 is changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513) and the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1551: No), the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1558) is performed. They differ from each other in terms of execution. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the contents of the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be described. Figure 133 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 omission stop processing (S1564). This special figure 2 loss stop process (S1564) executes the special symbol variation stop process corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than the big win (small hit or out).

When the special figure 2 out stop processing (S1564) is executed, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1652), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. A temporary stop command in FIG. 1 is set (S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the audio lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is temporarily stopped (is being done) A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description continues. When the processing of S1653 is completed, next, a small winning scenario (opening operation scenario for small winning) corresponding to the small winning game is set (S1654), the small winning flag 203dg is set to OFF (S1655), the winning information indicating that the small winning game is being played (during small winning) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol stops at the pattern indicating the small winning (small winning pattern). A special figure 2 confirmation command for indicating that it is displayed (confirmed display) is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (confirmed display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) for performing a process such as subtraction of the number of remaining time saving times is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 203dg is set to OFF in the processing of S1651 (S1651: No), a special figure 2 confirmation command is set (S1659) to indicate that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the removal (defective symbol) (S1659), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped (determined display) with the symbol (S1660). And a time saving update process is performed (S1661 (S863)), and this process is complete|finished.

Incidentally, for the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update process (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, even if the lottery game is executed by variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern at the same time, when the big winning game occurs in one of the first and second special patterns, the variable display of the other special pattern is stopped, so that the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that indicates a big win (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed. However, the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can grasp that the lottery game which was in the middle of the variable display is not extinguished, and can play the jackpot game without anxiety.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, start winning process 4 (S152), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 4 (S152). The start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) determines whether the ball has entered (start winning) either the special symbol entrance 64 or the second entrance 1645, and if the start winning is performed, each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 20 up to the maximum number of reservations (maximum of 4 in each of the special symbol entrance 64 and the second entrance 1645). This is the process of storing each in 3db.

In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) of predicting the result of winning or not, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. in advance is executed based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db. The starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described below.

In the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entered (starting winning) into the special figure entrance 64 which is the first starting opening (S1751). Here, the entry of the ball to the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the special figure entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S1751: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S1752), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (S1754), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the special figure entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights of the first special symbol) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1755).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1756).

Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1757). This first look-ahead processing (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135, but from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the result of winning or not determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. are determined. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining the result of win/fail judgment, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc., based on each newly stored counter value.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, that is, when the first special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the contents of the first special symbol lottery right (winning information) are determined in advance. may be configured.

After the processing of S1757 is executed, the processing of S1758 is executed next. Also, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 in the processing of S1751 (S1751: No), or in the processing of S1753, when it is determined that the number of reservations for the special figure entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1758.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first look-ahead process (S1757) is executed based on the information (winning information) on the added winning. 1753: No), that is, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit and the ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64, the first look-ahead process (S1757) may be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Further, since an added value can be given when a ball is entered into the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit.

Next, for each process from S1758 to S1764, the same process as the process performed for the winning of the ball to the first start port (special figure entrance 64) executed in each process from S1751 to S1757 is different only in that it is a process executed for the second ball entrance 1645, so detailed description will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, the first look-ahead process (S1757), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S1757).

In the first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 135), first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S1822).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reservation (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a) and the timing when the big winning determination is executed based on the winning information newly reserved this time.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is composed so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special pattern and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern are executed (in parallel), and the fluctuation time set in corresponding to the lottery results of each special pattern is compatible with the reservoir of the special pattern (holding) at the time of holding the special pattern (at the time of the special design). This is because it is difficult to determine the timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of each special pattern (lottery) because it is set to be varied by the number of pending patterns).

Then, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in the low-probability state, jackpot only in the high-probability state, jackpot in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state) (S1823: Yes), the first winning command indicating the conditions for winning the jackpot (game state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot when winning is set (S1824), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is lost even in a high-probability state or a low-probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the loss is set (S1825), and this processing ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is set to include information for indicating the above-described win/fail judgment result (information that has a different meaning based on the win/fail judgment result), as well as information for showing the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 as common information. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, based on various information included in the winning command, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the usual color), and an effect (pre-reading effect) can be executed such as displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of winning or failing determination to the player.

In the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the success/failure determination result in the case of a high probability state of the special symbol and the success/failure determination result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are distinguished, and a winning command is set based on each determination result. It may be configured such that a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot is set only when the player wins.

By constructing in this manner, a prize winning command indicating a big win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when a specific big win is determined in advance, so that a feeling of expectation of winning the big win can be given to the special pattern variation in which the look-ahead performance is not executed.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a may be accurately determined, and the win/loss determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, prefetching processing based on the winning information is performed, and the winning judgment is predicted in advance in the prereading processing. Counter value) may be set as a prize winning command, and the result of win/fail determination may be predicted based on the information included in the prize winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is preferably configured to be analyzed (prediction of the result of winning/failure determination). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the second look-ahead process (S1764), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this second look-ahead processing (S1764). In the second look-ahead process (S1764 in FIG. 134), the above-described first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 133) discriminates (pre-reads) the pending data (winning information) based on the fact that the ball entered (start winning) in the first start opening (special figure entrance 64) in advance, and makes various judgments. 1645), the only point is that the winning information is changed to that based on the start winning, and since the other processes are the same, the detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the details of the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the contents of this V passing process 4 (S153). The V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment is different from the V passing process (see S153 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. When a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a V prize occurs during the small winning game, a process of setting the time saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether it is during a small hit (S1571). When it is determined that it is in the middle of a small hit (S1571: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 described above are executed, and the process proceeds to S1572. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the small hit (S1571: No), the processing of S1504-S1506 and S1572-S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1572, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S1572). When it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S1572: Yes), after the jackpot game awarded from this V winning, a new time saving state period is set, so the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set off (S1573). In this way, when a small win is won in the final variation of the time saving game, a V prize is generated, and a big win is given, a new time short time is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, by setting the short time end standby flag 203dm to off, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of shifting to a normal game state immediately after a new short time period is set.

After executing the process of S1572 or S1573, the process proceeds to S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON (S1574). That is, it is determined whether or not the variation of the first special pattern is executed in parallel with the variation of the second special pattern this time, and the variation of the first special pattern is not yet stopped and is temporarily stopped. When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509.

In this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is being executed at the time of winning the small hit, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, after the end of the small winning game, the temporarily stopped variation of the special symbols is restarted, but in this embodiment, there is a case where V wins are made during the small winning game and a big winning is awarded. The lottery for the first special symbol is temporarily stopped even during the jackpot game. After the end of the jackpot game, the temporarily stopped variation of the special pattern is resumed, but in this embodiment, the number of remaining short time periods is subtracted when the variation is stopped, so there is a problem that the remaining short time period is reduced even with this temporarily stopped variation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a V winning occurs during a small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time period is not subtracted when the temporarily stopped variation is stopped. Therefore, the player can set the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped symbols as a time saving period in addition to the time saving period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer period of time that is advantageous to the player, and to provide pleasure for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, it is configured to forcibly stop (discard) the fluctuation of the other special symbol. Further, when a small win is won, the variation of the other special pattern is temporarily stopped, but the configuration is not limited to this, and when a small win is won, the variation of the other special pattern may be discarded. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from winning a big win by temporarily stopped fluctuation and giving an excessive privilege to a player after a big win game is awarded by winning a V prize.

Also, when winning a big win that is disadvantageous to the player with one special symbol, the disadvantageous big win variation can be discarded by winning a small win with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of playability.

As described above, the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine in which the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed in parallel, and is configured to temporarily stop the other symbol when a small hit is won. Then, when a V prize is generated during the small winning game and a big winning is given, the temporarily stopped symbols resume fluctuation after the big winning game is finished. Further, in this embodiment, when the game state is the time saving state at the start of the fluctuation, by setting on a flag indicating that the value of the time saving counter is scheduled to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

Therefore, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is resumed by setting the subtraction flag to OFF when the V winning occurs, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the time saving counter is not decremented. That is, when the temporarily stopped pattern restarts the fluctuation and stops, the short period of time is not updated, so the player can set the remaining fluctuation period of the temporarily stopped special pattern in addition to the preset short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to set the short period of time advantageous to the player to the maximum length.

In the present embodiment, one type of jackpot is provided by winning a V prize. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, the player can play the game while having an interest not only in whether or not the V prize is generated, but also in the type of jackpot to be awarded.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to have one small hit type to be elected, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Furthermore, it may be configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol. In this way, by providing a plurality of types of small wins, the player can play the game while expecting small wins that are more likely to generate a V prize.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel, but without being limited to this, the special symbol corresponding to the order in which the ball is entered may be changed (so-called winning order change). In addition, when configured in this way, it is preferable to configure the advantage degree of the winning jackpot type to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the player can execute the game while desiring to win a big win when the lottery for the special figure that is more advantageous is executed, so that the game with a sense of tension can be provided.

In the present embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, but by providing a plurality of small winning types, the small winning that discards the variation of the first special symbol (forcibly stops due to loss) and the small winning that temporarily stops may be set separately. In the case of such a constitution, when the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player due to the variation of the other special pattern, it is preferable to execute the performance to urge the player to discard it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

In the present embodiment, the game state to be set is two types (normal state, time saving state), but it may be three types (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state), or four types (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, latent probability state). Moreover, it is good also as two types or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game is executed by aiming at the left area of the game board 13 so that the game balls flow down regardless of the game state, but the game method is not limited to this, and a game method aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed. Then, the switching of the game method may be configured to be set based on the game state. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute a guide display mode for showing the current game method to the player. The player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state by this guidance display mode.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of updating the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of times of time saving, and the timing of determining whether the termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied are different. You may comprise so that a process may be performed. Moreover, although the process of subtracting the time saving frequency is performed after performing the special figure lottery, the special figure lottery may be performed after subtracting the time saving frequency.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol final variation in the time saving state (special symbol variation executed in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied), the time saving state is terminated at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. That is, when the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win) is satisfied at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition in a state where the time saving end condition is established, the timing for determining the establishment of the time saving end condition is switched (delayed at the end of the small winning game). As a result, the period during which the time saving state continues can be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end.

In addition, it may be possible to use other than the above-mentioned contents (small winning) as the above-mentioned switching condition, for example, in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, it may be set as a switching condition that the normal symbol fluctuation is running and that the game per normal pattern is being executed. can be set as By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Combination Modification of General Electric Prize-winning Device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, and when the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 during the general electric winning game wins the special electric operating opening 643, the accessory winning game is executed. In addition, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to solve the problem that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the game becomes monotonous during the time saving state and the game motivation is reduced, a plurality of special electric operation openings (special electric operation opening 643, second special electric operation opening 1643) are provided in the electric prize winning device 640, and V jackpot games are easily executed according to the special electric operation opening in which the ball has won. And, it is configured to be able to execute the accessory winning game in which the V jackpot game is difficult to execute.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment or second embodiment, the period of the time saving state is lengthened by suspending the special symbol variation being executed (interrupting the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation) with the execution of the role winning game as a trigger. On the other hand, in the above-described third embodiment, the V jackpot type is selected based on the fact that the ball has entered the special electric activation port 643, and according to the selected V jackpot type, any one of a pattern of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed when executing the role winning game, a pattern of discarding, and a pattern of discarding and ending the time saving state is executed, and the player is made to select whether or not to execute the role winning game during the time saving state. By providing a new playability, it is intended to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time saving state.

In addition, in the above-described first to third embodiments, the special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and when the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643, the role game is executed. In the fourth embodiment, the second ball entrance 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, and the same game as in the first to third embodiments described above. A lottery for the first special symbol and a lottery for the second special symbol are executed in parallel, which is a so-called simultaneous variation type specification.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 138, based on the configuration of the general electric prize winning device 640 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 88), a second ball entrance 1645 is provided in place of the second special electric operation opening 1643, and the winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 is configured to enter the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. It differs from other embodiments.

Then, the V winning device 65 is configured to open with the same contents in the small winning game executed when winning the small winning in the second special pattern lottery executed based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1645 and the accessory winning game executed based on the winning of the ball into the special electric operation opening 643.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small winning game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the fulfillment element of the accumulated time saving end condition, which is the condition for ending the time saving state, is updated as in the above-described fourth embodiment. As a result, the number of times the V winning device 65 is opened does not match the number of times the element satisfying the time saving end condition is updated, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the period until the time saving state ends.

In this modification, an example is shown in which the same end condition as in the fourth embodiment is set as the end condition of the time saving state, but without being limited to this, for example, the time saving end condition may be established even when the number of times the game per role reaches a specific number (for example, 50 times). By constructing in this way, the game can be played while making the player predict whether the time saving end condition will be established first based on the lottery of the second special symbols or whether the time saving end condition will be established first based on the performance of the role winning game.

In this case, as an effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is preferable to execute a suggestive effect (for example, an effect suggesting the number of times until each time-shortening end condition is satisfied) for suggesting to the player which time-shortening end condition is likely to be satisfied, out of the time-saving end condition established based on the lottery of the second special pattern and the time-saving end condition established based on the performance of the winning game. By constructing in this way, the player can grasp the period until one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, so that the player can be happy and sad about the destination of the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 138, in this modification, a special electric operation opening 643 and a second ball entrance 1645 are provided in the general electric prize winning device 640. However, the second special electric operation opening 1643 may also be provided, and a ball winning a prize in the general electric prize device 640 may be configured to win any one of the above three.

Furthermore, in the case of using the configuration of this modification, the processing contents for the special symbol variation being executed may be different between the case where the small winning game is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 and the case where the accessory winning game is executed based on the ball winning the special electric activation opening 643. For example, when the small winning game is performed, the special symbol variation being performed is discarded rather than when the accessory winning game is performed When the accessory winning game is executed, it is preferable to make it easier to interrupt the special symbol variation being executed than when the small winning game is executed.

It should be noted that, in this modified example, the ball may enter the special electric operation opening 643 while the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are being executed. In this case, both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are interrupted. After the accessory winning game ends, the interrupted first special symbol variation and second special symbol variation are restarted. Then, when the second special symbol variation after the restart is winning a small winning, when a small winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning, the first special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded.

In this way, in this modification configured to be able to simultaneously execute three kinds of games, ie, the first special symbol variation (lottery), the second special symbol variation (lottery), and the ball winning to the special electric activation port 643, it is possible to interrupt the first special symbol variation, in which a longer variation time than the second special symbol variation is likely to be selected, at a plurality of opportunities during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player regarding the timing when the first special symbol variation is interrupted and the period during which the first special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, it is configured so that the winning ball in the general electric prize device 640 can win the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645, but without being limited to this, for example, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 1645 or the special electric operation opening 643. Specifically, the special electric operation opening 64 in the general electric prize winning device 640 3, and a second ball entrance 1645 may be provided in the right area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. FIG. The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the setting method of various commands for outputting the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 side is different, and in that the control processing to be executed when the various commands output from the main control device 110 are received on the sound lamp control device 113 side is partially changed. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the production mode (V rush) corresponding to the special symbol variation in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is variably set according to the remaining period of the time saving state (the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state). , The number of times of time saving (variation times of special patterns) set as a termination condition of the time saving state is stored, and when information (variation pattern command) indicating the start of variation of special patterns is received, processing for updating the number of times of time saving is executed, whereby the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

By configuring in this way, in the first embodiment in which the timing of updating the number of times of time saving (at the start of special symbol variation) and the timing of determining whether the time saving condition is satisfied (at the time of stopping special symbol variation) are different, only the command indicating the content of the game using the special symbol lottery, such as the state command set when the game state is changed and the variation pattern command set when the variation of the special symbol is started, is performed without setting a dedicated command on the main controller 110 side. By using this, it is possible to grasp the remaining period of the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and it is possible to set an effect according to the lapse of the period during the time saving state.

However, in the control content used in the above-described first embodiment, the update status of the game state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 that does not have a backup function. Therefore, for example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted (power failure occurs) during the period when the time saving state is set, and then the power supply is restarted, various information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the audio lamp control device 113 side is cleared. (initialization), and there was a problem that the update state of the game state in the time saving state could not be determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main control unit 110 executes the process of starting the special symbol variation (the process of setting the variation pattern command), the command indicating the update result of the number of times of time saving (number of times command) can be set.

Then, the fluctuation pattern command and the time saving command can be output at the same timing, and the determination command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Further, when receiving the variation pattern command on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not the command for the number of times of shortening of working hours is received, and based on the determination result, it is possible to determine the current status of shortening of working hours.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp controller 113 side to determine the status of the time saving state based on the combination of each command set by the main controller 110 and received by the voice lamp controller 113, and even if a power failure occurs during the variable display of the special symbol, the voice lamp controller 113 side can determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main controller 110.

In addition, since the combination of commands received at the same timing determines the status of the time saving state, compared to setting individual commands to indicate the status of the time saving state on the main controller 110 side, the types of commands set by the main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of the control processing in the main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing contents of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, among the control processing contents of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, points different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see S235 of FIG. 41) is replaced with the special symbol variation start processing (see S205 of FIG. 41), the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 of FIG. 140) is replaced with the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45), and the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 48) is replaced with the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see S238 of FIG. 45). S136 in FIG. 141) is provided, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the processing for updating (subtracting) the number of times of working hours (value of the time saving counter 203h) when starting the variation of the special symbols (see S205 of FIG. 139), and the processing for determining whether the conditions for ending the time saving state when stopping the variation of the special symbols are satisfied (see S208 of FIG. 45) was configured to run

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to manage the situation of the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the state command output from the main control device 110 (the state command set in the processing of S1916 in FIG. 56) and the variation pattern command (Special figure variation pattern command set in S506 in FIG. 43), the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol variation starts or the special symbol variation stops, in addition to the command indicating the start and stop of the special symbol variation, various commands for indicating the status of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times, etc.) are set. case), it is configured so that it is possible to grasp the situation of the time saving state (number of remaining time saving times) on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235). This special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) differs from the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the above-described first embodiment in the processing for updating the time saving state at the start of the special symbol variation, but the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the above-described first embodiment, there is no need to output information for indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the special symbol variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state. 3j setting process).

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of times of time saving (remaining time saving times) of special symbols is set, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 .

The processing contents of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Then, in the process of S308, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, the current time is in the time saving state (S308: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S372).

If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction, that is, the time saving number command indicating the number of remaining time saving times is set (S373), and this process ends. Time saving frequency command set in the process of S373 is the same timing as the special figure variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43), and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving number command is also received.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, only when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating (after subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No), the time saving number command is configured to be set. Therefore, in the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113, if the fluctuation pattern command (special figure fluctuation pattern command) is received during the time saving state and the time saving number command is not received, the special symbol in the time saving state can be determined to be the final variation of

Returning to FIG. 139, the description is continued. In the processing of S372, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, if the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311) as in the first embodiment described above, and this processing ends.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more), even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, while the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, the normal pattern high probability state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol (S308: Yes), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is always executed, so that the control process can be shared.

Also, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction (after updating) is greater than 0 (1 or more), the time saving number command is set, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction (after updating) is 0, the time saving number command is not set. In addition, the processing for setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43) and the same processing (special symbol variation start processing) are configured to set the time saving number command, and in the external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), it is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing.

By constructing in this way, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command is received in the state where the time saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving frequency command is received at the same time. In addition, when a time saving number command is received at the same time, it is possible to determine the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving number) to be updated by executing the special symbol variation this time.

In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating becomes 0, i.e., when the special pattern variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving number command is not set. . In this way, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state (time saving final variation) is executed, instead of setting the time saving number command indicating the remaining time saving number 0 as the time saving number command, the time saving number command is not set, so that when the time saving number command set by the main controller 110 cannot be received, for example, when the command cannot be normally received due to noise or the like, the performance at the time of the time saving final variation is executed.

Therefore, since it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of short remaining time of 0 times which is less than the number of times of short remaining time which is actually set without using special performance data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be normally received, the performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) is provided. It is also possible to provide an end condition that is established when the player wins (time).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state, which of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied varies according to the game content of the player, so that it is necessary to determine the update status until the termination condition is satisfied for each termination condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are established among a plurality of possible time-saving end conditions, the voice lamp control device 113 side can easily discriminate that the current special symbol variation is the final change of the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) is different from the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment in that the update contents of the time saving state at the time of stopping the special symbol variation are different, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same S801 and S802 processing as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not turned on in the processing of S802 (S802: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( S871), greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed this time is not the final variation of time saving (S871: Yes), a time saving continuation command indicating that the time saving state continues is set (S872), the same S809 and S810 processing as the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current game state is the normal state, the process of S872 is skipped and the process proceeds to S809. Also, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed this time is the final time saving variation (S802: Yes), the same S804 and S805 processes as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment are executed, and then the processes of S809 and S810 are executed to execute this process. end.

In addition, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processes of S806 to S810 are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping display (determined display) of the special symbol variation, the special symbol confirmation command is set, and the time saving continuation command is set. Then, the special figure determination command set in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) and the time saving continuation command are executed in the main processing (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 External output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) Output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing. A voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not a time saving continuation command is received at the same time when a special figure determination command is received in a state in which a time saving state is set, and based on the determination result, grasps whether the special pattern variation to be stopped and displayed this time is the final variation (time saving final variation) of the time saving state, and sets a presentation mode.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing in the state where the time saving state is set, the performance mode for indicating that the time saving state continues is set, and when only the special figure determination command is received, the performance mode for indicating that the time saving state ends is set. In this way, by combining a plurality of commands output from the main controller 110 at the same timing, the state of the current time saving state can be grasped on the side of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the types of commands set by the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case where each command is set to indicate the situation of the time saving state in the main controller 110.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol determination command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be set within the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140), but each command may be output at the same timing in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55), and the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55) External output processing (S1801) is executed within an interval of 4 milliseconds, the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command may be configured to be settable, respectively.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when executing the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, various commands set in the interval (4 milliseconds) after the previous external output process is executed are configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at once (output as serial data). 801 reference) may be configured to wait the output of the special figure determination command until the predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing even if the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command are not set in the same process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) differs from the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above in that the process for determining whether the current game state is a normal symbol high probability state is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state in which the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON are configured to be managed as information indicating the high probability state of the normal design, and only the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) is managed as the information indicating the high probability state of the normal design. is different from the first embodiment.

That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235 in FIG. 139), the value of the time saving counter 203h is configured to be subtracted until it becomes 0, thereby simplifying the updating process of the time saving counter 203h, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted to 0. Even in this case, the difference is that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON in order to continue the high probability state of normal symbols until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the same processing of S1101 to S1108 as the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above is performed, and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S1108 (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is turned on. If it is set, that is, it is determined whether the special symbol is in the time saving final variation (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1171: Yes), it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, in the process of S1171, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), the present is the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, so the processes of S1110 to S1114, which are the same as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above, are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol is fluctuating (S1102: Yes), the same S1115 to S1118 processing as the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and in the processing of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), Set the scenario operation per normal figure for time saving (S1120), set the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory (S1121), and end this process.

In the process of S1118, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1118: No), then it is determined whether the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S1172). S1120 and S1121, which are the same as those in S106 of No. 8), are executed, and this process ends. Also, in the process of S1172, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), the present is a low probability state of normal symbols, so the processes of S1119 and S1121, which are the same as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above, are executed, and this process ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol (the length of the dynamic display period), or the content of the normal symbol winning game (opening pattern of the electric role object 640a) executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is configured to be set differently according to the probability state of the normal symbol. In addition to the value of the counter 203h, it is configured to refer to the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the probability state of normal symbols.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 142 and 143, control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in place of the special figure variation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), the special figure variation start processing 5 (see S4254 in FIG. ) in place of the stop-related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, types of commands output from the main control device 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the situation during the time saving state (number of remaining time saving times) can be determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side. By configuring in this way, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the time saving state and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, after the power supply is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate presentation mode according to the actual situation of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times).

First, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254) will be described. Figure 142 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254). This special figure variation start process 5 (S4254) is a process executed when a special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is different from the special figure variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above in that the processing content during the time saving state is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure fluctuation start process 5 (S4254) is executed, the same S4301 to S4305 processes as the special figure fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S4304, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, that is, when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the state where the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the time saving number command is included in the command received this time (S4351).

In this embodiment, in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the main controller 110, serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands is used to output a command to the sound lamp controller 113. Therefore, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main controller 110, the special figure variation pattern command and the time saving number command are set in the same process, At least the special figure variation pattern command and the time saving number command are stored in the same serial data and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

In the process of S4351, whether the command received this time has a time saving number command, that is, in the serial data in which the special figure variation pattern command is stored, it is determined whether the time saving number command is also included (S4351), If it is determined that the time saving number command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command received this time is the final variation of the time saving state (shortening final variation) Since it is not the case, set a display command for indicating that it is in the time saving state (S4306), the same S4306 to S4308 processing as the special figure fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4351, if it is determined that there is no time saving number command in the received command (S4351: No), the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command this time is the final time saving variation.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the time saving state, by discriminating the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure variation pattern command, the status of the time saving state (remaining time shortening number) can be easily determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265). This stop-related processing 5 (S4265) differs from the stop-related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above in that the content of the processing executed when the special figure determination command is received is changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601), and if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command is not received (S4601: No), the same S4602 to S4611 processing as the stop related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above is executed and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving continuation command is received (S4631), and if it is determined that the time saving continuation command is received (S4631: Yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation indicating the time saving continuation is set (S4632), and the process proceeds to S4602.

In the processing of S4631, if it is determined that the time saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether the time saving end command has been received (S4633), and if it is determined that the time saving end command has been received (S4633: yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation indicating the end of the time saving state is set.

In this way, when the special figure determination command is received, the time saving continuation command or the time saving end command can be received at the same time. By executing the stop related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), the display mode (production mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed and set when the time saving continuation command is received, when the time saving end command is received, and when no command is received. Therefore, the processing for setting the display mode for stopping the fluctuation to be executed when the special figure confirmation command is received and the processing for setting the display mode for showing the status of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times) can be performed in the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the normal pattern winning game that is executed when the lottery of the normal pattern is won is aimed at the role winning game (the aim is to win the ball into the special electric operation opening 643 provided in the general electric winning device 640 that is opened in the normal drawing winning game). It is configured to cause the player to execute a game (special electric game) aiming to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game).

Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) (until the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed), or until the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot before reaching the predetermined number (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed to indicate that the lottery result is a big hit). short period) can be lengthened, and the number of normal symbol lotteries to be executed during the short period of time can be increased.

Furthermore, when the role winning game is executed with the fact that the ball has entered the special electric activation port 643 during the normal per game, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the processing for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted). It is constructed so as to restart when the conditions for executing the special symbol variation are established.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the execution period (short time period) of the special electric game is changed by the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period of the role winning game, so that the player during the special electric game can be motivated to play the game while wishing to select as long a variation time as possible as the special symbol variation and to execute many role winning games.

However, during the special electric game, for example, during the fluctuation period of the normal pattern or during the normal pattern per game, the ball cannot be won in the general electric prize device 640 (difficult to win) (closed period of the electric role product 640a). The open period of a, that is, the period in which the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which the winning-accessory game can be executed.

In addition, the accessory winning game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted is configured to end when either of the termination condition (winning termination condition) that is satisfied when the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three) or the termination condition (time termination condition) that is satisfied when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the accessory winning game is satisfied. If any end condition is met, the accessory winning game ends.

That is, in the first embodiment described above, in view of the normal pattern fluctuation situation and the game situation of the general pattern per game during the special electric game, it has a game property that allows you to select which end condition to establish for the accessory per game being executed. By configuring in this way, the length of the period in which the above-described disadvantageous period (normal symbol fluctuation period, normal symbol per game electric accessory 640a closed period) and the per-accessory game execution period overlap can be varied depending on the skill of the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, since a plurality of end conditions are set, for example, a ball does not enter the V winning device 65 as expected and the time end condition is satisfied despite the game being played in an attempt to satisfy the winning end condition, or a ball that has been shot in advance enters the V winning device 65 and the winning end condition is satisfied despite the game being played to satisfy the time end condition. However, there is a problem that the end condition desired by the player cannot be established.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the prize-winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the winning-accessory game. That is, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if the period for which the time ending condition can be satisfied passes, and when the time ending condition is selected, even if the number of winning prizes to the V prize winning device 65 reaches the number capable of satisfying the winning ending condition, the winning ending condition is not satisfied. By constructing in this way, the role winning game can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is established, so that the player can be made to actively play the game during the special electric game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the elapsed time during the prize winning game, and when the time ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game. 1.6 seconds) or longer (e.g., 10 seconds), or if a time end condition is selected, a forced winning end condition may be set that is met when the number of winnings (e.g., 10) is greater than the number of winnings (e.g., 3) set as a normal winning end condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of the accessory winning game for a long period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in that an operation means (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) that can be operated by the player is newly provided, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side of the return button 43 provided in the ball rental operation unit 40 (right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144), and a first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). The switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter also referred to as the end condition switching button group 22z) are configured such that when the player presses them, a detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing and outputs the detection result to the input/output port 205 (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

Specifically, when the switching button 22za is pressed, the switching button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the switching button 22za, when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the first selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the first selection button 22zb, and when the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the second selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the second selection button 22zc. Each detection switch is configured to output the detection result to main controller 110 .

That is, the switching button detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the end condition switching button group 22z described above is spaced apart from the frame button 22 by about 10 centimeters. By constructing in this way, the operation performance using the frame button 22 is executed in order to make the player interested in various performances executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the player's erroneous operation of the end condition switching button group 22z can be suppressed when the player is made to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with operating means (frame buttons 22) for effects and operating means (group of end condition switching buttons 22z) that affect the game performance, so that the player can arbitrarily select contents in terms of both effects and game performance. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<Regarding production content in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, the characteristic effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In contrast to the above-described first embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, a selection effect for allowing the player to operate the end condition switching button group and a switching effect for indicating the player's operation result of the end condition switching button group are configured to be executable.

First, with reference to FIG. 145(a), the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 145(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the jackpot ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is different from the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12(a)) in the above-described first embodiment in that a display mode for prompting the player to operate the switch button 22za is added, and the rest is the same. The same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "V rush will start after the jackpot ends!" Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment ``Get 40 seconds of V rush period'' with a short remaining time mode 801 of ``40 seconds'' for indicating the duration of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Incidentally, when the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the special symbol pending storage status (see FIG. 145 (c)) is the same as the special symbol pending storage status (see FIG. 12 (c)) when the display screen of FIG. 12 (a) of the first embodiment described above is displayed.

In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 145), and as a display mode for prompting the user to operate the switching button 22za, a comment of "select end condition with button PUSH" and an icon imitating the switching button 22za are displayed.

In the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is being displayed, so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the end condition of the role-winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game is finished, the end condition of the role-winning game cannot be switched.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress frequent switching of the termination condition of the accessory winning game according to the game situation during the V rush, that is, the variation situation of the special pattern and the variation situation of the normal pattern, and to provide the player with an excessively advantageous game situation. Also, since the end condition of the role winning game can be selected at the timing when the game for winning the ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is completed and before the special electric game is executed, the game for shooting the ball and the act of selecting the end condition do not overlap, and the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the end condition of the role winning game can be selected in a state where the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is notified, so that the player can select the end condition of the role winning game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big win ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801, the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the game for the role, and the game period of the game for the role is arbitrarily adjusted, aiming at a special electric game that efficiently sets the period for interrupting the special symbol variation, and the period of the time saving state is long (for example, 200 seconds) as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801. is displayed, the time end condition is selected and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize winning device 65 in one accessory winning game is increased, thereby aiming at a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per unit time is increased.

In the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the ending condition of the role winning game during the period when the ending screen of the big winning game is displayed.

In addition, even when a standby screen (demonstration screen) is displayed when the special symbol variation is not executed in the time saving state, the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable, or the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable during the period when the role winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, the conditions for ending the game with the role can be selected at the timing when the remaining time (short time period) of the time saving state is not subtracted, so that the player can select the condition for finishing the game with the role while giving him time to spare.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, it may be possible to select the end condition of the game per role only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted. By configuring in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time (short time period) of the time saving state is subtracted, it is possible for the player to select whether to concentrate only on the special electric game or to execute the operation of selecting the end condition of the game with the role, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game contents, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the player presses the switching button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the termination condition of the accessory winning game will be described. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as the end condition selection screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the switching button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switching button 22za is pressed, the detection result is output to the main controller 110 . In the main controller 110, a command (during switching command) indicating that the switching button 22za is pressed is set, and the set command (during switching command) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) based on the reception of the switching command.

Referring to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the winning role game will be explained in detail. A comment "Please select the end condition of winning the role" is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm. By visually recognizing this comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the end condition of the role winning game.

In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions selectable by the player are partitioned, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end condition, time end condition) (contents for establishing the end condition) are displayed. More specifically, the display area HR21 displays the winning ending condition as the ending condition of the accessory winning game in association with it, and the display area HR22 displays the time ending condition as the ending condition of the accessory winning game in association with it.

In the display area HR21, a comment ``It will end when three balls enter the V attacker'' is displayed as a requirement for establishing the winning end condition, and ``winning end'' for indicating the target ending condition is displayed in the display region HR21a. Also, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the winning end condition, an icon imitating the first selection button 22zb (a circle with the number 1 attached) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area HR22, a comment "It will end in 1.6 seconds from the start of winning the character" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the time end condition, and "time end" for indicating the target end condition is displayed in the display area HR22a. Also, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon imitating the second selection button 22zc (a circle with the number 2 attached) is displayed.

Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Time" are displayed to indicate the type of end condition currently set as the end condition of the winning-accessory game. That is, FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game. In addition, when a prize-winning end condition is set as the condition for ending the role-winning game, the characters "winning" are set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the operation to be executed by the player to select the end condition of the winning game, a comment of ``Please select with the button'' and an icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (depressed) are displayed.

By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily make a selection while grasping the content of the conditions for ending the accessory winning game. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b), when the selection screen that allows selection of the end condition of the accessory winning game is displayed, the information (for example, the short time remaining state 801 shown in FIG. 145(a)) indicating the length of the time saving state (short time) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured not to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily select the end condition of the accessory winning game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed, the first selection button detection switch detects that the first selection button 22zb has been operated (pressed), and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, processing based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb (processing for storing the selected termination condition) is executed, and a command (operation command) is set to indicate that the first selection button 22zb has been effectively operated.

When an operation command is set in the control processing of main controller 110, in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), the operation command is output to sound lamp control device 113, and sound lamp control device 113 sets the display mode after selection of the end condition based on the information included in the received operation command (information indicating the type of the selected button that was operated). Here, an example of the display screen displayed after selection of the termination condition will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed after selecting the prize ending condition as the condition for ending the winning-accessory game.

When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning ending condition is operated (depressed) while the ending condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed, a display area corresponding to the selected ending condition (winning ending condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the character "OK" indicating that the selection of the ending condition is completed is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 146(a). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for informing the player of the timing at which the result of this selection is reflected, a comment ``The prize winning will end after winning the next role'' is displayed, and in the display area HR23, characters of ``Winning'' indicating that the currently set end condition is the winning end condition are displayed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the role winning game can be selected a plurality of times within a period in which the end condition of the role winning game can be selected, and the end condition selected at the time when the period in which the end condition of the role winning game can be selected has passed is set as the end condition of the role winning game. Therefore, even if the player selects the ending condition by mistake, he/she can select the ending condition again until the period during which the player can select the ending condition for the accessory winning game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state in which the condition for ending the role winning game is selectable, an operation command indicating that the selection button has been operated and the type of the selected button that has been operated is set, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, when the period in which the condition for ending the role winning game can be selected ends, the ending condition for the finally selected role winning game is determined. It is configured to set the command to indicate (end condition command).

That is, since the player may select the termination condition a plurality of times during the period when the termination condition of the accessory winning game is selectable, only the operation of each selection button is output to the voice lamp control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and only the finally selected termination condition is output to the voice ramp control device 113. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary commands from being output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is displayed in the same situation (see FIG. 12(c)) in which the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) of the above-described first embodiment is displayed (see FIG. 146(c)). The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), on the display screen during the V-rush, the characters "WIN" are displayed, indicating that the prize-winning end condition is set as the condition for ending the role-winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the accessory winning game executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period, and for example, the player can easily grasp the end condition of the role winning game even during the role winning game. When the end condition is displayed during the role winning game in this way, it is preferable to display the update status of the element for establishing the end condition (the number of winning balls to the V attacker (V winning device 65) when the winning end condition is set, and the elapsed time after the start of the role winning game when the time end condition is set) and the value satisfying the end condition on the display surface. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused due to the abrupt end of the accessory winning game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 147, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29) in that an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec are added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The termination condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the termination conditions of the role winning game selected by the player, and when it is determined that the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) have been operated in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the termination condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the stored end condition is read, and is referred to when setting the end condition command corresponding to the read end condition. Further, when executing the accessory winning game, the accessory winning game is executed based on the read end condition.

In the sixth embodiment, the end condition storage area 203ea is configured to store information indicating the winning end condition as initial data. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated (S1704: Yes in FIG. 54) in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54), information for indicating the winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea as part of the process of S1714.

In this way, at least one end condition is stored as the initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea as the end condition of the role winning game, so that in the pachinko machine 10 having a function of selecting the end condition of the role winning game, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which none of the end conditions of the role winning game is set. In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the winning end condition is stored (stored) in the end condition storage area 203ea as the initial data of the ending condition of the role winning game.

The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected, and is set to ON when the ending period of the big win game is started, and is set to OFF when the ending period of the big win game is over.

In the sixth embodiment, when the switch button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation of the switch button 22za is disabled. With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, execution of processing based on the operation can be suppressed.

The switching flag 203ec is a flag for indicating that the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during the period in which the end condition of the role-winning game can be selected (the period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), and the end condition can be selected by operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc. It is set to ON when a period is set that can be set.

This switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes) when the switching button 22za is operated in a state in which the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) (S2201 in FIG. 151: Yes), that is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes) (S22 in FIG. 151). 04).

Then, the setting state of the switching flag 203ec is referred to in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) when determining whether or not the operation of the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined (S2202 in FIG. 151). It is set to off (see S2209 in FIG. 151). Further, when the selection operation is not performed by the player while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, it is set to OFF at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Ramp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, the sixth embodiment differs from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment in the above-described first embodiment in that an end storage area 223ea is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected accessory winning game. When an operation command is received in the end condition related process (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the corresponding end condition is stored based on the operation information (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated) included in the operation command (S5706, S5 in FIG. 155). 707). Then, when an end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the content of the received end condition command (type of end condition set) is compared with the information stored in the end storage area 223ea (type of end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) (S5710 in FIG. 155), and when the comparison result is different, the end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored. There is.

In other words, the end storage area 223ea stores an end condition based on the received operation command when an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated by the player is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. Then, when an end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set by the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command is compared with the actually set end condition, and when the comparison result is not the same, the end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

By constructing in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) for indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of the jackpot game, the end condition selected by the player can be predicted based on the operation command at a stage prior to receiving the end condition command, the performance mode based on the prediction result can be set, and the performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In the present embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is the end timing of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the player operates the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), the end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. When configured in this manner, the display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be selected based on the received termination condition command, that is, based on the actually set termination condition.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Control processing of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 153. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, timer interrupt processing 6 (see FIG. 149) instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is replaced with the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), special electric starting door winning processing 6 (see S178 of FIG. 150) is replaced with the special electric starter winning prize processing (see S108 of FIG. 50), and jackpot control processing (see S1804 of FIG. 56) is replaced with the jackpot control processing 6 (see S1854 of FIG. 152). are the same except that they execute The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt processing 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 6. As shown in FIG. This timer interrupt process 6 differs from the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) in that the special electric starting point winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is executed instead of the special electric starting point winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50), and a switching process (see S171) is added. ), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178). This special electric starter winning process 6 (S178) differs from the above-described special electric starter winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that the contents of the process to be executed when the conditions for executing the game with the accessory are satisfied are changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric starting entrance winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the same S1301 to S1307 processes as the special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and then the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined that it is not in the process of S1302 (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the condition for executing the role winning game is established, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set, thereby varying the end condition of the role winning game. As a result, when the termination condition selected by the player is established, the role winning game can be terminated, so that the player can select the size of the privilege to be given during the special electric game, and the willingness to play can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the condition for ending the role winning game to be executed is set each time the condition for executing the role winning game is established. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the condition for ending the role winning game can be selected only during the jackpot game as in the present embodiment, it is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea when the jackpot game ends or when the condition for executing the role winning game is satisfied for the first time after the jackpot game ends. It is also possible to read out the set end condition, set the role winning operation scenario corresponding to the end condition, and execute the role winning game based on the set role winning operation scenario until the next big winning game is executed.

By constructing in this way, the role winning game corresponding to the end condition selected by the player can be executed without executing the processing of reading information from the end condition storage area 203ea each time the execution condition of the role winning game is satisfied.

Further, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select the end condition of the role winning game during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, a flag (end condition switching flag) indicating that the end condition of the role winning game has been switched is provided, and only when the end condition switching flag is set to ON, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read and the end condition of the role winning game is switched. good to do Thus, when a new role winning game is executed under the same end condition as the previous role winning game, it is possible to skip processing for reading information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea, thereby simplifying the control processing when executing the role winning game.

Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and is executed based on the player's operation of the end condition switching button group 22z.

When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the current time is not during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: No), the operation of the end condition switching button group 22z is in an invalid period, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON in the process of S2201, that is, when it is determined that the current time is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), it is next determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

In the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, if the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed) (S2202: No), it is determined whether the switching button 22za is operated (S2203), and if it is determined that the switching button 22za is not operated (S2203: No ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), then the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), the switching command is set (S2205), and this processing ends.

Here, the determination processing of S2203 will be described. In this embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za, the switching button detection switch detects the pressed switching button 22za, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the determination processing of S2203, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the switch button detection switch described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, when the switching button 22za is already being operated (the display screen of FIG. 145(b) is being displayed) (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is being operated (S220). 6). In the determination process of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the first selection button detection switch detects the pressed first selection button 22zb, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first selection button detection switch. Further, when the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the second selection button detection switch detects the pressed second selection button 22zc, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the second selection button detection switch.

If it is determined in the process of S2206 that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (S2206: Yes), an operation command including information indicating that the selection button has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button is set (S2207), and the end condition selected by the process of S2206 is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (S2208). , the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF (S2209), and the process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S2206 that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc has been operated, that is, if it is determined that neither the first selection button detection switch nor the second selection button detection switch outputs a detection signal (S2206: Yes), this processing ends.

As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), when any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated at the timing at which the operation of the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, information indicating the selected termination condition is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea, but the command indicating the selected termination condition is not set. , information indicating that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button are set. Further, since the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF in the process of S2209, it is possible to select the ending condition again by operating the ending condition switching button group 22z during the ending period of the jackpot game.

That is, since the end condition is not determined until the ending period of the jackpot game is over, the command (end condition command) for indicating the selected end condition is not output to the sound lamp control device 113. - 特許庁With this configuration, when the end condition command is received on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, performance can be set according to the information (end condition type) included in the received end condition command until the next jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the control processing on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified compared to the case where the end condition command is set each time the player operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc).

Further, since an operation command indicating that the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) are operated in the state that the switching flag 203ec is set to ON can be set, performance based on the received operation command can be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player who operates the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) feel uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854). This jackpot control process 6 (S1854) differs from the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed at the start timing of the ending period and the process executed at the end timing of the jackpot game are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and after finishing the process of S1911, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and this process ends. That is, in this embodiment, when an ending period set after the end of the last round game is set in the jackpot game, by setting the switchable flag 203eb to ON, the player's operation on the switch button 22za is effectively determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), next, it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, that is, the timing of the end of the ending period (S1912). After that, the end condition setting process is executed (S1952), and this process ends. In addition, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot in the processing of S1912 (S1912: No), the same processing of S1918 as the jackpot control processing of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 153, the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and is executed based on the selection result of the end condition selection of the accessory winning game executed during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to OFF (S2301), and then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2302). The switching flag 203ec is set to off (S2303), the information (finally selected termination condition type) stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S2304), the termination condition command is set based on the information read from the termination condition storage area 203ea (S2305), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, if the switch button 22za is not operated on the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)), or if the desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) (S2302: No), S23 03 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, the end condition command is set only for the finally selected end condition. Furthermore, it is configured so that the period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected is only during the big winning game. By constructing in this way, the number of end condition commands output to the sound lamp control device 113 side at the time of one big win game can be reduced to one, and the end conditions corresponding to the end conditions included in the end condition commands are applied at least until the next big win game is executed.

Therefore, since the performance based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next big win game is executed on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing for changing the performance mode when changing the performance mode according to the end condition of the role winning game.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The sixth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 154, the contents of the command determination process 6 (S4172) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61) in the above-described first embodiment in that a determination process for determining whether a command related to the termination condition of the role-winning game has been received and a process executed based on the result of the determination process are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 6 (S4172 of FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process of the first embodiment (see S4102 of FIG. 61) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4218 that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, the termination condition-related command corresponds to the switching command and operation command set in the switching process of the main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151), and the termination condition command set in the termination condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153).

In the process of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the end condition related process is executed (S4272), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 155, the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272). In this end condition related process (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation to select the end condition of the accessory winning game, various processes for setting an effect mode corresponding to the selection operation are executed.

When the end condition-related processing (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is currently in progress (S5701), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S5701: No), this processing is terminated as it is. That is, in this embodiment, since the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected only during the big win game, when the end condition related command is received other than during the big win game, the performance corresponding to the received command is not set. Therefore, when an erroneous command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect not intended by the player.

In the process of S5701, when it is determined that the game is currently in the jackpot game (S5701: Yes), next, it is determined whether the switching command is received, that is, whether the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za during the ending period of the jackpot (S5702). If it is determined in the processing of S5702 that the switching command has been received (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating a selection screen is set (S5703), and this processing ends.

When the processing of S5703 is executed, a display command for switching the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)) to a selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) for selecting the termination condition of the accessory winning game is set. The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)), and the selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is set when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) effectively, that is, when the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated during the ending period of the big win, and the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated in a state in which the selection screen of the ending condition is displayed, and indicates the type of the selection button operated by the player. is a command that contains information about

In the processing of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the operation command received this time is an operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, whether information included in the operation command includes information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated (S5705). A display command indicating the end of winning (condition), which is the end condition corresponding to the selection button 22zb, is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the processing of S5706, an end condition determination screen (see FIG. 146(a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). After that, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc. When the display command is set in the processing of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). Specifically, in the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146(a), the display area HR22 (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed in an enlarged manner instead of the display area HR21, "Time End" is displayed in the display area HR22a, and the characters "Time" are displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

In the processing of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has not been received (S5704: No), then it is determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and if it is determined that an end condition command has not been received (S5709: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the termination condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the termination condition stored in the termination storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the termination condition command received this time to determine whether the same termination condition is indicated (S5710).

In the process of S5710, if it is determined that the end condition is the same, that is, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition (S5710: Yes), this process ends. Also, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), the actually set end condition and the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are different. 11), the process ends.

When the display command is set in the process of S5711, a display mode corresponding to the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command is displayed in the display area HR23 while displaying the comment "Ending condition is being switched" in the center of the main display area Dm.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the prize-winning end condition or the time end condition as the condition for ending the winning-accessory game. That is, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if the period for which the time ending condition can be satisfied passes, and when the time ending condition is selected, even if the number of winning prizes to the V prize winning device 65 reaches the number capable of satisfying the winning ending condition, the winning ending condition is not satisfied. By constructing in this way, the role winning game can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is established, so that the player can be made to actively play the game during the special electric game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the elapsed time during the prize winning game, and when the time ending condition is selected, the role winning game does not end based on the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 during the prize winning game. 1.6 seconds) or longer (e.g., 10 seconds), or if a time end condition is selected, a forced winning end condition may be set that is met when the number of winnings (e.g., 10) is greater than the number of winnings (e.g., 3) set as a normal winning end condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of the accessory winning game for a long period of time.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the completion condition of the role winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game is finished, the termination condition of the role winning game cannot be switched.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress frequent switching of the termination condition of the accessory winning game according to the game situation during the V rush, that is, the variation situation of the special pattern and the variation situation of the normal pattern, and to provide the player with an excessively advantageous game situation. Also, since the end condition of the role winning game can be selected at the timing when the game for winning the ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is completed and before the special electric game is executed, the game for shooting the ball and the act of selecting the end condition do not overlap, and the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, since the end condition of the role winning game can be selected while the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is notified, the player can select the end condition of the role winning game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big win ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801, the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the game for the role, and the game period of the game for the role is arbitrarily adjusted, Aiming for a special electric game that efficiently sets the period for interrupting the special symbol variation, the period of the time saving state is long (for example, 200 seconds) as the display mode of the short time remaining mode 801. is displayed, the time end condition is selected, and by increasing the number of balls to be awarded to the V winning device 65 in one accessory winning game, a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per unit time is increased can be aimed at.

In the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the ending condition of the role winning game during the period when the ending screen of the big winning game is displayed.

In addition, even when a waiting screen (demonstration screen) displayed when the special symbol variation is not executed in the time saving state, the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable, or the end condition of the role winning game may be selectable during the period when the role winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, the conditions for ending the game with the role can be selected at the timing when the remaining time (short period of time) of the time saving state is not subtracted, so that the player can select the condition for finishing the game with the role while giving him time to spare.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, it may be possible to select the end condition of the game per role only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (short time period) is subtracted. By configuring in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time (short time period) of the time saving state is subtracted, it is possible for the player to select whether to concentrate only on the special electric game or to execute the operation of selecting the end condition of the game with the role, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game contents, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a second modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time-saving state is set, in all games such as winning games (character winning game, small winning game, big winning game), the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13 It was configured to execute a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is shot so that the ball flows down.

As a result, since the game area in which the player shoots the ball is not changed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, in each embodiment, as described above, in the middle of the game (for example, when the winning game is executed), there is no need to change the game method. Therefore, even if the normal figure winning game is executed (see FIG. 13 (a)) or the role winning game is executed (see FIG. 18 (a)), the guidance notification for changing the game method (for example, comment display of "right hit") is not executed, and the display area HR3 is opened during the winning game. It was configured to notify the player of the device (for example, the general electric winning device 640, the V winning device 65, etc.) to be in the state.

However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)) in each of the above-described embodiments, there is simply an image display schematically showing the winning device (general/electrical winning device 640) corresponding to the winning game to be executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, when unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)), the area for executing other performance displays is narrowed, and the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, if each display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set for the purpose of widening the area for executing other performance display and enhancing the performance effect, the display area of the display area HR3 becomes narrow, and there is a problem that a game difficult for the player to understand is provided.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, the guide display mode (the display mode of the display image displayed in the display area HR3) indicating the winning device (general electric winning device 640, V winning device 65, variable winning device 650) that the player should aim for during the winning game is configured to be variably settable based on various conditions, which is different from the above-described embodiments. The contents other than that are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, an example of the display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when a regular game is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is being displayed.

In the second modification, similarly to each of the first embodiments described above, when the game per general pattern is executed, the ball enters a state in which the general electric prize winning device 640 can win. A special electric operation port 643 is provided inside the general electric prize winning device 640, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 643, a prize winning game is executed in which the ball can win a prize to the V prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加Further, a V prize winning port 165 is provided in the V prize winning device 65, and when a ball enters the V prize winning port 165, a big winning game (V big winning game) in which the ball can win a prize to the variable winning device 650 is executed. In other words, it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of possible winning games based on one winning game (normal figure winning game).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, for example, the ball enters the special electric activation opening 643 during the normal pattern winning game, so that the accessory winning game is executed continuously from the normal pattern winning game. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed corresponding to the type of the winning game being executed, the guidance display mode displayed in the display area HR3 is switched in accordance with the timing of switching from the regular winning game to the role winning game, so there is a problem that the timing of displaying the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the prize winning device (V winning device 65) corresponding to the role winning game is delayed. In addition, considering that the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed is delayed, for example, when the hitting game switches from the normal game to the role game, specifically, after the normal game is finished (after the ball enters the special electric activation port 643), it is also possible to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) until the role game is executed. ), the sense of speed of the special electric game is lowered, and the amusement of the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), it is a normal game, and in a state where an image display imitating the general electric winning device 640 is executed as a guide display mode in the display area HR3. The prize device 65) is configured such that a second guidance display mode for guiding the player in advance is displayed in the display area HR30.

By configuring in this way, when the game result of the current normal figure winning game is a specific game result (the game result of winning the ball into the special electric activation port 643), the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the winning device to be targeted in the next winning game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, by notifying in advance the game contents of the accessory winning game that can be executed next during the normal figure winning game, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a waiting period for allowing the player to grasp the game contents of the role winning game (a winning device to be aimed at) during the period from the end of the normal figure winning game to the execution of the role winning game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows.

In addition, as described above, since it is configured so that the role winning game is executed when the game result of the normal figure winning game being executed becomes a specific game result, the comment "Aim" is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed in the display area HR30 during the normal figure winning game. In addition, in a state in which the performance of the accessory winning game is not confirmed, that is, in a state in which the normal game is in progress and the ball has not entered the special electric operation opening 643, only a part of the display image simulating the V winning device 65 (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 in FIG. 18(a)) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily distinguish between the first guidance display mode showing the game contents of the winning game being executed and the second guidance display mode showing the game contents of the winning game to be executed next, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game aiming at the V winning device 65 during the normal drawing winning game.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a), as the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, the image display imitating the prize-winning device that is in the open state in the corresponding winning game is used.

Further, photographed data obtained by photographing each prize-winning device actually provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used as the image display imitating the prize-winning device displayed in the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode. As a result, the image of the winning device can be used as the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can achieve an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

On the contrary, it is possible to use a simple display that displays only the minimum required display information among the winning devices corresponding to the winning game. In this case, since the simple display can be used in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the cost of developing the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in the second modification, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the past history information mode is also displayed for enabling notification of the type of winning game that triggered the execution of the winning game currently being executed (for example, the jackpot game).

By constructing in this way, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to look back on the past game contents, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the jackpot game executed this time is a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in a lottery of special symbols or a jackpot game executed based on a ball entering a V winning port 165 during a role winning game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the second guidance display mode displayed during the normal pattern per game is configured to be variably set according to the progress of the normal per pattern game, that is, according to the change in the degree of expectation that the ball will win in the special electric operation port 643 in the normal per pattern game being executed. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of the general game per game from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (universal electric winning device 640) and the second image data to be displayed as the second guidance display mode (image data schematically showing the V winning device 65) are set and transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, based on the reception of the display command described above, the image display data of the first guidance display mode and the image display data of the second guidance display mode shown in FIG. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed immediately after the game per normal pattern is started. Then, when a prize winning command indicating that a winning sensor 640s has detected that a ball has won a prize in a general electric prize winning device 640 during a general pattern winning game is output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command indicating the progress of the general pattern winning game to the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

As a result, image display data (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed) in which the image simulating the V winning device 65 is exposed more than the display mode shown in FIG. Then, similarly, when a command is output from the main controller 110 indicating that it is determined that the ball will enter the special electric operation opening 643, for example, the state in which the ball passes through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special electric operation opening 643, an entire image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as the second guidance display mode.

With this configuration, the display mode (second guidance display mode) of the guidance display for the winning game to be executed next can be changed according to the progress of the winning game being executed, that is, the higher the expectation that the ball will win in the special electric activation opening 643 in the normal figure winning game being executed, the more clearly the guidance display for guiding the winning game to be executed next can be displayed.

The example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a) is merely an example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games in a series of flows, during the period in which one winning game is being executed, it is sufficient if it is possible to guide the game method of the winning game that can be executed next. According to the type of the game per normal figure to be executed, the first guide display mode displayed during the game per normal figure, or the second guide display mode may be varied. Specifically, the display color and size of the first guidance display mode may be changed to a mode that stands out to the player as the probability of the next winning game (for example, the winning game for the role) increases. In addition, the display mode of the second guide display mode displayed at the start of the normal game may be varied. For example, when a disadvantageous normal game with a low probability of executing the next winning game (for example, a role winning game) is executed, a display mode in which about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode, and a horse match in which an advantageous normal game winning game is executed more easily than the unfavorable normal game is entered as the second guidance display mode. It is preferable to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the prize device 65 is displayed.

By recognizing the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, not only can the game method of the winning game to be executed be easily comprehended, but also the player can predict whether or not the winning game under execution is a winning game advantageous to the player, so that the presentation effect of the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, the display mode is configured to vary step by step according to the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player, and by configuring the stage of the initially set display mode to be different according to the degree of advantage of the winning game (normal game) to be executed, i.e., by changing the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of advantage of the winning game to be executed while using common image data. Data capacity can be reduced.

In the above-described contents, an example in which the normal figure winning game and the accessory winning game are executed as an example winning game is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it may be used in all cases where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of winning games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156(b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the normal game winning game will be described. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed, the display area HR3 for guiding the game method of the normal figure winning game being executed is enlarged and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player who wants to know the game method of the winning game being executed. When the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is reduced from the size shown in FIG. 156(a). When the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen. When the frame button 22 is operated four times, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed.

Thus, by varying the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the playing method of the winning game being executed based on the player's operation, the guide display mode can be displayed in the size desired by the player. Further, when the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other performance displays (the performance displays such as reference numerals 811 and 812) displayed on the display screen overlapping the display timing of the guidance display mode is enlarged. Furthermore, it has an effect display that is executed only when the display area of other effect displays becomes large. This allows the player to positively operate the frame button 22 .

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, the detailed display part of the first guidance display mode, for example, the display mode imitating the second movable valve 642 in the electric power winning device 640 is configured so that the player can visually recognize that it is a specific display mode different from the usual, and this specific display mode may be configured to be easily displayed when a winning game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. As a result, even a player who already understands the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

In the example described above, the guidance display mode can be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22). However, the guidance display mode may be changed based on the operation of the operation means. The guidance display mode may be varied so that the area where the target winning device is arranged on the game board 13 of No. 0 is displayed, or the guidance display mode may be varied so that the target winning device of the guidance display mode is rotated (horizontally rotated, vertically rotated). In this case, image data showing the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device are stored in advance in the display control device 114, and when a command corresponding to the operation signal indicating the operation content for the direction operation means is received, the image data corresponding to the command is created and displayed. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that information advantageous to the player is displayed in the displayable area only when the direction operation means is operated. As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment described above, all games are configured to be executable as left-handed games. However, for example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games as a series of games, and when one winning game is executed as a left-handed game and the next winning game is executed as a right-handed game, a display region HR3 in which the first guidance display mode is displayed is formed on the left side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the second It is preferable that the display area HR30 in which the guide display mode is displayed is formed on the right side of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . Further, in this case, the player may be configured to be able to operate the position where the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed by operating the above-described direction operation means.

In the second modified example explained above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games was explained, but even when a specific winning game is executed alone, the above-described effect can be applied. For example, a special symbol variation period and a jackpot game may be set as a series of games, and during the special symbol variation period, an image aiming at the special symbol entrance 64 may be displayed as the first guidance display mode, and an image showing the variable winning device 650 may be displayed as the second guidance display mode. In this case, the first guidance display mode, which is less necessary to guide the player on the game method, may be deleted, and only the second guidance display mode may be displayed. In addition, if the game machine is provided with a plurality of variable prize winning devices 650 which are opened when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the second guidance display mode may be constructed so as to be able to perform a presentation to prompt the player as to which variable prize winning device 650 will be finally displayed.

In addition, in the above-described second modification, the guidance display mode when the normal pattern winning game is executed has been explained, but for example, during the period until the normal pattern winning game is won and the normal pattern winning game is executed, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. Also, at that timing, the guidance display mode may be switched in order to display the flow of the game when all the examples of games are successful, that is, the flow of the normal game, the role game, and the big win game.

Furthermore, the variable contents of the guide display mode displayed during the winning game may be appropriately set, for example, besides enlarging, reducing, and rotating, the guide display mode may be changed using flashing or color change, or the guide display mode may be varied by causing a character to appear in the vicinity of the guide display mode. Also, the game method may be guided by combining a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 .

Furthermore, in each of the second modified examples described above, an image display using an image simulating a real object is executed in order to guide the game method during the winning game in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. It is also possible to use a display image that is simplified to the extent that it is possible for the player to grasp at least one of the location of the advantageous area. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the minimum required information to the player and to use common image data for different pachinko machines 10, so that the development cost and manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, or when the ball enters (wins) the specific area (V winning opening 165) during the role winning game, the big winning game is configured to be executable, and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the big winning game. In addition, as a termination condition of the time-saving state, a time-saving termination condition (number of times of time-saving) established based on execution of a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries (for example, four times) without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set. Further, when the role winning game is executed during the dynamic display period (variation period of the special pattern) from the execution of the special symbol lottery until the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted, and the interrupted processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted based on the end of the role winning game or the end of the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the ball passed (entered) the specific area during the role winning game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, processing for updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state (processing for subtracting the number of remaining time reduction) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, specifically, it is executed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the special symbol variation, and after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is established.

By constructing in this way, when the processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted on the basis of the performance of the winning-accessory game during the execution of the special symbol variation, and then the interrupted processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted, when the dynamic display period after the resumption elapses and the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the number of times of shortening of working hours can be prevented from being updated. Therefore, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the residual dynamic display period of the interrupted dynamic display is extremely short, and it is possible to suppress the immediate subtraction of the number of times of time saving set after the end of the jackpot game by the stop display of the special symbol variation after restart.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing when the dynamic display period of the special symbol has passed. Therefore, the time saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, which satisfies the termination condition of the time saving state, is stopped and displayed, so that the game state advantageous to the player can be continued as long as possible. Furthermore, since it is not determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the special pattern, the game state does not shift from the time saving state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special pattern. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, you may apply the content mentioned above to the pachinko machine 10 of 4th Embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in duplicate. When the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small win, big win), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation (processing for subtracting the dynamic display period of the special symbol) being executed is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, when one special symbol lottery wins a big win, the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and when a small win wins, the other special symbol variation being executed is interrupted.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, when the cumulative number of lotteries obtained by summing the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or when the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol reaches a specific number of times (for example, 4 times), the time saving end condition is established.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above executes the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state (the process of subtracting the number of remaining time reductions) based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, and determines whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied. As a processing result of (1), the execution condition of the other special symbol lottery is established during the execution of the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation in which the number of times of time reduction after subtraction is 0) in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, and the timing is set before the execution of the special symbol lottery.

With such a configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed more than a specified number of times during the time saving state, and the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player can be continued as long as possible.

In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the process of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied and the process of ending the time saving state based on the processing result (shifting to the normal state) are the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed). When the special pattern variation (final variation of the time saving state) wins (small win or big win), the timing at which the winning game is executed, the predetermined timing during the winning game (for example, 1 second after the winning game is started), and the timing at which the winning game ends may be set. In other words, the processing for updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (processing for subtracting the number of times of remaining time reduction) is executed, and the period from when the special symbol variation targeted for the execution is stopped and displayed until the next special symbol lottery is executed is sufficient.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of lottery of special symbols reaches a specific number (for example, 4 times) is provided. However, without being limited to this, the lottery result of special symbols is a specific lottery result (e.g., a lottery result other than a jackpot winning, and a part of lottery results when winning out). A time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls passing through a specific end region in the middle reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or a time-saving end condition that is established when the elapsed time after the time-saving state is set exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be set. In addition, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, if the game machine is configured to be able to execute a winning game (small winning game) different from the big winning game, the time reduction end condition that is established when the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches a specific number of times may be set.

In addition, when configuring to be able to set the end condition of the time saving state that is established under various conditions, it is preferable to configure so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the trigger for setting the time saving state. Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game, the time-saving end condition may be set based on the game state when the big win is won or the big win type set when the big win is won, or the time-saving end condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the big win is won. Further, the time saving end condition may be set based on the number of times the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set across the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the time-saving end condition to be set.

In addition, it may be configured so that the player can select the time saving end condition set for the current time saving state from among a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be set as the time saving end condition. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while the player predicts which time saving end condition is selected to execute the most advantageous game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state, the number of times of saving time is not subtracted when the restarted special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Even when such a constitution is used, since the length of the short period of time after resuming differs depending on the length of the remaining variation period of the special symbol variation at the time of interruption, it is possible to make the player interested in at what timing the special symbol variation is interrupted (whether the jackpot game is executed).

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the process of updating (subtracting) the number of times of saving time is configured to be executed in the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the start of the special symbol variation. By constructing in this way, depending on the timing when the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to provide a case where the number of times of shortening of working hours is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol variation after resuming, and a case where it is not. Specifically, when the special symbol variation is interrupted 2 seconds after the special symbol variation is started, the update processing of the number of time reduction is executed 3 seconds after the special symbol variation is restarted. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation is interrupted after 10 seconds from the start of the special symbol variation, the number of time-saving update processing is not executed after the special symbol variation is restarted. Therefore, even when the special symbol variation is interrupted immediately after the special symbol variation is started, that is, when the remaining variation time is long, the player may be put in a disadvantageous state, so that the player can be interested in the game after the restart (the game during the time saving state). In addition, when configured so as to execute the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times of saving time during the period when the special pattern is fluctuating, it is preferable to configure the timing of executing the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times of saving time to be different according to the variation pattern (variation time, jackpot lottery result, stop type) of the selected special pattern. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing of interrupting the special symbol variation, which is advantageous to the player (the number of times of time saving is not updated by the special symbol variation after restarting, or the time saving state set at the time of restarting can be continued for a long time), so that the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for informing the player of that fact is executed. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next, the lucky time performance can be executed. With such a configuration, when a V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Also, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed, a method (absolute determination) of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) and a method of determining whether the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next is longer (relative determination) are configured to be executable. As a result, the player can grasp the timing of advantageously interrupting the special symbol variation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player can be notified of the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is being executed. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration for executing update processing of the number of times of shortening of working hours of special symbol variations during special symbol variations, it may be configured to execute an effect indicating that the number of times of shortening of working hours is updated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when a specific winning game (accessory winning game, small winning game, big winning game) is executed during the execution of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a general electric prize winning device 640 is provided that makes it easier for a ball to win when a normal pattern winning game is executed, and a winning ball in the general electric prize winning device 640 passes (enters) a specific area (special electric operation opening 643, special electric operation opening 1643, second ball entrance 1645). That is, depending on the game result, it is possible to execute a game in which a jackpot game can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to set a game state (time-saving state) in which the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 easily passes through the above-mentioned specific area (time saving state) and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass.

By constructing in this way, even if a ball wins a prize in a general electric prize winning device 640 during a normal state winning game, it is possible to suppress the balls from entering a specific area, so that it is possible to prevent the excessively advantageous game from being provided to the player who is playing the game in the normal state.

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide the game board 13 with a special configuration for preventing the ball from winning a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the general pattern winning game executed in the normal state in order to suppress the balls from entering the specific area during the normal state, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be enhanced. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the winning balls of the general electrical winning device 640, the balls that do not pass (enter) the specific area are configured to enter the out hole, and are configured so that the player is not awarded a privilege (a prize ball). .

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the type of privilege given to the player by the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 according to the set game state, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, a game state (time-saving state) in which the ball that has won the general electric prize device 640 can easily pass through the above-described specific region and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the above-described specific region can be set. 3), and a second specific area (special electric operation port 643) for executing the role winning game in which the execution opportunity of the jackpot game is less likely to be established than in the first specific area.

By configuring in this way, the ratio (easiness of passage) of the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 to pass through the specific region is changed according to the set game state, and the ball winning the general electric prize device 640 can be made to pass through either the first specific region advantageous to the player or the second specific region disadvantageous to the first specific region in a state where the game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to pass the specific region is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which specific area the ball enters (passes through) even in a state (a state in which the ball is likely to be given) that the first privilege is decided to be given by the winning ball of the electric prize winning device 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the general pattern winning game executed during the time saving state until the end.

In the above-described second embodiment, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning hole 165 in the executed accessory winning game varies depending on the type of the specific area (special electric operation opening) into which the ball enters. That is, although the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the accessory winning game is made different, for example, the contents of the V jackpot game executed when the ball enters the V prize winning opening 165 (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game is finished (the number of time reductions)) may be configured to differ according to the type of the specific area (special electric activation opening) into which the ball enters.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments described above, when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time is interrupted), but as in the third embodiment described above, according to the conditions established when the ball wins the special electric activation opening 643, the special symbol variation being performed is discarded (the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and stopped) or discarded. You may comprise so that a time saving state may be ended on.

Furthermore, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the technical idea of the above-described second embodiment may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 which is configured so as to execute multiple types of special symbol lotteries (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) in duplicate. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the second ball entrance 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640, and the winning ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 when the ball wins in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 during the time saving state than when the ball wins in the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 in the normal state. The winning device 640 may be provided with a right first ball entrance which triggers the lottery of the first special pattern, and a switching means may be provided so that the ball winning in the general electric prize winning device 640 in the time saving state enters either the second ball entrance 1645 or the right first ball entrance. In this case, it is preferable that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1645 rather than the right first ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol that can be executed even in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to entertain the player until the end of the result of the normal figure per game executed during the time saving state. In addition, in the case of using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in which the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol is defined as the termination condition of the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is not executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the general electric prize winning device 640 may be configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to configure so as to control the operation of the switching means so as to make it easier to enter the ball. By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery can be executed more reliably during the time saving state.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be executed at the start of the game per general pattern, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be executed based on the timing at which the normal symbol indicating winning per general pattern is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the stop display period has elapsed. It may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time saving state is set, until the time saving state ends (until the special symbol variation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state ends), the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of aiming for a big win game (V big win game) via a specific game (accessory game or small win game) has been explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 having such game characteristics, the longer the variation time of the special symbols during the time saving state, the longer the period (short time period) during which the time saving state is set, and the more times the specific game is executed during the time saving state.

Further, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol variation (the process for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation) is restarted after the specific game or the big win game (V big win game) ends, that is, when the conditions for executing the new special symbol change are established.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, the length of the short period of time is varied by the variation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period of the specific game, so that the player can be made to play the game enthusiastically so as to perform many specific games while wishing to select a longer variation time as the special symbol variation.

However, for example, the game period for executing the specific game (period during which the ball cannot be won in the general electrical winning device 640 during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol or during the game per normal symbol (difficult to win)) is a period in which the specific game cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted. This is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the opening period of the electric role product 640a during the normal pattern winning game, that is, the period in which the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, but the period in which the role winning game can be executed).

In addition, the specific game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted is configured to end when either of the end condition (winning end condition) established when the number of winning balls into the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) that is opened during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or the end condition (time end condition) established when a prescribed period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) elapses after the start of the accessory winning game is met. According to the content of the game played by the player during the winning game (whether or not the ball is shot), the accessory winning game ends when any of the end conditions is met.

On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-described unfavorable period overlap, the effect mode of the specific game is configured to be variable based on the length of the unfavorable period. As a result, it is possible for the player to select the content of the game (end condition to be established) during the specific game, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, a special electric activation port 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, which serves as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed. Also in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the electric winning device 640 as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol variation being executed. In a game machine having such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a delay means that randomizes (delays) the period (ball flowing period) until the winning ball of the general electric prize device 640 enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the period until the end of a plurality of special symbol variations is configured to be a short period of time, and when a new time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is set by executing a jackpot game, the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is added without subtracting the time-saving number of times. Therefore, it is constructed so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the jackpot game after the remaining number of times of the remaining time reduction and when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation under execution is long (the jackpot game is executed after the short period of time is shortened), rather than when the number of times of remaining time reduction remains and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation under execution is short.

Thus, by providing a delay means in the general electric prize winning device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance, it may be advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player as to at what timing the winning ball of the general electric prize winning device 640 enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance. In addition, it is possible to suppress the intentional execution of a game in which the ball is entered into the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance while the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long.

In this case, as the delay means, a clown member in which the ball can roll is provided, and when a plurality of balls enter the cloon member, the balls may easily flow into a passage opening provided in the center of the cloon member. By constructing in this way, it is possible to operate the timing at which the ball enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entry opening according to the game content (the winning degree of the ball to the general electric prize winning device 640) during the normal game per game even though the delay means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the game so that the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entry opening at an arbitrary timing.

In addition, when the ball has flowed into the delay means (clone member), a suggestive effect is executed to suggest to the player a period advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long), or a result notification means for informing whether the timing at which the ball enters the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance is a timing advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long) may be provided. Furthermore, in the above-described example, an example using a cloon member as a delay means has been described, but it is sufficient to be able to change the flow period of a ball that enters the ordinary electric winning device 640. For example, a plurality of flow paths having different periods (flowing periods) from entering the ordinary electric winning device 640 to entering the special electric activation opening or the second ball entrance may be provided, and a distribution means for distributing the ball to any of the plurality of flow paths.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. FIG. Like the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are configured to be executable (so-called simultaneous variation specification), and by varying the length of the variation time of the first special symbol and the length of the variation time of the second special symbol selected according to the set game state, Of the two types of special symbol lotteries that can be performed in duplicate, the lottery is easy to execute. There are some that change the symbol type according to the game state. Specifically, when one game state (eg, normal state) is set, a short variation time (eg, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, and a long variation time (eg, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. When a specific game state different from the normal state (eg, latent state) is set, a long variation time (eg, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. A short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol lottery is easily executed during the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state.

Further, in the game machine having the above-described structure, there is a game machine which is configured to win a small prize with a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and makes a latent state in which a small prize game executed based on the small prize winning is frequently executed a game state advantageous to the player.

In the above-described gaming machine, since a game (advantageous game) that frequently generates a small winning game can be executed only in a specific game state (latency state), the player can play the game while expecting the game state to shift. However, since a fixed variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state, it is not possible to make a large difference in the small winning game execution frequency during the latent definite state. there was

On the other hand, in the present seventh embodiment, it is configured to vary the range that can be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol according to the number of held balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a short variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, by executing a game (right-handed game) in the latent definite state, it is possible to acquire both the start winning of the first special symbol (holding memory) and the starting winning of the second special symbol, and according to the small winning type set when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted or the lottery result indicating the failure can be forced to stop (discard). By forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to positively reduce the number of reserved first special symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of pending memories of the first special symbol based on the lottery result of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the latent certainty state.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game state in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, as the game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and although detailed description will be given later, the latent state is configured as the most advantageous game state for the player, and the normal state is the most disadvantageous game for the player. It is configured as a skill state. Also, the variable probability state is configured as a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the name of the production mode executed during each game state may be used to indicate the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the board configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in that the V winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640 are deleted, and instead, a right variable winning device 1650, a right electric accessory 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided. Also, the difference is that the positions of the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are different. Other configurations are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, the left area (left area) and the right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80 among the game areas formed on the game board 13 are respectively provided with winning openings (ball openings) that allow a ball to win (enter a ball). Therefore, unlike the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, it is configured so that the player can execute a game in which the ball falls to the left side area (left-handed game) and a game in which the ball falls to the right side area (right-handed game).

Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the player is made to execute different games according to the set game state. When the normal state is set, the left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64. When the variable probability state is set, the right-handed game is executed to make the right electric accessory 164 win the ball. It is configured to execute a right-handed game in order to enter the ball into the ball. In addition, even when a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, it is configured to execute a right-handed game.

In other words, when a game that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is configured to play the game to the right. Therefore, since the game method allows the player to grasp whether the current situation is advantageous or not, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Although the details will be described later, during the game state (variable probability state, latent probability state, and various winning states) in which the right-handed game is executed, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a guidance display mode for causing the player to execute the right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), the rate at which a ball flowing down the left side region due to a left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), and the ratio at which a ball flowing down the right side region due to a right-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 are configured to vary depending on the nail planted on the board surface of the game board 13 and various structures. Specifically, one out of about 15 balls that flow down the left side area in a left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), and one out of about 250 balls that flow down in the right side area in a right-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c). Therefore, in the normal state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c), the left-handed game is the most advantageous game method for the player.

157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80), there are a right variable winning device 1650, a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650, a right first ball entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67, and a right electric accessory 16 having an opening/closing door 164r1 capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first ball entrance 164r. 4, a right second ball entrance 645 into which a ball that has flowed down (passed) on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 can enter, and a variable winning device 650 is provided in a downstream area where a ball that has flowed down in the right area without entering any of the above-described ball entrances reaches.

As shown in FIG. 157, the flow-down path of the game ball is set so that only the game ball passing through the through gate 67 can reach the right second ball entrance 645 while the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed). In other words, even if a right-handed game is played in a high-probability state (probability variable state) of normal patterns where the right electric accessory 164 is likely to be opened, almost all game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first ball entrance 164r, so that the game balls cannot be entered into the right second ball entrance 645.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, even in the variable probability state (variable probability mode), it can be configured so that the game can be progressed by the right-handed game.

In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening/closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all the balls flowing down the right side area in the right-handed game can win the right variable winning device 1650 in the open state. This right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball entry means) that is opened in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery.

When the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (a small winning game is not executed), about 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right region flow down the region where the through gate 67 is arranged (the right region (first route) of the left and right regions defined by the nails planted on the left side of the right variable winning device 1650), and the remaining about 1/2 flow down the left region (second route). The ball flowing down this left area (second path) flows down toward the variable winning device 650 without entering the right electric accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 1645 .

On the other hand, all the balls flowing down the right area (first path) where the through gate 67 is arranged flow down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (the upstream end side of the opening/closing door 164r1), and flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 from the upstream side to the downstream side. Approximately 2/3 of the ball discharged from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enters the right second ball entrance 645, and the remaining approximately 1/3 passes through a gap formed between the right electric accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 645 and flows down toward the variable winning device 650.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of paths are provided for the ball shot to the right side area by the right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650, and each path is formed so that the period required for the ball to flow down is different. Specifically, it is configured so that the ball flows down in the right area (first path) for about 2 seconds, and the ball in the left area (second path) flows about 1 second. By configuring in this way, balls fired at different timings (balls fired in a right-handed game), specifically, a plurality of balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds can reach the variable winning device 650 at the same timing. Therefore, during the period when the variable prize winning device 650 is in the open state (during the jackpot game), a plurality of balls can be easily entered into the variable prize winning device 650 at the same time, so that the player can be interested in the behavior of the falling balls during the jackpot game.

The right electric accessary 164 is a variable ball entry means which is opened when winning in a normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) in which a lottery condition can be established when a ball passes through a through gate 67 (when a normal pattern winning game is executed). Here, the normal design lottery (normal pattern lottery) in the present seventh embodiment, and the contents of the normal pattern per game will be briefly described.

In the seventh embodiment, even in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the ball can enter the right electric accessory 164 by the right-handed game, albeit with a low probability. This ball entry rate is set lower than the rate of balls that enter the first ball entry port 64 when a left-handed game is played in the normal state (ratio of about 1 ball out of 20 balls). A ball entering the right electric accessory 164 is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 164r without fail. Then, when the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164, the lottery right of the first special pattern is acquired (the lottery condition is established) as in the case of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, prize balls (four pieces) are provided in addition to the first special pattern lottery right as a benefit of the ball entering. On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164, a prize ball (1 piece) is granted in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege for entering the ball. That is, when the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is set as the game state, it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the first special symbol when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed, and the number of prize balls given when the ball is entered into the ball entrance for acquiring the lottery right of the first special symbol is increased. Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

Also, when a right-handed game is played in the normal state, about 1/3 of the balls flowing down the right side area enter the right second ball entrance 645 . When a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645, the lottery right for executing the lottery for the second special symbol is given, and one prize ball is given. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a long time (10 minutes) is set as the variation time. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured not to be stored (retained storage). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not smoothly performed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, when a jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed and a game of winning a ball to the variable winning device 650 is executed. Since the normal state of the normal pattern is set during execution of the jackpot game, balls enter the right first ball entrance 164r in the right electric accessory 164 during the period of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the reserved memory number (the number of reserved balls) of the first special pattern becomes the upper limit.

Thus, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being the upper limit. In this embodiment, when the latent definite state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and a long variation (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. Then, a game (small winning RUSH) is executed in which a large number of prize balls are obtained while frequently winning a small winning in the second special symbol lottery.

Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent definite state reaches a predetermined number (1 or 2), a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation than when the number is other than the predetermined number (0, 3, 4). That is, the period in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is the predetermined number during the latent definite state is the period in which the number of times of the small winning game executed per unit time is likely to increase, and the game period is advantageous to the player.

As described above, since this embodiment does not have a reservation storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the latent state. And it is configured so that the variation time of the first special symbol in the latent definite state is a long time (10 minutes). Therefore, it is difficult to reach a predetermined number (1 or 2) of the number of held balls of the first special symbol in the lapse of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the latent certainty state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is configured to forcibly stop (discard) the first special symbol variation being executed in part when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the player can play the game of reducing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while performing the game aiming at winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent certainty state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the advantage period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in the latent state is set based on the number of balls held in the first special symbol, and furthermore, the number of balls held in the first special symbol can be increased when a game (right-handed game) for executing the second special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the advantageous period lasts.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a reserved memory function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is configured to select the variation time of the second special symbol based on the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol to be selected during the latent state is always configured to be a long variation time, but without being limited to this, for example, a short variation (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected with a probability of about 1/10 as the variation time of the first special symbol variation during the latent definite state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to include the fluctuation time lapse of the first special symbol in the practical method of causing the reserved memory of the first special symbol to be reduced during the latent definite state. Therefore, it is possible to substantially have a plurality of opportunities to reduce the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol in the latent certainty state.

Further, although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the discard condition is satisfied in part of the case where the second special symbol lottery wins the small prize, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, but the discard condition that can be satisfied regardless of the second special symbol lottery result may be used. Alternatively, a discard condition that can be established when a ball enters a ball entrance provided in any of the game areas (right area) of the game board 13 may be set. In this way, the state of discarding the first special symbol is established due to various factors, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period is set.

Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158(a) is a front perspective view schematically showing the closed state of the right electric accessory 164 (the state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed), and FIG. 158(b) is a front perspective view schematically showing the open state of the right electric accessory 164 (the state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is open).

As shown in FIG. 158(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is provided with projections 164r1a to 164r1c provided to prevent game balls from flowing down. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by the projections 164r1a to 164r1c, it flows down from the left side to the right side of the opening/closing door 164r1 along the outer periphery of each projection 164r1a to 164r1c. In other words, on the opening/closing door 164r1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the projections 164r1a to 164r1c. Therefore, compared to the case where the projections 164r1a to 164r1c are not provided (that is, the case where the game ball flows straight down the opening/closing door 164r1 from the left direction to the right direction in front view), it is possible to lengthen the period required until it completely flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. This makes it easier for a plurality of balls (subsequent balls) to reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 while one ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and the ball can be easily won to the right electric accessory 164 when the normal game is executed.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but in this embodiment, when a high probability state (probability variable state) of normal symbols is set as the game state, most of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right electric accessory 164. The variation time of the normal symbols, the operation content of the normal per game, and the path of the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are designed. By constructing in this way, in the variable probability state, the probability of winning a big win in the special pattern lottery can be increased more than in the normal state, and by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the first special pattern can be made easier than in the normal state. In addition, since the lottery for the second special symbols is difficult to be executed during the variable probability state, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player who is playing the game during the variable probability state. In this embodiment, if a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the variable probability state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a variable time (60 seconds) shorter than the normal state is selected.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable probability state shifts to the latent probability state while the second special symbol variation is being executed for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time despite the shift to the latent probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as transition conditions for shifting the game state from the variable probability state to the latent probability state, a first transition condition established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) executed during the variable probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), and a second transition condition established when a specific small winning (small winning C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbols executed during the variable probability state are set. That is, in the probability variable state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to execute, when a specific small winning (small winning C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the second shift condition is satisfied), the state can be shifted to the latent probability state even if the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) executed during the variable probability state does not reach the predetermined number of times (50 times).

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158(b), the opening/closing door 164r1 slides from the front side in front view toward the back side in front view and is housed inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. As shown in FIG. As a result, the right first ball entrance 164r is opened. Although detailed description is omitted, the opening/closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state based on an instruction from the main controller 110. When an electric current is supplied to this solenoid, the solenoid is turned ON and the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened. In other words, it is configured so that the current flows to the solenoid only when the normal pattern lottery wins and the normal pattern winning game is executed. As a result, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed because the power is not required during the period in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed, which occupies a large proportion of the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

When the first ball entrance 164r is opened (when the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened), the ball passing through the through gate 67 can win the right electric accessory 164. In addition, since the interval in the height direction of the opening for housing the opening/closing door 164r1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the game ball which was flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 at the time when the opening/closing door 164r1 starts to slide is not housed inside the game board 13 together with the opening/closing door 164r1. A positioned ball can be dropped from above the opening/closing door 164r1 toward the first ball entrance 164r.

In the seventh embodiment, three protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1, so that the game ball circumvents the protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the passage period for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing door 164r1 is lengthened. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 may be made of a material (for example, an elastic body) having a larger coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, the surface may be provided with unevenness, etc.).

FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening/closing door 164r1 viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 159, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of a ball are embedded in the zigzag path on which the ball can (easily) roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other at a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are known optical sensors whose output is H (high) when a game ball is placed above them and whose output is L (low) when there is nothing to obstruct the above. In the seventh embodiment, the combination of the outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored by the audio lamp control device 113 side. By combining the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, it is possible to calculate the passage state of the ball on the opening/closing door 164r1, and execute notification of the ball passage state based on the calculation result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp how close the ball shot by the right-handed game during the variable probability state is to the right second ball entrance 645 . Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game during the variable probability state based on the content of the ball passing state notification to be executed, the interest of the game during the variable probability state can be improved. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged only on the opening/closing door 164r1. However, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are provided only on the opening/closing door 164r1. It may be configured so that the number of balls that have passed through the upper surface of 1 can be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, description will be given of the flow-down situation when a ball shot in a right-handed game flows down the right-hand region. FIG. 160(a) is a latent state (high-probability state for special symbols, low-probability state for normal symbols), and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flowing down state when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645. FIG.

The seventh embodiment is configured so that the game of entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 by the right-handed game is the most advantageous game for the player when the latent definite state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is set. 160(a), the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state, and enters the right second ball entrance 645.

Although the detailed explanation will be given later, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is set to 1/2, and 30 seconds is set as a period (fluctuation time) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display (confirmation) of the lottery result. That is, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state (normal state, latent probability state, jackpot game state) in which a low probability state of normal patterns is set, one ball passes through the through gate 67 at a rate of one ball out of two balls, so that one ball out of four is won per normal pattern, and the game per normal pattern is executed at a rate of once every 60 seconds.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering ball flow path (passing period 1.3 seconds) is formed on the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 that is opened as a normal game. Therefore, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to make a plurality of balls stay on the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state with a high probability.

Therefore, even when the low-probability state of normal symbols is set, it is possible to win one or two balls to the right electric accessory 164 per minute. In addition, since the ball is easily made to stay on the opening/closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, even if the game period of the normal figure winning game is set to a short period (for example, open for 0.2 seconds), the ball can be easily won to the right electric accessory 164 during the normal figure winning game.

By setting the game period of the normal pattern winning game short in this way, when the right hitting game is executed after determining that the normal pattern winning game is executed based on the stop display mode of the normal pattern, the normal pattern winning game can be finished before the ball reaches the right electric accessory 164.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game of efficiently winning the ball to the right electric accessory 164 by executing the right hitting game after determining that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that is opened during a small winning game is provided above (upstream) the through gate 67. Therefore, even in a state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set, if the game state (latent probability state) in which the second special pattern lottery can be smoothly executed, the ball can be suppressed from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164 by executing the small winning game.

By constructing in this way, even when the low-probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to make it more difficult for the right electric accessory 164 to win the ball in the latent-probability state than in the normal state or during the jackpot game. Therefore, in the right hitting game executed during the jackpot game, the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1) can be obtained up to the upper limit by winning the balls in the right electric accessory 164, while the excessive increase of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 due to the right hitting game executed during the latent state can be suppressed.

<Regarding production content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161 to FIG. 165, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the flow of effects from when the variable probability state is set as the game state until the latent probability state is set, and the flow of the effects executed during the latent probability state will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the flow of effects from when the variable probability state is set as the game state to when the latent probability state is set will be described. In this embodiment, in a part of the case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, a variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, in a state in which the variable probability state is set, when a predetermined transition condition is established, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state. Specifically, as the variable probability state, the high probability state of the special pattern is continued until the next big win, and the high probability state of the normal pattern is continued until the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times. In other words, the game state is changed from the variable probability state to the latent probability state when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot after the variable probability state is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, an effect is executed to suggest a period until the probability state that is most advantageous to the player is set. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the conditions until the latent certainty state is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the variable probability state (variable probability mode) is set. FIG.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, by passing (adding) the number of time reductions in the variable probability state, it is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous latent certainty mode (latent certainty state). Therefore, in the variable probability state (variable probability mode), an effect aiming at the latent probability state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), an effect is executed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In addition, in a display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, a character "Aim for the summit!" The example of FIG. 161(a) illustrates a case where characters "50 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. Since the remaining meter display up to the top is displayed by subtracting 1 m each time the variable display (variation display of the third pattern) is executed once, the player can easily understand that the remaining meter (distance) up to the top is the remaining number of times of variation until shifting to the stealth mode.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the above-described display area HR2 is varied (subtracted) each time the variation display of the third symbol is executed, and when the display mode of the meter display after the variation (subtraction) becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m"), the game state is configured to shift from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. The display mode (numerical value) of the meter display may be configured so that the latent accuracy mode is set when it is added up to a specific numerical value. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the meter display every time the variable display of the third pattern is executed, and for example, when the variable display of the third pattern is executed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter display may be changed. By constructing in this way, the timing of changing the display mode of the meter display can be made different from the variable display timing of the third pattern, so that an unexpected performance can be provided by executing the performance of greatly decreasing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display at once while making the player recognize the approximate period until the latent probability mode (latent probability state) is set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2, in order to notify the player that the period until the latent probability mode is set is shortened (that the transition condition establishment timing is approaching), only the effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is executed. You may perform the production|presentation which temporarily increases the display mode (numerical value) of. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the definite state will be set, so that the player can play the game while always anticipating that the definite state will be set.

In this case, as a transition condition for transitioning from the probability variable state to the latent probability state, at least a plurality of transition conditions, specifically, according to the jackpot type that triggered the probability variable state to be set and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, As a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first transition condition that is easy to be satisfied (for example, the number of times of shortening time 20 times) and the second transition condition that is less likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition (for example, the number of time saving times of 50 times). A display mode (e.g., ``remaining 20m'') indicating a period until a first transition condition that is likely to be met when a probability variable state is set is displayed in a display area HR2, and when the actually set time-saving termination condition is the first transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is directly executed, and when the actually set time-saving termination condition is the second transition condition, the meter is displayed based on the number of remaining time reductions. While increasing the number of display modes, a specific transition display mode may be displayed at the timing when the second transition condition is satisfied. By constructing in this way, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time saving end condition set for the variable probability state this time is.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to set a plurality of time-saving end conditions in a variable probability state that is set after execution of a specific jackpot game. More specifically, a first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the variable probability state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the result of the special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the probability variable state is a specific result (for example, a small winning C win) are set. And it comprises so that the meter display based on the 1st time saving end conditions which can calculate the timing when time saving end conditions are satisfied beforehand may be displayed on display area HR2. That is, during the definite variable state, the meter display is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, ``remaining 0 m''), the effect of notifying that the definite state is set is executed. On the other hand, when the second time-saving end condition is satisfied before the above-mentioned first time-saving end condition is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display becomes a specific transitional display mode), an effect is executed in which the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is rapidly reduced, and the meter display is changed to a specific transitional display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m") after the character 811 vigorously climbs the mountain.

Thus, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the state is shifted to the probability state, so that the player who is playing the variable probability state can be made to play the game while always expecting the shift to the probability state. In addition, even when any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the player can be notified of the transition to the latent state by displaying the specific transition display mode as the display mode of the meter display, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand presentation.

Next, with reference to Drawing 161 (b), the contents of the production performed when time saving end conditions are satisfied during probability change state are explained. Figure 162 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the number of times of time saving has elapsed in the variable probability mode (variable probability state) (the time saving end condition is established). As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the time-saving end condition (for example, a special pattern variation of a predetermined number of times) is established, an effect is executed in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain, and the characters "Reach the top!" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to the latent state (latent certainty mode).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent definite state is set, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special pattern is made easier than when the game state other than the latent definite state is set, and the lottery of the second special pattern is constructed so as to win a small prize with a high probability (higher probability than the lottery of the first special pattern). By frequently executing the second special symbol lottery, the small winning game is frequently executed, and the player is made to execute the game in which many benefits (prize balls) can be obtained. Hereinafter, the game in which the small winning game is frequently executed by the second special symbol lottery in the latent state will be referred to as "RUSH", and the effect executed during the RUSH game will be referred to as "RUSH effect".

FIG. 162(a) shows a state (preparation state) from the transition to the latent state (latent certainty mode) to the state in which a prize ball can actually be obtained (until a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery). As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the preparatory state, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the characters "Right-handed to start RUSH!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the characters "RUSH preparation" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the right-handed game will enter the RUSH state in which prize balls can be obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set when the time saving end condition is established in the probability variable state, but the second special symbol lottery may not be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set. Specifically, the second special symbol variation is executed during the probability variation state, and when the time saving end condition is established based on the execution of the first special symbol variation while the second special symbol variation is being performed, the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state while the second special symbol variation is being performed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol variation in the latent probability state is not executed until the second special symbol variation being executed (the second special symbol variation started during the probability variation state) is stopped and displayed.

In this way, after the latent certainty state is set, if a period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly executed occurs for a predetermined period, by displaying the display screen (RUSH preparation screen) shown in FIG. I can.

In this embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the game state shifts from the definite variable state to the latent definite state, when the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed is a predetermined period or more (for example, 10 seconds or more), the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. In a certain case, it may be configured to notify that an advantageous game will be executed later, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which a game method (e.g., left-handed game) executed by a player during a disadvantageous game (variable probability state) is different from a game method (e.g., right-handed game) executed by a player during an advantageous game (variable probability state), the period from when the latent probability state is set to when the second special symbol variation is actually executed by the right-handed game is used. 162(a).

Further, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured such that, in a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is easier for the player to be won in a normal symbol lottery than in an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and that the length of the variation time to be selected is likely to be longer, and the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed during the normal symbol winning game that is executed when the player wins in the normal symbol lottery, the disadvantageous game state occurs when the advantageous game state is set. The RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162(a) may be executed during the period until the normal symbol variation executed during is stopped and displayed. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 162(a), it is preferable to hide (difficult to see) the display mode of "Right shot" displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, or to display the characters "Preparing, please wait for a while" in the display area HR1. That is, it is preferable to display the RUSH preparation period display so as to notify the player that the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (difficult to execute) even if the right-handed game is executed, although the latent definite state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the RUSH game from being executed in spite of the execution of the right-handed game, thereby giving the player a sense of distrust.

Then, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) is executed during the latent certainty state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162(b) is displayed, and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162(b), when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the latent state and the second special symbol variation in which the small hit is won is executed, the characters "RUSH start" are displayed in the display area HR1, and the characters "RUSH rush!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, an icon resembling a treasure box (treasure box 812) is displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, during the RUSH game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect (RUSH effect) using an icon imitating a treasure box (treasure box 812) will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, the effect of the character 811 opening the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode indicating the lottery result of the current second special symbol lottery is displayed from the opened treasure box 812 . As the lottery result display mode, for example, when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is a small win, a display mode imitating 'V' is displayed, when the result is a big win, a display mode imitating the characters of 'hit' is displayed, and when the result is a loss, a display mode imitating a 'cross mark' is displayed. In this way, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed only by executing the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 for the treasure box 812 that is always displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, the effect executed during the super RUSH game that is more advantageous to the player than during other RUSH games during the RUSH game will be described. In this embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the latent definite state is configured to be variable based on the number of special symbols reserved (the number of retained memories of the first special symbol) that is reserved and stored. Specifically, in the second special symbol variation executed when the number of special symbols reserved is a specific number (for example, 1), it is configured so that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the second special symbol variation executed when the number of special symbols reserved is other than the specific number. As described above, while the latent definite state is set, the effect of awarding a privilege (a prize ball) to the player is executed by frequently generating a small winning game based on the winning of the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the shorter the variation time of the second special symbol variation in the latent definite state, the greater the proportion of the small winning game period in the unit period, so that the player can make the game state more playable. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the number of reserved special symbols becomes a specific number, and the RUSH game during the period in which the variation time of the second special symbol variation is shortened is referred to as a super RUSH game.

First, the effect contents executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents executed in a state where the special figure pending number is likely to be subtracted during the RUSH game. In this embodiment, when a specific small win (for example, a small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent definite state, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly missed and stopped and displayed. In addition, it is configured such that a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is likely to be selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to acquire the first special symbol reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball) by the right-handed game executed during the latent certainty state. That is, while executing the RUSH game during the latent certainty state, it is configured to make it difficult to reduce the special figure 1 reserved balls based on the passage of the fluctuation time.

Therefore, in order to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls until the conditions for executing the super RUSH game are established, it is necessary to win a specific small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol variation in which a specific small win is won is executed, the characters "Aim for further top" are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and an effect for the character 811 to aim for a higher position is executed in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 164(a).

Specifically, a display mode showing a stage corresponding to the difference between the number of currently acquired special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls that is the condition for executing the super RUSH game is displayed, and a guidance suggestion display that suggests the situation until the super RUSH game is executed to the player is displayed in the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm.

Then, when a specific small hit is won multiple times during the RUSH game, and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes a specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164(b) is displayed. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed when the conditions for executing the super RUSH game are satisfied. When the execution condition of the super RUSH game (for example, the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 becomes 2) is satisfied, the character 811 reaches the top and the performance is executed with the display mode informing that the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied. And, in the display area HR71, the display mode "2" indicating that the current special figure 1 reserved ball number has the execution condition of the super RUSH game is displayed.

164 (a) and (b) are displayed, that is, after setting the effect mode suggesting super RUSH rush in the special figure discard setting process (see S4643 in FIG. 186) to be described later, If the special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, the super RUSH game may not be executed when the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. Therefore, in the state where FIGS. 164(a) and (b) are displayed, a process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired is executed, and when the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, a process for switching the performance mode is executed. For example, when a special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, an effect is executed in which the peak shown in FIG. As a result, even if the super RUSH entry opportunity disappears during the execution of the production suggesting the super RUSH entry, the effect can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Also, in FIGS. 164 (a) and (b), the effect contents when the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special 1 reserved balls are explained, but in addition to this, the effect suggesting the super RUSH rush is executed even when the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of special 1 reserved balls. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the current state (increased advantageous state) sets an advantageous period (a period in which a super RUSH game is executed) by increasing the special figure 1 reserved number by one is executed, and when it is determined that the increased advantageous state is established, it is determined whether or not a normal figure winning game is executed. In this determination, it is determined whether or not a normal pattern winning game is executed based on the preliminary determination result (prefetch result) of whether or not information for winning a normal pattern is included in the prefetching process (corresponding to the process of executing the same process as the prefetching process for the special symbol executed in each embodiment described above for the normal symbol) based on the lottery result of the normal symbol fluctuation being executed and the information reserved for the normal symbol. Then, when it is determined that a game per normal pattern is executed, a super RUSH rush performance is executed for suggesting that an opportunity to increase the special figure 1 reserve will soon come.

As a performance mode of this super RUSH rush performance, by increasing the special figure 1 reserved number (by making the right electric accessory 164 win a ball), a notification mode for notifying the player that the super RUSH game will be executed is set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to establish the conditions for executing the super RUSH game. In addition, in this embodiment, the player can grasp the conditions for executing the super RUSH game, that is, the case where the super RUSH game is executed by decreasing the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls and the case where the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls. It may be configured to notify the player and make the player select whether to execute a game to increase the number of reserved special figures 1 or to execute a game to decrease it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effects executed during the super RUSH will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during Super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol variation having a shorter variation time than the normal RUSH game is easily executed, so that the execution interval of the small winning game is shortened and the number of times the small winning game is executed in a unit time can be increased more than the normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the super RUSH game, it becomes a game period more advantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH game. During the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the characters "SUPER RUSH" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the characters "speed up" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

That is, during the super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and it is difficult to execute the effect of suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery using one fluctuation period of the second special symbol lottery (the effect of displaying a treasure box) and the effect of informing the lottery result (the effect of opening the treasure box and displaying the contents) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Then, an effect for opening the treasure box is appropriately executed based on the result of the lottery.

Specifically, a plurality of treasure chests with different display modes (for example, colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and a performance for opening the treasure chests according to the lottery result of the second special pattern to be executed is executed. In this case, as a result of the lottery of the second special pattern that is advantageous to the player, for example, if the player wins the big win in which the latent state is set again after the end of the big win game, a gorgeous rainbow-colored or golden treasure box is opened, and as a result of the lottery that is unfavorable to the player, for example, if the player wins a big win in which the normal state is set after the end of the big win game, that is, when the RUSH game ends, an effect of opening the tattered treasure box is executed.

Thus, by displaying a plurality of treasure boxes with different display modes in advance, it is possible to easily execute the performance suggesting the lottery result (the performance of varying the display mode of the treasure box to be opened) without executing the performance of varying the display mode of the displayed treasure box according to the result of the second special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have a holding memory function, for example, the winning information of the second special symbol that is held and stored is determined in advance. Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for executing the performance suggesting the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, the performance effect of previously displaying a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes can be further enhanced.

When using a configuration in which a plurality of treasure chests with different display modes are displayed in advance as in this embodiment, the number of displayed treasure boxes displayed at the same time and the display mode may be set randomly, or the display mode may be varied according to the number of games (the number of executions of the special symbol lottery) during the latent state. In addition, the current number of special figure reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) is read out, whether or not the super RUSH game is likely to end based on the read result is determined, and the display mode and the number of displayed treasure boxes may be varied based on the determination result. By constructing in this way, not only the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery but also the game status of the super RUSH game can be grasped by the player by using the display mode and the number of displayed treasure boxes, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165(b), during the super RUSH game, the effect content of the effect suggesting the end of the super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect for suggesting the end of the super RUSH game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (one or two), the super RUSH game is configured to be executed, and the right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) can be increased by the game (right-handed game) executed during the super RUSH game (see FIG. 157).

Therefore, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases during the super RUSH game, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases from 2 to 3, and the super RUSH game may end. In such a case, an ending suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165(b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165(b), the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is 2, and during the super RUSH game, the normal symbol is won (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 is opened. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "end pinch" are displayed.

By executing the end suggesting performance in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game due to the increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 by causing the ball to win in the right electric accessory 164 during the super RUSH game. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (b), in the state in which the super RUSH game ends due to the factor of the super RUSH game ending, that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 increases, the player is not notified that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is likely to increase (the state in which the game per normal figure is executed). Guidance notification may be performed to make it difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the end of the super RUSH game based on the increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1, and to make the player pay attention to the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the super RUSH game, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the execution timing of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be the start timing of the game per normal pattern, the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation (fluctuation time 10 seconds to 30 seconds) that is won per normal pattern, the timing when the remaining fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation becomes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the information contained in the normal pattern holding ball is discriminated in advance, and the predetermined timing (for example, 30 seconds before the game per normal pattern is executed). But it's okay.

Furthermore, in the case of executing the above-mentioned guidance notification (guidance notification that makes it difficult for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the normal game by interrupting the right-handed game), when the right-handed game is interrupted after grasping the notification content of the guidance notification, it is preferable to secure a period of time during which the ball fired by the right-handed game that was being executed before the interruption cannot win the right electric accessory 164. It is preferable to configure so that the guidance notification is executed 10 seconds before the game is executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute a game that does not increase the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls for the player who grasps the guidance information. In addition, when the normal pattern per game is not actually executed, for example, when the information contained in the normal pattern reserved ball is determined in advance and it is determined in advance that the normal pattern per pattern game is executed after 60 seconds, that is, the above-mentioned end suggesting performance (so-called fake performance) may be executed at the timing when the number of special 1 reserved balls cannot increase even if the right-handed game is not interrupted.

In the above-described FIG. 165 (b), the number of special 1 reserved balls is no longer a specific number (1 or 2) due to the increase in the number of special 1 reserved balls, and the super RUSH game can be terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the end suggesting effect executed when the super RUSH game ends due to the decrease in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen of an end suggestion effect that is executed when the super RUSH game ends due to the decrease in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the end suggestion effect is executed in the same display mode as the display mode shown in FIG. 165(b) described above.

In this case, after 1.5 seconds, the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the next first special symbol variation is started, so that the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls becomes 0 and the super RUSH game ends. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "finishing pinch! Accumulate pending" are displayed. By executing the end suggesting effect in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the super RUSH game will end unless the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased.

In this embodiment, a plurality of opportunities to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls are provided, and as shown in FIG. 166, in addition to the case where the first special symbol variation in progress is stopped and displayed after the variation time has elapsed, there is a case where a specific small win (small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol variation in progress is forcibly stopped (discarded). By executing the end suggesting performance shown in FIG. 166 in a state in which any opportunity is established (or can be established), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game.

166, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed or the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation in which the small hit B is won is determined, and based on the determination result, the remaining period until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes 0 is calculated, and it may be configured to be executed at the timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). , 30-second intervals). That is, the state in which the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 is a state in which the super RUSH game continues even if the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls is increased by 1, so the end suggesting performance may be executed to reduce the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls to 2 without determining the timing when the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls may become 0.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game can be completed regardless of whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 increases or decreases. I can.

It should be noted that, unlike the effect content of the present embodiment, for example, the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 165 (b)) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is likely to be satisfied by increasing the number of special 1 reserved balls, and the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 166) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game by decreasing the number of special 1 reserved balls is likely to be satisfied. It may be constructed so as to execute an effect that allows the player to select whether or not. Thereby, the continuation period of the super RUSH game can be made different depending on the game method selected by the player, that is, the game method of continuing the super RUSH game by executing the right-handed game in order to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the game method of continuing the super RUSH game by interrupting the right-handed game in order not to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. In addition, when the player selects an erroneous game method, the game method becomes a game method that facilitates establishment of conditions for ending the super RUSH game, so that the effect of the game method selected by the player on subsequent game results can be increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the period in which the super RUSH game is executed is configured to be a specific range (1, 2) in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is continuous. In this case, as the end suggestion effect, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls can be 1 to 0 and when it can be 3 to 4, the same end suggestion effect as in FIG. 165 (b) and FIG. should be configured to That is, according to the above-described example, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2, the super RUSH game will be executed even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases or increases. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0 or 4, the super RUSH game will be in a state (standby state) that is easier to execute. Also, in this case, the variation time selected in the first special symbol variation executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2 (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2 after subtracting the number of special figure 1 reserved balls used in the first special symbol lottery of this time) may be configured to be shorter than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0 or 4. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the transition from the standby state to the super RUSH game, and to motivate the player who has transitioned to the standby state to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of game states in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in this embodiment, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set. And, according to the set game state, the amount of privilege given to the player who plays the game is configured to differ. Specifically, it is constructed so that the player is given the most benefits when the latent probability state is set, and the amount of benefits given to the player decreases in the order of the variable probability state and the normal state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). During the normal state, a left-handed game aiming at the entrance of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed because it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a normal state, a first special symbol lottery is executed to win a big win with a probability of 1/200. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which a normal state is set again after the jackpot game is finished is set at a rate of 35%, a jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished at a rate of 45%, and a jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which a probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished is set at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, it is most easily shifted to the variable probability state, then easily shifted to the normal state, and most difficult to shift to the latent state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game property in which a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set by going through a plurality of game states.

Next, when the variable probability state is set, the normal symbol high probability state is set, so that the right electric accessory 164 is more easily opened than the normal symbol low probability state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 164r by the right-handed game than to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, so that the right-handed game executes the first special symbol lottery. Furthermore, during the variable probability state, the state becomes a state with a high probability of special symbols, and the first special symbol lottery for winning a big hit with a probability of 1/60 is executed. When a big win is won in a first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, a big win type (big win A7) in which a normal state is set after the end of the big win game is set at a rate of 35%, a big win type (big win B7) in which a latent state is set after the big win game is over at a rate of 45%, and a big win type (big win C7) in which the variable probability state is set again after the big win game is over at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the variable probability state is more likely to shift to the latent probability state than the normal state, which is the initial state. Thus, when a jackpot is won in the normal state and the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the variable probability state can be changed to the latent probability state more easily than the normal state, so that the player can easily continue playing the game.

In addition, when the special pattern variation is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot in the state where the variable probability state is set, a condition for ending the high-probability state of the normal pattern (time-saving termination condition) is established, and the state is shifted to the latent probability state. That is, when the definite variable state is set, the latent definite state is set when any one of the first transition condition (establishment probability is about 35%) established when the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot (winning probability 1/60) and the second transition condition (establishment probability is about 30%) established when the jackpot is won in the probability variable state and the jackpot B7 is set is established. In addition, the above-described first transition condition has a probability of establishment varying according to the remaining period of the variable probability state. For example, in a state where the special symbol variation is executed 49 times during the variable probability state, the first transition condition is established (probability of establishment is about 90%) when the 50th special symbol variation to be executed next is lost (winning probability 59/60).

In this way, when there are multiple migration conditions for shifting the gaming status from the probable change state to the accuracy state, the transfer conditions in which the probability of establishment is variable according to the number of executions of the special pattern fluctuation (the first migration condition), and the transition condition that does not change the probability of establishment according to the number of executions of the special pattern fluctuation (second transfer conditions). It is possible to variable the desired gaming results as the gaming of the gaming in accordance with the gaming in the probable change. Therefore, immediately after the variable probability state is set, that is, in a period in which the probability of setting the latent certain state based on the establishment of the first transition condition is higher than the probability of setting the latent certain state based on the establishment of the first transition condition, an effect is executed to prompt the player whether the second transition condition is satisfied or not, and when a predetermined period has passed since the variable probability state was set, that is, the probability that the probability information is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition is higher based on the establishment of the second transition condition. In the period in which the probability of setting the latent certainty state is higher than the probability of setting, it is possible to execute an effect to prompt the player whether or not the first transition condition is satisfied.

Next, the flow of the game during the latent certainty state will be explained. When the latent certainty state is set, as described above, the RUSH game corresponding to the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number of balls) is executed. Specifically, when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number of balls) is 0, 3, 4, a RUSH game is executed in which a normal length is likely to be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the latent state, and when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number of balls) is 1 or 2, a super RUSH game is executed in which a shorter length than usual is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation in the latent state. In this way, by varying the variation time of the second special symbol variation according to the game situation (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and thus the number of executions of the small winning game, can be varied, so that the player can be made to play the game in the latent state while expecting the execution of the more advantageous RUSH game.

Both the RUSH game and the super RUSH game described above are games executed during the latent state, and the winning probability of the special symbols (winning winning in the second special symbols) is set to be common (1/60). Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbols is set to be high (59/60). When a jackpot is won in the latent definite state, a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished is set at a rate of 35%, and the latent state is set again after the jackpot game is finished at a rate of 65%. On the other hand, when a small hit is won during the latent probability state, the game state is not changed. That is, once the probability state is set, the RUSH game (game during the probability state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of the jackpot winning) is set.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 174. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110, and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 168 to 172, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided within the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168(a). FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, the small winning random number table 202de with the small winning random number 7 table, the second winning random number table 202b with the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, and the jackpot type selection 4 table 20 with respect to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 116) in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is provided instead of 2db, a variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe is provided instead of a variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and a small hit type selection 7 table 202ff and a normal figure variation pattern selection 7 table 202fg are newly provided. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the seventh embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the range in which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can be updated is changed from "0 to 399" to "0 to 599", and the range in which the value of the second winning random number counter C2 can be updated is changed from "0 to 999" to "0 to 299." Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 168(b). FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 7 table 202fa. This first winning random number 7 table 202fa is different from the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) in that it defines the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined as winning according to the special symbol type and the probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery is executed, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 "0 to 2" is defined as the jackpot determination value (the value determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery). A range is specified. That is, in the seventh embodiment, even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special symbol low probability state is set, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/200, and even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state where the special symbol high probability state is set, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/60. In the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for each special symbol type. However, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is different for each special symbol type may be defined as the big hit determination value, or the number of the first winning random number counter C1 that is the big hit determination value may be different for each special symbol type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value ("0 to 2") of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win when the special symbol low probability state is set is configured to be the value of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win even when the special symbol high probability state is set. By configuring in this way, in the first look-ahead process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process (see S1764 in FIG. 136) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special corresponding to the winning information It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information for winning a jackpot without executing a process of discriminating (predicting) the game state at the time when the symbol lottery is executed. The content of the first winning random number table 202fa may be defined so that at least part or all of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win in the low probability state of the special symbols is not determined as a big win in the high probability state of the special symbols. With this configuration, when the same value of the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired, the determination result can be varied according to the game state set when the big winning determination using the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the specific first winning random number counter C1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168(c), the contents of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb will be described. FIG. 168(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number 7 table 202fb. This small winning random number 7 table 202fb is different from the small winning random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is changed. In other words, the seventh embodiment is configured so as to win a small hit with a high probability (590/600) in the lottery of the second special symbol without winning the small prize in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 168(d), the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be described. FIG. 168(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. This second winning random number 7 table 202fc, as shown in FIG. 168(d), in the case of the normal symbol low probability state, the second winning random number counter C4 obtained normal pattern hit is defined as "0" value, and in the case of the normal symbol high probability state, the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/299) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, the execution probability of the game per normal pattern can be made different between the normal state, the latent probability state, which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the variable probability state, which is the high probability state of the normal pattern.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the same game method (right-handed game) is executed in the variable probability state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set and the latent probability state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set. In the right hitting game executed during the latent probability state, the second special symbol lottery is executed by entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 (see FIG. 157), and in the right hitting game executed during the variable probability state, the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164 to execute the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, details of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd. This jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which a determination value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "jackpot A7" to "jackpot C7" Three jackpot types are defined. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbols, two jackpot types, "jackpot D7" to "jackpot E7", are defined.

As shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot A7" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This "jackpot A7" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the normal state of special symbols is set after the jackpot ends. It should be noted that depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, it is variable whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set. More specifically, when "jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the time saving state of normal symbols is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot A7'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A7'' is 35% (35/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "jackpot B7" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". This "jackpot B7" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the completion of the jackpot, the probability variable state of the special symbol is set. When the ``jackpot B7'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 50, while when the ``jackpot B7'' is won in the variable probability state and the probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, if the "jackpot B7" is won in the normal state, it shifts to a comparatively advantageous variable probability state (50 times). On the other hand, when "jackpot B7" is won in the variable probability state or the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the end of the big win becomes the most advantageous latent certainty state. Therefore, "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 45 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot B7'', so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B7'' is 45% (45/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "jackpot C7" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot C7" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the variable probability state of the special symbol is set. When the ``jackpot C7'' is won in the probability variation, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 50, while when the ``jackpot C7'' is won in the normal state and the potential probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, it is more advantageous for the player to win the ``big win C7'' than to win the ``big win B7'' in the normal state, and it is more advantageous to the player to win the ``jackpot B7'' than to win the ``jackpot C7'' in the probability variable state. Further, during the latent certainty state, the degree of advantage does not change between the case of winning the "jackpot B7" and the case of winning the "jackpot C7".

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot C7'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C11'' is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rate of shifting to the most advantageous game state (potential state) is different according to the game state when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and the potential state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 20% during the normal state, 45% during the variable probability state, and 65% during the potential state. By constructing in this way, when the game state shifts, for example, when a jackpot is won in a normal state and a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, an advantageous state can be provided in which the state is more likely to shift to the latent state than in the normal state, so that the player who has not been set in the latent state can be motivated to continue the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot D7" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This ``jackpot D7'' is a jackpot type in which the same content as the above-mentioned ``jackpot A7'' is specified, the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is finished, it is a type of jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot) set to a normal state with special symbols. It should be noted that depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, it is variable whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set. More specifically, when "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the time saving state of normal symbols is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "jackpot D7" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot D7'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot D7'' is 35% (35/100). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery is easily executed when the game state (potential state) most advantageous to the player is set, this "jackpot D7" serves as an end trigger for ending the game state (potential state) most advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "jackpot E7" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". This "jackpot E7" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the completion of the jackpot, the variable probability state of the special symbol is set. When the ``jackpot E7'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 when the ``jackpot E7'' is won in the variable probability state and the latent probability state.

That is, if the "jackpot E7" is won in the normal state, the game shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (100 times). On the other hand, when "jackpot E7" is won in the variable probability state or the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the end of the big win becomes the most advantageous latent certainty state. Therefore, "jackpot E7" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 65 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E7'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E7'' is 65% (65/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is mainly executed in the most advantageous game state (latency state) for the player, the probability state is looped at a rate of 65%, and the probability state is ended (normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, the player will execute the game hoping not to win the 'big win E7' while winning prize balls by the small win game executed with a high probability (59/60) in the state that the latent certainty state is set.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. This variation pattern selection table 202fe, like the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, is a data table for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1. In the seventh embodiment, as the variation pattern selection table 202fe, the content of the data table referred to when the game state is the normal state is partially changed from the first embodiment described above.

First, the contents of the normal 7-table 202fe1, which is referred to when the game state is the normal state, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal 7-table 202fe1. This normal 7 table 202fe1 is greatly different from the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above in that a variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) are defined as symbol types.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery wins, normal variation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds)) is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99”, super variation (15000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) is associated with the range of “100 to 179”, and special variation (20000 milliseconds (20000 milliseconds) is associated with the range of “100 to 179”. 20 seconds)) are associated.

In FIG. 170, the length of the variation time defined for each variation pattern is shown in units of milliseconds (units of 1/1000 seconds), but for convenience of explanation, the length of the variation time will be explained using seconds in the following description.

As the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern of short variation (1 second) out of the range of "0 to 180", out of the range of "181 to 197" is associated with middle variation (10 seconds), and out of the range of "197, 198" is associated with super variation (15 seconds).

On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, regardless of the lottery result, the long variation (hitting long variation, losing long variation) (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1.

In the present embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the total value of the reserved storage numbers of all the special symbols. In this embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have the reserved memory function, substantially, the first special symbol variation pattern and the second special symbol variation pattern are selected based on the retained storage number (reserved ball number) of the first special symbol. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 of FIG. 139) is executed after the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation pattern is not selected in a state where the number of special figure reserved balls is four. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(a), the contents of the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probability variation state will be described. FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variant 7 table 202fe2. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the right electric accessory 164 wins the ball by the right-handed game, and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. Then, for the first special symbol variation during the probability variation state, the variation pattern having the same content as the above-described normal 7 table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern is defined in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1 is set. Other elements are the same as those of the normal 7-table 202fe1 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is opened with a high probability in the variable probability state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the ball hardly enters the right second ball entrance 645. - 特許庁That is, it is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the second right ball entrance 645 when executing a right-handed game in the variable probability state than when executing a right-handed game in the normal state. Further, when the normal state is set, the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game is the appropriate game method, and when the variable probability state is set, the game of the right-handed game where the ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164 is configured to be the proper game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, when a right-handed game is executed in a normal state, a ball can be easily entered into the right second ball entrance 645. Therefore, by setting a variation pattern in which a long-time variation time (10 minutes) is defined as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed in the normal state, the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, and the act of executing the second special symbol lottery is suppressed.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game, which is the appropriate game method, is executed in the variable probability state, most of the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the right electric accessory 164 as described above with reference to FIGS. There is a case to ball.

In the present embodiment, when a proper game method is executed in this way, when the ball flows down with unpredictable behavior and enters the right second ball entrance 645, i.e., when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the variable probability state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, a shorter variation time (60 seconds) is set than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, when a specific small win (small win C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed during the probability variable state, the variable probability state can be shifted to the latent probability state.

As a result, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be made to pay attention to the behavior of the ball flowing down the right side area and eagerly play the game while expecting the execution of the second special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(b), the contents of the 7 table 202fe3 for latent probability referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the 7-table for confirmation 202fe3. In this embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the latent state is set, a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 645 by a right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. By executing a long variation (10 minutes) for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state, the reserved memory number (special figure 1 reserved ball number) of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the latent definite state is configured to be the upper limit number. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the latent definite state is made different according to the reserved memory number (special figure 1 reserved ball number) of the special symbol (first special symbol).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), as the variation pattern determined corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (hit ultra-long variation, lose ultra-long variation) is associated. That is, the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state is always configured to have a variation time of 600 seconds.

On the other hand, as a variation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery wins (big hit), when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "0 to 3", the long fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198", and when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "4", the fluctuation type counter CS1. are associated.

In addition, as the variation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery is lost (including small hits A and C), when the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved) is "1, 2", the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the whole range "0 to 198" Short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated, and when the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved) is "0, 3, 4", it is out of the whole range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198". Variation (10 seconds) is associated.

Furthermore, as a variation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit B, when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "0, 1, 2", a small hit middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number) is "3, 4", a small hit short fluctuation (0.5) to the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. seconds) are associated.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol variation executed during the latent certainty state, as the variation pattern set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a short variation of 0.5 seconds and a long variation of 10 seconds are set. When winning the small hits A and B set at about 95% of the time when the small hit is won, if the special figure pending number is a specific number (1, 2), the game in which the short variation (0.5 seconds) is set. (Super RUSH game) is executed, and if it is other than the specific number (0, 3, 4), a game (RUSH game) in which a long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

By configuring in this way, the number of small winning games per unit time can be changed according to the number of reserved special figures (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) in the latent sure state, and as a result, the amount of privilege (the number of prize balls) that the player can acquire in the unit time can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who is executing the RUSH game during the latent certainty state to aim at the super RUSH game which is more advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if you win a small hit B, that is, if you win a small hit type in which the process of discarding (forcibly stopping) the first special symbol variation in progress is executed, a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set when the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is greater than a specific number (1, 2) (3, 4), and a long variation (10 seconds) when the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is less than or equal to a specific number (1, 2) (0, 1, 2). is configured to be set. That is, when winning a small prize capable of reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) is larger than a specific number, a shorter variation time is determined than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved balls) is smaller than the specific number.

By constructing in this way, the first special pattern variation being executed can be quickly discarded when the small win B is won in a state where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) is larger than the specific number, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) can be easily set to the specific number. On the other hand, when the small win B is won with the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) less than the specific number, a long period of fluctuation is set as the small prize variation, so that the period required to discard the first special pattern variation being executed can be lengthened, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) can be suppressed from decreasing below the specific number.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of special figure reserved balls is the lower limit value of "0", it is easier to set a long-time variation (variation of 10 seconds) as the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation than when the number of special figure retained balls is other than the lower limit value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the number of special figure reserved balls is the lower limit value "0", long time fluctuation (10 second fluctuation) is set even if any small hit is won.

In this way, by imposing a penalty that a long-time variation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls is ``0'', which is the lower limit value, it is possible to suppress the action of interrupting the game until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of special figure reservations) becomes ``0'' after the latent definite state is set, specifically, interrupting the game until the first special symbol variation in the latent definite state in which the variation time of 10 minutes is set is executed four times, and then executing the game in the latent definite state.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the degree of advantage in the latent definite state is divided into two stages according to the number of special figures reserved, but is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage in the latent definite state may be divided into three or more stages according to the number of special figures reserved. In this case, for example, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of special figure pending balls is "0" which is the lower limit value, it is possible to set a longer variation time (for example, 30 seconds) than the above-mentioned long time variation (variation of 10 seconds). A variable time (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the other (for example, 2) special figure reservation number can be set, and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player may be executed.

In addition, different variation pattern tables are referred to when the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the probability state is set via the variable probability state. An advantageous game (a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) that is advantageous to the player during the latent definite state may be easily executed rather than the latent definite state is set by the establishment of the establishment of the latent definite state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state, the special symbol variation pattern is selected (determined) with the same stipulated content, but is not limited to this. Different variation patterns are defined for the 7 table 202fe3 according to the number of special symbol variations (number of times obtained by summing the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation) after the latent definite state is set, and it is preferable to make it easier to execute an advantageous game (a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player in the second period than in the first period. By constructing in this manner, novel game characteristics can be provided in which the longer the latent definite state continues for a long time, that is, the longer the period during which the big win is not won during the latent definite state (so-called addictive period), the more advantageous the player can be.

Further, when the definite variable state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and based on the fact that the small win C is won, the advantageous game most advantageous to the player (the game in which the short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) may be executed when the state shifts to the latent state without executing the special symbol variation of the specified number of times (50 times). In this case, for example, the variation pattern data to be referred to during the probability variation state should be defined so as to correspond to the period until the special symbol variation is executed a specified number of times (50 times), and the special variation pattern data to be referred to when shifting to the latent probability state within the specified number of times may be defined corresponding to the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 to be referred to when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 in which the variation pattern data is defined for the range of the specified number of times (50 times) of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation to be executed during the probability variation state within the specified number of times and the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation to be executed during the latent probability state may be defined in advance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the execution of the second special symbol variation (lottery) during the variable probability state. In this case, after the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number of times (50 times), the variation pattern may be set by referring to the 7 table 202fe3 for latent probability shown in FIG. 171(b). The data may be continuously settable.

170 and 171, the variation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to each game state has been described, but it is not limited to the example described in this embodiment, and the variation time of each variation pattern set based on the set game state, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the success/failure determination result may be defined so as not to deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment (a range that does not deviate from the technical idea relative to other variation patterns). In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, an example in which a specific variation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions is shown, but under each specific condition, a different variation pattern (variation time) may be selected according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In this case, the average value calculated based on the variation time of each variation pattern that can be latent may be specified so as not to deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment. It may be configured to set a time (for example, 1 second).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to rarely provide a game with unexpectedness to the player without changing the flow of the main game executed during the latent certainty state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In the above example, the variation pattern selected in the latent state is taken as an example, but based on the same technical idea, the same technical idea may be applied to the variation pattern selected when another game state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172(a), the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described. This small winning type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table referred to when selecting a small winning type after winning a small winning in a special symbol lottery, and is defined to select three types of small winning types of 'small winning A7', 'small winning B7' and 'small winning C7' corresponding to the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5.

When a small prize is won in a special pattern lottery, the content of small prize operation, pattern fixing time (a period required for fixing the stop display of the special pattern), and processing contents for the special pattern variation during execution can be changed according to the selected small prize type. In this embodiment, as described using the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 168 (c)), it is configured so that the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the main controller 110, when it is determined that the small hit is won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

When the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff are specifically described, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with the “small hit A” in the range of “0 to 74”, the “small hit B7” is associated with the range of “75 to 79”, and the “small hit C” is associated with the range of “80 to 99”. Since the range of possible values of the small win type counter C5 is 100 of ``0 to 99'', the ratio of selecting the ``small prize A'' when winning the small prize is 75% (75/100), the ratio of selecting the ``small prize B'' is 5% (5/100), and the ratio of selecting the ``small prize C'' is 20% (20/100).

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.2 seconds" is selected as the special symbol determination time, and the process of interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the processing for interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed, the processing for interrupting the processing for measuring the fluctuation time lapse of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. Specifically, when the small winning game is executed, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, and while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to ON, the process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed. Then, with the end of the small winning game, the restart condition is established (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is restarted. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed from being reduced while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is established), so that, for example, the first special symbol variation that has been won is stopped and displayed and the overlapping winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is prohibited to be executed while the small winning game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the variation time lapse of the special symbol variation being executed is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol variation performed before the small win game can be resumed after the resuming condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied with the fact that the small winning is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed is executed. In other words, even when the interruption condition is met, the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the update process is executed until the preset fluctuation time elapses, it is determined whether or not the interruption condition is established, and when it is judged that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special symbol fluctuation is not executed until the restart condition is established. Since this eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, the processing load can be reduced.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in a state in which the interruption condition is established and the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, that is, in a state in which the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is skipped, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the interruption effect in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol fluctuation (first special symbol fluctuation) is interrupted, the notification display for informing the player that the first special symbol fluctuation is being interrupted as the current gaming situation, and the elapse of a predetermined period of time. A guide display for showing that the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted later (after the end of the small winning game) can be displayed. Thereby, when the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to inform the player of the fact in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as the above-mentioned interrupting effect, for example, it is preferable to configure so that different interrupting effects can be executed according to the effect mode of the variable display effect (variable display effect using the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When the third pattern fluctuates at a high speed, it is configured to execute, as an interruption performance, a performance of continuing the high-speed fluctuation of the third pattern until the restart condition is satisfied, and when the third pattern fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, i.e., when the third pattern fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the varying third pattern, it is preferable to execute a performance of continuing the low-speed fluctuation of the third pattern until the restart condition is satisfied as the interruption performance. In this way, by varying the variable performance mode (interruption performance mode) during the period when the suspension condition is established according to the variation performance mode of the third pattern at the time when the suspension condition is established, the interruption performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, when the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, for example, the symbols other than one of the plurality of symbols are stopped in combination indicating the winning of the jackpot (combination of symbols indicating the same number), and the remaining one symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the winning of the big win (whether all the symbols stop with the same number). An interrupting performance for continuing the variable display may be executed, or one pattern during the variable display may be stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, ``temporary rest!!'') indicating that the interrupting condition is established, and the ready-to-win performance may be terminated. After the resuming condition is established, the characters ``Break is over!!'' may be displayed, and the result of the ready-to-win performance executed before the interruption may be stopped and displayed without executing the ready-to-win performance. As a result, various performances can be executed according to the timing when the interruption condition is established, so that the performance executed based on the establishment of the interruption condition can be diversified, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 172(a), the description is continued. When "small win B" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 second" is selected as the special symbol determination time, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the processing for discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed and the remaining variation time, the processing for stopping and displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the result is out is executed. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the value of a special figure 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is cleared to 0, and a forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is set. Further, when the first special pattern variation targeted for forced stop has won the jackpot, the information indicating the jackpot winning set at the start timing of the first special pattern variation is cleared (the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is turned off).

When the forced stop command is set and the forced stop command is received on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 (when the forced stop display condition is satisfied), the forced stop performance for switching the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed (the third symbol variation displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol variation) is executed.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, the forced stop condition is established based on the fact that the ``small win B'' is won, and the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped, and the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost and the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. In addition, according to the timing when the forced stop condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the forced stop effect for forcibly stopping and displaying the third symbol variation being executed is changed.

Specifically, when the forced stop display condition is established in a state in which the third pattern is fluctuating at a high speed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, that is, the third pattern is fluctuating at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuating third pattern. When the third pattern fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the third pattern, the forced stop display is performed by using a second period longer than the first period for the third pattern fluctuation display during low speed fluctuation as a forced stop presentation.

In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third pattern, it is difficult for the player to identify the third pattern that is being variably displayed. Therefore, even if the third pattern is suddenly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a detachment, the player will not feel uncomfortable. If the forced stop performance is suddenly executed in this state, the player feels a sense of incongruity that the performance mode of the third pattern variation being executed is suddenly switched. In addition, since the forced stop performance is to stop and display the third pattern in a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is finally lost, the third pattern is displayed off after the performance mode of the third pattern variation being executed is suddenly switched, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, when the third pattern on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 fluctuates at a low speed, i.e., when the third pattern fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the third pattern during the fluctuation, as a forced stop effect, a forced stop display is executed using a second period longer than the above-described first period for the third pattern fluctuating display during the low speed fluctuation, and the forced stop display is executed during the second period according to the contents of the third pattern fluctuating display being executed. It is configured so as to set the mode and finally perform the out-of-order display. Therefore, the forced stop performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable by varying the performance mode and the performance period from when the forced stop condition is satisfied until the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the variable performance mode of the third pattern at the time when the forced stop condition is established.

When "small win C" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the above-described "small win A". Furthermore, when the "small win C" is selected in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the normal design, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state is executed. That is, the "small win C" is set as a time-saving end condition for shifting the high-probability state of normal symbols to the low-probability state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed is varied according to the small winning type selected when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which small win type is selected when the small win is won. Furthermore, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be varied according to the content of the processing (interruption, abandonment) executed for the first special symbol variation.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery wins the small hit, it is configured to vary the special symbol fixation time according to the selected small hit type. As a result, the period from when the special symbol for indicating the winning of the small prize is stop-displayed to when the small prize game is executed can be varied according to the selected small prize type. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which a ball is shot by predicting the timing at which a small winning game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the small winning game is configured to be executed with the same opening contents regardless of which small winning type is selected, but without being limited to this, for example, depending on the selected small winning type, the type of attacker to be opened in the small winning game may be changed, or the opening operation content (opening time, opening number of times) may be changed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 172 (b), the contents of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg are explained. FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery, and each data is defined so that different variation patterns (variation time) are selected according to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 and the set game state.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, each variation pattern (long variation) in which the variation time is set in the range of 10 seconds to 30 seconds with respect to the range of "0 to 198" for the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is defined. More specifically, the range of "0 to 99" is associated with a variation pattern of "10 seconds", the range of "100 to 149" is associated with a variation pattern of "20 seconds", and the range of "150 to 198" is associated with a variation pattern of "30 seconds". In this way, when the same game state is set, the variation patterns of different variation times can be selected according to the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS3, thereby making it difficult for the player to predict the stop display timing of the normal symbol variation, and furthermore, the timing at which the normal symbol variation is stop-displayed in the display mode indicating the normal symbol winning and the normal symbol winning game is executed.

Further, during the probability variation state, the value of the obtained second variation type counter CS3 is associated with the variation pattern (short variation) of "0.8 seconds" for the entire range of "0 to 198". By constructing in this way, the ball passing through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal pattern lottery, can be entered into the right electric accessory 164 with high probability in the right hitting game executed during the variable probability state.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set, the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is associated with the variation pattern of “0.1 seconds” in the range of “0 to 169”, and the variation pattern of “10 seconds” in the range of “170 to 198”. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 in the latent probability state than in the probability variable state, and to allow the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 moderately in the latent probability state.

Next, contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment described above in that a variable probability flag 203fa for storing the high probability state of the special symbol is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those in the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, for example, the types and numbers of information that can be stored in the game state storage area 203g are different, but the role of the game state storage area 203g and the processing contents for updating the stored information are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variable probability flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the game state has changed to the variable probability state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the variable probability state is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the end condition of the variable probability state is met.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the fluctuation number counter 223fc, the preparation state flag 223fd, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, the super RUSH flag 223fi are added. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb differ from the above-described special figure fluctuation start flag 223d and stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. Therefore, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether the flag is set to ON and the process of determining the setting status of the flag are executed based on the first special symbol variation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb determine whether the flag is set to ON in the process executed based on the second special symbol variation. and a process of determining the setting status of the flag is executed. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation number counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbol variation, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The in-ready state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in a ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in a ready state (see FIG. 162(a)), and if it is off, it means that it is not in a ready state. In the latent state, the preparation state in-progress flag 223fd is referred to determine whether or not the preparation state has already ended (the display is switched to the display during RUSH), and it is determined whether to execute the presentation of the ready state or the presentation of the RUSH state.

The RUSH in-progress flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not the RUSH game is in progress (renso mode). If it is on, it means that the RUSH game is in progress (renso mode), and if it is off, it means that the RUSH game is not in progress (renso mode). During the latent state, the ready state flag 223fd and the RUSH state flag 223fg are referred to, and it is determined for which state the effect mode is to be set.

The ceiling performance execution flag 223fh is a flag indicating whether or not the performance of the performance mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (top reaching performance), which is executed when the number of times of probability variation or the number of times of time reduction remains 1, is being executed. If the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 161(b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the peak reaching effect is not being executed. When the pattern stop timing is reached while the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON, the mode is shifted to the continuous villa mode and a preparation state is established. In the present embodiment, even if the number of times of probability variation (number of time reductions) remaining in the probability variation state is not 1, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C), the time reduction end condition is established, and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON. In this case, the performance mode is gradually changed according to the subtraction state of the number of probability variations, and the top-reaching performance is executed abruptly compared to the case where the top-reaching performance is executed. As a result, the performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 can be executed without a sense of incongruity, and the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the top has been reached (the latent certainty state is set) earlier than planned.

The flag 223fi during the super RUSH is a flag for indicating that the number of special figure reserved balls becomes a specific number while the RUSH game is being executed and that the RUSH game advantageous to the player is being executed. The super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed by setting the in-super RUSH flag 223fi to ON.

<Regarding main control processing in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182, the contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (special figure 2 lottery) are redundantly configured to be executable, and compared to the above-described fourth embodiment, the function of temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol (holding storage function) is deleted, and the high probability state of the special symbol can be set. This machine is different in that, when a small hit is won in a special figure 2 lottery, the types of set small hit types are increased and the processing executed for the first special pattern variation (special figure 1 variation) being executed is varied according to the set small hit type, and the game state is shifted when the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (the high probability state of the normal pattern is shifted to the low probability state). Also, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the difference is that the contents defined in various data tables referred to in the control process executed by main controller 110 are different. Other than that, it is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described. This first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (see S258 in FIG. 124) in the above-described fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a deviation variation, time saving update processing (see S862 in FIG. 124) is performed. When it is determined that the short update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), that is, among the processes executed when the first special symbol fluctuation to be stopped this time is a jackpot fluctuation, various flags and various counters are cleared based on the stop of the jackpot fluctuation (start of the jackpot game) (S860 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the process (S870 in FIG. 175) with a added is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). This time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) differs from the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the game state set in the case where it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (S2104 in FIG. 125: Yes) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, as the game state, three types of game states can be set: the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), the probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), and the potential state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state). Then, when the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. From the state in which the variable probability mode is set to the state in which the probability mode (RUSH game) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). In the seventh embodiment, since it is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that it does not have a function of holding and storing the second special symbol, the content of the information to be referred to when starting the variation of the second special symbol (determining whether the start condition for starting the second special symbol variation is satisfied) is changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol variation start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to OFF (S952), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the processing of S951 (S951: Yes), then the ball is the second ball entrance (right second ball entrance 645) It is determined whether it entered (S974). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have a reservation storage function (because it does not have a second special symbol reserved ball number counter and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area), it is determined whether the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 and has acquired the execution right of the second special symbol lottery in the state where the second special symbol variation start process 7 (S280) is executed.

Although detailed description is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the right second ball entrance 645, the length of the period during which the second special symbol variation start process 7 (S280) is executed multiple times in the control processing of the main controller 110, and the detection signal is output for a period shorter than the shortest variation time set for the second special symbol variation. It is configured so as not to miss a detection signal indicating that the ball has entered the ball opening 645 . Here, in the process of S974, when the winning of the ball is detected once, the process for starting the second special symbol variation is executed, and the second special symbol variation is performed in a predetermined variation time. Therefore, even if the detection signal is output for the length of the period during which the second special symbol variation start processing 7 (S280) is executed multiple times in the control processing of the main controller 110, it is possible to suppress the second special symbol variation from being performed multiple times based on the output of the detection signal once. In addition, not limited to this, when the processing for starting the second special symbol variation is executed based on the reception of the detection signal, the processing of setting a flag so that the currently output detection signal becomes invalid may be added. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably suppress the execution of the second special symbol variation a plurality of times based on the output of one detection signal.

In the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance (the right second ball entrance 645) (S974: Yes), then the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed (S978), and then the processes of S959 to S963, which are the same as the above-described second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), are executed, and this process ends. Also, in the processing of S974, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (second right ball entrance 645) (S974: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). This second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) differs from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the jackpot determination corresponding to the set probability state of the special symbol is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, the same S1051 and S1052 processes as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) are performed, and when it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON in the process of S1052 (S1052: Yes), S10 53 to S1056 are executed, and the process proceeds to S1071. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is not set to ON in the process of S1052 (S1052: No), the process proceeds to S1071 as it is.

In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S1071), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S1071: Yes), the first per random number table (first per random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)) Refer to the data defined in the high probability state. Acquire the lottery result (win/fail judgment result). On the other hand, in the process of S1071, the probability variation flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1071: No), the first winning random number table (1st winning random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)) is referred to the data defined in the low probability state to obtain the lottery result (property determination result).

Then, after obtaining the lottery result in the process of S1073 or the process of S1072, the process of S1058 to S1062, which is the same as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127), is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) will be described. This special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277), as shown in Figure 179, with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in Figure 130), when selecting the variation pattern, it is different in that the processing content for selecting (determining) the small winning type for the small winning winning this time is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same S1371 process as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the same S1 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130). The processing of 377 to S1379 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small hit in the process of S1371 (S1371: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, the small hit type is selected by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same S1374 to S1376 processing as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, the process of selecting the small hit type is executed in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, but without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit in the process of determining the lottery result of the second special symbol (second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178))), the process of selecting the small hit type may be performed together, and a different small hit determination value is defined for each small hit type. , It may be configured so that the small hit type is determined in correspondence with the small hit determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1) used when it is determined that the small hit is won. As a result, the number of types of counters can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283) will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (S283). This second special symbol variation stop process 7 (S283) is a process that is executed when the variation time of the second special symbol variation has passed and the second special symbol variation that is in process of variation is stopped. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283) is performed, first, the same S1551 to S1559 processing as the above-described second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is performed, then the special figure 2 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the big hit flags 203i), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end waiting flag 20 3dm, the variable probability flag 203fa is set to OFF, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

In other words, when one special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning of a jackpot, the lottery result and remaining variation time for the other special symbol variation being executed are completely discarded and then stopped and displayed, and the set information on the game state (probability variation flag 203fa, time reduction counter 203h, time reduction end waiting flag 203dm) are all reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire a privilege (prize ball) other than the privilege (prize ball) obtained by winning the ball in the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game, and to suppress the situation in which the player is given the privilege excessively.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous variation specification, the special pattern variation executed before the big winning game is not restarted after the end of the big winning game, and the number of times of time saving is not subtracted by the information based on the special symbol variation executed before the big winning game, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. When the processing of S1580 is finished, then the same processing of S1561 to S1563 as the above-described second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is executed, and this processing is finished.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of special figure 2 deviating stop processing 7 (S1584). This special figure 2 out stop processing 7 (S1584) is different from the above-described special figure 2 out stop processing (see S1564 in FIG. 133) in that when it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651: Yes), the small win process (S1671) is executed. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted. Here, the contents of the small hit process (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 out stop process 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process (S1671). This small winning process (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol winning the small winning is stopped and displayed, and the process (interrupting process, forced stop (discard) process) corresponding to the selected small winning type is executed for the first special symbol variation being executed.

When the small hit process (S1671) is executed, first, the small hit type (the small hit type selected in the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)) set for the second special symbol fluctuation of this time is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit A" (S1683). If it is determined that it is a "small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 1 is changing (during the first special symbol variation) (S1684), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating the ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set. (S1686), this processing ends. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (S1684: No), skip the processes of S1685 and S1686 and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1683, if it is determined that it is not "small hit A" (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit C" (S1687), and if it is determined to be "small hit C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current is in a probability variable state (normal pattern high probability state) ( S1688). If it is determined that the current is in the variable probability state (S1688: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol variation that won the "small hit B" in the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state is the processing target of this time, Next, it is determined whether the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203dm is not ON (S1689: No), When it is determined that it is not the final variation of the probability variation state, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690), and the process proceeds to S1684 described above. Also, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 in the process of S1688, i.e., if it is determined that the present is not in the variable probability state (S1688: No), or if the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON in the process of S1689, that is, if it is determined that it is the final variation of the variable probability state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped, and the above-described S1684 is skipped. Go to processing.

In other words, when a ``small hit C'' is won in the variable probability state, the time reduction end waiting flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not reduced to 0, so that the game state can be shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state before the special pattern variation (lottery) in the variable probability state is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the "small hit C" election is set as an end condition for ending the variable probability state (high probability state of normal symbols). In this embodiment, since the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player than the probability variable state, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state is small, that is, the state where the probability of transitioning to the normal state without shifting to the latent probability state is low. The end condition is the end condition that is more advantageous to the player. When the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (in the case of a low-probability state of a normal pattern), that is, in the case of a normal state or a latent probability state, processing for ending the time-saving state is not executed, so the same processing is executed in the case of winning the "small winning C" and winning the "small winning A".

In the process of S1687, if it is determined that it is not "small hit C", that is, if it is determined that the read small hit type is "small hit B" (S1687: No), it is determined whether the current special figure 1 is fluctuating (S1691), and if it is determined that special figure 1 is fluctuating (S1691: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S 1692), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S1693), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag (flag corresponding to the first special symbol out of the big hit flag 203i) is set to ON, that is, whether the first special symbol variation being executed is the big hit variation (S1695), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol out of the big hit flag 203i) is set to on (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag (jackpot flag 20) The flag corresponding to the first special symbol among 3i) is set to OFF (S1696), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1697), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that there is no special figure 1 fluctuation (S1691: No), this process is terminated as it is. In addition, in the processing of S1695, the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the big hit flags 203i) is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation being executed is a deviation variation (S1695: No), the processing of S1696 and S1697 is skipped and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 192, control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of command determination processing 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and performs processes corresponding to various commands received from the main controller 110, similar to the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above.

When command determination processing 7 (S4192) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a status command has been received (S4231). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), status command reception processing is performed (S4232), and this processing ends. This received command process (S4232) executes the same process as the received command process (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the above-described command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Although detailed explanation is omitted, a state command indicating the current game state is received, a mode performance mode corresponding to the game state is set, and a display command for displaying the corresponding performance mode (for example, back image) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set. For example, when a state command indicating a variable probability state is received, a display command corresponding to the production mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. The details of the switching control of the effect mode during the latent certainty state will be described later.

In command determination processing 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not a status command has been received is different from that in the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether the state command has been received prior to determining whether the special figure variation pattern command has been received. By configuring in this way, after determining the current gaming state, it is possible to reliably execute the processing based on the special figure variation pattern command. Various command determinations may be executed in the same order as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) without being limited to this.

If it is determined that the state command has not been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: No), then it is determined whether the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203), and if it is determined that it is received (S4203: Yes), the variation start flag (special figure variation start flag 223d, special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command is set to ON (S4233), from the received command A variation pattern command is extracted (S4234). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special figure stop type command is received (S4205), and if it is determined that it is received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command is set to ON (S4235), The stop type is extracted from the received command (S4236). Then, the process ends.

If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), the same S4208 to S4214 processing as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) is performed, and in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop related command has been received, the stop related processing 7 is performed (S4236), and this processing ends. The detailed content of this stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the same processing of S4216 to S4218 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61) is executed, and in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the stop-related command has been received, the winning-related processing 7 is executed (S4237), and this processing ends. Although the detailed description of this winning related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, the above-mentioned winning related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67) is executed based on the reception of the small winning related command instead of the winning related command. The small prize related commands include at least a small prize start command indicating the start of the small prize game, a round command indicating the start of the round game opened by the winning device to be operated during the small prize game, and an ending command indicating the end of the small prize game, similarly to the above-described accessory prize related command, and a process of setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. As a result, the effect mode corresponding to the small winning game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

Then, in the process of S4218, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4220: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of stop-related processing 7 (S4236) executed in command determination processing 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop-related processing 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) is the above-described stop-related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65), when the special figure confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes), the preparation state setting process (See S4641 in FIG. 184) is added and the process for determining whether the special figure discard command is received (S4642), and when it is determined that the special figure discard command is received in the process of S4642. To (S4642: Yes), it is different in that the process (S4643) to execute the special figure discard setting process is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). This preparation state setting process (S4641) is, as described above, a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162(a)). In the preparation state setting processing (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON (S8001), and if it is determined to be OFF (S8001: No), there is no possibility of shifting to the preparation state, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S8001, when it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to OFF (S8002), and the display mode during preparation for RUSH (see FIG. 162(a)) is set (S8003). Next, the in-RUSH flag 223fg and the in-preparation flag 223fd are both set to ON (S8004), and the process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), it is possible to set the display mode of the preparation state from the time of shifting to the consecutive villa mode (RUSH game).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the latent state is configured as an advantageous game state (continuous game mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbols is easily executed and small winning games are frequently performed, and the normal state is configured as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the number of times of probability variation (50 times) in the probability variation state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to shift directly from the probability variable state to the most advantageous game state without going through the jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the probability variation state, it is possible to play a game with the elapse of the probability variation number of times as one goal.

Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which the probability state is set to the most advantageous game state, and the probability state can be set after winning a jackpot. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the latent state is not set unless a big win is won, a disadvantageous state is formed in which the number of balls in possession is likely to decrease while staying in the normal state (that is, until the big win is won).

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the probability variable number of times in the probability variable state that is more disadvantageous than the latent probability state, the game is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous continuous mode (latent probability state) without going through the jackpot winning. In other words, even if the player does not win the jackpot, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently by simply continuing the right-handed game. By constructing in this way, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment when the probability variable number of times can be ended, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit C) in a state where the variable probability state is set, the mode is shifted to the most advantageous continuous mode (latent probability state) without elapsing the number of probability variable times. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for the lottery result other than the jackpot win during the variable probability state.

In addition, the lottery result (small win C) described above is configured so that it can be won only in the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) that is difficult to be executed during the variable probability state. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the right-handed game in the variable probability state enters the right second ball entrance 645 with irregular behavior and the second special pattern lottery is executed, the player can have expectations.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol is not stored in the reserved memory, the small win C cannot be won unless the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 645 during the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the behavior of the ball in the variable probability state. In addition, only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be adopted, for example, a second special symbol holding storage function may be provided, for example, the second special symbol lottery based on the holding storage of the second special symbol acquired during the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set may be executed during the probability change state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation a plurality of times immediately after the probability variation state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period in which the second special symbol variation is executed, for example, as a preliminary stage of the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG.

As a result, immediately after the variable probability state is set, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the period during which the state is likely to shift to the latent probability state is set. Furthermore, in this case, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the variable probability state, when the number of times of special symbol variation executed after the variable probability state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), the short variation (variation time is 5 seconds) should be easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is frequently opened during the variable probability state, so that the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to enter the right second ball entrance 645. For example, it is configured to select a variation pattern with a long period of time (for example, 10 seconds) with a small probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, so that the ball can temporarily enter the right second ball entrance 645 easily. It may be configured to be able to form a state. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery during the variable probability state. Therefore, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes the specific lottery result (small hit C), the chance of shifting to the latent probability state can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ``small hit C'' that triggers the transition from the variable probability state to the latent probability state can be won only in the second special symbol lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to report a preparation state from the transition to the continuous game mode (secret state) until the first small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and to notify that it has become an advantageous state (RUSH state) when it becomes a situation in which a prize ball can actually be obtained (that is, when the small win variation is started). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained even though the RUSH state has been notified for a long time.

In the seventh embodiment, the probability of a small win in the second special symbol lottery is set to about 1/1 (59/60), but the probability is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. For example, the small hit probability may be lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643). This special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed when a special figure discard command is received in the stop related process 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In this embodiment, by executing the right-handed game in the latent sure state, while securing the reserved ball of the first special pattern (special figure 1 reserved ball), the lottery of the second special pattern is mainly executed, and the RUSH game for frequently executing the small winning game is executed.

And, during the latent definite state, the variation time set as the first special symbol variation is likely to be long (600 seconds). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state is configured to vary according to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, specifically, the smaller the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 or 2), the shorter the variation time is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In addition, when a specific lottery result ("small win B") is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded (forcibly stopped).

That is, in the present embodiment, a game aiming at a more efficient game (a game that increases the number of small winning games executed within a unit time) is executed by reducing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by winning a specific small winning while frequently executing the small winning game in the second special symbol lottery during the latent definite state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH game executed during the latent state is a normal RUSH game, and a super RUSH game in which the number of small winning games executed within a unit time is increased than the normal RUSH game. It consists of Thus, the presence of a more advantageous state (super RUSH game) and the situation until the execution of the super RUSH game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who is executing the game in the latent certainty state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

When the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No), the present is not in the latent state (RUSH game), so the processes of S8102 to S8107 described later are skipped, and the process of S8108 is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read, and it is determined whether the current number of special figure reserved balls is 3. That is, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 and the game is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of special figure pending balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), the production mode (see FIG. 164 (b)) indicating the super RUSH rush is determined, the flag during super RUSH is set to ON (S8105), the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), the display command for showing the determined various modes is set (S8109), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the processing of S8108 will be described. In this embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel (overlapping), the timing of stopping and displaying the second special symbol variation that wins a specific small win (small win B7) in the second special symbol lottery is determined independently of the variation timing of the first special symbol variation. Therefore, it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the first special symbol variation is started, or may be forcibly stopped (discarded) at the timing immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol variation. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation mode of the third symbols (decorative symbols variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that is variably displayed corresponding to the variation of the first special symbols (decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is variable based on the lapse of the variation time, for example, immediately after the variation starts, the high-speed variation display that makes it difficult for the player to identify the third symbols is executed, and just before the end of the variation time (immediately before the variation stops), the variation speed is slowed down to the extent that the player can identify the third symbols. is common.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, if the third symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of receiving the command indicating the forced stop based on the forced stop of the first special symbol variation, there is a risk that the third symbol will be stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big win, for example, when the third symbol is displayed in a low-speed variation display.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the process of S8108, based on the remaining period of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed as the forced stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol), either the stop mode at high speed fluctuation or the stop mode at low speed fluctuation is determined. Then, it outputs to the display control device 114 by the display command set in the process of S8109. On the side of the display control device 114, the forced stop display mode of the third pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received command for display, and display control based on the determined forced stop display mode is executed.

Specifically, when a display command indicating a stop mode during high-speed fluctuation is received, image data of a display mode indicating forced stop is interrupted into image data prepared for executing high-speed fluctuation display, and display control is performed so that high-speed fluctuation display is suddenly switched to a display mode indicating forced stop. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player without delay that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped. Also, since it is difficult for the player to identify the varying third pattern during the high-speed fluctuation, even if the display mode indicating the forced stop is suddenly stopped and displayed, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the replacement of the image.

On the other hand, when a display command indicating a stop mode at low speed fluctuation is received, the image displayed (or to be) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is read out, and it is determined whether or not it is in a ready-to-win state (a state in which the third pattern can be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win). When it is determined that the present state is not in the ready-to-reach state, an image corresponding to display data in which each third pattern is displayed at a predetermined position (established line) among the display data used for the low-speed fluctuation display is determined as a forced stop image, and after the low-speed fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed, the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. In the ready-to-win state, image data is created by replacing one pattern included in the remaining third pattern row during fluctuation with a forced stop pattern indicating forced stop, variable display data for forced stop is generated so that the forced stop pattern is stop-displayed, and display control is executed based on the variable display data for forced stop.

In this way, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the process for forcibly stopping the third symbol is changed according to the variation display mode of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable even if the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped at any timing.

Also, when the above-described display control is executed, the period from when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped until the third symbol variation display is stopped and displayed differs depending on the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being performed. A pattern fixing period from the stop display of the special pattern showing the small win B winning to the fixing is specified as a prescribed period (for example, 1 second), and various kinds of forced stop display control for stop-displaying the third pattern variation can be executed within the prescribed period. Then, based on the output of a command (confirmation command) indicating that the confirmation period has passed from the main controller 110, the third symbol display mode (for example, "123") for confirming the forced stop may be displayed. By constructing in this way, when the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped, even if the period until the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped is varied according to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed, the third symbol variation display can be forcibly stopped within the determination period, and furthermore, the third symbol can be displayed in the same display mode in the display mode for forced stop determination when the determination period elapses.

Returning to FIG. 186, the description continues. In the processing of S8103, if it is determined that the number of special pending balls is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of special pending balls is 4 (S8106), and if it is determined to be 4 (S8106: Yes), a production mode aiming for the top (for example, a production mode in which the character 811 rises one step above the production screen shown in FIG. 164 (a)) is determined (S8107), The process proceeds to S8108. If it is determined in the process of S8106 that the number is not 4, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8108.

Next, referring to FIG. 187, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variation display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and generates and sets a variation pattern command for display based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). And, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5234 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5231), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5202), and then the display control device 114 is notified to the variation pattern command for display based on the acquired variation pattern type Production mode setting processing is executed (S5232), input The data in the award information storage area 223b is shifted (S5233), and the process proceeds to S5234.

In the processing of S5234, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5234). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5234: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5238 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is on (S5234: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5235), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is set to off (S5236), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 is executed (S5237). The details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing the processing of S5237, the process proceeds to S5238.

In the processing of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5238). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is not on (that is, it is off) (S5238: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is ON (S5238: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is set to OFF (S5239), and then the special figure 1 for display or the special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and then this process ends.

Next, details of the effect mode setting process (S5232) described above will be described. This production mode setting process (S5232) is, as described above, a process for setting the production mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this production mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S8201), and if it is determined that the state is not the normal state (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the variable probability state (S8202). In the processing of S8202, if it is determined that the state is not the variable probability state (S8202: No), it means that the state is the latent probability state (Rental house mode), the ceiling effect setting process is executed (S8203), the variable pattern command for display indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8202, when it is determined that it is in the variable probability state (S8202: Yes), in order to determine whether the first special symbol of this time is the final variation of the variable probability state, it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223fc is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), the ceiling effect setting process for selecting the effect mode of the last variable display effect before shifting to the RUSH game is executed (S8206), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the processing of S8204, if it is determined that the number of times of remaining time reduction is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (continuous mode), so the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the processing of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the normal mode effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8207), and the process proceeds to S8208.

Next, details of the above-described ceiling effect setting process (S8202, S8206) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, out of the winning information storage area 223b, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read (S8301), and it is determined whether the data of the read execution area is data corresponding to the jackpot (S8302). When it is determined that it is a hit variation, the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (the production mode for notifying the jackpot is determined (S8303), and this processing ends. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the latent state. A performance mode of displaying a display mode indicating the winning of a jackpot while climbing is determined.By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the jackpot game despite the execution of the performance of reaching the top, and then the setting of a game state other than the latent state.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is a jackpot winning in the process of S8302, the top reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not to execute the peak reaching performance in the final variation of the variable probability state, but without being limited to this, when winning a jackpot for which the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends in the variable probability state (during the jackpot variation), after executing the peak reaching performance, further, the performance of displaying the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot at the top may be executed. As a result, the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable probability state (the performance in which the character 811 aims at the top) can be varied based on the remaining period of the variable probability state and the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, and when the performance for reaching the top is executed, the latent probability state can be surely set, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating the big win (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 169(b)) is determined (S8304), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON (S8305), and this process ends.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), it is possible to appropriately set whether or not to execute the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 169 (b)) according to the result of the first special symbol lottery result at the time of transition to the latent state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 190, details of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) will be described. This special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. When this special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223fg during RUSH is ON (S8401), and when it is determined that the flag 223fg during RUSH is OFF (S8401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, then it is determined whether the probability variable state is set (S8402) .

In the processing of S8402, if it is determined that the variable probability state is not set, that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8402: No), the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8403), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the variable probability state (S8402: Yes), during the variable probability setting processing (S8404) for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol variation during the variable probability state, the processing ends. The detailed content of this variable probability setting process (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S8401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), then it is determined whether the preparation state flag 223fd is on (S8405), and if it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is off (S8405: No), it means that the RUSH game is in progress (the preparation state is finished), so the potential state ( RUSH game) for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol variation during RUSH setting processing (S8410) is executed, and this processing ends. The detailed content of this setting processing during RUSH (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S8405, when it is determined that the flag 223fd in the preparation state is on (that is, in the preparation state) (S8405: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the variation type of the small hit is notified by the variation pattern command (S8406), and when it is determined that the variation type of the small hit is notified (S8406: Yes), the flag 223fd in the preparation state is set to OFF (S8407), As the effect mode of the current variable display effect, the effect mode of the RUSH rush effect (see FIG. 162(b)) for notifying the RUSH rush is determined (S8408), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the processing contents of the during probability variation setting processing (S8404) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable probability setting process (S8404). This variable probability setting processing (S8404) is for setting the performance mode when the second special symbol variation is executed during the variable probability state, and the processing for setting the performance mode (shortcut performance mode) when the latent probability state is set without winning the small win C during the variable probability state and the number of times of variable probability (50 times) does not elapse is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed in the variable probability state, most of the balls flowing down the right-side region win the right electric accessory 164, and the first special symbol variation is executed. However, when the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other and behave irregularly, the ball may rarely enter the right second ball entrance 645 and the second special symbol lottery may be executed. When a small win C is won by a second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the variable probability state can be shifted to the latent probability state without executing the special symbol variation for the number of times of probability variation (50 times), which is the termination condition of the variable probability state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the variable probability state, a special performance is executed to indicate to the player that a chance to shift to the probability state has arrived.

When the probability variation setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol variation of this time is a variation that is winning the small hit C (S8501). If it is determined to be a small hit C (S8501: Yes), then read the value of the variation number counter 223fc (S8502), and based on the value of the variation number counter 223fc read in the process of S8502. A presentation mode is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8503, if it is determined that the probability variation calculation number is not 5 times or less (6 times or more) (S8503: No), the effect mode (for example, warp effect) indicating that the shortcut rushes into the small hit RUSH (RUSH game) is determined (S8504), and the process proceeds to S8506. In addition, in the processing of S8501, when it is determined that the small winning C is not won in this variation (S8501: No), the processing proceeds to S8506 as it is.

In the process of S8506, the effect mode (for example, the character 811 is dressed in flames from the display mode shown in FIG. 161(a) from the display mode shown in FIG. 161(a) (the display mode of the character 811 is changed) and the character 811 climbs up the mountain vigorously) is determined (S8506), the display pattern commands indicating the determined various effect modes are set (S8507), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the contents of the setting process during RUSH (S8410) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the contents of the setting processing during RUSH (S8410). In this RUSH setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol variation executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S8601: Yes), then it is determined whether the current variation is a small hit B winning (S8602). When it is determined that the small hit B is won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped when the variation is stopped, so the performance mode of the end suggesting performance showing the pinch of the end of the super RUSH is set (S8603), and the performance mode for RUSH corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8604), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8602, if the small hit B is not won (S8602: No), or if it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is not set to ON in the process of S8601 (S8601: No), the process proceeds to S8604 as it is, and then the process ends.

<Regarding another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path is formed in the right area of the game board 13 so that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and the right electric accessory 164 is arranged in the flow path. 158), and the right second ball inlet 645 is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 can enter. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric role object 164 (the opening operation pattern of the normal game), the ball flowing down the right side area, and the ball flowing down the flow path (hereinafter referred to as the specific flow path) where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down. and the rate of entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 (the rate of entering the ball into the starting opening which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol lottery).

Specifically, when the probability variable state is set as the game state, the variation time of the normal symbol variation and the opening pattern of the right electric role object 164 are defined so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path win the right electric role object 164, and when the latent probability state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set so that the rate of the ball flowing down the specific flow path winning the right electric role object 164 is lower than when the probability variable state is set. , and right electric-access pattern 164 are defined. In addition, when the normal state is set, the variation time of the normal pattern variation is stipulated so as to lower the rate of winning the right electric accessory 164 than when the latent state is set. In addition, in both the potential probability state and the normal state, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the opening operation pattern (the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed in the game per normal pattern is the same.

According to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, by making the starting openings (first right ball entrance 164r, second right ball entrance 645) into which balls are likely to enter different according to the set game state, it is possible to easily change the types of special symbols for which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed by executing a right-handed game. could be improved.

However, in the above-described seventh embodiment, a special symbol type in which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed is defined for a set game state (for example, a variable probability state). Specifically, the first special symbol lottery is easily executed during the variable probability state, and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent probability state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, the special symbol types corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be mainly executed cannot be differentiated, and there is a problem that the player who has been playing the game for a long time in the same game state gets tired of the game early.

In order to solve the above-described problem, it is preferable to use each of the following configurations or a combination of each of the configurations in place of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Configuration example 1: Configuration of normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the set gaming state and the value of the second variation type counter CS3, and when the process of selecting the variation pattern is executed, the variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is selected. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the same game state is set, regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed during the game state, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 obtained from the data table defining the variation pattern of the same content. On the other hand, in this configuration example 1, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected variation time and the length of the selected variation time can be varied according to the number of special symbol variations executed in a state where a specific game state (probability variation state) is set (the number of special symbol lotteries performed after the completion of the probability variation jackpot game).

That is, with respect to the configuration of the general pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172 (b)) of the seventh embodiment described above, different variation patterns are defined corresponding to the number of special symbol variations after the game state is set. Specifically, in the range of 1 to 2 times the number of times of special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is defined, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.8 seconds is defined in the same manner as the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above.

By configuring in this way, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as a normal symbol variation from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is executed twice. Therefore, the predetermined period after the variable probability state is set (the period until the special symbol variation is executed twice) makes it easier to enter the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 than the period outside the predetermined period (the period after the special symbol variation is performed twice). As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery only for a partial period during the variable probability state. Therefore, a specific small win (small win C) is won in the second special symbol lottery only in a partial period during the variable probability state, and the variable probability state can be easily shifted to a latent probability state which is more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period (50 times of probability variable times).

In the above-described configuration example 1, the normal symbol variation pattern that can be selected so that the predetermined period after the variable probability state is set is more advantageous to the player than the period other than the predetermined period is defined. By configuring in this way, when the specific period elapses without terminating the variable probability state, it is possible to execute a game more advantageous to the player than during the specific period. Therefore, the player who has been playing for a long time can be motivated to play the game without changing the game state.

In addition, in the configuration example 1 described above, it is configured to select a different variation time (variation pattern) according to the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set, but without being limited to this, for example, regardless of the number of special symbol variations, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.8 seconds are configured to be selectable, and the probability that each variation pattern is selected is configured to be different according to the number of special symbol variations. Specifically, special after the probability variation state is set. When the number of symbol variations satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the number of special symbol variations executed after the probability variation state is set is within two times, or when the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set is an even number), a variation pattern (2-second variation pattern) advantageous to the player may be more likely to be selected than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set a period in which a game advantageous to a player is executed only by variably setting the selection ratio of each variation pattern according to the number of variations of special symbols.

In the above-described configuration example 1, there is one type of normal pattern variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the probability variable state is set, but without being limited to this, according to the jackpot type that triggers the probability variable state to be set, a normal pattern variation pattern may be selected by referring to a different data table. A variation pattern (variation time) of symbol variation can be selected. In this case, the length of the advantageous period (the period in which a game more advantageous to the player than other periods (for example, the second special symbol lottery) is more likely to be executed) and the timing of setting the advantageous period may be changed according to the type of big win. In addition, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the variable probability state is set as an advantageous period, and when a specific disadvantageous jackpot type is set, the advantageous period may not be set for the entire period of the variable probability state.

As described above, when a game that is more advantageous to the player than other periods can be executed during a part of the period in which a specific game state (probability variable state) is set, in addition to the current game state, it is preferable to execute a period suggestion effect for suggesting (informing) the player whether the present is an advantageous period (a period in which a game (for example, a second special symbol lottery) that is more advantageous to the player than other periods). For example, during the hill-climbing effect (see FIG. 161(a)) executed during the variable probability state in the above-described seventh embodiment, the character 811 resembling a rabbit is changed to a power-up display mode, and the main display area Dm displays the characters "entering the powerful zone", and the effect is executed so that the period until reaching the top can be shortened.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period. Therefore, for example, a plurality of normal pattern fluctuation pattern tables with different advantageous periods are prepared as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern tables to be referred to during the probability variable state, and even if one normal pattern fluctuation pattern table is selectable based on the jackpot type set when the probability variable jackpot is won, the advantageous period can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that the above-mentioned period-indicating performance is intended for all performances configured to be more likely to be executed during the advantageous period than outside the advantageous period, and even for performances other than directly explaining to the player that the current period is in the advantageous period, the possibility of the present being in the advantageous period becomes higher than the possibility of being outside the advantageous period at the time the performance is executed, so that it is included in the period-indicating performance. Therefore, the execution frequency of the period suggesting effect should be lower than during the advantageous period, and may be executed during a period (disadvantage period) outside the advantageous period.

In addition to the above-described period suggesting performance, that is, the performance for suggesting to the player that the current probability is likely to be in the advantageous period, the state suggesting performance suggesting that the normal pattern variation pattern table referred to in the probability variation state this time is the normal pattern variation pattern table in which the advantageous period is easily set among the plurality of normal pattern variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the probability variation state may be executed.

Further, when the probability variable state is set, when the ball enters the second right ball entrance 645, the effect mode of the notification effect for notifying that the ball has entered the second right ball entrance 645 may be configured to vary based on the determination result of whether or not the current time is the advantageous period. Since it is a ball entry, the notification performance is executed without setting the performance mode of excessively congratulating the player, and when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 in a state where the ball entrance frequency is low (during the unfavorable period), the performance mode of congratulating the player is preferably set rather than the performance mode of the notification performance that can be set when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the advantageous period. In this way, when a plurality of periods in which the easiness of entering a ball into a specific ball entrance is made different can be set, by varying the performance mode of the notification performance according to the set period, when the ball can enter the specific ball entrance during the period when it is difficult to enter the ball, the notification performance of the special performance mode can be executed.

In the configuration example 1 described above, by varying the variation time of the normal symbols according to the predetermined conditions (jackpot type, game state, number of special symbol variations, value of the variation type counter CS3), it is configured to vary the rate at which the ball flowing down the specific flow path (the flow path in which the ball that passed through the through gate 67 flows down) reaches the right second ball entrance 645. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the normal symbol variation that was won stops. The length of the period from the display to the execution of the normal pattern per game (normal pattern determination period) may be varied according to the winning normal pattern per type or the selected normal pattern variation pattern type. That is, the period from the start of the normal pattern variation to the execution of the normal pattern per game may be configured to be variable according to predetermined conditions (jackpot type, game state, number of special symbol fluctuations, value of variation type counter CS3, normal pattern lottery result, etc.).

<Configuration example 2: Configuration of opening operation of right electric accessory>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in the normal figure winning game executed during the variable probability state is shown as an example of one type. It may be configured such that the length of the period during which the second right ball entrance 645 is turned on is different. By configuring in this way, the rate at which the ball flowing down the specific flow path (the flow path in which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) reaches the right second ball entrance 645 can be varied according to the winning type of the normal game winning game executed during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, for example, as the opening operation pattern of the normal figure per game, the first open state (the state in which the ball is easy to enter the right electric accessory 164) is set for 2 seconds, the first closed state (the state in which the ball is difficult to enter the right electric accessory 164) is set for 5 seconds, and the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds. .

By configuring in this way, for example, if the ball is allowed to win the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the normal game is terminated at that time, but by executing the game so as not to allow the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the ball can be easily reached to the right second ball entrance 645 during the normal game. Also, in this case, it is preferable to be able to set an opening operation pattern in which the normal figure per game ends when the period of the first open state has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to shoot the ball during the normal game per game (perform the right-handed game).

In the above-described seventh embodiment and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path is formed in the right side area of the game board 13 so that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and the right electric role object 164 is arranged in the flow path. A flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that a ball flows down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 of 64, and a right second ball entrance 645 is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 can enter. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric role object 164 (the opening operation pattern of the normal game), the ball flowing down the right side area, and the ball flowing down the flow path (hereinafter referred to as the specific flow path) where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down. and the ratio of entering a ball into a right second ball entrance 645 (the ratio of entering a ball into a start opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol lottery) to be variable, and during the variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In other words, a lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player is executed at the starting hole provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path than the starting hole provided on the downstream side, and by varying the winning ratio of the balls to the starting hole provided on the upstream side, the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. It may be configured such that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed rather than the ball entering the starting port provided on the side.

Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, no matter what occasion the latent certainty state that is most advantageous to the player is set, specifically, when a jackpot is won in which the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or even when the latent certainty state is set after the predetermined transition condition (for example, the number of times of probability variation is 50 times) is established during the certainty variable state, the first special symbol is reserved and stored at the time when the latent certainty state is set. In order to facilitate a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of (special figure 1 reserve) is secured, the special figure 1 reserve can be obtained in a right-handed game executed during a jackpot game or a variable probability state.例文帳に追加Specifically, the first special symbol variation is executed during the probability variable state, and the first special symbol variation is not executed during the jackpot game, so that when the latent probability state is set with the chance of winning the probability jackpot, the probability state is more likely to be executed with the number of special symbols 1 reserved at the upper limit value (4) than when the probability state is set via the probability variable state.

In addition, when the latent definite state is set, a game (second special symbol lottery) with a different degree of advantage (different fluctuation time) is executed according to the number of reserved special figures 1, and a game more advantageous to the player is executed when the number of reserved special figures 1 is smaller than when the number of reserved special figures 1 is large.

In other words, when the number of times of probability variation (the number of times of special pattern variation executed during the probability variation state) reaches 50 times during the probability variation state, the number of reserved special figures 1 becomes the upper limit (4 pieces) with high probability by the right-handed game executed until the number of times of probability variation reaches 50 times. Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the small win C is won in the second special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, the variable probability state can be shifted to the latent probability state before the frequency of the variable probability reaches 50 times. Therefore, for example, when a small win C is won immediately after the variable probability state is set and the state is shifted to the latent probability state, the execution period of the right-handed game before the probability state is set is shortened compared to the case where the probability state is set based on the establishment of other transition conditions, so that the number of special figure 1 reservations at the time when the probability state is set can be easily reduced. Therefore, it is possible to set a transition condition that is more advantageous to the player than the other transition condition (the transition condition that is established when the number of times of probability variation reaches 50).

In this way, a plurality of transition conditions (big win, probability variable number of times 50 times, small win C winning) are set in advance in order to set a specific game state (for example, probability state), and the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set can be varied according to the type of the established transition condition, so that the player can be interested not only in the game state set to the player but also in the established transition condition. Furthermore, in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent probability state) in a state where the same game state (for example, a variable probability state) is set, a plurality of transition conditions (50 times of variable probability, winning a small win C) are set in advance as transition conditions that can be established without a big win, and the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set according to the type of the established transition condition is variable. A game aiming to make the player play and the game can be played in parallel. Furthermore, the preset specific transition condition (small win C win) is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the latent state is easily changed according to the timing of establishment, specifically, when the transition condition is established in a state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is small, it is configured so that an advantageous game (super RUSH) is easily executed after setting the latent state. In addition, since the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) can be established regardless of the special figure 1 reserved number, the player can always expect the specific transition condition to be established.

In the seventh embodiment described above, among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning to the latent definite state, the transition condition established by winning a small win C is configured so as to be most advantageous to the player. In this case, for example, the variable probability state is more advantageous to the player than the latent certainty state, or setting the latent certainty state with a large number of special figure 1 reserved balls is more advantageous to the player than setting the latent certainty state with a small number.

161 (a) and (b), as the effect (mountain climbing effect) executed during the variable probability state shown with reference to FIG. (For example, an effect mode in which the top is a flower garden) may be executed to inform the player that the transition condition has been established in an advantageous state. At the time when the small winning C is won (when the second special symbol variation for winning the small winning C is started) or when it is determined that the probability variation number of times reaches 50 times (the special figure 1 reservation is read ahead and it is determined that the big winning will not be won before the probability variation number of times of 50 is reached), the right-hand hitting game may be urged to be interrupted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the useless increase of the special figure 1 reservation.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, by interrupting the game until the first special symbol variation (10-minute variation) of the long-time variation is executed a plurality of times while the latent state is set, it is possible to forcibly play the game in an advantageous game state. Specifically, according to the number of reserved memories of normal symbols (the number of reserved memories of normal symbols), the selected normal pattern fluctuation pattern is configured to be different, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of normal symbols is 0 is preferably configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of normal symbols is larger than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, it may be configured to facilitate selection of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set.

By constructing in this way, when the number of normal pattern reservations is set to 0 by suspending the game for a long time in the latent sure state, the player can play the game in a disadvantageous situation in which the special figure 1 reservation is difficult to increase from 0.例文帳に追加In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be able to select a normal pattern variation pattern based on the number of reserved normal patterns and the number of reserved special patterns 1, for example, when the number of reserved patterns for normal patterns is 0 and the number of reserved patterns for special patterns is 1 or 2, it is easy to set a short variation time as the fluctuation time of normal patterns so that the number of reserved balls for special patterns 1 is 3 or more, and when the number of reserved patterns for normal patterns is 0 and the number of reserved patterns for special patterns is 0, it is difficult to newly acquire the reserved patterns for special patterns. Therefore, it is preferable to set a long fluctuation time.

Furthermore, according to the number of reserved and stored normal symbols, the configuration in which the normal pattern variation pattern is varied may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is also provided in the left side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. ) is provided with a variable winning device 650 opened during the big win game, and the game board 13 is configured so that the player can select the left-handed game or the right-handed game during the big win game. Then, the rate at which the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 is made different between when the right-handed game is played and when the left-handed game is played. Thereby, depending on which game is played during the jackpot game, the number of reserved memory of normal symbols acquired at the end of the jackpot game (normal pattern reserved number) can be varied. As game states to be set after the end of the jackpot game, a first game state in which a larger number of reserved normal patterns is more advantageous than a smaller number and a second game state in which a larger reserved number of normal patterns is more disadvantageous than a smaller number can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method during the big win game while predicting the game state to be set after the big win game is over.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 200, a modified example of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) that can perform the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) is set, a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation, and a short-time (for example, 1 second) variation pattern is set as the variation time for the second special symbol variation. , and furthermore, it is configured so that a small prize can be won in the special figure 2 lottery.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the special figure 2 lottery than the execution frequency of the special figure 1 lottery during the latent definite state, and to provide a game advantageous to the player by frequently generating a small winning game executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

On the other hand, in a modification of the seventh embodiment, similar to the above-described seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) that can perform the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol in duplicate, when a specific game state (eg, variable probability state) is set, one special symbol (eg, the first special symbol) is configured to have a longer variation time (eg, 10 minutes), and the other special symbol (eg, the second special symbol) is configured. By configuring the fluctuation time to be short (for example, 1 second), the other special symbol lottery may be preferentially executed.

Then, the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, the second special symbol lottery makes it easier to win a small win than the first special symbol lottery, or the contents of the big win game executed when a big win is won), and the game that is advantageous to the player is facilitated during a specific game state (for example, a variable state).

In the above-described game machine, the first special symbol lottery becomes a disadvantageous lottery disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery advantageous to the player, at least during the period when the variable probability state is set. Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machine, at least one of the end conditions for ending a specific game state (for example, the variable probability state) is set to an end condition that is satisfied when the lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery) becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a winning lottery or a big win), and by providing a game property in which many advantageous special symbol lotteries are executed until the end condition is satisfied by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery. .

However, in the above-described gaming machine, when a specific game state (for example, variable probability state) that is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous game state continues is set only by the result of the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result that terminates the advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot win in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends), the period until the special symbol for indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result is started) becomes the period in which the advantageous game state continues, and once the period in which the advantageous game state continues is set, the period cannot be changed (discarded). There was

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) mainly executed during an advantageous game state, the disadvantageous special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed can be discarded. That is, when the result of the disadvantageous special symbol variation during execution is the result of ending the advantageous game state (for example, the result of showing the winning of the big win in which the normal state is set after the end of the big win game), the advantageous game state can be extended (continued) by discarding the lottery result. Further, when the unfavorable special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is discarded, the number of disadvantageous special symbol variations is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special symbol variation. Therefore, even if the termination condition for ending the advantageous game state is set as the termination condition for the number of times of unfavorable symbol variation that is satisfied when the number of disadvantageous special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice) during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued). are

By constructing in this way, the period during which the advantageous game state continues can be varied based on the lottery result of the advantageous special pattern (second special pattern), so that the player who plays the game in the advantageous game state can be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, in this modification, when a small win is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery in an advantageous game state (probability variable state), at least a small win type (small win B) that discards the disadvantageous special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed and a small win type (small win C) that terminates the advantageous game state after discarding the disadvantageous special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed can be set.

That is, in the present modified example, as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state, the termination condition established based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second winning symbol) is set. By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the advantageous game state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues.

In addition, since the termination condition that can be satisfied is set based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbols (second special symbols) during the advantageous game state, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected games. In addition, as described above, when a small win is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery, the period during which an advantageous game state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the set small win type, so that when a small win is won in an advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, the player can be made to pay attention to subsequent game contents.

Furthermore, in this modification, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, it is possible to variably set the fluctuation time of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) variation according to the number of retained balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (first special symbol) (the number of retained balls of the special symbol and the number of retained balls of the advantageous special symbol). Arithmetic) is configured so that a short variation time can be easily set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the advantageous game state (during the probability variation state).

As a result, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols in the advantageous game state can be increased by winning a small prize in the lottery of the advantageous special symbols (second special symbols) and canceling the unfavorable special symbol variations being executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbols is set after the end of the big win game, the high probability state of the special symbols is continued until the next big win is won by the special symbol lottery, and the probability state of the normal symbols is configured to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (specific small winning or execution of the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times) is established. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, once the high probability state of the special symbols is set, the probability of winning the big win in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next big win is won, so that the player can play the game without anxiety. .

On the other hand, in this modified example, a condition is added that the high-probability state of the special pattern shifts to the low-probability state, and the high-probability state of the special pattern can be shifted to the low-probability state even if the special pattern lottery does not win a big hit. As a result, even when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the high probability state of the special pattern may end without winning the jackpot, so that the player who is playing in the high probability state of the special pattern can play the game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this modification, when the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of special symbols is set, and when the second transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of normal symbols is set. , When the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, the variable probability state is shifted to the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). Then, when both of the transition conditions are met, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set.

That is, it is configured such that the state is finally shifted to the normal state through different processes depending on the order of establishment of the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be satisfied during the variable probability state. By constructing in this way, a player who is playing in the variable probability state can be interested in not only when the variable probability state ends, but also to which game state the variable probability state shifts to.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above is configured such that a long-time (e.g., 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation while the latent state is set, and a long-time (e.g., 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation while the normal state is set. 50 times) is set, there is a possibility that both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation may fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) during the normal state set based on the establishment of the first transition condition, and the player cannot smoothly play the game.

On the other hand, in this modification, from a game state (for example, a probability variation state) in which a long-time variation is set as a variation pattern of one special symbol variation (for example, a first special symbol variation) to a game state (for example, a normal state) in which a long-time variation is set as a variation pattern for the other special symbol variation (for example, a second special symbol variation). 10 minutes) It is configured to make it difficult for the situation to fluctuate. This allows the player to play the game smoothly.

First, based on FIG. 193, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of this modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 157) in a part of the configuration of the right side area (area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) among the game areas formed on the game board 13, and the rest of the configuration is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 193, in this modification, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and the balls fired by the right-handed game are configured to be alternately distributed to the left flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member 700 and the right flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 forming a flow-down surface of the left flow path 701 is provided on the upstream side of the left flow path 701. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a fixed opening/closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown). It consists of

Specifically, a movable lid opening/closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110, and the movable lid opening/closing process repeats an opening period of 0.1 seconds and an average closing period of 0.8 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b that is controlled to open and close in this way is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG.

Then, the ball that flows down the left channel 701 and flows down on the movable lid 1500 (the ball that flows down the channel formed on the movable lid 1500 in the closed state) flows down the bent portion of the left channel 701 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a by the nail planted at the position where the downstream end of the left channel 701 faces.

On the other hand, a bent portion is formed in the right channel 702 by the sorting device 700, and a small hit attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is arranged so as to form a part of the flowing surface of the bent portion. This small winning attacker 3650 is composed of an opening/closing lid 3650a whose opening/closing is controlled during a small winning game executed on the basis of winning of a small winning in a second special pattern lottery, a flow path through which the balls flowed down when the opening/closing lid 3650a is in an open state, and a small winning prize opening 3653 into which the balls flowing down the flow path enter. The contents of the opening/closing control of the opening/closing lid 3650a during the small winning game are the same as the contents of the accessory winning control process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will now be described in detail. This normally movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 0.8 seconds, which is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of this modified example, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the rolling surface on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in the open state, the ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball inlet 64b.

The timing for rolling on (or falling on) the constantly movable member 1500 is every 1.2 seconds, and the timing for the constantly movable valve 1500 to be in an open state is 0.1 second in 0.9 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b periodically, so that when a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is completed, a state in which the first special symbol is not reserved (special figure 1 reservation) can be prevented from occurring. In addition, since a period (0.1 second) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit is set as a period in which the movable valve 1500 is opened once, the right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than the left-handed game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in the normal game state.

Specifically, it is designed so that about 15 balls out of 250 shot balls enter the first ball entrance 64 when a left-handed game is played when the game state is the normal state, and when the balls enter, 5 prize balls are paid out. Also, it is designed so that about five balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the balls enter. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, taking into consideration the fact that the paid-out prize balls are shot again, it is possible to let about 20 balls enter the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, it is designed so that about 9 out of 250 shot balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b when the right-handed game is played, and when the balls enter, 2 prize balls are paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, only about 10 balls can be entered into the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the paid-out prize balls are shot again. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired in the right-handed game passes is not provided with the general prize-winning opening 63, but the general prize-winning opening 63 may be provided based on the design concept that the right-handed game is not more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game when the game state is normal. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time saving state or during the jackpot state.

Furthermore, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball on the path until the ball shot in the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the ball shot in the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500.例文帳に追加In this modification, the distribution member 700 is provided for both the purpose of delaying the flow of the ball (differentiating the flow behavior of the ball) and the purpose of distributing the ball fired in the right-handed game to a plurality of flow paths. A delay means (e.g., a flow path in which the friction coefficient of the flow-down surface is different from that of other flow-down surfaces, or a flow path in which the flow-down direction of the sphere branches in the middle and eventually reaches the movable lid 1500 regardless of which branch) may be provided.

Next, the electric accessory 640a to which the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 reaches will be described. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric role object 640a is provided in an area where both the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 701 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 702 can reach, and the ball that has reached the electric role object 640a can flow down toward the second ball entrance 640 by the normal figure winning game that is executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery. It can be changed to a released state (embedded state) in which it cannot be used.

Furthermore, the variable mode (opening/closing control content) of the electric role object 640a executed as the above-described normal pattern per game is varied according to the probability state of the set normal symbol, and in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric role object 640a is opened and closed for a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball that reaches the electric role object 640a to reach the second ball entrance 640, so that the electric role object 640a is in the induction state. In a game state (normal state, latent state) in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set, the opening and closing of the electric role object 640a is controlled so that the electric role object 640a is in an inductive state during a time (for example, 0.1 second) during which the ball reaching the electric role object 640a cannot reach the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, during a game state (for example, normal state, latent probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a left-handed game is an advantageous game that is more advantageous to an advantageous person than a right-handed game, and during a game state (for example, a variable probability state, a time-saving state) in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set, a right-handed game can be made an advantageous game that is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game.

Finally, the ball that has passed through the electric accessory 640 a (the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 701 and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 702 ) reaches the V winning device 2650 . The V winning device 2650 is controlled to be opened/closed by a big win game executed when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery, and is constructed so as to set a high-probability state of the special pattern after the big win game is finished by the ball winning to the V winning device 2650 passing through a specific gate during the big win game.

Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 2650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the V winning device 2650 includes an opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 2650c combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b for screwing the V winning device 2650 to the game board 13, and a base member 2650c arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c and mounted on the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. LED substrate 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs for lighting the LEDs are arranged on the front side of the back cover 2650d; a channel cover body 2650g that is combined to form a channel; a switching member 2650h that protrudes into the channel formed by the back cover body 2650e and the channel cover body 2650g and switches the channel of the game ball; 650i, and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover 2650j with screws.

FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. FIG. 195(c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 195(b), the V winning device 2650 is formed with a jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning hole (jackpot winning hole) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and a bottom surface inclined to the left and downward so that the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 195(b). A detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of game balls is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195(b).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 195(b), the opening of the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a is changed between an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 2650f1 constructed by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 2650f1, and the ball can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is retracted inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a.

In addition, in the open state, the plane orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the ball wins the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 195(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 195(b). As shown in FIG. 195(a), a magnetic sensor 2650c1 having a detection port 2650a1 is fixed to a base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration for distributing the balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 2650e to a normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and a special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 196(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is actuated so that the balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 that guides the ball, and is rotatably supported from the rear side of the flow channel cover 2650g. Here, the channel cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, so that the guide piece 2650h can be rotatably arranged in the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 2650g.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), the sphere guided into the sorting channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left, and guided to the special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2. The special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route in which the ball that has flowed in passes through a specific area (detection switch) 2650e3.

Here, the details will be described later, but the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to set a high probability state of special symbols when the detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 2650h is for setting either a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) that can pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 (ordinary discharge flow path 2650e1) as the flow path for the balls that have won the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game, and the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the game state transition contents in this modified example will be described. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of the game state in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. In this modified example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery), the jackpot A is set at a rate of 40% and the jackpot B is set at a rate of 60% as the jackpot types. Then, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), the big win C is set at a rate of 100% as the big win type.

When the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot B is set, the same jackpot game as the jackpot B7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this modification, when the variable state is set, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state of special symbols (ST number) 50 times is set as the end condition (first transition condition) of the high probability state of special symbols (high probability of special symbols), and the number of times of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state of normal symbols (time reduction number) 70 times (second transition condition A), or as the end condition (second transition condition) of the high probability state of normal symbols (high probability of normal symbols). , Special figure 1 lottery number of times 2 times (second transition condition B) is configured to be set.

When a jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special figure 1) can easily reach the upper limit (4). During the variable probability state, a game for executing a special figure 2 lottery is performed by a right hitting game. In this modification, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to execute a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery so that the game state most advantageous to the player becomes a variable probability state, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easily executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to make it easier to win the small prize than the special figure 1 lottery, and the probability of winning the small prize in the special figure 2 lottery is set to 1/20. Furthermore, it is constructed so that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game is more easily set in the case of winning the big win in the special figure 2 lottery than in the case of winning the big win in the special figure 1 lottery. In addition, the 7 table for probability variation 203fe3 referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the latent probability state in the above-described seventh embodiment is referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the 7 table for probability variation 202fe2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol in the seventh embodiment is configured to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the latent probability state.

In this embodiment configured in this manner, a right-handed game in which a special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed is performed in a variable probability state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set and a time saving state, and a left-handed game in which a special figure 1 lottery is mainly performed in a normal state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set and a latent probability state is performed.

Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the game result during the variable probability state and the contents of the transition of the game state. As described above, in this modification, the first transition condition for shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state when satisfied, and the second transition condition for transitioning from the variable probability state to the latent probability state when satisfied are set. Specifically, as the first transition condition, the special symbol lottery number of times (ST number of times) executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set 50 times, and as the second transition condition, the special symbol lottery number of times (time saving number of times) executed during the normal symbol high probability state 70 times (second transition condition A) or the special symbol 1 lottery number of times 2 times (second transition condition B) is set.

In other words, after the variable probability state is set, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, the state is shifted to the time saving state, and then when the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times in the time saving state, the state is shifted to the normal state. Here, in this modification, in the variable probability state, a different variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of special figure 1 reserved balls). Specifically, similar to the 7 table 203fe3 for concealment in the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is a predetermined number or less (for example, 1, 2), when it is a predetermined number or more (for example, 4).

By constructing in this way, in order to increase the execution frequency of the special figure 2 lottery in which the set period (the number of times of ST is 50 times) is stipulated, the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery that facilitates the execution of the lottery advantageous to the player can be made to play a novel game of winning the small win B in the special figure 2 lottery and reducing the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls by discarding the special figure 1 variation.

Furthermore, in this modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big hit game, the game is interrupted and the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed multiple times. When the act of reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is executed, the second transition condition B is established and the probability variable state is shifted to the latent probability state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game is lowered due to the interruption of the game during the period when the special figure 1 variation is executed in the variable probability state in which a long variation time is likely to be selected.

Next, a description will be given of how each special symbol changes when the game state changes. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied in a state where the variable probability state is set and the latent probability state is set will be described. As described above, the second transition condition B can be established when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed, so a new special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the latent certainty state is set. For this newly executed special figure 1 variation, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the variation pattern table referred to during the latent state, so the variation pattern that can be selected during the normal state as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special figure 2 variation for a long time during the execution of the special figure 1 variation for a long time.

On the other hand, the case where the first transition condition is established during the variable probability state and the time saving state is set will be described. As described above, the first transition condition, when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed, or because it can be established in any case when the special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is set At the timing, there is a case where the special figure 1 variation is performed for a long time. However, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special figure lottery is performed 20 times or until a big hit is won in the special figure lottery, and the total value of the variation time for 20 special figure 2 variations executed during the time saving state is configured to be at least longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation set during the latent state. Then, the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state is defined in the variation pattern table so that a shorter variation time than the special figure 1 variation executed during the latent state is likely to be selected.

By constructing in this way, when shifting from the probability variable state to the time saving state and then shifting to the normal state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which both the first special pattern fluctuation and the second special pattern fluctuation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). When a special figure lottery is won in the time saving state or the latent state, the special figure variation being executed is discarded, so that after the big winning game is finished, a new special figure lottery is executed according to the game state set after the big winning game is finished. Therefore, when a new game state is set with the winning of the jackpot as a trigger, the long-time special symbol variation executed before the winning of the jackpot continues to be performed even after the end of the jackpot game, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

As described above, in this modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in duplicate, and the variable probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game is finished if the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery than in the case that the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery becomes a lottery (game) more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

The same technical idea as this modification may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having different game characteristics from that of this modification. For example, like the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, even if a special symbol lottery does not win a big win, a predetermined game (accessory winning game, small winning game) can be executed when a predetermined execution condition (e.g., a ball entering a special electric start gate or winning a small win in a special symbol lottery) is established. It may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot game is executed when a ball entering a variable ball entering means opened during a predetermined game enters a specific area (for example, a V winning hole) as a trigger.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), the internal structure of the small-hit attacker 3650 is changed, and the movable valve 3651 is configured to move so that the ball winning the small-hit attacker 3650 wins either the normal winning opening 3652 or the V winning opening 3653, and when the ball enters the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197(b)), the big winning game is started. It should be configured to run. Also, even if the ball winning the small winning attacker 3650 wins the normal winning hole 3652 (see FIG. 197(a)), it is preferable to give the same winning ball as the V winning hole 3653.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the contents of the effect performed in this modified example will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, various transition conditions for ending the variable probability state are set, and the variable probability state is configured to shift to a different game state according to the established transition condition. Among them, the effect contents regarding the second transition condition B established when the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probability variation state will be described.

In this modification, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, a small hit type (small hit A, small hit C) that interrupts the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution and a small hit type (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution can be set. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the number of special figure 1 fluctuations is configured to be updated.

That is, when a small prize B is set when a small prize is won in a special prize 2 lottery, the special prize 1 fluctuation under execution is discarded and a new special prize 1 fluctuation is executed without updating the number of special prize 1 fluctuations. Therefore, in the probability variation state, if you continue to discard the special figure 1 variation in progress, it is configured so that the second transition condition B described above is unlikely to be established. On the other hand, as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation in the probability variable state, the long special figure 1 variation in which the variation time is set for a long time (for example, 1 minute) and the short special figure 1 variation in which the short time (for example, 1 minute) variation time is set can be selected. It is advantageous for the player. That is, in some cases, the second transition condition B can be made difficult to be established.

Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation to be newly executed after discarding the long special figure 1 variation under execution is the short special figure 1 variation, there is a possibility that the number of special figure 1 variations will be updated as the variation time of the short special figure 1 variation passes than when the long special figure 1 variation is not discarded.

Therefore, in this modification, in the state where the probability change state is set, the situation of the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution (length of the remaining fluctuation time), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery to be mainly executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game content during the variable probability state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Figure 199 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the RUSH period variable effect executed when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the variable probability state (RUSH), and Figure 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the extension display showing that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable effect. Also, FIG. 200(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as the effect result of the variable RUSH period effect, and FIG. Among the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in this modified example, the same elements as in the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), during the RUSH period, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined lottery result (big win, small win, partial loss), a character 811 imitating a rabbit in the main display area Dm finds a treasure box 812 with a bonus bag 812h (variable period effect). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "What is the content of the bonus?" is displayed. The treasure box 812 is a display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is mainly executed, and the bag 812h is a display mode for notifying the player how the RUSH period (probability variable state period) varies based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

After the period variable production shown in FIG. 199(a) is started, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), as the result display mode 812a, a display mode of "V" indicating that a small hit has been won in the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. As the result display mode 812a, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, when the result is a big win, a display mode imitating the characters "hit" is displayed, and when it is a loss, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed.

Then, from the opened bag 812h, an effect is executed to display a situation display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probability variable state period) is variable (whether it shifts to a variable state) based on the lottery result of this special figure 2 lottery. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), as the status display mode 812j, the display mode of "extended" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed. In addition to the display mode of "extended" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, the status display mode 812j includes "disappointing" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, "end" indicating that the small hit C is set and the RUSH period ends, "?" Aspects are displayed.

Here, the method of setting various display modes displayed when the period variable effect is executed will be described using the control processing (see FIGS. 183 to 192) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above. First, in the state command receiving process (see S4232 in FIG. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the variable probability state, and when it is determined that the state is in the variable probability state, a process of setting a display command for displaying "DURING RUSH" shown in FIG.

Next, instead of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), the special figure 2 variation of this time is a big hit variation, a small hit variation, or an outlier variation. In this selection process, it is selected whether or not to execute the variable period effect based on the contents defined in a dedicated data table (variable period effect selection table). Concretely, the contents of the period variable performance selection table are defined so that execution of the period variable performance is selected at a rate of about 20% when the current special figure 2 variation is a big winning variation, at a rate of 100% when it is a small winning variation, and at a rate of 10% when it is a loss variation.

Here, when it is selected that the period variable performance is executed in the jackpot variation, a display command for displaying the display mode of ``hit'' as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of ``celebration'' as the situation display mode 812j on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 variation. In addition, when it is selected to execute the period variable performance in the deviation fluctuation, a display command for displaying the display mode of "cross mark" as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of "?"

On the other hand, when it is selected to execute the period variable performance in the small winning variation, next, the small winning type set in the current small winning variation is read, and at the timing of stopping the special figure 2 variation, the small winning classification is to interrupt the special figure 1 variation being executed or the small winning classification is to be discarded. Next, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (variation pattern command included in the prize information stored in the first reserved area) to be executed next is predicted from the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b.

Then, as a result of the type determination process, when it is determined that it is a small hit type that interrupts the special figure 1 variation, if the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of interruption is longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation that will be executed next, the display mode of "extended" is set as the situation display mode 812j. be done. Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation is discarded as a result of the type determination process, the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of discarding is longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be executed next. be done. Further, when the small win type set this time is the small win C, a display command for displaying the display mode of ``end'' on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as the situation display mode 812j is set because the high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state at the timing of stopping the special figure 2 variation.

As described above, in this modified example, even when the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit variation is stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern set for the special figure 1 variation to be executed next time. In other words, as a performance result of the variable period performance, it is configured to relatively discriminate which is more advantageous to the player between the small winning type that interrupts the special figure 1 variation being executed at the timing of stopping the special figure 2 variation and the small winning type that is discarded at the timing when the current small winning variation is stopped and displayed, and sets the performance mode (display mode) of the period variable performance based on the determination result. Therefore, even when the small hit fluctuates at any timing, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the small win type advantageous to the player is set at that time.

In this modification, as described above, the production mode of the variable period production is configured to be relatively set, but without being limited to this, for example, the remaining variation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted is a specific time (for example, 1 minute).

Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modified example of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the latent state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than winning a jackpot may be provided, and the latent state may be ended when the end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, a first termination condition that can be established when the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches 100 times, a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches five times, and a third termination condition that can be satisfied when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small win (small win C) can be set.

By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the latent sure state will continue when the latent sure state advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, once the cm accurate state is set, at least until the next jackpot is executed (until the jackpot is won), the diving state of the diving will continue, so the gaming in the dive state will be monotonous, but in this case, the creamy state will continue for a long time or a large hit. The players can do gaming while expecting to continue, so it can suppress the fact that the players get tired of the game as soon as possible.

Further, a plurality of small winning types including at least a small winning type (small winning A) for interrupting the first special symbol variation under execution and a small winning type (small winning B) for canceling the second special symbol variation under execution (forced stop due to failure) when winning the small winning in the second special symbol lottery can be set. Then, when a small win B is set as a small win type and the first special pattern variation is discarded, the discarded first special pattern variation does not update the number of lotteries of the first special pattern in the latent definite state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which the above-described second end condition is established during the latent certainty state based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, the advantage degree of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be varied according to the execution status of the first special symbol.

For example, in a gaming machine configured so that at least a variation time A (2 minutes) and a variation time B (10 minutes) can be set as the variation time of the first special symbol in the latent definite state, when the first special symbol variation set with the variation time B (10 minutes) is executed, if the remaining time of the first special symbol variation being executed is longer than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to interrupt the first special symbol being executed than to discard the first special symbol being executed. When the remaining time of one special symbol variation is shorter than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol being executed than to interrupt it.

Therefore, the player can be interested in both the result of the lottery of the special symbols and the fluctuation state of the first special symbols, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by combining a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, variation of the first special symbol), it is possible to provide a game that is difficult to predict for the player.

Furthermore, the technical idea described above may be applied to a game machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, according to the hit type obtained when winning the special electric operation opening, it is sufficient to vary the processing for the special figure variation being executed.

In the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of overlapping execution of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (so-called simultaneous variation specification), the first special symbol variation being executed is canceled or interrupted according to the result of the second special symbol lottery, thereby varying the length of the period in which the advantageous game state is set. In other words, by canceling the first special symbol variation, the end condition that can be established based on the number of execution times of the first special symbol lottery is made difficult to be established, thereby aiming at a long-term advantageous game state, but instead of this, a specific area may be provided in the small winning attacker opened in the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, and the big winning game may be executed even when the ball passes through the specific area.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, only the first special symbol has the reserved memory function, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be provided with the reserved memory function. In this case, in a game state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player, as the number of reserved balls referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol to be executed, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol may be referred to, or the cumulative number of reserved balls obtained by summing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be referred to. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol.

With this configuration, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern while acquiring the reserved balls of the second special pattern, so that the action of interrupting the game to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern can be suppressed. In addition to this, the variation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the total number of retained balls obtained by summing the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol and the difference between the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol, and when the cumulative number of retained balls is a specific number (for example, 5) or more and the difference is 3 or more, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player. It is preferable to configure so that a pattern (variation pattern with a short variation time) is easily selected. As a result, since the player can actively play the game, the operation of the game can be improved.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (1 or 2), a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than in the case other than the specific number. It may be a plurality of values (eg, 3 or 4) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of retained balls of 1 special symbol, or may be a separate value (eg, 1 or 3). In this case, when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small winning classification for discarding the first special symbol variation being executed is set, whether the winning of the small winning is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player can be varied according to the number of retained balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, there are cases where it is advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation and cases where it is advantageous for the player not to discard (suspend) the variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, only one type of variation pattern table is provided when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when a game state (latent probability state) advantageous to the player is set. A plurality of pattern tables may be provided, and in this case, the number of retained balls of the first special symbol, which facilitates the selection of a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation, should be varied according to the variation pattern table to be referred to. By configuring in this way, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol aimed at by the player can be varied during the latent definite state, so that a game that is difficult to predict for the player can be provided. Furthermore, when a plurality of variation pattern tables to be referred to during the latent certainty state are provided, an advantageous variation pattern table in which a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation is easily selected (always selected) regardless of the number of retained balls of the first special symbol, and a variation disadvantageous pattern table in which a variation pattern (short-term variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation is difficult to be selected (not selected) regardless of the number of retained balls in the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide both or one of

Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above, when the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, the number of times of time saving is not subtracted. In such a configuration, when a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to a player is set, a variation pattern in which a short-time (for example, 5 seconds) variation time is set is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, and a variation pattern in which a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation time is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is easily selected. Then, with the second special symbol variation that is efficiently executed for the first special symbol variation, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property that the game can be executed in the variable probability state until the player wins a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) for a small win that discards the first special symbol variation that is being executed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of pending memories of the first special symbol becomes one or two during the latent certainty state, the variation time of the second special symbol variation is shortened. Furthermore, it is configured to reduce the reserved memory number of the first special pattern by winning a specific small prize (small prize B) in the second special pattern lottery and canceling (forcibly stopping) the first special pattern variation being executed. Further, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the reserved memory of the first special symbol can be acquired in the game (right-handed game) executed during the latent state. In addition, it is configured such that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the latent definite state is long (for example, 10 minutes). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented game in which the second special symbol lottery, in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed as a game during the latent definite state, simultaneously executes a game of winning a large win or a small win advantageous to the player to win a large number of prize balls and a game of reducing the reserved memory of the first special symbol to increase the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is four (upper limit), the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, with respect to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, it may be configured to make it difficult to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol during the game (right-handed game) in the latent state. In this case, unlike each embodiment described above, winning a specific small win (small win B) in the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player.

Even in the case of such a constitution, the easiness of lottery of special patterns (second special patterns) advantageous to the player can be varied according to the reserved memory number of the special patterns (first special pattern) disadvantageous to the player. Also, in this case, for example, by acquiring the reserved memory number of the first special symbols up to the upper limit value during the big win game in which the latent definite state is set after the end of the big win game, it is possible to easily set the state in which the second special symbol lottery is advantageously executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to acquire the reserved memory number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game.

Also, even if the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is obtained up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game, the processing for starting the first special symbol variation is executed before the processing for starting the second special symbol variation after setting the latent state, so that the execution of the second special symbol variation in an advantageous state after setting the latent state can be suppressed. In addition, as the control process of the main controller 110, the process for starting the second special symbol variation may be configured to be executed prior to the process for starting the first special symbol variation. By constructing in this way, for example, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special pattern variation can be executed without changing (decreasing) the reserved memory number of the first special pattern from the reserved memory number obtained during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the reserved memory number of special symbols (the number of special symbol reserved balls) is a specific number (for example, 1), it is configured so that a game that is advantageous to the player (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) is easily executed. For example, a game that stops the special symbol variation after the variation time has elapsed) is executable. In addition, the specific number (for example, 1) of the special figure reserved balls which facilitates the execution of a game advantageous to the player is designed to be less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the special figure reserved balls, and when the current number of special figure reserved balls is larger than the specific number, the first game is more likely to be executed than when the number is smaller than the specific number. In addition, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is a specific number, or when it is less than the specific number, it is configured to make it more difficult to execute the first game than when it is greater than the specific number.

By constructing in this way, the number of special figure reserved balls can be brought close to a specific number only by making the player play the game with the aim of executing the first game, and the player can play an easy-to-understand game.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls that makes it easier for the player to play an advantageous game is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls. In this case, when a game for forcibly stopping the special symbol variation is executed, the number of special symbol reserved balls tends to decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of performing the game aiming at not executing the game in which the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 215. FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the content of processing for the first special symbol variation being executed is made different according to the small winning type set when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the small winning A or the small winning C is set as the small winning type, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, and when the small winning B is set, the special symbol variation being executed is discarded.

In the pachinko machine 10 using such a constitution, processing according to the set small winning type is executed regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol variation during execution, so that there is a problem that the big winning variation is discarded based on the small winning even during the big winning variation which is a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the small winning winning, for example. In addition, when such a constitution is used, if the high expectation level performance in which the first special symbol variation being executed is a big win is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the player will notice that the big winning variation has been discarded (the jackpot winning is invalidated), so there is a problem that it is difficult to execute the high expectation level performance.

In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the game state (latency state) advantageous to the player is set, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is not stored with hold. There is a problem that it is difficult to execute the high-expectation performance for a long time (time corresponding to the fluctuation time of the big win fluctuation) because the timing when it is determined that there is no big win fluctuation is immediately before the stop display of the big win fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed (when special processing is executed for the special symbol variation being executed), the content of processing is determined according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed. More specifically, when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when a special symbol indicating a small winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed is discriminated, and if the determination result is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol variation being performed is discarded, and if it is other than the specific variation pattern, the other special symbol variation being performed can be interrupted. It is configured as follows.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) for winning the jackpot, different variation patterns are configured to be selected between an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, a variable jackpot) is performed and a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) is performed.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, a variation pattern in which a variation time of less than 30 seconds is set is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous big win type than when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is small, and a variation pattern in which the variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous big win type is configured to be more easily selected.

By constructing in this way, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, a big win game (for example, variable probability big win) advantageous to the player can be easily executed (difficult to be discarded by winning a small prize), and a big win game (for example, normal jackpot) disadvantageous to the player is difficult to be executed (easily discarded by winning a small prize), compared to when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is small. That is, it is possible to vary the proportion of the probability variable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to ambitiously accumulate the number of reserved balls of special symbols while expecting that an advantageous jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is won in either the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the big win can be canceled by the other small win, so that the percentage of the probability variable big win at the time of winning the big win can be surely changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbols.

First, referring to FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in this embodiment differs from the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193) in that part of the configuration of the right side area and part of the configuration of the lower side area (the area below the variable display unit 80) are different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193) in that a first flow path 701 and a second flow path 702 through which the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 can flow down are provided extending to the lower side of the right side area, a through gate 67, and an electric accessory 640a. and a small winning attacker (second attacker) 5650 that is opened in a part of the small winning game that is opened in the small winning game instead of the small winning attacker 3650 is arranged at the central lower position of the game board 13. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described, focusing on differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 pass through the curved path 701a, pass through the through gate 67, and flow out downward to the right region. In addition, the ball distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flows into the inflow port 704a, flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 201), passes through the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and flows out from the outflow downward to the right area on the game board 13. The balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 join under the right area, flow down the variable winning device (first attacker) 2650, and flow into the out port 66.

Next, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 among the structures arranged in the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In this embodiment, a through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and a second ball entrance 640 is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without lowering the flow velocity. Therefore, it is possible to keep the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 constant, thereby preventing the balls from lining up in the second flow path 702 and causing a plurality of balls to enter the second ball inlet 640 at the same time. In addition, when the third pattern display device 81 reports that the electric accessory 640a is opened without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball can be quickly entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the through gate 67 which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery and the electric function 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol are arranged in different flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) distributed by the distribution member 700, it is difficult to let the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 when the distribution member 700 is broken so that the ball flows down only to one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled). can be reduced. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed to create a state in which the ball flows down only in one flow path, thereby making it possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to suppress the creation of a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 illegally.

Next, the case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the ball flows down in a shorter period than the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured such that it takes approximately 1.5 seconds for the ball that has flowed into the second channel 702 to flow out from the flow outlet. With this configuration, when 100 balls are shot toward the right side area in one minute, the ball that flows into the first flow path 701 and the ball that is shot next to that ball and flows into the second flow path 702 flow down the lower right area (the area where the first variable winning device 2650 is arranged) of the game board 13 almost simultaneously (with a difference of about 0.1 second). Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened, it is possible to make it easier to win a plurality of balls at once.

A part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701, so that a plurality of flow paths overlap when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball passages (the area of the game board 13 occupied by the ball passages) can be reduced.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second ball inlet 640), and the balls flow out from the first flow path 701 in the lower right region of the game board 13 so that the balls flow out to the downstream side. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball flowing out from the outflow port 704c vigorously (the ball flowing out at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the ball flowing out from the first flow path 701, resulting in an irregular flow of balls.

In this embodiment, the distribution member 700 uses a configuration in which the balls fired in the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the two flow paths, but other configurations may be used. For example, instead of alternately (1:1) in the two flow paths, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the balls are randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths according to the weight of the balls or the flow timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes depending on the weight of the passed ball. However, for example, a distribution member that is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule may be used.

Next, the lower area of the game board 13 where the small winning attacker 5650 is arranged will be described. This small winning attacker 5650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a small winning game executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small winning attacker 5650 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, and is constructed such that the nail planted in the game board 13 makes it difficult for the balls flowing down on the game board 13 to reach there. Therefore, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which it is difficult for the player to acquire prize balls.

In this embodiment, when a small prize is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the control for interrupting or forcibly stopping the other special symbol variation being executed is configured to be executable, and further, the control content to be executed is switched based on the variation content of the other special symbol variation being performed. In other words, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to acquire the prize ball, but this is an execution opportunity for executing a predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) for the second special symbol variation being executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 208. FIG. The eighth embodiment differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and a partial configuration of the RAM 203 are different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 202, the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has a small hit random number 8 table 202gb instead of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb, a big hit type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202ge instead of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe. , The difference is that a small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is provided instead of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, and the rest is the same.

Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of the small hit random number 8 table 202gb will be described. Figure 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit determination value is defined also for the first special symbol in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to be in the range of ``300 to 599'' regardless of the probability state of the special symbol for the first special symbol type, and the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 to the second special symbol is defined to be within the range of ``550 to 599'' regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is constructed so that a small prize is won with a probability of about 1/2 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a small prize is won with a probability of about 1/12 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. In the present embodiment, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the attacker 5650 for a small win in which the ball cannot (is difficult to win) wins during the small win game is opened, and when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened during the big win game. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to win a small prize with a high probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being given excessive specific (prize balls). The second special symbol lottery is set so that the small winning probability is lower than the probability of the small winning of the first special symbol lottery, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls possessed by the player in a probability variable state or a latent state in which the game is executed by the right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, this jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is different from the above-described jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in that the winning device for executing the jackpot operation (winning device to be released) is different and the value of the time saving counter 203h that is set after the jackpot is different. For convenience of explanation, some of the names of the jackpot types used in the seventh embodiment described above and the jackpot types used in the eighth embodiment are different (for example, jackpot A7 and jackpot A8), but the elements without explanation about the differences are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when a jackpot C8 set at a rate of 20% is won among the jackpot wins in the first special pattern lottery, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 10000 regardless of the game state set when the jackpot wins. That is, substantially, it is configured such that the variable probability state is set until the next big hit is won.

As described above, the jackpot types set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are stipulated with different degrees of advantage for the player, and ``jackpot A8'', ``jackpot B8'' and ``jackpot C8'' are defined in order of the most disadvantageous to the player. In other words, the "jackpot C8" is defined to be the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when winning a variable probability big win in the second special symbol lottery ("big win E8" is won), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the big win. That is, when "jackpot E8" is won, the 100 times (special symbol variation is 100 times) probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the variable probability state, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlapping), the game is executed aiming at winning the "jackpot C8" which is the most advantageous jackpot type but not winning the jackpot types "jackpot A8" and "jackpot D8" where the probability variable state ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, among the variation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation 8 table 202ge and the probability variation 8 table 202ge to be referred to during the probability variation state will be described. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variable 8 table 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the potential probability 8 table 202ge.

In this embodiment, a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the variable probability state and the latent probability state are set, and a game is executed in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are overlapped. The variation pattern set when a big win is won is made different according to the selected big win type. Further, based on the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2), different variation patterns can be selected.

Specifically, the larger the combined special figure reservation number, the shorter the variation time selected when winning a jackpot advantageous to the player than when the combined special figure reservation number is short, and the larger the total special figure reservation number, the longer the variation time selected when the player wins a disadvantageous jackpot than the case where the total special figure reservation number is short.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the control contents to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed are varied according to the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed. Specifically, when the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, a process for discarding the special symbol variation is executed, and if the variation pattern is less than 30 seconds, the special symbol variation is interrupted. It is configured to execute the process to make it possible.

By constructing in this way, when the total number of reserved special symbols is large, when the big winning type disadvantageous to the player is set, it is made easier to discard the special symbol variation than when the total number of reserved special symbols is small. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to continue the state in which the total number of reserved special symbols is large.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the probability variation 8 table 202g2, different variation patterns are defined based on the special symbol type, the success/failure determination result (the result of the selected type), and the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number).

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and among the big hits, the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is "0 to 3". In the range of , the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the hit/fail determination result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot B", and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds as a fluctuation pattern.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and the number of reserved special figures (total special figure reserved number) is in the range of "0 to 3", the full range of the variation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") is associated with a super long variation with a variation time of 60 seconds as a variation pattern, and the special figure reserved number (total special figure reserved number) is in the range of "4 to 7", The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a super-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the result of the judgment is off (including a small hit), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The range ("0 to 198") is associated with a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the range of the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number) is "7".

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the hit/fail determination result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot D", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". A long variation with a variation time of 35 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the hit/fail determination result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot E", and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the success/failure determination result is off (including a small hit), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 7", that is, in the entire range, the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a short variation with a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the hidden 8 table 202g2, different variation patterns are defined based on the special symbol type, the success/failure determination result (the result of the selected type), and the special figure pending number (total special figure pending number).

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and among the big hits, the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is "0 to 4". In the range of , the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot B", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". A long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the hit/fail determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the winning judgment result is out (including a small hit), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 6". "0 to 198") is defined in association with a middle variation with a variation time of 25 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and among the jackpots, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" and the number of special figure reservations (total special figure reservation number) is in the range of "0 to 4". A long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the hit/fail judgment result is the jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot E", and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 4". The entire range (“0 to 198”) of the type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the result of the judgment is off (including a small hit), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is in the range of "0 to 3". The range ("0 to 198") is associated with a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 325 as a fluctuation pattern, the range of the special figure reservation number (total special figure reservation number) is "7", and the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") is defined by being associated with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution condition for executing specific control (for example, interruption or abandonment) for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied (for example, when executing a small winning game), the content of the specific control to be executed is configured to be switched according to the content of the special symbol variation being performed. Then, the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variation display mode set when executing the special symbol variation) is configured to be switched to the variation display mode according to the specific control content. As a result, it is possible to change the switching contents of the variation display mode according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Also, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the easiness of establishment of the switching condition for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to the specific variation display mode (variation display mode for forced stop) is varied according to the set game state. Furthermore, the easiness of establishment of the switching condition is varied according to the type of the special symbol being executed and the set jackpot type (the length of the variation time to be selected is varied). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how the variable display mode will switch when the execution condition is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, the easiness of establishment of the execution condition differs according to the special symbol type. Specifically, the probability of obtaining a lottery result (small winning) in which the execution condition can be established in the special symbol lottery is made different according to the special symbol type, and furthermore, the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation set when the small winning is won is made different. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the game result depending on which special symbol type executes variation indicating which lottery result at what timing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, a specific variable time is selected in correspondence with each condition. However, without being limited to this, a plurality of variable times that can be selected in correspondence with each condition may be defined, and a variation pattern of different variation times may be selected according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. In addition, in the present embodiment, the threshold is set to a variable time of 30 seconds as a condition for switching the content of specific control to be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time (for example, 28 seconds, 30 seconds) close to a threshold set as a condition for switching the specific control to be executed is selected. Thereby, when the variable effect corresponding to the selected variable pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect of the same effect mode can be executed. The difference (2 seconds) of the variable time can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the variable performance from the start timing of the special symbol variation or by making the end timing of the variable performance earlier than the end timing of the special symbol variation, and for the difference period, a still image (for example, an image displayed at the start of the variable performance or an image displayed at the end of the variable performance) can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf. This small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is different from the above-described small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172 (a)) in that the small hit type is defined also for the first special symbol, the opening target to be opened in the small winning game is changed, the symbol determination time is changed, and the control content performed for the special symbol fluctuation during execution is changed. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

To specifically explain the contents defined in the small winning type selection 8 table 202gf, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is associated with the ``small winning A8'' in the range of ``0 to 89'', and the ``small winning B8'' in the range of ``90 to 99''. Since the range of possible values of the small winning type counter C5 is 100 of '0 to 99', the rate of selecting 'small winning A8' is 90% (90/100) and the rate of selecting 'small winning B8' is 10% (10/100) when the small winning is won.

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed to open the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 for 0.1 second. In addition, "0.1 second" is selected as the special design determination time, and the process of interrupting the second special design (special design 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the processing for interrupting the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed is executed, the processing for interrupting the processing for measuring the fluctuation time lapse of the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. Specifically, when the small winning game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, and while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, the process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Then, with the end of the small winning game, the restart condition is established (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is resumed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed from being reduced while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is established), so that, for example, the winning second special symbol variation being stopped and displayed and the overlapping winning game (big winning game, small winning game) being executed while the small winning game is being executed can be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the variation time lapse of the special symbol variation being executed is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol variation performed before the small win game can be resumed after the restart condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied with the fact that the small winning is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed is executed. That is, even when the interruption condition is met, the updating process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the updating process is executed until the preset fluctuation time elapses, it is determined whether or not the interruption condition is established, and when it is judged that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special symbol fluctuation is not executed until the restart condition is established. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the "small win A" is selected, the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 is the object to be released for the small win game, and the small win game in which it is difficult to win prize balls during the small win game is executed.

When the "small win B" is selected, the small win game is executed with the same operation contents as the "small win A" described above. Furthermore, according to the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol being executed, either the process of interrupting the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed or the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, in a part of the case where one special symbol lottery wins a small prize, the contents of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed are configured to be switchable based on the situation (variation situation, setting situation) of the other special symbol variation. Specifically, when the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded), and when the variation pattern has a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control contents can be switched so as to interrupt the special symbol variation. By constructing in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed is discarded according to the fluctuation situation of the special symbol lottery being executed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the timing of winning the small win B8.

Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation in execution. Therefore, for example, only by prescribing the variation pattern table so that the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player has a longer variation time, the special symbol variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player can be easily stopped (discarded). In addition, the condition used when determining the control content is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to determine whether the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation during execution or whether the lottery result satisfies the specific condition, and determine the result of the control content based on the determination result. Furthermore, the control contents to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed may be determined based on the combination of the first special symbol variation being executed and the lottery result of the second special symbol that is won with a small hit.

Next, the contents of the small hit type corresponding to the second special design (special figure 2) as the design type of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be described. The range of the value of the small winning type counter C5 of ``0 to 79'' is associated with ``small winning C8'', the range of ``80 to 89'' is associated with ``small winning D8'', and the range of ``90 to 99'' is associated with ``small winning E8''. Since the range of possible values of the small winning type counter C5 is 100 of ``0 to 99'', the ratio of selecting ``small winning C8'' when winning a small winning is 80% (80/100), the ratio of selecting ``small winning D8'' is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of selecting ``small winning E8'' is 10% (10/100).

When "small winning C8" is selected, a small winning game is executed in which the big winning attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Also, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol. Further, when 'small winning D8' is selected, the same small winning game as 'small winning C8' is executed, and furthermore, according to the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol being executed, either the processing of interrupting the special figure 1 variation being executed or the processing of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. Incidentally, the content of the control processing when interrupting or forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation based on the "small hit D8" is only to switch the target of the control processing executed based on the "small hit B8" from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 208, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, this embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the above-described seventh embodiment in that a special variation flag 203ga is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special variation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special symbol variation to be executed is a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and is set to ON when the variation time of 30 seconds or more is set. In this embodiment, when a small winning variation that wins a specific small winning type is stopped and displayed, it is possible to switch between executing processing for interrupting the other special symbol variation or executing processing for discarding (forced stop) according to the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed. In other words, in one special symbol lottery, when a processing condition for switching a variation mode during execution to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation is satisfied in one special symbol lottery, the variation mode after switching is made different according to the variation mode during execution.

By constructing in this way, when the above-described processing conditions are established, the variation mode to be switched to is determined based on the other special pattern variation, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 215, the contents of control processing of main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This eighth embodiment differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small win can be won in the first special symbol lottery, when a variation pattern is selected, a process for determining whether or not a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected is added, and when the special symbol variation that has won a small win is stopped and displayed, a process for determining the processing content to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed is added, but the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, various control processes executed for the first special symbol will be used to describe the characteristic processing contents of the eighth embodiment, but the same processing contents are also executed in the control process of the corresponding second special symbol, but the detailed description using the illustration will be omitted because the description will be duplicated.

First, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be described. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (see S457 in FIG. 121), the special figure 1 loss variation process 8 (S481) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the special figure 1 loss variation process 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481). In this special figure 1 loss variation process 8, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery (when the win is lost), the process for determining the presence or absence of the small win is executed. In addition, the detailed contents are different in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol with respect to the above-described special figure 2 deviation variation process (see S1059 in FIG. 128), and the rest is the same.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation process 8 (S481), first, this lottery result (lottery result obtained in the process of S457 of the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit or not (S485).

When it is determined that the small winning is won in the processing of S485 (S485: Yes), the small winning flag 203i is set to ON (S486), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small winning (S487), the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S485, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win, that is, it is a loss (S485: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S485), and the process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S481 in FIG. 210) executed as one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, when it is determined that the small winning is won in the process executed at the timing of starting the variation (lottery) of the special symbol, the small winning flag 203i is set to ON, and the small winning flag 203i is set at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. Corresponding processing can be easily carried out.

In addition, the small hit flag 203i used in the present embodiment has a special figure 1 area indicating that it was elected by the first special design lottery, and a special figure 2 area indicating that it was elected to the small hit by the second special pattern lottery. The flag is set to on, and if the small hit is won by the second special design lottery, the flags in the special map 2 area are configured to turn on. As a result, even when a small hit is won in duplicate in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily stored.

Next, referring to FIG. 211, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that a determination process for setting the special variation flag to ON after selecting a variation pattern is added, and a process for selecting a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning is added. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes of S551 to S555 as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are performed, and then it is determined whether the variation pattern selected this time is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). Then, when it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or more (S582: Yes), the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122) is performed, and the processing of S556 to S559, which is the same as the processing, is completed. Also, when it is determined that the variation time is not 30 seconds or more (S582: No), the process of S583 is skipped, and the processes of S556 to S559, which are the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122), are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the processing of S551 (S551: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing is executed (S581), and then the processing of S553 is performed. The contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581), the same processing contents as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above are performed, the target being the second special symbol to the first special symbol.

When the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S591: No), the processing of the same content as S1377 to S1379 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599). , and then terminate this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small hit in the process of S591 (S591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, the small hit type is selected by referring to the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf (S593). Next, the processing of S1374 to S1376 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1277 in FIG. 179) and the processing of the same content are executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S594 to S596), and the processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288) will be described. FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288). This first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S851; No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a deviation variation, the time saving update processing 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) executed when the special figure 1 deviation stop processing 8 (S 892), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), a process for determining whether the second special symbol variation is executed (S891), and when the second special symbol variation is not performed, the processing of S853 to S855 is configured to be skipped, and various flags and various counters are set based on the stop of the big hit variation (start of the jackpot game). The difference is that the processing (S893 in FIG. 213) is executed to add the special fluctuation flag 203ga to the clearing processing (S870 in FIG. 175), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the contents of the special figure 1 deviating stop process 8 (S892) will be described. Figure 214 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 omission stop processing 8 (S892). In this special figure 1 out stop processing 8 (S892), the same processing as the special figure 2 out stop processing 7 (see S1584 in FIG. 181) of the seventh embodiment described above is performed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. omitted.

Here, the small winning process 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 out stop process 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process 8 (S1972). This small winning process 8 (S1972) is different from the small winning process (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the control process executed according to the winning small winning type is different. Specifically, when a specific small win type (small wins B, D, E) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation being executed is different.

When the small winning process 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small winning type set for the current first special symbol variation is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small winning type is "small winning A or small winning C" (S1981). If it is determined that it is "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 2 is fluctuating (during the second special symbol fluctuation) (S1684), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 is fluctuating (S1684: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol fluctuation is interrupted (temporary stop) is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set. Set the special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating ON (S1686) and terminate this process. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 fluctuation (S1684: No), skip the processes of S1685 and S1686 and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1981, if it is determined that it is not "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit E8" (S1982). medium) is determined (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the variable probability state (S1688: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689).

Next, it is determined whether the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if the variation pattern set for the second special symbol variation being executed is not a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more, or if the second special symbol variation is not executed (S1983: No), the process proceeds to S1684 described above. Also, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 in the process of S1688, i.e., if it is determined that the present is not in the variable probability state (S1688: No), or if the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON in the process of S1689, that is, if it is determined that it is the final variation of the variable probability state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped, and the above-described S1684 is skipped. Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON in the process of S1983 (S1983: Yes), the process proceeds to S1692. Also, in the processing of S1982, if it is determined that it is not "small hit E8", that is, if it is determined that it is "small hit B8" or "small hit D8" (S1982: No), skip the processing of S1688 to S1690 and move to the processing of S1983.

In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small winning processing (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and then the special variation flag 203ga is set to OFF (S1184), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed (when special processing is executed for the special symbol variation being executed), the processing content is determined according to the contents of the special symbol variation being executed. More specifically, when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when a special symbol indicating a small winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed is discriminated, and if the determination result is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol variation being performed is discarded, and if it is other than the specific variation pattern, the other special symbol variation being performed can be interrupted. It is configured as follows. In other words, when a specific condition for executing a special process is established for the special symbol variation being executed, the processing contents of the special process are determined by referring to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if the specific condition is satisfied, only "interruption" is determined as the special processing, and when the variable probability state is set, "interruption" or "discard" may be set as in the eighth embodiment described above. By varying the determined contents of the special processing according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to provide diversity in the game characteristics in each game state.

Further, the content of the special processing to be determined may be changed according to the type of the special pattern that satisfies the specific condition. For example, it may be configured such that "discard" is more likely to be decided when the specific condition is satisfied with the second special pattern than when the specific condition is satisfied with the first special pattern. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is less likely to be established than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), and when the specific condition is established, the condition for determining "discard" (in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern during execution is 30 seconds or more). 32 seconds or longer). As a result, the content of the special processing can be changed depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when a specific condition for executing a special process for the special symbol variation being executed is established, the processing content of the special process is determined by referring to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. In the case of , the condition for determining "abandon" (in the eighth embodiment, the variation pattern during execution is 30 seconds or more) may be changed depending on the case of disengagement. By configuring in this way, the easiness of "discarding" can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, so that the game suitable for the design idea can be easily executed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) for winning the jackpot, different variation patterns are selected for an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, a variable jackpot) is executed and a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) is performed.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, a variation pattern in which a variation time of less than 30 seconds is set is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous big win type than when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is small, and a variation pattern in which the variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as the variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous big win type is configured to be more easily selected.

By constructing in this way, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is large, it is possible to make it easier to execute a big win game (for example, variable probability big win) advantageous to the player (difficult to discard by winning a small win) and to make it difficult to execute a big win game (for example, normal big win) to the player (easier to cancel by winning a small win) than when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is small. That is, it is possible to vary the proportion of the probability variable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to ambitiously accumulate the number of reserved balls of special symbols while expecting that an advantageous jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is won in either the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the big win can be canceled by the other small win, so that the percentage of the probability variable big win at the time of winning the big win can be surely changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbols.

In the eighth embodiment described above, as a condition (specific condition) that triggers execution of special processing (interruption or cancellation) for one special symbol variation (for example, first special symbol variation), the other special symbol variation (for example, second special symbol variation) shows a condition that is established when a specific small hit is won. A specific condition may be established when it is determined that the power supplied to the dick machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power is temporarily turned off). Further, the game method executed by the player may be configured to satisfy a specific condition when detecting an illegal game method (for example, a game method in which a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetic force is provided and the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force, or a game method in which an impact detection sensor is provided for detecting an impact on the pachinko machine 10 and the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (when the variable probability state and the time saving state are set), the special symbol variation executed is discarded (forced stop). Specifically, in a game machine configured to set a latent probability state when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) while the probability variable state is set, when the special symbol fluctuation executed during the probability variable state is discarded (forcibly stopped), the number of time saving times (variable probability frequency) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode (for example, the value displayed in the display area HR2 in FIG. 161 (a)) for indicating the number of times of time reduction (variable number of times) until the probability variation state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of times of time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has been canceled without updating the number of times of time saving. In this case, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of times of reduced time (probability variable number of times) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the display mode may be restored based on the discarding of the special symbol variation (for example, if the number of reduced time remaining is displayed, the number of times of reduced time remaining is added, and if the number of times of shortened time that has elapsed is displayed, subtraction is performed).

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation reaches 100 times, and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the second special symbol variation is executed five times) are set as transition conditions (end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for terminating the high-probability state of normal symbols) for shifting from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. Therefore, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, by displaying only the end condition (for example, "5" corresponding to five times of the second special symbol variation) that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the pachinko machine 10 configured to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner, even if the first special symbol variation is executed immediately after the probability variation state is set, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed. It is configured not to update. Then, when the first special symbol variation is further performed in a state in which the first special symbol variation is performed 95 times after the probability variation state is set (when the 96th first special symbol variation is performed), display control is performed to update the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4". In this way, by determining whether or not to update the display of the number of reduced working hours displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol variation is executed during the variable probability (time reduction) state, the period until the variable probability state ends can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 223. FIG. The ninth embodiment is greatly different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a reservation storage function is provided also for the second special symbol, that the performance mode of the performance (DUSH performance) executed during the latent state (during the RUSH game) is changed, and that the variation patterns of the big hit type, the small hit type, and the normal pattern are different.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of special symbols reserved for indicating the number of reserved memories of special symbols (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are those that display a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special figure reserved number on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the number of reserved special figures to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, a prefetching process (preliminary discrimination process) is executed for the winning information of the reserved and stored special patterns, and the prefetching result (preliminary discrimination result) is changed in the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern (for example, the color or effect of the reserved pattern is changed, or the design of the reserved pattern is changed) to execute a pending change performance to notify the player.

However, in the above-described pending change performance, the number of pending patterns to be subjected to the pending change performance is determined according to the number of acquired special figure pending balls, so when the number of special figure pending balls is small, the pending change performance is more difficult to execute than when the number of special figure pending balls is large. In other words, as long as the production using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of acquired special reserved balls is executed, the production effect of the prefetched production (holding change production) for notifying the player of the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) according to the number of acquired special reserved balls is varied. There is a problem in that the player feels dissatisfied with the decrease in the performance effect of the game, and the desire to play the game decreases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, according to the result of the pre-reading process (preliminary discrimination process) executed for the winning information of the reserved and stored special symbols, regardless of the number of the acquired special symbol reserved balls, the pre-reading effect (icon effect) for varying the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. As a result, even when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same look-ahead performance as when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is the upper limit according to the result of look-ahead. Therefore, even a player who cannot obtain a lot of special reserved balls can be provided with a look-ahead performance with a high performance effect, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is configured to be the upper limit (4) of the number of special symbols reserved balls that can be retained and stored (the number of retained memories of the second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state), and the reserved symbols for indicating the number of acquired special symbols retained balls are not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (displayed so that the player cannot distinguish). By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that the specific pattern displayed by the icon performance is a reserved pattern for indicating the special figure reserved ball number (the reserved memory number of the second special pattern mainly executed during the latent definite state). It is possible to suppress the decrease in the game motivation of a player who cannot obtain many special figure reserved balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead result is a specific result (for example, a big win in which a latent state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol pending balls that can be reserved and stored (the number of reserved and stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player who had the illusion that the specific symbols displayed by the icon performance to the player were reserved symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) executed for the reserved and stored special symbol winning information, the number of opening times of the attacker to be released in the small winning game is determined, and the display number of the specific symbol is determined based on the determination result. And it is configured to vary the number of times the attacker is released in one small win game according to the type of the won small win. Furthermore, as a part of the big winning game executed when the big winning is won, the same attacker release operation as in the small winning game is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small winning games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in this embodiment, the player is notified that the period during which the specific symbols are displayed is the period during which the latent state (RUSH game) is not terminated. That is, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that the latent definite state will be set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, every time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding production content in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 216 to FIG. 219, the characteristic effect contents among the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Concretely, the content of the icon effect for variably displaying the specific symbols executed during the latent certainty state (during the RUSH game) will be described. This icon effect is a effect of variably displaying the number of specific symbols (icons) based on the result of prefetching of the acquired second special symbol pending storage (special symbol 2 pending).

First, with reference to FIG. 216(a), the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the latent state (RUSH game) is set immediately after will be described. FIG. 216(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game before rushing into the RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the latent probability jackpot (jackpot in which the latent probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game) is won in a state where the probability state is not set, that is, when the first win is entered into the RUSH game and when the probability jackpot is won in the state where the probability state is set, the performance mode displayed during the ending period is made different.

During the ending period when the RUSH game is entered for the first time, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and a display area HR70 is formed in the center. An icon 871 representing a carrot and acquisition number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216(a)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH will continue as long as there are icons" are displayed.

In this embodiment, when the RUSH game is executed, the icon 871 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the content of the game to be executed during the RUSH game is suggested to the player based on the number of displayed icons 871 and the display mode. This icon 871 is configured such that the display number and display mode are variably set based on the information (lottery information, prefetch information) related to the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the RUSH game.

As described above, in the present embodiment configured so that the icon effect is executed during the RUSH game, the icon effect initial display screen shown in FIG. 216 (a) is displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game that triggers the entry into the RUSH game, and the four icons 871 are displayed regardless of the number of held balls of the second special symbol at that time and the look-ahead result. Thus, even if the RUSH game is executed in any state, the performance mode of the icon performance at the time of entering the RUSH game can be made the same, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed from being lowered by the performance mode of the icon performance at the time of starting the RUSH game.

In the present embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon presentation. However, the number of icons 871 to be displayed at the start of the icon presentation is not limited to four. In this case, the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon presentation may be other than four when a specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon presentation, for example, when there is a big win advantageous to the player in the look-ahead result for the reserved ball of the second special symbol (potential jackpot in which the probability state is set again). It is preferable to configure so that a smaller number of icons 871 are displayed.

When the RUSH game is started, the icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a pending icon 873 in the display area HR71, and an effect using the pending icon 873 and a rabbit-like character 811 is executed in the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216(b), in this embodiment, the upper limit display number of the hold icon 873 is configured to be the same as the hold upper limit number of the second special symbols in which the lottery is mainly executed during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four pending icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

As for the suspended icons 873a to 873d, a first suspended icon 873a, a second suspended icon 873b, a third suspended icon 873c, and a fourth suspended icon 873d are displayed in order from the top of the display area HR, and are used for presentation in order from the first suspended icon 873a. Then, when the first pending icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in rendering, the remaining second pending icon 873b to fourth pending icon 873d are shifted and displayed to the previous pending icon. Also, when a new pending icon is acquired, it is additionally displayed in order after the pending icon already displayed.

In this embodiment, the small winning game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is read in advance, and the number of pending icons is determined based on the result of the reading in advance. The number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is varied in the small winning game according to the winning small winning type, and further, even when the big winning winning is won, the big winning game is executed in which the second attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times in a part of the winning big winning winning type.

That is, for example, even when the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is 2, if the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is 4 times as a result of pre-reading (preliminary determination) for the 2 special figure 2 reserved balls, it is configured so that 4 can be set as the number of display of the reserved icon. By constructing in this way, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be determined regardless of the number of actually obtained special 2 reserved balls, so that even in a state where many special 2 reserved balls are not obtained, an interesting icon performance can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217(a), the contents of the effect of consuming the pending icon in the icon effect during the RUSH game will be described. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the small winning game is executed, the character 811 eats the reserved icon 873a, and a prize ball display mode 874 showing the prize balls won in the small winning game is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217(a), the prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in the display mode of "+15" indicating that the second attacker 1650 wins one ball and there are 15 prize balls. In addition, the characters "itadakimasu" are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect in which the character 811 eats the pending icon 873a will be executed.

In FIG. 217(a), the display screen displayed during the execution of the small winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened once is described as an example. Therefore, the character 811 picks up only one reserved icon 873a. However, for example, when the small winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is executed, the character 811 eats two reserved icons. Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in some small winning games or some big winning games, winning games in which the second attacker 1650 is opened multiple times are executed, and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is larger in the big winning games than in the small winning games.

In other words, as the effect shown in FIG. 217(a), if the effect in which the character 811 eats a plurality of reserved icons is executed, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the effect of consuming the reserved icons (reducing the number of reserved icons) among the icon effects executed during the RUSH game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the small winning game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the big winning game are configured to be the same. Therefore, by grasping the contents of the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the winning game, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the type of the current winning game (small winning game, big winning game).

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved icons 873 corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one digest effect, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small winning game being executed is displayed. By configuring in this way, the number of pending icons displayed at the start of the digestion effect can be increased, so that the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot.

Further, the number of pending icons used in the digestion effect may be varied during the execution period of the digestion effect. As a result, the number of reserved icons can be increased at any timing, so that even when an icon performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed, a game can be played while expecting that the number of reserved icons used for performance during the digest performance period will increase during the digest performance period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217(b), as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game, the effect contents of the acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of reserved icons have been acquired will be described. FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of reserved icons have been acquired as an icon effect executed during a RUSH game. In this embodiment, an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed, similar to the effect executed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 162(b)). Then, it is configured to execute an acquisition effect in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of reserved icons are displayed from the treasure box.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), the treasure box 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and the display area HR70 displays an icon 871 in the shape of a carrot and acquisition number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217(b)). Then, the characters "get carrots" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect is executed to inform the player that the number of displayed pending icons has increased.

As described above, in the icon effect of the present embodiment, the number of displayed reserved icons is controlled so that the number of reserved icons does not become 0 while the RUSH game continues, and acquisition effects for increasing the number of reserved icons can be executed at various timings. Then, it is configured to suggest that the more the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition effect, the more advantageous the game will be executed for the player. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the number of display of the pending icon can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increasing the number of special figure 2 pending balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218(a), the contents of the continuous effect executed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the continuous effect executed during the icon effect. In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of variation of the second special symbol, continuous production is configured to be executable. This continuous performance has a pattern executed for a variation period of one second special symbol variation and a pattern executed over a plurality of second special symbol variations, and the performance using all the displayed reserved icons is executed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed when four (upper limit number) of reserved icons are displayed. When the continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. Then, behind the last reserved icon 873d, a V-icon 873y indicating winning of a big win (winning of a big win type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "I've eaten up all the carrots! You might find a treasure inside" are displayed to show the contents of the continuous effects to the player.

In other words, when the continuous effect is executed, it is suggested whether all the reserved icons are consumed and the jackpot is won or the reserved icons are not completely consumed and the RUSH game is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 218(b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from among the pending icons being executed before the last pending icon is executed while the continuous effect is being executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 218(b), description will be given of the effect contents when the V-icon 873z is displayed during the continuous effect. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the V-icon 873z is acquired without consuming all the pending icons during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 218(b), an effect of discovering the V-icon 873z from the third reserved icon 873c is executed while the third reserved icon 873c is being consumed (during eating). In this case, the fourth pending icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71 because the fourth pending icon 873d has not been completed. When the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game is executed while the reserved icon is displayed, so that the player is informed that the latent definite state (RUSH game) will be executed again after the jackpot game is finished at this point.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the effect in which a special icon different from the normal reserved icon is displayed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during icon rendering. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of pending icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of special figure 2 pending balls and the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated by prefetching.

When the number of pending icons that can be displayed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 4 or more), that is, when the display upper limit number is exceeded, a special icon is displayed. When the second special symbol variation being executed or the result of the second special symbol look-ahead includes a big win advantageous to the player, the number of reserved icons that can be displayed easily exceeds a predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 219, when the number of displayable reserved icons is calculated to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a special icon 873x resembling a gorgeous carrot appears in the treasure box 812 in the acquisition presentation, and the characters "Lucky, SP carrot get" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In the present embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is stipulated to be four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the number of displayable reserved icons exceeds four, special icons are displayed to execute an effect that raises the player's expectations for a big win while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71. In this case (when a special condition is established), the upper limit number of pending icons that can be simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71 may be set to be greater than the upper limit number of the pending balls of the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the player who has recognized that the reserved icon indicates the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is displayed with a number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, thereby executing an unexpected presentation. Furthermore, when the number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning a big win can be increased, so that the performance with a high degree of expectation for the big win can be executed for the player by using the performance with unexpectedness.

Above, with reference to Figures 216 to 219, the various effect screens executed during the characteristic effect (icon effect) performed in the ninth embodiment have been described, but without being limited to this, for example, in a state in which the RUSH game is being executed, when the number of special figures 2 pending becomes 0, one or more pending icons may be displayed, and a pseudo-fluctuation effect using the pending icon may be executed without being involved in the result of the special symbol lottery, or the pending icon may be hidden. can be configured to

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pending icon, a display mode imitating a normal carrot (see the pending icon 873a in FIG. 217(a)) and a display mode imitating a luxurious carrot (see the special icon 873x in FIG. 219) are configured to be settable, but other display modes may be settable. and a third display mode to be set. In addition, in order to additionally display a large number of pending icons at once, it may be configured to execute a reduction effect in which a large number of pending icons are consumed at once.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 223. FIG. In the ninth embodiment, a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 are different from the above-described seventh embodiment. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment has will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd. This jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd is different from the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the seventh embodiment described above, in which the release target of the jackpot operation defined for the jackpot types (jackets A to C) associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the time reduction counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends are different, and the type of jackpot type associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). is increased, and otherwise the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot A9" is defined as the jackpot type. Since this "jackpot A9" is the same jackpot type as the "jackpot A7" of the above-described seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, "jackpot B9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". This "jackpot B9" is different from the above-described "jackpot B7" of the seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends is changed, and the rest is the same.

Specifically, when a ``jackpot B9'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time-reduction counter 203h is set to 100, and when the ``jackpot B9'' is won in the variable probability state, the value of the time-reduction counter 203h is set to 50. On the other hand, when "jackpot 9" is won in the probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, the game shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state. On the other hand, when "jackpot B9" is won in the latent certainty state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the big win is the most advantageous latent certainty state. In addition, even when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set to be more advantageous to the player when the ``big win B9'' is won in the variable probability state than when the ``big win B9'' is won in the normal state, so that the variable probability state is set to be smaller in the case of winning in the variable probability state than in the case of winning in the normal state.

With this configuration, the player can easily shift to the most advantageous game state by shifting from the normal state, which is the initial game state, to a different game state, so that the player can be motivated to play the game aiming at the most advantageous game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, "jackpot C9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot C9" is different from the above-described "jackpot C7" of the seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends is changed, and the rest is the same.

Specifically, when a ``jackpot C9'' is won in a normal state, a variable probability state and a potential probability state, that is, when the ``jackpot C9'' is won, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set game state. That is, when "jackpot C9" is won, the game state (probability state) most advantageous to the player is always set after the jackpot game ends, and it becomes the jackpot type most advantageous to the player. In addition, in the state in which the probability state is set, the value of "jackpot B9" and "jackpot C9" is the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio of shifting to the most advantageous game state (potential state) is different between when the normal state and the variable probability state are set and when the potential state is set. It is configured as follows.

Further, as described above, the normal state and the variable probability state in which the rate of transition to the latent certainty state is set to 20% are both configured to shift to the variable probability state at a rate of 45%. By constructing in this way, even if the transition rate to the most advantageous game state (probability state) for the player after the end of the big win game is set to be the same for a plurality of game states as the game state set at the time of winning the big win, the degree of expectation for transition to the potential state can be made different for each game state set at the time of winning the big win.

Next, the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be explained. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four types of jackpot types (jackets D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special drawing 2) are defined, and the contents of the opening operation of the jackpot game are varied according to the selected jackpot type.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and "jackpot D9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with each other. This "jackpot D9" is a jackpot type in which the same content as the "jackpot D7" of the above-described seventh embodiment is defined. "Jack E9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 69". This "jackpot E9" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the completion of the jackpot, the probability variable state of the special symbol is set. In the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, when the "jackpot E9" is won, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when "jackpot C9" is won, the game state (probability state) most advantageous to the player is always set after the jackpot game ends, which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E9'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E9'' is 35% (35/100).

"Jack F9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89". This "jackpot F9" is a jackpot (9 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 9 rounds, and in the 1st round (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds and the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds from the 2nd round (R) to the 9th round (R). It should be noted that, when the "jackpot F9" is won in the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, when "jackpot F9" is won, the same release operation as the small win game is executed as the first round. That is, in the prefetching of the second special symbol, in addition to winning the jackpot, the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is calculated once. Thus, in the icon performance for determining the number of display of reserved icons based on the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 (the number of opening times of the small winning game), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the pattern suggesting the winning of the small winning and the pattern suggesting the winning of the big winning, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, in the "jackpot F9", nine rounds of the jackpot game are defined such that the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened is the same as in the above-described "jackpot E9". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650 .

In this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small winning game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big winning game is executed after the second round (R). and an opening operation for opening for 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified. Therefore, for example, when the first symbol display device 37 is provided with notification means for notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed (e.g., means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting an LED lamp), the number of rounds to be notified by the notification means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type based on the notification contents of the notification means.

"Jackpot G9" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". This "jackpot G9" has 11 rounds of the jackpot, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and from the 4th round (R) to the 11th round (R), the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds. In the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, when the "jackpot G9" is won, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, when "jackpot G9" is won, the same release operation as the small win game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the prefetching of the second special symbol, in addition to winning the jackpot, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated three times. Thus, in the icon performance for determining the number of display of reserved icons based on the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 (the number of times of opening the small winning game), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the pattern suggesting the winning of the small winning and the pattern suggesting the winning of the big winning, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is calculated three times as a lottery result of one time of the second special pattern lottery, even when the number of balls reserved for the special figure 2 is small, the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 can be calculated to be large, and the performance mode of the icon performance can be diversified. Also, in the "jackpot G9", 11 rounds of jackpot games are defined such that the number of openings of the first attacker 650 is the same as in the above-described "jackpot E9". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650 .

In this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small winning game is executed in the 1st round (R) to the 3rd round (R), and the actual big winning game is executed after the 4th round (R). , the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds may be executed. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified. Therefore, for example, when the first symbol display device 37 is provided with notification means for notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed (e.g., means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting an LED lamp), the number of rounds to be notified by the notification means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type based on the notification contents of the notification means.

Next, with reference to Fig.221 (a), the content of small hit classification selection 9 table 202hf is demonstrated. FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the types of small hit types are increased, and the small hit operation content (open operation content of the small hit game) defined for each small hit type, and the processing content of the first special symbol variation that is executed when the small hit game is executed. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

This small winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table referred to when selecting a small winning type after winning a small winning in a special symbol lottery like the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff described above, and is defined to select four types of small winning types, "small winning A9" to "small winning D9", corresponding to the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5.

When a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, the content of the small win operation and the processing content for the special symbol variation during execution can be changed according to the selected small win type. In addition, in this embodiment, even when any small hit type is selected, it is configured to execute the interruption process for the special symbol variation being executed. This suspension process is a process of temporarily suspending the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed (for example, until the small winning game ends). Since this interruption process is the same as that of the above-described seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff are specifically described, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with the "small hit A9" in the range of "0 to 59", the "small hit B9" in the range of "60 to 79", the "small hit C9" in the range of "80 to 89", and the "small hit D9" in the range of "90 to 99". . Since the range of values that the small winning type counter C5 can take is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small winning A9" at the time of winning the small winning is 60% (60/100), the rate of selecting "small winning B9" is 20% (20/100), the rate of selecting "small winning C9" is 10% (10/100), and the rate of selecting "small winning D9" is 10% (10/10). 0).

When "small win A9" is selected, a small win game is executed to open the variable winning device (first attacker 650) for 1.5 seconds, when "small win B9" is selected, a small winning game is executed to open the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 for 0.5 seconds, and when "small win C9" is selected, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. When the small winning game to be executed twice is executed and "small winning C9" is selected, the small winning game to open the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 for 0.5 seconds three times is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, according to the small winning type selected when winning the small winning, the small winning game to open the first attacker 650 mainly opened during the big winning game and the small winning game to open the second attacker 2650 mainly opened during the small winning game are configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the big winning game may have been executed immediately after the small winning game was executed. The player can be made to think that. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed with the pending icon displayed in the potential state, the icon performance is executed so that the potential state is set again after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, if a 'small win A' is won in a state where the reserved icon is displayed, the player can be made happy and sad that an advantageous big win game will be executed when the first attacker 650 is released.

Further, when ``small winning B9'' to ``small winning D9'' are selected, a small winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed, but the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is varied for each selected small winning type. That is, it is configured so that the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 calculated for one special symbol lottery can be varied. As a result, when calculating the number of displayed pending icons in the icon effect, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be greatly deviated from the number of special-figure 2 pending balls and, by extension, the number of winning small hits. Therefore, the display number of the pending icon determined based on the number of times of opening of the second attacker 1650 can be easily displayed without synchronizing with the special figure 2 pending ball number.

In this embodiment, according to the selected small winning type, either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is configured to perform a small winning game that opens. However, it is not limited to this, for example, in one small winning game, an opening operation that sequentially opens the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the opening action executed as one small winning game is continuously executed a plurality of times of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221(b), the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be described. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg differs from the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above in that the variation pattern of the normal symbol selected during the latent probability state is the same as during the normal state, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

As shown in the normal figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in this embodiment, during the probability variation state, the ball fired by the right hitting game is configured to enter the right electric accessory 164 as in the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, a ball fired in a right-handed game during the latent probability state is configured to be less likely to enter the right electric accessory 164 as compared with the above-described seventh embodiment. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, the game property is such that a ball is entered into the right electric accessory 164 even in the latent state to make it easier to increase the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 222(a), the contents of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the ninth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment in that an icon display number selection table 222ha and a continuous effect selection table 222hb are provided. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referred to when selecting the number of displayed pending icons displayed in the icon effect described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. 223(a). FIG. 223(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the number of displayed icons that can be selected (the number of reserved icons displayed) is defined based on the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the count value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved balls counter 223c) and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Specifically, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and when the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "5 (special)" is defined as the number of displayed icons. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 pending number is "1", the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb does not become "6" or more, so the corresponding value is not defined.

In addition, when the number of special figures 2 pending is "2" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 2" is defined as the number of icon display, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "1 to 4" is defined as the number of icon display, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 ~", as the number of icon display. "5 (special)" is defined.

When the special figure 2 pending number is "3" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 3" is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5". 4” is stipulated.

Then, when the special figure 2 pending number is "4" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 4" is defined as the icon display number, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "3 to 4" is defined as the icon display number, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 ~", as the icon display number. "4" is specified.

Here, when the icon display number "5 (special)" is selected, an icon display number larger than the upper limit number of special-figure 2 reserved balls "4" is selected, and in this embodiment, the upper limit display number of the reserved icon is "4".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference between the number of special-figure 2 pending balls and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb, that is, as the look-ahead result of one special-figure 2 pending, the more the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is calculated, the more easily the special icon is displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, when the number of special 2 pending balls is large (for example, 3, 4), the number of special 2 pending balls to be prefetched increases, so the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is more likely to be calculated multiple times as a result of the prefetching of one special 2 pending than the result of prefetching executed when the number of special 2 pending balls is small. is not set, and "4" is easily set. Then, when the icon display number is "4", it is configured to facilitate the execution of a continuous effect, which will be described later. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large.

Also, even if the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is small (for example, 2), if the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is large as a result of the look-ahead, that is, if the small hit C9 or the small hit D9 (see FIG. 221 (a)) is won, or if the big hit G9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the icon display number larger than the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is selected.

On the other hand, even if the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is large, if the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is small as a look-ahead result, that is, if the lottery result of the second special pattern is lost, or if a small hit A9 (see FIG. 221 (a)) is won, or if a big hit D9 or big hit E9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the icon display number less than the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is selected.

With such a configuration, the display number of reserved icons used for icon performance can be determined regardless of the actual number of special-figure 2 reserved balls, so that an interesting look-ahead performance can be executed regardless of the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is made to think that the reserved icon is a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2, and an interesting look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of the actual number of reserved balls of the special figure 2. It may be configured to display the reserved symbols shown on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . In this case, the player can grasp the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the number of display of reserved icons, so that, for example, when many reserved icons are displayed in a state where the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is small, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, when winning a jackpot type (jackpot F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is calculated, the probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, so that all the big wins that can be predicted based on the number of display of the pending icons are jackpots in which the probability state is set. Therefore, since the prediction based on the performance mode of the icon performance (reserved icon display) is the prediction of winning a big win advantageous to the player, the player can be more interested than the prediction including the winning of a big win disadvantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big win is won in which the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is not calculated, that is, when a big win (jackpot D9, jackpot E9) in which the second attacker 1650 is not opened during the big win game is executed, the ratio of setting the latent state after the big win game is 50%. Therefore, even if the big win is won in the case that the performance mode of the icon performance is a performance mode in which the big win cannot be predicted (for example, a state in which the number of display of reserved icons is small), the possibility of setting the latent state after the end of the big win game can be left. In this case, a presentation is executed to agitate whether or not the reserved icon is completely consumed before the big winning game is executed, and if even one reserved icon is displayed at the age when the big winning game is executed, it is configured to inform that a latent state is set (the RUSH game is continued) after the big winning game is finished.

In this way, by using the reserved icon displayed in the icon effect for various purposes, it is possible to execute more various effects and enhance the effect of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 222, the description continues. The continuous performance selection table 222hb is a data table referred to when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous performance described above with reference to FIG. This continuous production selection table 222hb defines whether or not continuous production is executed based on the winning information (special figure 2 winning information) related to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

Here, the contents specified in the continuous effect selection table 222hb will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223(b), in the continuous effect selection table 222hb, among the special figure 2 winning information, the execution area winning information (winning prize information used in the second special symbol lottery this time), the winning prize information in the reservation (reservation area), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc. It is stipulated that the continuous effect can be selected only in a state where four pending icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

Specifically, when the winning information included in the execution area is a jackpot, that is, when the second special symbol variation to be executed this time is a jackpot variation, if the jackpot type is "jackpot F9, jackpot G9", execution of continuous performance A (execution A) is defined, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot D9, jackpot E9", non-execution of continuous performance is associated with the range of the acquired performance counter 223f being "0 to 89". , "90 to 99" are defined in association with the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B). When the execution area contains prize winning information related to the winning of the jackpot, since the jackpot game is executed after the second special pattern variation of this time, the presence or absence of execution of the continuous performance is defined without considering the prize winning information stored in the reservation area.

Here, in the continuous performance of the pattern of finally winning the jackpot, it is determined which of the first result of getting the V-icon 873y by consuming all the reserved icons and the second result of getting the V-icon 873z without consuming all the reserved icons is determined as the performance result of the continuous performance. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot to be executed in this continuous effect is a variable probability jackpot (jackpots E9 to G9), and if it is determined that it is not a variable probability jackpot (jackpot D9) (in the case of execution B), the first result of extinguishing all the pending icons is set, and if it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, a lottery (result selection lottery) is executed to determine whether to set the first result or the second result, and the result selection lottery is performed. It is configured to set the type of effect result based on the result. By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the latent definite state is not set after the big winning game is finished despite the fact that the big winning game is executed with the reserved icon remaining.

In addition, even when a variable probability jackpot is won (execution A), the first result can be set as the performance result of the continuous performance, so even if the continuous performance of getting the V icon 873y is executed, the player can play the game with expectations until the end. When a big win game corresponding to the variable probability big win is executed in a state where all the reserved icons are consumed, it is preferable to execute the performance of displaying the reserved icon by the end of the big win game triggered by the establishment of a predetermined occurrence condition during the big win game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player who is playing the jackpot game to quickly grasp the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the method of establishing the generation condition is not limited to this, and for example, a generation condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls enter the variable ball entry means (the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650) that is opened during the big win game, or a condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable ball entry means different from the variable ball entry means that is opened during the big win game.

Returning to FIG. 223(b), the description is continued. If the execution area of the special figure 2 winning information contains winning information indicating small winning, and the winning information is ``small winning B9'' to ``small winning D9'', if there is winning information indicating the kind of big winning of ``big winning E'', ``big winning F'', and ``big winning G'' in the reservation, the execution (execution B) of the continuous production B is associated with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of ``0 to 69'', and the range of ``70 to 99''. is defined in association with non-execution of the continuous effect. In addition, when there is no prize winning information indicating any one of the ``jackpot E'', ``jackpot F'', and ``jackpot G'' in the reserve, non-execution of the continuous performance is associated with the range of the value of the performance counter 223f from ``0 to 69'', and the execution of the continuous performance C (execution C) is associated with the range of ``70 to 99''. The execution area of the special figure 2 winning information includes winning information indicating winning of a small winning, and when the winning information is 'small winning A9', non-execution of continuous presentation is stipulated regardless of the winning information stored in the reserved area.

When the execution area of the special figure 2 winning information includes the winning information indicating the winning outside, the execution of the continuous performance is defined in correspondence with the winning information indicating the jackpot type of any of ``jackpot E'', ``jackpot F'' and ``jackpot G'' in the reservation, and the non-execution of the continuous performance is defined in correspondence with the case of no prize information indicating the jackpot type of ``jackpot E'', ``jackpot F'' and ``jackpot G'' in the reservation.

As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous performance, the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed this time and the prefetch result of the second special symbol reserved and stored (winning information stored in the reservation area) are referred to, so that the continuous performance with high expectation for big win can be executed. Therefore, after grasping that a jackpot is won at the time when the continuous performance is executed, the continuous performance can be watched while paying attention to whether the performance result of the continuous performance becomes the first result or the second result, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous effect is executed only when four pending icons are displayed. And, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the larger the number of actual special figure 2 reserved balls, the easier it is for the four reserved icons to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the four pending icons are displayed, and to enhance the operation of the game. In addition, the upper limit number (4) of the reserved icons may not be displayed even when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, so that even when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the 4 reserved icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be further enhanced.

In this embodiment, the continuous performance can be executed only when four reserved icons are displayed, but without being limited to this, the continuous performance may be executed when two or more reserved icons are displayed. In this case, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous performance is determined based on the actual number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 and the result of the look-ahead. For example, only when there is winning information indicating that the player wins a big win (jackpot E9), the continuous performance may be executed in a state where there are few reserved icons. As a result, the degree of expectation for the continuous performance, that is, the degree of expectation for winning a big win advantageous to the player can be varied according to the number of display of the reserved icons at the time when the continuous performance is executed, so that the player can be interested in the timing of executing the continuous performance.

Further, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous performance based on the actual number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead result, for example, when there is prize winning information indicating that the player wins a big win (jackpot E9), as a preparatory performance for executing the continuous performance, the continuous performance may be executed after the forced increase display is executed so that the number of display of the pending icons reaches the upper limit.

223(b), the continuous effect A (execution A), the continuous effect B (execution B), and the continuous effect C (execution C) are provided as types of the continuous effect. In the execution C, an effect in which the reserved icons 873a to 873d imitating carrots cannot be digested (cannot be eaten) and the V icon cannot be acquired is executed in the continuous effect.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222(b). FIG. 222(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 174) in that an undisplayed information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a continuous rendering flag 223hd are added. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main controller 110, and stores the opening number of the second attacker 1650 extracted in the winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) (S4486 in FIG. 224). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of displayed icons based on the stored information, and then the referred information is discarded. As for the prize winning information already acquired before the latent probability state is set, the number of opening times of the second attacker 1650 is extracted for all the winning prize information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game, and the result is stored.

By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this way, it is possible to easily differentiate the timing of receiving the special symbol winning information and the timing of determining the effect mode.

The undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of pending icons that have not yet been displayed among the number of currently displayable pending icons, and the value of the counter is decremented when a new pending icon is displayed. In this embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons, a true icon effect in which the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the displayed icon number counter 223hc are increased or decreased, and a pseudo effect in which only the apparent number of pending icons is increased or decreased without increasing or decreasing the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb or the displayed icon number counter 223hc (effect that ultimately becomes the same value) are configured to be executable.

The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for counting the number of currently displayed pending icons, which is incremented when a new pending icon is displayed and decremented when the number of pending icons decreases. When displaying a new pending icon, the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are referred to determine the total number of pending icons to be displayed, and the display number is determined based on the difference between the determined total number and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc.

The continuous effect flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the continuous effect is being executed. While the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON, the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons is not executed in the icon effect.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, among the control contents of the ninth embodiment, control processing executed by the sound lamp control device will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 227. FIG. The contents of control of the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment are as follows. 691) is replaced with the setting process during RUSH (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and the setting process during RUSH 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is executed. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 224, the contents of winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning command process 9 (S4281). In this prize winning command process 9 (S4281), a process of updating information related to icon effects executed during the RUSH game and determining the number of display of pending icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effects is executed.

When the winning command process 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4482). 84). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a winning winning command.

When it is determined that there is winning information in the process of S4484 (S4484: Yes), the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is extracted based on the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) indicated by the winning information (S4485), and the value corresponding to the extracted number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, based on the information stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number and the undisplayed information storage area 223hb, the icon display number selection table 222ha is referred to and the icon display number is selected (S4487). After that, the difference between the number of displayed icons selected and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), other processes are executed (S4412), and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a winning prize command is received as a prize winning command, only updating of information used for icon presentation is executed, and control for varying the number of displayed pending icons is not executed. As a result, the timing at which the number of displayed pending icons is changed can be made different from the timing at which the winning prize command is received, so that it is difficult for a player to understand when and how the number of displayed pending icons is changed. In this embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for the icon effect is only updated, and the control for changing the number of displayed pending icons is not executed. However, without being limited to this, the control for varying the number of displayed pending icons may be executed, or the control may be executed for varying the number of displayed pending icons when a predetermined lottery is executed and a prize is won.

Also, in the process of S4484, if it is determined that there is no hit information (S4484: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S4490). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (S4490: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S4492), the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated according to the mode of the pseudo effect (S4493), and a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S4493). 4494), and the process proceeds to S4412.

If it is determined in the process of S4489 that the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489: Yes), that is, if the continuous effect is currently being performed, or if the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0 (S4404: No), that is, if the number of displayed pending icons cannot be increased, the process proceeds to S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the contents of the jackpot ending process 9 (S4954) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the content of jackpot end processing 9 (S4954). This jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is greatly different from the jackpot end processing described above in that processing for setting information on icon performance is executed based on the winning information already obtained when a RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot ends, that is, when a latent probability state is set or when a probability variable state is set.

When the jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5051: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S5052). When it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is determined (S5052: Yes), that is, when the probability variable state is set in the jackpot executed at a timing other than during the RUSH game, all the winning prize information stored in the winning prize information storage area 223b is read (S5053), the winning information (big winning information, small winning information) included in the winning prize information is extracted (S5054), and the second attacker 165 based on the extracted winning information. The number of opening times of 0 is calculated (S5055). Then, the calculated total number of second attackers (total release number) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a potential jackpot (S5057), and if it is a potential jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding potential probability mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode) is set (S5058), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon number counter is set to 4 (S5060), and stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the big win is set (S5062), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that it is not a latent probability jackpot (it is a probability variable jackpot) (S5057: No), a display command for indicating the probability variable mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062.

If it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON in the process of S5051, that is, if it is a jackpot won during the RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot (S5064). set) (S5065), set the display command for RUSH corresponding to this big hit (S5066), and proceed to the process of S5062. In this case, in the processing of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. Also, when it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game continues is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, the content of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be described. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). This preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) is different from the preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 226) of the seventh embodiment described above in that a process for displaying a pending icon at the timing of transition from the variable probability state to the latent probability state is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the ready state setting process 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processes of S8001 to S8004 as the ready state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 226) are executed, then a display command for indicating the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) is set (S8051), the icon display number is set to 4 (S8052), and the displayed icon number counter is set to 4 (S8053). ), the information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S8054), and this processing ends.

That is, the same processing as the processing executed at the end of the big win in the case where the latent state is set after the end of the big win game is executed. As a result, the initial display of the icon production (the state in which four reserved icons are displayed regardless of the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls) can be unified regardless of the occasion when the latent certainty state is set. Therefore, it is possible to unify the control processing for changing the effect mode of the icon effect according to the timing of transition to the latent definite state, so that the load of the control processing can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 227, the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In this RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting the effect mode of the icon effect to be executed according to the second special symbol variation executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH middle setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651), and if it is 4 (S8651: Yes), the continuous effect selection table 222hb is referred to select the continuous effect (S8652), and it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (S4453). If it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the selected continuous effect is set (S4454), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated in correspondence with the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous effect. If it is determined in the process of S4453 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (S8653: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8651 that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (S8656: Yes), the effect mode of a pseudo effect that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S8658), the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated according to the mode of the pseudo effect (S8659), and a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S8659). 8660), the process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S8655 that the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655: Yes), that is, if the continuous effect is currently being performed, or if the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0, that is, if the number of displayed pending icons cannot be increased, this process is terminated without setting the pseudo effect.

<Regarding Modifications of the Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment described above will be described. In the icon effect executed in the ninth embodiment described above, continuous effect can be executed based on the look-ahead result. Then, the performance mode of the continuous performance is determined when the continuous performance is set. Concretely, as a result of the continuous performance, the type of performance mode such as the performance mode to execute so as to leave the reserved icons or the performance mode to execute so as to consume all the reserved icons is determined in advance, and the performance corresponding to the type is configured to be executed. By constructing in this manner, there is no difference between the performance result of the continuous performance and the actual game result, and the processing load during the continuous performance can be reduced, but there is a problem that the performance pattern of the continuous performance cannot be diversified.

On the other hand, in this modified example, at the start of the jackpot game targeted for the continuous performance, the performance mode of the continuous performance is varied based on the type of the winning big win and the number of remaining reserved icons. By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the continuous performance can be set by dividing the performance mode into, for example, the first half period until the start of the big win game and the second half period after the start of the big win game, so that the performance pattern of the continuous performance can be easily diversified.

Further, in this modified example, processing for increasing the number of displayed reserved icons can be executed after the start of the jackpot game, so even if a performance mode in which all reserved icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous performance is set, the number of displayed reserved icons can be increased during the jackpot game when the winning jackpot type is the potential jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the performance mode of the first half period of the performance pattern of the continuous performance, and to facilitate the diversification of the performance pattern.

Furthermore, in this modified example, it is configured so that the continuous effect progresses in accordance with the opening action of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, although the second attacker 1650 is released in the big winning game, the player can be made to think that the small winning game is being executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the ninth embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 228, control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. This modification differs from the above-described ninth embodiment in that a jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) executed at the start timing of a jackpot game is executed, and the rest is the same. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the contents of jackpot-related processing 9 (S4802).

When the jackpot related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether the jackpot start command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is received (S4901: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4902), then it is determined whether the flag 223fg during RUSH is set to ON (S4951), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4951: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952). That is, it is determined whether or not the current big win is a big win targeted for continuous production.

In the process of S4952, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), it is determined whether the current big win is a latent big win (a big win in which the latent certainty state is set after the big win game ends) (S4954), and if it is determined to be a latent big win (S4954: Yes) , the information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated in correspondence with the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 during the big win, that is, each value is updated in order to consume the number of displayed pending icons in correspondence with the opening of the second attacker 1650 executed in the jackpot game to be executed this time (S4955).

After that, a display command corresponding to the updated contents is set (S4956), and it is determined whether or not the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 after the update (S4957), and if it is determined to be 0, that is, if the number of displayed pending icons becomes 0 when the number of displayed pending icons becomes 0 (S4957) in spite of the fact that RUSH continues with the potential jackpot and the continuous performance is progressed in accordance with the release of the second attacker 1650 (S4957). An additional effect (mode) for displaying one pending icon later is set (S4958), and this process is terminated. As an additional effect mode set here, there is an effect such as carrots falling from the sky during the jackpot game. Further, although the detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot game executed during the RUSH is in progress and the reservation icon is not displayed, that is, when there is a possibility that the RUSH game will end due to the jackpot game this time, a pseudo additional performance is executed to determine whether or not the above-mentioned additional performance is executed. This pseudo-additional effect is composed of a first effect that encourages something to fall from the sky and a second effect that something other than carrots falls from the sky, like the additional effect. As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations until the end.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4954 that the current big win is not a potential big win (S4954: No), that is, when the RUSH game ends with the current big win, the production mode of consuming all the displayed pending icons is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same S4913 to S4916 processes as the jackpot related process (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed, and this process ends.

Note that the technical idea used in this modified example, that is, the technical idea of executing the effect of changing the number of displayed reserved icons at the timing of starting the jackpot game, may be used for purposes other than execution in the continuous effect.

In this modified example, since processing for increasing the number of displayed reserved icons can be executed after the start of the jackpot game, even if a performance mode in which all reserved icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous performance is set, the number of displayed reserved icons can be increased during the jackpot game when the winning jackpot type is the potential jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the performance mode of the first half period of the performance pattern of the continuous performance, and to facilitate the diversification of the performance pattern.

Furthermore, in this modified example, it is configured so that the continuous effect progresses in accordance with the opening action of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, although the second attacker 1650 is released in the big winning game, the player can be made to think that the small winning game is being executed.

As described above, in the above-described ninth embodiment, according to the result of the look-ahead processing (preliminary determination processing) executed for the reserved and stored special symbol winning information, regardless of the number of acquired special symbol reserved balls, the look-ahead effect (icon effect) for varying the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. As a result, even when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same look-ahead performance as when the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is the upper limit according to the result of look-ahead. Therefore, even a player who cannot obtain a lot of special reserved balls can be provided with a look-ahead performance with a high performance effect, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is configured to be the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be retained and stored (the number of retained and stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that the specific pattern displayed by the icon performance is a reserved pattern for indicating the special figure reserved ball number (the reserved memory number of the second special pattern mainly executed during the latent definite state). It is possible to suppress the decrease in the game motivation of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead result is a specific result (for example, a big win in which a latent state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number of special symbol pending balls that can be reserved and stored (the number of reserved and stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player who had the illusion that the specific symbols displayed by the icon performance to the player were reserved symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) executed for the reserved and stored special symbol winning information, the number of opening times of the attacker to be released in the small winning game is determined, and the display number of the specific symbol is determined based on the determination result. And it is configured to vary the number of times the attacker is released in one small win game according to the type of the won small win. Furthermore, as a part of the big winning game executed when the big winning is won, the same attacker release operation as in the small winning game is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small winning games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in this embodiment, the player is notified that the period during which the specific symbols are displayed is the period during which the latent state (RUSH game) is not terminated. That is, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that the latent definite state will be set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, every time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, the number of displayable icons (the number of pending icons) is determined in the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when the winning information command indicating the special symbol winning information is received. Instead of being executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed when an information command is received, the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the displayable icon number determination process may be executed when a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds, or a period until the number of additional winning information commands (winning commands) received reaches three) has elapsed since the last displayable icon number determination process was executed. As a result, the timing of actually receiving the winning information command (winning command) can be made different from the timing of determining the number of displayable icons based on the information included in the command, so that it is difficult to understand for which winning information (special figure reserved storage) the number of reserved icons is determined. In this way, by making the timing of determining the number of displayable icons different, it is possible to easily deviate the performance mode of the performance for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons displayed within the range of the number of displayable icons from the winning information contained in the received winning information command, so that it is possible to easily provide the player with an unexpected performance.

Furthermore, in addition to winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operable operation means (frame button 22), the number of displayable icons determination process may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an operation effect on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to cause the player to operate the operation means according to predetermined contents. As a result, the player who has correctly operated the operating means for the operation performance to be executed can be made to easily execute the icon performance based on the prize winning information included in the received prize winning information command, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition to this, it is also possible to detect that a ball has entered a general winning hole 63 or a through gate 67 provided on the game board 13, and to execute displayable icon number determination processing based on the detection result (at a predetermined probability when a ball has entered). With such a configuration, the number of displayable reserved icons is determined by a game unrelated to the special symbol lottery, so that the timing of actually receiving a winning information command (winning command) and the timing of determining the number of displayable icons based on the information included in the command can be made different for the player, making it difficult to understand for which winning information (special figure reserved storage) the number of reserved icons is determined.

In this embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons, a true icon effect in which the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the displayed icon number counter 223hc are increased and decreased, and a pseudo effect in which only the number of pending icons in appearance is increased or decreased without increasing or decreasing the values of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the values of the displayed icon number counter 223hc (resulting in the same value in the end). 13, but is not limited to this, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a pseudo effect, and if it is determined to execute a pseudo effect, a display command indicating the range of the number of pending icons to be increased or decreased in the pseudo effect and the execution of the pseudo effect is set and output to the display control device 114. When the display command indicating that the pseudo effect is to be executed is received by the display control device 114, it is included in the received display command. It may be configured to determine the mode of presentation based on the information received.

By constructing in this way, only the icon performance (true icon performance) set based on the winning information of the special symbol can be controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the processing load of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, by executing a pseudo performance of increasing/decreasing (variable) only the number of pending icons in appearance without increasing/decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the variable pattern of the number of pending icons can be diversified in the icon performance. In addition, since the pseudo performance is executed so that the final increment and decrement of the pending icon match, when setting the performance mode of the true icon performance, there is no need to care about the performance situation of the pseudo performance, and the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 263. FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing performed by the main control device 110 and the control processing performed by the voice ramp control device 113 are partially changed. It is different in that it has been changed. In addition, due to the difference described above, part of the content of the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also different. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure same as 7th Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, a brief description will be given of major differences between the tenth embodiment and the above-described seventh embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are constructed so as not to be executed in duplicate (in parallel), and the lottery for the second special pattern is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special pattern. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time saving state, variable probability state) is set rather than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state), it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In addition, it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. That is, when the game is played in the normal state which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. By constructing in this manner, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the game state to be set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting the game state with a high degree of advantage to be set.

Here, for example, when the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player among a plurality of game states, is set, if the lottery for the second special symbol, which is the lottery advantageous to the player, is not executed at all, the player's desire to play the game in the normal state, that is, the desire to play for the purpose of setting a more advantageous game state (reduction of working hours state, variable probability state) is lowered, and there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early. On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when a specific condition is established in a period in which a normal state is set, a predetermined number (up to five) of lottery rights for the second special symbol can be obtained. Concretely, when a win is won in a normal pattern lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal pattern is set, a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessary 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which the second special symbol lottery can easily be executed even in a normal state that is a game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player playing in the normal state can be made to execute a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot winning and a game aiming for a winning lottery in the normal symbol lottery, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be varied based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol stored, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as a performance mode of the special figure 2 variation performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-loss variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a win is performed in the first half period of the variation performance, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to perform a pseudo-hit variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, and the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation performance. The number of times is configured to be variable corresponding to the number of special figures 2 pending. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the variable performance of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big win. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery is conducted a plurality of times.

As a result, even when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special pattern lottery to be executed first among a plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal game per game, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the big prize because the plurality of special figure 2 reservations are obtained during the normal game per game, so that the player can play the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation more enthusiastically during the normal game per game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved number is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, as the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance, the variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the pseudo repetition of the special figure 2 variation performance in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variable performance simulating the special figure 1 variable performance is executed, the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, so that the variable performance with unexpectedness for the player can be executed.

<Regarding the Game Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine in the Tenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 229 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 157) of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and the configuration of the lower area formed on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 are different. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that the game value obtained by the player does not differ (is unlikely to occur) even if a game (left-handed game) in which balls flow down to the left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 is executed or a game (right-handed game) in which balls flow down to the right side area is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 is formed bilaterally symmetrical with respect to the vertical line of the central portion of the game board 13. In the lower region of the variable display unit 80, there is a first ball entrance 64 that can trigger a first special symbol lottery by entering a ball, a second ball entrance 640 that is provided below the first ball entrance 64 and can trigger a second special symbol lottery by entering a ball, and a second ball entrance 640. An electric accessory 640a attached to a ball entrance 640 and opened in a normal figure winning game executed when winning in a normal symbol lottery, and a V prize winning device 2650 provided in a lower position of the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a big winning game executed in a special symbol lottery are arranged.

Balls shot in a left-handed game flow down the left side area and pass through a through gate 67 provided in the left side area at a rate of 1/2, and both the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and the balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward a first ball inlet 64 provided in the lower side area by nails planted in the game board 13.例文帳に追加Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters two general ball entrances 63 . In the present embodiment, about 1/50 of the balls flowing down the left side area enter either of the two general ball entrances 63, and when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (privileges) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a rate of 1 ball per 15 balls, as in the first embodiment described above, and when a ball enters, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured such that when the electric accessory 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 229), few balls enter, and in the state where the electric accessory 640 is open (shown in black in FIG. 229), a ball is entered at a rate of about two out of the balls launched in the left-handed game and flowing down the left side area, and when a ball enters, one ball is paid as a prize ball. configured to be released. In addition, the V winning device 2650 is constructed so that almost no balls enter when the big winning game is not executed, and during the big winning game the balls enter at a rate of about 2 out of 3 balls, and when the balls enter, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the V winning device 2650 will be described. This V winning device 2650 is a variable ball entry means which is opened in a big winning game executed when a special pattern lottery is won, and is constructed so that a ball winning to the V winning device 2650 during the big winning game passes through a specific gate so that a high probability state of the special pattern can be set after the big winning game is finished. In addition, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 is likely to flow down a specific gate and a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 is difficult to flow down can be executed. ) is referred to as a variable jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which it is difficult for a ball that has entered a V winning device 2650 to flow down a specific gate, that is, a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to make the ball flow down to a specific gate even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game will be referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if the variable probability big winning game is executed, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the big winning game, the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the big winning game is finished. That is, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is not determined. Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the round game executed in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the round game (V round game) in which the balls are most likely to flow down to the specific gate is executed. Therefore, the game state set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until the V-round game ends. In this way, the game state set after the end of the big winning game is determined by the game result during the big winning game, so that the player can play the game for acquiring various benefits (high probability state of prize balls and special patterns) in the big winning game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when using the above -mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set the news of the news (for example, at the start of the jackpot gaming), and the control processing of the ball cannot be set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot gaming), and control processing related to the outing is performed. There was a problem that the control process of pachinko machine 10 had to be complicated during the densely executed jackpot, and the control process of pachinko machine 10 was complicated.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when a variable probability jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as a performance mode of the notification performance (at the start of the jackpot game), and immediately before the notification performance is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the performance mode of the notification performance based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate. The notification effect of the effect mode set in advance is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball does not flow down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and the variable probability jackpot advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, there is a problem that if the performance mode of the jackpot ending period is simply changed to the performance mode executed in the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification performance is executed during the ending period. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode which is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game is made in advance, it is necessary to store image data (performance data) for the performance mode in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the normal win game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification performance that does not give a sense of incompatibility to a player without providing a special performance mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the variable probability big winning game.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, thereby switching and setting the effect mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game. The notification performance executed for a period may be executed, or the round performance executed during the final round period of the big win game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the big win ending period is set, and then the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual big win ending period by executing the notification performance.

Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which a ball flowing down the right area enters the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the above-described left area, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state and whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the same privilege is provided whether the player executes the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that the bonus amount that the player can obtain does not differ greatly between when playing a left-handed game and when playing a right-handed game. The ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game, so that the left-handed game is more difficult to acquire prize balls than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is more likely to acquire prize balls than the left-handed game, but it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, i.e., during the execution of the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method, and in the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (the game during the time-saving state or the probability variable state), the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

<Regarding display content in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 230(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth control example differs from the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described first control example in that the scroll direction of the third symbol (decorative symbol that is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol) is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is changed from one (see FIG. 11(a)) to five (see FIG. 230(a)). It is different in that the mode of notification of the information related to the game is different. Also, there are some elements that are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three upper, middle, and lower pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230(a)). The third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (decorative pattern that fluctuates corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) is composed of 10 types of main patterns to which identification information imitating numbers '1' to '9' is attached. In this embodiment, the number of pieces of identification information imitating a specific number (for example, identification information imitating the number “4”) is configured to be greater than the number of pieces of identification information imitating other numbers. As a result, when the identification information simulating the specific number is in the ready state, the number of big winning patterns (identification information simulating the specific number) passing on the effective line can be increased more than when the other identification information is in the ready state, so that the player can visually predict that the degree of expectation of winning the big prize is high.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each identification information modeled on numbers. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on the top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the main symbols arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to be variably displayed by scrolling from right to left, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are variably displayed by scrolling from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, a sub-symbol (blank symbol) which does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is also formed between the main symbols. In FIG. 230(b), a blank pattern (secondary pattern) is displayed using a pattern imitating a triangle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in an oblique direction. When the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stop-displayed and the third symbols are stopped on the effective line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this control example, the same combination of main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big win.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

Incidentally, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variability display area of the third symbol may be made smaller, or the variability display area may be moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the third symbol is varying. Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are configured to be the same (including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to identify), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying special symbol.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 230(b). As shown in FIG. 230(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result) is displayed. configured to be displayed.

In addition, the small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result) is displayed. It consists of

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of special symbols and the lottery status of normal symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross. ), the lottery result of the special symbol is shown. However, the lottery result of the special symbol may be shown by, for example, using a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors to indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating according to the display mode of changing the number or color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbol or color.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is underway (fluctuating) and the result of the lottery). Further, as shown in FIG. 230(b), in this embodiment, the fourth symbol display areas (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed are shown as an example in which they are formed on the upper left side and the upper right side of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variable effect is executed, thereby reducing the effect of the effect. In this case, it is preferable that the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the fourth pattern is variably displayed using light emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

The display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, so a detailed description is omitted. Although the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is only the small area Ds1, and in the small area Ds1, the active area Ds1a and the waiting area Ds1b are formed. The display contents of the in-execution area Ds1a are the same as those of the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In this embodiment, eight pedestals are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols are normally displayed.

In addition, when the total value of the first special symbol reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball) and the second special symbol reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) becomes 8, that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed on the rightmost pedestal, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), a dedicated effect (period effect) using the 8 reserved patterns stored in the reservation may be executed. In the area Ds1b, not reserved patterns for indicating the number of reserved balls of special patterns, but reserved patterns for performance indicating only the period during which the period performance is executed (reserved patterns to be subjected to the period performance) may be displayed.

By constructing in this way, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period performance, a new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner how long the period performance continues.

In the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, and the same game result is given when a right-handed game is performed and when a left-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is not displayed. If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting the case of the technique method, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction). By constructing in this manner, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot toward, only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area, so that the game machine can be provided that is easy for the player to understand.

To explain in more detail, it is preferable that the guidance display area displays a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to play a right-handed game and a "left-handed" display mode for guiding the player to play a left-handed game. is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed in a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, the display mode of 'left-handed' is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Also, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each of the above-described embodiments may be configured so as to be appropriately displayable.

<Regarding production content of the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 231 to FIG. 236, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 231(a), the display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed in the reach state in the normal state (normal state). In this embodiment, the third symbols to be variably displayed are stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as part of the third symbol combination indicating the winning of the jackpot on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 230(a)), the ready-to-win state is entered, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the winning of the big win. The middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed with the effective line on which is displayed as a ready-to-win effective line. After reaching the ready-to-win state, the middle pattern row Z2 is configured to variably display each piece of identification information (third pattern) at a low speed (a speed of about 0.5 seconds required for one main pattern (third pattern imitating a number) to shift by one) at which the player can visually recognize.

As described above, in this embodiment, one symbol row has 10 types of main symbols, so when the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed at a low speed, the time required for one round is set to 5 seconds (0.5×10). Then, the medium symbol row Z2, which is variably displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231(a), even when the ready-to-win state occurs with any third symbol (in FIG. 231(a), the identification information imitating "9" (the third symbol imitating a crab)), the medium symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 230) variably displayed during the ready-to-win is configured so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third symbol resembling an octopus) can be visually recognized first. are

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance mode of the variable performance is configured to vary according to the variation mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after entering the ready-to-win state, for example, it is configured to be variable to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode) at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round or two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by unifying the identification information of the medium pattern row Z2 which becomes visible first after entering the ready-to-win state, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand at what timing to change to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode).

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the medium pattern row Z2 makes one round or two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state is used as the timing for changing to a different production mode (ready-to-win mode), but the present invention is not limited to this. aspect). In this way, by structuring such that specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information for which the ready-to-win state is stopped is changed to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode) on the basis of passing through the ready-to-win effective line, it is possible to provide the player with a relationship between the timing at which the middle pattern row Z2 is stop-displayed in combination for a big hit and the timing for changing to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode). Specifically, when the identification information (the same identification information as the reach-stopped identification information) that becomes the combination indicating the big win after entering the ready-to-win state is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-reach mode) at the timing of passing through the ready-reach effective line, it is possible for the player to overlap the timing at which the medium symbol row Z2 is stop-displayed in the combination that becomes the big win and the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (the ready-to-win mode). (identification information) approaches the reach effective line, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable presentation while having a great sense of anticipation.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the medium symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed with low-speed fluctuation so that the specific identification state (the third symbol imitating the number 1) becomes visible first, regardless of which third symbol is in the ready-to-win state. A new problem arises that the period until all the third patterns are stop-displayed (until the final stop display mode is stop-displayed) differs depending on the type of the third pattern in the ready-to-win state.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the "third symbol imitating the number 1", the middle symbol row Z2 displays the "third symbol imitating the number 1" as a specific symbol in low-speed fluctuation. In the hit state, the medium pattern row Z2 displays ``the third pattern imitating the number 1'' as a specific pattern at a low speed, so that it takes 8 seconds (first round) and 13 seconds (second round) after entering the ready-to-win state in order to stop and display the medium pattern row Z2 in the final stop display mode with one frame off the ready-to-win state.

Therefore, in order to establish a ready-to-win state with third patterns of different types in a variation pattern in which the same variable time is set, it is necessary to execute a process of setting the timing of reaching the ready-to-win state by calculating back from the stop display timing of the third pattern. In other words, there is a problem that a non-uniform ready-to-win performance that varies according to the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is executed during the period from the fluctuation start timing to the ready-to-win state, and the performance effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, along with the execution of the lottery for the special symbol, the variation time of the first symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by lottery in the main control device 110, and the determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display performance of the performance period suitable for the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and executes the variable display performance of the third pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic variation time and an addition time command indicating an added variation time, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern to be in the ready-to-win state based on the length of the variation time included in the addition time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional time. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional time. In other words, the notification content of the addition time command allows the audio lamp control device 113 side to identify the variation type that is seven seconds longer than the basic time. As a result, it is possible to set the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state simply by confirming the contents of the addition time command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 231(b) to 234, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 231(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the normal symbol variation that is winning in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during execution of normal symbol variation in which winning is achieved in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 231(b), when the normal symbol variation is performed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being performed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an icon simulating an electric accessory 640 to be opened in a normal game is displayed therein, and an emphatic display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to inform the player that the small display area Dm3 is formed. In the situation shown in FIG. 231(b), since the winning normal symbol variation is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 has a display mode that imitates the electric accessory 640 in the closed state. By configuring in this way, the game may soon be executed for the player. can be predicted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 231(b), the execution of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery is won is explained as an example, but the small display area Dm3 is formed in part of the execution of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery result is lost (for example, the probability of 1/100 of the loss variation), and the effect (fake effect) of displaying the icon imitating the electric accessory 640 is performed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player expects that the game per normal pattern will be executed.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, up to four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal pattern reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the preliminary determination result can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 . Therefore, the suggesting performance suggesting that the normal pattern winning game will soon be executed can be executed from the stage before the execution of the normal pattern variation in which the normal pattern variation that is winning the suggesting performance suggesting the execution of the normal pattern winning game is executed, that is, the stage at which the general pattern holding that the preliminary determination result is winning is obtained. In this case, the suggestive effect may be executed in an effect mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 231(b). For example, the suggestive effect may be configured to be executed in the same effect mode as the effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, or the pre-determined result of the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive effect may be configured to notify the player only that a situation advantageous to the player will soon come. .

In this way, it is difficult for a player to understand the performance mode of the suggestive performance for indicating that the normal game will be executed to the extent that the timing of actually executing the general pattern winning game and the execution timing of the suggestive performance diverge, and by making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestive performance is the general pattern winning game, the amusement of the game when the suggestive performance is executed can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when the normal pattern winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when a general pattern per game (long open per game) is executed at normal time (during normal state). In this embodiment, in the normal state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the variation time of the normal pattern variation executed in the normal pattern low probability state is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, it is configured so that about 1/2 of the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 in either case of executing a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, it is configured to be able to store up to four lottery rights (normal pattern reservation) for normal patterns.

In other words, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the normal symbol lottery is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when winning a general pattern in the normal state, the electric accessory 640 is configured to be executed for a general pattern per game (long open per) in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 229, the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, so that the shot ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second ball inlet 640 in the normal pattern winning game in the low probability state of the normal pattern that occurs at a low probability is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), when a normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state, identification information (symbols) is stopped and displayed in a combination (two circles in the figure) indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win in the small display area Dm2, a comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, and an icon simulating an open electric chew (electric accessory 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery can be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variable display of the third symbol executed corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol executed in the small display area Dm1 are continuously executed even during the regular per-symbol game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds, the special figure 2 reserved pattern (indicated by a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 2 reserved) of the second special pattern acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is given priority over the special figure 1 reserved pattern (indicated by a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special pattern acquired (on the left side of the waiting area Ds1b ) is displayed. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 232 (a), it is a state after four or more balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and four or more are acquired as the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the second special pattern is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special pattern, so the special pattern lottery is executed with the special pattern 2 reservation obtained later being given priority over the special pattern 1 reservation obtained earlier. By constructing in this way, when a normal pattern winning game is executed in a normal state and a plurality of special pattern 2 reservations are acquired, the second special pattern lottery can be preferentially and continuously executed, so that one period during which the lottery of the second special pattern is executed can be used as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and a dedicated performance can be executed to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance.

Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 232(b) to 234. FIG. FIG. 232(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 232(b), when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state, the comment "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set to a period until all the special 2 reserves obtained in the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, characters of ``variable probability GET high probability'' are displayed as a guide display mode for showing that the variable probability state can be obtained with a high probability. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this chance zone, during one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation), a pseudo variation effect is executed to make it appear that a plurality of special symbol variations are performed. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 232 (a)) indicating the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds is hidden, and the special figure 1 reserved number (in the figure, "2" indicating that the special figure 1 reserved number is 2) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm.

As shown in FIG. 232(b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 232(a)) of the sub-display area Ds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the chance zone, it can be made to think that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm is used to display the number of special figures reserved, but without being limited to this, the number of special figures reserved may be configured not to notify the player during the chance zone, or may be configured to notify the number of special figures reserved in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is only necessary to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of reserved special figures, for example, a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily identify the number of reserved special figures may be switched to a display mode in which colors are changed in correspondence with each number of reserved special figures. In the case of such a configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 232(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate that the second special symbol is currently changing. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), so the period during which the normal pattern winning game is executed may overlap with the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (see FIG. 232 (a)) or may not overlap. When the normal pattern winning game is executed while overlapping with the fluctuation period of the first special pattern, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the first special pattern fluctuation being executed is finished, and when it is not overlapped with the fluctuation period of the first special pattern, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game (during the normal pattern winning game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special pattern lottery is different according to the fluctuation state of the first special pattern when the normal pattern winning game is executed, and there arises a problem that it is difficult for the player to accurately discriminate whether the currently executed special pattern fluctuation is the first special pattern fluctuation or the second special pattern fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233(a) to FIG. 234, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) among the variable effects executed during the chance zone will be described. Figure 233 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation production, and Figure 233 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in the special variation production executed in the state where the special figure 2 suspension is obtained. It is a schematic diagram which showed the example typically.

Here, the contents of the special fluctuation production (pseudo-variation production) will be explained. This special variation performance is a variation performance in which the third pattern is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) during one variation period of the second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation performance that makes the player think that the special symbol variation has been executed a plurality of times. First, the ready-to-win effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variable effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special variation presentation, characters of ``sorry'' suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the player is made to think that the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone was lost. In other words, in the first half period of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the ready-to-win performance with the expectation of winning the jackpot is stopped (temporarily stopped) with the performance result indicating the failure.

After that, in the second half period of the special variable performance, a variable performance (special second half performance) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured to vary its effect mode according to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, for example, when the special figure 2 reservations are secured, as shown in FIG. The second half production is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the special variation performance, the type of special symbol variation to be executed after the second special symbol variation in execution is finished is discriminated based on the number of special symbol reservations, and the performance mode of the special second half performance is set in the performance mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more strongly that a plurality of special symbol variations are executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone (see FIG. 233(b)), it is configured to vary the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the second half period in correspondence with the number of acquired special symbols 2 pending. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 reservation nor the special figure 1 reservation is secured when the special variation production is executed, the temporary stop display of the 3rd symbol shown in FIG. 233 (a) is not executed. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only in a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is secured, so that it is possible to make the player think more strongly that the special symbol variations are executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a presentation mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol to be executed during the second half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped, so it is difficult to accurately determine the number of temporary stops. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed to make the player think that the temporary stop display has been performed five times or more, or to make the player think that a part of the temporary stop display is the stop display and make him think that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached 5 times or more even though the temporary stop display is actually made five times or more, and the enjoyment of predicting the performance result can be provided to the player.

In addition, a configuration other than this may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect. For example, a display mode indicating the number of temporary stop display times may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol change. , effect of the third pattern, etc.) may be configured to vary in stages. In addition, it is also possible to display a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third symbol is temporarily displayed (for example, the first time, the second time) at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the special variation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserve is not secured, the characters "Chance zone end" are displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm is the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol fluctuates in the horizontal direction). After that, the effect result of the special variation effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stop-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the contents of the effect in the state in which the variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the production contents when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the variable probability state is set, and FIG.

In this embodiment, when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed. Then, when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, a variable probability state is set with a high probability (a variable probability big win game in which a ball can easily flow down to a specific gate is always executed during the big win game). Then, the variable probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state can be looped at a high probability as long as the second special symbol lottery wins the big win (the probability of the big win in the high probability state of the special symbols is 1/50) before the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly win the big win in the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, even in the state where the probability variable state is set, for example, the probability variable jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and immediately after the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, in the state where the probability variable state is set, the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained and the special figure 1 reservation is obtained, the first special symbol lottery may be executed. In this embodiment, as described above, when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability variable big winning game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability variable big winning game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. In other words, even if the variable probability state is set, there is a case where the variable probability state cannot be looped when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, if the player early determines that the winning jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed, the player's willingness to play is reduced. A double ready-to-win performance, which is a variable performance to make a ready-to-win state at the same time as the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the big hit, is easily executed. More specifically, when winning the normal jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the double reach performance described above is always executed (see FIG. 235(a)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent execution of the ready-to-win performance in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal big win is in the ready-to-win state when winning the normal big win in the first special pattern lottery executed during the variable probability state, and suppress the player's advance prediction of winning the normal big win during the variation period of the special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(a), in this embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same manner as in the chance zone described above, and the player is configured to make it difficult to grasp the number of reserved special figures. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters of "under super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the current state is in the variable probability state.

Here, in the super chance mode, when the double reach shown in FIG. 235 (a) (the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to the normal jackpot are in the ready state at the same time) is executed. In the embodiment, even in the variation performance executed in correspondence with the second special symbol variation, the double reach performance shown in FIG. 235(a) is configured to be executable. In other words, the variable performance corresponding to the second special pattern lottery in which the probability variable big win game is always executed when the big win is won, is constituted so as to be able to execute the double reach performance using the third pattern corresponding to the normal win.

With this configuration, even if the double reach performance shown in FIG. 235(a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily discriminate whether the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the double ready-to-win effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is shown in FIG. 235(b).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the probability variable big winning game will always be executed when the special symbol lottery being executed has won the big winning. In addition, even when the double reach performance is executed as the variable performance corresponding to the first special pattern lottery, the game can be played while expecting the player to be promoted to the variable probability double reach on the way.

In the present embodiment, a variable condition is set as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach effect being executed to a variable reach effect to the variable reach effect when the variation mode of the medium symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (elapsed one round). may be set, or a variable condition may be set that is established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that the player can operate is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable condition is established, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 235(a), blank patterns (represented by triangle marks in the figure) are erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed in order from the left as the upper pattern row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed in order from the left as the lower pattern row Z3. Even in the case of such constitution, the number of reach of the third pattern corresponding to the variable probability big win can be increased in the triple reach performance rather than the double reach performance, so that the player can be visually notified of the high possibility of winning the probability variable big win in the special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-described technical idea may be applied to the variable performance executed in the normal state, for example, when the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach performance in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the ready-to-win state, the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state may be switched to the type of the third symbol to correspond to the probability variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the ready-to-win state may be increased. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting a more advantageous performance result to be provided until the variable performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, FIG. 236(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the variable jackpot game, and FIG. (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the variable probability jackpot game.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game (variable probability big winning game) in which a variable probability state which is a game state advantageous to a player is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to set a variable probability state which is a game state advantageous to the player. Specifically, 17 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period for the variable probability jackpot, and 15 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period for the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when the variable probability jackpot game is executed, the variable probability state is not set unless the winning ball of the V winning device 2650 is allowed to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, when the balls cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable big winning game, the time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set like the normal big winning game without setting the variable probability state after the completion of the variable probability big winning game.

In this case, there is a problem that if the notification performance indicating the setting of the variable probability state is executed in the ending period of the variable probability big winning game, the performance contents of the notification performance and the actually set game state are different, which makes the player feel dissatisfied. Furthermore, when the performance mode of the notification performance executed in the ending period (17 seconds) of the probability variable jackpot game is switched to the performance mode of the notification performance executed in the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, the length of the actual ending period and the performance period of the notification performance are different, and there is a problem that the notification performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is set to be a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of the jackpot game. Then, the effect mode of the notification effect to be executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236, when the normal jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, the character "chance mode 100 times" is displayed for the first half period (8 seconds), which suggests that the time saving state is set. As a game guidance mode for indicating that it is easy to win, a production mode (see FIG. 236(c)) in which characters of "win and super chance GET in chance mode" is displayed is executed.

On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, the effect mode (see FIG. 236 (b)) is executed in which the characters "super chance mode 100 times" suggesting that the variable probability state is set are displayed in the first half period (10 seconds). d) is configured to execute cf.

In this embodiment, the effect mode during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be set in advance at the timing at which the jackpot game is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing executed during the jackpot game since it is not necessary to execute the processing for determining the performance mode of the notification performance each time during the jackpot game where various control processing is executed.

Here, a case will be described in which the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the big winning game even though the variable probability big winning game is executed. In this case, out of the display modes shown in FIG. 236(b), a process of hiding the characters "super" and a process of switching the notification effect executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the normal winning game ending period (see FIG. 236(c)) are executed.

More specifically, as the display mode shown in FIG. 236(a), the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "SUPER" are displayed and the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "CHANCE MODE 100 times" are displayed are different, and it is possible to switch between the presence or absence of the display instruction for the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "SUPER" are displayed based on the determination result as to whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the ball can be made to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the period set with the same length as the second half period of the jackpot ending period, the presentation mode of the notification presentation can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period varies depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all the jackpot types without being limited to this. In the present embodiment, the second half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period of the same length for all the jackpot types, but without being limited to this, the first half period of the jackpot ending period may be configured to have the same length for all the jackpot types. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the first half period of the jackpot may be the same length for the jackpot types A and B, and the second half period of the jackpots may be the same length for the jackpot types B and C.

Also, in the present embodiment, the ending period of different length is set according to the winning jackpot type, but without being limited to this, the length of the ending period may be changed according to the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this embodiment and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of production when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation production is executed is set as the variation production of the third symbol, and FIG.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 242, but in this embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern obtained by summing the basic time and the addition time is defined. A period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common variation pattern, and a period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific variation pattern.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as a performance mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, the period from the display of the ready-to-win state to the stop display of the third symbol is configured to vary according to the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state. Then, the third pattern corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. By constructing in this way, the third pattern variation performance (the third pattern variation performance executed corresponding to the basic time) executed during a predetermined period after the third pattern starts to fluctuate can be shared.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237(a), in the case of the non-ready-to-win variation production, since the addition time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper symbol row Z1 is stop-displayed at the timing (for example, 5-second elapsed timing) after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third symbol variation production, and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped-displayed in a stop display mode in which the reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later, the lottery result. The middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a stopped display mode indicating that the is out. After that, after a stop display period (determined time) of 1 second, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is determined and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 237(b), when the ready-to-win variation effect is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common variation pattern for 30 seconds, the effect mode is set until 5 seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state is reached. In other words, the effect mode from when the ready-to-win state is reached to when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one turn is set as the common variation pattern. After that, an effect mode (ready-to-win pattern, stop pattern) is set according to the added time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 238(a) shows the flow of the ending period targeting the normal jackpot, FIG. 238(b) shows the flow of the effect for the variable probability big win, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 238, in this embodiment, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot, and the ED period is set to 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the variable probability jackpot. The ending display mode is divided into the first half period and the second half period to be displayed (see FIG. 236).

In this embodiment, a performance mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, whether or not a V prize has been won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start timing of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 245. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202 and a part of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 and a part of the ROM 222 and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242. FIG. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239(a). FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 239(a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja in place of the first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in place of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and a normal winning random number 10 table 202j in place of the second winning random number table 202b, in place of the first winning random number table 202a. c is different in that a jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db, and that the small hit random number table 202de is deleted. Furthermore, the illustration is omitted, but in the 10th embodiment of the book, in response to the fourth embodiment described above, the special random number counter C1 (update range "0-999") has the same function (update range "0-999") with the same functions instead of the first random number counter C1 per random number counter C1. Instead, only the update range is different, and the other is different in that it has an ordinary random number counter C5 (update range "0-299") with the same function. Since other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, as described above, the names of the various counters are partially changed, but the basic functions are the same, so a detailed description thereof and the description of the various counters referred to in the various data tables defined in the ROM 202 will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 240(a), the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja will be described. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja. This special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja is different from the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) in that it defines the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined as winning according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, irrespective of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery is executed, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is defined as a value of "0 to 4" as a jackpot determination value (value determined as a big win in the special symbol lottery), and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is defined as a jackpot determination value of "0 to 19". is stipulated. That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special symbol low probability state is set, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/200, and even if any kind of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state where the special symbol high probability state is set, the player wins the big win with a probability of about 1/50. In the present embodiment, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big hit is commonly defined for each special symbol type, but without being limited to this, a different value of the special winning random number counter C1 for each special symbol type may be defined as the big winning determination value, or the number of values of the special winning random number counter C1 serving as the big winning determination value may be varied for each special symbol type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value ("0 to 4") of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win when the special symbol low probability state is set is configured to be the value of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big win even when the special symbol high probability state is set. By configuring in this way, in the first look-ahead process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process (see S1764 in FIG. 136) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special corresponding to the winning information It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information for winning a jackpot without executing a process of discriminating (predicting) the game state at the time when the symbol lottery is executed. In addition, without being limited to this, the contents of the special symbol big winning random number table 202ja may be defined so that at least part or all of the value of the special winning random number counter C1 determined as a big winning in the special symbol low probability state is not determined as a big winning in the special symbol high probability state. By configuring in this way, when the same value of the special winning random number counter C1 is obtained, the determination result can be varied according to the game state set when the big winning determination using the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act to acquire the value of the specific special winning random number counter C1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240(b), the contents defined in the normal winning random number 10 table 202jc will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal random number 10 table 202jc. As shown in FIG. 240(b), this normal winning random number 10 table 202jc defines normal winning random number counter C5 in the range of "0 to 2" in the low probability state of normal symbols, and defines normal winning in the range of "0 to 149" in the high probability state of normal symbols.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. Thereby, the execution probability of the game per normal pattern can be varied between the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal pattern, the probability variable state which is the high probability state of the normal pattern, and the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd will be described. FIG. 241(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd. This jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is a data table in which a determination value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 241 (a), in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd in the tenth embodiment, a special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 will be described. FIG. 241(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1. This special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 is a data table referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241 (b), in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 in the tenth embodiment, as the first special symbol (special figure 1) jackpot type, "jackpot A" ~ "jackpot B" two jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the special hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type. The ``jackpot A'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win A'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win A'' is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 7 rounds and a normal jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game is finished. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win B'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win B'' is 50% (50/100).

That is, the two types of jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but differ in the ease with which the ball passes through a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed in which the balls are likely to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, the "jackpot A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 will be described. FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2. This special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 is a data table referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 in the tenth embodiment, as the second special symbol (special figure 2) jackpot type, "jackpot C" ~ "jackpot E" three jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type. The ``jackpot C'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the big winning game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win C'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win C'' is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to "50" after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win D'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win C'' is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". The ``jackpot E'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the big winning game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``big win E'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win E'' is 30% (30/100).

That is, three types of jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery are all executed as variable jackpot games, but the number of rounds of the jackpot games is made different, "jackpot E" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and "jackpot A" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variable probability big winning game is always executed, so that the game state set after the end of the big winning game is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery in which the variable probability big winning game is executed at a rate of 50%. In terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls obtainable during the jackpot game, the maximum obtainable number is larger in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum obtainable number is also smaller in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, it is defined that the average number of prize balls that can be acquired is larger in the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls obtainable under the minimum conditions, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other respects. In this embodiment, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are defined, but without being limited to this, various jackpot types can be set based on the same technical concept as each jackpot type that can be set in each embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 242(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb. As shown in FIG. 242 (a), in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb, the normal 10 table 202jb1 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the state where the normal state is set, and the probability variation / time reduction 10 table 202jb2 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the state where the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set are defined.

First, the normal 10 table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 242(b). FIG. 242(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal ten table 202jb1. In this normal 10 table 202jb1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the win/loss determination result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating either a basic time of 30 seconds or an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in increments of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. For example, if the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", if it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", if it is "2", the addition time is "4 seconds", if "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds", and if it is "3". If the additional time is "5 seconds" or "4", the additional time is "5.5 seconds"; if the additional time is "5", the additional time is "6 seconds"; if the additional time is "6", the additional time is "6.5 seconds"; if "7" is "7 seconds"; If the additional time is "9 seconds" and "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds"; if "15", the additional time is "10 seconds"; if "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds";

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the ready-to-win pattern (type of the third symbol) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of the third pattern of the middle pattern row Z2, which is first visible to the player in the ready-to-win state, is always set to the specific third pattern (in this embodiment, the third pattern to which the numeral 1 is attached), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the additional time of 13 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the above-described normal pattern, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, when the number of seconds included in the addition command is "3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal ready-to-win effect (effect to stop display after the middle pattern row Z2 fluctuates about one turn) is "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super ready-to-win effect (effect to stop display after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about two times). ) is configured to run.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during the first predetermined period, and then the variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, the period in which the same performance mode is executed can be set based on the basic command (command including information indicating the basic time), and the variable performance after branching can be set based on the addition command (command including information indicating the addition time). Therefore, for example, even when the entire fluctuation time is the same, the voice lamp control device 113 side can easily set different fluctuation performances only by changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time in the fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the basic time (30 seconds) for executing normal reach and the basic time (30 seconds) for executing super reach are set to be the same, and the effect mode of ready reach effect is varied according to the length of the variable time set as the additional time. 12 seconds” may be selected.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an additional time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, an effect is executed in which the variable effect of the third symbol once in the ready-to-win state is switched to another variable effect. Therefore, even if the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, which is first visible to the player in the ready-to-reach condition, is always set to a specific third symbol (in this embodiment, the third symbol to which the number 1 is attached), the medium symbol row Z does not give the player a sense of incongruity during the variation. Since the display order of the third pattern of 2 can be changed corresponding to the third pattern to be finally stopped, there is no need to set the type of the third pattern to be in a ready-to-win state by varying the addition time like the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the loss is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the loss without entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, there is no need to set the addition time.

Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the variation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When this out of reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of 30 seconds of basic time and 3 to 22 seconds of additional time is output as a variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the above-described normal pattern, so detailed description will be omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is a loss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. When the result of the lottery is a loss, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed so that the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that makes a big win. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 side performs a correction process so that the third symbol shifted by one from the set content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is set. Thus, when the out-of-reach performance is executed, it is possible to easily set a performance mode in which the third pattern is stop-displayed (disappearance-stop display) in the vicinity of the third pattern that is the combination of the big win.

On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit/fail determination is a big win, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a variation time of 40 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command showing a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command of a combination of a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when the basic command indicating the basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, as shown in FIG. 233(a), an effect mode is set to stop display (temporary stop display) of the third symbol. Then, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is out of special), the third pattern is fixed and displayed as it is, and the variation performance is terminated.

On the other hand, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is special ready-to-win), as shown in FIG. 233(b) and FIG. A detailed effect mode of the variable effect in which the temporarily stopped third symbol restarts will be described later with reference to FIG. 244 .

Next, details of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239(b). FIG. 239(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 239(b), the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a game state storage area. 203g, time-saving counter 203h, variable probability counter 203ja, jackpot start flag 203jb, mid-jackpot flag 203jcc, variable probability setting flag 203jd, variable probability passage counter 203je, winning number counter 203jf, remaining ball timer flag 203jg, remaining ball timer 203jh, variable probability effective flag 203ji, variable probability effective timer 203jj, discharge number counter 203jk, other memory It has at least an area 203z.

Among the various configurations of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment, some configurations having the same names as those of the above-described embodiments are given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each value of a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the empty areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination of the special symbol lottery or the like is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to shift the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (the second reservation area to the fourth reservation area) to the reservation areas (the first reservation area to the third reservation area) having an area number smaller by 1.例文帳に追加In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db has four reserved areas like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. In this second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value and the like is the same as that of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C5. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). That is, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main controller 110, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203dc is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the lottery for the winning of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so similarly to the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area with the area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203dd is incremented by one up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203dd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is changed, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the variable display reserved by the main controller 110. As a result, even if the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c1 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of holding balls of variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 transmits the pending number of balls command for display for notifying the number of pending balls. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203de is incremented by one up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. Since this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has the same content as the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d used in the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variable probability counter 203ja is a counter for indicating a state in which a special symbol high probability state is set, and is set to a value corresponding to a case in which a special symbol high probability state is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the probability variable counter 203ja after the jackpot game ends (see S2602 in FIG. 253). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. In addition, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a state where the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is set (see S622 in FIG. 248).

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set, based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is subtracted, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203ja becomes 0, the variable probability state ends and shifts to the time saving state. It may be configured to continue. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203ja.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203ja, only the condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203ja based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (variation) is set. . Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., special winning win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., special normal win winning), the value of the probability variable counter 203ja may be reduced, or the ball enters a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.). may be configured to subtract the value of the probability variable counter 203ja.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is configured to be decremented by one, but depending on the type of the satisfied end condition, a plurality of values of the variable probability counter 203ja may be collectively subtracted (for example, 2), or the value of the variable probability counter 203ja may be subtracted so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the variable probability counter 203ja. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the condition for ending the variable probability state may be changed according to the establishment content (jackpot type) of the condition under which the variable probability state is set. As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The jackpot start flag 203jb is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203jb is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. The big win start flag 203jb is set to ON when the end timing of the fluctuation display indicating the big win comes. Also, the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S2403 in FIG. 251).

The jackpot flag 203jc is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. When this jackpot flag 203jc is ON, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and when it is OFF, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203jc is set to ON as soon as the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S2403 in FIG. 251). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Then, in the special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 247), this jackpot in progress flag 203jc is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S601 in FIG. 247).

The variable probability setting flag 203jd is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not a ball enters (flows down) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific gate (passage of the variable probability switch provided in the specific gate), the variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715 in FIG. 254). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2605 in FIG. 253). The variable probability setting flag 203jd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

When the variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable probability switch has been passed, the variable probability setting flag 203jd may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the variable probability passage counter 203m, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the game parlor by discriminating fraud such as turning on only the variable probability setting flag 203jd and turning on the power again while the power is turned off.

The variable probability passage counter 203je is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (flowed down a specific gate) in one round (in this embodiment, 5 rounds of jackpot) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 2650a of the V winning device 2650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203je and the ejection number counter 203jk, which will be described later. This probability variable passing counter 203je is updated by adding one by one when the ball passes through the probability variable switch (falls down a specific gate). In addition, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the V winning device 2650 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that this probability variable passage counter 203je is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203jf is a counter for counting the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 in one round in the jackpot game, and is updated by incrementing by one based on detection of winning in the specific winning opening 2650a. On the other hand, when one round is finished, it is reset to the initial value "0" after it is determined whether or not the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) of the V winning device 2650 and the discharged number (the total value of the discharge number counter 203jk and the probability variable passage counter 203je) match. The value of the winning number counter 203jf is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203jg is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 2650a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 2650a is closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged has passed.

The remaining ball timer 203jh is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the winning balls to the V winning device 2650 has elapsed when one preset round is completed and the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be discharged from the V winning device 2650 is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh. When the remaining ball timer 203jh reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning balls to the V winning device 2650 and the number of discharged balls match. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to inform early that game balls are jammed in the V winning device 2650 .

When the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a special flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the variable probability setting flag 203jd may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The variable probability effective flag 203ji is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage (entrance) when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch (enters the V area) after the distribution member switches to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to a specific gate. When this variable probability effective flag 203ji is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch.

The variable probability valid timer 203jj is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203ji described above is set to ON. After the V role is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this probability variation valid timer 203jj, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the variable probability switch. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203jj is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the damage caused by illegally entering the V area to pass the variable probability switch, pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passing it through, or erroneously detecting that the ball has passed through the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The discharged number counter 203jk is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This ejected number counter 203jk is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the ejected number.

Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245. FIG. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 243(a). FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, a normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja and a probability variable medium effect selection table 222jb are added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. Regarding the changes in the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b, the detailed description is omitted, but various values are changed in accordance with the changes in the main controller 110.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 244 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja. This normal special figure 2 performance selection table 222ja is a data table referred to when selecting the performance mode of the 3rd pattern when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the 2nd special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are defined corresponding to the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol lottery (result of determination of success or failure), the number of special figures 2 reserved, the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, the common out reach production is executed in correspondence with the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 233 (a)), and then the pseudo-variation production (see FIGS. 233 (b) to 234) is executed during the addition time (30 seconds) as the production content (production mode) selected by referring to the normal medium special 2 production selection table 222ja.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is in the range of "0 to 79", "pseudo 3 production" is defined as the variation pattern, and "special pseudo 2 production" is defined as the variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99", and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 2, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is "0 to 9". In the range of 9", ``pseudo 2 performance'' is defined as a variation pattern, and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 1, the value of the performance counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is defined in the range of ``0 to 89'', ``pseudo 1 performance'' as the variation pattern, and ``special pseudo 4 performance'' as the variation pattern in the range of ``90 to 99''.

In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0, ``special ending performance'' is set when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 1 to 4, and ``non-pseudo performance'' is set when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0.例文帳に追加

If the lottery result is out, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of "0 to 99", and "pseudo 3 production" is defined as the variation pattern. In the case, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of ``0 to 99'', and the variation pattern is ``pseudo 1 production'', and when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, ``pseudo no production'' is defined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when setting the performance mode of the pseudo-variation performance of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the special figure 2 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number is determined, and the pseudo-variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily make the pseudo-variation performance executed during one special symbol variation period look like a variation performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, since the number of times of pseudo fluctuation (the number of times of temporary stop of the third pattern) executed in the pseudo-variation performance is set to correspond to the number of reserved special figures 2 already acquired, it can be made to think that all the reserved special figures 2 acquired during the game per normal figure executed in the normal state are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance of winning the jackpot is executed, the player can be made to think that he or she has won the jackpot as a result of acquiring many special 2 reserves during the normal game winning game executed in the normal state. In addition, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance of losing winning is executed, the variable performance using the special figure 2 reservation is executed next after making the player think that the special figure 2 reservation is completely consumed (because the chance zone continues), so that the player can be provided with the performance with extraneousness.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the pseudo-variation performance (special pseudo-2 performance, pseudo-4 performance) set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the player can be interested in the number of times of pseudo-variation executed in the pseudo-variation performance and the number of special figures 2 reserved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the effect selection table 222jb during probability variation will be described. FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability effect selection table 222jb. The performance selection table 222jb during the probability variation is a data table referred to when setting the variation performance when the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state.

As shown in FIG. 245, different effects modes are defined according to the type of special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is defined as "variable single reach" in the range of "0 to 49", "double reach" in the range of "50 to 99", "double reach" in the case of normal jackpot, and "non-reach" in the case of deviation.

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is defined as "special double reach" in the range of "0 to 49", and "variable double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99". ' is defined as 'non-reach' in the range of '11-99'.

By configuring in this way, both when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the "double reach" (shown in FIG. 235 (a), the reach effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the normal hit are in the ready state) is executed. Therefore, when the "double reach" is executed for the player, the third symbol variation effect corresponding to any special symbol lottery is executed. can make it difficult to understand

Further, when ``special double reach'' is set, the performance mode of ``double reach'' is set first, and then the ready-to-reach performance is executed in which the performance mode is changed to ``variable double reach'' shown in FIG. 235(b). Therefore, even when ``double reach'' is executed corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be played while expecting to be promoted to ``probability variable double reach'' on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing of changing the performance mode of the ready-to-win performance is the timing when the middle pattern row Z2 makes one or two turns, but the performance mode may be changed based on the timing when the player operates the operation button 22 without being limited to this.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the game flow in the tenth embodiment will be briefly described. FIG. 246 is a transition diagram showing the game flow in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 246, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to set three game states, that is, a normal state, a probability variable state, and a time saving state, as the game state. In the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery.

When a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/200) in a first special pattern lottery executed in a normal state, a normal jackpot game and a probability variable jackpot game are executed with a probability of 1/2, and when a ball flows down to a specific gate during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a probability variable state, and when a ball does not flow down to the specific gate, it shifts to a time-saving state.

The probability variable state is constituted so as to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times or a big win is won, and when the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times without winning the big prize during the probability variable state, the state shifts to the time saving state. This time saving state is configured to continue until 100 special pattern lotteries are executed after the end of the big win game, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big win game, the number of times of time saving is 100 times, and when the variable probability state is shifted to the time saving state, the number of times of time saving is 50 times.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255, the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, as described above, the lottery right for the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved) are both stored. In this point, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. A high-probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the big winning game by causing the ball to flow down to a specific gate arranged in the V winning device 2650 while the big winning game is being executed. This game differs from the above-described embodiments in that, in addition to the end condition established when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, an end condition established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is provided as an end condition for ending the probability variable state which is a game state advantageous to the player.

Then, in order to configure the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described differences, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes a special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247), a normal symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249), a through-gate passage process (see S157 in FIG. 250), and a jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251). are doing. Other control contents are the same as any of the control processing contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 247, special symbol variation processing 10 (S154) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 10 (S154). This special symbol variation process 10 (S154) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

In the special symbol variation process 10 (S154), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S601). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203jc is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbols are in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

In the process of S601, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (during the jackpot game) is not being performed (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S602). The holding count N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (S605), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de changed by calculation is set (S606). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 corresponding to the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved ball number counters 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S606, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (S607). In the process of S607, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203db are processed to shift in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and the process proceeds to S608.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the number of times N1 of holding the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S204: No). 609).

In the processing of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S609: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S609: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 603dd is subtracted by 1 (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by calculation is set (S611). ). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 corresponding to the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved ball number counters 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S611, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted by the same method as the processing of S607 (S612), and the processing is shifted to the processing of S608. In the process of S608 executed after the process of S607 or S612, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S608), and this process ends. In this special symbol variation start process, similar to the special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 41) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above, a process for determining the lottery result of the special symbol and a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the same manner as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 41) are performed.

In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S614). In the process of S614, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation start process (S608) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and thereafter updated (decremented) each time the process of S614 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S613 (S613: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S614 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S615). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S608). When this special symbol variation start process (S608) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special pattern jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of a special pattern jackpot, one of the jackpots A to E is determined depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 lights up a blue LED in the case of a big win A, a red LED in the case of a big win B, a green LED in the case of a big win C, and a blue LED and a green LED in the case of a big win D. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the processing of S615 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is started, it is determined whether the special pattern lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special pattern variation start processing is a special pattern jackpot (S616). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S616: Yes), a jackpot start flag 203jb is set to ON (S617), the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variable counter 203ja are cleared (set to 0) (S618), and the process proceeds to S619. When the jackpot start flag is set to ON by the processing of S617, when the jackpot control processing 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, S2401: Yes branch to set the opening command (S2402). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S616, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S616: No), the processes of S617 and S618 are skipped, the update process is executed (S620), and then the process proceeds to S619.

The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the contents of the update process (S620 in FIG. 247) executed in the special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S620). This update process (S620) is a process executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (when the fluctuation is stopped), and the remaining period of the period in which the variable probability state is continuously set or the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is updated.

When the update process (S620) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the present is a high probability state of the special symbol (S621), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (updated) (S622), and then the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update. is 0 (S623), and if it is determined to be 0 (S623: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. Also, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S621 (S621; No), the current is not in the high probability state of the special symbol, so the above-described processing of S622 to S624 for updating the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is skipped and the process of S625 is performed.

Also, in the processing of S623, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is not 0, that is, the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is greater than 0, and even if the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) continues, the processing of S624 is skipped and the processing of S625 is performed.

In the process of S625, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined to be greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S625: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S626), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S627). Umaai, who determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S627, sets the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S628), sets the value of the probability variation counter 203ja, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the current game state (S629), and ends this process. Also, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S625 (S625: No), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 in the process of S627 (S627: No), the process proceeds to S629.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) will be described. In this normal symbol variation processing 10 (S166), various processes related to normal symbol variation (lottery) (processing for executing normal symbol variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal symbol variation to be performed, processing for updating normal symbol variation during execution, processing for stopping normal symbol variation, processing for determining game content of normal symbol per game performed when the result of normal symbol lottery is winning) are executed, and the normal symbol of the first embodiment described above. The pattern variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is different in that the contents of the process of selecting the variation time of the normal symbol and the process of determining the game content of the normal per pattern game are partially changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) is executed, first, the same processes of S1101 to S1113 as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed. After that, it is determined by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h whether the current game state is in the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) (S1161), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) (S1161: Yes), the variation time of the normal pattern is set to 3 seconds (S1162), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1161 that it is not in the time-saving mode (high-probability state of normal symbols) (S1161: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S1163), and this process ends.

In addition, the processing of S1115 to S1118, which is the same as the above-described normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48), is performed, and the current game state is determined by referring to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S1118), and when it is determined that it is during time reduction (high probability state of normal symbols) (S1118: Yes), the game content of the game per normal symbol. , the game content (opening action) is set such that the opening time of the electric accessary 640 is 1 second×2 times (S1165), the process of S1121 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state) in the processing of S1118 (S1118: No), as the game content of the game per normal pattern, the opening time of the electric accessary 640 is set to 5 seconds x 1 game content (opening operation) (S1164), the processing of S1121 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the low probability state of normal symbols has a lower probability of winning of normal symbols than the high probability state of normal symbols (see FIG. 240(b)), and although the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set longer, the period in which the electric accessory 640 is opened in the normal symbol winning game executed when winning is configured to be longer. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state (low-probability state of the normal pattern) when winning the normal pattern with a low probability. In addition, since it is possible to easily acquire the upper limit number (four) of the special figure 2 reserve during one normal figure per game, the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed a plurality of times in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 250, the contents of the through gate passage processing (see S157) will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S157). This through-gate passing process (see S157) is different from the through-gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the above-described first embodiment, using the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C5, before the actual win-or-fail judgment is executed (before the win-or-fail judgment (see S1111) is executed in the normal symbol variation process 10 (see S166 of FIG. 249)), the lottery result (see S166 of FIG. 249). are the same except for the addition of The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the through gate passage processing (see S157) is executed, first, the same processing of S1201 to S1205 as the through gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and then the lottery result is acquired in advance based on the normal winning random number 10 table 202jc (S1211), and the normal drawing winning information command including the normal winning determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the processing of S1211) is issued. It sets (S1212) and terminates this processing.

The normal figure winning information command set in the process of S1212 is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each embodiment described above. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal pattern lottery right can be discriminated in advance, and the performance can be executed based on the preliminary discrimination result.

Specifically, in a state in which a chance zone is set, i.e., in a state in which a second special symbol lottery is executed based on execution of a normal pattern winning game in a normal state, when information indicating winning of a normal pattern is included in a normal pattern prize winning information command received, a performance for continuing the chance zone can be executed until the next normal pattern winning game is executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is all finished and the first special symbol lottery is executed until the next normal pattern lottery game is executed, the production mode of the variable production executed in response to the first special symbol lottery is not the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the production mode of horizontally varying the third symbol shown in FIG. 231 (b)), but the production mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, shown in FIG. 232 (b). It is preferable to configure so that a production mode in which the third pattern is changed in the vertical direction) is set. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal pattern is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the chance zone is not finished even though the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can grasp that the next normal pattern winning game will be executed soon, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo-variable performance of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is executed. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone will be extended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074) will be described. FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074). This jackpot control process 10 (S1074) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 2650a.

In the jackpot control process 10 (S1074), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203jb is ON (S2401). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2402), the jackpot start flag 203jb is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203jc is turned on (S2403), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is off (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (that is, whether the jackpot flag 203jc is on) (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203jc is off) (S2404: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2404, if it is determined that the jackpot is currently in progress (the jackpot flag 203jc is ON) (S2404: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S2405).

In the process of S2405, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2405: Yes), a big win operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds is executed (S2406), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2405: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S2407). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S2407: Yes), an ending command is set (S2408), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect (see FIG. 236) indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S2407: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2409, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (S2409: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S2410), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2409, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S2409: No), winning processing for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 2650a is executed (S2411), abnormal processing is performed to determine whether the ball entered into the specific winning opening 2650a is discharged normally (S2412), and then this processing ends. The details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2406) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S2406). This jackpot action setting process (S2406) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning port 2650a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 252) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start the fifth round (S2501). In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the 5th round (S2501: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V role (flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid)) 65k is set (S2502), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 2650a corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S2503).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (fifth round) is changed according to the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), as the fifth round round game, the round game that operates the V accessories so that the ball can easily flow down to a specific gate is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the balls flowing down to a specific gate only for a specific period of the long-running big winning game, so that the player can execute the game during the big winning game without losing concentration.

In this embodiment, when the fifth round of the variable probability jackpot game is executed, the characters "Aim for V" are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance notification mode for indicating to the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate in the long-running jackpot game. Further, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific gate, the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a guide notification mode for guiding that the ball has flowed down the specific gate. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.

Note that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of conditions. For example, based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate, it is preferable to change the character color of "Aim for the V", change the size of the display area, or change the characters to emphasize the content (for example, "Aim for the V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific gate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by varying the operation pattern of the V role object for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the V winning device 2650, it is possible to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to do so. It may be configured such that a period in which it is easy to set and a period in which it is difficult to set can be set. As a result, it is possible to standardize the operation pattern of the V role product, thereby making it difficult for the V role product to break down.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the current round is not the fifth round (S2501: No), the processing of S2502 and S2503 is skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2504), and the processing proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2505), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252), it is possible to open the specific prize winning opening 2650a in each round of the jackpot, and to set the passage through the special discharge channel 2665e2 in the fifth round. As a result, in the big hits A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific gate (variable probability switch 2665e3) only by the player shooting the ball in the fifth round, so that the variable probability state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) can be set after the end of the big win.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S2410) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S2410). This jackpot end process (S2410) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S2410), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203jd is ON (S2601). In the processing of S2601, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203jd is on (S2601: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through a specific heto (variable probability switch 2650e3) during the big hit. On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if the variable probability setting flag 203jd is off (S2601: No), the process of S2602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2603.

In the process of S2603, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2603), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203ja (S2604). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203jc and the variable probability setting flag 203jd are set to OFF (S2605), and the process ends.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 253), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball passes through the specific gate (probability variable switch 2665e3) during the jackpot game.

Next, details of the winning process (S2411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S2411). This winning process (S2411) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 2650a.

In this prize winning process (S2411), first, it is determined whether or not the current round validity period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 2650a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S2701, if it is not the round effective period (S2701: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2701, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 2650a is detected (S2702). A winning command indicating that a winning to 650a has been detected is set (S2704), and the process proceeds to S2705. On the other hand, in the process of S2702, if winning to the specific winning hole 2650a is not detected (S2702: No), the processes of S2703 and S2704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2705.

In the process of S2705, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705). On the other hand, in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 9 or less (S2705: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2706), and if the round time has elapsed (S2706: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. In addition, in the process of S2706, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round game of this big win. In this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot and the number of rounds, the end condition of the round game is established by the same elapsed round time and the number of prizes won.

In the process of S2707, closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2707), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set is set (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 2650a this time is based on the end of 5 rounds (S2709), and if it is determined that it is the closure based on the end of 5 rounds (S2709: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is set to off (S2710), and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning hole 2650a this time is due to the completion of rounds other than 5 rounds (S2709: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, so the process of S2710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2711, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg, the variable probability effective flag 203ji, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the process of S2705 (S2705: No), and when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S2706 (S2706: No), the processes of S2707 to S2711 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2712, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is ON (S2712), and if the round end flag 203 is OFF (S2712: No), the process proceeds to S2713. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203 is ON in the process of S2712 (S2712: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203ji is ON (S2716). In the processing of S2716, if the variable probability effective flag 203ji is off (S2716: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203ji is ON (S2716: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj (S2717), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2718). Then, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203jj is not the upper limit value (S2718: No), the process proceeds to S2713, and the probability variation switch 2665e3 is monitored to execute the processing of updating the probability variation setting flag 203jd. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203jj is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the variable probability switch 2665e3 from being illegally passed through the ball and the variable probability state being imparted.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2718: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203ji and the round end flag 203 are set to OFF (S2719), the value of the probability variable effective timer 203jj is reset (S2720), and this processing ends.

Also, in the processing of S2713, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3 (S2713), and if the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3 (S2713: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 2665e3 (S2713: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203je (S2714), the variable probability setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715), and the process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S2412) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S2412). This abnormality process (S2412) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, it is a process for determining whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 2650a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality process (S2412), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2801), and if not (S2801: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (see FIG. 196) (S2802).

In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 2650e4 (S2802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203jk (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: No), the process of S2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2804.

In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is ON (S2804). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is off (S2804: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is ON (S2804: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is updated by adding 1 (S2805). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203je and the value of the discharge number counter 203jk) matches the number of prizes won (the value of the prize number counter 203jf) (S2807).

In the processing of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S2807: No), an error command is set (S2808), and the process proceeds to S2809. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge channel 2650e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge channel 2650e2 and passing through the variable probability switch 2650e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S2807: Yes), the process of S2808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2809. In the process of S2809, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to OFF (S2809), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is reset (S2810). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203jf, the discharge number counter 203jk, and the variable probability passing counter 203je are reset (S2811), and the process is terminated.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 255), it is possible to quickly detect and notify the occurrence of a problem such as ball clogging occurring inside the V winning device 2650 and the ball entering the specific winning hole 2650a not being discharged normally.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 263, the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. The tenth embodiment differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that command determination processing 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) is performed in place of command determination processing 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183), and variable display setting processing 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) is performed in place of variable display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187). The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 256, the contents of command determination processing 10 (see S4193) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 10 (see S4193). When the command determination process 10 (see S4193) is executed, the same processes of S4231 to S4208 as the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) of the seventh embodiment are executed.

Then, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S4208: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2) and normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223ja (S4291), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4208: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command (winning information command) has been received (S4210). Details of the winning command process 10 (S4292) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command (winning information command) has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S4293). If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4293: No), then it is determined whether or not the general map related command has been received (S4216). In addition, the detailed description of the normal figure related process 10 (S4295) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4216, if it is determined that the command related to the general pattern is not received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot is received (S4296), and if it is determined that the command is received (S4296: Yes), the processing 10 related to the jackpot is executed (S4297), and then this processing is terminated. A detailed description of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4296: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4220), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the contents of the winning command process 10 (see S4292) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning command process 10 (S4292). This winning command process 10 (S4292) is executed when a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, a normal symbol lottery winning information command set when the lottery right for the normal symbol lottery is acquired, or a V winning command set when the ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during the jackpot game is received.

When the winning command process 10 (S4292) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). (S4442) If it is determined that there is winning information (S4442: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal patterns (S4443).

Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high probability state of the normal pattern, that is, it is the normal state (S4443: No), it is a state in which the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins the normal pattern is obtained in the normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set. When the display command is set in the process of S4444, the display control device 114 is notified with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control processing in other audio lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect (for example, an effect to encourage whether or not the small display region Dm3 is formed in the main display region Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. be done.

In the present embodiment, the above-described suggestive effect is executed only when the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired in the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and the above-described suggestive effect may be executed even when it is determined that the prize information indicating the specific lost winning is included in the normal pattern winning information command. As a result, it is possible to set the case where the normal pattern winning game is executed and the case where it is not executed when the suggestion performance is executed, so that the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery right for the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, the suggestive effect is configured to be executed. In addition to this configuration, the timing at which the normal pattern lottery is actually executed based on the special pattern lottery being executed or the preliminary determination result of the special pattern lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, that is, the timing at which the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information command for the normal pattern indicating winning per normal pattern is executed (per normal pattern). A preliminary game state process for determining whether or not the game state at the timing when the game is executed is the normal state may be executed, and when it is determined that the game state is the normal state, the above-described suggestive performance may be executed. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description continues. In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the winning information command for the normal figure is not received (S4441: No), if it is determined that there is no hit information in the process of S4442 (S4442: No), If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in the process of S4443 (S4443: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4445.

In the processing of S4445, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2791) set when the ball flows down to the variable probability switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S2411 in FIG. 254)) (S4445), and if it is a V winning command (S4445: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4446), and other processing is performed. is executed (S4412), and the process ends. Also, in the process of S4445, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4445: No), the process of S4446 is skipped, the process of S4412 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the general pattern related process 10 (S4295) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general-purpose map related process 10 (S4295). This general pattern related process 10 (S4295) is a process executed when a general pattern variation pattern command indicating that a normal pattern lottery is executed, a general pattern per start command indicating that a general pattern per game is started, and a general pattern per end command indicating the end of a general pattern per game are received from the main control device 110.

When the general pattern related processing 10 (S4295) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general pattern variation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4701: Yes), the normal pattern variation start command for display is set (S4702), and then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the normal pattern is in a high probability state (S4781). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4781: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4781: No), it is determined whether the general pattern variation pattern command received this time is a general pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has been won per normal pattern (S4782), and if it is determined that it has not been elected per normal pattern (S4782: No), this is as it is. End the process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal pattern win is won (S4782: Yes), the long open pattern is executed for the normal pattern per variation, so a display command indicating waiting for the long open is set (S4783), and this processing is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4783, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will soon be set.

In the present embodiment, a processing form that displays the display form (display form that forms a small display area DM3) shown in FIG. 231 (B) based on whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation fluctuates, but is not limited to this, and a specific outbreak fluctuation (for example, the same fluctuation time is the same fluctuation time. The display form (display form that forms a small display area DM3) may be displayed in FIG.

Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied according to the content of the variation performance (third symbol variation performance) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. For example, when the variation performance with high expectation for big win (for example, ready-to-win performance) is executed in the third symbol variation performance, the display content of the small display region Dm3 may be made smaller than when the variation performance with high expectation for big win (for example, ready-to-win performance) is not executed. Good. In this way, by variably controlling the display contents by giving a relationship between the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the useless supply of a lot of game information and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. If it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703), and if it is determined that the normal pattern per start command is received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4784), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4784: No) ), set a display command indicating that the long opening is in progress (S4785), and terminate this process. By setting the display command in the process of S4785, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the long open win is being executed. Moreover, in the process of S4784, when it discriminate|determines that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4784: Yes), the process of S4785 is skipped and this process is complete|finished.

In the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the normal pattern per start command is not received (S4703: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per end command is received (S4709), if it is determined that it is received (S4709: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4786), and if it is not greater (S4786: No), then the normal symbol retention ball counter It is determined whether the value of 223ja is 1 or more (S4787), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S4787: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S4788). (S4790), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4786 to S4788, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297). In the jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297), the third symbol display device 81 executes the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4981), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4981: Yes), an ending display mode indicating entry into the chance mode (a time-saving state is set) is set (S4982), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4981: No), that is, when it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, an ending display mode indicating entry into a super chance mode (variable probability state is set) is set (S4983), and this processing is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 241, the ending periods of different lengths are set according to the set jackpot types (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is started. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of the jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information to indicate the number of won prize balls and control to display information to indicate the number of round games being played), and prize ball payout control to pay out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the V prize winning device 2650 during the jackpot game) are frequently performed. Since there is no need to execute display control for the display control, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the processing for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, the ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation of the special symbols in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, or may be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 which is executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period.

In the processing of S4901, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4913), and if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4914), and it is determined whether the current round number is 5 rounds (V round) (S4984). When it is determined that there are 5 rounds (V round) (S4984: Yes), a display command for guiding V winning is set (S4985), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4984 that the number of rounds this time is not 5 rounds (V round), that is, if it is determined that a round game other than the 5th round will be started (S4984: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4986). Also, when it is determined that the ending command is not received in the processing of S4986 (S4986: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command is received (S4915), and when it is determined that it is received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end processing is executed (S4916), and then this processing is finished. Also, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is not received in the process of S4915 (S4915: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, the processing of ending processing 10 (S4987) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending process 10 (S4987). This ending process 10 (S4987) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the above-described jackpot related process 10 (see S4297 in FIG. 259), and is a process for finally determining the ending display mode executed during the ending period.

When the ending process 10 (S4987) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4991: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to OFF (S4992), execution of the ending display corresponding to the already set ending display mode is set (S4995), and this process is terminated. . Also, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223jc is not set to ON in the processing of S4991 (S4991: No), it is determined whether the current big win is a variable probability big win (S4993), and if it is determined that it is not a variable probability big win (it is a normal big win) (S4993: No), the process proceeds to S4995 as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4993, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot (S4993: Yes), out of the ending period, set a display switching command for switching the display mode of the second half period (7 seconds) (S4994), and shift to the processing of S4995.

When the display switching command is set in the process of S4994, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set corresponding to the setting of the variable probability state in advance (see FIG. 236(d)) is executed to the display mode corresponding to the time saving state being set (see FIG. 236(c)). In this embodiment, the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183). This variable display setting process 10 (S4183) differs from the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5251) is executed instead of the effect mode setting process (S5232), and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237). Another difference is that the process of subtracting the value of the fluctuation number counter (S5231 and S5235 in FIG. 187) is eliminated. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) will be described. Figure 262 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing 10S (S5251). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) is executed when setting the variable effect of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261), and the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the set game state is executed.

When the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variable state based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S8251). If it is determined that it is not a probability variable state (normal state, time saving state) (S8251: No), the production mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, the production mode that stops without reaching the reach after the 3rd design variation is started, or the production mode from the start of the 3rd design variation to the reach state and 5 seconds), that is, the period in which a common production mode can be executed regardless of the stop design of the 3rd design. The corresponding effect mode is determined (S8252), and then the effect mode corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, the effect mode corresponding to the period until the third symbol is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds have elapsed since the ready-to-win state) is determined (S8253), and the process proceeds to the process of S8257 described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S8251, if it is determined that the variable probability state (S8251: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S8254), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S8255). Here, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242(c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is always selected when the jackpot is won, and the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is selected in about 90% of the cases when the winning is lost.

In the processing of S8255, when it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S8255: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the probability variable performance selection table 222jb (S8256), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8257), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8255: No), the above-described S8252 and S8253 processes are executed, then S8257 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) will be described. Figure 263 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing 10 (S5252). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed when setting the variable effect of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261), and the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the set game state is executed.

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S8261), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S8261: Yes), the command for display indicating entering the chance zone is set (S8262), then the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S8263), and the normal special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja is set. Based on this, an effect mode is determined (S8264), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8261, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S8261: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the variable probability state (S8266), and if it is determined that it is not in the variable probability state (S8266: No), the production mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, the production mode to stop without reaching the reach after the 3rd symbol variation is started, or the 3rd A production mode corresponding to a period during which a common production mode can be executed regardless of the stop pattern of the third symbol (S8267), and then a production mode corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, a production mode corresponding to the period until the third symbol is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state), that is, the stop symbol of the third symbol. The effect mode of the correspondingly variable period is determined (S8268), the process proceeds to the process of S8265 described above, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S8266, if it is determined that the variable probability state (S8266: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S8269), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S8270). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242(c), when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, the variation pattern with the basic time of 30 seconds is selected with a probability of about 25% when the jackpot is won and about 4% when the miss is won.

In the processing of S8270, when it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S8270: Yes), the performance mode (details of performance) is determined based on the probability variable performance selection table 222jb (S8271), the variation pattern command for display indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8265), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8270: No), the above-described processing of S8267 and S8268 is executed, then S8265 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed in duplicate (in parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time-saving state, variable probability state) is set than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state), so that it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol, when a ball enters a ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric accessory 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when winning a normal symbol. In addition, it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In other words, when the game is played in the normal state which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. With this configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the game state to be set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting the game state with a high degree of advantage to be set.

In addition, when winning is won in a normal pattern lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of normal patterns is set, a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery even in a normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player who is playing in the normal state can be made to execute a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot winning and a game aiming for a winning lottery in the normal symbol lottery, and early boredom of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be varied based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol stored, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as a performance mode of the special figure 2 variation performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-loss variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a win is performed in the first half period of the variation performance, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to perform a pseudo-hit variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, and the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation performance. The number of times is configured to be variable corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big win. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery is conducted a plurality of times.

As a result, even when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special pattern lottery to be executed first among a plurality of special figure 2 reservations obtained during the normal pattern per game, the player can be made to think that he or she has won the big prize because the plurality of special figure 2 reservations are obtained during the normal pattern per game, so that the player can play the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation more enthusiastically during the normal pattern per game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved number is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, as the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance, the variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the pseudo repetition of the special figure 2 variation performance in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variable performance simulating the special figure 1 variable performance is executed, the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, so that the variable performance with unexpectedness for the player can be executed.

In the present embodiment, when a variable probability jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as a performance mode of the notification performance (at the start of the jackpot game), and immediately before the notification performance is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the performance mode of the notification performance based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, and when the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the preset performance is performed. The notification effect of the mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball does not flow down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and the variable probability jackpot advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, there is a problem that if the performance mode of the jackpot ending period is simply changed to the performance mode executed in the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification performance is executed during the ending period. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode which is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game is made in advance, it is necessary to store image data (performance data) for the performance mode in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the normal win game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification performance that does not give a sense of incompatibility to a player without providing a dedicated performance mode that is used only when a ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a variable probability big win game.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, thereby switching and setting the effect mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game. The notification performance executed for a period may be executed, or the round performance executed during the final round period of the big win game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the big win ending period is set, and then the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual big win ending period by executing the notification performance.

Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which a ball flowing down the right area enters the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the above-described left area, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state and whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the same privilege is provided whether the player executes the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be bilaterally symmetrical. However, the configuration is not limited to this. The ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game, so that the left-handed game is more difficult to acquire prize balls than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is more likely to acquire prize balls than the left-handed game, but it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, i.e., during the execution of the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method, and in the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (the game during the time-saving state or the probability variable state), the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the case where the command for the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning to the special figure entrance 64 is suspended up to 4 times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to 1 time, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to this. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the special figure entrance 64 may be indicated by numbers in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the area divided into four.

Further, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling patterns as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying patterns in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but includes, for example, a performance display in which one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern, by variously displaying actions or changing displays. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third design. Further, each display mode may be set by using common image data of the display control device 114, for example, so that the player can hardly distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. is executed, and in the time-saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed, or a left-handed game may be executed during the time-saving state and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed when any game state is set or when the jackpot game is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means is determined to have been operated by the player by pressing the button. or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as an effect operation means for changing the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal capable of inputting an output signal from the frame button 22) and outputting to the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of operation means for performance are provided, output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of operation means for performance can be centrally managed, so that the mode of performance for the player's operation of the operation means for performance can be set smoothly.

In addition, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the switching button group 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game per character is provided, and the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) are provided. 22c may be configured to be executed not by the main controller 110 but by the audio lamp controller 113 side.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 296. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above facilitates the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol with a high small winning probability by shifting to the latent definite state, and forms a state in which a game ball is entered into the right variable winning device 1650 to frequently obtain a chance to win a prize ball. In other words, it is configured to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without winning the jackpot.

In addition to this, in the eleventh embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the combination (setting) of the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (variable probability state) is configured to be variable. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, six types of combinations (settings) are defined as combinations (settings) of the jackpot probability (see FIG. 269(a)). The higher the jackpot probability is set (higher setting), the easier it is to win the jackpot in both the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) and the latent state (high probability state of special symbols). On the other hand, the lower the probability of big win (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period (easier to generate addiction). That is, the game properties (the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period, and the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to be continued for a relatively long period) can be differentiated according to the big win probability (probability), so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, that the main controller 110 is provided with various operation means (setting keys 110b and setting change switches 110c) for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 (combination of jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state and the low-probability state). The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the seventh embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 264, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 264, the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) only in that a special figure 1 winning device 1640 is provided below the central first ball entrance 64c to be opened when a small win is obtained in the first special symbol lottery. In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, a specification is adopted in which a small win can be won not only in the lottery of the second special symbol but also in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the type of the prize winning device that is opened (allows ball entry) when the small win is won is made different according to the type of the special symbol.

This special figure 1 winning device 1640 includes at least a special figure 1 winning opening 1640a into which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a, and a special figure 1 small winning solenoid (not shown) for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. This special figure 1 winning device 1640 is normally maintained in a closed state in which the opening/closing plate completely covers the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a, making it difficult for game balls to enter the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a (closing the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a). When the lottery of the first special pattern results in a small win, the solenoid for the special figure 1 small win is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front lower side to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball easily wins a prize for the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 264, the special figure 1 winning device 1640 has the central first ball entrance 64c arranged vertically above it, and the upper right direction and the upper left direction in the front view are blocked by the game nail. That is, the small hit of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment is not provided for the player to win the prize ball, but is provided to forcibly end (discard) the long variation of the second special symbol by the small hit of the first special symbol when the second special symbol lottery is executed due to intentional or mistaken hitting to the right in the normal state. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for one of the special symbols becomes a big win or a small win, if the variation display of the other special symbol is being executed when the variation display of the big win or the small win is stopped, the variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In other words, even if the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 645 by hitting to the right and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in normal times, and the second special symbol is long-varied (variation display for 600 seconds) is executed, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by entering the game ball into the first center ball entrance 64c by hitting to the left after that. It is possible to forcibly end (discard) the long variation of the second special symbol by winning the election. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation of the special symbol on the side that is likely to be executed for each game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various operation means for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 265 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the setting value display device 110a capable of displaying the setting value to the main control device 110, the setting key 110b capable of switching between a state of accepting the setting change operation (and the setting confirmation operation) and a state of not accepting it (normal game state), and in the state of accepting the setting change operation (setting change state), the operator (for example, the staff of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed) operates in response to the operation. A setting change mechanism is provided which comprises at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing setting values of the cock machine 10. FIG. A setting change method and a setting confirmation method using this setting change mechanism will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

First, with reference to FIGS. 266(a) to (d), the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIGS. 266(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, with the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 turned off, rotate the setting key 110b clockwise to turn it to the ON position (see FIG. 266(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 first. Next, while turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 266(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state. In the setting change state, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display content makes it possible for the operator (for example, a hall clerk) to easily understand that the setting change state has been normally entered.

When the setting change state is entered, the set value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 266(c)). In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, six types of setting values, ie, setting values 1 to 6, are provided. That is, setting 1 has the lowest jackpot probability (for example, 1/320 in a low probability state, and 1/102 in a high probability (variable probability) state), and setting 6 has the highest jackpot probability (for example, 1/220 in a low probability state and 1/70 in a high probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed in the order of 1→2→ . . . →6 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed. Further, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the setting value is 6, the setting value is returned to 1. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. Note that FIG. 226(c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the set value is set to "5". As shown in FIG. 226(c), when the set value is switched to 5 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "5" indicating the setting 5 is displayed for the last digit on the set value display device 110a.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting key 110b is turned counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position, thereby terminating the setting change state and shifting to a normal game state (see FIG. 266(d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key part can be inserted into the keyhole only when an operator (for example, a hall clerk) performs a setting change operation, and the key part can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized players from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, so that it is possible to prevent the hall from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

Next, referring to FIGS. 266(e) to 266(g), a procedure for setting confirmation (setting confirmation operation) will be described. In order to confirm the setting, first, the setting key 110b is turned to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as in the setting change operation (see FIG. 266(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while it is in the off state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 266(f)). When the setting confirmation state is entered, the currently set values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in FIG. 266(f) shows a state in which "5" is set as the set value. When the confirmation of the settings by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to a state in which the normal game can be played (see FIG. 266(g)).

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting may be switched in order of 1→2→ . Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out from the keyhole portion to restore the normal game state. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the transition of the effect mode when the setting change operation is terminated and the normal game is enabled in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, an effect that can suggest to the player the set value set by the setting change operation can be executed. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, only during the period from the setting change until the jackpot is won for the first time, every time a specific variation pattern is selected, the setting suggesting performance suggesting the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

In this setting suggestion performance, the left pattern row and the right pattern row are stopped and displayed with the third symbols attached with the same numbers, and the performance of finally losing (so-called reach failure performance) is executed, and the set value is suggested to the player by the numbers of the left and right third patterns stopped when the ready-to-win occurs. More specifically, the 1-symbol ready-to-win (ready-to-win effect in which the third pattern with the number "1" attached to the left and right is stopped and displayed) is highly likely to be selected when "1" is set as the setting value, the 2-symbol ready-to-win is highly likely to be selected when the setting value is "2", the 3-symbol ready-to-win is highly likely to be selected when the setting value is "3", and the 4-symbol ready to be selected is the setting value "3". The possibility of being selected is high when 4" to "6" are set, the possibility of being selected is high when ``5'' or ``6'' is set as the set value, and the possibility of being selected is high when ``6'' is set as the set value. Also, the ready-to-win with "9" symbols is configured to be selected only when "6" is set as the set value. On the other hand, the reach of 8 symbols is configured such that the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of being selected.

FIG. 267 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode after the setting change operation in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 267, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting change operation is completed, the normal performance mode is executed over the variable display based on the lottery of special symbols for 49 times, and the setting suggestion performance is executed in the 50th variable display. Then, in the 51st to 99th variable display, the normal effect mode is executed, and in the 100th variable display, the setting suggesting effect is executed. After that, the setting suggesting effect is executed every time the number of times of variable display becomes a multiple of 50 until the jackpot is won for the first time. In the eleventh embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether or not it is a variation pattern for which the setting suggestion effect should be set, depending on the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272(b), but in the eleventh embodiment, when power is turned on with RAM clear 122, the variation pattern scenario is set such that a special variation type (outlier special reach variation) that is not normally selected is selected each time the number of variations after power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50. On the side of the voice lamp control device 113, only when a deviation special reach variation is notified as a variation pattern command, the performance mode of setting suggestion performance is determined and the variation pattern performance of the determined performance mode is executed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to keep track of whether or not a setting change (power-on accompanied by operation of the RAM clear switch 122) has been executed in the sound lamp control device 113, the number of fluctuations after power-on, and the like, so the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 side can be reduced.

After the setting is changed, until the jackpot is won for the first time, the player is made to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 that has not won the big win even once by executing the setting suggesting performance every time the lottery of the special pattern is executed, and the player can be motivated to continue the game depending on the presence or absence of the setting suggesting performance and its contents. More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 where the result of the previous day is bad (the result is a low jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of big wins), when the setting suggestion performance can be confirmed, the player can be expected to expect that the setting value has been changed to an advantageous set value, so that the player can be made to want to continue the game at the pachinko machine 10 where the setting suggestion performance has been confirmed. In addition, for example, when the setting suggestive effect cannot be confirmed in the pachinko machine 10 where the previous day's result is good (the result is a high jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games played and the number of big wins), the player can be convinced that the settings of the previous day have not been changed, so that the player can continue the game in anticipation of a good result similar to that of the previous day. Furthermore, in the setting suggesting effect, when the effect in which the high setting can be expected is executed, the game can be continued with a stronger expectation of the high setting. In addition, even when a big win is achieved before the execution of the setting suggesting performance (before the lottery of special symbols is executed 50 times), the player can be made to think that winning within 50 times is more likely to occur as the setting is higher, so that the player can be made to continue the game.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, until the first big win is won, the player's motivation for playing the game can be enhanced by executing an effect capable of suggesting a specific element (set value) relating to the advantage of the pachinko machine 10 each time a special pattern lottery is executed for a specific number of times (50 times). As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10, especially in a state in which the jackpot has not been won.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 268(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 268(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with the first per random number 11 table 202ma instead of the first per random number 7 table 202fa with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)). The difference is that a jackpot type selection 11 table 202md is provided instead of 02fd, a variation pattern selection 11 table 202me is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and a variation pattern scenario table 202mf is added. The variation pattern scenario table 202mf is the four variation pattern tables (normal 11 table 202me1, time saving/probability variation 11 table 202me2, latency 11 table 202me3, RAM clear time table 202me4) that are referenced to determine which variation pattern (variation time) is to be selected.

First, with reference to FIG. 269(a), details of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 269(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 269(a), in the first winning random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment, the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as big hits is defined in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the set value "1" (setting 1) is defined in association with "0 to 204" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1, and the setting value "2" (setting 2) is defined in association with "0 to 217" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1, and the set value "3" (setting For 3), the counter value (random value) range of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to be "0 to 233", the setting value "4" (setting 4) is defined to be the counter value (random value) range of the first winning random number counter C1 "0 to 251", and the setting value "5" (setting 5) is defined to be the counter value (random value) range of the first winning random number counter C1 "0 to 272". The set value "6" (setting 6) is defined in association with "0 to 297" as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first hit random number counter C1. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the possible range of the first winning random number counter C1 is expanded to "0 to 65535". Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state is 1/320 (205/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/301 (218/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/280 (234/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/260 (252/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/240. (273/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/220 (298/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the high-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 643" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 1, "0 to 686" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 to setting 2, and "0" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 3. "0 to 735" is defined in association with setting 4, "0 to 791" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 4, "0 to 857" is defined in association with setting 5 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 935" is defined in association with setting value 6 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. are For this reason, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is 1/102 (644/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/95 (686/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/89 (736/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/82 (792/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/76 (858 /65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/70 (936/65536). The ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, as a whole, the higher the setting, the higher the degree of advantage for the player. That is, setting 6 is most advantageous for the player, and setting 1 is most disadvantageous. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of a big win, so the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the big win itself increases, and even if the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small win during the latent state is reduced, the higher the setting, the higher the total advantage. That is, a low setting (for example, setting 1) tends to be disadvantageous to the player as the game is continued, so that it becomes a game property of a short-time game depending on how many prize balls can be obtained in the latent state of 1 (how many times a lottery of special symbols can be executed without winning a big win).

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to set the set value to 1 out of 6 stages of set values from 1 to 6, and the higher the setting, the higher the probability of a big win in a low probability state and a high probability (variable probability) state. Therefore, the higher setting makes it difficult to continue the disadvantageous normal state for a long period of time (hardly the occurrence of addiction), while the most advantageous latent state tends to end in a relatively short period of time (other game states are easily set by winning a big win in the latent state). Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a special pattern lottery is executed in the latent state which is the most advantageous game state, a small win is won with a high probability and the right variable prize winning device 1650 is opened, so that even if the player does not win a big win, chances of winning prize balls are given frequently. Further, once the game shifts to an advantageous latent state, it is constructed so as not to shift to another game state unless a big win is won. Therefore, in the latent probability state, the longer the period during which the big win is not won (that is, the more addictive the game is), the more prize balls can be obtained by the small win, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in an advantageous probability state, the low setting with a low probability of big win and relatively easy occurrence of addiction tends to increase the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by a small winning game in a probability state of 1, rather than the high setting with high probability of big win and relatively difficult occurrence of addiction. That is, the game properties (the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period, and the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to be continued for a relatively long period) can be differentiated according to the big win probability (probability), so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special pattern was configured to be common to all settings, but the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be changed for each setting. More specifically, for example, while the jackpot probability in the low-probability state varies according to the set value as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state may be constant regardless of the set value (for example, 1/90). With this configuration, the ease of addiction in the high-probability state can be made common regardless of the setting, so the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, since the advantage of the high setting can be further enhanced, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game property that the higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. Further, for example, the odd-numbered setting (settings 1, 3, 5) and the even-numbered setting (settings 2, 4, 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, odd number setting lowers the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/100), whereas even number setting increases the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/70). By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Further, in this case, the probability of big wins in the low-probability state of the special pattern may be configured so that the even-numbered setting has a higher jackpot probability than the odd-numbered setting, and the odd-numbered setting and the even-numbered setting may be configured so that the higher the odd-numbered setting, the higher the big-winning probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state does not last long, but the latent state does not last long, so that a game property in which the ball-out transition tends to be relatively gentle can be realized. On the other hand, in the odd-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state tends to last for a long time, but the latent state tends to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, since appropriate settings can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269(b), the details of the small winning random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 269(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269(b), in the eleventh embodiment, as the random number value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit, a common value is defined regardless of the type of special symbol. More specifically, 936 to 58981 are associated and defined as the range of random numbers corresponding to the small hits (the counter value of the first hit random number counter C1). Among the 65535 random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 65535 that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the small winning is 58046, so the ratio of the lottery result to the small winning when the lottery of the special symbol is executed is about 88.6% (58046/65536).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for the special pattern is executed, a small win is won with a high probability (ratio of 88.6%), so that the right variable winning device 1650 is frequently opened in an advantageous latent state, and the player can frequently win prize balls. Therefore, since the amusement of the game in the latent certainty state can be improved, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game will shift to the latent certainty state. Further, by constructing the lottery not only for the second special pattern but also for the first special pattern for the lottery so as to win a small prize with a high probability, when the lottery for the second special pattern is executed due to intentional or erroneous hitting to the right in a normal state, the long variation of the second special pattern can be forcibly terminated (discarded) by the small prize for the first special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, details of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. This jackpot type selection 11 table 202md is a data table in which a determination value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, similarly to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 270, in the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment, six jackpot types of “jackpot A11” to “jackpot F11” are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbols, five jackpot types of "jackpot G11" to "jackpot K11" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), "jackpot A11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. This "jackpot A11" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds (R) variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state regardless of the game state at the time of winning (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON regardless of the game state). This "jackpot A11" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the jackpot ends is also the most advantageous. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the ``jackpot A11'' is 1, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A11'' is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot B11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 49". This "jackpot B11" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the variable probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot (variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot B11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 in game states other than the normal state (time saving state, variable probability state, and potential probability state).

That is, when the "jackpot B11" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a comparatively advantageous variable probability state. In this definite variable state, since the number of times of time saving is set to 65536, the definite variable state continues substantially until the next big hit. On the other hand, when "jackpot B11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the number of times of time saving is set to 0, so the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, "jackpot B11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 49 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win B11'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win B11'' is 49% (49/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot C11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 59". This "jackpot C11" is a jackpot (8-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

That is, when the "jackpot C11" is won, a variable probability state is set which is substantially continued until the next jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "jackpot C11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot C11'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C11'' is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot D11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64". This "jackpot D11" is a type of jackpot (8-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. In addition, unlike the "jackpot C11", in the "jackpot D11", the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, so the variable probability state does not always continue until the next jackpot. That is, when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big win within 100 times after the end of the "big win D11", the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0 and shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "jackpot D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot C11" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the lottery of special symbols within 100 times results in a big hit, the operation is exactly the same as the "big win D11", so it can be rephrased as a big win type that tends to be more advantageous than the "big win C11" in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot D11'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot D11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot E11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 84". This "jackpot E11" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the "jackpot E11" is a jackpot type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot E11'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E11'' is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot F11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 99". This "jackpot F11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern (the variable probability flag 203g is set off). When the ``jackpot F11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while when the ``jackpot F11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, if 'big win F11' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, so 'big win F11' is the most disadvantageous big win type in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 15 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot F11'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot F11'' is 15% (15/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". This "jackpot G11" is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the completion of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot G11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot G11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``jackpot G11'' is won in a normal state, a probability variable state substantially continuing until the next jackpot is set, while when a ``jackpot G11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the most advantageous latent probability state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot G11'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot G11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot H11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 9". This "jackpot H11" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the state of the special pattern after the completion of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot H11'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot H11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``jackpot H11'' is won in a normal state, a probability variable state substantially continuing until the next jackpot is set, while when a ``jackpot H11'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the most advantageous latent probability state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot H11'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot H11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot I11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 14". This "jackpot I11" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of 100 times of time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the "jackpot I11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot I11'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot I11'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot J11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64". This "jackpot J11" is a jackpot (two-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state that is substantially continued until the next jackpot (65536 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the "jackpot J11" is a jackpot type having a lower degree of advantage than the "jackpot I11" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot J11'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot J11'' is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "jackpot K11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot K11" is a type of jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state with the number of times of time-saving 100 times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the "jackpot K11" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpot types of the second special symbols in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``big win K11'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win K11'' is 35% (35/100).

The reason why there is no jackpot type that directly shifts to the latent state when the lottery of the second special symbol is won in the normal state is to suppress the irregular game method of shooting the game ball aiming at the right second ball entrance 645 in the normal state. That is, if the player hits to the right in the normal state, the long variation of the second special symbol is executed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated, and the game state after the big win is more disadvantageous than the big win of the first special symbol, so that the player can feel that the irregular game is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the jackpot. It is composed of four types of data tables, namely, an 11 table for confirmation 202me3 referred to for determining the variation pattern when the pattern lottery is executed and a RAM clear time table 202me4 which is referred to for determining the variation pattern when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state after the RAM is cleared.

Among these, since the defined contents of the 11 tables for time saving and probability variation 202me2 are the same as the 7 tables for probability variation 202fe2 in the seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted here. First, with reference to FIG. 271(a), the details of the 11-for confirmation 11-table 202me3 constituting the 11-variation pattern selection table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 271(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the 11 table for concealment 202me3.

As shown in FIG. 271(a), the lottery for the first special symbol is defined in association with a super long variation of 60000 ms regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the latent definite state, the variable display for 600 seconds (10 minutes) is always executed. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, when the lottery result is winning, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of ``0 to 49'' in association with the winning short variation with the variation time of 2000 ms, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of ``50 to 198'' is associated with the winning long variation with the variation time of 5000 ms. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (or a small hit), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and the deviation time is 2000 ms. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent definite state, only the variation pattern with a short variation time (2 seconds or 5 seconds) is executed, so the small winning game of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively short period. Therefore, it is possible to win more prize balls in a short period of time in the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271(b), the details of the RAM clearing table 202me4 will be described. This RAM clear time table 202me4 is, as described above, a data table referred to for determining a variation pattern (variation time) based on a lottery of special symbols in the normal state (normal state after RAM clear operation) set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 122. Here, as described above, in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (setting of combinations of jackpot probabilities in the low-probability state and high-probability state), the RAM clear operation is essential. Therefore, after the setting is changed, the table for RAM clearing 202me4 is always referred to until the jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 271(b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined to correspond to the normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms for the range of "0 to 39", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined to correspond to the super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms to the range of "40 to 119", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined to be "120. ∼ 198", a special variation with a variation time of 40000 ms is defined in association with the range.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a loss and the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation is a multiple of 50, a loss special reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25000 seconds is associated and defined regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. This deviation special reach fluctuation is a fluctuation type that can be determined only in the normal state after the RAM clear operation. The voice ramp control device 113 is configured to, when receiving the variation pattern command indicating the deviation special reach variation, execute a setting suggesting performance as a performance mode (variation pattern performance) during execution of the deviation special reach variation. That is, on the condition that a jackpot is not won even once after the RAM clearing operation (after setting change), the setting suggesting performance can be executed every time the lottery of special symbols is executed 50 times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 currently playing the game by the contents of the setting suggesting performance to have novel game property that makes him/her wish to be out of the lottery of special symbols continuously at least 50 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is not generated even if the special pattern lottery is executed 50 times or more after the power is turned on, the player can be convinced that the RAM clearing operation is not performed (that is, the setting is not changed). Therefore, when the result of the pachinko machine 10 which is playing the game on the previous day is good (the result is a high jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of jackpots), the player can predict whether the jackpot probability was set to a good setting (high setting) before the day before and the good setting has not been changed until today. On the other hand, conversely, when the result of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 in which the game is played is bad (the probability of big win calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of big wins is low), it is possible to make the player predict that the bad win probability setting (low setting) was set before the previous day and the bad setting has not been changed until today. In this way, depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the presence or absence of a setting change and the set value can be guessed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271(b), when the lottery result is out and the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation is other than a multiple of 50, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 70" in association with the short deviation of the fluctuation time of 8000 ms, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "71 to 130" is defined in association with the long deviation of the fluctuation time of 12000 ms. is defined in association with the range of "131 to 170" with a deviation normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms, and with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in a range of "171 to 198" with a deviation with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. In other words, when the number of fluctuations is a number other than a multiple of 50 and the first special symbol is lost in the lottery, the special reach fluctuation is not selected. In this way, by limiting the timing for executing the deviation special ready-to-reach variation (that is, the timing for executing the setting suggestion performance) to the number of times of variation that is a multiple of 50, the player can have a sense of purpose to continue the game until the number of times of variation reaches a multiple of 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 that has not won a big win even once on the day.

Also, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a win, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600000 ms is associated and defined. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clearing operation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600000 ms is associated and defined. That is, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the RAM clearing operation, an extremely long variation time of 600000 ms is set under any circumstances. Therefore, the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated when the game is played by hitting right in the normal state, and even if the game is lost, the special reach fluctuation is not selected (the setting suggestion performance is not executed), which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.

The normal table 202me1 differs from the RAM clearing table 202me4 only in that when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery of the first special symbol, the loss special reach variation is not selected even if the number of variations is a multiple of 50 (a variation pattern in a variation number other than a multiple of 50 is selected), and other specified contents are the same as the RAM clearing table 202me4, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf, as described above, four fluctuation pattern tables (normal 11 table 202me1, time-saving/probability variable 11 table 202me2, probability 11 table 202me3, RAM clear time table 202me4) are referred to for determining which fluctuation pattern table to select a fluctuation pattern (variation time).

As shown in FIG. 272, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment defines a variation pattern table to be referred to for selecting a variation pattern in association with the game state after the last big win, the last big win type, and the number of special symbol lotteries (number of variations) after the last big win. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous big win is the latent definite state, and the last big win type is the big win A11, B11, G11, H11, a variation pattern scenario in which the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the probability 11 table 202me3 (see FIG. 271(a)) regardless of the number of times of lottery (variation number) of special symbols after the end of the big win is defined in correspondence. Therefore, when the big hits A11, B11, G11 and H11 are won, the lottery of the second special pattern is frequently executed by hitting to the right until the next big win, and an advantageous game state is formed in which the opportunity to win the small prize of the second special pattern and obtain a prize ball is frequently given.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, the game state after the end of the previous jackpot is the probability variable state, and the last jackpot type is the jackpot D11, I11, in the case of the number of times of lottery of special symbols within 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the 11 table 202me2 for time reduction and probability variation is referred, and in the case of the number of times of lottery of special symbols after 101 times, the 11 table 202me3 for latent certainty is referred. . Therefore, when the game state after the big win D11, I11 is won and the game state after the big win is set to the variable probability state, the lottery for the first special pattern is frequently executed by hitting to the right until the lottery for the special pattern is completed 100 times after the big win (long variation is always set when the lottery for the second special pattern is executed). form an advantageous game state that is frequently given. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the lottery will be executed 101 times or more without winning the jackpot in the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is a probability variable state and the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpots D11 and I11 (that is, any one of the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11), a variation pattern scenario in which the time reduction/probability variable 11 table 202me2 is referred to is associated and defined regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when a variable probability state is set by winning big wins B11, C11, G11, H11, J11, a relatively advantageous game state is formed in which the player can play the game without reducing the number of held balls until the next big win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous big win is the normal state and the type of the previous big win is the big win F11, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to is associated and defined regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win. For this reason, a game state disadvantageous to the player is formed in which the game efficiency is remarkably deteriorated unless the game is played aiming at the central first ball entrance 64c by hitting to the left.

Also, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is a time saving state, and the previous jackpot type is one of the jackpot E11, F11, and K11, the time saving/probability 11 table 202me2 is referred to in the case of the number of special symbol lotteries within 100 times after the end of the jackpot, and the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to in the case of the lottery number of special symbols after 101 times. Scenarios are associated and defined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, for the normal state after clearing the RAM, a variation pattern scenario that refers to the table 202me4 for clearing the RAM is associated and defined regardless of the number of lotteries of special symbols after clearing the RAM. Therefore, in the normal state after clearing the RAM, every time the number of times of lottery of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50, the special ready-to-win variation is selected and the setting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 currently playing the game by the contents of the setting suggesting performance to have novel game property that makes him/her wish to be out of the lottery of special symbols continuously at least 50 times or more. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 268(b). FIG. 268(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268(b), the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a set value storage area 203ma, a winning state storage area 203mb, a special figure 1 big win flag 203mc, and a special figure 2 big win flag 2, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 173). 03md, the special figure 1 small per flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small per flag 203mf are different in that they are added. In addition, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are also different in that they are deleted.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db differs from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are acquired in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 645, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and determination of the special symbol lottery or the like is performed based on each counter value stored in the execution area. When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, shift processing is performed to shift the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) having an area number smaller by 1.例文帳に追加

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is a counter for counting the reserved balls based on winning the right second ball entrance 645, and has the same function as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203da for counting the reserved balls of the first special symbol. That is, it is a counter capable of counting the second special symbol reserved ball up to the upper limit value (4).

The set value storage area 203ma is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. More specifically, if "00H" is stored in the setting value storage area 203ma, it indicates that the setting value "1" is set; if "01H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value is "2"; if "02H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value is "3"; if "03H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value is "4"; If "04H" is stored, it indicates that the set value "5" is set, and if "05H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "6" is set. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is read out, and the special symbol lottery (big win lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, among the first winning random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269(a)), the random number range corresponding to the setting value indicated by the data in the setting value storage area 203ma and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area are compared to execute the lottery for the special symbol (see S492 and S493 in FIG. 278 and S1081 and S1082 in FIG. 285). The initial value of the setting value storage area 203ma is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the value is updated by "01H" → "02H" → ... → "05H" and "01H". When the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, all the data in the RAM 203 are reset (cleared). Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203ma is also reset to the initial value "01H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, all the data in the RAM 203 are cleared when the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122 (RAM clear operation), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured to be retained even when the RAM clear operation is performed. That is, the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may not be updated (changed) unless the setting switch 110c is operated (depressed) in the setting change state. With such a configuration, when the hall side wishes to reset the data in the RAM 203 without changing the set value (for example, when the opening hours of the hall end in the most advantageous latent state, and if the reset is not performed, the most advantageous state will remain even at the start of business on the next business day, etc.), the request can be easily fulfilled, so the convenience of the hall can be improved.

The winning state storage area 203mb is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 and the variable probability flag 203fa is off), '00H' is stored as information indicating the normal state in the winning state storage area 203mb. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203fa is off), '01H' is stored as information indicating the time saving state in the winning state storage area 203mb. In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the variable probability flag 203fa is on), ``02H'' is stored as information indicating the variable probability state in the winning state storage area 203mb. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent probability state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the variable probability flag 203fa is on), ``03H'' is stored as information indicating the probability state in this winning state storage area 203j. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the end of the big win (see S1991 in FIG. 292).

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball entering the center first ball inlet 64c or the right first ball inlet 164r matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S459 in FIG. 278). This special figure 1 big win flag 203mc is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big win or the second special symbol small win (see S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S11608 in FIG. 289).

With the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with a deviated symbol is executed (see S854 in FIG. 282). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the right second ball opening 645 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S1059 in FIG. 285). This special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol (see S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S11608 in FIG. 289).

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S1554 in FIG. 288). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball entering the central first ball entrance 64c or the right first ball entrance 164r matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S10481 in FIG. 279). This special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the second special symbol big hit (see S3009 in FIG. 283, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S11608 in FIG. 289). With this special figure 1 small hit flag 203me turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S3006 in FIG. 283). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win or a small win is made in the lottery of the second special pattern while the small win of the first special pattern is being executed, and the big win or the small win is started redundantly during the small win.

The special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball entering the right second entrance 645 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation (see S1332 in FIG. 286). This special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the first special symbol big hit (see S10855 in FIG. 282, S3009 in FIG. 283, and S11608 in FIG. 289). With the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S11605 in FIG. 289). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win or a small win is made in the lottery of the second special pattern while the small win of the second special pattern is being executed, and the big win or the small win is started redundantly during the small win.

Next, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, which is realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is provided with roughly four game states. That is, there are four game states: a normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), a short-time state (low-probability state of special symbols and short-time state of normal symbols), a variable probability state (variable probability state of special symbols and short-time state of normal symbols), and a latent probability state (variable probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the most unfavorable normal state is called normal mode, the time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is low next to the normal state (normal mode) but the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held is called pullback mode, and the probability variable state with a relatively high degree of advantage in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held until the next big win is called continuous mode A. The advantageous latent state is referred to as Renso Mode B. In FIG. 273, the normal mode is shown on the upper left side, the retraction mode is shown on the upper right side, the continuous mode A is shown on the lower left side, and the continuous mode B is shown on the lower right side.

As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of transition from the normal mode to another state in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 273, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 1% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the continuous mode B. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 64% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a comparatively advantageous continuous mode A after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots E11 and F11 determined at a rate of 35% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to a pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a big win is won in the normal mode, the game can be played in anticipation of shifting to either the continuous mode A or B.例文帳に追加As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the probability of a big win varies depending on the setting, and the higher the setting (the higher the setting), the higher the probability of a big win. Therefore, the higher the setting, the more likely the jackpot will be won early in the disadvantageous normal mode. That is, the higher the setting, the less likely the period during which the jackpot is not won in the disadvantageous normal mode becomes longer (the more difficult it is to become addicted). As described above, if a jackpot is won in the normal mode, the mode is always shifted to another mode having a higher degree of advantage compared to the normal mode, so in the normal mode, the high setting with a high jackpot probability has a higher degree of advantage than the low setting.

In addition, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the pullback mode will shift to another state when a big win occurs and when a prescribed number of times of time saving has passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 273, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and one of the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to the most advantageous continuous mode B after the jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and one of the jackpots C11 and D11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to a comparatively advantageous continuous mode A after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and the jackpot F11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, and when the predetermined number of times of shortening the time (100 times) has passed since the pullback mode was set, the game shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the first special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot E11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, a pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage is set again after the jackpot ends (the pullback mode is looped). Therefore, in the pullback mode, the ratio of setting the most advantageous multi-floor mode B in the case of winning the jackpot is greatly increased compared to the normal mode (1%→50%), so that the shift to the multi-floor mode B can be expected more strongly when the player wins the jackpot. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning a big win again within the number of times of shortening the time (pulling back the jackpot) and shifting to the most advantageous continuous mode B, while the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous normal mode without winning the big win within the number of times of shortening the time. Therefore, even in the pullback mode, the high setting with a high jackpot probability has a higher advantage than the low setting, as in the normal mode.

In addition, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode A to another state when a big win occurs or when a prescribed number of times of time saving has passed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 273, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained and the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% are selected (determined) as the jackpot types, and when the number of times of time saving set in the consecutive game mode A has passed, the game shifts to the game game mode B which is most advantageous to the player. In addition, when the first special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot E11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage. Furthermore, when the first special pattern is a big win and a big win F11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the big win type, the game state after the big win is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode for the player. On the other hand, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and jackpots C11 and D11 determined at a rate of 15% are determined as the jackpot types, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode A, the probability of a big win is high, and the ratio of shifting to the consecutive game mode B, which is advantageous when the big win is won, is also high (50%) as in the pullback mode, so that a game state advantageous to the player is formed. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, even in the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbols. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot at an early stage, so when 100 times is set as the number of times of shortening the working hours in the multi-station mode A, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of losing 100 consecutive times in the lottery of the special pattern, so that the shift to the more advantageous multi-station mode B is facilitated. That is, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lower the setting, the higher the advantage. In the continuous mode A, there is a higher possibility that the number of times of reduced working hours (65536 times) that will continue until the next big win is substantially set, but if it continues until the next big win, the influence of the big win probability on the degree of advantage is relatively small. This is because, while the variable probability state continues, the game ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 164r, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held.

In addition, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode B to another state only when a big win occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 273, when the second special pattern is a jackpot, and jackpots I11 and J11 determined at a rate of 55% are selected (determined) as the jackpot types, the mode shifts to consecutive mode A which is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special pattern is a jackpot and a jackpot K11 determined at a rate of 35% is determined as the jackpot type, a pullback mode with a low degree of advantage is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the second special pattern is a big win and the big wins G11 and H11 determined at a rate of 10% are selected (determined) as the big win types, the game state after the big win is again set to the most advantageous consecutive game mode B (the consecutive game mode B is looped). In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the player can acquire prize balls by a small winning of the second special pattern while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and there is no possibility of shifting to the most disadvantageous normal mode in the case of a big winning, which is very advantageous for the player. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of a big win, so that the consecutive game mode B, which is advantageous to the player, is easily terminated early (the big win is easily won with a small number of lotteries). The continuous mode B is substantially continued until the next big win, and since it is possible to frequently acquire prize balls by small wins while the continuous mode B continues, more prize balls can be expected to be obtained by not winning the big win. Therefore, in the low setting where it is difficult to win the jackpot (the probability of the big win is low), the expected value of the number of winning balls to be obtained when shifting to the continuous mode B is higher than in the high setting, so that the novel game property can be realized in which the low setting is more advantageous in the most advantageous game state. In other words, in the consecutive game mode B, it is possible to realize a very special game property in which the degree of advantage decreases as the probability of winning increases, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 274, the ROM 222 of the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RM 222 of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 30(a)) only in that a setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma is added. The setting suggesting performance selection table 222ma is a data table referred to for selecting the performance mode of the setting suggesting performance to be executed during the execution period of the non-special ready-to-reach variation when the main control device 110 notifies the special ready-to-reach variation as a variation type by a variation pattern command.

Details of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 275, in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma in the eleventh embodiment, the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect mode are defined in association with each set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1, 10 counter values of "0 to 9" are defined as the value range of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of one-symbol ready-to-win, and in the case of setting 2 to 6, three counter values of "0 to 2" are defined in correspondence as the value range of the effect counter 223f. Therefore, when the deviation special reach variation is notified in setting 1 (when the number of times of variation after setting change becomes a multiple of 50), the ratio of selecting the variation pattern performance of one symbol reach is 10% (10/100). Therefore, when one symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of 1, which is the lowest setting, is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1, three counter values of "10 to 12" are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of the two-symbol ready-to-win, in the case of setting 2, ten counter values of "3 to 12" are defined in correspondence as the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 3 to 6, three counter values of "3 to 5" are defined in correspondence. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 2-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 is 1% (1/100), the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 2-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 2 is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 2-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 3 to 6 is 3% (3/100). Therefore, when the 2-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 2 is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1 and 2, three counter values of "13 to 15" are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of 3 symbol reach, in the case of setting 3, 15 counter values of "6 to 20" are defined in association as the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 4 to 6, three counter values of "6 to 8" are defined in association. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 3-symbol ready-to-win is 3% (3/100) when the missing special variation is notified in setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, while the ratio of selecting the variation pattern presentation of 3-symbol ready-to-win when the missing special variation is notified in setting 3 is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the 3-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 3 is relatively high.

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the 4-symbol ready-to-win production mode, in the case of settings 1 and 2, three counter values "16 to 18" are defined in association as the value of the production counter 223f in the case of setting 3, three counter values "21 to 23" are defined in association as the value of the production counter 223f in the case of setting 4, and 15 counter values "9 to 23" are defined in association with settings 5 and 6. In this case, seven counter values "9 to 15" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the percentage of 4 -pattern reach fluctuation pattern production of the 4 -design reach is selected when a special fluctuation is notified in settings 1 to 3, and when a special fluctuation is notified in setting 4, the rate in which the fluctuation pattern production of the reach is selected is 15 % (15/100), and the setting is 5, 5,. When a special fluctuation is notified in 6, the percentage of 4 -design reach fluctuation pattern production is selected is 7 % (7/100). Therefore, when the 4-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 4 is relatively high, and the player can also have expectations of setting 5 or 6.例文帳に追加

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of the 5-symbol ready-to-win, in the case of settings 1 and 2, 3 counter values "19 to 21" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in association, in the case of settings 3 and 4, 3 counter values of "23 to 26" are defined in association as the values of the effect counter 223f, in the case of setting 5, 15 counter values of "15 to 29" are defined in association, and 6. , seven counter values "16 to 22" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 5-symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 to 4 is 3% (3/100). Therefore, when 5-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 5 is relatively high, and the player can also have expectations of setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of 6 symbol ready-to-win, in the case of settings 1 and 2, three counter values of "22 to 24" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in association with each other, in the case of settings 3 and 4, three counter values of "27 to 29" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in correspondence, and in the case of setting 5, three counter values of "30 to 32" are defined in association with each other. , 15 counter values from "23 to 38" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern presentation of 6-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 to 5 is 3% (3/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern presentation of 6-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 6 is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the 6-symbol ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 6 is relatively high.

Also, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of 8 symbol reach, in the case of setting 1, 2, 75 counter values of "25 to 99" are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f in association, in the case of setting 3, 4, 70 counter values of "30 to 99" are defined in association as the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 67 counter values of "33 to 99" are defined in association, In the case of setting 6, 57 counter values from "39 to 96" are associated and defined. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 1 and 2 is 75% (75/100), the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 3 and 4 is 70% (70/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8-pattern reach when the special variation is notified in setting 5 is 67% (67/100). ), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern production of 8 symbol reach when the special variation is notified in setting 6 is 57%. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the easier it is to select the variation pattern presentation of the 8-pattern ready-to-win, so when the 8-pattern ready-to-win is executed when the number of fluctuations after setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of low setting is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 6, three counter values of "97 to 99" are defined as the values of the effect counter 223f in association with the effect mode of the 9-symbol ready-to-win, while in other settings, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated. Therefore, when the 9-symbol ready-to-win operation is performed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, setting 6, which is the highest setting, is determined.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, every time the number of times of change after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50, the setting suggesting effect is executed so that the setting can be guessed from the content (selection rate of each effect mode differs for each set value). As a result, the player can be made to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after turning on the power becomes a multiple of 50, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved after turning on the power until winning a jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 292. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 276, the details of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) will be described. This special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276, S121) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIGS. 119, S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above, and is a process for performing display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, like the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 119) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment).

Of the special symbol variation processing 11 (FIGS. 276, S121), S251, S254, S259, and S262 are the same as S251, S254, S259, and S262 of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIGS. 119, S151) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment).

Further, as shown in FIG. 276, in the special symbol variation processing 11 (S121) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S254, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being varied and displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is subtracted and updated (S291), and the first special figure of the first symbol display device The pattern display is updated (S292). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di updated in the processing of S291 is 0 (S256), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 for setting the stop display of the first special symbol is executed (S293), and the process moves to S259. The details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283. FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 in the process of S256 (S256: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S254 (S254: No), it means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 281, this first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) is executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 11 in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a value greater than 0 in the processing of S259 (S259: No), it means that the second special symbol is currently being varied and displayed. And (S296), next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update by the processing of S295 has become 0 (S262). In the processing of S262, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj has been updated to 0 (S262: Yes), it means that the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol has elapsed, so the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 for setting the stop display of the second special symbol is executed (S297), and this processing is terminated. Here, details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289, but this second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297) is executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see FIG. 180) in the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, in the process of S262, if it is determined that the value of the post-update special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj has not been updated to 0 (S262: No), the process of S297 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

Also, as shown in FIG. 276, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) in the process of S259 (S259: No), since it means that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed, next, the second special symbol variation start process 11 for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (S298), and this process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287, but this second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) is executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, details of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121), will be described. This first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment), and is a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), in each process of S351 to S355, the same processes as those of S351 to S355 of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) are executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S355, the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 for executing the first special symbol big hit lottery is executed (S391). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, but this first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 121) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment).

When the process of S391 is completed, then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the special symbol lottery result is executed (S392). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 280, but this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment). Further, when the process of S392 is finished, next, a game state update process for updating the game state is executed (S393), and this process is finished. Details of this game state update process (S393) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121, S356) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment), and as described above, it is a process for executing the first special symbol jackpot lottery.

In the processes of S451 and S458 to S461 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), the same processes as those of S451 and S458 to S461 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIGS. 121 and S356) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 278, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S451 is completed, then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S491), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is ON (S491: Yes), it means that the present is a high probability state (variability state) of the special symbol, Of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma for high probability (see FIG. 269(a)), the winning random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S492), and the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, in the process of S491, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S491: No), it means that the current is a low probability state of the special symbol, so the first per random number table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)) for the low probability. In the process of S494 executed after the process of S492 or S493, the lottery result (judgment result) of the big win lottery is obtained using the winning random number value read in the process of S492 or S493 and the data of the execution area (S494), and the process proceeds to S458.

In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 278) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S458, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot (S458: No), the special figure 1 loss variation process 11 for setting a stop symbol according to the type of loss is executed (S495), and this process ends. The details of this special figure 1 deviation variation process 11 (S495) will be described with reference to FIG.

The special figure 1 loss variation process 11 (S495) is a process for setting a stop symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost (including a small hit which is a kind of loss), and is the same process as the special figure 1 loss variation process 8 (see FIG. 210) in the eighth embodiment described above. Of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (see FIG. 279) in the eleventh embodiment, S485, and in each processing of S487 to S489, S485 of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (FIG. 210, S481) in the eighth embodiment, and the same processing as each processing of S487 to S489 are executed.

In addition, in the special figure 1 deviation variation process 11 (S495) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S485, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S485: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to ON (S10481), and the process proceeds to S487. By setting the special figure 1 small winning flag 203me, it is possible to easily determine that the small winning symbol should be stopped at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122, S357) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment).

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), in each process of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559, the same process as each process of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122, S357) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 280, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S553, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (see FIG. 272) is referred to, the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations is read (S560), and the process proceeds to S555. By reading the variation pattern table with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf, the variation pattern can be varied according to the number of variations after the big win, the game state, and the type of the previous big win, so that the variation pattern can be diversified. In the processing after S555, similarly to the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), a variation pattern is selected with reference to the read variation pattern table, and processing for setting the start of the selected variation pattern is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, details of the game state update process (S393), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This game state update process (S393) is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the game state update process (S393), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving (S2901). In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S2901: No), since there is no need to update the game state (the number of time saving times), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2902), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter is set (S2903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction has become 0 (S2904), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h has become 0 (S2904: Yes), it means that the game state has been changed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is not 0 (S2904: No), since there is no change in the gaming state, this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203fa is on (S2905), and if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203fa is on (S2905: Yes), it means that the time saving number of times in the variable probability state has become 0 and the state has transitioned to the probability state, so a state command indicating the probability state is set (S2906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203fa is off (S2905: No), it means that the number of times of time saving is 0 in the time saving state and the state has shifted to the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S293) will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

In the processes of S851 to S855, S863, and S864 in the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293), the same processes as the processes of S851 to S855, S863, and S864 of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 282, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S293) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S851, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203mc is set to OFF (S581: No), since it means that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit, the special symbol 1 loss stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol is performed (S10851). ), and the process proceeds to S863. The details of this special figure 1 out stop processing (S10851) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S581, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc is set to ON (S581: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S10852). In the process of S10852, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S10852: Yes), the process of S852 to S855 for forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and the process of S10853 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S10852: No), it means that the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed, so the processing of S852 to S855 is skipped and the process of S10853 is performed.

In the process of S10853, the start of the jackpot is set (S10853), the data stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is updated to the data corresponding to the current game state (that is, the data indicating the game state at the time of jackpot winning) (S10854), next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf, the variable probability flag 203 All the values of fa and the time saving counter 203h are reset (S10855). Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S10856), and the process proceeds to S863.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the details of the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (S10851) executed in the first special symbol variation stop processing 11 (see FIGS. 282 and S293) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviating stop process (S10851).

In the special figure 1 off stop processing (S10851), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on (S3001), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is off (S3001: No), it means that the lottery result of the special figure this time is a pure loss (not a small hit), so for the first special symbol being fluctuatingly displayed in the first symbol display device 37 A change stop is set in the outlier pattern (S3002), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203me is ON (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S3003). In the processing of S3003, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S3003: Yes), it means that the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, so the second special symbol during variation is out and forcibly stopped. More specifically, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S3004), the special figure 2 variation stop command indicating the variation stop of the second special symbol is set (S3005), and the variation stop in the off design is set for the second special symbol being displayed in the first symbol display device 37 (S3006). Then, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S3003: No), it means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner.

In the process of S3008, the start of the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S3008), and the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to OFF (3009). Next, data indicating that a small win is in progress is set in the game state storage area 203g (S3010), and the first special symbol being changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to stop changing with a small win symbol (S3011), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this special figure 1 loss stop processing (see FIG. 283), when the first special symbol wins a small win, the second special symbol is forced to lose and the variation can be stopped at the time of stop display of the small win. Therefore, in particular, when the second special pattern performs a long variation in a normal state, the long variation can be easily ended only by winning a small win with a high probability in the lottery of the first special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the details of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) will be described. This second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (FIG. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In the processes of S951 and S952 of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298), the same processes as those of S951 and S952 of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (FIGS. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S951, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S951: No), the processes of S953 to S957, S981 and S982 are executed, and S described later. 983 (S393). The processes of S953-S957, S981 and S982 are different from the processes of S351-S355, S391 and S392 of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIGS. 277, S294). The symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) are the same except that they are changed to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982). Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, in the second special symbol variation start processing 11 (see FIG. 284) in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 11 (S982) ends, the same processing as the above-described game state update processing (FIG. 281, S393) is executed (S983), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described. This second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (FIG. 178, S978) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process for executing the second special symbol jackpot lottery.

In the processes of S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), the same processes as the processes of S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (FIG. 178, S978) of the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1071, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S1071: Yes), the first per random number 11 table 202ma for high probability (see FIG. 269 (a)), read out the per random value corresponding to the current set value (S1 081), and the process proceeds to S1083. On the other hand, in the processing of S1071, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is not set to ON (S1071: No), the first per random number 11 table 202ma for low probability (see FIG. 269 (a)), the per random value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S1082), and the process proceeds to S1083. In the process of S1083, the lottery result (win/fail determination result) of the big win lottery is obtained based on the winning random number value read out in the processes of S1081 and S1082 and the data of the execution area (S1083).

In addition, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 285) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot in the process of S1058 (S1058: No), the special figure 2 loss variation process 11 for setting the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol loss is executed (S1084), and this process ends. Details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 286, in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1331), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to ON (S1332). Next, the lottery result of the second special design is set to a small hit (S1333), the small hit design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S1334), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1331, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win (that is, it is a loss) (S1331: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1335), and the process is terminated. By executing this special figure 2 loss variation processing 11 (see FIG. 286), it is possible to set an appropriate stop pattern depending on whether the type of loss is a pure loss or a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), which is one process in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 129, S956) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment).

Of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), in each process of S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1258 to S1260, S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Fig. 129, S956) in the seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment) respectively The same processing as each processing of 258 to S1260 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 287, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S1251 (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped and the process of S1253 is performed.

Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (see FIG. 287) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1253, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (FIG. 271) is referred to and the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations is read (S1281), and then the processes of S1255, S1256, S1258 to S1260 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297) will be described. This second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment described above.

Among the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297), S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563 are respectively S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S156 of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (FIGS. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment. 3 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 288, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 11 (S297) in the eleventh embodiment, in the processing of S1551, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is off (S1551: No), the special figure 2 loss stop processing 11 for stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss is executed (S1596), and the process proceeds to S1562. do. The details of this special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1551, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is ON (S1551: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 (S1591). In the processing of S1591, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 (S1591: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S1592), and the first special symbol during the fluctuation display is executed S1553, S1554 and S1505 for forcibly stopping the symbol, and the process proceeds to S1593.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1591, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S1591: No), it means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol does not need to be forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S1593, the start of the jackpot is set (S1593), and the data in the win state storage area 203mb is updated to the data corresponding to the current game state (data indicating the game state when the jackpot is won) (S1594). Next, all the values of the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the probability variation flag 203fa and the time saving counter 203h are reset (S1595), and the process proceeds to S1561.

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described. This special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (S1596) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 out stop processing 7 (FIGS. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment described above, and the second special symbol is out. It is a process for stopping with a stop symbol corresponding to.

Of this special figure 2 deviating stop processing 11 (S1596), the processing of S1660 is the same as the processing of S1660 of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 7 (FIG. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 289, in the special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (S1596) in the eleventh embodiment, it is first determined whether the special figure 2 small per flag 203mf is set to ON (S11601), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 small per flag 203m is set to on (S11601: Yes), then the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0, that is, , It is determined whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S11602). In the processing of S11602, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed while varying (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S11602: Yes), the first special symbol during variation is removed and forcibly stopped by the symbol is executed. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S11603), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON is set (S11604). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S11605), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is set to 0 (S11606), and the process proceeds to S11607.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter is 0 (S11602: No), since the first special symbol is not being varied, the processing of S11603 to S11606 for forcibly stopping the variation display of the first special symbol is skipped, and the process of S11607 is performed.

In the process of S11607, the start of the special figure 2 small hit is set (S11607), and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to OFF (S11608). Next, data indicating that a small win is in progress is set in the game state storage area 203g (S11609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a small win symbol (S11610), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 290, the contents of start-up processing 11 will be described. This start-up process 11 is a process that is executed instead of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a process that is executed to perform various initial settings based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on.

In the processes of S1701 to S1714 of the startup process 11, the same processes as the processes of S1701 to S1714 of the startup process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 290, in the start-up process 11 in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (S1721). In the process of S1721, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the ON position (S1721: Yes), this means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set, and therefore the set value control process for performing control corresponding to these states is executed (S1722), and the process proceeds to the process of S1710. Details of this set value control process (S1722) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the setting key is not in the ON position (S1721: No), the process proceeds to S1704.

In the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 290) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1710, a state command indicating the current game state is set (S1723), and the process proceeds to S1711.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, the contents of the set value control process (S1722), which is one process in the start-up process 11 (FIG. 290), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 291, in the set value control process (S1722), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 265) is turned on (S3101). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S3103, S3104). In the RAM initialization process (S3103, S3104), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S3103), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S3104). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, a status command indicating the setting change status is set (S3105), and the process proceeds to S3106.

In the process of S3106, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S3106). In the process of S3106, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S3106: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3106 that the setting switch is off (S3106: No), the process of S3107 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3108.

In the processing of S3108, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (S3108). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the OFF position (S3108: Yes), this processing is terminated. That is, the setting change state is ended, and the process returns to start-up processing 11 (see FIG. 292). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be played.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (S3108: No), the process returns to S3106. In other words, the processes of S3106 to S3108 are repeated until it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Also, in the processing of S3101, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S3101: No), first, a payout return command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S3109), and then the data in the set value storage area 203ma is read out (S3110). After the processing of S3110 is completed, next, the setting value display device 110a is caused to display the setting value corresponding to the read data (S3111), the state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (S3112), and it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position (S3113). In the processing of S3113, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (S3113: Yes), this processing ends. That is, the game is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3113 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (S3113: No), the process of S3113 is repeatedly executed. That is, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

By executing this set value control process (see FIG. 291), it is possible to change the set value in accordance with the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, details of the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 11 (S1831) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and first embodiment), and is a process for performing various controls during the jackpot game.

Of this jackpot control process 11 (S1831), in each process of S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918, the same process as each process of S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918 of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 292, in the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that the current jackpot end timing (S1912: Yes), the data of the state storage area 203mb at the time of winning is read (S1991), and the game state corresponding to the read data (game state at the time of winning the jackpot) and the current jackpot type, according to the time-saving counter 203h, the probability variation flag 203fa is updated (S1992), and the process proceeds to S1916. By executing this jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 292), the game state after the jackpot is completed can be appropriately set according to the game state when the jackpot is won and the jackpot type.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 296. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This command determination process 11 (S4131) is a process executed instead of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process for performing control according to the type of command received from the main controller 110.

In this command determination process 11 (S4131), each process except for the process of S4241 is the same as each process of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) in the seventh embodiment except for the process of S4232.

Further, as shown in FIG. 293, in the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that a state command has been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: Yes), the state command reception process 11 for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command is executed (S4241), and this process ends. Details of this state command process 11 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. This status command reception process 11 (S4241) is a process executed instead of the status command reception process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment).

In the process of S4509 of the state command reception process 11 (S4141), the same process as the process of S4509 of the state command reception process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 294, in the state command reception processing 11 (S4241) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating a setting change state (S4511). If it is determined that the command is a command indicating a setting change state (S4511: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting change screen is set (S4512), and the process proceeds to S4509.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4511 that the received command does not indicate the setting change state (S4511: No), then it is determined whether or not the received command indicates the setting confirmation state (S4513). If it is determined that the received command indicates the setting confirmation state (S4513: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting confirmation screen is set (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4509.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently set game state is changed (S4515). If it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4515: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4515 that there is a change in the game state (S4515: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S4516), and the process proceeds to S4509.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 11 (S4132) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In the variable display setting process 11 (S4132), the processes other than S5261 are the same as the processes in the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) except S5232 in the seventh embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 295, in the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S5202, the effect mode setting process 11 for setting the variable display mode corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command received this time is executed (S5261), and the process proceeds to the process of S5233. The details of this rendering mode setting process 11 (S5261) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In the processing of S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the rendering mode setting processing 11 (S5261), the same processing as the processing of S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the rendering mode setting processing (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 296, in the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8281), and the process proceeds to S8208.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is normal (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a special reach variation (S8282). In the process of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a special reach variation (S8282: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, in the processing of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is different and the special reach variation is determined (S8282: Yes), it means that after changing the setting (after turning on the power with RAM clearing operation), the number of variations has become a multiple of 50 without becoming a big win. 75) determines the effect mode with the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter (S8284), and shifts to the process of S8208.

By executing this performance mode setting processing 11 (see FIG. 296), every time the number of times of variation after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50, a setting suggestion performance can be executed (the selection rate of each performance mode differs for each set value), which makes it possible to guess the setting from the content, so that the player can be made to continue the game until the number of times of variation after the power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved after the power is turned on until the jackpot is won. .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set (for example, any one of six types of jackpot probabilities) by performing a predetermined operation (setting change operation) by a hall clerk or the like outside business hours. The higher the jackpot probability is set (higher setting), the easier it is to win the jackpot in both the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) and the latent state (high probability state of special symbols). On the other hand, the lower the probability of big win (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period (easier to generate addiction). That is, the game properties (the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period, and the game properties in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are likely to be continued for a relatively long period) can be differentiated according to the big win probability (probability), so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to always be set to the normal state (RAM 203 settings are initialized by the RAM clear operation) by performing the setting change operation, and only in the normal state that shifts after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), a specific type of variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the establishment of a specific condition. That is, whenever the number of lotteries of special symbols after changing the setting (after clearing the RAM) becomes a multiple of 50, the special ready-to-win fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm whether or not a setting change operation is executed by the variation type of the variation pattern executed when a specific condition is established (the number of lotteries of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50) after turning on the power, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved after the power is turned on until the specific condition is established. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as a production mode (variation pattern production) during execution of the special reach fluctuation, the setting value that is set can be suggested by the type of the third symbol (number attached to the third symbol) when the reach occurs. By configuring in this way, the player's motivation for the game can be improved when the ready-to-win effect of the effect mode that is easily executed with high setting is executed. In addition, when the effect mode of the content suggesting the high setting is not executed in the setting suggesting effect, it is possible to make the user want to confirm the setting suggesting effect again. That is, since it is possible to make the player think that the lottery for the special symbol will be executed 50 times, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting may be switched in order of 1→2→ . Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out from the keyhole portion to restore the normal game state. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state of special symbols and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (probability variable state) of special symbols is common to all settings. More specifically, for example, while the jackpot probability in the low-probability state varies according to the set value as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state may be constant regardless of the set value (for example, 1/90). With this configuration, the ease of addiction in the high-probability state can be made common regardless of the setting, so the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, since the advantage of the high setting can be further enhanced, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game property that the higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. Further, for example, the odd-numbered setting (settings 1, 3, 5) and the even-numbered setting (settings 2, 4, 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, odd number setting lowers the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/100), whereas even number setting increases the probability of a big win in a high probability state (e.g., 1/70). By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Further, in this case, the probability of big wins in the low-probability state of the special pattern may be configured so that the even-numbered setting has a higher jackpot probability than the odd-numbered setting, and the odd-numbered setting and the even-numbered setting may be configured so that the higher the odd-numbered setting, the higher the big-win probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state does not last long, but the latent state does not last long, so that a game property in which the ball-out transition tends to be relatively gentle can be realized. On the other hand, in the odd-numbered setting, the disadvantageous normal state tends to last for a long time, but the latent state tends to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, since appropriate settings can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved. Further, for example, only setting 6, which is the highest setting, may be configured so that the game characteristics are significantly different from those of other settings. Specifically, for example, for settings 1 to 5, while adopting the jackpot probability in the eleventh embodiment described above, only setting 6 may be set to an extremely high jackpot probability (for example, a probability of twice or more than setting 5). Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state may be set to 1/100, and the jackpot probability in the special symbol high probability state may be set to 1/30. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the setting is 6 in a relatively short period of time based on the odds of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the player who is convinced that the setting is 6 can play the game for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, by making it easy to determine whether the setting is 6 or not, the player can be made to recognize that the hole uses the setting 6 which is the highest setting (that is, the most advantageous for the player) when the setting 6 is set. Therefore, the reputation of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, in a part of the variable probability big wins (in the case of the big wins D11, E11, and I11), a variable probability state with 100 times of time saving is set after the end of the big win, and when 100 times of times of time saving have passed in the probability variable state (when 100 times of lotteries for special symbols are continuously lost), the state is shifted to the most advantageous latent probability state. In other words, in a specific game state (probability variable state), it is configured to shift to an advantageous state by continuously failing (lottery result different from a big win) over a specific number of special symbol lotteries (100 times), thereby realizing a game property that becomes more advantageous as the big win probability is lower (that is, as the setting is lower) in the high probability state of special symbols. For example, the variable probability state of the special symbols may be terminated when the lottery for the special symbols is executed a specific number of times (for example, 100 times), and the latent probability state may be the most unfavorable state (a state in which neither the first special symbol lottery nor the second special symbol lottery is executed even if the player hits to the right), and in the latent state, when the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times is continuously lost, the state may be shifted to a relatively advantageous normal state. That is, in the latent definite state, the number of rounds is small even if the big win is won, and most of the jackpot types are set to the latent definite state after the end of the big win, while most of the jackpot types are set to an advantageous variable probability state after the end of the big win if the big win is won in the normal state. Then, in the variable probability state, it is possible to make it easy to win a big win without almost reducing the number of balls held, and to make it easy to set the variable probability state again after the end of the big win, so that a game may be played with the goal of shifting to an advantageous variable probability state. Also in this specification, the lower the jackpot probability in the latent probability state, the easier it is to shift to a relatively advantageous normal state, and as a result, the easier it is to shift to the most advantageous probability variable state, so that the lower the jackpot probability (that is, the lower the setting), the more advantageous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, if the jackpot probability is low, it is difficult to win a jackpot in a normal state with a high degree of advantage, and the possibility that the variable probability count (specific number) ends without a jackpot in an advantageous variable probability state increases. Therefore, in the high setting with a high jackpot probability, the latent state and the disadvantageous jackpot are likely to be repeated. It is possible to realize a playability that becomes easier. In this way, since the game characteristics can be differentiated between the low setting and the high setting, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the deviation special reach fluctuation can be executed only in the normal state set after the setting change (after the RAM clearing operation), but it is not limited to this. For example, even in a normal state set under conditions other than after setting change (after RAM clearing operation), every time the number of special pattern lotteries becomes a multiple of a specific number of times (50 times), a deviation special ready-to-win variation is executed with a relatively low probability (for example, a probability of 1/10). By constructing in this way, even in a normal state set under conditions other than after the setting change, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of the specific number of times (50 times), so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, instead of changing the selection probability of the loss special reach fluctuation, for example, the cycle of selecting the loss special reach fluctuation may be set longer than the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clearing operation) (for example, every time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of 100). Also, in the normal state, regardless of whether or not the settings have been changed, a common variation pattern scenario may be referenced to determine the variation pattern. In other words, even in a normal state other than after setting change, it may be constituted so that the deviation special ready-to-win variation is executed every time the number of times of lottery becomes a multiple of 50, and the setting suggestion performance can be executed every time the number of times of lottery becomes a multiple of 50.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the operating rate in a disadvantageous normal state.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the RAM clearing operation is performed at the time of power-on, regardless of whether the setting change state is entered or not, while the normal state continues, the RAM clearing table 202me4 is referred to determine the variation pattern. In other words, even if the setting is not changed, if the RAM clearing operation is performed, every time the number of lottery times of the special pattern becomes a multiple of 50, the special ready-to-win fluctuation is executed and the setting suggesting performance is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, only when shifting to a setting change state when power is turned on, setting suggestion performance may be executed every time the number of times of lottery of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50 in the subsequent normal state. By constructing in this way, only when the store clerk or the like of the hall actually performs the setting change operation, the loss special reach fluctuation is executed and the setting suggestion performance is executed, so that the player can more easily distinguish whether or not the setting is changed.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the loss special reach fluctuation is executed, as the fluctuation pattern performance, the set value is suggested by the number attached to the third pattern when the reach occurs, but the set value does not necessarily have to be suggested by the performance. For example, it may be configured to execute a variation pattern effect of an effect mode that can suggest only whether or not it is an outlier special reach variation. That is, even if the deviation special reach fluctuation is determined, the set value may not be suggested from the effect mode. By configuring in this way, there is no need to grasp the set value on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and only when the variation type of the loss special reach variation is notified, it is only necessary to execute a special effect (or a mode that tends to appear only in the case of the loss special reach variation), so that the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game player from thinking that the setting is low due to the suggestion of the setting, thereby reducing the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the eleventh embodiment, when the variation pattern of the loss special reach variation is notified, the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Simply, when determining the effect mode of the variation pattern effect on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 1%). By configuring in this way, there is no need to provide a deviation special reach fluctuation, and a common fluctuation pattern table can be used in the normal state, so the number of fluctuation pattern tables can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the setting change state, in the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), the setting suggestion performance is executed (the special reach variation is selected) every time the lottery for the special symbol is performed 50 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outlier special reach variation is selected may be varied. That is, the rate at which the sound lamp control device 113 side executes the setting suggestion effect when the deviation special reach fluctuation is notified may be varied according to the set value. Alternatively, by making the variation pattern selection table referred to in the normal state after the RAM clearing operation differ for each set value, when the number of variations becomes a multiple of 50 according to the set value, the ratio of selecting the off special reach variation itself may be varied. More specifically, for example, in multiples of 50, the higher the setting, the more easily a variation pattern other than the off-special reach variation is selected (the more difficult it is to execute the setting-suggestion effect). By constructing in this way, even though the number of lotteries of special patterns has become a multiple of 50, when the deviation special ready-to-win fluctuation is not executed (setting suggesting performance is not executed), the expectation for high setting can be improved. Further, for example, by changing the variation pattern selection table referred to in the normal state after the RAM clearing operation for each set value, the cycle of executing the deviation special reach variation (executing the setting suggestion effect) may be changed according to the set value. By constructing in this way, a game can be played while paying attention to how many variations the special reach variation is executed, so that the game can be positively started from the state of zero big hits. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is also cleared to the initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured not to be cleared even if the RAM clear operation is performed. In other words, the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may be configured to be updated only while the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position. With such a configuration, when the hall side desires to perform the RAM clearing operation without wanting to change the setting, the request can be fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the right variable winning device 1650 that enables winning during a small winning game when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a small win and the variable winning device 650 that enables winning in each round of the big winning in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbols are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 650 may be configured to be able to enter the ball when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit or a big hit. By configuring in this way, the right variable winning device 1650 can be deleted, so the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the flexibility of the game area can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value is suggested only by the setting suggestion effect. That is, when the number of lotteries of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50 in a normal state after setting change and the variation pattern of the deviation special ready-to-win fluctuation is set, the setting suggesting performance is executed as the variation pattern performance for the deviation special ready-to-win variation, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to suggest a setting in the opening effect or ending effect of a big win. In this case, the type (selection ratio) of characters appearing on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect and ending effect may be changed for each set value. Further, for example, after shifting to an advantageous game state (continuous game mode A or continuous game mode B), when the advantageous game state is terminated and the game is shifted to the disadvantageous normal mode, the type of display mode (so-called result display) showing the game result in the advantageous game state may be changed. Specifically, for example, as the titles displayed according to the game results, a title of a type determined only according to the game result and a title of a type determined in consideration of the set value may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result display at the end of an advantageous game state.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may also be configured to display a numerical value indicating the set value.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the player to become more advantageous (that is, the higher chance chance), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a part of the settings and a part of the other settings have the same total advantage. More specifically, for example, by adjusting the jackpot probability, the advantages of setting 1 and setting 6 may be made equal. That is, in the setting 1, when the state is once shifted to the latent certainty state, the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the latent certainty state is greatly increased compared to the other settings (for example, the probability of the big win in the high probability state of the special symbols is set to 1/200), so that the setting values other than the setting 6 (settings 2 to 5) may be more advantageous than the setting values (settings 2 to 5) other than the setting 6 even if the probability of the big win is low in the low probability state of the special symbols. In addition to this, it may be configured such that settings 2 and 5 have the same degree of advantage, and settings 3 and 4 have the same degree of advantage. In other words, setting 1 and setting 6 may be configured to have the highest degree of advantage, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be configured to have the lowest degree of advantage. In other words, setting 1 to setting 3 may be configured to have a game property in which a low probability of a big hit is advantageous (a game property mainly to increase the number of balls held with a small prize ball in a latent probability state), and a game property to be advantageous to a high probability of a big win (a game property mainly to increase the number of balls with a big prize ball) in the setting 4 to setting 6. By configuring in this way, the difference in game characteristics for each setting can be made more noticeable, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in this case, it may be possible to inform the player whether the game property setting (settings 1 to 3) is set mainly to increase the number of balls held with small prize balls in the latent probability state, or whether the game property setting (settings 4 to 6) is set mainly to increase the number of balls held with big prize balls. More specifically, for example, in the demo display displayed when the pachinko machine 10 has not played a game for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), which game type is displayed (for example, if the setting is 1 to 3, the character "single blow type" is displayed, and if the setting is 4 to 6, the character "knock-knock type" is displayed). As a result, the game can be started with the game properties set to the player's preference, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, instead of or in addition to the demonstration display screen, a display mode such as a volume display displayed when a volume change operation is performed to change the volume of the pachinko machine 10, or a light amount display displayed when a light amount change operation is performed to change the light amount of various light emitting members such as LEDs may be configured to be capable of informing the playability (whether it is a one-hit type or a tapping type). By configuring in this way, the player can check the playability at an arbitrary timing by performing the volume change operation or the light amount change operation, so that the player's convenience can be further improved. Furthermore, the display mode of the ending screen of the big win and the result screen after the end of the latent certainty state may be changed according to the game characteristics. Specifically, for example, when the one-hit type game property (settings 1 to 3) is set, the total number of winning balls won in an advantageous state is displayed in a conspicuous manner, while when the tapping type game property (settings 4 to 6) is set, the total number of jackpots won in the advantageous state may be displayed in a conspicuous manner. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the items that the player tends to pay more attention to for each game feature, so that the player's convenience can be improved. In this case, the setting value display device 110a may be configured to display settings A, B, and C instead of settings 1, 2, and 3. FIG. In other words, the notation of the set values may be changed according to the game characteristics. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress confusion caused by the fact that the advantage degrees are not in numerical order (the advantage degrees increase in the order of setting 3, 4→2,5→1, 6) when a hall clerk or the like changes or confirms the set values.

In the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the RAM clearing table 202me4 (see FIG. 271 (b)) is referred to until the first big win is won, and the variation pattern table is determined (every time the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times). For example, the variation pattern scenario may be set so that the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to by winning a small prize. In this case, the table for RAM clearing 202me4 may be configured so that the loss special reach variation is always executed when the lottery results other than the big win are obtained. In other words, in the specification of winning a small prize with a high probability, it may be constructed so that the special ready-to-win game is lost every time a lottery of special symbols is executed until the first small prize game (or big prize game) is executed after the setting is changed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that the setting change has been performed only by executing the special pattern lottery once in the Pachinko machine 10 in which the special pattern lottery has not been executed even once after the opening of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall.

In the eleventh embodiment, only after the setting is changed, the loss special reach variation is executed every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed 50 times. By structuring in this way, it is possible to predict the number of fluctuations in which the loss special reach is set when the setting is not changed from the number of fluctuations at the end of the game on the previous day, and realize the novel game property that the player can be convinced that the possibility of the setting change is high when the loss special reach is not executed in the predicted number of times.

In the eleventh embodiment, every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed 50 times, the special reach variation is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the off special reach variation can be performed only once. In other words, when the normal state is set, the number of times of lottery of special symbols until the loss special reach fluctuation is set is set, and while 50 times is set when the setting is changed, when the normal state is set under other conditions, the number of times such as 65536 times which cannot be practically consumed may be set. Then, after the deviation special reach fluctuation is set, it may be configured to set the number of times such as 65536 times that is substantially impossible to digest. By constructing in this way, when the lottery for the special pattern is executed 50 times in the state that no big win is won, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the special reach to lose occurs.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 306. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above is configured such that the jackpot probability can be set to any one of a plurality of stages (six stages) of settings, and the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability.

In addition to this, in the twelfth embodiment, when a specific lottery result different from a big win is obtained in a predetermined game state, a period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player is formed. More specifically, it is structured such that it is easier for the player to win a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern than in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a long fluctuation time can be set when the player loses in the lottery of the first special pattern in the continuous mode B (secret state). That is, by intensively executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the long variation of the first special symbol is executed, an advantageous period (chance zone) can be formed in which the player can aim for the big win of the second special symbol with a relatively low degree of advantage without winning the big win of the first special symbol with a relatively low degree of advantage.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small win during the variation of the first special symbol and the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is not discarded (not stop-displayed with the missing symbol). By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the long variation from being discarded (forcibly ending the chance zone) when the second special symbol wins a small prize during the long variation of the first special symbol (in the chance zone). Therefore, the player can be sufficiently entertained in the chance zone once entered.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed. This is the point that has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the continuous villa mode B (hidden state) of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display mode of a continuous losing effect that is executed when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost in the continuous villa mode B of the twelfth embodiment. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a high probability (approximately 90%) of a small win or a big win is achieved. In other words, it is configured so that the lottery for the special symbols has a relatively low probability of being lost. In the twelfth embodiment, when this relatively low-probability loss continues over a predetermined first number of times (for example, three consecutive losses in the first special symbol lottery), a long variation is set as the first loss variation (a chance zone is formed in which the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed intensively). In addition, even if the deviation continues for a second number of times less than the first number (for example, two consecutive deviations), a long fluctuation is set (a chance zone is formed) as the deviation fluctuation for the second number of times at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). In other words, the chance zone is formed more easily as the first special symbol continues to come off, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the first special symbol coming off. The continuous omission effect described below is an effect mode that is executed to suggest (notify) the player the number of consecutive omissions and whether or not entry into the chance zone is possible.

First, with reference to FIG. 297, the display mode at the start of the above-described continuous loss effect will be described. This continuous loss effect is started when the first special symbol lottery results in a loss after the end of the big win or after the end of the small win of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 297, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, when the lost symbol for the first special symbol is stopped, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 imitating a rabbit finds a hill with a flag FG with the letters SP on the top. In addition, along with the effect of discovering this hill, the characters "Aim for further peaks" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display is displayed that suggests to the player the situation until the chance zone (super RUSH game) is executed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the chance zone will start if the rabbit-like character 811 can climb the hill and reach the flag FG. As shown in FIG. 297(a), the hill discovered by the character 811 has two ladders, a ladder HG1 extending from the foot to the middle and a ladder HG2 extending from the middle to the top. In addition, a jump platform JD is also installed at the foot of the hill. In the twelfth embodiment, when the chance zone is started, one of two patterns of performance is executed: one is the performance that the character 811 reaches the top (flag FG) by climbing the ladder one by one requiring two movements, and the other is the case that the character 811 jumps to the top at once with one movement using the jumping platform JD. More specifically, when the lottery for the first special pattern is lost two times in a row and the variation pattern in the second continuation is set to the long variation, the performance of jumping to the top at once using the jumping table JD is executed, and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified. On the other hand, when there are 3 consecutive losses in the lottery of the first special pattern and the 2nd consecutive loss is not a long variation, the performance of climbing the ladder HG1 continuing from the foot to the middle is executed during the second consecutive loss variation, and the performance of climbing the ladder HG2 continuing from the middle to the top is executed during the 3rd continuous loss variation, and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified.

On the other hand, if the lottery for the first special symbol following the first loss was not a loss (a small win), as shown in FIG. 297(b), in the main display area Dm, the character 811 jumps to the top using the jumping board JD, but fails to reach the top and falls down. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Failed..." are displayed. With these presentation modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the player has not entered the chance zone without consecutive misses.

FIG. 298 is a diagram showing a display mode when the first special symbol lottery loses three consecutively in the continuous mode B (RUSH) and the first special symbol long variation is set. As shown in FIG. 298, when the long variation of the first special symbol is started, the character 811 reaches the flag SP in the main display area Dm, and an effect of raising the flag SP and being happy is executed. In addition to this, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters ``Super RUSH rush!!'' are displayed, and a countdown display of the remaining variation time until the end of the long variation (that is, the remaining time until the chance zone ends) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily confirm the end of the chance zone (super RUSH) in which only the lottery of the second special symbols that are advantageous can be executed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, the small winning probability is made common to all settings while the big winning probability is varied according to the setting. As the special symbol lottery results, only three kinds of lottery results of big win, small win and loss are provided. For this reason, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of being out, so the possibility of entering the chance zone (continuously being out) is reduced. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to a chance zone that is more advantageous to the player, so when shifting to the consecutive game mode B, the low setting makes it possible to realize a very special and novel game property that the degree of advantage is higher. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical Configuration in the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 to 301. FIG. Here, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment has the first per random number 12 table 202na instead of the first per random number 11 table 202ma, the small per random number 12 table 202nb instead of the small per random number 11 table 202mb, and the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. It is different in that a big hit type selection 12 table 202nd is provided instead, and a variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me.

First, with reference to FIG. 299(a), details of the first winning random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299(a), the first winning random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment, like the first winning random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment, defines the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as a big hit in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299(a), in the low-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 204" is defined in association with the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1. As the range, "0 to 233" is associated and defined, with setting 4, "0 to 251" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1, with setting 5, "0 to 311" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1, and with setting 6, "0 to 409" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. are stipulated. Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state is 1/320 (205/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/301 (218/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/280 (234/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/260 (252/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/210. (312/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/160 (410/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 299(a), in the high-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 467" is defined in correspondence with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 1, "0 to 498" is defined in correspondence with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 to setting 2, and "0" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 to setting 3. "0 to 534" is defined in association with setting 4, "0 to 575" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 4, "0 to 712" is defined in association with setting 5 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 935" is defined in association with setting value 6 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. are Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is 1/140 (468/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/131 (499/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/123 (535/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/114 (576/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/92 ( 713/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/70 (936/65536). Incidentally, as in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, mainly, the jackpot probabilities of setting 5 and setting 6 in the low probability state of special symbols are increased, and the jackpot probability in the high probability (variable probability) state of special symbols is lowered as a whole. As a result, the probability of losing the first special pattern in the lottery is relatively increased, and the execution frequency of the continuous losing performance can be increased, so that the player who confirms the start of the continuous losing performance can be made to have expectations for shifting to the chance zone more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 299(b), the details of the small winning random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 299(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299(b), in the small winning random number 12 table 202nb, 58982 random numbers (counter values) of 936 to 59917 are defined as random numbers (the value of the first random number counter C1) determined as the small winning of the first special symbol. Among 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small winnings is 58982, so the probability of winning a small winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/1.11 (58982/65536). In addition, as described above, in the variable probability state of the special symbols, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 1/140 (setting 1) to 1/70 (setting 6). Therefore, the probability of losing the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state of the special symbol is 1/10.8 (setting 1) to 1/11.7 (setting 6). As described above, in the latent state, the chance zone that is more advantageous is likely to be set as the loss continues in the lottery of the first special symbol. And, the lower setting has a lower probability of big hits, and a higher probability of losing. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such that it is easier to enter the chance zone where the low setting is more advantageous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 299(b), the small hit random number 12 table 202nb is defined as a random number (value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. Among 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small winnings is 64599, so the probability of winning a small winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/1.01 (64599/65536). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small win is won. However, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the continuous mode B (secret state), the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in the same distribution as the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, if the small hit of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first while the small hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol will come off and be forcibly stopped. In other words, even if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, about half of them are changed to lose due to the stop display of the small win pattern of the first special pattern first, and the chance of getting a prize ball by the small prize game of the second special pattern is lost. In other words, in the consecutive game mode B in the twelfth embodiment, compared to the consecutive game mode B (invisible state) in the eleventh embodiment described above, the frequency of small hits of the second special symbol is about half (the frequency of winning prize balls is about half). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the big win probability in the high probability state of the special symbols is generally lowered, and the small win probability of the second special symbol is increased, so that it is adjusted so as not to be too disadvantageous as compared with the continuous mode B (latent state) in the eleventh embodiment.

In addition, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol continues to come off, the long variation of the first special symbol can be set. During this long variation, there is no possibility that the small winning pattern (and the big winning pattern) of the first special pattern is stopped, so that when the small winning pattern of the second special pattern is won, the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning can be surely executed. That is, during the long variation (chance zone) of the first special symbol, the execution frequency of the small winning game of the second special symbol becomes high, forming an extremely advantageous state in which the winning frequency of prize balls also becomes high. Also, even if the lottery of the second special pattern results in a small win, the long variation of the first special pattern is controlled so as not to be discarded (not to be forcibly stopped by the missing pattern), so that the advantageous state (chance zone) can be continued for a longer time. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, it is easier for the player to win a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols than in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbols. That is, the ratio of setting the most advantageous continuous mode B (probability state) after the end of the big win (looping the continuous mode B) is higher for the big win of the second special pattern than for the big win of the first special pattern. Therefore, in a chance zone in which the lottery of the first special pattern is difficult to execute (the lottery of the second special pattern is intensively executed), the loop rate of the continuous mode B is substantially improved in the event of a big win, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode B, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property in which a series of failures is expected in order to move to the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300, details of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types of "jackpot A12" to "jackpot F12" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, while three jackpot types of "jackpot G12" to "jackpot K12" are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), "jackpot A12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. This "jackpot A12" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds (R) variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state regardless of the game state at the time of winning (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON regardless of the game state). This "jackpot A12" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because it has the largest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is also the most advantageous. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the ``jackpot A12'' is one, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A12'' is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot B12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 49". This "jackpot B12" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the variable probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot (variable probability flag 203g is set to ON). In the normal state and the probability state, when the "jackpot B12" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, when winning the "jackpot B12" in the normal state and the latent probability state, the state shifts to a comparatively advantageous variable probability state. In this definite variable state, since the number of times of time saving is set to 65536, the definite variable state continues substantially until the next big hit. On the other hand, when "jackpot B12" is won in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the number of time saving times is set to 0, so the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the most advantageous latent probability state. Therefore, "jackpot B12" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state when winning in the normal state and the latent state. On the other hand, when winning in a game state other than the normal state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 49 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot B12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B12'' is 49% (49/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot C12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 59". This "jackpot C12" is a jackpot (8 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In other words, when the "big win C12" is won, a variable probability state is set which is substantially continued until the next big win regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, "jackpot C12" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot C12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C12'' is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot D12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64". This "jackpot D12" is a jackpot (8-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous variable probability state (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, since 100 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h in the "jackpot D12" unlike the "jackpot C12", the variable probability state does not always continue until the next jackpot. That is, when the special symbol lottery within 100 times after the end of the "jackpot D12" does not result in a jackpot, the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0 and shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "jackpot D12" is a jackpot type that tends to be more advantageous than the "jackpot C12" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, five random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot D12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot D12'' is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot E12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 84". This "jackpot E12" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the "jackpot E12" is a jackpot type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E12'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E12'' is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot F12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 99". This "jackpot F12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern (the variable probability flag 203g is set off). When the ``jackpot F12'' is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while when the ``jackpot F12'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, if ``jackpot F12'' is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, so ``jackpot F12'' is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 15 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot F12'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot F12'' is 15% (15/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9". This "jackpot G12" is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the completion of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot G12'' is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot G12'' is won in the latent probability state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``big win G12'' is won in a game state other than the latent definite state, a variable definite state substantially continuing until the next big win is set, while when a ``big win G12'' is won in the latent definite state, the most advantageous latent definite state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot G12'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot G12'' is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot H12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 64". This "jackpot H12" is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the probability variable state of the special pattern (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). When the ``jackpot H12'' is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the value of the time-reduction counter 203h is set to 65536, while when the ``jackpot H12'' is won in the latent probability state, the value of the time-reduction counter 203h is set to 0. Therefore, when a ``big win H12'' is won in a game state other than the latent definite state, a variable definite state substantially continuing until the next big win is set, while when a ``big win H12'' is won in the latent definite state, the most advantageous latent definite state is set. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 55 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot H12'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot H12'' is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "jackpot K12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot K12" is a type of jackpot (8-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state with the number of times of time-saving 100 times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 and the variable probability flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, "jackpot K12" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpot types of the second special symbols in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 35 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the ``jackpot K12'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot K12'' is 35% (35/100).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot is won in the consecutive game mode B (latent state), the game state after the jackpot is more disadvantageous than in the eleventh embodiment described above. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot in the latent state, at a rate of 50% (that is, when either jackpot A11 or B11 is won), the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous consecutive game mode B (latent state). It is configured so that only advantageous consecutive villa mode B is set. On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win in the advantageous consecutive villa mode B (probable state), the advantageous consecutive villa mode B is set with a high probability (65% ratio). Therefore, in the latent definite state, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol rather than a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, the game can be played with a strong expectation that a chance zone (long variation period of the first special pattern) in which the lottery of the special pattern can be executed biased toward the lottery of the second special pattern is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, a chance zone is formed as an advantageous state in which the lottery for the special symbols can be executed with a bias toward the lottery for the second special symbols by configuring the ratio of setting the second special symbol to the advantageous latent state after the end of the big win to be higher than the jackpot for the first special symbol in the advantageous latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second special symbol may be constructed so that the ratio of the definite variable big win (jackpot that shifts to the definite variable state or the latent definite state after the end of the big win) is higher in the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, so that the degree of advantage of the second special symbol is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, details of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment is a normal 12 table 202ne1 that is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the jackpot, and a time saving / probability variation 12 table 202ne2 that is referred to for determining the variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is performed in the probability variation state and the time reduction state. It is composed of four types of data tables, namely, a 12-table for concealment 202ne3 referred to for determining a variation pattern when pattern lottery is executed and a RAM-clearing table 202ne4 referred to for determining a variation pattern when special pattern lottery is executed in a normal state after RAM clearing. Of these four types of data tables, the normal 12 tables 202ne1, the time saving/probability 12 tables 202ne2, and the RAM clearing table 202ne4 are the same data as the normal 11 tables 202me1, the time saving/probability 11 tables 202me2, and the RAM clearing table 202me4 in the eleventh embodiment described above, respectively, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

With reference to FIG. 301, the details of the 12-table for latency determination 202ne3 constituting the 12-variation pattern selection table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the 12-table for confirmation 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 301, in the 12 table for latent certainty 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after the win and the small win, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149". A long variation per 5000 ms is associated and defined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost, the variation time is varied according to the number of variations of the first special symbol after the end of the big win and the small win. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big win and the small win (the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol) is 1, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (that is, with respect to the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take), the deviation short fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 1000 ms is defined as the fluctuation type in association. For this reason, the chance zone (long variation) is not set for the first (non-continuous) deviation in the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after winning (big win or small win) is 2 times, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of ``0 to 158''. Therefore, if two misses occur consecutively in the latent certainty state, the miss super long fluctuation is set at a rate of about 20% (40/199). That is, it is possible to form an advantageous state (chance zone) in which only an advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after winning (big win or small win) is 3 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 600000 ms as the fluctuation type. Therefore, if there are three or more consecutive misses in the latent probability state, a miss long variation (chance zone) is always set. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property that strongly desires continuous failures, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of the first special pattern being lost, so that in the latent probability state, the lower the setting, the more advantageous (because the chance zone is easily set, and as a result, it is easy to win the advantageous second special pattern jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after winning (both big and small), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" as the fluctuation type (variation pattern). are

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the number of fluctuations after winning (big win and small win), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" as the fluctuation type (variation pattern). are stipulated. In other words, the distribution is the same as when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, a loss short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined as a variation type regardless of the number of variations after winning (big win and small win) and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, regardless of the number of fluctuations after winning (big win and small win), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2000 ms as a fluctuation type (variation pattern) for the range of ``0 to 49'', and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms as a fluctuation type with a value in the range of ``50 to 198''. In other words, the distribution is the same as when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when a lottery result other than a loss is obtained in the hidden state (that is, the state in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to the hidden 12 table 202ne3), the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to prevent only the disadvantageous first special fluctuation from continuing to stop first. In addition, as the loss in the lottery of the first special pattern continues, the ratio of setting the loss super-long variation (chance zone capable of intensively executing the lottery of the second special pattern with advantage) is set higher, so that the novel game property that strongly expects the continuous loss can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 174) in the eleventh embodiment (and the seventh embodiment) described above only in that a continuous loss effect counter 223na is added.

The continuous loss effect counter 223na is a counter indicating the progress of the effect in the continuous loss effect (see FIGS. 297(a), (b), and FIG. 298). The initial value of this continuous loss effect counter 223na is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 every time the loss continues in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state (see S8735 and S8741 in FIG. 306). When setting the effect mode of the continuous loss effect, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na and the variation type is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 12 (S11595) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 12 (S11595) in the twelfth embodiment. This special figure 2 out stop processing 12 (S11595) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the eleventh embodiment described above.

This special figure 2 out stop processing 12 (S11595) is different from the special figure 2 out stop processing 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the above-described eleventh embodiment in that the processing of S11602 to S11606 is deleted, and the processing of S11611 is executed instead of the processing of S11608. In other words, the only difference is that when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped by a small hit, even if the first special symbol is in the process of being varied, the first special symbol being varied is not forcibly stopped by the missing symbol (variation display is continued as it is). By configuring so as not to discard (forcibly stop) the fluctuation display of the first special pattern when the second special pattern becomes a small prize, it is possible to suppress the chance zone (loss fluctuation of the first special pattern) from being forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining time of the chance zone just by winning the small prize once in the lottery of the second special pattern.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306. FIG.

First, with reference to FIG. 304, details of the rendering mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIG. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment described above.

In the processing of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 to S8284 of the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271), the same processes as those of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 to S8284 of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIG. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment are executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 304, in the presentation mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the current state is the potential state (S8291). When it is determined that the present state is not the latent definite state (S8291: No), the processing proceeds to S8281, while when it is determined that the present state is the latent definite state (S8291: Yes), special figure 1 performance setting processing for setting the performance mode when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent definite state is executed (S8292), and the processing proceeds to S8208. The details of this special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 305, in the special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701). In the processing of S8701, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the loss (S8701: Yes), the performance setting processing at the time of failure for setting the performance mode of continuous failure performance (see FIG. 297) is executed (S8702), and this processing is terminated. The details of the effect setting process when out (S8702) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8701, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern corresponding to the loss (S8701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is greater than 0 (S8703). In the process of S8783, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive omission effect counter 223na is larger than 0 (S8703: Yes), the effect mode of failing to reach the top of the hill is determined (S8704), the value of the consecutive omission effect counter 223na is reset to 0 (S8705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8703, if it is determined that the value of the continuous out of production counter 223na is 0 (S8703: No), the production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8706), and then it is determined whether the super RUSH flag 223fi is on (that is, whether it is in the chance zone) (S8707). When it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is ON (S8707: Yes), the flag 223fi during super RUSH is set to OFF (S8708), and then this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is off (S8707: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the details of the effect setting process at the time of failure (S8702) will be described. FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process (S8702) at the time of failure in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 306, in the out-time effect setting process (S8702), first, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is ON (S8731). In the processing of S8731, when it is determined that the flag 223fi during super RUSH is on (S8731: Yes), at least the previous fluctuation display is set to super long fluctuation, and furthermore, this time is also set to super long fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8731, when it is determined that the flag 223fi during the super RUSH is off (S8731: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733). In the processing of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive omission effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the first variation of the consecutive omission effect (see FIG. 297(a)) is determined (S8734), 1 is added to the value of the consecutive omission effect counter 223na (S8735), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is not 0 (S8733: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736). When it is determined that the value of the continuous loss performance counter 223na is not 1 (2 or more) (S8736: No), a performance mode of climbing the second ladder and entering a super RUSH (chance zone) is set (S8737), and the process proceeds to S8742.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a super long variation (S8738). If it is determined that the current variation is off and the variation pattern corresponds to the super long variation (S8738: Yes), the performance mode of entering the super RUSH (chance zone) by reaching the top of the hill at once on the jumping platform is determined (S8739), and the process proceeds to S8742. On the other hand, in the processing of S8738, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern corresponding to the extra-long variation (S8738: No), the effect mode of climbing the first ladder is determined (S8740), 1 is added to the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na (S8741), and then this processing is terminated.

In the process of S8742, the value of the continuous loss effect counter 223na is reset, the flag 223fi during super RUSH is set to ON (S8742), and the process is terminated. By executing this performance setting processing at the time of failure (see FIG. 306), when the first special symbols are continuously missed, the performance mode of continuous failure performance can be preferably set according to the number of times of succession and the selected variation pattern.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the higher the setting, the lower the probability that the special symbols will be lost, and the chance zone that is advantageous to the player is set when the first special symbol lottery is continuously lost for the first number of times in an advantageous latent state. More specifically, as the first deviation fluctuation, a deviation super-long fluctuation with an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to bias the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, during the execution of the extra-long fluctuation. That is, in the lottery of the second special pattern, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to obtain a prize ball by winning a small win with a high probability, and in the case of winning a big win, the game state after the end of the big win is likely to be set again to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the lower the setting in the latent probability state, the easier it is to set the chance zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the chance zone is set at a rate of 20% when there are two consecutive losses in the lottery for the first special symbol in the latent state, and the chance zone is set at a rate of 100% when the failure occurs three times or more in succession. In addition, the chance zone may be set even if the loss is not continuous, or the chance zone may be set at a certain rate (for example, a rate of 50% or 100%) when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery regardless of the number of consecutive times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of appearance of the chance zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special pattern that is easily executed in the chance zone is executed, the big win type that is advantageous when winning the big win is easily selected, and if the small win with high probability is won, prize balls can be easily obtained during the small win game. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the probability variable big win in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol are made different at the time of winning the jackpot, and the ratio of the probability variable big win in the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 50%) may be set higher in the lottery of the second special symbol (e.g., 80% or 100%). By constructing in this way, the game can be played with a strong expectation of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols in the chance zone. Further, for example, regarding the type of big win, the lottery of the second special symbol may be more disadvantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, the ratio of setting the advantageous continuous mode B (potential state) may be reduced, or the ratio of the probability variable jackpot may be reduced). In the case of this constitution, there is a high possibility that winning a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern during the chance zone will be disadvantageous, but continuing to win a small win will be advantageous to the player, so that a novel game property can be realized in which the player can play the game with a strong hope that he will not get a big win in the chance zone.

In the twelfth embodiment, when one of the special symbols wins a big win or a small win in the lottery, the variation display of the other special symbol is basically stopped with a missing symbol, and only when the second special symbol wins a small win, the variation display is continued even when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed when the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped, the variable display being executed may be continued without being forcibly stopped (between the big winning game and the small winning game, the subtraction of the first special symbol variation time is interrupted, and after the big winning game and the small winning game are finished, the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted). By constructing in this way, when a big win is won during the chance zone, the chance zone continues even after the end of the big win, so that the benefit of the chance zone can be continuously received even after the end of the big win, especially when the latent state (continuous mode B), which is advantageous again after the end of the big win, is set. Therefore, since the advantage of the chance zone can be further enhanced, the interest of the player in the game when the chance zone is set can be further enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol, which is relatively disadvantageous, is lost in the advantageous continuous mode B (secret state), a chance zone is formed in which only the lottery for the second special symbol, which is relatively advantageous, is frequently executed, but the opportunity to set the chance zone is not limited to the loss. For example, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, by lengthening the variation time of the variation of the big win (for example, to 10 minutes), the period during which the variation of the big win is executed may be formed as a chance zone in which only the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, can be frequently executed. In this case, if a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the chance zone and the big winning symbol of the second special symbol is not stopped and displayed before the chance zone ends (that is, if the big winning variation of the first special symbol is not forcibly changed to a failure by stopping the big winning symbol of the second special symbol), the relatively unfavorable big winning of the first special symbol is started at the end of the chance zone, so that the game property that strongly expects the big win of the second special symbol that is advantageous during the chance zone is realized. I can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player between the chance zones. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which forms a chance zone when it becomes a small hit by lottery of the 1st special design.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the drawing of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous is lost, only the drawing of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, is performed intensively, and an advantageous chance zone is formed. Alternatively, or in addition, a period (pinch zone) is formed in which only the drawing of the first special symbol, which is relatively disadvantageous, is performed by setting a long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) even when the drawing of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, is lost. It may be configured as With this configuration, the lower the setting, the more likely the chance zone and the pinch zone will appear. Therefore, it is possible to add contrast to the game in the consecutive villa mode B, which is more advantageous at the lower setting. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 327. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above, the specification is such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (overlapping), and a chance zone can be set in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery of the first special symbol, can be executed biasedly.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the specification that only one type of variable display can be performed, a period (chance zone) advantageous to the player is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. More specifically, in the thirteenth embodiment, there are a jackpot (direct hit) that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a jackpot (V win) that is executed based on the fact that a game ball enters (V wins) a specific area (V area) provided at a predetermined position on the game board 13, and when the special symbol lottery is lost in a specific game state (time saving state), a specific game method is performed during the loss fluctuation. Thus, the ball-entering rate (V winning rate) to the specific area (V area) is increased. By configuring in this way, as in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage in a specific game state (time saving state) can be improved as the setting is lowered.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 307, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 is a front view of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment is provided with a lottery device 6750 for executing a jackpot lottery (character lottery) by allocating the inflowing game balls to either a specific area (V area) or an out port below the third symbol display device 81 on the game board 13, in contrast to the board configuration (see FIG. 264) of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). The difference is that the variable winning device 1650 and the right electric accessory 164 are omitted, and the second right ball inlet 6400 is provided with an electric accessory 6400a instead of the right second ball inlet 645.

The lottery device 6750 is in a state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period when a small win is obtained in a lottery with a special pattern (that is, an attacker 6750a for a small win provided at the entrance of the lottery device 6750 is opened), and the game ball entered during the enterable state enters a V winning port 6750f1 provided inside the lottery device 6750, thereby winning a big win (V win). . In addition, inside the lottery device 6750, one V winning opening and five out-openings (out-openings 6750f2 to 6750f6) are provided. Since the game ball entering the lottery device 6750 always enters the V winning port 6750f1 or one of the out ports, the rate (probability) that the game ball entering the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning port (V winning occurs) is 1/6.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of winning the small prize is zero, but when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the probability of winning the small prize is high (for example, 98%). Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry hole 6400, by continuing to hit to the right, a small win is obtained with a high probability and the attacker 6750a for the small win is released, so that the ball is easily entered into the V winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 even if the game ball is hit to the right, so it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left. A left-handed game ball can enter the first ball entry hole 64, but cannot enter the second ball entry hole 6400, so that a small win is not won in the normal state of the normal pattern. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, only two types of game states, a normal state and a time-saving state, are provided. That is, the high probability state and low probability state of the special symbols are not provided, and the lottery probability of the special symbols (lottery probability of direct hit) is always constant.

Next, details of the lottery device 6750 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 308, the lottery device 6750 is provided with one V winning opening 6750f1, five normal V winning openings 6750f2 to 6750f6, and a distribution rotating body 6750f that always rotates at a constant speed. A game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6750f enters one of one V winning hole and five out holes. Since the distribution rotor 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is cut off, the timing of winning a small win, the rolling speed of the game ball in the lottery device 6750, etc. Depending on the ball entrance (one V winning hole and five out ports) provided in the distribution rotor 6750f, it is variable. That is, each time a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the ball entrances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308, a small winning attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the lottery device 6750 when viewed from the front. This small winning attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) when winning a small winning. The game balls that reach the small winning attacker 6750 a from above during this open period flow into the lottery device 6750 . Inside the lottery device 6750, as shown in FIG. 308, a guide channel 6750b for causing game balls to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f is provided, and a part of the floor surface of the guide channel 6750b is provided with a ball discharge door 6750c for opening and closing the floor surface. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c form one flow path, so that the game ball can flow downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls to the discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the sorting rotor 6750f. Further, as shown in FIG. 308, a ball stopping portion 6750e capable of temporarily stopping a game ball that has flowed down in the guide channel 6750b (closing a specific position of the guide channel 6750b) is provided downstream of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c by about one game ball.

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotor 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309(a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the lottery device 6750 while both the ball ejection door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 309(a), when the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stop portion 6750e are closed, the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6750 passes through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c, is prevented from flowing down by the ball stop portion 6750e, and is stopped to the right of the ball stop portion 6750e. When a game ball further flows down the guide channel 6750b while one game ball is parked, the already parked game ball prevents the flow down and stops to the right of the parked game ball. As described above, the ball stop portion 6750e is disposed with a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the second and subsequent game balls entering the lottery device 6750 are stopped on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

FIG. 309(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while game balls are stationary. As shown in FIG. 309(b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls stopped on the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e drop to the discharge area 6750d and fall outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, a state in which only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 can be formed. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the ball ejection door 6750c was opened, the ball stopper 6750e is tilted leftward in a front view, thereby allowing passage through the guide channel 6750b. As a result, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be caused to flow down toward the sorting rotor 6750f. The game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 6750b is dropped toward the distribution rotor 6750f from the upper right direction in the front view toward the distribution rotor 6750f. By controlling in this way, the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotor 6750f in one small win can be limited to one at most, so that the probability of the big win lottery using the lottery device 6750 (the ratio of distribution to the V prize opening by the distribution rotor 6750f) can be made constant.

Next, with reference to FIG. 310, details of the distribution rotor 6750f will be described. FIG. 310 is a top view of the distribution rotor 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189, the distribution rotator 6750f is configured in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and has six ball entrances arranged on the outer edge thereof. Since the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with an inclination downward from its center toward the outer edge direction, a game ball that reaches the vicinity of the center of the distribution rotator 6750f from above is distributed to any of the ball entrances provided at the outer edge portion along the inclination toward the outer edge direction.

As shown in FIG. 310, the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with one V-winning opening having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the top and five out-openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the top. That is, the V winning opening 6750f1 and the out openings 6750f2 to 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 310, the distribution rotator 6750f is configured to continuously rotate around the axis 6750fz as the rotation axis at a constant speed (for example, a rotation speed of one rotation in 6 seconds) in the clockwise direction in top view while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 311, the operating pattern (opening pattern) of each part of the lottery device 6750 (the small winning attacker 6750a, the ball stopper 6750e, and the ball ejection door 6750c) when the second special symbol lottery in the thirteenth embodiment results in a small winning will be described. FIG. 311 is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of each part when a small hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 311, when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small winning attacker 6750a is opened along with the start of the small winning (the start of the small winning effective period). As shown in FIG. 311, the open state of this small hit attacker 6750a continues for 2 seconds and is closed after 2 seconds. Thereafter, the small winning attacker 6750a is maintained in a closed state until the small winning ends. If the game ball can enter the small hit attacker 6750a during the open period of 2 seconds, the game ball can be made to reach the distribution rotor 6750f during the small win effective period and enter any ball entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 311, the ball stopping portion 6750e is maintained in a closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) until 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and is switched to an open state (a state in which the guide channel 6750b can flow down) from the time when 3.5 seconds have passed (1.5 seconds after closing the small hit attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small win. On the other hand, the sphere discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309(a)) until 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small winning, and is switched to the open state (see FIG. 309(b)) from the time when 3 seconds have passed (1 second after closing the small winning attacker 6750a) to the end of the small winning, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small winning. That is, for 3 seconds after the start of the small win, the ball stop part 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are closed, so that all the game balls entered into the lottery device 6750 are stopped in the guide channel 6750b by the ball stop part 6750e.

In addition, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stop part 6750e closed, so that all the game balls other than the one game ball stopped by direct contact with the right side of the ball stop part 6750e fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750 . Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball ejection door 6750c is opened, the ball stop portion 6750e is opened, so that one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 flows down toward the distribution rotor 6750f. In this way, by first opening the ball discharge door 6750c and then opening the ball stop part 6750e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small winning attacker 6750a, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6750d until the ball stop part 6750e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f in one small win can be limited to one each time, the winning probability of the big win in the small win (probability of the game ball entering the V winning hole) can be always constant (1/6).

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the time-saving state of normal symbols, when the second special symbol lottery performed with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols being 0 results in a small hit, the fluctuation time is randomly set to 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds. Therefore, even if it is possible to adjust the variation start timing (the timing at which the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400) by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is impossible to adjust the start timing of the small winning game (starting at any timing after 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds after the start of the variation). can be configured to prevent In other words, the jackpot (per V) winning rate in the case of a small win in the time saving state can be made constant (1/6). Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the variation time of the normal symbols is fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the game state, the electric accessory 6400a is opened only at intervals of 30 seconds at the shortest (the opportunity to enter the second ball entrance 6400 is given only every 30 seconds). On the other hand, when it becomes a small hit that is won at a rate of 98% in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds or less (1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds). In other words, even if the effective period (6 seconds) of the small winning game is taken into account, the period required from the start of the lottery of one special symbol to the end of the small winning game is 9 seconds or less (the period is less than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the opening time of the electric accessary 6400a when the normal symbol wins in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds x 1 time", so that it is configured so that one game ball can barely enter during the opening period based on the win of one normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved ball.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the presence of the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the variation time is fixed to 1 second. That is, while the reserved ball exists, a new special symbol lottery is executed every 7 seconds (fluctuation time of 1 second + small winning game period of 6 seconds). In this case, the ball stopping portion 6750e is opened, and the game balls stopped inside the guide flow path 6750b are moved to the distribution rotor 6750f at intervals of 7 seconds. Here, as described above, the distribution rotor 6750f is configured to always rotate at a rotational speed of one revolution in 6 seconds while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, if the game ball goes to the distribution rotor 6750f every 7 seconds, the game ball will reach the distribution rotor 6750f about every 7/6 laps. Here, as described above, the distribution rotator 6750f has six ball entrances (V winning opening 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6) arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, when a game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f every 7/6 rounds, it enters the ball entrance that is adjacent in the rotational direction to the previously distributed (about 7 seconds ago) ball entrance. . Therefore, as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the game ball can be entered into the adjacent ball entrance for each small hit variation, so it can be said that the game ball can easily enter the V winning opening 6750f1. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the long variation of the second special symbol is set so that the maximum (four) reserved balls of the second special symbol can be accumulated during the long variation. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a loss that is originally not very pleasing can be turned into a great chance of winning a V.

Next, with reference to FIG. 312, an overview of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state, a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) (long variation) is set, and during this period, the second special symbol reserved balls can be stored up to the maximum (four). In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol lottery can be executed at least four times or more. As described above, the variation time of the normal symbols is 30 seconds, and the open period at the winning of the normal symbols is 0.5 seconds, so that the lottery of the normal symbols can be executed about 5 times during the long variation. Therefore, it is possible to easily store up to four holding balls of the second special symbol, which is the maximum value, simply by continuously hitting to the right during the long variation. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing the change over time of the progress of the game after accumulating the reserved balls to the upper limit in the chance zone (lost long variation).

FIG. 312(a) shows an example of temporal change in the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotor 6750f immediately after the chance zone ends. Each number attached to FIG. 312(a) corresponds to one of the six entrances (V winning entrance 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6). That is, the number "1" designates the first entrance (one of six entrances), the number "2" designates the second entrance rotationally adjacent to the first entrance, the number "3" designates the third entrance rotationally adjacent to the second entrance, the number "4" designates the fourth entrance rotationally adjacent to the third entrance, and the number "5" designates the fifth entrance rotationally adjacent to the fourth entrance. The number "6" designates the sixth entrance which is rotationally adjacent to the fifth entrance, respectively. In addition, in FIG. 312(a), as the position (rotational position) of the distribution rotor 6750f, the change over time of the ball entrance into which the game ball dropped from the guide channel 6750b can be entered is shown. Here, in FIG. 312(a), in order to make the explanation easier to understand, a situation is exemplified in which the first ball entrance becomes a ball-enterable arrangement at the end timing of the chance zone. However, since the rotation of the sorting rotor 6750f is executed regardless of the end timing of the chance zone (the state of the variable display of the second special symbol), the end timing of the chance zone does not always coincide with the timing when the first ball entrance is moved to an arrangement in which a ball can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), the type of the ball entrance arranged at the position where the game ball can be entered in the distribution rotator 6750f is switched every second. That is, as shown in FIG. 312(a), until 1 second has passed since the end of the chance zone, a game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance, from 1 second until 2 seconds have passed, a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance, from 2 seconds to 3 seconds, a game ball can be entered into the third ball entrance, and from 3 seconds to 4 seconds, a game ball can be entered into the fourth ball entrance. A game ball can be entered into a fifth ball entrance from 4 seconds to 5 seconds, and a game ball can be entered into a 6th ball entrance from 5 seconds to 6 seconds. After that, the ball entrance that allows the ball to enter is switched one by one every second.

On the other hand, FIG. 312(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the game after the loss long variation (chance zone) ends. If the held ball is stored until the end of the long fluctuation (during the chance zone), the small hit fluctuation will start with the end of the chance zone. As described above, the small winning variation of the second special pattern is always set to 1 second under the condition that the ball is held, so when 1 second elapses, the small winning pattern is stop-displayed and the small winning game is started. As described above in FIG. 311, in the small winning game of the thirteenth embodiment, the small winning attacker 6750a is opened for 2 seconds immediately after the start, and the game ball that first entered the lottery device 6750 during the opening period (the game ball stopped by the ball stopper 6750e) flows down toward the distribution rotating body 6750f 3.5 seconds after the start of the small winning. That is, the small hit attacker 6750a is released from 1 second after the end of the chance zone to 3 seconds after the end of the chance zone, and the game ball flows down toward the distribution rotor 6750f at 4.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. Here, since it takes 0.5 seconds to 1 second to flow down from the ball stop portion 6750e to the distribution rotor 6750f, it actually reaches the distribution rotor 6750f after 5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the chance zone. That is, as shown in FIG. 312(a), the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f in the arrangement in which the sixth ball entrance can be entered. Therefore, if the sixth ball entrance is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, the V winning occurs) and wins the V win (the V winning starts when the small win ends). Note that FIG. 312(b) illustrates a case where the sixth entrance is the out entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 312(b), after the chance zone ends, when the first small win does not result in a V prize, after the small win valid period elapses (after 6 seconds from the start of the small win), the variation display based on the second held ball held in the chance zone is started. In other words, after the end of the chance zone, the variable display based on the second held ball is started when 7 seconds have passed. In addition, when the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit (four) in the chance zone, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the second reserved ball (the variable display executed under the condition that two reserved balls exist) is always set to 1 second. Therefore, when 1 second elapses after the start of variation (8 seconds after the end of the chance zone), the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed to start the small winning game, and the small winning attacker 6750a is released for 2 seconds (from 8 seconds after the end of the chance zone to 10 seconds after the end of the chance zone). Then, when 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win (11.5 seconds have passed after the chance zone has ended), the ball stopping part 6750e is opened. That is, as shown in FIG. 312(a), the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f in the arrangement in which the first ball entrance can be entered. Therefore, if the first ball entrance is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, the V winning occurs) and wins the V winning (the V winning starts when the small winning ends), while if the first ball opening is one of the out openings, the V winning does not occur and the V winning does not occur. Note that FIG. 312(b) illustrates a case where the first entrance is the out entrance. Thus, in the second small winning game after the chance zone ends, the ball enters the ball entering (the first ball entering) adjacent to the ball entering (the sixth ball entering) in the first small winning game in the rotating direction.

Then, in the small hit based on the third reserved ball held in the chance zone (third small hit after the chance zone ends), similarly, as shown in FIGS. With respect to the fourth held ball, since the number of held balls is 0 at the time of digestion of the hold, any one of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds is randomly set as the fluctuation time, but when the fluctuation time of 1 second is set, the ball enters the entrance (third ball entrance) adjacent to the entrance (second ball entrance) in the rotation direction in the third small winning game, and when the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the ball enters in the third small winning game. A ball is entered into a ball entrance (fourth ball entrance) at a position advanced by two positions in the rotational direction with respect to the entrance (second ball entrance), and when a variation time of 3 seconds is set, the ball is entered into a ball entrance (fifth ball entrance) at a position advanced by three positions in the rotational direction with respect to the ball entrance (second ball entrance) in the third small winning game.

In summary, by continuously executing right-handed hitting in the chance zone, the reserved balls are accumulated to the maximum, and the game ball is entered into the small winning attacker 6750a during the opening period of the small winning game after the chance zone ends. In other words, it is possible to enter a game ball into four different ball entrances among the six ball entrances provided in the distribution rotator 6750f during the pending digestion after the end of the chance zone. Therefore, the probability that a V prize will occur during the period from the end of the chance zone until the upper limit number (four) of the reserved balls accumulated during the chance zone is consumed is 4/6. Since the V winning rate is about 52% (1-5/6×5/6×5/6×5/6) when the small winning game is executed four times in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0, an advantageous situation can be formed in which the V winning rate is increased by 10% or more by setting the chance zone. In addition, when winning of normal symbols is started during the holding digestion and the number of held balls of the second special symbols increases, the number of small winning games increases, so that the V winning rate further increases. In this way, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to form an advantageous situation in which V prizes are more likely to occur than usual when the game is lost in the time-saving state, so it is possible to realize a novel game property of wishing to be lost in the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, a characteristic effect in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, control is performed so that the lost long variation with a variation time of 5 minutes (300 seconds) is set, and it is possible to accumulate the number of reserved balls up to the upper limit during the execution of this lost long variation. By accumulating the reserved balls up to the upper limit number, the possibility of generating a V winning prize in a small win game executed from the end of the lost long variation to the consumption of all the reserved balls is increased (4/6 or more). In FIG. 313, an effect mode (charge time effect) executed in the third symbol display device 81 during execution of this off-long variation (during the chance zone) will be described.

FIG. 313(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the charge time effect which is executed when the drawing for the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 313(a), when the off-long variation is executed (entering the chance zone) and the charge time effect is executed, a character 811 resembling a rabbit with a stern expression and a display mode in which the character 811 begins to apply force to the whole body is displayed in the approximate center of the main display area Dm, and a display area is formed above the character 811 in which the characters "Charge time rush!" This display area also displays a countdown display of the remaining period until the charge time (chance zone) ends. In the example of FIG. 313(a), the state of 4 minutes and 56 seconds remaining is illustrated, and characters "4:56 remaining" are displayed in the display area. Furthermore, an expectation degree display image KH having a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed on the right side of the character 811 in front view. This expectation degree display image KH is a display area for displaying characters indicating the degree of expectation that a V prize will be generated in a small win game for the number of reserved balls executed after the chance zone ends, and is constructed so that the displayed degree of expectation increases each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases. FIG. 313(a) illustrates a state in which the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0, and "Expectation 0/6" is displayed in the expectation degree display image KH. Furthermore, a character saying ``Raise your expectations by hitting right-handed!!'' is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous manner by numbers in the small display area Ds1 formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that hitting to the right increases the expectation of a big win.

FIG. 313(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when game balls enter the second ball entrance 6400a and the number of held balls increases during execution of the charge time effect. When the ball entering the second ball entrance 6400a is detected during execution of the charge time performance, the character 811 is switched to a display mode in which the character 811 is wrapped in an aura OG (the surroundings emit light), and an expectation-increasing image UG is formed on the upper left side of the character 811, in which the characters "UP!!" Furthermore, the degree of expectation displayed in the degree-of-expectation display image KH increases by 1 to become "1/6". In addition, the number indicating the number of held balls of the second special symbol in the small display area Ds1 is also updated. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the degree of expectation increases as the number of held balls of the second special symbol increases. As the number of held balls increases, the range of the aura OG expands, and the degree of expectation displayed in the degree of expectation display image KH increases up to 4/6. These changes in the display content can further heighten expectations for the small winning game to be executed after the chance zone (charge time) ends, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the display mode of the aura image OG and the degree-of-expectation display image KH is simply varied according to the number of held balls of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time the number of held balls increases, the result of prefetching may be determined, and the display mode may be determined in consideration of the determination result. More specifically, for example, when the look-ahead result is a small win, the display mode of the aura image OG and the degree-of-expectation display image KH is raised by one step, while when the look-ahead result is a big win, the display mode may be set to correspond to the maximum degree of expectation (for example, 6/6). With this configuration, the player can play the game while paying attention to the change in the display mode (implied degree of expectation) during execution of the charge time performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314(a). FIG. 314(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment has the first per random number table 202pa instead of the first per random number 12 table 202na, the small per random number 13 table 202pb instead of the small per random number 12 table 202nb, and the second per random number 7 table 202fc instead of the first per random number table 202pa. The difference is that a second winning random number 13 table 202pc is provided, a jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd, and a variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne.

First, with reference to FIG. 315(a), details of the first winning random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 13 table 202pa. As shown in FIG. 315(a), in the first winning random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment, one type of value range of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in association with each set value. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is no special symbol low probability state or variable probability state, and the jackpot lottery (lottery of special symbols) is always executed with a constant jackpot probability.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 315(a), the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponds to setting 1, which corresponds to "0 to 204", the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponds to setting 2, which corresponds to "0 to 217", and the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1 corresponds to setting 3, which corresponds to "0 to 233". Setting 4 is defined in association with "0 to 251" as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1, setting 5 is defined in association with "0 to 311" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1, and setting 6 is defined in association with "0 to 409" as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state is 1/320 (205/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/301 (218/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/280 (234/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/260 (252/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability is 1/210. (312/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/160 (410/65536).

Next, with reference to FIG. 315(b), details of the small winning random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is not associated with the first special symbol. Therefore, the probability of becoming a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is zero. On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, "410 to 64634" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1. Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/1.02 (64225/65536). Therefore. Considering the probability of a big hit, the probability of losing the second special symbol lottery is 1/59 (setting 1) to 1/73 (setting 6). In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of entering the chance zone in the time-saving state (the ball is lost in the lottery of the special symbols and the long variation is set), so the low setting also increases the probability of winning the V during the period from the setting of the advantageous time-saving state to the end of the lottery based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols reserved in the time-saving state. Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, when winning a V hit, the game state after the end of the V hit is always set to an advantageous time-saving state. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the lower the setting, the longer the repetition of the time-saving state and the jackpot tends to continue (more times). Therefore, in an advantageous time-saving state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played with the expectation that the setting is low, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315(c), details of the second winning random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315(c), in the second winning random number 13 table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment, only "0" is defined as a random value (the counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) determined to be a winning of a normal symbol in a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is 1/300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 315(c), in the second winning random number 13 table 202pc, "0 to 299" is defined as a random value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a winning of normal symbols in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. Therefore, the probability of winning the lottery of the normal symbols in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols is 1/1 (300/300). As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbols in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols is configured to be extremely low. As a result, even if the lottery for the second special pattern with a high small winning probability is to be executed in the normal state by hitting to the right, it is difficult to win the normal pattern and it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, so that the game ball can be more likely to lose than hitting to the left. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, details of the first win type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. This first winning type selection 13 table 202pd is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when winning a jackpot, like the first winning type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 316(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first win type selection 13 table 202pd.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment includes a direct hit table 202pd1 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (so-called "direct hit" occurs), and a direct hit table 202pd1 for determining (determining) the jackpot type when a special symbol lottery occurs. A V-per table 202pd2 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type is defined. First, the details of the direct hit table 202pd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 316(b).

FIG. 316(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the direct hit table 202pd1. As shown in FIG. 316(b), in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A13" and "jackpot B13", are provided as jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot (a direct hit occurs) occurs in the first special symbol lottery. "Jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (4 rounds, short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state of 5 times of time-saving times regardless of the game state. On the other hand, "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (four rounds, normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the end of the jackpot, while when winning during the time saving state, the time saving state of 5 times is given. Therefore, in the normal state, the "jackpot A13" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B13" because the game state after the completion of the jackpot is more advantageous. In addition, in the time-saving state, even if any jackpot is won, an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, so the degree of advantage is the same.

As shown in FIG. 316(b), "jackpot A13" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 64", and "jackpot B13" is defined in correspondence with the range of "65 to 99". That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win, the "jackpot A13" is determined at a rate of 65% (65/100), and the "jackpot B13" is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 316(b), the direct hit table 202pd1 is provided with "big hit C13" as a big hit type that can be determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit. This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (4 rounds, normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 12 rounds, and the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends when winning in the normal state, while the time saving state of 5 times is given when winning during the time saving state. If you win a jackpot in the second special design lottery. 100% (100/100) "jackpot C13" is determined.

Next, details of the V winning table 202pd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 316(c). As described above, this V winning table 202pd2 is a data table that defines data for specifying (selecting) the type of big winning to be executed based on the occurrence of a V winning in a small winning game (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 6500e3). FIG. 316(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this V winning table 202pd2. As shown in FIG. 316(c), the V-hit table 202pd2 defines three types of jackpots: "jackpot D13", "jackpot E13", and "jackpot F13".

As shown in FIG. 316(c), "jackpot D13" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 12 rounds and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot D13" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and the game state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot C7' is 50, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot D13' as the jackpot type to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 50/100 (50%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 316(c), "big win E13" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" for the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot E13" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This 'jackpot E13' has the largest number of rounds next to the 'jackpot C13' and 'jackpot D13', and since the game state after the completion of the jackpot is in an advantageous time-saving state, it is the next advantageous jackpot type after the 'jackpot C13' and 'jackpot D13' in terms of the number of rounds. In addition, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot E13' is 20, so the probability (percentage) that the 'jackpot E13' is determined (selected) as the jackpot type to be started when the V winning occurs during execution of the small win game is 20/100 (20%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 316(c), "big win F13" is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" for the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot F13" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot F13" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in terms of the number of rounds, but the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot F13' is 30, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot F13' as the jackpot type to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 30/100 (30%).

Incidentally, as described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the probability of winning a small prize at a rate of about 98% and the occurrence of a V prize in one small prize game is 1/6. In addition, unless the lottery for the second special symbol results in a relatively low probability of being out, it is almost impossible to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls. Therefore, when the time-saving state of 5 times of time-saving is set, 5 times of the small win game is executed and the reserved ball of the 2nd special pattern shifts to the normal state with 0, or V winning occurs within 5 times and becomes a V win in most cases. Since the probability of V winning occurring within 5 small wins executed in the time saving state is about 59.8% (1-5/6×5/6×5/6×5/6×5/6), basically, once the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 59.8% (a rate of more than 60% when direct hits are taken into account). When winning the second special pattern directly or winning the V win, an advantageous time saving state is set again after the end of the big win without fail, so that when shifting to the time saving state, an advantageous state is formed in which the big win and the time saving state are repeated at a rate of more than 60%. Therefore, since the game can be played with one goal of shifting to the time-saving state, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, details of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment includes a normal 13 table 202pe1 that is referred to to determine the variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is performed in the normal state, a time saving 13 table 202pe2 that is referred to to determine the variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, and a special symbol lottery in the normal state after clearing the RAM (after setting change). and a RAM clear time table 202pe3 that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern in each case. For convenience of explanation, first, the details of the 13 table for time saving 202pe2 will be explained.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 317, in the time saving 13 table 202pe, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of held balls, the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation type (variation pattern). On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, regardless of the number of held balls, a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1000 ms is defined as a fluctuation type in association with the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, the variation time is set to 1000 ms regardless of the lottery result.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the middle variation with the variation time of 5000 ms is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the long variation with the variation time of 10000 ms is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". Also, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 300000 ms is defined in association with the entire range that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special pattern is lost in the time-saving state, the second special pattern continues to fluctuate for 5 minutes, so that a chance zone can be formed in which the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be stored during that time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time is configured to be variable according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 65" in association with the small winning variation A with the variation time of 1000 ms as the variation type, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the small winning variation B with the variation time of 2000 ms as the variation type in the range of "66 to 132". 33 ~ 198”, as a variation type, a small hit variation C with a variation time of 3000 ms is associated and defined. That is, the variable time of 1 second, the variable time of 2 seconds, and the variable time of 3 seconds are selected at a ratio of approximately 1:1:1. Therefore, in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0, a game method aiming at a small winning start timing which facilitates a V winning from the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6750f can be configured so as not to be established, so that the V winning rate in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0 can be uniformly reduced to 1/6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, a small hit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association with the entire range that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit number in the chance zone, the fluctuation time is fixed to 1 second until the reserved balls become 0 (until the reserved balls are consumed by 3), so that the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution rotor 6750f in the small winning game can be set at a constant interval (7 seconds interval). As a result, the game ball can be entered into the ball entrance adjacent in the rotation direction to the ball entrance into which the ball was entered in the previous small win for each small win until the number of reserved balls becomes 0 with respect to the distribution rotator 6750f that makes one round in 6 seconds. That is, in the small winning game for the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to enter the same ball entrance with each other, so that the possibility of winning a V prize can be improved. Therefore, when the player is given an opportunity to move to the chance zone and save the reserved balls, the expectation for the V prize can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although not shown, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the normal state, the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be the same except for the deviation. Therefore, for example, even when the long variation is set due to a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the state of one remaining number of times of time saving, by accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol during the long variation, a small winning game with a high V winning rate can be executed after the end of the long variation (that is, after the end of the time saving state). In other words, a small win game with a high V winning rate can be executed after the chance zone ends regardless of the timing of the loss in the lottery of the second special pattern, so that the loss can always be expected until the time-saving state ends. It should be noted that, in the normal state, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, it is configured to set a loss short variation with a variation time of 1 second. This is intended to suppress a long useless period in which the lottery of the special symbols is not executed and the reserved balls cannot be stored because the winning probability of the normal symbols is low and the reserved balls of the second special symbol cannot be accumulated even if the long variation is executed when the ball is lost in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 314(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 268 (b)) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) in that a jackpot type storage area 203pa and a V passage flag 203pb are added. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, the probability variation flag 203fa, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are different in that they are deleted. The deletion of these flags and counters is due to the deletion of the simultaneous variation function and probability variation function.

The jackpot type storage area 203pa is a storage area for storing data for discriminating the jackpot type (V win type) set when a game ball winning a prize in a lottery device 6750 enters a V prize opening 6750f1 during execution of a small prize game. This big win type storage area 203pa stores a data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the judged small win type when the fluctuation of the special symbol that the determination result is a small win stops (S36022 in FIG. 320). When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 in the lottery device 6750, at the end of the small win, the start of the big win of the type corresponding to the data value stored in the big win type storage area 203pa is set (see S3311 in FIG. 324).

The V passing flag 203pb is a flag indicating whether or not V winning has been detected during the small winning game. If this V pass flag 203pb is ON, it indicates that V winning has already been detected during the small winning game, and if it is OFF, it means that V winning has not been detected. The initial value of the V passing flag 203pb is set to OFF, and is set to ON when a V winning is detected (see S3406 in FIG. 325). Also, at the end of the small hit that detects the V winning, it is set to off after setting the start of the big win according to the small win type (see S3312 in FIG. 324). With this V passing flag 203pb, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the big win should be started at the end of the small winning game (that is, whether or not the V winning occurred during the small winning game).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 318 to 325. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) will be described. This special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above, and is a process for setting the variation display of the special symbol in the first symbol display device 37.

In the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 13 (S141), the same process as the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) is executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (S141) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the present is not during the big hit or the small hit in the processing of S251 (S251: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is being varied (S10201), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not being varied (S10201: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter The value of 203dd (number of holdings of variable display based on lottery of the first special symbol N1) is acquired (S10202), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S10203).

In the processing of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S10203: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by calculation is set (S10205). The special figure 1 pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10205, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S10206). In the process of S10206, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203dd are processed to sequentially shift to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and the process proceeds to S10212.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S10203: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (the number of holding times of variation display based on the second special symbol lottery N2) is acquired (S10207). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is greater than 0 (S10208). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S10208: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S10209), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de changed by calculation is set (S10210). The special figure 2 pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S10210, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted by the same technique as the process of S10206 (S10211).

In the processing of S10212 executed after the processing of S10206 or S10211, the special symbol variation start processing 13 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S10212), and this processing ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S10201, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10201: Yes), the variation time counter for measuring the variation time is updated (S10213), and based on the value of the variation time counter after updating, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this variation time has not passed (S10214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10215), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 13 (S10212), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of a special pattern is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and when the jackpot of the special pattern is determined, the type of jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

After the processing of S10216 is finished, when the variation display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is started, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is a special symbol jackpot (S10217). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10217: Yes), data corresponding to the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 203mb (S10218), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S10219). Next, the start of the jackpot is set, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10225.

On the other hand, in the process of S10217, if the result of the lottery this time is the deviation of the special pattern (including the small hit) (S10217: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether the time saving state of the normal pattern) is determined (S10221), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10221: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated by subtracting 1. (S10222), and the process proceeds to S10223. On the other hand, in the processing of S10221, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10221: No), the processing of S10222 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S10223.

In the process of S10223, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small win (S10223), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S10223: Yes), a small win start process for setting the start of the small win is executed (S10224), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the processing of S10223, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (that is, it is a loss) (S10223: No), the processing of S10224 is skipped and the processing of S10225 is performed.

In the process of S10225, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends (S10225). The stop command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the state command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

By executing this special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 318), it is possible to perform only one of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display. Also, the lottery for the first special symbol can be preferentially executed over the lottery for the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141), will be described. In this special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212), first, the data stored in the execution area is acquired (S321), and among the acquired execution area data, the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning random number table 202pa (see FIG. 315, (a)), and the small winning random number table 202pb (see FIG. 315, (b)) are referred to to acquire the lottery result of the big winning lottery (S 322). Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S322 is a special symbol jackpot (S323), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S323: Yes), data indicating the current jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203pa (S324). Then, the display mode at the time of the big win is set according to the type of the big win this time (S325). In the process of S325, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the jackpot type. Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S326). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S326, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state among the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S326 is completed, the process proceeds to S332.

On the other hand, in the processing of S323, when it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (S323: No), it is then determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is a small win (S327), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S327: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small win is set (S328). When the processing of S328 is completed, the variation pattern at the time of the small winning is determined (S329). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S329, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops with a combination of symbols indicating a small win is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state among the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S329 is completed, the process proceeds to S332.

On the other hand, in the processing of S327, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery of this time is not a small win (S327: No), the display mode (loss symbol) at the time of loss is set (S330), and then the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S331). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S329, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state among the variation pattern selection 13 tables 202pe, and the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S331 is completed, the process proceeds to S332.

After any one of S326, S329 and S331 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S326, S329 and S331 is set (S332). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S333). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in any one of S325, S328, and S330 is set (S334). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) described later. When the processing of S334 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 318).

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, details of the above-described small winning start processing (S10225) will be described. This small winning start process (S10225) is, as described above, a process for starting a small winning when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning. In this small winning start process (S10225), first, the operation scenario (see FIG. 311) of the lottery device 3750 in the small winning game is read (S3601), and then the big winning type storage area 203pa stores data indicating the big winning type to be started when V winning occurs in this small winning (S3602). More specifically, in the process of S3602, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot D13 (12 rounds short time jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type; , jackpot F13 (4 round short time jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type. When the process of S3603 ends, the start of the small hit is set, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 13 (S142) will be described. This normal design variation process 13 (S142) is a process executed instead of the normal design variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

In the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 of the normal symbol variation process 13 (S142), the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 321, in the normal symbol variation process 13 (S142) in the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1112 or S1113, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be 30 seconds (S1131). This fluctuation time of 30 seconds is a period of length in which it is difficult to increase the number of held balls of the second special symbol even if the player continues to hit to the right in an advantageous time-saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, the variation time of normal symbols is fixed to 30 seconds irrespective of the game state so that the number of held balls of the second special symbols cannot be increased unless the special symbol lottery is lost and long variation is set. As a result, it is possible to give great joy to the player when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery during the time saving state.

Also, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol (S1118: No), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S1133). On the other hand, in the process of S1118, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory are set to "0.5 seconds x 1 time" (S1132). This open time of 0.5 seconds x 1 time is composed of a length that makes it difficult to enter two or more game balls into the second ball entry port 6400 (it becomes difficult to acquire the second special pattern reserved ball by winning one normal pattern). After executing the process of S1132 or S1133, the process proceeds to S1121.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the details of the main process 13 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. This main process 13 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of this main process 13, S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 are the same processes as S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main process (FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Further, as shown in FIG. 322, in the main process 13 in the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1803, instead of the big win control process (see FIG. 56) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the big win control process 13 is executed (S1841). The details of this jackpot control process 13 (S1841) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S1841 is completed, small winning control processing for executing various controls during execution of the small winning game is executed (S1842), and the processing proceeds to S1806. The details of this small winning control process (S1842) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841), which is one process in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described. This jackpot control process 13 (S1841) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a process for executing various controls during execution of the jackpot game.

Of this jackpot control process 13 (S1841), in each process of S1901-S1912 and S1916-1918, the same process as each process of S1901-S1912 and S1916-1918 of the jackpot control process (FIG. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 323, in the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that the current time is the jackpot end timing (S1912: Yes), the data in the winning state storage area 203mb is read out (S1991), and the game state corresponding to the data in the read winning state storage area 203mb and the time according to the jackpot type this time. The value of the short counter 203h is updated (S1992), and the process proceeds to S1916.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the contents of the small hit control process (S1842), which is one process in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described. In this small hit control process (S1842), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the small hit start timing (S3301). In addition, in the processing of S3301, in the small winning start processing (see FIG. 320), when the start of the small winning is set, it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning.

In the processing of S3301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning (S3301: Yes), the opening command for the small winning showing the start of the opening period of the small winning is set (S3302), the small winning flag 203dg is set to ON (S3303), the start of the operation scenario for the small winning is set (S3304), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is on (that is, whether it is during the small hit) (S3305), and when it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is off (S3305: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is on (S3305: Yes), it means that the small hit game is being executed, so next it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ending period) (S3306). 3308). Next, it is determined whether the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309), and if it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309: Yes), it means that the V winning has already been detected in the small hit this time. S3311), the V passage flag 203pb is set to OFF (S3312), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3309: No), it means that the V winning is not detected, so each processing of S3310 to S3312 for setting a jackpot game based on the V winning is skipped, and the present processing is finished as it is.

Also, in the processing of S3306, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small win (S3306: No), the entry of the ball into the V prize opening 3750f1 is monitored, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the V passage detection processing for storing the occurrence of the V prize is executed (S3307), and this processing is finished. By executing this small winning control process (see FIG. 324), the big winning game can be started only when the V winning is detected during execution of the small winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the contents of the V passage detection process (S3307), which is one process in the small hit control process (FIG. 324, S1842), will be described. This V passing detection process (S3307) is, as described above, a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the V winning opening 3750f1 and storing the occurrence of a V winning when detecting the entry of a ball.

As shown in FIG. 325, in the V passing detection process (S3307), first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203pb is ON (S3401). If it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is ON (S3401: Yes), it means that the ball entering (passing through) the V winning hole 3750f1 has already been detected and there is no need to monitor the ball entering the V winning hole 3750f1. exit.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203pb is off (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not a ball entering (passing through) the V winning opening 3750f1 has been detected (S3402), and if it is determined that a ball entering (passing through) the V winning opening 3750f1 has not been detected (S3402: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3402 that a ball has been entered into the V winning opening 3750f1 (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is valid (S3403). 3404), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that it is within the V effective period (S3403: Yes), the V pass command is set (S3405), then the V pass flag 203pb is turned on (S3406), and this process ends.

By this V passage detection processing, when the V prize is generated, the V passage flag 203pb is set to ON to memorize the occurrence of the V prize, so whether or not the big win game can be executed can be accurately determined according to the presence or absence of the V prize.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 and 327. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 326, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (S4161) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 11 (FIG. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

In the variable display setting process 13 (S4161), the process of S5231 is the same as the process of S5231 of the variable display setting process 11 (FIG. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

Also, as shown in FIG. 326, in the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5281). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5281: No), since the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S5285. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S5281: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5231), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5282), then the production mode setting process 13 for setting the production mode according to the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is executed (S5283), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b. is shifted (S5284), and the process proceeds to S5285. Details of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S5285, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5285), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5285: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5285: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5286), a stop type command for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5287), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the contents of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described. This effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment described above.

In the processes of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 of the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283), the same processes as the processes of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327, in the production mode setting process 13 (S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is an off-long variation (S18201). In the processing of S18201, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not long variation (S18201: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, in the processing of S18201, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a long variation (S18201: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the charge effect (see FIG. 313) is determined (S18202), and the process proceeds to S8208. By executing the charge performance, the player can easily understand that the game should be played with the aim of increasing the number of held balls of the second special symbol by striking to the right during a chance zone (charge time).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the normal state (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), the V prize is generated at a rate of 1/6. When the V prize is generated, the big win is started after the small win is finished, and the game state after the big win is again in an advantageous time-saving state, so that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the V prize is generated in the small win game. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is configured to form a chance zone capable of accumulating up to the upper limit number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when winning in the time saving state. A small winning game with a higher V winning rate than usual is executed by continuously executing right-handed hitting in the chance zone and accumulating the reserved balls to the maximum, so that a special game property that strongly desires to be lost in a time-saving state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting (the higher the probability of a big hit), the lower the probability of being out, so when shifting to the time saving state, the lower setting is more likely to shift to the chance zone. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage in the time saving state, so that when shifting to the time saving state, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property that makes the player wish for a lower setting. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery during the time saving state, a long variation with a long variation time (5 minutes) is set, and the reserved ball with the second special symbol can be stored only during the long variation. is not limited to For example, even during execution of the jackpot game, it may be configured such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easily accumulated. By configuring in this manner, a situation in which the winnings are likely to be distributed to the V winning opening 6750f1 immediately after the end of the big win is likely to occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, for example, when a direct hit is won in a time-saving state, the change time of the direct hit may be lengthened (for example, to 5 minutes) to form a state in which a V prize is likely to occur after the direct hit ends. In this case, the high setting, which is easier to win directly, has a higher degree of advantage, so that the player can be made to want to play with the pachinko machine 10 with a higher setting.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol exist, each time a small winning game is executed, the variation time of the second special symbol is set (set to 1 second) so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entrance adjacent to the entrance (distributed by the distribution rotator 6750f) in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance of the game ball in the previous small winning. There is no need to set a variable time that makes it easier to The behavior when the small winning game is executed continuously in the state where the reserved balls are accumulated can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the case where the small winning game is executed the same number of times in the state where the reserved balls are not held.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in the lottery device 3750 for performing lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit by the entered game ball, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of V winning, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having specifications provided with a variable probability lottery device for drawing a game state (low probability state of special symbols or variable probability state) after the end of the big win during the big win game. Specifically, when at least one game ball entering a variable probability lottery device in which game balls can be entered during execution of a big winning game enters a V winning opening, the state of the special symbols after the end of the big winning is set to the variable probability state of the special symbols, and when the V winning does not occur during the big winning game, the special symbols may be set to the low probability state of the special symbols. The lower the setting, the lower the jackpot probability, but it may be configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type in which the variable probability lottery device is operated in an operation pattern in which V prizes are likely to occur increases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 14th embodiment, a chance zone (long variation) is set to easily create a situation (a state in which reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit) in which a V winning prize is likely to occur in a small winning game when the ball is lost in the time-saving state, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, in a normal state, a chance zone may be formed on the basis of establishment of a prescribed condition after being configured so that the lottery for the first special symbol can win a small prize at a lower probability (for example, probability of 1/100) than the lottery for the second special symbol. Concretely, for example, when two consecutive small wins are won in the lottery of the first special pattern, it may be configured so that the fluctuation time becomes extremely long, and by hitting to the right during that time, it is possible to accumulate balls with the second special pattern like a chance zone set during the time saving state. By constructing in this way, even if the V prize is not generated in the small prize game of the first special pattern, if a small prize is obtained in the first special pattern lottery after the end of the small prize game, a chance of easily generating the V prize can be obtained, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the first special pattern lottery result after the completion of the small prize. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 328 to 363. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment described above is configured to execute a special symbol jackpot lottery and a lottery for determining a variation pattern indicating the result of the jackpot lottery by referring to separate random numbers. That is, the jackpot lottery is executed by comparing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type selection 13 table 202pa, and the lottery for determining the variation pattern is executed by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured so that the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern are executed based on the same random number value. Then, a special failure variation pattern is selected as a failure variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that is a win for some set values and a failure for some set values. In other words, it is possible to guess (narrow down) the set value when an outlier variation pattern that is selected only for some set values is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of variation pattern that is executed at the time of loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the more unfavorable the situation is for the player, the higher the execution rate of the specific effect (win rate suggesting effect) that can suggest the setting. That is, the execution ratio of winning rate suggesting performance is set to be higher as the number of times of failing to shift to an advantageous game state (probability variable state continuing until the next big win or time saving state of 100 times of time saving) after the end of big win continues. As a result, the player can be made to start a game in the pachinko machine 10 where the disadvantageous situation has continued for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Although the details will be described later, in the 14th embodiment, four types of game states are provided: normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, and latent probability state. The normal state and latent probability state are disadvantageous game states. That is, the normal state and the hidden state are configured as a disadvantageous game state in which the electric accessary 6400a is difficult to open and the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed even if the player hits to the right (it is necessary to advance the game by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left). In addition, in a disadvantageous game state, even if a variable probability jackpot is won, the ratio of setting a small number of times of shortening time (e.g., 8 times) is high, and if the jackpot is not won again during the small number of times of shortening time, it is difficult to shift to an advantageous variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played with a strong desire to win a jackpot during a small number of times of time saving (8 times). Further, in the 14th embodiment, when a big win is won, a high probability state (latent probability state or probability variable state) of special symbols is set at a high rate (percentage of 90%) after the end of the jackpot. In other words, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, even if the probability variable big win is won, the state of the special pattern after the end of the big win is forcibly set to the low probability state of the special pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the big win, so that a deep game can be realized.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control unit 113 is partially changed, and control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 328, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the game board 13 of the fourteenth embodiment differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 307) in that the lottery device 6750 is eliminated and that various movable members (accessories) capable of performing predetermined performance operations are provided for each part of the game board 13.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 329 and 330, the operation unit 300 provided with various movable members will be described. 329 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 330 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300 in which the operation unit 300 is disassembled and viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, operation unit 300 includes rear case 310 formed in a box-like shape with one side (front side of FIG. 330) opened from bottom wall portion 311 and outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of bottom wall portion 311. A rectangular opening 311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, so that the rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 328) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The motion unit 300 includes a swing motion unit 400, a first slide motion unit 500, a box-shaped unit 600, a decorative accessory unit 700, and a second slide motion unit 800, which are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 310, and are configured as one unit. Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an external shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the back case 310, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 311 in a manner surrounded by the outer wall portion 312 while contacting the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312. In the assembled state (see FIG. 329), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in front view.

The swing motion unit 400, the first slide motion unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decoration accessory unit 700 are arranged in a stacked state in front of the second slide motion unit 800, and housed in the rear case 310 (see FIG. 329). As described above, in the present embodiment, another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) is superimposed on the front side of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800). In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 328) is made of a light-transmissive material and the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are visible to the player, only the necessary parts of the predetermined action units can be seen by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by the other action units. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332, an overview of the operation modes of the standing object 400 and the first slide operation unit 500 will be described. 329 and 330 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 331 and 332 as appropriate.

331 and 332 are front views of operation unit 300. FIG. 331 shows a state in which the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged in the extended position, and FIG. 332 shows a state in which the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position. As shown in FIG. 331, the swinging motion unit 400 includes an arm member 420 whose base end is swingably pivoted, and an upright material 410 swingably supported at the swinging end side opposite to the base end side of the arm member 420, and these arm member 420 and upright helper 410 are operated between a retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and an extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (original position) shown in FIG. 329, the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 are retracted below the opening 311a of the rear case 310 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 331, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the standing member 410 is arranged in the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third pattern display device 81).

As shown in FIG. 332, the first slide operation unit 500 includes a tilting accessory 510 that slides obliquely downward, and a rotating accessory 520 that can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise around a rotating shaft 520a. The tilting accessory 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (original position) shown in FIG. 329, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 332, the tilting accessory 510 is placed in the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, in front of the third pattern display device 81).

In this way, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment is provided with a plurality of movable members (various accessories such as the standing accessory 410 and the tilting accessory 510), and is configured to be capable of executing various performance operations. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333, a characteristic presentation mode in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the 14th embodiment, in the normal state and latent probability state, which are relatively disadvantageous to the player, as a kind of variable display performance, a winning rate suggesting performance is configured to notify (suggest) the player of the expectation (winning rate) of winning a big win in the lottery of special symbols within 100 times. Here, in the 14th embodiment, as described above, both the normal state and the latent state are configured as disadvantageous game states in which it is extremely difficult to execute the special symbol lottery even if the player hits to the right (it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left). That is, since the behavior of the pachinko machine 10 (operation of the pachinko machine 10) other than the jackpot probability is common between the normal state and the latent probability state, it is basically difficult to distinguish between the normal state and the latent probability state. However, in the case that it is completely unknown whether it is a normal state or a latent state, the player has a feeling of uneasiness that a normal state with a low jackpot probability is set when the special pattern lottery is continuously lost, and the player loses motivation for the game and quits the game even though the latent state with a slightly higher advantage is set because the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state. That is, there is a possibility that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be lowered. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, by executing the winning probability suggesting effect, it is possible to distinguish between the normal state and the latent probability state depending on the content of the effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the winning rate suggesting performance is executed, and to improve the motivation for the game when the content of the performance has a high possibility of a latent probability state. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the 14th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the ratio of setting the number of time reduction times to 0 is lower than when the jackpot is won in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal state from becoming excessively disadvantageous compared to the latent probability state, so it is possible to prevent the operating rate from decreasing in the normal state.

FIG. 333(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode at the start of the winning probability suggesting effect. When execution of winning rate suggesting performance is set in a normal state or a latent probability state, a performance is executed in which a character 710 imitating a boy wearing a headband displayed in a small area Ds2 utters the words ``What is the winning rate within 100 games...'' while all the third patterns are being variably displayed at high speed. The line uttered by the character 710 after this line suggests the probability of winning the jackpot (winning rate) during 100 games (that is, until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times). In addition, since the probability of winning a big win is higher in the latent probability state than in the normal state, a higher winning rate is likely to be suggested in the latent probability state.

FIG. 333(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the winning rate is suggested by the character 710 in the winning rate suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 333(b), in the win rate suggesting effect, an effect is executed in which the character 710 suggests the win rate numerically to the player through dialogue. FIG. 333(b) exemplifies a situation in which the line "30% over" is uttered, suggesting that the winning rate is at least 30% or higher. Although the details will be described later, this production mode in which the line "30% over" is pronounced is configured to be more likely to be selected in the latent state than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the degree of expectation of the latent state is high, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved. In addition, in the 14th embodiment, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 1/200 and 1/55.6. In the low probability state of the special pattern, the ratio of winning the 1/200 jackpot (winning rate) until the lottery of the special pattern is executed 100 times is about 39.4%, so the winning rate of ``30% over'' is a numerical value that applies even in the normal state of setting 1.例文帳に追加As a result, even if a winning rate of ``30% over'' is suggested in a normal state with a low probability of big win, the behavior of winning a big win at a ratio exceeding 30% can actually be realized, so that the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(a), another aspect of the winning probability suggesting effect in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the winning rate suggesting performance in the 14th embodiment, the winning rate is suggested so as not to exceed the theoretical value of the rate of winning the jackpot (winning rate within 100 games) until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times. The winning rate within 100 games changes depending on the setting. More specifically, in the 14th embodiment, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is set to 1/200, while the jackpot probability of setting 6 is set to 1/90. Therefore, the winning rate within 100 games of setting 1 is approximately 39.4%, while the winning rate within 100 games of setting 6 is approximately 67.3%. For this reason, for example, when a winning rate of "40% over" is reported in the normal state, setting 1 is denied. Conversely, when a winning rate of "40% over" is notified in setting 1, the normal state is denied (the latent probability state is established). In this way, in the fourteenth embodiment, taking into account the difference in the jackpot winning rate for each setting and the game state word, when a specific performance mode (a mode in which a winning rate exceeding the winning rate within 100 games in a specific setting or a normal state) is executed in the winning rate suggesting performance, a part of the situation (a part of the setting or the normal state) is denied. As a result, it is possible to suggest a set value to the player in addition to suggesting the normal state or the latent state in the win rate suggesting presentation, so that a more amusing presentation mode can be realized.

FIG. 334(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the win rate suggestion effect in which setting 6 is fixed. As shown in FIG. 334(a), in setting 6, it is configured such that a winning rate of "66.6% over" can be announced as a winning rate suggesting effect. By setting all the digits (the tens digit, the ones digit, and the first decimal place) of the value indicating the winning rate to "6", it is possible to suggest that the setting is 6 to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation. It should be noted that this effect mode of "66.6% over" is configured to be executed only in the normal state in setting 6. In the normal state, the 100-game winning rate of setting 5 (jackpot probability 1/120) is about 56.7%, and the 100-game winning rate of setting 6 (jackpot probability 1/90) is about 67.3%. Therefore, when "66.6% over" is reported in the normal state of setting 6, the behavior of actually winning the big win at a rate exceeding 66.6% can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the more the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player (the more the number of consecutive times (through times) that the player cannot shift to an advantageous game state (either the probability variable state that continues until the next big win or the time saving state with the number of time saving times of 100 times), the higher the probability of execution of the winning rate suggesting effect. That is, it is configured such that the setting is suggested at a higher rate. As a result, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game in a disadvantageous situation, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the setting suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, on the main controller 110 side, an outlier variation pattern (variation type) that can be selected (or is likely to be selected) only with some set values is provided. More specifically, outlier fluctuations that are selected only at setting 2 or higher (setting 1 negative super reach), outlier fluctuations that are only selected at setting 4 or higher (high setting fixed super reach), and outlier fluctuations that are selected only at setting 6 (setting 6 fixed super reach) are provided. In addition, there are provided an outlier variation (even-number suggesting super reach) in which an even-number setting is more likely to be selected than an odd-number setting and an out-of-range variation (radix index super reach) in which an odd number setting is more likely to be selected than an even number setting. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, when these variation types are notified, similar to the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern type (that is, the setting value) is suggested (executed setting suggestion presentation) by the numbers attached to the left and right third symbols when the reach occurs.

FIG. 334(b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern presentation (drawing mode) when the variation type (variation pattern) of the high setting fixed super reach is notified from the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 334(b), when the high setting fixed super reach is executed, the third symbol with the number "4", the third symbol with the number "5", and the third symbol with the number "6" are stopped in a vertical line with respect to the right symbol row, while the third symbol with the number "6", the third symbol with the number "5", and the number "4" are attached with respect to the left symbol row. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the third symbols are stopped in a vertical line. In other words, a ready-to-win performance (a so-called triple ready-to-win performance) is executed in which the third pattern ready-to-win with the number ``4'' added in the downward right direction, the ready-to-win in the third pattern with the number ``5'' attached in the horizontal direction to the horizontal direction, and the ready-to-win in the third pattern with the number ``6'' attached to the rising right-hand side are performed, and finally the lost pattern is stop-displayed. In the setting suggesting performance, setting is suggested by a number attached to a pattern on which reach is applied, so that only by confirming the third pattern during execution of high setting fixed super reach, it is possible to easily understand that any one of setting 4, 5 and 6 is suggested.

In addition, in order to execute a performance in which the ready-to-win occurs in the third pattern with any of the numbers ``1'' to ``6'' in the setting suggestive performance, when the normal super-ready-to-win (that is, super ready-to-win that can be selected regardless of the setting) is notified as the variation type, the performance in which the ready-to-win occurs in the third pattern to which a number other than ``1'' to ``6'' (that is, any of the numbers ``7'' to ``9'') is executed. Thus, when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player can easily understand whether it is the setting suggestion performance or the normal super ready-to-win performance only by confirming the number attached to the third pattern. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation.

<Electrical configuration in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 335(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment described above (see FIG. 314 (a)), in that the 1st per random number 14 table 202qa is provided instead of the 1st per random number 13 table 202pa, and the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd. The difference is that a variable pattern selection 14 table 202qe is provided instead of the pattern selection 13 table pe, a time reduction granting table 202qf is added, and a small winning random number 13 table 202pb is deleted along with the elimination of the small winning lottery result. Since other configurations are the same as those of the thirteenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 336(a), details of the first winning random number 14 table 202qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 14 table 202qa. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the first winning random number 14 table 202qa in the fourteenth embodiment defines the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as big hits in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 336(a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, 328 counter values (random values) of "0 to 89, 200 to 437" are defined in association with setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first per random number counter C1, and for setting 2, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as "100 to 189, 230 to 503." 364 counter values (random values) are defined in association with setting 3, and 410 counter values (random values) of “0 to 89, 230 to 549” are defined in association with setting 3 as the range of counter values (random values) of the first random number counter C1. With setting 5, 546 counter values (random numbers) of "0 to 89, 280 to 735" are associated and defined as the range of the counter values (random numbers) of the first random number counter C1, and with setting 6, 728 counter values (random numbers) of "100 to 189, 300 to 937" are associated with the ranges of the counter values (random numbers) of the first random number counter C1. are stipulated. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (328/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/180 (364/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 3 is 1/160 (410/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/140 (468/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120. (546/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/90 (728/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 336(a), in the high-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1179" is defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 1, "0 to 1310" is defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 2, and "0 to 1310" is defined as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 3. "0 to 1474" is defined in association with setting 4, "0 to 1684" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 for setting 4, "0 to 1965" is defined in association with setting 5 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 2620" is defined in association with setting value 6 as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first random number counter C1. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the setting 1 jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is 1/55.6 (1180/65536), the setting 2 jackpot probability is 1/50 (1311/65536), the setting 3 jackpot probability is 1/44.4 (1475/65536), the setting 4 jackpot probability is 1/38.9 (1685/65536), and the setting 5 jackpot probability. is 1/33.3 (1966/65536) and the jackpot probability for setting 6 is 1/25 (2621/65536). In addition, the ratio of the jackpot probability of a low probability state and the jackpot probability of a high probability state is common similarly to 11th Embodiment and 12th Embodiment.

Here, unlike other embodiments, the value of the random number (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big win in the low probability state of the special symbol is not continuous (the value is partly skipped). This is to provide a range that cannot be selected, a range that can be selected only at high settings (settings 4 to 6), a range that can be selected only at setting 6, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 339 and the like, but in the variation pattern selection 14 table in the 14th embodiment, the variation pattern at the time of loss and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 are defined in association with each other. That is, the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery are determined by referring to a common counter (first winning random number counter C1). In some set values, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit is defined in association with the type of a special outlier variation pattern. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to estimate (narrow down) the set value when the special deviation fluctuation pattern is executed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of variation pattern that is executed at the time of loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336(b), details of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 336(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 336(b), in the first winning type selection 14 table 202qb in the tenth embodiment, at least a special 1 winning table 202qd1 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and a special 2 winning table 202qd2 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 337(a), the details of the special 1 win table 202qd1 will be described.

FIG. 337(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special 1 win table 202qd1 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 337(a), in the special 1-per table 202qd1 in the 14th embodiment, 8 types of "jackpot A14" to "jackpot H14" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. "Jack A14" to "Jack C14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot is set to a high probability state of special symbols. In addition, "jackpot D14" to "jackpot F14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special pattern. In addition, "jackpot G14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern. Further, "jackpot H14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state. In addition, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is provided is configured to differ according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 337(a), "jackpot A14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 5". Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with 'jackpot A14' is 6 of '0 to 5', so the ratio of determining (selecting) 'jackpot A14' when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 6% (6/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "6 to 46" in association with "jackpot B14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot B14'' is 41, ie, ``6 to 46'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot B14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 41% (41/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "47 to 66" in association with "jackpot C14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``big win C14'' is 20, ie, ``47 to 66'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot C14'' is 20% (20/100) when the big winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value "67" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "jackpot D14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot D14'' is 1, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot D14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 1% (1/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "68, 69" in association with "jackpot E14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot E14'' is 2, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot E14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 89" as the jackpot type "jackpot F14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) in association with each other. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot F14'' is 20, ie, ``70 to 89'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot F14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 92" in association with "jackpot G14" (9-round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``big win G14'' is 3, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot G14'' when the big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "93 to 99" in association with "jackpot H14" (3-round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot H14'' is 7, so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot H14'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 7% (7/100).

Thus, in the 14th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the percentage of probability variable jackpot is 90% (when any of ``jackpot A14'' to ``jackpot F14'' is obtained), and the normal jackpot is won at a percentage of 10% (when either ``jackpot G14'' or ``jackpot H14'' is obtained). In addition, it is configured such that a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337(b), the details of the special 2 win table 202qd2 will be described. This special 2 winning table 202qd2 is, as described above, a data table for determining a winning type when a big winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 337(b), in the 14th embodiment, four jackpot types, "jackpot I14" to "jackpot L14", are provided as the jackpot types of the second special symbols. "Jack A14" to "Jack C14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot is set to a high probability state of special symbols. Also, "jackpot D14" to "jackpot F14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the special symbol state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. "Jack I14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the special symbol state after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol high probability state. Also, "jackpot J14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special pattern. In addition, "jackpot K14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern. Furthermore, "jackpot L14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 66" in association with "jackpot I14" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot I14'' is 67, ``0 to 66''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "67 to 89" in association with "jackpot J14" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with ``jackpot J14'' is 23, ``67 to 89''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 92" as the jackpot type "jackpot K14" (9 round normal jackpot) in association with it. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot K14' is 3 of '90 to 92'.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type "jackpot L14" (3-round normal jackpot) in association with it. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot L14'' is 7, ``93 to 99''.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, similarly to the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of 90% (when either ``jackpot I14'' or ``jackpot J14'' is obtained) is a probability variable jackpot, and the ratio of 10% (when either ``jackpot K14'' or ``jackpot L14'' is obtained) is configured to win a normal jackpot. In addition, it is configured such that a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%. In other words, it is configured so that the distribution of the number of rounds is the same as when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338(a), details of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment is different from other embodiments, and data for determining the variation pattern (variation time) is defined according to the value (random number) of the first per random number counter C1. FIG. 338(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 338 (a), the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the 14th embodiment is a left-handed state table 202qe1 for determining (selecting) the variation pattern (variation time) in the gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set (that is, the normal state in which the game should proceed by hitting to the left, the latent state), and the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (that is, the time-saving state in which the game should proceed by hitting to the right, variable state). and a right-handed state table 202qe2 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in . First, with reference to FIG. 338(b), the details of the left-handed state table 202qe1 will be described.

FIG. 338(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the left-handed state table 202qe1. As shown in FIG. 338(b), in the left-handed state table 202qe1 in the fourteenth embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the first winning random number counter C1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 338(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a multiple of 4, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in correspondence with the "winning normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to be a value other than a multiple of 4, and the "winning super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when a big win is obtained in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state and the latent state, the variation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the variation time is set to 30 seconds at a rate of about 3/4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 99". Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in the odd setting, the range of "0 to 89" in the range of the random numbers corresponding to the even suggesting super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to the range of "0 to 89". Therefore, in the odd number setting, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the even number suggesting super reach, 90% will be a big hit (loss variation is not executed), so the ratio of even number suggesting super reach is substantially 1/10. That is, the even-number suggesting super reach is ten times more likely to be executed in the even-number setting, so that the player can be made to think that the possibility of the even-number setting is high when the even-number suggesting super reach is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "100 to 199" in association with the "odd-suggestion super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in the even setting, the range of "100 to 189" in the range of the random numbers corresponding to the odd-number suggesting super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to the range of "100 to 189". Therefore, in the even number setting, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the odd number suggesting super reach, the ratio of executing the odd number suggesting super reach is substantially 1/10 because 90% of the winning is a big hit (loss variation is not executed). That is, the odd number suggesting super reach is ten times more likely to be executed in the odd number setting, so that the player can be made to think that the odd number setting is highly likely when the odd number suggesting super reach is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "200 to 229" in association with "setting 1 negative super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in setting 1, the entire range of the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to a random number value determined as a big hit, while in the other settings, the random value range corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach and the range of random numbers determined as a big win are set so as not to overlap each other. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery for the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach, the possibility of executing the setting 1 negative super reach is 0 because a big win is achieved (loss variation is not executed). That is, setting 1 negation super reach is executed only at setting 2 or higher, so that when executed, the player can at least have a sense of security that the setting is not the lowest setting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "200 to 229" in association with "setting 1 negative super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336(a), in setting 1, the entire range of the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to a random number value determined as a big hit, while in the other settings, the random value range corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach and the range of random numbers determined as a big win are set so as not to overlap each other. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery for the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach, the possibility of executing the setting 1 negative super reach is 0 because a big win is achieved (loss variation is not executed). That is, setting 1 negation super reach is executed only at setting 2 or higher, so that when executed, the player can at least have a sense of security that the setting is not the lowest setting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "230 to 279" in association with "high set fixed super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in settings 1 to 3 (low setting), the entire range of the range of random numbers (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to the high setting fixed super reach is set to the random number value determined as a big hit, while in settings 4 to 6 (high setting), the random number value corresponding to the high setting fixed super reach and the range of the random number determined to be a big hit are set so as not to overlap. Therefore, in the settings 1 to 3, even if the lottery of the special pattern is executed with the random number value corresponding to the high setting fixed super reach, the possibility of executing the high setting fixed super reach is 0 because a big hit is obtained (loss variation is not executed). That is, since the high setting fixed super reach is executed only at the setting of 4 or more (high setting), the player can have a great sense of security that the setting is high (the probability of big win is set relatively high) when executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "280 to 299" in association with "setting 6 finalized super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in settings 1 to 5 (settings other than setting 6), the entire range of the range of random numbers (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to setting 6 confirmed super reach is set to the random number value determined as a big hit, while in setting 6, the random number value is set so that the range of random numbers corresponding to setting 6 confirmed super reach and the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit do not overlap. Therefore, in settings 1 to 5, even if a special symbol lottery is executed with a random number value corresponding to setting 6 fixed super reach, the possibility of executing setting 6 fixed super reach is 0 because a big win is achieved (loss variation is not executed). That is, since the setting 6 fixed super reach can be executed only at the setting 6 (high setting), the player can have a very great sense of security and satisfaction that the setting is the highest (the jackpot probability is set to the highest) when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's motivation for the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 338(b), the normal (that is, selected regardless of the setting) deviation fluctuation pattern is associated with the range where the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "300" or more. More specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "300 to 10084", and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "300 to 10084", the fluctuation time of 30000 ms is defined in association with the "short out" of the fluctuation time of 8000 ms to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "1085 to 33465". 224” is defined in association with “long out” with a fluctuation time of 12000 ms, and “out of normal reach” with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 of “53225 to 65535”.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is ``big win'', ``long winning variation'' with a variation time of 120000 ms is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "loss", "loss long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 120000 ms is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1. Therefore, when an irregular game method of right-handed hitting is practiced in a state where the game should be advanced by left-handed hitting (normal state, latent state), the electric accessary 6400a is hardly opened, making it difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the variation time is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, so that the game efficiency can be greatly deteriorated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-hand shot is performed in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which the game should be progressed by a left-hand shot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, in the 14th embodiment, an overview of the correspondence between the random number value (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) associated with various variation patterns corresponding to the failure and the random number value determined to be winning (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) will be described in detail using setting 1 and setting 4 as examples.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 339, the random numbers determined to be winning in setting 1 are the range of "0 to 89", which occupies 90% of the range of random numbers corresponding to even suggested super reach (the range of "0 to 99" for the first random number counter C1), the entire range of random numbers corresponding to setting 1 negative super reach (the range of "200 to 229" for the first random number counter C1), and the entire range of random values corresponding to high setting confirmed super reach. The full range of the range (the range of the first per random number counter C1 is "230 to 279"), the entire range of the random value range corresponding to the setting 6 fixed super reach (the range of the first per random number counter C1 is "280 to 299"), and the range of "300 to 437", which is part of the range of the random value corresponding to the outlier super reach (the range of the first per random number counter C1 is "300 to 10084"). are Therefore, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of starting winning in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number corresponding to the even-number suggesting super reach (within the range of "0 to 99"), 90% (within the range of "0 to 89") is determined as a big winning, and the normal winning variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, which is an odd number setting, even if a random number value corresponding to even number suggesting super reach is obtained, the ratio of actually executing even number suggesting super reach is only 10%, so even number suggesting super reach becomes difficult to execute.

In addition, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired at the time of start winning in setting 1 is within the range of random number values corresponding to any of setting 1 negative super reach, high setting fixed super reach, and setting 6 fixed super reach (within the range of "200 to 299"), it is always determined as a big win and normal winning variation or winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, the possibility of execution of setting 1 negative super reach, high setting fixed super reach, and setting 6 fixed super reach is zero.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 339, the random value determined to be a hit in setting 4 is the range of “100 to 189”, which occupies 90% of the range of random values corresponding to the odd number suggestive super reach (the range of “100 to 199” for the first hit random number counter C1), the entire range of the random value range corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (the range of “280 to 299” for the first random number counter C1), and the outlier super reach. and a range of "300 to 657" which is a part of the range of random numbers corresponding to (the range of "300 to 10084" of the first hit random number counter C1). Therefore, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of starting winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number corresponding to the odd number suggesting super reach (within the range of ``100 to 199''), 90% (within the range of ``100 to 189'') is determined as a big winning, and the normal winning variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 4, which is an even number setting, even if a random value corresponding to odd number suggesting super reach is obtained, the ratio of actually executing odd number suggesting super reach is only 10%, so odd number suggesting super reach becomes difficult to execute.

In addition, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number corresponding to the setting 6 finalized super reach (within the range of ``280 to 299''), it is always determined as a big win, and the winning normal variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 4, the possibility of execution of setting 6 finalized super reach is 0.

Although illustration is omitted, the same is true for other settings. In setting 2, odd number suggestive super reach (random value range of “100 to 199”) is difficult to execute, and random values (counter value of first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit are set (distributed) so that the possibility of executing high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 confirmed super reach (random value range of “230 to 299”) is 0. Further, in setting 3, the random numbers (counter values of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as big wins are set (distributed) so that even-suggestion super reach (random value range of "0 to 99") is difficult to be executed, and the possibility of executing high setting fixed super reach and setting 6 fixed super reach (random number range of "230 to 299") is 0. Also, in setting 5, the random number (the counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big win is set (distributed) so that the possibility of even-suggestion super reach (random value range “0 to 99”) is difficult to be executed, and the possibility of executing setting 6 definite super reach (random value range “280 to 299”) is 0. Then, in setting 6, the random number (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit is set (distributed) so that the odd number suggesting super reach (random number "100 to 199" range) is difficult to execute, and other fluctuation types are executed without limitation.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a failure variation type that is difficult to be executed and a failure variation type that is unlikely to be performed for each setting, so that the game property of estimating the set value of the pachinko machine 10 from the execution state of the failure variation can be realized. For example, when setting 1 negative super reach and odd suggesting super reach are confirmed, the player can guess that setting 3 or setting 5 is highly likely. In addition, when high setting fixed super reach and even number suggested super reach are confirmed, the player can guess that setting 4 or setting 6 is highly likely. Further, if setting 6 confirmed super reach is executed, the player can be convinced that it is setting 6. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property of guessing (narrowing down) the setting from the execution status of the deviation fluctuation pattern of the specific type, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type drawn by the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to analyze the variation pattern command output each time the special symbol lottery is executed and execute the variation pattern performance according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, on the audio ramp control device 113 side, it is only necessary to define the correspondence relationship between the variation type and the performance mode of the variation pattern performance, and it is not necessary to grasp the setting values themselves (that is, the main control device 110 does not need to notify the audio ramp control device 113 of the setting values).

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, the details of the right-handed state table 202qe2 constituting the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe described above will be described. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the right-handed state table 202qe2. As shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is a "big win", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is a multiple of 4 is defined in association with the "normal winning reach" with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is not a multiple of 4 is defined in association with the "winning super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15000 ms. Therefore, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit in the time saving state and the probability variable state, the variation time is set to 10 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the variation time is set to 15 seconds at a rate of about 3/4. That is, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be set compared to the state in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting to the left.

Also, as shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is "loss", regardless of the type of special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "0 to 4999", and the fluctuation time is 15000ms. , the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to correspond to the range of "45000 to 54999" with "long out" with a fluctuation time of 7000 ms, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined to correspond to the range of "55000 to 65535" with the "outside normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms. That is, in the time saving state and the probability variable state, even when it is out, it is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected than in the normal state and the latent probability state. As a result, since the game efficiency can be enhanced in an advantageous state, the player's interest in the advantageous state can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the time reduction provision table 202qf in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This time reduction provision table 202qf is a data table referred to for setting the number of times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Drawing 341 is a figure showing the contents of regulation of time reduction grant table 202qf.

As shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot A14 (9 round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set. The number of times of working hours is set. Therefore, if a jackpot A14 or a jackpot D14 is won before reaching the probability variable limit number of times, a variable probability state (most advantageous game state) continuing until the next big win is set, while when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, only a low probability state of a special symbol and a time-saving state of eight times are set, so that the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the probability variable limit number of times is reached.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot A14 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. If the probability variable jackpot hits before the probability variable limit is reached, the number of time reductions (65536 times) that substantially continues until the next jackpot is granted. Time saving number of times is set. Therefore, even when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the lottery of the special pattern can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls in hand, so that the player can have a feeling of anticipation for pulling back the big win. In addition, in the 14th embodiment, it is configured so as not to clearly inform the player whether or not the limit number of times has been reached (whether the variable probability state or the time saving state). Therefore, even if the variable probability limit number of times is actually reached and the time saving state is set, the player can expect the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot I14 (9 round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, 8 times of time reduction times are given even if it is a hit before reaching the probability limit limit or the probability limit number of times is reached. In other words, before the limit is reached, the probability variable state is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed eight times after the end of the jackpot, and the probability state is maintained after the ninth time. On the other hand, if the limit number of times has been reached, the working hours are shortened during the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of the special symbols eight times, and the normal state is entered after the ninth time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot I14 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set are associated with the same number of time reduction grants as the jackpot A14 and jackpot D14. In other words, the number of times of time reduction (65536 times) substantially continuing until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the probability variable limit number of times, and the time reduction number of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times. Therefore, the big wins B14, E14 and I14 are more disadvantageous than the big wins A14 and D14 in terms of the game state after the end of the big win when they are won in the normal state or the latent probability state without reaching the probability variable limit number of times, and when they are won in other situations (when they are won in the probability variable state, the time-saving state, or when the probability variable limit number of times is reached), the same game state as the big wins A14 and D14 is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state are defined in association with 8 times as the number of times of time reduction. In addition, if you win the probability variable jackpot in the normal state, the probability variable limit number of times will not be reached, so the number of time reduction grants when the probability variable limit number is reached is not specified (because the probability variable limit number cannot be reached, there is no need to specify). In addition, 0 times is defined as the number of times of shortening time even if the hit is before reaching the variable probability limit or the number of times of probability variable limit is reached for the jackpots C14 and F14 won in the latent probability state. In other words, when the jackpots C14 and F14 are won in the latent probability state, the time-saving state of normal symbols is not provided even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, are associated with the same time saving times as the jackpots A14, B14, D14, E14, I14. In other words, the number of times of time saving that continues until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time saving of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot G14 (9 rounds normal jackpot), jackpot H14 (3 rounds normal jackpot), jackpot K14 (9 rounds normal jackpot), and jackpot L14 (3 rounds normal jackpot) won in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set are defined in association with 8 times as the number of times of time reduction. In addition, since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached when winning a normal jackpot, the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not defined (no need to be defined). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, 100 times are associated with the jackpots G14, H14, K14, L14 won in the gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, as the number of time saving giving times. In other words, when the jackpots G14, H14, K14, L14 are won, it is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 to F14, H14 to J14 because the number of time-saving grants that continues until the next jackpot cannot be set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot J14 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is defined as 0 times as the number of times of time reduction regardless of whether or not the probability variable limit number of times is reached. Therefore, the jackpot J14 is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player when winning in the normal state or the latent probability state because the number of rounds is small and the time saving state is not given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot J14 won in the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, if the probability variable jackpot hits before the probability variable limit is reached, the time saving state (65536 times) that continues until the next big hit is given.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the number of times of shortening time given after the end of the big win is differentiated according to the kind of the big win, the game state at the time of winning the big win, and whether or not the variable probability limit number of times has been reached. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state after the end of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 335(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 314(b)) in that a variable probability flag 203fa, a limit counter 203qa, and a limit reaching flag 203qb are added. Moreover, it is different in that the small hit flag 203dg, the big hit type storage area 203pa, and the V passage flag 203pb are deleted. Deletion of these configurations is intended to eliminate the configuration for realizing a V win, since a jackpot (V win) based on a V prize is not provided in the 14th embodiment.

The variable probability flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to a variable probability state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the variable probability state is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied.

The limit counter 203qa is a counter for counting the probability variation limit number of times. If the value of the limit counter 203qa is less than 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached, so the state after the jackpot end is set to the special symbol high probability state. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203qa is 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached, so the state after the jackpot end is set to the special symbol low probability state. The limit counter 203qa has an initial value set to 0, and each time the probability variable jackpot is won, the value is updated by adding 1 at the end of the probability variable jackpot (see S3504 in FIG. 352). In addition, this limit counter 203qa is reset to 0 when it is determined that the variable probability limit has been reached (the counter value is updated to 11) at the end of the variable probability jackpot, and at the end of the normal jackpot (see S3502 in FIG. 352).

The limit reaching flag 203qb is a flag indicating whether or not the variable probability limit number of times has been reached. If this limit reaching flag 203qb is ON, it means that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached (the probability variable jackpot has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is OFF, it means that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached. The limit reaching flag 203qb is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203qa is updated to 11, which is the probability variable limit number, at the end of the jackpot (see S3507 in FIG. 352). Also, this limit reaching flag 203qb is set to OFF at the start of the big win (see S10233 in FIG. 347).

Next, referring to FIG. 342, a state transition method in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the 14th embodiment, as described above, there are provided four game states, namely, the normal state and latent probability state that are disadvantageous to the advantageous player, and the time-saving state and variable probability state that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment, two kinds of probability variable states, namely, the probability variable state in which the number of times of time saving is 8 times and the probability variable state which continues until the next jackpot election are provided. Also, as the time saving state, two types of time saving state, ie, a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 8 times and a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 100 times are provided. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the normal state and latent probability state that are disadvantageous to the player are referred to as normal mode A and normal mode B, respectively, the time saving state with a small number of times of time saving (8 times) and the probability variable state are respectively referred to as chance mode A and chance mode B, the time saving state with a large number of times of time saving (100 times) is referred to as a pullback mode, and the probability variable state that continues until the next big win (substantially confirmed state) is referred to as the continuous mode. First, with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in normal mode A will be described.

As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 342, in normal mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big win is won. That is, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and either jackpot A14 or D14 determined at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the continuous mode advantageous to the player. In addition, when one of the big wins B14, C14, E14 and F14 determined at a rate of 83% is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加Further, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either jackpot G14 or H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A.例文帳に追加In this way, when a jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the time saving state of the normal pattern is given at least eight times without fail, so that a shift to the continuous mode can be expected by making the jackpot win again within the number of times of the time saving. Also, when a big win is achieved in the normal mode A, it is mainly (at a high rate of 83%) that one of the big wins B14, C14, E14, F14 is won, and the game shifts to the chance mode B. In other words, in most cases, it is possible to receive the lottery eight times in the high probability state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to strongly expect the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

Next, a mode transition method in normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. 342 . As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 342, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big win is won. Specifically, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either of the big wins A14 or D14 decided at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the continuous mode advantageous to the player. In addition, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached by the big win, the mode after the big win is set to the chance mode A. - 特許庁In addition, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, either of the big wins B14 or E14 determined at a rate of 43% is won, the mode after the big win is finished is set to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加In addition, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached by the big win, the mode after the big win is set to the chance mode A. - 特許庁Further, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either the jackpot G14 or H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win and either of the big wins C14 and F14 determined at a rate of 40% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the normal mode B again. That is, a disadvantageous state is set in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not provided. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached by the big win, the normal mode A is set as the mode after the big win. In other words, even if the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the time saving state is not given. In this way, when a big win is won in the normal mode B, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given only at a rate of 60%, so the normal mode B is more disadvantageous than the normal mode A in terms of the game state after the big win. However, in the normal mode B, the probability of a big win is increased by more than three times, so the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the probability of a big win.

Next, with reference to the central left side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described. As shown on the center left side of FIG. 342, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state not only when a big win is won, but also when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the center left of FIG. 342, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackets A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when the number of time saving passes in the chance mode A (eight consecutive draws of special symbols are lost), the game shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a jackpot during the eight time-saving times.

Next, with reference to the center right side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in chance mode B will be described. As shown on the center left side of FIG. 342, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the central right part of FIG. 342, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackpots A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. It should be noted that when the probability variation limit number of times is reached in the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when the number of time saving passes in chance mode B (lottery for special symbols is lost eight times in a row), the game shifts to normal mode B, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode B as well as in the chance mode A, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a jackpot during the eight time reduction times.

Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in the pullback mode will be described. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, in the pullback mode, like the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when a big win is won or when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackpots A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the time saving number of times has passed in the pullback mode (the lottery of special symbols is lost 100 times in a row), the game shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is again set to the pullback mode (the pullback mode is looped).

Next, with reference to the lower right part of FIG. 342, the mode transition method in the consecutive villa mode will be described. As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 342, in the continuous mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big win is won. Concretely, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 342, when winning a normal jackpot (jackpots G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special patterns, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win, when a probability variable big win (big wins A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% is won, the mode after the big win is again set to the consecutive game mode most advantageous to the player (the consecutive game mode is looped). In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won and the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

Thus, in the 14th embodiment, in order to shift to the continuous mode which is advantageous for the player, basically, it is necessary to shift to the chance modes A and B in which the number of times of time saving is set to 8 times, and then win a jackpot within the range of the number of times of time saving of 8 times, which is relatively small. However, once the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, a very advantageous state is formed in which the continuous mode and the big win are repeated at a high rate of 90%, so that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when shifting to the continuous mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343(a), details of the RAM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 343(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 222 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343(a), the configuration of the RAM 222 in the fourteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 222 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and eleventh embodiment) (see FIG. 274) in that a winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa, a performance type selection table 222qb, a power return operation table 222qc, and a role item operation setting table 222qd are added.

First, with reference to FIG. 344(a), the details of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The winning rate suggesting effect lottery table 222qa is a data table that defines the rate at which the winning rate suggesting effect (see FIG. 333) is determined as the variable pattern effect for each game situation. Here, as described above, the fourteenth embodiment is configured so that the execution probability of the winning rate suggesting effect increases as the situation disadvantageous to the player continues (as the number of times the player cannot shift to the consecutive game mode or the pullback mode increases).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 344(a), a probability of 1/100 is defined as the lottery probability of the winning rate suggesting performance in association with the situation where the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times in which it was not possible to shift to an advantageous state after the big win (through) is 3 times or less. In addition, a probability of 1/90 is defined as a lottery probability of winning rate suggesting performance in association with a situation where the current game state is a normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times in which the game could not be shifted to an advantageous state after a big win (passed through) is 4 times or more and 6 times or less. In addition, when the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the continuous number of times that the game could not be shifted to an advantageous state after the big win (passed through) is 7 times or more and 9 times or less, the probability of 1/80 is defined as the lottery probability of the win rate suggesting performance in association with it. Furthermore, a probability of 1/50 is defined as a lottery probability of a win rate suggesting performance in association with a situation where the current game state is a normal state (normal mode A) and the continuous number of times that the game could not be shifted to an advantageous state after a big win (passed through) is 10 times or more.

On the other hand, when the current game state is the latent probability state (normal mode B), a probability of 1/50 is defined as the lottery probability of the win rate suggesting effect regardless of the number of through times. Thus, in the fourteenth embodiment, the more unfavorable the situation becomes for the player (the more unpleasing the situation continues), the higher the probability of execution of the win rate suggesting effect. By configuring in this way, the more the disadvantageous situation continues, the higher the possibility that the setting is suggested in the win rate suggesting performance, so that even if the disadvantageous situation continues, the motivation for the game can be maintained. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability of execution of the winning probability suggesting effect in the relatively advantageous probability state (normal mode B) is constant regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the latent probability state, the probability of execution of the win rate suggesting effect may be increased as the situation disadvantageous to the player continues. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player's motivation to play when the disadvantageous situation continues.

Next, details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described. This effect type selection table 222qb is a data table that is referred to for determining the mode of effect when execution of the win rate suggesting effect (see FIG. 333) is determined. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, first, referring to FIG. 344(b), the relationship between the jackpot probability and the winning rate within 100 games in the fourteenth embodiment will be explained, and then the details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 344(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state and probability variable state and the winning rate within 100 games for each set value. As shown in FIG. 344(b), in the low-probability state of the special symbols, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is 1/200, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 39.4% (probability of continuously losing 199/200 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 60.6%). Also, setting 2 has a jackpot probability of 1/180, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 42.7% (probability of losing 179/180 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 57.3%). Also, setting 3 has a jackpot probability of 1/160, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 46.6% (probability of losing 159/160 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 53.4%). In addition, setting 4 has a jackpot probability of 1/140, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 51.2% (probability of losing 139/140 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 48.8%). In addition, setting 5 has a jackpot probability of 1/120, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 56.7% (probability of losing 119/120 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 43.3%). Furthermore, setting 6 has a jackpot probability of 1/90, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 67.3% (probability of losing 89/90 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 32.7%).

On the other hand, in the variable probability state of the special symbols, the big win probability of setting 1 is 1/55.6, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 83.7% (probability of losing 54.6/55.6 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 16.3%). Also, setting 2 has a jackpot probability of 1/50, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 86.7% (probability of losing 49/50 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 13.3%). Also, setting 3 has a jackpot probability of 1/44.4, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 89.7% (probability of losing 43.4/44.4 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 10.3%). In addition, setting 4 has a jackpot probability of 1/38.9, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 92.6% (probability of losing 37.9/38.9 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 7.4%). In addition, setting 5 has a jackpot probability of 1/33.3, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 95.2% (probability of losing 32.3/33.3 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 4.8%). Furthermore, setting 6 has a jackpot probability of 1/25, and a winning rate within 100 games is about 98.3% (probability of losing 24/25 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 1.7%).

The winning rate suggestion performance in the 14th embodiment is configured to select a performance mode that does not conflict with the actual winning rate within 100 games calculated from the jackpot probability (the data of the performance type selection table 222qb is defined). As a result, the performance content of the winning rate suggesting performance can be matched with the actual behavior (big win winning rate), so that the player can be prevented from feeling distrustful of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, details of the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect type selection table 222qb. As shown in FIG. 345, in the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment, the value range of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with the effect mode, game state, and set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 1, an odd number setting suggesting effect (an effect mode suggesting a winning rate of 13.5% within 100 games) is associated with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "0 to 84", and an even number setting suggesting effect (an effect mode suggesting a winning rate of 24.6% within 100 games) is defined for the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "85 to 94". is defined in association with the value of the production counter 203f, and the value of the production counter 203f is defined in association with a latent probability suggesting production (a production mode that suggests a winning rate of 30% within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 1, when it is decided to execute the winning rate suggestion effect in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over which suggests setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is performed at a rate of 85%, the even setting suggestion effect (24.6% over which implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is performed at a rate of 10%, and the latent probability suggestion effect (indicating that the possibility of latent probability is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is notified) is executed. In other words, most of them are odd setting suggestions. As described above, the winning rate within 100 games in the normal state of setting 1 is about 39.4%, which is higher than the winning rate notified by the above three effects and does not contradict the actual behavior.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 2, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 9", the odd number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "10 to 91", the even number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "92 to 96", the latent definite suggestive effect is defined in relation to the effect counter 203f. The value of '97 to 99' is defined in association with a latent probability or 2 or higher fixed effect (a effect mode suggesting a winning rate of 40% within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 2, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over which suggests setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is performed at a rate of 10%, the even setting suggestion effect (24.6% over which implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is performed at a rate of 82%, and the latent probability suggestion effect (indicating that the possibility of the latent probability state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is reported) is executed, and a mode in which 40% over, which is higher than 39.4%, which is the jackpot winning rate in the normal state of setting 1, is reported) is executed at a rate of 3%. In other words, most of them are the even number setting suggesting effects, but the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effects are also executed with a low probability. Therefore, when the latent probability or 2 or more definite performance appears under the situation where the player is convinced of the normal state (for example, under the situation where a big addiction occurs between big wins), it is possible to make the player guess that the setting is 2 or more, so that the player can have the pleasure of guessing the setting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 3, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 80", the odd number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "81 to 90", the even number setting suggestive effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "91 to 95", the potential suggestive effect is defined in relation to the effect counter 203. A value of f in the range of ``96 to 98'' is defined in association with a fixed performance of latent probability or 2 or more, and a value of ``99'' of a performance counter 203f is defined in association with a fixed performance of setting 3 or more (performance mode suggesting 45.6% over as winning rate within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 3, when it is decided to execute the winning rate suggesting effect in the normal state, the odd setting suggesting effect (13.5% over which suggests setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 81%, the even setting suggesting effect (24.6% over which implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and the latent probability suggesting effect (indicating that the possibility of latent certainty is high) is executed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which 30% over is reported) is executed, a latent probability or 2 or more fixed performance is performed at a rate of 3% (a mode in which 40% over, which is higher than 39.4%, which is a jackpot winning rate in a normal state of setting 1, is reported), and a set 3 or higher fixed performance (a mode in which 45.6% over implying high setting) is performed at a rate of 1%. In other words, almost all of them are odd number setting suggesting effects, but with a low probability, latent probability or 2 or more finalizing effects and setting 3 or more finalizing effects are also executed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player guess the settings when these presentation modes are executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 4, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 9", the odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "10 to 89", the even number setting suggestion effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "90 to 94", the potential suggestion effect is defined in correspondence, and the effect counter 203f is defined in correspondence. A value of ``95 to 97'' is defined in association with a latent probability or 2 or more fixed performance, a value ``98'' of a performance counter 203f is defined in correspondence with a set 3 or more fixed performance, and a value ``99'' of the performance counter 203f is defined in correspondence with a latent probability or 4 or more fixed performance (performance mode suggesting 50% over as winning rate within 100 games). Therefore, in the case of setting 4, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd setting suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 10%, the even setting suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 80%, the latent probability suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 5%, the latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect is performed at 3%, the set 3 or more fixed effect is performed at 1%, and the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is performed at 1%. A mode in which 50% over, which is higher than .6%, is notified) is executed.In other words, most of the even setting suggestion effects are performed, but with a low probability, a latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect, a setting 3 or more fixed effect, and a latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect are also executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 5, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of ``0 to 77'', the odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of ``78 to 87'', the even number setting suggestion effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of ``88 to 92'', the latent definite suggestion effect is defined in relation to the value of the effect counter 203f. For the value of f in the range of "93 to 95", a fixed effect of latent probability or 2 or more is defined in correspondence, with the value of the effect counter 203f "96, 97", a fixed effect of set 3 or more is defined in correspondence, with the value "98" of the effect counter 203f, a fixed effect of latent probability or 4 or more is defined in correspondence, and to the value of the effect counter 203f "99", fixed effect of set 5 or more (56% o as winning rate within 100 games) ver) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of setting 5, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 78%, the even setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the latent probability suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 5%, the latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect is executed at a 3% ratio, the set 3 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio, the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is executed at a rate of 1%, and the setting 5 or more fixed effect (set) A mode in which 56% over, which implies 5 or 6, is notified) is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and setting 6, odd number setting suggestive effects are defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f from "0 to 9", even number setting suggestive effects are defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f from "10 to 84", and potential suggestive effects are defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 203f from "85 to 89". value is in the range of ``90 to 92'', the value ``93, 94'' of the production counter 203f is associated with a fixed effect of 3 or more, and the value ``95'' of the production counter 203f is associated with a fixed effect of 4 or more. A value of f "98" is defined in association with a latent probability or 6 fixed performance (a performance mode suggesting 60% over as a winning rate within 100 games), and a setting 6 fixed performance (a performance mode suggesting a winning rate of 66.6% over within 100 games) is defined in correspondence with the value "99" of the performance counter 203f. Therefore, in the case of setting 6, when execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 75%, the latent probability suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 5%, the latent probability or 2 or more fixed effect is executed at a 3% ratio, the set 3 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio, the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio, and the set 5 or more fixed effect is executed at a 2% ratio. Then, at a rate of 1%, a latent probability or 6 fixed performance (a mode in which 60% over, which is higher than 56.7%, which is a jackpot winning rate in a normal state of setting 5, is reported) is executed, and at a rate of 1%, a setting 6 fixed performance (a mode in which 66.6% over implying setting 6 is reported) is executed. Therefore, when the setting 6 confirmation performance is executed, or when the latent probability or 6 confirmation performance is executed in a situation where the normal state is certain, the player can be given a great sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 345, in the latent definite state, the selection ratio of each effect mode is common regardless of the setting. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 59", the latent probability suggesting effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "60 to 83", the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is defined in correspondence, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "84 to 88", the latent probability or 4 or more fixed effect is defined in correspondence, and the value of the effect counter 203f is "89". , and the value of the performance counter 203f is ``90 to 99'', the latent probability fixed performance (a mode in which 80% over, which is higher than 67.3%, which is the winning rate of setting 6 in a low probability state, is notified as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined correspondingly. Therefore, in the case of the latent certainty state, the latent certainty suggesting performance is executed at a rate of 60%, the latent certainty or 2 or more fixed performance is executed at a rate of 24%, the latent certainty or 4 or more fixed performance is executed at a 5% rate, the latent certainty or 6 fixed performance is executed at a rate of 1%, and the latent certainty fixed performance is executed at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, by making a configuration in which the distribution of the performance mode of the winning rate suggesting performance is made different according to the game state and the set value, it is possible to realize the game property in which the set value and the game state are estimated from the content of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 346, the details of the power recovery operation table 222qc will be described. This power restoration operation table 222qc is a data table that is referred to when executing the power restoration operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be changed normally when the power is turned on. The power restoration operation is executed each time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed or not). In this power return operation table 222qc, a return operation for each type of role is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223qe. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the action of one of the role items due to the return action, an error command is set (see S9003 in FIG. 357). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location of the occurrence of the abnormality. The display control device 114 that has received this error command displays the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality on the third pattern display device 81 . In this manner, by performing the recovery operation based on power-on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not an abnormality has occurred in each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the clerk of the hall from starting the game without noticing that the accessory of the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (return to origin) before executing the power restoration operation based on the power restoration operation table 222qc. In other words, when the power supply is interrupted while the character is being changed, the system is configured to execute the power return operation after returning to the origin when the power is turned on. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare only one type of power return operation starting from the origin position (there is no need to define different patterns of power return operation according to the arrangement of the accessories when the power is turned on), so the amount of data in the power return operation table 222qc can be reduced.

If the power is cut off while the character is being changed and then the power is turned on again, the reason why the operation of the character is not continued is that the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. That is, once the power supply is shut off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the presentation that has been performed up to that point. Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed or not, when the power is turned on, the origin return operation is executed and then the power return operation is performed.

In this embodiment, the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, but backup power may be supplied so that the information stored in the RAM 223 can be held even after the power is turned off. As a result, when the power is cut off during the performance, the progress of the performance at the time of the power shutdown can be discriminated after the power is turned on, and the performance can be executed from the continuation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 346(a) is a diagram showing an example of the power recovery operation table 222qc. As shown in FIG. 346(a), in the power return operation table 222qc, the operation contents of the role are defined for each value of the return pointer 223qe. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223qe is updated by 1 in the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) each time the main process 14 (see FIG. 355) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation is completed.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured such that the return operation is executed in the order of the leaning accessory 510→the standing accessory 410 according to the update of the return pointer 223qe. In addition, in the return operation, each accessory is configured to be varied from the origin position to the extended position and then returned to the origin position. In other words, the return operation comprehensively operates the entire operation range in which the accessory may change during the normal game. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

Further, the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured such that the operation is stopped for a predetermined period of time (2000 ms) after each accessory is changed to the projecting position. Thereby, it is possible to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs during the operation up to the projecting position and in the operation from the projecting position to the origin position, and also detect whether an abnormality occurs during the stop of the operation. An abnormality during operation stop means, for example, the case where the operation does not stop even though the operation stop is set, the case where the return to the origin position occurs before the predetermined period (2000 ms) specified as the operation stop period elapses, or the case where the operation to return to the origin position does not start even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

Furthermore, the power supply restoration operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period of a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the restoration operation of all the characters is completed. This stop period is provided as a timing for ending confirmation and shutting off the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 normally starts up in a shipping inspection or the like. That is, if the role object immediately moves after the return operation is finished, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 must wait until the operated role object returns to the origin and then cut off the power supply, or cut off the power supply during the operation of the role object and manually return the role object to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by providing an operation suspension period after the return operation is completed, if the power supply is cut off during the operation suspension period, the power supply can be cut off while all the accessories are at the origin position. Therefore, it is not necessary to wait until returning to the origin position or to manually return the accessories to the origin position after the power is turned off, so that inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection can be improved.

In the fourteenth embodiment, if the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change operation from being hindered by the action of each role object, which makes it possible to improve the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In addition, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening and closing shafts. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, so that the opening/closing shaft or the like can be prevented from being damaged. Further, in the 14th embodiment, when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation state is established, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is avoided. This is because the possibility that the status of the pachinko machine 10 will change is low if it is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, after the end of the setting confirmation state, it is possible to quickly return the accessory to a state in which it is normally movable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346(b), details of the role product action setting table 222qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This role product operation setting table 222qd is a data table that defines the type (group) of the role product to be operated in various effects of the pachinko machine 10 and the operation timing. In this embodiment, the action of the role product is set based on this role product action setting table 222qd. FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the role product action setting table 222qd. As shown in FIG. 346, the role product action setting table 222qd defines, for each corresponding effect, the timing at which the role product is to be operated and the group of role products to be operated at the operation timing.

Specifically, in the off super reach performance with the performance time of 30 seconds, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the performance, the tilting accessory 510 moves to the overhanging position and then moves to the origin position, to execute a series of operations. In addition, in the hit normal reach performance with a performance time of 20 seconds, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 19 seconds have elapsed from the start of the performance, a series of operations of moving the standing accessory 410 to the projecting position and then to the origin position are executed. Further, in the hit super reach performance with the performance time of 30 seconds, it is specified that a series of operations of moving the tilting accessory 510 to the projecting position and then to the origin position are executed at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the performance. In addition, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 29 seconds have elapsed from the start of the presentation, the standing accessory 410 moves to the projecting position and then moves to the origin position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the action timing of the role and the group of the role to be operated are specified in the role product action setting table 222qd, various actions of the role can be realized simply by executing the action predetermined for each group based on the role product action setting table 222qd.

Further, in the present embodiment, the action of the character is not performed in all the variable effects, but the action of the character is set only in a part of the variable effects with a relatively long change time. A variation performance with a relatively long variation time has a low probability of being selected as a performance for notifying a failure and is likely to be selected as a performance for notifying a big win, so that a player can have a high expectation for a big win at the stage when the accessory moves in the variation performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the accessory moves, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the character is operated only in some variation pattern effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the character is moved in other effects such as the opening effect of the big win, the ending effect, and the round effect. Further, the types of variable effects for moving the character may be increased, and for example, the character may be configured to operate even in the case of a lost normal reach or the like. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effects, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343(b), details of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 343(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 302) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the twelfth embodiment) described above. The difference is that a flag 223qg and a return standby flag 223qh are added. Also, the interruption flag 223m, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the preparation state flag 223fd, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, the super RUSH flag 223fi, and the continuous off effect counter 223na, The difference is that the is deleted. These deletions are mainly intended to eliminate flags and counters for managing various effects that are not executed in the fourteenth embodiment.

The secondary set value storage area 223qa is a storage area for storing data indicating the set values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the secondary set value storage area 223qa, when data indicating a set value set in the setting change state is notified as a set value command from main controller 110, data corresponding to the set value notified by the command is stored (see S14204 in FIG. 358).

The through number counter 223qb is a counter for counting the number of consecutive times (through number) that the transition to an advantageous game state has not been possible. When setting the effect mode of the variable pattern effect, the number of slew times indicated by the value of the slew time counter 223qb and the specified contents of the winning rate suggesting effect lottery table 222qa are referred to determine the lottery probability of execution of the winning probability suggesting effect (see S18215 in FIG. 363).

The initialization flag 223qc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the return operation of the role object is executed based on power-on. While the initialization flag 223qc is on, an initial action process (see FIG. 357) for setting the return action of the character is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223qc is off, it indicates that the return action of the character has already ended, so the initial action process (see FIG. 357) is skipped (see S8901: No in FIG. 356). This initialization flag 223qc is set to ON in the origin return processing (see S4021) of the start-up processing 14 (see FIG. 353) (see S8807 in FIG. 354). On the other hand, when it is determined in the initial operation process that the return operation of the character has ended (that is, when the END information is read from the power return operation table 222qc), it is set to OFF (see S9104 in FIG. 357).

The on-time operation flag 223qd is a flag indicating whether or not the return to origin of the role object executed before the power return operation has been completed. If this input operation flag 223qd is ON, it indicates that the return to origin of the role object has been completed, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. This closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON when it is determined that the return-to-origin operation has ended (see S9008 in FIG. 357). In addition, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the on-time operation flag 223qd is also cleared (that is, turned off).

The return pointer 223qe is used to select the operation data of the character from the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346(a)) that defines the operation contents of the return operation of the character executed based on power-on. More specifically, each time the initial action process (see FIG. 357) executed at intervals of 1 ms is executed, the return pointer 223qe is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223qe), and the action of the character indicated by the updated value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223qe is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is turned off. Therefore, every time the power is turned on, it is possible to execute the return action of the role object from the beginning of the power return action table 222qc.

The role product operation flag 223qf is a flag indicating whether or not each role product is being changed. The role product operation flag 223qf is composed of 2 bytes, and each bit is associated with each role product. If each bit of the role product operation flag 223qf is 1, it indicates that the corresponding role product is variable, and if it is 0, it indicates that the corresponding role product is stopped. Also, the value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. Based on the state of each bit of the role product action flag 223qf, the type of role product being operated can be identified.

The return delay flag 223qg is a flag for indicating that the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the role object is delayed until the setting confirmation state is completed due to the setting confirmation state being set at the time of power return.

The return standby flag 223qh is a flag for indicating that the setting confirmation state set at the time of power return is ended and the return operation of the role object (origin return operation, power return operation) can be started.

<Regarding main control processing in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 352. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 347, the details of the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 14 (S181) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Of the special symbol variation processing 14 (S181), S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222 and S10225 are the same as S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222 and S10225 of the special symbol variation processing 13 (Fig. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment. is executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the 14th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S10231). When it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S10231: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10231, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S10231: No), the process proceeds to S10201.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, the processing order of each processing of S10202 to S10206 regarding the lottery of the first special symbol and each processing of S10208 to S10211 regarding the lottery of the second special symbol is changed. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the processing of S10206 or S10211, instead of the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 319), the special symbol variation start process 14 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10232), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the process of S10219 is completed, the limit reach flag 203gb is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S10220. Further, in the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S10222, the process proceeds to the process of S10225 as it is. This is because, in the fourteenth embodiment, there is no loss as a special symbol lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the above-described special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) will be described. This special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Of this special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232), in each process of S321, S323 to S326 and S330 to S334, the same process as each process of S321, S323 to S326 and S330 to S334 of the special symbol variation start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, in the special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, after executing the process of S321, whether or not the probability variation flag 203fa is on, that is, whether the current probability variation state is determined (S341), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to on (S341: Yes), the first per random From the formula 14 table 202pa (see FIG. 335(a)), the winning random value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S342), and the process proceeds to S344. On the other hand, in the process of S341, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S341: No), the first per random number 14 table 202pa for low probability (see FIG. 335 (a)), the per random value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S343), and the process proceeds to S344.

In the process of S344, the lottery result is obtained based on the winning random number value read in the process of S342 or S343 and the data of the execution area (S344), and the process proceeds to the process of S323.

The processing of these S3341 to S344 is a change due to having a probability changing function in the 14th embodiment, whereas the above-described 13th embodiment did not have a probability changing function.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, details of the set value control process 14 (S1731) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This set value control process 14 (S1731) is a process executed in place of the set value control process (FIG. 291, S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and is a process for executing control in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

Of this set value control process 14 (S1731), the processes of S3101 to S3113 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control process (FIG. 291, S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment.

In the set value control process 14 (S1731) of the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key is in the off position (S3108: Yes), a set value command indicating the data in the set value storage area 203ma is set (S3121), and this process ends. By executing the process of S3121, it is possible to immediately notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the setting value when the setting change state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, details of main processing 14 of main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This main process 14 (see FIG. 350) is a process executed in place of the main process 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

In the main processing 14, S1801-S1803 and S1806-1816 are the same as S1801-S1803 and S1806-1816 of the main processing 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment.

In addition, in the main processing 14 (see FIG. 350) in the 14th embodiment, after executing the processing of S1803, instead of the jackpot control processing 13 (see FIG. 323) in the 13th embodiment, the jackpot control processing 14 is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1806. Details of this jackpot control process 14 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG.

Of this jackpot control process 14 (S1851), S1901-S1912 and 1918 processes are the same as S1901-S1912 and 1918 of the jackpot control process 13 (FIG. 322, S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351, in the jackpot control processing 14 (S1851) in the 14th embodiment, in the processing of S1912, when it is determined that the current time is the timing of the jackpot end (S1912: Yes), the jackpot end processing 14 for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S11911), and this processing ends. Details of this jackpot ending process 14 (S11911) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 352, in the jackpot ending process 14 (S11911), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is a variable probability jackpot (S3501). In the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the variable probability jackpot (that is, the normal jackpot) (S3501: No), the value of the limit counter 203ga is set to 0 (S3502), the variable probability flag 203fa is set off (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3508.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S3501: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203ga (S3504), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition has reached 11 (S3505). In the process of S3505, if it is determined that the value of the limit counter after addition has reached 11 (S3505: Yes), the limit reach flag 203gb is set to ON (S3507), and after executing the processes of S3502 and S3503, the process proceeds to S3508. On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203ga after addition is not 11 (S3505: No), the variable probability flag 203fa is set to ON (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

In the process of S3508, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203mb, and the state of the limit reaching flag is read from the time reduction grant table 202qf (see FIG. 341) (S3508), and the read number of time reductions is set to the counter value of the time reduction counter 203h (S3509). Next, a time saving setting state command for notifying the set number of times of time saving is set (S3510), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S3511), and a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203mb, and the state of the limit reaching flag is specified (S3512). Then, the data indicating the scenario identified in the process of S3512 is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area (S3513), the end of the jackpot is set (S3514), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end processing 14 (see FIG. 352), the game state after the jackpot ends can be accurately set in consideration of the probability variable limit number of times.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 to 363. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 353, the details of start-up processing 14 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This start-up process 14 is a process that is executed instead of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

In the processes of S4001 to S4011 of the startup process 14, the same processes as the processes of S4001 to S4011 of the startup process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

Further, in the startup process 14 in the 14th embodiment, when the process of S4001 is finished, next, the placement of each character when the power is turned on is determined, and if there is a character that is displaced from the origin, origin return processing is executed to return it to the origin position (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4002. Details of this origin return processing (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 354, in the return-to-origin process (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not a state command indicating a setting change state has been received (S8801). In the processing of S8801, if it is determined that the state command indicating the setting change state has been received (S8801: Yes), the return delay flag 223qg is set to ON in order to delay the start of the origin return operation of the character and the power return operation (S8802), and this processing ends. As a result, the return operation of the role can be delayed until the setting change state is terminated, so that the role can be prevented from operating in the setting change state, making it difficult to perform the setting change operation. In addition, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening and closing shafts. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, so that the opening/closing shaft or the like can be prevented from being damaged.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8801 that the status command indicating the setting change status has not been received (S8801: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803). If it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803: Yes), the initialization flag 223qc and the ON operation flag 223qd are set to OFF (S8804), and this processing ends. That is, it is set so as not to perform (avoid) the return operation of the role object (origin return operation, power supply return operation). This is because, in many cases, the setting confirmation state is a state shifted by the operation of an operator (for example, a store clerk in a hall, etc.) while the pachinko machine 10 is operating without any problem in the playable state, so the possibility of occurrence of an abnormality in the accessory is extremely low. By avoiding the return operation of the accessory in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to shorten the time from the end of the setting confirmation state to the state in which the game including the operation of the accessory can be played as usual.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8803 that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has not been received (S8803: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory shifted from the origin (S8805). In the process of S8805, if it is determined that there is a role product that is displaced from the origin (S8805: Yes), the action in the direction of the origin position is set for the role product that is displaced from the origin (S8806), and the process proceeds to S8807. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory that deviates from the origin (S8805: No), the process of S8806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8807. In the process of S8807, the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8807), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the details of the main processing 14 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the main processing 14, S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are the same as S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 of the main processing (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively.

In addition, in the main processing 14 in the fourteenth embodiment, after the processing of S4111 is completed, next, role product control processing for controlling actions of various role products is executed (S4141). Details of this role product control process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the processing of S4141 is completed, command determination processing 14 is then executed (S4142). The details of this command determination process 14 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the process of S4142, the variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4143), and the process proceeds to the process of S4114. The details of this variable display setting process 14 (S4143) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, the contents of the accessory control process (S4141), which is one process in the main process 14 (FIG. 355), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 356, in the role product control process (S4141) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223qc is ON (S8901). In the process of S8901, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223qc is ON (S8901: Yes), the initial action process for setting the return action (initial action) of the role object is executed (S8902), and this process ends. The details of this initial operation process (S8902) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8901 that the initialization flag 223qc is off (S8901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory whose operation is to be stopped (S8903). If it is determined that there is a role product whose action is to be stopped (S8903: Yes), the action stop of the relevant role product is set, the corresponding bit of the role product action flag 223qf is set to 0 (S8904), and the process proceeds to S8905. On the other hand, in the process of S8903, when it is determined that there is no accessory to be stopped (S8903: No), the process of S8904 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8905.

In the process of S8905, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory to start moving (S8905). In the processing of S8905, when it is determined that there is a role product to start the action (S8905: Yes), the operation start is set, the corresponding bit of the role product action flag 223qf is set to 1 (S8906), and the process proceeds to S8907. On the other hand, in the process of S8905, if it is determined that there is no accessory to start the action (S8905: No), the process of S8906 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8907.

In the process of S8907, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag 223qh is ON (S8907). If it is determined that the return standby flag 223qh is ON (S8907: Yes), it means that the return operation of the role object is delayed and the delay has been canceled (the return operation is executable), so the return standby flag 223qh is set to OFF (8908), and the process proceeds to S8909. If it is determined that the return standby flag is off (S8907: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S8909, it is determined whether or not there is any accessory that is shifted from the origin (S8909). If it is determined that there is a role product that is displaced from the origin (S8909: Yes), the action in the direction of the origin position is set for the role product that is displaced from the origin (S8910), the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8911), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory that deviates from the origin (S8909: No), the process of S8910 is skipped, the process of S8911 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the details of the initial operation process (S8902), which is one process in the role product control process (FIG. 356, S4141), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 357, in the initial action process (S8902) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal action of the role object is detected (S9001). In the processing of S9001, if it is determined that an abnormal operation has been detected (S9001: Yes), a notification operation corresponding to the accessory that has detected an abnormality is set (S9002), an error command is set (S9003), and the process proceeds to S9004. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9001 that no abnormal operation has been detected (S9001: No), the processes of S9002 and S9003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9004.

In the process of S9004, it is determined whether or not the operation flag 223qd at input is ON (S9004). If it is determined that the action flag 223qd at the time of entry is off (S9004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005). In the process of S9005, if it is determined that there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9005 that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: No), the number of drive steps for all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S9006), the operation stop period of 1 second is set (S9007), the input operation flag 223qd is set to ON (S9008), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9004 that the ON operation flag 223qd is ON (S9004: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the operation stop period (one second) has elapsed (S9009). If it is determined that the operation suspension period has not elapsed (S9009: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that the operation suspension period has elapsed (S9009: Yes), the return pointer 223qe is updated (S9010), the data specified by the return pointer 223qe is read from the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346, (a)) (S9011), and then it is determined whether or not the END information has been read (S9012). In the processing of S9012, if it is determined that the END information has been read (S9012: Yes), this means that the power recovery operation has ended, so the initialization flag 223qc and the operation flag 223qd at power-on are set to OFF (S9014), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9012, if it is determined that the data read from the power return operation table 222qc is not the END information (S9012: No), the operation of the character corresponding to the read data is set (S9013), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358, the details of the command determination process 14 (S4142) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 14 (S4142) is a process executed instead of the command determination process 11 (FIG. 293, S4131) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

In the command determination process 14 (S4142), the processes of S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242 are performed in the command determination process 11 (FIGS. 293 and S4131) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment), respectively. ), S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235 and S4242 are executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 358, in the command determination process 14 (S4142) in the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4231 that a state command has been received (S4231: Yes), instead of the state command reception process 11 (see FIG. 294) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment), the state command reception process 14 is executed (S14201), and this process ends. The details of this status command reception process 14 (S14201) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360. FIG.

In addition, in the processing of S4218, when it is determined that a winning-related command has been received (S4218: Yes), a jackpot-related processing 14 for executing control according to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S14202), and this processing ends. The details of this jackpot related process 14 (S14202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4218 that the win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the set value command has been received (S14203). If it is determined that the setting value command has been received (S14203: Yes), the secondary setting value storage area 223qa is updated according to the setting value indicated by the command (S14204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14203 that the setting value command has not been received (S14203: No), the process proceeds to S4220.

Next, referring to FIG. 359, the contents of the status command reception process 14 (S14201), which is one process in the command determination process 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described. This status command reception process 14 (S14201) is a process executed in place of the status command reception process 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

In the state command reception processing 14 (S14201), the processing of S4509 and S4511 to S4514 are the same as the processing of S4509 and S4511 to S4514 of the state command reception processing 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) of the thirteenth embodiment.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 359, in the state command reception processing 14 (S14201) in the 14th embodiment, if the received command is not a command that indicates the setting confirmation status (S4513: NO), it will respond according to the type of command received in the state where normal play is possible. Execute the normal state setting processing (S4521) to execute the control (S4521) and migrate to the S4509 process. Details of this normal state setting process (S4521) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the normal state setting process (S4521), first, it is determined whether or not the return delay flag 203qg is ON (S9101). If it is determined that the return delay flag 203g is ON (S9102: Yes), it means that a state command indicating a normal gaming state has been notified in the setting confirmation state, meaning that the setting confirmation state has ended and the return operation is possible. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9101 that the return delay flag 203qg is off (S9101: No), then it is determined whether the received command indicates either the normal state or the latent state (S9103). In the process of S9103, if it is determined that the received command indicates either the normal state or the latent state (S9103: Yes), the value of the through number counter 223qb is updated by adding 1 (S9104), and the process proceeds to S9105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9103 that the received command is not a command indicating the normal state or the latent state (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9105.

In the process of S9105, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (S9105). In the processing of S9105, if it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S9105: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S9106), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9105, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S9105: No), the process of S9106 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the contents of the jackpot related process 14 (S14202), which is one process in the command determination process 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described. This jackpot related process 14 (S14202) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process (FIG. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and first embodiment) described above.

Of this jackpot related processing 14 (S14202), in each of S4901, S4902, and S4913 to S4916, the same processing as each of S4901, S4902, and S4913 to S4916 of jackpot related processing (FIG. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and first embodiment) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot related processing 14 (S14202) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start command is not received in the processing of S4901 (S4901: No), the processing of S4913 is performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot related process 14 (see FIG. 361) in the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the hit is during the time saving state of normal symbols (S4921). When it is determined that it is not hit during the time saving state of normal symbols (S4921: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, when it is determined that the winning is during the time saving state of the normal symbol (S4921: Yes), the value of the through number counter 223qb is reset to 0 (S4922), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot-related process 14 (see FIG. 361), the number of slews can be reset when shifting to the continuous mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp how long the disadvantageous situation continues for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 362, details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 14 (S4143) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

In the variable display setting process 14 (S4143), the processes of S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287 are the same as the processes of S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287 of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 362, in the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) in the 14th embodiment, after executing the process of S5282, instead of the effect mode setting process 13 (see FIG. 327) in the thirteenth embodiment, the effect mode setting process 14 is executed (S5291), and the process proceeds to the process of S5284. Details of the rendering mode setting process 14 (S5291) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the processes of S8207 and S8208 of the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291), the same processes as the processes of S8207 and S8208 of the effect mode setting process 13 (FIG. 326, S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 363, in the presentation mode setting process 14 (S5291) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern for suggesting setting has been notified (S18211). When it is determined that the setting suggestion variation pattern has been notified (S18211: Yes), the setting suggestion rendering mode corresponding to the type of variation pattern is determined (S18212), and the process proceeds to S8208. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the even-number suggestive super reach is notified, setting of a form in which reach occurs (triple reach occurs) in the third symbols with three numbers ``2'', ``4'', and ``6'' respectively. When the suggested production is set and the fluctuation pattern of setting 1 negative super reach is notified, the setting suggested production in which reach occurs (double reach occurs) in the third symbols with two numbers "2" and "6" is set, and when the fluctuation pattern of high setting fixed super reach is notified, the setting suggestion production in which reach occurs (triple reach occurs) in the third symbols with three numbers "4", "5" and "6". When it is set and the variation pattern of the setting 6 fixed super reach is notified, the setting suggesting effect is set in which the reach is generated in the third symbol to which the number "6" is attached. Thus, when ready-to-win occurs, the set value suggested by the setting suggesting performance can be easily grasped only by confirming the number attached to the ready-to-win pattern, so that a performance mode easy for the player to understand can be realized.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the reach is generated by a variation pattern other than the setting suggestion, the third pattern other than the third pattern with the numbers "1" to "6" used for setting suggestion (the third pattern with the numbers "7" to "9") is configured to generate the reach. As a result, it is possible to easily understand whether or not it is a variation pattern for suggesting setting, simply by confirming the number attached to the pattern in which the reach has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S18211 that the variation pattern for suggesting setting has not been notified (S18211: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a failure (S18213). If it is determined that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: Yes), then it is determined whether the current state is the normal state or the latent certainty state (S18214). In the process of S18214, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214: Yes), whether or not execution of the state suggesting effect is executed is determined by lottery probability corresponding to the value of the through number counter 223qb (S18215), and it is determined whether or not the lottery for whether or not execution is won (S18216). In the process of S18216, when it is determined that the lottery for execution possibility is won (S18216: Yes), the effect type selection table 222qb (see FIG. 345) is referred to determine the effect mode corresponding to the set value and the value of the effect counter 223f (S18217), and the process proceeds to S8208.

On the other hand, in the processing of S18213, if it is determined that the current variation is not a variation pattern corresponding to a failure (S18213: No), in the processing of S18214, if it is determined that the current state is neither the normal state nor the latent state (S18214: No), and in the processing of S18216, if it is determined that the lottery for whether or not to execute the state suggesting effect is not won (S18216: No), the processing of S8207 to

By executing this performance mode setting process 14 (see FIG. 363), when a variation pattern for setting suggestion is notified from the main controller 110, it is possible to execute a performance suggesting a set value corresponding to the variation type, and even when the variation pattern for setting suggestion is not notified, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance can be increased as the situation disadvantageous to the player continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable display effect that can suggest the setting to the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is configured so that the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern are executed based on the same random number value. Then, a special failure variation pattern is selected as a failure variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that is a win for some set values and a failure for some set values. In other words, it is possible to guess (narrow down) the set value when an outlier variation pattern that is selected only for some set values is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of variation pattern that is executed at the time of loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type drawn by the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to analyze the variation pattern command output each time the special symbol lottery is executed and execute the variation pattern performance according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, on the audio ramp control device 113 side, it is only necessary to define the correspondence relationship between the variation type and the performance mode of the variation pattern performance, and it is not necessary to grasp the setting values themselves (that is, the main control device 110 does not need to notify the audio ramp control device 113 of the setting values).

Further, in the 14th embodiment, the more unfavorable the situation is for the player, the higher the execution rate of the specific effect (win rate suggesting effect) that can suggest the setting. In other words, the execution ratio of winning rate suggesting performance increases as the number of times (as the number of through times increases) that the transition to an advantageous game state (probability variable state continuing until the next big win or time saving state with 100 times of time saving) continues after the end of the big win. As a result, the player can be made to start a game in the pachinko machine 10 where the disadvantageous situation has continued for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change operation from being hindered by the action of each role object, so that the convenience at the time of setting change operation can be improved. In addition, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening and closing shafts. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, so that the opening/closing shaft or the like can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, in the 14th embodiment, when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation state is established, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is avoided. This is because the possibility that the status of the pachinko machine 10 will change is low if it is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, after the end of the setting confirmation state, it is possible to quickly return the accessory to a state in which it is normally movable.

In the 14th embodiment, the higher the number of continuous times (the number of slew times) of failing to shift to either the advantageous consecutive mode or the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot, the higher the probability that the winning rate suggesting performance is executed in the normal state, and as a result, the higher the possibility of suggesting the set value, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the more consecutive normal jackpots are won, the higher the execution probability of the winning rate suggesting performance when the state shifts to the normal state after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining even when winning a disadvantageous normal jackpot.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability of execution of winning rate suggestion performance in the normal state increases as the number of continuous times (the number of slew times) of failing to shift to either the advantageous consecutive mode or the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the above-described twelfth embodiment, it may be configured such that the winning rate suggesting effect is more likely to be executed as the first special symbol lottery continues to be lost in the advantageous continuous mode B (latent probability state). Further, for example, it may be configured so that winning rate suggesting performance is likely to occur to the extent that a disadvantageous situation occurs such that a small winning variation of an advantageous second special pattern is lost due to a small winning of the first special pattern in which prize balls are hardly obtained in the continuous mode B, and the pattern is forcibly stopped. By configuring in this way, the player's stress can be reduced when a disadvantageous situation occurs. Further, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 of a type that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to shift (fall) to a low probability state of special symbols each time a lottery of special symbols is executed in the variable probability state, the smaller the number of times of lottery of special symbols from setting to the variable probability state to winning of the falling lottery, the easier it is to suggest the set value by the winning rate suggesting performance. By constructing in this way, even if the number of lotteries is small and the player falls into a low probability state of a disadvantageous special symbol, the player's disappointment can be reduced.

In the 14th embodiment, the distribution of the big hit judgment value (random number) is changed according to the setting, and when some of the set values are out and some of the set values are big hits, a special variation pattern is determined, so that the set value can be suggested by the special variation pattern. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern selection table in which different data are simply defined according to settings is referred to, and a variation pattern that is easily selected with some set values or a variation pattern that is only selected with some set values may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set the big win determination value as a discrete value, so it is possible to reduce the effort of the developer when setting the big win determination value.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting key 110b is on and the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the return operation of the character is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, it may be configured to unconditionally execute the return operation of the role object. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period of time from the end of the setting change state to the transition to a state in which a normal game including accessories can be played.

In the 14th embodiment, only the big win probability in the special pattern high probability state and the special pattern low probability state is changed according to the setting, but the object that can be changed according to the setting is not limited to this. It is only necessary that the player's degree of advantage differs according to the set value, and for example, the higher the set value, the greater the variable probability limit number of times. By constructing in this way, when shifting to the consecutive game mode, the higher the set value, the more times the consecutive game mode is easily looped, so that the player can be strongly desired to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 with a higher set value. Therefore, the game can be played while paying more attention to the content of the setting suggesting effect and the win rate suggesting effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, when the setting change state is established when the power is turned on (that is, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10), the start of the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the role is delayed until the setting change state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the setting change state ends, while at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open, the start of the returning action of the character may be delayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the accessories from operating in a state where the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, and the loading of the opening/closing shaft of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 different from that during a normal game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hinges 18, 19, etc. from being damaged as a result of a larger load than usual.

In the 14th embodiment, when the power is turned on in the setting change state, the start of the return operation of the role object is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Some or all of the accessories may be executed upon power-on without delaying the return operation. In this case, the accessory to start the return operation immediately after power-on regardless of whether it is in the setting change state may be set so as not to interfere with the setting change operation and to keep the amount of movement of the center of gravity position based on the accessory operation within a predetermined amount (for example, 5 cm) when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, they are supported only by the opening and closing shafts, so if the accessories whose center of gravity position can be greatly deviated (heavy weight accessories, fast moving accessories, long moving distance accessories, etc.), there is a possibility that an excessive load will be applied to the opening and closing shafts. Therefore, only the return operation of the character having almost no effect on the center of gravity of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 due to movement is started immediately after the power is turned on, so that the opening and closing shafts of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be prevented from being damaged.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the third symbol for notifying the big win is selected without any restrictions. In other words, even if the ready-to-win occurs in the third pattern to which ``6'' is added, if three identical third patterns are arranged and a big win is reported, it is also determined that the set 6 fixed super ready-to-win which is a kind of loss variation is determined, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a reach occurs in a third pattern with numbers "1" to "6" attached (that is, when a reach occurs in a third pattern that can be selected in a setting suggestion variation pattern), the setting may be suggested by the number attached to the third pattern in which the reach has occurred regardless of whether it is a hit or not (a setting is suggested regardless of whether or not the same third patterns are complete). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling overjoyed when a big win is notified despite the thought that a good setting has been suggested.

<Modified Example of Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 368, a modification of the fourteenth embodiment described above will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment described above, when reach occurs in the third pattern display device 81, the type of the variation pattern is suggested to the player by the number attached to the pattern in which the reach occurs. More specifically, reach occurs at the same time in the third pattern with three numbers "2", "4", and "6", suggesting that there is a high possibility of setting an even number. , it suggests that there is no possibility of setting 1, and the third symbol with three numbers "4", "5", and "6" simultaneously causes reach, which suggests that it is a high setting (any of settings 4 to 6).

In addition to this, in this modified example, various examples of effects suggesting that there is a possibility that the setting suggesting effect may occur depending on the effect mode before the ready-to-win occurs will be described.

First, FIG. 368(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the ready-to-win symbol selection effect is executed to allow the player to select the type of the to-win symbol. This ready-to-win pattern selection performance is a performance that may be executed in a predetermined period (for example, 5 to 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) before the timing at which ready-to-win occurs (for example, 11 seconds after the start of fluctuation). As shown in FIG. 368(a), when the ready-to-win pattern suggesting effect is executed, a display area simulating a balloon is formed in the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and the characters "Push to select the ready-to-win symbol!!" are displayed inside the display area. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, there is formed in the center a display area in which the characters "Choose!" are displayed in a substantially oblong rectangular shape, three third patterns with numbers "4", "5" and "6" are displayed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, a third pattern with the number "6" is displayed on the lower right side, and a display area with the number "7" is formed on the upper left side. A display area in which patterns are displayed is formed, and three third patterns with numbers "2", "4", and "6" are displayed on the lower left side. During the execution of this ready-to-win pattern selection performance, one of four display regions displaying different combinations of third patterns is set to have a lighted (emission) appearance, and the remaining display regions are set to have an extinguished appearance. The third symbol shown in the display area set to look lit when the player presses the frame button (PUSH button) 22 is set as the ready-to-win symbol in the variable display effect. As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of selecting ready-to-win symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, when the ready-to-win in the third pattern to which the number '6' is attached is selected and the ready-to-win is lost, setting 6 fixed super ready-to-win is decided, so that the player can be pleased even if he wins or loses. In other words, when options in the ready-to-win pattern selection performance include a combination of symbols such as high setting suggesting super reach, setting 6 fixed super reach, etc., in which a setting comparatively advantageous to the player is fixed in case of deviation, the player desiring high setting can be made to expect that the variable display will be lost after selecting the pattern combination for setting suggesting. Conversely, a player who expects a big win can play a game in anticipation of being notified of a big win. In this way, by executing the ready-to-win pattern selection performance, the ready-to-win patterns to be selected and the results of the expected variable display can be changed according to whether the player desires high setting or the player desires a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the case of a player who desires a high setting, especially when the degree of expectation of a notice (for example, a so-called pending notice performance, a comment notice performance, etc.) for the change is low (in the case of content corresponding to a low possibility of a big win), the expectation that the high setting is suggested can be enhanced at the time when the option (display area) of the combination corresponding to the suggestion of the high setting is displayed in the ready-to-win pattern selection performance. In other words, when the ready-to-win pattern selection performance is executed in consideration of other performances, it is possible to realize a game property that makes it more likely that the setting is suggested (missed) or that a big win is reported, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 368(b), the ready-to-win symbol prefetch effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 368(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the ready-to-win symbol look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 368(b), when the ready-to-win symbol look-ahead effect is executed, the characters "there are six ready-to-win games in the hold" are displayed in the small area Ds3. In other words, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the ready-to-win effect of the effect mode in which the ready-to-win is generated with the "6" symbol is executed in the variable display based on any of the held balls. So also in this case. A player who desires a high setting can be expected to come off if a reach occurs with the symbol "6". In addition, when a notice effect of changing the display mode of a part of reserved symbols (so-called reserve notice effect) is generated, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is possible to strongly expect that the "6" symbol will not reach the ready-to-win with the reserved balls that cause the reserved predictive effect (that is, the reserved balls that are highly expected to hit the jackpot compared to the reserved balls whose display mode is not changed). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the ready-to-win pattern look-ahead performance, a pattern for notifying other third patterns for suggesting setting is provided, and a mode for notifying other patterns (for example, a "7" pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) is also provided. As a result, when the ready-to-win pattern pre-reading performance is executed, it is possible to realize the game property of estimating the degree of expectation for a big win, the degree of expectation for setting suggestion, etc. from the type of the notified pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the setting values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In this case, by delaying or avoiding the return operation of the character in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting value displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from being hidden behind the character by the movement of the character, so that the operation of the character in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be controlled more preferably.

In the 14th embodiment, the start of the return operation of the character is suppressed (delayed) during the setting change state, but the return operation may be started even in the setting change state. In this case, in most cases, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened in the setting change state, and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated by the pachinko machine 10 by the staff in the hall, so that it is difficult to confirm the return operation of the character. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the action of the role during the setting change state, the abnormality may be notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the abnormality occurs in the action of the role in a state other than the setting change state (a mode in which the user can easily notice even if the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is focused). By configuring in this way, when a part or all of the accessory is abnormal, it is possible to easily make the hall clerk notice the abnormality.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 to 367. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments described above, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is constantly updated in the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the time of starting winning is determined to match the winning random number. In addition, the jackpot lottery is executed using a first winning random number table in which a different winning random number value is associated with each set value.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, a random number generation IC 900 capable of generating a winning random number (first winning random number counter R1) is provided separately from the main controller 110, and the random number generated by this random number generating IC 900 (count value of the first winning random number counter R1) is acquired at the time of starting winning and used for the big winning lottery. The random number generating IC 900 is configured to be capable of designating a random number update range, and by setting a different random number update range according to a set value, it is configured to be able to vary the jackpot lottery probability using a common hit determination value. For example, if the random number update range of the second setting is halved with respect to the random number update range of the first setting, the probability denominator of the big win probability in the second setting becomes half of that in the first setting, so that the big win probability in the second setting can be made half of the big win probability in the first setting. With this configuration, on the side of the main controller 110, a random number update range corresponding to the set value is simply set for the random number generation IC when setting is changed, and when executing the lottery for the special symbol, it is only necessary to compare the common winning random value with the counter value of the first winning random number counter R1 acquired from the random number generation IC. That is, in the main controller 110, there is no need to store different hit determination values for each set value, and only one common hit determination value that does not depend on the setting can be stored, so that the processing load at the time of lottery for the special pattern can be reduced by the amount that can eliminate the process of selecting the hit determination value according to the set value. Also, the capacity of the first hit random number table can be reduced.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 364, the electrical configuration of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 364 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 364, in the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above, a random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. The random number generation IC 900 is used to generate a winning random number (first winning random number counter R1) obtained based on the start winning. That is, instead of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, the counter value (random number) used for the big winning lottery (judgment) executed by the main control device 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. The random number generation IC 900 can randomly generate a maximum 16-bit (0 to 65535) value as the value of the first hit random number counter R1. This random number generation IC 900 is configured, for example, internally with a clock generation circuit capable of generating a clock frequency of 250 kHz, and every time a clock signal is generated by this clock generation circuit, it can randomly generate a random number value (the value of the first random number counter R1) within a random number update range set in synchronization with this clock signal. That is, since random values can be randomly generated every 0.004 milliseconds, random values can be generated at intervals shorter than the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the random number value is not updated over a plurality of times of timer interrupt processing, so that randomness in the jackpot lottery can be ensured.

In the fifteenth embodiment, only the first winning random number counter R1 is generated by the random number generating IC 900, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the second hit random number counter C4, and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2, etc., for some or all of the various counter values, generated by the random number generation IC900 It may be replaced with a random value. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268(a)) only in that a first winning random number 15 table 202ra is provided instead of the first winning random number 11 table 202ma, and a random number range setting table 202rb that defines the random number update range of the random number generation IC 900 for each set value is added.

First, with reference to FIG. 365(a), details of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 365(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 365(a), the first winning random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment defines "0 to 204" as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and "0 to 643" as the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol. That is, only the setting 1 jackpot determination value (see FIG. 269(a)) in the eleventh embodiment is defined. In the fifteenth embodiment, instead of sharing the random value (hit determination value) specified in the first random number 15 table 202ra, the range of the random value generated by the random number generation IC 900 is varied according to the setting, thereby making the jackpot probability for each setting the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

Next, details of the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 365(b). The random number range setting table 202rb is a data table referred to when setting the random number generation range (random number update range) according to the set value for the random number generation IC 900 . At the end of the setting change state, the random number range setting table 220rb is referenced to identify the random number generation range corresponding to the set value, and the identified random number generation range is set to the random number generation IC 900. By making the random number generation range different, the probability denominator in the big win lottery can be made different for each setting, so that the big win probability can be made substantially different according to the setting.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), in the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment, "0 to 65535" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 1, "0 to 61499" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 2, "0 to 57399" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 3, and "0 to 57399" is defined in correspondence as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 4. , “0 to 53299” are associated and defined, “0 to 49199” is associated and defined as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 5, and “0 to 45099” is associated and defined as the random number generation range corresponding to setting 6.

Therefore, in setting 1, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 65536 values of "0 to 65535", so the jackpot probability of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 1 is 1/320 (205/65536) and 1/101.8 (644/65536), respectively. Also, in setting 2, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 61500 values "0 to 61499", so the jackpot probability of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 2 is 1/300 (205/61500) and 1/95.5 (644/61500), respectively. Also, in setting 3, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 57400 values "0 to 57399", so the jackpot probabilities of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 3 are 1/280 (205/57400) and 1/89.1 (644/57400), respectively. Also, in setting 4, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 53300 values "0 to 53299", so the jackpot probabilities of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 4 are 1/260 (205/53300) and 1/82.8 (644/53300), respectively. Also, in setting 5, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 49200 values "0 to 49199", so the jackpot probabilities of the special symbol low probability state and high probability state in setting 5 are 1/240 (205/49200) and 1/76.4 (644/49200), respectively. Also, in setting 6, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 45100 values "0 to 45099", so the special symbol low probability state and high probability state jackpot probability in setting 6 are 1/220 (205/45100) and 1/70 (644/45100), respectively.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of common hit determination values that does not depend on the set values is defined for the first hit random number 15 table 202ra, and the random number generation IC 900 varies the range for generating random values according to the set values, thereby varying the jackpot probability for each setting. By configuring in this way, the data amount of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and when executing the big winning lottery, the process of reading out the big winning determination value corresponding to the set value is unnecessary, so that the processing load at the time of the big winning lottery can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 366, details of the starting winning process 15 (S1751) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This starting winning process 15 (S1751) is a process executed instead of the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and is a process for acquiring various random values (counter values) based on the starting winning.

Of the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, the processes of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 are the same as the processes of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 of the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). executed.

In addition, in the starting winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1755 is completed, next, the value of the first winning random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC900 (S1771), the values of the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are acquired, and these acquired counter values (random numbers) are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da (S17). 72), and the process proceeds to S1757.

In addition, in the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1762 is completed, next, the value of the first winning random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC900 (S1773), the values of the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are acquired, and these acquired counter values (random numbers) are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db (S17). 74), and the process proceeds to S1764.

By executing this starting winning process 15 (see FIG. 366), the value of the first winning random number counter R1 randomly generated by the random number generating IC 900 can be obtained each time a starting winning is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 367, details of the set value control process 15 (S1741) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This setting value control process 15 (S1741) is executed in place of the setting value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process for performing control in the setting change state and setting confirmation state.

In this set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), the processes of S3101 to S3113 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment.

Further, in the set value control processing 15 (see FIG. 367) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S3108 that the setting key 110b is placed at the off position, the random number generation range corresponding to the set value is read from the random number range setting table 202rb (see FIG. 365(b)), the read random number generation range is set in the random number generation IC 900 (S3131), and this processing ends.

By executing this set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), it is possible to set the random number generation range according to the set value, so that the probability denominator is changed according to the set value, and as a result, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is configured so that the counter value (random number) used for the big win lottery (judgment) executed by the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of common hit determination values that does not depend on the set value is defined for the first random number 15 table 202ra in which the determination value determined as the big win in the special symbol lottery is defined, and the random number generation IC 900 varies the range of generating the random number according to the set value, thereby varying the jackpot probability for each setting. By configuring in this way, the data amount of the first winning random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and when executing the big winning lottery, the process of reading out the big winning determination value corresponding to the set value is unnecessary, so that the processing load at the time of the big winning lottery can be reduced.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a 2-time right product or a 3-time right product) in which the expected value of a big win is increased until a big win state occurs a plurality of times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the big win once. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a variable-probability state) can be set to any one of a plurality of steps (for example, 6 steps). Instead of or in addition to the combinations of the jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is achieved according to settings may be implemented. That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big win may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the big win is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) a disadvantageous game state (such as a normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In the setting 6, when a big win is achieved, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of setting 6, which is the most advantageous, is extremely high, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In place of or in addition to these, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot games during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot type can be easily determined (decided rate increases) with specific settings. In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probabilities of big wins in accordance with the setting, in the low-probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the variable probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is disadvantageous to the player. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of game machine in which the number of winning balls tends to increase as the number of times of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of awarded balls tends to increase more than the number of fired game balls) in the variable probability state. More specifically, for example, the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won, and by applying it to a game machine of a type where the variable probability state gives a small win with a high probability, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

The slot machine is a well-known machine in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid pattern line, and the pattern is changed by operating an operation lever, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to provide a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitely displays the identification information, and the variability display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., an operation lever), and the variability display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (e.g., stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of stop is a specific combination. In this case, typical examples of game media are coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, there is provided a display device for confirming and displaying a pattern after variably displaying a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns, and not having a handle for hitting a ball. In this case, after putting the specified ball based on the prescribed operation (button operation), the pattern fluctuates due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, the design is stopped due to a predetermined time. A special game is generated as a requirement of a hidden pattern, which gives a prescribed gaming value to the player, and a large amount of balls are paid to the lower plate for the players. If such a game machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game values in the game hall, so that problems such as a burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game values seen in current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist can be resolved, and restrictions on the installation locations of the game machines.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (The timing of updating the number of times of time saving and the timing of determining the end of time saving are different)
Any one of a plurality of game states including at least a determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting a game state, comprising update means capable of updating first information relating to the determination by the determination means, and end determination means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the update means satisfies an end condition, wherein the game state setting means sets the second game state when the end determination means determines that the end condition is satisfied while the first game state is set; The game machine A1 is characterized in that the timing of updating the first information by the updating means is different from the end determination timing of determining whether the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a game machine configured to be able to set a plurality of game states, and configured to set an advantageous state in which a game ball is likely to enter a starting hole when a specific game state is set until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting that the first game state will be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Furthermore, in the above-described game machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of lotteries reaches a specific number, are configured to be executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in an advantageous state and the end processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed when the lottery result is stopped and displayed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a game for executing a privilege game can be duplicated (overlapped game is possible), and depending on the game result of one game, the other game. There is a game machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation period for indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be performed in an overlapping manner, it is possible to efficiently perform the game aiming at the execution of the privilege game. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted according to the game result of one of the games, it is possible to suppress the privilege game from being redundantly executed by a plurality of games to be executed in duplicate, and the privilege game being difficult for the player to understand.

However, when the configuration capable of setting the above-described advantageous state is used in a gaming machine capable of executing duplicate games, the counting (subtraction) processing of the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the end processing of the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the state is set, there is a problem that the counting (subtracting) process of the number of lotteries is executed when the interrupted subtraction of the variable time is resumed and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the number of lotteries is counted (subtracted) in the advantageous state based on the stationary display of the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state, so there is a problem that the player cannot preferably execute the game in the advantageous state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by allowing the player to preferably execute the game in the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A1, the update of the first information by the update means and the determination of the end by the end determination means can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the termination condition is satisfied by updating the first information, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing executed at the same timing, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the update timing is the timing at which the determination is executed by the determination means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, since the update timing of the first information related to the discrimination of the discriminating means is set to the timing of executing discrimination by the discriminating means, there is an effect that the first information corresponding to the discriminated contents can be reliably updated. Further, since the first information can be updated by the updating means by executing the discrimination by the discriminating means, the players can be interested in both the discrimination by the discriminating means and the game state to be set, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the first information is updated by the updating means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of update processing and to reduce the processing load.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, since the determination of the end condition is executed during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, it is possible to suppress the change of the game state while the player watches the dynamic display of the identification information in order to grasp the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine A3, the determination means executes determination corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means, and the end determination timing is a period from when the identification information is stop-displayed to when the determination is next performed by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to suppress execution of discrimination by the discriminating means before the second game state is set, even though the updating means updates the first information to the first information that can satisfy the end condition. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information and the end determination timing are made different, there is an effect that the determination performed by the determination means can be properly performed.

A gaming machine A5 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated by the updating means based on the number of times of the determination performed by the determining means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated each time the discrimination means executes discrimination, so that the update status of the first information can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game state suddenly shifts to the second game state and the player is confused.

In the game machine A5, the updating means updates the first information during a period from execution of the determination by the determination means to execution of dynamic display for indicating the determination result of the determination.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the first information is not updated while the identification information is dynamically displayed, so there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine A7 is characterized in that, in the game machines A1 to A6, the game machine A7 comprises a suspending means for suspending the dynamic display when a suspension condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a restarting means for resuming the dynamic display suspended by the suspending means when a resume condition is satisfied, and an information changing means capable of varying the first information updated by the updating means when the dynamic display is suspended by the suspending means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing means. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can be entertained not only by the discrimination result of the discriminating means but also by the presence or absence of an interruption, which has the effect of enhancing the amusement of the game.

In the game machine A7, the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can play the game while anticipating that the dynamic display will be interrupted by the interruption means.

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game even when a second condition different from the first condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means is satisfied, and the interruption condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7 or A8, when the second condition for executing the privilege game is established without using the discrimination by the discrimination means, the interruption condition can be established, so that the game different from the discrimination by the discrimination means can be provided to the player, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the gaming machine A9 has a ball-entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball-entering means.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, a game in which a game ball is entered into the ball-entering means can be performed as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A10 has a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a variable control means capable of executing a variable operation of changing the variable member to the first state for a predetermined period based on the establishment of an execution condition, wherein the variable control means performs the variable operation when the first game state is set rather than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is easy to execute

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the period during which the first game state, in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second game state, continues can be varied based on the establishment of the second condition, so that the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second condition.

<Characteristic group B> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which the prize is given to the winning ball is changed)
A gaming machine comprising: variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first state; variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on establishment of an execution condition; a specific region through which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means can pass; a setting information determining means capable of determining setting information when the variable ball entering means is variably controlled by the variable control means; and a switching means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area and a second state in which the game ball enters the variable ball entering means more difficultly than the first state, according to the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when a winning lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period has passed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a game machine in which, as a starting port, a variable ball-entering means having a variable member attached to the starting port that is variable between a first state that permits the entry of a game ball and a second state that restricts the entry of a game ball is provided, and the variable ball-entering means is configured to be able to set an advantageous state in which it is easy to change to the first state and a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to change to the first state from the first game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, by varying the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball-entering means, the player can be motivated to play while anticipating that an advantageous state will be set. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's willingness to play by making it difficult to execute a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a variable ball entry means in the above-described game machine in a state in which a disadvantageous state is set.

According to the game machine B1, since the first state and the second state can be switched according to the setting information, the player can be interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 includes operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, wherein the switching means is capable of switching between the plurality of flow paths so that a game ball entering the variable ball entering means flows down any one of a plurality of flow paths including a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, the operation control means starts operation control of the switching means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and the switching means causes the first flow path. A game machine B2 characterized in that a game ball flowing down the channel can pass through the specific area.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation control means controls the operation of the switching means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and when the game ball that enters the variable ball entering means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, it can pass through the specific area. As a result, the variable control for facilitating entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering means and the operation control of the switching means can be interlocked, so that it is possible to appropriately control whether or not the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the specific area.

In the game machine B2, the game ball flowing down to the second flow path by the switching means is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the game ball flowing down to the first flow path.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, since it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path, it is possible to set the passing ratio of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means to the specific area only by controlling the operation of the switching means by the operation control means.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the game machine B2 or B3 has a normal area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can pass, wherein the normal area is formed so as to pass game balls that have not passed through the specific area among the game balls entering the variable ball entering means, and the privilege imparting means does not impart the privilege when the game ball passes through the normal area.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, when the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the normal area, the privilege is not given. Therefore, even if game balls enter the variable ball entry means excessively, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an excessive privilege. Further, by providing the normal area in the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege even without providing a mechanism for suppressing the entry of the game ball into the variable ball-entering means outside the variable ball-entering means, so that the area outside the variable ball-entering means can be easily used for other purposes.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the gaming machine has a distribution means capable of distributing a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to a third flow path different from the second flow path and a fourth flow path different from the second flow path and the third flow path, and the game machine has, as the specific area, a first specific area into which the game ball distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter, and a game ball distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means. The game machine B5 has at least a second specified area different from the first specified area where a ball can be entered, and the privilege imparting means is characterized in that the awarding contents of the privilege differ between when the game ball enters the first specified area and when the game ball enters the second specified area.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means passes through the first specific area when distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, and passes through the second specific flow path when distributed to the fourth flow path. As a result, when a game ball enters the variable ball entering means, it is possible to vary the easiness of granting the privilege by the privilege imparting means and to vary the contents of the privilege imparted by the sorting means according to the establishment of the set condition. Therefore, since whether or not a privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined in stages, there is an effect that the period during which the player can enjoy the game can be lengthened compared to the case where the presence or absence of the privilege and the content of the privilege are determined at once. Also, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating the flow condition of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flow condition of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is preferable to use a function of reporting information indicating that the setting condition is established. As a result, the player can grasp that some kind of privilege is likely to be awarded by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means before entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means, so that the player can play the game with expectations.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines B1 to B5 has a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the switching means is easier to switch to the first state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means than when the second game state is set.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the easiness of switching to the first state can be changed according to the set game state, so that the player can be interested in the currently set game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means can variably control the variable ball-entering means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern, and the switching means can switch at least to the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball-entering means with the first variable pattern.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can be made more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means when the second variable pattern is set by the variable control means than when the variable control means is variably controlled with the first variable pattern. Then, the switching means can be switched to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege giving means executes a specific game based on the entry of a game ball into the specific area, and the gaming machine has a privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game when the result of the specific game executed by the privilege giving means is a predetermined result.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B7, when the result of the specific game executed when the game ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the privilege game is executed, so there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game for passing the game ball through the specific area.

<Characteristic group C> (In a gaming machine that can overlap and execute multiple games, setting the mode of production for the other game according to the fluctuation time of one game)
A gaming machine comprising: determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on selection information; The game machine C1 is characterized by having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game during a period when identification information is dynamically displayed, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance related to the specific game, and a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means based on at least information corresponding to the selection information.

In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be redundantly executable (overlapping game is possible), and a game result is shown for each of the games that are redundantly executed. In such a game, when a plurality of games are executed in duplicate, each game can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by seeing each performance display to be executed in duplicate, but since the performance mode of the performance display to be executed is determined only based on the contents of the corresponding game, and it is impossible to execute the performance associated with the plurality of games to be executed in duplicate, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the whole of the redundantly executed games from the performance display being executed, and the performance effect is lowered. To provide a game machine capable of increasing the performance effect and allowing a player to enthusiastically play a game by executing a performance that makes it easy to grasp the contents of a plurality of games to be executed in duplicate in the above game machine.

According to the game machine C1, since the performance mode of the specific performance can be determined based on the selection information, the dynamic display of the identification information executed redundantly and the performance associated with the specific game can be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the performance mode of the specific performance can be determined based on the selection information, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various performance modes.

The game machine C2 is characterized in that the game machine C1 has remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means.

According to the game machine C2, since the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the remaining period of the identification information in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the performance mode of the specific performance can be varied according to the determination timing of the determination means and the execution timing of the specific game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various presentation modes.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that the game machine C2 comprises: when an interruption condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display; and a restart means for restarting the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means based on the end of the privilege game, wherein the interruption condition is satisfied when the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means becomes a predetermined game result.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, not only the effect to be executed, but also in the actual game, the determination by the determination means and the specific game can be associated with each other, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C3 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed, the game state setting means sets the first game state when a specific period of time has passed since the second game state was set, and the restart means restarts the suspended dynamic display when the second game state is set after the privilege game is finished. The game machine C4 is characterized in that the dynamic display is resumed during the second game state, the specific period is variable according to the remaining period of the identification information resumed by the restarting means, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed is set varies according to the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. Then, it is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the effect mode of the specific effect is interrupted by the interrupting means. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be grasped by the effect mode of the specific effect, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the game machine C5 has a remaining period determining means capable of determining a remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and an advantageous condition determining means determining whether the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means satisfies an advantageous condition, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition by the advantageous condition determination means, and the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the determination result, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the specific performance to be executed is in an advantageous state for the player.

In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information during the dynamic display is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, so that the player can be motivated to play the specific game based on the specific performance to be executed.

The gaming machine C4 or C5 has a ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, an acquisition means that acquires acquired information when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and a storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of acquired information acquired by the acquiring means, and the determination means executes determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and stores the acquired information stored in the storage means as the acquired information. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it has a preliminary determination means capable of prior determination before the determination based on the information is executed by the determination means, the preliminary determination means determines in advance a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means based on at least the acquired information, and the advantageous condition determination means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period determined by the preliminary determination means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquired information determined by the determination means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage means is pre-determined. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the dynamic display being executed is longer than the pre-determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be played while predicting the interruption timing of the dynamic display that is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determining means determines whether or not the advantageous condition is satisfied with respect to the determination result of the preliminary determining means corresponding to the acquired information next determined by the determining means among the obtained information stored in the storing means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since an advantageous condition is established when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information whose determination is next performed by the determination means, the player can determine whether to interrupt the dynamic display being executed or to interrupt the dynamic display to be executed next based on the specific performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to select a game, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the game state setting means sets the first game state when a period until the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times at least two times in a state in which the first game state is set as the specific period, and has a period calculation means capable of calculating the specific period, wherein the period calculation means calculates the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The game machine C8 is characterized in that the specific period is calculated by adding up the specific number of times to the upper limit, and that the game machine C8 has a period mode display means capable of displaying the period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by the period calculation means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the game situation in the second game state can be grasped based on the effect mode of the specific effect while grasping the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to various effects that are executed, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group D> (Different conditions for ending the winning game according to the operation of the operating means)
In a gaming machine having a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when a first condition is satisfied, the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is performed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. and a second termination condition that is satisfied when the period during which the variable ball-entering means is varied to the first state elapses the predetermined period of time. Ending means for terminating the game when one of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied; The game machine D1 is characterized in that it facilitates establishment of the end condition.

In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a privilege game that allows the game ball to enter the attacker (specific prize winning slot) is executed, and multiple conditions are set for terminating the privilege game. 5518). In such a game machine, generally, a time end condition for ending the privilege game based on the elapsed time after the privilege game is executed and a winning end condition for ending the privilege game based on the number of game balls entered by an attacker during the privilege game are set, and control for terminating the privilege game is executed when either end condition is satisfied.

However, since the same game is played every time during the privilege game, even if a plurality of end conditions are set, basically only one of the end conditions is more likely to be satisfied. In other words, in a game machine constructed so as to make it easy for an attacker to win a game ball during a privilege game, the winning end condition is likely to be established before the time end condition is established, and in a game machine constituted so as to make it difficult for an attacker to win a game ball during the privilege game, the time end condition is likely to be established before the winning end condition is established.

Thus, even if a plurality of termination conditions of the privilege game are set, if most of the termination conditions that can be met are specific termination conditions, the advantage of setting the plurality of termination conditions, that is, it is difficult to obtain the effect of making the player interested in the game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand which termination condition the privilege game ends based on which termination condition is met. To provide a game machine in which a player can enthusiastically play a game during a privilege game by suppressing bias toward a specific termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the privilege game.

According to the game machine D1, it is possible to change the end condition for ending the specific game being executed according to the operation contents executed by the operation means, so that there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The game machine D2 is characterized in that the game machine D1 has a selection effect execution means capable of executing a selection effect for allowing the player to select whether to execute the first operation or the second operation with respect to the operation means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selection performance executed by the selection performance execution means, so that there is an effect that a game easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that the game machine D2 has a performance mode setting means capable of setting a performance mode of the selected performance to be executed by the selected performance execution means, and the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode differently when a privilege to be given after the specific game is completed is different between when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the selection effect can be changed according to the privilege given after the specific game ends, the player will pay attention to the selection effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In a gaming machine D3, determining means for executing determination when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means for a predetermined period of time; privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stop-displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific determination result; and a period discriminating means capable of discriminating the period of the game machine D4, wherein the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode of the selected performance based on the timing at which the specific game is executed and the discrimination result of the period discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the performance mode of the selection performance is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing of execution of the privilege game, the game can be played while predicting which end condition for the specified game being executed can shorten the period from the end of the specified game to the execution of the privilege game based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D4 has a second variable ball-entering means that can be changed between a third state in which a game ball can enter and a fourth state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the third state, wherein the privilege game executing means changes the second variable ball-entering means to the third state and the fourth state according to a predetermined variable pattern for a predetermined period of time as the privilege game, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege type and a second variable entering means. a second privilege type in which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state during the privilege game longer than the first privilege type; and a type setting means for setting one privilege type among a plurality of privilege types including at least a second privilege type, wherein the performance mode setting means makes the performance mode different between when the type of the privilege game that can be executed at the end timing of the specific game is the first privilege type and when it is the second privilege type based on the start timing of the specific game. A game machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game can be executed at the end timing of the specific game, the performance mode of the selection performance is set according to the type of the privilege game, so that the player can play the game while predicting which end condition is established for the specific game being executed to end the specific game in a situation advantageous to the player based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D5 is characterized by comprising situation determining means for determining whether the end timing of the specific game is a first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means or a second situation in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means, and the presentation mode setting means changes the presentation mode between the first situation and the second situation.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the performance mode of the selection performance can be changed depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of the identification information or during the execution of the privilege game, so that the game can be played while predicting which end condition to satisfy for the specific game being executed will allow the specific game to end in a situation advantageous to the player based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The game machine D7 is characterized in that the gaming machine D6 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period of the dynamic display at the end timing of the specific game when the situation determining means determines that the first situation exists, and the effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period determining means, and sets a different effect mode from when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, the performance mode of the selection performance is set differently according to the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing at which the specific game can be terminated, so that the game can be played while predicting which end condition to satisfy the specific game being executed will shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game based on the selection performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines D4 to D7, the game machine D8 is characterized by comprising a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is established, an interrupting means for interrupting the dynamic display when the specific game is started in a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a restarting means for restarting the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means when the specific game ends.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic display can be interrupted while the specific game is being executed, the length of the period during which the dynamic display is interrupted can be varied by changing the end conditions for ending the specific game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

The game machine D9 is characterized in that the game machine D8 has a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and the special game execution means can execute the special game even when the game ball passes through the specific area.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of the game machine D8, the privilege game can be executed even when the game ball entering the variable ball entry means passes through the specific area, so that the player can be provided with the pleasure of choosing whether to perform the game to satisfy the second end condition or the game to satisfy the first end condition for the specific game, and the effect of improving the interest of the game.

A game machine D8 or D9, wherein the game machine D8 or D9 has game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed as game states, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times in a state in which the second game state is set. 0.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, interrupting the dynamic display during the second game state is effective in lengthening the duration of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether to perform the game for establishing the second end condition or the game for establishing the first end condition with respect to the specific game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

<Feature group E> (Navigation display of the target location of the winning game)
variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; discrimination means for executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means; The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and further comprising a display control means for displaying a display image showing the variable ball entry means on the display means when the privilege game is executed.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the game is successful, and when the lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a game in which a ball-entering means into which a game ball is normally difficult to enter is released as a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting hole and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, the position of shooting the game ball to the player is varied depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting hole or the privilege game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

However, when the privilege game is executed, if the game aimed at the starting hole is continuously executed, the ball cannot be entered into the ball-entering means during the privilege game, and there is a possibility that the player loses.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, there are some devices that are densely arranged within a limited game area (devices that change from a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to a state in which it is easy to enter a ball according to the content of the game). Such a gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for a player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and the player may play an inappropriate game, resulting in a loss for the player. It is an object of the gaming machine described above to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine E1, since the display image showing the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner where the game ball should be shot when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine E1, the display control means displays the display image on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed until the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state, so that when the game ball is shot after seeing the display image, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E3 has privilege game type selection means capable of selecting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and display mode setting means capable of setting a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and the display mode setting means can set a different display mode according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection means. .

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be changed based on the type of big win, so that the privilege game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner and the game contents of the privilege game can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E4 in the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege games with different values according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selecting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, privilege games with different values are executed according to the privilege game type, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the display mode setting means variably sets the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means by the display control means based on the detection of the ball entry by the ball entry detection means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means by the ball entry detection means, the display mode of the display image can be changed, so that the progress of the privilege game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A game machine E6 characterized in that any one of the game machines E1 to E5 has operation means operable by a player and operation discrimination means capable of discriminating the contents of an operation executed with respect to the operation means, and the display mode setting means variably sets the display mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the player can change the display mode of the display image by operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the game machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the display image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation of the operating means. As a result, a player who does not need to display the display image when the privilege game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed in the display means can be used for another performance display. Therefore, there is an effect that a display suitable for the player can be executed.

A game machine E8 in the game machine E6 or E7, wherein the display mode setting means can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation of the operation means, so there is an effect that the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means can be visually recognized by the player.

<Feature F group> (Switching the time saving end timing according to conditions)
any one of a plurality of game states including at least a determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time; a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information indicating the determination result; a first game state; and a second game state different from the first game state. A gaming machine having game state setting means capable of setting a game state, updating means capable of updating predetermined information, and end determining means capable of determining whether the predetermined information updated by the updating means satisfies an end condition, wherein the second game state can be set when the end determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, and switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determining means based on the establishment of a switching condition. Gaming machine F1.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when a winning lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period has passed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine which is configured to be able to set a plurality of game states, and when a specific game state is set, sets an advantageous state in which a game ball is likely to enter a starting hole until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described game machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the end processing for the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of lotteries reaches a specific number, are configured to be executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in an advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, so there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (the stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a game for executing a privilege game can be duplicated (overlapped game is possible), and according to the game result of one game, the other game. There is a game machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the variable period for indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be performed in an overlapping manner, a game aimed at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted according to the game result of one of the games, it is possible to suppress the execution of privilege games that are difficult for the player to understand due to the overlapping execution of the privilege games due to the plurality of games that are executed in duplicate.

However, when the configuration capable of setting the above-described advantageous state is used in a gaming machine capable of executing duplicate games, the processing for measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the termination processing for the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of lotteries reaching a specific number, are executed at the timing when the lottery results are stopped and displayed. When the state is set, there is a problem that the counting (subtracting) process of the number of lotteries is executed when the interrupted subtraction of the variable time is resumed and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the number of times of lotteries is measured (subtracted) in the advantageous state based on the stationary display of the result of the lottery executed in the state other than the advantageous state, so there is a problem that the player cannot preferably execute the game in the advantageous state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by allowing a player to preferably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the game machine F1, since the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the first game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the updating means can update, as the predetermined information, first information based on at least the number of times the determination is executed by the determining means, and the switching condition can be satisfied when the first information updated by the updating means satisfies the termination condition.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means satisfies the termination condition, the switching condition can be established, so that the player who executed the discrimination by the discrimination means can play the game while being excited about whether or not the first game state will end as many times as the number of times the discrimination means satisfies the termination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, second determination means for executing a second determination when a second determination condition is satisfied; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the result of the second determination by the second determination means for a predetermined period; , wherein the switching condition can be satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination result.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the switching condition can be established based on the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means different from the discrimination means, so that it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the switching condition is established when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed until the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays the execution timing of the end condition determination means for a specific period, and the determination means executes the determination corresponding to the first game state as the determination performed during the specific period.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the determination of the determination means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determination means is delayed by the switching means can be executed as determination during the first game state, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has a game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, the game state display means being capable of displaying a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode as a display mode for indicating that the first game state is set, and the second display mode is the switching means switching the execution timing of the end condition determination means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being displayed when

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the second display mode displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means can be displayed as the display mode showing the state in which the first game state is set, so that the player can be notified of the current game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature G Group> (Variable navigation display of the target device of the winning game according to the progress of the game)
A gaming machine having a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a first privilege game execution means capable of executing a first privilege game in which the first variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when a first execution condition is satisfied, in a third state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball in a higher state than in the third state. a second variable ball-entering means capable of varying between a fourth state in which it is difficult to enter a ball, a second privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that changes the second variable ball-entering means from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period when the game result of the first privilege game executed by the first privilege game executing means is a predetermined game result, and displaying a first display image showing the first variable ball-entering means on a display means when the first privilege game is executed, The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising display control means for displaying a second display image showing the second variable ball entry means on the display means when the second privilege game is executed.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the game is successful, and when the lottery result is stop-displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is a win, a game in which a ball-entering means into which a game ball is normally difficult to enter is released as a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting hole and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, the position of shooting the game ball to the player is varied depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting hole or the privilege game, so that the player can be provided with a game that does not get bored.

However, when the privilege game is executed, if the game aimed at the starting hole is continuously executed, the ball cannot be entered into the ball-entering means during the privilege game, and there is a possibility that the player loses.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, there are some devices that are densely arranged within a limited game area (devices that change from a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter to a state in which it is easy to enter a ball according to the content of the game). Such a gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for a player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and the player may play an inappropriate game, resulting in a loss for the player. It is an object of the gaming machine described above to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine G1, since the display image showing the variable ball entry means corresponding to the privilege game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner where the game ball should be shot when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine G1, the display control means causes the display means to display the first display image in a period from when the first execution condition is satisfied until the first variable ball entering means is changed to the first state.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entering means is changed to the first state, so that when the game ball is shot after seeing the display image, the game ball can be entered into the first variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the second display image when the first privilege game execution means is executing the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, at least a part of the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game to be executed next is displayed during the execution of the first privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game method after the end of the first privilege game can be grasped in advance, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the game machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2 or G3, at least a part of the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means corresponding to the already executed first privilege game is displayed during execution of the second privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the content of the privilege game executed in the past, and the game can be easily understood by the player.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the display control means sequentially displays the first display image and the second image before the first privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the first execution condition.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is established, the flow of a plurality of privilege games to be executed in the future can be notified to the player, so that the player can grasp the series of game methods in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

<Characteristic group H> (execution of games that are unlikely to become games that are likely to result in a number of holdings that can be executed with an advantageous game)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means until a determination condition for the information is satisfied; determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied; A game machine H1 characterized by having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating that the game machine is more likely to execute an advantageous game advantageous to a player when the number of information stored in the storage means satisfies a prescribed condition than when the prescribed condition is not met.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a game machine that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole, there is a configuration that allows a predetermined upper limit to be reserved and stored for the lottery right for executing the lottery for winning or losing the game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since a game with the same degree of advantage is executed regardless of the number of reserved and stored lottery rights, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which enhances the enjoyment of games in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine H1, the ease with which an advantageous game can be executed can be varied according to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of information stored in the storage means, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is capable of executing a first game in which the number of information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which the predetermined condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first game.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can more easily satisfy the predetermined condition in the first game than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game makes it easier to reduce the number of the information than the second game when the number of the information stored in the storage means is larger than the specific number.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, when the number of information is larger than the specific number, the number of information can be easily reduced when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed, so the number of information can be easily reduced to the specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who is playing the game with the number of pieces of information larger than the specific number can play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is smaller than the specific number, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of the information than the second game.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2 or H3, when the number of information is less than a specific number, the number of information can be increased more easily than when the second game is executed when the first game is executed, so the number of information can be easily increased to the specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who is playing the game with the number of pieces of information smaller than the specific number can play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H4, when a first condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped until a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information elapses, the first game can forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means, and the second game is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means than the first game. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is difficult to play.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H2 to H4, the forced stop means can forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Accordingly, the dynamic display of the identification information can be terminated without waiting for the dynamic display of the identification information being executed for a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the determination means to perform the next determination, so that the efficiency of the game can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine H6 is characterized in that the game machine H5 comprises a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the determination condition when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, and the first condition can be satisfied at least when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the first condition can be easily established when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved by providing a novel game property of executing the second discrimination by the second discriminating means in order to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

<Characteristic group I> (Provide a variable display in which the number of times of reduced working hours is updated during a short period of time and a variable display that is not updated)
One game state is set from a plurality of game states including a determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is established, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. possible game state setting means, the game machine has update means capable of updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed in the state where the second game state is set, and restriction means for restricting updating of the first information by the update means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the time-saving game ends when the number of lotteries executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the player easily predicts the remaining period of the time-saving game, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which enhances the enjoyment of games in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the state where the second game state is set, the update of the first information can be restricted by the restricting means when the first condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I1, the game state setting means sets the first game state when a termination condition based on the first information is satisfied while the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, by restricting the updating of the first information by the restricting means, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the end condition of the second game state is established, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the determining means executes determination that is more advantageous to the player when the determination is performed when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the second game state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the number of times of dynamic display executed during the period in which the second game state is set increases, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine I3, the updating means can update, as the first information, the number of dynamic display times of the identification information executed in the state where the second gaming state is set.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machine I3, the update means updates the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information as the first information, so that the second game state is terminated based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information executed in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated even though the identification information is dynamically displayed according to the established condition, so that there is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I4, the game machine I5 is characterized by comprising forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information elapses when a special condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and wherein the first condition can be satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means, the first condition is established, and the limit means limits the update of the first information by the update means. As a result, updating of the first information by the dynamic display of the identification information which cannot be dynamically displayed normally can be suppressed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the second game state is terminated while the identification information cannot be dynamically displayed normally in the state where the second game state is set.

In the game machine I5, the forced stop means forcibly stops the game with identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result regardless of the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the identification information.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the specific game is not executed when the identification information is forcibly stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the second game state is terminated while the identification information cannot be normally dynamically displayed in the state where the second game state is set.

The game machine I6 has a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the determination when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is established, the specific game execution means executes the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result. A game machine I7 characterized in that it can be established in

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of the game machine I6, a special condition is established when the second determination result of the second determination means that the specific game can be executed is a predetermined second determination result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the forced stop means. Thus, when the second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means for executing the specified game, even if the result of the second discrimination comes before the result of the specified second discrimination, the dynamic display of the specific identification information is forcibly stopped and the updating of the first information can be suppressed.

The gaming machine I7 has game type determination means for determining one specific game type from among a plurality of specific game types including a first specific game type and a second specific game type capable of executing a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, and the game type determination means determines the specific second determination result by the second determination means, the specific determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine I8 characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type than in the case of .

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machine I7, the second discrimination means is more likely to produce a discrimination result more advantageous to the player than the discrimination means, so the player can be actively made to perform the second discrimination. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect of the limiting means can be further enhanced.

In the game machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I7 or I8, it is easier to execute the second judgment by the second judgment means when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set, so that the player can positively execute the second judgment in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect of the limiting means can be further enhanced.

<Feature J group> (When the condition for stopping the variable display being executed is satisfied, the content of the stop control is switched based on the content of the variable display being executed.)
A gaming machine comprising: determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means; and specific game execution means for executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a specific control means capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode according to a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means when a switching condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a game machine capable of simultaneously varying a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when one lottery wins, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded. In this case, the result of the other lottery is forcibly discarded regardless of the contents of the result of the other lottery. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game. The above-mentioned conventional problem describes a problem in a gaming machine (a so-called simultaneous variation machine) that executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (parallel). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that

According to the game machine J1, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode in accordance with the conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information being executed when the switching condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed. Thereby, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust when the dynamic display mode is switched, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the specific control means switches to one of the plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means when executing the specific control.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, when the specific control is executed, the specific dynamic display mode can be changed according to the conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to determine the specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult for the player to understand when the specific control is executed for the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the game machine J3 comprises a second determining means for executing a second determination different from the above determination when a second determination condition different from the above determining condition is established, and the switching condition can be established when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a predetermined second determination result.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a predetermined second determination result, the switching condition is satisfied and the specific control is executed. Therefore, the control contents of the specific control are associated with both the result of discrimination by the discrimination means and the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J3, the specific game execution means can execute the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result.

According to the game machine J4, since the specific game can be executed even based on the second discrimination by the second discrimination means, the player can be motivated to perform both the discrimination by the discrimination means and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency with which the specific control is executed can be increased.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines at least the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is more likely to be satisfied when the dynamic display period is longer than when the dynamic display period is short.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the longer the dynamic display period is, the more easily the switching condition is established, so that the player can be interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the effect of improving the amusement of the game is obtained.

A game J6 characterized in that any one of the game machines J1 to J5 has a residual period determining means capable of determining a residual dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the switching condition is different in easiness of establishment according to the length of the residual dynamic display period determined by the residual period determining means.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J5, since the easiness of establishment of the switching condition can be changed according to the length of the residual dynamic display period, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the residual dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Characteristics K group> (The number of specific symbols displayed based on the result of prefetching is increased or decreased without synchronizing with the number of pending)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the information acquisition means until at least a determination condition for the information is satisfied; determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when the specific game is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a result, in which, before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is performed, a preliminary determination means for performing preliminary determination based on the information; a specific pattern display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means; A game machine K1, characterized by comprising: symbol number variable display means capable of variable display regardless of the number of symbols.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, when a game ball enters a start hole, it is proposed that a predetermined number of lottery rights for executing a game success or failure lottery can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number, the number of the retained and stored lottery rights is displayed by a pattern, and the display mode of the symbol is changed based on the predetermination result of preliminarily discriminating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved and stored lottery right (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-223613). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the result of the preliminary determination can be suggested to the player by using the displayed symbols, but when the number of reserved and stored lottery rights is small, the number of displayed symbols is also reduced, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect, and there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

According to the game machine K1, the number of specific symbols displayed based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means can be varied regardless of the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the number of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be variably displayed, and there is an effect that the player can be interested in the performance suggesting the result of preliminary discrimination.

In the game machine K1, the specific pattern display means can display the specific patterns up to the number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the upper limit display number of specific patterns is set as the upper limit number of information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the player can be made to think that the specific patterns indicate the number of information stored in the storage means.

In either the game machine K1 or K2, the symbol number varying means varies the number of the specific symbols to be displayed within a range of 1 or more as the number of the specific symbols when the number of the information stored in the storage means is 1 or more.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the specific patterns can be continuously displayed while the information is stored in the storage means, so that the player can be made to think that the specific patterns indicate the number of information stored in the storage means.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the game machine has game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the game state setting means can set the first game state when a termination condition is satisfied in a state in which at least the second game state is set, and the specific symbol display means is the second game state. is set, the specific pattern can be displayed on the display means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines K1 to K3, while the specific symbols are displayed on the display means, the second game state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player can be notified of whether or not the second game state will be terminated each time the number of display of the specific symbols is changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine K4, the game machine K5 is characterized in that the number-of-symbols varying means can change the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by two or more.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be greatly changed at one time, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected performance and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K5, the number-of-symbols varying means can more easily change the display number of the specific symbols when the information stored in the storage means includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be easily increased by pre-determination that information corresponding to the specific determination result is included, so that there is an effect that the player can be interested in the variable state of the specific symbols and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K6, the number-of-symbols varying means is more likely to increase the display number of the specific symbols to be increased at once when the information stored in the storage means contains the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result as a result of the preliminary discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means than when the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is not included.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, the possibility that the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included increases as the number of display of the specific patterns increased at one time increases, so that the player can be interested in how the number of display of the specific patterns increases, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine K7, the symbol number varying means can execute a preparatory variable display for decreasing the display number of the specific symbols before increasing the display number of the specific symbols to the specific number.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, the display number of the specific symbols can be reduced by the preparation variable display, so the increase variable display of the specific number can be executed regardless of the current display number of the specific symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of performance for variably displaying the number of specific symbols to be displayed by the symbol number varying means can be increased.

<Characteristic group L> (By varying the winning rate of electric chews on the upstream side, the rate of ball entry into the starting port on the downstream side is varied)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, and a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result or when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down; a first ball entry means that can satisfy the first determination condition when the game ball enters the first flow path; a variable means that can be varied between a first state in which the game ball can enter the first ball entrance means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; The game machine L1 is characterized by having a variable control means and a second ball entry means which allows a game ball to enter and which can satisfy the second determination condition when the game ball enters the game ball, and wherein the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has failed to enter the first ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, there is a game machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and a variable member for facilitating entry of a game ball during a time-saving game is provided in one of them to facilitate execution of a lottery during a time-saving game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when a game ball is shot toward the starting hole provided with the variable member, the game ball that does not enter the starting hole is wasted, and there is a problem that the willingness to play is reduced. Therefore, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

According to the game machine L1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is likely to be executed and a state in which the second determination is likely to be performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path, depending on the length of the period in which the variable means is changed to the first state by the variable control means. Thus, when the game ball flows down the first flow path, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which determination will be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L1, the game machine L2 has a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the variable means is in the second state longer than the first variable pattern as the variable patterns of the variable means variably controlled by the variable control means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means in accordance with the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means. Therefore, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is easily performed and a state in which the second determination is easily performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path according to the variable state of the variable means. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the variable state of the variable means, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game machine L3, characterized in that the game machine L2 has a determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is established, and the variable control means variably controls the variable means when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, since the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determination means, the player can be interested in the determination contents of the determination means, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L3 is characterized by comprising: dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means; and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining one dynamic display period from among a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths as a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determination means is stopped and displayed can be varied, so that the player can be given a period during which variable control is not executed by the variable control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine L5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second determining means executes determination more advantageous to the player than the first determining means.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L4, since the second discrimination means performs discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discrimination means, the player can expect that the game ball will reach the second ball entering means and can play the game while making the player interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first flow path.

The game machine L5 includes a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection result of the detection means, wherein the detection means comprises at least a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the first flow path, and a second detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has not entered the first ball entering means out of the game balls flowing down the first flow path. The game machine L6 is characterized in that the effect to be executed is for indicating to the player the degree of expectation that the ball flowing down the first flow path will reach the second ball entering means.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L5, the player can be easily informed of the flow condition of the game balls flowing down the first flow path, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AA group>
first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; second information acquisition means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; In a gaming machine having second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of second identification information, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means. and selectable performance mode selection means, wherein the performance mode selection means selects the performance mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AA1, since the performance mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied depending on the number of the stored second information, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information that can be executed thereafter, and even when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, the player continues to be interested in the subsequent game, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the game machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the performance mode executing means executes the performance mode when the specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to store the second information, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In the game machine AA1 or AA2, the presentation mode is set in a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of the second information stored.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA1 or AA2, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable over the dynamic display period of the second identification information which is continuously performed a plurality of times, there is an effect that the second dynamic display mode a plurality of times can be shown as one dynamic display to improve interest.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established. and advance determination means capable of determining in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, wherein the performance mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific performance mode at least based on the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AA1 to AA3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily discriminating the establishment of a specific condition which is a trigger for facilitating the acquisition of the second information, so there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristics AB group> (Effect variable depending on the number of special figures 2 pending during the execution of the variation pattern)
first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; second information acquisition means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; In a gaming machine having second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of second identification information, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during a dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means. and selectable performance mode selection means, wherein the performance mode selection means selects the performance mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines aim to increase interest in games by determining an effect mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning hole, and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AB1, since the performance mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, not only the result of the first determination but also the information about the possibility of executing the second determination can be determined from the performance mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine AB1, the rendering mode selection means selects the rendering mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1, since the performance mode is selected according to the number of the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of second information stored during the execution, there is an effect that various performance modes can be executed.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the performance mode is a performance related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information to be executed after that.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, when the second information is stored, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the performance mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information is started.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established. and advance determination means capable of determining in advance whether the specific condition is established before the establishment of the specific condition, wherein the performance mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific performance mode at least based on the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AB1 to AB3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily discriminating establishment of a specific condition, which is a trigger for facilitating the acquisition of the second information, so there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristic AC group> (Use special figure 1 variation effect as a pseudo effect of special figure 2 variation)
first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; second determination means for performing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; first privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; and based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result. Second privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player, first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the execution of the first determination, and second effect executing means for performing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination, wherein the second effect executing means has at least a predetermined specific condition. The game machine AC1 is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect when established.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the first effect can be executed as the effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect executing means is capable of executing the second effect of a effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC1, the second effect using the display mode showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination can be executed, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect executing means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group> (Double display including probability variation even for normal hits)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying a plurality of first identification patterns on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying the combination to indicate the first determination result by the first determination means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination; 2. A gaming machine comprising: dynamic display means; and privilege granting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when the first identification symbols are stop-displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific first determination result on the display means or when the second identification symbols are statically displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, wherein the privilege provision means is stop-displayed in the combination of the identification patterns corresponding to the first specific combination among the specific combinations. a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is displayed, the gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege to be given by the privilege giving means; The game machine AD1 is characterized in that the first identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination after displaying a plurality of ready-to-win display modes in which the patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either the first specific combination or the second specific combination.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the benefits to be given after that are different depending on the type of displayed symbols, thereby improving the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that some of the patterns constituting a combination that does not give a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player are stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game is reduced before the result is reported.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

According to the game machine AD1, when identification patterns are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through a plurality of ready-to-win display modes, so that there is an effect that the expectation that both the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the combination corresponding to the second privilege are displayed can be kept for a long time, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD1, even in the specific period when the first privilege is determined by the determining means, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display mode, so that even when the first determination is executed in the specific period, there is an effect that it is possible to easily have an expectation for the second privilege to be given.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when the specific period is set, dynamically displays one second identification pattern and after displaying the special multiple ready-to-win display mode in which the remaining identification patterns are statically displayed in a combination that can be any combination of two or more different second specific combinations, the second identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination. A game machine AD3 characterized in that it is displayed by.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD2, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given when the specific second determination result is obtained during the specific period.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control at probability variable hit)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and a game state set after the execution of the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area. In a gaming machine having a setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state until an end condition is satisfied, and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the game state set after execution of the privilege game when the privilege game ends, the suggestion mode comprises a combination of a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the advantageous game state are suggested. The gaming machine AE1 is characterized in that the second suggestive mode for playing is composed of a suggestive mode configured in the same period.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a win, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during the winning game of a specific type, the variable ball entry area is changed to the state where the game ball can be entered and the state where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball enters the winning game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of winning game is executed, the game ball may not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. There was a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load.

According to the game machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation of the period for displaying the suggestion mode and set the mode suggested by the state of the ball entering the specific area, thereby facilitating the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game and reducing the control load.

In the gaming machine AE1, the gaming machine AE2 comprises: suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means corresponding to the type of the privilege game to be executed when the privilege game is executed; and switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode among the suggestion modes set when a game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific privilege game to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific privilege game. .

According to the game machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE1, even if the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game, the suggestion mode can be switched to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode, so that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be performed.

<Feature AF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means from a plurality of types; and period setting means for setting a period.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set according to the type of privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AF2 is characterized in that the game machine AF1 is provided with specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1, the specific performance can be executed in different periods set according to the type of the privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AF3 is characterized by comprising a period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game in the game machine AF1 or AF2.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AG group> (The ED period is variable depending on whether or not there is a V prize)
determining means capable of executing determination; privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result; a specific area through which a game ball can pass during execution of the privilege game; game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area during execution of the privilege game; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game, and the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set different lengths of the specific period depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AG1, different lengths of specific periods can be set depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AG2, gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing state of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.

According to the game machine AG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic BA group> (Different game characteristics according to settings)
Specific element setting means for setting the state of a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of a player to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage; , wherein the second game state is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the specific element is set to the first state than when the specific element is set to the second state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the degree of advantage of each game state is fixed, there is a problem that the game may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BA1, in the advantageous second game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is advantageous to set the specific element to the first state with a low degree of advantage, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BA1 is characterized in that the game machine BA1 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, and the first state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific determination result being obtained is lower than that in the second state.

According to the game machine BA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA1, in an advantageous second game state, a very novel game property can be realized in which a lower probability of a specific discrimination result is more advantageous, so that there is an effect that a player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BA2, variable means capable of changing between a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position into which a game ball can easily enter the ball entering means, and a second position into which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, wherein the second game state is configured such that the predetermined privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means than in the first game state.

According to the game machine BA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA2, a predetermined privilege is easily given in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved when the second game state is set.

A gaming machine BA4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the first gaming state based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA2 or BA3, if a specific discrimination result is obtained in the second game state, there is a possibility that the first game state having a lower advantage degree than the second game state is set, so in the second game state, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants the privilege to be continuously provided with the second discrimination result rather than with the specific discrimination result. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game feature that makes one expect that a specific determination result will not be obtained, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

A game machine BA5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines BA2 to BA4, the second game state can be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine BA5, since the second game state is maintained until the specific determination result is obtained in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BA2 to BA5, the second game state tends to be continued longer in the first state having a lower probability of obtaining the specific determination result. That is, since the second determination result is likely to be obtained more times, the number of times that the predetermined privilege is granted is likely to be increased as well. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the second state in the states other than the second game state, and to make the player expect the disadvantageous first state in the second game state.

In the gaming machine BA2, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set to one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state. A game machine BA6 characterized by being configured to be able to set a state.

According to the game machine BA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA1 or BA2, the first state having a low probability of obtaining a specific determination result is more likely to have a determination result other than the specific determination result in the second game state, so that an advantageous third game state is easily obtained. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is strongly expected to set the disadvantageous first state in the second game state, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6 is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the shooting means, and a payout means paying out at least a prize ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, wherein the first game state is the payout when the game balls continue to be shot in a shooting direction in which the game balls are likely to enter the first ball entering means. The game machine BA7 is characterized by being constructed so that the number of game balls to be shot out is likely to be larger than the number of prize balls to be put out by means.

According to the game machine BA7, in any one of the game machines BA2 to BA6, in the first game state, the more game balls are shot, the more likely the number of held balls is reduced, so that the setting of the second state in which a specific determination result is likely to occur at an early stage can be strongly expected. Therefore, it is possible to realize the novel game property that the second state is expected in the first game state and the first state is expected in the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BA7, the game machine BA8 is characterized in that, in the second game state, the number of prize balls put out by the payout means is more likely to be closer to the number of game balls to be shot than in the first game state.

According to the game machine BA8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA7, the degree of advantage in the second game state can be increased, so there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of the transition to the second game state.

<Characteristic BB group> (The easier it is to win, the lower the advantage)
A state for setting one state out of a plurality of states including at least a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, a first probability state in which the determination result of the determination means is obtained with a first probability based on establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a second probability state in which the determination result is obtained with a second probability different from the first probability. A game machine BB1, comprising a setting means, wherein the first probability state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second probability state at least while a predetermined specific condition is established.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the winning lottery probability can be changed according to the type of winning after the winning state is over, and there are also those which are intended to improve the interest after the winning state is over.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that if the winning probability is low, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, since the first probability state can be expected at least while the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BB2, wherein the first probability is lower than the second probability in the gaming machine BB1.

According to the game machine BB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB1, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such that the lower the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result is more advantageous while the specific condition is established, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BB3 is characterized in that, in the game machine BB1 or BB2, the state in which the specific condition is established can be terminated at least based on the specific determination result.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB1 or BB2, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained while a specific condition is established, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a variable game in which a game ball can enter a ball entering means, a first position where a game ball can easily enter the ball entering means, and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means, wherein the predetermined privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means when the specific condition is established than when the specific condition is not established.

According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BB1 to BB3, a predetermined privilege is likely to be given while the specific condition is established, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the specific condition is established.

In the gaming machine BB4, the determining means comprises at least a first determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition, and a second determining means for performing determination based on the establishing of a second determining condition different from the first determining condition, and the second determining means is configured so that a ratio of the second determining result is higher than that of the first determining means. The game machine BB5 is characterized in that it is constructed such that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a state where there is no such condition.

According to the game machine BB5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB4, discrimination by the second discriminating means that tends to result in the second discrimination result is easily executed while the specific condition is established, so there is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation that the specific condition will be established.

The game machine BB5 is characterized in that the state in which the determination result of the first determination means becomes the specific determination result while the specific condition is established is more likely to result in the establishment of the specific condition after the end of the privilege game than in the case where the judgment result of the second judgment means becomes the specific judgment result while the specific condition is established.

According to the game machine BB6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BB5, when the discrimination of the second discrimination means, which is easily executed in the state of establishment of the specific condition, results in a specific discrimination result, the state of the establishment of the specific condition is highly likely to be ended, so that the novel game property of expecting that the specific discrimination result will not be obtained while the specific condition is established can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In a gaming machine BB5 or BB6, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction by the shooting means can easily enter, a second ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, a third position where a game ball can easily enter the second ball-entering means, and a game is played to the second ball-entering means. a third position where it is difficult for a ball to enter; The game machine BB7 is characterized in that the variable means is configured to be easily changed to the third position.

According to the game machine BB7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB5 or BB6, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the pleasure of changing the shooting direction of the game ball depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic BC group> (Variable occurrence rate of specific suggestions between normal state after setting change and normal state after winning)
A gaming machine having effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect comprises first game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on establishment of a first setting condition, and second game state setting means for setting the specific game state based on establishment of a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, wherein the effect executing means is provided with a case where the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means and the second game state. A gaming machine BC1 is characterized in that the easiness of execution of a predetermined specific effect is different between when the specific game state is set by the game state setting means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game becomes monotonous when the same game state continues for a long time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BC1, even in the same specific game state, the easiness of execution of the specific performance can be changed depending on whether it is set by the first game state setting means or the second game state setting means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC1 comprises a determining means for performing a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, wherein the first game state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the specific game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game, and the second game state setting means is the setting of the gaming machine. A game machine BC2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set the specific game state based on the initialization of the BC2.

According to the game machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC1, the easiness of execution of the specific performance can be changed in the game state set at the time of initialization, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine BC1 or BC2, the game machine BC3 is characterized in that the performance executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance on the basis of the determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations after the specific game state is set.

According to the game machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC1 or BC2, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of continuous failure determination results.

In the game machine BC3, the performance executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance based on the fact that the number of times of succession of the result of determination of failure after the specific game state is set becomes a multiple of the specific number of times.

According to the game machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC3, the specific performance is executed every time the consecutive number of times of the failure determination result becomes a multiple of the specific number of times, so that the player can be tempted to continue the game until the number of times becomes a multiple of the specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BC1 to BC3, the game machine BC4 is characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to more easily execute the specific performance when the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means than when the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means.

According to the game machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BC1 to BC3, there is an effect that the operating rate in the specific game state set by the second game state setting means can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, a specific element setting means capable of setting a specific element relating to the player's degree of advantage to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage; and a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least:

According to the game machine BC5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BC1 to BC4, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific performance, so that the player who wants to predict the state of the specific element can play the game expecting the execution of the specific performance in the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the game machines BC1 to BC5 includes main control means for performing main control related to the game, and the effect execution means, and includes sub-control means for performing control according to commands output from the main control means, and display means capable of displaying identification information. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; type determination means for determining a dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means; and command output means for outputting a type command for indicating the dynamic display type determined by the type determination means to the slave control means; The game machine BC6 is characterized in that an effect corresponding to the received type command can be executed based on the reception, and the specific effect is composed of an effect that can be executed by the effect executing means as an effect corresponding to a predetermined specific dynamic display type.

According to the game machine BC6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BC1 to BC5, the slave control means only needs to determine the type of the specific performance when receiving the type command corresponding to the specific dynamic display type, so there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine BC6, the main control means stores a plurality of regulation information including at least first regulation information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the specific game state set by the first game state setting means and second regulation information referred to when deciding the dynamic display type in the specific game state set by the second game state setting means, as regulation information in which information referred to when determining the dynamic display type is defined in advance. A gaming machine BC7 comprising storage means, and provision information specifying means for specifying, from the provision information storage means, one provision information to be referred to for determining the dynamic display type based on the establishment of the determination condition, wherein the second provision information defines information such that the specific dynamic display type is more easily determined than the second provision information.

According to the game machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC6, there is an effect that the easiness of determination of the specific dynamic display type can be changed only by changing the stipulated information to be referred to.

In the gaming machine BC7, the second regulating information defines information such that when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the determination condition is satisfied, the specific dynamic display type is more likely to be determined than the second regulating information, and when the specific condition is not satisfied, the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type is common to the second regulating information.

According to the game machine BC8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC7, the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type can be varied depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not, so that the execution ratio of the specific effect can be biased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BD group> (Specific suggestions are more likely to occur in situations that are disadvantageous to the player)
a specific effect execution means for executing a predetermined specific effect based on the establishment of a specific execution condition; a specific effect type determining means for determining one type out of a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect capable of suggesting to the player the state of a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player and a second specific effect in which the state of the specific element is difficult to suggest as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means; A game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least two game states, wherein the first game state is configured such that the first specific effect is more likely to be determined by the specific effect type determination means than the second game state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are executed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are capable of executing an effect mode suggesting a degree of advantage for the player in a predetermined gaming state.

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, a player who desires to know the state of the specific element can actively play the game in the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1, the gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is constructed in a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

According to the game machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD1, there is an effect that the operation rate in the disadvantageous first game state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state, and the specific effect type determination means continuously sets the game state after the privilege game to a game state other than the third game state. The game machine BD3 is characterized in that it is easier to determine the first specific performance in the first game state set when the number of times is equal to or greater than the specific number of times than when the first game state is set when the number of times is less than the predetermined specific number.

According to the game machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD1 or BD2, the specific performance is more likely to be executed as the disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous third game state is not set continues, so that even when the disadvantageous situation continues, the player's motivation for the game can be hardly lowered.

In any one of the game machines BD1 to BD3, determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, and as the specific element, the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state in the first game state is set to one of a plurality of probabilities including at least a predetermined first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability. and specific element setting means, wherein the second game state is constituted by a game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state.

According to the game machine BD4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BD1 to BD3, the game can be played with the expectation that the second probability is indicated in the specific performance, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD4, the second game state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a probability of a third probability higher than the second probability, and the first specific effect is one of a plurality of effects including at least a first effect mode that is more likely to be executed when the first probability is set higher than the second probability, and a second effect mode that is more likely to be executed when the second probability is set to be higher than the first probability. The gaming machine BD5 is characterized by being constructed in a presentation mode suggesting information according to the probability of obtaining a specific determination result.

According to the game machine BD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD4, the execution of the second performance mode can be expected when the specific performance is executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD5, the specific element setting means sets the probability of the specific determination result to the first probability by setting a predetermined first set value to a predetermined setting destination, and sets the probability of the specific determination result to the second probability by setting a second set value different from the first set value to the predetermined setting destination, and the first presentation mode is a numerical value indicating a probability equal to or lower than the first probability, and The game machine BD6 is characterized in that the game machine BD6 is composed of a performance mode in which a numerical value suggesting a set value of 1 is notified, the second performance mode is a numerical value that suggests a probability equal to or lower than the first probability, and a performance mode in which a numerical value that suggests the second set value is notified.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD5, the set value can be suggested numerically in the first specific presentation, so there is an effect that an presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be realized.

In the game machine BD5 or BD6, the second specific effect is configured in a performance mode of announcing a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is equal to or higher than the second probability and equal to or lower than the third probability.

According to the game machine BD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BD5 or BD6, the probability suggested by the second specific performance can be made below the actual probability, so that the actual behavior of the game machine can be made above the probability suggested by the second specifying means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from contradicting the content of the specific effect, so there is an effect that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In any one of the game machines BD5 to BD7, the specific effect type determining means is configured to be able to determine one type out of a plurality of types including at least the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect suggesting either the first game state set to the second probability or the second game state.

According to the game machine BD8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BD5 to BD7, when the third specified performance is executed, the player can expect the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD8, the third specific effect is configured in a performance mode in which a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than the first probability and equal to or less than the second probability is notified.

According to the gaming machine BD9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD8, the numerical value reported by the specific effect can draw the player's attention, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BE group> (varies the chance zone appearance rate according to the setting)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means; special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player until a predetermined specified condition is established based on a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result at least in a specific game state; , a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage, and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage, wherein the first state is configured such that the second determination result is more likely to occur in the specific game state than in the second state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the degree of advantage of each game state is fixed, there is a problem that the game may become monotonous.

According to the game machine BE1, since the first state with a low degree of advantage is more likely to be set as a special state in a specific game state, it is possible to expect the first state with a low degree of advantage in the specific game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BE1, the state setting means sets, as the specific element, at least the probability of obtaining the first determination result in the specific game state, the first state is configured to obtain the first determination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second state is configured to obtain the first determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to the game machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BE1, novel game characteristics can be realized in which a state in which the probability of obtaining the first determination result is low can be realized in a specific game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BE3 is characterized in that when the special state is set in the specific game state in the game machine BE1 or BE2, the specific game state is maintained at least until the special state ends.

According to the game machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE1 or BE2, the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the game state in a specific game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BE1 to BE3, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and at least in the specific game state, the determination by the second determination means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the determination by the first determination means, and the special state is set to the special state. A game machine BE4 characterized in that it is constructed in a state in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more likely to be executed than in a state in which it is not.

According to the game machine BE4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BE1 to BE3, when the special state occurs, the advantageous second discrimination means is likely to perform the discrimination, so that the game in the specific game parlor cheer can be played in anticipation of the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BE4 is characterized in that the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on the second determination result obtained in the determination by the first determination means.

According to the game machine BE5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE4, there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized such that an advantageous special state is set when a second judgment result is obtained in the judgment of the first judgment means having a low degree of advantage.

A game machine BE6, characterized in that, in a game machine BE4 or BE5, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are configured to be executed in overlap.

According to the game machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE4 or BE5, there is an effect that the discrimination by the discrimination means can be efficiently performed.

In the game machine BE6, the special state is configured at least in a state during which the first identification information for indicating the second determination result is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6, only the discrimination of the second discriminating means which is advantageous during the special state can be executed, so there is an effect that the special state can be strongly expected.

In a gaming machine BE6 or BE7, a variable means capable of changing between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position into which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means, and the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in the discrimination of the second discrimination means. A gaming machine BE8 comprising: variable game executing means for executing a variable game, and privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means.

According to the game machine BE8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6 or BE7, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation of execution of a variable game.

In any one of the game machines BE1 to BE8, the game machine BE9 is characterized in that the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state at a higher rate than when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is less than the specific number of times when the second determination result is obtained continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means in the specific game state.

According to the game machine BE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BE1 to BE8, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make the user expect that the second determination result continues for a specific number of times or more.

In the gaming machine BE9, the special state setting means is configured to set the special state at a predetermined first rate when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is equal to or greater than the specified number of times, and to set the special state at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is equal to or greater than the second number of times greater than the specified number of times.

According to the game machine BE10, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE9, the more the second determination result continues, the easier it is to set the special state.

<Characteristic BF Group> (Form a chance zone without changing the game state based on the fact that the lottery result is a pure loss)
determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result; game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage is a first advantage based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; The gaming machine BF1 is characterized by comprising an advantage degree setting means capable of setting the advantage degree to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree while maintaining the first game state until a predetermined specific condition is established based on the judgment result.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional type game machines, there are those which are configured so that the game state after the winning state is ended can be changed according to the type of winning, and there are also those which are intended to improve interest after the winning state is ended.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game state does not change unless the lottery result is a win, there is a problem that the player is disappointed every time the lottery result is a loss.

According to the game machine BF1, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the degree of advantage is increased when the result of determination is a failure, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BF2 is characterized in that the game machine BF1 is provided with dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the advantage level setting means sets the advantage level while the identification information for indicating the outlier determination result is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means to the second advantage level.

According to the game machine BF2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1, it is possible to realize a very novel game property that is advantageous while the identification information for indicating the result of the discrepancy is dynamically displayed, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In the game machine BF1 or BF2, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the determination by the second determination means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the determination by the first determination means.

According to the game machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1 or BF2, there is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.

In the gaming machine BF3, the advantage level setting means sets the second advantage level based on the result of the determination by the first determination means as being out.

According to the game machine BF4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF3, there is an effect that a very novel game property can be realized such that the advantage degree becomes high when the judgment result of the first judgment means having a low advantage degree becomes a disadvantageous judgment result.

In the game machine BF4, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means is provided, and the advantage level setting means is configured to be able to vary the length of a dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the advantage level setting means controls the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means until the determination result of the first determination means in the first game state becomes a non-determination result. A dynamic display period is set to a length equal to or less than a predetermined first period, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means can be set to a second period longer than the first period based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination means is a failure determination result. A game machine BF5 characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed during a display period.

According to the game machine BF5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BF3, the dynamic display period of the second period can be set when the determination result of the first determination means is a failure determination result, so that only the determination of the second determination means can be executed during the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, the advantage setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second advantage at a higher rate than when the number of consecutive times of the failure determination results is less than the first number, when the failure determination result is obtained continuously over a predetermined first number of determinations in the determination by the determination means in the first game state.

According to the game machine BF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BF1 to BF5, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which one expects the result of the determination to be a failure continuously over the determination of the first number of times.

In the gaming machine BF6, the advantage setting means is configured to set the second advantage at a first rate when the number of consecutive failure determination results is equal to or greater than the first number, and to set the second advantage at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number of consecutive failure determination results is a second number greater than the first number.

According to the game machine BF7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF6, there is an effect that the degree of expectation to be set to the second advantage level increases as the failure determination result continues.

<Characteristic BG group> (1 type 2 types, low setting makes it easier to hit with accessories)
A ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first area provided at a position where a game ball entering the entering means can flow in, a second area different from the first area, a distributing means for distributing the game ball entering the entering means to either the first area or the second area, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball entered the first area; state setting means for setting a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, wherein the first state is configured such that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means is more likely to be distributed to the first area than the second state. Technique BG1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a special game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is given to the player when a game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine that makes it possible has been proposed, and attempts have been made to improve the interest of players (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010741).

In addition, among such conventional type game machines, there is also one that is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not a privilege game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is of an advantageous type. In such a conventional type gaming machine, when it is suggested that the degree of expectation of a privilege game of an advantageous type is high, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of passing through the specific area.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the ratio of game balls passing through the specific area is common when a specific game is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player even if it is suggested that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous type.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BG1, since the easiness of sorting to the first area can be changed according to whether it is in the first state or the second state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG1, the gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the first advantageous degree is lower than the second advantageous degree.

According to the game machine BG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG1, there is an effect that a game with a lower degree of advantage can be more easily distributed to the first area by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, variable means that can change between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a period; and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state after the end of the privilege game; A gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that it is constructed such that a game ball that has entered the ball entering means is easily distributed to the first area until the end of the game.

According to the game machine BG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG1 or BG2, the setting of the first state facilitates the distribution of the game balls to the first area in the advantageous first game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG3, a second privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, wherein the first game state is configured so that a game ball entering the ball entry means is easily distributed to the first area based on the determination result of the determination means being a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result and the second determination result. Technique BG4.

According to the game machine BG4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG3, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property such that, when the result of the determination is a failure in the first game state, the game is easily sorted to the first area.

A game machine BG5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BG4, the first state has a lower probability of the second determination result and a higher probability of the third determination result than the second state.

According to the game machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG4, the setting of the first state with a low probability of obtaining the second determination result makes it possible to realize the novel game property that the advantageous first game state becomes more advantageous, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BG4 or BG5, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined number of specific information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; The dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set a dynamic display period during which the variable game is likely to be executed in the first period cycle when setting the dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in a state in which one or more of the discrimination information are stored in the storage means in the first game state. A game machine BG6 characterized in that, in a state, when setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the discrepancy determination, a dynamic display period of a length that enables acquisition of the discrimination information of the specific number of pieces of information can be set.

According to the game machine BG6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG4 or BG5, discrimination information of a specific number of pieces of information can be acquired during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination of failure, so that the player can play the game expecting the result of discrimination of failure.

In the gaming machine BG6, the dynamic display period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a dynamic display period of a length that makes it difficult to acquire the discrimination information from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the end of the variable game executed after the dynamic display of the identification information ends, when setting the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result in the first game state.

According to the game machine BG7, in addition to the effects of the game machine BG6, it is difficult to acquire discrimination information unless it is during the dynamic display of the discrimination information for showing the discriminated result of failure, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation of the discriminated result of failure. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature BH group> (Avoid the initial action of the character when confirming the setting)
A gaming machine BH1 comprising: a variable member that can be varied; a variable means for varying the variable member; an on-time control means capable of controlling the variable means so that the variable member performs a predetermined operation, that is, an input operation, when power is turned on to the game machine;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable members (eg, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

Among such conventional game machines, there are some which are configured so that it is possible to determine whether or not the variable member is normally operable by making the variable member perform a predetermined input operation when the power of the game machine is turned on.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a possibility that the insertion operation is performed even in a situation in which the insertion operation should not be performed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BH1, there is an effect that the variable member can be preferably operated when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine BH1, the suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of the input operation at least until the specific condition is not satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the game machine is powered on.

According to the game machine BH2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH1, there is an effect that the start timing of the insertion operation can be set favorably.

A game machine BH3 is characterized by comprising a second control means for controlling said variable means to perform said input operation on the condition that said specific condition is not satisfied when said specific condition and a second specific condition different from said specific condition are met at the time when the game machine BH1 or BH2 is powered on.

According to the game machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH1 or BH2, the insertion operation can be performed in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, so that the insertion operation can be executed more preferably.

In the gaming machine BH3, the suppressing means suppresses execution of the input operation even after the specific condition is not satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the game machine is powered on and the second specific condition is not satisfied.

According to the game machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH4, the execution of the insertion operation can be suppressed when the second specific condition is satisfied, so there is an effect that the variable member can be favorably operated.

In any one of the game machines BH1 to BH4, the state of a specific element relating to the degree of advantage for the player can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage on the basis of power being turned on to the game machine in a state in which an operation means operable by an operator and a first operation content is performed on the operation means. means, wherein the suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of the inserting operation while the special state is set.

According to the game machine BH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BH1 to BH4, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difficulty of changing the state of the specific element due to the execution of the insertion operation while the special state is set.

The game machine BH5 comprises display means capable of displaying information indicating the state of the specific element, and second special state setting means for setting a second special state in which the state of the specific element is displayed on the display means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine in a state in which a second operation content different from the operation of the second operation content is performed on the operation means, and the suppression means, when the second special state has been set at the time the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the second special state setting means. The gaming machine BH6 is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of the insertion operation even after the second special state is terminated.

According to the game machine BH6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH5, it is possible to prevent the power of the game machine from being turned on again just to confirm the state of the specific element, and the turning-on operation being executed even though the turning-on operation is highly likely not necessary, so that the operation of the variable member at the time of turning on the power can be preferably set.

In the game machine BH6, the operation means is composed of at least a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means, the operation of the first operation content is composed of the operation content of operating both the first operation means and the second operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is composed of the operation content of operating only the first operation means.

According to the game machine BH7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH6, the operator can easily switch between the operation of the first operation content and the operation of the second operation content, so that the convenience of the operator can be improved.

The game machine BH7 is characterized by comprising a game enable state setting means for setting a game enable state in which a normal game is possible based on the fact that the first operating means is in a non-operating state in the special state and the second special state.

According to the game machine BH8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH7, the game ready state can be easily set, so there is an effect that the operator's convenience can be improved.

<Feature BI group> (Provide a variation pattern that makes it easier to determine when a lottery is executed based on a winning random number that is a win in some settings and a loss in other settings)
discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; a first dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and the non-compliance discrimination result is obtained as a dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result; and discrimination information different from the specific discrimination information. A dynamic display type determining means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a second dynamic display type that is used for determination and is likely to be executed when the determination result is out.

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, notify the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole by variably displaying symbols on a display means. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine shifts to a so-called winning state that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of patterns with different variation times are provided for the symbol variation, and the interest in the game of the player is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BI1, it is possible to predict whether the state is the first discrimination state or the second discrimination state according to the dynamic display type, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BI1, one of a plurality of effects including at least a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a first effect mode that is more likely to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type as the effect mode of the specific effect, and a second effect mode that is more likely to be performed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. A game machine BI2 characterized by comprising a performance mode determining means for determining a mode.

According to the game machine BI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BI1, it becomes easier to understand whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type is executed or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is executed depending on the performance mode, so there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the game machine BI2, the game machine BI3 is characterized in that the first specific effect is configured in an effect mode suggesting the first determination state.

According to the game machine BI3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI2, there is an effect that the player can be convinced that the first determination state is established when the first specific effect is executed.

In any one of the game machines BI1 to BI3, the first determination state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability.

According to the game machine BI4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BI1 to BI3, when the first dynamic display type that is likely to be executed in the first discrimination state is determined, the possibility of being in a discrimination state with a high probability of a specific discrimination result increases, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type will be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BI4 comprises game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, wherein the first determination state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability, and the second determination state is the above in the first game state. The game machine BI5 is characterized in that the game machine BI5 is configured such that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is set to the second probability.

According to the game machine BI5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI4, when the first discrimination state is set, the specific discrimination result is more likely to occur in the first game state with a lower degree of advantage than when the second discrimination state is set, so there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first discrimination state is set.

In the game machine BI5, the first determination state is configured in a state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a third probability higher than the first probability, and the second determination state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a fourth probability higher than the second probability and lower than the third probability.

According to the game machine BI6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BI5, in the first determination state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is high both in the first game state and in the second game state, so the superiority in the first determination state can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the first determination state is set.

In any one of game machines BI1 to BI6, game machine BI7 is characterized in that the discrimination state set by the discrimination state setting means can be maintained until power to the game machine is cut off.

According to the game machine BI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BI1 to BI6, since the discrimination state is not changed during the operation of the hall, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that an advantageous discrimination state is set.

In any one of the game machines BI1 to BI7, the game machine comprises operation means operable by an operator, and operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period for treating an operation to the operation means as valid, wherein the determination state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the first determination state based on the fact that an operation of a first operation content is performed on the operation means during the operation valid period, and setting the second determination state based on the fact that an operation of a second operation content is performed. BI8.

According to the game machine BI8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BI1 to BI7, the discrimination state can be set by operating the operation means, so the favorite discrimination state can be easily set. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Different appearance rate of chance zone according to conditions)
A special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and a state setting means capable of setting a specific element relating to the degree of advantage to the player to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage, and the first state is the state in which the specific condition is established rather than the second state. A gaming machine BJ1 characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the game machine BJ1, since the ease with which the specific condition is established varies depending on the state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BJ2 in the game machine BJ1 is characterized in that the special state setting means sets the special state on the basis that the specific condition is established in a predetermined specific game state.

According to the game machine BJ2, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that a specific condition will be established in a specific game state.

A game machine BJ3 is characterized in that the game machine BJ1 or BJ2 is constructed so as to maintain the game state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied from when the special state is set until the special state is terminated.

According to the game machine BJ3, the degree of advantage can be varied without changing the game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine BJ4 characterized in that the gaming machine BJ3 is constructed so as to maintain the gaming state at the point in time when the specific condition is established even after the special state ends.

According to the game machine BJ4, it is possible to change the degree of advantage before and after the special state without changing the game state.

In any one of the game machines BJ1 to BJ4, it comprises a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result, and the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on the determination result of the determination means being different from the specific determination result as the specific condition. Giki BJ5.

According to the game machine BJ5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BJ1 to BJ4, there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized such that an advantageous special state is set based on the generally disadvantageous deviation determination result.

<Characteristic BK group> (Variable degree of advantage when out)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a first discrimination result; game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage is the first advantage based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; a gaming machine BK1 characterized by comprising advantage level setting means capable of setting a second advantage level higher than the first advantage level based on a second determination result.

According to the game machine BK1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage is increased without executing the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BK1, the advantage level setting means is configured to be able to set the second advantage level while maintaining the game state in the first game state.

According to the game machine BK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1, a novel game property can be realized in which the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the game state, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In the game machine BK1 or BK2, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set one game state out of a plurality of at least the first game state and a second game state in which the player's degree of advantage is a third degree of advantage lower than the first degree of advantage.

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1 or BK2, the degree of advantage is further improved by obtaining the second determination result in the relatively advantageous first game state, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved when the second determination result is obtained in the first game state.

In any of the game machines BK1 to BK3, the game machine BK4 is characterized by comprising a specific game executing means for executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the privilege game based on the third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in the discrimination of the discrimination means.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BK1 to BK3, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the degree of advantage increases based on the second determination result with the lowest degree of advantage among the determination results, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK4, the determination means comprises a first determination means for executing determination based on the satisfaction of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the second determination means is configured to facilitate the execution of the privilege game of a type having a high degree of advantage for the player when the specific determination result is obtained than the first determination means. The gaming machine BK5 is characterized in that the advantage degree setting means is configured to be able to set the second advantage degree based on the fact that the second judgment result is obtained in the judgment by the first judgment means in the first game state.

According to the game machine BK5, in addition to the effects of the game machines BK1 to BK4, when the second discrimination result of the low advantage degree is obtained in the discrimination of the first discrimination means of the low advantage degree, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the advantage degree is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine includes an operation handle, and a ball is shot into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and on the condition that the ball wins (or passes through) an operation opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to win prizes, and a valuable value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) corresponding to the number of prizes awarded is given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then for confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated under the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information. A gaming machine equipped with a special game state generating means". In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the integrated game machine, a special game advantageous to the player is provided with a variable display means that confirms and displays the identification information after dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information, the identification information starts to change due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (e.g., stop button), or after a predetermined period of time has passed. The game machine is equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a state, uses balls as game media, requires a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display of the identification information, and is constructed so that a large number of balls are put out at the time of the generation of the special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, notify the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole by variably displaying symbols on a display means. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine shifts to a so-called winning state that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of patterns with different variation times are provided for the symbol variation, and the interest in the game of the player is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 comprises discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and the specified discrimination result when the discrimination using the predetermined specific discrimination information as the discrimination information is executed. discrimination state setting means for setting one discrimination state out of a plurality of discrimination states including at least a first discrimination state and a second discrimination state in which a discrimination result different from the specified discrimination result is obtained when discrimination is performed using the specific discrimination information; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; a dynamic display type determining means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a display type and a second dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when discrimination information different from the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and the result of the discrepancy is obtained.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a performance mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of performance modes including at least two performance modes.
The gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 2, wherein the first rendering mode is a rendering mode that suggests the first determination state.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first determination state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, further comprising game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first determination state being configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability; The 2 determination state is constituted by a state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; discrimination state setting means for setting one discrimination state out of a plurality of discrimination states including at least a state and a second discrimination state in which a discrimination result different from the specified discrimination result is obtained when discrimination is performed using the specific discrimination information; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and a second dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when discrimination information different from the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and the result of the discrepancy is obtained.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a second rendering mode that is likely to be executed in dynamic display;
As a result, it becomes easier to understand whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is executed depending on the performance mode, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, since the first performance mode is composed of the performance mode suggesting the first determination state, there is an effect that the player can be convinced that it is the first determination state when the specific performance of the first performance mode is executed.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the first determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result at a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result at a second probability lower than the first probability.
Thus, when the first dynamic display type that is easily executed in the first discrimination state is determined, the possibility of being in the discrimination state with a high probability of a specific discrimination result increases, so that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type will be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, the game state setting means is provided for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the first determination state is set such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability. The second determination state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.
Thus, when the first discrimination state is set, the specific discrimination result is more likely to be obtained in the first game state with a lower degree of advantage than when the second discrimination state is set, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first discrimination state is set.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )

Claims (5)

discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a determination means for performing determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result;
discrimination state setting means for setting one discrimination state from among a plurality of discrimination states including at least a first discrimination state in which the specific discrimination result is obtained when discrimination is performed using specific discrimination information predetermined as the discrimination information, and a second discrimination state in which the discrimination result is different from the specific discrimination result when discrimination using the specific discrimination information is performed;
dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means;
dynamic display type determination means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a first dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when the specific determination information is used for determination and the failure determination result is obtained, and a second dynamic display type that is likely to be executed when determination information different from the specific determination information is used for determination and the failure determination result is obtained, as dynamic display types in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the failure determination result. a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means;
2. The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising, as the effect mode of the specific effect, a effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a first effect mode that is more likely to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type, and a second effect mode that is more likely to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the first effect mode is configured in a mode of effect suggesting that the game is in the first determination state. The first determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability,
4. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a second probability lower than the first probability. game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition;
The first determination state is configured in a state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability,
5. The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the second determination state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.

Images